Specs 2 PDF

Project Manual

Project Number: WSU-160027
Project Name: Agricultural Education and Water Quality

Building
Lake Campus
Prepared for: Wright State University
Prepared by: SPGB Architects, LLC

Dublin, Ohio
Bassett Associates
Lima, Ohio
Access Engineering Solutions

Celina, Ohio
GOP Limited
Cincinnati, Ohio
Fanning Howey
Celina, Ohio
Set Number: Rebid Set – Volume One of Two

March 3, 2017
Document 00 01 10 - Table of Contents (General Contracting Project)
State of Ohio Standard Requirements for Public Facility Construction
Volume One of Two
PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS GROUP
Division 00 – Procurement and Contracting Requirements
Introductory Information
00 01 10 .............. Table of Contents
Procurement Requirements
00 10 00 .............. Solicitation
00 21 13 .............. Instructions to Bidders
00 31 19 .............. Existing Condition Information
00 31 32 .............. Geotechnical Data
............................ Geotechnical Report
00 41 13 .............. Bid Form
00 43 13 .............. Bid Security Form
00 45 13 .............. Bidder’s Qualifications
00 45 39 .............. EDGE Affidavit
Contracting Requirements
00 52 00 .............. Agreement Form
00 52 14 .............. Subcontract Form (OAC 153:1-03-02)
00 61 13 .............. Performance and Payment Bond Form
00 62 43 .............. Certified Payroll Report
00 71 00 .............. Contracting Definitions
00 72 13 .............. General Conditions
00 73 00 .............. Supplementary Conditions
00 73 43 .............. Wage Rate Requirements
............................ Prevailing Wage Rates
SPECIFICATIONS GROUP
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SUBGROUP
Division 01 – General Requirements

01 10 00 .............. Summary
............... Specification Coordination Table
01 22 00 .............. Unit Prices
01 23 00 .............. Alternates
01 31 00 .............. Project Management and Coordination
01 31 00a ........ WSU Work Changes Proposal Request
01 31 00b ........ WSU Proposal Request Pricing Detail Summary
01 31 00c......... WSU Change Order Instructions
01 31 00d ........ WSU Change Directive
01 32 00 .............. Construction Progress Documentation
01 32 33 .............. Photographic Documentation
M160-00 01 10 2014 Edition (2015-JUL) Page 1 of 4

Project No. WSU-160027
Agricultural Education and Water Quality Building
Wright State University, Lake Campus
01 33 00 .............. Submittal Procedures

01 40 00 .............. Quality Requirements
01 42 00 .............. References
01 50 00 .............. Temporary Facilities and Controls
01 60 00 .............. Product Requirements
01 73 00 .............. Execution
01 74 19 .............. Construction Waste Management and Disposal
01 77 00 .............. Closeout Procedures
01 78 23 .............. Operation and Maintenance Data
01 78 39 .............. Project Record Documents
01 79 00 .............. Demonstration and Training
FACILITY CONSTRUCTION SUBGROUP
Division 02 – Existing Conditions- Not Used
Division 03 – Concrete
03 30 00 .............. Cast-In-Place Concrete
Division 04 – Masonry
04 20 00 .............. Unit Masonry
.............. UL-U905
Division 05 – Metals
05 12 00 .............. Structural Steel Framing
05 12 13 .............. Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel Framing
05 21 00 .............. Steel Joist Framing
05 31 00 .............. Steel Decking
05 50 00 .............. Metal Fabrication
Division 06 – Wood, Plastics, and Composites

06 10 53 .............. Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry
Division 07 – Thermal and Moisture Control

07 11 13 .............. Bituminous Dampproofing
07 19 00 .............. Water Repellants
07 21 00 .............. Thermal Insulation
07 25 00 .............. Weather barriers
07 42 13.23 ......... Metal Composite Material Wall Panels
07 54 23 .............. Thermoplastic-Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing
.............. Special Project Warranty
07 71 00 .............. Roof Specialties
07 72 00 .............. Roof Accessories
07 84 13 .............. Penetration Firestopping
............... UL-W-L-8086
............... UL-W-L-8085
.............. UL-W-L-3335
.............. UL-W-J-3189
.............. UL-W-L-3384

............. UL-C-AJ-3281
............. UL-C-AJ-3282
.............. UL-C-AJ-3283
............ UL-C-AJ-3284
............. UL-C-AJ-3285
............ UL-W-J-3168
............. UL-C-AJ-3298
............. UL-W-J-3167
............ UL-W-J-1215
............ UL-W-J-2229
............ UL-W-J-2230
............. UL-W-L-1441
............. UL-W-L-2537
............ UL-W-L-2538
............ UL-W-L-3334
............ UL-W-L-2541
............ UL-W-L-3395
............ UL-W-J-3200
07 84 43 .............. Joint Firestopping
.............. UL-HW-D-0285 – Joint Systems
.............. UL-HW-D-0295 – Joint Systems
07 92 00 .............. Joint Sealants
Division 08 – Openings
08 11 13 .............. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
08 14 16 .............. Flush Wood Doors
08 41 13 .............. Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts
08 71 00 .............. Door Hardware
08 80 00 .............. Glazing
08 88 13 .............. Fire-Resistant Glazing
Division 09 – Finishes
09 22 16 .............. Non-Structural Metal Framing
09 29 00 .............. Gypsum Board
............... UL U419
09 30 13 .............. Ceramic Tiling
09 51 13 .............. Acoustical Panel Ceilings
09 65 13 .............. Resilient Base and Accessories
09 65 16 .............. Resilient Sheet Flooring
09 65 19 .............. Resilient Tile Flooring
09 68 13 .............. Tile Carpeting
09 91 13 .............. Exterior Painting
09 91 23 .............. Interior Painting
Division 10 – Specialties
10 11 00 .............. Visual Display Units
10 21 13.19 ......... Plastic Toilet Compartments
10 22 39 .............. Folding Panel Partitions
10 26 00 .............. Wall and Door Protection
10 28 00 .............. Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories

10 44 13 .............. Fire Protection Cabinets

10 44 16 .............. Fire Extinguishers
10 51 13 .............. Metal Lockers
Division 11 – Equipment
11 52 13 .............. Projection Screens
11 53 13 .............. Laboratory Fume Hoods
Division 12 – Furnishings
12 24 13 .............. Roller Window Shades
12 35 53.13 ......... Metal Laboratory Casework
12 36 61.16 ......... Solid Surfacing Countertops
Division 13 – Special Construction – Not Used
Division 14 – Conveying Equipment – Not Used
Divisions 15 through 19 – Not Used
END OF DOCUMENT

Document 00 10 00 - Solicitation (General Contracting Project)
All bids for Project WSU-160027 Agricultural Education and Water Quality Building received and read aloud on
January 25, 2017 were rejected.
Sealed bids for revised scope of work (rebid) will be received by:
Wright State University-Lake Campus
Dean’s Office
108 Dwyer Hall
7600 Lake Campus Drive
Celina, Ohio 45822
for the following Project:

Project WSU-160027
Celina, Ohio 45822
in accordance with the Contract Documents prepared by:
SPGB Architects, LLC
4333-B Tuller Road
Dublin, OH 43017
Ph: 614-771-8963
Fax: 614-522-6763
Michelle Shumaker, AIA
mshumaker@spgbarch.com
www.spgbarchitects.com
Bidders may submit requests for consideration of a proposed Substitution for a specified product, equipment, or service to the
Architect/Engineer (“A/E”) no later than 10 days prior to the bid opening. Additional products, equipment, and services may
be accepted as approved Substitutions only by written Addendum.
From time to time, the Commission issues new editions of the “State of Ohio Standard Requirements for Public Facility
Construction” and may issue interim changes. Bidders must submit Bids that comply with the version of the Standard
Requirements included in the Contract Documents.
Prevailing Wage rates and Equal Employment Opportunity requirements are applicable to this Project.
This Project is subject to the State of Ohio’s Encouraging Diversity, Growth, and Equity (“EDGE”) Business Development
Program. A Bidder is required to submit with its Bid and with its Bidder’s Qualifications form, certain information about the
certified EDGE Business Enterprise(s) participating on the Project with the Bidder. Refer to Section 6.1.11 of the
Instructions to Bidders.
The EDGE Participation Goal for the Project is 5.0 percent.
The percentage is determined by the contracted value of goods, services, materials, and labor that are provided by EDGE-
certified business(es). The participation is calculated on the total amount of each awarded contract. For more information
about EDGE, contact the State of Ohio EDGE Certification Office at http://das.ohio.gov/eod, or at its physical location: 4200
Surface Road, Columbus, Ohio 43228-1395; or by telephone at (614) 466-8380.
The Bidder may be subject to a Pre-Award Affirmative Action Compliance Review in accordance with Section 123:2-5-01 of
the Ohio Administrative Code including a review of the Bidder’s employment records and an on-site review.
The Bidder must indicate on the Bid Form, the locations where its services will be performed in the spaces provided or by
attachment in accordance with the requirements of Executive Order 2011-12K related to providing services only within the
United States. Failure to do so may cause the Bid to be rejected as non-responsive.
DOMESTIC STEEL USE REQUIREMENTS AS SPECIFIED IN OHIO REVISED CODE SECTION 153.011
APPLY TO THIS PROJECT. COPIES OF OHIO REVISED CODE SECTION 153.011 CAN BE OBTAINED FROM
ANY OF THE OFFICES OF THE OHIO FACILITIES CONSTRUCTION COMMISSION.
M160-00 10 00 2014 Edition (2016-AUG) Page 1 of 4

Bidders are encouraged to be enrolled in and to be in good standing in a Drug-Free Safety Program (“DFSP”) approved by
the Ohio Bureau of Workers' Compensation (“OBWC”) prior to submitting a Bid and provide, on the Bid Form with its Bid,
certain information relative to their enrollment in such a program; and, if awarded a Contract, shall comply with other DFSP
criteria described in Section 1.6 of the General Conditions.
Bids will be received for:
Trade Estimate
Prime Contract .......................................................... $2,250,000
Concrete Patio and Boot Wash .................................... $3,600
Asphalt Walk to Dwyer ............................................... $3,000
Brick Veneer................................................................ $36,000
Roller Shades............................................................... $7,500
Commercial Hood ....................................................... $21,500
Demand Ventilation Controls ...................................... $14,000
until March 21, 2017, at 2:00 p.m., when all Bids will be opened and read aloud.
Contractor is responsible for scheduling the Project, coordinating the Subcontractors, and providing other services identified
in the Contract Documents. Successful bidder shall begin the Work on receipt of the Notice to Proceed and shall complete the
Work within the Contract Time of 200 consecutive calendar days.
The Contract Documents are available for purchase from:
BlueServ Reprograhics, LLC
3313 Seajay Drive
Beavercreek, Ohio 45430
Phone: 937-426-6410
Fax: 937-426-6420
Contact: Rob Mantia
Email: rmantia@blueservrepro.com
Website: www.blueservplanroom.com
at the non-refundable cost of $145.00 per set, plus shipping, if requested.
The Contract Documents may be reviewed for bidding purposes without charge during business hours at the office of the A/E
and the following locations:
Allied Construction Industries BB-Bid Plan Room
3 Kovach Drive Contractor’s Register
Cincinnati, Ohio 45215 800 East Main Street
Phone: (513) 221-8020 Jefferson Valley, NY 10535
Contact: Candi Oakley Phone: (800) 431-2584 Ext 3618
E-mail: coakley@aci-construction.org Contact: Kathy Stein
Website: www.aci-construction.org E-mail: kstein@thebluebook.com
Website: www.thebluebook.com
The Builder’s Exchange, Inc. (Cleveland) The Builder’s Exchange, Inc. (Dayton)
9555 Rockside Rd., Suite 300 2077 Embury Park Road
Valley View, Ohio 44125 Dayton, Ohio 45414
Phone: (216) 393-6300 Ext 39 / (866) 907-6300 Phone: (937) 278-5723
Contact: Laurel Screptock Contact: John Grandetti [Do not send documents]
E-mail: info@bxohio.com E-mail: jgrandetti@bxohio.com
Website: www.bxcleve.com Website: www.bxohio.com

The Builder’s Exchange, Inc. (Toledo) Builder’s Exchange of East Central Ohio
5555 Airport Highway, Suite 140 5080 Aultman Road
Toledo, Ohio 43615 North Canton, Ohio 44720
Phone: (419) 865-3833 Ext 201 Phone: (330) 452-8039 Ext 104
Contact: Sarah Skiver Contact: Julie Thornberry
E-mail: sskiver@bxohio.com E-mail: jthornberry@buildersexchange.org
Website: www.bxohio.com Website: www.mybx.org
Cincinnati Builders Exchange Pittsburgh Builders Exchange

4350 Glendale-Milford Road, Suite 120 1813 North Franklin Street
Cincinnati, Ohio 45242 Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania 15233
Phone: (513) 769-4800 Ext 203 Phone: (412) 922-4200
Contact: Ashley Grandetti Contact: Karen Kleber
E-mail: agrandetti@bxohio.com E-mail: Karen@pghbx.org
Website: www.bxohio.com Website: www.pghbx.org
ConstructConnect Construction Journal

30 Technology Parkway South - Suite 100 7261 Engle Road, Suite 101
Norcross, Georgia 30092 Cleveland, Ohio 44130
Phone: (800) 364-2059 Ext. 8158 Phone: (800) 969-4700 / (440) 826-4700 Ext 17
Contact: Allen Blair Contact: Ted Blaicher
E-mail: isqftmr@gmail.com E-mail: ted.blaicher@constructionjournal.com
Website: www.constructconnect.com Website: www.constructionjournal.com
Dodge Data Analytics Minority Business Solutions

c/o McGraw-Hill Company 16400 Miles Avenue
3315 Central Avenue Cleveland, Ohio 44128
Hot Springs, Arkansas 71913-6138 Phone: (216) 283-0707
Phone: (800) 393-6343 Contact: Vena Moore
Website: www.construction.com E-mail: vmoore@minoritybiz.org
To upload project documents: Website: www.minoritybiz.org
http://construction.com/dodge/submit-project.asp
Subcontractors Association of Northeast Ohio Northeast Ohio Procurement Technical Assistance

637 Vernon Odom Blvd Center
Akron, Ohio 44307 Lakeland Community College
Phone: (330) 762-9951 Ext 11 Engineering Building Room 222
Contact: Shelly Miller 7700 Clock Tower Drive
E-mail: safetycenter@saneo.com Kirtland, Ohio 44094
Secondary E-mail: planroom@saneo.com Phone: (440) 525-7733
Website: www.saneo.com Contact: Jane Stewart
E-mail: jstewart@lakelandcc.edu
Website: http://lakelandcc.edu/ptac/
Ohio University Procurement Technical Assistance South Point Procurement Technical Assistance Center
Center Southern Ohio Procurement Outreach Center
Voinovich Center for Leadership and Public Affairs 216 Collins Avenue
The Ridges, Building 20, Suite 143 South Point, Ohio 45680
Athens, Ohio 45701 Phone: (740) 377-4550
Phone: (740) 597-1868 Contact: Jordan Lucas
Contact: Sharon Hopkins E-mail: jordan@sopoc.org
E-mail: ptac@ohio.edu Website: www.sopoc.org
Website: www.ohio.edu/ptac

Mahoning Valley Procurement Technical Assistance Region 1 Minority Business Assistance Center
Center Akron Urban League
Mahoning Valley Economic Development Corporation 440 Vernon Odom Boulevard
4319 Belmont Avenue Akron, Ohio 44307
Youngstown, Ohio 44505 Phone: (234) 542-4149
Phone: (330) 759-3668 x24 Contact: Triva Manley
Contact: Norma Webb E-mail: tmanley@akronurbanleague.org
E-mail: norma@mvedc.com Website: www.akronurbanleague.org
Website: www.mvedc.com
Region 2 Minority Business Assistance Center Region 3 Minority Business Assistance Center
University of Toledo Central Ohio Minority Business Association
2145 East Scott Park Drive 1393 East Broad Street, Floor 2
Toledo, Ohio 43607 Columbus, Ohio 43205
Phone: (419) 530-3344 Phone: (614) 252-8005 Ext. 102
Contact: Jay Black Contact: Averi Frost [Paper + PDF]
E-mail: nwombac@utoledo.edu E-mail: jfrost@comba.com
Website: www.nwombac.com Website: www.comba.com
Region 4 Minority Business Assistance Center Region 5 Minority Business Assistance Center
City of Dayton c/o Human Relations Council Greater Cincinnati African American Chamber
907 West Fifth Street 2945 Gilbert Avenue
Dayton, Ohio 45402 Cincinnati, Ohio 45206
Phone: (937) 333-1002 Phone: (513) 475-7151 Ext. 121
Contact: RoShawn Winburn Contact: Deborah Davis
E-mail: roshawn.winburn@daytonohio.gov E-mail: deborah@african-americanchamber.com
Website: www.african-americanchamber.com
Region 6 Minority Business Assistance Center

Mahoning Valley Economic
Development Corporation
2123 Belmont Avenue
Youngstown, Ohio 44505
Phone: (330) 746-5681
Contact: William Carter
E-mail: YADC@sbcglobal.net
END OF DOCUMENT

Document 00 21 13 - Instructions to Bidders (General Contracting Project)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ARTICLE 1 - GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS ............................................................1
ARTICLE 2 - BIDDING PROCEDURES ................................................................1
ARTICLE 3 - BID OPENING AND EVALUATION.................................................5
ARTICLE 4 - WITHDRAWAL OF BID ...................................................................8
ARTICLE 5 - BID GUARANTY AND BOND ..........................................................9
ARTICLE 6 - CONTRACT AWARD AND EXECUTION ......................................10
KEYWORD INDEX ...............................................................................................12
ARTICLE 1 - GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

1.1 Applicable Law and Forum
1.1.1 The rights of any Bidder or any party to a subsequent Contract shall be governed by the laws of the state of Ohio
and only Ohio courts shall have jurisdiction over any action or proceeding related to the Bid or any subsequent Contract.
The Bidder irrevocably consents to such jurisdiction.
1.2 Project Scheduling and Coordination

1.2.1 When the Contract Documents refer to a period of time by a number of days, it excludes the first day and includes
the last day of the period. If the last day of the period falls on a Saturday, Sunday, or a legal holiday, that day shall be
omitted and the period shall end on the next day which is not a Saturday, Sunday, or legal holiday.
1.2.2 The time for completion of the Project indicated on the Bid Form is the time for Substantial Completion applicable
to the Bidder.
1.2.3 The State may assign all or any portion of its interest in a Contract with one or more of the successful Bidders to
another successful Bidder as an agreed condition for an award of the Contract for the respective Bid. The assignment
may include, without limitation, the duty to schedule, coordinate, and administer the Contract.
1.2.4 The Contractor is responsible for scheduling the Project, coordinating the Subcontractors, and providing other
services identified in the Contract Documents.
1.2.5 By submitting its Bid, the Bidder indicates its understanding that the Contract Sum, based on its Bid and as
amended by Change Orders, includes all costs that the Contracting Authority owes the Bidder.
1.3 Written Notice

1.3.1 Notice under the Contract Documents shall be validly given if:
1.3.1.1 delivered personally to a member of the organization for whom the notice is intended;
1.3.1.2 delivered, or sent by registered or certified mail, to the last known business address of the organization; or
1.3.1.3 sent by facsimile, email, or web-based project management software, provided the original signed document
is delivered within 3 business days after the date of the electronic transmission.
1.3.2 Notices provided to one Project Participant from another shall be simultaneously copied to the prospective Bidders,
the Owner, the Contracting Authority, and the A/E.
ARTICLE 2 - BIDDING PROCEDURES

2.1 Examination of Contract Documents and the Site
2.1.1 Before submitting a Bid, the Bidder shall examine all Contract Documents, including, but not limited to, the
Drawings, Specifications, and Addenda for all divisions of Work for the Project, noting in particular all requirements that
may affect its Work in any way.
M160-00 21 13 2014 Edition (2016-JAN) Page 1 of 13

Document 00 21 13 Instructions to Bidders (General Contracting Project)
2.1.2 The Bidder’s failure to become acquainted with the extent and nature of Work required to complete any portion of
the Work in conformity with the requirements of the Contract Documents, shall not be a basis for additional
compensation.
2.1.3 Before submitting a Bid, the Bidder should not only examine and evaluate the Site and related Project conditions
where the Work will be performed, but shall also consider when the Work will be performed including, but not limited
to, the following:
2.1.3.1 the condition, layout, and nature of the Site and surrounding area;
2.1.3.2 the availability and cost of labor;
2.1.3.3 the availability and cost of materials, supplies, and equipment;
2.1.3.4 the cost of temporary utilities required in the Bid;
2.1.3.5 the cost of any permit or license required by a local or regional authority having jurisdiction over the Project;
2.1.3.6 the usual weather conditions of the Project location;
2.1.3.7 conditions bearing upon transportation, disposal, handling, and storage of equipment, materials, and waste;
and
2.1.3.8 subsurface and concealed physical conditions and related information provided in the Contract Documents.
2.2 Pre-Bid Meeting

2.2.1 The Bidder is encouraged to attend the pre-bid meeting, where the A/E, the Contracting Authority, and the Owner
will receive questions regarding the Contract Documents. If not given in Document 00 10 00 - Solicitation, the A/E
shall issue notice of the time and place of any pre-bid meeting to each registered Plan Holder.
2.2.2 The A/E shall prepare minutes of the pre-bid meeting for the Project record. If questions raised by the prospective
Bidders require changes to, or clarifications of, the Contract Documents, the A/E shall issue the changes by written
Addendum, along with a list of pre-bid meeting attendees.
2.2.3 Additional compensation shall not be based upon the Bidder’s failure to attend the pre-bid meeting, which results
in the Bidder’s incomplete knowledge and familiarity of the Project requirements.
2.3 Request for Interpretation

2.3.1 If the Bidder finds any perceived ambiguity, conflict, error, omission, or discrepancy within the Contract
Documents, including the Drawings, Specifications, and Addenda, or between any of the Contract Documents and
Applicable Law, the Bidder shall submit a written Request for Interpretation (“RFI”) to the A/E for an interpretation or
clarification.
2.3.1.1 The Bidder is responsible for prompt delivery of the RFI.
2.3.1.2 The A/E shall respond to RFIs received more than 7 days before the bid opening.
2.3.2 The A/E shall issue Addenda in response to RFIs that modify or clarify the Contract Documents. Any Addenda
issued within 72 hours before any bid opening (excluding Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays) shall extend the bid
opening date by 7 days pursuant to Section 3.3.1.
2.3.2.1 The Addenda may be delivered via facsimile or e-mail, posted to a web or FTP site, or otherwise furnished to
each registered Plan Holder.
2.3.3 Any interpretation or clarification of the Contract Documents made by any Person other than the A/E, in any
manner other than a written Addendum, shall not be binding, and the Bidder shall not rely upon the interpretation or
clarification.
2.3.4 The successful Bidder shall not be compensated for a claim alleging insufficient data, incomplete, ambiguous,
conflicting, or erroneous Contract Documents or proposed Contract Documents, or assumed conditions regarding the
nature, extent, or character of the Work, if the Bidder did not submit a related RFI prior to the bid opening.
2.4 Basis of Design and Acceptable Components

2.4.1 The Contract Documents may list components produced by specific manufacturers to denote kind, quality, or
performance requirements.
2.4.2 The component listed first is the Basis of Design Component.

2.4.3 Other listed components are Acceptable Components.
2.4.3.1 If the Bidder includes an Acceptable Component in its Bid, the Bidder is responsible for the costs of
coordination and modification required.
2.5 Substitutions Prior to Bid Opening

2.5.1 If the Bidder proposes to use an article, device, material, equipment, form of construction, fixture, or item other
than the Basis of Design or Acceptable Components named in the Specifications, the Bidder shall certify that the
proposed item is equal in quality and all aspects of performance and appearance, to the item specified.
2.5.1.1 If approval of a Substitution requires changes to the Contract Documents or affects the work of other trades,
the Bidder is responsible for the additional costs, including, but not limited to, changes to the design by the A/E.
2.5.2 The Bidder shall submit its request for Substitution to the A/E no later than 10 days prior to the bid opening, which
must include:
2.5.2.1 the name and complete description of the proposed Substitution, including Drawings, performance and test
data, and other information necessary for a complete evaluation; and
2.5.2.2 a statement setting forth any changes that the Proposed Substitution will require in the Contract Documents
or the Project.
2.5.3 If the A/E approves the Proposed Substitution, the A/E shall issue an Addendum.
2.5.4 If the A/E does not approve the Proposed Substitution, the A/E shall inform the Bidder of its decision, which is
final. The A/E may reject a proposed Substitution because the Bidder failed to provide sufficient information to enable
the A/E to completely evaluate the Proposed Substitution without causing a delay in the scheduled bid opening.
2.5.5 Proposed Substitutions received by the A/E less than 10 days prior to the bid opening shall not be considered.
2.6 Bid Form

2.6.1 Each Bid shall be submitted on the Bid Form and sealed in an envelope clearly marked as containing a Bid,
indicating the Contracting Authority’s Project number and name, and the date and time of the bid opening on the
envelope. Refer to Section 3.1.2 for requirements related to envelope markings.
2.6.1.1 Any change, alteration, omission, or addition in the wording of the Bid Form shall cause the Bid to be
rejected as non-responsive.
2.6.1.2 All pages of the Bid Form, including a completed “Bidder Affirmation and Disclosure” page acknowledging
that the Bidder affirms, understands, and will abide by the requirements of Executive Order 2011-12K, and a
completed “Commitment to Participate in the EDGE Business Assistance Program” page, shall be submitted with
the Bid. Failure to do so may cause the Bid to be rejected as non-responsive.
.1 If the names, locations, and service locations of Subcontractors are not known at the time of the Bid
Opening, the Bidder must provide the information requested with its Subcontractor and Material Supplier
Declaration form.
2.6.1.3 Unless the Bidder withdraws the Bid as provided in Article 4, the Bidder is required to comply with all
requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether the Bidder had actual knowledge of the
requirements and regardless of any statement or omission made by the Bidder that might indicate a contrary
intention.
2.6.2 The Bidder shall fill in all relevant blank spaces on the Bid Form by printing in ink or by typewriting, and not in
pencil.
2.6.2.1 The Bidder shall show all bid amounts in both words and figures. In the case of a conflict between the words
and figures, the amount shown in words shall govern, where the words are not ambiguous. When the Bidder's
intention and the meaning of the words are clear, omissions, or misspellings of words shall not render the words
ambiguous.
2.6.2.2 The Bidder shall initial alteration or erasure of items filled in on the Bid Form.
2.6.3 If the Bidder is a corporation, partnership, or sole proprietorship, an officer, partner or principal of the Bidder shall
print or type the legal name of the Bidder on the line provided, and sign the Bid Form. If the Bidder is a joint venture, an
officer, partner or principal, as applicable, of each member of the joint venture shall print or type the legal name of the
applicable member on the line provided, and sign the Bid Form on behalf of that member. All signatures must be
original.

2.7 Allowances
2.7.1 If Allowances are provided on the Bid Form, the amount of each Allowance shall be included in the Base Bid
amount. Allowances shall be used solely for the purpose of determining the adjustment to the Contract Sum for the
difference between the amount of the Allowance and the actual cost of the related Work provided. Allowances shall not
include the Contractor’s Fee.
2.8 Unit Prices

2.8.1 If Unit Prices are requested on the Bid Form, the amount of the scheduled quantities shall be included in the Base
Bid amount. Unit prices shall be used solely for the purpose of determining the adjustment to the Contract Sum for the
difference between the estimated quantities on the Bid Form and the actual quantities provided.
2.8.2 Unit Prices shall include all materials, equipment, labor, delivery, installation, and any other cost or expense, in
connection with, or incidental to, the performance of that portion of the Work. Unit Prices shall not include the
Contractor’s Fee on account of the associated Unit Price Work. The Bidder shall submit Unit Prices for all items listed.
2.9 Alternates
2.9.1 If an Alternate is listed on the Bid Form, the Bidder shall fill in the applicable blank with an increased or decreased
bid amount and indicate which by circling the word “ADD” or the word “DEDUCT” as applicable. The Contracting
Authority reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bid amounts for Alternates, in whole or in part, and in any order.
2.9.1.1 If no change in the bid amount is required, indicate "No Change" or “$0.”
2.9.1.2 Failure to make an entry or an entry of "No Bid,” “N/A," or similar entry on any Alternate shall cause the
Bid to be rejected as non-responsive if that Alternate is selected.
2.9.1.3 Failure to indicate a negative number by circling “DEDUCT,” preceding the number by a minus sign, or
enclosing the number in parentheses will indicate the Bidder’s intent to increase the Base Bid by the amount entered
in the applicable blank.
2.9.1.4 If an Alternate is not selected, an entry as listed in Section 2.9.1.2 on that Alternate shall not, by itself,
render a Bid non-responsive.
2.10 Submittals with Bid Form

2.10.1 The Contracting Authority shall reject a Bid as non-responsive if the Bidder fails to submit the following with the
Bid Form in a sealed envelope:
2.10.1.1 A Bid Guaranty as provided in Article 5, meeting the requirements of Ohio Revised Code (“ORC”)
Sections 153.54 and 153.571.
2.10.2 If the apparent low Bidder does not submit a valid Power of Attorney of the agent signing for the Surety with its
Bid, the Contracting Authority shall direct the apparent low Bidder to deliver a valid and appropriate Power of Attorney
to the Contracting Authority within a period determined by the Contracting Authority. The Contracting Authority shall
not enter into a Contract without a valid Power of Attorney.
2.10.3 The Bidder is encouraged to submit background information with its Bid using the Bidder’s Qualifications form
and including, but not limited to, the information listed in this Section 2.10. If the apparent low Bidder does not submit
the Bidder's Qualifications form and related information with its Bid, the Bidder shall provide it upon request in
accordance with Section 3.5.4, including, but not limited to:
2.10.3.1 the overall experience of the Bidder, including number of years in business under present and former
business names;
2.10.3.2 a complete listing of all the Bidder’s ongoing construction projects and a listing of construction projects
which are similar in cost and type to the Project completed by the Bidder in the last 5 years. Include information of
the scope of work and value of each contract, a description of Encouraging Diversity Growth and Equity (“EDGE”)
participation and performance, and a project name/contact Person/address/phone number for the owner and the
architect or engineer for each project;
2.10.3.3 a Certificate of Compliance with Affirmative Action Programs, issued pursuant to ORC Section 9.47, by
the Equal Opportunity Coordinator of the Department of Administrative Services;
2.10.3.4 a complete listing of Affirmative Action and EDGE program violations in the last 5 years;
2.10.3.5 a complete listing of Prevailing Wage, EPA, OSHA, or other regulatory entity issues or violations in the
last 5 years;

2.10.3.6 a complete listing of judgments, claims, arbitration proceedings or suits pending or outstanding in the last
5 years;
2.10.3.7 a complete listing of Drug-Free Workplace Program and Drug-Free Safety Program (“DFSP”) violations in
the last 5 years;
2.10.3.8 upon request of the Contracting Authority, the apparent low Bidder shall submit the following information,
which is not a public record under ORC Section 149.43; and shall remain confidential, except under proper order of
a court:
.1 an annual financial statement prepared within the 12 months prior to the bid opening by an independent
licensed accounting firm; and the name, address, contact Person, and phone number of the bank normally
used by the Bidder for its primary banking; or
.2 a financial report generated within 30 days prior to the bid opening from Standard and Poor, Dun and
Bradstreet or a similar company acceptable to the Contracting Authority documenting the financial
condition of the Bidder; and the name, address, contact Person, and phone number of the bank normally
used by the Bidder for its primary banking.
2.10.3.9 a description of the Bidder’s relevant facilities and major equipment, whether leased or owned;
2.10.3.10 a description of the management experience of the Bidder’s project manager(s) and superintendent(s) and
a comprehensive resume for each;
2.10.3.11 a description of the EDGE-certified Business Enterprises the Bidder proposes as Subcontractors and
Material Suppliers for this Project by attaching a fully completed EDGE Affidavit for each EDGE-certified Business
Enterprise;
2.10.3.12 to support a Bond, a current and signed Certificate of Compliance issued by the Ohio Department of
Insurance, showing the Surety is licensed to do business as a surety in Ohio;
2.10.3.13 a current Ohio Workers' Compensation Certificate;
2.10.3.14 if the Bidder is a foreign corporation not incorporated under the laws of Ohio, a Certificate of Good
Standing from the Ohio Secretary of State; or, if the Bidder is a foreign person or partnership, evidence that the
Bidder filed, with the Ohio Secretary of State, a Power of Attorney designating the Ohio Secretary of State as the
Bidder's agent for the purpose of accepting service of summons in any action brought under ORC Section 153.05 or
under ORC Sections 4123.01 to 4123.94, inclusive;
2.10.3.15 evidence that the Bidder is enrolled in, and in good standing in, a DFSP approved by the Ohio Bureau of
Workers’ Compensation (“OBWC”); and
2.10.3.16 any other data or information which the A/E may request concerning the responsibility of the Bidder,
including a complete list of major Subcontractors with an estimated contract value of $200,000 or more, which the
Bidder proposes to employ on the Project.
2.11 Changes in the Bid Amount

2.11.1 Any change to a previously submitted Bid shall be in writing and received by the Contracting Authority before the
time scheduled for the bid opening.
2.11.2 Changes shall provide an amount to be added to, or subtracted from, the bid amount, so that the final bid amount
may be determined only after the sealed envelope is opened.
2.11.3 If the Bidder's written instruction reveals the bid amount in any way prior to the bid opening, the Contracting
Authority may, in its sole discretion, reject the Bid as non-responsive.
ARTICLE 3 - BID OPENING AND EVALUATION

3.1 Delivery of Bid
3.1.1 The Bidder shall submit its Bid to the Contracting Authority at the location indicated in Document 00 10 00 -
Solicitation prior to the time scheduled for the bid opening.
3.1.2 If the sealed bid envelope is enclosed in another envelope for the purpose of delivery, the exterior envelope shall
also be clearly marked as containing a Bid with the Project name and Project number, construction trade of the Bid, and
the date and time of the bid opening shown on the envelope.

3.1.3 Bids that arrive at the location designated in Document 00 10 00 - Solicitation after the time set for the bid
opening shall not be opened or considered.
3.2 Bid Opening

3.2.1 Sealed Bids shall be received at the location designated in Document 00 10 00 - Solicitation until the time stated
when all Bids shall be opened, read aloud, and the tabulation made public.
3.2.2 The public opening and reading of Bids is for informational purposes only and is not to be construed as an
acceptance or rejection of any Bid submitted.
3.2.3 The contents of the bid envelope are public records and open for inspection, upon request, at any time after the bid
opening, except for any information that is not defined as a public record under Ohio law.
3.3 Bid Opening Extension

3.3.1 If an Addendum is issued within 72 hours prior to the published time for the bid opening, excluding Saturdays,
Sundays and legal holidays, the bid opening shall be extended 7 days. If the Contracting Authority approves, the bid
opening may be extended for more than 7 days, and consideration for additional advertising may be recommended.
3.3.2 As part of issuing any Addendum earlier than 72 hours prior to the published time for the bid opening, excluding
Saturdays, Sundays and legal holidays, only the Contracting Authority may approve a revised bid opening date or
additional advertising.
3.4 Bid Evaluation Criteria

3.4.1 The Contracting Authority reserves the right to accept or reject any or all Bids, in whole or in part, and reserves the
right to award the Contract to any remaining Bidder the Contracting Authority determines, in its sole discretion, to have
submitted the lowest responsive and responsible Bid.
3.4.2 The Contracting Authority reserves the right to accept or reject any or all Alternates. Alternates may be accepted or
rejected in any order.
3.4.3 If any Bidder has engaged in collusive bidding, the Contracting Authority shall reject that Bidder’s Bid as non-
responsible for the Contract. A collusive bidder may also be debarred from future State Contracts.
3.4.4 The Contracting Authority reserves the right to waive, or to allow any Bidder a reasonable opportunity to cure a
minor irregularity or technical deficiency in a Bid, provided the irregularity or deficiency does not affect the bid amount,
or otherwise give the Bidder a competitive advantage. Noncompliance with any material requirements of the Contract
Documents shall cause a Bid to be rejected as non-responsive.
3.4.5 If, in the opinion of the Owner, the award of the Contract to the lowest Bidder is not in the best interest of the State,
with the written consent of the Contracting Authority, the Owner may accept, in its discretion, another Bid so opened, or
the Contracting Authority may reject all Bids and advertise for other Bids. The advertisement shall be for the period, in
the form, and in the publications directed by the Contracting Authority.
3.5 Bid Evaluation Procedure

3.5.1 The Contract shall be awarded to the lowest responsive and responsible Bidder as determined in the discretion of
the Contracting Authority, or all Bids may be rejected in accordance with Applicable Law.
3.5.1.1 In determining which Bid is the lowest, the Contracting Authority shall consider the Base Bid and the bid
amounts for any Alternate, or Alternates, which the Owner decides, in its sole discretion, to accept.
3.5.1.2 The total of the bid amounts for the accepted Alternate(s) shall be added to, or deducted from, the Base Bid,
as applicable, for determining the lowest Bidder.
3.5.1.3 If two Bidders submit the same bid amount and both are determined to be responsive and responsible, the
Contracting Authority may select one Bidder by the flip of a coin, which shall be conducted in the presence of both
Bidders and shall be final.
.1 If one of the Bidders refuses to participate in, or fails to be present at, the flip of a coin, the remaining
Bidder shall be selected.
3.5.2 A Bidder for a Contract shall be considered responsive if the Bidder's Bid responds to the Contract Documents in
all material respects and contains no irregularities or deviations from the Contract Documents that would affect the
amount of the Bid or otherwise give the Bidder a competitive advantage.

3.5.2.1 A Bid shall be rejected as non-responsive if the Bid contains a Bid Guaranty executed by a Surety not
licensed in Ohio or a Bid Guaranty that is otherwise determined to be insufficient by the Contracting Authority.
3.5.2.2 The Bidder may be subject to a Pre-Award Affirmative Action Compliance Review pursuant to OAC Section
123:2-5-01 including a review of the Bidder’s employment records and an on-site review.
.1 The Bidder must submit the information requested no later than 10 days after receipt of the request. Failure
to timely respond to this request for records may result in the Bidder being found non-responsive.
3.5.2.3 If the lowest Bidder is non-responsive, the Bidder shall be notified according to Section 3.6.
3.5.3 In determining whether a Bidder is responsible, factors to be considered include, without limitation:
3.5.3.1 preferences required by law, where applicable;
3.5.3.2 the experience of the Bidder;
3.5.3.3 the financial condition of the Bidder;
3.5.3.4 the conduct and performance of the Bidder on previous Contracts, including compliance with Equal
Employment Opportunity in the Construction Industry Administrative Rules, OSHA and Prevailing Wage laws, and
demonstration of good faith effort to participate in the EDGE Business Development program, or actual
participation in the EDGE Business Development program, or both, as indicated in the ORC and the Ohio
Administrative Code;
3.5.3.5 the facilities of the Bidder;
3.5.3.6 the management skills of the Bidder, including the capability of the Bidder to construct and manage the
entire Project, including but not limited to the plumbing, fire protection, heating, ventilating and air conditioning,
and electrical branches or classes of the Work; and
3.5.3.7 the Bidder’s ability to execute the Contract properly, including past performance of the Bidder and the
Subcontractors that the Bidder proposes to use on the Project.
3.5.4 The A/E shall obtain from the lowest responsive Bidder any information the Contracting Authority determines
appropriate to consideration of factors showing responsibility. If the lowest responsive Bidder is responsible, the
Contract shall be awarded to that Bidder, unless all Bids are rejected. The Bidder shall provide all requested information
within 3 days of a request from the A/E, or a longer period, if the Contracting Authority consents in writing.
3.5.5 If the lowest responsive Bidder is not responsible, the Contracting Authority shall evaluate the next lowest Bidder
according to the procedures set forth in this Section 3.5 until the Contract is awarded, all Bids are rejected, or all
responsive Bidders are determined to be not responsible.
3.6 Rejection of Bid

3.6.1 If the lowest Bidder is not responsive or responsible, the Contracting Authority shall reject the Bid and notify the
Bidder in writing by Certified Mail of the finding and the reasons for the finding.
3.6.2 Ten Percent Rule.
3.6.2.1 If the lowest responsive and responsible Bid for the Contract, including the Base Bid and accepted Alternates
if any, exceeds an amount 10 percent greater than the published Estimated Construction Cost for the Contract, the
Contracting Authority shall reject all Bids.
3.6.3 A Bidder notified in accordance with Section 3.6.1 may object to its rejection by filing a written protest, which
must be received by the Contracting Authority within 5 days of the notification provided pursuant to Section 3.6.1.
3.6.4 Upon receipt of a timely protest, the Contracting Authority shall meet with the protesting Bidder to hear its
objections. ORC Chapter 119 administrative hearing requirements are not applicable to the bid protest meeting.
3.6.4.1 No Contract award shall become final until after the Contracting Authority has met with all Bidders who
have timely filed protests and the award of the Contract is affirmed by the Contracting Authority.
3.6.4.2 If all protests are rejected, the Contract shall be awarded to the lowest responsive and responsible Bidder, or
all Bids shall be rejected.
3.7 Notice of Intent to Award

3.7.1 The Contracting Authority shall notify the apparent successful Bidder that upon satisfactory compliance with all
conditions precedent for execution of the Contract, within the time specified, the Bidder shall be awarded the Contract.

3.7.2 The Contracting Authority reserves the right to rescind any Notice of Intent to Award if the Contracting Authority
determines it issued the Notice of Intent to Award in error, or if the conditions precedent for execution of Contract set
forth in Article 6 are not met.
ARTICLE 4 - WITHDRAWAL OF BID

4.1 Withdrawal prior to Bid Opening
4.1.1 A Bidder may withdraw a Bid after the Contracting Authority receives the Bid, provided the Bidder makes a
request in writing and the Contracting Authority receives the request prior to the time of the bid opening, as determined
by the Contracting Authority.
4.2 Withdrawal after Bid Opening

4.2.1 The Bid shall remain valid and open for acceptance for a period of 60 days after the bid opening; provided,
however, a Bidder may withdraw a Bid from consideration after the bid opening if the bid amount was substantially
lower than the amounts of other Bids, providing the Bid was submitted in good faith, and the reason for the bid amount
being substantially lower was a clerical mistake, as opposed to a judgment mistake, and was actually due to an
unintentional and substantial arithmetic error or an unintentional omission of a substantial quantity of Work, labor, or
material made directly in the compilation of the bid amount.
4.2.1.1 Notice of a request to withdraw a Bid shall be made in writing filed with the Contracting Authority within
2 business days after the bid opening. The Contracting Authority reserves the right to request the Bidder to submit
evidence substantiating the Bidder’s request to withdraw the Bid.
4.2.1.2 No Bid may be withdrawn under Section 4.2.1 which would result in awarding a Contract involving the
same item on another Bid to the same Bidder.
4.2.2 If a Bidder withdraws its Bid under Section 4.2.1, the Contracting Authority may award the Contract to the next
lowest responsive and responsible Bidder, or reject all Bids and advertise for other Bids. In the event the Contracting
Authority advertises for other Bids, the withdrawing Bidder shall pay the costs, in connection with the re-bidding, of
printing new Contract Documents, required advertising, and printing and mailing of notices to prospective Bidders, if the
Contracting Authority finds that these costs would not have been incurred but for the withdrawal.
4.2.3 A Bidder may withdraw the Bidder’s Bid at any time after the 60-day period described in Section 4.2.1 by giving
written notice to the Contracting Authority.
4.3 Refusal to Accept Withdrawal

4.3.1 If the Contracting Authority contests the right of a Bidder to withdraw a Bid pursuant to Section 4.2.1, a hearing
shall be held within 10 days after the bid opening and the Contracting Authority shall issue an order allowing or denying
the claim of this right within 5 days after the hearing is concluded. The Contracting Authority shall give the withdrawing
Bidder timely notice of the time and place of the hearing.
4.3.1.1 The Contracting Authority shall make a stenographic record of all testimony, other evidence, and rulings on
the admissibility of evidence presented at the hearing. The Bidder shall pay the costs of the hearing.
4.3.1.2 Pursuant to ORC Section 119.12, the Bidder may appeal the order of the Contracting Authority required by
Section 4.3.1.
4.4 Refusal to Perform

4.4.1 In the event the Contracting Authority denies the request for withdrawal and the Bidder refuses to perform the
Contract, the Contracting Authority may reject all Bids or award the Contract to the next lowest responsive and
responsible Bidder.
4.5 Effect of Withdrawal

4.5.1 A Bidder, who is permitted to withdraw a Bid under Section 4.2.1, shall not supply material or labor to, or perform
a subcontract or other work for, the Person to whom the Contract is awarded; or otherwise benefit, directly or indirectly,
from the performance of the Project for which the withdrawn Bid was submitted; without the Contracting Authority’s
prior written consent.

ARTICLE 5 - BID GUARANTY AND BOND
5.1 Bid Guaranty
5.1.1 The Bidder shall submit a Bid Guaranty with the Bidder’s Bid, payable to the Contracting Authority, in the form of
either:
5.1.1.1 the signed Document 00 43 13 - Bid Security Form contained in the Contract Documents for the amount of
the Base Bid plus all additive Alternates; or
5.1.1.2 a certified check, cashier's check, or letter of credit, for 10 percent of the Base Bid, plus all additive
Alternates – a letter of credit shall expressly provide that it is revocable only by the Contracting Authority.
5.1.2 The Bid Guaranty shall be in form and substance satisfactory to the Contracting Authority and shall serve as an
assurance that upon acceptance of the Bid, the Bidder shall comply with all conditions precedent for Contract execution,
within the time specified by the Contracting Authority.
5.1.3 If the blank line on the Bid Security Form is not filled in, the penal sum shall be the full amount of the Base Bid
plus all additive Alternates. If the blank line is filled in, the amount shall not be less than the full amount of the Base Bid
plus all additive Alternates, stated in dollars and cents. A percentage is not acceptable. In the event the blank line is filled
in for an amount less than the full amount of the Base Bid plus all additive alternates, the Bid shall be rejected as non-
responsive.
5.1.4 An authorized agent must sign the Bid Security Form, and the Bidder shall provide a Power of Attorney from the
Surety. A Surety authorized by the Ohio Department of Insurance to transact business in Ohio must issue the Bid
Security Form.
5.1.5 The requirements of ORC Section 3901.86 may be applicable requiring an Ohio resident agent countersign the Bid
Security Form. The Bidder shall determine the applicability of this provision.
5.1.6 Bid Guaranties in the form of a certified check, cashier's check, or letter of credit shall be returned to unsuccessful
Bidders 60 days after the bid opening. Bid Guaranties in the form of a certified check, cashier's check, or letter of credit
shall be returned to the successful Bidder upon providing Document 00 61 13 - Performance and Payment Bond Form
from a Surety satisfactory to the Contracting Authority.
5.2 Forfeiture of Bid Guaranty

5.2.1 If for any reason, other than as authorized by Section 4.2.1 or Section 5.3, the Bidder fails to execute the
Agreement, and the Contracting Authority awards the Contract to another Bidder, which the Contracting Authority
determines is the lowest responsive and responsible Bidder:
5.2.1.1 The Bidder who failed to execute the Agreement is liable to the State for the difference between its Bid and
the Bid of the next lowest responsive and responsible Bidder, or for a penal sum not to exceed ten percent of the bid
amount, whichever is less.
5.2.2 If the Contracting Authority then awards a Contract to another Bidder, which the Contracting Authority determines
is the lowest responsive and responsible Bidder and that Bidder fails or refuses to execute the Agreement:
5.2.2.1 The liability of the lowest responsive and responsible Bidder shall be the difference between the bid amount
of the lowest responsive and responsible Bidder and another Bidder which the Contracting Authority determines is
the lowest responsive and responsible Bidder, except as provided in Section 5.3, but not in excess of the liability
specified in Section 4.2.2.
5.2.2.2 The liability on account of an award to the lowest responsive and responsible Bidder beyond the third lowest
responsive and responsible Bidder shall be determined in like manner.
5.2.3 If the Contracting Authority does not award the Contract to another Bidder under Section 5.2.2, but submits the
Project for re-bidding:
5.2.3.1 The Bidder failing or refusing to execute the Agreement is liable to the State for a penal sum not to exceed
10 percent of the Bidder's bid amount or the costs in connection with the resubmission of printing new Contract
Documents, required advertising, and printing and mailing notices to prospective Bidders, whichever is less, except
as provided in Section 5.3.

5.3 Exception to Forfeiture
5.3.1 A Bidder for a Contract with the State costing less than $500,000 may withdraw its Bid from consideration if its
Bid for another Contract with the State for less than $500,000 has already been accepted if:
5.3.1.1 the Bidder certifies in good faith that the total amount of its current contracts is less than $500,000; and
5.3.1.2 the Bidder's Surety certifies in good faith that the Bidder is unable to perform the subsequent Contract
because such performance would exceed the Bidder's bonding capacity.
5.3.2 If a Bid is withdrawn pursuant to Section 5.3.1:
5.3.2.1 the Contracting Authority may award the Contract to another Bidder which the Contracting Authority
determines is the lowest responsive and responsible Bidder or reject all Bids and submit the Project for re-bidding;
and
5.3.2.2 neither the withdrawing Bidder nor the Bidder's Surety shall be liable for the difference between the Bidder's
Bid and that of the next lowest responsive and responsible Bidder for a penal sum, or for the costs of printing new
Contract Documents, required advertising, and printing and mailing notices to prospective Bidders.
5.4 Bond
5.4.1 Prior to signing the Agreement, the Bidder shall provide the Bond required by law in form and substance
satisfactory to the Contracting Authority, and from a Surety licensed to do business in the state of Ohio and satisfactory
to the Contracting Authority.
5.4.1.1 If the Bidder provided Document 00 43 13 - Bid Security Form, described in Section 5.1.1.1, as its Bid
Guaranty then that form shall be the Bond.
5.4.1.2 If the Bidder provided another form of Bid Guaranty, described in Section 5.1.1.2, then Document 00 61 13
- Performance and Payment Bond Form, described in Section 5.1.6, shall be the Bond.
5.4.1.3 The Bidder shall not be required to provide both forms described above.
5.4.2 The Bond must be in the full amount of the Contract to indemnify the State against all direct and consequential
damages suffered by failure of the Contractor to perform according to the provisions of the Contract and in accordance
with the Plans, Specifications, details, and bills of material therefore and pay all lawful claims of Subcontractors,
Material Suppliers, and laborers for labor performed or materials furnished in performing and completing the Contract.
ARTICLE 6 - CONTRACT AWARD AND EXECUTION

6.1 Conditions Precedent for Execution of Contract
6.1.1 The successful Bidder must submit the items in this Section 6.1 to the Contracting Authority before executing the
Agreement.
6.1.2 Bond, and to support the Bond, a Certificate of Compliance issued by the Ohio Department of Insurance, showing
the Surety is licensed to do business in the state of Ohio.
6.1.3 Ohio Workers' Compensation Certificate
6.1.4 Certificate of Compliance with Affirmative Action Programs, issued by the Equal Opportunity Coordinator. The
form must be submitted through the Ohio Business Gateway: http://business.ohio.gov/efiling/.
6.1.5 Certificate of Insurance (ACORD form is acceptable) and copy of additional insured or loss payee endorsement.
The Contracting Authority reserves the right to request and receive a certified copy of the Contractor's insurance
policies.
6.1.6 If a Bidder is a foreign corporation (e.g., not incorporated under the laws of Ohio) it must submit a Certificate of
Good Standing from the Ohio Secretary of State showing the right of the Bidder to do business in the state of Ohio.
6.1.7 If a Bidder is an individual or partnership, nonresident of the State, it must submit a Power of Attorney designating
the Ohio Secretary of State as the Bidder's agent for accepting service of summons in any action brought under ORC
Section 153.05 or under ORC Sections 4123.01 to 4123.94, inclusive.
6.1.8 If the Contract includes plumbing; electrical; hydronics; refrigeration; and heating, ventilating and air conditioning
(“HVAC”) Work, the Contractor or its Subcontractors must submit proof of current licensing pursuant to Applicable
Law.

6.1.9 Evidence that the Bidder is enrolled in, and in good standing in, a DFSP approved by the OBWC.
6.1.10 Required Notice of Unresolved Findings for Recovery.
6.1.10.1 By submitting its Bid, the Bidder warrants that it is not subject to an unresolved findings for recovery under
ORC Section 9.24. ORC Section 9.24 prohibits the State from awarding a Contract to any Bidder against whom the
Auditor of State has issued a finding for recovery if the finding for recovery is unresolved at the time of award. If
the Contract is awarded to a Bidder subject to an unresolved finding for recovery under ORC Section 9.24, the
Contract is void on its face and the Contractor shall immediately repay to the Owner any funds paid under the
Contract.
6.1.11 EDGE Program – Supporting Documentation Required.
6.1.11.1 The Bidder shall provide evidence acceptable to the Contracting Authority of the Bidder’s participation in
the EDGE Program by contracting with EDGE-certified Business Enterprise(s) for the Project by submitting a fully
completed EDGE Affidavit for each EDGE-certified Business Enterprise, by requesting a waiver or partial waiver of
the advertised EDGE Program participation goal for the Project on the Bidder’s company letterhead including full
documentation of the Bidder’s good faith effort to contract with EDGE-certified Business Enterprise(s) for this
Project, or both.
6.1.12 Registered Apprentices – Supporting Documentation Required.
6.1.12.1 The Bidder shall provide evidence acceptable to the Contracting Authority of the registration of all
apprentices who the Bidder or its Subcontractors intend to employ on the Project pursuant to ORC Section 4115.05.
6.1.13 If the Bidder is a joint venture, it must submit the executed agreement between the joint venturers describing the
division of services/work and percentage of contract for each company, and a Power of Attorney which authorizes one or
more individuals to bind the joint venture and each individual joint venturer to Contract Modifications.
6.2 Non-compliance with Conditions Precedent

6.2.1 The award of the Contract and execution of the Agreement require the Contractor to comply with:
6.2.1.1 all conditions precedent for execution of the Contract within 10 days of the date of the Notice of Intent to
Award; and
6.2.1.2 the Bidder’s Qualifications form, including a fully completed EDGE Affidavit for each EDGE-certified
Business Enterprise, not previously provided within 3 business days of receiving the Contracting Authority’s
request.
6.2.2 Non-compliance with the conditions precedent for execution of the Contract as stated in Section 6.1 within the
timelines stated in Section 6.2.1 following the date of the Notice of Intent to Award shall be sufficient cause to permit
the Contracting Authority to cancel the Notice of Intent to Award, for the Bidder’s lack of responsibility and award the
Contract to another Bidder, which the Contracting Authority determines is the lowest responsive and responsible Bidder;
or the Contracting Authority may re-bid the Work at its sole discretion.
6.2.3 The Contracting Authority may extend the time for complying with the conditions precedent for execution of the
Contract for good cause. The extension is not a waiver of the conditions precedent for execution of the Contract.
6.3 Time Limits

6.3.1 The Contracting Authority’s failure to award the Contract and execute the Agreement within 60 days of the bid
opening invalidates the entire bid process and all Bids submitted, unless the time is extended by written consent of the
apparent lowest responsive and responsible Bidder and the Contracting Authority.
6.3.1.1 If the Contracting Authority awards the Contract within 60 days of the bid opening, increases in material,
labor, and subcontract costs shall be borne by the Bidder.
6.3.1.2 If failure to execute the Contract within 60 days of the bid opening is due to matters for which the State is
solely responsible, the Contractor is entitled to a Change Order authorizing payment of verifiable increased costs in
materials, labor, or subcontracts. This increase shall not exceed the difference in price between the successful Bidder
and the price of the next lowest responsive and responsible Bidder.
6.3.1.3 If failure to execute the Contract within 60 days of the bid opening is due to matters for which the Contractor
is responsible, the Contracting Authority shall not grant a request for increased costs.

6.4 Notice to Proceed
6.4.1 The Contracting Authority shall issue a Notice to Proceed to the Contractor, which establishes the date for
commencement and the calendar days allocated for Substantial Completion. Within 10 days of the date of the Notice to
Proceed, or other period as mutually agreed by the Contractor and the Contracting Authority, the Contractor shall furnish
the following submittals to the A/E:
6.4.1.1 Schedule of Values;
6.4.1.2 preliminary schedule of Shop Drawings and other Submittals;
6.4.1.3 Subcontractor and Material Supplier Declaration form, with completed “Bidder Affirmation and
Disclosure” forms acknowledging that the Contractor affirms, understands, and will abide by the requirements of
Executive Order 2011-12K for Subcontractors that were not identified in the Bid Form;
6.4.1.4 qualifications of proposed project manager(s) and superintendent(s) and a comprehensive resume of each;
and
6.4.1.5 evidence that an authorization agreement for automatic deposit of state warrants has been submitted to Ohio
Shared Services using the electronic funds transfer form provided on the Internet at
http://ohiosharedservices.ohio.gov/Vendors.aspx?Page=2.
6.5 Prevailing Wage Rates

6.5.1 The Bidder shall base its Bid upon the prevailing rates of wages as ascertained by the Ohio Department of
Commerce, Wage and Hour Bureau for the Project as provided in ORC Sections 4115.03 through 4115.14. Refer to
Document 00 73 43 - Wage Rate Requirements for related information and the Project’s prevailing rates of wages with
an appropriate ratio of registered apprentices.
6.5.2 The Bidder shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Sum on account of an increase in prevailing wage
rates, except as otherwise provided by Applicable Law. The Bidder is responsible for compliance of its Subcontractors
with prevailing wage requirements.
6.5.3 Within 10 days of the date of the Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall provide the Contracting Authority’s
Prevailing Wage Coordinator with a schedule of dates during the term of the Contract when the Contractor shall pay
wages to its employees for the Project.
KEYWORD INDEX
A C
Acceptable Components, 3 Change Order, 1, 11
Addenda, 1, 2 Contract, 1, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12
Addendum, 2, 3, 6 Contract Documents, 1, 2, 3, 6, 8, 9, 10
Affirmative Action, 4, 7, 10 Contract Sum, 1, 4
Agreement, 9, 10, 11
Allowances, 4 D
Alternate, 4, 6, 7
Applicable Law, 2, 6, 10, 12 Drawings, 1, 2, 3
award of the Contract, 1, 6, 7, 11 Drug-Free Safety Program (“DFSP”), 5, 11
B E
Base Bid, 4, 6, 7, 9 Encouraging Diversity Growth and Equity (“EDGE”), 3,
Basis of Design Component, 2, 3 4, 5, 7, 11
Bid, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 Equal Employment Opportunity, 7
Bid Form, 1, 3, 4 Equal Opportunity Coordinator, 4, 10
Bid Guaranty, 4, 7, 9, 10 Estimated Construction Cost, 7
Bidder, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12
Bond, 5, 10 I
insurance, 10

J S
joint venture, 3, 11 Schedule of Values, 12
Shop Drawings, 12
N Specifications, 1, 2, 3, 10
State, 1, 6, 9, 10, 11
Notice of Intent to Award, 8, 11 Subcontractor, 1, 3, 5, 7, 10, 11, 12
Notice to Proceed, 12 Substantial Completion, 1, 12
Substitutions, 3
O Surety, 4, 5, 7, 9, 10
Ohio Bureau of Workers’ Compensation (“OBWC”), 5,

11
T
Ohio Department of Commerce, 12 Ten Percent Rule, 7
Ohio Department of Insurance, 5, 9, 10
Ohio Secretary of State, 5, 10 U
P Unit Price, 4
unresolved findings for recovery, 11
Plan Holder, 2
Prevailing Wage Rates, 12 W
R Wage and Hour Bureau, 12
Request for Interpretation, 2
END OF DOCUMENT

DOCUMENT 003119 - EXISTING CONDITION INFORMATION
1.1 EXISTING CONDITION INFORMATION
A. This Document with its referenced attachments is part of the Procurement and Contracting
Requirements for Project. They provide Owner's information for Bidders' convenience and are
intended to supplement rather than serve in lieu of the Bidders' own investigations. They are
made available for Bidders' convenience and information, but are not a warranty of existing
conditions. This Document and its attachments are not part of the Contract Documents.
B. Existing drawings for Dwyer Hall that include information on existing conditions including
previous construction at Project site are available for viewing on line at BlueServ
Reprographics, LLC
C. Survey information that includes information on existing conditions, prepared by Vanatta

Engineering dated October 2016, and by Access Engineering Solutions dated December 12,
2016 is available for viewing as part of Drawings.
D. Related Requirements:
1. Document 002113 "Instructions to Bidders" for the Bidder's responsibilities for

examination of Project site and existing conditions.
2. Document 003132 "Geotechnical Data" for reports and soil-boring data from
geotechnical investigations that are made available to bidders.
END OF DOCUMENT 003119
Project 16018 EXISTING CONDITION INFORMATION 003119 - 1

AIA/MCS December 21, 2016
DOCUMENT 003132 - GEOTECHNICAL DATA
1.1 GEOTECHNICAL DATA
A. This Document with its referenced attachments is part of the Procurement and Contracting
Requirements for Project. They provide Owner's information for Bidders' convenience and are
intended to supplement rather than serve in lieu of Bidders' own investigations. They are made
available for Bidders' convenience and information, but are not a warranty of existing
conditions. This Document and its attachments are not part of the Contract Documents.
B. Soil-boring data for Project, obtained by CBC Engineers, dated September 26, 2016, is
available for viewing as appended to this Document.
C. A geotechnical investigation report for Project, prepared by CBC Engineers, dated September
26, 2016, is available for viewing as appended to this Document.
D. Related Requirements:
1. Document 002113 "Instructions to Bidders" for the Bidder's responsibilities for

examination of Project site and existing conditions.
2. Document 003119 "Existing Condition Information" for information about existing
conditions that is made available to bidders.
END OF DOCUMENT 003132
Project 16018 GEOTECHNICAL DATA 003132 - 1

AIA/MCS December 21, 2016
Document 00 41 13 - Bid Form (General Contracting Project)
Sealed bids will be received by the Wright State University-Lake Campus at 108 Dwyer Hall, 7600 Lake Campus Drive,
Celina, Ohio 45822 for:
Project WSU-160027
Wright State University-Lake Campus
at

Celina, Mercer County
for the
Wright State University
The time for Substantial Completion of all Work is 200 consecutive days from the Notice to Proceed.
Having read and examined the proposed Contract Documents prepared by the Architect/Engineer for the above-referenced
Project and the following Addenda:
Addendum Number Date Received
The undersigned Bidder proposes to perform all Work for the applicable Contract in accordance with the proposed Contract
Documents, for the following sum(s):
Bid Package 101 – GENERAL CONTRACT
UNIT PRICES (Include the subtotal of Unit Price extensions in the Base Bid below. Unit prices shall be used solely for the
purpose of determining the adjustment to the Contract Sum for differences between the estimated quantities on the Bid Form
and the actual quantities provided. The Contractor’s Fee on account of Unit Price Work is included in the Base Bid and not in
the Unit Price.)
Estimated Unit of
Item Description Quantity Unit Price / Measure Extension
Unit Price U-1 Removal of unsatisfactory soil 1,500 Cu.Yd. $ __________ / Cu.Yd. $ ______________
SUBTOTAL OF UNIT PRICE EXTENSIONS: $ ______________
BASE BID (Including Allowances and Subtotal of Unit Price Extensions above):
ALL LABOR AND MATERIALS, for the sum of $ _____________
Sum in words:
and ______ /100 dollars.
M160-00 41 13 2014 Edition (2015-SEP) Page 1 of 7

WSU-160027 Agricultural Education and Water Quality Building
Alternate 1, Patio and Boot Wash (Circle appropriate choice below and insert amount)
If Alternate is accepted, ADD TO / DEDUCT FROM Base Bid: $
Sum in words: and ______ /100 dollars.
Alternate 2, Walk to Dwyer (Circle appropriate choice below and insert amount)
Alternate 3, Brick Veneer (Circle appropriate choice below and insert amount)
Alternate 4, Roller Shades (Circle appropriate choice below and insert amount)
Alternate 5, Type I Commercial Hood (Circle appropriate choice below and insert amount)
Alternate 6, Demand Ventilation Controls (Circle appropriate choice below and insert amount)
-- remainder of page left blank intentionally --

BIDDER AFFIRMATION AND DISCLOSURE
Bidder acknowledges that by signing the Bid Form on the Bidder Signature and Information page, that it affirms,
understands, and will abide by the requirements of Executive Order 2011-12K. If awarded a Contract, the Bidder will
become the Contractor and affirms that both the Contractor and its Subcontractors shall perform no services requested under
this Contract outside of the United States.
The Bidder shall provide the locations where services under this Contract will be performed in the spaces provided below or
by attachment. Failure to provide this information as part of its Bid may cause the Bidder to be deemed non-responsive and
no further consideration will be given to its Bid. If the Bidder will not be using Subcontractors, indicate “Not Applicable” in
the appropriate spaces.
1. Principal business location of Contractor:
Address City, State, Zip
2. Location where services will be performed by Contractor:
Locations where services will be performed by Subcontractors, if known at time of Bid Opening:
3. Location where state data will be stored, accessed, tested, maintained, or backed-up, by Contractor:
Locations where state data will be stored, accessed, tested, maintained, or backed-up by Subcontractors, if known at
time of Bid Opening:

COMMITMENT TO PARTICIPATE
IN THE
EDGE BUSINESS ASSISTANCE PROGRAM
Bidder: Mark only one option.

Use “” or “X” to mark option included in Bid
If marking Option B, also show percentage of proposed participation.
Option A
Bidder commits to meet or exceed the advertised EDGE Participation Goal of the Contract award
amount, calculated as a portion of the Base Bid plus all accepted Alternates, by using certified EDGE
Business Enterprise(s).
Bidder agrees that if selected for consideration of the Contract, it shall provide (if not provided with the
Bidder’s Bid) to the Contracting Authority, at the location required and within 3 business days after
receiving notice from the Contracting Authority, its fully-completed Bidder’s Qualification Form,
including an EDGE Affadavit form for each certified EDGE Business Enterprise proposed for use by the
Bidder if awarded the Contract for this Project.
Option B (also indicate percentage -- see text )

Bidder does not meet the advertised EDGE Participation Goal percentage, but, if awarded the Contract for
this Project, commits to provide ______ percent of the Contract award amount, calculated as a portion
of the Base Bid plus all accepted Alternates, by using certified EDGE Business Enterprise(s).
Bidder acknowledges it understands the requirement for it to provide and agrees to provide to the
Contracting Authority, if selected for consideration of the Contract, within 3 business days after notice
from the Contracting Authority, a detailed Demonstration of Good Faith form describing its efforts
undertaken prior to submitting its Bid to meet the advertised EDGE Participation Goal percentage for the
Contract for this Project.
Bidder commits to provide to the Contracting Authority at the location required, and within 3 days after
receiving notice from the Contracting Authority, its fully-completed Bidder’s Qualification Form,
including an EDGE Affadavit form for each certified EDGE Business Enterprise proposed for use by the
Bidder if awarded the Contract for this Project.
Option C
Bidder declares that the Bidder is a certified EDGE Business Enterprise and that if awarded this Contract,
the EDGE Participation percentage will be 100 percent of the Contract award amount.

BIDDER'S CERTIFICATIONS
The Bidder hereby acknowledges that the following representations in this Bid are material and not mere recitals:
1. The Bidder has read and understands the proposed Contract Documents and agrees to comply with all requirements
of the proposed Contract Documents, regardless of whether the Bidder has actual knowledge of the requirements
and regardless of any statement or omission made by the Bidder, which might indicate a contrary intention.
2. The Bidder represents that the Bid is based upon the Basis of Design and Acceptable Components specified by the
proposed Contract Documents.
3. The Bidder has visited the Site, become familiar with local conditions, and has correlated personal observations
about the requirements of the proposed Contract Documents. The Bidder has no outstanding questions regarding the
interpretation or clarification of the proposed Contract Documents.
4. The Bidder understands that the execution of the Project will require sequential, coordinated, and interrelated
operations, which may involve interference, disruption, hindrance, or delay in the progress of the Bidder's Work.
The Bidder agrees that the Contract Sum, as amended from time to time, shall cover all amounts due from the State
resulting from interference, disruption, hindrance, or delay that is not caused by the State or its agents and
employees. The Bidder agrees that any such interference, disruption, hindrance, or delay is within the contemplation
of the Bidder and the State and that the Contractor’s sole remedy from the State for any such interference,
disruption, hindrance, or delay shall be an extension of time in accordance with the proposed Contract Documents.
5. During the performance of the Contract, the Bidder agrees to comply with Ohio Administrative Code (“OAC”)
Chapters 123:2-3 through 123:2-9 and agrees to incorporate the monthly reporting provisions of OAC Section
123:2-9-01 into all subcontracts on the Project, regardless of tier. The Bidder understands the State’s Equal
Opportunity Coordinator or the Contracting Authority may conduct pre-award and post-award compliance reviews
to determine if the Bidder maintains nondiscriminatory employment practices, maintains an affirmative action
program, and is exerting good faith efforts to accomplish the goals of the affirmative action program. For a full
statement of the rules regarding Equal Employment Opportunity in the Construction Industry, see OAC Chapters
123:2-1 through 123:2-9.
6. The Bidder and each Person signing on behalf of the Bidder certifies, and in the case of a Bid by a joint venture each
member thereof certifies as to such member’s entity, under penalty of perjury, that to the best of the undersigned's
knowledge and belief: (a) the Base Bid, any Unit Prices, and any Alternate bid in the Bid have been arrived at
independently without collusion, consultation, communication or agreement, for the purpose of restricting
competition as to any matter relating to such Base Bid, Unit Prices or Alternate bid with any other Bidder; (b) unless
otherwise required by law, the Base Bid, any Unit Prices and any Alternate bid in the Bid have not been knowingly
disclosed by the Bidder and shall not knowingly be disclosed by the Bidder prior to the bid opening, directly or
indirectly, to any other Bidder who would have any interest in the Base Bid, Unit Prices or Alternate bid; (c) no
attempt has been made or shall be made by the Bidder to induce any other Person to submit or not to submit a Bid
for the purpose of restricting competition.
7. The Bidder understands that the Contract is subject to all the provisions, duties, obligations, remedies and penalties
of Ohio Revised Code Chapter 4115 and that the Bidder shall pay any wage increase in the locality during the term
of the Contract.
8. The Bidder shall execute the Agreement with the Contracting Authority, if a Contract is awarded on the basis of this
Bid, and if the Bidder does not execute the Agreement for any reason, other than as authorized by law, the Bidder
and the Bidder's Surety are liable to the State as provided in Article 5 of the Instructions to Bidders.
9. The Bidder certifies that the upon the award of a Contract, as the Contractor it shall make a good faith effort to
ensure that all of the Contractor’s employees, while working on the Site, shall not purchase, transfer, use, or possess
illegal drugs or alcohol or abuse prescription drugs in any way.

10. The Bidder acknowledges that it read all of the Instructions to Bidders, and in particular, Section 2.10 - Submittals
With Bid Form, and by submitting its Bid certifies that it has read the Instructions to Bidders and it understands and
agrees to the terms and conditions stated in them.
11. The Bidder agrees to furnish any information requested by the Contracting Authority or Architect/Engineer to
evaluate the responsibility of the Bidder.
12. The Bidder agrees to furnish the submittals required by Section 6.1 of the Instructions to Bidders for execution of
the Agreement within 10 days of the date of the Notice of Intent to Award.
13. When the Bidder is a corporation, partnership or sole proprietorship, an officer, partner or principal of the Bidder, as
applicable, shall print or type the legal name of the Bidder on the line provided, and sign the Bid Form.
14. When the Bidder is a joint venture, an officer, partner or principal, as applicable, of each member of the joint
venture shall print or type the legal name of the applicable member on the line provided, and sign the Bid Form.
15. Bidder acknowledges that by signing the Bid Form on the following Bidder Signature and Information page that it is
signing the actual Bid and when submitted as a part of its bid package, shall serve as the Bidder’s authorization for
the further consideration and activity in the bidding and contract process.
16. All signatures must be original.
-- remainder of page left blank intentionally --

BIDDER SIGNATURE AND INFORMATION
Bidder’s Authorized Signature:

Please print or type the following:
Name of Bidder’s Authorized Signatory
Title:
Company Name:
Mailing Address:
Telephone Number:
Facsimile Number:
E-Mail Address:
Where Incorporated:
Federal Tax Identification Number:
Date enrolled in an OBWC-approved DFSP (month/date/year): _______ / _______ /
Contact person for Contract processing:
President’s or Chief Executive Officer’s Name / Title:
JOINT VENTURE ADDITIONAL BIDDER SIGNATURE & INFORMATION
Joint Venture Bidder’s Authorized Signature:

Please print or type the following:
Name of Joint Venture Bidder’s Authorized Signatory
Title:
Company Name:
Mailing Address:
Telephone Number:
Facsimile Number:
E-Mail Address:
Where Incorporated:
Federal Tax Identification Number:
Date enrolled in an OBWC-approved DFSP (month/date/year): _______ / _______ /
Contact person for Contract processing:
President’s or Chief Executive Officer’s Name / Title:
END OF DOCUMENT

Document 00 43 13 - Bid Security Form
( Form of combined Bid Guaranty and Bond prescribed by Ohio Revised Code Section 153.571 )
KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS, that we, the undersigned ________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________, as Principal,
and _______________________________________________________________________________________ as Sureties,
are hereby held and firmly bound unto _____________________________________________________________________
___________________________ as Obligee(s), in the penal sum of the dollar amount of the Bid submitted by the Principal
to the Obligee on _______________________ (date) to undertake the Project known as:
Project Number: _________________________________________________
Project Name: _________________________________________________
Contract Description: ______________________________________________

(e.g., General Trades, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical)
The penal sum, referred to herein, shall be the dollar amount of the Principal's Bid to the Obligee, incorporating any
additive alternate Bids made by the Principal on the date referred to above to the Obligee, which are accepted by the Obligee.
In no case shall the penal sum exceed the amount of dollars ($___________________). (If the preceding line is left blank, the
penal sum will be the full amount of the Principal's Bid, including add alternates. Alternatively, if completed, the amount
stated shall not be less than the full amount of the Bid, including Alternates, in dollars and cents. A percentage is not
acceptable.) For the payment of the penal sum well and truly to be made, we hereby jointly and severally bind ourselves, our
heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns.
THE CONDITION OF THE ABOVE OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that whereas the above-named Principal has
submitted a Bid for the above referenced Project;
NOW, THEREFORE, if the Obligee accepts the Bid of the Principal, and the Principal fails to enter into a proper
contract in accordance with the Bid, Plans, Specifications, details, and bills of material; and in the event the Principal pays to
the Obligee the difference, not to exceed ten percent of the penal sum hereof between the amount specified in the Bid and
such larger amount for which the Obligee may in good faith contract with the Bidder determined by the Obligee to be the
next lowest responsive and responsible to perform the Work covered by the Bid; or in the event the Obligee does not award
the Contract to such next lowest responsive and responsible Bidder and resubmits the Project for bidding, the Principal pays
to the Obligee the difference not to exceed ten percent of the penal sum hereof between the amount specified in the Bid, or
the costs, in connection with the resubmission, of printing new Contract Documents, required advertising and printing and
mailing notices to prospective Bidders, whichever is less, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to remain in
full force and effect. If the Obligee accepts the Bid of the Principal, and the Principal, within 10 days after the awarding of
the Contract, enters into a proper contract and executes the Agreement Form in accordance with the Contract Documents,
including without limitation the Bid, Plans, Specifications, details, and bills of material, which said Contract is made a part of
this Bond the same as though set forth herein; and
NOW ALSO, IF THE SAID Principal shall well and faithfully perform each and every condition of such Contract;
and indemnify the Obligee against all damage suffered by failure to perform such Contract according to the provisions
thereof and in accordance with the Contract Documents, including without limitation Plans, Specifications, details, and bills
of material therefore; and shall pay all lawful claims of Subcontractors, Material Suppliers and laborers for labor performed
and materials furnished in the carrying forward, performing or completing of said Contract; we, agreeing and assenting that
this undertaking shall be for the benefit of any Subcontractor, Material Suppliers or laborer having a just claim, as well as for
the Obligee herein; then this obligation shall be void; otherwise the same shall remain in full force and effect; it being
M140-00 43 13 2014 Edition (2014-JUN) Page 1 of 2

Document 00 43 13 Bid Security Form
expressly understood and agreed that the liability of the Surety for any and all claims hereunder shall in no event exceed the
penal amount of this obligation as herein stated.
THE SAID Surety hereby stipulates and agrees that no modifications, omissions or additions, in or to the terms of
said Contract, the Work thereunder or the Contract Documents, including without limitation the Plans and Specifications,
therefore, shall in any way affect the obligations of said Surety on its bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such
modifications, omissions or additions in or to the terms of the Contract, the Work, or the Contract Documents, including
without limitation the Plans and Specifications.
SIGNED AND SEALED this day of , .
PRINCIPAL:
By:
Title:
SURETY: SURETY INFORMATION:
x
Street
By:
Attorney-in-Fact City State Zip
Telephone Number
SURETY AGENT'S INFORMATION:
Agency Name
Street
City State Zip
Telephone Number
END OF DOCUMENT

Document 00 45 13 - Bidder’s Qualifications
Project Number: _________________________________________________
Project Name: _________________________________________________
1. Company Name:
Physical Address:
Street, Building, Unit
City, State, Zip
Mailing Address (if different):

P.O. Box
City, State, Zip
Telephone Number (w/ Area Code): ( ________ ) __________________
Fax Number (w/ Area Code): ( ________ ) __________________
Email address:
2. Overall Experience. Indicate Bidder’s overall experience performing the trades bid, including the years in business
performing the trade under present and former business names.
3. Financial. The apparent low Bidder shall submit, upon request of the Contracting Authority, either:
a) An annual financial statement prepared within the 12 months prior to the bid opening by an independent licensed
accounting firm; and the name, address, contact person and phone number of the bank normally used by the Bidder
for its primary banking; or,
b) A financial report generated within 30 days prior to the bid opening from Standard and Poor, Dun and Bradstreet or
a similar company acceptable to the Contracting Authority documenting the financial condition of the Bidder; and
the name, address, contact person and phone number of the bank normally used by the Bidder for its primary
banking;
This information is not a public record under Ohio Revised Code Section 149.43; and shall remain confidential,
except under proper order of a court.

Document 00 45 13 Bidder’s Qualications
4. Facilities & Equipment. Indicate Bidder’s relevant facilities and major equipment (leased or owned).
5. Ongoing & Relevant Projects. List all ongoing projects and projects completed in the last 5 years, which are similar in
cost and type to the Project. Include scope of Work, Contract value, a description of EDGE participation and
performance, and project name/contact person/address/phone number for each owner and the architect or engineer for
each project.
6. Regulatory / Contractual. Indicate all occurrences of the following in the last 5 years (indicate if none). For
verification, attach documentation, and/or provide sufficient and appropriate detail information such as: project name,
owner, contact person and phone number, amount of contract, etc.
a) State or federal Prevailing Wage violations or judgments
b) Affirmative Action and EDGE program violations (Attach Certificate of Compliance with Affirmative Action
Programs, issued pursuant to Ohio Revised Code Section 9.47)
c) Contract abandonment, contract termination, as either a prime- or sub-contractor, or Surety takeover
d) Debarment by state, federal, or local jurisdictions

Document 00 45 13 Bidder’s Qualications
e) EPA/OSHA violations
f) Liquidated damages and Statutory Delay Forfeiture assessed
g) Drug-Free Safety Program and Drug Free Workplace Program violations
7. Management. Identify individuals assigned to this Project.
Principal _____________________________________ Years with firm ________ Total Exp._______
Project Manager _______________________________ Years with firm ________ Total Exp._______
Field Superintendent ____________________________ Years with firm ________ Total Exp.______
8. EDGE Participation. Identify EDGE-certified Business Enterprises proposed as Subcontractors and Material Suppliers
for this Project. Attach a fully completed Document 00 45 39 - “EDGE Affidavit” for each EDGE-certified Business
Enterprise.
9. Certification. I hereby certify that the information in this entire Bidder’s Qualifications form, including all attachments
and referenced information, is factual and complete.
Company Name ___________________________________________________________________
Authorized Official (please print or type) _______________________________________________
Signature of Authorized Official _______________________________ Date _________________
END OF DOCUMENT

Document 00 45 39 - EDGE Affidavit
EDGE PARTICIPATION
Certified Statement of Intent to Contract and Perform
Bidder / Proposer: Submit one fully completed form for each EDGE-certified Business Enterprise
Project: _________________________________________________
Project Name: _________________________________________________
A. Bidder / Proposer’s Company Name:
Mark all that apply:

__ Multi-Prime Contract __ General Contract __ CM at Risk Contract __ Design-Build Contract
B. EDGE-certified Business Enterprise information (for contract at ANY tier)
Mark all that apply:

__ Subcontractor __ Material Supplier __ Professional Services __ Goods & Services
EDGE Business Name:

EDGE Business Address:
EDGE Business Federal Tax I.D. E-mail:

Contact Person: Phone: ( )
Insert a brief description of materials, labor, services, supplies, etc. to be provided (may use industry codes):
C. Certification of Intent
By signing below, the Bidder / Proposer certifies that it intends to contract with the EDGE-certified Business Enterprise
for the portion of the contract described above related to its Contract for this Project and for the estimated cost shown
below. By signing below, the EDGE-certified Business Enterprise certifies that it intends to contract with the Bidder /
Proposer and intends to provide the portion of the contract described above related to the Contract for this Project for the
estimated cost of:
and /100 dollars ( $ ).
In the event the named Bidder / Proposer is NOT awarded a Contract, this Statement shall be null and void.
EDGE-certified Business Enterprise Bidder / Proposer
Authorized representative name, title (print or type) Authorized representative name, title (print or type)
Signature of authorized representative Signature of authorized representative
END OF DOCUMENT

Document 00 52 00 - Agreement Form
This Agreement is made as of the date set forth below between the State of Ohio, acting by and through the Contracting
Authority, and the Contractor in connection with the Project.
Project Name: Agricultural Education and Water Quality Building
Site Address: 7600 Lake Campus Drive
Celina, Ohio
Mercer County
Owner: Wright State University

Owner’s Representative: Rob Thompson
Address: 2455 Executive Blvd, Suite 11
Fairborn, Ohio 45324
Contracting Authority: «insert name»

Project Manager: «insert name»
Address: «insert street address»
«insert city, state zip code»
Contractor: «insert name»

Contractor’s Principal Contact: «insert name»
Architect/Engineer (“A/E”): SPGB Architects, LLC

A/E’s Principal Contact: Tom Gates
Address: 4333-B Tuller Road
Dublin, Ohio 43017
ARTICLE 1 - SCOPE OF WORK; EDGE COMMITMENT

1.1 The Contractor shall perform and provide all of the Work described in the Contract.
1.2 The project delivery method for this Project shall be single prime.
1.3 The Contractor shall contract with EDGE-certified Business(es) for not less than 5 percent of the Contract Sum.
ARTICLE 2 - COMPENSATION
2.1 The Owner shall pay the Contractor the Contract Sum for the Contractor’s proper, timely, and complete performance of
the Contract. The Contract Sum is $«insert amount», subject to Modifications as provided in the Contract Documents. The
Contract Sum is comprised of the following:
2.1.1 Base Bid: ..................................................... $«Insert Base Bid Amount»
2.1.2 Alternate «Insert Alternates Awarded»: ...... $«Insert Alternate Amount»
ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACT TIMES

3.1 The Contract Times are the periods established in the following table for the achievement of the associated Milestones:
Construction Stage Milestone(s) Projected Date

to which Liquidated Damages apply (as of the date of this Agreement)
Anticipated Notice to Proceed April 6, 2017

Construction Stage Milestone(s) Projected Date

to which Liquidated Damages apply (as of the date of this Agreement)
Substantial Completion of all Work October 23, 2017
3.1.1 The projected dates listed under “Projected Date (as of the date of this Agreement)” are provided only for
convenient reference during the consideration Agreement. The durations listed under “Contract Time” define the
Contract Times and take precedence over the projected dates.
ARTICLE 4 - KEY PERSONNEL

4.1 The Contractor’s key personnel for the Project are:
4.1.1 «insert name», Project Manager;
4.1.2 «insert name», Lead Scheduling Engineer;
4.1.3 «insert name», General Superintendent.
4.2 The Contractor’s key personnel are authorized to act on the Contractor’s behalf with respect to the Project and all matters
concerning the Project.
ARTICLE 5 - GENERAL PROVISIONS

5.1 Effectiveness.
5.1.1 It is expressly understood by the Contractor that none of the rights, duties, and obligations described in the Contract
Documents shall be valid and enforceable unless the Director of the Office of Budget and Management first certifies that
there is a balance in the Owner’s appropriation not already encumbered to pay existing obligations and until all relevant
statutory provisions of the Ohio Revised Code, including ORC Section 126.07, have been complied with, and until such
time as all necessary funds are available or encumbered and, when required, such expenditure of such funds is approved
by the State Controlling Board, or other applicable approving body.
5.1.2 In addition, if federal funds are to be used to pay fees and expenses under this Agreement, none of the rights,
duties, and obligations contained in this Agreement shall be binding on any party until the Owner gives the Contractor
written notice that such funds are available from the Owner’s funding source.
5.1.3 Subject to Section 5.1.1, the Contract shall become binding and effective upon execution by the Contracting
Authority, Owner, Contractor, and Ohio Attorney General.
5.1.3.1 If the Contractor is a joint venture, (1) each individual joint venturer shall (a) sign the Agreement in its own
name and (b) be a party to the Contract, and (2) the Contract and the Performance and Payment Bond shall be
binding on and apply to all joint venturers jointly and severally.
5.1.3.2 If the Contractor is a limited liability company, which the Contracting Authority reasonably believes to be a
special purpose or similar entity, the Contracting Authority may in its discretion require the limited liability
company and each member of the limited liability company to (1) sign the Agreement in its own name and (2) be a
party to the Contract. In that case, the Contract and the Performance and Payment Bond shall be binding on and
apply to the limited liability company and to all of its members jointly and severally.
5.1.4 This Agreement may be executed in several counterparts, each of which shall constitute a complete original
Agreement, which may be introduced in evidence or used for any other purpose without production of any other
counterparts.
5.2 Representations.
5.2.1 The Contractor represents and warrants that it is not subject to an unresolved finding for recovery under ORC
Section 9.24. If this representation and warranty is found to be false, the Contract is void, and the Contractor shall
immediately repay to the Owner any funds paid under this Contract.
5.2.2 The Contractor hereby certifies that neither the Contractor nor any of the Contractor’s partners, officers, directors,
shareholders nor the spouses of any such person have made contributions in excess of the limitations specified in ORC
Section 3517.13.

5.2.3 The Contractor, by signature on this Agreement, certifies that it is currently in compliance with, and will continue
to adhere to, the requirements of Ohio ethics laws and conflict of interest laws and will take no action inconsistent with
those laws.
5.2.4 The Contractor affirms to have read and understands Executive Order 2011-12K and shall abide by those
requirements in the performance of this Contract. Notwithstanding any other terms of this Contract, the State reserves the
right to recover any funds paid for services the Contractor performs outside of the United States for which it did not
receive a waiver. The State does not waive any other rights and remedies provided the State in this Contract.
SIGNATURES
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed this Agreement as of the date set forth below:
«INSERT CONTRACTOR’S NAME» Owner
{&vend1-sig!] {&ca-sig!]
Signature Signature
Printed Name Printed Name
Title Title
OWNER’S CONCURRENCE OHIO ATTORNEY GENERAL

by «insert Owner’s name» Approval as to Form
{&own1-sig!] {&ag-sig!]
Signature Signature
Title Title
{&po-no!]
Purchase Order No. Date
«INSERT CONTRACTOR’S NAME» STATE OF OHIO
by «insert Joint Venturer/Member’s name» by «insert Contracting Authority’s name»
{&vend1-sig!] {&ca-sig!]
Signature Signature
Title Title
OWNER’S CONCURRENCE
by «insert Joint Venturer/Member’s name» by «insert Owner’s name»

{&vend2-sig!] {&own1-sig!]
Signature Signature
Title Title
{&po-no!]
Purchase Order No.
OHIO ATTORNEY GENERAL

Approval as to Form
{&ag-sig!]
Signature
Printed Name
Title
Date
END OF DOCUMENT

Document 00 52 14 - State of Ohio Subcontract Form
This Agreement is made as of the date set forth below between the Contractor and the Subcontractor in connection with the
Project.

Project Name: Agricultural Education and Water Quality Building
Site Address: 7600 Lake Campus Drive
Celina, Mercer County
Contractor: «insert name»

Contractor’s Principal Contact: «insert name»
Subcontractor: «insert name»

Subcontractor’s Principal Contact: «insert name»
Public Authority: «insert name»

Public Authority Contact: «insert name»
ARTICLE 1 - NATURE OF SUBCONTRACT

1.1 The Subcontractor shall perform the entire Subcontract Work as specified in Exhibit «N» and described in the Contract
Documents for the Project.
ARTICLE 2 - COMPENSATION
2.1 The Contractor agrees to pay for the performance of this Subcontract, subject to additions and deductions as provided in
the Contract Documents, the Subcontract Sum of «insert Subcontract Sum», comprised of the following:
«insert Subcontract Sum component» ....................................................... $«insert amount»
ARTICLE 3 - TIME OF PERFORMANCE

3.1 Time is of the essence. The Subcontractor shall diligently prosecute and complete all Subcontract Work in accordance
with the construction progress schedule agreed between the parties.
ARTICLE 4 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

4.1 To the extent that the contract between the Public Authority and the Contractor applies to the Subcontract Work:
4.1.1 The Contractor and the Subcontractor agree to be mutually bound by the terms of the Contract Documents;
4.1.2 The Contractor assumes toward the Subcontractor the rights, remedies, obligations, and responsibilities that the
Public Authority has and assumes toward the Contractor;
C190-00 52 14 2016-OCT Page 1 of 4

4.1.3 The Subcontractor assumes toward the Contractor the rights, remedies, obligations, and responsibilities that the
Contractor assumes toward the Public Authority; and
4.1.4 The Subcontractor agrees to perform its portion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
4.2 The Subcontract and any modifications, amendments, or alterations thereto shall be governed, construed, and enforced by
and under the laws of the State of Ohio.
4.3 If any term or provision of the Subcontract, or the application thereof to any Person or circumstance, is finally
determined, to be invalid or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction, the remainder of the Subcontract or the
application of such term or provision to other Persons or circumstances, shall not be affected thereby, and each term and
provision of the Subcontract shall be valid and enforced to the fullest extent permitted by law.
4.4 The Subcontract shall be binding on the Contractor and Subcontractor, their successors and assigns, in respect to all
respective covenants and obligations contained in the Contract Documents, but the Subcontractor may not assign the
Subcontract without the prior written consent of the Contractor and the Public Authority.
ARTICLE 5 - EFFECTIVENESS
5.1 The Subcontract shall become binding and effective upon execution by the Contractor.
5.2 This Subcontract has been executed in several counterparts, each of which shall constitute a complete original
Subcontract, which may be introduced in evidence or used for any other purpose without production of any other
counterparts.
5.3 Any signatory may deliver a copy of its counterpart signature page to this Subcontract via fax or e-mail. Each signatory
shall be entitled to rely upon a signature of any other signatory delivered in such a manner as if such signature were an
original.
ARTICLE 6 - REPRESENTATIONS
6.1 Contingent Assignment. The Contractor’s contingent assignment of this Subcontract to the Public Authority, as provided
in the Contract, is effective after termination of the Contractor by the Public Authority and the Public Authority’s acceptance
of the assignment in writing to the Subcontractor. The Subcontractor consents to the assignment and shall be bound at the
same price and terms as in the Subcontract to the Public Authority. Unless the Public Authority takes assignment of the
Subcontract, the Subcontractor will not have any contractual rights against the Public Authority.
6.2 Intended Third-Party Beneficiary. The Public Authority is an intended third party beneficiary of the Subcontract, entitled
to enforce any rights thereunder for its benefit.
6.3 Insurance. The Subcontractor shall maintain insurance in accordance with the Contract Documents. Exhibit «N» sets
forth the minimum limits of liability for the insurance required in the Contract Documents.
6.4 Right to Audit. The Subcontractor agrees that the Public Authority or any agents designated by the Public Authority have
access to and the right to audit and the right to copy at the Public Authority’s cost all of the Subcontractor’s books, records,
contracts, correspondence, instructions, drawings, receipts, vouchers, purchase orders, and memoranda relating to the Work
for a period of not less than 3 years following completion of the Work consistent with Ohio Revised Code (“ORC”) Section
149.43 with regard to the Public Authority’s obligation to maintain confidentiality of trade secrets.
6.5 Indemnity. To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Subcontractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the
Public Authority, the Contractor, their consultants and employees from all claims and expenses for bodily injury and property
damage other than to the Work itself that may arise from the performance of the Subcontract Work, including reasonable
attorneys' fees, costs and expenses, but only to the extent caused by the negligent acts or omissions of the Subcontractor or a
person or entity for whom the Subcontractor may be liable. This Subcontract does not require a Subcontractor to waive its
immunity under the Workers Compensation laws of Ohio from claims brought against the Subcontractor by the
Subcontractor’s employees.
C190-00 52 14 2016-OCT Page 2 of 4

6.6 Prompt Pay. The Contractor shall at a minimum make payments to the Subcontractor in accordance with Applicable Law,
including ORC Section 4113.61. Progress payments to the Subcontractor for satisfactory performance of Subcontract Work
shall be made no later than 10 days after receipt by the Contractor of payment from the Public Authority for Subcontract
Work.
6.7 Retainage. Subcontractor retainage shall be at a rate equal to the percentage retained from the Contractor’s payment by
the Public Authority for the Subcontract Work, unless a lesser percentage is otherwise specified.
6.7.1 Labor Payments.
6.7.1.1 Partial payments to the Subcontractor for labor performed shall be made at the rate of 92 percent of the
amount invoiced through the Subcontractor’s request for payment that shows the Work of the Subcontractor is
50 percent complete.
6.7.1.2 After the Work of the Subcontractor is 50 percent complete, as evidenced by payments of at least 50 percent
of the total amount due under the Subcontract, no additional funds shall be retained from payments for labor.
6.7.2 Material Payments.
6.7.2.1 The Contractor shall pay the Subcontractor at the rate of 100 percent of the scheduled value for materials
incorporated into the Project.
6.7.2.2 The Contractor shall pay the Subcontractor at the rate of 92 percent of the invoice cost, not to exceed the
scheduled value, for materials delivered to the Site, or other off-site storage location approved by the A/E, provided
the Subcontractor provides the following information with its request for payment:
.1 a list of the fabricated materials consigned to the Project, giving the place of storage, together with copies
of invoices, in order to verify quantity and cost; and
.2 a certification of materials stored off-site, prepared by the Subcontractor and signed by the A/E to evidence
that the materials are in conformity with the Specifications and have been tagged with the Project name and
number for delivery to the Project. The Subcontractor shall reimburse the A/E, through the Contractor, for
all costs incurred to visit a storage site, other than the areas adjacent to the Project.
.3 The Contractor shall pay the balance of the scheduled value when the materials are incorporated into and
become a part of the Project.
6.8 Warranty. The Subcontractor fully warrants, for the benefit of the Public Authority, that all materials and equipment shall
be new unless otherwise specified, of good quality, in conformance with the Contract Documents and free from defective
workmanship or materials.
6.9 Non-Waiver of Lien Rights or Payment Bond Rights. This Subcontract shall not prohibit a Subcontractor from exercising
its rights under ORC Chapter 1311 or under any Contractor-provided payment bond.
6.10 Non-Discrimination. The Subcontractor agrees to fully comply with Applicable Law regarding equal opportunity,
including ORC Section 153.59 and, to the extent applicable, all Executive Orders issued by the Governor of the state of Ohio.
6.11 Dispute Resolution. The supplemental conditions to this Subcontract shall provide for a dispute resolution process
comparable to the Contract’s dispute resolution process in terms of timing, notice, substantiation, and informal dispute
resolution efforts. The dispute resolution process provided in the supplemental conditions shall result in prompt access to the
ultimate dispute resolution mechanism selected by the parties.
6.12 In the event that any supplemental conditions or other Subcontract terms conflict with the State of Ohio Subcontract
Form, the State of Ohio Subcontract Form takes precedence and this Subcontract shall be read and enforced to include the
provisions of the State of Ohio Subcontract Form.
6.13 The following exhibits are attached to and are a part of this Subcontract:
6.13.1 Exhibit A:
6.13.2 Exhibit B:
6.13.3 Exhibit C:
6.13.4 Exhibit D:
C190-00 52 14 2016-OCT Page 3 of 4

SIGNATURES
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Subcontract Form.

«INSERT SUBCONTRACTOR’S NAME» «INSERT CONTRACTOR’S NAME»
Signature Signature
Title Title
Date
END OF DOCUMENT
C190-00 52 14 2016-OCT Page 4 of 4

Document 00 61 13 - Performance and Payment Bond Form
( Form of Bond prescribed by Ohio Revised Code Section 153.57 - Not to be used as Bid Guaranty )
KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS, that we, the undersigned ________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________, as Principal,
and _______________________________________________________________________________________ as Sureties,
are hereby held and firmly bound unto _____________________________________________________________________
___________________________ as Obligee(s), in the penal sum of _______________________________________ dollars,
for the payment of which well and truly to be made, we jointly and severally bind ourselves, our heirs, executors,
administrators, successors, and assigns.
SIGNED AND SEALED this day of , .
THE CONDITION OF THE ABOVE OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that whereas the above-named Principal did on the
________ day of ________________________, ________, enter into a Contract with the Obligee, which said Contract is
made a part of this Bond the same as though set forth herein and which is more fully described as:
Project Number: _________________________________________________
Project Name: _________________________________________________
Contract Description: ______________________________________________

(e.g., General Trades, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical)
NOW, THEREFORE, if the above-named Principal shall well and faithfully do and perform the things agreed by the
Obligee to be done and performed according to the terms of said Contract; and shall pay all lawful claims of Subcontractors,
Material Suppliers, and laborers, for labor performed and materials furnished in the carrying forward, performing, or
completing of said Contract; we agreeing and assenting that this undertaking shall be for the benefit of any Subcontractor,
Material Supplier or laborer having a just claim as well as for the Obligee herein; then this obligation shall be void; otherwise
the same shall remain in full force and effect; it being expressly understood and agreed that the liability of the Sureties for
any and all claims hereunder shall in no event exceed the penal amount of this obligation as herein stated.
THE SAID Surety hereby stipulates and agrees that no modifications, omissions, or additions, in or to the terms of
the said Contract or in or to the Plans and Specifications therefor shall in any wise affect the obligations of said Surety on its
bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such modifications, omissions or additions in or to the terms of the Contract, the
Work or the Contract Documents, including without limitation the Plans and Specifications.
M140-00 61 13 2014 Edition (2014-APR) Page 1 of 2

Document 00 61 13 Performance and Payment Bond Form
PRINCIPAL:
Principal Signature
By:
Title:
SURETY: SURETY INFORMATION:
Surety Signature Street
By:
Attorney-in-Fact City State Zip
Telephone Number
SURETY AGENT'S INFORMATION:
Agency Name
Street
City State Zip
Telephone Number
END OF DOCUMENT
M140-00 61 13 2014 Edition (2014-APR) Page 2 of 2

Certified Payroll Report - Instructions
State of Ohio Standard Forms for Public Facility Construction
This Certified Payroll Report was created in Excel Version 14.0.6112.5000 (32-bit), part of Microsoft Office Professional 2010. There are two tabs that comprise a complete Certified
Payroll Report that complies with Section 4115.071 of the Ohio Revised Code. Part A may be produced in response to a public records request without the need for redacting each
Worker's Social Security Number in order to protect sensitive personal information. Part B shall be produced in response to a request from the Bureau of Wage and Hour
Administration of the Department of Commerce.
EMPLOYER NAME AND ADDRESS: Enter the company's full name and address. Indicate if the company is a Subcontractor in the space below, if so list the name of the General or
Prime Contractor. Prime Contractor includes a Construction Manager at Risk or a Design-Build firm.
PROJECT NAME AND LOCATION: Enter the name and location of the Project, including the county or counties where the Project is located.
CONTRACTING AUTHORITY: Enter the name and address of the public authority responsible for maintaining prevailing wage records. This may be the Project Owner.
WEEK ENDING: Indicate month, day, and year for last day of reporting period.
PAYROLL NUMBER: Indicate first, second, third, etc. payroll filed by the company for the project.
PAGE: Indicate number of pages included in the report.
PROJECT / CONTRACT NUMBER: Indicate the Project number or Contract number determined by the public authority. If there is no number leave blank.
1. NAME AND INDIVIDUAL IDENTIFYING NUMBER OF WORKER: Enter the name and a unique number for each employee. The full name, social security number, and address may
be provided on Part B, which must be provided with each report to be considered valid. This information must be provided for all employees that perform physical labor on the Project.
Corporate officers, partners, and salaried employees are considered employees and must be paid the prevailing rate. Individual sole proprietors do not have to pay themselves
prevailing rate but must report their hours on the Project.
2. WORK CLASSIFICATION: List classification of work actually performed by employee. If unsure of work classification, consult the Ohio Department of Commerce, Wage and Hour
Bureau. Employees working more than one classification should have separate line entries for each classification. Indicate what year/level for Apprentices. Be specific when using
laborer and operator classifications; for example, Backhoe Operator or Asphalt Laborer.
3. RACE AND SEX: Provide the race and sex of each worker. This information is requested to facilitate review by the Construction Compliance Unit of the Equal Opportunity Division in
the Ohio Department of Administrative Services pursuant to Chapter 123:2 of the Ohio Administrative Code. This information is not required by Chapter 4115 of the Ohio Revised
4. HOURS WORKED - DAY AND DATE: In the first row of column 4 enter the days of the pay period. For example: S M T W TH F S. The second row is for the date that corresponds
with each day for the pay period. In the employee information section enter the number of hours worked on the prevailing wage Project and which day(s) the hours were worked.
Separate rows are labeled for (ST) straight time hours and (OT) overtime hours. All hours worked beyond 40 hours must be paid at the appropriate overtime rate.
5. TOTAL PROJECT HOURS: Total the hours entered for the pay period.
6. BASE WAGE RATE: Enter actual rate per hour paid to the employee. The overtime hourly rate is time and one-half the base rate listed in the prevailing wage schedule plus fringe
benefits at straight time rate. The prevailing wage schedule lists the base rate plus fringe benefit amounts. These amounts added together equal the total prevailing wage rate.
Employers must pay this total amount in one of three ways: (1) total rate may be paid in entirety in the base rate to the employee; in which case, the cash designation will be checked
for fringe benefits; (2) total rate may be paid as listed in prevailing wage rate schedule with total fringe amounts paid approved plans; or (3) total rate may be paid with a combination of
base rate and fringe payments to approved plans in amounts other than those listed in schedule.
7. PROJECT GROSS: Enter total gross wages earned on the Project for straight time and overtime. Project hours multiplied by base rate should equal the Project gross.
8. FRINGES: If fringe benefits are paid in the hourly base rate, indicate this by marking the cash space. If fringe benefits are paid to approved plans as listed in the prevailing wage rate
schedule, mark the space for Approved Plans. If fringe benefits are paid partially in the base rate and partially to approved plans, mark the space for Cash & Approved plans. List the
hourly amount paid to approved plans for each fringe. If payments are not made on a per-hour basis, calculate the hourly fringe credit by dividing the yearly employer contribution by
the lesser of: hours actually worked in the year (these must be documented) or 2080. Fringe benefits include: Employer's share of health insurance, life insurance, retirement plan,
bonus/profit sharing, sick pay, holiday pay, personal leave, vacation, and education/training programs.
9. TOTAL HOURS ALL JOBS: Total all hours worked during the pay period including non-prevailing wage jobs.
10. TOTAL GROSS ALL JOBS: Gross amount earned in the pay period for all hours worked.
ITEMS 11., 12., AND 13. ARE SELF-EXPLANATORY
1 2 3
F330-03v0912 If Subcontractor, provide Contractor name in space provided. Attach additional pages as necessary. For Public Records Requests, redact Social Security Numbers.
Certified Payroll Report - Part A
EMPLOYER NAME AND ADDRESS NAME OF GENERAL / PRIME CONTRACTOR PROJECT NAME AND LOCATION (COUNTY) CONTRACTING AUTHORITY (OR OWNER)
CHECK IF SUBCONTRACTOR1 WEEK ENDING PAYROLL NUMBER PAGE2 PROJECT / CONTRACT NUMBER
of
3 4
1. NAME AND INDIVIDUAL 2. WORK 3. 5. 6. 7. 8. FRINGES: CASH 9. TTL 11. 12. 13.
10. TOTAL
IDENTIFYING NUMBER (e.g., LAST CLASS- RACE TOTAL BASE PROJ HRS TAXES OTHER NET
4. HOURS WORKED - DAY AND DATE APPROVED PLANS GROSS
FOUR DIGITS OF SOCIAL IFICA- AND PROJ WAGE GROSS ALL WITH- DEDUC- WAGES
CASH AND APPROVED PLANS ALL JOBS
SECURITY NUMBER) OF WORKER TION SEX HRS RATE WAGES JOBS HELD TIONS PAID
M T W TH F S S
H&W PENS VAC APP OTHER
OT
ST
OT
ST
OT
ST
OT
ST
OT
ST
OT
ST
OT
ST
OT
ST
OT
ST
OT
ST
My signature on this form signifies that I pay, or supervise the payment of the employees shown above. I am certifying: 1) That during the pay period reported on this form, all hours
worked on this Project have been paid at the appropriate prevailing wage rate for the class of work done. 2) That the fringe benefits have been paid as indicated above. 3) That no
rebates or deductions have been or will be made, directly or indirectly from the total wages earned, other than permissable deductions as defined in Ohio Revised Code Chapter 4115.
4) That apprentices are registered with the U.S. Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training. I understand that the willful falsification of any of the above statements
may subject the Contractor or Subcontractor to civil or criminal prosecution. In addition, I have submitted the full Name, Social Security Number, and Address of each Worker on a
separate sheet (Part B) to form the entire Certified Payroll Report required by Applicable Law.
Type or Print Name and Title: Signature: Date:

1 2 3 4
F330-03v0912 If Subcontractor, provide Contractor name in space provided. Attach additional pages as necessary. Text will wrap. Text will fit to cell.
Certified Payroll Report - Part B
EMPLOYER NAME AND ADDRESS NAME OF GENERAL / PRIME CONTRACTOR PROJECT NAME AND LOCATION (COUNTY) CONTRACTING AUTHORITY (OR OWNER)
CHECK IF SUBCONTRACTOR1 WEEK ENDING PAYROLL NUMBER PAGE2 PROJECT / CONTRACT NUMBER
of
FULL NAME OF WORKER SOCIAL SECURITY NUMBER3 STREET ADDRESS CITY, STATE AND ZIP CODE
1 2 3
F330-03v0912 If Subcontractor, provide Contractor name in space provided. Attach additional pages as necessary. For Public Records Requests, redact Social Security Numbers.
Document 00 71 00 - Contracting Definitions (General Contracting Project)
Exhibit D
Acceptable Component A component listed in the Specifications after the Basis of Design Component.
Addenda or Addendum Written or graphic instrument issued prior to the bid opening which modifies or
interprets the proposed Contract Documents by additions, deletions, clarifications, or
corrections. Addenda become part of the Contract Documents when the Agreement
is executed.
A/E See “Architect/Engineer.”
Agreement The form furnished by the Contracting Authority (including all of its exhibits) that,
when completed and signed by the Contractor and Contracting Authority evidences
entry into the Contract.
Allowance A sum stipulated in the Contract Documents for a defined scope of the Work that
may not be completely defined at the time of bidding. Allowance amounts do not
include the Contractor’s Fee on account of the associated Work.
Alternate A change in the proposed Project scope, which may include but is not limited to
alternate materials or methods of construction, and an amount stated on the Bid form
to be added to or deducted from the Base Bid if the corresponding Alternate is
incorporated into the Contract.
Alternative Dispute Resolution A voluntary and non-binding process for the administrative review, consideration,
and attempted settlement of a dispute, without resort to judicial process, including
but not limited to partnering, negotiation, mediation, impartial fact-finding, dispute
review board, and mini-trials, but shall not include arbitration.
Applicable Law All federal, state, and local codes, statutes, ordinances, and regulations that apply to
the performance of the Work or the A/E’s Services on the Project.
Architect/Engineer The Person responsible for providing professional design services and construction
contract administration for the Project as provided in the Contract Documents. The
A/E shall be a (1) registered architect holding a license and certificate of
authorization issued by the Ohio Architects Board pursuant to ORC Chapter 4703,
(2) landscape architect holding a license and certificate of authorization issued by the
Ohio Landscape Architects Board pursuant to ORC Chapter 4703, or (3) professional
engineer or professional surveyor holding a license and certificate of authorization
issued by the Ohio Engineers and Surveyors Board pursuant to ORC Chapter 4733.
As-Built Documents Documents, including but not limited to Drawings, Addenda, Specifications,
executed Change Orders, and other elements of the Contract Documents which the
Contractor annotates and otherwise modifies to indicate changes made during the
construction process, the location of concealed and buried items, and other
information useful to the Owner throughout the life of the completed Project.
Base Bid The amount stated in a Bid as the sum for which the Bidder offers to perform the
Work in a particular trade or other category, which is described in the Contract
Documents, excluding Alternates.
Basis of Design A document that records the concepts, calculations, decisions, and product selections
used to meet the Owner’s Project Requirements and to satisfy applicable regulatory
requirements, standards, and guidelines. The document includes both narrative
descriptions and lists of individual items that support the design process.
Basis of Design Component A component listed first in the Specifications.
Bid A written proposal to perform a Contract, submitted on a completed Bid Form,
accompanied by other required documents. The term Bid includes a proposal that has
been digitally signed, encrypted, and submitted through the State’s electronic
bidding application pursuant to OAC Section 153:1-8-01.
M160-00 71 00 2014 Edition (2016-MAR) Page 1 of 9

Document 00 71 00 Contracting Definitions (General Contracting Project)
Bidder A Person that submitted a Bid.
BIM See “Building Information Model.”
Bid Form A form furnished by the Contracting Authority with the proposed Contract
Documents that is to be completed, signed, and submitted containing the Bidder's
Bid.
Bid Guaranty A bid bond or other instrument of security authorized by ORC Section 153.54
submitted with the Bid to provide assurance that the Bidder will execute the
Agreement.
Bond A performance and payment bond in the format specified by ORC Section 153.57
submitted by the Contractor to provide assurance that the Contractor will perform the
Work of the Contract, including making required payments to Subcontractors and
Materials Suppliers.
Building Information Model A digital representation of physical and functional characteristics of a facility; a
shared knowledge resource for information about a facility forming a reliable basis
for decisions during its life-cycle, which is defined as existing from earliest
conception to demolition; electronic files used to design and coordinate the Project;
and may be used to describe a single model or multiple models used in the aggregate.
Certificate of
Contract Completion A form used to document that the Contractor’s achievement of Contract Completion.
This form may also be used to document partial Contract Completion.
Certificate of
Substantial Completion A form used to document (1) that the Contractor has achieved Substantial
Completion of the Work or a designated portion of the Work for which the
Contracting Authority and the Owner have agreed to take Partial Occupancy, and
(2) the date on which the associated Substantial Completion of the Work was
achieved.
Change Directive A written document prepared by the A/E and executed by the Contracting Authority
that directs a change in the Work.
Change Order A document recommended by the A/E and executed by the Contracting Authority
and the Contractor that modifies the Contract.
Claim A demand or assertion, initiated by written notice, certified by one of the parties to
the Contract seeking, as a matter of right, adjustment or interpretation of Contract
terms, payment of money, extension of time, or other relief with respect to the terms
of the Contract.
Claim Affidavit A sworn document used in conjunction with filing a lien, which contains a claim on
the funds that are due to a Contractor, in favor of a Person supplying labor, materials,
or services for the value of labor, materials, or services supplied.
Combined Bid A Bid that combines bid items for separate Contracts stated on the Bid Form.
Commission See “Ohio Facilities Construction Commission.”
Commissioning Agent The Person identified by the Contracting Authority who leads, plans, schedules, and
coordinates the commissioning team to implement the Commissioning Process for
the Project.
Commissioning Plan A document that outlines the organization, schedule, allocation of resources, and
documentation requirements of the Commissioning Process.
Commissioning Process A quality-focused process for enhancing the delivery of a project. The process
focuses on verifying and documenting that the facility and all of its systems are
planned, designed, installed, tested, operated, and maintained to meet the Owner’s
Project Requirements.

Commissioning Report A document that records the activities and results of the Commissioning Process.
The Commissioning Report is developed from the final Commissioning Plan with its
attached appendices.
Conformed Documents Contract Documents with all Addenda items and accepted Alternates incorporated by
the A/E, published, and issued to a successful Bidder for its use during performance
of the Contract. The Conformed Documents are furnished solely for the Contractor’s
convenience. In the event of any conflict between the Contract Documents modified
by Addenda and the Conformed Documents, the Contract Documents take
precedence.
Construction Budget The amount identified in the Agreement as adjusted by the Owner and Contracting
Authority.
Construction Cost The sum of the Contract Cost amounts for a phase of the Project.
Construction Progress Schedule The critical path schedule for performance of the Contract; showing the time for
completing the Work within the Contract Times; the planned sequence for
performing the various components of the Work; the interrelationship between the
activities of the Contractor, A/E, Contracting Authority, and Owner; and the
Contractor’s resource and cost loading information; as periodically updated during
the performance of the Work.
Contract The state of legal obligation entered into by the State and the Contractor, whereby
they have agreed to an exchange of certain acts, materials, equipment, and services
for certain monetary consideration, under all terms and conditions specified in the
Contract Documents, which shall remain in full force and effect until such time as all
obligations under the Contract have been lawfully and completely discharged, or the
Contract is terminated under other conditions specified in the Contract Documents.
Contract Completion The schedule Milestone in the progress of any Phase when the Work is completed in
accordance with the terms of the Contract Documents and Contractor has satisfied all
of its other obligations under the Contract Documents, including but not limited to
(1) all governmental authorities have given final, written approval of the Work, (2) a
final unconditional certificate of occupancy has been granted and issued to the
Owner by the appropriate governmental authorities, (3) the Contractor's Work is
100 percent complete, and (4) all Punch List items have been completed or corrected,
and (5) the Contractor has complied with conditions precedent to final payment and
release of retained funds.
Contract Documents Collectively, the documents that constitute the substance of the Contract including
but not limited to Drawings, Specifications, Addenda if any, General Conditions,
Supplementary Conditions if any, Bid Form, Wage Rates; and the executed
Agreement, Bid Guaranty and Contract Bond, and Change Orders if any.
Contract Sum The Contract Sum is the Contractor’s entire compensation for the Contractor’s
proper, timely, and complete performance of the Work and is subject to adjustment
as provided in the Contract.
Contract Times The periods stipulated in the Agreement for the achievement of associated
Milestones, in consecutive days, beginning on the date established by the Notice to
Proceed, including adjustments authorized by executed Change Orders.
Contracting Authority The party identified in the Agreement, which may be the Ohio Facilities
Construction Commission; an agency of the state of Ohio; an Institution of Higher
Education or division thereof; a School District Board; or the legislative body of a
political subdivision.
Contractor A firm, which is party to the Contract for the performance of Work on the Project in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
Contractor’s Documents All Project-related documents, including those in electronic form, prepared by the
Contractor and its Subcontractors.

Contractor’s Fee The portion of the Contract Sum attributable to the aggregate of the Contractor’s
profit and home-office overhead related to the Contractor’s proper, timely, and
complete performance of the Work.
Contractor Payment Request The form furnished by the Commission that is to be used by the Contractor in
requesting payments and which, when signed by the Contractor, shall serve as an
affidavit that payments requested are in proportion to the Work completed as shown
on the Schedule of Values.
Contractor’s Punch List A document prepared by the Contractor that consists of a list of items of Work to be
completed or corrected by the Contactor as a condition precedent to Contract
Completion.
Coordination Drawings Drawings and Electronic Files prepared by the Contractor to demonstrate how
multiple-system and interdisciplinary work will be coordinated. Clash reports
generated by BIM authoring software may be included in the Coordination Drawing
submittals if applicable.
Correction Period A period of one year commencing on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work
or a designated portion of the Work which the Contracting Authority and Owner
have agreed to take Partial Occupancy.
CxA See “Commissioning Agent.”
Date of Commencement The date established in a Notice to Proceed issued by the Contracting Authority to
the Contractor to mark the start of the Work and the beginning of the running of the
Contract Times.
day A calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to midnight, unless otherwise
expressly specified to mean a business day.
Defective Work Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents; or does not meet the
requirements of any applicable statute, rule or regulation, inspection, reference
standard, test or approval; or has been damaged prior to the A/E's recommendation
of final payment, unless responsibility for the protection thereof has been expressly
assumed by the Owner; or that is not free from defects in workmanship, materials or
equipment during the period of any warranty or guarantee.
Differing Site Condition Either (1) a subsurface or otherwise concealed physical condition encountered at the
Site that differs materially from the conditions indicated in the Contract Documents
or (2) an unknown physical condition of an unusual nature encountered at the Site
that differs materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized
as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract
Documents.
Dispute Review Board A form of Alternative Dispute Resolution that is typically comprised of three
members, selected jointly by the Contractor and the Contracting Authority, to
monitor the progress of construction and provide recommended resolutions to
disputes that are brought before them.
Drawings Graphic portions of the Contract Documents, showing the design, type of
construction, location, dimension, and character of the Work to be provided by the
Contractor, which generally includes plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules,
diagrams, notes, and text.
Electronic File Information maintained in a computer system or format that is intended to facilitate a
Person’s use and manipulation of the information including but not limited to Word,
Excel, PDF, Primavera, CAD, and BIM files all in their native format.
Enclosure, Permanent The condition in which the permanent exterior walls and roofs are in place, insulated
and weathertight, and permanent windows and entrances are in place.
Enclosure, Temporary The condition in which the permanent exterior walls and roofs are in place, insulated
and weathertight, and windows and entrances are provided with suitable temporary
enclosures.

Estimated Construction Cost The sum of the Estimated Contract Cost amounts published in the Solicitation, as
modified by Addenda, for a phase of the Project.
Estimated Contract Cost The estimated amount for the Contract published in the Solicitation, including the
Base Bid estimate and the estimates of selected Alternates, if any, as modified by
Addenda.
Extra Materials Materials required by the Contract Documents that are not incorporated into the
Project but are given to the Owner to be used for future maintenance or repairs.
Final Inspection The final review of the Work of the Contractor by the A/E to determine whether
issuance of the Certificate of Contract Completion is appropriate.
furnish Supply and deliver to the Site, or other specified location, ready for installation.
General Conditions The State’s Standard General Conditions currently in effect, which may be modified
by the Commission from time to time.
General Conditions Costs General Conditions Costs include only the Contractor’s costs to provide the general
conditions Work including without limitation the costs of all of the following Site-
related items: scheduling and coordinating the Work. telephone, telephone charges,
facsimile, telegrams, postage, photos, photocopying, hand tools, simple scaffolds
(one level high), tool breakage, tool repairs, tool replacement, tool blades, tool bits,
and pre-approved travel, lodging, and parking costs. General Conditions Costs also
include (1) Bond premiums and (2) premiums for builder’s risk insurance if the
Contractor purchases the builder’s risk policy for the Project.
Hazardous Materials Any material, substance, pollutant, or contaminant that is defined, regulated,
referenced, or classified in the Comprehensive Environmental Response,
Compensation and Liability Act, Federal Water Pollution Control Act, the Resource
Conservation and Recovery Act, Clean Air Act, Hazardous Materials Transportation
Uniform Safety Act, Toxic Substances Control Act, or any other Applicable Law
relating to any hazardous, toxic, or dangerous waste, substance, or material. Any
substance or material that, after release into the environment or upon exposure,
ingestion, inhalation, or assimilation, either directly from the environment or directly
by ingestion through food chains, will, or may reasonably be anticipated to, cause
death, disease, behavior abnormalities, cancer or genetic abnormalities and
specifically includes but is not limited to asbestos, polychlorinated biphenyls
(“PCBs”), radioactive materials, including radon and naturally occurring radio
nuclides, natural gas, natural gas liquids, liquefied natural gas, synthetic gas, oil,
petroleum and petroleum-based derivatives and urea formaldehyde.
Indemnified Parties The State, Contracting Authority, Owner, A/E, other Separate Consultants, and their
respective officials, officers, consultants, agents, representatives, and employees, in
both individual and official capacities.
install Put into use or place in final position, complete and ready for intended service or use.
Institutional Designee The party identified in the Agreement empowered with a level of authority similar to
the Executive Director of the Commission, which may be the university architect or
engineer, director of capital facilities, or an institution vice president.
Institution of Higher Education Any state of Ohio university or college, community college, state of Ohio
community college, technical college, university branch, community college district,
technical college district, university branch district, and the applicable board of
trustees or, in the case of a university branch district, any other managing authority.
Liquidated Damages A sum established in the Contract Documents, pursuant to the statutory delay
forfeiture authorized under ORC Section 153.19, to be paid to the Owner due to the
Contractor’s failure to complete the Work within the Contract Time for achievement
of Substantial Completion, or any applicable portion of the Work on or prior to any
Milestone date stated on the Agreement.
Material Supplier A Person under a contract with the Contractor to furnish materials or supplies in
furtherance of the Work, including all such Persons in any tier. Material Supplier

does not include any Separate Contractor unless expressly assigned in writing to the
Contractor by the Owner and accepted by the Contractor.
mediation A voluntary process in which a neutral third party meets with the parties who have a
disagreement or dispute and attempts to facilitate a mutually satisfactory resolution.
Milestone A principal event specified in the Contract relating to an intermediate completion
date or time prior to and including Substantial Completion of all Work.
Modification A (1) written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) Change Order,
(3) Change Directive, or (4) an order for a minor change in the Work.
negotiation A form of Alternative Dispute Resolution in which all parties involved are
represented by those invested with the authority to agree to a determination of an
adjustment in the Contract Sum, Contract Times, or both.
Neutral Facilitator An nonpartisan third-party without decision-making authority who is engaged to
assist the Project’s key stakeholders in developing cooperative relationships,
achieving project objectives, avoiding or minimizing disputes, and nurturing a more-
collaborative ethic characterized by trust, cooperation and teamwork.
Notice of Commencement A notice prepared by the Contracting Authority identifying the Project, the
Contractors, the Surety for each Contractor, and the name of the Contracting
Authority’s representative upon whom a Claim Affidavit may be served.
Notice of Intent to Award A written notice provided by the Contracting Authority to the apparent successful
Bidder stating that upon satisfactory compliance with all conditions precedent for
execution of a Contract within the time specified, the Contracting Authority intends
to execute a Contract with the Bidder.
Notice to Proceed A written notice provided by the Contracting Authority authorizing the Contractor to
proceed with the Work and establishing the dates for commencement and completion
of the Work.
OAC Ohio Administrative Code
Ohio Facilities
Construction Commission The authorized contracting agent for public improvement projects in accordance with
ORC Chapters 123 and 153, acting by and through its Executive Director.
ORC Ohio Revised Code
Owner The state of Ohio agency, Institution of Higher Education or division thereof, School
District Board, or other instrumentality for whom the Project is being constructed.
Owner’s Project Requirements A written document that details the functional requirements of the Project and the
expectations of how it will be used and operated. These include project goals,
measureable performance criteria, cost considerations, benchmarks, success criteria,
and supporting information.
Partial Occupancy The condition that occurs when the Owner occupies or uses a portion of the Project
prior to Contract Completion, partial occupancy is approved by authorities having
jurisdiction, and items of Work cannot be completed until a subsequent date.
partnering A voluntary dispute prevention process involving team building activities to help
define common goals, improve communication, and foster a problem solving attitude
among a group of contracting parties that must work together throughout Contract
performance to be less adversarial and more cooperative.
Person An individual, corporation, business trust, estate, partnership, association, or other
public or private entity.
Phase A separation in the Work of the Project by sequence or time intervals, which may
include separate contractors for each Phase.
Plan Holder A prospective Bidder that received a set of Contract Documents prior to the bid
opening.

Product Data Manufacturer’s standard illustrations, schedules, diagrams, performance charts,
instructions, and brochures that illustrate physical appearance, size, and other
characteristics of materials and equipment.
Project The public improvement, of which the Work performed under the Contract
Documents may be the whole or a part.
Project Manager A permanent employee of the Contracting Authority assigned to the Project and
authorized to perform specific responsibilities.
Project Manual That part of Construction Documents which consists of bound volume(s) of
primarily written material which generally contain Division 00 - “Procurement and
Contracting Requirements,” and Divisions 01 through 49 - “Specifications,” and
other documents pertaining to the Project.
Proposal The offer of a Contractor to perform the Work set forth in a Proposal Request.
Proposal Request A document issued after execution of the Contract requesting a Proposal from the
Contractor(s), which may initiate a Change Order to modify the Contract.
provide Furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use.
Punch List A document listing items of Work requiring correction or completion by the
Contractor as a condition precedent to Contract Completion.
Record Documents Electronic files and printed documents of all nature prepared by the A/E, which
incorporate the information shown on the Contractor’s As-Built Documents. They
consist of the “Record Drawings” and “Record Project Manual,” Certificate of
Substantial Completion, Certificate of Contract Completion (as complete),
Contractor’s Warranty, Manufacturers’ Warrantees, certificate(s) of occupancy,
approved shop drawings and other action submittals, Change Directives, Proposal
Requests, Requests for Interpretation, Addenda, Change Orders, Balancing Reports,
and the final version of the approved Construction Progress Schedule.
Record Drawings The Drawings, which have been revised by the A/E to show the changes made
during the construction process, conformed to represent the Work as executed by the
Contractor.
Record Model The Building Information Model, which has been revised by the A/E to show the
changes made during the construction process, conformed to represent the Work as
executed by the Contractor.
Record Project Manual The Project Manual of the Contract Documents, which has been revised by the A/E
to show the changes made during the construction process, based on the As-Built
Project Manual furnished by the Contractor.
Request for Change Order A written notice from the Contractor accompanied by a Proposal for a change in the
Work.
Request for Interpretation A written request to the A/E seeking an interpretation or clarification of the Contract
Documents.
RFI See “Request for Interpretation.”
Samples Physical examples, color selection items, field samples, and mock-ups furnished by
the Contractor to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of products,
materials, equipment, or workmanship and establish criteria by which the Work shall
be judged.
Schedule of Values A full, accurate, and detailed statement furnished by the Contractor reflecting a
defined breakdown of the Contract Sum.
School District A local, exempted village, or city school district as defined in ORC Chapter 3311, or
a joint vocational school established pursuant to ORC Section 3311.18, performing
essential governmental functions of state government pursuant to ORC Sections
3318.01 to 3318.20.

School District Board The board of education of a School District.
Separate Consultant A Person engaged by the Owner or Contracting Authority to provide Project-related
professional services other than the services under this Contract. The term includes
the Separate Consultant’s authorized representatives, successors, assigns, and
subconsultants regardless of tier.
Separate Contract The contract between the Owner or Contracting Authority and a Separate Consultant
or a Separate Contractor.
Separate Contractor A Person under contract with the Owner or Contracting Authority to provide Project-
related work other than the Work under this Contract. The term includes the Separate
Contractor’s authorized representatives, successors, assigns, and subcontractors
regardless of tier.
Shop Drawings Drawings, diagrams, illustrations, and schedules specifically prepared for the Project
provided by the Contractor or a Subcontractor to illustrate some portion of the Work.
Shop Drawings are not Contract Documents. Shop Drawings on equipment shall
include a written statement from the manufacturer of the equipment certifying the
equipment is in compliance with the Contract Documents.
Site The location designated for the Project.
Specifications Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of detailed written
administrative, procedural, and technical requirements, included in Divisions 01
through 49, for the construction of the Work, whether physically on the Drawings or
bound in separate volumes, including identification of acceptable materials, methods,
equipment, quality, and workmanship.
Stage A distinct period in the life cycle of a facility from concept through construction, to
use and deconstruction or demolition. Typical Stages include Program Verification,
Schematic Design, Design Development, Construction Documents, Bidding and
Award stages; and the Construction Stage, which includes Construction and Closeout
activities.
Standard Requirements The brief name of the “State of Ohio Standard Requirements for Public Facility
Construction,” including but not limited to General Conditions, and other
Division 00 Documents and Division 01 Sections; currently in effect, which the
Commission may modify from time to time.
State The government of Ohio, including any organized body, office, or agency
established by the laws of this state for the exercise of any function of state
government, any state institution of higher education as defined in ORC Section
3345.011, or any School District Board as defined in ORC Section 3318.01.
Subcontract Any contract or agreement between the Contractor and a Subcontractor for
performance of a portion of the Work.
Subcontract Form The State of Ohio Subcontract Form prescribed by OAC Section 153:1-3-02 and
required for use with the General Contracting method of project delivery.
Subcontractor A Person who undertakes to perform any part of the Work on the Project under a
contract with a Contractor or with any Person other than the State, including all such
Persons in any tier. The term "Subcontractor" includes Material Suppliers, but does
not include any Separate Contractor unless expressly assigned in writing to the
Contractor by the Owner and accepted by the Contractor.
Substantial Completion The stage in the progress of the Work when the Work (or designated portion of the
Work for which the Contracting Authority and Owner have agreed to take Partial
Occupancy) is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract that the Owner
can utilize the Work for its intended use, as determined by the A/E. The issuance of a
certificate of occupancy or partial certificate of occupancy (if applicable) is a
condition precedent to the achievement of Substantial Completion.
Substantially Complete See “Substantial Completion.”

Substitution An article, device, material, equipment, form of construction, or other item, proposed
by a prospective Bidder prior to the bid opening and approved by the A/E by
Addendum, for incorporation or use in the Work as being functionally and
qualitatively equivalent to essential attributes of a Basis of Design or Acceptable
Component specified in the proposed Contract Documents.
Supplementary Conditions Amendments to the General Conditions, issued as a separate document, which
describe conditions of the Contract unique to a particular Owner or Project, which
may include provisions regarding the assignment of responsibility for refuse
removal, safety and security precautions and programs, temporary Project facilities
and utilities, weather and fire protection, scaffolding and equipment, materials and
services to be used commonly by the Contractor and Subcontractors and requiring
the Contractor to provide assistance in the utilization of any applicable equipment
system, preparation of operation and maintenance manuals, and training of Owner
personnel for operation and maintenance of the Project. The General Conditions
shall not be superseded or amended by Drawings and Specifications, unless so
provided in Supplementary Conditions prepared by the Contracting Authority and
approved by the Commission.
Supplementary Instructions Amendments to the Instructions to Bidders, issued as a separate document, which
describe instructions unique to a particular Owner or Project. The Instructions to
Bidders shall not be superseded or amended by Drawings and Specifications, unless
so provided in Supplementary Instructions prepared by the Contracting Authority
and approved by the Commission.
Surety A Person providing a Bid Guaranty or a Bond to a Bidder or a Contractor, as
applicable, to indemnify the State against all direct and consequential damages
suffered by failure of the Bidder to execute the Contract, or of the Contractor to
perform the Contract and to pay all lawful claims of Subcontractors, Material
Suppliers and laborers, as applicable.
Systems Manual A system focused composite document that includes the operation manual,
maintenance manual, and additional information of use to the Owner after they begin
using the facility.
Unit Price The cost of providing a unit of Work including labor, materials, services, and
associated expenses. Unit Prices do not include the Contractor’s Fee on account of
the associated Unit Price Work.
Work The labor, materials, equipment, and services, individually or collectively which are
required by the Contract Documents, to be performed or provided by the Contractor
for the Project. The furnishing of all material, labor, detailing, layout, supplies,
plants, tools, scaffolding, transportation, temporary construction, superintendence,
demolition, and all other services, facilities and items reasonably necessary for the
full and proper performance and completion of the requirements of the Project as set
forth in the Contract Documents, and items reasonably inferable therefrom and
consistent therewith for the proper execution and completion of the construction and
other services required by the Contract Documents, whether provided or to be
provided by the Contractor or a Subcontractor, or any other entity for whom the
Contractor is responsible, and whether or not performed or located on or off of the
Site.
END OF DOCUMENT

Document 00 72 13 - General Conditions (General Contracting Project)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ARTICLE 1 - CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES ..........................................1
ARTICLE 2 - STATE’S RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES ................................5
ARTICLE 3 - A/E’S RESPONSIBILITIES ..............................................................6
ARTICLE 4 - SUBCONTRACTORS ......................................................................7
ARTICLE 5 - PRECONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES ................................................9
ARTICLE 6 - CONSTRUCTION AND CLOSEOUT .............................................10
ARTICLE 7 - MODIFICATIONS ...........................................................................29
ARTICLE 8 - DISPUTE RESOLUTION ...............................................................36
ARTICLE 9 - COMPENSATION AND PAYMENT ...............................................42
ARTICLE 10 - BONDS, INSURANCE, AND INDEMNIFICATION ......................46
ARTICLE 11 - SUSPENSION AND TERMINATION ...........................................52
ARTICLE 12 - GENERAL PROVISIONS .............................................................55
KEYWORD INDEX ...............................................................................................59
ARTICLE 1 - CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES

1.1 Nondiscrimination
1.1.1 The Contractor shall comply with Applicable Law regarding equal employment opportunity, including ORC
Section 153.59 and all Executive Orders issued by the Governor of the state of Ohio.
1.1.1.1 As required under ORC Section 153.59, the Contractor agrees to both of the following:
.1 “in the hiring of employees for the performance of work under the contract or any subcontract, no
contractor, subcontractor, or any person acting on a contractor’s or subcontractor’s behalf, by reason of
race, creed, sex, disability or military status as defined in section 4112.01 of the Revised Code, or color,
shall discriminate against any citizen of the state in the employment of labor or workers who is qualified
and available to perform the work to which the employment relates; and”
.2 “no contractor, subcontractor, or any person on a contractor’s or subcontractor’s behalf, in any manner,
shall discriminate against or intimidate any employee hired for the performance of work under the contract
on account of race, creed, sex, disability or military status as defined in section 4112.01 of the Revised
Code, or color.”
1.1.1.2 The Contractor shall cooperate fully with the State’s Equal Opportunity Coordinator (“EOC”), with any
other official or agency of the state or federal government that seeks to eliminate unlawful employment
discrimination, and with all other state and federal efforts to assure equal employment practices under the Contract.
1.1.1.3 In the event the Contractor fails to comply with these nondiscrimination clauses, the Contracting Authority
shall deduct from the amount payable to the Contractor a forfeiture of the statutory penalty pursuant to ORC 153.60
for each person who is discriminated against or intimidated in violation of this Section 1.1.1.
1.1.1.4 The Contract may be terminated or suspended in whole or in part by the Contracting Authority and all
money to become due hereunder may be forfeited in the event of a subsequent violation of this Section 1.1.1.
1.1.2 Hiring Under State Public Improvement Contracts.
1.1.2.1 Any provision of a hiring hall contract or agreement which obligates the Contractor to hire, if available, only
employees referred to the Contractor by a labor organization shall be void as against public policy and
unenforceable with respect to employment under any public improvement contract unless at the date of execution of
the hiring hall contract or agreement, or within 30 days thereafter, the labor organization has procedures in effect for
referring qualified employees for hire without regard to race, color, religion, national origin, military status as
defined in ORC Section 4112.01, or ancestry and unless the labor organization includes in its apprentice and

Document 00 72 13 General Conditions (General Contracting Project)
journeyperson’s membership, or otherwise has available for job referral without discrimination, qualified
employees, both whites and non-whites (including African-Americans).
1.1.3 Affirmative Action.
1.1.3.1 The Contractor and Subcontractors shall comply with the State’s Equal Employment Opportunity
requirements described under OAC Sections 123:2-3 through 123:2-9 that include, without limitation, the
requirements described under this Section 1.1.3.
1.1.3.2 The Contractor shall demonstrate its good faith efforts to comply with the utilization goals currently
established for minority and women employees and submit documentation to the EOC.
1.1.3.3 By the 10th day of each month, the Contractor and Subcontractors shall submit to the EOC via the internet a
completed Ohio Construction Contract Information Report - Input Form 29 (I-29) for the preceding month. The
form shall be submitted through the Ohio Business Gateway: http://business.ohio.gov/efiling/.
1.2 Prevailing Wages

1.2.1 The Contractor shall comply with the prevailing wage requirements described under ORC Chapter 4115 that
include, without limitation, the requirements described under this Section 1.2.
1.2.2 If the Project is subject to payment of prevailing wage rates, the Contractor shall:
1.2.2.1 pay to laborers and mechanics performing Work on the Project the prevailing wage rates of the Project
locality, as determined by the Ohio Department of Commerce, Wage and Hour Bureau;
1.2.2.2 post in a prominent place readily accessible by all workers on the Site, a legible listing of the current
classifications of laborers, workers, and mechanics employed under this Contract;
1.2.2.3 ensure that the rates posted are current and remain posted in legible condition during the period of the
Contract; and
1.2.2.4 not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Sum on account of an increase in prevailing wage rates, except
as otherwise provided by Applicable Law.
1.2.3 The Contractor may access the Ohio Department of Commerce, Wage & Hour Bureau at its website,
http://198.234.41.198/w3/webwh.nsf/pages/PrevailingWageBid, to obtain the current wage rates.
1.3 Royalties and Patents

1.3.1 The Contractor shall pay all royalties, license fees, and assume all costs incident to the use, in the performance of
the Work or the incorporation in the Work, of any invention, design, process, product, or device that is the subject of
patent rights or copyrights held by others.
1.3.2 If the Contractor has reason to believe that use of the specified item is subject to patent or copyright protection, the
Contractor shall immediately notify the Contracting Authority.
1.4 Assignment of Antitrust Claims

1.4.1 By signing the Agreement, the Contractor assigns, conveys and transfers to the Contracting Authority any right,
title, and interest to any claims or causes of action it may have or acquire under state or federal antitrust laws relating to
any goods, products, or services purchased, procured, or rendered to the State pursuant to the Contract.
1.5 Use of Domestic Steel

1.5.1 The Contractor is required by law to supply domestically produced steel products used for load bearing structural
purposes on all projects funded in whole or in part with State funds.
1.5.2 The Contractor and Subcontractors shall comply with ORC Section 153.011 regarding the use of domestically
produced steel products, and furnish the certifications required by Section 6.20.8. Copies of ORC Section 153.011 may
be obtained from the Ohio Facilities Construction Commission.
1.6 Drug Free Safety Program Participation

1.6.1 Throughout the performance of the Work, the Contractor shall be enrolled in and remain in good standing in the
Ohio Bureau of Workers’ Compensation (“OBWC”) Drug-Free Safety Program (“DFSP”) or a comparable program
approved by the OBWC that meets the requirements specified in ORC Section 153.03 (“OBWC-approved DFSP”).

1.6.2 As required under ORC Section 153.03(E):
1.6.2.1 “Each contractor shall require all subcontractors with whom the contractor is in contract for the public
improvement to be enrolled in and be in good standing in the Bureau of Workers’ Compensation’s Drug-Free
Workplace Program or a comparable program approved by the Bureau that meets the requirements specified in
section 153.03 of the Revised Code prior to a subcontractor providing labor at the project site of the public
improvement.”
1.6.2.2 “Each subcontractor shall require all lower-tier subcontractors with whom the subcontractor is in contract for
the public improvement to be enrolled in and be in good standing in the Bureau of Workers’ Compensation’s Drug-
Free Workplace Program or a comparable program approved by the Bureau that meets the requirements specified in
section 153.03 of the Revised Code prior to a lower-tier subcontractor providing labor at the project site of the
public improvement.”
1.6.2.3 “Failure of a contractor to require a subcontractor to be enrolled in and be in good standing in the Bureau of
Workers’ Compensation’s Drug-Free Workplace Program or a comparable program approved by the Bureau that
meets the requirements specified in section 153.03 of the Revised Code prior to the time that the subcontractor
provides labor at the project site will result in the contractor being found in breach of the contract and that breach
shall be used in the responsibility analysis of that contractor or the subcontractor who was not enrolled in a program
for future contracts with the State for 5 years after the date of the breach.”
1.6.2.4 “Failure of a subcontractor to require a lower-tier subcontractor to be enrolled in and be in good standing in
the Bureau of Workers’ Compensation’s Drug-Free Workplace Program or a comparable program approved by the
Bureau that meets the requirements specified in section 153.03 of the Revised Code prior to the time that the lower-
tier subcontractor provides labor at the project site will result in the subcontractor being found in breach of the
contract and that breach shall be used in the responsibility analysis of that subcontractor or the lower-tier
subcontractor who was not enrolled in a program for future contracts with the State for 5 years after the date of the
breach.”
1.6.3 Prior to authorizing a Subcontractor to commence Work on the Site, the Contractor shall obtain the Contracting
Authority’s approval, and shall also submit written confirmation of the Subcontractor’s enrollment on the
Subcontractor and Material Supplier Declaration form to the A/E.
1.6.4 In addition to OBWC-approved DFSP Basic requirements, the Contractor, each Subcontractor, and each Separate
Contractor that provides labor on the Site shall participate in a pool that performs random drug testing of at least
5 percent of its employees who perform labor on the Site. The random drug testing percentage shall also include the on-
site supervisors of the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Separate Contractors. Basic random drug testing shall otherwise
comply with the same testing guidelines and criteria as required for OBWC-approved advanced testing. The Contractor
and Subcontractor shall provide evidence of required testing to the Contracting Authority upon request.
1.7 Use of the State’s Web-based Project Management Software

1.7.1 If the Contracting Authority decides, in its sole discretion, to utilize the State’s web-based project management
software for the Project, the Contractor shall use such software for all compatible services required under this Contract.
1.7.2 All costs for the Contractor’s use of the State’s web-based project management software for the Project shall be
included in the Contract Sum. If the Contractor is unfamiliar with the proper use of such software, the Contractor shall
provide its employees for training without additional compensation.
1.8 EDGE Participation and Reporting

1.8.1 The Contractor shall participate in the “Encouraging Diversity, Growth and Equity” (“EDGE”) Program by
subcontracting with, and using one or more, businesses certified as an EDGE Business Enterprise (“EDGE-certified
Business”) by the EOC.
1.8.1.1 If the Contractor is an EDGE-certified Business, the Contractor may include its own compensation under this
Contract in the reporting.
1.8.1.2 The amount of EDGE participation cannot exceed 100 percent of the Contract Sum.
1.8.1.3 The Contractor shall include in the reporting only those expenditures to EDGE-certified Businesses that
perform a commercially useful function as described in OAC Section 123:2-16-15.
1.8.2 The Contractor shall provide an EDGE Participation Report with each Contractor Payment Request.

1.8.2.1 The Contractor shall provide status reports, produced by the Contractor and each applicable EDGE-certified
Business for the Contract, indicating:
.1 the name of each EDGE-certified Business;
.2 the federal tax identification number of each EDGE-certified Business;
.3 the date of the EDGE-certified Business contract, Subcontract, or purchase order;
.4 the projected and actual start and end dates of the EDGE-certified Business contract, Subcontract, or
purchase order;
.5 the original amount of the EDGE-certified Business contract, Subcontract, or purchase order with the
Contractor;
.6 the current amount of the EDGE-certified Business contract, Subcontract, or purchase order;
.7 the amount invoiced to date;
.8 the amount paid to date;
.9 the status of the EDGE-certified Business contract, Subcontract, or purchase order (active, complete, or
void); and
.10 a statement describing any substantive product or performance deficiencies.
1.8.2.2 The Contractor shall provide reports for each EDGE-certified Business; however, the reports may be
consolidated and submitted as one document.
1.8.3 The Contractor shall provide an EDGE Participation Final Report simultaneously with its final Contractor Payment
Request.
1.8.3.1 The Contractor and each EDGE-certified Business shall provide in the report certification that the submitted
document is a true and accurate accounting of the original contract amount paid to, and received by, each EDGE-
certified Business.
1.8.4 The Contractor shall provide the EDGE Participation Reports in detail and form acceptable to the Contracting
Authority.
1.8.4.1 Failure to timely submit EDGE Participation Reports may result in withholding payment in accordance with
Section 9.8.
1.8.5 If the Project is administered using the State’s web-based project management software, the Contractor shall
submit its EDGE Participation Reports, using the “Contractor Pay Request” (Agency/Higher Education) or
“Applications for Payment” (School Facilities) business process.
1.8.6 The Contractor shall cooperate fully with requests for additional EDGE information and documentation from the
EOC or Contracting Authority.
1.9 Owner Work Rules

1.9.1 The Contractor shall consult with the Owner to obtain full knowledge of the Owner’s rules, regulations, or
requirements affecting the Project.
1.10 Emergency
1.10.1 In the event of an emergency affecting the safety of the Project, other property, or individuals, the Contractor,
without special instruction or authorization, shall act to prevent the threatened damage, injury, or loss.
1.10.2 If the Contractor believes that it is entitled to an adjustment of the Contract Sum or Contract Times, or both, on
account of its actions in response to an emergency, the Contractor may request a Modification by giving written notice
under Section 7.3.2.
1.11 Contractor’s Standard of Care

1.11.1 The Contractor shall perform the Work in a workmanlike manner, consistent with the standards of skill and care
exercised by entities licensed to perform (where required under Applicable Law) and regularly performing comparable
work in the same or similar locality under the same or similar circumstances.
1.12 Limit of Contractor’s Responsibility

1.12.1 The Contractor is not responsible for the A/E’s negligence or the A/E’s failure to properly perform the A/E’s
contract.

1.13 Sustainability Requirements
1.13.1 This Project shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the requirements of Am. Sub. H.B. 251 of the
126th General Assembly and the resulting rules, policies, and procedures adopted by the Ohio Facilities Construction
Commission establishing Sustainability Requirements for Capital Improvements Projects, including but not limited to
the applicable provisions of OAC 3318-3.
1.13.2 If the Project is designed and constructed under the Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design (“LEED”)
Rating System developed by the U.S. Green Building Council or another rigorous rating system used to facilitate
achievement of sustainability goals for the Project, the Contractor shall provide submittals certifying achievement of
sustainable design rating system criteria for verification by the Green Building Certification Institute or other third party
in accordance with the Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 2 - STATE’S RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES

2.1 Contracting Authority
2.1.1 The Contracting Authority shall designate a Project Manager for the Project. The Project Manager is authorized to
act on behalf of the Contracting Authority to perform specific responsibilities under the Contract.
2.1.2 The Contracting Authority shall furnish information and services required of it in a timely manner.
2.1.3 The Contracting Authority shall have access to the Work at all times, whenever the Project is in preparation or
progress.
2.1.4 The Ohio Facilities Construction Commission requires use of its forms where indicated in the Contract Documents.
The party responsible for initiating forms shall utilize the latest edition obtained from the Commission’s website:
http://ofcc.ohio.gov. The Commission may make modifications to its forms at any time.
2.1.4.1 The Contractor shall not modify any form provided by the Commission or Contracting Authority.
2.1.4.2 If the Project is administered using the State’s web-based project management software, the Contractor shall
utilize the web-based forms and reports within the applicable business process. The State’s web-based project
management software is sponsored by the Commission, and such web-based forms and reports are acceptable to the
Commission in lieu of its paper forms.
2.1.5 The Contracting Authority is not responsible for construction means, methods, manners, techniques, sequences,
procedures, or for safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, or for the Contractor’s failure to carry
out the Work in conformity with the Contract Documents.
2.2 Owner
2.2.1 The Owner shall designate a representative authorized to act on behalf of the Owner during the Project.
2.2.2 The Owner shall furnish information and services required of it in a timely manner.
2.2.3 The Owner shall have access to the Work at all times whenever the Project is in preparation or progress.
2.2.4 Upon issuance of the Notice to Proceed, the Owner shall provide the Site to the Contractor in a condition to permit
the Contractor to perform the Work.
2.2.5 The Owner may request a change in the Work if the A/E recommends and the Contracting Authority approves the
change.
2.2.6 The Owner shall communicate with the Contractor through the Contracting Authority.
2.2.7 The Owner is not responsible for construction means, methods, manners, techniques, sequences, procedures, or for
safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, or for the Contractor’s failure to carry out the Work in
conformity with the Contract Documents.
2.3 Approval of Owner, Contracting Authority, and State

2.3.1 The Owner, Contracting Authority, or State’s review and approval of the Work and any information the Contractor
submits to them is for the sole purpose of determining whether the Work and information are generally consistent with
the Contract’s intent, and will not relieve the Contractor of its sole responsibility for the performance, preparation,
completeness, and accuracy of the Work and information.

2.4 Neutral Facilitation
2.4.1 The Contracting Authority or Owner may engage a Neutral Facilitator for the purposes of (1) building cooperative
relationships among the Project participants to achieve discrete objectives; (2) encouraging educated, productive, and
expedited attempts to avoid, minimize, and resolve disputes; and (3) maximizing the effectiveness of each participant’s
resources.
2.4.1.1 For example, a Neutral Facilitator may facilitate the organizational meeting, partnering session(s), and
efforts to resolve disputes throughout the Project.
2.4.2 The Contracting Authority, Owner, and Contractor are entitled to interact with the Neutral Facilitator with the full
expectation that (1) they may act, speak, and disclose information with complete candor and (2) all communication,
whether oral or written, made in the course of facilitated sessions is confidential.
2.4.3 At any hearing or proceeding regarding any dispute arising out of or related to the Project (1) the Neutral Facilitator
will not be competent to testify and shall not be called as a witness and (2) the Neutral Facilitator’s testimony and work
product will not be admissible.
2.4.4 The Neutral Facilitator will not (1) perform any services with respect to or bear any responsibility for any legal
services, design-professional services, construction, or construction management associated with the Project or (2) have
any liability whatsoever for any claims related to any legal services, design-professional services, construction, or
construction management associated with the Project, including without limitation, claims for legal or design-
professional errors or omissions, delays, cost overruns, faulty construction, or increased costs.
2.4.5 The Neutral Facilitator’s participation in the Project will not relieve the Contracting Authority, Owner, and
Contractor of any of their respective rights or obligations under the Contract.
2.5 Contractor Performance Evaluation

2.5.1 The Contracting Authority may evaluate the Contractor’s performance during the progress of the Work, at
completion of a phase of the Project, completion of the Project, or any of the foregoing. The Contracting Authority shall
retain the evaluation(s).
2.5.1.1 The Contractor may request a copy of the completed evaluation(s). If the Contractor wishes to comment or
take exception to any rating or remark, the Contractor must send a response in writing to the Contracting Authority
within 30 days of receiving the evaluation(s).
2.5.1.2 The Contracting Authority may use the evaluation(s) in determining the responsibility of the Contractor for
award of future contracts.
2.5.1.3 The Contracting Authority may request information from the Contractor for use in evaluating the A/E’s
performance. If information is requested, the Contractor must comply in a timely and responsive manner.
2.5.1.4 If a breach of the Contract is committed by the Contractor or is attributable to a Subcontractor, that breach
will be used in the responsibility analysis of the Contractor and Subcontractor (where applicable) for future contracts
with the State or subcontracts on State projects for 5 years after the date of the breach.
receive and review the Contracting Authority’s evaluation of the Contractor’s performance and respond with its
comments, using the “Contractor Evaluation” business process.
ARTICLE 3 - A/E’S RESPONSIBILITIES

3.1 The A/E’s Contract Administration Duties
3.1.1 The A/E shall administer the Contract as provided in the Contract Documents and Architect/Engineer Agreement,
including, but not limited to, performance of the functions described as follows:
3.1.1.1 The A/E shall attend and conduct progress meetings. The A/E shall prepare an agenda and produce a written
report of each progress meeting, and distribute the report to the Contracting Authority, Owner, and Contractor
within 3 business days after the meeting. The A/E shall not delegate the duty to prepare the agenda and written
reports of any progress meeting.
3.1.1.2 The A/E may authorize minor changes or alterations in the Work that are consistent with the intent of the
Contract Documents and do not involve adjustment of the Contract Sum or Contract Times, or both. The A/E has no
authority to authorize the Contractor to perform additional or extra Work for which the Contractor may seek
adjustment of the Contract Sum or Contract Times, or both.

3.1.1.3 The A/E shall review and recommend, certify, or approve applicable forms required under the Contract
Documents.
3.1.1.4 The A/E shall render decisions in connection with the Contractor’s responsibilities under the Contract
Documents, and submit recommendations to the Contracting Authority for enforcement of the Contract as
necessary.
3.1.2 The A/E is the initial interpreter of all requirements of the Contract Documents. All decisions of the A/E are
subject to final determination by the Contracting Authority.
3.2 Site Visits and Observation

3.2.1 The A/E shall notify, advise, and consult with the Contracting Authority and Owner and protect the State against
Defective Work throughout completion of the Project, which includes the Correction Period.
3.2.1.1 The A/E shall designate a field representative, subject to the Contracting Authority’s approval, to attend to
the Project, to observe and check the progress and quality of the Work, and to take action as necessary or
appropriate to achieve conformity with the Contract Documents.
3.2.1.2 The A/E shall have its consultants attend to the Project at intervals required by its agreement or the
Contracting Authority.
3.2.2 The A/E is authorized to disapprove or reject Defective Work. The A/E shall immediately notify the Contracting
Authority any time the A/E disapproves or rejects an item of Work.
3.2.3 The A/E is not responsible for construction means, methods, manners, techniques, sequences, procedures, or for
safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, or for the Contractor’s failure to carry out the Work in
conformity with the Contract Documents.
3.3 Testing and Inspection Services

3.3.1 Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, the A/E shall apply for, secure, and pay for the costs of
structural testing and special inspections under Chapter 17 of the Ohio Building Code; testing including geotechnical
analysis, environmental testing and analysis, concrete, masonry, structural steel, reinforcing steel, welding, bolts, steel
connections, HVAC systems and controls, plumbing and piping, air and water balancing and testing, or other testing; or
approval required by Applicable Law.
3.4 Approval of A/E

3.4.1 The A/E’s review and approval of the Work and any information the Contractor submits to the A/E is for the sole
purpose of determining whether the Work and information are generally consistent with the Contract’s intent, and will
not relieve the Contractor of its sole responsibility for the performance, preparation, completeness, and accuracy of the
Work and information.
3.5 Limitation of A/E’s Authority

3.5.1 Under no circumstances is the A/E authorized to:
3.5.1.1 bind the Owner or Contracting Authority to any authorizations under, modifications of, or amendments to
any contract other than as expressly described under Section 3.1.1.2;
3.5.1.2 accept any defective or non-conforming services, Work, or vendor-furnished items;
3.5.1.3 make any settlements on behalf of the Owner or Contracting Authority; or
3.5.1.4 assume any responsibilities of the Contractor or Subcontractors.
ARTICLE 4 - SUBCONTRACTORS
4.1 Evaluation and Approval
4.1.1 Within 10 days after the Notice to Proceed, or other period as mutually agreed by the Contractor and Contracting
Authority, the Contractor shall submit to the A/E a Subcontractor and Material Supplier Declaration form through
which the Contractor identifies its Subcontractors.
4.1.2 The Contractor’s failure to timely submit the information regarding a proposed Subcontractor may result in
withholding payment in accordance with Section 9.8.

4.1.3 After receiving the Subcontractor and Material Supplier Declaration form, the A/E shall verify that it is
complete and deliver it to the Contracting Authority and Owner. If the A/E finds the form incomplete, the A/E shall
return it to the Contractor and identify the incomplete information.
4.1.4 If the Contracting Authority rejects any proposed Subcontractor, the Contractor shall propose a replacement
Subcontractor with no adjustment of the Contract Sum. The proposed replacement Subcontractor will be evaluated as
described above.
4.1.5 No less than 10 days before Work is to be performed by the Subcontractor, or within a shorter period as mutually
agreed by the Contractor and Contracting Authority, the Contractor shall submit to the Contracting Authority a complete
copy of the executed Subcontract between the Contractor and Subcontractor.
identify its proposed Subcontractors and submit its Subcontracts through the “Subcontractor Supplier Declaration”
business process.
4.2 Form of Subcontract

4.2.1 All Subcontracts shall be on the State of Ohio Subcontract Form prescribed by OAC Section 153:1-03-02.
4.2.2 No less than 10 days before Work is to be performed by a Subcontractor, or within a shorter period as mutually
agreed by the Contractor and Contracting Authority, the Contractor shall submit to the Contracting Authority and A/E a
complete copy of the executed Subcontract between the Contractor and Subcontractor. After receiving the Subcontract,
the A/E shall verify that it is complete and deliver it to the Contracting Authority. If the A/E finds the Subcontract
incomplete, the A/E shall return it to the Contractor and identify the incomplete information.
4.3 Replacement of Subcontractors

4.3.1 The Contractor shall not replace any Subcontractor after execution of the Subcontract without the prior written
approval of the Contracting Authority.
4.4 Contractor’s Responsibility

4.4.1 The Contractor is fully responsible for all acts and omissions of its Subcontractors and is responsible for scheduling
and coordinating the Work of its Subcontractors.
4.4.1.1 The Contractor is fully responsible for any delay, interference, disruption, or hindrance attributable to the
Contractor’s Subcontractors.
4.4.1.2 The Contractor shall require that each of its Subcontractors have a competent supervisor at the Site whenever
the Subcontractor is performing Work.
4.4.1.3 The Contractor shall bind its Subcontractors to the terms of the Contract Documents, so far as applicable to
the Work of the Subcontractor, and shall not agree to any provision, which seeks to bind the State to terms
inconsistent with or at variance from the Contract Documents.
4.4.2 The Contractor will not be relieved of its full responsibility for Subcontractors and their performance of the Work
by (1) the participation of the Owner, Contracting Authority, and A/E in the processes described under this Article 4 or
other related provisions of the Contract Documents or (2) the Contracting Authority’s rejection of a Subcontractor or
failure to reject a Subcontractor under Section 4.1.
4.5 Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts

4.5.1 The Contractor hereby assigns its agreement with each Subcontractor to the Contracting Authority provided that
the assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Contracting Authority and only for those
agreements that the Contracting Authority accepts by notifying the Contractor and applicable Subcontractor in writing.
The Contracting Authority may re-assign accepted agreements.
4.6 Prompt Payment

4.6.1 The Contractor shall make payments to Subcontractors in accordance with Applicable Law, including ORC Section
4113.61 that include, without limitation, the requirements described under this Section 4.6.
4.6.1.1 If a Subcontractor requests payment in time to allow the Contractor to include the request in its Contractor
Payment Request, the Contractor shall pay within 10 days after receipt of payment from the State:
.1 To a Subcontractor other than a Material Supplier, an amount equal to the percent of completion allowed
by the Contracting Authority for the Subcontractor’s Work.

.2 To a Material Supplier, an amount equal to all or that portion of the Contractor Payment Request that
represents the materials furnished by the Material Supplier.
4.6.2 The Contractor may reduce the amount paid to a Subcontractor pursuant to Section 4.6.1 at a rate equal to the
percentage retained from the Contractor and may withhold amounts necessary to (1) resolve disputed liens or claims
involving the Work of the Subcontractor or (2) account for the failure of the Subcontractor to perform its obligations
under its agreement with the Contractor.
4.6.2.1 Labor Payments.
.1 Partial payments to the Subcontractor for labor performed under either a Unit Price or lump sum
Subcontract shall be made at the rate of 92 percent of the amount invoiced through the Subcontractor’s
request for payment that shows the Work of the Subcontractor is 50 percent complete.
.2 After the Work of the Subcontractor is 50 percent complete, as evidenced by payments of at least
50 percent of the total amount due under the Subcontract, no additional funds shall be retained from
payments for labor.
4.6.2.2 Material Payments.
.1 The Contractor shall pay the Subcontractor at the rate of 100 percent of the scheduled value for materials
incorporated into the Project.
.2 The Contractor shall pay the Subcontractor at the rate of 92 percent of the invoice cost, not to exceed the
scheduled value in a Unit Price or lump sum Subcontract, for materials delivered to the Site, or other off-
site storage location approved by the A/E, provided the Subcontractor provides the information required by
Sections 9.6.2.1 and 9.6.2.2 with its request for payment.
4.6.3 If the Contractor fails to comply with this Section 4.6, the Contractor shall pay to the applicable Subcontractor
18 percent interest, compounded annually, on any unpaid amount beginning on the 11th day after receipt of payment
from the State.
4.6.4 In order to establish lien rights, Subcontractors shall comply with Applicable Law, including ORC Sections
1311.26, 1311.261, and 1311.29.
4.6.5 If the Contracting Authority receives a Claim Affidavit from a Subcontractor, it shall proceed as required by
Applicable Law, including ORC Sections 153.63 and 1311.31.
4.6.6 Laborers, Subcontractors, and Material Suppliers may secure payment rights in accordance with Applicable Law,
including ORC Section 153.56.
ARTICLE 5 - PRECONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES

5.1 Partnering
5.1.1 The formation of a cohesive, mutually beneficial partnering arrangement among the Contractor, Contracting
Authority, A/E, and Owner will accomplish the construction of the Project most effectively and efficiently. This
arrangement draws on their collective strengths, skills, and knowledge to achieve a Project of the intended quality, within
budget, and on schedule. To achieve that objective, participation in a partnering session is required for the following key
stakeholders:
5.1.1.1 Contracting Authority: Project Manager
5.1.1.2 Owner: Primary representative
5.1.1.3 A/E: Principal-in-charge, project manager, field representative, major consultants
5.1.1.4 Contractor: Principal-in-charge, project manager, and superintendent
5.1.1.5 Major Subcontractors (e.g., plumbing, HVAC, electrical): Principal-in-charge, project manager or
superintendent
5.1.1.6 CxA, if applicable
5.1.2 The purpose of the partnering arrangement is to build cooperative relationships between the Project’s key
stakeholders, avoid or minimize disputes, and nurture a more collaborative ethic characterized by trust, cooperation and
teamwork. This arrangement is intended to produce a voluntary, non-binding, but formally structured agreement among
the Project’s key stakeholders, leading to an attitude that fosters risk sharing.

5.1.3 To create and implement the partnering arrangement, the Project’s key stakeholders shall meet prior to the
construction of the Project for developing a partnering agreement. The agreement should be comprehensive and focus on
all issues necessary for successful completion of the Project, and shall identify common goals and objectives, develop a
problem solution process, an Alternative Dispute Resolution (“ADR”) strategy in accordance with Section 8.13, and an
implementation plan for the partnering arrangement.
5.1.4 Formal contractual relations, responsibilities, and liabilities are not affected by any partnering arrangement. The
cost associated with establishing this partnership, including but not limited to engaging the services of a Neutral
Facilitator, shall be included in an allowance in the Contractor’s bid. The Contractor shall include in its base bid the
resources necessary to participate in the partnering session.
5.1.5 Partnering services may extend over the entire period of performance of the Contract and may include intervention
or project realignment services to be utilized if serious disputes arise. The Project’s key stakeholders should agree,
during the initial partnering session, to the types of situations and circumstances in which intervention or realignment
services shall be utilized.
5.2 Building and Trade Permits and Licenses

5.2.1 Plan Approval.
5.2.1.1 The A/E shall secure the required structural, plumbing, HVAC, and electrical plan approvals.
5.2.1.2 The Contractor shall schedule and attend all intermediate and final inspections required for any permit
applicable to the Work. The Contractor shall schedule the State Fire Marshal or local fire authority for the life safety
inspection for occupancy permits. The Contractor shall give the A/E, Contracting Authority, and Owner reasonable
notice of the dates and times arranged for inspections.
.1 The Contractor shall pay for any reinspections required as a result of the Contractor’s failure to receive
approval of its Work.
5.2.2 Trade Permits and Licenses.
5.2.2.1 The Contractor shall obtain, maintain, and pay for any permit, inspection, or license applicable to the
Contractor’s particular trade.
5.2.3 Local Permits.
5.2.3.1 The Contractor shall secure and pay the fees for any permits, inspections, licenses, capacity charges, or tap
fees required by local authorities having jurisdiction over the Project. The Contractor shall give the A/E, Contracting
Authority, and Owner reasonable notice of the date arranged for inspections.
5.2.4 National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (“NPDES”) Storm Water General Permit.
5.2.4.1 The A/E shall secure the NPDES general permit by submitting a Notice of Intent (“NOI”) application form
to the Ohio Environmental Protection Agency at least 45 days prior to the start of construction. The Contractor shall
be a “co-permitee” if required under Applicable Law.
5.2.4.2 The A/E shall prepare and certify a storm water pollution prevention plan to provide sedimentation and
erosion controls at the Project.
5.2.4.3 The A/E shall prepare and process the required Notice of Termination (“NOT”) prior to Contract
Completion.
ARTICLE 6 - CONSTRUCTION AND CLOSEOUT

6.1 Commencement of Work on the Site
6.1.1 Unless the Contracting Authority agrees otherwise in writing, the Construction Stage will commence with the
Contracting Authority’s issuance of the Notice to Proceed and will terminate upon Contract Completion.
6.2 Responsibility of the Contractor

6.2.1 The Contractor shall complete portions of the Work in the sequence and time in the Construction Progress
Schedule.
6.2.2 The Contractor shall supervise the Work.
6.2.3 The Contractor must perform the Work so as not to interfere with, disturb, hinder, or delay the services of Separate
Consultants or the work of Separate Contractors. The Contractor must cooperate and coordinate fully with all Separate

Consultants and Separate Contractors and must freely share all of the Contractor’s Project-related information with them
to facilitate the timely and proper performance of the Work and of the services and work of the Separate Consultants and
Separate Contractors.
6.2.4 The Contractor must afford every Separate Consultant and Separate Contractor proper and safe access to the Site
and a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment and the execution of their
services and work.
6.2.5 If the Contractor damages the property or work of any Separate Consultant or Separate Contractor, or by failure to
perform the Work with due diligence, delays, interferes with, hinders, or disrupts the services of any Separate Consultant
or the work of any Separate Contractor who suffers additional expense and damage as a result, the Contractor is
responsible for that damage, injury, or expense.
6.2.6 The intent of Sections 6.2.3 through 6.2.5 is to benefit the Separate Consultants and Separate Contractors, and to
demonstrate that the Separate Consultants and Separate Contractors are intended third-party beneficiaries of the
Contractor’s obligations under the Contract.
6.2.7 If the proper execution or results of any part of the Work depends upon work performed or services provided by the
Owner, a Separate Consultant, or a Separate Contractor, the Contractor must inspect that other work and appropriate
instruments of service, and promptly report to the Contracting Authority in writing any defects or deficiencies in that
other work or services that render it unavailable or unsuitable for the proper execution and results of the Work. The
Contractor’s failure so to report will constitute an acceptance of the other work and services as fit and proper for
integration with the Contractor’s Work except for defects and deficiencies in the other work or services that were not
reasonably discoverable at the time of the Contractor’s inspection.
6.2.8 The Contractor shall not delay the Work on account of any claim, dispute, or action between the Contractor and a
Separate Consultant or Separate Contractor.
6.2.9 The Contractor shall develop and keep current the Construction Progress Schedule in accordance with Section 6.5,
and prepare and keep current a schedule of submittals that is coordinated with the Construction Progress Schedule, for
the A/E and Contracting Authority’s acceptance.
6.2.10 The Construction Progress Schedule shall not exceed the time limits current under the Contract Documents, shall
provide for reasonable, efficient, and economical execution of the Project, and shall relate to the entire Project to the
extent required by the Contract Documents.
6.2.11 The Contractor shall use the Construction Progress Schedule to plan, organize, and execute the Project, record and
report actual performance and progress, and show how it plans to coordinate and complete all remaining work by
Contract Completion.
6.2.12 The Contractor shall monitor the progress of the Work for conformance with the Construction Progress Schedule
and shall initiate revisions as required by Section 6.5.14.
6.2.13 The Contractor shall establish the Project’s regular working hours, subject to approval by the A/E and the Owner.
6.2.14 The Contractor shall coordinate the Work with the activities and responsibilities of the A/E, Owner, and
Contracting Authority to complete the Project in accordance with the Contract Documents.
6.2.15 In the event of default of the Contractor, the Contractor shall cooperate with the A/E, Contracting Authority, and
Contractor’s Surety to achieve the Substantial Completion date and Contract Completion.
6.2.16 The Contractor shall remove all snow and ice as may be required for reasonably safe access to the Project
including, but not limited to, building entries, driveways, parking lots, and sidewalks.
6.2.17 The Contractor shall keep a daily log containing a record of weather, number of workers on Site for the
Contractor, identification of equipment, Work accomplished, problems encountered, and other similar relevant data.
6.3 Construction Procedures

6.3.1 The Contractor is solely responsible for and has control over all construction means, methods, manners, techniques,
sequences, and procedures, for safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, and for coordinating all
portions of the Work.
6.3.1.1 If the Contract Documents give instructions that affect construction means, methods, manners, techniques,
sequences, or procedures, the Contractor shall evaluate the jobsite safety of them and, except as stated below, shall

be fully and solely responsible for the jobsite safety of the means, methods, manners, techniques, sequences, or
procedures.
6.3.1.2 If the Contractor determines that the means, methods, manners, techniques, sequences, or procedures
specified in the Contract Documents may not be safe, the Contractor shall give timely written notice to the A/E,
Owner, and Contracting Authority. The Contractor shall not proceed with that portion of the Work without further
written instructions from the A/E. Any modification of the Contract shall be in accordance with Article 7.
6.3.2 The Contractor shall lay out and coordinate all lines, levels, elevations, and measurements for all of the Work,
coordinate and verify existing conditions, and notify the A/E of discrepancies and conflicts before proceeding with
installation or excavation.
6.3.3 The Contractor shall perform all cutting, fitting, or patching required for the Work and shall not endanger the
Project by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering the Project, or any part of it.
6.3.3.1 If the Contractor requires sleeves for the Work, the Contractor shall furnish and install the sleeves. The
Contractor is responsible for the exact location and size of all holes and openings required to be formed or built for
the Work.
6.3.3.2 The Contractor’s patching shall match and blend with the existing or adjacent surface(s).
6.3.4 The Contractor shall comply with ORC Sections 3781.25 through 3781.32. In addition, before starting excavation
or trenching, the Contractor shall determine the location of any underground utilities and notify any public authority or
utility having jurisdiction over the Project and secure any required approval.
6.3.4.1 The Contractor shall give notice at least 2 business days in advance of excavation to the owners of
underground utilities registered with the Ohio Underground Utility Protection Services (“OUPS” at http://oups.org,
phone 811 or 800-362-2764), and the owners of underground utilities shown on the Drawings and Specifications
who are not registered members of OUPS. The owner of an underground utility is required within 48-hours’ notice
to stake, mark, or otherwise designate the location of its utilities in the construction area together with its
approximate depth. In the event that any underground utility owner fails to timely perform, the Contractor shall
notify the A/E and contact the owner of the underground utility.
6.3.5 The Contractor shall install all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and any installation
recommendations of the manufacturer, including required temperature and humidity limits for installation of the various
materials.
6.3.6 The Contractor shall comply with all requirements and conditions of the NPDES general permit, including, but not
limited to, implementing and maintaining the sedimentation and erosion control measures specified in the storm water
pollution prevention plan prepared by the A/E pursuant to Section 5.2.4, which are related to the Work, maintaining
records of its construction activities, removing materials no longer required, and taking proper action if there is a
reportable quantity spill.
6.3.7 The Contractor shall communicate with the Contracting Authority and Owner through the A/E.
6.4 Construction Supervision

6.4.1 Unless waived by the Contracting Authority in writing, the Contractor shall provide continuous supervision at the
Site by a competent superintendent when any Work is being performed and the Contractor’s superintendent shall not be
involved with any work other than the Project.
6.4.2 The Contractor’s project manager and superintendent shall each have the responsibility and authority to act on
behalf of the Contractor. All communications to the Contractor’s project manager or superintendent shall be binding as if
given directly to the Contractor.
6.4.3 The Contractor shall submit an outline of the qualifications and experience of the Contractor’s proposed project
manager and proposed superintendent, including references, to the Contracting Authority no less than 10 days of the
Notice to Proceed. For all Subcontracts in excess of $200,000, and for all other Subcontracts on request from the
Contracting Authority, the Contractor shall submit an outline of the qualifications and experience of the Subcontractor’s
proposed project manager and proposed superintendent, including references, to the Contracting Authority no less than
10 days before the Subcontractor is scheduled to begin Work on the Site.
6.4.3.1 The Contracting Authority may reject the Contractor or Subcontractor’s proposed project manager or
proposed superintendent. If the Contracting Authority does not notify the Contractor of the rejection within 30 days
after receiving the required information, it shall indicate that the Contracting Authority has no objection, but does

not affect the Contracting Authority’s rights under Section 6.12.2 or any other provision relative to that project
manager or superintendent.
6.4.3.2 If the Contracting Authority rejects the Contractor or Subcontractor’s proposed project manager or proposed
superintendent, the Contractor shall replace, or cause the Subcontractor to replace the project manager or
superintendent (as appropriate) with someone acceptable to the Contracting Authority at no additional cost.
6.4.4 The Contractor and its Subcontractors subject to Section 6.4.3 shall not replace their respective project managers
or superintendents without prior written approval of the Contracting Authority.
6.4.4.1 If the Contractor or a Subcontractor subject to Section 6.4.3 proposes to change its project manager or
superintendent, the Contractor shall submit written justification to the Contracting Authority, along with the name
and qualifications of the proposed replacement.
6.4.4.2 The procedure provided in Section 6.4.3 shall be conducted to evaluate the Contractor or Subcontractor’s (as
applicable) proposed replacement project manager or superintendent.
6.5 Construction Progress Schedule

6.5.1 If the Estimated Construction Cost is less than $500,000, the Contractor may provide a bar chart schedule with a
logical sequence of events and sufficient detail to properly anticipate and monitor construction progress. If the Estimated
Construction Cost for the Project is $500,000 or more, the Contractor shall prepare and maintain a resource-loaded
Construction Progress Schedule using the critical-path method of scheduling that provides the following information:
6.5.1.1 a graphic presentation of the sequence of the Work for the Project in the media and format required for the
Project;
6.5.1.2 identification of each stage of the Work and any Milestone dates;
6.5.1.3 identification of activities and durations for review and approval of Shop Drawings and other action
submittals, fabrication and review of mock-up Work, product review and procurement, fabrication, shop inspection,
and delivery, including, but not limited to, lead time, coordination drawing delivery, Substantial Completion, Punch
List, Punch List Correction, Project close-out requirements, occupancy requirements, and Contract Completion;
6.5.1.4 identification of disruptions and shutdowns due to other operations;
6.5.1.5 identification of the critical path of the Work;
6.5.1.6 identification of the crew size and total resource hours for each activity in the schedule; and
6.5.1.7 the Contractor’s signature and date indicating approval.
6.5.2 The Contractor shall develop the Construction Progress Schedule using commercially available, personal computer
software acceptable to the Contracting Authority and shall submit all baseline and updated schedules to the A/E in the
schedules’ native electronic format.
6.5.3 The Construction Progress Schedule shall not exceed the time limits current under the Contract Documents, shall
provide for reasonable, efficient, and economical execution of the Project, and shall relate to the entire Project to the
extent required by the Contract Documents.
6.5.4 The Contractor shall use the Construction Progress Schedule to plan, organize, and execute the Project, record and
report actual performance and progress, and show how it plans to coordinate and complete all remaining Work within
applicable Milestones. The Project participants shall use the Construction Progress Schedule as a tool for scheduling and
reporting sequenced progress of the Work. The Contractor shall provide a clear graphics legend and other data including,
but not limited to, Milestone dates, constraints, and other items required by the Project, A/E, Contracting Authority, and
Owner. Each submission shall show the Contracting Authority’s Project number and Project name, and provide a
signature approval and date line for the Contractor.
6.5.5 The Contractor shall provide in each schedule: Activity identification and description for each activity broken
down to a maximum duration that is appropriate for the activity, responsibility of the Contractor, Contractor’s resources
and crew size for each activity, provide early start, early finish, late start, late finish dates. Each schedule shall show
predecessor activities and successor activities for each activity, entry free float, total float, and percentage of completion,
and identify the appropriate predecessors and successors for all related activities.
6.5.6 The Construction Progress Schedule shall show all submittal dates, review and approval durations for coordination
drawings, Shop Drawings, other action submittals, and mock-up Work.
6.5.7 Within 30 days of the date of the Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit to the A/E a proposed Construction
Progress Schedule approved by the Contractor. If the Project is $4 million total construction cost or more, the Contractor

may submit an intermediate Bar Chart Schedule for the first 120 days to the A/E within 30 days of the date of the Notice
to Proceed; followed by the complete resource-loaded precedence or arrow diagram schedule within 90 days of the date
of the Notice to Proceed.
6.5.7.1 The Contractor shall submit the initial and all updates of the Construction Progress Schedule in graphic and
tabular form to the A/E. With each monthly schedule update, the Contractor shall include a list of all changes to the
previously approved baseline schedule or monthly updated schedule.
6.5.7.2 After receiving the Construction Progress Schedule, the A/E shall review and submit a copy of the
Construction Progress Schedule to the Contracting Authority and Owner for review and acceptance, or reject and
return it to the Contractor with recommendations for revisions.
create, approve, and submit the initial and all updates of the Construction Progress Schedule to the A/E, Contracting
Authority, and Owner through the “Schedule Approvals” business process.
6.5.8 The Construction Progress Schedule shall be managed using early start dates and early finish dates. The Contractor
must exhaust existing float before claiming additional time for a Change Order, or show that it is not possible to use float
to cover the time requirements of the Change Order.
6.5.9 The Contractor’s failure to timely submit and properly maintain an approved Construction Progress Schedule may
result in withholding payment in accordance with Section 9.8.
6.5.10 For each progress meeting, the Contractor shall provide a 2- to 6-week look-ahead schedule, as appropriate for the
Project.
6.5.11 On a weekly basis, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the A/E a written report describing:
6.5.11.1 activities begun or finished during the preceding week;
6.5.11.2 activities in progress and expected completion;
6.5.11.3 activities to be started or finished in the upcoming 2 weeks, including but not limited to, the Contractor’s
workforce size and total resource hours associated with those activities; and
6.5.11.4 other information requested by the A/E.
6.5.12 The A/E shall attach the above information to the minutes of the weekly progress meetings.
6.5.13 The Contractor shall provide monthly Progress Status Reports to the Contracting Authority, A/E, and Owner,
which shall include recommendations for adjusting the Construction Progress Schedule to meet Milestone dates and the
Substantial Completion date.
6.5.13.1 If it is apparent to the A/E that the Contractor may be unable to meet critical path activities, Milestone
completion dates, or the Substantial Completion date, the A/E shall direct the Contractor to submit within 3 days a
recovery plan to avoid or minimize delay to the Project.
6.5.13.2 A recovery plan shall include, but is not limited to, adjustments to one or more of the following:
.1 workforce
.2 hours per shift
.3 shifts per workday
.4 workdays per week
.5 equipment
.6 activity logic
6.5.13.3 If the A/E approves the recovery plan, the Contractor shall prepare a revised Construction Progress
Schedule approved in accordance with Section 6.5.7. If the A/E does not approve the recovery plan, the Contractor
shall submit within 3 days an alternate recovery plan to the A/E in writing for review and approval in accordance
with Section 6.5.7.
6.5.14 The Contractor shall update the Construction Progress Schedule on a monthly basis, or other interval approved by
the Contracting Authority, in accordance with Section 6.5.7.
6.5.14.1 The updated Construction Progress Schedule approved by the Contractor shall serve as an affirmation that
the Contractor can meet the requirements of the updated Construction Progress Schedule.
6.5.14.2 The Contractor shall submit a tabular copy showing all changes to the previously approved schedule
including, but not limited to, logic, float, and actual start date of activities. The original or initially approved

Construction Progress Schedule and all subsequent Construction Progress Schedules submitted by the Contractor,
and accepted by the A/E, shall serve as an affirmation that the Contractor agrees to and can meet the applicable
requirements of the updated Construction Progress Schedule.
6.5.15 The Contractor’s failure to timely submit an approved, updated Construction Progress Schedule may result in
withholding payment in accordance with Section 9.8.
6.6 Progress Meetings

6.6.1 The A/E shall schedule a weekly progress meeting for the Contractor and other Persons involved in the Project.
The purpose of the progress meeting is to review progress on the Project during the previous week, discuss anticipated
progress during the following weeks, review critical operations, and discuss critical problems.
6.6.2 The Contractor shall be represented at every progress meeting by a Person authorized with signature authority to
make decisions regarding possible modification of the Contract Documents or Construction Progress Schedule.
6.6.2.1 The A/E shall notify the Contractor and other Persons involved in the Project of the time and place of the
progress meeting that shall thereafter be the same day and hour of the week for the duration of the Project, unless the
A/E notifies the Contractor and other Persons involved in the Project of a different day and hour at least 2 days in
advance.
6.6.2.2 The Contractor shall have any of its Subcontractors attend the progress meeting as determined advisable by
the Contractor, or as requested by the A/E.
6.6.3 The A/E shall prepare a written report of each progress meeting and distribute the report to the Contracting
Authority, Owner, and Contractor. The A/E shall not delegate the duty to prepare a written report of any progress
meeting.
6.6.3.1 If any Person in attendance objects to anything in a report of a progress meeting, the Person shall notify the
A/E, Contracting Authority, and any other affected Person in writing explaining the objection within 5 days.
6.6.3.2 The report of each progress meeting shall reflect any objection made to the report of the previous progress
meeting and any response.
receive written reports of progress meetings from the A/E through the “Meeting Minutes” business process, and
issues identified during progress meetings that require resolution by one or more Project participants shall be
documented through the “Action Items” business process.
6.7 Project Coordination

6.7.1 The Contractor shall prepare drawings (“Coordination Drawings“) after the Contractor and appropriate
Subcontractors (“Coordination Participants“) (1) determine the sequence of the Project, (2) identify the areas requiring
special attention (“Coordination Areas“), and (3) determine the need for a coordination drawing for any Coordination
Area. The Contractor shall prepare the Coordination Drawings with Computer-Aided Design (“CAD”) or Building
Information Modeling (“BIM”) software acceptable to the Contracting Authority. The Coordination Drawings shall show
the sheet metal work with plan and elevation dimensions, which specifically locate all HVAC ductwork, HVAC
equipment, and HVAC piping for each Coordination Area based upon the information, discussion, and resulting
consensus of the Coordination Participants during the coordination meetings.
6.7.1.1 After the Contractor completes the Coordination Drawings, the Contractor shall forward a copy of the
Coordination Drawings to the A/E, Contracting Authority, and Owner.
6.7.1.2 The A/E shall review the Coordination Drawings to determine whether the Coordination Participants
achieved the goals listed in Section 6.7.1. The A/E shall report any concerns, in writing, to the Coordination
Participants within 14 days after receiving the drawings.
submit the Coordination Drawings to the A/E, and CxA if applicable, through the “Submittals” business process.
6.8 Additional Tests and Inspections

6.8.1 If the A/E or the Contracting Authority determines that any portion of the Work requires special inspection, testing,
or approval not otherwise required under the Contract Documents, the A/E shall order such inspection, testing, or
approval.

6.8.1.1 If the special inspection, testing, or approval reveals Defective Work, the Contractor shall pay all associated
costs and will not be entitled to any related adjustment of the Contract Times. Those costs may include, but are not
limited to:
.1 the cost of the special inspection, testing, or approval;
.2 the cost of additional special inspections, testing, or approvals to evaluate remedial Work;
.3 the cost of correcting the Defective Work; and
.4 all related Owner-incurred fees and charges of contractors, engineers, architects, attorneys, and other
professionals.
6.8.1.2 The Contracting Authority may deduct the costs described under Section 6.8.1.1 from payments then or
thereafter due the Contractor. If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover those
amounts, the Contractor shall immediately pay the amount of the insufficiency to the Owner.
6.8.1.3 If the special inspection, testing, or approval reveals that the Work complies with the Contract Documents,
and the Contractor believes that it is entitled to an adjustment of the Contract Sum or Contract Times, or both, on
account of the special inspection, testing, or approval, the Contractor may request a Change Order by giving written
notice under Section 7.3.2 within 7 days after the special inspection, testing, or approval.
6.8.2 If the Contractor is aware of a need for inspection, testing, or approval, or of a need to have any inspection, testing,
or approval completed by a particular time to avoid delay, then the Contractor shall timely communicate such
information to the A/E and Contracting Authority.
6.8.3 Except as described under Section 6.8.1, the Owner shall pay for any inspection, testing, or approval that did not
become a requirement until after it awarded the Contract.
6.8.4 The Contractor shall coordinate with and give the A/E, Contracting Authority, and Owner reasonable notice of the
anticipated dates of all inspections, testing, or approvals.
6.8.5 Within 5 days after completion of an inspection, testing, or approval, the A/E shall provide an original
report/certificate of the inspection, testing, or approval to the Contractor and Contracting Authority with a
recommendation for or against acceptance of the results therein.
6.9 Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions

6.9.1 Before starting each portion of the Work, the Contractor shall carefully study and compare the various Contract
Documents relative to that portion of the Work, shall take field measurements of any existing conditions related to that
portion of the Work, and shall observe any conditions at the Site affecting it.
6.9.2 If the Contractor finds any perceived ambiguity, conflict, error, omission, or discrepancy on or between any of the
Contract Documents, or between any of the Contract Documents and any Applicable Law, the Contractor, before
proceeding with the Work, shall promptly submit a Request for Interpretation (“RFI”) to the A/E for an interpretation or
clarification.
6.9.2.1 Before submitting any RFI to the A/E, the Contractor shall carefully review the Contract Documents to
ensure that the Contract Documents do not answer the RFI.
6.9.2.2 The A/E shall respond to an RFI within 3 days of receiving the RFI.
6.9.2.3 Any interpretation or clarification of the Contract Documents made by any Person other than the A/E, or in
any manner other than writing, shall not be binding and the Contractor shall not rely upon it.
submit RFIs to the A/E through the “Requests for Interpretation” business process.
6.9.3 If the Contractor believes that it is entitled to an adjustment of the Contract Sum or Contract Times, or both, on
account of clarifications or instructions issued by the A/E in response to a RFI, the Contractor may request a Change
Order by giving written notice under Section 7.3.2 within 7 days of receiving the A/E’s RFI response.
6.9.4 If the Contractor does not notify the A/E per Section 6.9.3, the Contractor will have accepted the RFI response
without an adjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Times.
6.10 Protection of the Project

6.10.1 The Contractor shall protect the Work from weather and maintain the Work and all materials, apparatus, and
fixtures free from injury or damage until Substantial Completion of the Work.
6.10.1.1 The Contractor shall at all times cover or protect the Work.

6.10.1.2 The Contractor, at its expense, shall remove, and replace with new, any Work damaged as a result of the
Contractor’s failure to provide coverage or protection.
6.10.1.3 The Contractor, at its expense, shall repair or replace any adjacent property, including, but not limited to,
roads, walks, shrubbery, plants, trees, or turf, damaged during performance of the Work.
6.10.1.4 After the date of Substantial Completion of the Work, the Owner is responsible for protecting and
maintaining all materials, apparatus, and fixtures for the occupied portion of the Project free from injury or damage.
6.10.2 The Contractor shall protect the Project and existing or adjacent property from damage at all times and shall erect
and maintain necessary barriers, furnish and keep lighted necessary danger signals at night, and take reasonable
precautions to prevent injury or damage to individuals or property.
6.10.3 The Contractor shall not load, or permit any part of the Project to be loaded, in any manner that endangers the
Project, or any portion thereof. The Contractor shall not subject any part of the Project or existing or adjacent property to
stress or pressure that endangers the Project or property.
6.10.4 The Contractor shall provide all temporary bracing, shoring, and other structural support required for safety of the
Project and proper execution of the Work.
6.10.5 Vibration, Noise, and Dust Control.
6.10.5.1 The Contractor shall provide controls/barriers for vibrations, noise, and dust control in occupied buildings
as required by the construction operations.
6.10.5.2 The Contractor will not be permitted to exhaust or release unfiltered air, dust, construction debris, or other
undesirable products into the exterior atmosphere or into occupied areas of the building outside the Site. The Project
Manager may limit or stop the Work if the Contractor does not maintain proper air-quality standards.
6.10.5.3 In certain occupied buildings, tasks might be of such a nature that noise and vibration cannot be tolerated.
In such spaces, Work shall be scheduled for other than normal working hours. The Contractor is cautioned that
weekend or overtime work, if required, shall be performed at no additional cost. Permission to work other than
standard hours shall be received from the Contracting Authority prior to the occurrence. Weekend and overtime
Work shall be reflected in the Construction Progress Schedule.
6.10.5.4 The Contractor is responsible for vibration control and control of transmission of noise arising from the
Work. Principal considerations that shall be given to noise and vibration control are:
.1 Noise control in compliance with Occupational Safety and Health Administration (“OSHA”) requirements
for the health and safety of building occupants; control shall be for all areas of the facility, including
equipment rooms, boiler rooms, and fan rooms.
.2 Vibration control to limit sound produced by construction equipment, and for protection of the equipment
existing in a building and the building structure.
.3 Vibration control to provide for maximum usefulness of the facility by keeping levels of vibration within
ranges conducive to study and work or other uses for which the facility is designed.
6.11 Materials and Equipment

6.11.1 The Contractor shall provide new materials and equipment of the quality specified in the Contract Documents.
6.11.2 The Contractor shall bring to or store at the Site only the materials and equipment required in the Work. If
possible, materials and equipment should be installed in their final positions when brought to the Site.
6.11.2.1 The Contractor shall properly store and protect all materials and equipment it provides to the Project.
6.11.2.2 The Contractor shall timely remove from the Site any materials or equipment no longer required for the
Work.
6.11.3 The Contractor shall not allow materials or equipment to damage the Project or adjacent property, nor to endanger
any individual at or near the Site.
6.11.4 If the Contractor provides an Acceptable Component, the Contractor shall be solely responsible for the costs of
coordination and modification required.
6.11.5 If the Contractor provides approved Substitutions that require changes to the Contract Documents, the Contractor
shall be solely responsible for the additional costs incurred as a result, including, but not limited to, changes to the design
by the A/E.

6.11.6 The A/E shall consider Requests for Substitutions after the bid opening only when the Contractor can
conclusively demonstrate to the A/E the following conditions:
6.11.6.1 the specified Basis of Design Components, Acceptable Components, or previously-approved Substitutions,
through no fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, are not available; or
6.11.6.2 the specified Basis of Design Components, Acceptable Components, or previously-approved Substitutions
will not perform as designed or intended.
6.11.7 The Contractor’s incorporation of unapproved Substitutions in the Work shall constitute Defective Work.
6.12 Labor
6.12.1 The Contractor shall maintain a sufficient workforce and enforce good discipline and order among its employees
and the employees of its Subcontractors. The Contractor shall not permit employment of individuals not skilled in tasks
assigned to them.
6.12.2 The Contractor shall dismiss from the Project any individual employed by the Contractor, or a Subcontractor, who
the Contracting Authority finds, in its sole discretion, to be incompetent, guilty of misconduct, or detrimental to the
Project.
6.12.3 The Contractor shall employ all legal efforts to minimize the likelihood or effect of any strike, Work stoppage, or
other labor disturbance. Informational pickets shall not justify any Work stoppage.
6.13 Safety Precautions

6.13.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions to ensure the safety of individuals on the Project.
6.13.1.1 The Contractor is responsible for designing and implementing its own safety program, including
compliance with OSHA regulations. The Contractor’s safety plans, such as fall protection, hazards,
communications, competent person, etc., shall meet or exceed the Owner’s safety plan (if any).
6.13.2 The Contractor shall pay any fine or cost incurred because of the Contractor’s violation, or alleged violation, of
Applicable Law.
6.13.3 Before starting any Work, the Contractor shall submit to the Contracting Authority a copy of the Contractor’s site-
specific safety plan and safety manuals.
6.13.4 The Contractor shall not introduce Hazardous Materials to the Project or burn any fires on the Site.
6.13.4.1 The Contractor shall notify the Project Manager 24 hours before the start of non-routine or non-recurring
hot-work. Use of sources of fire, flame or sparks and flammable materials shall be kept to an absolute minimum. At
the beginning of the Project, the Contractor shall inform the Project Manager of its intent to use blowtorches,
welding apparatus or similar exposed flame and sparking devices. Similar notice shall be given in regard to the use
of flammable liquids, adhesives, and cleaners.
6.13.4.2 The Contractor shall furnish an appropriate number of fire extinguishers (minimum of 1), which shall be
within the immediate areas where work is being done at all times. The extinguisher shall be adequate and suitable
for the class of fire likely to be caused by the Contractor’s operations.
6.13.5 Work Stoppage Due to Hazardous Materials.
6.13.5.1 If the Contractor encounters material the Contractor reasonably believes to be, or contain, a Hazardous
Material that has not been rendered harmless, the Contractor shall immediately stop Work in the affected area and
verbally report the condition to the Contracting Authority and A/E, and within 1 business day deliver written notice
of the condition to the Contracting Authority and A/E.
6.13.5.2 The Contracting Authority will promptly determine the necessity of the Owner retaining a qualified
environmental consultant to evaluate the suspected Hazardous Material and to issue a related written report. Where
appropriate, the Owner will engage a licensed abatement contractor to remove the material or render it harmless as
directed.
6.13.5.3 The Contractor shall resume Work in the affected area upon written notice from the A/E that (1) the suspect
material was evaluated and found not to be or contain a Hazardous Material, or (2) the suspect material has been
removed or rendered harmless.
6.13.5.4 If the Contractor knowingly or negligently proceeds with the Work in an area where a Hazardous Material
exists and has not been rendered harmless, the Contractor shall be solely responsible for all related claims, damages,

losses, and expenses, including, but not limited to, attorneys’ fees, arising out of or resulting from performing the
Work in the affected area.
6.13.5.5 The term “rendered harmless” means that the level of exposure is less than any applicable exposure
standards set forth in Applicable Law.
6.13.6 Safety Data Sheets.
6.13.6.1 The Contractor shall identify any material it uses at the Site with a Safety Data Sheet (“SDS”) meeting the
requirements of OSHA’s Hazard Communication Standard (formerly known as a Material Safety Data Sheet).
6.13.6.2 The Contractor shall maintain a notebook containing all of its applicable SDSs. This notebook shall be kept
at the Site for the duration of the Project.
6.14 Construction Facilities, Utilities, and Equipment

6.14.1 Facilities.
6.14.1.1 The Contractor shall provide and maintain in a clean condition suitable temporary facilities, equipment,
services, and enclosed storage for its use at the Site.
6.14.1.2 The Contractor shall provide and maintain in a clean condition:
.1 suitable facilities, equipment, and services for use by the A/E and Contracting Authority;
.2 adequate space, equipment, and furnishings to conduct progress meetings, and store approved documents
and permits; and
.3 adequate sanitary facilities for use by all Persons at the Site.
6.14.2 Environmental Controls.
6.14.2.1 The Contractor shall protect its Work and materials from weather and damage from heat, cold, and
humidity.
6.14.2.2 Until the permanent HVAC system is complete and available for use:
.1 the Contractor shall make arrangements and pay for installation and maintenance of temporary heating and
ventilating systems; and
.2 the Contractor shall pay the costs incurred in operating the temporary heating and ventilating systems.
6.14.2.3 When the permanent HVAC system is complete and available for use:
.1 The Contractor shall start up and maintain operation of the permanent HVAC system, including filters, and
promptly remove temporary heating and ventilating systems.
.2 If the Project consists entirely of new construction, the Contractor shall pay the costs of energy consumed
in operating the permanent HVAC system until Substantial Completion.
.3 If the Project is a renovation of an existing building or structure, addition(s) to an existing building or
structure, or any combination of new construction and renovation work that does not allow separate
metering of utilities, the Owner shall pay the costs of energy consumed in operating the permanent HVAC
system.
6.14.2.4 From the date of Substantial Completion, the Owner shall pay the cost of operating the permanent HVAC
system for the occupied portion of the Project.
6.14.2.5 If the permanent HVAC system is used during construction, the Contractor shall furnish an extended
warranty and service contract in effect until the expiration of the Correction Period.
6.14.3 Water and Drainage.
6.14.3.1 The Contractor shall provide water necessary for the Work until the permanent plumbing system is
available for use.
6.14.3.2 The Contractor shall provide temporary drainage and dewatering necessary for the Work and shall employ
pumps, trenches, drains, sumps, and other necessary elements required to provide satisfactory working conditions
for the protection, execution, and completion of the Project.
6.14.3.3 The Contractor shall make arrangements and pay for installation and maintenance of temporary plumbing
systems until the permanent plumbing system is available for use.
6.14.3.4 When the permanent plumbing system is complete and available for use:
.1 The Contractor shall start up and maintain operation of the permanent plumbing systems, and make
arrangements and pay for removal of temporary plumbing systems.

.2 If the Project consists entirely of new construction, the Contractor shall pay the costs of water consumed
and sewerage charges until Substantial Completion.
.3 If the Project is a renovation of an existing building or structure, addition(s) to an existing building or
structure, or any combination of new construction and renovation work that does not allow separate
metering of utilities, the Owner shall pay the costs of water consumed and sewerage charges.
6.14.3.5 From the date of Substantial Completion, the Owner shall pay the costs of water consumed and sewerage
charges for the occupied portion of the Project.
6.14.3.6 If the permanent plumbing system is used during construction, the Contractor shall furnish an extended
6.14.4 Electric Service.
6.14.4.1 The Contractor shall provide temporary light and power; pay the charges for temporary electric service
installation, and removal if required.
6.14.4.2 If the Project consists entirely of new construction, the Contractor shall pay the cost of energy consumed
until Substantial Completion.
6.14.4.3 If the Project is a renovation of an existing building or structure, addition(s) to an existing building or
structure, or any combination of new construction and renovation work that does not allow separate metering of
utilities, the Owner shall pay the cost of energy consumed.
6.14.4.4 From the date of Substantial Completion, the Owner shall pay the cost of energy consumed for the occupied
portions of the Project.
6.14.4.5 If the permanent electrical system is used during construction, the Contractor shall furnish an extended
6.14.5 Hoisting Facilities.
6.14.5.1 The Contractor shall erect and maintain any hoisting equipment required for its Work.
6.14.5.2 If the electric service requirements of hoisting facilities differ from that available at the Site, the Contractor
shall provide and pay for all necessary connections.
6.14.5.3 If a permanent elevator is identified in the Contract Documents to be used for hoisting materials or
personnel during construction, the Contractor shall furnish an extended warranty and service contract in effect until
the expiration of the Correction Period.
6.15 Progress Cleaning

6.15.1 The Contractor shall remove all waste materials, rubbish, and mud attributable to the Work to an appropriate
disposal location at, or near, the Site.
6.15.2 The Contractor shall perform weekly broom cleaning of hard flooring surfaces in the area of the Work.
6.15.3 The Contractor shall remove, once each working day or as appropriate for the Project, all waste materials and
rubbish from the disposal location at, or near, the Site.
6.15.4 The Contractor shall remove, as appropriate for the Project or as the A/E or Owner directs, any waste materials or
rubbish from areas adjacent to the Project.
6.15.4.1 The Contractor shall dispose of waste materials, rubbish, and construction debris in a lawful manner in
approved recycling facilities or landfills.
6.15.5 If the Contractor fails to clean up during the progress of the Work, the Contracting Authority may clean up on
behalf of the Contractor and at the Contractor’s expense. If the Contractor fails to maintain the areas adjacent to the
Project clean and free of waste materials and rubbish, the Contracting Authority may also direct the local jurisdiction
responsible for the area to have the area cleaned to its satisfaction at the Contractor’s expense.
6.15.5.1 The Contracting Authority may deduct the cleaning costs from payments then or thereafter due the
Contractor. If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover those amounts, the
Contractor shall immediately pay the amount of the insufficiency to the Owner.
6.15.6 The Contractor shall remove excavated material and spoil to a suitable off-site location approved by the
6.15.6.1 If the Owner designates a location on its property for disposal or storage of clean topsoil and/or subsoil in
the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall remove such materials to the designated location.

6.16 Use of Premises
6.16.1 The Contractor shall use corridors, stairs, and elevators as designated by the Contracting Authority. The
Contractor shall exercise extreme care to not exceed the carrying capacity of elevators or damage the cab interior in any
way.
6.16.2 Loitering or wandering through interior of buildings or exterior grounds outside the limits of the Work will not be
permitted.
6.16.3 The Contractor shall confine its apparatus, materials, and the operations of its workers to the limits indicated by
law, ordinances, permits and the directions of the A/E or Project Manager.
6.16.4 No signs or advertising of any kind will be permitted on or about the Site, except those appearing on trucks and
trailers.
6.16.5 Site Logistics Plan.
6.16.5.1 The Contractor shall prepare a plan of the Site indicating how the Contractor intends to use the Site. The
plan should illustrate, as an example, areas to be used for lay down of material and equipment; office and storage
trailer locations; vehicular access gates with ingress and egress routes; locations of wheel wash and concrete truck
wash out activities; and offloading and hoisting locations.
6.16.6 Smoking and Tobacco Products.
6.16.6.1 All State buildings are smoke free. Smoking will not be permitted in any indoor area. The ban on tobacco
products will be observed in all indoor and outdoor areas and parking areas on all State-owned and leased property.
The Contractor shall enforce these restrictions on any individual employed by the Contractor, or a Subcontractor.
6.17 Interruption of Existing Services

6.17.1 Whenever it becomes necessary to interrupt existing services in use by the Owner or its tenants, including but not
limited to sewer, water, gas, and steam lines, electric, telephone, and cable service, the Contractor shall continue the
associated Work on a non-stop 24-hour per day basis until that Work is completed and the service restored, or at an
alternate time required by the Contracting Authority.
6.17.2 Before beginning that Work, the Contractor shall apply in writing to, and receive approval in writing from, the
Owner, through the A/E, to establish a time when interruption of the service will cause a minimum of interference with
the activities of the Owner and its tenants.
6.18 Explosives and Blasting

6.18.1 The Contractor shall not conduct blasting on, or bring explosives to, the Site without the prior written approval of
the Contracting Authority, Owner, and other authorities with jurisdiction.
6.18.2 The Contractor shall perform all blasting, storing, and handling of explosives as required under Applicable Law.
6.18.2.1 The Contractor shall carry appropriate liability insurance coverage, as required by the Contract Documents,
for its blasting and explosives storage and handling operations. Immediately upon request, the Contractor shall
deliver evidence of that insurance to the Contracting Authority.
6.19 Building Commissioning

6.19.1 If the Project scope includes building commissioning, the Contractor shall participate in the Commissioning
Process, as prescribed in the Contract Documents.
6.19.2 The Contractor shall permit the A/E, or a third-party Commissioning Agent (“CxA”) if applicable, access to
commission performance based equipment, fixtures, and/or systems (e.g., HVAC, fire protection, smoke evacuation,
fume hoods, emergency power, etc.), prior to Substantial Completion.
6.19.3 The A/E, or CxA if applicable, shall promptly notify, in writing, the Contractor of any deficiency identified during
the Commissioning Process.
6.19.4 To facilitate the Commissioning Process, the Contractor shall submit 4 sets of Operation and Maintenance
Manuals for dynamic and engineered systems to the A/E, and CxA if applicable, for approval. This submission shall
occur within 30 days following approval of all related Contractor submittals required by the Contract Documents.

6.20 Action Submittals
6.20.1 Submittal Description. Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals for the A/E’s review and
action shall be provided by the Contractor for any item required by the Contract Documents but not fully described in the
Contract Documents, unless waived by the A/E, and include, but are not limited to:
6.20.1.1 construction of the various parts, method of joinery, type of materials, grade, quality and thickness of
materials, alloy of materials, profiles of all sections, reinforcement, method of hanging doors or installing windows,
anchorage, and type and grade of finish;
6.20.1.2 capacities, types of materials and performance charts that are pertinent to the materials, and performance
charts that are pertinent to the equipment item; and
6.20.1.3 wiring diagrams, control diagrams, schematic diagrams, working and erection dimensions, arrangement and
specifications.
6.20.2 Form of Submittals. The Contractor shall provide a transmittal letter, review and stamp its approval, and transmit
the submittals to the A/E in accordance with the submittal schedule established by the A/E and Contractor.
6.20.2.1 The Contractor shall submit a minimum of 1 reproducible and 3 copies of Shop Drawings, and a minimum
of 4 copies of any other submittal, except when using the State’s web-based project management software under
Section 6.20.2.4.
6.20.2.2 The data shown on the Shop Drawings shall be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified
performance and design criteria, materials, and similar data to communicate to the A/E the materials and equipment
that the Contractor proposes to provide.
6.20.2.3 Each Sample shall be identified clearly as to materials, supplier, pertinent data as catalog numbers, the
intended use, and other uses as the A/E may require enabling the A/E to review the submittal.
6.20.2.4 If the Project is administered using the State’s web-based project management software, the Contractor
shall submit electronic files of its submittals for review, using the “Submittals” business process.
6.20.3 Variation from Contract Documents. If the submittals show variations from the requirements of the Contract
Documents, the Contractor shall specifically and clearly identify the variations in its letter of transmittal.
6.20.3.1 Variations that may affect the construction quality, cost or timeline shall be submitted by the A/E to the
Contracting Authority for review, and if approved, shall be incorporated into the Work by Change Order.
6.20.3.2 The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from the Contract Documents by the
A/E’s approval of submittals.
6.20.3.3 Submittals are not Contract Documents. In the event of conflicts between submittals and the Contract
Documents, the Contract Documents take precedence and govern the Work.
6.20.4 Contractor’s Submittal Review. The Contractor shall review and stamp “approved” all submittals before
forwarding them to the A/E. If it is apparent to the A/E that the Contractor has not reviewed the submittals, or has
conducted an incomplete review, the A/E may reject the submittals.
6.20.4.1 The Contractor shall field verify conditions as necessary and make corrections of dimensions, locations of
various items, encroachments of work of Separate Contractors, or variations from the requirements of the Contract
Documents.
6.20.4.2 If required by the Contract Documents or Applicable Law, the Contractor shall have Shop Drawings or
other submittals prepared by Persons possessing expertise and experience in an appropriate trade or profession or by
a registered architect, professional engineer, or other professional.
6.20.4.3 By approving and submitting submittals, the Contractor represents that the Contractor has determined and
verified materials, field measurements, and field construction criteria related to the associated Work, or shall do so,
and has checked and coordinated the information contained within the submittals with the requirements of the Work
and of the Contract Documents.
6.20.5 A/E’s Submittal Review. The A/E shall review submittals for conformity with design intent within 14 days of
receiving them or in accordance with the approved submittal schedule, or other period as mutually agreed by the A/E and
Contractor. The A/E’s review of submittals is to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation
and incorporation into the Work, conform to the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the
Project as a functioning whole.

6.20.5.1 The Contractor shall make corrections required by the A/E and resubmit the required number of corrected
copies of submittals until approved, which resubmission shall be acted upon by the A/E within 14 days of receiving
them, or other period mutually agreed by the A/E and Contractor.
6.20.5.2 When resubmitting corrected submittals, the Contractor shall direct the A/E’s attention to revisions made by
noting revisions on the resubmittal.
6.20.5.3 The Contractor shall pay all reasonable costs of the A/E, Owner, and Contracting Authority for attendant
delay, interference, hindrance or disruption of the Project due to excessive resubmittals without fault of the A/E, the
Owner, or Contracting Authority. Resubmittals in excess of 2 without fault of the A/E, Owner, or Contracting
Authority may be determined excessive by the Contracting Authority.
6.20.5.4 The A/E may hold Samples and other submittals used to coordinate finishes, colors, patterns, textures, or
other characteristics until submittals for adjacent materials are available. The A/E shall issue a written notice to the
Contractor stating that the submittal is being held, within 7 days of receiving it.
6.20.5.5 If coordinating submittals are not received within the period required for action on previously received
submittals that are held in accordance with Section 6.20.5.4, review of the previously received submittals may be
delayed.
6.20.5.6 The A/E’s review shall not extend to means, methods, manners, techniques, sequences, or procedures of
construction, or to safety precautions or incident programs.
6.20.5.7 The review and approval of a separate item shall not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item
functions.
6.20.6 Risk of Nonpayment. The Contractor shall not commence any portion of the Work requiring Shop Drawings,
Product Data, Samples, or other submittals until the submittal has been approved by the A/E. If the Contractor starts
Work before the A/E’s final approval of the submittal, the Contractor does so at its own risk that payment may not be
approved by the Contracting Authority or made by the Owner for the related Work.
6.20.7 Equipment Statement. Shop Drawings on equipment shall include the following written statement from the
manufacturer of the equipment:
6.20.7.1 “This equipment submitted for approval shall perform as specified when installed in the arrangement shown
on this drawing and in the Contract Documents and in conjunction with all other accessories as flues, breechings,
piping, controls, and equipment not furnished by this manufacturer, but required as an accessory or supplement to
this equipment, providing that the accessory or supplementary items perform as specified and are installed as shown
in the Contract Documents.”
.1 The Contractor will be deemed to have included the above statement as required even if the associated
Shop Drawing does not actually contain the statement.
6.20.7.2 This equipment statement shall not be required for Samples, Product Data, and other standard submittals
that are not created specifically for this Project.
6.20.8 Domestic Steel Certifications. The Contractor shall include the following written certifications on the front cover
or initial sheet of each structural steel fabrication Shop Drawing, signed and dated prior to fabrication:
6.20.8.1 “Steel Fabricator Certification: The steel fabricator identified below certifies that for this project all load-
bearing structural steel has been fabricated or produced, to the best of its knowledge, only from steel made in the
United States in accordance with Ohio Revised Code Section 153.011. Further, the steel fabricator hereby certifies
that it has read and understands that a monetary penalty for violations may be imposed under the authority of Ohio
Revised Code Section 153.99.” This certification shall be followed by the name of the fabrication company, name of
the company official signing the certification, the signature of that company official, and the date of that signature.
.1 The Contractor will be deemed to have included the above certification as required even if the associated
Shop Drawing does not actually contain the certification.
6.20.8.2 “Contractor Certification: The contractor identified below certifies that it has required as a condition of
purchase, that for this project all load-bearing structural steel shall be fabricated and produced using, to the best of
its knowledge, only steel made in the United States in accordance with Ohio Revised Code Section 153.011. Further,
the contractor hereby certifies that it has read and understands that a monetary penalty for violations may be
imposed under the authority of Ohio Revised Code Section 153.99.” This certification shall be followed by the name
of the Contractor company, name of the company official signing the certification, the signature of that company
official, and the date of that signature.
.1 The Contractor will be deemed to have included the above certification as required even if the associated
Shop Drawing does not actually contain the certification.

6.21 Warranty
6.21.1 The Contractor warrants to the Contracting Authority and Owner that all materials and equipment furnished under
the Contract shall be new and of good quality unless otherwise required or permitted by the Contract Documents, that the
Work shall be free from defects not inherent in the quality required or permitted, and that the Work shall conform to the
requirements of the Contract Documents. Work not conforming to those requirements, including Substitutions not
properly approved and authorized, may be considered Defective Work. If required by the A/E, the Contractor shall
furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment.
6.21.1.1 If the Contractor or a Subcontractor recommends a particular product, material, system, or item of
equipment for incorporation into the Project and the Owner accepts that recommendation, the above warranty
includes a warranty from the Contractor to the Owner that the recommended product, material, system, or item of
equipment is fit and appropriate for the associated purpose.
6.22 Uncovering the Work

6.22.1 If the Contractor covers Work contrary to the requirements of the Contract Documents or contrary to the written
request of the Contracting Authority or A/E, the Contractor shall, if the Contracting Authority or A/E requests in writing,
uncover that Work for observation, correct it if not in conformity with the Contract Documents, and recover it at the
Contractor’s expense without adjustment of the Contract Times.
6.22.2 If the Contractor covers Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and not contrary to a request from the
A/E or Contracting Authority for an opportunity to observe the Work prior to covering, the Contractor shall, if the A/E
requests in writing, uncover that Work.
6.22.2.1 If the uncovered Work is Defective Work, the Contractor shall pay the costs of uncovering, correcting, and
recovering the Work and shall not be entitled to an adjustment of the Contract Times.
6.22.2.2 If the uncovered Work is not Defective Work and the Contractor believes that it is entitled to an adjustment
of the Contract Sum or Contract Times, or both, on account of the uncovering and recovering of the Work, the
Contractor may request a Change Order by giving written notice under Section 7.3.2 within 7 days after the
Contracting Authority or A/E observes the uncovered Work.
6.23 Correction of the Work

6.23.1 Before Substantial Completion.
6.23.1.1 If the Contractor provides Defective Work or fails or neglects to perform the Work in accordance with the
Construction Progress Schedule, the Contracting Authority or A/E may issue a written notice to the Contractor and
Contractor’s Surety directing the Contractor to correct the Defective Work or recover schedule deficiencies. Unless
otherwise specified in that written notice, the Contractor shall begin to correct the Defective Work and recover the
schedule deficiencies within no more than three days after the Contracting Authority issues the written notice (“72-
Hour Notice“).
6.23.1.2 If the Contractor fails to promptly commence and diligently pursue correction of Defective Work or
recovery of schedule deficiencies required under Section 6.23.1.1, the Owner may correct the Defective Work or
take action to recover schedule deficiencies without giving further notice to the Contractor or Contractor’s Surety.
6.23.2 After Substantial Completion.
6.23.2.1 In addition to the Contractor’s other obligations under the Contract Documents, if any of the Work is found
to be Defective Work after Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of written
notice from the A/E, Contracting Authority, or Owner to do so, unless the Contracting Authority and Owner have
previously acknowledged and accepted the Defective Work in writing. The A/E, Contracting Authority, or Owner
may send a copy of the written notice to the Contractor’s Surety, but are not obligated to do so.
6.23.2.2 During the Correction Period. If the Contracting Authority or Owner issues a notice under Section 6.23.2.1
during the Correction Period, the Owner may correct the Defective Work itself without giving further notice to the
Contractor or Contractor’s Surety if the Contractor fails to (1) notify the Owner in writing of the Contractor’s intent
to correct the Defective Work within 7 days after the Contracting Authority or Owner issues the notice and
(2) thereafter promptly commence and diligently pursue correction of Defective Work.
6.23.2.3 The Correction Period:
.1 commences on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or a designated portion of the Work which
the Contracting Authority and Owner have agreed to take Partial Occupancy;

.2 relates only to the Contractor’s specific obligation and opportunity to correct the Work during the
Correction Period;
.3 does not establish a period of limitation with respect to any of the Contractor’s other obligations under the
Contract Documents;
.4 has no relationship to the time within which the State or Owner may seek to enforce the Contract;
.5 does not establish a period of limitation within respect to the commencement of litigation to establish the
Contractor’s liability under the Contract or otherwise; and
.6 shall not be extended by corrective Work performed by the Contractor under this Section 6.23.2.
6.23.2.4 After the Correction Period. If the Owner issues notice under Section 6.23.2.1 after expiration of the
Correction Period, the Owner may correct the Defective Work without giving further notice to the Contractor or
Contractor’s Surety if the Contractor fails to (1) notify the Owner in writing of the Contractor’s intent to correct the
Defective Work within 14 days after the Owner issues the notice and (2) thereafter promptly commence and
diligently pursue correction of Defective Work.
6.23.3 Emergency Correction of Defective Work.
6.23.3.1 Notwithstanding any other provision of the Contract to the contrary, if in the Contracting Authority or
Owner’s opinion the Defective Work presents a threat of imminent harm or danger to people, property, or the
environment, the Contracting Authority or Owner may order the Contractor to immediately correct Defective Work
or the Owner may correct the Defective Work itself without any prior notice to the Contractor or Contractor’s
Surety.
6.23.4 Responsibility for Costs of Correction.
6.23.4.1 The Contractor shall pay all of the costs and damages associated with the correction of Defective Work and
the recovery of schedule deficiencies under this Section 6.23. Those costs and damages may include, but are not
limited to, the related fees and charges of contractors, engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals; and
the cost of correcting or replacing adjacent work. The Contracting Authority may deduct those costs and damages
from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor. If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not
sufficient to cover those amounts, the Contractor shall immediately pay the amount of the insufficiency to the
Owner.
6.24 Acceptance of Defective Work

6.24.1 The Owner may accept any Defective Work instead of requiring its removal or correction, in which case the
Contract Sum must be equitably reduced as described under Article 7.
6.24.1.1 The Owner may only accept Defective Work though a deduct Change Order that makes explicit reference
to this Section 6.24.
6.24.2 None of the following will constitute (1) acceptance of Defective Work, (2) a release of the Contractor’s
obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract, or (3) a waiver of any rights set forth in the Contract or
otherwise provided by Applicable Law:
6.24.2.1 observations or inspections by the Owner, Contracting Authority, or A/E;
6.24.2.2 the making of any payment;
6.24.2.3 Substantial Completion or the issuance of a Certificate of Substantial Completion;
6.24.2.4 Partial Occupancy and the Owner’s use or occupancy of the Work or any part of it;
6.24.2.5 Contract Completion or the issuance of a partial or final Certificate of Contract Completion;
6.24.2.6 any review or approval of a submittal;
6.24.2.7 any inspection, test, or approval by other Persons; or
6.24.2.8 any correction of Defective Work by the Owner.
6.25 Project Document Maintenance and Submittal

6.25.1 During Construction.
6.25.1.1 The Contractor shall maintain in good order at a secure location on the Site:
.1 a complete copy of all Contract Documents; Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar required
submittals; manufacturer operating and maintenance instructions; certificates; warranties; RFIs and
responses thereto; and other Project-related documents, all marked currently and accurately to record field

changes and selections made during construction and to show actual installation where installation varies
from Work as originally shown, including the exact location and depth of underground utility lines; and
.2 a set of Drawings and Specifications, approved in accordance with Section 5.2.1.1, and the records
required by Section 6.2.17.
6.25.1.2 Before submitting each Contractor Payment Request, the Contractor shall record all changes on the
Contract Documents, neatly in a contrasting color, noting new information not shown on the original Contract
Documents. Failure to record all changes may cause payment to be withheld or delayed by the Contracting
Authority.
6.25.1.3 The Contractor shall keep a record of changes made to the Specifications, noting particularly any approved
variation from manufacturer’s installation instructions and recommendations.
6.25.1.4 If the Contractor uses Shop Drawings to indicate as-built conditions, the Contractor shall cross-reference
the Shop Drawing sheet numbers to the corresponding sheet numbers on the Contract Documents. The Contractor
shall note related numbers where applicable.
6.25.1.5 The Contractor shall at all times permit access to the documents described in this Section 6.25.1 to
authorized representatives of the State, local authorities having jurisdiction, Contracting Authority, Owner, and A/E.
6.25.2 Before Contract Completion.
6.25.2.1 The Contractor, as a condition precedent to execution of the Certificate of Contract Completion and final
payment, shall organize the As-Built Documents into manageable sets, bind the sets with durable paper cover sheets,
and deliver the As-Built Documents to the A/E.
6.25.2.2 The Contractor’s As-Built Documents submission shall include, but is not limited to:
.1 Certificate of Occupancy;
.2 inspection certificates for pressure piping, elevator, boiler, electrical, plumbing or piping purification, etc.;
.3 Letter of Approval from the local fire authority or State Fire Marshal for the fire suppression system;
.4 Operation and Maintenance Manuals, organized into suitable sets of manageable size. Indexed data bound
in individual binders, with pocket folders for folded sheet information and appropriate identification
marked on the front and the spine of each binder;
.5 neatly and accurately marked sets of As-Built Documents, and other Contract Documents reflecting the
actual construction of the Project;
.6 detailed Drawings reflecting the exact location of any concealed utilities, mechanical or electrical systems,
and components;
.7 assignment to the Owner of all warranties and guarantees, including the most-recent address and telephone
number of any Subcontractors or manufacturers;
.8 an affidavit to certify that all Subcontractors have been paid in full for all Work performed or materials
furnished for the Project;
.9 final certified payroll reports; and
.10 an affidavit to certify that the Contractor and each of its Subcontractors, regardless of tier, have complied
with all requirements of ORC Chapter 4115.
6.25.2.3 By submitting the As-Built Documents to the A/E, the Contractor certifies that its As-Built Documents are
complete, correct, and accurate.
6.25.3 Record Documents.
6.25.3.1 The A/E shall revise the original Contract Documents and related electronic files with the information
contained on the As-Built Documents. The A/E shall label the revised original Contract Documents and related
electronic files as “Record Documents” and reflect the date of the A/E’s incorporation of the As-Built Documents.
6.25.3.2 The Owner may thereafter use the Record Documents for any purpose relating to the Project including, but
not limited to, additions to or completion of the Project.
6.26 Final Cleaning

6.26.1 Before requesting the Substantial Completion inspection of the Work, the Contractor shall clean the Site, remove
waste materials and rubbish attributable to the Project, and restore the property to its original condition so that upon
Substantial Completion, the premises are ready for occupancy by the Owner.

6.26.2 If the Contractor performs any Work after final cleaning, the Contractor shall clean the affected area as provided
above so that upon Substantial Completion, the premises are ready for occupancy by the Owner.
6.26.3 Final cleaning shall be done to the reasonable satisfaction of the A/E and Contracting Authority.
6.27 Substantial Completion

6.27.1 Contractor’s Punch List.
6.27.1.1 When the Contractor considers the Work, or a designated portion thereof, Substantially Complete the
Contractor shall inspect the Work and prepare a list of Defective Work and incomplete or unacceptable Work
(“Contractor’s Punch List“). The Contractor shall list all items of Work not in compliance with the Contract
Documents, including items the Contractor is requesting to be deferred.
.1 The Contractor shall proceed to correct all items listed on the Contractor’s Punch List and certify that the
incomplete items listed on the Contractor’s Punch List are to its knowledge an accurate and complete list
by signing the Contractor’s Punch List.
.2 The Contractor’s failure to include an item on the Contractor’s Punch List shall not alter the Contractor’s
responsibility to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
.3 The Contractor shall submit the signed Contractor’s Punch List to the A/E, together with a request for the
Substantial Completion inspection of the Work.
shall submit the Contractor’s Punch List, using the “Punch List” business process.
6.27.2 Substantial Completion Inspection.
6.27.2.1 Within 3 business days after receipt of the request for the Substantial Completion inspection of the Work,
the A/E shall notify the Contractor of acceptance or rejection of the request, stating reasons for any rejection.
.1 Within 7 days after its acceptance of the Contractor’s request, the A/E shall conduct the Substantial
Completion inspection to determine whether the Work, or designated portion, is in conformity with the
Contract Documents and Substantially Complete. The A/E shall notify the Contractor, Contracting
Authority, and Owner of the scheduled time of the inspection.
.2 If the A/E determines that the Work is Substantially Complete, within 3 business days after the Substantial
Completion inspection, the A/E shall prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion that shall establish the
date of Substantial Completion and include a list of Defective, incomplete, or unacceptable Work (“A/E’s
Punch List“). The A/E’s Punch List shall include (1) the items on the Contractor’s Punch List that are not
yet completed or corrected as of the date of the Substantial Completion inspection, and (2) comments from
the Contracting Authority and Owner.
.3 The A/E shall submit the Certificate of Substantial Completion to the Contracting Authority, Owner, and
Contractor for their written acceptance. Upon their acceptance and consent of the Contractor’s Surety, and
subject to the Owner’s right to withhold payment, the Owner shall release retainage as described under
Section 9.7.2.
.4 The A/E’s failure to include an item on the A/E’s Punch List shall not alter the Contractor’s responsibility
to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
.5 If the A/E accepts the request and subsequently determines that the Work is not Substantially Complete, the
A/E may request compensation for expenses related to excessive Punch List activities. The Contracting
Authority may deduct that additional compensation to the A/E from payments then or thereafter due the
Contractor. If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover those amounts, the
Contractor shall immediately pay the amount of the insufficiency to the Owner.
6.27.3 Completion of Punch List Items.
6.27.3.1 Within 30 days after the date of Substantial Completion and before the date of Final Contract Completion,
the Contractor shall complete all items on the A/E’s Punch List. After completing all items on the A/E’s Punch List,
the Contractor shall provide a written request for Final Inspection of the Work to the A/E.
.1 If Work on the A/E’s Punch List cannot be timely completed, the Contractor shall justify in writing to the
reasonable satisfaction of the Contracting Authority and A/E, the reasons the items cannot be completed,
and the Contractor may propose, for the Contracting Authority and A/E’s approval, a time when the
Contractor shall complete those items.
.2 Within 3 business days after receipt of the request for the Final Inspection of the Work, the A/E shall
complete a Final Inspection of the Work for compliance with the Contract Documents.

.3 If multiple inspections of items on the A/E’s Punch List are required due to the Contractor’s failure to
properly and timely complete them, the Contractor shall pay any additional costs incurred by the A/E,
Owner, and Contracting Authority resulting from any attendant delay. The Contracting Authority may
deduct those additional costs from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor. If payments then or
thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover those amounts, the Contractor shall immediately
pay the amount of the insufficiency to the Owner.
shall receive the A/E’s Punch List and submit its written request for Final Inspection of the Work, using the “Punch
List” business process.
6.28 Partial Occupancy

6.28.1 The Owner may occupy or use a portion of the Project prior to Contract Completion if:
6.28.1.1 the building authority with jurisdiction over the Project issues a partial certificate of occupancy for the
portion of the Project the Owner intends to occupy;
6.28.1.2 the A/E with the Owner’s assistance has provided written notice of the Partial Occupancy to the insurers
providing property insurance for the Project; and
6.28.1.3 the Contracting Authority has received notice of the Partial Occupancy from the A/E and has consented to
it.
6.28.2 Before the Owner commences Partial Occupancy, the Owner, Contracting Authority, A/E, and Contractor shall
proceed as described under Section 6.27 for the area designated for Partial Occupancy.
6.28.3 The Contractor shall be relieved of the obligation to maintain the area accepted for Partial Occupancy, but shall
remain obligated to complete and correct the Work and to carry the insurance required by the Contract Documents
during performance of any such Work.
6.29 Demonstration and Training, Operating Appurtenances

6.29.1 The Contractor, as a condition precedent to execution of the Certificate of Contract Completion and final
payment, shall perform demonstration and training of the Owner’s maintenance personnel as specified in the Contract
Documents.
6.29.2 The Contractor, as a condition precedent to execution of the Certificate of Contract Completion and final
payment, shall organize and submit operating appurtenances and loose items related to operation and maintenance of the
completed Project to the Owner, including, but not limited to:
6.29.2.1 keys to door and window hardware, panels, and other devices not directly provided to the Owner from the
manufacturer;
6.29.2.2 operating handles, levers, cranks, specialized wrenches or drivers, remote controls, and similar items; and
6.29.2.3 extra materials (e.g., attic stock).
6.30 Contract Completion

6.30.1 Partial Contract Completion.
6.30.1.1 When items of Work cannot be completed until a subsequent date, the A/E shall prepare a partial Certificate
of Contract Completion that shall include a detailed list of the deferred Work and the date(s) by which the
Contractor will complete that Work.
6.30.1.2 The A/E shall submit the partial Certificate of Contract Completion to the Contracting Authority, Owner,
and Contractor for their written acceptance. Upon their acceptance of the partial Certificate of Contract Completion
and consent of the Contractor’s Surety, the Contracting Authority may release payment to the Contractor, as
determined in the sole discretion of the Contracting Authority.
6.30.2 Final Contract Completion.
6.30.2.1 When all items on the A/E’s Punch List have been completed to the satisfaction of the A/E, all requirements
of the Contract Documents have been completed, and the provisions of Sections 6.25 through 6.29 have been
fulfilled, the A/E shall prepare and recommend execution of a final Certificate of Contract Completion.
6.30.2.2 The date that the Contracting Authority executes the final Certificate of Contract Completion is the date of

ARTICLE 7 - MODIFICATIONS
7.1 General
7.1.1 Changes in the Work.
7.1.1.1 The Contracting Authority may order changes in the Work without invalidating the Contract. Subject to the
limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents, a change in the Work may be
accomplished by a Change Order, Change Directive, or order for a minor change in the Work.
.1 The Contractor shall proportionately increase the amount of the Bond whenever the Contract Sum is
increased.
.2 If notice of any change affecting the Contract is required by the provision of any Bond, notice is the
Contractor’s responsibility, and the amount of each applicable Bond shall be adjusted accordingly.
7.1.1.2 The Contractor shall not proceed with any change in the Work without the Contracting Authority’s prior
written authorization except as provided under Sections 1.10 and 7.5.
7.1.1.3 Except as provided in Section 1.10, the Contractor’s failure to obtain prior written authorization for a change
in the Work constitutes a waiver by the Contractor of an adjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Times, or both,
for the related Work.
7.1.1.4 The Contractor shall perform all changes in the Work under the applicable provisions of the Contract
Documents, and the Contractor shall proceed promptly with the change unless otherwise provided in the Change
Order, Change Directive, or order for a minor change in the Work
7.1.2 Paperwork Consolidation.
7.1.2.1 Related Modifications, with the same or similar justification (e.g., Owner Request or field resolution), may
be consolidated into the same Change Order.
7.1.2.2 Add and deduct Modifications, with the same or similar justification, may be included on the same Change
Order.
7.1.2.3 Modifications resulting from errors or omissions shall not be combined with other modifications for which
the A/E will receive a fee.
7.1.3 Modification Numbering.
7.1.3.1 The A/E shall assign a number to each Modification, which shall uniquely identify it.
7.1.3.2 The A/E shall not duplicate or reuse any number throughout the Project or reuse assigned numbers for
Proposal Requests that are initiated but cancelled in process.
7.1.3.3 The number for each Change Order shall be coordinated with any associated Proposal Request or Change
Directive.
7.1.4 Modification Log.
7.1.4.1 The A/E shall create and maintain a Modification Log for the Project, which shall contain the following
minimum information:
.1 number of the Modification;
.2 a brief description of the Modification;
.3 cost of the Modification;
.4 schedule impact of the Modification; and
.5 dates sent to, and received from, the parties.
7.1.5 Reconciliation of Unit Price Items.
7.1.5.1 The Contracting Authority may increase, decrease, or delete entirely the scheduled quantities of Work to be
performed and materials to be furnished by Change Order.
7.1.5.2 The A/E shall issue a Change Order to reconcile the difference between the scheduled and actual quantities
of Work performed and materials furnished.
7.1.5.3 If the actual quantity of a Unit Price item differs from the scheduled quantity by 20 percent or more, so that
application of the Unit Price to the quantities of Work proposed would create an undue hardship on either the Owner
or Contractor, the A/E shall issue a Proposal Request and subsequent Change Order to adjust the Unit Price.
.1 If a Unit Price is adjusted as described under Section 7.1.5.3, the new Unit Price will only apply to the
units of Work performed that are (1) less than the 20 percent threshold if the Unit Price is changed on

account of an over-estimation of the scheduled quantity of a Unit Price item involved in the Work or (2) in
excess of the 20 percent threshold if the Unit Price is changed on account of an under-estimation of the
scheduled quantity of a Unit Price item involved in the Work.
7.1.5.4 If the actual quantity of a Unit Price item exceeds the scheduled quantity by 20 percent or more, the
Contractor shall immediately notify the A/E, who shall issue a Change Directive and subsequent Change Order to
authorize an adjustment in the scheduled quantity.
7.2 Change Order Procedure

7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the A/E and executed by the Contracting Authority and
Contractor, stating their agreement upon all of the following:
7.2.1.1 a change in the Work;
7.2.1.2 the amount of the adjustment of the Contract Sum, if any; and
7.2.1.3 the extent of the adjustment of the Contract Times, if any.
7.2.2 Except with the Contracting Authority’s written consent as explicitly provided under Section 7.4.8, the Contractor
is not entitled to reserve any rights or take other similar action with respect to a Change Order if the effect or intent of the
reservation or action would be to accommodate a further adjustment of the Contract Sum or Contract Times, or both,
after the Contractor signs the Change Order. By signing a Change Order, the Contractor irrevocably certifies that the
elements of a Change Order described in Section 7.2.1 are completely satisfied, and waives all rights, if any, to seek
further adjustment of the Contract Sum or Contract Times, or both, at a later date with respect to the associated change in
the Work including without limitation on account of the “cumulative impact” of the associated change in the Work in
combination with one or more other changes in the Work.
7.2.3 The A/E shall prepare each Change Order form, attach the supporting documentation, and issue the Change Order
to the Contractor for signature.
7.2.4 If the Contractor is in agreement with the Change Order under Section 7.2.1, the Contractor shall sign and return
the Change Order to the A/E within 3 days after receiving it.
indicate its agreement with the Change Order using the “Change Order” or “Contract Modifications” business
process.
7.2.5 When the A/E receives the Change Order signed by the Contractor, the A/E will recommend approval by signing
the form and transmitting the Change Order and the revised Change Order Log to the Owner.
7.2.6 When the Owner receives the Change Order, the Owner may sign the form accepting the Change Order, attach
certification of funding, and transmit the Change Order to the Contracting Authority; or, if the Owner does not accept the
Change Order, the Owner will reject and return it to the A/E.
7.2.7 When the Contracting Authority receives the Change Order, the Contracting Authority may sign the form
approving the Change Order, and transmit the fully executed Change Order to all signers; or, if the Contracting Authority
does not accept the Change Order, the Contracting Authority will reject and return it to the A/E.
7.2.8 When the Change Order is signed by the Contractor, A/E, Owner, and Contracting Authority, the fully executed
Change Order modifies the Contract Documents and authorizes and directs the Contractor to proceed, and the Contractor
shall promptly proceed with the associated change in the Work.
7.3 Initiation of Change Orders

7.3.1 Proposal Request.
7.3.1.1 The A/E shall prepare and issue a Proposal Request to the Contractor to obtain the Contractor’s Proposal for
the adjustment of the Contract Sum or the Contract Times, or both, associated with a contemplated Modification.
.1 In any Proposal for an adjustment of the Contract Sum, the Contractor shall specifically identify the items
set forth in Section 7.7.
.2 In any Proposal for an adjustment of the Contract Times, the Contractor shall specifically identify the items
set forth in Section 7.8.
.3 The Contractor’s cost of preparing and providing Proposals is included in the Contract Sum.

7.3.1.2 The Contractor shall respond with a Proposal to the A/E and Contracting Authority within 14 days after
receiving the Proposal Request. The allowable time for the Contractor’s response may be extended by written
agreement of the Contractor and A/E.
7.3.1.3 The Contractor shall hold the Proposal valid and open for acceptance for at least 45 days. The acceptance
period may be adjusted by mutual consent of the Contractor and Contracting Authority. The time limits described
under this Section 7.3.1.3 apply only to Proposals submitted in response to a Proposal Request.
7.3.1.4 A Proposal may be accepted by the Contracting Authority only through a Change Order. A Proposal Request
does not authorize the Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work.
7.3.1.5 If the Contractor does not timely submit a Proposal within the time required in Section 7.3.1.2, the
Contractor waives its right to an adjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Times, or both, associated with the
contemplated change in the Work.
respond to a Proposal Request issued by the A/E with its Proposal using the “Change Order” or “Contract
Modifications” business process.
7.3.2 Request for Change Order.
7.3.2.1 The Contractor may initiate a change in the Work by submitting written notice to the A/E accompanied by a
Proposal meeting the requirements of Section 7.3.1.
initiate its Request for Change Order using the “Change Order” or “Contract Modifications” business process with
the “Request for Change Order” workflow.
7.4 Change Directives

7.4.1 A Change Directive is a written order prepared by the A/E and executed by the Contracting Authority directing a
change in the Work and may, if necessary:
7.4.1.1 state a proposed basis for adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum or Contract Times, or both; or
7.4.1.2 limit the scope of the change in the Work on a time and materials basis, not to exceed a fixed adjustment of
the Contract Sum.
7.4.2 If a change in the Work must start immediately to avoid an imminent impact to the schedule of the Project, the A/E
may prepare a Change Directive for the Contracting Authority’s and the Owner’s signatures pursuant to Section 7.4.1,
authorizing the Contractor to proceed.
7.4.3 A Change Directive shall be used to direct a change in the Work in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a
Change Order.
7.4.3.1 For the purposes of clarity, the Contract refers to a Change Directive as if it is only to be used in the absence
of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order concerning the associated change of the Work. A Change
Directive may also be used in the absence of agreement as to whether the subject of the Change Directive actually
constitutes a change in the Work; such as the situation described under Section 7.5.3.
7.4.4 Upon receipt of a Change Directive, the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work involved.
7.4.5 The Contractor may sign the Change Directive to accept the proposed basis for adjustment, if any, of the Contract
Sum or Contract Times, or both. Thereafter, the A/E shall prepare and the A/E, Contracting Authority, Owner, and
Contractor shall promptly execute an associated Change Order as described under Section 7.2.
7.4.6 Within 14 days after receiving the Change Directive, the Contractor shall respond with a Proposal meeting the
requirements of Section 7.3.1 to the A/E and Contracting Authority for adjustment of the Contract Sum or Contract
Times, or both, on account of the change, unless the Change Directive is performed on a time and materials basis under
Section 7.4.1.2. If the Change Directive is performed on a time and materials basis, the Contractor shall submit its
Proposal within 7 days after completing the Work.
7.4.6.1 The Proposal for the adjustment of the Contract Sum, if any, shall include: (1) written documentation as
described under Section 7.7; and (2) a written statement from the Contractor that the proposed adjustment is the
entire adjustment in the Contract Sum associated with the change.
7.4.6.2 The Proposal for the change in the Contract Times, if any, shall include: (1) written documentation as
described under Section 7.8; and (2) a written statement from the Contractor that the proposed adjustment is the
entire adjustment of the Contract Times associated with the change.

7.4.7 If the Contractor does not respond to a Change Directive as required under Section 7.4.5 or Section 7.4.6, the
Contracting Authority shall determine the adjustments, if any, of the Contract Sum and Contract Times. If the Contractor
does not agree with the Contracting Authority’s determination, the Contractor shall initiate a Claim under Article 8
within 10 days of the date that the Contracting Authority issues its determination, and the Contractor’s failure to do so
shall constitute an irrevocable waiver of the Claim.
7.4.8 Pending final determination of the total adjustment of the Contract Times on account of a Change Directive, the
period of time not in dispute for that change in the Work may be included in the Construction Progress Schedule
accompanied by a Change Order indicating the parties’ agreement with part or all of the time adjustment.
7.4.9 If the Contracting Authority, Owner, and Contractor agree on the adjustments of the Contract Sum and Contract
Times associated with a Change Directive, the A/E shall prepare an appropriate Change Order within 7 days after
receiving the Contractor’s Proposal. The A/E, Contracting Authority, Owner, and Contractor shall promptly sign the
Change Order as described under Section 7.2.
7.4.10 If the Contracting Authority, Owner, and Contractor do not agree on the adjustments of the Contract Sum and
Contract Times associated with a Change Directive within 60 days after the Change Directive is issued, the Contracting
Authority shall determine the adjustments, if any, of the Contract Sum and Contract Times. If the Contractor does not
agree with the Contracting Authority’s determination, the Contractor shall initiate a Claim under Article 8 within 10 days
of the date that the Contracting Authority issues its determination, and the Contractor’s failure to do so shall constitute
an irrevocable waiver of the Claim.
respond to a Change Directive issued by the A/E with its Proposal using the “Change Order” or “Contract
Modifications” business process.
7.5 Minor Changes in the Work

7.5.1 The A/E may order minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment of the Contract Sum or extension of the
Contract Times and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Those changes shall be effected by
written order issued to the Contractor.
7.5.2 The Contractor shall promptly carry out each order for a minor change in the Work if the Contractor agrees that the
order does not involve adjustment of the Contract Sum or Contract Times, or both.
7.5.3 If the Contractor reasonably believes that it would be entitled to an adjustment of the Contract Sum or Contract
Times, or both, on account of an order for a minor change in the Work, the Contractor, within 3 business days after
receiving the order, shall give the Contracting Authority and A/E written notice of the Contractor’s position, and not
proceed with the subject Work without first receiving a Change Directive or Change Order related to it.
7.5.4 The Contractor waives its right to an adjustment of the Contract Sum or Contract Times on account of an order for
a minor change in the Work by:
7.5.4.1 starting the Work that is the subject of the order for a minor change in the Work; or
7.5.4.2 failing to give the notice described under Section 7.5.3 within 3 business days after receiving the order for a
minor change in the Work.
7.5.5 If the Project is administered using the State’s web-based project management software, the order for a minor
change in the Work shall be documented through the “Action Items” business process.
7.6 Differing Site Conditions

7.6.1 If the Contractor encounters a Differing Site Condition, the Contractor shall stop Work on that Differing Site
Condition and give immediate written notice of the condition to the A/E and Contracting Authority.
7.6.1.1 The Contractor’s failure to give notice of the Differing Site Condition as required under this Section 7.6.1
shall constitute an irrevocable waiver of any associated Claim.
7.6.1.2 The written notice of a Differing Site Condition under this Section 7.6.1 shall be required before the notice
of Claim under Article 8.
7.6.2 Promptly after receiving notice from the Contractor under Section 7.6.1, the A/E shall investigate to determine
whether the Contractor has encountered a Differing Site Condition. The A/E shall give written notice of its determination
to the Contracting Authority and Contractor within 10 days after completing the investigation.

7.6.2.1 If the A/E determines that the Contractor has encountered a Differing Site Condition and the Contracting
Authority agrees with the A/E’s determination, the A/E shall process an appropriate Change Order.
7.6.2.2 If the A/E determines that the Contractor has encountered a Differing Site Condition but the Contracting
Authority disagrees with the A/E’s determination, the A/E shall process an appropriate Change Directive through
which the Contracting Authority may convey its disagreement with the A/E’s determination.
7.6.2.3 If the A/E determines that the Contractor has not encountered a Differing Site Condition and the Contractor
does not agree with that determination, the Contractor must initiate a Claim under Article 8 within 10 days of the
date that the A/E issues its determination.
7.7 Change Order Cost or Credit Determination

7.7.1 General.
7.7.1.1 The maximum cost or credit resulting from a change in the Work shall be determined as described below.
.1 Proposals shall include the information required by Section 7.7.1.4.
.2 A Unit Price Proposal shall only be valid when incorporated into the Contract by Change Order.
.3 The maximum cost or credit includes all compensation for impact costs. Additional costs for impacts shall
not be allowed.
7.7.1.2 The Contractor shall not assign any portion of the Work to another Person whereby the Contractor would
benefit directly or indirectly from the double application of charges for overhead or profit.
7.7.1.3 The Contracting Authority may require notarized invoices for material costs and may audit the records of the
Contractor and Subcontractors.
7.7.1.4 For each change in the Work, the Contractor shall furnish a detailed Proposal itemized on the Proposal
Worksheet Summary Form (Contractor) published by the Ohio Facilities Construction Commission through which
the Contractor shall document the related changes in the Contract Sum as described under Section 7.7.2. Any
Subcontractor pricing shall be itemized on the appropriate Proposal Worksheet Summary Form.
7.7.1.5 Section 7.7.2 establishes the exclusive and maximum amount that the Owner shall pay for any Change
Order, including, but not limited to, all amounts for interference with, delay, hindrance, disruption, or impact of the
Work (“Pricing Criteria“). These Pricing Criteria also govern the value of deduct Change Orders and the
Contractor’s entitlement to additional compensation or damages through the Claims and dispute resolution processes
on account of changes in the Work. In order to expedite the review and approval process, Proposals shall be
prepared in the categories and order listed in Section 7.7.2.
7.7.2 Pricing Criteria.
7.7.2.1 Contractor Personnel Costs: The Contractor’s on-Site management (including supervision and administrative
personnel) not subject to prevailing wage under to ORC Chapter 4115. These costs will be calculated on an hourly
basis according to the rates acceptable to the Contracting Authority.
.1 In no event will the Contractor be entitled to an increase in the Contract Sum on account of Contractor
Personnel Costs unless the Contractor actually incurs additional Contractor Personnel Costs solely on
account of the associated change in the Work.
.2 Under no conditions will the increase under this Section 7.7.2.1 exceed those additional Contractor
Personnel Costs the Contractor actually incurs.
7.7.2.2 Labor: Field labor directly involved in the Work based upon the actual rate of pay to the worker. If the
Project is subject to payment of prevailing wage rates, field labor shall be paid according to the relevant
classification of labor as established in the applicable prevailing wage determination for the Project locality, as
determined by the Ohio Department of Commerce, Wage and Hour Bureau.
.1 In no event will the Contractor be entitled to an increase in the Contract Sum on account of labor costs
unless the Contractor actually incurs additional labor costs solely on account of the associated change in the
Work.
.2 Under no conditions will the increase under this Section 7.7.2.2 exceed those additional labor costs the
Contractor actually incurs.
.3 The cost for supervision above the level of working forepersons (such as general forepersons,
superintendent, project manager, etc.) is included in the adjustment under Section 7.7.2.1 for the
Contractor and under Section 7.7.2.10 for Subcontractors.
7.7.2.3 Fringes: Fringe benefit credit for labor provided under Section 7.7.2.2 is only allowable for prevailing wage
fringe benefits pursuant to ORC Chapter 4115, including, but not limited to, Health and Welfare, vacation,

apprenticeship training, and certain types of pension plans. The parties shall defer to the Ohio Department of
Commerce’s policy on which benefits are granted fringe benefit credit. Each fringe benefit for which credit is
requested shall be calculated on an hourly basis and listed as a separate line item. The Contractor shall submit
documentation supporting the calculation of the amounts for each fringe benefit for each worker classification,
including labor provided by Subcontractors.
7.7.2.4 Allowable Payroll Expenses: Allowable payroll expenses for labor provided under Section 7.7.2.2 including
payroll taxes as well as other benefits that are required by Applicable Law, such as federal and state Unemployment
and Workers’ Compensation shall each be a separate line item and shall not be credited for compliance with ORC
Chapter 4115.
7.7.2.5 Equipment Rentals: All charges for certain non-owned heavy or specialized equipment at up to 100 percent
of the documented rental cost. No rental charges shall be allowed for hand tools, minor equipment, simple scaffolds,
etc. Downtime due to repairs, maintenance and weather delays shall not be allowed. Contractor shall submit copies
of actual paid invoices to substantiate rental costs.
7.7.2.6 Owned Equipment: All charges for certain heavy or specialized equipment owned by the Contractor or
Subcontractor performing the Work at up to 100 percent of the cost listed by the current edition of the Associated
Equipment Distributors’ AED Green Book heavy equipment rental rates. No recovery shall be allowed for hand
tools, minor equipment, simple scaffolds, etc. The longest period of time that the equipment is to be required for the
Work shall be the basis for the pricing. Downtime due to repairs, maintenance, and weather delays shall not be
allowed.
7.7.2.7 Trucking: A reasonable delivery charge or per-mile trucking charge for delivery of required materials or
equipment. Charges for use of a pick-up truck shall not be allowed.
7.7.2.8 Materials: The actual cost (including all discounts, rebates or related credits) of all materials incorporated
into the changed Work. Documentation shall show costs, quantities, or Unit Prices of all items, as appropriate.
.1 The cost or credit for reusable materials (e.g., concrete form lumber, shoring, or temporary enclosures)
shall be limited to 33 percent of the material cost for each use.
7.7.2.9 Contractor’s General Conditions Costs: The Contractor’s General Conditions Costs to the extent attributable
to an associated change in the Contract Time for achievement of Substantial Completion resulting from the change
in the Work.
.1 In no event shall the Contract Sum adjustment per day of Contract Time adjustment exceed an amount
equal to (1) the sum of the General Conditions Costs line items in the Contractor’s Schedule of Values
approved by the Contracting Authority, (2) divided by the total number of days of the original Contract
Time for achievement of Substantial Completion.
.2 The Contractor shall (1) exclude the Bond premium from the Schedule of Values for the purposes of the
calculation under Section 7.7.2.9.1, and (2) include the actual adjustment of the Bond premium attributable
to an associated change in the Contract Sum.
.3 If the Contractor purchases the builder’s risk insurance for the Project, the Contractor shall (1) exclude the
builder’s risk insurance premium from the Schedule of Values for the purposes of the calculation under
Section 7.7.2.9.1, and (2) include the actual adjustment of the builder’s risk insurance premium attributable
to an associated change in the Contract Sum.
7.7.2.10 Subcontractor Overhead and Profit: Adjustment of the Contract Sum on account of a change in
Subcontractor-performed Work shall include the Subcontractor’s aggregate overhead and profit allowance equal to
15 percent of the sum of the Subcontractor’s costs described under Sections 7.7.2.2 through 7.7.2.8 that are
associated with that changed Work.
.1 The allowance applies to each Subcontractor tier.
.2 The allowance covers: the costs required to schedule and coordinate the Work, telephone, telephone
charges, facsimile, telegrams, postage, photos, photocopying, hand tools, simple scaffolds (one level high),
tool breakage, tool repairs, tool replacement, tool blades, tool bits, home office estimating and expediting,
home office clerical and accounting support, home office labor (management, supervision, engineering), all
other home office expense, legal services, travel, and parking expenses.
.3 An exception is allowed for shop or engineering labor on items in Section 7.7.2.10.2, which shall not be
subject to Prevailing Wage rates for steel fabricators, sheet metal fabricators, and sprinkler system
fabricators performing work off-site. Recovery for these matters shall be allowed on an hourly basis under
items in Sections 7.7.2.2, 7.7.2.3, and 7.7.2.4 of these Pricing Criteria.
.4 An exception is allowed for field supervision labor on items in Section 7.7.2.10.2, for those portions of the
Change Order Work that will be performed, or was performed, at times when the superintendent is not

required to be on site under Section 6.4, including but not limited to overtime hours due to acceleration and
extensions of the Contract Times. Recovery for this matter will be allowed on an hourly basis under items
in Sections 7.7.2.2, 7.7.2.3, and 7.7.2.4 of these Pricing Criteria.
7.7.2.11 Contractor’s Fee: Adjustment of the Contract Sum on account of a change in the Work shall include an
allowance for the Contractor’s Fee equal to 10 percent of the sum of the costs described under Sections 7.7.2.1
through 7.7.2.10 that are associated with that changed Work.
7.7.2.12 Miscellaneous: Adjustment of the Contract Sum on account of a change in Work may include the following
costs with no allowance for Contractor’s Fee under Section 7.7.2.11 or Subcontractor overhead and profit under
Section 7.7.2.10.
.1 The premium portion only for approved overtime (labor and fringes). The straight time portion is included
in items in Sections 7.7.2.2, 7.7.2.3, and 7.7.2.4.
.2 State sales tax shall be allowed on items as defined by Section 12.7.
7.7.3 Costs that shall not be reimbursed for Change Order Work include the following:
7.7.3.1 Voluntary employee deductions including, but not limited to, deductions for charitable donations or U.S.
savings bonds.
7.7.3.2 Employee profit sharing.
7.8 Time Extension

7.8.1 Every adjustment of the Contract Times associated with any change in the Work shall be determined as provided in
this Section 7.8, which establishes the Contractor’s maximum entitlement for any change in the Work, including without
limitation all adjustments for interference, delay, hindrance, or disruption of the Work. This Section 7.8 also governs
time adjustments for deduct Change Orders and the Contractor’s entitlement to additional time through the claims and
dispute resolution processes on account of changes in the Work.
7.8.2 The Contractor shall substantiate all changes in the Contract Times with:
7.8.2.1 a written description of the nature of the interference, disruption, hindrance or delay;
7.8.2.2 identification of Persons and events responsible for the interference, disruption, hindrance or delay;
7.8.2.3 date, or anticipated date, of commencement of the interference, disruption, hindrance or delay;
7.8.2.4 identification of activities by schedule activity number and name on the Construction Progress Schedule,
which may be affected by the interference, disruption, hindrance or delay, or new activities created by the
interference, disruption, hindrance or delay and the relationship with existing activities;
7.8.2.5 anticipated duration of the interference, disruption, hindrance or delay and of any remobilization period;
7.8.2.6 specific number of days of extension requested and specific number of days for remobilization requested;
7.8.2.7 recommended action to avoid or minimize any future interference, disruption, hindrance or delay; and
7.8.2.8 a detailed written proposal as described under Section 7.7 for an increase in the Contract Sum which would
fully compensate the Contractor for all costs of acceleration of the Work needed to completely overcome the
associated delay, if any.
7.8.3 Critical Path. Time extensions shall depend upon the extent to which the Work on the critical path of the
Construction Progress Schedule is affected, if applicable.
7.8.3.1 A Change Order granting a time extension may provide that the Contract Times shall be extended for only
those specific elements so interfered with, disrupted, hindered, or delayed and related remobilization and that
remaining Milestone dates shall not be altered and may further provide for adjustment of Liquidated Damages.
7.9 Examination and Audit of Contractor’s Records

7.9.1 The Contracting Authority and Owner may examine all books, records, documents and other data of the Contractor
and its Subcontractors related to the bidding, pricing, or performance of the Work for the purpose of evaluating any
Contractor Payment Request, Proposal, Modification, or Claim.
7.9.2 The above referenced materials shall be made available at the office of the Contractor or Subcontractor, as
applicable, at all reasonable times for inspection, audit, and reproduction until the expiration of 6 years after the date of
Substantial Completion of all Work.

7.9.2.1 The Contractor shall maintain, and require its Subcontractors to maintain, complete and accurate business
records at its principal place of business. If the principal place of business is greater than 50 miles from the Site, the
Contractor shall timely make records available, and shall require its Subcontractors to timely make records
available, at the office of the Contracting Authority or Owner upon request for the records.
7.9.3 To the extent that the Contractor or Subcontractor, as applicable, informs the Contracting Authority or Owner in
writing that any documents provided to the Contracting Authority or Owner are trade secrets, the Contracting Authority
or Owner shall treat these documents, to the extent permitted by law, as trade secrets of the Contractor or Subcontractor,
as applicable.
7.9.3.1 If a dispute arises with any other Person about whether that Person should be given access to the documents,
the Contractor or Subcontractor as applicable, shall indemnify the Contracting Authority and Owner against all
costs, expenses, and damages, including but not limited to attorneys’ fees, incurred or paid by reason of that dispute.
7.9.4 The right of inspection, audit, and reproduction extends to all documents necessary to permit adequate evaluation
of the cost of pricing data submitted along with the computations and projections used therein.
7.9.5 If the Contract has been terminated, in whole or in part, the records relating to the Work terminated shall be made
available to the Contracting Authority or Owner for a period of 6 years from the date of any applicable final settlement
or payment, as applicable.
7.9.6 Records that relate to disputes, litigation, or settlement of Claims arising out of the performance of the Work shall
be made available until the dispute, litigation or Claims have been finally decided or settled.
ARTICLE 8 - DISPUTE RESOLUTION

8.1 Initiation of a Claim
8.1.1 Every Claim shall accrue upon the date of occurrence of the event giving rise to the Claim.
8.1.2 Except as provided under Section 1.10, the Contractor shall initiate every Claim by giving written notice of the
Claim to the A/E and Contracting Authority within 10 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to the Claim, with
the following exceptions:
8.1.2.1 The 10-day time limit on initiating a Claim arising from a determination of the Contracting Authority
concerning a Change Directive begins to run on the date that the Contracting Authority issues its determination
under Section 7.4.7 or Section 7.4.10, as applicable.
8.1.2.2 The 10-day time limit on initiating a Claim arising from the response of the A/E to a RFI begins to run on the
date that the A/E issues the A/E’s response to the RFI.
8.1.2.3 The 10-day time limit on initiating a Claim arising from the A/E’s determination concerning a Differing Site
Condition begins to run on the date that the A/E issues the A/E’s determination under Section 7.6.
8.1.3 The Contractor’s written notice of a Claim shall provide the following information to permit timely and appropriate
evaluation of the Claim, determination of responsibility, and opportunity for mitigation:
8.1.3.1 nature and anticipated amount of the impact, including all costs for any interference, disruption, hindrance,
or delay, which shall be calculated in accordance with Section 7.7 and be a fair and reasonably accurate assessment
of the damages suffered or anticipated by the Contractor;
8.1.3.2 identification of the circumstances responsible for causing the impact, including, but not limited to, the date
or anticipated date, of the commencement of any interference, disruption, hindrance, or delay;
8.1.3.3 identification of activities on the Construction Progress Schedule that will be affected by the impact or new
activities that may be created and the relationship with existing activities;
8.1.3.4 anticipated impacts and anticipated duration of any interference, disruption, hindrance, delay, or impact, and
any remobilization period; and
8.1.3.5 recommended action to avoid or minimize any interference, disruption, hindrance, delay, or impact.
8.1.4 The Contractor’s failure to initiate a Claim as and when required under this Section 8.1 shall constitute the
Contractor’s irrevocable waiver of the Claim.
8.1.5 The A/E, in consultation with the Contracting Authority, shall respond to the written notice of the Claim within a
reasonable time of receipt, but not to exceed 10 days.

8.2 Substantiation of Claims
8.2.1 Within 30 days after the initiation of a Claim, the Contractor shall submit 4 copies of all information and
statements required to substantiate a Claim as provided in this Article 8 and all other information that the Contractor
believes substantiates the Claim. The Contractor shall file the 4 copies by delivery of 1 copy to the A/E, 1 copy to the
Owner, and 2 copies to the Contracting Authority.
8.2.2 The Contractor shall substantiate all of its Claims by providing the following minimum information:
8.2.2.1 a narrative of the circumstances, which gave rise to the Claim, including without limitation the start date of
the event or events and the actual or anticipated finish date;
8.2.2.2 detailed identification of the Work (e.g., activity codes from the Construction Progress Schedule) affected by
the event giving rise to the Claim;
8.2.2.3 copies of the Contractor’s daily log (Section 6.2.17) for each day of impact;
8.2.2.4 copies of relevant correspondence and other information regarding or supporting Contractor entitlement;
8.2.2.5 copies of the Contractor’s most recent income statement, including segregated general and administrative
expenses for the most recent reporting period, and for the period of the Contract, if available, and similar
information for any Subcontractor claim included; and
8.2.2.6 the notarized certification described under Section 8.5.1.1.
8.2.3 The Contractor’s failure to comply with the requirements of this Section 8.2 shall constitute an irrevocable waiver
of any related Claim.
8.3 Substantiation of Claims for Increase of the Contract Sum

8.3.1 The Contractor shall substantiate each Claim for an increase of the Contract Sum with:
8.3.1.1 written documentation as described under Section 7.7 of the actual additional direct and indirect costs to the
Contractor due to the event giving rise to the Claim;
8.3.1.2 a written statement from the Contractor that the increase requested is the entire increase in the Contract Sum
associated with the Claim; and
8.3.1.3 the general substantiation documentation described under Section 8.2.
8.4 Substantiation of Claims for Extension of the Contract Times

8.4.1 The Contractor shall substantiate each Claim for an extension of the Contract Times with:
8.4.1.1 written documentation as described under Section 7.8 of the actual delay to the critical path of the
Construction Progress Schedule due to the event giving rise to the Claim;
8.4.1.2 a detailed written Proposal as described under Section 7.7 for an increase in the Contract Sum that would
fully compensate the Contractor for all costs of acceleration of the Work needed to completely overcome the
associated delay together with a statement consistent with Section 8.3.1.2;
8.4.1.3 a written statement from the Contractor that the extension requested is the entire extension of the Contract
Times associated with the Claim; and
8.4.1.4 the general substantiating documentation described under Section 8.2.
8.4.2 In addition to the requirements of Section 8.4.1, if adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for
additional time, the Contractor shall document the Claim with data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal
for the period, could not have been reasonably anticipated, and had an adverse effect on a critical element of the
scheduled construction. The support for and evaluation of all adverse weather Claims shall be based upon average
weather conditions during the 5 years immediately preceding the dates at issue in the Claim as those weather conditions
were recorded at the government-controlled weather-recording facility nearest to the Site.

8.5 Certification of the Claim
8.5.1 The Contractor shall certify each Claim within 30 days after initiating the Claim under Section 8.1 or before
Contract Completion, whichever is earlier, by providing the notarized certification specified in Section 8.5.1.1, signed
and dated by the Contractor:
8.5.1.1 “The undersigned Contractor certifies that the Claim is made in good faith; that the supporting data is
accurate and complete to the best of the Contractor’s knowledge and belief; that the amount requested is a fair,
reasonable, and necessary adjustment for which the Contractor believes the State is liable; and that the undersigned
is duly authorized to certify the Claim on behalf of the Contractor.”
8.5.2 The date that the Contractor’s certified and fully substantiated Claim is received by the Contracting Authority, or
the date that the Contractor is required to certify and fully substantiate a Claim pursuant to Sections 8.2.1 and 8.5.1,
shall trigger the 120-day period for exhaustion of administrative remedies pursuant to ORC Section 153.16(B).
8.6 Delay and Delay Damage Limitations; Derivative Claims

8.6.1 Subject to other provisions of the Contract, the Contractor will be entitled to an extension of the Contract Times on
account of delay in the commencement or progress of Work on the critical path of the Construction Progress Schedule
caused by acts of Nature or the public enemy, acts of the government not arising from the Contractor’s failure to comply
with Applicable Law, fires, floods, epidemics, weather, and labor disputes beyond the Contractor’s control.
8.6.2 Notwithstanding any other provision of the Contract Documents to the contrary, the Contractor shall not be entitled
to an increase in the Contract Sum, or an extension of the Contract Times, or both:
8.6.2.1 on account of the impact of any normal adverse weather on any of the Work or on account of the impact of
any abnormal adverse weather on Work not on the critical path;
8.6.2.2 to the extent that a delay occurs concurrently with a delay attributable to the Contractor; or
8.6.2.3 on account of the delay of any Work not on the critical path.
to an increase in the Contract Sum or any type of damages on account of a delay in the commencement or progress of
Work on the critical path unless (1) the delay is caused by the Owner and (2) the delay was not authorized or permitted
under the Contract.
to an increase in the Contract Sum or any type of damages arising from a delay in the commencement or progress of any
of the Work caused by the occurrence or non-occurrence of an event beyond the Owner’s control such as acts of Nature
or the public enemy, acts of the government, fires, floods, epidemics, labor disputes, unusual delivery delays, weather, or
damages caused by the Contractor.
8.6.5 Derivative Claims. Notwithstanding any other provision of the Contract to the contrary, if the Owner prosecutes a
claim, suit, or appeal against a Separate Consultant or Separate Contractor to recover damages the Contractor suffers on
account of the acts or neglects of a Separate Consultant or Separate Contractor or a person or entity for whom either is
legally responsible, the Owner’s liability to the Contractor shall not exceed the amount the Owner actually recovers from
the Separate Consultant or Separate Contractor on account of those damages less the costs the Owner incurs recovering
them. The Owner is not obligated to prosecute any such claim, suit, or appeal.
8.7 Liquidated Damages

8.7.1 If the Contractor fails to achieve a Milestone within the associated Contract Time, it would be difficult, if not
impossible, to determine the Owner’s resulting damages. Therefore, if the Contractor fails to achieve a Milestone within
the associated Contract Time, the Contractor shall (at the Owner’s option) pay to or credit the Owner the Liquidated
Damages per day sum determined according to the following schedule for each day that the Contractor fails to achieve a
Milestone within the associated Contract Time.
Contract Sum Liquidated Damages per day
Less than $1,000,000 $500
From $1,000,000.01 to $2,000,000 $1,000
From $2,000,000.01 to $5,000,000 $2,000

Contract Sum Liquidated Damages per day
From $5,000,000.01 to $10,000,000 $5,000
From $10,000,000.01 to $20,000,000 $7,500
From $20,000,000.01 to $50,000,000 $10,000
More than $50,000,000 $15,000
8.7.2 If the Contractor simultaneously fails to achieve two or more Milestones, the Owner shall be entitled to recover the
sum of the associated Liquidated Damages per day rates.
8.7.3 The Liquidated Damages described in this Section 8.7 are only intended to compensate the Owner for the direct
damages it incurs as a result of the Contractor’s failure to achieve the Milestones within their associated Contract Times.
8.7.4 The Liquidated Damages described in this Section 8.7 are not intended to compensate the Owner for any damages
the Owner incurs on account of (1) any claims attributable to the Contractor that are brought by others including Separate
Consultants and Separate Contractors or (2) any failure of the Contractor to timely, properly, and completely perform the
Contract other than the failure to achieve the Milestones within their associated Contract Times.
8.7.5 The parties acknowledge that the above-listed Liquidated Damages per day sums are not penalties, and they each
irrevocably waive the right (if any) to challenge the validity and enforceability of those Liquidated Damages per day
sums. Notwithstanding any other provision of the Contract Documents to the contrary, if a court determines that the
Liquidated Damages per day sums or their application are void and unenforceable, the Owner shall be entitled to recover
the actual damages that it incurs on account of the Contractor’s failure to achieve one or more of the Milestones within
the Contract Times.
8.7.6 In addition to other rights that the Owner may have relative to the Liquidated Damages, the Contracting Authority
may deduct the Liquidated Damages from the Contract Sum as the damages accrue. If payments then or thereafter due
the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall immediately pay the amount of the
insufficiency to the Owner.
8.8 Mutual Waiver of Consequential Damages

8.8.1 Except as provided under Section 8.8.2, the Owner and Contractor each waive against the other all Claims for
consequential damages that may arise out of or relate to this Contract.
8.8.1.1 The Owner’s waiver includes Claims for loss of use, income, profit, revenue, financing, cost of capital,
business and reputation, management and employee productivity, and consequential damages arising from
termination of the Contract or related to insolvency.
8.8.1.2 The Contractor’s waiver includes Claims for unabsorbed home-office overhead; any other form of overhead
in excess of that specifically provided for under Section 7.7; delay damages except as otherwise specifically
provided for in Section 8.6; increased cost of funds for the Project; lost opportunity to work on other projects; losses
of financing, business, and reputation; loss of profit except anticipated profit arising directly from properly
performed Work; loss of bonding capacity; and consequential damages arising from termination of the Contract or
related to insolvency.
8.8.2 Notwithstanding Section 8.8.1, this Section 8.8:
8.8.2.1 does not apply to any damages that would be covered by insurance provided in connection with the Project if
the Contract did not include Section 8.8.1;
8.8.2.2 does not apply to the Contractor’s indemnity obligations for third-party claims against the Indemnified
Parties even if those claims are for damages that Section 8.8.1 would otherwise preclude;
8.8.2.3 does not preclude the Owner’s recovery of Liquidated Damages under Section 8.7; and
8.8.2.4 does not apply to Claims for damages arising from the Owner’s or the Contractor’s gross negligence or
willful misconduct.
8.8.3 This Section 8.8 shall survive termination of the Contract.
8.9 Review of the Claim

8.9.1 The A/E shall review the Claim and prepare a written analysis of its content, which shall include:
8.9.1.1 a narrative of the A/E’s examination of the facts giving rise to the Claim;
8.9.1.2 identification of relevant Contract Documents and language;

8.9.1.3 an analysis of whether the Contractor complied with the requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining
to Claim initiation and substantiation including, without limitation, the issues of entitlement to, and calculation of,
adjustments of the Contract Sum, Contract Times, or both;
8.9.1.4 an analysis of claimed additional labor, materials, and equipment for the scope of the Work items described;
8.9.1.5 an analysis of any time extension for any interference, disruption, hindrance, impact, or delay claimed (to
include the calculation of any concurrent delays affecting entitlement);
8.9.1.6 a concluding opinion regarding Contractor entitlement to, and the appropriateness and reasonableness of all,
or any part of, the Claim; and
8.9.1.7 an appendix containing copies of contemporaneous documentation supporting the concluding opinion.
8.9.2 The A/E shall submit the written analysis to the Project Manager no more than 30 days after receiving the
Contractor’s substantiated and certified Claim.
8.10 Claim Decision

8.10.1 The Project Manager shall examine the Contractor’s Claim and A/E’s analysis.
8.10.2 The Project Manager shall approve or deny all, or any part, of the Contractor’s Claim and forward a written
decision to the Contractor, A/E, Owner, and Contracting Authority within 14 days after receiving the A/E’s analysis.
8.10.2.1 The Project Manager may employ independent resources to assist in its review, or refer evaluation of the
Claim to a consultant.
8.10.3 If the Contractor and Owner agree with the Project Manager’s decision, the decision shall be incorporated into a
Change Order.
8.10.4 Any Claim remaining unresolved after completion of the process described under this Section 8.10 shall be
subject to Claim decision review as described under Section 8.11.
8.11 Claim Decision Review

8.11.1 The Contractor may request review of the Project Manager’s decision by written notice delivered by certified mail
within 14 days of the Project Manager’s decision.
8.11.1.1 If the Project is administered by the Commission, jointly administered by the Commission and a public
school district, or locally administered by authority granted to an agency of the state of Ohio by the Commission, the
written notice shall be delivered to the Executive Director of the Commission.
8.11.1.2 If the Project is locally administered by an Institution of Higher Education under ORC Section 3345.50 or
ORC Section 3345.51, the written notice shall be delivered to the Institutional Designee who will review the Project
Manager’s decision instead of the Commission.
8.11.2 The Commission or Institutional Designee, if applicable, shall schedule and conduct a meeting within 30 days
after receiving the Contractor’s request for review.
8.11.2.1 The Commission or Institutional Designee may employ independent resources to assist in the meeting and
review.
8.11.3 The Commission or Institutional Designee, if applicable, shall determine the final disposition of the Contractor’s
request for review and provide a written decision to the Contractor and Owner within 14 days after the meeting.
8.11.4 The decision of the Commission or Institutional Designee is the final administrative decision of the Contracting
Authority as described under ORC Section 153.12(B).
8.11.5 If the Contractor and Owner agree with the Commission’s or the Institutional Designee’s decision, the decision
shall be incorporated into a Change Order.
8.11.6 Any Claim remaining unresolved after completion of the process described under this Section 8.11 shall be
subject to litigation, which may be preceded by Alternative Dispute Resolution (“ADR”) as described under
Section 8.13.
8.12 Delegation
8.12.1 No provision of this Article 8 shall prevent the Executive Director from delegating the duties or authorities of the
Commission to any other person selected at the Executive Director’s sole discretion.

8.13 Alternative Dispute Resolution
8.13.1 The intent of the ADR process is to resolve disputes quickly and equitably in a manner agreed upon by all parties
to the dispute.
8.13.2 The ADR procedure shall be accepted by all of the Project’s key stakeholders.
8.13.3 The accepted ADR methods shall not include binding arbitration; alter any of the requirements for Claim
initiation, certification, and substantiation; or alter the administrative process described under this Article 8.
8.13.4 The following forms of non-binding ADR may be considered:
8.13.4.1 Negotiation: If negotiation is warranted, the parties to the dispute may agree to a progressive level of
negotiators, invested with the authority to agree to a determination of an adjustment in the Contract Sum, Contract
Times, or both.
8.13.4.2 Dispute Review Board: If a dispute review board is the accepted ADR procedure, or the process to follow
when negotiations are unsuccessful, the parties to the dispute shall jointly select 3 neutral third parties to monitor the
progress of construction and provide recommended resolutions to disputes that are brought before them. The costs of
the dispute review board shall be shared equally among the parties to the dispute.
8.13.4.3 Mediation: If mediation is the accepted ADR procedure, or the process to follow when negotiations are
unsuccessful, the parties to the dispute shall accept a neutral third party to mediate the dispute. The costs of
mediation shall be shared equally among the parties to the dispute.
8.13.4.4 Another ADR procedure accepted by all of the Project’s key stakeholders.
8.14 Audit of the Claim

8.14.1 All Claims shall be subject to audit at any time following filing of the Claim, whether or not the Claim is part of a
lawsuit.
8.14.2 The audit may be performed by employees of the Contracting Authority or by a consultant engaged by the
8.14.3 The audit may begin upon 10-days’ notice to the affected Contractor or affected Subcontractor.
8.14.4 The Contractor shall cooperate with the request.
8.14.5 Failure of the Contractor or Subcontractor to produce sufficient records to allow the Contracting Authority to
audit and verify a Claim shall constitute an irrevocable waiver of the Claim or portion of the Claim that could not be
completely audited.
8.14.6 The Contractor shall make available to the Contracting Authority all Contractor and Subcontractor documents
related to the Claim including, without limitation, the following documents:
8.14.6.1 daily time sheets and superintendent’s daily reports;
8.14.6.2 union agreements, if any, and employer agreements;
8.14.6.3 insurance, welfare, fringes, and benefits records;
8.14.6.4 payroll register;
8.14.6.5 earnings records;
8.14.6.6 payroll tax returns;
8.14.6.7 material invoices, purchase orders, Subcontracts, and all material and supply acquisition contracts;
8.14.6.8 material cost distribution worksheets;
8.14.6.9 equipment records (list of Contractor equipment, rates, etc.);
8.14.6.10 vendor rental agreements and Subcontractor invoices;
8.14.6.11 Subcontractor payment certificates;
8.14.6.12 canceled checks (payroll and vendors);
8.14.6.13 job cost report;
8.14.6.14 job payroll ledger;
8.14.6.15 general ledger, general journal, (if used) and all subsidiary ledgers and journals together with all
supporting documentation pertinent to entries made in these ledgers and journals;

8.14.6.16 cash disbursements journal;
8.14.6.17 financial statements for all years reflecting operations on the Project;
8.14.6.18 income tax returns for all years reflecting operations on the Project;
8.14.6.19 depreciation records on all equipment utilized whether the records are maintained by the Contractor, its
accountant, or others;
8.14.6.20 if a source other than depreciation records is used to develop costs for the Contractor’s internal purposes in
establishing the actual cost of owning and operating equipment, all other source documents;
8.14.6.21 all documents that reflect the Contractor’s actual profit and overhead during the years the Project was
being performed;
8.14.6.22 all documents related to the preparation of the Contractor’s Bid, including the final calculations on which
the Bid was based, unless the documents are placed in escrow under provisions of the Instructions to Bidders;
8.14.6.23 all documents that relate to the Claim together with all documents that support the amount of damages as
to the Claim;
8.14.6.24 worksheets used to prepare the Claim establishing the cost components for items of the Claim including,
but not limited to, labor, fringes, benefits and insurance, materials, equipment, Subcontractors, and all documents
that establish the periods of time, individuals involved, the hours and rate of pay for the individuals; and
8.14.6.25 all other documents required by the Contracting Authority to reasonably review the Claim.
8.15 False Certification of the Claim

8.15.1 If the Contractor falsely certifies all or any part of a Claim, the portion of the Claim falsely certified shall be
denied, and may be sufficient cause for the State to debar the Contractor from future State contracting opportunities as
permitted by law.
8.16 Performance and Payment

8.16.1 The Contractor shall proceed with the Work during any dispute resolution process, unless otherwise agreed by the
Contractor and Contracting Authority in writing.
8.16.2 The Contracting Authority shall continue to make payment of any undisputed amounts in accordance with the
Contract Documents pending final resolution of a Claim, unless otherwise agreed by the Contractor and Contracting
Authority in writing.
ARTICLE 9 - COMPENSATION AND PAYMENT

9.1 Allowances
9.1.1 The Contract Sum includes the Allowances (if any) identified in the Contract.
9.1.2 All Allowances include the cost to the Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment
required by the Allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes.
9.1.3 The Contractor’s Fee and costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation costs, and other expenses
contemplated for the Allowances are not in the stated Allowance amounts but are otherwise included in the Contract
Sum.
9.1.4 Before final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued to reconcile the Contract Sum so that it reflects
actual amounts due to the Contractor on account of Work covered by Allowances.
9.2 Unit Prices

9.2.1 Where the Contract provides that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the Contract Sum will
include for all Unit Price Work (1) an amount equal to the sum of the established Unit Prices for each separately
identified item of Unit Price Work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Contract plus (2) the
Contractor’s Fee on that Unit Price Work.
9.2.2 The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of
comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Sum. The Contracting Authority will determine the actual
quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor.

9.2.3 The Contractor’s Fee on account of Unit Price Work is not in the stated Unit Price amounts but are otherwise
included in the Contract Sum.
9.2.4 Before final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as described under Section 7.1.5 to reconcile the
Contract Sum so that it reflects actual amounts due to the Contractor on account of Unit Price Work actually performed.
9.3 Schedule of Values

9.3.1 Within 10 days after receipt of the Notice to Proceed, or other period as mutually agreed by the Contractor and
Contracting Authority, the Contractor shall submit to the A/E a Schedule of Values on a form published by the
Commission, with separate amounts shown for labor and materials for each branch of Work, following the numbers and
titles of the Construction Specifications Institute’s MasterFormat for individual work results, or UniFormat for
assemblies in place.
9.3.1.1 The Contractor shall clearly indicate on the Schedule of Values, the amount(s) allocated, including separate
items for Contractor’s Fee (overhead and profit), for each EDGE-certified Business used in the performance of the
Work. The amount(s) shall indicate labor and materials, as appropriate.
9.3.2 The grand total shown on the Schedule of Values shall equal the total Contract Sum. The Contracting Authority
may use the approved Schedule of Values to determine the cost or credit to the Owner resulting from any change in the
Work.
9.3.2.1 The first items shall be a breakdown of General Conditions Costs.
9.3.2.2 The amounts for labor and materials shall accurately reflect the cost for each item. Separate items shall not
be shown for Contractor’s Fee, except when Work is performed or materials are supplied by an EDGE-certified
Business, pursuant to Section 9.3.1.1. Contractor’s Fee shall be included in the totals for labor and materials.
9.3.2.3 If the material allocation exceeds 55 percent of the Contract Sum, the Contractor shall provide, upon request,
sufficient information to support the higher percentage.
9.3.2.4 Subcontract Work shall show amounts for labor and materials. Fringe benefits shall be shown as a part of
labor costs.
9.3.2.5 When more than one major structure is included in the Work, the Contractor shall subdivide the Schedule of
Values accordingly, with cost details for each structure shown separately.
9.3.2.6 The line items shall be coordinated with line items in the Project Schedule, which may require division of
items of Work by area of the Project by floor, phase, or other appropriate area.
9.3.2.7 Mechanical and electrical Work shall be included in separate line items for all major pieces of equipment,
and group smaller equipment items by type.
9.3.2.8 Line items shall be included for each Allowance, Punch List Work, Project Record Document Submittals,
delivery of attic stock, and specified demonstrations and training.
9.3.3 The A/E may return the Schedule of Values to the Contractor for re-submittal if it does not meet the requirements
or contains insufficient items or details of the Work, or approve the Schedule of Values if the A/E determines that it
conforms to this Section 9.3.
9.3.4 No payment shall be made until the A/E has approved the Contractor’s Schedule of Values.
submit its Schedule of Values, using the “Contract Schedule of Values” business process.
9.4 Contractor Payment Request

9.4.1 The Contractor may submit a Contractor Payment Request for Work performed based upon the Schedule of Values
to the A/E each month or upon another interval approved by the Contracting Authority. When the rate of Work and
amount involved is sufficient that it is considered appropriate by the Contracting Authority, the Contractor may submit
Contractor Payment Requests twice a month.
9.4.1.1 The Contractor shall support each Contractor Payment Request with documentation substantiating the
Contractor’s right to payment. The Contractor shall supply additional documentation as the A/E may request in
connection with each payment to the Contractor.
9.4.1.2 The Contracting Authority may require proof of the renewal of required insurance as a condition precedent
to payment.

9.4.1.3 The Contractor shall attach certified payroll reports for the relevant period to 1 copy of each Contractor
Payment Request, see Document 00 73 43 - Prevailing Wage Requirements.
9.4.1.4 The Contractor may list on the Contractor Payment Request any Change Orders approved and performed
prior to submission of the Contractor Payment Request.
9.4.1.5 The Contractor shall submit its Contractor Payment Request using the Contractor Payment Request form or
forms current at the time of each application and as provided by the Contracting Authority in the manner prescribed
by the Contracting Authority.
9.4.1.6 If the Project is not administered using the State’s web-based project management software, the Contractor
shall submit 1 draft copy of its Contractor Payment Request (“Pencil Copy”) to the A/E not less than 1 week prior to
submitting multiple copies of its Contractor Payment Request. The A/E shall review the Pencil Copy and provide
comments to the Contractor within 3 days of receiving it. The Contractor shall incorporate the A/E’s comments into
its Contractor Payment Request prior to submitting multiple copies for payment.
9.4.1.7 The Contractor shall clearly indicate on the Contractor Payment Request, the amount(s) requested for each
EDGE-certified Business used in the performance of the Contract. The amount(s) shall indicate labor and materials,
as appropriate.
9.4.1.8 The Contractor shall submit an electronic copy of the Contractor Payment Request to the A/E with its paper
copies of the Contractor Payment Request for collection and reporting of information used for contract compliance
evaluation and statistical purposes. The Contractor may issue the copy in any electronic media acceptable to the
9.4.2 Payments, except for lump sum items, in Unit Price Contracts shall be made to the Contractor only for the
authorized actual quantities of Work performed or materials furnished in accordance with the Contract Documents.
9.4.3 Subject to Section 9.8, the Owner shall pay an approved Contractor Payment Request within 30 days from the date
the A/E recommends acceptance of the Contractor Payment Request.
9.4.3.1 Payments due and not paid to the Contractor, through no fault of the Contractor, within the 30 day period
shall, from the date payment is due, bear simple interest at the applicable statutory rate.
9.4.4 Notwithstanding any other provision of the Contract Documents, partial payments made pursuant to this
Section 9.4 constitutes neither acceptance of any Defective Work, nor a waiver of any rights set forth in the Contract
Documents or otherwise provided by Applicable Law.
9.4.5 The Contracting Authority and Owner may audit Contractor Payment Requests as described under Section 7.9.
submit its Contractor Payment Request, using the “Contractor Pay Request” or “Applications for Payment” business
process.
9.5 Labor Payments

9.5.1 Partial payments to the Contractor for labor performed under either a Unit Price or lump sum Contract shall be
made at the rate of 92 percent of the amount invoiced through the Contractor Payment Request that shows the Work is
50 percent complete.
9.5.2 After the Work is 50 percent complete, as evidenced by payments of at least 50 percent of the Contract Sum
including approved Change Orders to date, no additional funds shall be retained from payments for labor.
9.6 Material Payments

9.6.1 The Owner shall pay the Contractor at the rate of 100 percent of the scheduled value for materials incorporated into
the Project.
9.6.2 The Owner shall pay the Contractor at the rate of 92 percent of the invoice cost, not to exceed the scheduled value
in a Unit Price or lump sum Contract, for materials delivered to the Site, or other off-site storage location approved by
the A/E, provided the Contractor provides the following information with the Contractor Payment Request:
9.6.2.1 a list of the fabricated materials consigned to the Project, giving the place of storage, together with copies of
invoices, in order to verify quantity and cost; and
9.6.2.2 a certification of materials stored off-site, prepared by the Contractor and signed by the A/E to evidence that
the materials are in conformity with the Specifications and have been tagged with the Project name and number for

delivery to the Project. The Contractor shall directly reimburse the A/E for all costs incurred to visit a storage site,
other than the areas adjacent to the Project.
9.6.2.3 The Owner shall pay the balance of the scheduled value when the materials are incorporated into and become
a part of the Project.
9.6.3 When payment is allowed for materials delivered to the Site or other approved off-site storage location but not yet
incorporated into the Project, the materials are the property of the Owner.
9.6.3.1 The Owner may, at its sole discretion, retain any material not ultimately incorporated into the Project or
return it to the Contractor for credit of an amount proportionate to the value of the extra materials.
9.7 Retainage
9.7.1 If the total Contract Sum is $15,000 or more, when the Contract is 50 percent complete, all funds retained for
faithful performance of the Work, in accordance with Section 9.5.1, shall be deposited in an escrow account with a bank
in the state in accordance with the terms and conditions provided in an escrow agreement executed by the Contractor,
Contracting Authority, and applicable bank.
9.7.2 When the Contractor has achieved Substantial Completion of all Work, and there is no other reason to retain funds;
upon request of the Contractor, the funds retained in connection with that Work shall be released from escrow and paid
to the Contractor, withholding only that amount necessary to assure faithful completion in the sole discretion of the
Contracting Authority, including but not limited to compliance with Section 6.25.2.
9.7.3 Upon consent by the Contractor’s Surety, the Contracting Authority may reduce the amount of funds retained for
the faithful performance of Work by 50 percent of the amount of funds required to be retained, provided the Contractor’s
Surety remains responsible for all damages that may be caused due to default by the Contractor, including, but not
limited to, the following:
9.7.3.1 completion of the Work;
9.7.3.2 all interference, disruption, hindrance and delay claims;
9.7.3.3 all Liquidated Damages; and
9.7.3.4 all additional expenses incurred by the State.
9.8 Payments Withheld

9.8.1 The A/E may recommend to the Contracting Authority that payments be withheld from, or Liquidated Damages be
assessed against, a Contractor Payment Request.
9.8.2 The Contracting Authority may decline to approve any Contractor Payment Request or part thereof, or nullify any
previous Contractor Payment Request, in whole or in part, to the extent necessary in the Contracting Authority’s sole
opinion to protect the Owner from loss because of:
9.8.2.1 Defective Work not remedied;
9.8.2.2 damage caused by the Contractor;
9.8.2.3 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum;
9.8.2.4 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Times, and that the unpaid
balance would not be adequate to cover damages under the Contract Documents for the anticipated delay;
9.8.2.5 failure to comply with Applicable Law including, but not limited to, the requirements of ORC Chapter 4115;
9.8.2.6 failure to timely submit EDGE Participation Reports in accordance with Section 1.8.2;
9.8.2.7 failure to timely identify the Contractor’s proposed Subcontractors in accordance with Section 4.1.1;
9.8.2.8 failure to timely approve a Construction Progress Schedule in accordance with Section 6.5;
9.8.2.9 failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; or
9.8.2.10 that which is permitted under other provisions of the Contract Documents.
9.8.3 If the Contractor remedies the basis for withholding payment under Section 9.8.2 to the Contracting Authority’s
satisfaction, the Owner shall pay the amounts withheld.

9.9 Final Contractor Payment Request
9.9.1 The Contractor, as a condition precedent to execution of the Certificate of Contract Completion and to final
payment, shall complete all requirements of the Contract Documents.
9.9.1.1 The Contractor and each of its Subcontractors, regardless of tier, shall execute a Payment Release Affidavit
to certify that the Contractor and each of its Subcontractors, regardless of tier, have complied with all requirements
of ORC Chapter 4115, and to certify that all of its Subcontractors have been paid in full for all Work performed or
materials furnished for the Project.
9.9.2 The Owner shall pay the final Contractor Payment Request within 30 days from the date the A/E recommends
acceptance of the final Contractor Payment Request.
9.9.2.1 Payments due and not paid to the Contractor within the 30 day period shall bear interest from the date
payment is due under the Contract Documents at the applicable statutory rate.
9.9.3 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor or a Subcontractor constitutes the payee’s waiver of all claims
against the State except those previously made in writing under Article 8 and identified by that payee as unsettled at the
time of the final Contractor Payment Request.
submit its final Contractor Payment Request, using the “Contractor Pay Request” or “Applications for Payment”
business process.
ARTICLE 10 - BONDS, INSURANCE, AND INDEMNIFICATION

10.1 Payment and Performance Bonds
10.1.1 Before signing the Agreement, the Contractor shall provide the Bond required under Applicable Law and below:
10.1.1.1 If the Contractor provided Document 00 43 13 - Bid Security Form as its Bid Guaranty then that form
shall be the Bond.
10.1.1.2 If the Contractor provided another form of Bid Guaranty, then Document 00 61 13 - Performance and
Payment Bond Form shall be the Bond.
10.1.1.3 Each Surety under the Bond shall be licensed to do business in Ohio and satisfactory to the Contracting
Authority.
10.1.1.4 If there is more than one Surety under the Bond, each of them shall be jointly and severally liable as surety
under the Bond.
10.1.1.5 The penal sum of the Bond, when initially submitted, shall be equal to one-hundred percent of the Contract
Sum.
10.1.2 The Contractor shall submit with the executed Bond (1) a certified copy of the authority to act (power of attorney)
of the agent signing the Bond on behalf of the Surety and (2) a current and signed Certificate of Compliance under ORC
Section 9.311 issued by the Ohio Department of Insurance showing the Surety is licensed to do business in Ohio.
10.1.3 If the Contract Sum increases at any time such that it exceeds the penal sum of the Bond, the Contractor shall
cause the penal sum of the Bond to be increased such that the penal sum equals one-hundred percent of the increased
Contract Sum.
10.1.4 Any time the Contractor increases the penal sum of the Bond under Section 10.1.3, the Contractor shall deliver to
the Contracting Authority written consent of the affected Surety or Sureties confirming the increased penal sum. The
Contracting Authority’s receipt of that written consent is a condition precedent to the Owner’s obligation to pay the
Contractor for any portion of the Work associated with the increase.
10.1.5 If notice of any change affecting the Contract is required by any Surety or by the provision of any Bond, the
Contractor shall provide that notice.
10.2 Contractor’s General Insurance Requirements

10.2.1 Throughout the performance of the Work or longer as may be described below, the Contractor shall obtain, pay
for, and keep in force, the minimum insurance coverage described in this Article 10.
10.2.1.1 Each requirement of this Article 10 applies to Subcontractors just as it applies to the Contractor.

10.2.1.2 If a Subcontractor’s usual insurance coverage does not meet the minimum coverage requirements, before
entering into an agreement with that Subcontractor, the Contractor shall submit to the Contracting Authority (1) a
certificate of insurance evidencing the insurance the Subcontractor will carry without additional compensation and
(2) if the Contracting Authority requests, a written proposal from the Subcontractor to provide coverage that meets
the minimum coverage requirements. The Contracting Authority will decide whether to accept the non-conforming
insurance coverage or the proposal to provide conforming coverage.
10.2.1.3 On a case-by-case basis, the Contracting Authority and Contractor may agree to adjust the below
requirements for any particular Subcontractor.
10.2.2 Before starting the Work on the Site, upon renewal of any policy, and upon a change of any insurance carrier, the
Contractor shall deliver to the Contracting Authority certificates evidencing that the required insurance is in force.
10.2.3 With the exception of government-controlled workers compensation coverage:
10.2.3.1 the Contractor shall place the insurance with companies that (1) are satisfactory to the Contracting
Authority, (2) hold an A.M. Best Rating of A-, X, or higher, and (3) are authorized to conduct business in Ohio;
10.2.3.2 the policies shall be endorsed to require the Contractor’s insurance carrier to (1) provide 30-days’ written
notice to the Contracting Authority (as certificate holder) of the cancellation or non-renewal of the insurance and
(2) provide at least 10-days’ written notice to the Contracting Authority (as certificate holder) of the cancellation of
the insurance for non-payment of premium; and
10.2.3.3 within 30 days of the Contracting Authority’s request, the Contractor shall submit insurance-company
certified copies of the policies, the policy endorsements, loss-run reports, or all three.
10.2.4 The Contractor shall pay all deductibles, or self-insured retentions, or both contained in the Contractor’s policies
of insurance required or provided in connection with the Project. The Contracting Authority reserves the right to approve
or reject all levels of self-insured retention, captive insurance programs, or other alternative risk financing the Contractor
may use to comply with any insurance requirement.
10.2.5 The Contractor shall pay a proportionate share of the deductibles, or self-insured retentions, or both contained in
any insurance policy the Contracting Authority purchases for the Project. The Contractor’s proportionate share will
derive from the percentage of the associated claim or loss attributable to the alleged or actual negligence of the
Contractor or a Subcontractor.
10.2.6 The Contracting Authority and Owner do not represent that required coverage or limits are adequate to protect the
Contractor.
10.2.7 Failure of the Contracting Authority to demand a certificate or other evidence of full compliance with the
insurance requirements or failure of Contracting Authority to identify a deficiency from evidence that is provided shall
not be construed as a waiver of the Contractor’s obligation to maintain the required insurance.
10.2.8 The Contracting Authority may terminate the Contract for cause on account of the Contractor’s failure to maintain
required insurance.
10.3 Contractor’s Minimum Coverage Requirements

10.3.1 Workers Compensation. The Contractor shall maintain workers compensation coverage meeting the requirements
of Applicable Law.
10.3.2 Employers Liability Coverage. The Contractor shall maintain employers liability coverage with (1) an each-
accident limit of not less than $1,000,000, (2) a disease each-employee limit of not less than $1,000,000, and (3) a
disease policy limit of not less than $1,000,000.
10.3.3 Commercial General Liability. The Contractor shall maintain commercial general liability (“CGL”) coverage that
provides (1) an each-occurrence limit of not less than $1,000,000, (2) a general-aggregate limit of not less than
$2,000,000, and (3) a products and completed-operations aggregate limit of not less than $2,000,000.
10.3.3.1 The CGL insurance shall be written on ISO occurrence form CG 00 01 10 01 or a substitute form,
providing at least equivalent coverage for liability arising from premises, operations, independent contractors,
products/completed-operations, personal and advertising injury, and liability assumed under an insured contract.
10.3.3.2 The Contractor shall include the State, Contracting Authority, Owner, and A/E as additional insureds under
the CGL policy using ISO endorsement CG 20 10 07 04 and ISO endorsement CG 20 37 07 04 or a substitute
form(s) providing equivalent coverage.

10.3.3.3 The CGL policy shall be endorsed using ISO endorsement CG 25 03 or a substitute form providing
equivalent coverage to provide that the general aggregate limit applies separately to each of the insured’s projects.
10.3.3.4 The CGL insurance shall apply as primary and non-contributory insurance with respect to any other
insurance or self-insurance programs that cover the additional insured(s).
10.3.3.5 The CGL policy shall not exclude coverage to the additional insured(s) for bodily injury or property
damage arising out of the products/completed-operations hazard.
10.3.3.6 The Contractor shall maintain the CGL insurance in effect for no less than 5 years after the earlier of the
termination the Contract or Substantial Completion of all Work.
10.3.4 Business Automobile Liability. The Contractor shall maintain business automobile (“BA”) coverage written on
ISO form CA 00 01 10 01 or a substitute form, providing at least equivalent coverage with a limit of not less than
$1,000,000 each accident.
10.3.4.1 The coverage shall extend to any auto.
10.3.4.2 The Contractor shall include the State, Contracting Authority, Owner, and A/E as additional insureds under
the BA policy.
10.3.5 Umbrella/Excess Liability. The Contractor may employ an umbrella/excess liability policy to achieve the above-
required minimum coverage.
10.3.5.1 The Contractor shall maintain umbrella/excess liability coverage with a limit of not less than $2,000,000 (in
addition to the above-required limits) if the Work (or the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor) includes any
of the following:
.1 brick/block masonry;
.2 exterior caulking/sealant;
.3 cast-in-place or precast concrete;
.4 curtain wall;
.5 dampproofing/waterproofing;
.6 electrical;
.7 elevator;
.8 exterior glass and/or glazing;
.9 exterior marble, granite, and/or other stonework;
.10 miscellaneous metals;
.11 plaster/stucco;
.12 plumbing;
.13 HVAC;
.14 roofing and/or sheet metal;
.15 scaffolding;
.16 spray-on fireproofing;
.17 sprinkler and/or fire protection; or
.18 structural steel and/or metal deck.
10.3.5.2 The Contractor shall maintain umbrella/excess liability coverage with a limit of not less than $5,000,000 (in
addition to the above-required limits) if the Work (or the Work to performed by the Subcontractor) includes any of
the following:
.1 caissons and/or piles;
.2 demolition;
.3 excavation and/or utility work;
.4 sheeting, shoring, and/or underpinning;
.5 window washing equipment; or
.6 wrecking.
10.3.6 Contractor’s Pollution Liability. If the Work includes environmentally sensitive, hazardous types of activities
(such as demolition, exterior insulation finish systems, Asbestos abatement, storage-tank removal, or similar activities),
or involves Hazardous Materials, the Contractor shall maintain a contractor’s pollution liability (“CPL”) policy with (1) a
per-claim limit of not less than $1,000,000 and (2) an annual-aggregate limit of not less than $1,000,000, covering the

acts, errors and/or omissions of the Contractor for damages (including from mold) sustained by the Owner by reason of
the Contractor’s performance of the Work.
10.3.6.1 The CPL policy shall have an effective date, which is on or before the date that the Contractor first started
to perform any Project-related services.
10.3.6.2 Upon submission of the associated certificate of insurance and at each policy renewal, the Contractor shall
advise the Contracting Authority in writing of any actual or alleged claims that may erode the CPL policy’s limits.
10.3.6.3 The Contractor shall maintain the CPL insurance in effect for no less than 5 years after the earlier of the
termination of the Contract or Substantial Completion of all Work.
10.3.7 Professional Liability—Contractor. The Contractor shall maintain professional liability insurance (including
without limitation for sprinkler and/or fire protection and other design-build work included in the Work) without design-
build exclusions with limits not less than as identified in the following table:
Contract Sum Each Claim Annual Aggregate
Up to $50,000,000 $1,000,000 $2,000,000
More than $50,000,000 $2,000,000 $4,000,000
10.3.7.1 The professional liability policy shall have an effective date on or before the date that the Contractor first
started to provide any Project-related services.
advise the Contracting Authority in writing of any actual or alleged claims that may erode the professional liability
policy’s limits.
10.3.7.3 The Contractor shall maintain the professional liability insurance in effect for no less than 5 years after the
earlier of the termination of the Contract or Substantial Completion of all Work.
10.3.7.4 If the Contractor is not authorized under Applicable Law to directly provide professional design services,
the Contractor may satisfy the requirements of this Section 10.3.7 by providing a contractor’s professional liability
insurance policy.
10.3.7.5 If the Contractor is a joint venture:
.1 the Contractor may meet the requirements of this Section 10.3.7 by providing a PL policy under which
each joint venturer is the insured; or
.2 each joint venturer shall individually meet the requirements of this Section 10.3.7 by providing a PL policy
(1) under which the individual joint venturer is the insured and (2) that covers that joint venturer’s interests
in the joint venture by endorsement or otherwise. The certificate of insurance shall reflect that the PL
policy covers the joint venturer’s interest in the joint venture.
Example: Assume that the Contractor (1) is the “XY joint venture” of company “X” and company “Y”;
and (2) is required under Section 10.3.7 to maintain PL insurance limits of $1M/$2M. In order to
comply with Section 10.3.7.5.2, “X” must maintain PL insurance limits of $1M/$2M and “Y” must
maintain PL insurance limits of $1M/$2M.
10.3.7.6 If the Contractor is a limited-liability company, which members consist of two or more separate firms:
.1 the Contractor may meet the requirements of this Section 10.3.7 by providing a PL policy under which the
limited-liability company is the insured; or
.2 each member of the limited-liability company shall individually meet the requirements of this
Section 10.3.7 by providing a PL policy (1) under which the individual member is the insured and (2) that
covers that member’s interests in the limited-liability company by endorsement or otherwise. The
certificate of insurance shall reflect that the PL policy covers the member’s interest in the limited-liability
company.
Example: Assume that the Contractor (1) is the “XY limited-liability company,” the members of which
are “X” and “Y”; and (2) is required under Section 10.3.7 to maintain PL insurance limits of
$1M/$2M. In order to comply with Section 10.3.7.6.2, “X” must maintain PL insurance limits of
$1M/$2M and “Y” must maintain PL insurance limits of $1M/$2M.

10.3.8 Professional Liability—Subcontractors. If the Work to be performed by a Subcontractor includes any professional
design services (including without limitation sprinkler and/or fire protection and other design-build work) the
Subcontractor shall maintain professional liability insurance without design-build exclusions with limits not less than as
identified in the following table:
Subcontract Sum Each Claim Annual Aggregate
Up to $50,000,000 $1,000,000 $2,000,000
More than $50,000,000 $2,000,000 $4,000,000
10.3.8.1 The professional liability policy shall have an effective date on or before the date that the Subcontractor
first started to provide any Project-related services.
advise the Contracting Authority in writing of any actual or alleged claims that may erode the Subcontractor’s
professional liability policy’s limits.
10.3.8.3 The Subcontractor shall maintain the professional liability insurance in effect for no less than 5 years after
the earlier of the termination of the Contract or Substantial Completion of all Work.
10.3.8.4 If the Subcontractor is not authorized under Applicable Law to directly provide professional design
services, the Subcontractor may satisfy the requirements of this Section 10.3.7.5 by providing a contractor’s
professional liability insurance policy.
10.3.9 Aviation Liability. If the Contractor or a Subcontractor uses aircraft, including helicopters, in performance of the
Work, the Contractor shall maintain aircraft or aviation liability coverage in an amount of no less than $10,000,000. The
Contracting Authority and Owner will not be liable for any damage to any aircraft owned, leased, rented, or borrowed by
the Contractor or a Subcontractor.
10.3.10 Watercraft Liability. If the Contractor or a Subcontractor uses watercraft in performance of the Work, the
Contractor shall maintain watercraft liability coverage including protection and indemnity insurance in an amount of no
less than $5,000,000. The Contracting Authority and Owner will not be liable for any damage to any watercraft owned,
leased, rented, or borrowed by the Contractor or Subcontractor.
10.3.11 Equipment Coverage. The Contracting Authority and Owner will not insure or be liable for damage to any
Contractor or Subcontractor owned, leased, rented, or borrowed tools, equipment, or vehicles. The Contractor and
Subcontractors are solely responsible for maintaining all insurance necessary to cover their tools, equipment, and
vehicles.
10.3.12 Ocean Marine Insurance. If the shipment of equipment or materials for the Work will not be covered by the
builder’s risk insurance required under Section 10.4, the Contractor shall maintain ocean marine insurance to the Site
including cost, insurance, and freight with limits of not less than an amount equal to the full replacement cost of
equipment/materials shipped to final destination point. The insurance shall include the following minimum requirements:
10.3.12.1 all-risk basis including war risk and all forms of terrorism;
10.3.12.2 coverage for general average and salvage charges;
10.3.12.3 “on deck” coverage;
10.3.12.4 warehouse-to-warehouse coverage;
10.3.12.5 coverage to include losses from strikes, riots, and civil commotions (“SR&CC coverage”);
10.3.12.6 coverage to include losses from free of capture and seizure warranty (“FC&S Warranty coverage”);
10.3.12.7 “Inchmaree” clause;
10.3.12.8 sue and labor;
10.3.12.9 “both-to-blame” coverage;
10.3.12.10 free of particular average;
10.3.12.11 inland coverage including on-land shipment, port storage, and barge transit upon inland waterways; and
10.3.12.12 damage by saltwater and rainwater perils and cargo sweat.
10.3.13 Additional Property Insurance. For any demolition, blasting, excavating, tunneling, shoring, or similar
operations, the Contractor shall provide and maintain Property Damage Liability insurance with a limit of liability equal
to the limit as specified in the applicable sections of Article 10.

10.4 Builder’s Risk Insurance
10.4.1 The Contractor shall provide and maintain, during the progress of the Work and until Contract Completion, a
builder’s risk insurance policy to cover all Work in the course of construction including false-work, temporary buildings
and structures, and materials used in the construction process, stored on or off-site, or while in transit. This insurance
shall be on a special cause of loss form that provides coverage on an open perils basis insuring against the direct physical
loss of, or damage to, covered property including, but not limited to, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, earthquake,
tornado, lightning, explosion, breakage of glass, flood, collapse, water damage, and hot and cold testing. This insurance
shall be written on a replacement cost basis and shall also include debris removal, and/or demolition occasioned by
enforcement of Applicable Law.
10.4.1.1 The amount of coverage shall be not less than the total completed value of the Project, including the value
of permanent fixtures and decorations, with a deductible of not more than $25,000 per occurrence. Any deductible
over the amount specified shall be authorized in writing by the Owner and Contracting Authority.
10.4.1.2 Coverage shall include a provision to pay the reasonable extra costs of acceleration and expediting
temporary and permanent repairs to, or permanent replacement of, damaged property. This shall include overtime
wages and the extra cost of “express” or other means for rapidly transporting materials and supplies necessary to the
repair or replacement.
10.4.1.3 Coverage shall include “soft cost endorsement” including, but not limited to, the reasonable extra costs of
the A/E and reasonable Contractor extension or acceleration costs.
10.4.1.4 Coverage shall include material in transit or stored off-site and identified for the Project.
10.4.1.5 Coverage shall waive all rights between the Owner, Contracting Authority, Contractor, and Subcontractors
at any tier, for damages caused by fire or any other perils to the extent of actual recovery of any insurance proceeds
under the policy.
10.4.1.6 Coverage shall include appropriate sub-limits for installation coverage.
10.4.1.7 Coverage shall include provisions for mechanical or electrical breakdown, or boiler system testing.
10.4.1.8 Coverage shall include temporary structures and scaffolding, along with collapse coverage.
10.4.1.9 Coverage shall be primary to all other applicable insurance.
10.4.1.10 The builder’s risk policy shall specifically permit and allow for Partial Occupancy by the Owner prior to
Contract Completion and coverage shall remain in effect until all punch list items are completed.
10.4.1.11 The Contractor’s tools and equipment shall not be covered under the builder’s risk policy. It is the
Contractor’s sole responsibility to maintain such coverage, which shall be included in its Overhead (a component of
Contractor’s Fee) and not included as a separate item in the Contractor’s Schedule of Values.
10.4.2 If the Contractor is involved solely in the installation of material and equipment and not in new building
construction, the Contractor shall purchase and maintain a builder’s risk, builder’s risk-renovations, or installation floater
insurance policy. The policy shall comply with the provisions of Section 10.4.1.
10.5 Waivers of Subrogation

10.5.1 To the fullest extent permitted by Applicable Law, the Contractor waives all rights against the Owner, Contracting
Authority, and their agents and employees for damages to the extent covered by any insurance, except rights to the
proceeds of that insurance. All policies shall accomplish the waiver of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise.
10.5.2 The Owner, Contracting Authority, and Contractor waive all rights against each other for damages caused by fire
or other perils to the extent of actual recovery of any insurance proceeds under any property insurance, inland marine
insurance, or builder’s risk insurance applicable to the Work.
10.6 Indemnification for Injury or Damage

10.6.1 To the fullest extent permitted by Applicable Law, the Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the
Indemnified Parties from and against all claims, costs, damages, losses, fines, penalties, and expenses (including but not
limited to all fees and charges of attorneys and other professionals, and all court, arbitration, or other dispute-resolution
costs) arising out of or in connection with the Project, provided that any such claim, cost, damage, loss, fine, penalty, or
expense is attributable to:
10.6.1.1 bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property but only to the
extent caused by the negligent acts, errors, or omissions of the Contractor or a person or entity for whom the
Contractor may be liable;

10.6.1.2 infringement of patent rights or copyrights by the Contractor or a person or entity for whom the Contractor
may be liable; or
10.6.1.3 a violation of Applicable Law but only to the extent attributable to the Contractor or a person or entity for
whom the Contractor may be liable.
10.6.2 The Contractor’s indemnification obligation under Section 10.6 exists regardless of whether or not and the extent
to which the claim, damage, loss, fine, penalty, or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified under Section 10.6.
But nothing in Section 10.6 obligates the Contractor to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the
consequences of that individual or entity’s own negligence.
10.6.3 The Contractor’s obligations under Section 10.6 shall not extend to the liability of the A/E, A/E’s consultants,
agents, representatives, or employees for negligent preparation or approval of Drawings, Specifications, Change Orders,
opinions, and any other responsibility of the A/E, except to the extent covered by the Contractor’s insurance.
10.6.4 In claims against an Indemnified Party by any direct or indirect employee (or the survivor or personal
representative of that employee) of the Contractor or a person or entity for whom the Contractor may be liable, the
indemnification obligation under Section 10.6 will not be limited by a limitation on the amount or type of damages,
compensation, or benefits payable under workers’ compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit
acts.
10.6.5 The Contractor’s indemnification obligation under Section 10.6 will not be limited by any insurance policy
provided or required in connection with the Project.
10.6.6 The Contractor’s obligations under Section 10.6 shall not negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of
indemnity, which would otherwise exist as to an Indemnified Party.
10.6.7 The Contractor’s indemnification obligation under Section 10.6 will survive termination of the Contract and
10.6.8 The Contracting Authority may deduct from the Contract Sum the claims, damages, losses, fines, penalties, and
expenses for which the Contractor is liable under Section 10.6. If those claims, damages, losses, fines, penalties, and
expenses exceed the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum, the Contractor shall immediately pay the difference to the
Owner.
ARTICLE 11 - SUSPENSION AND TERMINATION

11.1 Suspension of the Work
11.1.1 The Contracting Authority, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy it may have, may
order the Contractor in writing to suspend, delay, or interrupt performance of the Work in whole or in part for such
period as the Contracting Authority may determine.
11.1.1.1 If the Contracting Authority suspends the Work under this Section 11.1.1 and the Contractor complies with
Article 8, the Contract Sum and Contract Times shall be adjusted for increases in the cost and time caused by the
suspension, delay, or interruption. The adjustment of the Contract Sum, however, shall not include profit (a
component of Contractor’s Fee).
11.1.1.2 Notwithstanding the foregoing, no adjustment shall be made to the Contract Sum or Contract Times to the
extent that:
.1 performance was, or could have been, suspended, delayed, or interrupted by a cause for which the
Contractor is responsible; or
.2 an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract.
11.1.1.3 If the Contracting Authority suspends the Work under this Section 11.1.1 and the Contractor submits a
proper Contractor Payment Request, subject to all other provisions of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall
be entitled to payment of compensation due under the Contract Documents for Work performed before the
suspension based upon the Schedule of Values.
11.1.2 The Contracting Authority, without prejudice to any other right or remedy it may have, may order the Contractor
in writing to suspend, delay, or interrupt the performance of the Work in whole or in part for such period as the
Contracting Authority may determine for any of the following reasons: (1) Defective Work; (2) the Contractor is causing
undue risk of damage to any part of the Project or adjacent area; (3) the Contractor fails to furnish or perform the Work

in such a way that the complete Work will conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents; or (4) any other
cause the Contracting Authority reasonably believes justifies suspension.
11.1.2.1 The Contracting Authority’s exercise of its right to suspend the Work under this Section 11.1.2 shall not
entitle the Contractor to any adjustment of the Contract Sum, Contract Times, or both.
11.1.2.2 If the Contracting Authority is adjudged to have improperly suspended the Work under this Section 11.1.2,
the suspension shall be deemed to have been a suspension under Section 11.1.1.
11.1.3 Upon receipt of notice of suspension under this Section 11.1, the Contractor shall cease Work on the suspended
activities and take all necessary or appropriate steps to limit disbursements and minimize respective costs. The
Contractor shall furnish a report to the Contracting Authority, within 5 days of receiving the notice of suspension,
describing the status of the Work, including, but not limited to, results accomplished, resulting conclusions, and other
information as the Contracting Authority may require.
11.1.4 The Contracting Authority’s right to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty to exercise the right for the
benefit of the Contractor or any other party, and the Contracting Authority’s exercise or failure to exercise the right shall
not prejudice any of the Contracting Authority’s other rights.
11.2 Termination for Convenience

11.2.1 The Contracting Authority may, at any time, terminate the Contract in whole or in part for the Owner’s
convenience and without cause, at any time upon 10 days’ written notice to the Contractor.
11.2.2 Upon receipt of the notice of termination for convenience, the Contractor shall immediately proceed with
performance of the following duties in accordance with instructions from the Contracting Authority:
11.2.2.1 cease operation as specified in the notice;
11.2.2.2 place no further orders and enter into no further subcontracts for materials, labor, services, or facilities,
except as necessary to complete continued portions of the Project;
11.2.2.3 terminate all subcontracts and orders to the extent they relate to the Work terminated;
11.2.2.4 proceed with Work not terminated; and
11.2.2.5 take actions that may be necessary, or that the Contracting Authority may direct, for the protection and
preservation of the terminated Work.
11.2.3 Upon termination, the Contracting Authority shall pay the Contractor in accordance with the Schedule of Values
for Work completed, including any retained funds, and the value of materials ordered and delivered, less any salvage
credit the Contractor may receive for them.
11.2.3.1 All materials, equipment, facilities, and supplies at the Site or stored off-site, for which the Contractor has
received payment, shall become the property of the Owner.
11.2.3.2 The Contractor is entitled to a fair and reasonable profit for Work performed and reasonable expenses
directly attributable to termination of the Contract. In no event shall the Contractor be entitled to (1) Contractor’s
Fee on Work not performed or (2) compensation in excess of the total Contract Sum.
11.2.4 If the Contracting Authority terminates the Work under this Section 11.2, the termination shall not affect the
rights or remedies of the State against the Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue.
11.2.5 Notwithstanding Section 11.2.3, if the Contracting Authority terminates the Work under this Section 11.2, but
there exists an event of the Contractor’s default, the Contractor shall be entitled to receive only such amounts as it would
be entitled to receive following the occurrence of an event of default as provided in Section 11.3.
11.3 Termination for Cause

11.3.1 The Contracting Authority may terminate all or a portion of the Contract if the Contractor commits a material
breach of the Contract including but not limited to:
11.3.1.1 failure to prosecute the Work with the necessary force or in a timely manner;
11.3.1.2 refusal to remedy Defective Work;
11.3.1.3 failure to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials;
11.3.1.4 failure to properly make payment to Subcontractors or Consultants;
11.3.1.5 performance of any services outside of the United States;

11.3.1.6 permitting its Subcontractors or Consultants to perform any services outside of the United States; or
11.3.1.7 disregarding laws, ordinances, or rules, regulations, or orders of a public authority with jurisdiction over the
Project.
11.3.2 If the Contracting Authority intends to exercise its termination rights under this Section 11.3, the Contracting
Authority shall issue not less than 5 days’ written notice to the Contractor and the Contractor’s Surety in accordance with
ORC Section 153.17 (“5-Day Notice”).
11.3.2.1 Notwithstanding any provision of the Contract to the contrary (1) the issuance of a 72-Hour Notice under
Section 6.23.1 is not a condition precedent to the Contracting Authority’s exercise of its rights under Section 11.3
and (2) the Contracting Authority’s decision to not issue a 72-Hour Notice under Section 6.23.1 will not prejudice
the Contracting Authority’s rights under Section 11.3.
11.3.3 If the Contractor fails to satisfy the requirements set forth in the 5-Day Notice within 15 days of receipt of the 5-
Day Notice, the Contracting Authority may declare the Contractor in default, terminate the Contract, and employ upon
the Work the additional force or supply materials or either as appropriate, and remove Defective Work.
11.3.4 If the Contract is terminated, the Contractor’s Surety may perform the Contract. If the Contractor’s Surety does
not commence performance of the Contract within 10 days of the date of Contract termination, the Contracting Authority
may complete the Work by means the Contracting Authority determines appropriate. The Contracting Authority may
take possession of and use all materials, facilities, and equipment at the Site or stored off-site, for which the State has
paid.
11.3.5 If the Contract is terminated, the Contractor shall not be entitled to further payment. If the unpaid balance of the
Contract Sum exceeds the costs of finishing the Work, including without limitation the fees and charges of engineers,
architects, attorneys, and other professionals and court costs, and other damages incurred by the Owner and not expressly
waived, the Contractor or Surety shall immediately pay the amount of the insufficiency to the Owner. This obligation for
payment shall survive termination of the Contract.
11.3.6 If the Contractor’s Surety performs the Work, the provisions of the Contract Documents govern the Surety’s
performance, with the Surety in place of the Contractor in all provisions including, but not limited to, provisions for
payment for the Work, and provisions of the right of the Contracting Authority to complete the Work.
11.3.7 If the Contracting Authority terminates the Contract under this Section 11.3, the termination shall not affect any
rights or remedies of the State against the Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue. The Contracting
Authority’s retention or payment of funds due the Contractor shall not release the Contractor or the Contractor’s Surety
from liability for performance of the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
11.3.8 If the Contracting Authority is adjudged to have improperly terminated the Contract under this Section 11.3, the
termination will be deemed to have been a termination under Section 11.2.
11.4 Contractor Insolvency

11.4.1 Bankruptcy of Contractor.
11.4.1.1 If the Contractor files a voluntary petition in bankruptcy or has an involuntary petition in bankruptcy filed
against it, the Contractor, the Contractor as the debtor-in-possession, or the trustee of the Contractor’s bankruptcy
estate shall file a motion to assume or reject the Contract under Bankruptcy Code §365, 11 U.S.C. §365, within
20 days after the filing of the voluntary petition or involuntary petition and shall diligently prosecute that motion to
conclusion so as to obtain an order granting or denying that motion within 45 days after the filing of the voluntary or
involuntary petition. The failure to file and prosecute that motion within the time limits provided by this
Section 11.4 shall constitute a material breach of the Contract as time is of the essence with respect to Contractor’s
performance of all terms of this Contract. The Contractor agrees to the granting of relief from the automatic stay of
the Bankruptcy Code, 11 U.S.C. §362(a), to permit the Contracting Authority to terminate the Contract for cause in
such instance and issue and serve all notices necessary to terminate the Contract or arising out of the termination of
the Contract and to take any and all other action necessary to terminate the Contract.
11.4.2 Receivership or Assignment for the Benefit of Creditors.
11.4.2.1 If the Contractor makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors or if a receiver is appointed for all
or a substantial part of the Contractor’s business or property, the Contracting Authority shall serve written notice on
the Contractor and Contractor’s Surety stating that any failure of the Contractor to provide adequate assurance of
continued performance shall be considered a rejection of the Contract, which shall result in termination of the
Contract for cause. Such termination of the Contract need not be evidenced by an order of any court.

ARTICLE 12 - GENERAL PROVISIONS
12.1 Contractor’s Documents and Contract Documents
12.1.1 Ownership.
12.1.1.1 The Owner alone owns the Contractor’s Documents and the Contract Documents and every right, title, and
interest therein.
.1 The Contractor must execute and deliver and cause its employees and agents and all Subcontractors and
Consultants to execute and deliver, to the Owner any transfers, assignments, documents, or other
instruments (if any) necessary to vest in the Owner complete right, title, interest in and ownership of the
Contractor’s Documents and the Contract Documents.
12.1.1.2 The Contractor may retain copies, including reproducible copies, of the Contractor’s Documents and the
Contract Documents for information, reference, and performance of the Work.
12.1.1.3 The submission or distribution of the Contractor’s Documents or the Contract Documents to meet official
regulatory requirements or for similar purposes in connection with the Project is not a waiver of the Owner’s
reserved rights in the Contractor’s Documents and the Contract Documents. Any unauthorized use of the
Contractor’s Documents or the Contract Documents shall be at the sole risk of the entity making the unauthorized
use.
12.1.1.4 The Contractor shall provide Electronic Files (in native format) to Separate Consultants and Separate
Contractors for their use in connection with the Project. The Contractor shall provide the Electronic Files (1) at no
additional cost to the Separate Consultants, Separate Contractors, and Owner and (2) without requiring the Separate
Consultants, Separate Contractors, or Owner to agree to any terms or conditions concerning the provision, receipt, or
use of the Electronic Files that differ in any material respect from the Contract.
12.1.2 Intent.
12.1.2.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and
completion of the Work by the Contractor.
12.1.2.2 The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one is binding as if required by all.
12.1.2.3 The Contractor shall provide all labor and materials necessary for the entire completion of the Work
described in the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable to produce the intended results.
12.1.2.4 The Drawings govern dimensions, details, and locations of the Work. The Specifications govern quality of
materials and workmanship.
12.1.2.5 The organization of the Specifications in divisions, sections, and articles, and the arrangement of Drawings
shall not restrict the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to
be performed by any trade.
12.1.2.6 In the event of inconsistency or conflict within the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide the
better quality or greater quantity of Work, and comply with the stricter requirement.
12.1.2.7 Unless otherwise defined in the Contract Documents, words that have well-known technical or construction
industry meanings are used in accordance with those recognized meanings.
12.1.2.8 The Sections of Division 01 - “General Requirements” govern the performance of the Work of all Sections
of the Specifications.
12.1.3 Use of Electronic Files.
12.1.3.1 The Owner, Contracting Authority, A/E, and Contractor reasonably expect that they will provide Electronic
Files to each other to facilitate the design and construction of the Project consistent with current practices and
customs in the construction industry.
12.1.3.2 The Owner, Contracting Authority, A/E, and Contractor acknowledge that the use of Electronic Files
involves risks not generally associated with the use of paper documents. Those risks include, for example and
without limitation, alteration (inadvertent or intentional) and deterioration, both of which may not be readily
apparent through casual observation.
12.1.3.3 The Owner, Contracting Authority, A/E, and Contractor do not warrant to each other that any Electronic
File they provide (1) was not altered though transmission; (2) is compatible with the recipient’s computer system or
software; (3) will not be altered through degradation of the recipient’s storage media; or (4) is suitable for
conversion/translation to and subsequent use in a system or format other than the Electronic File’s original system or
format.

12.1.3.4 Before relying on any Electronic File it receives, the recipient is responsible for verifying that the
Electronic File was not altered though transmission, degradation of the recipient’s own storage media, or other
causes.
12.1.3.5 If the recipient of an Electronic File converts/translates the Electronic File from its original system or
format to an alternate system or format, the recipient assumes the risk that the conversion/translation created errors
in the converted/translated file.
12.1.3.6 The Owner, Contracting Authority, A/E, and Contractor shall each maintain and operate its own computer
systems and storage media in a commercially reasonable way and take reasonable steps to prevent errors in and
deterioration of the Electronic Files it creates, provides, and receives.
12.1.3.7 In the event of a discrepancy between information contained in a paper version of a document and the
Electronic File of that document, the paper version will govern.
12.1.3.8 This Section 12.1.3 does not relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for the preparation, completeness,
or accuracy of the Contractor’s Documents.
12.2 Public Relations

12.2.1 Publicity prior to completion of the Project. Prior to completion of the Project, public relations or publicity about
the Project shall be solely within the control, and with the consent of, the Owner.
12.2.2 Publicity after completion of the Project. After completion of the Project, the Contractor may exercise reasonable
public relations and marketing efforts related to the Project, provided the Contractor properly identifies the Owner and
Contracting Authority, and their participation in the Project.
12.2.3 Professional Photography. If the Contractor commissions photography of the completed Project, the Contractor
shall include in its photography agreements a release for unrestricted and unlimited use of photographs by the Owner and
Contracting Authority, and shall provide the Owner and Contracting Authority with a reasonable quantity of photographs
for use in the Owner’s and the Contracting Authority’s marketing and awareness activities, including, but not limited to,
profiles of the Project on their respective websites.
12.2.4 Craft Awards and Other Recognition. If the Contractor submits the Project for craft awards or other similar
venues for recognition of the Project, the Contractor shall properly identify the Owner and Contracting Authority, and
their participation in the Project. In addition, if the Project receives any craft award or other recognition, the Contractor
shall provide duplicate copies of the award plaque or other memento of the award to the Owner and Contracting
Authority.
12.3 Application and Governing Law

12.3.1 The Contract and the rights of the parties thereunder shall be governed by the laws of the state of Ohio and only
Ohio courts shall have jurisdiction over any action or proceeding concerning the Contract and/or performance
thereunder. The Contractor irrevocably consents to such jurisdiction.
12.3.2 The parties to the Contract shall comply with Applicable Law.
12.3.3 Other rights and responsibilities of the Contractor, A/E, Contracting Authority, and Owner are set forth
throughout the Contract Documents and included under different titles, articles, and paragraphs for convenience.
12.4 Conditions of the Contract

12.4.1 These General Conditions govern, take precedence over, and shall not be superseded or amended by Drawings
and Specifications, unless so provided in Supplementary Conditions prepared by the Contracting Authority and approved
by the Ohio Facilities Construction Commission.
12.5 Notice of Commencement.

12.5.1 The Contracting Authority shall prepare a Notice of Commencement and make it available as required under ORC
Section 1311.252.
12.5.2 Upon request, the Contracting Authority or the Contractor shall furnish the Notice of Commencement to
Subcontractors or any other member of the public.

12.6 Written Notice
12.6.1 Notice under the Contract Documents shall be validly given if:
12.6.1.1 delivered personally to a member of the organization for whom the notice is intended;
12.6.1.2 delivered, or sent by registered or certified mail, to the last known business address of the organization; or
12.6.1.3 sent by facsimile, email, or web-based project management software, provided the original, signed
document is delivered within 3 business days after the date of the electronic transmission.
12.6.2 When the Owner, Contracting Authority, A/E, or Contractor gives notice to one of the other 3, it shall also
simultaneously send a copy of that notice to the others.
12.6.3 A copy of all notices, certificates, requests, or other communications to the Contracting Authority shall be sent to
the Project Manager.
12.6.4 In the event of an emergency involving the Project, including, but not limited to, a fatality, serious injury, fire,
collapse, flood, utility, or power loss to occupied facilities, explosion, or environmental damage, the Contractor shall
immediately notify the A/E, Contracting Authority, and Owner by telephone.
12.6.5 The Contracting Authority, Owner, A/E, or Contractor may, by written notice given hereunder, designate
addresses, telephone numbers, email addresses, or facsimile numbers to which notices, certificates, requests, or
communications shall be sent.
12.7 Taxes
12.7.1 Only those materials that ultimately become a part of the completed structure or improvement that constitutes the
Project shall be exempt from state sales tax and state use tax.
12.7.2 The purchase, lease, or rental of material, equipment, parts, or expendable items as concrete form lumber, tools,
oils, greases, and fuels, which are used in connection with the Work, are subject to the application of state sales tax and
state use tax.
12.8 Computing Time

12.8.1 When the Contract Documents refer to a period of time by a number of days, the period shall be computed to
exclude the first and include the last day of the period. If the last day of the period falls on a Saturday, Sunday, or a legal
holiday, that day shall be omitted from the computation and the period shall end on the next succeeding day that is not a
Saturday, Sunday, or legal holiday.
12.8.2 Except as excluded under Section 12.8.1, the Contract Times and all other periods referred to in the Contract
Documents includes Saturdays, Sundays, and all days defined as legal holidays by Section 12.8.4.
12.8.3 The standard workdays for State projects are Monday through Friday, excluding legal holidays.
12.8.4 Legal holidays are as follows:
12.8.4.1 New Year’s Day – First Day in January;
12.8.4.2 Martin Luther King Jr. Day – Third Monday in January;
12.8.4.3 Washington-Lincoln (President’s) Day – Third Monday in February;
12.8.4.4 Memorial Day – Last Monday in May;
12.8.4.5 Independence Day – Fourth day of July;
12.8.4.6 Labor Day – First Monday in September;
12.8.4.7 Columbus Day – Second Monday in October;
12.8.4.8 Veterans’ Day – Eleventh Day of November;
12.8.4.9 Thanksgiving Day – Fourth Thursday of November; and
12.8.4.10 Christmas Day – Twenty-fifth day of December.
12.8.5 If a legal holiday falls on a Saturday, it is observed on the preceding Friday. If a legal holiday falls on a Sunday, it
is observed on the following Monday.

12.9 Time of the Essence
12.9.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract and all obligations under the
Contract. By signing the Agreement, the Contractor acknowledges that the Contract Times are reasonable, taking into
consideration the usual weather and other conditions prevailing in the locality of the Project. By signing the Construction
Schedule, the Contractor acknowledges that the specified Milestone dates are reasonable, taking into consideration the
usual weather and other conditions prevailing in the locality of the Project.
12.9.1.1 The Notice to Proceed establishes the date for commencement of the Work.
12.9.1.2 The Contractor acknowledges that the Owner has entered into, or may enter into, agreements for use of all
or part of the premises where the Work is to be completed based upon the Contractor achieving Contract
Completion within the associated Contract Time.
12.9.1.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in a reasonable, efficient, and economical sequence, and in the order
and time as provided in the Construction Progress Schedule.
12.9.1.4 The Contractor acknowledges that it may be subject to interference, disruption, hindrance, or delay in the
progress of the Work from any cause. The sole remedy for such interference, disruption, hindrance, or delay shall be
an extension of the Contract Times under Article 8, unless otherwise required by ORC Section 4113.62.
12.10 Successors and Assigns

12.10.1 The Contracting Authority and Contractor each bind themselves, their successors, assigns, and legal
representatives, to the other party to this Contract and to the successors, assigns, and legal representatives of the other
party with respect to all terms of this Contract.
12.10.2 The Contracting Authority and Contractor each acknowledge that the Owner is an intended third-party
beneficiary of this Contract.
12.10.3 The Contractor shall not assign, or transfer any right, title, or interest in this Contract without the Contracting
Authority’s prior written consent.
12.11 Extent of Contract

12.11.1 Entire Contract. The Contract Documents represent the entire and integrated agreement between the Contracting
Authority and Contractor and supersede all prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, either written or oral.
12.11.2 Multiple Counterparts. This Contract may be executed in any number of counterparts, each of which shall be
regarded as an original and all of which shall constitute but one and the same instrument.
12.11.3 Captions. The captions and headings in this Contract are for convenience only and in no way define, limit, or
describe the scope or intent of any provisions or sections hereof.
12.11.4 Precedence. If there are any inconsistencies between the provisions of the Contract Documents and the
provisions of the Contract, the provisions of this Contract shall prevail.
12.12 Severability
12.12.1 If any term or provision of this Contract or the application thereof to any Person or circumstance, is finally
determined to be invalid or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction, the remainder of this Contract or the
application of such term or provision to other Persons or circumstances, shall not be affected thereby, and each term and
provision of this Contract shall be valid and enforced to the fullest extent permitted by Applicable Law.
12.13 Electronic and Facsimile Signatures

12.13.1 Any party hereto may deliver a copy of its counterpart signature page to this Contract via electronic signature
software, fax, e-mail, or web-based project management software. Each party hereto shall be entitled to rely upon an
electronic, scanned, or facsimile signature of any other party delivered in such a manner as if such signature were an
original.
12.14 No Third-Party Interest

12.14.1 Except as expressly provided under Sections 6.2.3 through 6.2.5 and Section 12.10.2, (1) no person or entity,
other than the Contracting Authority and Contractor, will have any right or interest under the Contract, and (2) the
Contract does not create a contractual relationship of any kind between any people or entities other than the Contracting
Authority and Contractor.

12.15 Ohio Retirement System
12.15.1 All individuals employed by the Contractor that provide personal services to the Contracting Authority or Owner
are not public employees for the purposes of ORC Chapter 145, as amended.
12.15.2 If the Contractor is a PERS retirant, as defined by ORC Section 145.38, the Contractor shall notify the
Contracting Authority of such status in writing prior to commencement of Work. The Contracting Authority, Owner, or
State is not responsible for changes to the Contractor’s retirement benefits resulting from entering into this Contract.
12.16 No Waiver
12.16.1 The failure of the Contracting Authority or Contractor to insist in any one or more instances upon the strict
performance of any one or more of the provisions of the Contract or to exercise any rights under the Contract or provided
by law will not be construed as a waiver or relinquishment of that provision or right or of the right to subsequently
demand strict performance or exercise the right and the rights will continue unchanged and remain in full force and
effect.
12.17 Rights and Remedies

12.17.1 The duties, obligations, rights, and remedies under the Contract are in addition to and not a limitation of the
duties, obligations, rights, and remedies otherwise imposed by or available under Applicable Law.
12.18 Survival of Obligations

12.18.1 All representations, indemnity obligations, warranties, guarantees, and necessarily continuing obligations under
the Contract, will survive final payment, completion and acceptance of the Work, and termination or completion of the
Contract.
KEYWORD INDEX
Certificate of Substantial Completion, 25, 27
A Change Directive, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 36
change in the Work, 5, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 43
acceleration, 35, 37, 51 Change Order, 14, 16, 22, 24, 25, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34,
Acceptable Components, 18 35, 40, 42, 43, 44, 52
Affirmative Action, 2 Change Order Log, 30
Agreement, 2, 46, 58 Claim, 32, 33, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42
Allowance, 42, 43 Claim Affidavit, 9
Alternative Dispute Resolution (“ADR”), 10, 40, 41 cleaning, 20, 26, 27
antitrust claims, 2 Commissioning, 21
Applicable Law, 1, 2, 4, 7, 8, 9, 16, 18, 19, 21, 22, 25, 34, Commissioning Agent (“CxA”), 9, 15, 21
38, 44, 45, 47, 51, 52, 56, 59 Computer-Aided Design (“CAD”), 15
approval, 3, 5, 7, 8, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 21, 22, 23, 24, construction procedures, 11
25, 27, 30, 33, 52 Construction Progress Schedule, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 24,
Architect/Engineer Agreement, 6 32, 35, 36, 37, 38, 58
As-Built Documents, 26 Construction Specifications Institute (“CSI”), 43
audit, 33, 35, 36, 41 Construction Stage, 10
construction supervision, 12
B Contract, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10, 12, 16, 24, 25, 29, 31,
33, 36, 37, 38, 42, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 52, 53,
Bankruptcy of Contractor, 54 54, 56, 58, 59
Basis of Design Component, 18 Contract Completion, 10, 11, 13, 25, 26, 27, 28, 38, 51,
Bond, 29, 34, 46 52, 58
builder’s risk, 34, 50, 51 Contract Documents, 5, 6, 7, 8, 11, 12, 13, 15, 16, 17, 20,
Building Information Modeling (“BIM”), 15 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 32, 38, 39, 40,
42, 44, 45, 46, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58
C Contract Sum, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 16, 24, 25, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33,
34, 35, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 49, 52,
capacity charges, 10 53, 54
Certificate of Contract Completion, 25, 26, 28, 46 Contract Times, 4, 6, 16, 24, 29, 30, 31, 32, 35, 37, 38,
certificate of occupancy, 26, 28 39, 40, 41, 45, 52, 53, 57, 58

Contractor Payment Request, 3, 4, 8, 9, 26, 35, 43, 44, 45, I
46, 52
Contractor Personnel Costs, 33 indemnification, 51, 52
Contractor’s Fee, 35, 42, 43 Institution of Higher Education, 40
Coordination Areas, 15 Institutional Designee, 40
Coordination Drawings, 15 insurance, 21, 28, 34, 41, 42, 43, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52
coordination meetings, 15 interruption of existing services, 21
Coordination Participant, 15
correction of the Work, 24 J
Correction Period, 7, 24, 25
critical path, 13, 14, 35, 37, 38 joint venture, 49
D L
daily log, 11, 37 labor, 2, 3, 9, 18, 33, 34, 38, 40, 42, 43, 44, 50, 53, 55
default, 45, 53, 54 Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design
Defective Work, 7, 16, 18, 24, 25, 27, 44, 45, 52, 53, 54 (“LEED”) Rating System, 5
demonstration and training, 28 legal holiday, 57
Differing Site Conditions, 32, 33, 36 licenses, 10
dispute review board, 41 limited-liability company, 49
Domestic Steel, 2, 23 Liquidated Damages, 35, 38, 39, 45
drainage, 19
Drawings, 12, 26, 52, 55, 56 M
Drug Free Safety Program (“DFSP”), 2, 3
MasterFormat, 43
material, 9, 11, 12, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 26,
E 28, 29, 31, 33, 34, 35, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 50,
electric service, 20 51, 53, 54, 55, 57
electronic signature, 58 Material Safety Data Sheet, 19
emergency, 4, 57 Material Supplier, 8, 9
Encouraging Diversity, Growth and Equity (“EDGE”), 3, mediation, 41
4, 43, 44, 45 Milestone, 13, 14, 35, 38, 39, 58
environmental controls, 19 minor change in the Work, 6, 29, 32
Equal Employment Opportunity, 2 Modification, 4, 29, 30, 35
Equal Opportunity Coordinator (“EOC”), 1, 2, 3, 4
equipment, 11, 14, 15, 17, 19, 20, 22, 23, 24, 34, 40, 41, N
42, 43, 48, 50, 51, 53, 54, 57
Estimated Construction Cost, 13 National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System
explosives, 21 (“NPDES”), 10, 12
negotiation, 41
Neutral Facilitator, 6, 10
F no damage for delay, 38
facilities, 19 Nondiscrimination, 1
Field Conditions, 16 Notice of Commencement, 56
Final Inspection, 27, 28 Notice to Proceed, 5, 7, 10, 13, 43, 58
Fire Marshal, 10, 26 Notice, 5-Day, 54
Notice, 72-Hour, 24, 54
G
O
General Conditions, 56
General Conditions Costs, 34, 43 Occupational Safety and Health Administration
Green Building Certification Institute, 5 (“OSHA”), 17, 18, 19
Ohio Building Code, 7
Ohio Bureau of Workers’ Compensation (“OBWC”), 2, 3
H Ohio Construction Contract Information Report, 2
Hazardous Materials, 18, 48 Ohio Department of Commerce, 2, 33
hoisting facilities, 20 Ohio Environmental Protection Agency, 10
Ohio Facilities Construction Commission, 5, 33, 40, 43,
56

Ohio Underground Utility Protection Services (“OUPS”), State, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 21, 25, 26, 38, 42, 45, 46, 53, 54,
12 57
Operation and Maintenance Manuals, 21, 26 storm water, 10
structural testing, 7
P Subcontract, 4, 8, 9, 12, 41, 43, 50
Subcontractor, 2, 3, 6, 7, 8, 9, 12, 13, 15, 18, 21, 24, 26,
Partial Occupancy, 24, 25, 28, 51 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 41, 42, 45, 46, 47, 50, 53, 55, 56
partnering, 9, 10 Substantial Completion, 11, 13, 14, 16, 17, 19, 20, 21, 24,
Pencil Copy, 44 25, 26, 27, 34, 35, 45, 48, 49, 50
performance evaluation, 6 Substitutions, 18
permits, 10 Supplementary Conditions, 56
Plan Approval, 10 Surety, 11, 24, 25, 27, 28, 45, 46, 54
Prevailing Wage Requirements, 44 Suspension of the Work, 52
Pricing Criteria, 33, 34, 35 sustainability, 5
Product Data, 22, 23, 25
progress meetings, 6, 14, 15, 19 T
Project Manager, 5, 9, 17, 18, 21, 40, 57
Project Schedule, 43 tap fees, 10
Proposal, 30, 31, 32, 33, 35, 37 taxes, 35, 57
Proposal Request, 29, 30, 31 Termination for Cause, 53
Protection of the Project, 16 Termination for Convenience, 53
Punch List, 13, 27, 28, 43 testing, 7, 15, 16, 51
tests and inspections, 15
R third-party beneficiary, 11, 58
Record Documents, 26, 43 U

Request for Change Order, 31
Request for Interpretation (“RFI”), 16, 25, 36 U.S. Green Building Council, 5
Retainage, 45 uncovering the Work, 24
royalties and patents, 2 UniFormat, 43
Unit Price, 9, 29, 30, 33, 34, 42, 43, 44
S utilities, 19
Safety Data Sheet (“SDS”), 19 W

Samples, 22, 23, 25
schedule of submittals, 11 Waivers of Subrogation, 51
Schedule of Values, 34, 43, 51, 52, 53 warranty, 24
Separate Consultant, 10, 11, 38, 39 waste materials and rubbish, 20
Separate Contractor, 10, 11, 22, 38, 39 water, 19
Shop Drawings, 13, 22, 23, 25, 26 weather delay, 37
snow and ice, 11 written notice, 4, 12, 16, 18, 23, 24, 28, 31, 32, 36, 40, 47,
special inspection, 7, 15, 16 53, 54, 56, 57
Specifications, 12, 26, 44, 52, 55, 56
END OF DOCUMENT

Document 00 73 00 - Supplementary Conditions (WSU General Contracting)
Certifications
These Supplementary Conditions amend and supplement the General Conditions and other provisions of the
Contract Documents as indicated below. All provisions not amended remain in full force and effect. The terms in
these Supplementary Conditions defined in the Contracting Definitions or the General Conditions shall have the
meanings assigned to them in those documents.
These Supplementary Conditions are authorized, by the Ohio Facilities Construction Commission, for use on
projects constructed by and for Wright State University (“University”).
Contracting Authority
Wright State University
Engineering & Construction
3640 Colonel Glenn Highway
Dayton, Ohio 45435-0001
937.775.4140
http://www.wright.edu
Institutional Designee
Daniel Papay, P.E.
University Engineer
MODIFICATIONS TO GENERAL CONDITIONS

Insert Section 1.1.4 as follows:
1.1.4 This contractor and all subsequent subcontractors shall abide by the requirements of 41 CFR §§ 60-1.4(a),
60-300.5(a) and 60-741.5(a). These regulations prohibit discrimination against qualified individuals based on their
status as protected veterans or individuals with disabilities, and prohibit discrimination against all individuals
based on their race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. Moreover, these regulations require that covered
prime contractors and subcontractors take affirmative action to employ and advance in employment individuals
without regard to race, color, religion, sex, national origin, protected veteran status or disability.
1.10.3 The Contractor shall provide the A/E and the University with a list of contact persons, with telephone numbers,
for 24-hour emergency contact.
Insert Sections 6.3.4.2 through 6.3.4.5 as follows:
6.3.4.2 The Contractor is responsible for contacting the University Engineering & Construction Department at
construction@wright.edu to obtain a dig permit 72 hours in advance of any digging, excavation, trenching, drilling,
driving posts or any other such work. The University’s Excavation/Boring Permit shall be made a part of this
document and can be obtained at http://www.wright.edu.
6.3.4.3 The Contractor shall physically locate underground utilities installed or exposed by the Contractor prior to
backfilling. Physically locating means to measure each change in direction from two separate permanent objects and
note the depth below grade on the As-Built Documents.
6.3.4.4 In conjunction with Section 6.3.4.1, the Contractor shall document the location of any existing or new utility
or device uncovered or installed underground in accordance with Section 6.3.4.3. This information is to be timely
provided to the Project Manager for incorporation into the University’s utility drawings.
6.3.4.5 The Contractor shall backfill excavations with material specified and approved in writing by the A/E.
Surfaces (pavement, concrete, turf, etc.) shall be restored to like new conditions. Turf replacement shall be sod and
not seed, unless otherwise approved by the University.
Insert Section 6.10.5.1.1 as follows:
.1 Work performed in an area that must be kept in operation shall be protected with a sheeted bulkhead
sufficient to keep out dust and dirt, and to isolate the area.
Insert Section 6.10.5.2.1 as follows:
.1 The Contractor shall control fumes and dust to prevent any harmful or undesirable effects in the
surrounding areas.
M160-00 73 00.13.WSU 2014 Edition (2016-MAR) Page 1 of 4

Document 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions (WSU General Contracting)
Insert Sections 6.10.6 through 6.10.10 as follows:
6.10.6 The Contractor, in coordination with the Project Manager, shall document the Site with a video recorder or other
electronic means prior to the start of any Work on the Project. The video recording shall be made approximately 1 week
prior to the start of construction. The purpose of the video recording will be to establish existing conditions before the
Site is turned over to the Contractor. The video recording shall include, but is not limited to, lay-down/staging areas,
condition of existing structures to remain, landscaping that is to remain or be restored subsequent to Project completion,
any University property immediately adjacent to the Site, and ingress and egress routes across University property. The
Contractor shall provide 1 copy of the video recording on a DVD-R disc to the Project Manager.
6.10.7 Temporary fencing shall be installed and maintained to protect the Site, including any lay-down areas, temporary
offices, etc. The Contractor shall submit a fencing plan to the University prior to installation of any temporary fencing.
The Contractor shall furnish and install chain link fencing, knuckled top and bottom, 6 feet high supported with
minimum 1-5/8 inch line posts and 2-3/8 inch end/gate posts on 2 x 1 feet weighted bases a maximum of 10 feet on
center. Mesh openings shall be a maximum of 2-3/8 inches. All fencing materials shall be galvanized. The University
may require Knox locks be installed on entrance gates. Warning signs shall be posted on the fence 40 feet apart stating;
“Construction Area-Keep Out” or similar verbiage approved in writing by the University.
6.10.8 The Contractor shall completely enclose the Site using temporary fencing under Section 6.10.7.
6.10.9 The Contractor shall ensure that the Site be secure from casual non-construction traffic (vehicular and pedestrian)
from either entering in, or passing through, the Site and that the Site includes effective securing of equipment, storage of
materials, and adequate lighting.
6.10.10 If the Contractor desires guard service, the Contractor may provide guard service at the Contractor's cost.
Replace Sections 6.13.4.1 and 6.13.4.2 with the following:
6.13.4.1 The Contractor shall notify the Project Manager 24 hours before the start of non-routine or non-recurring
hot-work. Use of sources of fire, flame or sparks and flammable materials shall be kept to an absolute minimum.
The Contractor shall take proper precautions to prevent fires when welding or while other fire-hazardous work is
being performed. At the beginning of the Project, the Contractor shall inform the Project Manager of its intent to use
blowtorches, welding apparatus, or similar exposed flame and sparking devices. Similar notice shall be given in
regard to the use of flammable liquids, adhesives, and cleaners.
6.13.4.2 The Contractor shall furnish temporary fire extinguishers as required by Applicable Law (minimum of 1),
which shall be within the immediate areas where work is being done at all times. The extinguishers shall be
adequate and suitable for the class of fire likely to be caused by the Contractor’s operations.
Insert Sections 6.13.4.3 through 6.13.4.5 as follows:
6.13.4.3 The Contractor shall implement and follow practices designed to minimize risk and avoid harmful exposure
to chemicals, biological or radiological substances, and physical or mechanical hazards.
6.13.4.4 The Contractor shall use facilities and equipment in the prescribed manner to avoid injury and health
damage to themselves, others, and the environment.
6.13.4.5 The Contractor shall submit a written lockout/tag out procedure based on OSHA requirements to the
University for approval at the beginning of the Project. The Contractor shall use the approved procedure whenever a
system is to be de-energized.
Insert Sections 6.13.5.2.1 and 6.13.5.2.2 as follows:
.1 The licensed abatement contractor will make arrangements for the proper disposal of Hazardous Materials
off-site according to Applicable Law and University regulations.
.2 University trash receptacles, sanitary sewers, and storm drains shall not be used for the disposal of
Hazardous Materials.
Insert Section 6.14.1.3 as follows:
6.14.1.3 The Contractor shall comply with requirements of Applicable Law during installation, use, and removal of
temporary controls, facilities, and utilities.
6.14.3.7 The requirements of this Section 6.14.3 shall include testing or bacteriological analysis required for new
domestic water piping per the American Water Works Standard C651. The Contractor shall be responsible for
sampling and bacteriological analysis required in existing piping and/or buildings taken out of service related to this

Project. Boil advisory situations and the University’s policy regarding water shutdowns can be found in the
University’s Community Water System Contingency Plan (copies available upon request).
Insert Sections 6.14.4.1.1 and 6.14.4.1.2 as follows:
.1 A minimum of 10 foot-candles of night safety lighting covering the entire Site shall be provided for
building construction (ANSI Standard 11.1-1973, Practice for Industrial Lighting).
.2 Lighting removed by the Contractor during construction shall be replaced with adequate temporary lighting
during construction as determined by the A/E and/or the University.
6.15.4.2 University trash receptacles, sanitary sewers, and storm drains shall not be used for the disposal of
construction debris, waste materials, or rubbish.
6.15.5.3 The Contractor shall maintain public streets and roads adjacent to property utilized for construction traffic
clear, clean, and free from dirt and debris. Failure to clean public streets and roads will result in the University
having it done at the expense of the Contractor in accordance with Section 6.15.5.1.
Insert Sections 6.16.7 through 6.16.12 and subordinate sections as follows:
6.16.7 Parking.
6.16.7.1 Main Campus. All parking on the University’s Main Campus is restricted and controlled by the
University’s Parking & Transportation Department. Employees of contractors and subcontractors shall purchase
parking permits from the Parking & Transportation Department and shall park cars in areas assigned to them.
Contractors parking on University property will be charged the current rate to park, as space is available. Parking on
streets or in restricted areas is prohibited. Violations will result in a citation or vehicle impoundment/ towing by a
third party towing company. At the beginning of the Work, each contractor shall report to the Parking &
Transportation Department the approximate number of parking permits which will be required for all employees,
including employees of its subcontractors. On-site parking for all contractor personnel will not be permitted within
construction limits.
6.16.7.2 All Other Campuses. Contractors performing Work on all other campuses shall coordinate with the Project
Manager on matters of parking permits and designated areas.
6.16.8 The Contractor shall validate with the appropriate University, City, County, or State agency as to the status of
road work impacting traffic flow on, to, and from, campus.
6.16.8.1 The Contractor shall not be permitted to use University streets for any purpose not previously approved by
the Parking & Transportation Department. This includes, but is not limited to, trucks stopping on streets awaiting
access to the Site. Should Site constraints be such that offloading of trucks from University streets is required, the
Contractor shall provide a written request to the Parking & Transportation Department 5 days in advance of the date
when the unloading is required. The Contractor shall pay for any traffic control occasioned by the street blockage.
The Contractor shall also post signs three days in advance of any street blockage longer than 2 hours warning
motorists of the date, time, and duration of the planned blockage.
6.16.9 The Contractor shall clean and restore storage areas to their original condition.
6.16.10 The University reserves the right to refuse to allow material it considers, in its sole discretion, to be a fire hazard
to be stored on the University's property.
6.16.11 Gasoline and other flammable liquids shall be kept in approved safety cans at all times and shall not be stored
inside University facilities.
6.16.12 The use of skid-steer loaders, track hoes, front loaders, back hoes, tractors, excavators, bulldozers, and similar
equipment inside a structure is prohibited regardless of size, attachments, or type including, but not limited to, self-
propelled, ride-on, or walk-behind.
6.17.3 Interruptions to utility services shall be planned by the Contractor in coordination with the University, to provide
the least inconvenience and downtime. A major utility shutdown requires a minimum of 4 weeks’ notice from the
Contractor. The Contractor shall provide a licensed and bonded electrician to operate all medium voltage electrical
equipment and be present during the duration of the shutdown.

6.23.3.2 If the Defective Work creates or contributes to a situation whereby the University is unable to occupy or
use the space as intended, the Contractor shall begin to correct Defective Work within 24 hours of receiving notice.
6.23.5 Failure to comply with this Section 6.23 may cause the University to determine the Contractor non-responsive,
which the University will use in determining the responsibility of the Contractor for award of future contracts.
Replace Section 7.9.2.1 with the following:
7.9.2.1 The Contractor shall maintain, and require its Subcontractors to maintain, complete and accurate business
records in accordance with Generally Accepted Accounting Principles, at its principal place of business. If its
principal place of business is not in Dayton, Ohio, the Contractor shall make records available, and shall require its
Subcontractor to make records available, at the Site within 48 hours of a request for the records.
12.2.1.1 The Contractor shall not advertise the fact that it has contracted with Wright State University, or make use
of the University's name or other identifying marks or property, without the prior written consent of the University.
Insert Article 13 with associated Sections as follows in its entirety:
ARTICLE 13 - MISCELLANEOUS SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS

13.1 Sexual Harassment
13.1.1 The University maintains an environment free from sexual harassment. Contractors and Subcontractors are hereby
notified that, in accordance with University policy, prompt corrective measures will be taken to stop sexual harassment
whenever it occurs in accordance with Section 6.12.2.
13.2 False Fire Alarms

13.2.1 As liquidated damages, and not as a penalty, the Contractor acknowledges and agrees that the Contracting
Authority shall be entitled to retain or recover from the Contractor $300 or actual costs, whichever is greater, for each
false fire alarm that is determined to be a result of negligence by the Contractor. This amount reflects the Contracting
Authority’s actual costs incurred in dealing with these false alarms, including, but not limited to, the costs of
transportation, manpower, and loss of efficiency.
13.3 Safety and Health Rules

13.3.1 It is the policy of the University to provide a quality workplace environment for the learning experiences of
teaching, education, work, and research which meets or exceeds Applicable Law for health and safety. The University’s
policy includes procedures relating to emissions by air, by liquid-carried wastes, by solid and hazardous waste disposal,
or by sonic, radioactive, or electromagnetic radiation. The Contractor shall read and acknowledge by its signature that
they have read and understand the policy. The University’s Safety and Health Rules shall be made a part of this
document and can be obtained at http://www.wright.edu. In addition the contractor shall follow and adhere to the
applicable sections of the Wright State University Environmental Health and Safety Design and Construction
Specifications/Requirements which are made a part of this document and can be obtained at http://www.wright.edu.
13.4 Impairment/Hot Work Permit

13.4.1 When construction operations require the impairment of the fire protection/alarm, fire suppression systems,
shutdown, interruption or impairment of a utility system or require welding, cutting, burning or any open-flame/torch
application, the Contractor shall follow the requirements of the University’s Impairment/Hot Work Permit program. The
University’s Impairment/Hot Work Permit Program shall be made a part of this document in its entirety and can be
obtained at http://www.wright.edu.
END OF DOCUMENT

Document 00 73 43 - Wage Rate Requirements
PREVAILING WAGE RATES
1.1 Payment of Prevailing Wage Rates

1.1.1 The Contractor shall pay the prevailing wage rates of the Project locality, as issued by the Ohio Department of
Commerce, Wage and Hour Bureau to laborers and mechanics performing Work on the Project.
1.1.2 The Contractor shall comply with the provisions, duties, obligations, and is subject to the remedies and penalties of
ORC Chapter 4115.
1.1.3 If the Contractor or its Subcontractors fail to comply with ORC Chapter 4115, the Contracting Authority may
withhold payment pursuant to Section 9.8.2.5 of the General Conditions. The Contractor is liable for violations
committed by the Contractor or its Subcontractors to the extent provided in ORC Chapter 4115.
1.1.4 The Contractor shall submit all payroll reports in compliance with the requirements of Section 1.2 for all of the
employees of the Contractor and of the Contractor’s Subcontractors.
1.1.5 By executing a Contract, the Contractor certifies that it based its Bid upon the prevailing rates of wages as
ascertained by the Ohio Department of Commerce, Wage and Hour Bureau for the Project as provided in ORC Sections
4115.03 through 4115.14, which are inserted at the end of this Document.
1.2 Prevailing Wage Rate Revisions
1.2.1 The Contracting Authority shall, within 7 business days after receipt of a notice of a change in the prevailing wage
rates, notify the Contractor of the change. The prevailing wage rates are available at the Ohio Department of
Commerce’s web site: http://com.state.oh.us/.
1.2.2 The Contractor shall pay any revised wage rates issued during the term of the Contract.
1.3 Payroll Schedule
1.3.1 Within 10 days of the date of the Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall provide the Contracting Authority’s
Prevailing Wage Coordinator a schedule of dates during the term of the Contract on which wages shall be paid to
employees for the Project.
1.4 Payroll Reports
1.4.1 The Contractor shall submit payroll reports with each Contractor Payment Request, which reports shall be certified
by the Contractor that the payroll is correct and complete and the wage rates shown are not less than those required by
the Contract. The Contractor is responsible for submitting all payroll reports of its Subcontractors.
1.4.1.1 Each payroll report shall indicate the period covered and include a list containing the name, address and
social security number of each employee of the Contractor and its Subcontractors paid for the Work.
1.4.1.2 Each payroll report shall list the number of hours each employee worked each day on the Project during the
reporting period, the total hours each week on the Project, the employee's hourly rate of pay, job classification,
hourly rate of fringe benefits, and all deductions from wages and net pay.
1.4.1.3 Each payroll report shall list each fringe benefit and state if it is paid as cash to the employee or to a named
plan.
1.4.1.4 The Contractor and its Subcontractors shall submit apprenticeship agreements for all apprentices utilized on
the Project with the first payroll report from the Contractor or its Subcontractor that includes apprentices.
END OF DOCUMENT

12/28/2016 198.234.41.198/w3/webwh.nsf/PWDetermination?openform
Prevailing Wage Determination Cover Letter
County: MERCER
Determination Date: 12/28/2016
Expiration Date: 03/28/2017
THE FOLLOWING PAGES ARE PREVAILING RATES OF WAGES ON PUBLIC IMPROVEMENTS FAIRLY ESTIMATED
TO BE MORE THAN THE AMOUNT IN O.R.C. SEC. 4115.03 (b) (1) or (2), AS APPLICABLE.
Section 4115.05 provides, in part: “Where contracts are not awarded or construction undertaken within ninety days from the
date of the establishment of the prevailing wages, there shall be a redetermination of the prevailing rate of wages before the
contract is awarded.” The expiration date of this wage schedule is listed above for your convenience only. This wage
determination is not intended as a blanket determination to be used for all projects during this period without prior approval of
this Department.
Section 4115.04, Ohio Revised Code provides, in part: “Such schedule of wages shall be attached to and made a part of the
specifications for the work, and shall be printed on the bidding blanks where the work is done by contract...”
The contract between the letting authority and the successful bidder shall contain a statement requiring that mechanics and
laborers be paid a prevailing rate of wage as required in Section 4115.06, Ohio Revised Code.
The contractor or subcontractor is required to file with the contracting public authority upon completion of the project and
prior to final payment therefore an affidavit stating that he has fully complied with Chapter 4115 of the Ohio Revised Code.
The wage rates contained in this schedule are the “Prevailing Wages” as defined by Section 4115.03, Ohio Revised Code
(the basic hourly rates plus certain fringe benefits). These rates and fringes shall be a minimum to be paid under a contract
regulated by Chapter 4115 of the Ohio Revised Code by contractors and subcontractors. The prevailing wage rates contained
in this schedule include the effective dates and wage rates currently on file. In cases where future effective dates are not
included in this schedule, modifications to the wage schedule will be furnished to the Prevailing Wage Coordinator appointed
by the public authority as soon as prevailing wage rates increases are received by this office.
“There shall be posted in a prominent and accessible place on the site of work a legible statement of the Schedule of Wage
Rates specified in the contract to the various classifications of laborers, workmen, and mechanics employed, said statement
to remain posted during the life of such contract.” Section 4115.07, Ohio Revised Code.
Apprentices will be permitted to work only under a bona fide apprenticeship program if such program exists and if such
program is registered with the Ohio Apprenticeship Council.
Section 4115.071 provides that no later than ten days before the first payment of wages is due to any employee of any
contractor or subcontractor working on a contract regulated by Chapter 4115, Ohio Revised Code, the contracting public
authority shall appoint one of his own employees to act as the prevailing wage coordinator for said contract. The duties of
the prevailing wage coordinator are outlined in Section 4115.071 of the Ohio Revised Code.
Section 4115.05 provides for an escalator in the prevailing wage rate. Each time a new rate is established, that rate is
required to be paid on all ongoing public improvement projects.
A further requirement of Section 4115.05 of the Ohio Revised Code is: “On the occasion of the first pay date under a
contract, the contractor shall furnish each employee not covered by a collective bargaining agreement or understanding
between employers and bona fide organizations of Labor with individual written notification of the job classification to which
the employee is assigned, the prevailing wage determined to be applicable to that classification, separated into the hourly
rate of pay and the fringe payments, and the identity of the prevailing wage Coordinator appointed by the public authority.
The contractor or subcontractor shall furnish the same notification to each affected employee every time the job
classification of the employee is changed.”
Work performed in connection with the installation of modular furniture may be subject to prevailing wage.
THIS PACKET IS NOT TO BE SEPARATED BUT IS TO REMAIN COMPLETE AS IT IS SUBMITTED TO YOU. (Reference
guidelines and forms are included in this packet to be helpful in the compliance of the Prevailing Wage law.)
wh1500
http://198.234.41.198/w3/webwh.nsf/PWDetermination?openform 1/1
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2016fbLoc41 Page
Prevailing Wage Rate

Skilled Crafts
Name of Union: Asbestos Local 41 Heat & Frost Insulators
Change # : LCN01-2016fbLoc41
Craft : Asbestos Worker Effective Date : 07/27/2016 Last Posted : 07/27/2016
BHR Fr inge Benefit Payments Ir r evocable Total Over time
Fund PWR Rate
H&W Pension App Vac. Annuity Other LECET MISC
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Asbestos $29.82 $5.84 $4.00 $0.15 $0.00 $3.63 $1.49 $0.00 $0.00 $44.93 $59.84
Insulation
Worker
Appr entice Per cent

1st year 3 49.73 $14.83 $5.59 $0.00 $0.15 $0.00 $3.41 $0.69 $0.00 $0.00 $24.67 $32.08
months
1st year 9 60.05 $17.91 $5.59 $0.00 $0.15 $0.00 $3.79 $0.69 $0.00 $0.00 $28.13 $37.08
months
2nd year 70.35 $20.98 $5.59 $0.00 $0.15 $0.00 $4.21 $0.69 $0.00 $0.00 $31.62 $42.11
3rd year 78.83 $23.51 $5.59 $4.00 $0.15 $0.00 $2.75 $2.13 $0.00 $0.00 $38.13 $49.88
4th year 89.53 $26.70 $5.59 $4.00 $0.15 $0.00 $3.05 $2.13 $0.00 $0.00 $41.62 $54.97
Special Calculation Note : "Other" Benefits are for Retiree Medical and Pension Rehab.
Ratio : Jurisdiction ( * denotes special jurisdictional
note ) :
3 Journeymen to 1 Apprentice ALLEN, DEFIANCE, MERCER, PAULDING, VAN
WERT, WILLIAMS
Special Jurisdictional Note :
Details :
The removal of all insulation materials, whether they contain asbestos or not, from mechanical systems (pipes,
boilers, ducts, flues, breaching, etc.) is recognized as being the exclusive work of the Asbestos Workers.
On all mechanical systems (pipes, boilers, ducts, flues, breaching, etc.) that are going to be demolished, the
removal of all insulating materials whether they contain asbestos or not shall be the exclusive work of the
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285256B67004B03E4?opendocument 1/2
Laborers.

Skilled Crafts
Name of Union: Asbestos Local 41 Heat & Frost Insulators
Craft : Asbestos Worker Effective Date : 07/27/2016 Last Posted : 07/27/2016
Fund PWR Rate
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Asbestos $29.82 $5.84 $4.00 $0.15 $0.00 $3.63 $1.49 $0.00 $0.00 $44.93 $59.84
Insulation
Worker

1st year 3 49.73 $14.83 $5.59 $0.00 $0.15 $0.00 $3.41 $0.69 $0.00 $0.00 $24.67 $32.08
months
1st year 9 60.05 $17.91 $5.59 $0.00 $0.15 $0.00 $3.79 $0.69 $0.00 $0.00 $28.13 $37.08
months
2nd year 70.35 $20.98 $5.59 $0.00 $0.15 $0.00 $4.21 $0.69 $0.00 $0.00 $31.62 $42.11
3rd year 78.83 $23.51 $5.59 $4.00 $0.15 $0.00 $2.75 $2.13 $0.00 $0.00 $38.13 $49.88
4th year 89.53 $26.70 $5.59 $4.00 $0.15 $0.00 $3.05 $2.13 $0.00 $0.00 $41.62 $54.97
Special Calculation Note : "Other" Benefits are for Retiree Medical and Pension Rehab.
note ) :
3 Journeymen to 1 Apprentice ALLEN, DEFIANCE, MERCER, PAULDING, VAN
WERT, WILLIAMS
Details :
The removal of all insulation materials, whether they contain asbestos or not, from mechanical systems (pipes,
boilers, ducts, flues, breaching, etc.) is recognized as being the exclusive work of the Asbestos Workers.
On all mechanical systems (pipes, boilers, ducts, flues, breaching, etc.) that are going to be demolished, the
removal of all insulating materials whether they contain asbestos or not shall be the exclusive work of the
Laborers.
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2012kpLoc 154 Page

Skilled Crafts
Name of Union: Boilermaker Local 154
Change # : LCN01-2012kpLoc 154
Craft : Boilermaker Effective Date : 03/22/2012 Last Posted : 03/22/2012
Fund PWR Rate
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Boilermaker $36.17 $8.57 $11.28 $0.55 $0.00 $4.25 $0.34 $0.00 $1.40 $62.56 $80.65
Trainee $23.25 $8.57 $3.59 $0.55 $0.00 $4.25 $0.34 $0.00 $1.40 $41.95 $53.57
60%
Trainee $27.13 $8.57 $3.59 $0.55 $0.00 $4.25 $0.34 $0.00 $1.40 $45.83 $59.40
70%
Trainee $31.00 $8.57 $3.59 $0.55 $0.00 $4.25 $0.34 $0.00 $1.40 $49.70 $65.20
80%
Trainee $34.88 $8.57 $3.59 $0.55 $0.00 $4.25 $0.34 $0.00 $1.40 $53.58 $71.02
90%

Register ed
After
11/01/2005
1st 6 60.00 $21.70 $8.57 $3.59 $0.55 $0.00 $4.25 $0.34 $0.00 $1.40 $40.40 $51.25
months
2nd 6 65.00 $23.51 $8.57 $3.59 $0.55 $0.00 $4.25 $0.34 $0.00 $1.40 $42.21 $53.97
months
3rd 6 70.00 $25.32 $8.57 $3.59 $0.55 $0.00 $4.25 $0.34 $0.00 $1.40 $44.02 $56.68
months
4th 6 75.00 $27.13 $8.57 $3.59 $0.55 $0.00 $4.25 $0.34 $0.00 $1.40 $45.83 $59.39
months
5th 6 80.00 $28.94 $8.57 $3.59 $0.55 $0.00 $4.25 $0.34 $0.00 $1.40 $47.64 $62.10
months
6th 6 85.00 $30.74 $8.57 $3.59 $0.55 $0.00 $4.25 $0.34 $0.00 $1.40 $49.44 $64.82
months
7th 6 90.00 $32.55 $8.57 $3.59 $0.55 $0.00 $4.25 $0.34 $0.00 $1.40 $51.25 $67.53
months
8th 6 95.00 $34.36 $8.57 $3.59 $0.55 $0.00 $4.25 $0.34 $0.00 $1.40 $53.06 $70.24
months
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852569420060FBC0?opendocument 1/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2012kpLoc 154 Page
Special Calculation Note : No special calculations for this skilled craft wage rate are required at this
time.
note ) :
5 Journeymen to 1 Apprentice BUTLER, COLUMBIANA, FAYETTE, JEFFERSON,
LAWRENCE, MERCER, WARREN, WASHINGTON
Details :
Work includes but not limited to: boiler making, acetylene burning, riveting, chipping, caulking, rigging, fitting-
up, grinding, reaming, impact machine operating, unloading, and handling of boilermaker's material and
equipment. Boilermakers, Blacksmiths, Forgers, Iron Shipbuilders
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852569420060FBC0?opendocument 2/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2012kpLoc85 Page

Skilled Crafts
Name of Union: Boilermaker Local 85
Change # : LCN01-2012kpLoc85
Craft : Boilermaker Effective Date : 03/28/2012 Last Posted : 03/28/2012
Fund PWR Rate
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Boilermaker $31.01 $6.97 $10.77 $0.35 $0.00 $3.00 $2.09 $0.00 $0.00 $54.19 $69.69

1st 6 70.00 $21.71 $6.97 $0.25 $0.35 $0.00 $0.25 $2.09 $0.00 $0.00 $31.62 $42.47
months
2nd 6 72.50 $22.48 $6.97 $0.25 $0.35 $0.00 $0.25 $2.09 $0.00 $0.00 $32.39 $43.63
months
3rd 6 75.00 $23.26 $6.97 $0.25 $0.35 $0.00 $0.25 $2.09 $0.00 $0.00 $33.17 $44.80
months
4th 6 77.50 $24.03 $6.97 $10.77 $0.35 $0.00 $3.00 $2.09 $0.00 $0.00 $47.21 $59.23
months
5th 6 80.00 $24.81 $6.97 $10.77 $0.35 $0.00 $3.00 $2.09 $0.00 $0.00 $47.99 $60.39
months
6th 6 85.00 $26.36 $6.97 $10.77 $0.35 $0.00 $3.00 $2.09 $0.00 $0.00 $49.54 $62.72
months
7th 6 90.00 $27.91 $6.97 $10.77 $0.35 $0.00 $3.00 $2.09 $0.00 $0.00 $51.09 $65.04
months
8th 6 95.00 $29.46 $6.97 $10.77 $0.35 $0.00 $3.00 $2.09 $0.00 $0.00 $52.64 $67.37
months
time.
note ) :
5 Journeymen to 1 Apprentice ALLEN, ASHLAND, AUGLAIZE, CRAWFORD,
10 Journeymen to 2 Apprentice DARKE, DEFIANCE, DELAWARE, ERIE, FULTON,
15 Journeymen to 3 Apprentice HANCOCK, HARDIN, HENRY, HURON, KNOX,
LOGAN, LUCAS, MARION, MERCER, MORROW,
OTTAWA, PAULDING, PUTNAM, RICHLAND,
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285256CA9004CA365?opendocument 1/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2012kpLoc85 Page
Helpers will be referred in the event that apprentices are SANDUSKY, SENECA, SHELBY, UNION, VAN
NOT available. WERT, WILLIAMS, WOOD, WYANDOT
Details :
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285256CA9004CA365?opendocument 2/2

Skilled Crafts
Name of Union: Bricklayer Local 22 Tile Finisher
Craft : Bricklayer Effective Date : 08/21/2015 Last Posted : 08/21/2015
Fund PWR Rate
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Bricklayer $24.35 $1.00 $4.37 $0.39 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $30.11 $42.29
Tile Marble
Terrazzo
Finisher
Base $24.85 $1.00 $4.37 $0.39 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $30.61 $43.04
Machine

1st 6 60.00 $14.61 $1.00 $0.00 $0.39 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $16.00 $23.30
months 0-
600 hrs
2nd 6 65.00 $15.83 $1.00 $0.00 $0.39 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $17.22 $25.13
months
601-1200
hrs
3rd 6 70.03 $17.05 $1.00 $4.37 $0.39 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $22.81 $31.34
months
1201-1800
hrs
4th 6 75.00 $18.26 $1.00 $4.37 $0.39 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $24.02 $33.15
months
1801-2400
5th 6 80.00 $19.48 $1.00 $4.37 $0.39 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $25.24 $34.98
months
2401-3000
hrs
6th 6 90.00 $21.92 $1.00 $4.37 $0.39 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $27.68 $38.63
months
3001-3600
hrs
TMT
Helper-May
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852566FE00567B7B?opendocument 1/2
enter
Apprentice
Program
after 90 day
completionr
First 90 45.00 $10.96 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $10.96 $16.44
Days
Special Calculation Note : Classification title contains "Bricklayer" because contract originates within
the Bricklayer Local.
Note that the classification description is clarified after the local union number at the top of the page.
***Medical Savings Account***: The Medical Savings Account can only be deducted providing
employee shows proof voluntary enrollment in the program. Minimum contribution of $1.00 per
hourworked with no maximum.
note ) :
1 Journeyman 1 Apprentice AUGLAIZE, CHAMPAIGN, CLARK, CLINTON,
5 Journeyman 1 Apprentice DARKE, GREENE, HARDIN, HIGHLAND, LOGAN,
10 Journeyman 2 Apprentice MERCER, MIAMI, MONTGOMERY, PREBLE*,
15Journeyman 3 Apprentice SHELBY
20 Journeyman 4 Apprentice
25 Journeyman 5 Apprentice
8 Employees 1 Helper
Special Jurisdictional Note : In Preble County the following townships are included: (Jackson,
Monroe, Harrison, Twin and Washington)
Details :
Tile Layer Finishers shall do mixing of mortars & adhesives,cleaning & grouting of tile,unloading of all
trucks,unpacking & handling of all tile & materials such as sand,lime,cement,tile,& all types of tile panels,
prefabricated on job site. Marble Setter Finishers shall do all cleaning,waxing & polishing,grouting and
pointing.
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852566FE00567B7B?opendocument 2/2

Skilled Crafts
Name of Union: Bricklayer Local # 3-35
Fund PWR Rate
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Bricklayer $26.53 $7.00 $5.84 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $40.01 $53.28
Stone $26.53 $7.00 $5.84 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $40.01 $53.28
Masons
Marble
Masons
Pointer $26.53 $7.00 $5.84 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $40.01 $53.28
Caulker
Cleaner
Refractory $26.53 $7.00 $5.84 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $40.01 $53.28
Worker
Improvers
1st 6 $15.92 $7.00 $5.84 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $29.40 $37.36
Months
1200-1800
Hrs
2nd 6 $18.57 $7.00 $5.84 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $32.05 $41.34
Months
1801-2400
3rd 6 $19.90 $7.00 $5.84 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $33.38 $43.33
Months
2401-3000
Hrs
4th 6 $21.22 $7.00 $5.84 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $34.70 $45.31
Months
3001-3600
5th 6 $23.88 $7.00 $5.84 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $37.36 $49.30
Months
3601-4200
6th 6 $25.20 $7.00 $5.84 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $38.68 $51.28
Months
4201-4800
Hrs

50.00 $13.27 $7.00 $5.84 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $26.75 $33.38
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285256B8E0057EC4F?opendocument 1/3
1st 6
months
2nd 6 55.00 $14.59 $7.00 $5.84 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $28.07 $35.37
months
3rd 6 60.00 $15.92 $7.00 $5.84 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $29.40 $37.36
months
4th 6 70.00 $18.57 $7.00 $5.84 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $32.05 $41.34
months
5th 6 75.00 $19.90 $7.00 $5.84 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $33.38 $43.33
months
6th 6 80.00 $21.22 $7.00 $5.84 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $34.70 $45.32
months
7th 6 90.00 $23.88 $7.00 $5.84 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $37.36 $49.30
months
8th 6 95.00 $25.20 $7.00 $5.84 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $38.68 $51.29
months
Mason 45.00 $11.94 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $11.94 $17.91
Finisher 1-
90 days
Mason 45.00 $11.94 $7.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $18.94 $24.91
Finisher
91-365
days
Mason 50.00 $13.27 $7.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $20.26 $26.90
Finisher
2nd year
Special Calculation Note : Light Commercial Apprentices are 50% of Journeyman's rate plus full
fringes
note ) :
5 Journeymen to 1 Apprentice ALLEN, AUGLAIZE, MERCER, VAN WERT
8 Journeymen to 2 Apprentice
MASON FINISHER RATIO:
permits 1 Mason Finisher
2-6 Journeymen to 2 Apprentices
permits 1 Mason Finishers
Details :
BAT registered Apprentices must be employed prior to hiring Mason Finisher (s).

Skilled Crafts
Name of Union: Bricklayer Local # 3-35 Tile Setters
Fund PWR Rate
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Bricklayer Tile $26.53 $7.00 $5.84 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $40.01 $53.28
Setter/Terrazzo
Worker
Tile Finisher
Assistant
1st Year $13.26 $7.00 $1.35 $0.54 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $22.15 $28.78
2nd Year $17.24 $7.00 $1.35 $0.54 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $26.13 $34.75
3rd Year $21.22 $7.00 $1.35 $0.54 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $30.11 $40.72

1st 6 months 50.00 $13.27 $7.00 $5.84 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $26.75 $33.38
2nd 6 months 55.00 $14.59 $7.00 $5.84 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $28.07 $35.37
3rd 6 months 60.00 $15.92 $7.00 $5.84 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $29.40 $37.36
4th 6 months 70.00 $18.57 $7.00 $5.84 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $32.05 $41.34
5th 6 months 75.00 $19.90 $7.00 $5.84 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $33.38 $43.33
6th 6 months 80.00 $21.22 $7.00 $5.84 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $34.70 $45.32
7th 6 months 90.00 $23.88 $7.00 $5.84 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $37.36 $49.30
8th 6 months 95.00 $25.20 $7.00 $5.84 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $38.68 $51.29
Special Calculation Note : Light Commercial Apprentices are 50% of Journeyman's rate plus full
fringes
note ) :
1 Journeymen to 1 Apprentice ALLEN, AUGLAIZE, MERCER, VAN WERT
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285257FE80069F834?opendocument 1/2
Details :
BAT registered Apprentices must be employed prior to hiring Mason Finisher (s).
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285257FE80069F834?opendocument 2/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN02-2016fbLocNW372 Page

Skilled Crafts
Name of Union: Carpenter Local 372
Change # : LCN02-2016fbLocNW372
Craft : Carpenter Effective Date : 05/20/2016 Last Posted : 05/20/2016
Fund PWR Rate
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Carpenter $24.54 $6.45 $7.88 $0.48 $0.00 $3.50 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $42.85 $55.12

1st period 55.00 $13.50 $6.45 $0.00 $0.48 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $20.43 $27.18
2nd 60.00 $14.72 $6.45 $7.88 $0.48 $0.00 $3.50 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $33.03 $40.40
3rd 65.00 $15.95 $6.45 $7.88 $0.48 $0.00 $3.50 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $34.26 $42.24
4th 75.00 $18.41 $6.45 $7.88 $0.48 $0.00 $3.50 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $36.71 $45.92
5th 80.00 $19.63 $6.45 $7.88 $0.48 $0.00 $3.50 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $37.94 $47.76
6th 85.00 $20.86 $6.45 $7.88 $0.48 $0.00 $3.50 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $39.17 $49.60
7th 90.00 $22.09 $6.45 $7.88 $0.48 $0.00 $3.50 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $40.40 $51.44
8th 95.00 $23.31 $6.45 $7.88 $0.48 $0.00 $3.50 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $41.62 $53.28
time.
note ) :
2 Journeymen to 1 Apprentice ALLEN, AUGLAIZE, HARDIN, MERCER,
not to exceed 5 apprentices PUTNAM, VAN WERT
per entire job or employer
Details :
Special Work Rates:
40-100 foot free fall - $ .50 per hour above scale
Over 100 foot free fall - $1.00 per hour above scale
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B8007069328525660C004274F2?opendocument 1/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN02-2016fbLocNW372 Page
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B8007069328525660C004274F2?opendocument 2/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN02-2016fbLoc1090mil Page

Skilled Crafts
Name of Union: Carpenter Millwright & Pile Driver Light Commercial Local 1090
Change # : LCN02-2016fbLoc1090mil
Fund PWR Rate
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Carpenter $28.62 $6.45 $8.99 $0.53 $0.00 $5.03 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $49.62 $63.93
Millwright
Pile Driver

1st 6 55.00 $15.74 $6.45 $0.00 $0.53 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $22.72 $30.59
months
2nd 6 60.00 $17.17 $6.45 $8.99 $0.53 $0.00 $5.03 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $38.17 $46.76
months
3rd 6 70.00 $20.03 $6.45 $8.99 $0.53 $0.00 $5.03 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $41.03 $51.05
months
4th 6 75.00 $21.46 $6.45 $8.99 $0.53 $0.00 $5.03 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $42.47 $53.20
months
5th 6 80.00 $22.90 $6.45 $8.99 $0.53 $0.00 $5.03 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $43.90 $55.34
months
6th 6 85.00 $24.33 $6.45 $8.99 $0.53 $0.00 $5.03 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $45.33 $57.49
months
7th 6 90.01 $25.76 $6.45 $8.99 $0.53 $0.00 $5.03 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $46.76 $59.64
months
8th 6 95.00 $27.19 $6.45 $8.99 $0.53 $0.00 $5.03 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $48.19 $61.78
months
time.
note ) :
3 Journeymen to 1 Apprentice ALLEN, AUGLAIZE, HARDIN, MERCER,
PUTNAM, VAN WERT, WYANDOT
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B8007069328525781600726EFA?opendocument 1/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN02-2016fbLoc1090mil Page
Details :
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B8007069328525781600726EFA?opendocument 2/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2014fbCarpNEStatewide Page

Skilled Crafts
Name of Union: Carpenter NE District Industrial Dock & Door
Change # : LCN01-2014fbCarpNEStatewide
Fund PWR Rate
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Carpenter $19.70 $5.05 $1.00 $0.15 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $25.90 $35.75
Tr ainee Per cent

1st Year 60.00 $11.82 $5.05 $1.00 $0.15 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $18.02 $23.93
2nd Year 80.20 $15.80 $5.05 $1.00 $0.15 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $22.00 $29.90
time.
note ) :
1 Journeymen to 1 Trainee ADAMS, ALLEN, ASHLAND, ASHTABULA,
ATHENS, AUGLAIZE, BELMONT, BROWN,
BUTLER, CARROLL, CHAMPAIGN, CLARK,
CLERMONT, CLINTON, COLUMBIANA,
COSHOCTON, CRAWFORD, CUYAHOGA, DARKE,
DEFIANCE, DELAWARE, ERIE, FAIRFIELD,
FAYETTE, FRANKLIN, FULTON, GALLIA,
GEAUGA, GREENE, GUERNSEY, HAMILTON,
HANCOCK, HARDIN, HARRISON, HENRY,
HIGHLAND, HOCKING, HOLMES, HURON,
JACKSON, JEFFERSON, KNOX, LAKE,
LAWRENCE, LICKING, LOGAN, LORAIN, LUCAS,
MADISON, MAHONING, MARION, MEDINA,
MEIGS, MERCER, MIAMI, MONROE,
MONTGOMERY, MORGAN, MORROW,
MUSKINGUM, NOBLE, OTTAWA, PAULDING,
PERRY, PICKAWAY, PIKE, PORTAGE, PREBLE,
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852577C90051DAF8?opendocument 1/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2014fbCarpNEStatewide Page
PUTNAM, RICHLAND, ROSS, SANDUSKY,
SCIOTO, SENECA, SHELBY, STARK, SUMMIT,
TRUMBULL, TUSCARAWAS, UNION, VAN WERT,
VINTON, WARREN, WASHINGTON, WAYNE,
WILLIAMS, WOOD, WYANDOT
Special Jurisdictional Note : Industrial Dock and Door is the installation of overhead doors, roll up
doors and dock leveling equipment
Details :
10/27/10 New Contract jc
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852577C90051DAF8?opendocument 2/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled CN02-2007LocNW248 Page

Skilled Crafts
Name of Union: Carpenter NW District Overhead Door
Change # : CN02-2007LocNW248
Fund PWR Rate
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Carpenter $20.00 $0.00 $1.00 $0.20 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $21.20 $31.20
Mechanic
Intermediate $15.85 $0.00 $0.00 $0.20 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $16.05 $23.97
Mechanic
Level 2
Mechanic $12.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.20 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $12.20 $18.20
Level 1
Special Calculation Note : Fully paid reasonable & customary comprehensive medical/surgical
insurance shall be provided for employee,spouse and dependent children by employer.
note ) :
1 Journeymen Mechanic to 1 Mechanic Level 1 ALLEN, AUGLAIZE, CRAWFORD, DEFIANCE,
or Intermediate Mechanic Level 2 FULTON, HANCOCK, HARDIN, HENRY, LUCAS,
MERCER, OTTAWA, PAULDING, PUTNAM,
SANDUSKY, SENECA, VAN WERT, WILLIAMS,
WOOD, WYANDOT
Details :
All work related to the repair, transportation, installation and servicing of doors and gates of any type: and
repair, transportation and servicing of any and all items related to doors and gates: and the preparation of any
openings, passageways and/or access where a door and/or gate will be installed.
Including but not limited to: Upward acting doors, horizontally sliding doors, rapid roll fabric doors, overhead
chain gates, sliding grills, air doors, fire doors and any other doors/or gates which are used to gain access to or
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285256BE30049E9A3?opendocument 1/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled CN02-2007LocNW248 Page
prevent access to any area, enclosed or otherwise and Dock Levers. Also any devices and/or items used to
operate, open or close doors.
Journeyman Mechanic - an individual that has adequately demonstrated his knowledge and proficiency at all
parts of the trade, who has 3 years documented experience at that trade, or who has been certified by a bona fide
apprenticeship program, registered with the US Dept of Labor/Bureau of Apprenticeship.
Intermediate Mechanic Level 2- an employee who has performed work as a junior mechanic at least 3 years.
Mechanic Level 1- the employer may hire persons who are not journeypersons. These employees will start at
60% of the journeypersons wage rate and the employer is not required to pay fringe benefits, until the Mechanic
becomes a Journeyman Mechanic.
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285256BE30049E9A3?opendocument 2/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2016fbHvyHwy Page

Skilled Crafts
Name of Union: Cement Mason Bricklayer Local 97 HevHwy A
Change # : LCN01-2016fbHvyHwy
Fund PWR Rate
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Cement $28.55 $7.75 $5.48 $0.42 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $42.20 $56.48
Mason
Bricklayer
Sewer
Water
Treatment
A

1st year 50.00 $14.28 $7.75 $5.48 $0.42 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $27.92 $35.06
2nd year 70.01 $19.99 $7.75 $5.48 $0.42 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $33.64 $43.63
3rd year 90.01 $25.70 $7.75 $5.48 $0.42 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $39.35 $52.20
Special Calculation Note : NOT FOR BUILDING CONSTRUCTION.
note ) :
3 Journeymen to 1 Apprentice ADAMS, ALLEN, ASHLAND, ASHTABULA,
6 Journeymen to 2 Apprentice ATHENS, AUGLAIZE, BELMONT, BROWN,
9 Journeymen to 3 Apprentice BUTLER, CARROLL, CHAMPAIGN, CLARK,
12 Journeymen to 4 Apprentice CLERMONT, CLINTON, COLUMBIANA,
15 Journeymen to 5 Apprentice COSHOCTON, CRAWFORD, CUYAHOGA, DARKE,
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B8007069328525709000576B31?opendocument 1/2
VINTON, WARREN, WASHINGTON, WAYNE
Details :
(A) Highway Construction, Sewer, Waterworks And Utility Construction, Industrial & Building Site Heavy
Construction, Airport Construction Or Railroad Construction Work.
(B) Power Plant, Tunnels, Amusement Park, Athletic Stadium Site Work ,Pollution Control,Sewer Plant, Waste
Plant, & Water Treatment Facilities, Construction.
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B8007069328525709000576B31?opendocument 2/2

Skilled Crafts
Name of Union: Cement Mason Bricklayer Local 97 HevHwy B
Change # : LCN01-2016fbHvyHwy
Fund PWR Rate
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Cement $29.54 $7.75 $5.48 $0.43 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $43.20 $57.97
Mason
Bricklayer
Power
Plants
Tunnels
Amusement
Parks B

1st year 50.00 $14.77 $7.75 $5.48 $0.43 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $28.43 $35.82
2nd year 70.00 $20.68 $7.75 $5.48 $0.43 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $34.34 $44.68
3rd year 90.00 $26.59 $7.75 $5.48 $0.43 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $40.25 $53.54
Special Calculation Note : NOT FOR BUILDING CONSTRUCTION.
note ) :
6 Journeymen to 2 Apprentice ATHENS, AUGLAIZE, BELMONT, BROWN,
9 Journeymen to 2 Apprentice BUTLER, CARROLL, CHAMPAIGN, CLARK,
12 Journeymen to 4 Apprentice CLERMONT, CLINTON, COLUMBIANA,
15 Journeymen to 5 Apprentice COSHOCTON, CRAWFORD, CUYAHOGA, DARKE,
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852577070068E248?opendocument 1/2
VINTON, WARREN, WASHINGTON, WAYNE
Details :
(A) Highway Construction, Sewer, Waterworks And Utility Construction, Industrial & Building Site Heavy
Construction, Airport Construction Or Railroad Construction Work.
(B) Power Plant, Tunnels, Amusement Park, Athletic Stadium Site Work ,Pollution Control,Sewer Plant, Waste
Plant, & Water Treatment Facilities, Construction.
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852577070068E248?opendocument 2/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled CN01-2011jcCementHevHwy886 Page

Skilled Crafts
Name of Union: Cement Mason Local 886 HevHwy III
Water and Sewage Treatment Plant, Amusement Parks, ETC
Change # : CN01-2011jcCementHevHwy886
Craft : Cement Mason Effective Date : 09/21/2011 Last Posted : 09/21/2011
Fund PWR Rate
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Cement $25.59 $6.09 $4.00 $0.40 $0.00 $2.10 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $38.18 $50.97
Mason

1st Year 60.00 $15.35 $6.09 $4.00 $0.40 $0.00 $2.10 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $27.94 $35.62
2nd Year 75.00 $19.19 $6.09 $4.00 $0.40 $0.00 $2.10 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $31.78 $41.38
3rd Year 90.00 $23.03 $6.09 $4.00 $0.40 $0.00 $2.10 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $35.62 $47.14
time.
note ) :
5 Journeymen to 1 Apprentice ALLEN, AUGLAIZE, HARDIN, LOGAN, MERCER,
VAN WERT
Special Jurisdictional Note : Water and Sewage Treatment Plant, Amusement Parks, ETC
Details :
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852579100077AD45?opendocument 1/1
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled CN01-2011jcCementHevHwy886 Page

Skilled Crafts
Name of Union: Cement Mason Local 886 HevHwy III
Change # : CN01-2011jcCementHevHwy886
Craft : Cement Mason Effective Date : 09/21/2011 Last Posted : 09/21/2011
Fund PWR Rate
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Cement $25.43 $6.09 $4.00 $0.40 $0.00 $2.10 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $38.02 $50.74
Mason

1st Year 60.00 $15.26 $6.09 $4.00 $0.40 $0.00 $2.10 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $27.85 $35.48
2nd Year 75.00 $19.07 $6.09 $4.00 $0.40 $0.00 $2.10 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $31.66 $41.20
3rd Year 90.00 $22.89 $6.09 $4.00 $0.40 $0.00 $2.10 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $35.48 $46.92
time.
note ) :
VAN WERT
Details :
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852579100078314A?opendocument 1/1
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled CN01-2016fbLoc886Lima Page

Skilled Crafts
Name of Union: Cement Mason Local 886 (Lima)
Change # : CN01-2016fbLoc886Lima
Craft : Cement Effective Date : 07/01/2016 Last Posted : 06/29/2016
Fund PWR Rate
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Cement $26.60 $7.40 $6.35 $0.20 $0.00 $4.05 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $44.60 $57.90
Mason
Cement $14.63 $7.40 $6.35 $0.20 $0.00 $4.05 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $32.63 $39.95
Mason
Shophand

1st 6 55.00 $14.63 $7.40 $6.35 $0.20 $0.00 $4.05 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $32.63 $39.95
months
2nd 6 65.00 $17.29 $7.40 $6.35 $0.20 $0.00 $4.05 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $35.29 $43.94
months
3rd 6 75.00 $19.95 $7.40 $6.35 $0.20 $0.00 $4.05 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $37.95 $47.93
months
4th 6 80.00 $21.28 $7.40 $6.35 $0.20 $0.00 $4.05 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $39.28 $49.92
months
5th 6 85.00 $22.61 $7.40 $6.35 $0.20 $0.00 $4.05 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $40.61 $51.92
months
6th 6 90.00 $23.94 $7.40 $6.35 $0.20 $0.00 $4.05 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $41.94 $53.91
months
time.
note ) :
VAN WERT
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285256609005B72B0?opendocument 1/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled CN01-2016fbLoc886Lima Page
Details :
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285256609005B72B0?opendocument 2/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCR01-2016fbLoc32 Page

Skilled Crafts
Name of Union: Electrical Local 32
Change # : LCR01-2016fbLoc32
Craft : Electrical Effective Date : 08/17/2016 Last Posted : 08/17/2016
Fund PWR Rate
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Electrician $28.57 $7.85 $3.90 $1.14 $0.00 $2.95 $0.86 $0.00 $0.00 $45.27 $59.56

1st period 40.00 $11.43 $7.85 $0.00 $0.46 $0.00 $0.00 $0.34 $0.00 $0.00 $20.08 $25.79
0-1000 hrs
2nd period 45.00 $12.86 $7.85 $0.00 $0.51 $0.00 $0.00 $0.39 $0.00 $0.00 $21.61 $28.03
1001-
2000 hrs
3rd period 55.00 $15.71 $7.85 $2.15 $0.63 $0.00 $1.62 $0.47 $0.00 $0.00 $28.43 $36.29
2001-
3500 hrs
4th period 65.00 $18.57 $7.85 $2.54 $0.74 $0.00 $1.92 $0.56 $0.00 $0.00 $32.18 $41.47
3501-
5000 hrs
5th period 75.00 $21.43 $7.85 $2.93 $0.86 $0.00 $2.21 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $35.92 $46.63
5001-
6500 hrs
6th period 85.00 $24.28 $7.85 $3.32 $0.97 $0.00 $2.51 $0.73 $0.00 $0.00 $39.66 $51.81
6501-
8000 hrs
Special Calculation Note : OTHER IS: Voluntary Employees Beneficiary Association.
note ) :
Each Job Site shall be allowed 3 ALLEN, AUGLAIZE, HARDIN, LOGAN, MERCER,
Journeymen to 2 Apprentices as SHELBY, VAN WERT, WYANDOT*
illustrated below:
1 to 3 Journeymen to 2 Apprentices
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852577D1006DB0A4?opendocument 1/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCR01-2016fbLoc32 Page
The first person assigned to any job site shall be a
Journeyman Wireman.
Special Jurisdictional Note : In Wyandot County the following townships are included: Crawford,
Jackson, Marseilles, Mifflin, Ridgeland, Ridge and Salem.
Details :
A Certified Welder will receive $1.50 per hour above the Journeyman rate. Welders welding on galvanized shall
receive $1.50 per hour above the Journeyman rate.
All work over 35 feet but less than 60 feet shall receive $.75 per hour above the Journeyman rate.
All work 60 feet or over shall receive $1.50 per hour above the Journeyman rate.
When using a JLG-typ equipment or bucket truck is used there will be no high pay unless the work is over 60
feet.
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852577D1006DB0A4?opendocument 2/2

Skilled Crafts
Name of Union: Electrical Local 32 Lt Commercial South West
Craft : Electrical Effective Date : 03/05/2014 Last Posted : 03/05/2014
Fund PWR Rate
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Electrician $26.75 $6.30 $3.70 $0.80 $0.00 $2.50 $1.00 $0.00 $0.00 $41.05 $54.42
CE-3 $20.11 $4.62 $0.60 $0.64 $0.00 $0.60 $0.00 $0.00 $0.10 $26.67 $36.73
12,001-
14,000 Hrs
CE-2 $15.80 $4.62 $0.47 $0.64 $0.00 $0.47 $0.00 $0.00 $0.10 $22.10 $30.00
10,001-
12,000
CE-1 $14.37 $4.62 $0.43 $0.64 $0.00 $0.43 $0.00 $0.00 $0.10 $20.59 $27.78
8,001-
10,000 Hrs
CW-4 $12.93 $4.62 $0.39 $0.64 $0.00 $0.39 $0.00 $0.00 $0.10 $19.07 $25.54
6,001-
8,000 Hrs
CW-3 $11.49 $4.62 $0.34 $0.64 $0.00 $0.34 $0.00 $0.00 $0.10 $17.53 $23.28
4,001-
6,000 Hrs
CW-2 $10.06 $4.62 $0.30 $0.64 $0.00 $0.30 $0.00 $0.00 $0.10 $16.02 $21.05
2,001-
4,000 Hrs
CW-1 0- $10.06 $4.62 $0.30 $0.64 $0.00 $0.30 $0.00 $0.00 $0.10 $16.02 $21.05
2,000 Hrs

1st period 40.00 $10.70 $6.30 $0.32 $0.32 $0.00 $0.00 $1.00 $0.00 $0.00 $18.64 $23.99
0-1000 hrs
2nd period 45.00 $12.04 $6.30 $0.36 $0.36 $0.00 $0.00 $1.00 $0.00 $0.00 $20.06 $26.08
1000-
2000 hrs
3rd period 55.00 $14.71 $6.30 $2.04 $0.44 $0.00 $1.38 $1.00 $0.00 $0.00 $25.87 $33.23
2000-
3500 hrs
4th period 65.00 $17.39 $6.30 $2.41 $0.52 $0.00 $1.63 $1.00 $0.00 $0.00 $29.25 $37.94
3500-
5000 hrs
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852579900049A8DA?opendocument 1/2
5th period 75.00 $20.06 $6.30 $2.78 $0.60 $0.00 $1.88 $1.00 $0.00 $0.00 $32.62 $42.65
5000-
6500 hrs
6th period 85.00 $22.74 $6.30 $3.15 $0.68 $0.00 $2.13 $1.00 $0.00 $0.00 $36.00 $47.37
6500-
8000 hrs
Special Calculation Note : OTHER IS: Voluntary Employees Beneficiary Association.
note ) :
Each Job Site shall be allowed 3 ALLEN, AUGLAIZE, HARDIN, LOGAN, MERCER,
Journeymen to 2 Apprentices as SHELBY, VAN WERT, WYANDOT*
illustrated below:
The first person assigned to any job site shall be a
Journeyman Wireman.
Construction Electrician and Construction Wireman
Ratio
There shall be a minimum ratio of one inside
Journeyman to every (4) employees of different
classification per jobsite. An inside Journeyman
Wireman is required on the project as the fifth (5th)
worker or when apprentices are used.
Special Jurisdictional Note : In Wyandot County the following townships are included: Crawford,
Jackson, Marseilles, Mifflin, Ridgeland, Ridge and Salem.
The scope of work for the light commercial agreement shall apply to the following facilities not to
exceed 200,000 square feet; office buildings, shopping centers, auto sales agencies and garages,
churches, funeral homes, nursing homes, hotels, retail and wholesale facilities, small stand-alone
manufacturing facilities when free standing and not part of a larger facility (not to exceed 50,000
square fee), solar projects (500 panels or less) unless otherwise covered under the agreement,
lighting retrofits (when not associated with remodels involving branch re-circuiting) lighting retrofits
shall be defined as the changing of lamps and ballasts in existing light fixtures and shall also include
the one for one replacement of existing fixtures, warehouses, gas stations, food service centers,
restaurants, entertainment facilities, hospitals, clinics, motels, residential buildings.
Details :
A Certified Welder will receive $1.50 per hour above the Journeyman rate. Welders welding on galvanized shall
receive $1.50 per hour above the Journeyman rate.
All work over 35 feet but less than 60 feet shall receive $.75 per hour above the Journeyman rate.
All work 60 feet or over shall receive $1.50 per hour above the Journeyman rate.
When using a JLG-typ equipment or bucket truck is used there will be no high pay unless the work is over 60
feet.
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852579900049A8DA?opendocument 2/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCR02-2012fbLoc32VDV Page

Skilled Crafts
Name of Union: Electrical Local 32 Voice Data Video
Change # : LCR02-2012fbLoc32VDV
Craft : Voice Data Video Effective Date : 07/11/2012 Last Posted : 07/11/2012
Fund PWR Rate
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Electrical $22.00 $5.50 $0.66 $0.42 $0.00 $2.40 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $30.98 $41.98
Installer
Technician
A
Electrical $20.90 $5.50 $0.63 $0.40 $0.00 $2.40 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $29.83 $40.28
Installer
Technician
B
JW $19.80 $5.50 $0.59 $0.38 $0.00 $2.40 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $28.67 $38.57
Installer
Technician

1st 800 50.00 $11.00 $5.50 $0.33 $0.21 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $17.04 $22.54
hours
2nd 800 50.00 $11.00 $5.50 $0.33 $0.21 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $17.04 $22.54
hours
3rd 800 60.00 $13.20 $5.50 $0.40 $0.25 $0.00 $2.40 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $21.75 $28.35
hours
4th 800 65.00 $14.30 $5.50 $0.43 $0.27 $0.00 $2.40 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $22.90 $30.05
hours
5th 800 70.00 $15.40 $5.50 $0.46 $0.29 $0.00 $2.40 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $24.05 $31.75
hours
6th 800 75.01 $16.50 $5.50 $0.50 $0.31 $0.00 $2.40 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $25.21 $33.46
hours
time.
note ) :
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B8007069328525660B0044654B?opendocument 1/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCR02-2012fbLoc32VDV Page
1 Technician to 1 Apprentice ALLEN, AUGLAIZE, HARDIN, LOGAN, MERCER,
SHELBY, WYANDOT*
Special Jurisdictional Note : In Wyandot County the following townships are included: (Crawford,
Jackson, Marseilles, Mifflin, Ridgeland, Ridge and Salem)
Details :
Installer Technician A: has 5 years of experience and training, successfully completed classroom and OJT
requirements of the JATC Administered Apprenticeship Program, pass and maintained BICSI Installer Level 1,
BICSI Installer Level 2 and BICSI Technician level. A Journeyman Installer/Technician "A" is a Journeyman
Installer/Technician B with 5 years experience & training and who holds a current BICSI Technician
Certification.
Installer Technician B; shall have 4 years of experience & training, successfully completed Classroom & OJT
requirements of JATC Administrated Apprenticeship Program, pass and maintained BICSI Installer Level 1 and
BICSI Installer Level 2 or has passed & maintained BISCI Installer Level 2.
An Apprentice/Installer shall be an individual currently participating in the JATC Administered Apprenticeship
Program completing classroom and OJT requirements as specified by JATC.
An employee who is required to wear a pager after hours will receive an additional 1.00 per hour for all hours
worked.
Work covers but not limited to: low voltage construction, installation, maintenance, and removal of teledata
facilities (voice, data,video) including outside plant, telephone and data inside wire, interconnect, terminal
equipment, central offices, PABX, fiber optic cable and equipment, railroad communications, micro waves, V-
sAT, by-pass, CATV, WAN, wide area networks, LAN and ISDN.
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B8007069328525660B0044654B?opendocument 2/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled OCN1-2015fbLoc71DOTClev Page

Skilled Crafts
Name of Union: Electrical Local 71 DOT Traffic Signal Highway Lighting American Line
Builders
Change # : OCN1-2015fbLoc71DOTClev
Craft : Lineman Effective Date : 12/28/2015 Last Posted : 03/11/2015
Fund PWR Rate
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Electrical $35.82 $5.25 $1.07 $0.36 $0.00 $6.45 $0.06 $0.00 $0.00 $49.01 $66.92
Lineman
Traffic $34.48 $5.25 $1.03 $0.34 $0.00 $6.21 $0.06 $0.00 $0.00 $47.37 $64.61
Signal &
Lighting
Journeyman
Equipment $32.24 $5.25 $0.97 $0.32 $0.00 $5.80 $0.06 $0.00 $0.00 $44.64 $60.76
Operator
Groundman $19.70 $5.25 $0.59 $0.20 $0.00 $3.55 $0.06 $0.00 $0.00 $29.35 $39.20
0 to 1 Year
Groundman $23.28 $5.25 $0.70 $0.23 $0.00 $4.19 $0.06 $0.00 $0.00 $33.71 $45.35
1 Year or
more
Traffic
Apprentice
1st 1000 hrs $20.69 $5.25 $0.62 $0.21 $0.00 $3.72 $0.06 $0.00 $0.00 $30.55 $40.90
2nd 1000 $22.41 $5.25 $0.67 $0.22 $0.00 $4.03 $0.06 $0.00 $0.00 $32.64 $43.85
hrs
3rd 1000 $24.14 $5.25 $0.72 $0.24 $0.00 $4.35 $0.06 $0.00 $0.00 $34.76 $46.83
hrs
4th 1000 $25.86 $5.25 $0.78 $0.26 $0.00 $4.65 $0.06 $0.00 $0.00 $36.86 $49.79
hrs
5th 1000 $27.58 $5.25 $0.83 $0.28 $0.00 $4.96 $0.06 $0.00 $0.00 $38.96 $52.75
hrs
6th 1000 $31.03 $5.25 $0.93 $0.31 $0.00 $5.59 $0.06 $0.00 $0.00 $43.17 $58.69
hrs
Lineman Per cent

Appr entice
1st 1,000 60.00 $21.49 $5.25 $0.64 $0.21 $0.00 $3.87 $0.06 $0.00 $0.00 $31.52 $42.27
Hours
2nd 1,000 65.00 $23.28 $5.25 $0.70 $0.23 $0.00 $4.19 $0.06 $0.00 $0.00 $33.71 $45.35
Hours
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285257A0700589960?opendocument 1/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled OCN1-2015fbLoc71DOTClev Page
3rd 1,000 70.00 $25.07 $5.25 $0.75 $0.25 $0.00 $4.51 $0.06 $0.00 $0.00 $35.89 $48.43
Hours
4th 1,000 75.00 $26.87 $5.25 $0.81 $0.27 $0.00 $4.84 $0.06 $0.00 $0.00 $38.10 $51.53
Hours
5th 1,000 80.00 $28.66 $5.25 $0.86 $0.29 $0.00 $5.16 $0.06 $0.00 $0.00 $40.28 $54.60
Hours
6th 1,000 85.00 $30.45 $5.25 $0.91 $0.30 $0.00 $5.48 $0.06 $0.00 $0.00 $42.45 $57.67
Hours
7th 1,000 90.00 $32.24 $5.25 $0.97 $0.32 $0.00 $5.80 $0.06 $0.00 $0.00 $44.64 $60.76
Hours
Special Calculation Note : Other is for Safety and Education Fund
note ) :
1 Journeymen to 1 Apprentice AUGLAIZE, CHAMPAIGN, CLARK, CLINTON,
DARKE, GREENE, LOGAN, MERCER, MIAMI,
MONTGOMERY, PREBLE, SHELBY
Details :
A groundman when directed shall assist a Journeymen in the performance of his/her work on the ground,
including the use of hand tools. Under no circumstances shall this classification climb poles, towers, ladders, or
work from an elevated platform or bucket truck. This classification shall not perform work normally assigned to
an apprentice lineman. No more than three (3) Groundmen shall work alone. Jobs with more that three
Groundmen shall be supervised by a Groundcrew Foreman, Journeyman Lineman, Journeyman Traffic Signal
Technician or an Equipment Operator.
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285257A0700589960?opendocument 2/2

Skilled Crafts
Name of Union: Electrical Local 71 High Tension Pipe Type Cable
Fund PWR Rate
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Electrical $40.37 $5.25 $1.21 $0.40 $0.00 $8.88 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $56.46 $76.64
Lineman
Certified $40.37 $5.25 $1.21 $0.40 $0.00 $8.88 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $56.46 $76.64
Lineman
Welder
Certified $40.37 $5.25 $1.21 $0.40 $0.00 $8.88 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $56.46 $76.64
Cable
Splicer
Operator A $36.28 $5.25 $1.09 $0.36 $0.00 $7.98 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $51.31 $69.45
Operator B $32.21 $5.25 $0.97 $0.32 $0.00 $7.09 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $46.19 $62.29
Operator C $26.10 $5.25 $0.78 $0.26 $0.00 $5.74 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $38.48 $51.53
Groundman $20.19 $5.25 $0.61 $0.20 $0.00 $4.44 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $31.04 $41.14
0-12
months
Exp
Groundman $22.20 $5.25 $0.67 $0.22 $0.00 $4.88 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $33.57 $44.67
0-12
months
Exp w/CDL
Groundman $22.20 $5.25 $0.67 $0.22 $0.00 $4.88 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $33.57 $44.67
1 yr or
more
Groundman $26.24 $5.25 $0.79 $0.26 $0.00 $5.77 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $38.66 $51.78
1 yr or
more
w/CDL
Equipment $32.21 $5.25 $0.97 $0.32 $0.00 $7.09 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $46.19 $62.29
Mechanic
A
Equipment $29.16 $5.25 $0.87 $0.29 $0.00 $6.42 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $42.34 $56.92
Mechanic
B
Equipment $26.10 $5.25 $0.78 $0.26 $0.00 $5.74 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $38.48 $51.53
Mechanic
C
X-Ray $40.37 $5.25 $1.21 $0.40 $0.00 $8.88 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $56.46 $76.64
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285257745004D91C8?opendocument 1/3
Technician

1st 1000 60.00 $24.22 $5.25 $0.73 $0.24 $0.00 $5.33 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $36.12 $48.23
hrs
2nd 1000 65.00 $26.24 $5.25 $0.79 $0.26 $0.00 $5.77 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $38.66 $51.78
hrs
3rd 1000 70.00 $28.26 $5.25 $0.85 $0.28 $0.00 $6.22 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $41.21 $55.34
hrs
4th 1000 75.00 $30.28 $5.25 $0.91 $0.30 $0.00 $6.66 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $43.75 $58.89
hrs
5th 1000 80.00 $32.30 $5.25 $0.97 $0.32 $0.00 $7.11 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $46.30 $62.44
hrs
6th 1000 85.00 $34.31 $5.25 $1.03 $0.34 $0.00 $7.55 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $48.83 $65.99
hrs
7th 1000 90.00 $36.33 $5.25 $1.09 $0.36 $0.00 $7.99 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $51.37 $69.54
hrs
Special Calculation Note : Other is Health Retirement Account
Operator "A"
John Henry Rock Drill, D-6 (or equivalent) and above, Trackhoe Digger, (320 Track excavator),
Cranes (greater then 25 tons and less than 45 tons).
Operator "B"
Cranes (greater than 6 tons and up to 25 tons), Backhoes, Road Tractor, Dozer up to D-5, Pressure
Digger- wheeled or tracked, all Tension wire Stringing equipment.
Operator "C"
Trench, Backhoe, Riding type vibratory Compactor, Ground Rod Driver, Boom Truck (6 ton & below),
Skid Steer Loaders, Material Handler.
*All Operators of cranes 45 ton or larger shall be paid the journeyman rate of pay. $0.30 is for Health
Retirement Account.
note ) :
1 Journeyman to 1 Apprentice ADAMS, ASHLAND, ASHTABULA, ATHENS,
AUGLAIZE, BELMONT, BROWN, BUTLER,
CARROLL, CHAMPAIGN, CLARK, CLERMONT,
CLINTON, COLUMBIANA, COSHOCTON,
CRAWFORD, CUYAHOGA, DARKE, DELAWARE,
FAIRFIELD, FAYETTE, FRANKLIN, GALLIA,
HARRISON, HIGHLAND, HOCKING, HOLMES,
LAWRENCE, LICKING, LOGAN, LORAIN,
MUSKINGUM, NOBLE, PERRY, PICKAWAY, PIKE,
PORTAGE, PREBLE, RICHLAND, ROSS, SCIOTO,
SHELBY, STARK, SUMMIT, TRUMBULL,
TUSCARAWAS, UNION, VINTON, WARREN,
WASHINGTON, WAYNE
Details :
Heli - Arc Welding will be paid $.30 above Journeyman rate. Additional compensation of 10% over the
Journeyman Lineman and Journeyman Technician for performing work on structures outside of buildings such
as water towers, smoke stacks, radio and television towers, more than 75' above the ground.

Skilled Crafts
Name of Union: Electrical Local 71 Outside Utility Power
Fund PWR Rate
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Electrical $38.29 $5.25 $1.15 $0.38 $0.00 $8.42 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $53.84 $72.98
Lineman
Substation $38.29 $5.25 $1.15 $0.38 $0.00 $8.42 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $53.84 $72.98
Technician
Cable $40.06 $5.25 $1.20 $0.40 $0.00 $8.81 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $56.07 $76.10
Splicer
Operator A $34.42 $5.25 $1.03 $0.34 $0.00 $7.57 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $48.96 $66.17
Operator B $30.54 $5.25 $0.92 $0.31 $0.00 $6.72 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $44.09 $59.36
Operator C $24.73 $5.25 $0.74 $0.25 $0.00 $5.44 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $36.76 $49.13
Groundman $19.15 $5.25 $0.57 $0.19 $0.00 $4.21 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $29.72 $39.29
0-12
months
Exp
Groundman $21.06 $5.25 $0.63 $0.21 $0.00 $4.63 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $32.13 $42.66
0-12
months
Exp w/CDL
Groundman $21.06 $5.25 $0.63 $0.21 $0.00 $4.63 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $32.13 $42.66
1 yr or
more
Groundman $24.89 $5.25 $0.75 $0.25 $0.00 $5.48 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $36.97 $49.42
1 yr or
more
w/CDL
Equipment $30.54 $5.25 $0.92 $0.31 $0.00 $6.72 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $44.09 $59.36
Mechanic
A
Equipment $27.65 $5.25 $0.83 $0.28 $0.00 $6.08 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $40.44 $54.26
Mechanic
B
Equipment $24.73 $5.25 $0.74 $0.25 $0.00 $5.44 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $36.76 $49.13
Mechanic
C
Line Truck $27.24 $5.25 $0.82 $0.27 $0.00 $5.99 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $39.92 $53.54
w/uuger
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852573600050A24D?opendocument 1/3

1st 1000 60.00 $22.97 $5.25 $0.69 $0.23 $0.00 $5.05 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $34.54 $46.03
hrs
2nd 1000 65.00 $24.89 $5.25 $0.75 $0.25 $0.00 $5.48 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $36.97 $49.41
hrs
3rd 1000 70.00 $26.80 $5.25 $0.80 $0.27 $0.00 $5.90 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $39.37 $52.77
hrs
4th 1000 75.00 $28.72 $5.25 $0.86 $0.29 $0.00 $6.32 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $41.79 $56.15
hrs
5th 1000 80.00 $30.63 $5.25 $0.92 $0.31 $0.00 $6.74 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $44.20 $59.52
hrs
6th 1000 85.00 $32.55 $5.25 $0.98 $0.33 $0.00 $7.16 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $46.62 $62.89
hrs
7th 1000 90.00 $34.46 $5.25 $1.03 $0.34 $0.00 $7.58 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $49.01 $66.24
hrs
Special Calculation Note : Other is Health Retirement Account
Operator "A"
John Henry Rock Drill, D-6 (or equivalent) and above, Trackhoe Digger, (320 Track excavator),
Cranes (greater then 25 tons and less than 45 tons).
Operator "B"
Cranes (greater than 6 tons and up to 25 tons), Backhoes, Road Tractor, Dozer up to D-5, Pressure
Digger- wheeled or tracked, all Tension wire Stringing equipment.
Operator "C"
Trench, Backhoe, Riding type vibratory Compactor, Ground Rod Driver, Boom Truck (6 ton & below),
Skid Steer Loaders, Material Handler.
note ) :
(1) Journeyman Lineman to (1) Apprentice ADAMS, ASHLAND, ASHTABULA, ATHENS,
AUGLAIZE, BELMONT, BROWN, BUTLER,
CRAWFORD, CUYAHOGA, DARKE, DELAWARE,
FAIRFIELD, FAYETTE, FRANKLIN, GALLIA,
HARRISON, HIGHLAND, HOCKING, HOLMES,
LAWRENCE, LICKING, LOGAN, LORAIN,
MUSKINGUM, NOBLE, PERRY, PICKAWAY, PIKE,
PORTAGE, PREBLE, RICHLAND, ROSS, SCIOTO,
SHELBY, STARK, SUMMIT, TRUMBULL,
TUSCARAWAS, UNION, VINTON, WARREN,
WASHINGTON, WAYNE
Special Jurisdictional Note : 0.30 is for Health Retirement Account.
Details :
Heli - Arc Welding will be paid $.30 above Journeyman rate. Additional compensation of 10% over the
Journeyman Lineman and Journeyman Technician for performing work on structures outside of buildings such
as water towers, smoke stacks, radio and television towers, more than 75' above the ground.

Skilled Crafts
Name of Union: Elevator Local 44
Craft : Elevator Effective Date : 01/01/2015 Last Posted : 11/26/2014
Fund PWR Rate
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Elevator $44.77 $13.58 $8.46 $0.60 $3.58 $5.75 $1.38 $0.00 $0.00 $78.12 $100.50
Mechanic
Assistant $35.82 $13.58 $8.46 $0.60 $2.15 $5.75 $1.10 $0.00 $0.00 $67.46 $85.37
Mechanic
Mechanic $50.37 $13.58 $8.46 $0.60 $4.03 $5.75 $1.55 $0.00 $0.00 $84.34 $109.52
in Charge
0-6 50.00 $22.39 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $22.39 $33.58
months
Probation
1st year 55.00 $24.62 $13.58 $8.46 $0.60 $1.48 $5.75 $0.76 $0.00 $0.00 $55.25 $67.57
2nd year 65.00 $29.10 $13.58 $8.46 $0.60 $1.75 $5.75 $0.90 $0.00 $0.00 $60.14 $74.69
3rd year 70.00 $31.34 $13.58 $8.46 $0.60 $1.88 $5.75 $0.96 $0.00 $0.00 $62.57 $78.24
4th year 80.00 $35.82 $13.58 $8.46 $0.60 $2.15 $5.75 $1.10 $0.00 $0.00 $67.46 $85.36
Helper 70.00 $31.34 $13.58 $8.46 $0.60 $1.88 $5.75 $0.96 $0.00 $0.00 $62.57 $78.24
Special Calculation Note : OTHER IS :HOLIDAY & VACATION PAY
note ) :
The total number of Helpers & Apprentices and ALLEN, AUGLAIZE, CRAWFORD, DEFIANCE,
Assistant Mechanic employed shall not exceed the ERIE, FULTON, HANCOCK, HARDIN, HENRY,
number of Mechanics on any one job, except on jobs HURON, LUCAS, MERCER, OTTAWA, PAULDING,
where (2) teams or more are working, (1) extra Helper, PUTNAM, SANDUSKY, SENECA, VAN WERT,
Apprentice or Assistant Mechanic may be employed for WILLIAMS, WOOD, WYANDOT
the first (2) teams and an extra Helper, Apprentice or
Assistant Mechanic for each additional (3) teams.
Further, the Company may use as many Helpers,
Apprentices and Assistant Mechanics as best suits his
convenience under the direction of a Mechanic in
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285256CD3006F6F0C?opendocument 1/2
wrecking old plants and in handling and hoisting
material, and on foundation work. When removing old
and installing new cables on existing elevator
installations, the Company may use two (2) Helpers,
Apprentices or Assistant Mechanics to one (1)
Mechanic.
Details :
A Helper or Apprentice certified to weld shall be paid mechanic's rate when performing welding (excluding tack
welding).
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285256CD3006F6F0C?opendocument 2/2

Skilled Crafts
Name of Union: Glazier Local 1020
Craft : Glazier Effective Date : 02/06/2013 Last Posted : 02/06/2013
Fund PWR Rate
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Glazier $19.90 $1.96 $2.43 $0.10 $0.00 $0.00 $4.00 $0.00 $0.00 $28.39 $38.34

1st 6 50.00 $9.95 $1.96 $2.43 $0.10 $0.00 $0.00 $4.00 $0.00 $0.00 $18.44 $23.41
months
2nd 6 55.00 $10.95 $1.96 $2.43 $0.10 $0.00 $0.00 $4.00 $0.00 $0.00 $19.44 $24.91
months
3rd 6 60.00 $11.94 $1.96 $2.43 $0.10 $0.00 $0.00 $4.00 $0.00 $0.00 $20.43 $26.40
months
4th 6 65.00 $12.93 $1.96 $2.43 $0.10 $0.00 $0.00 $4.00 $0.00 $0.00 $21.42 $27.89
months
5th 6 70.00 $13.93 $1.96 $2.43 $0.10 $0.00 $0.00 $4.00 $0.00 $0.00 $22.42 $29.38
months
6th 6 75.00 $14.92 $1.96 $2.43 $0.10 $0.00 $0.00 $4.00 $0.00 $0.00 $23.41 $30.88
months
7th 6 80.00 $15.92 $1.96 $2.43 $0.10 $0.00 $0.00 $4.00 $0.00 $0.00 $24.41 $32.37
months
8th 6 90.00 $17.91 $1.96 $2.43 $0.10 $0.00 $0.00 $4.00 $0.00 $0.00 $26.40 $35.36
months
Special Calculation Note : Other is: In lieu of paid holidays and paid vacations $4.00 per hour
premium is added
note ) :
1Journeymen to 1 Apprentice ALLEN, AUGLAIZE, HANCOCK, HARDIN,
LOGAN, MERCER, PAULDING, PUTNAM,
SHELBY, VAN WERT, WYANDOT
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B8007069328525692300462250?opendocument 1/2
Details :
Journeymen in charge of 6 or more men shall receive $1.00 an hour premium.
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B8007069328525692300462250?opendocument 2/2

Skilled Crafts
Name of Union: Ironworker Local 147
Craft : Ironworker Effective Date : 06/29/2016 Last Posted : 06/29/2016
Fund PWR Rate
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Ironworker $25.39 $7.10 $9.50 $0.57 $0.00 $4.05 $0.27 $0.00 $0.00 $46.88 $59.58

1st 6 55.00 $13.96 $7.10 $9.50 $0.57 $0.00 $4.05 $0.27 $0.00 $0.00 $35.45 $42.44
months
2nd 6 60.00 $15.23 $7.10 $9.50 $0.57 $0.00 $4.05 $0.27 $0.00 $0.00 $36.72 $44.34
months
3rd 6 65.00 $16.50 $7.10 $9.50 $0.57 $0.00 $4.05 $0.27 $0.00 $0.00 $37.99 $46.25
months
4th 6 70.00 $17.77 $7.10 $9.50 $0.57 $0.00 $4.05 $0.27 $0.00 $0.00 $39.26 $48.15
months
5th 6 75.00 $19.04 $7.10 $9.50 $0.57 $0.00 $4.05 $0.27 $0.00 $0.00 $40.53 $50.05
months
6th 6 80.00 $20.31 $7.10 $9.50 $0.57 $0.00 $4.05 $0.27 $0.00 $0.00 $41.80 $51.96
months
7th 6 85.00 $21.58 $7.10 $9.50 $0.57 $0.00 $4.05 $0.27 $0.00 $0.00 $43.07 $53.86
months
8th 6 90.00 $22.85 $7.10 $9.50 $0.57 $0.00 $4.05 $0.27 $0.00 $0.00 $44.34 $55.77
months
Special Calculation Note : Other is Building Industry.
note ) :
4 Journeymen to 1 Apprentice ALLEN*, DEFIANCE, MERCER, PAULDING,
PUTNAM*, VAN WERT*, WILLIAMS*
Special Jurisdictional Note : Allen County Twps included: Monroe, Richland. Putnam County Twps
included: Jennings, Sugar Creek, Pleasant, Union, Jackson, Monterey, Perry, Greensburg, Ottawa,
Palmer, Monroe. VanWert County Twps included: York, Liberty, Willshire, Harrison, Pleasant, Ridge,
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852578CC0070A2CD?opendocument 1/2
Washington, Jackson, Hoaglin, Union, Tully. Williams County Twps included: Pulaski, Center, St.
Joseph, Florence, Superior, Jefferson, Northwest, Bridgewater, Springfield.
Details :
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852578CC0070A2CD?opendocument 2/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2015fbLoc147HevHwy Page

Skilled Crafts
Name of Union: Ironworker Local 147 HevHwy
Change # : LCN01-2015fbLoc147HevHwy
Fund PWR Rate
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Ironworker $25.39 $6.60 $9.20 $0.42 $0.00 $3.80 $0.62 $0.00 $0.00 $46.03 $58.73

1st 6 55.00 $13.96 $6.60 $9.20 $0.42 $0.00 $3.80 $0.62 $0.00 $0.00 $34.60 $41.59
months
2nd 6 60.00 $15.23 $6.60 $9.20 $0.42 $0.00 $3.80 $0.62 $0.00 $0.00 $35.87 $43.49
months
3rd 6 65.00 $16.50 $6.60 $9.20 $0.42 $0.00 $3.80 $0.62 $0.00 $0.00 $37.14 $45.40
months
4th 6 70.00 $17.77 $6.60 $9.20 $0.42 $0.00 $3.80 $0.62 $0.00 $0.00 $38.41 $47.30
months
5th 6 75.00 $19.04 $6.60 $9.20 $0.42 $0.00 $3.80 $0.62 $0.00 $0.00 $39.68 $49.20
months
6th 6 80.00 $20.31 $6.60 $9.20 $0.42 $0.00 $3.80 $0.62 $0.00 $0.00 $40.95 $51.11
months
7th 6 85.00 $21.58 $6.60 $9.20 $0.42 $0.00 $3.80 $0.62 $0.00 $0.00 $42.22 $53.01
months
8th 6 90.00 $22.85 $6.60 $9.20 $0.42 $0.00 $3.80 $0.62 $0.00 $0.00 $43.49 $54.92
months
Special Calculation Note : *Pension & Health and Welfare are paid on hours worked. **Annuity will
be based on hours paid (time and a half = $4.88 per hour and double time = $6.50 per hour).
note ) :
4 Journeymen to 1 Apprentice ALLEN*, DEFIANCE, MERCER, PAULDING,
PUTNAM*, VAN WERT*, WILLIAMS*
Special Jurisdictional Note : Allen County Twps included: Monroe, Richland. Putnam County Twps
included: Jennings, Sugar Creek, Pleasant, Union, Jackson, Monterey, Perry, Greensburg, Ottawa,
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852575BD0050B447?opendocument 1/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2015fbLoc147HevHwy Page
Palmer, Monroe. VanWert County Twps included: York, Liberty, Willshire, Harrison, Pleasant, Ridge,
Washington, Jackson, Hoaglin, Union, Tully. Williams County Twps included: Pulaski, Center, St.
Joseph, Florence, Superior, Jefferson, Northwest, Bridgewater, Springfield.
Details :
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852575BD0050B447?opendocument 2/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2016fbLocalHevHwy3 Page

Skilled Crafts
Name of Union: Labor HevHwy 3
Change # : LCN01-2016fbLocalHevHwy3
Craft : Laborer Group 1 Effective Date : 05/20/2016 Last Posted : 05/20/2016
Fund PWR Rate
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Laborer $29.22 $6.70 $3.20 $0.45 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.10 $0.00 $39.67 $54.28
Group 1
Group 2 $29.39 $6.70 $3.20 $0.45 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.10 $0.00 $39.84 $54.54
Group 3 $29.72 $6.70 $3.20 $0.45 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.10 $0.00 $40.17 $55.03
Group 4 $30.17 $6.70 $3.20 $0.45 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.10 $0.00 $40.62 $55.71
Watch $21.95 $6.70 $3.20 $0.45 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.10 $0.00 $32.40 $43.38
Person

0-1000 hrs 60.00 $17.53 $6.70 $3.20 $0.45 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.10 $0.00 $27.98 $36.75
1001-2000 70.00 $20.45 $6.70 $3.20 $0.45 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.10 $0.00 $30.90 $41.13
hrs
2001-3000 80.00 $23.38 $6.70 $3.20 $0.45 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.10 $0.00 $33.83 $45.51
hrs
3001-4000 90.00 $26.30 $6.70 $3.20 $0.45 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.10 $0.00 $36.75 $49.90
hrs
More than 100.00 $29.22 $6.70 $3.20 $0.45 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.10 $0.00 $39.67 $54.28
4000 hrs
Special Calculation Note : Watchmen have no Apprentices. Tunnel Laborer rate with air-pressurized
add $1.00 to the above wage rate.
note ) :
1 Journeymen to 1 Apprentice ADAMS, ALLEN, ASHLAND, ATHENS,
3 Journeymen to 1 Apprentice thereafter AUGLAIZE, BELMONT, BROWN, BUTLER,
CRAWFORD, DARKE, DEFIANCE, DELAWARE,
FAIRFIELD, FAYETTE, FRANKLIN, FULTON,
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852579C10069857F?opendocument 1/3
GALLIA, GREENE, GUERNSEY, HAMILTON,
HIGHLAND, HOCKING, HOLMES, JACKSON,
JEFFERSON, KNOX, LAWRENCE, LICKING,
LOGAN, MADISON, MARION, MEIGS, MERCER,
MIAMI, MONROE, MONTGOMERY, MORGAN,
MORROW, MUSKINGUM, NOBLE, PAULDING,
PERRY, PICKAWAY, PIKE, PREBLE, PUTNAM,
RICHLAND, ROSS, SCIOTO, SENECA, SHELBY,
TUSCARAWAS, UNION, VAN WERT, VINTON,
WARREN, WASHINGTON, WAYNE, WILLIAMS,
WYANDOT
Special Jurisdictional Note : Hod Carriers and Common Laborers - Heavy, Highway, Sewer,
Waterworks, Utility, Airport, Railroad, Industrial and Building Site, Sewer Plant, Waste Water
Treatment Facilities Construction
Details :
Group 1
Laborer (Construction); Plant Laborer or Yardman, Right-of-way Laborer, Landscape Laborer, Highway
Lighting Worker, Signalization Worker, (Swimming) Pool Construction Laborer, Utility Man, *Bridge Man,
Handyman, Joint Setter, Flagperson, Carpenter Helper, Waterproofing Laborer, Slurry Seal, Seal Coating,
Surface Treatment or Road Mix Laborer, Riprap Laborer & Grouter, Asphalt Laborer, Dump Man (batch
trucks), Guardrail & Fence Installer, Mesh Handler & Placer, Concrete Curing Applicator, Scaffold Erector, Sign
Installer, Hazardous Waste (level D), Diver Helper, Zone Person and Traffic Control.
*Bridge Man will perfomr work as per the October 31, 1949, memorandum on concrete forms, byand between
the United Brotherhood of Caprpenters and Joiners of Americ and the Laborers' International Union of North
America, which states in; "the moving, cleaning, oiling and carrying to the next point of erection, and the
stripping of forms which are not to be re-used, and forms on all flat arch work shall be done by memebers of the
Laborers' International Union of North America."
Group 2
Asphalt Raker, Screwman or Paver, Concrete Puddler, Kettle Man (pipeline), All Machine-Driven Tools (Gas,
Electric, Air), Mason Tender, Brick Paver, Mortar Mixer, Skid Steer, Sheeting & Shoring Person, Surface
Grinder Person, Screedperson, Water Blast, Hand Held Wand, Power Buggy or Power Wheelbarrow, Paint
Striper, Plastic fusing Machine Operator, Rodding Machine Operator, Pug Mill Operator, Operator of All
Vacuum Devices Wet or Dry, Handling of all Pumps 4 inches and under (gas, air or electric), Diver, Form Setter,
Bottom Person, Welder Helper (pipeline), Concrete Saw Person, Cutting with Burning Torch, Pipe Layer, Hand
Spiker (railroad), Underground Person (working in sewer and waterline, cleaning, repairing and reconditioning).
Tunnel Laborer (without air),Caisson, Cofferdam (below 25 feet deep), Air Track and Wagon Drill, Sandblaster
Nozzle Person, Hazardous Waste (level B), ***Lead Abatement, Hazardous Waste (level C)
***Includes the erecting of structures for the removal, including the encapsulation and containment of Lead
abatement process.
Group 3
Blast and Powder Person, Muckers will be defined as shovel men working directly with the miners, Wrencher
(mechanical joints & utility pipeline), Yarner, Top Lander, Hazardous Waste (level A), Concrete Specialist, Curb
Setter and Cutter, Grade Checker, Concrete Crew in Tunnels. Utility pipeline Tappers, Waterline, Caulker,
Signal Person will receive the rate equal to the rate paid the Laborer classification for which the Laborer is
signaling.
Group 4
Miner,Welder, Gunite Nozzle Person
A.) The Watchperson shall be responsible to patrol and maintain a safe traffic zone including but not limited to
barrels, cones, signs, arrow boards, message boards etc.
The responsibility of a watchperson is to see that the equipment, job and office trailer etc. are secure.

Skilled Crafts
Name of Union: Labor Local 329
Craft : Laborer Effective Date : 05/01/2016 Last Posted : 04/28/2016
Fund PWR Rate
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Laborer $24.36 $6.70 $3.20 $0.40 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.15 $0.00 $34.81 $46.99
Group 1
Group 2 $24.51 $6.70 $3.20 $0.40 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.15 $0.00 $34.96 $47.22
Group 3 $24.66 $6.70 $3.20 $0.40 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.15 $0.00 $35.11 $47.44
Group 4 $24.86 $6.70 $3.20 $0.40 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.15 $0.00 $35.31 $47.74

0-1000 hrs 60.00 $14.62 $6.70 $3.20 $0.40 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.15 $0.00 $25.07 $32.37
& 108 hrs
Instruction
1001-2000 70.00 $17.05 $6.70 $3.20 $0.40 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.15 $0.00 $27.50 $36.03
hrs & 216
hrs
Instruction
2001-3000 80.00 $19.49 $6.70 $3.20 $0.40 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.15 $0.00 $29.94 $39.68
hrs & 324
hrs
Instruction
3001- 90.00 $21.92 $6.70 $3.20 $0.40 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.15 $0.00 $32.37 $43.34
4,000 hrs
& 432 hrs
Instruction
More than 100.00 $24.36 $6.70 $3.20 $0.40 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.15 $0.00 $34.81 $46.99
4000
Hours
time.
note ) :
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852570A50058A7BE?opendocument 1/2
1 Journeyman to 1 Apprentice then ALLEN, AUGLAIZE, MERCER, PAULDING,
4 to 1 thereafter per project PUTNAM, SHELBY, VAN WERT
Details :
Group 1
Building Laborer, Carpenter Tender, Flagman, Signal Man, Rigging/Hooking/unhooking of construction
material, utility construction laborer, guardrail erector, fence installer, landscape laborer, laser beam set-up man,
grade checker, power wheelbarrow or power buggy, removal of asbestos, hazardous waste (Levels C & D),
drinking water supplier, warehouse/tool man, safety man, confined space/hole watch attendant, fire watch,
parking attendant, watchman, time/bookkeeper.
Group 2
Vibrators, Cement Finisher Helper, cement Raker, pump hose nozzle man, Asphalt Raker, Tamper & Packer,
Pump Man Under 4'', Discharge, Caisson, Cofferdam, Tunnel, Spiker Railroad (By Hand), Pot Tender, Torch
Man, Demolition, All Machine Driven Tools (Gas, Electric, Air).
Group 3
Plaster Tender, Mortar Mixer, Cylinder, Shaft, Sewer, Water Conduit, Gas, Oil, Pipeline, Except Mainlines,
Sewer Bottom Man, Sewer Pipe Layer, Manhole Builder, Blaster Helper, air track/Wagon Drill Helper, Jack
Hammer, Gunnite Operator, Mucker (Tunnel & Caisson) Free Air, Miner, Sand Blaster, Blaster-Powder Man,
Wagon drill/Operator, The removal of Lead or Toxic and Hazardous Waste materials (Level A & B).
Group 4
Mason Tender, scaffold builder, truck driver with CDL, welder, skid loader, forklift operator and man lifts.
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852570A50058A7BE?opendocument 2/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2016fbLoc18zone3 Page

Skilled Crafts
Name of Union: Operating Engineers - Building Local 18 - Zone III
Change # : LCN01-2016fbLoc18zone3
Craft : Operating Engineer Effective Date : 06/01/2016 Last Posted : 06/01/2016
Fund PWR Rate
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Operator $33.84 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $48.34 $65.26
Class 1
Class 2 $32.72 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $47.22 $63.58
Class 3 $32.68 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $47.18 $63.52
Class 4 $31.50 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $46.00 $61.75
Class 5 $26.04 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $40.54 $53.56
Class 6 $34.09 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $48.59 $65.64
Class 7 $34.34 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $48.84 $66.01
Class 8 $34.84 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $49.34 $66.76
Class 9 $35.09 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $49.59 $67.14

1st Year 50.00 $16.92 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $31.42 $39.88
2nd Year 60.00 $20.30 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $34.80 $44.96
3rd Year 70.00 $23.69 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $38.19 $50.03
4th Year 80.00 $27.07 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $41.57 $55.11
Field
Mechanic
Trainee
1st Year 50.00 $16.92 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $31.42 $39.88
2nd Year 60.00 $20.30 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $34.80 $44.96
3rd Year 70.00 $23.69 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $38.19 $50.03
4th Year 80.00 $27.07 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $41.57 $55.11
Special Calculation Note : Other: Education & Safety
note ) :
For every (3) Operating Engineer Journeymen ADAMS, ALLEN, ASHLAND, ATHENS,
employed by the company ,there may be employed (1) AUGLAIZE, BELMONT, BROWN, BUTLER,
Registered Apprentice. An apprenice, while employed CARROLL, CHAMPAIGN, CLARK, CLERMONT,
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852579EA00739A8E?opendocument 1/3
as part of a crew per Article VIII, paragraph 77, will not CLINTON, COSHOCTON, CRAWFORD, DARKE,
be subject to the apprenticeship ratios in this collective DEFIANCE, DELAWARE, FAIRFIELD, FAYETTE,
bargaining agreement. On jobs where maintenance FRANKLIN, FULTON, GALLIA, GREENE,
engineers are to be employed, for every (2) Class 2 GUERNSEY, HAMILTON, HANCOCK, HARDIN,
Mechanics there may be (1) Mechanic Trainee & so HARRISON, HENRY, HIGHLAND, HOCKING,
fourth. HOLMES, JACKSON, JEFFERSON, KNOX,
LAWRENCE, LICKING, LOGAN, MADISON,
MARION, MEIGS, MERCER, MIAMI, MONROE,
RICHLAND, ROSS, SANDUSKY, SCIOTO,
SENECA, SHELBY, STARK, TUSCARAWAS,
UNION, VAN WERT, VINTON, WARREN,
WASHINGTON, WAYNE, WILLIAMS, WYANDOT
Details :
**Apprentices will receive a 10% increase on top of the percentages listed above provided they are operating
mobile equipment. Mechanic Trainees will receive 10% increase if required to have CDL
Class 1 - Barrier Moving Machine; Boiler Operators or Compressor Operators, when compressor or boiler is
mounted on crane (Piggyback Operation); Boom Trucks (all types); Cableways Cherry Pickers; Combination -
Concrete Mixers & Towers; All Concrete Pumps with Booms; Cranes (all types) Derricks (all types); Draglines
Dredges (dipper, clam or suction) 3-man crew; Elevating Graders or Euclid Loaders; Floating Equipment;
Gradalls; Helicopter Operators; hoisting building materials; Helicopter Winch Operators, Hoisting building
materials; Hoes (All types); Hoists (with two or more drums in use): Hydraulic Gantry (lift system); Laser
Finishing Machines; Lift Slab or Panel Jack Operators; Locomotives (all types); Maintenance Engineers
(Mechanic and/or Welder); Mixers, paving (multiple drum); Mobile Concrete Pumps, with booms, Panelboards,
(all types on site); Pile Drivers; Power Shovels; Prentice Loader; Rail Tamper (with automatic lifting and
aligning device);' Rotary Drills (all) used on caissons for foundations and sub-structure work; Side Booms; Slip
Form Pavers; Straddle Carriers (Building Construction on site); Tug Boats. Horizontal Directional Drill, Rough
Terrain Fork-lift with Winch/Hoist, Laser Screed, and Like equipment;Compact Cranes,track or rubber over
4,000 pound capacity,self-erecting cranes:stationary,track or truck (all configurations) bucket trench machines
(over 24 " wide).
Class 2 - Asphalt Pavers; Bobcat-type and/or skid steer loader with hoe attachment greater than 7000 lbs.
Bulldozers; CMI type Equipment; Endloaders; Hydro Milling Machine; Kolman-type Loaders (Dirt Loading);
Lead Greasemen; Mucking Machines; Pettibone-Rail Equipment; Power Graders; Power Scoops; Power
Scrapers; Push Cats; Vermeer Type Concrete Saw;All rotomills, grinders & planers of all types. Articulating/end
dumps (minus $4.00/hour from Class 2 rate)
Class 3 - A Frames; Air Compressors, Pressurizing Shafts or Tunnels; All Asphalt Rollers; Bobcat-type and/or
skid steer loader with or without attachments; Boilers (15 lbs pressure and over); All concrete Pumps (without
booms with 5 inch system); Fork Lifts (except masonry); Highway Drillers - all types (with integral power);
Hoists (with one drum); House Elevators (except those automatic call button controlled); Man lifts; Mud Jacks;
Pressure Grouting; Pump Operators (installing or operating Well Points or other types of Dewatering Systems);
Pumps (4 inches and over discharge); Railroad Tie Inserter/Remover; Rotator (Lime-Soil Stabilizer);
Submersible Pumps (4 inches and over discharge); Switch & Tie Tampers (without lifting and aligning device);
Trench Machines (24 inches and under); Utility Operators; Material hoist/elevators.
Class 4 - Ballast Re-locator; Backfillers and Tampers; Batch Plant Operators; Bar and Joint Installing Machines;
Bull Floats; Burlap and Curing Machines; Clefplanes; Compressors, on building construction; Concrete
Spreader; Conveyors, used for handling building materials; Concrete Mixers, one bag capacity (side loader);
Concrete Mixers, capacity more than one bag; Crushers; Deck Hands; Drum Fireman (in Asphalt Plant); Farm
type tractors pulling attachments; Finishing Machines; Form Trenchers; Generators: Gunite Machines; Hydro-
Seeders; Pavement Breakers (hydraulic or cable); Post Drivers; Post Hole Diggers; Pressure Pumps (over 1/2
inch discharge); Road Widening Trenchers; Rollers (except asphalt); All Concrete pumps (without Boom with 4
inch or smaller systems); Self-Propelled Power Spreaders; Concrete Spreaders; Self-Propelled Sub-graders;
Shotcrete Machines; Tire Repairmen; Tractors, pulling sheepfoot rollers or graders; VAC/ALLS; Vibratory
Compactors, with integral power; Welder Operators.
Class 5 - Boilers (less than 15 lbs. pressure); Inboard/outboard Motor Boat Launches; Light Plant Operators;
Masonry Fork Lifts; Oilers/Helpers; Power Driven Heaters (oil fired); Power Scrubbers; Power Sweepers;
Pumps (under 4 inch discharge); Signalmen, Submersible Pumps (under 4 inch discharge). Directional Drill
Locator and Allen Screed Concrete Paver. Fueling and greasing (plus $3.00), compact cranes; track or rubber
under 4,000 pounds.
Class 6 - Master Mechanic
Class 7 - Boom & Jib 150 - 180 feet
Class 8 - Boom & Jib 180 - 249 feet
Class 9 - Boom & Jib 250 - or over
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2016fbLoc18hevhwyII Page

Skilled Crafts
Name of Union: Operating Engineers - HevHwy II
Change # : LCN01-2016fbLoc18hevhwyII
Craft : Operating Engineer Effective Date : 06/01/2016 Last Posted : 06/01/2016
Fund PWR Rate
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Operator $33.84 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $48.34 $65.26
Class 1
Class 2 $33.72 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $48.22 $65.08
Class 3 $32.68 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $47.18 $63.52
Class 4 $31.50 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $46.00 $61.75
Class 5 $26.04 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $40.54 $53.56
Class 6 $34.09 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $48.59 $65.64
Class 7 $34.09 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $48.59 $65.64
Class 8 $34.34 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $48.84 $66.01
Great
Lakes
Floating
Agreement
Class 1 $41.90 $7.41 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $56.15 $77.10
Class 2A $40.40 $7.41 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $54.65 $74.85
Class 2B $40.40 $7.41 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $54.65 $74.85
Class 3 $35.95 $7.41 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $50.20 $68.18
Class 4 $29.90 $7.41 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $44.15 $59.10

1st Year 50.00 $16.92 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $31.42 $39.88
2nd Year 60.00 $20.30 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $34.80 $44.96
3rd Year 70.00 $23.69 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $38.19 $50.03
4th Year 80.00 $27.07 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $41.57 $55.11
Field Mech
Trainee
Class 2
1st year 49.82 $16.86 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $31.36 $39.79
2nd year 59.78 $20.23 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $34.73 $44.84
3rd year 69.73 $23.60 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $38.10 $49.89
4th year 79.73 $26.98 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $41.48 $54.97
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852579EA0071D69A?opendocument 1/3
Special Calculation Note : Other: Education & Safety Fund is $0.09 per hour.
note ) :
For every (3) Operating Engineer Journeymen ADAMS, ALLEN, ASHLAND, ATHENS,
employed by the company , there may be employed (1) AUGLAIZE, BELMONT, BROWN, BUTLER,
Registered Apprentice. An apprentice, while employed CARROLL, CHAMPAIGN, CLARK, CLERMONT,
as part of a crew per Article VIII paragraph 65, will not CLINTON, COSHOCTON, CRAWFORD, DARKE,
be subject the apprenticeship ratios in this collective DEFIANCE, DELAWARE, FAIRFIELD, FAYETTE,
bargaining agreement. On jobs where maintenance FRANKLIN, FULTON, GALLIA, GREENE,
engineers are to be employed, for every (2) Class 2 GUERNSEY, HAMILTON, HANCOCK, HARDIN,
Mechanics there may be (1) Mechanic Trainee & so HARRISON, HENRY, HIGHLAND, HOCKING,
fourth. Mechanic Trainee rate is a percentage of Class 2 HOLMES, HURON, JACKSON, JEFFERSON,
rate. KNOX, LAWRENCE, LICKING, LOGAN, LUCAS,
MADISON, MARION, MEIGS, MERCER, MIAMI,
MONROE, MONTGOMERY, MORGAN, MORROW,
RICHLAND, ROSS, SANDUSKY, SCIOTO,
SENECA, SHELBY, STARK, TUSCARAWAS,
UNION, VAN WERT, VINTON, WARREN,
WASHINGTON, WAYNE, WILLIAMS, WOOD,
WYANDOT
Details :
**Apprentices will receive a 10% increase on top of the percentages listed above provided they are operating
mobile equipment. Mechanic Trainees will receive 10% increase if they are required to have CDL.
Class 1 - Air Compressors on Steel Erection; Barrier Moving Machine; Boiler Operators, on Compressors or
Generators, when mounted on a rig: Cableways, Combination Concrete mixers & Towers; Concrete Pumps;
Concrete Plants ( over 4 yd capacity); Cranes (all types, including Boom Trucks, Cherry Pickers); Derricks;
Draglines, Dredgers (dipper, clam or suction); Elevating Graders or Euclid Loaders; Floating Equipment (all
types); Gradalls, Helicopter Crew (Operator- hoist or winch); Hoes (all types); Hoisting Engines, on shaft or
tunnel work; Hydraulic Gantry (lifting system); Industrial - Type Tractors; Jet Engine Dryers (D8 or D9), Diesel
Tractors; Locomotives (standard gage); Maintenance Operators (class A); Mixers, paving (single or double
drum); Mucking Machines; Multiple Scrapers; Piledriving Machines (all types); Power Shovels, Prentice
Loader; Quad 9 (double pusher); Rail Tamper (with automatic lifting and aligning device); Refrigerating
Machines (freezer operation); Side Booms; Slip Form Pavers; Tower Dericks; Tree Shredders; Truck Mounted
Concrete Pumps; Tug Boats; Tunnel Machines and /or Mining Machines; Wheel Excavators. Rough Terrain
Fork-lift with Winch/Hoist; Compact Cranes, track rubber over 4,000 pound capacity, self-erecting cranes;
stationary, track or truck (all configurations) Bucket trench machines (over 24 inches wide).
Class 2 - Asphalt Pavers; Automatic Subgrade Machines, self-propelled (CMI-type); Bobcat-type and /or skid
steer loader with hoe attachment greater than 7000 lbs.; Boring Machine Operators (more than 48 inches);
Bulldozers; Endloaders; Hydro Milling Machine; Kolman-type Loaders (production type-dirt); Lead
Greasemen; Maintenance Operators, Class B (Portage and Summit Counties only); Pettibone-Rail Equipment;
Power Graders; Power Scrapers; Push Cats; Lighting and Traffic Signal Installation Equipment includes all
groups or classifications; Trench Machines (24inch wide and under); Vermeer Type Concrete saw. Material
Transfer Equipment (Shuttle buggy) Asphalt; All rotomills,grinders and planers of all types. Horizontal
Directional Drill (Over 50,000 ft.lbs.thrust and over)
Class 3 - A-Frames; Air Compressors, on tunnel work (low Pressure); Asphalt Plant Engineers; Bobcat-type
and/or skid steer loader with or without attachments; Power Boilers (15 lbs pressure and over); Highway Drills
(all types); Rollers, asphalt; Pump Operators (installing or operating well Points); Pumps (4 inch and over
discharge); Railroad Tie Inserter/Remover; Rotator (lime-soil Stabilizer), Switch & Tie Tampers (without lifting
and aligning device); Locomotives (narrow gage); Mixers, concrete (more than one bag capacity); Mixers, one
bag capacity (side loader); Utilities Operators, (small equipment); Welding Machines; Material hoist/elevators.
Articulating/straight bed end dumps if assigned (minus $4.00 per hour).
Class 4 -Ballast Re-locator; Backfillers, Batch Plants; Bar and Joint Installing Machines; Boring Machine
Operators (48 inch or less); Bull Floats; Burlap and Curing Machines; Concrete Plants (capacity 4 yd and
under); Conveyors (highway); Concrete Saws (multiple); Crushers; Deckhands; Farm type tractors, with
attachments (highway), except masonry; Finishing Machines; Firemen, Floating Equipment (all types); Fork
Lifts (highway); Form Trenchers; Hydro Hammers; Hydro Seeders; Pavement Breakers; Plant Mixers; Post
Drivers; Post Hole Diggers (power auger); Power Brush Burners; Power Form Handling Equipment; Road
Widening Trenchers; Rollers (brick, grade, macadam); Self-Propelled Power Spreaders; Self-Propelled Sub-
Graders; Tractors, pulling sheepsfoot rollers or graders; Steam Firemen; Vibratory Compactors, with integral
power.
Class 5 - Compressors (portable, Sewer, Heavy and Highway); Generators; Inboard-Outboard Motor Boat
Launches; Masonry Fork Lifts; Oilers/Helpers; Power Driven Heaters; Power Scrubbers; Power Sweepers;
Pumps (under 4 inch discharge); Signalmen; Drum Fireman (in Asphalt Plant); Oil Heaters (Asphalt Plant); Tire
Repairmen; VAC/ALLS; Fueling and greasing (plus $3.00), compact cranes: track or rubber under 4,000
pounds.
Class 6 - Master Mechanic
Class 7 - Crane Boom 150 ft - 180 ft
Class 8 - Crane Boom over 180 ft .
GREAT LAKES FLOATING AGREEMENT:
Class 1 - Diver,Wet Tender, Engineer, (Hyd.Dredge), Craft Foreman ( Master Mechanic)
Class 2A - Crane Backhoe Operator,Mechanic/Welder,Assistant Engineer (Hyd. Dredge), Leverman (Hyd
Dredge) Diver Tender, Tug Operator ( Tug 70T and over)
Class 2B - Friction Crane, Lattice Boom or any Crane Certification.
Class 3 - Deck Equipment Operator, (Machineryman), Maint. of Crane, Tug/Launch Operator, Loader/Dozer on
Barge, Deck Machinery, Maintenance of Crane ( over 50T capacity), or Backhoe (115,000lbs or more)
Loaders/Dozer and like equipment on Barge, Breakwater Wall, Slip/Dock Scow.
Class4 - Deck Equipment Operator, (Machineryman/Fireman)(4 equipment Units or more), Deck Hand, Tug
Engineer, Crane Maintenance, 50T and under/Backhoe 115,000lbs or less, Assistant Tug Operator, add off Road
Truck.
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2016fbLoc1020Com Page

Skilled Crafts
Name of Union: Painter Local 1020 Commercial
Change # : LCN01-2016fbLoc1020Com
Craft : Painter Effective Date : 05/25/2016 Last Posted : 05/25/2016
Fund PWR Rate
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Painter Brush $20.98 $6.50 $5.22 $0.28 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $32.98 $43.47
Roll
Spray Water $20.98 $6.50 $5.22 $0.28 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $32.98 $43.47
Borne
Products
Sandblaster $21.73 $6.50 $5.22 $0.28 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $33.73 $44.60
Pressure
Cleaning and
Spray of
alkyd,
epoxy's, and
petroleum
base
products
Wallcovering $21.43 $6.50 $5.22 $0.28 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $33.43 $44.14
Lead $25.58 $6.50 $5.22 $0.28 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $37.58 $50.37
Abatement

1st 0-1500 50.00 $10.49 $6.50 $5.22 $0.28 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $22.49 $27.73
hrs
2nd 1501- 60.00 $12.59 $6.50 $5.22 $0.28 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $24.59 $30.88
3000 hrs
3rd 3001- 70.00 $14.69 $6.50 $5.22 $0.28 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $26.69 $34.03
4500 hrs
4th 4501- 80.00 $16.78 $6.50 $5.22 $0.28 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $28.78 $37.18
6000 hrs
Special Calculation Note : APPRENTICE PAY BASED ON % OF EACH CLASSIFICATION ABOVE
PLUS FULL FRINGES.
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285256FEE0051D262?opendocument 1/2
note ) :
1 Journeymen to 1 Apprentice ALLEN, AUGLAIZE, CHAMPAIGN, DEFIANCE,
HARDIN, LOGAN, MERCER, PAULDING,
PUTNAM, SHELBY, VAN WERT, WILLIAMS
Details :
All surfaces 40 feet or over where material is applied to or labor performed on above the ground level (exterior),
floor level (interior), $0.50 per hour shall be applied to the prevailing rate of the classification involved.
Journeymen and apprentices applying Coal Tar products shall have $1.00 per hour added to the prevailing rate
of the classification involved.
Journeymen and apprentices working with a spray painter as a rigger, picker, or blow down man shall receive
spray painter wages.
Swing stage, Chair, Spiders and Cherry Pickers shall have $.25 added to the prevailing rate of the classification
involved.
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285256FEE0051D262?opendocument 2/2

Skilled Crafts
Name of Union: Painter Local 1020 Commercial
Change # : LCN01-2016fbLoc1020Com
Craft : Drywall Finisher Effective Date : 05/25/2016 Last Posted : 05/25/2016
Fund PWR Rate
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Painter $22.53 $6.50 $5.22 $0.28 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $34.53 $45.80
Drywall
Finisher

1st-0-1500 50.00 $11.27 $6.50 $5.22 $0.28 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $23.26 $28.90
hrs
2nd- 1501- 65.00 $14.64 $6.50 $5.22 $0.28 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $26.64 $33.97
3000 hrs
3rd- 3001- 80.00 $18.02 $6.50 $5.22 $0.28 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $30.02 $39.04
4500 hrs
time.
note ) :
1 Journeymen employed to 1 Apprentice ALLEN, AUGLAIZE, CHAMPAIGN, DEFIANCE,
Details :
Swing stage, Chair, Spiders and Cherry Pickers shall have $0.25 added to the prevailing rate of the classification
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B8007069328525771C00653E4F?opendocument 1/2
involved.
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B8007069328525771C00653E4F?opendocument 2/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2016fbLoc1020Ind Page

Skilled Crafts
Name of Union: Painter Local 1020 Industrial
Change # : LCN01-2016fbLoc1020Ind
Fund PWR Rate
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Painter $23.83 $6.50 $5.22 $0.28 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $35.83 $47.75
Brush Roll
Spray $24.58 $6.50 $5.22 $0.28 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $36.58 $48.87
Painter
Sandblasting
Pressure
Cleaning
Refinery
Wall $21.43 $6.50 $5.22 $0.28 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $33.43 $44.14
Coverings
Lead $25.58 $6.50 $5.22 $0.28 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $37.58 $50.37
Abatement
(plus .75
premium
when
blasting)

1st-0-1500 50.02 $11.92 $6.50 $5.22 $0.28 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $23.92 $29.88
hrs
2nd-1501- 60.00 $14.30 $6.50 $5.22 $0.28 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $26.30 $33.45
3000 hrs
3rd-3001- 70.00 $16.68 $6.50 $5.22 $0.28 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $28.68 $37.02
4500 hrs
4th-4501- 80.00 $19.06 $6.50 $5.22 $0.28 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $31.06 $40.60
6000 hrs
6th 6 months
7th 6 months
8th 6 months
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285256FEB004E0E1C?opendocument 1/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2016fbLoc1020Ind Page
Special Calculation Note : APPRENTIC PAY BASED ON % OF EACH CLASSIFICATION ABOVE
PLUS FULL FRINGES.
note ) :
1 Journeymen employed to 1 Apprentice ALLEN, AUGLAIZE, CHAMPAIGN, DEFIANCE,
Details :
Journeymen and apprentices applying Coal Tar products shall have $1.00 per hour added to the prevailing rate
of the classification involved.
Journeymen and apprentices working with a spray painter as a rigger, picker, or blow down man shall receive
spray painter wages.
Swing stage, Chair, Spiders and Cherry Pickers shall be paid $0.25 added to the prevailing rateof the
classification involved.
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285256FEB004E0E1C?opendocument 2/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCNO1-2015fbLoc639 Page

Skilled Crafts
Name of Union: Painter Local 639
Change # : LCNO1-2015fbLoc639
Fund PWR Rate
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Painter Metal
Finisher/Helpers
Top Helper $19.09 $3.65 $0.00 $0.00 $0.66 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $23.40 $32.94
Class A
Top Helper $19.09 $3.65 $0.65 $0.00 $1.03 $0.00 $0.37 $0.00 $0.00 $24.79 $34.33
Class B
Top Helper $19.09 $3.65 $1.00 $0.00 $1.76 $0.00 $0.37 $0.00 $0.00 $25.87 $35.41
Class C
Helper Class A $14.69 $3.65 $0.00 $0.00 $0.51 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $18.85 $26.19
Helper Class B $14.69 $3.65 $0.65 $0.00 $0.79 $0.00 $0.28 $0.00 $0.00 $20.06 $27.40
Helper Class C $14.69 $3.65 $1.00 $0.00 $1.64 $0.00 $0.28 $0.00 $0.00 $21.26 $28.60
New Hire 90 $11.00 $3.65 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $14.65 $20.15
Days
Special Calculation Note : Other is Sick and Personal Time
note ) :
ADAMS, ALLEN, ASHLAND, ASHTABULA,
COSHOCTON, CRAWFORD, CUYAHOGA, DARKE,
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285257E5F00500355?opendocument 1/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCNO1-2015fbLoc639 Page
Details :
Top Helper: Shall perform the responsibilities of a Helper and be responsible for the setup, break down, safety
and quality of the company's product.
Helper : Shall be responsible for performing tasks in refinishing, compliance with safety procedures, setting up
and breaking down job sites, scaffolding and swing stages and preparing surfaces for refinishing including but
not limited to, masking and stripping and cleaning, oxidizing, polishing and scratch removal on various surfaces
.
Class A Workers: Less than 1 Year of Service.
Class B Workers: More than 1 and less than 8 Years of Service.
Class C Workers: More than 8 Years of Service.
Metal Polisher Scope of Work: Polishing, buffing, stripping, coloring, lacquering, spraying, cleaning and
maintenance of ornamental and architectural metals, iron, bronze, nickel, aluminum and stainless steel and in
mental specialty work, various stone finishes, stone specialty work and any other work pertaining to the
finishing of metal, stones, woods, and any window washing/cleaning done in conjunction with this work, using
chemicals, solvents, coatings and hand applied lacquer thinner, removing scratches from mirrow finished metals,
burnishing of bronze, statuary finishes on exterior and interior surfaces and the use of all tools required to
perform such work, including but not limited to polishes, spray equipment and scaffolding.
Swing State Rate: All work on scaffold 4 sections or higher, including any boom lifts and swing stage scaffolds
including the rigging and derigging of hanging/suspended swing stage systems and rappelling/bolson chair
work, ADD $1.50 per hour.
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285257E5F00500355?opendocument 2/2

Skilled Crafts
Name of Union: Painter Local 639 Zone 2 Sign
Fund PWR Rate
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Painter Sign $21.25 $1.33 $0.14 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.57 $0.00 $0.00 $23.29 $33.92
Journeyman
Tech/Team
Leader
Class A
Painter Sign $21.25 $1.33 $0.14 $0.00 $0.41 $0.00 $0.57 $0.00 $0.00 $23.70 $34.32
Journeyman
Tech/Team
Leader
Class B
Painter Sign $21.25 $1.33 $0.14 $0.00 $0.82 $0.00 $0.57 $0.00 $0.00 $24.11 $34.74
Journeyman
Tech/Team
Leader
Class C
Painter Sign $21.25 $1.33 $0.14 $0.00 $1.23 $0.00 $0.57 $0.00 $0.00 $24.52 $35.14
Journeyman
Tech/Team
Leader
Class D
Sign $20.98 $1.33 $0.14 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.56 $0.00 $0.00 $23.01 $33.50
Journeyman
Class A
Sign $20.98 $1.33 $0.14 $0.00 $0.40 $0.00 $0.56 $0.00 $0.00 $23.41 $33.90
Journeyman
Class B
Sign $20.98 $1.33 $0.14 $0.00 $0.81 $0.00 $0.56 $0.00 $0.00 $23.82 $34.31
Journeyman
Class C
Sign $20.98 $1.33 $0.14 $0.00 $1.21 $0.00 $0.56 $0.00 $0.00 $24.22 $34.71
Journeyman
Class D
Tech Sign $15.90 $1.33 $0.14 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.43 $0.00 $0.00 $17.80 $25.75
Fabrication/
Erector
Class A
Tech Sign $15.90 $1.33 $0.14 $0.00 $0.31 $0.00 $0.43 $0.00 $0.00 $18.11 $26.06
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285258003005752C2?opendocument 1/2
Fabrication/
Erector
Class B
Tech Sign $15.90 $1.33 $0.14 $0.00 $0.61 $0.00 $0.43 $0.00 $0.00 $18.41 $26.36
Fabrication/
Erector
Class C
Tech Sign $15.90 $1.33 $0.14 $0.00 $0.92 $0.00 $0.43 $0.00 $0.00 $18.72 $26.67
Fabrication/
Erector
Class D
Special Calculation Note : Other is for paid holidays.
note ) :
ADAMS, ALLEN, AUGLAIZE, BROWN, BUTLER,
CRAWFORD, DARKE, DEFIANCE, DELAWARE,
ERIE, FAIRFIELD, FAYETTE, FRANKLIN,
FULTON, GREENE, HAMILTON, HANCOCK,
HARDIN, HENRY, HIGHLAND, HOLMES, HURON,
JACKSON, KNOX, LICKING, LOGAN, LORAIN,
LUCAS, MADISON, MAHONING, MARION,
MERCER, MIAMI, MONTGOMERY, MORROW,
MUSKINGUM, OTTAWA, PAULDING, PERRY,
PICKAWAY, PIKE, PREBLE, PUTNAM, ROSS,
SANDUSKY, SCIOTO, SENECA, SHELBY, STARK,
WARREN, WAYNE, WILLIAMS, WOOD,
WYANDOT
Details :
Class A: less that 1 year.
Class B: 1-3 years.
Class C; 3-10 years.
Class D: More than 10 years.
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285258003005752C2?opendocument 2/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled CN01-2016fbLoc886 Page

Skilled Crafts
Name of Union: Plasterer & Drywall Finisher Local 886
Change # : CN01-2016fbLoc886
Craft : Plasterer Effective Date : 08/03/2016 Last Posted : 08/03/2016
Fund PWR Rate
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Plasterer $27.81 $7.30 $5.60 $0.30 $0.00 $4.00 $0.03 $0.00 $0.00 $45.04 $58.94
Drywall $25.80 $7.30 $5.60 $0.30 $0.00 $4.00 $0.03 $0.00 $0.00 $43.03 $55.93
Drywall
Apprentice
Drywall $12.90 $7.30 $5.60 $0.30 $0.00 $4.00 $0.03 $0.00 $0.00 $30.13 $36.58
50%
Drywall r $14.19 $7.30 $5.60 $0.30 $0.00 $4.00 $0.03 $0.00 $0.00 $31.42 $38.52
55%
Drywall $15.48 $7.30 $5.60 $0.30 $0.00 $4.00 $0.03 $0.00 $0.00 $32.71 $40.45
60%
Drywall $18.06 $7.30 $5.60 $0.30 $0.00 $4.00 $0.03 $0.00 $0.00 $35.29 $44.32
70%
Drywall $19.35 $7.30 $5.60 $0.30 $0.00 $4.00 $0.03 $0.00 $0.00 $36.58 $46.26
75%
Drywall $20.64 $7.30 $5.60 $0.30 $0.00 $4.00 $0.03 $0.00 $0.00 $37.87 $48.19
80%
Drywall $23.22 $7.30 $5.60 $0.30 $0.00 $4.00 $0.03 $0.00 $0.00 $40.45 $52.06
90%
Drywall $24.51 $7.30 $5.60 $0.30 $0.00 $4.00 $0.03 $0.00 $0.00 $41.74 $54.00
95%
Drywall $18.06 $7.30 $5.60 $0.30 $0.00 $4.00 $0.03 $0.00 $0.00 $35.29 $44.32
Shophand
Plaster er Per cent

Appr entice
Plasterer 50.00 $13.91 $7.30 $5.60 $0.30 $0.00 $4.00 $0.03 $0.00 $0.00 $31.14 $38.09
Plasterer 55.00 $15.30 $7.30 $5.60 $0.30 $0.00 $4.00 $0.03 $0.00 $0.00 $32.53 $40.17
Plasterer 60.00 $16.69 $7.30 $5.60 $0.30 $0.00 $4.00 $0.03 $0.00 $0.00 $33.92 $42.26
Plasterer 70.00 $19.47 $7.30 $5.60 $0.30 $0.00 $4.00 $0.03 $0.00 $0.00 $36.70 $46.43
Plasterer 75.00 $20.86 $7.30 $5.60 $0.30 $0.00 $4.00 $0.03 $0.00 $0.00 $38.09 $48.52
Plasterer 80.00 $22.25 $7.30 $5.60 $0.30 $0.00 $4.00 $0.03 $0.00 $0.00 $39.48 $50.60
Plasterer 90.00 $25.03 $7.30 $5.60 $0.30 $0.00 $4.00 $0.03 $0.00 $0.00 $42.26 $54.77
Plasterer 95.00 $26.42 $7.30 $5.60 $0.30 $0.00 $4.00 $0.03 $0.00 $0.00 $43.65 $56.86
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285256EF300504F16?opendocument 1/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled CN01-2016fbLoc886 Page
Plasterer 70.00 $19.47 $7.30 $5.60 $0.30 $0.00 $4.00 $0.03 $0.00 $0.00 $36.70 $46.43
Shophand
time.
note ) :
1 Journeymen to 1 Apprentice for 1st Apprentice only ALLEN, AUGLAIZE, DEFIANCE, ERIE, FULTON,
Then 3 Journeymen to 1 Apprentice thereafter HANCOCK, HARDIN, HENRY, HURON, LOGAN,
LUCAS, MERCER, OTTAWA, PAULDING,
PUTNAM, SANDUSKY, SENECA, VAN WERT,
WILLIAMS, WOOD
Details :
****Improvers receive no fringe benefits for the first 90 days. Then $3.75 Health & Welfare
Workers on Swing Stage will be paid ($.25) per hour above journeyman rate.
Nozzelmen or Operators of the Plastering Browning Gun shall receive ($.75) per hour above journeyman rate.
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285256EF300504F16?opendocument 2/2

Skilled Crafts
Name of Union: Plumber Pipefitter Local 776
Craft : Plumber/Pipefitter Effective Date : 10/05/2016 Last Posted : 10/05/2016
Fund PWR Rate
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Plumber $34.00 $9.86 $7.06 $0.92 $0.00 $4.50 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $56.34 $73.34
Pipefitter

1st year 40.00 $13.60 $9.86 $0.00 $0.92 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $24.38 $31.18
2nd year 50.00 $17.00 $9.86 $7.05 $0.92 $0.00 $2.25 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $37.08 $45.58
3rd year 60.00 $20.40 $9.86 $7.05 $0.92 $0.00 $2.70 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $40.93 $51.13
4th year 70.00 $23.80 $9.86 $7.05 $0.92 $0.00 $3.15 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $44.78 $56.68
5th year 80.00 $27.20 $9.86 $7.05 $0.92 $0.00 $3.60 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $48.63 $62.23
time.
note ) :
SHELBY, VAN WERT
Details :
$0.14 under "Other" is Labor Management Corporation Committee.
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285256609005D73A3?opendocument 1/1

Skilled Crafts
Name of Union: Roofer Local 75
Craft : Roofer Effective Date : 05/20/2016 Last Posted : 05/20/2016
Fund PWR Rate
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Roofer $23.08 $7.68 $7.28 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $38.68 $50.22
Slate and $23.30 $7.68 $7.28 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $38.90 $50.55
Tile

1st term 50.00 $11.54 $2.50 $0.67 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $15.35 $21.12
1000 hrs
2nd term 55.00 $12.69 $7.68 $0.99 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $22.00 $28.35
1000 hrs
3rd term 60.00 $13.85 $7.68 $1.31 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $23.48 $30.40
1000 hrs
4th term 70.00 $16.16 $7.68 $2.04 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $26.52 $34.59
1000 hrs
5th term 80.00 $18.46 $7.68 $2.77 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $29.55 $38.79
1000 hrs
Tradesman 79.00 $18.23 $2.50 $1.32 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $22.69 $31.81
time.
note ) :
3 Journeymen to 2 Apprentices ALLEN, AUGLAIZE, CLARK, CLINTON, DARKE,
GREENE, MERCER, MIAMI, MONTGOMERY,
PREBLE, SHELBY, VAN WERT
Details :
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852571790051861D?opendocument 1/2
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852571790051861D?opendocument 2/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCR01-2016fbLoc24(Day) Page

Skilled Crafts
Name of Union: Sheet Metal Local 24 (Dayton)
Change # : LCR01-2016fbLoc24(Day)
Craft : Sheet Metal Worker Effective Date : 11/09/2016 Last Posted : 11/09/2016
Fund PWR Rate
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Sheet Metal $26.54 $7.91 $12.65 $0.85 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $47.95 $61.22
Worker
5th Year B 80.00 $21.23 $7.67 $10.12 $0.85 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $39.87 $50.49
5th Year A 75.00 $19.91 $7.61 $9.49 $0.85 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $37.86 $47.81
4th Year B 70.00 $18.58 $7.55 $8.85 $0.85 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $35.83 $45.12
4th Year A 65.00 $17.25 $7.50 $8.22 $0.85 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $33.82 $42.45
3rd year B 60.00 $15.92 $7.44 $7.59 $0.85 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $31.80 $39.77
3rd Year A 55.00 $14.60 $7.38 $6.96 $0.85 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $29.79 $37.09
2 Year B 52.00 $13.80 $7.34 $6.58 $0.85 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $28.57 $35.47
2 Year A 50.00 $13.27 $7.32 $6.33 $0.85 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $27.77 $34.41
Probationary 47.50 $12.61 $7.29 $6.01 $0.85 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $26.76 $33.06
1 Year
time.
note ) :
1 Journeyman to 1 Apprentice then, ALLEN, AUGLAIZE, BUTLER, CHAMPAIGN,
1 Apprentice for every 2 Journeymen thereafter CLARK, CLINTON, DARKE, GREENE, HARDIN,
LOGAN, MERCER, MIAMI, MONTGOMERY,
PREBLE, SHELBY, VAN WERT, WARREN,
WYANDOT
Details :
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B8007069328525660A003CB72B?opendocument 1/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCR01-2016fbLoc24(Day) Page
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B8007069328525660A003CB72B?opendocument 2/2

Skilled Crafts
Name of Union: Sprinkler Fitter Local 669
Craft : Sprinkler Fitter Effective Date : 08/17/2016 Last Posted : 09/08/2016
Fund PWR Rate
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Sprinkler $35.08 $8.77 $6.05 $0.45 $0.00 $4.72 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $55.07 $72.61
Fitter
Indentured
prior to
April 2010
45% $15.79 $7.45 $0.00 $0.45 $0.00 $0.69 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $24.38 $32.28
50% $17.54 $7.45 $0.00 $0.45 $0.00 $0.74 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $26.18 $34.95
55% $19.29 $8.77 $6.05 $0.45 $0.00 $0.53 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $35.09 $44.74
60% $21.05 $8.77 $6.05 $0.45 $0.00 $0.58 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $36.90 $47.42
65% $22.80 $8.77 $6.05 $0.45 $0.00 $1.13 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $39.20 $50.60
70% $24.56 $8.77 $6.05 $0.45 $0.00 $1.18 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $41.01 $53.29
75% $26.31 $8.77 $6.05 $0.45 $0.00 $1.23 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $42.81 $55.96
80% $28.06 $8.77 $6.05 $0.45 $0.00 $1.28 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $44.61 $58.64
85% $29.82 $8.77 $6.05 $0.45 $0.00 $1.32 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $46.41 $61.32
90% $31.57 $8.77 $6.05 $0.45 $0.00 $1.37 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $48.21 $64.00

Indentur ed
on or after
Apr il 2010
ClLASS 1 45.00 $15.79 $7.45 $0.00 $0.45 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $23.69 $31.58
CLASS 2 50.00 $17.54 $7.45 $0.00 $0.45 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $25.44 $34.21
CLASS 3 55.00 $19.29 $8.77 $6.05 $0.45 $0.00 $0.25 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $34.81 $44.46
CLASS 4 60.00 $21.05 $8.77 $6.05 $0.45 $0.00 $0.25 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $36.57 $47.09
CLASS 5 65.00 $22.80 $8.77 $6.05 $0.45 $0.00 $0.50 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $38.57 $49.97
CLASS 6 70.00 $24.56 $8.77 $6.05 $0.45 $0.00 $0.50 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $40.33 $52.60
CLASS 7 75.00 $26.31 $8.77 $6.05 $0.45 $0.00 $0.50 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $42.08 $55.24
CLASS 8 80.00 $28.06 $8.77 $6.05 $0.45 $0.00 $0.50 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $43.83 $57.87
CLASS 9 85.00 $29.82 $8.77 $6.05 $0.45 $0.00 $0.50 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $45.59 $60.50
CLASS 10 90.00 $31.57 $8.77 $6.05 $0.45 $0.00 $0.50 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $47.34 $63.13
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852573300068D774?opendocument 1/2
time.
note ) :
1 Journeyman to 1 Apprentice ADAMS, ALLEN, ASHLAND, ASHTABULA,
COSHOCTON, CRAWFORD, DARKE, DEFIANCE,
DELAWARE, ERIE, FAIRFIELD, FAYETTE,
FRANKLIN, FULTON, GALLIA, GREENE,
GUERNSEY, HAMILTON, HANCOCK, HARDIN,
HARRISON, HENRY, HIGHLAND, HOCKING,
HOLMES, HURON, JACKSON, JEFFERSON,
KNOX, LAWRENCE, LICKING, LOGAN, LUCAS,
Details :
Sprinkler Fitter work shall consist of the installation,dismantling,maintenance,repairs,adjustments,and
corrections of all fire protection and fire control systems including the unloading,handling by hand,power
equipment and installation of all piping or tubing,appurtenances and equipment pertaining thereto,including both
overhead and underground water mains,fire hydrants and hydrant mains,standpipes and hose connections to
sprinkler systems used in connection with sprinkler and alarm systems. Also all tanks and pumps connected
thereto,also included shall be CO-2 and Cardox Systems, Dry Chemical Systems,Foam Systems and all other
fire protection systems.
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852573300068D774?opendocument 2/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCON1-2015fbBldgHevHwy Page

Skilled Crafts
Name of Union: Truck Driver Bldg & HevHwy Class 1
Locals 20,40,92,92b,100,175,284,438,377,637,908,957
Change # : LCON1-2015fbBldgHevHwy
Craft : Truck Driver Effective Date : 05/01/2015 Last Posted : 03/31/2015
Fund PWR Rate
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Truck $25.28 $6.81 $6.70 $0.20 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $38.99 $51.63
Driver
CLASS 1 4
wheel
service,
dump, and
batch
trucks, Oil
Distributor
- Asphalt
Distributor-
Tandems

First 6 80.00 $20.22 $6.81 $6.70 $0.20 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $33.93 $44.05
months
7-12 85.00 $21.49 $6.81 $6.70 $0.20 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $35.20 $45.94
months
13-18 90.00 $22.75 $6.81 $0.00 $0.20 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $29.76 $41.14
months
19-24 95.00 $24.02 $6.81 $0.00 $0.20 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $31.03 $43.03
months
25-30 100.00 $25.28 $6.81 $0.00 $0.20 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $32.29 $44.93
months
time.
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285257E19004BBE71?opendocument 1/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCON1-2015fbBldgHevHwy Page
note ) :
per company/project ATHENS, AUGLAIZE, BELMONT, BROWN,
KNOX, LAWRENCE, LICKING, LOGAN, LORAIN,
MEDINA, MEIGS, MERCER, MIAMI, MONROE,
Details :
** Asphalt - Oil spray bar man when operating from cab shall receive $0.20 cents per hour above their Basic
Hourly Rate.
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285257E19004BBE71?opendocument 2/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled CN1-2015-fbBldgHevHwy Page

Skilled Crafts
Name of Union: Truck Driver Bldg & HevHwy Class 2
Locals 20,40,92,92b,100,175,284,438,377,637,908,957
Change # : CN1-2015-fbBldgHevHwy
Craft : Truck Driver Effective Date : 05/01/2015 Last Posted : 03/31/2015
Fund PWR Rate
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Truck Driver CLASS 2 $25.70 $6.81 $6.70 $0.20 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $39.41 $52.26
Tractor Trailer-Semi
Tractor Trucks-Pole
Trailers-Ready Mix
Trucks-Fuel Trucks-
Asphalt-Oil Spray bar
men- 5 Axle & Over -
Belly Dumps-End
Dumps-Articulated
Dump Trucks- Low
boys-Heavy duty
Equipment(irrespective
of load carried) when
used exclusively for
transportation-Truck
Mechanics (when
needed)

First 6 months 80.00 $20.56 $6.81 $6.70 $0.20 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $34.27 $44.55
7-12 months 85.00 $21.84 $6.81 $6.70 $0.20 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $35.56 $46.48
13-18 months 90.00 $23.13 $6.81 $0.00 $0.20 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $30.14 $41.71
19-24 months 95.00 $24.41 $6.81 $0.00 $0.20 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $31.42 $43.63
25-30 months 100.00 $25.70 $6.81 $0.00 $0.20 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $32.71 $45.56
time.
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852573140053CFF2?opendocument 1/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled CN1-2015-fbBldgHevHwy Page
note ) :
per company/project ATHENS, AUGLAIZE, BELMONT, BROWN,
KNOX, LAWRENCE, LICKING, LOGAN, LORAIN,
MEDINA, MEIGS, MERCER, MIAMI, MONROE,
Details :
** Asphalt - Oil spray bar man when operating from cab shall receive $0.20 cents per hour above their Basic
Hourly Rate.
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852573140053CFF2?opendocument 2/2

Skilled Crafts
Name of Union: Ironworker Local 290
Fund PWR Rate
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Ironworker $27.00 $7.10 $9.50 $0.45 $0.00 $3.88 $0.25 $0.00 $0.00 $48.18 $61.68
Structural
Welder $27.00 $7.10 $9.50 $0.45 $0.00 $3.88 $0.25 $0.00 $0.00 $48.18 $61.68
Fence $27.00 $7.10 $9.50 $0.45 $0.00 $3.88 $0.25 $0.00 $0.00 $48.18 $61.68
Erector
Reinforcing $27.00 $7.10 $9.50 $0.45 $0.00 $3.88 $0.25 $0.00 $0.00 $48.18 $61.68
Rods
Machinery $27.00 $7.10 $9.50 $0.45 $0.00 $3.88 $0.25 $0.00 $0.00 $48.18 $61.68
Mover
Sheeter $27.00 $7.10 $9.50 $0.45 $0.00 $3.88 $0.25 $0.00 $0.00 $48.18 $61.68
Metal $27.00 $7.10 $9.50 $0.45 $0.00 $3.88 $0.25 $0.00 $0.00 $48.18 $61.68
Building
Erector
Rigger & $27.00 $7.10 $9.50 $0.45 $0.00 $3.88 $0.25 $0.00 $0.00 $48.18 $61.68
Erector

1st year 60.00 $16.20 $7.10 $9.50 $0.45 $0.00 $3.88 $0.25 $0.00 $0.00 $37.38 $45.48
2nd year 70.00 $18.90 $7.10 $9.50 $0.45 $0.00 $3.88 $0.25 $0.00 $0.00 $40.08 $49.53
3rd year 80.00 $21.60 $7.10 $9.50 $0.45 $0.00 $3.88 $0.25 $0.00 $0.00 $42.78 $53.58
4th year 90.00 $24.30 $7.10 $9.50 $0.45 $0.00 $3.88 $0.25 $0.00 $0.00 $45.48 $57.63
1st Year 65.00 $17.55 $7.10 $9.50 $0.45 $0.00 $3.88 $0.25 $0.00 $0.00 $38.73 $47.51
Rodman
2nd Year 80.00 $21.60 $7.10 $9.50 $0.45 $0.00 $3.88 $0.25 $0.00 $0.00 $42.78 $53.58
Rodman
3rd Year 90.00 $24.30 $7.10 $9.50 $0.45 $0.00 $3.88 $0.25 $0.00 $0.00 $45.48 $57.63
Rodman
Special Calculation Note : Other is for Industry Fund.
note ) :
3 Journeymen to 1 Apprentice ALLEN*, AUGLAIZE, BUTLER*, CHAMPAIGN*,
CLARK, CLINTON, DARKE, FAYETTE*, GREENE,
HARDIN*, HIGHLAND*, LOGAN*, MADISON*,
MERCER*, MIAMI, MONTGOMERY, PREBLE,
SHELBY, VAN WERT*, WARREN*
Special Jurisdictional Note : Allen County Twps included are: Auglaize, Perry, Shawnee, Amanda,
Spencer, Marion, Sugar Creek, American, Bath, Jackson. Butler County Twps included are: Milford,
Wayne, Madison, Lemon. Champaign Cnty Twps included are: Union, Urbana, Jackson, Concord,
Salem, Mad River, Johnson, Harrison, Adams. Fayette County Twps included are: Green, Jasper,
Concord, Jefferson. Hardin County Twps included are: Round Head, Marion, Liberty. Highland County
Twps included are: Fairfield, Penn, Union, Marshall, Liberty, Paint, Brush Creek. Logan County Twps
included are: Richland, Stokes, Bloomfield, Washington, Harrison, McArthur, Lake, Liberty, Pleasant,
Miami. Madison County Twps included are: Stokes. Mercer County Twps included are: Dublin,
Washington, Jefferson, Recovery, Gibson, Union, Liberty, Butler, Granville, Center, Hopewell, Franklin,
Marion. VanWert County Twps included are: Jennings. Warren County Twps included are: Franklin,
Clear Creek, Turtle Creek, Wayne, Massie, Washington, Salem, Union.
Details :
Structural Iron Work but not limited to:field fabrication, all loading to and including the
erecting,rigging,assembly,dismantling, placing, temporary and permanent securing by any means of all
structural iron,steel,ornamental lead,bronze,brass,copper,aluminum,glass all ferrous and non ferrous metal and
composite material, precast prestressed and post-stressed concrete structures. Bridges and bridge rails,bridge
viaducts,bucks bulkheads,bumper and bumper post,canopies and unistrut canopies,corrugated ferrous and non
ferrous sheets when attached to steel frames,columns,beams,bar-joists,trusses,grinders,roof decking,electrical
supports,elevator cars,elevator fronts and enclosures,erection of steel towers,flag poles, gymnasium
equipment,stadium and arena seating,jail cell work,jail cell beds,benches,bunks,chairs,tables,mirrors,jail cell
access doors,rigging and installation of machinery and equipment(erecting,aligning,anchoring and dismantling,
erection and dismantling of tower cranes,derrick monorail systems, Chicago booms,overhead
cranes,gantries,material and personnel hoists,tanks,hoppers and conveyors. All pre-engineered metal buildings
and their entirety including siding,roofing, gutters, downspouts and erection of all.
Ornamental Iron Work but not limited to:all work in connection with field fabrication,handling including
loading/off loading,sorting,cutting,fastening,anchoring,bending,hoisting,placing,burning,welding,and
tying,dismantling of all materials used in miscellaneous iron or steel, for stairs,hand railings,rolling doors,
rolling gates,rolling shutters,fence,windows,curtain wall,erection and welding of all metal, sash,architectural and
ornamental treatments, but not necessarily limited to all sizes and types of ornamental,steel
iron,lead,bronze,brass,copper,aluminum,all ferrous and non ferrous metals and composite materials
.
Fence Erector Iron Worker but not limited to: All work in connection with the field fabrication and erection of
chain link fence,which includes but not limited to the loading and of the fence fabric and posts also the
installation of the above.
SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Project information.
2. Work covered by Contract Documents.
3. Work by Owner.
4. Work under separate contracts.
5. Future work.
6. Owner-furnished products.
7. Access to site.
8. Coordination with occupants.
9. Work restrictions.
10. Specification and Drawing conventions.
11. Miscellaneous provisions.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures
governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.
1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION
A. Project Identification: Project Number WSU-160027, Agricultural Education and Water Quality
Building
1. Project Location: Wright State University, Lake Campus, 7600 Lake Campus Drive,
Celina, Ohio 45822
Project 16018 SUMMARY 011000 - 1

15001/MCS March 3, 2017
B. Owner: Wright State University
1. Owner's Representative:
Mr. Robert Thompson
Architect
Wright State University,
2455 Executive Blvd., Sutie 11
Fairborn, Ohio 45324
Ph: (937) 775-2035
Fax: (937) 775-3513
Rob.thompson@wright.edu
C. A/E:
SPGB Architects, LLC
Ms. Michelle Shumaker, AIA
4333-B Tuller Road
Dublin, Ohio 43017
Ph: (614) 771-8963
Fax: (614) 522-6763
mshumaker@spgbarch.com
D. A/E's Consultants: The A/E has retained the following design professionals who have prepared
designated portions of the Contract Documents:
1. Civil Site Engineering
Nancy Tobe, PE
1200 Irmscher Blvd, Suite B
Celina, Ohio 45822
Ph: (419) 586-1430
Fax: (419) 586-4833
nkt@accessengllc.com
2. Landscaping
Bassett Associates
Pat Beam, RLA, ASLA, CLARB
4010 Ada Road
Lima, Ohio 45801
Ph: (419) 221-0181
Fax: (419) 221-0743
pjbeam@bassettassociates.com
3. Structural Engineering
GOP Limited
Doug Crawford, PE
644 Linn Street, Suite 936
Cincinnati, Ohio 45203
Ph: (513) 621-7073
Fax: (513) 621-0434
dcrawford@gopltd.com

15001/MCS March 3, 2017
4. Plumbing, Mechanical, and Electrical (PME) Engineering

Fanny Howey
Tim Lehman, PE
540 East Market Street
Celina, Ohio 45822
Ph: (419) 586-7771
Fax: (419) 586-2141
tlehaman@fhai.com
1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:
1. The Project is to build a new 7,589 square foot one story building on a green field to the
east of Wright State University Lake Campus. The work includes site grading,
landscaping, masonry walls (brick and CMU), aluminum storefront, hollow metal and
wood doors, door hardware, cold form metal stud framing, gypsum board walls, lay-in
acoustical ceilings, resilient flooring and accessories, ceramic wall and floor tile, wall
base, carpet, painting, laboratory metal casework, fume hood, fire protection, HVAC, and
electrical, and other Work indicated in the Contract Documents.
B. Type of Contract:
1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.
1.5 WORK BY OWNER
A. General: Cooperate fully with Owner so work may be carried out smoothly, without interfering
with or delaying work under this Contract or work by Owner. Coordinate the Work of this
Contract with work performed by Owner.
B. Subsequent Work: Owner will perform the following work using either their staff or third-party
contractors. Completion of that work will depend on successful completion of preparatory
Work under this Contract (unless otherwise noted).
1. Signage, including code required signage.

2. Fire Extinguishers
3. Technology infrastructure, including but not limited to cabling, devices, cover plates,
terminations, wireless equipment, servers, routers, switches, other similar equipment and
programming. This work will be done concurrent to Contractor’s work. Cabling will be
installed after pathways are completed and prior to ceiling completion and devices
installed after painting and prior to project completion.
4. Computer technology, including but not limited to computers and monitors.
5. Audio-visual technology, including but not limited to projectors, cameras, and sound
system components. Portions of this work will be done concurrent to Contractor’s work.

15001/MCS March 3, 2017
1.6 FUTURE WORK
A. The Contract Documents include requirements that will allow Owner to carry out future work
following completion of this Project; provide for the following future work:
1. Technology infrastructure for distance learning, including but not limited to projectors,
cameras and sound system components.
1.7 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS
A. Owner will furnish products indicated. The Work includes receiving, unloading, handling,
storing, protecting, and installing Owner-furnished products and making building services
connections.
B. Owner-Furnished Products:
1. Toilet paper dispenser

2. Sanitary napkin dispenser
3. Paper towel dispenser
4. Soap Dispenser
5. Trash/recycling containers
6. Emergency Blue Light/Phone
1.8 ACCESS TO SITE
A. General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations during
construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Owner's right to perform
work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.
B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb
portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.
1. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises
clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times.
Do not use these areas for parking or for storage of materials.
a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction

operations.
b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of
materials and equipment on-site.
C. Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by construction

operations in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by
construction operations.
D. Condition of Existing Grounds: Maintain portions of existing grounds, landscaping, and

hardscaping affected by construction operations throughout construction period. Repair damage
caused by construction operations.

15001/MCS March 3, 2017
1.9 WORK RESTRICTIONS
A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.
1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working hours of
7:00 a.m. to 7:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Weekend Hours: 7:00 a.m. to 7:00 p.m.

2. Hours for Utility Shutdowns: Schedule in advance and confirm with Owner 72 hours
beforehand.
3. Hours for Noisy Activity: Coordinate with Owner.
4. Quiet time: April 24, 2017- April 28, 2017 no work in Dwyer Hall is allowed during
quiet times.
C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or
others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary
utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Owner not less than 72 hours in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions.
3. Utility shut downs to be scheduled after hours 11:00 p.m. to 6:00 a.m. or weekends as
coordinated with the Owner.
D. Restricted Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on Project site
is not permitted.
E. Music: Use of radios, tape decks, compact disk players and similar devices are not permitted on
University property.
1.10 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS
A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and
the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations.
These conventions are as follows:
1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The
words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied
where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated
otherwise.
B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work

of all Sections in the Specifications.
C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are
described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to
identify materials and products:

15001/MCS March 3, 2017
1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in
the individual Specifications Sections.
2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as part of
the U.S. National CAD Standard and scheduled on Drawings.
3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing
Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual.
1.11 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
A. Additional Milestone: The milestone dates are in addition to the mile stones located in
Document 00 52 00 “Agreement Form” and are as follows:
1. March 23, 2017- issue Notice of Apparent Low Bidder

2. March 23, 2017- Cut off for Controlling Board Submission (April 24th meeting date)
3. March 28, 2017 issue Notice of Intent to Award
4. April 6, 2017 Anticipated Notice to Proceed
5. October 23, 2017 Substantial Completion of the project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 011000

15001/MCS March 3, 2017
Specification Coordination Table
Scope Item Disciplinary Responsibility
Owner General Plumbing and HVAC Electrical
(Architecture) Fire Protection
Laboratory Casework
Utility Rough‐In Layout in the Field Provide
Utility Space Framing Casework Utility Cores Provide
Piping Clips to Utility Racks Provide
Conduit Clips to Utility Racks Provide
Laboratory Casework Provide
Adjustable Laboratory Shelving Provide
Cabinet & Shelving Accommodations for Piping,
Provide
Conduit & Surface Mtd. Raceways
Countertops Provide
Sinks & Carriages Provide
Sink Outlets Provide
Tailpieces Furnish Install
Traps & Drain Piping Provide
Plumbing Fittings at Lab Casework Furnish Install
Plumbing Fittings at Bld'g. Walls Furnish Install
Shut‐off Valves at Movable Lab Equipment Provide
Eye & Face Washes ‐ Countertop Mtd. Provide
Deluge Showers ‐ Floor & Ceiling Mtd. Provide
Plumbing Fitting Connections Provide
Elec. Devices at Cabinets, Countertops & Reagent
Shelving ‐ Incl. Switches, Receptacles & Data Provide
Jacks
Elec. Device Cover Plates Provide
Elec. Device Identification Plaques Provide
Elec. Pathways & Circuiting to Lab Casework
Provide
Mounted Devices
Elec. Device Connections Provide
Elec. Backboxes, Devices, Cover Plates, Plaques,
Pathways, Circuiting & Connections at Bld'g. Provide
Walls
Laboratory Hoods
Base Cabinets & Stands Provide
Cabinet Vents into Superstructure Provide
Countertop Provide
Superstructure Enclosures Provide
Closure Panels to Ceilings Provide
Filler Panels to Walls Provide
Sinks Provide
Sink Outlets Provide
Tailpieces Furnish Install
Traps & Drain Piping Provide
Specification Coordination Table
Scope Item Disciplinary Responsibility
Owner General Plumbing and HVAC Electrical
(Architecture) Fire Protection
Plumbing Fittings Provide
Service Piping Within Superstructure to Single
Provide
Point of Connection
Service Piping Beyond Hoods Provide
Service Piping to Single Point Connections Provide
Fume Hood Knock‐Outs for Monitors & Alarms
Provide
Monitors & Alarms Provide
Sash Sensors Provide
Occupancy Sensors Provide
Exhaust Controls & Circuiting Inside and Outside
Provide
of the Fume Hood
Exhaust Duct Collars Provide
Duct Transition ‐ Collar to Exhaust Duct Provide
Exhaust Ducts & Connections Provide
Airflow Control Valves Provide
Exhaust Fans Provide
Fan Support Structures, Curbs & Roofing Provide
Elec. Backboxes Provide
Elec. Receptacles Provide
Elec. Device Cover Plates Provide
Elec. Device Identification Plaques Provide
Light Fixtures & Lamps Provide
Light Switches Provide
Elec. Pathways & Circuiting Within
Provide
Superstructure to Single Point Connection
Elec. Pathways & Circuiting Beyond Fume Hoods
Provide
Single Point Power Connections Provide
Exhaust Fan Power Circuits, Complete Provide
Air Balancing Provide
ASHRAE In‐Place Performance Testing Provide
Training & Startup Provide
Miscellaneous
Exhaust Canopies (heat, steam, etc.), Compl. Provide
Definitions:
Provide: Responsible for all work ‐ furnish and install.
Responsible for materials ‐ turn over to Contractor responsible
Furnish:
for installing the work.
Install: Responsible for labor and tools.
SECTION 012200 - UNIT PRICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Unit price is an amount incorporated into the Agreement, applicable during the duration of the
Work as a price per unit of measurement for materials, equipment, or services, or a portion of
the Work, added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if the scope
of Work or estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or
decreased.
1.4 PROCEDURES
A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance,
overhead, and profit.
B. Measurement and Payment: See individual Specification Sections for work that requires
establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified
in those Sections.
C. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use
of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense, by an
independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor.
D. List of Unit Prices: A schedule of unit prices is included in Part 3. Specification Sections
referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials described under each unit price.
Project 16018 UNIT PRICES 012200 - 1

AIA/MCS March 3, 2017
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SCHEDULE OF UNIT PRICES
A. Unit Price No. 1: Removal of unsatisfactory soil and replacement with satisfactory soil material.
1. Description: Unsatisfactory soil excavation and disposal off-site and replacement with
satisfactory fill material or engineered fill from off-site, as required, according to
Section 312000 "Earth Moving."
2. Unit of Measurement: Cubic yard of soil excavated, based on in-place surveys of volume
before and after removal.
Project 16018 UNIT PRICES 012200 - 2

SECTION 012300 - ALTERNATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined
in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if the
Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be
completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described
in the Contract Documents.
1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the
Agreement.
2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract
Sum to incorporate alternates into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the
Contract Sum.
1.4 PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work
of the alternate into Project.
1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar
items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part
of alternate.
B. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.
C. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections
referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work
described under each alternate.
Project 16018 ALTERNATES 012300 - 1

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
A. Alternate No. 1: Concrete Patio and Boot Wash
1. Base Bid: Provide concrete frost slabs and walks as shown on the L sheets.
2. Alternate:
a. Provide 29’x 16’ concrete patio on the south side of the building as shown on
sheets L-102 “Enlarged Phase 1 Site Layout Plan-Materials” and L-202
“Enlarged Site Phase 1 Grading/Drainage Plan” and associated drawings.
b. Provide 20’x 8’-8” concrete slab as shown on sheets L-102 “Enlarged Phase 1
Site Layout Plan-Materials” and L-202 “Enlarged Site Phase 1
Grading/Drainage Plan” and associated drawings.
B. Alternate No. 2: Asphalt Walk to Dwyer
1. Base Bid: Provide asphalt walk from the west front entrance to west edge of new drive.
2. Alternate: Provide side walk from the edge of the new drive to west to the main drive as
shown on L-202 “Enlarged Site Phase 1 Grading/Drainage Plan” and associated
drawings.
C. Alternate No. 3: Brick Veneer
1. Base Bid: Provide CMU block veneer as shown on the documents.

2. Alternate: Provide brick veneer in lieu of CMU block veneer as shown in the
Architectural Drawings and sheets: A-203 “Alternate Exterior Elevations” and A-6-06
“Alternate Window Schedules and Details” and associated drawings.
D. Alternate No. 4: Roller Shades
1. Base Bid: No Roller Shades are provided in base bid.

2. Alternate: Provide manual shades at all exterior windows as indicated on Drawing A-101
First Floor Plan and associated drawings and as specified in Section 12 24 13 “Roller
Shades.”
E. Alternate No. 5: Type I Commercial hood.
1. Base Bid: No work required for the Type I Commercial Kitchen hood as described in the
Mechanical Drawings.
2. Alternate: Provide a Type I Commercial Kitchen hood in the Ag Lab as indicated on the
Mechanical Drawing H101 and associated drawings and as specified in Section 23 38 13
“Commercial Kitchen Hoods."
F. Alternate No. 6: Demand Ventilation Controls

1. Base Bid: No work required for demand ventilation controls as described in the
Mechanical Drawings.
2. Alternate: Provide demand ventilation controls as described in the Mechanical Drawings.

WSU-160027
SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project

including, but not limited to, the following:
1. General coordination procedures.

2. Coordination drawings.
3. RFIs.
4. Project meetings.
1. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting

Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Section 017300 "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and
field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.
3. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. RFI: Request for Information. Request from Owner, A/E, or Contractor seeking information
required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each
portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a
special design. Use Subcontractor & Material Supplier Declaration F310-01 found at
http://ofcc.ohio.gov
B. Key Personnel Names: Within 7 days of notice to proceed, submit a list of key personnel
assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify
individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and cellular telephone numbers
and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned
as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.
1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, and in prominent
location in built facility. Keep list current at all times.
Project 16018 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 1

WSU-160027
1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the

Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate
construction operations included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper
installation, connection, and operation.
1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where
installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before
or after its own installation.
2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and
accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures
required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at
meetings.
1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their
Work is required.
C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative

procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of
the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Preparation of the schedule of values.
3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
4. Delivery and processing of submittals.
5. Progress meetings.
6. Preinstallation conferences.
7. Project closeout activities.
8. Startup and adjustment of systems.
1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in

individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely indicated on Shop
Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is
required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than
one entity.
1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to

indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed
data. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings.

Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of
various systems and components.

WSU-160027
b. Coordinate the addition of trade-specific information to coordination drawings in a

sequence that best provides for coordination of the information and resolution of
conflicts between installed components before submitting for review.
c. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural,
structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.
d. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated
replacement of components during the life of the installation.
e. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers,
valves, and other controls.
f. Indicate required installation sequences.
g. Indicate dimensions shown on Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that appear
to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements.
Provide alternative sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such
conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be
considered changes to the Contract.
B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows:
1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and
mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of
visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan
drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work.
2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical
and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within plenums to
accommodate layout of light fixtures and other components indicated on Drawings.
Indicate areas of conflict between light fixtures and other components.
3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans
and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical
equipment.
4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines.
5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of
embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door
floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and
similar items.
6. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following:
a. Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including
insulation, bracing, flanges, and support systems.
b. Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access
doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment.
c. Fire-rated enclosures around ductwork.
7. Electrical Work: Show the following:
a. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inches in diameter and larger.
b. Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other fire-
alarm locations.
c. Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and motor-
control center locations.
d. Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines.

WSU-160027
8. Fire-Protection System: Show the following:
a. Locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and sprinkler
heads.
9. Review: A/E will review coordination drawings to confirm that in general the Work is
being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's
responsibility. If A/E determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared in
sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, Architect will so inform Contractor,
who shall make suitable modifications and resubmit.
10. File Preparation Format: DWG, operating in Microsoft Windows operating system.
11. File Submittal Format: Submit or post coordination drawing files using PDF format.
12. A/E will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of Drawings for use in preparing
coordination digital data files.
a. A/E makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data

files as they relate to Drawings.
b. Digital Data Software Program: Drawings are available in Revit and can be
exported to AutoCad format. Civil and Landscaping drawings are available in
AutoCad format.
1.7 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION (RFI)
A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information, clarification, or

interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the
form specified.
1. A/E will return without response those RFIs submitted to A/E by other entities controlled
by Contractor.
2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's
work or work of subcontractors.
B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or
interpretation and the following:
1. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.

2. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the
Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.
3. Contractor's signature.
4. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop
Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items
needing interpretation.
a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected

materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.
C. RFI Forms: Fill out completely the Request for Interpretation F340-01 from http://ofcc.ohio.gov
1. Attachments shall be electronic files in PDF format.

WSU-160027
D. A/E's Action: A/E will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. RFIs received
by A/E after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.
1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action:
a. Requests for approval of submittals.

b. Requests for approval of substitutions.
c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods.
d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract
Documents.
e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.
f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.
g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.
2. A/E's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's
time for response will date from time of receipt by A/E of additional information.
E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number.
Submit log weekly. Include the following:
1. Project name.
2. Name and address of Contractor.
3. Name and address of A/E.
4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn.
5. RFI description.
6. Date the RFI was submitted.
7. Date A/E's response was received.
F. On receipt of A/E's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to
affected parties.
1.8 PROJECT MEETINGS
A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is
required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and A/E of scheduled meeting
dates and times.
2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.
3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions
and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned,
including Owner and A/E, within two days of the meeting.
B. Preconstruction Conference: A/E will schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before
starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 after
execution of the Agreement.

WSU-160027
C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each

construction activity when required by other sections and when required for coordination with
other construction.
1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or

affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and
installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise A/E of
scheduled meeting dates.
2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the
particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:
a. Contract Documents.
b. Options.
c. Related RFIs.
d. Related Change Orders.
e. Purchases.
f. Deliveries.
g. Submittals.
h. Review of mockups.
i. Possible conflicts.
j. Compatibility requirements.
k. Time schedules.
l. Weather limitations.
m. Manufacturer's written instructions.
n. Warranty requirements.
o. Compatibility of materials.
p. Acceptability of substrates.
q. Temporary facilities and controls.
r. Space and access limitations.
s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
t. Testing and inspecting requirements.
u. Installation procedures.
v. Coordination with other work.
w. Required performance results.
x. Protection of adjacent work.
y. Protection of construction and personnel.
3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including

required corrective measures and actions.
4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties
requiring information.
5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded.
Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the
Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.
D. Preinstallation Finish Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation finish conference at Project site

before finishes shall be installed but after mock-ups have been placed. Schedule all such
meetings on same days as Progress Meetings and invite the Owner, A/E and contractor’s finish
subs.

WSU-160027
1. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including

required corrective measures and actions.
2. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties
requiring information.
3. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded.
Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the
Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.
E. Project Closeout Conference: The A/E shall conduct a project closeout conference.
F. Progress Meetings: The A/E shall Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals.
G. Coordination Meetings: Conduct Project coordination meetings at weekly intervals. Project

coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as
progress meetings and preinstallation conferences.
1. Attendees: Each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with
current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities
shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meetings shall be familiar
with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. Advise Owner and
A/E of scheduled meeting dates.
2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous coordination meeting.
Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for
discussion as appropriate to status of Project.
a. Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last

coordination meeting. Determine whether each contract is on time, ahead of
schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to combined Contractor's construction
schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure
commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions
are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed
within the Contract Time.
b. Schedule Updating: Revise combined Contractor's construction schedule after each
coordination meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or
recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting.
c. Review present and future needs of each contractor present, including the
following:
1) Interface requirements.
2) Sequence of operations.
3) Status of submittals.
4) Deliveries.
5) Off-site fabrication.
6) Access.
7) Site use.
8) Temporary facilities and controls.
9) Work hours.
10) Hazards and risks.
11) Progress cleaning.
12) Quality and work standards.

WSU-160027
13) Status of RFIs.

14) Proposal Requests.
15) Change Orders.
16) Pending changes.
3. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to
others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting.

Work Changes Proposal Request
Wright State University Standard Requirements for Public Facility Construction
Proposal Request Number: «insert number»

Date of Issuance: «insert date»

Building
Owner: Wright State University
Address: 7600 Campus Drive
Celina, Ohio 45822
To Contractor: «insert name»

Contractor For: «insert contractor type»

Contract Date: «insert date of contract»
From Architect/Engineer (“A/E”): SPGB Architects, LLC

Address: 4333-B Tuller Road
Dublin, Ohio 43017
A/E Project Number: 16018
REASON FOR CHANGE

Owner
A/E
Consultant
Contractor
Field
Other
Please submit an itemized proposal for changes in the Contract Sum and Contract Time for proposed
modifications to the Contract Documents described herein. Within Ten (10) days, the Contractor must submit
this proposal or notify the A/E in writing, of the date on which proposal submission is anticipated.
THIS IS NOT A CHANGE ORDER, A CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE, OR A DIRECTION
TO PROCEED WITH THE WORK DESCRIBED IN THE PROPOSED MODIFICATIONS.
DESCRIPTION: «insert a written description of the Work»
Page 1 of 2
ATTACHMENTS: «list attached documents that support description»
REQUESTED BY A/E:
Signature Printed name and title
Page 2 of 2
Contractor / Subcontractor Proposal Request Detail Summary
State of Ohio Standard Forms and Documents
Project Name Contractor's
Contract No.
Project No. Phase Contr. No.
County Change Order No. 0 0
Contractor / Subcontractor Name and Address I.D. No. Phase Contr. No.
Type of Contract
Local Contract No.
A. Labor Summary (excluding fringe benefits). Check box for overtime rate.*
hours x /hour = 0.00
hours x /hour = 0.00 Total (A) $ 0.00
B. Fringes:
hours x /hour = 0.00 Total (B) $ 0.00
C. Equipment Rental (attach itemized quotes / invoices) Total (C) $
D. Owned Equipment (attach itemized supporting documentation) Total (D) $
E. Trucking (attach itemized supporting documentation) Total (E) $
F. Overhead (A+B+C+D+E) x 15.00% ** Total (F) $ 0.00
G. Material (attach itemized supporting documentation) Total (G) $
H. Profit (A+B+C+D+E+F+G) x 10.00% Total (H) $ 0.00
I. Subcontractor (attach Change Order Detail Summary and quotes / invoices) Total (I) $
J. Contractor / Subcontractor mark-up on Subcontractor (I x 5.00% )** Total (J) $ 0.00
K. Miscellaneous
1. Additional bond/insurance cost $
2. Fees for permits, licenses, inspection, tests, etc. (attach supporting
documentation)
$
3. Overnight lodging, travel and food (prior approval from State Architect
required)
$
Total (K) $ 0.00
Grand Total (A+B+C+D+E+F+G+H+I+J+K) $ 0.00
* Enter Overtime labor rates separately from regular labor rates.

** Percentage shown is maximum allowed on contracts awarded under the Standard Requirements, 2007 Edition. For contracts awarded under
the Standard Conditions (May 2003 Lead Contractor or March 2000 Construction Manager), the maximum allowable percentage is 10 for each
category.
Contractor / Subcontractor Change Order Detail Summary
Contract No.
County Change Order No.
Contractor / Subcontractor Name and Address I.D. No. Phase Contr. No.
Type of Contract
Local Contract No.
A. Labor Summary (excluding fringe benefits). Check box for overtime rate.*
hours x /hour =
hours x /hour =
hours x /hour =
hours x /hour =
hours x /hour =
hours x /hour = Total (A) $
B. Fringes:
hours x /hour =
hours x /hour =
hours x /hour =
hours x /hour =
hours x /hour =
hours x /hour = Total (B) $
C. Equipment Rental (attach itemized quotes / invoices) Total (C) $
D. Owned Equipment (attach itemized supporting documentation) Total (D) $
E. Trucking (attach itemized supporting documentation) Total (E) $
F. Overhead (A+B+C+D+E) x 15.00% ** Total (F) $
G. Material (attach itemized supporting documentation) Total (G) $
H. Profit (A+B+C+D+E+F+G) x 10.00% Total (H) $
I. Subcontractor (attach Change Order Detail Summary and quotes / invoices) Total (I) $
J. Contractor / Subcontractor mark-up on Subcontractor (I x 5.00% )** Total (J) $
K. Miscellaneous
1. Additional bond/insurance cost $
2. Fees for permits, licenses, inspection, tests, etc. (attach supporting
documentation) $
3. Overnight lodging, travel and food (prior approval from State Architect
required) $
Total (K) $
Grand Total (A+B+C+D+E+F+G+H+I+J+K) $
* Enter Overtime labor rates separately from regular labor rates.
** Percentage shown is maximum allowed on contracts awarded under the Standard Requirements, 2007 Edition. For contracts awarded
under the Standard Conditions (May 2003 Lead Contractor or March 2000 Construction Manager), the maximum allowable percentage is
10 for each category.
F340-04v0912 Section B - Change Order Detail Summary

Change Order
Contract No.
Change Order No.
I.D. No. Phase Contr No.
County Type of Contract
Contractor Name
Local Contract No.
Basis of Change Order Encumbrance
Error/Omission Differing Condition Number SF LF

Owner Request Field Resolution Number SF LF
Value Engineering Other
State Funds
Current Completion Date Local Funds
Contract Days Changed
Revised Completion Date Change Order Total
Description / Justification (attach additional pages as necessary)
This Change Order identifies and provides full and complete satisfaction for all direct and indirect costs, including interest and all related
extensions to the time for Contract Completion, for the described changes in the Scope of the Work.
Contractor Acceptance Owner Acceptance

Name Name
Address Address
Signature Date Signature Date

Construction Manager Recommendation Project Manager Recommendation
Name Name
Address Address
Architect/Engineer Recommendation Contracting Authority Approval

Name Name
Address Address
F340-04v0912 Section A - Change Order

Change Directive (Field Work Order)
Contractor Name Change Directive No.

Contact Contract No.
Address Project Name
City, State ZIP Project Location
Basis of Change Directive
Error / Omission Differing Site Condition Adjustment to Contract Sum (indicate if zero cost)
Owner Request Field Resolution Add: $ Deduct: $
Value Engineering
Adjustment to Contract Time Cost Basis (check all that apply)

No Change Days Added Days Deducted Time & Material Not to Exceed Fixed Price
Allowance (described below) Unit Price
Your company is authorized and directed to proceed with the following (attach additional sheets if needed):
Justification
Special Notice: This Change Directive identifies satisfaction of all compensation and time adjustments related to this change in the Work.
Construction Manager Recommendation (if applicable) Owner Acceptance

Name Name
Architect/Engineer Recommendation Project Manager Recommendation

Name Name
Contractor Concurrence Contracting Authority Approval

Name Name
F340-06v1012 Page 1 of 1
SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of
construction during performance of the Work, including the following:
1. Startup construction schedule.

2. Contractor's Construction Schedule.
3. Construction schedule updating reports.
4. Daily construction reports.
5. Material location reports.
6. Site condition reports.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring,
and controlling the construction Project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume
time and resources.
1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned
early start and finish times.
2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.
3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.
B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the schedule of values for completing an activity as scheduled.
The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum.
C. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction
project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations
determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.
D. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network
schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.
E. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.
Project 16018 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 1

15001/MCS March 3, 2017
F. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.
1. Float time belongs to Owner.

2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the
early start of the successor activity.
3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without
adversely affecting the planned Project completion date.
G. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for completing an
activity as scheduled.
A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:
1. PDF file.
B. Startup construction schedule.
1. Submittal of cost-loaded, startup construction schedule will not constitute approval of

schedule of values for cost-loaded activities.
C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule
for entire construction period.
D. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment.
E. Daily Construction Reports: Submit at weekly intervals.
F. Material Location Reports: Submit at weekly intervals.
G. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.
H. Unusual Event Reports: Submit at time of unusual event.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures
related to the preliminary construction schedule and Contractor's Construction Schedule.

15001/MCS March 3, 2017
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts,
submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and
reports.
1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities
involved.
2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule
them in proper sequence.
1.7 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has
been developed specifically to manage construction schedules.
B. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of
final completion.
1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an
early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.
C. Activities: Treat each floor or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main
element of the Work. Comply with the following:
1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless

specifically allowed by A/E.
2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long
lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities
in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals,
approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.
3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in
Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times
in Contractor's Construction Schedule with submittal schedule.
4. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 15 days for startup and testing.
5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for
Substantial Completion, and allow time for A/E's administrative procedures necessary for
certification of Substantial Completion.
6. Punch List and Final Completion.
D. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and
as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.
1. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract.
2. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by
Owner.

15001/MCS March 3, 2017
3. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery
date indicated in Section 011000 "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the
earliest possible delivery date.
4. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the
Work, including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Subcontract awards.
b. Purchases.
c. Mockups.
d. Installation.
e. Tests and inspections.
f. Startup and placement into final use and operation.
5. Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of
the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be
sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following:
a. Structural completion.
b. Temporary enclosure and space conditioning.
c. Permanent space enclosure.
d. Completion of mechanical installation.
e. Completion of electrical installation.
f. Substantial Completion.
E. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but
not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion.
F. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 7 or more calendar days
behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by
which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working
hours, working days, crew sizes, equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by which
recovery will be accomplished.
1.8 STARTUP CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit startup, horizontal, Gantt-chart-type construction schedule within

seven days of date established for commencement of the Work.
1.9 GANTT-CHART SCHEDULE REQUIREMENTS
A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal, Gantt-chart-type,

Contractor's Construction Schedule within 30 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed.
1. Base schedule on the startup construction schedule and additional information received
since the start of Project.

15001/MCS March 3, 2017
B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of
each week with a continuous vertical line.
1.10 REPORTS
A. Weekly Construction Reports: Prepare a weekly construction report recording the following
information concerning events at Project site. Submit copies of report at the weekly Progress
Meetings:
1. List of subcontractors at Project site.

2. Approximate count of personnel at Project site.
3. Equipment at Project site.
4. Material deliveries.
5. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or
snow.
6. Testing and inspection.
7. Accidents.
8. Meetings and significant decisions.
9. Unusual events.
10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.
11. Meter readings and similar recordings.
12. Emergency procedures.
13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.
14. Change Orders received and implemented.
15. Work Change Directives received and implemented.
16. Services connected and disconnected.
17. Equipment or system tests and startups.
18. Partial completions and occupancies.
19. Substantial Completions authorized.
B. Material Location Reports: At weekly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of
materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials
previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on
and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project
site. Indicate the following categories for stored materials:
1. Material stored prior to previous report and remaining in storage.

2. Material stored prior to previous report and since removed from storage and installed.
3. Material stored following previous report and remaining in storage.
C. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and
the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for
Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with
recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.

15001/MCS March 3, 2017
D. Unusual Event Reports: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project
site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain
of events, persons participating, responses by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or
effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are
known or predictable.
1. Submit unusual event reports directly to Owner within one day(s) of an occurrence.
Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.

15001/MCS March 3, 2017
SECTION 013233 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:
1. Preconstruction photographs.
2. Periodic construction photographs.
3. Final completion construction photographs.
4. Preconstruction video recordings.
5. Periodic construction video recordings.
6. Construction webcam.
1. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting photographic documentation as

Project Record Documents at Project closeout.
2. Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of
demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel.
3. Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for photographic documentation before site clearing
operations commence.
A. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site and building with notation of vantage points marked
for location and direction of each photograph and video recording. Indicate elevation or story of
construction. Include same information as corresponding photographic documentation.
B. Digital Photographs: Submit image files prior to disturbance on site.
1. Submit photos. Include copy of key plan indicating each photograph's location and
direction.
2. Identification: Provide the following information with each image description in file
metadata tag:
a. Name of Project.
b. Name and contact information for photographer.
c. Name of Architect.
Project 16018 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013233 - 1

d. Name of Contractor.
e. Date photograph was taken.
f. Description of location, vantage point, and direction.
g. Unique sequential identifier keyed to accompanying key plan.
C. Video Recordings: Submit video recordings prior to disturbance of the site.
1. Submit video recordings on CD-ROM or thumb drive. Include copy of key plan
indicating each video's location and direction.
2. Identification: With each submittal, provide the following information in file metadata
tag:
a. Name of Project.
b. Name and address of photographer.
c. Name of Architect.
e. Date video recording was recorded.
f. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point).
1.4 FORMATS AND MEDIA
A. Digital Photographs: Provide color images in JPG format, produced by a digital camera with
minimum sensor size of 12 megapixels, and at an image resolution of not less than 3200 by
2400 pixels. Use flash in low light levels or backlit conditions.
B. Digital Video Recordings: Provide high-resolution, digital video in MPEG format, produced by
a digital camera with minimum sensor resolution of 12 megapixels and capable of recording in
full high-definition mode. Provide supplemental lighting in low light levels or backlit
conditions.
C. Digital Images: Submit digital media as originally recorded in the digital camera, without
alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software.
D. Metadata: Record accurate date and time and GPS location data from camera.
E. File Names: Name media files with date, Project area, and sequential numbering suffix.
1.5 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS
A. General: Take photographs with maximum depth of field and in focus.
1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each
photographic location.
B. Preconstruction Photographs: Before site disturbance, take photographs of Project site and
surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction, from different
vantage points.

1. Flag excavation areas before taking construction photographs.

2. Take 20 photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to property before starting the
Work.
3. Take 20 photographs of existing buildings either on or adjoining property to accurately
record physical conditions at start of construction.
4. Take additional photographs as required to record settlement or cracking of adjacent
structures, pavements, and improvements.
1.6 CONSTRUCTION VIDEO RECORDINGS
A. Video Recording Photographer: Engage a qualified videographer to record construction video

recordings.
B. Preconstruction Video Recording: Before disturbance of site record video recording of Project
site and surrounding properties from different vantage points.
1. Flag excavation areas before recording construction video recordings.

2. Show existing conditions adjacent to Project site before starting the Work.
3. Show protection efforts by Contractor.

SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Submittal schedule requirements.

2. Administrative and procedural requirements for submittals.
1. Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting coordination

drawings and subcontract list and for requirements for web-based Project software.
2. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and
reports, including Contractor's construction schedule.
3. Section 013233 "Photographic Documentation" for submitting preconstruction
photographs, periodic construction photographs, and final completion construction
photographs.
4. Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports, and
schedule of tests and inspections.
5. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting closeout submittals and
maintenance material submittals.
6. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and
maintenance manuals.
7. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record
Specifications, and record Product Data.
8. Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of
demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require A/E's
responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification
Sections as "action submittals."
Project 16018 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 1

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not
require A/E's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with
requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification
Sections as "informational submittals."
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTAL
A. Submit all shop drawings and samples as part of the O&M manauals.
1.5 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
A. Submittal Schedule: Submit, as an action submittal, a list of submittals, arranged in

chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for
review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include
additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by A/E and
additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.
1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and
Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include
submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required
to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead
time for manufacture or fabrication.
3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's
construction schedule.
a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing
for submittals.
4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:
a. Scheduled date for first submittal.

b. Specification Section number and title.
c. Submittal Category: Action; informational.
d. Name of subcontractor.
e. Description of the Work covered.
f. Scheduled date for A/E's final release or approval.
1.6 SUBMITTAL FORMATS
A. Submittal Information: Include the following information in each submittal:
1. Project name.
2. Date.
3. Name of A/E.
4. Name of Contractor.

5. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.

6. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
7. Unique submittal number, including revision identifier. Include Specification Section
number with sequential alphanumeric identifier; and alphanumeric suffix for
resubmittals.
8. Category and type of submittal.
9. Submittal purpose and description.
10. Number and title of Specification Section, with paragraph number and generic name for
each of multiple items.
11. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
12. Indication of full or partial submittal.
13. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
14. Other necessary identification.
15. Remarks.
16. Signature of transmitter.
B. Options: Identify options requiring selection by A/E.
C. Deviations and Additional Information: On each submittal, clearly indicate deviations from
requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations; include
relevant additional information and revisions, other than those requested by A/E on previous
submittals. Indicate by highlighting on each submittal or noting on attached separate sheet.
D. PDF Submittals: Prepare submittals as PDF package, incorporating complete information into
each PDF file. Name PDF file with submittal number.
1.7 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of

submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections.
1. Remote Server: Prepare submittals as PDF package, and transmit to A/E by sending
email transmittal. Include PDF transmittal form. Include information in email subject line
as requested by A/E.
a. A/E will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as a digital
Project Record Document file.
Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of

construction activities.
2. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other

submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.
3. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless
partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.
4. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification
Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.

5. Coordinate transmittal of submittals for related parts of the Work specified in different
Sections so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals
concurrently for coordination.
a. A/E reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination

with other submittals until related submittals are received.
B. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows.
Time for review shall commence on A/E’s receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract
Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the
Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.
1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time
if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. A/E will advise Contractor when a
submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.
2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as
initial submittal.
3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.
4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by A/E's consultants, Owner,
or other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal.
C. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.
1. Note date and content of previous submittal.

2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of
revision.
3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from A/E's action
stamp.
D. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,

fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of
construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
E. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action
submittals that are marked with approval notation from A/E's action stamp.
1.8 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and
type of product or equipment.
1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data
are unsuitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
3. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.

b. Manufacturer's product specifications.
c. Standard color charts.

d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.

e. Testing by recognized testing agency.
f. Application of testing agency labels and seals.
g. Notation of coordination requirements.
h. Availability and delivery time information.
4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:
a. Wiring diagrams that show factory-installed wiring.

b. Printed performance curves.
c. Operational range diagrams.
d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop
Drawings.
5. Submit Product Data before Shop Drawings, and before or concurrent with Samples.
B. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.
1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the

following information, as applicable:
a. Identification of products.
b. Schedules.
c. Compliance with specified standards.
d. Notation of coordination requirements.
e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.
g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.
C. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these
characteristics with other materials.
1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together
in one submittal package.
2. Identification: Permanently attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the
following:
a. Project name and submittal number.

b. Generic description of Sample.
c. Product name and name of manufacturer.
d. Sample source.
e. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.
f. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.
3. Email Transmittal: Provide PDF transmittal. Include digital image file illustrating Sample
characteristics, and identification information for record.
4. Paper Transmittal: Include paper transmittal including complete submittal information
indicated.

5. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-
control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be
used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
a. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's

property, are the property of Contractor.
6. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or
sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set of available choices where color, pattern,
texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's
product line. A/E will return submittal with options selected.
7. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared
from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and
physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of
color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the
following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or
containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing
color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing
and inspection.
a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. A/E will retain two sets;
remainder will be returned.
1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication

techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to
be demonstrated.
2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in
material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three of paired
units that show approximate limits of variations.
D. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary

indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the
following information in tabular form:
1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract
Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated.
2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable.
3. Number and name of room or space.
4. Location within room or space.
E. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of
firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact
information of architects and owners, and other information specified.

F. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information indicating compliance with
indicated performance and design criteria in individual Specification Sections. Include list of
assumptions and summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and
version of software, if any, used for calculations. Number each page of submittal.
G. Certificates:
1. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Submit a statement that includes signature of

entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be
signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that
entity. Provide a notarized signature where indicated.
2. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying
that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required,
is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.
3. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead
certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.
4. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying
that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
5. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying
that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
6. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel
comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding
Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include
names of firms and personnel certified.
H. Test and Research Reports:
1. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on

testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests
performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers
and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.
2. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests
performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final
location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.
3. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance
with requirements in the Contract Documents.
4. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on
testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed
before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the
Contract Documents.
5. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by
manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on
evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing
agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
6. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for
Project. Include the following information:

a. Name of evaluation organization.

b. Date of evaluation.
c. Time period when report is in effect.
d. Product and manufacturers' names.
e. Description of product.
f. Test procedures and results.
g. Limitations of use.
1.9 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES
A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a

design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide
products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.
1. If criteria indicated are insufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a

written request for additional information to Architect.
B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other
required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF file and paper copies of certificate, signed and
sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned
to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.
1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the
Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing
these services.
1.10 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A. Action Submittals and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for
coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents.
Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to A/E.
B. Contractor's Approval: Indicate Contractor's approval for each submittal with a uniform
approval stamp. Include name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement
certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the
Contract Documents.
1. A/E will not review submittals received from Contractor that do not have Contractor's
review and approval.
1.11 A/E'S REVIEW
A. Action Submittals: A/E will review each submittal, indicate corrections or revisions
required, and return it.
1. PDF Submittals: A/E will indicate, via markup on each submittal, the appropriate action.

B. Informational Submittals: A/E will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it
if it does not comply with requirements. A/E will forward each submittal to appropriate party.
C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial
submittals has received prior approval from A/E.
D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned
for resubmittal without review.
E. A/E will return without review submittals received from sources other than Contractor.
F. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will be returned by A/E without action.

SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality
control.
B. Testing and inspection services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.
1. Specific quality-assurance and quality-control requirements for individual work results

are specified in their respective Specification Sections. Requirements in individual
Sections may also cover production of standard products.
2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-
assurance and quality-control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract
Document requirements.
3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and quality-control services
required by A/E, Owner. or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions
of this Section.
4. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" unless otherwise further
described means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in
nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and
having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Field Quality-Control Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of
the Work and for completed Work.
Project 16018 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 1

C. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an

employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation,
including installation, erection, application, assembly, and similar operations.
1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that
certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or
that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).
D. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site either as freestanding
temporary built elements or as part of permanent construction. Mockups are constructed to
verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities
of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface
between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation
tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish
the standard by which the Work will be judged.
E. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before
products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance
with specified criteria.
F. Product Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed by a nationally recognized testing
laboratory (NRTL) according to 29 CFR 1910.7, by a testing agency accredited according to
NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP), or by a testing agency
qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to
establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.
G. Source Quality-Control Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source; for
example, plant, mill, factory, or shop.
H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing
laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
I. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during
execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed
construction will comply with requirements.
J. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after
execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and
completed construction comply with requirements. Contractor's quality-control services do not
include contract administration activities performed by A/E.
1.4 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES
A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a

design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide
products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit
a written request for additional information to A/E.
1.5 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
A. Conflicting Standards and Other Requirements: If compliance with two or more standards or
requirements are specified and the standards or requirements establish different or conflicting
requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent
requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect
for direction before proceeding.
B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be
the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the
minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits.
To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as
appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision
before proceeding.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: For laboratory mockups.
1. Include plans, sections, and elevations, indicating materials and size of mockup
construction.
2. Indicate manufacturer and model number of individual components.
3. Provide axonometric drawings for conditions difficult to illustrate in two dimensions.
B. Delegated-Design Services Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other
required submittals, submit a statement signed and sealed by the responsible design
professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or
certified by a design professional, indicating that the products and systems are in compliance
with performance and design criteria indicated. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors
used in performing these services.
C. Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities and

responsibilities.
A. Qualification Data: For Contractor's quality-control personnel.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a
recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

C. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:
1. Specification Section number and title.

2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.
3. Description of test and inspection.
4. Identification of applicable standards.
5. Identification of test and inspection methods.
6. Number of tests and inspections required.
7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.
8. Requirements for obtaining samples.
9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.
D. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports and documents as specified.
E. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's record, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee
payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents established for
compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
1.8 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLAN
A. Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within 10 days of Notice to Proceed,
and not less than five days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format acceptable to
A/E. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, and forms to be used
to carry out Contractor's quality-assurance and quality-control responsibilities. Coordinate with
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
B. Quality-Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified personnel trained and experienced

in managing and executing quality-assurance and quality-control procedures similar in nature
and extent to those required for Project.
1. Project quality-control manager may also serve as Project superintendent.
C. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements through
review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible
for submittal review.
D. Testing and Inspection: In quality-control plan, include a comprehensive schedule of Work

requiring testing or inspection, including the following:
1. Contractor-performed tests and inspections including Subcontractor-performed tests and

inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor-elected tests and
inspections. Distinguish source quality-control tests and inspections from field quality-
control tests and inspections.
2. Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on the
Statement of Special Inspections.
3. Owner-performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract Documents.

E. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection during

construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and
inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into
compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and approved
mockups.
F. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of
approved and rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated as nonconforming or
defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance with
requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.9 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS
A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other
Sections. Include the following:
1. Date of issue.
2. Project title and number.
3. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of testing agency.
4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
7. Identification of product and Specification Section.
8. Complete test or inspection data.
9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and
inspection.
11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with
the Contract Document requirements.
12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information

documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other
Sections. Include the following:
1. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of technical representative making
report.
2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.
3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.
4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with
requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.
5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
complies with requirements.
6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting

manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in
other Sections. Include the following:
1. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of factory-authorized service

representative making report.
2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements.
3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
complies with requirements.
4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels
required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar

to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as
well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. As applicable, procure products
from manufacturers able to meet qualification requirements, warranty requirements, and
technical or factory-authorized service representative requirements.
C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated

for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient
production capacity to produce required units.
D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, applying, or

assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose
work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to

practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed
for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and
extent to those indicated for this Project.
F. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the

experience and capability to conduct testing and inspection indicated, as documented according
to ASTM E 329 and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where
required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.
G. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of

manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation
of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for
this Project.

H. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of

manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of
manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this
Project.
I. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing

for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the
following:
1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:
a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction.

b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing
results to prevent delaying the Work.
c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory
mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with
d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will
perform same tasks for Project.
e. When testing is complete, remove test specimens and test assemblies,
and mockups; do not reuse products on Project.
2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test,

inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to A/E with copy to Contractor.
Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work
complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
J. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each
form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using
materials indicated for the completed Work:
1. Build mockups of size indicated.

2. Build mockups in location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by A/E.
3. Coordinate the mockups construction and completion with the weekly progress meetings.
4. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers
that will be employed to perform same tasks during the construction at Project.
5. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
6. Obtain A/E approval of mockups before starting corresponding work, fabrication, or
construction.
a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.
7. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for

judging the completed Work.
8. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.

1.11 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility,

Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.
1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing
agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspection they are engaged to
perform.
2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work
that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the
Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.
B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are
Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities, whether specified or
not, to verify and document that the Work complies with requirements.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required
by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor
by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.
2. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform quality-control services.
a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in
writing by Owner.
3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires
testing or inspection will be performed.
4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a
certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.
5. Testing and inspection requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract
Documents are Contractor's responsibility.
6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,
when they so direct.
C. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's

responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for
construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.
D. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with A/E and Contractor in performance of duties.
Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.
1. Notify A/E and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the

Work during performance of its services.
2. Determine the locations from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests
are conducted.
3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and
inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.
4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar
quality-control service through Contractor.
5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve
or accept any portion of the Work.

6. Do not perform duties of Contractor.
E. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service

representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 013300 "Submittal
Procedures."
F. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical

representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's
services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and
conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed
portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.
G. Associated Contractor Services: Cooperate with agencies and representatives performing

required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary
services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment
of personnel. Provide the following:
1. Access to the Work.

2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and
inspection. Assist agency in obtaining samples.
4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.
5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies.
6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing
agency.
7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspection equipment at Project
site.
H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and

quality-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and
replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspection.
1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
I. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-
control services required by the Contract Documents as a component of Contractor's quality-
control plan. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Update as the Work progresses.
1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, A/E, testing agencies, and each party
involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.
1.12 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency or special inspector
to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the
responsibility of Owner, as indicated in the drawings, and as follows:

1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures

and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.
2. Notifying A/E and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the
Work during performance of its services.
3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control
service to A/E with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.
4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion,
which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.
5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected
work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG
A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:
1. Date test or inspection was conducted.

2. Description of the Work tested or inspected.
3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.
4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.
B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and
inspection log for A/E's reference during normal working hours.
1. Submit log at Project closeout as part of Project Record Documents.
3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. General: On completion of testing, inspection, sample taking, and similar services, repair
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other

Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas
and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as
possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in
Section 017300 "Execution."
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of

responsibility for quality-control services.

Wright State University Lake Campus
SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications,

and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the
Conditions of the Contract.
C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested,"

"authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."
D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on

Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown,"
"noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."
E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having
jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control
performance of the Work.
F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,
installation, and similar operations.
G. "Install": Unload, temporarily store, unpack, assemble, erect, place, anchor, apply, work to
dimension, finish, cure, protect, clean, and similar operations at Project site.
H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site
is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on
which Project is to be built.
1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent

requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if
bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards
are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
Project 16018 REFERENCES 014200 - 1

B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless
otherwise indicated.
C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with
industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not
bound with the Contract Documents.
1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain
copies directly from publication source.
1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.
This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the
Contract Documents.
1. AABC - Associated Air Balance Council; www.aabc.com.

2. AAMA - American Architectural Manufacturers Association; www.aamanet.org.
3. AAPFCO - Association of American Plant Food Control Officials; www.aapfco.org.
4. AASHTO - American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials;
www.transportation.org.
5. AATCC - American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists; www.aatcc.org.
6. ABMA - American Bearing Manufacturers Association; www.americanbearings.org.
7. ABMA - American Boiler Manufacturers Association; www.abma.com.
8. ACI - American Concrete Institute; (Formerly: ACI International); www.abma.com.
9. ACPA - American Concrete Pipe Association; www.concrete-pipe.org.
10. AEIC - Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The); www.aeic.org.
11. AF&PA - American Forest & Paper Association; www.afandpa.org.
12. AGA - American Gas Association; www.aga.org.
13. AHAM - Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers; www.aham.org.
14. AHRI - Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (The); www.ahrinet.org.
15. AI - Asphalt Institute; www.asphaltinstitute.org.
16. AIA - American Institute of Architects (The); www.aia.org.
17. AISC - American Institute of Steel Construction; www.aisc.org.
18. AISI - American Iron and Steel Institute; www.steel.org.
19. AITC - American Institute of Timber Construction; www.aitc-glulam.org.
20. AMCA - Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; www.amca.org.
21. ANSI - American National Standards Institute; www.ansi.org.
22. AOSA - Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc.; www.aosaseed.com.
23. APA - APA - The Engineered Wood Association; www.apawood.org.
24. APA - Architectural Precast Association; www.archprecast.org.
25. API - American Petroleum Institute; www.api.org.
26. ARI - Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI).
27. ARI - American Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI).
28. ARMA - Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association; www.asphaltroofing.org.
29. ASCE - American Society of Civil Engineers; www.asce.org.
30. ASCE/SEI - American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute; (See
ASCE).

31. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers;

www.ashrae.org.
32. ASME - ASME International; (American Society of Mechanical Engineers);
www.asme.org.
33. ASSE - American Society of Safety Engineers (The); www.asse.org.
34. ASSE - American Society of Sanitary Engineering; www.asse-plumbing.org.
35. ASTM - ASTM International; www.astm.org.
36. ATIS - Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions; www.atis.org.
37. AWEA - American Wind Energy Association; www.awea.org.
38. AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute; www.awinet.org.
39. AWMAC - Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada;
www.awmac.com.
40. AWPA - American Wood Protection Association; www.awpa.com.
41. AWS - American Welding Society; www.aws.org.
42. AWWA - American Water Works Association; www.awwa.org.
43. BHMA - Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; www.buildershardware.com.
44. BIA - Brick Industry Association (The); www.gobrick.com.
45. BICSI - BICSI, Inc.; www.bicsi.org.
46. BIFMA - BIFMA International; (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's
Association); www.bifma.org.
47. BISSC - Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee; www.bissc.org.
48. BWF - Badminton World Federation; (Formerly: International Badminton Federation);
www.bissc.org.
49. CDA - Copper Development Association; www.copper.org.
50. CEA - Canadian Electricity Association; www.electricity.ca.
51. CEA - Consumer Electronics Association; www.ce.org.
52. CFFA - Chemical Fabrics and Film Association, Inc.; www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com.
53. CFSEI - Cold-Formed Steel Engineers Institute; www.cfsei.org.
54. CGA - Compressed Gas Association; www.cganet.com.
55. CIMA - Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.cellulose.org.
56. CISCA - Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association; www.cisca.org.
57. CISPI - Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; www.cispi.org.
58. CLFMI - Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute; www.chainlinkinfo.org.
59. CPA - Composite Panel Association; www.pbmdf.com.
60. CRI - Carpet and Rug Institute (The); www.carpet-rug.org.
61. CRRC - Cool Roof Rating Council; www.coolroofs.org.
62. CRSI - Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; www.crsi.org.
63. CSA - Canadian Standards Association; www.csa.ca.
64. CSA - CSA International; (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services); www.csa-
international.org.
65. CSI - Construction Specifications Institute (The); www.csinet.org.
66. CSSB - Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau; www.cedarbureau.org.
67. CTI - Cooling Technology Institute; (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute); www.cti.org.
68. CWC - Composite Wood Council; (See CPA).
69. DASMA - Door and Access Systems Manufacturers Association; www.dasma.com.
70. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute; www.dhi.org.
71. ECA - Electronic Components Association; (See ECIA).
72. ECAMA - Electronic Components Assemblies & Materials Association; (See ECIA).
73. ECIA - Electronic Components Industry Association; www.eciaonline.org.
74. EIA - Electronic Industries Alliance; (See TIA).

75. EIMA - EIFS Industry Members Association; www.eima.com.

76. EJMA - Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.ejma.org.
77. ESD - ESD Association; (Electrostatic Discharge Association); www.esda.org.
78. ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology Association; (See PLASA).
79. EVO - Efficiency Valuation Organization; www.evo-world.org.
80. FCI - Fluid Controls Institute; www.fluidcontrolsinstitute.org.
81. FIBA - Federation Internationale de Basketball; (The International Basketball
Federation); www.fiba.com.
82. FIVB - Federation Internationale de Volleyball; (The International Volleyball
Federation); www.fivb.org.
83. FM Approvals - FM Approvals LLC; www.fmglobal.com.
84. FM Global - FM Global; (Formerly: FMG - FM Global); www.fmglobal.com.
85. FRSA - Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association, Inc.;
www.floridaroof.com.
86. FSA - Fluid Sealing Association; www.fluidsealing.com.
87. FSC - Forest Stewardship Council U.S.; www.fscus.org.
88. GA - Gypsum Association; www.gypsum.org.
89. GANA - Glass Association of North America; www.glasswebsite.com.
90. GS - Green Seal; www.greenseal.org.
91. HI - Hydraulic Institute; www.pumps.org.
92. HI/GAMA - Hydronics Institute/Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association; (See AHRI).
93. HMMA - Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association; (See NAAMM).
94. HPVA - Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association; www.hpva.org.
95. HPW - H. P. White Laboratory, Inc.; www.hpwhite.com.
96. IAPSC - International Association of Professional Security Consultants; www.iapsc.org.
97. IAS - International Accreditation Service; www.iasonline.org.
98. IAS - International Approval Services; (See CSA).
99. ICBO - International Conference of Building Officials; (See ICC).
100. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org.
101. ICEA - Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.; www.icea.net.
102. ICPA - International Cast Polymer Alliance; www.icpa-hq.org.
103. ICRI - International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc.; www.icri.org.
104. IEC - International Electrotechnical Commission; http://www.iec.ch.
105. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The); www.ieee.org.
106. IES - Illuminating Engineering Society; (Formerly: Illuminating Engineering Society of
North America); www.ies.org.
107. IESNA - Illuminating Engineering Society of North America; (See IES).
108. IEST - Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology; www.iest.org.
109. IGMA - Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance; www.igmaonline.org.
110. IGSHPA - International Ground Source Heat Pump Association;
www.igshpa.okstate.edu.
111. ILI - Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc.; www.iliai.com.
112. Intertek - Intertek Group; (Formerly: ETL SEMCO; Intertek Testing Service NA);
www.intertek.com.
113. ISA - International Society of Automation (The); (Formerly: Instrumentation, Systems,
and Automation Society); www.isa.org.
114. ISAS - Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society (The); (See ISA).
115. ISFA - International Surface Fabricators Association; (Formerly: International Solid
Surface Fabricators Association); www.isfanow.org.
116. ISO - International Organization for Standardization; www.iso.org.

117. ISSFA - International Solid Surface Fabricators Association; (See ISFA).

118. ITU - International Telecommunication Union; www.itu.int/home.
119. KCMA - Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association; www.kcma.org.
120. LMA - Laminating Materials Association; (See CPA).
121. LPI - Lightning Protection Institute; www.lightning.org.
122. MBMA - Metal Building Manufacturers Association; www.mbma.com.
123. MCA - Metal Construction Association; www.metalconstruction.org.
124. MFMA - Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.maplefloor.org.
125. MFMA - Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.metalframingmfg.org.
126. MHIA - Material Handling Industry of America; www.mhia.org.
127. MIA - Marble Institute of America; www.marble-institute.com.
128. MMPA - Moulding & Millwork Producers Association; www.wmmpa.com.
129. MPI - Master Painters Institute; www.paintinfo.com.
130. MSS - Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.;
www.mss-hq.org.
131. NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers;
www.naamm.org.
132. NACE - NACE International; (National Association of Corrosion Engineers
International); www.nace.org.
133. NADCA - National Air Duct Cleaners Association; www.nadca.com.
134. NAIMA - North American Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.naima.org.
135. NBGQA - National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc.; www.nbgqa.com.
136. NBI - New Buildings Institute; www.newbuildings.org.
137. NCAA - National Collegiate Athletic Association (The); www.ncaa.org.
138. NCMA - National Concrete Masonry Association; www.ncma.org.
139. NEBB - National Environmental Balancing Bureau; www.nebb.org.
140. NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association; www.necanet.org.
141. NeLMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association; www.nelma.org.
142. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association; www.nema.org.
143. NETA - InterNational Electrical Testing Association; www.netaworld.org.
144. NFHS - National Federation of State High School Associations; www.nfhs.org.
145. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association; www.nfpa.org.
146. NFPA - NFPA International; (See NFPA).
147. NFRC - National Fenestration Rating Council; www.nfrc.org.
148. NHLA - National Hardwood Lumber Association; www.nhla.com.
149. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority; www.nlga.org.
150. NOFMA - National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association; (See NWFA).
151. NOMMA - National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association; www.nomma.org.
152. NRCA - National Roofing Contractors Association; www.nrca.net.
153. NRMCA - National Ready Mixed Concrete Association; www.nrmca.org.
154. NSF - NSF International; www.nsf.org.
155. NSPE - National Society of Professional Engineers; www.nspe.org.
156. NSSGA - National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association; www.nssga.org.
157. NTMA - National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The); www.ntma.com.
158. NWFA - National Wood Flooring Association; www.nwfa.org.
159. PCI - Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; www.pci.org.
160. PDI - Plumbing & Drainage Institute; www.pdionline.org.
161. PLASA - PLASA; (Formerly: ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology
Association); www.plasa.org.
162. RCSC - Research Council on Structural Connections; www.boltcouncil.org.

163. RFCI - Resilient Floor Covering Institute; www.rfci.com.

164. RIS - Redwood Inspection Service; www.redwoodinspection.com.
165. SAE - SAE International; www.sae.org.
166. SCTE - Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers; www.scte.org.
167. SDI - Steel Deck Institute; www.sdi.org.
168. SDI - Steel Door Institute; www.steeldoor.org.
169. SEFA - Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (The); www.sefalabs.com.
170. SEI/ASCE - Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers; (See
ASCE).
171. SIA - Security Industry Association; www.siaonline.org.
172. SJI - Steel Joist Institute; www.steeljoist.org.
173. SMA - Screen Manufacturers Association; www.smainfo.org.
174. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association;
www.smacna.org.
175. SMPTE - Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers; www.smpte.org.
176. SPFA - Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance; www.sprayfoam.org.
177. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau; www.spib.org.
178. SPRI - Single Ply Roofing Industry; www.spri.org.
179. SRCC - Solar Rating & Certification Corporation; www.solar-rating.org.
180. SSINA - Specialty Steel Industry of North America; www.ssina.com.
181. SSPC - SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings; www.sspc.org.
182. STI - Steel Tank Institute; www.steeltank.com.
183. SWI - Steel Window Institute; www.steelwindows.com.
184. SWPA - Submersible Wastewater Pump Association; www.swpa.org.
185. TCA - Tilt-Up Concrete Association; www.tilt-up.org.
186. TCNA - Tile Council of North America, Inc.; www.tileusa.com.
187. TEMA - Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.tema.org.
188. TIA - Telecommunications Industry Association (The); (Formerly: TIA/EIA -
Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance);
www.tiaonline.org.
189. TIA/EIA - Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance; (See
TIA).
190. TMS - The Masonry Society; www.masonrysociety.org.
191. TPI - Truss Plate Institute; www.tpinst.org.
192. TPI - Turfgrass Producers International; www.turfgrasssod.org.
193. TRI - Tile Roofing Institute; www.tileroofing.org.
194. UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; www.ul.com.
195. UNI - Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association; www.uni-bell.org.
196. USAV - USA Volleyball; www.usavolleyball.org.
197. USGBC - U.S. Green Building Council; www.usgbc.org.
198. USITT - United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc.; www.usitt.org.
199. WASTEC - Waste Equipment Technology Association; www.wastec.org.
200. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau; www.wclib.org.
201. WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers Association; www.wcmanet.org.
202. WDMA - Window & Door Manufacturers Association; www.wdma.com.
203. WI - Woodwork Institute; www.wicnet.org.
204. WSRCA - Western States Roofing Contractors Association; www.wsrca.com.
205. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association; www.wwpa.org.

B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract
Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This
information is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents.
1. DIN - Deutsches Institut fur Normung e.V.; www.din.de.

2. IAPMO - International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials;
www.iapmo.org.
3. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org.
4. ICC-ES - ICC Evaluation Service, LLC; www.icc-es.org.

SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and
protection facilities.
1. Section 011000 "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions.
2. Section 312319 "Dewatering" for disposal of ground water at Project site.
1.3 USE CHARGES
A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in
the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities engaged in the Project to use
temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's
construction forces, A/E, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Sewer Service: Pay sewer-service use charges for sewer usage by all entities for construction
operations.
C. Water Service: Pay water-service use charges for water used by all entities for construction
operations.
D. Electric Power Service: Pay electric-power-service use charges for electricity used by all
entities for construction operations.
A. Site Utilization Plan: Show temporary facilities, temporary utility lines and connections, staging
areas, construction site entrances, vehicle circulation, and parking areas for construction
personnel.
B. Implementation and Termination Schedule: Within 15 days of date established for

commencement of the Work, submit schedule indicating implementation and termination dates
of each temporary utility.
Project 16018 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 1

C. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Show fabrication and installation details, including
plans, elevations, details, layouts, typestyles, graphic elements, and message content.
D. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having
jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire-prevention
program.
E. Moisture- and Mold-Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials
and construction from water absorption and damage and mold.
A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary
electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each
temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in ICC/ANSI A117.1.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume
responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its
use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned
responsibilities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch-thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric

fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch-OD line
posts and 2-7/8-inch-OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch-OD top rails.
B. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool;
with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively.
2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature
controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.

B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, A/E, and
construction personnel office activities and to accommodate Project meetings specified in other
Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows:
1. Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan
racks, and bookcases.
2. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 10 individuals. Provide
electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with no fewer than one
receptacle on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4-foot-square
tack and marker boards.
3. Drinking water and private toilet.
4. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68
to 72 deg F.
5. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc at desk height.
C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate
materials and equipment for construction operations.
1. Store combustible materials apart from building.
2.3 EQUIPMENT
A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by
locations and classes of fire exposures.
B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented,
self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.
1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating

units is prohibited.
2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location
and application.
3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for
temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return-air grille
in system and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in
Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES, GENERAL
A. Conservation: Coordinate construction and use of temporary facilities with consideration given
to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary utilities to
minimize waste.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference
with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the
Work.
1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Section 011000 "Summary."
B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities
are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.
3.3 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.
1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be
interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.
1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having

jurisdiction.
C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for
construction.
D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of
construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type,
number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.
E. Temporary Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by
construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed
construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that
will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.
1. Provide temporary dehumidification systems when required to reduce ambient and

substrate moisture levels to level required to allow installation or application of finishes
and their proper curing or drying.
F. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size,
capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations.
1. Install electric power service underground unless otherwise indicated.

2. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by Owner.

G. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination
for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.
1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements
without operating entire system.
H. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all
construction personnel. Install one land-based telephone line(s) for each field office.
1. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.
a. Police and fire departments.

b. Ambulance service.
c. Contractor's home office.
d. Contractor's emergency after-hours telephone number.
e. Architect's office.
f. Engineers' offices.
g. Owner's office.
h. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.
3.4 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with the following:
1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction
area or within 30 feet of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136.
Comply with NFPA 241.
2. Maintain support facilities until A/E schedules Substantial Completion inspection.
Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial
Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to
Owner.
B. Temporary Use of Planned Permanent Roads and Paved Areas: Locate temporary roads and
paved areas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Construct and maintain
temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Extend temporary roads
and paved areas, within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations.
1. Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and
paved areas.
2. Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas
according to Section 312000 "Earth Moving."
3. Delay installation of final course of permanent hot-mix asphalt pavement until
immediately before Substantial Completion. Repair hot-mix asphalt base-course
pavement before installation of final course according to Section 321216 "Flexible
Paving."

C. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.
2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.
D. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel.
E. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.
1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or
adjoining properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.
2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.
F. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.
1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings.

2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and
individuals seeking entrance to Project.
a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.
3. Maintain and touch up signs so they are legible at all times.
G. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419

"Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
3.5 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and
other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be
removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.
1. Where access to adjacent properties is required in order to affect protection of existing

facilities, obtain written permission from adjacent property owner to access property for
that purpose.
B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct

construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible
air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.
1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Section 011000 "Summary."
C. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide

barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of
stormwater from heavy rains.

D. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line
of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root
systems from damage, flooding, and erosion.
E. Site Enclosure Fence: Prior to commencing earthwork, furnish and install site enclosure fence in
a manner that will prevent people from easily entering site except by entrance gates.
1. Extent of Fence: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized
personnel. Furnish one set of keys to Owner.
F. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of
construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and
similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each workday.
G. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.
H. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and
as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
I. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress

and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar
activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.
1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulate

temporary enclosures.
J. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types
needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with
NFPA 241; manage fire-prevention program.
1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. Comply with additional limits on smoking

specified in other Sections.
2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar
sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel
at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be
followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.
4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning
sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed.
Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.
3.6 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL
A. Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Describe delivery, handling, storage, installation, and

protection provisions for materials subject to water absorption or water damage.

1. Indicate procedures for discarding water-damaged materials, protocols for mitigating

water intrusion into completed Work, and replacing water-damaged Work.
2. Indicate sequencing of work that requires water, such as sprayed fire-resistive materials,
plastering, and terrazzo grinding, and describe plans for dealing with water from these
operations. Show procedures for verifying that wet construction has dried sufficiently to
permit installation of finish materials.
3. Indicate methods to be used to avoid trapping water in finished work.
B. Exposed Construction Period: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject
to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows:
1. Protect porous materials from water damage.

2. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water.
3. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete.
4. Remove standing water from decks.
5. Keep deck openings covered or dammed.
C. Partially Enclosed Construction Period: After installation of weather barriers but before full
enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration
of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows:
1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with
high organic content, into partially enclosed building.
2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage.
3. Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter.
4. Discard or replace water-damaged material.
5. Do not install material that is wet.
6. Discard and replace stored or installed material that begins to grow mold.
7. Perform work in a sequence that allows wet materials adequate time to dry before
enclosing the material in gypsum board or other interior finishes.
D. Controlled Construction Period: After completing and sealing of the building enclosure but
prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows:
1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions.
2. Use temporary or permanent HVAC system to control humidity within ranges specified
for installed and stored materials.
3. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative humidity, and
exposure to water limits.
a. Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including wood and
gypsum-based products, that become wet during the course of construction and
remain wet for 48 hours are considered defective and require replacing.

b. Measure moisture content of materials that have been exposed to moisture during
construction operations or after installation. Record readings beginning at time of
exposure and continuing daily for 48 hours. Identify materials containing moisture
levels higher than allowed. Report findings in writing to Architect.
c. Remove and replace materials that cannot be completely restored to their
manufactured moisture level within 48 hours.
3.7 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and
abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.
1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,

ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated
results and to avoid possibility of damage.
C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and
protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.
D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended,
when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial
Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been
delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed
surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor.
Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.
2. Remove temporary roads and paved areas not intended for or acceptable for integration
into permanent construction. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove
soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove
materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and
other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace
street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities
having jurisdiction.
3. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during
construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in
Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."

SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in
Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on
products; special warranties; and comparable products.
1. Section 014200 "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or
taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,"
"equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or

model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product
literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or
facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new
products.
3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved by Architect through
submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-
service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal
or exceed those of specified product.
B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a single manufacturer's product

is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model
number or other designation. In addition to the basis-of-design product description, product
attributes and characteristics may be listed to establish the significant qualities related to type,
function, in-service performance and physical properties, weight, dimension, durability, visual
characteristics, and other special features and requirements for purposes of evaluating
comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification.
Project 16018 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 1

C. Subject to Compliance with Requirements: Where the phrase "Subject to compliance with
requirements" introduces a product selection procedure in an individual Specification Section,
provide products qualified under the specified product procedure. In the event that a named
product or product by a named manufacturer does not meet the other requirements of the
specifications, select another named product or product from another named manufacturer that
does meet the requirements of the specifications. Submit a comparable product request, if
applicable.
A. Comparable Product Request Submittal: Submit request for consideration of each comparable
product. Identify basis-of-design product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced.
Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable

Products" Article.
2. A/E's Action: If necessary, A/E will request additional information or documentation for
evaluation within seven days of receipt of a comparable product request. A/E will notify
Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15
days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or
documentation, whichever is later.
a. Form of A/E's Approval of Submittal: As specified in Section 013300 "Submittal

Procedures."
b. Use product specified if A/E does not issue a decision on use of a comparable
product request within time allocated.
B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 013300

"Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.
A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more

products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if
previously selected products were also options.
B. Identification of Products: Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach or
imprint manufacturer or product names or trademarks on exposed surfaces of products or
equipment that will be exposed to view in occupied spaces or on the exterior.
1. Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on a concealed surface, or, where
required for observation following installation, on a visually accessible surface that is not
conspicuous.
2. Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of service-
connected or power-operated equipment. Locate on a visually accessible but
inconspicuous surface. Include information essential for operation, including the
following:

a. Name of product and manufacturer.

b. Model and serial number.
c. Capacity.
d. Speed.
e. Ratings.
3. See individual identification sections in Divisions 21, 22, 23, and 26 for additional
identification requirements.
1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,
deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Delivery and Handling:
1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent

overcrowding of construction spaces.
2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that
are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other
losses.
3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original
sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for
handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.
4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and
to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.
C. Storage:
1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight
enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of
installation and concealment.
5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,
ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.
6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.
7. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and
equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.
1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on
product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract
Documents.

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a

particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.
2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide
specific rights for Owner.
B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and
identification, ready for execution.
1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and

properly executed.
2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a
written document using indicated form properly executed.
3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for
submitting special warranties.
C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES
A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are
undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.
1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items
needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.
2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are
specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used
successfully in similar situations on other projects.
3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties meeting
requirements of the Contract Documents.
4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," A/E will make selection.
5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications
establish salient characteristics of products.
6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or
approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products"
Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.
a. Submit additional documentation required by A/E in order to establish equivalency

of proposed products. Evaluation of "or equal" product status is by the A/E, whose
determination is final.
B. Product Selection Procedures:
1. Sole Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the
named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for
Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

a. Sole product may be indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with

requirements, provide the following: …"
2. Sole Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source,

provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.
Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be
considered.
a. Sole manufacturer/source may be indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance

with requirements, provide products by the following: …"
3. Limited List of Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both

manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with
requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not
be considered unless otherwise indicated.
a. Limited list of products may be indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance

with requirements, provide one of the following: …"
4. Non-Limited List of Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both

available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed
product, which complies with requirements.
a. Non-limited list of products is indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance

with requirements, available products that may be incorporated in the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following: …"
5. Limited List of Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers'

names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with
requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not
be considered unless otherwise indicated.
a. Limited list of manufacturers is indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance

with requirements, provide products by one of the following: …"
6. Non-Limited List of Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of available

manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an
unnamed manufacturer, which complies with requirements.
a. Non-limited list of manufacturers is indicated by the phrase: "Subject to

compliance with requirements, available manufacturers whose products may be
incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: …"
7. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product

indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or
indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers.
Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics
that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable
Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named
manufacturers.

C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match A/E's sample," provide a
product that complies with requirements and matches A/E's sample. A/E’s decision will be final
on whether a proposed product matches.
D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by A/E
from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with
requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's
product line that includes both standard and premium items.
2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A. Conditions for Consideration of Comparable Products: A/E will consider Contractor's request
for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions
are not satisfied, A/E may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with
these requirements:
1. Evidence that proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, is
consistent with the Contract Documents, will produce the indicated results, and is
compatible with other portions of the Work. Detailed comparison of significant qualities
of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant product qualities
include attributes such as type, function, in-service performance and physical properties,
weight, dimension, durability, visual characteristics, and other specific features and
requirements.
2. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
3. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and
names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.
4. Samples, if requested.
B. Submittal Requirements: Approval by the A/E of Contractor's request for use of comparable
product is not intended to satisfy other submittal requirements. Comply with specified submittal
requirements.

WSU-160027
SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the
Work including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Construction layout.
2. Field engineering and surveying.
3. Installation of the Work.
4. Cutting and patching.
5. Coordination of Owner-installed products.
6. Progress cleaning.
7. Starting and adjusting.
8. Protection of installed construction.
1. Section 011000 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site.

2. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys.
3. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project
Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and
levels, replacing defective work, and final cleaning.
4. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for patching penetrations in fire-rated
construction.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of

subsequent work.
B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after
installation of subsequent work.
1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Cutting and Patching Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
Project 16018 EXECUTION 017300 - 1

WSU-160027
1. Prior to commencing work requiring cutting and patching, review extent of cutting and
patching anticipated and examine procedures for ensuring satisfactory result from cutting
and patching work. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cutting
and patching to attend, including the following:
a. Contractor's superintendent.
b. Trade supervisor responsible for cutting operations.
c. Trade supervisor(s) responsible for patching of each type of substrate.
d. Mechanical, electrical, and utilities subcontractors' supervisors, to the extent each
trade is affecting by cutting and patching operations.
B. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential
conflicts before proceeding.
A. Qualification Data: For land surveyor.
B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of
improvements comply with requirements.
a. Include description of provisions for temporary services and systems during

interruption of permanent services and systems.
C. Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit plan describing procedures at least 10 days prior to the time
cutting and patching will be performed. Include the following information:
1. Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and patching.
2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to
structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building appearance
and other significant visual elements.
3. Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will perform
patching work.
4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed.
5. Utilities and Mechanical and Electrical Systems: List services and systems that cutting
and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services and systems that will be
relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate length of time
permanent services and systems will be disrupted.
D. Certified Surveys: Submit two copies signed by land surveyor.
A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice
in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying
services of the kind indicated.

WSU-160027
B. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of
construction elements.
1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify A/E of
locations and details of cutting and await directions from A/E before proceeding. Shore,
brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch
structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase
deflection.
2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components
in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that result in
increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.
3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or
components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in
reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or
decreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include but are not
limited to the following:
a. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers.

b. Membranes and flashings.
c. Exterior curtain-wall construction.
d. Sprayed fire-resistive material.
e. Equipment supports.
f. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment.
g. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems.
C. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence
of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in
Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction
that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written

recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.
B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed
surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent
possible.
1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed,
will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of
in-place materials.

WSU-160027
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate
and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, and other construction affecting
the Work.
1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of
sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services;
and other utilities.
2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public
utilities serving Project site.
B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the
Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where
indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance. Record observations.
1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of
connections before equipment and fixture installation.
2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are
to be installed.
3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with
existing finishes or primers.
C. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the
Work is required by other Sections, include the following:
1. Description of the Work.

2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates.
3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances.
4. Recommended corrections.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding
with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility and Owner that is necessary to
adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility
appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck
measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to
other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before

WSU-160027
fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.
C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown

diagrammatically on Drawings.
D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for
clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control
of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in
Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."
3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on
Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are
discovered, notify A/E promptly.
B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.
1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of
construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.
2. Establish limits on use of Project site.
3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain
required dimensions.
4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.
5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses.
6. Notify A/E when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances.
7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established
by authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill
and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.
D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building
foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and
electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels.
Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.
E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and
levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and
duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log
available for reference by A/E.
3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING
A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference
points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control
points during construction operations.

WSU-160027
1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written
approval of A/E. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points
promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to A/E
before proceeding.
2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base
replacements on the original survey control points.
B. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site,
referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having
jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.
1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record
Documents.
2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide
temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work.
3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction
to its original condition.
3.5 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and
elevation, as indicated.
1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.

2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance
and ease of removal for replacement.
3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.
4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches in occupied spaces and 90 inches in
unoccupied spaces.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in
applications indicated.
C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.
Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or

loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction
items on site and placement in permanent locations.
F. Tools and Equipment: Where possible, select tools or equipment that minimize production of
excessive noise levels.
G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be
factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other portions of the Work to
confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with
indicated requirements.

WSU-160027
H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size
and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with
other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size
and type required for load conditions.
1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at
heights directed by Architect.
2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions
for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with
integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to
Project site in time for installation.
I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,
arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
J. Repair or remove and replace damaged, defective, or nonconforming Work.
1. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for repairing or removing and
replacing defective Work.
3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching.
Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.
1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance

of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their
original condition.
B. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.
C. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.
Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be
exposed during cutting and patching operations.
D. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free
passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching according to
requirements in Section 011000 "Summary."
E. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar
operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or
adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply
with original Installer's written recommendations.
1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not
hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with
minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.

WSU-160027
3. Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill.
4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where
required by cutting and patching operations.
5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be
removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent
entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.
6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
F. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations
following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as
practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Sections, where applicable.
1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to
demonstrate physical integrity of installation.
2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration
into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching
and refinishing.
a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing
materials.
b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.
3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area
into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even
surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall
coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and
appearance.
a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and
intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final
paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional
coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.
4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane

surface of uniform appearance.
5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a
weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure.
G. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint,
mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.
3.7 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS
A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel.
B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by
Owner's construction personnel.

WSU-160027
1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for

Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable
timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual
construction progress.
2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction personnel at preinstallation
conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend
preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction personnel if portions of
the Work depend on Owner's construction.
3.8 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce
requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and
debris.
2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if
the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.
3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark
containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.
a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.
B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for
proper execution of the Work.
1. Remove liquid spills promptly.

2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the
entire work area, as appropriate.
D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written
instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials
specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning
materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.
E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure
freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials
down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 017419
H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining
materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from
damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

WSU-160027
I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through

the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure
operability without damaging effects.
J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to ensure that no part of the

construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise
deleterious exposure during the construction period.
3.9 STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove

malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation
without binding.
C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 014000

"Quality Requirements."
3.10 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage
or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.

SECTION 017419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:
1. Salvaging nonhazardous construction waste.

2. Recycling nonhazardous construction waste.
3. Disposing of nonhazardous construction waste.
1. Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for disposal requirements for masonry waste.
2. Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for disposition of waste resulting from site clearing and
removal of above- and below-grade improvements.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting
from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes
packaging.
B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or
selective demolition operations.
C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling,
reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation

for reuse.
E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another
facility.
Project 16018 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 1

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Practice efficient waste management in the use of materials in the course of the Work.
Use all reasonable means to divert construction and demolition waste from landfills and
incinerators. Facilitate recycling and salvage of materials.
A. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste
by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets,
receipts, and invoices.
B. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills
and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and
invoices.
C. Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician.
D. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for

recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that
recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician
and date refrigerant was recovered.
A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by EPA-approved certification

program.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.7 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN
A. General: Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E 1609 and requirements in
this Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and
cost/revenue analysis. Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure
throughout waste management plan.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION
A. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage,
signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan
during the entire duration of the Contract.
1. Comply with operation, termination, and removal requirements in Section 015000

"Temporary Facilities and Controls."
B. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management

procedures, as appropriate for the Work.
1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of submittal
return.
2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review
plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal.
C. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure
minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and
used facilities.
1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that
are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold.
2. Comply with Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust
and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control.
3.2 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL
A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers. All recyclable plastic
containers, glass bottles and cans shall be collected from construction site by contractor and
placed in Owner’s recycling bins.
B. Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to recycling or
reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum
contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process.
C. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate
recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical according to approved
construction waste management plan.
1. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials if
found.

2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place,
grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of
remaining trees.
4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather.
5. Remove recyclable waste from Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or
processor.
3.3 RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE
A. Asphalt Paving: Grind asphalt to maximum 1-1/2-inch size.
1. Crush asphaltic concrete paving and screen to comply with requirements in

Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for use as general fill.
3.4 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE
A. Packaging:
1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry
location.
2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials.
3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from
Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood
pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.
4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements
for recycling wood.
B. Wood Materials:
1. Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces.

2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood.
a. Comply with requirements in Section 329300 "Planting" for use of clean sawdust
as organic mulch.
C. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry
location.
3.5 DISPOSAL OF WASTE
A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove
waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of
accumulate on-site.

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.
C. Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them.

SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including,
but not limited to, the following:
1. Substantial Completion procedures.

2. Final completion procedures.
3. Warranties.
4. Final cleaning.
5. Repair of the Work.
1. Section 013233 "Photographic Documentation" for submitting final completion

construction photographic documentation.
2. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for additional operation and
maintenance manual requirements.
3. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record
Specifications, and Record Product Data.
4. Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training" for requirements to train the Owner's
maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain products, equipment, and
systems.
A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.
B. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at final completion signed by contracto.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Affidavit of Prevailing Wage: Provide original copy of signed and notarized affidavit of
prevailing wage for Contractor and each Subcontractor employed on project.
Project 16018 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 1

1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in
other Sections.
1.6 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by
construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if
necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.
1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first.
2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,
individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
3. Include the following information at the top of each page:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name of A/E.
e. Page number.
4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format:
a. PDF electronic file. A/E will return annotated file.
1.7 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES
A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of
the Work where warranties are indicated to commence on dates other than date of Substantial
Completion, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under
warranty.
B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of

designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during
construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.
C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project
Manual.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or

fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous
to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FINAL CLEANING
A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply
with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution
regulations.
B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each
surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and
maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification
of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:
a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,
including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other
foreign substances.
b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other
foreign deposits.
c. Rake grounds that are not planted, mulched, or paved to a smooth, even-textured
surface.
d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from
Project site.
e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.
f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,
free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural
weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original
condition.
g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,
plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean
according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain.
j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.
Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials.
Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.
k. Remove labels that are not permanent.

l. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment.

Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign
substances.
m. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains
resulting from water exposure.
n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed
surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.
o. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during
construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection.
p. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
q. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
C. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 017419
3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK
A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of
Substantial Completion.
B. Repair, or remove and replace, defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective
parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly
adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored,
provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired.
Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified
condition.
1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other
damaged transparent materials.
2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.
a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including
mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and
identification.
3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede
operation or reduce longevity.
4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and
noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for
new fixtures.

SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and
maintenance manuals, including the following:
1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory manuals.

2. Emergency manuals.
3. Systems and equipment operation manuals.
4. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.
5. Product maintenance manuals.
1. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation
and maintenance manuals.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular

interaction.
B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.
A. Submit operation and maintenance manuals indicated. Provide content for each manual as
specified in individual Specification Sections, and as reviewed and approved at the time of
Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by
this Section.
1. A/E will comment on whether content of operation and maintenance submittals is

acceptable.
2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions
and field conditions.
Project 16018 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 1

B. Format: Submit operation and maintenance manuals in the following format:
1. Submit five paper copies. A/E will return one copy.
C. Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least 30 days before commencing
demonstration and training. A/E will comment on whether general scope and content of manual
are acceptable.
D. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for
Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training.
A/E will return copy with comments.
E. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and
maintenance documentation.
1.5 FORMAT OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard-copy, bound and labeled volumes.
1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary

to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve
on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded
oversize sheets.
a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize

data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-
reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper
operation or maintenance of equipment or system.
b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of
contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.
2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual.
Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components
of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification
Section number and title of Project Manual.
3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic
software storage media for computerized electronic equipment. Enclose title pages and
directories in clear plastic sleeves.
4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper.
5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.
a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and
use as foldouts.
b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled
envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in
manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents,
and drawing locations.

1.6 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Organization of Manuals: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate
section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not
part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:
1. Title page.
2. Table of contents.
3. Manual contents.
B. Title Page: Include the following information:
1. Subject matter included in manual.

2. Name and address of Project.
3. Name and address of Owner.
4. Date of submittal.
5. Name and contact information for Contractor.
6. Name and contact information for A/E.
7. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the
systems contained in the manuals.
8. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.
C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to
the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project
Manual.
1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to

accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each
volume of the set.
D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by
system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems,
equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.
E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual,
identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the
Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to
ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building
Systems."
1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY MANUAL
A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides
an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. List items and their
location to facilitate ready access to desired information. Include the following:

1. List of contractors, subcontractors and suppliers with contact information and item they
installed/supplied.
2. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to
operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.
3. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system.
For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.
4. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and
maintenance manual.
1.8 EMERGENCY MANUALS
A. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures

for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies
indicated.
B. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:
1. Type of emergency.
2. Emergency instructions.
3. Emergency procedures.
C. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include
instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:
1. Fire.
2. Flood.
3. Gas leak.
4. Water leak.
5. Power failure.
6. Water outage.
7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure.
D. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages,
and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for
notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.
E. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Instructions on stopping.
2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits.
4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
5. Special operating instructions and procedures.

1.9 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT OPERATION MANUALS
A. Systems and Equipment Operation Manual: Assemble a complete set of data indicating
operation of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include
information required for daily operation and management, operating standards, and routine and
special operating procedures.
1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information

for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.
2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional
manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.
B. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in

individual Specification Sections and the following information:
1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and
equipment indicated on Contract Documents.
2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility.
3. Operating standards.
4. Operating procedures.
5. Operating logs.
6. Wiring diagrams.
7. Control diagrams.
8. Piped system diagrams.
9. Precautions against improper use.
10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.
C. Descriptions: Include the following:
1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract
Documents.
2. Manufacturer's name.
3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.
4. Equipment function.
5. Operating characteristics.
6. Limiting conditions.
7. Performance curves.
8. Engineering data and tests.
9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.
D. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Startup procedures.
2. Equipment or system break-in procedures.
3. Routine and normal operating instructions.
4. Regulation and control procedures.
5. Instructions on stopping.
6. Normal shutdown instructions.
7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
9. Special operating instructions and procedures.

E. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as
installed.
F. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color coding where required for
identification.
1.10 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Systems and Equipment Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of data indicating
maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include
manufacturers' maintenance documentation, preventive maintenance procedures and frequency,
repair procedures, wiring and systems diagrams, lists of spare parts, and warranty information.
1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information

for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.
2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional
manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.
B. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include
source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures,
maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service
contracts, and warranties and bonds as described below.
C. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual,
identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product,
list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent,
and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or
schedule designation or identifier where applicable.
D. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Include the following information for each

component part or piece of equipment:
1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins; include only sheets pertinent to product
or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component
incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format,
identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify
data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.
a. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not

available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and
maintenance of equipment or systems.
2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly

and component removal, replacement, and assembly.
3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.
4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

E. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential
maintenance procedures:
1. Test and inspection instructions.

2. Troubleshooting guide.
3. Precautions against improper maintenance.
4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.
5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.
6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.
F. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of
required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine
maintenance and service with standard time allotment.
1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly,
quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.
2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording
maintenance.
G. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with
parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local
sources of maintenance materials and related services.
H. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and
telephone number of service agent.
I. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
J. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the

relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and
flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to
ensure correct illustration of completed installation.
1. Do not use original project record documents as part of maintenance manuals.
1.11 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and
maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.
B. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include
source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources,
and warranties and bonds, as described below.

C. Shop drawings and samples: Include all shop drawings and product samples as part of the
manual.
D. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and
arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and
telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference
Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation
or identifier where applicable.
E. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Product name and model number.

2. Manufacturer's name.
3. Color, pattern, and texture.
4. Material and chemical composition.
5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.
F. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:
1. Inspection procedures.
2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.
5. Repair instructions.
G. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and
related services.
H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents,
including the following:
1. Record Drawings.
2. Record Specifications.
3. Miscellaneous record submittals.
1. Section 017300 "Execution" for final property survey.

2. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures.
3. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance
manual requirements.
A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:
1. Number of Copies: Submit one set(s) of marked-up record prints.

2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows:
a. Initial Submittal:
1) Submit one paper-copy set(s) of marked-up record prints.

2) Architect will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional
information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable.
b. Final Submittal:
1) Submit one paper-copy set(s) of marked-up record prints.

2) Plot each drawing file, whether or not changes and additional information
were recorded.
B. Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda
and contract modifications.
Project 16018 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 1

C. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: See other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record-
keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit
one paper copy of each submittal.
1.4 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop
Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued.
1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies
from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data,
whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide
information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.
a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be

difficult to identify or measure and record later.
b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique.
c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.
d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.
e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding photographic documentation.
2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Dimensional changes to Drawings.

b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings.
c. Depths of foundations.
d. Locations and depths of underground utilities.
e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.
f. Revisions to electrical circuitry.
g. Actual equipment locations.
h. Duct size and routing.
i. Locations of concealed internal utilities.
j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive.
k. Changes made following A/E's written orders.
l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings.
m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions.
n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.
3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use
personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record
prints.
4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish
between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.
5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted
from original Drawings.
6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order
numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

1.5 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS
A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that

cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
2. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to
provide a record of selections made.
3. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in
operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data.
4. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable.
B. Format: Submit record Specifications as paper copy.
1.6 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS
A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous

record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file
miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.
B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as PDF electronic file.
1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section

number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals.
1.7 MAINTENANCE OF RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Maintenance of Record Documents: Store record documents in the field office apart from the
Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for
construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible
condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for
A/E's reference during normal working hours.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION

SECTION 017900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel,
1. Instruction in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.

2. Demonstration and training video recordings.
A. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training,
including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of
instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and
outline for each training module.
1. Indicate proposed training modules using manufacturer-produced demonstration and

training video recordings for systems, equipment, and products in lieu of video recording
of live instructional module.
B. Qualification Data: For instructor and videographer.
C. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of
instruction time.
D. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and
documentation of performance-based test.
A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating

maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for
this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful
learning performance.
Project 16018 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 - 1

B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with

requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and
maintenance procedures and training.
C. Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures
related to demonstration and training including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction.
2. Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational materials,
instructors' personnel, audiovisual equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays.
3. Review required content of instruction.
4. For instruction that must occur outside, review weather and forecasted weather conditions
and procedures to follow if conditions are unfavorable.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to

minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel.
B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction

time, and course content.
C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data
have been reviewed and approved by Architect.
1.6 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM
A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules
for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification
Sections.
B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a
description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each
module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or
component:
1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following:
a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.

b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.
c. Operating standards.
d. Regulatory requirements.
e. Equipment function.
f. Operating characteristics.
g. Limiting conditions.
h. Performance curves.

2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail:
a. Emergency manuals.
b. Systems and equipment operation manuals.
c. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.
d. Product maintenance manuals.
e. Project Record Documents.
f. Identification systems.
g. Warranties and bonds.
h. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.
3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:
a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages.

b. Instructions on stopping.
c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits.
e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems.
f. Special operating instructions and procedures.
4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable:
a. Startup procedures.
b. Equipment or system break-in procedures.
c. Routine and normal operating instructions.
d. Regulation and control procedures.
e. Control sequences.
f. Safety procedures.
g. Instructions on stopping.
h. Normal shutdown instructions.
i. Operating procedures for emergencies.
j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure.
k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
m. Special operating instructions and procedures.
5. Adjustments: Include the following:
a. Alignments.
b. Checking adjustments.
c. Noise and vibration adjustments.
d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.
6. Troubleshooting: Include the following:
a. Diagnostic instructions.
b. Test and inspection procedures.

7. Maintenance: Include the following:
a. Inspection procedures.
b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
d. Procedures for routine cleaning.
e. Procedures for preventive maintenance.
f. Procedures for routine maintenance.
g. Instruction on use of special tools.
8. Repairs: Include the following:
a. Diagnosis instructions.
b. Repair instructions.
c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly
instructions.
d. Instructions for identifying parts and components.
e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.
1.7 PREPARATION
A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training
module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with
requirements in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data."
B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.
1.8 INSTRUCTION
A. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain
systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.
1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.
B. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed-on times. For equipment that requires
seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.
1. Schedule training with Owner, through A/E, with at least seven days' advance notice.
C. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fully
operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final operation
and maintenance data submittals.
D. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's
mastery of module by use of a demonstration performance-based test.

E. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove
instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial
training use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION

SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials,

mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.
1. Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade.

2. Section 321313 "Concrete Paving" for concrete pavement and walks.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the
following: fly ash.
B. W/C Ratio: The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials.
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality
control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures,
curing procedures, construction contraction and isolation joints, and joint-filler strips,
vapor-retarder installation, steel reinforcement installation, and concrete protection.
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when
characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances
warrant adjustments.
1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.
Project 16018 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 1

AIA/TWG-GOP March 3, 2017
C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing Drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and
placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar
diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing,
and supports for concrete reinforcement.
A. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:
1. Cementitious materials.
2. Admixtures.
3. Form materials and form-release agents.
4. Steel reinforcement and accessories.
5. Curing compounds.
6. Vapor retarders.
7. Semirigid joint filler.
8. Joint-filler strips.
9. Repair materials.
B. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency:
1. Aggregates: Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of

concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity.
C. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements indicating compliance with specified
tolerances.
D. Minutes of preinstallation conference.
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as

ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified
Concrete Flatwork Technician.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete

products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and
equipment.
1.8 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction

testing on concrete mixtures.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and
damage.
1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from
physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low
temperatures.
1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three
successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature
range required by ACI 301.
2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on
frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or
chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.
B. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:
1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing

water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of
ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is
Contractor's option.
2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep
subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL
A. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract
Documents:
1. ACI 301.
2. ACI 117.
2.2 FORM-FACING MATERIALS
A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that provide continuous, true, and
smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.
1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.

B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material.

Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
C. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic,
paper, or fiber tubes that produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding
specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic
concrete loads without detrimental deformation.
D. Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally sufficient
to support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads.
E. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum.
F. Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal.
G. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that does not bond with,
stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and does not impair subsequent treatments of
concrete surfaces.
1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.
H. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or metal

form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of
concrete on removal.
1. Furnish units that leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of exposed
concrete surface.
2. Furnish ties that, when removed, leave holes no larger than 1 inch in diameter in concrete
surface.
3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing
or waterproofing.
2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.
B. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, as drawn.
C. Plain-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, plain, fabricated from as-
drawn steel wire into flat sheets.
2.4 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES
A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain-steel bars, cut true to length with
ends square and free of burrs.

B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening
reinforcing bars and welded-wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel
wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater
compressive strength than concrete and as follows:
1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view, where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use
CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.
2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from
the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from
single source from single manufacturer.
B. Cementitious Materials:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I/II.
C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33/C 33M, Class 3M coarse aggregate or better, graded.
Provide aggregates from a single source.
1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1 inch nominal.

2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260/C 260M.
E. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and

that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened
concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.
1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.

2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.
3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.
5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G.
6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.
F. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M.
2.6 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive
or pressure-sensitive tape.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. Fortifiber Building Systems Group; Moistop Ultra.

b. Raven Industries, Inc; Vapor Block 15.
c. Reef Industries, Inc; Griffolyn Type-65G.
2.7 CURING MATERIALS
A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application

to fresh concrete.

following:
a. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Confilm.

b. ChemMasters; SprayFilm.
c. Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure Film (J-74).
d. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Eucobar.
e. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Vapor-Aid.
f. Lambert Corporation; LAMBCO Skin.
g. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; E-CON.
h. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; EVAPRE.
i. Metalcrete Industries; Waterhold.
j. Nox-Crete Products Group; MONOFILM.
k. Sika Corporation; SikaFilm.
l. SpecChem, LLC; Spec Film.
m. Symons by Dayton Superior; Finishing Aid.
n. TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-2120 TRI-FILM.
o. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex Envio Set.
B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing
approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.
C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.
D. Water: Potable.
E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B,

dissipating.

following:
a. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; AH Curing Compound #2 DR WB.

b. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Kure 200.
c. ChemMasters; Safe-Cure Clear.
d. Conspec by Dayton Superior; W.B. Resin Cure.
e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day-Chem Rez Cure (J-11-W).
f. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Kurez W VOX;
TAMMSCURE WB 30C.

g. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Thinfilm 420.

h. Lambert Corporation; AQUA KURE - CLEAR.
i. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; L&M Cure R.
j. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; 1100-CLEAR.
k. Nox-Crete Products Group; Resin Cure E.
l. Right Pointe; Clear Water Resin.
m. SpecChem, LLC; Spec Rez Clear.
n. Symons by Dayton Superior; Resi-Chem Clear.
o. TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-2519 DC WB.
p. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex Enviocure 100.
2.8 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.
B. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a
Type A shore durometer hardness of 80 according to ASTM D 2240.
C. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet, not less than 0.034 inch thick, with bent
tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of concrete or
debris.
2.9 REPAIR MATERIALS
A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be

applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor
elevations.
1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150/C 150M, portland cement or hydraulic or blended

hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219.
2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions,
and application.
3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended
by underlayment manufacturer.
4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested according to
ASTM C 109/C 109M.
B. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be

applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch and that can be filled in over a scarified surface to match
adjacent floor elevations.
1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150/C 150M, portland cement or hydraulic or blended

hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219.
2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and
application.
3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended
by topping manufacturer.

4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi at 28 days when tested according to
ASTM C 109/C 109M.
2.10 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL
A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of
laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.
1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture
designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.
B. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of

cement.
C. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Use water-reducing, high-range water-reducing, or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as

required, for placement and workability.
2. Use water-reducing and -retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low
humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.
3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial
slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a
w/c ratio below 0.50.
2.11 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS
A. Footings: Normal-weight concrete.
1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days.

2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.50.
3. Slump Limit: 4 inches for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches (50 to 100 mm)
before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or
minus 1 inch (25 mm).
4. Air Content: 4.0 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-1/2-inch
nominal maximum aggregate size.
B. Slabs-on-Grade: Normal-weight concrete.
1. Minimum Compressive Strength 4000 psi at 28 days.

2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.45.
3. Slump Limit: 3 inches plus or minus 1 inch.
4. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 percent.
2.12 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT
A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.13 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to

ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information.
1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from
1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and
delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FORMWORK INSTALLATION
A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical,
lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure
can support such loads.
B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,
elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows:
1. Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth-formed finished surfaces.

2. Class C, 1/2 inch for rough-formed finished surfaces.
D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.
E. Construct forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.
Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast-concrete surfaces. Provide
top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.
1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.
2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.
F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required
elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed
strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.
G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork
is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent
loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.
H. Do not chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.
I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads
required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and
other debris just before placing concrete.
K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and
maintain proper alignment.
L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, before placing reinforcement.
3.2 EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that
is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with
tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC 303.
2. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated.
3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS
A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does
not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50
deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by
form-removal operations, and curing and protection operations need to be maintained.
1. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that support
weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved its 28-day design compressive
strength.
2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without
loosening or disturbing shores.
B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or
otherwise damaged form-facing material are not acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new
form-release agent.
C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints.
Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces
unless approved by Architect.
3.4 VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION
A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to
ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.

B. Bituminous Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair bituminous vapor retarder according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and
supporting reinforcement.
1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before
placing concrete.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that
reduce bond to concrete.
C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and
support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld
crossing reinforcing bars.
D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
E. Install welded-wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to

minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps
of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire.
3.6 JOINTS
A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations
indicated or as approved by Architect.
1. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete.
2. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and
girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.
C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning

concrete into areas as indicated.
1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing
each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after
applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.
2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof
abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting
action does not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops
random contraction cracks.

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab
junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and
other locations, as indicated.
1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished
concrete surface unless otherwise indicated.
2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below
finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Section 079200 "Joint
Sealants," are indicated.
3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is
required, lace or clip sections together.
3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded
items is complete and that required inspections are completed.
B. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to
limitations of ACI 301.
1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to

mixture.
C. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new
concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness.
If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit
concrete to avoid segregation.
1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth not to exceed formwork design pressures
and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.
2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.
3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators
vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6
inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have
begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to
consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded
items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.
D. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of
construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.
1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations, so concrete is thoroughly worked

around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.
3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.
4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.
5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured
surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb
slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

3.8 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes
and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits
on formed-surface irregularities.
1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.
B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in

an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and
defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface
irregularities.
1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, or to be covered with a coating or

covering material applied directly to concrete.
C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces
adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent
formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent
unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
3.9 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS
A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and
finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-
floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4 inch
in one direction.
1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces to receive mortar setting beds for bonded cementitious
floor finishes.
C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or
inaccessible to power-driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots.
Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular
texture.
1. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish.
D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by
hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of
trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that
would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.
1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring,
carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-
finish coating system.

2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155, for a randomly
trafficked floor surface:
a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and of levelness, F(L) 25; with
minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 17; for slabs-on-
grade.
E. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere
as indicated.
1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with
fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish
with Architect before application.
3.10 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEM INSTALLATION
A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in
place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-
place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to
complete the Work.
B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still
green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and
terminations slightly rounded.
C. Equipment Bases and Foundations:
1. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
2. Construct concrete bases 4 inches high unless otherwise indicated, and extend base not
less than 6 inches in each direction beyond the maximum dimensions of supported
equipment unless otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic anchor support.
3. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days.
4. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,
install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.
5. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete
base and anchor into structural concrete substrate.
6. Prior to pouring concrete, place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings,
templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
7. Cast anchor-bolt insert into bases. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper
attachment to supported equipment.
3.11 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather
protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or
windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing
operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and
bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported
slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after
loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for remainder
of curing period.
D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed
surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.
E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the
following materials:
a. Water.
b. Continuous water-fog spray.
c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete
surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover

for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at
least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven
days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using cover material
and waterproof tape.
a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive

floor coverings.
b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive
penetrating liquid floor treatments.
c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining
cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies does not interfere with
bonding of floor covering used on Project.
3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller

according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall
within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair
damage during curing period.
a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without
damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound
manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound does not interfere
with bonding of floor covering used on Project.

4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a
continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial
application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity
of coating and repair damage during curing period.
3.12 JOINT FILLING
A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least two month(s). Do not fill joints until
construction traffic has permanently ceased.
B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact
faces of joints clean and dry.
C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches deep in formed
joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.
3.13 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and
replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.
B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of 1 part portland cement to 2-1/2
parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.
C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks,
spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and
stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.
1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than
1/2 inch in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch. Make edges of
cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes
and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding
agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place
with bonding agent.
2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and
standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar matches surrounding color.
Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before
proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than
surrounding surface.
3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and
structural performance as determined by Architect.

D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and
verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces
sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.
1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts,
honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that
penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of
width, and other objectionable conditions.
2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.
3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing
operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired
areas to blend into adjacent concrete.
4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment.
Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's
written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges
to match adjacent floor elevations.
5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low
areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor
elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's
written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface.
6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter,
by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean,
square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch clearance all around.
Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent.
Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete, except without
coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete.
Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.
7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar.
Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and
loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place
patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to
match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.
E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to A/E's approval, using epoxy adhesive and
patching mortar.
F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's
approval.
3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Contractor will engage a qualified testing inspecting agency to perform field tests and
inspections and prepare test reports to measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to
ASTM E 1155 within 24 hours of finishing.
B. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform
field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
C. Inspections:

1. Steel reinforcement placement.

2. Verification of use of required design mixture.
3. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing.
4. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.
D. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to

ASTM C 172/C 172M shall be performed according to the following requirements:
1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete
mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50
cu. yd. or fraction thereof.
a. When frequency of testing provides fewer than five compressive-strength tests for
each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly
selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.
2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample,
but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional
tests when concrete consistency appears to change.
3. Air Content: ASTM C 231/C 231M, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one
test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each
concrete mixture.
4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is
40 deg F and below or 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample.
5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M.
a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each
composite sample.
6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured
specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.
a. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of

two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.
7. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three
consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength
and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by
more than 500 psi.
8. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and
Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain
Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete
testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive
strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking
strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.
9. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may
be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of
concrete.
10. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete
when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other

requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency
may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with
ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect.
11. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
12. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply
with the Contract Documents.

SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Concrete masonry units.

2. Decorative CMU (Masonry Veneer)
3. Clay face brick. (Alternate Brick)
4. Mortar and grout.
5. Steel reinforcing bars.
6. Masonry-joint reinforcement.
7. Ties and anchors.
8. Embedded flashing.
9. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.
B. Products Installed but not Furnished under This Section:
1. Steel lintels in unit masonry.

2. Steel shelf angles for supporting unit masonry.
3. Cavity wall insulation.
C. Related Requirements:
1. Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation" for cavity wall insulation.

2. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for exposed sheet metal flashing and
for furnishing manufactured reglets installed in masonry joints.
3. Section 071900 "Water Repellents" for water repellents applied to unit masonry
assemblies.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).
B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.
Project 16018 UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 1

AIA/MCS/GOP March 3, 2017
B. Shop Drawings: For the following:
1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes.
2. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending, lap lengths, and placement of unit masonry reinforcing
bars. Comply with ACI 315. Show elevations of reinforced walls.
3. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special applications.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following:
1. Cocnrete Face Brick, in form of small-scale units.

2. Clay face brick, in the form of straps of five or more brick if alternate is accepted.
3. Special brick shapes.
4. Pigmented and colored-aggregate mortar. Make Samples using same sand and mortar
ingredients to be used on Project.
5. Weep holes and cavity vents.
6. Accessories embedded in masonry.
A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
B. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following:
1. Masonry units.
a. Include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements.

b. For brick, include size-variation data verifying that actual range of sizes falls
within specified tolerances.
c. For exposed brick, include test report for efflorescence according to ASTM C 67.
2. Cementitious materials. Include name of manufacturer, brand name, and type.

3. Mortar admixtures.
4. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.
5. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.
6. Reinforcing bars.
7. Joint reinforcement.
8. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.
C. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of
ingredients.

1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test
according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water
retention, and ASTM C 91/C 91M for air content.
2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with
compressive strength requirement.
D. Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and

equipment to be used to comply with requirements.
A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate
aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockups for typical exterior wall in sizes approximately 60 inches long by 60
inches high by full thickness, including face and backup wythes and accessories.
a. Include a sealant-filled joint at least 16 inches long in mockup.

b. Include lower corner of window opening at upper corner of exterior wall mockup.
Make opening approximately 12 inches wide by 16 inches high.
c. Include through-wall flashing installed for a 24-inch length in corner of exterior
wall mockup approximately 16 inches down from top of mockup, with a 12-inch
length of flashing left exposed to view (omit masonry above half of flashing).
d. Include water-resistive barrier, air barrier, veneer anchors, flashing, cavity
drainage material, and weep holes in exterior masonry-veneer wall mockup.
2. Clean exposed faces of mockups with masonry cleaner as indicated.

3. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather-resistant membrane.
4. Approval of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of
mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; and aesthetic qualities
of workmanship.
a. Approval of mockups is also for other material and construction qualities

specifically approved by A/E in writing.
b. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless A/E specifically approves such deviations
in writing.
A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an
enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units
become wet, do not install until they are dry.
B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not
use cementitious materials that have become damp.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination avoided.

D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers. Store preblended, dry
mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms in a dry location or in covered
weatherproof dispensing silos.
E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt
and oil.
A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with
waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when
construction is not in progress.
1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides of walls, and hold cover securely
in place.
2. Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes,
secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe, and hold
cover in place.
B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least
three days after building masonry walls or columns.
C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left
exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such
masonry.
1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading
coverings on ground and over wall surface.
2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and
integral finishes, from mortar droppings.
4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from
splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.
D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice
or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost
or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in
TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.
1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40
deg F and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days
after completing cleaning.
E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in

TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and
color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source
from single manufacturer for each product required.
2.2 UNIT MASONRY, GENERAL
A. Masonry Standard: Comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6, except as modified by

requirements in the Contract Documents.
B. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to
contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated. Do not use units where such
defects are exposed in the completed Work.
C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with requirements for fire-resistance-rated assembly designs

indicated.
1. Where fire-resistance-rated construction is indicated, units shall be listed and labeled by a

qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2.3 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed faces
of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers,
bonding, and other special conditions.
2. Provide bullnose units for outside corners unless otherwise indicated.
B. Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with integral water repellent for exposed units.
1. Integral Water Repellent: Liquid polymeric, integral water-repellent admixture that does
not reduce flexural bond strength. Units made with integral water repellent, when tested
according to ASTM E 514/E 514M as a wall assembly made with mortar containing
integral water-repellent manufacturer's mortar additive, with test period extended to 24
hours, shall show no visible water or leaks on the back of test specimen.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one

of the following:
1) ACM Chemistries.
2) BASF Corporation; Construction Systems.
3) Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company.

C. CMUs: ASTM C 90.
1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive
strength of 2150 psi.
2. Density Classification: Normal weight unless otherwise indicated.
3. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions.
D. Decorative CMUs: ASTM C 90.
1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive
strength of 2150 psi.
2. Density Classification: Normal weight.
3. Size (Actual Dimensions):
a. CMU-1 & CMU-3: 3-5/8 inches wide by 7-5/8 inches high by 15-5/8 inches long.
b. CMU-2: 3-5/8 inches wide by 3-5/8 inches high by 15-5/8 inches long.
4. Pattern and Texture:
a. CMU-2&3: Standard pattern, sandblasted texture. Match A/E's samples, basis of

design DesignBLOK by Oberfields, LLC.
b. CMU-1: Standard pattern, Smooth texture. Match A/E’s samples, basis of design
DesignBLOK by Oberfields, LLC.
5. Colors: Match A/E's samples, basis of design Oberfields, LLC:
a. CMU-1: DesignBLOK, Pioneer Leather #3322

b. CMU-2: DesignBLOK, Buff Cream #3302
c. CMU-3: DesignBLOK, Graphite #3325
6. Special Aggregate: Provide units made with aggregate matching aggregate in A/E's
sample.
2.4 MASONRY LINTELS
A. General: Provide one of the following:
B. Masonry Lintels: Built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam CMUs matching
adjacent CMUs in color, texture, and density classification, with reinforcing bars placed as
indicated and filled with coarse grout. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured.
2.5 BRICK -Alternate
A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching finish and
color of exposed faces of adjacent units:

1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose
unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces
finished.
2. Provide special shapes for applications where stretcher units cannot accommodate special
conditions, including those at corners, movement joints, bond beams, sashes, and lintels.
3. Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color, and texture on
exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing.
4. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in
sawed surfaces being exposed to view.
B. BR-1 Clay Face Brick: Facing brick complying with ASTM C 216.
1. Subject to compliance with the requirements, provide the following product or A/E
approved product meeting but not limited to color, texture and size.
a. The Belden Brick Company; Mod. Nutmeg Full Range Vel. A.
2. Grade: SW.
3. Type: FBX.
4. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested according to
ASTM C 67.
5. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated
"not effloresced."
6. Size (Actual Dimensions): 3-5/8 inches wide by 2-1/4 inches high by 15-5/8 inches long.
7. Application: Use where brick is exposed unless otherwise indicated.
C. BR-2 Clay Face Brick: Facing brick complying with ASTM C 216.
1. Subject to compliance with the requirements, provide the following product or A/E
approved product meeting but not limited to color, texture and size.
a. Bases of design: The Belden Brick Company; Modular No. 8530 A; Velour finish.
2. Grade: SW.
3. Type: FBX.
4. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested according to
ASTM C 67.
5. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated
"not effloresced."
6. Size (Actual Dimensions): 3-5/8 inches wide by 2-1/4 inches high by 7-5/8 inches long.
7. Application: Use where brick is indicated as BR-2.
2.6 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-
weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color
indicated.
1. Alkali content shall not be more than 0.1 percent when tested according to ASTM C 114.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing
no other ingredients.
D. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329/C 1329M.
E. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use
in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979/C 979M. Use only pigments with a record of
satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.

following:
a. Davis Colors.
b. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company.
c. Lanxess Corporation.
F. Colored Cement Products: Packaged blend made from portland cement and hydrated lime and
mortar pigments, all complying with specified requirements, and containing no other
ingredients.
1. Colored Portland Cement-Lime Mix:

of the following:
1) Essroc.
2) Holcim (US) Inc.
3) Lafarge North America Inc.
2. Formulate blend as required to produce color indicated or, if not indicated, as selected
from manufacturer's standard colors.
3. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight.
4. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of mortar cement by weight.
G. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.
1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or
crushed stone.
2. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone.
3. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce
required mortar color.
H. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
1. Fine Aggregates: ASTM C404, clean, sharp, natural sand free from loam, clay lumps, or
other deleterious substances.
2. Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C404, clean, uncoated, pea gravel containing no clay, mud,
loam, or foreign matter. Maximum aggregate size ¾ inch.

I. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with

ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar
of composition indicated.

following:
a. BASF Corporation; Construction Systems.

b. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company.
J. Water: Potable.
2.7 REINFORCEMENT
A. Uncoated-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60.
B. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M.
1. Interior Walls: Mill- galvanized carbon steel.

2. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized carbon.
3. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.148-inch diameter.
4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inch diameter.
5. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: 0.148-inch diameter.
6. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c.
7. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units.
C. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Ladder type with single pair of side
rods.
D. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement for Multiwythe Masonry:
1. Ladder type with one side rod at each face shell of hollow masonry units more than 4
inches wide, plus side rods at each wythe of masonry 4 inches wide or less.
2. Adjustable (two-piece) type, either ladder or truss design, with one side rod at each face
shell of backing wythe and with separate adjustable ties with pintle-and-eye connections
having a maximum horizontal play of 1/16 inch and maximum vertical adjustment of 1-
1/4 inches. Size ties to extend at least halfway through facing wythe but with at least 5/8-
inch cover on outside face. Ties have hooks or clips to engage a continuous horizontal
wire in the facing wythe.
2.8 TIES AND ANCHORS
A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that
comply with the following unless otherwise indicated:
1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M, with

ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating.

2. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel,
with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating.
2.9 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual" and as follows:
1. Fabricate continuous flashings in sections 96 inches long minimum, but not exceeding 12
feet. Provide splice plates at joints of formed, smooth metal flashing.
2. Fabricate through-wall flashing with snaplock receiver on exterior face where indicated
to receive counterflashing.
3. Fabricate metal drip edges from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches into wall and 1/2
inch out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed.
4. Solder metal items at corners.
B. Flexible Flashing: Use the following unless otherwise indicated:
1. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a pliable,

adhesive rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated
polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.040 inch.

of the following:
1) Advanced Building Products Inc.

2) Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.
3) GCP Applied Technologies Inc. (formerly Grace Construction Products).
4) Heckmann Building Products, Inc.
5) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
6) Polyguard Products, Inc.
7) W. R. Meadows, Inc.
8) Williams Products, Inc.
b. Accessories: Provide preformed corners, end dams, other special shapes, and
seaming materials produced by flashing manufacturer.
C. Application: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following:
1. Where flashing is indicated to receive counterflashing, use metal flashing.

2. Where flashing is indicated to be turned down at or beyond the wall face, use metal
flashing.
3. Where flashing is partly exposed and is indicated to terminate at the wall face, use metal
flashing with a drip edge or elastomeric thermoplastic flashing with a drip edge.
4. Where flashing is fully concealed, use flexible flashing.
D. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings:

1. Solder for Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with acid flux of type recommended
by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer.
2. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, chemically curing urethane sealant; of type, grade,
class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and remain
watertight.
E. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products
or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other
and to substrates.
F. Termination Bars for Flexible Flashing: Stainless steel bars 0.075 inch by 1 inch.
G. Termination Bars for Flexible Flashing: Stainless-steel sheet 0.019 inch by 1-1/2 inches with a
3/8 inch sealant flange at top.
H. Termination Bars for Flexible Flashing: Aluminum sheet 0.064 inch by 1-1/2 inches with a 3/8-
inch sealant flange at top.
2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1;
compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene, or
urethane.
B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying

with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 and designed to fit standard sash block and to
maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.
C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated felt complying with ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type I
(No. 15 asphalt felt).
D. Weep/Cavity Vent Products: Use the following unless otherwise indicated:

1.
2. Cellular Plastic Weep/Vent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV-resistant
polypropylene copolymer, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch less than
depth of outer wythe, in color selected from manufacturer's standard.

of the following:
1) Advanced Building Products Inc.

2) Heckmann Building Products, Inc.
3) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
E. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade
within the wall cavity.

following:

a. Advanced Building Products Inc.

b. CavClear/Archovations, Inc.
c. Heckmann Building Products, Inc.
d. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
e. Mortar Net Solutions.
2. Configuration: Provide one of the following:
a. Sheets or strips not less than 3/4 inch thick and installed to full height of cavity,
with additional strips 4 inches high at weep holes and thick enough to fill entire
depth of cavity and prevent weep holes from clogging with mortar.
2.11 MASONRY CLEANERS
A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing

mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without
discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by
cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

following:
a. Sure Klean 600 (BR-1)

b. Sure Klean Vana Trol (BR-2)
c. EaCo Chem, Inc. (BR-1 & 2)
d. Refer to manufacturer’s recommendations for CMU-1, 2 &3.
2.12 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators,

retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.

2. For exterior masonry, use portland cement-lime mortar.
3. For reinforced masonry, use mortar cement mortar.
4. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to
view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.
B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification. Provide the
following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated.
1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M.

2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S.
3. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and nonload-bearing walls and parapet walls; for
interior load-bearing walls; for interior nonload-bearing partitions; and for other
applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N.
4. For interior nonload-bearing partitions, Type O may be used instead of Type N.

C. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product
1. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight.

2. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement by weight.
3. Application: Use pigmented mortar for exposed mortar joints with the following units:
a. Alternate-At each Clay face brick type.

b. At each Decorative CMU unit type.
D. Colored-Aggregate Mortar: Produce required mortar color by using colored aggregates and
natural color or white cement as necessary to produce required mortar color.
1. Mix to match A/E's sample.

2. Application: Use colored-aggregate mortar for exposed mortar joints with the following
units:
a. Alternate-At each Clay face brick.

b. At each Decorative CMU
E. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.
1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will
comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour
height.
2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, paragraph 4.2.2 for specified 28-day
compressive strength indicated, but not less than 3000 psi.
3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to
ASTM C 143/C 143M.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental
to performance of the Work.
2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified.
3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.
4. Verify that substrates are free of substances that impair mortar bond.
B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify
actual locations of piping connections.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness
shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths
indicated.
B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.
C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing
equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to opening.
D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous
pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp,
unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut
units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.
E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and
textures. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.
F. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry.
3.3 TOLERANCES
A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:
1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation, do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or
minus 1/4 inch.
2. For location of elements in plan, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or
minus 1/2 inch.
3. For location of elements in elevation, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus
or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total.
B. Lines and Levels:
1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls, do not vary from level by more than 1/4
inch in 10 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.
2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary
from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.
3. For vertical lines and surfaces, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet ,
3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.
4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and
expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet,
1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.
5. For lines and surfaces, do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8
6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4
C. Joints:

1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch,
with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch.
2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more
than 1/8 inch.
3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8
inch or minus 1/4 inch.
4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus
1/8 inch. Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than
1/8 inch.
5. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line
by more than 1/16 inch from one masonry unit to the next.
3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint
thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets.
Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at
other locations.
B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in
running bond pattern; do not use units with less-than-nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions
at corners or jambs.
C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less
than 4 inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with
less-than-nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by stepping back units in each course from those in
course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive
mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh
masonry.
E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections.
Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
F. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.
G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of
metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below, and rod mortar or grout into core.
H. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and
similar items unless otherwise indicated.
I. Build nonload-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof
structure above unless otherwise indicated.
1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure
above.

2. Wedge nonload-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile, slate,
or metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead-load deflection of structure above approaches
final position.
3. At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure
above to comply with Section 078443 "Joint Firestopping."
3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Lay CMUs as follows:
1. Bed face shells in mortar and make head joints of depth equal to bed joints.
2. Bed webs in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.
3. Bed webs in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings.
4. Fully bed entire units, including areas under cells, at starting course on footings where
cells are not grouted.
5. Fully bed units and fill cells with mortar at anchors and ties as needed to fully embed
anchors and ties in mortar.
B. Set stone trim units in full bed of mortar with full vertical joints. Fill dowel, anchor, and similar
holes.
1. Clean soiled surfaces with fiber brush and soap powder and rinse thoroughly with clear
water.
2. Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar.
3. Rake out mortar joints for pointing with sealant.
C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint
thickness unless otherwise indicated.
D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than
paint) unless otherwise indicated.
E. Cut joints flush where indicated to receive cavity wall insulation and air barriers unless
3.6 COMPOSITE MASONRY
A. Retain one or more bonding methods in “Individual Metal Ties,” “Masonry-joint

Reinforcement,” and “Header Bonding” subparagraphs below; revise methods retained to suit
Project and office practice.
1. Individual Metal Ties: Provide ties as shown installed in horizontal joints, but not less
than one metal tie for 2.67 sq. ft. of wall area spaced not to exceed 16 inches o.c.
horizontally and 16 inches o.c. vertically. Stagger ties in alternate courses. Provide
additional ties within 12 inches of openings and space not more than 36 inches apart
around perimeter of openings. At intersecting and abutting walls, provide ties at no more
than 24 inches o.c. vertically.

a. Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable-type (two-piece-type) ties.
2. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints.
a. Where bed joints of both wythes align, use ladder-type reinforcement extending
across both wythes.
b. Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable-type (two-piece-type)
reinforcement with continuous horizontal wire in facing wythe attached to ties.
B. Bond wythes of composite masonry together using bonding system indicated on Drawings.
C. Collar Joints: Solidly fill collar joints by parging face of first wythe that is laid and shoving
units of other wythe into place.
D. Corners: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each wythe and course at corners unless
1. Provide continuity with masonry-joint reinforcement at corners by using prefabricated L-

shaped units as well as masonry bonding.
E. Intersecting and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion or control joints are shown at
juncture, bond walls together as follows:
1. Provide individual metal ties not more than 8 inches o.c.
3.7 CAVITY WALLS
A. Bond wythes of cavity walls together using one of the following methods:
1. Individual Metal Ties: Provide ties as shown installed in horizontal joints, but not less
than one metal tie for 2.67 sq. ft. of wall area spaced not to exceed 16 inches o.c.
horizontally and 16 inches o.c. vertically. Stagger ties in alternate courses. Provide
additional ties within 12 inches of openings and space not more than 36 inches apart
around perimeter of openings. At intersecting and abutting walls, provide ties at no more
than 24 inches o.c. vertically.
a. Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable-type (two-piece-type) ties.
b. Where one wythe is of clay masonry and the other of concrete masonry, use
adjustable-type (two-piece-type) ties to allow for differential movement regardless
of whether bed joints align.
2. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints.
a. Where bed joints of both wythes align, use ladder-type reinforcement extending
across both wythes.
b. Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable-type (two-piece-type)
reinforcement with continuous horizontal wire in facing wythe attached to ties.
c. Where one wythe is of clay masonry and the other of concrete masonry, use
adjustable-type (two-piece-type) reinforcement with continuous horizontal wire in

facing wythe attached to ties to allow for differential movement regardless of

whether bed joints align.
3. Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Comply with requirements for anchoring masonry veneers.
B. Bond wythes of cavity walls together using bonding system indicated on Drawings.
C. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel beds
away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. Do not attempt to trowel or
remove mortar fins protruding into cavity.
D. Installing Cavity Wall Insulation: Place small dabs of adhesive, spaced approximately 12 inches
o.c. both ways, on inside face of insulation boards, or attach with plastic fasteners designed for
this purpose. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other confining obstructions in
cavity, with edges butted tightly both ways. Press units firmly against inside wythe of masonry
or other construction as shown.
1. Fill cracks and open gaps in insulation with crack sealer compatible with insulation and
masonry.
3.8 ANCHORED MASONRY VENEERS
A. Anchor masonry veneers to concrete and masonry backup with masonry-veneer anchors to
comply with the following requirements:
1. Fasten screw-attached anchors to concrete and masonry backup with metal fasteners of
type indicated. Use two fasteners unless anchor design only uses one fastener.
2. Embed tie sections and connector sections and continuous wire in masonry joints.
3. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and
down.
4. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 18 inches o.c. vertically and horizontally.
Install additional anchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 24
inches, around perimeter.
B. Provide not less than 2 inches of airspace between back of masonry veneer and face of
insulation.
1. Keep airspace clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel
beds away from airspace, to minimize mortar protrusions into airspace. Do not attempt to
trowel or remove mortar fins protruding into airspace.
3.9 MASONRY-JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8
inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches.
B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.
D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.
3.10 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND CONCRETE
A. Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete, where masonry abuts or faces structural steel
or concrete, to comply with the following:
1. Provide an open space not less than 1 inch wide between masonry and structural steel or
concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid
materials.
2. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure.
3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 36 inches o.c.
horizontally.
3.11 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A. General: Install control- and expansion-joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses.
Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-
plane wall or partition movement.
B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows:
1. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block.
C. Form expansion joints in brick as follows:
1. Form open joint full depth of brick wythe and of width indicated, but not less than 3/8
inch for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Section 079200 "Joint
Sealants."
3.12 LINTELS
A. Install steel lintels where indicated.
B. Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches for brick-size
units and 24 inches for block-size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting
lintels.
3.13 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, AND CAVITY VENTS
A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges,
other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. Install cavity vents
at shelf angles, ledges, and other obstructions to upward flow of air in cavities, and where
indicated.

B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated:
1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could
puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on
sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal
penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing
manufacturer.
2. At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing through veneer, across airspace behind veneer,
and up face of sheathing at least 8 inches; with upper edge tucked under water-resistive
barrier, lapping at least 4 inches.
3. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry at each
end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches
to form end dams.
4. Interlock end joints of ribbed sheet metal flashing by overlapping ribs not less than 1-1/2
inches or as recommended by flashing manufacturer, and seal lap with elastomeric
sealant complying with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for application
indicated.
5. Install metal drip edges and sealant stops with ribbed sheet metal flashing by interlocking
hemmed edges to form hooked seam. Seal seam with elastomeric sealant complying with
requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for application indicated.
6. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop
flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall, and adhere flexible flashing to
top of metal flashing termination.
7. Cut flexible flashing off flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is
completed.
C. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be
built into masonry.
D. Install weep holes in exterior wythes and veneers in head joints of first course of masonry
immediately above embedded flashing.
1. Use specified weep/cavity vent products to form weep holes.

2. Space weep holes 24 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
3. Cover cavity side of weep holes with plastic insect screening at cavities insulated with
loose-fill insulation.
E. Place pea gravel in cavities as soon as practical to a height equal to height of first course above
top of flashing, but not less than 2 inches, to maintain drainage.
F. Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for cavity
drainage material in "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article.
G. Install cavity vents in head joints in exterior wythes at spacing indicated. Use specified
weep/cavity vent products to form cavity vents.
1. Close cavities off vertically and horizontally with blocking in manner indicated. Install
through-wall flashing and weep holes above horizontal blocking.

3.14 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION
A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support
reinforced masonry elements during construction.
1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as

indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace,
tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of
reinforced masonry.
2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened
sufficiently to carry their own weight and that of other loads that may be placed on them
during construction.
B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.
C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough
strength to resist grout pressure.
1. Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for cleanouts and for grout
placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.
2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches.
A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections
and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas as needed to perform
tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall
be done at Contractor's expense.
B. Inspections: Special inspections according to Level B in TMS 402/ACI 530/ASCE 5.
1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-
prepared mortar.
2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades,
sizes, and locations of reinforcement.
3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout.
C. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests.
D. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof.
E. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140 for
compressive strength.
F. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to
ASTM C 780.
G. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. Test
mortar for compressive strength.

H. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019.
3.16 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise
damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install
in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and
completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent
construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application,
where indicated.
C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar
fins and smears before tooling joints.
D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:
1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes
or chisels.
2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for
comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding
with cleaning of masonry.
3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering
them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking
tape.
4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by
rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.
5. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical
Notes 20.
6. Clean concrete masonry by applicable cleaning methods indicated in NCMA TEK 8-4A.
3.17 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL
A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's
property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.
B. Masonry Waste Recycling: Return broken CMUs not used as fill to manufacturer for recycling.
C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as
described above or recycled, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's
property.

BXUV.U905 - Fire-resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263 Page 1 of 2
BXUV - Fire Resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263

BXUV7 - Fire Resistance Ratings - CAN/ULC-S101 Certified for Canada
See General Information for Fire-resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263
See General Information for Fire Resistance Ratings - CAN/ULC-S101 Certified for Canada
Design No. U905

March 11, 2016
Bearing Wall Rating — 2 HR.
Nonbearing Wall Rating — 2 HR
This design was evaluated using a load design method other than the Limit States Design Method (e.g., Working Stress Design Method). For jurisdictions
employing the Limit States Design Method, such as Canada, a load restriction factor shall be used — See Guide BXUV or BXUV7
* Indicates such products shall bear the UL or cUL Certification Mark for jurisdictions employing the UL or cUL Certification (such as Canada), respectively.
1. Concrete Blocks* — Various designs. Classification D-2 (2 hr).
See Concrete Blocks category for list of eligible manufacturers.
2. Mortar — Blocks laid in full bed of mortar, nom. 3/8 in. thick, of not less than 2-1/4 and not more than 3-1/2 parts of clean sharp sand to 1 part
Portland cement (proportioned by volume) and not more than 50 percent hydrated lime (by cement volume). Vertical joints staggered.
3. Portland Cement Stucco or Gypsum Plaster — Add 1/2 hr to classification if used. Where combustible members are framed in wall, plaster or
stucco must be applied on the face opposite framing to achieve a max. Classification of 1-1/2 hr. Attached to concrete blocks (Item 1).
4. Loose Masonry Fill — If all core spaces are filled with loose dry expanded slag, expanded clay or shale (Rotary Kiln Process), water repellant
vermiculite masonry fill insulation, or silicone treated perlite loose fill insulation add 2 hr to classification.
5. Foamed Plastic* — (Optional-Not Shown) — 1-1/2 in. thick max, 4 ft wide sheathing attached to concrete blocks (Item 1).
ATLAS ROOFING CORP — "EnergyShield Pro Wall Insulation" and "EnergyShield Pro 2 Wall Insulation"
CARLISLE COATINGS & WATERPROOFING INC — Type R2+ Sheath
FIRESTONE BUILDING PRODUCTS CO L L C — "Enverge™ CI Foil Exterior Wall Insulation" and "Enverge™ CI Glass Exterior Wall
Insulation"
HUNTER PANELS — Types Xci-Class A, Xci 286
RMAX OPERATING L L C — "TSX-8500", "TSX-8510", "Thermasheath-XP", "ECOMAXci", "Thermasheath-3", "Durasheath-3"
THE DOW CHEMICAL CO — Types Thermax Sheathing, Thermax Light Duty Insulation, Thermax Heavy Duty Insulation, Thermax Metal
Building Board, Thermax White Finish Insulation, Thermax ci Exterior Insulation, Thermax XARMOR ci Exterior Insulation, Thermax IH Insulation,
Thermax Plus Liner Panel, Thermax Heavy Duty Plus (HDP) and TUFF-R™ ci Insulation
5A. Building Units — As an alternate to Items 5, min. 1-in thick polyisocyanurate composite foamed plastic insulation boards, nom. 48 by 48 or 96
in.
RMAX OPERATING L L C — "Thermasheath-SI", "ECOBASEci", "ThermaBase-CI"
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/ulweb/LISEXT/1FRAME/FireResistanceWizard.html?utm_... 12/8/2016
* Indicates such products shall bear the UL or cUL Certification Mark for jurisdictions employing the UL or cUL Certification (such as Canada),
respectively.
Last Updated on 2016-03-11
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/ulweb/LISEXT/1FRAME/FireResistanceWizard.html?utm_... 12/8/2016
SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Structural steel.
2. Grout.
1. Section 051213 "Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel Framing" for additional

requirements for architecturally exposed structural steel.
2. Section 053100 "Steel Decking" for field installation of shear connectors through deck.
3. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel fabrications and other steel
items not defined as structural steel.
4. Section 099123 "Interior Painting” for surface-preparation and priming requirements.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Structural Steel: Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as described in
AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint
and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats
are compatible with one another.
B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction

without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and
directions for installation.
Project 16018 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 1

AIA/TWG/GOP March 3, 2017
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.
1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.
2. Include embedment Drawings.
3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds,
and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed
and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain.
4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts.
Identify pretensioned and slip-critical, high-strength bolted connections.
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.
B. Welding certificates.
C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers,
certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
D. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties.
E. Product Test Reports: For the following:
1. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis.
2. Shear stud connectors.
3. Shop primers.
4. Nonshrink grout.
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in fabricating structural steel similar to

that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as
sufficient production capacity to fabricate structural steel without delaying the Work.
B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed structural steel
work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of
successful in-service performance.
C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,

"Structural Welding Code - Steel."
1. Welders and welding operators performing work on bottom-flange, demand-critical

welds shall pass the supplemental welder qualification testing, as required by AWS D1.8.
FCAW-S and FCAW-G shall be considered separate processes for welding personnel
qualification.

D. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:
1. AISC 303.
2. AISC 360.
3. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off
ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel
members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.
1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or
overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or
structures as directed.
B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact.
1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes
repackaging and seals containers.
2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use.
3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating
ASTM F 1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS
A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M.
B. Channels, Angles, M- and S-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500/A 500M, Grade B, structural tubing.
E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or Type S, Grade B.
1. Weight Class: Standard.

2. Finish: Black except where indicated to be galvanized.
F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.

2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS
A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural
bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened
carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish.
B. Zinc-Coated High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy-hex steel
structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade DH heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436,
Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers.
1. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating.
C. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished
carbon steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B.
D. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.
1. Configuration: Straight.
2. Nuts: ASTM A 563 hex carbon steel.
3. Washers: ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon steel.
4. Finish: Plain or Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C if exposed to
exterior in final condition.
E. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, straight.

F. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

2.3 PRIMER
A. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer

complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.
B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780/A 780M.

2.4 GROUT
A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, factory-packaged,

nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency
suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according
to AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," and to AISC 360.
1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated.

2. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up.
3. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/A 6M and maintain
markings until structural steel has been erected.
4. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly.
5. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-
priming operations.
B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.
1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in

AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.
D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.
E. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC-
SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning."
F. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors.

Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M
and manufacturer's written instructions.
G. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to
pass through steel members.
1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes
or enlarge holes by burning.
2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to
steel surfaces.
3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work.

2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS
A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint
specified.
1. Joint Type: Snug tightened.
B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding
procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.
1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes
without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303 for mill material.
2.7 SHOP PRIMING
A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:
1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded

members to a depth of 2 inches.
2. Surfaces to be field welded.
3. Surfaces of high-strength bolted, slip-critical connections.
4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing).
5. Galvanized surfaces.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter,
slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards:
1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning."
C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's

written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness
of 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and
exposed surfaces.
1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

2. Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection.
Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first.
2.8 GALVANIZING
A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel
according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.
1. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work unless they function as
weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.
2. Galvanize lintels and shelf angles attached to structural-steel frame and located in
exterior walls.

2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform shop tests and inspections.
1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being
fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections.
B. Bolted Connections: Inspect shop-bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for

Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
C. Welded Connections: Visually inspect shop-welded connections according to

AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:
1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.

2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished
weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted.
3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.
D. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect shop-welded shear connectors according to
requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows:
1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360-degree

flash or welding repairs to any shear connector.
2. Conduct tests according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M on additional shear
connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with certified steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces
and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with
requirements.
1. Prepare a certified survey of existing conditions. Include bearing surfaces, anchor rods,
bearing plates, and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and
elevations.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural
steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in
intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel,
connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated.
3.3 ERECTION
A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to
AISC 303 and AISC 360.
B. Baseplates, Bearing Plates and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces
of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface
of plates.
1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required.
2. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed.
Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before
packing with grout.
3. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain.
Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with
manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.
C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for
Steel Buildings and Bridges."
D. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before
permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that are in
permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for
discrepancies in elevations and alignment.
1. Level and plumb individual members of structure.

2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean
temperature when structure is completed and in service.
E. Splice members only where indicated.
F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Architect. Finish thermally cut
sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be
enlarged to admit bolts.
H. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors.

Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M
and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS
A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for

Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint
specified.
1. Joint Type: Snug tightened.
B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding
procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.
1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary
connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.
2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs where indicated, back gouge, and grind steel smooth.
3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes
without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel
Buildings and Bridges," for mill material.
A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following
special inspections:
1. Verify structural-steel materials and inspect steel frame joint details.

2. Verify weld materials and inspect welds.
3. Verify connection materials and inspect high-strength bolted connections.
B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
C. Bolted Connections: Inspect and test bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
D. Welded Connections: Visually inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
1. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field welds according to

AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:
a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.

b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on
finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not
accepted.
c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.
E. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field-welded shear connectors according to
requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows:
1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360-degree

flash or welding repairs to any shear connector.

2. Conduct tests according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M on additional shear

connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested.
3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.
B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is damaged or
missing and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1
for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool

cleaning.

SECTION 051213 - ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes architecturally exposed structural-steel (AESS).
1. Requirements in Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" also apply to AESS.
1. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" for additional requirements applicable to

AESS.
2. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel fabrications and other metal
items not defined as structural steel.
3. Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for surface preparation and priming requirements.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. AESS: Structural steel designated as "architecturally exposed structural steel" or "AESS" in the
Contract Documents.
B. Category 2 AESS: AESS that is within 20 feet vertically and horizontally of a walking surface
and that is visible to a person standing on that walking surface or is designated as "Category 2
architecturally exposed structural steel" or "AESS-2" in the Contract Documents.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint
A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of AESS components. Shop Drawings for structural steel
may be used for AESS provided items of AESS are specifically identified and requirements
below are met for AESS.
Project 16018 ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051213 - 1

1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.
2. Include embedment Drawings.
3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds,
and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed
and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain.
4. Indicate exposed surfaces and edges and surface preparation being used.
5. Indicate special tolerances and erection requirements.
A. Qualification Data: For Fabricator.
A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality

Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD, or is
accredited by the IAS Fabricator Inspection Program for Structural Steel (AC 172).
A. Use special care in handling to prevent twisting, warping, nicking, and other damage. Store
materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground
and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and
packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.
1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or
overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or
structures as directed.
A. Field Measurements: Where AESS is indicated to fit against other construction, verify actual
dimensions by field measurements before fabrication.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FILLER
A. Filler: Polyester filler intended for use in repairing dents in automobile bodies.
2.2 PRIMER
A. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer


2.3 FABRICATION
A. Shop fabricate and assemble AESS to the maximum extent possible. Locate field joints at
concealed locations if possible. Detail assemblies to minimize handling and to expedite
erection.
B. In addition to special care used to handle and fabricate AESS, comply with the following:
1. Fabricate with exposed surfaces smooth, square, and free of surface blemishes including
pitting, rust, scale, and roughness.
2. Grind sheared, punched, and flame-cut edges of AESS to remove burrs and provide
smooth surfaces and edges.
3. Fabricate AESS with exposed surfaces free of mill marks, including rolled trade names
and stamped or raised identification.
4. Fabricate AESS with exposed surfaces free of seams to maximum extent possible.
5. Remove blemishes by filling or grinding or by welding and grinding, before cleaning,
treating, and shop priming.
6. Fabricate with piece marks fully hidden in the completed structure or made with media
that permits full removal after erection.
7. Fabricate AESS to the tolerances specified in AISC 303 for steel that is not designated
AESS.
C. Coping, Blocking, and Joint Gaps: Maintain uniform gaps of 1/8 inch with a tolerance of 1/32
inch for AESS.
D. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to
pass through steel members.
1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces.

2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to
steel surfaces.
3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work.
2.4 SHOP PRIMING
A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:
1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded

members to a depth of 2 inches.
2. Surfaces to be field welded.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter,
slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards:
1. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's

written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness
of 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and
exposed surfaces.
1. Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection.
Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and
locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with
requirements.
B. Examine AESS for twists, kinks, warping, gouges, and other imperfections before erecting.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep AESS
secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in
intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel,
connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated.
1. If possible, locate welded tabs for attaching temporary bracing and safety cabling where
they will be concealed from view in the completed Work.
3.3 ERECTION
A. Set AESS accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and
AISC 360.
1. Erect AESS to the tolerances specified in AISC 303 for steel that is not designated AESS.
B. Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Architect. Finish thermally cut
sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to
inspect AESS as specified in Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing." The testing agency is
not responsible for enforcing requirements relating to aesthetic effect.

B. Architect will observe AESS in place to determine acceptability relating to aesthetic effect.
3.5 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Remove welded tabs that were used for attaching temporary bracing and safety cabling and that
are exposed to view in the completed Work. Grind steel smooth.
B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool

cleaning.
C. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Section 099123 "Interior
Painting."

SECTION 052100 - STEEL JOIST FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. K-series steel joists.

2. Joist accessories.
1. Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for installing bearing plates in unit masonry.
2. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" for field-welded shear connectors.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. SJI's "Specifications": Steel Joist Institute's "Standard Specifications, Load Tables and Weight
Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders."
B. Special Joists: Steel joists or joist girders requiring modification by manufacturer to support
nonuniform, unequal, or special loading conditions that invalidate load tables in SJI's
"Specifications."
A. Product Data: For each type of joist, accessory, and product.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include layout, designation, number, type, location, and spacing of joists.

2. Include joining and anchorage details; bracing, bridging, and joist accessories; splice and
connection locations and details; and attachments to other construction.
3. Indicate locations and details of bearing plates to be embedded in other construction.
A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.
Project 16018 STEEL JOIST FRAMING 052100 - 1

C. Manufacturer certificates.
D. Mill Certificates: For each type of bolt.
E. Comprehensive engineering analysis of special joists signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for its preparation.
F. Field quality-control reports.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer certified by SJI to manufacture joists complying

with applicable standard specifications and load tables in SJI's "Specifications.”
1. Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services for

designing special joists to comply with performance requirements.
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify field-welding procedures and personnel according to

AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
A. Deliver, store, and handle joists as recommended in SJI's "Specifications."
B. Protect joists from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and
handling.
1.8 SEQUENCING
A. Deliver steel bearing plates to be built into masonry construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:
1. Canam Steel Corporation; Canam Group, Inc.

2. CMC Joist & Deck
3. Gooder-Henrichsen Co.
4. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC.
5. Structures of U.S.A., Inc.
6. Valley Joist
7. Vulcraft; Nucor Vulcraft Group

2.2 K-SERIES STEEL JOISTS
A. Manufacture steel joists of type indicated according to "Standard Specification for Open Web
Steel Joists, K-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle top- and bottom-chord
members, underslung ends, and parallel top chord.
1. Joist Type: K-series steel joists.
B. Steel Joist Substitutes: Manufacture according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel
Joists, K-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle or -channel members.
C. Provide holes in chord members for connecting and securing other construction to joists.
D. Top-Chord Extensions: Extend top chords of joists with SJI's Type S top-chord extensions
where indicated, complying with SJI's "Specifications."
E. Extended Ends: Extend bearing ends of joists with SJI's Type R extended ends where indicated,
complying with SJI's "Specifications."
F. Camber joists according to SJI's "Specifications." Equip bearing ends of joists with
manufacturer's standard beveled ends or sloped shoes if joist slope exceeds 1/4 inch per 12
inches.
2.3 PRIMERS
A. Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, or manufacturer's standard shop primer complying with performance
requirements in SSPC-Paint 15.
2.4 JOIST ACCESSORIES
A. Bridging: Schematically indicated. Detail and fabricate according to SJI's "Specifications.

Furnish additional erection bridging if required for stability.
B. Fabricate steel bearing plates from ASTM A 36/A 36M steel with integral anchorages of sizes
and thicknesses indicated. Shop prime paint.
1. Finish: Plain, uncoated.
C. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.
D. Furnish miscellaneous accessories including splice plates and bolts required by joist
manufacturer to complete joist assembly.
2.5 CLEANING AND SHOP PAINTING
A. Clean and remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and
accessories by hand-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 2 or power-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 3.

B. Apply one coat of shop primer to joists and joist accessories to be primed to provide a
continuous, dry paint film not less than 1 mil thick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine supporting substrates, embedded bearing plates, and abutting structural framing for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured.
B. Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and true to line; securely fasten to supporting
construction according to SJI's "Specifications,” joist manufacturer's written instructions, and
requirements in this Section.
1. Before installation, splice joists delivered to Project site in more than one piece.
2. Space, adjust, and align joists accurately in location before permanently fastening.
3. Install temporary bracing and erection bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure that
joists are stabilized during construction.
4. Delay rigidly connecting bottom-chord extensions to columns or supports until dead
loads are applied.
C. Field weld joists to supporting steel bearing plates and framework. Coordinate welding
sequence and procedure with placement of joists. Comply with AWS requirements and
procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting
welding work.
D. Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before construction loads are
applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if terminating at walls or
beams.
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Visually inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

1. In addition to visual inspection, test field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the
following procedures, at testing agency's option:
a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165/E 165M.

b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709.
c. Ultrasonic Testing: ASTM E 164.
d. Radiographic Testing: ASTM E 94.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field
connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists, bearing plates, abutting
structural steel, and accessories.
1. Clean and prepare surfaces by hand-tool cleaning according to SSPC-SP 2 or power-tool

cleaning according to SSPC-SP 3.
2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as primer used on adjacent surfaces.

SECTION 053100 - STEEL DECKING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Roof deck.
1. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" for shop- and field-welded shear connectors.
2. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for framing deck openings with miscellaneous steel
shapes.
3. Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for repair painting of primed deck and finish painting
of deck.
A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans,
cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction.
A. Welding certificates.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of steel deck.
C. Product Test Reports: For tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that each of
the following complies with requirements:
1. Power-actuated mechanical fasteners.
D. Evaluation Reports: For steel deck, from ICC-ES.
Project 16018 STEEL DECKING 053100 - 1

E. Field quality-control reports.
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3/D1.3M,

"Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."
A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and
handling.
B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof
covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to
AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural
Members."
2.2 ROOF DECK
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the

following:
1. ASC Profiles, Inc.; a Blue Scope Steel company.

2. Canam United States; Canam Group Inc.
3. CMC Joist & Deck.
4. Consolidated Systems, Inc.; Metal Dek Group.
5. Cordeck.
6. DACS, Inc.
7. Epic Metals Corporation.
8. Marlyn Steel Decks, Inc.
9. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC.
10. Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Group.
11. Roof Deck, Inc.
12. Valley Joist; Subsidiary of EBSCO Industries, Inc.
13. Verco Manufacturing Co.

B. Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI
Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 31, and with the
following:
1. Galvanized and Shop-Primed Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS),
Grade 33, G60 zinc coating; cleaned, pretreated, and primed with manufacturer's standard
baked-on, rust-inhibitive primer.
a. Color: Manufacturer's standard.
2. Deck Profile: As indicated.

3. Profile Depth: As indicated.
4. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated.
5. Span Condition: Double span or more.
6. Side Laps: Overlapped or interlocking seam at Contractor's option.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with
requirements indicated.
B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically

driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws.
C. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel

screws, No. 10 minimum diameter.
D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber.
E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000
psi, not less than 0.0359-inch design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of
profile indicated or required for application.
F. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (230 MPa), of
same material and finish as deck, and of thickness and profile indicated.
G. Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material,
finish, and thickness as deck unless otherwise indicated.
H. Recessed Sump Pans: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch thick, of same material and finish as
deck, with 3-inch- wide flanges and level recessed pans of 1-1/2-inch minimum depth. For
drains, cut holes in the field.
I. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780/A 780M.
J. Repair Paint: Manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer of same color as primer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in
SDI Publication No. 31, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.
B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels if required to meet deflection limitations.
C. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members.
D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned
and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract
side-lap interlocks.
E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection.
F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting
through or adjacent to deck.
G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength,
continuity of deck, and support of other work.
H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.
3.3 ROOF-DECK INSTALLATION
A. Fasten roof-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface
diameter indicated or arc seam welds with an equal perimeter that is not less than 1-1/2 inches
long, and as follows:
1. Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch, nominal.

2. Weld Spacing: Weld edge and interior ribs of deck units with a minimum of two welds
per deck unit at each support. Space welds as indicated.
B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between
supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of one-half of the span or 36 inches, and as
follows:
1. Mechanically fasten with self-drilling, No. 10 diameter or larger, carbon-steel screws.

2. Fasten with a minimum of 1-1/2-inch- long welds.
C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2
inches, with end joints as follows:
1. End Joints: Lapped 2 inches minimum or butted at Contractor's option.
D. Roof Sump Pans and Sump Plates: Install over openings provided in roof deck and
mechanically fasten flanges to top of deck. Space mechanical fasteners not more than 12 inches
apart with at least one fastener at each corner.
1. Install reinforcing channels or zees in ribs to span between supports and mechanically
fasten.
E. Miscellaneous Roof-Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, end
closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. Weld
or mechanically fasten to substrate to provide a complete deck installation.
1. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of roof-deck panels unless otherwise indicated.
B. Field welds will be subject to inspection.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck
with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780/A 780M and manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Repair Painting: Wire brush and clean rust spots, welds, and abraded areas on both surfaces of
prime-painted deck immediately after installation, and apply repair paint.
1. Apply repair paint, of same color as adjacent shop-primed deck, to bottom surfaces of
deck exposed to view.
2. Wire brushing, cleaning, and repair painting of bottom deck surfaces are included in
Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Steel framing and supports for operable partitions.

2. Steel tube reinforcement for low partitions.
3. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.
4. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified
in other Sections.
5. Shelf angles.
6. Metal ladders.
B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:
1. Loose steel lintels.

2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts indicated
to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry.
3. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where they are not
specified in other Sections.
1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves,
slotted-channel inserts, wedge-type inserts, and other items cast into concrete.
2. Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for installing loose lintels, anchor bolts, and other items
built into unit masonry.
3. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing."
1.3 COORDINATION
D. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint
Project 16018 METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 1

E. Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other work.
Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves,
concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in
concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections,
and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
Provide Shop Drawings for the following:
1. Steel framing and supports for operable partitions.

2. Steel tube reinforcement for low partitions.
3. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.
4. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified
in other Sections.
5. Shelf angles.
6. Metal ladders.
7. Loose steel lintels.
B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For ladders, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.
C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers,
certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES.
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,

"Structural Welding Code - Steel."
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with
metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000

"Quality Requirements," to design ladders.
2.2 METALS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise
indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials
without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, cold-formed steel tubing.
D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 FASTENERS
A. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts,
ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.
B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 325, Type 3; with hex nuts,
ASTM A 563, Grade C3; and, where indicated, flat washers.
C. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts,

ASTM F 593; with hex nuts, ASTM F 594; and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy Group 1.
D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563; and,
where indicated, flat washers.
1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being
fastened is indicated to be galvanized.
E. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise
indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or
ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip
galvanized per ASTM F 2329.
F. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors.
1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with
ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1
stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer
1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.
B. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc-coated metal
and compatible with finish paint systems indicated.
C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and

compatible with paints specified to be used over it.
D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.
2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units
only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain
structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of
approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed
surfaces.
C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or
otherwise impairing work.
D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.
E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
surface.
F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or
welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head
(countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

G. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude
water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws,
and similar items.
I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring
devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.
J. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally
welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inch embedment and 2-inch
hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise
indicated.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to
complete the Work.
B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise
indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent
construction.
1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated.

2. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed.
C. Fabricate supports for operable partitions from continuous steel beams of sizes indicated with
attached bearing plates, anchors, and braces as recommended by partition manufacturer. Drill or
punch bottom flanges of beams to receive partition track hanger rods; locate holes where
indicated on operable partition Shop Drawings.
D. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.
E. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc-rich primer.
2.7 SHELF ANGLES
A. Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete
framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch bolts, spaced not more than 6
inches from ends and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide mitered and welded units at corners.

2. Provide open joints in shelf angles at expansion and control joints. Make open joint
approximately 2 inches larger than expansion or control joint.
B. For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support angles from backup masonry and
concrete.

C. Galvanize and prime shelf angles located in exterior walls.
D. Prime shelf angles located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer.
E. Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to cast-in-
place concrete.
2.8 METAL LADDERS
A. General:
1. Comply with ANSI A14.3.
B. Steel Ladders:
1. Space side rails 16 inches apart unless otherwise indicated.

2. Side rails: Continuous, 3/8-by-2-1/2-inch steel flat bars, with eased edges.
3. Rungs: 3/4-inch- diameter steel bars.
4. Fit rungs in centerline of side rails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces.
5. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung, either by coating rung with aluminum-
oxide granules set in epoxy-resin adhesive or by using a type of manufactured rung filled
with aluminum-oxide grout.
6. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches o.c. with welded or
bolted steel brackets.
7. Galvanize and prime ladders, including brackets.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM
A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown
with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed
field splices where possible.
B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with
other work.
1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry
construction.
C. Galvanize and prime exterior miscellaneous steel trim.
D. Prime exterior miscellaneous steel trim with zinc-rich primer.

2.10 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS
A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and
recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Fabricate in single lengths for
each opening unless otherwise indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit
where indicated.
B. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to 1/12 of clear span,
but not less than 8 inches unless otherwise indicated.
C. Galvanize and prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.
2.11 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES
A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from
concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than
two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.
2.12 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
B. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into
surrounding surface.
2.13 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for
steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.
1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint
adhesion.
B. Preparation for Shop Priming Galvanized Items: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of
grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic phosphate process.
C. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded
in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.
D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3,
"Commercial Blast Cleaning" Or SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning”
E. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification
No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing
metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with
edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and
levels.
B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are
not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
surface.
D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal
fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for
use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and
other connectors.
E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete,
masonry, or similar construction.
3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported,
including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.
B. Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to, and rigidly brace from, building structure.
C. Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure girders
with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through top plates of
pipe columns.
1. Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated for girders supported on concrete or
masonry, install as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.

SECTION 061053 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers.

2. Utility shelving.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Boards or Strips: Lumber of less than 2 inches nominal size in least dimension.
B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater size but less than 5 inches nominal
size in least dimension.
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate
type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.
2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include
physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent
testing agency.
3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before
and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent
testing agency according to ASTM D 5664.
4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of
treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.
Project 16018 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 061053 - 1

A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:
1. Preservative-treated wood.
2. Fire-retardant-treated wood.
3. Power-driven fasteners.
4. Post-installed anchors.
5. Metal framing anchors.
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-
retardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that
periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is
representative of the material tested.
A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation.
Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide
for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is
indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency
certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the
ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on
end or back of each piece.
3. Dress lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior
construction not in contact with ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in
contact with ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with ground.

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no

arsenic or chromium.
B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use
material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board
of Review.
1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of
each piece.
D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings.
2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, materials shall comply with
requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-
test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test
method indicated by a qualified testing agency.
B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread

index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant
progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame
front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during
the test.
1. Treatment shall not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.

2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire-
retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to
accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where
indicated.
3. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less
when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where
exterior type is not indicated.
4. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according to
ASTM D 5664, and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to
ASTM D 6841.
C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent.
D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing

agency.
1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of
each piece.
E. Application: Treat all miscellaneous carpentry unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other
construction, including the following:
1. Blocking.
2. Nailers.
3. Cants.
4. Furring.
5. Grounds.
6. Utility shelving.
B. Dimension Lumber Items: Standard, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used
provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and
purpose.
C. Utility Shelving: Lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content of any of the following
species and grades:
1. Eastern white pine, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine; Standard or
No. 3 Common grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
2. Mixed southern pine or southern pine No. 1 grade; SPIB.
3. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or spruce-pine-fir, Construction or No. 2 Common grade;
NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
D. Concealed Boards: 15 percent maximum moisture content of any of the following species and
grades:
1. Mixed southern pine or southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB.

2. Eastern softwoods, No. 2 Common grade; NELMA.
3. Northern species, No. 2 Common grade; NLGA.
E. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber
of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will
interfere with its attachment and purpose.
F. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to
eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.
G. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots
capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.

2.5 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in
this article for material and manufacture.
1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated,

or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating
complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C 1002 or ASTM C 954 as appropriate for
substrate, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.
D. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC01 or ICC-ES AC58 as appropriate for the substrate.
1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633,

Class Fe/Zn 5.
2. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and
ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit
carpentry accurately to other construction. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to
comply with requirements for attaching other construction.
B. Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install
fasteners through each fastener hole.
C. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.
D. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures,
specialty items, and trim.
1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where
framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips
not more than 16 inches o.c.

E. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and
as follows:
1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96
inches o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to
close furred spaces.
2. Fire block concealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not more
than 20 feet o.c.
F. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics do not interfere with installation or with
fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with
function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or
optimum joint arrangement.
G. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated
lumber.
1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water.
2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.
H. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install

continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.
I. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying
with the following:
1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.
J. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully
penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials.
Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails
snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated.
3.2 WOOD BLOCKING AND NAILER INSTALLATION
A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated
and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other
work involved.
B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces
unless otherwise indicated.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite
protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment.
Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.

B. Protect miscellaneous rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, miscellaneous rough
carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by
spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.

SECTION 071113 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Cold-applied, cut-back-asphalt dampproofing.

2. Cold-applied, emulsified-asphalt dampproofing.
1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for bituminous vapor retarders under slabs-on-
grade.
2. Section 071326 "Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing" for waterproofing.
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with application only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit dampproofing to be performed according to manufacturers' written
instructions.
B. Ventilation: Provide adequate ventilation during application of dampproofing in enclosed

spaces. Maintain ventilation until dampproofing has cured.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary dampproofing materials and primers from single source
from single manufacturer. Provide protection course auxiliary materials recommended in
writing by manufacturer of primary materials.
Project 16018 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 071113 - 1

A. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC content limits of authorities having jurisdiction
2.3 COLD-APPLIED, CUT-BACK-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING

following:
1. APOC, Inc; a division of Gardner Industries.

2. Brewer Company (The).
3. Henry Company.
B. Trowel Coats: ASTM D 4586/D 4586M, Type I, Class 1, fibered.
C. Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 4479/D 4479M, Type I, fibered.
2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. Furnish auxiliary materials recommended in writing by dampproofing manufacturer for

intended use and compatible with bituminous dampproofing.
B. Cut-Back-Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41/D 41M.
C. Asphalt-Coated Glass Fabric: ASTM D 1668/D 1668M, Type I.
D. Patching Compound: Epoxy or latex-modified repair mortar of type recommended in writing by

dampproofing manufacturer.
E. Protection Course: Smooth-surfaced roll roofing complying with ASTM D 6380/D 6380M,
Class S, Type III.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for surface smoothness, maximum surface moisture content, and other conditions
affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with application only after substrate construction and penetrating work have been
completed and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide
clean, dust-free, and dry substrates for dampproofing application.
B. Mask or otherwise protect adjoining exposed surfaces from being stained, spotted, or coated
with dampproofing. Prevent dampproofing materials from entering and clogging weep holes
and drains.
C. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to dampproofing work; fill voids,
seal joints, and remove bond breakers if any.
D. Apply patching compound to patch and fill tie holes, honeycombs, reveals, and other
imperfections.
3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for dampproofing application, cure time
between coats, and drying time before backfilling unless otherwise indicated.
1. Apply dampproofing to provide continuous plane of protection.

2. Apply additional coats if recommended in writing by manufacturer or to achieve a
smooth surface and uninterrupted coverage.
B. Where dampproofing footings and foundation walls, apply from finished-grade line to top of
footing; extend over top of footing and down a minimum of 6 inches over outside face of
footing.
1. Extend dampproofing 12 inches onto intersecting walls and footings, but do not extend
onto surfaces exposed to view when Project is completed.
2. Install flashings and corner protection stripping at internal and external corners, changes
in plane, construction joints, cracks, and where indicated as "reinforced," by embedding
an 8-inch-wide strip of asphalt-coated glass fabric in a heavy coat of dampproofing.
Dampproofing coat for embedding fabric is in addition to other coats required.
3.4 COLD-APPLIED, CUT-BACK-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING
A. Concrete Foundations: Apply two brush or spray coats at not less than 1.25 gal./100 sq. ft. for
first coat and 1 gal./100 sq. ft. for second coat.
3.5 PROTECTION COURSE INSTALLATION
A. Install protection course over completed-and-cured dampproofing. Comply with dampproofing-

material and protection-course manufacturers' written instructions for attaching protection
course.

3.6 PROTECTION
A. Correct dampproofing that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates, and reapply
dampproofing.

SECTION 071900 - WATER REPELLENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes penetrating water-repellent treatments for the following vertical and horizontal
surfaces:
1. Concrete unit masonry.
1. Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for integral water-repellent admixture for unit masonry
assemblies.
1. Include manufacturer's printed statement of VOC content.

2. Include manufacturer's recommended number of coats for each type of substrate and
spreading rate for each separate coat.
3. Include printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category
specified in Part 2 that specifies water repellents approved by MPI, with the proposed
product highlighted.
A. Qualification Data: For Applicator.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of water repellent.
C. Preconstruction Test Reports: For water-repellent-treated substrates.
Project 16018 WATER REPELLENTS 071900 - 1

D. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
A. Applicator Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.
B. Mockups: Prepare mockups of each required water repellent on each type of substrate required
to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Locate mockups on masonry sample panels.
2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations
in writing.
A. Limitations: Proceed with application only when the following existing and forecasted weather
and substrate conditions permit water repellents to be applied according to manufacturers'
written instructions and warranty requirements:
1. Concrete surfaces and mortar have cured for not less than 28 days.
2. Building has been closed in for not less than 30 days before treating wall assemblies.
3. Ambient temperature is above 40 deg F and below 100 deg F and will remain so for 24
hours.
4. Substrate is not frozen and substrate-surface temperature is above 40 deg F and below
100 deg F.
5. Rain or snow is not predicted within 24 hours.
6. Not less than seven days have passed since surfaces were last wet.
7. Windy conditions do not exist that might cause water repellent to be blown onto
vegetation or surfaces not intended to be treated.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agree(s) to repair or

replace materials that fail to maintain water repellency specified in "Performance
Requirements" Article within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Performance: Water repellents shall meet the following performance requirements as

determined by testing on manufacturer's standard substrates representing those indicated for this
Project.
B. Water Absorption: Minimum 80 percent reduction of water absorption after 24 hours for treated
compared to untreated specimens when tested according to the following:
1. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 140.
C. Water Penetration and Leakage through Masonry: Minimum 90 percent reduction in leakage
rate of treated compared to untreated specimens, according to ASTM E 514/E 514M.
D. Durability: Maximum 5 percent loss of water-repellent performance after 2500 hours of

weathering according to ASTM G 154 compared to water-repellent-treated specimens before
weathering.
E. Chloride-Ion Intrusion in Concrete: NCHRP Report 244, Series II tests.
1. Reduction of Water Absorption: 80 percent.

2. Reduction in Chloride Content: 80 percent.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements and conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry according to water-repellent manufacturer's
requirements. Check moisture content in three representative locations by method
recommended by manufacturer.
2. Verify that there is no efflorescence or other removable residues that would be trapped
beneath the application of water repellent.
3. Verify that required repairs are complete, cured, and dry before applying water repellent.
B. Test pH level according to water-repellent manufacturer's written instructions to ensure

chemical bond to silica-containing or siliceous minerals.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. New Construction and Repairs: Allow concrete and other cementitious materials to age before
application of water repellent, according to repellent manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Cleaning: Before application of water repellent, clean substrate of substances that could impair
penetration or performance of product according to water-repellent manufacturer's written
instructions and as follows:
1. Concrete Unit Masonry: Remove oil, curing compounds, laitance, and other substances
that inhibit penetration or performance of water repellents according to ASTM E 1857.
C. Protect adjoining work, including mortar and sealant bond surfaces, from spillage or blow-over
of water repellent. Cover adjoining and nearby surfaces of aluminum and glass if there is the
possibility of water repellent being deposited on surfaces. Cover live vegetation.
D. Coordination with Mortar Joints: Do not apply water repellent until pointing mortar for joints
adjacent to surfaces receiving water-repellent treatment has been installed and cured.
E. Coordination with Sealant Joints: Do not apply water repellent until sealants for joints adjacent
to surfaces receiving water-repellent treatment have been installed and cured.
1. Water-repellent work may precede sealant application only if sealant adhesion and
compatibility have been tested and verified using substrate, water repellent, and sealant
materials identical to those required.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect the

substrate before application of water repellent and to instruct Applicator on the product and
application method to be used.
B. Apply coating of water repellent on surfaces to be treated using 15 psi-pressure spray with a
fan-type spray nozzle to the point of saturation. Apply coating in dual passes of uniform,
overlapping strokes. Remove excess material; do not allow material to puddle beyond
saturation. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for application procedure unless
C. Apply a second saturation coating, repeating first application. Comply with manufacturer's
written instructions for limitations on drying time between coats and after rainstorm wetting of
surfaces between coats. Consult manufacturer's technical representative if written instructions
are not applicable to Project conditions.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Immediately clean water repellent from adjoining surfaces and surfaces soiled or damaged by
water-repellent application as work progresses. Correct damage to work of other trades caused
by water-repellent application, as approved by Architect.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written cleaning instructions.

SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Extruded polystyrene foam-plastic board.

2. Glass-fiber blanket.
3. Spray-applied cellulosic insulation.
1. Section 075419 "Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Roofing and Ethylene Interpolymer (KEE)
Roofing" for insulation specified as part of roofing construction.
2. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for sound attenuation blanket used as acoustic
insulation.
A. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
B. Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation, from ICC-ES.
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture,
soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's
written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
B. Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows:
1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and
concealment.
Project 16018 THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 1

2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to Project
site until just before installation time.
3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each
area of construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD
A. Extruded polystyrene boards in this article are also called "XPS boards." Roman numeral
designators in ASTM C 578 are assigned in a fixed random sequence, and their numeric order
does not reflect increasing strength or other characteristics.
B. Extruded Polystyrene Board, Type VI: ASTM C 578, Type VI, 40-psi minimum compressive
strength; maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 450, respectively, per
ASTM E 84.

following:
a. DiversiFoam Products
b. Dow Chemical Company (The)
c. Owens Corning
d. Soprema, Inc.
2.2 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET
A. Glass-Fiber Blanket, Unfaced: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-
developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for
combustion characteristics.

following:
a. CertainTeed Corporation
b. Johns Manville, a Berkshire Hathaway company
c. Knauf Insulation
d. Owens Corning
2.3 SPRAY-APPLIED CELLULOSIC INSULATION
A. Self-Supported, Spray-Applied Cellulosic Insulation: ASTM C 1149, Type I (materials applied

with liquid adhesive; suitable for either exposed or enclosed applications), chemically treated
for flame-resistance, processing, and handling characteristics.


following:
a. Central Fiber LLC.

b. GreenFiber
c. Hamilton Manufacturing Inc.
d. International Cellulose Corp.
e. Nu-Wool Co., Inc.
f. AGM Industries, Inc
g. Gemco
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Insulation for Miscellaneous Voids:
1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 764, Type II, loose fill; with maximum flame-spread
and smoke-developed indexes of 5, per ASTM E 84.
2. Spray Polyurethane Foam Insulation: ASTM C 1029, Type II, closed cell, with maximum
flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.
B. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product compatible with insulation and air and water barrier
materials, and with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without
damaging insulation and substrates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation, including removing projections
capable of puncturing insulation or vapor retarders, or that interfere with insulation attachment.
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and

applications.
B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice,
rain, or snow at any time.
C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Fit tightly around obstructions and fill
voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
D. Provide sizes to fit applications and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths,
and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or
required to make up total thickness or to achieve R-value.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF SLAB INSULATION
A. On vertical slab edge and foundation surfaces, set insulation units using manufacturer's
recommended adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches below exterior

grade line.
B. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.
1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches in from exterior

walls.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF CAVITY-WALL INSULATION
A. Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Install pads of adhesive spaced approximately 24 inches o.c.
both ways on inside face and as recommended by manufacturer. Fit courses of insulation
between wall ties and other obstructions, with edges butted tightly in both directions. Press units
firmly against inside substrates.
1. Supplement adhesive attachment of insulation by securing boards with two-piece wall

ties designed for this purpose and specified in Section 042000 "Unit Masonry."
3.5 MISCELLANEOUS INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Spray-Applied Cellulosic Insulation: Apply spray-applied insulation according to

manufacturer's written instructions at intersections of walls and roofs and as indicated on the
drawings.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and
other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse
and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after
installation.

SECTION 072500 - WEATHER BARRIERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Building paper.
2. Flexible flashing.
1. For building wrap, include data on air and water-vapor permeance based on testing
according to referenced standards.
B. Shop Drawings: Show details of building paper at terminations, openings, and penetrations.
Show details of flexible flashing applications.
A. Evaluation Reports: For water-resistive barrier and flexible flashing, from ICC-ES.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER
A. Building Paper: ASTM D 226, Type 1 No. 15 asphalt-saturated organic felt), unperforated.
2.2 FLEXIBLE FLASHING
A. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a

pliable, rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum
foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.030 inch.
Project 16018 WEATHER BARRIERS 072500 - 1

AIA/TWG March 3, 2017

following:
a. Advanced Building Products, Inc.

b. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc.
c. Fiberweb, Clark Hammerbeam Corp.
d. Fortifbiber Building Systems Group
e. GCP Applied Technologies, Inc.
f. MFM Building Products Corp.
g. Polyguard Products, Inc.
h. Sandwell Manufacturing Co., Inc.
i. Wire-Bond
B. Primer for Flexible Flashing: Product recommended in writing by flexible flashing

manufacturer for substrate.
C. Nails and Staples: Product recommended in writing by flexible flashing manufacturer and
complying with ASTM F 1667.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER INSTALLATION
A. Cover exposed exterior surface of sheathing with water-resistive barrier securely fastened to
framing immediately after sheathing is installed.
B. Cover sheathing with water-resistive barrier as follows:
1. Cut back barrier 1/2 inch on each side of the break in supporting members at expansion-
or control-joint locations.
2. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4-inch overlap unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Building Paper: Apply horizontally with a 2-inch overlap and a 6-inch end lap; fasten to
sheathing with galvanized staples or roofing nails.
3.2 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Prime substrates as recommended by flashing manufacturer.

2. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches except that at flashing
flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width.
3. Lap flashing over water-resistive barrier at bottom and sides of openings.
4. Lap water-resistive barrier over flashing at heads of openings.
5. After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller to ensure
that flashing is completely adhered to substrates.
Project 16018 WEATHER BARRIERS 072500 - 2

SECTION 074213.23 - METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes metal composite material wall panels.
1. Meet with Owner, A/E, Owner's insurer if applicable, metal composite material panel
Installer, metal composite material panel manufacturer's representative, structural-support
Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects metal composite material
panels, including installers of doors, windows, and louvers.
2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's
personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
3. Review methods and procedures related to metal composite material panel installation,
including manufacturer's written instructions.
4. Examine support conditions for compliance with requirements, including alignment
between and attachment to structural members.
5. Review flashings, special siding details, wall penetrations, openings, and condition of
other construction that affect metal composite material panels.
6. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and tests and
inspections if applicable.
7. Review temporary protection requirements for metal composite material panel assembly
during and after installation.
8. Review procedures for repair of panels damaged after installation.
9. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish
copy of record to each participant.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components

and profiles, and finishes for each type of panel and accessory.
Project 16018 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS 07421323 - 1

B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal composite material panels; details of
edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment assembly, trim,
flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details.
2. Accessories: Include details of the flashing, trim and anchorage, at a scale of not less than
1-1/2 inches per 12 inches.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of metal composite material panel indicated with
factory-applied color finishes.
1. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size
indicated below.
1. Metal Composite Material Panels: 12 inches long by actual panel width. Include
fasteners, closures, and other metal composite material panel accessories.
B. Product Test Reports: For each product, tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
C. Field quality-control reports.
D. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.
A. Maintenance Data: For metal composite material panels to include in maintenance manuals.
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and
approved by manufacturer.
A. Deliver components, metal composite material panels, and other manufactured items so as not
to be damaged or deformed. Package metal composite material panels for protection during
transportation and handling.
B. Unload, store, and erect metal composite material panels in a manner to prevent bending,
warping, twisting, and surface damage.

C. Stack metal composite material panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with
suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal composite material panels to ensure
dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal composite material panels
in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.
D. Retain strippable protective covering on metal composite material panels during installation.
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit assembly of metal composite material panels to be performed according to
manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate metal composite material panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim,
construction of soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and
noncorrosive installation.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of metal composite material panel systems that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing.

b. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.
2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer

agrees to repair finish or replace metal composite material panels that show evidence of
deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.
b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
2. Finish Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide metal composite material panel systems capable of

withstanding the effects of the following loads, based on testing according to ASTM E 330:
1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
3. Deflection Limits: For wind loads, no greater than 1/180 of the span.
B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint
sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface
temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
C. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Metal composite material wall panel system passes NFPA 285
testing.
2.2 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS
A. Metal Composite Material Wall Panel Systems: Provide factory-formed and -assembled, metal
composite material wall panels fabricated from two metal facings that are bonded to a solid,
extruded thermoplastic core; formed into profile for installation method indicated. Include
attachment assembly components and accessories required for weathertight system.

following:
a. Alcoa Architectural Products (USA).

b. ALPOLIC Materials; Mitsubishi Plastics Composites America.
c. Laminators, Inc.
d. Larson by Alucoil PE
2. Fabricators/Approved Manufacture’s Installers: Subject to compliance with the

requirements, Fabricators or Approved Manufacturer’s installers shall be responsible for
all required shop drawings and engineering requirements.
B. Aluminum-Faced Composite Wall Panels: Formed with 0.020-inch-thick, coil-coated aluminum

sheet facings.
1. Panel Thickness: 0.236 inch.

2. Core: Standard.
3. Exterior Finish: Metallic fluoropolymer.
a. Color: Match A/E's samples; Laminators, 028 Champagne

C. Attachment Assembly Components: Formed from extruded aluminum.
D. Attachment Assembly: Manufacturer's standard.
A. Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C 645, cold-formed, metallic-coated steel
sheet ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation or ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50
aluminum-zinc-alloy coating designation unless otherwise indicated. Provide manufacturer's
standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal composite material panel
system.
B. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system
including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets,
fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal composite material
panels unless otherwise indicated.
C. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal composite
material panels as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance.
Locations include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed
openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with
same finish system as adjacent metal composite material panels.
D. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed
fasteners with heads matching color of metal composite material panels by means of plastic
caps or factory-applied coating. Provide EPDM or PVC sealing washers for exposed fasteners.
E. Panel Sealants: ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane or silicone sealant; of type, grade, class,
and use classifications required to seal joints in metal composite material panels and remain
weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal composite material panel manufacturer.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate and finish metal composite material panels and accessories at the factory, by
manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance
requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with
dimensional and structural requirements.
B. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's
recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"
that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.
1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling,
and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded
back to form hems.
2. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and
seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.

3. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-
lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.
4. Sealed Joints: Form non-expansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate sealant
and to comply with SMACNA standards.
5. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not
allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view.
6. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored
or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended in writing by metal panel
manufacturer.
a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or

metal wall panel manufacturer for application but not less than thickness of metal
being secured.
2.5 FINISHES
A. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are

acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations
in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable
if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize
contrast.
C. Aluminum Panels and Accessories:
1. Metallic Fluoropolymer: AAMA 2605. Three-coat fluoropolymer finish with suspended

metallic flakes containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color
coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to
comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, metal composite material panel supports, and other
conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Examine wall framing to verify that girts, angles, channels, studs, and other structural
panel support members and anchorage have been installed within alignment tolerances
required by metal composite material wall panel manufacturer.
B. Examine roughing-in for components and assemblies penetrating metal composite material
panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal composite
material panels before installation.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support
members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal composite material panel
manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.3 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. General: Install metal composite material panels according to manufacturer's written

instructions in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings. Install panels
perpendicular to supports unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal composite material panels
and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural
movement.
1. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal composite material panels.

2. Flash and seal metal composite material panels at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with
self-tapping screws. Do not begin installation until air- or water-resistive barriers and
flashings that will be concealed by metal composite material panels are installed.
3. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes.
4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment.
5. Install flashing and trim as metal composite material panel work proceeds.
6. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices
and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition.
7. Align bottoms of metal composite material panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or
self-tapping screws. Fasten flashings and trim around openings and similar elements with
self-tapping screws.
8. Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe- and conduit-penetrating panels.
B. Fasteners:
1. Aluminum Panels: Use aluminum or stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the
exterior; use aluminum or galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.
C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect
against galvanic action as recommended in writing by metal composite material panel
manufacturer.
D. Attachment Assembly, General: Install attachment assembly required to support metal

composite material wall panels and to provide a complete weathertight wall system, including
subgirts, perimeter extrusions, tracks, drainage channels, panel clips, and anchor channels.
1. Include attachment to supports, panel-to-panel joinery, panel-to-dissimilar-material

joinery, and panel-system joint seals.
E. Track-Support Installation: Install support assembly at locations, spacings, and with fasteners
recommended by manufacturer. Use manufacturer's standard horizontal tracks and vertical

tracks that provide support and secondary drainage assembly, draining to the exterior at
horizontal joints through drain tube. Attach metal composite material wall panels to tracks by
interlocking panel edges with manufacturer's standard "T" clips.
1. Attach routed-and-returned flanges of wall panels to perimeter extrusions with

manufacturer's standard fasteners.
2. Install wall panels to allow individual panels to "free float" and be installed and removed
without disturbing adjacent panels.
3. Do not apply sealants to joints unless otherwise indicated.
F. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight
mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other
components.
1. Install components required for a complete metal composite material panel assembly
including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure
strips, and similar items. Provide types indicated by metal composite material panel
manufacturer; or, if not indicated, provide types recommended in writing by metal
composite material panel manufacturer.
G. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation
instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners
where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints,
and seams that are permanently watertight.
1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without buckling and tool marks and that is true
to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet
metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof performance.
3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal composite material wall panel units within
installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet, non-accumulative, on level, plumb, and location lines
as indicated, and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching
profiles.
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and

inspect completed metal composite material wall panel installation, including accessories.
B. Metal composite material wall panels will be considered defective if they do not pass test and
inspections.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal composite
material panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation
instructions. On completion of metal composite material panel installation, clean finished
surfaces as recommended by metal composite material panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean
condition during construction.
B. After metal composite material panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of
obstructions, dirt, and sealant.
C. Replace metal composite material panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond
successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 074213.23

SECTION 075423 - THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Adhered thermoplastic polyolefin (TPO) roofing system.

2. Roof insulation.
3. Walkways.
1. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking;
and for wood-based, structural-use roof deck panels.
2. Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation" for insulation beneath the roof deck.
3. Section 077100 "Roof Specialties" for manufactured copings and roof edge flashings.
4. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants, joint fillers, and joint preparation.
5. Section 221423 "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties" for roof drains.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D 1079 and glossary in NRCA's "The NRCA
Roofing Manual: Membrane Roof Systems" apply to Work of this Section.
A. Preinstallation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Meet with Owner, A/E and Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency
representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck
Installer, air barrier Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing,
including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.
2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's
written instructions.
3. Review and finalize construction schedule, and verify availability of materials, Installer's
4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements,
including flatness and fastening.
Project 16018 THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075423 - 1

5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.
6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations,
equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that affects roofing system.
7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if
applicable.
8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after
installation.
9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.
B. Shop Drawings: Include roof plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work, including
the following:
1. Layout and thickness of insulation.

2. Base flashings and membrane termination details.
3. Flashing details at penetrations.
4. Tapered insulation layout, thickness, and slopes.
5. Roof plan showing orientation of steel roof deck and orientation of roof membrane,
fastening spacings, and patterns for mechanically fastened roofing system.
6. Insulation fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field-of-roof locations.
C. Samples for Verification: For the following products:
1. Roof membrane and flashings, of color required.

2. Walkway pads or rolls, of color required.
D. Wind Uplift Resistance Submittal: For roofing system, indicating compliance with wind uplift
B. Manufacturer Certificates:
1. Performance Requirement Certificate: Signed by roof membrane manufacturer, certifying

that roofing system complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements"
Article.
a. Submit evidence of compliance with performance requirements.
2. Special Warranty Certificate: Signed by roof membrane manufacturer, certifying that all
materials supplied under this Section are acceptable for special warranty.

C. Product Test Reports: For roof membrane and insulation, for tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, indicating compliance with specified requirements.
D. Evaluation Reports: For components of roofing system, from ICC-ES.
E. Field quality-control reports.
F. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties.
A. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is UL listed for roofing system

identical to that used for this Project.
B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing

system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive
manufacturer's special warranty.
A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled
with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or
listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.
B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location
and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid
material from direct sunlight.
1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated
shelf life.
C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight,
moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation
manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
D. Handle and store roofing materials, and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent
deflection of deck.
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions
and warranty requirements.

1.11 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that
fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Special warranty includes roof membrane, base flashings, roof insulation, fasteners, and
other components of roofing system.
2. Warranty Period: 20 years (no dollar limit) from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form at end of this
Section, signed by Installer, covering the Work of this Section, including all components of
roofing system such as roof membrane, base flashing, roof insulation, fasteners, and walkway
products, for the following warranty period:
1. Roof Contractor: Submit the signed Special Project Warranty Roofing, on the form shon
in Section 075419GF “TPO Roofing Special Warranty.” Submit this guarantee through
the A/E to the Owner.
2. Guarantee to include, but not limited to roof membrane system, roof insulation, vapor
barrier, sheeting metal flashings and gravel stops, scuppers, flexible flashings, control
joints, saddles and fasteners.
3. Guarantee period begins on the date of Substantial Completion of the roof for the Project
or such date what the A/E and Owner accept the roof, if the date is after the dare of
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. General Performance: Installed roofing system and flashings shall withstand specified uplift
pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to
defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Roof system
and flashings shall remain watertight.
1. Accelerated Weathering: Roof membrane shall withstand 2000 hours of exposure when
tested according to ASTM G 152, ASTM G 154, or ASTM G 155.
2. Impact Resistance: Roof membrane shall resist impact damage when tested according to
ASTM D 3746, ASTM D 4272, or the "Resistance to Foot Traffic Test" in FM
Approvals 4470.
B. Material Compatibility: Roofing materials shall be compatible with one another and adjacent
materials under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roof
membrane manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
C. Wind Uplift Resistance: Design roofing system to resist the following wind uplift pressures
when tested according to FM Approvals 4474, UL 580, or UL 1897:
1. Zone 1 (Roof Area Field): 3.33 lbf/sq. ft.

2. Zone 2 (Roof Area Perimeter): 55.9 lbf/sq. ft.

a. Location: From roof edge to 8 feet inside roof edge.
3. Zone 3 (Roof Area Corners): 84.1 lbf/sq. ft.
a. Location: 8 feet in each direction from each building corner.
D. FM Approvals' RoofNav Listing: Roof membrane, base flashings, and component materials
shall comply with requirements in FM Approvals 4450 or FM Approvals 4470 as part of a
roofing system, and shall be listed in FM Approvals' RoofNav for Class 1 or noncombustible
construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FM Approvals Certification markings.
1. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-90.

2. Hail-Resistance Rating: SH.
E. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108 or UL 790, Class A; for application and roof slopes
indicated; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of
applicable testing agency.
2.2 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING
A. TPO Sheet: ASTM D 6878/D 6878M, internally fabric- or scrim-reinforced, TPO sheet.

following:
a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.

b. Firestone Building Products.
c. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.
2. Source Limitations: Obtain components for roofing system from roof membrane
manufacturer.
3. Thickness: 60 mils, nominal.
4. Exposed Face Color: White.
2.3 AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS
A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use
and compatible with other roofing components.
1. Adhesive and Sealants: Comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard unreinforced TPO sheet flashing, 60-mil thick,
minimum, of same color as TPO sheet.
C. Prefabricated Pipe Flashings: As recommended by roof membrane manufacturer.
D. Roof Vents: As recommended by roof membrane manufacturer.
E. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard.

F. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's standard, of thickness required for application.
G. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless steel or aluminum bars,
approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors.
H. Metal Battens: Manufacturer's standard, aluminum-zinc-alloy-coated or zinc-coated steel sheet,

approximately 1 inch wide by 0.05 inch thick, prepunched.
I. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-
resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roofing components to
substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
J. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings,
preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, lap sealants, termination
reglets, and other accessories.
2.4 ROOF INSULATION
A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured by TPO roof membrane manufacturer.
B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 2, Grade 2, felt or glass-fiber
mat facer on both major surfaces.
1. Compressive Strength: 20 psi.

2. Size: 48 by 48 inches
3. Thickness:
a. Base Layer: As indicated on drawings.

b. Upper Layer: As indicated on drawings.
C. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards.
1. Material: Match roof insulation.

2. Minimum Thickness: 1/4 inch.
3. Slope:
a. Roof Field: 1/4 inch per foot unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
b. Saddles and Crickets: 1/2 inch per foot unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
2.5 INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. General: Roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use
and compatibility with other roofing system components.
B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners with metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-
resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate,
and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.

2.6 WALKWAYS
A. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip-resisting, surface-textured

walkway pads or rolls, approximately 3/16 inch thick and acceptable to roofing system
manufacturer.
1. Size: Approximately 36 by 60 inches.

2. Color: Contrasting with roof membrane.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place, curbs are set and braced, and
roof-drain bodies are securely clamped in place.
2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at
penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation
3. Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of steel roof deck complies with
requirements in Section 053100 "Steel Decking."
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing system
installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp
projections.
B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or
migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking
place or when rain is forecast.
3.3 ROOFING INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install roofing system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions, FM

Approvals' RoofNav assembly requirements, and FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data
Sheet 1-29.
B. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from
entering completed sections of roofing system at end of workday or when rain is forecast.
Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning Work on adjoining roofing.

3.4 INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or

left exposed at end of workday.
B. Comply with roofing system and roof insulation manufacturer's written instructions for
installing roof insulation.
C. Installation Over Metal Decking:
1. Install base layer of insulation with end joints staggered not less than 12 inches in
adjacent rows and with long joints continuous at right angle to flutes of decking.
a. Locate end joints over crests of decking.

b. Trim insulation neatly to fit around penetrations and projections, and to fit tight to
intersecting sloping roof decks.
c. Make joints between adjacent insulation boards not more than 1/4 inch in width.
d. At internal roof drains, slope insulation to create a square drain sump with each
side equal to the diameter of the drain bowl plus 24 inches.
1) Trim insulation so that water flow is unrestricted.
e. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation.

f. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations.
g. Mechanically attach base layer of insulation using mechanical fasteners
specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation to
metal decks.
1) Fasten insulation to resist specified uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and

field of roof.
2. Install upper layers of insulation and tapered insulation with joints of each layer offset not
less than 12 inches from previous layer of insulation.
a. Staggered end joints within each layer not less than 24 inches in adjacent rows.
b. Trim insulation neatly to fit around penetrations and projections, and to fit tight to
intersecting sloping roof decks.
c. Make joints between adjacent insulation boards not more than 1/4 inch in width.
d. At internal roof drains, slope insulation to create a square drain sump with each
side equal to the diameter of the drain bowl plus 24 inches.
1) Trim insulation so that water flow is unrestricted.
e. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation.

f. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations.
g. Adhere each layer of insulation to substrate using adhesive according to FM
Approvals' RoofNav assembly requirements and FM Global Property Loss
Prevention Data Sheet 1-29 for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification, as
follows:

1) Set each layer of insulation in ribbons of bead-applied insulation adhesive,

firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place.
2) Set each layer of insulation in a uniform coverage of full-spread insulation
adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place.
3.5 ADHERED ROOFING INSTALLATION
A. Adhere roof membrane over area to receive roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's
B. Unroll roof membrane and allow to relax before installing.
C. Start installation of roofing in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel.
D. Accurately align roof membrane, and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum
dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.
E. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of roof membrane at rate required by
manufacturer, and allow to partially dry before installing roof membrane. Do not apply to splice
area of roof membrane.
F. In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten roof membrane securely at terminations,

penetrations, and perimeter of roofing.
G. Apply roof membrane with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.
H. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap roof membrane, and hot-air weld side and end laps of roof
membrane and sheet flashings, to ensure a watertight seam installation.
1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut
edges of roof membrane and sheet flashings.
2. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily, and repair seam sample areas.
3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roof membrane that do not comply with
requirements.
I. Spread sealant bed over deck-drain flange at roof drains, and securely seal roof membrane in
place with clamping ring.
3.6 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories, and adhere to substrates according to
roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate, and allow
to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing.
C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet
flashing.

D. Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot-air weld side
and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation.
E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through
termination bars.
3.7 WALKWAY INSTALLATION
A. Flexible Walkways:
1. Install flexible walkways at the following locations:
a. Retain one or more subparagraphs below. Revise to suit Project.

b. Perimeter of each rooftop unit.
c. Between each rooftop unit location, creating a continuous path connecting rooftop
unit locations.
d. Between each roof hatch and each rooftop unit location or path connecting rooftop
unit locations.
e. Top and bottom of each roof access ladder.
f. Between each roof access ladder and each rooftop unit location or path connecting
rooftop unit locations.
g. Locations indicated on Drawings.
h. As required by roof membrane manufacturer's warranty requirements.
2. Provide 6-inch clearance between adjoining pads.

3. Heat weld to substrate or adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive
according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
A. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect
roofing installation on completion, in presence of Architect, and to prepare inspection report.
B. Repair or remove and replace components of roofing system where inspections indicate that
they do not comply with specified requirements.
C. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine if

replaced or additional work complies with specified requirements.
3.9 PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When
remaining construction does not affect or endanger roofing system, inspect roofing system for
deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to
Architect and Owner.

B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair
substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration
at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.
C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures
recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
3.10 ROOFING INSTALLER'S WARRANTY
A. WHEREAS _______________________________ of ___________________________, herein

called the "Roofing Installer," has performed roofing and associated work ("work") on the
following project:
1. Owner: <Insert name of Owner>.

2. Address: <Insert address>.
3. Building Name/Type: <Insert information>.
4. Address: <Insert address>.
5. Area of Work: <Insert information>.
6. Acceptance Date: _________________.
7. Warranty Period: <Insert time>.
8. Expiration Date: __________________.
B. AND WHEREAS Roofing Installer has contracted (either directly with Owner or indirectly as a
subcontractor) to warrant said work against leaks and faulty or defective materials and
workmanship for designated Warranty Period,
C. NOW THEREFORE Roofing Installer hereby warrants, subject to terms and conditions herein
set forth, that during Warranty Period Roofing Installer will, at Roofing Installer's own cost and
expense, make or cause to be made such repairs to or replacements of said work as are
necessary to correct faulty and defective work and as are necessary to maintain said work in a
watertight condition.
D. This Warranty is made subject to the following terms and conditions:
1. Specifically excluded from this Warranty are damages to work and other parts of the
building, and to building contents, caused by:
a. lightning;
b. peak gust wind speed exceeding <Insert mph (m/sec)>;
c. fire;
d. failure of roofing system substrate, including cracking, settlement, excessive
deflection, deterioration, and decomposition;
e. faulty construction of parapet walls, copings, chimneys, skylights, vents,
equipment supports, and other edge conditions and penetrations of the work;
f. vapor condensation on bottom of roofing; and
g. activity on roofing by others, including construction contractors, maintenance
personnel, other persons, and animals, whether authorized or unauthorized by
Owner.

2. When work has been damaged by any of foregoing causes, Warranty shall be null and
void until such damage has been repaired by Roofing Installer and until cost and expense
thereof have been paid by Owner or by another responsible party so designated.
3. Roofing Installer is responsible for damage to work covered by this Warranty but is not
liable for consequential damages to building or building contents resulting from leaks or
faults or defects of work.
4. During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of work by anyone other than
Roofing Installer, including cutting, patching, and maintenance in connection with
penetrations, attachment of other work, and positioning of anything on roof, this
Warranty shall become null and void on date of said alterations, but only to the extent
said alterations affect work covered by this Warranty. If Owner engages Roofing Installer
to perform said alterations, Warranty shall not become null and void unless Roofing
Installer, before starting said work, shall have notified Owner in writing, showing
reasonable cause for claim, that said alterations would likely damage or deteriorate work,
thereby reasonably justifying a limitation or termination of this Warranty.
5. During Warranty Period, if original use of roof is changed and it becomes used for, but
was not originally specified for, a promenade, work deck, spray-cooled surface, flooded
basin, or other use or service more severe than originally specified, this Warranty shall
become null and void on date of said change, but only to the extent said change affects
work covered by this Warranty.
6. Owner shall promptly notify Roofing Installer of observed, known, or suspected leaks,
defects, or deterioration and shall afford reasonable opportunity for Roofing Installer to
inspect work and to examine evidence of such leaks, defects, or deterioration.
7. This Warranty is recognized to be the only warranty of Roofing Installer on said work
and shall not operate to restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies and resources
lawfully available to Owner in cases of roofing failure. Specifically, this Warranty shall
not operate to relieve Roofing Installer of responsibility for performance of original work
according to requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether Contract
was a contract directly with Owner or a subcontract with Owner's General Contractor.
E. IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this ___________ day of
___________________, ________________.
1. Authorized Signature: _______________________________________.

2. Name: ______________________________________.
3. Title: _______________________________________.

SPECIAL PROJECT WARRANTY

(TPO Roofing)
Whereas,
Of
Herein called the “Contractor”, has completed application of the following roof:
Owner:
Address of Owner:
Type and Name of Building:
Location:
Type of Roof:
Date of Initiation of Guarantee:
Date Guarantee Expires:
Whereas, at the inception of such work, the Contractor agreed to guarantee the aforesaid roof against
faulty materials or workmanship for a limited period and subject to the conditions herein set forth:
Now, therefore, the Contractor hereby guarantees, subject to the conditions herein set forth, that during a
period of two (2) years from the date of Contract Completion of said roof he will, at his own cost and ex-
pense, make or cause to be made such repairs to said roof resulting solely from faults or defects in materi-
al or workmanship applied by or through the Contractor as may be necessary to maintain said roof in wa-
tertight condition. Guarantee shall include, but not be limited to, metal roof, roof insulation, sheet metal
fascia and soffits, sheet metal closures, trim and flashings, curbs at roof openings, gutters and down-
spouts, coping caps, and counter-flashings.
This Guarantee is made subject to the following conditions:
1. Specifically excluded from this Guarantee is any and all damage caused by lightning, windstorm,
hailstorm, or other unusual phenomena of the elements; foundation settlement; failure or cracking
of the roof deck; defects or faulty construction and/or leakage due to erosion and/or porosity of
chimneys, skylights, vents, supports, or other parts of the building, or fire. The gutters and valleys,
etc., must be kept clear and free of dirt and debris. The roof is not to be used as a promenade deck,
work deck, or sprayed or flooded, unless specifically agreed upon or specified at time of application
of roofing. If the roof is damaged by reason of any of the foregoing, this Guarantee shall thereupon
become null and void for the balance of the guarantee period unless such damage is repaired by the
Contractor at the expense of the party requesting such repairs.
2. Nothing in this instrument shall render the Contractor liable for consequential damages to the build-
ing or contents resulting from any defects in said roof.
Project 16018 TPO ROOFING 075423 - 1

3. No work shall be done on said roof including, but without limitation, openings made for flues,
vents, drains, sign braces, or other equipment fastened to or set on the roof unless the Contractor
shall be first notified, shall be given the opportunity to make the necessary roofing application rec-
ommendations with respect thereto, and such recommendations are complied with. Failure to ob-
serve this condition shall render this Guarantee null and void. The Contractor shall be paid for time
and material expended in making recommendations or repairs occasioned by the work of others on
said roof.
4. Repairs required under this Guarantee, either permanent of temporary, shall be made within three
(3) days after notice of the need for repairs. Should the Contractor fail to make such repairs within
the time period, the Owner may have such repairs made and charge the cost to the Contractor.
5. Guarantee period shall begin on the date of Contract completion for the Project or such date of roof
acceptance by the A/E and the Owner, if the date is after the date of Contract Completion.
6. Additional conditions or exclusions:
In Witness Whereof, this instrument has been duly executed this
day of _______________________, 20 _______ .
Notary Authorized Signature
My commission expires _________________ Title
END OF SECTION 075419GF
Project 16018 TPO ROOFING 075423 - 2

SECTION 077100 - ROOF SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Copings.
2. Roof-edge specialties.
3. Roof-edge drainage systems.
4. Reglets and counterflashings.
1. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking.
2. Section 077200 "Roof Accessories" for set-on-type curbs, equipment supports, roof
hatches, vents, and other manufactured roof accessory units.
3. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for field-applied sealants between roof specialties and
adjacent materials.
C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Meet with Owner, A/E, Owner's insurer if applicable, roofing-system testing and
inspecting agency representative, roofing Installer, roofing-system manufacturer's
representative, Installer, structural-support Installer, and installers whose work interfaces
with or affects roof specialties, including installers of roofing materials and accessories.
2. Examine substrate conditions for compliance with requirements, including flatness and
attachment to structural members.
3. Review special roof details, roof drainage, and condition of other construction that will
affect roof specialties.

and profiles, and finishes.
Project 16018 ROOF SPECIALTIES 077100 - 1

B. Shop Drawings: For roof specialties.
1. Include plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, keyed details, and attachments to

other work. Distinguish between plant- and field-assembled work.
2. Include details for expansion and contraction; locations of expansion joints, including
direction of expansion and contraction.
3. Indicate profile and pattern of seams and layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other
attachments.
4. Detail termination points and assemblies, including fixed points.
5. Include details of special conditions.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of roof specialty indicated with factory-applied
color finishes.
D. Samples for Verification:
1. Include Samples of each type of roof specialty to verify finish and color selection, in
manufacturer's standard sizes.
2. Include copings, roof-edge specialties reglets and counterflashings made from 12-inch
lengths of full-size components in specified material, and including fasteners, cover
joints, accessories, and attachments.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of roof specialty.
C. Product Test Reports: For copings and roof-edge flashings, for tests performed by a qualified
testing agency.
D. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.
A. Maintenance Data: For roofing specialties to include in maintenance manuals.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer offering products meeting requirements

that are SPRI ES-1 tested to specified design pressure.

A. Do not store roof specialties in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting,
or other surface damage. Store roof specialties away from uncured concrete and masonry.
B. Protect strippable protective covering on roof specialties from exposure to sunlight and high
humidity, except to extent necessary for the period of roof-specialty installation.
A. Field Measurements: Verify profiles and tolerances of roof-specialty substrates by field

measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
B. Coordination: Coordinate roof specialties with flashing, trim, and construction of parapets, roof
deck, roof and wall panels, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace roof
specialties that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified
warranty period.
1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. General Performance: Roof specialties shall withstand exposure to weather and resist thermally
induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to defective
manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

B. SPRI Wind Design Standard: Manufacture and install copings and roof-edge specialties tested
according to SPRI ES-1 and capable of resisting the following design pressures:
1. Design Pressure: As indicated on Drawings.
C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components,
failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Provide clips that
resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of thermal movements. Base calculations on
surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
2.2 COPINGS
A. Metal Copings: Manufactured coping system consisting of metal coping cap in section lengths
not exceeding 12 feet, concealed anchorage; with corner units, end cap units, and concealed
splice plates with finish matching coping caps.

following:
a. Architectural Products Company.

b. Exceptional Metal
c. Hickman Company, W. P.
d. Metal-Era, Inc.
2. Formed Aluminum Sheet Coping Caps: Aluminum sheet, thickness as required to meet
a. Surface: Smooth, flat finish.

b. Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.
c. Color: Match A/E's sample.
3. Corners: Factory mitered and continuously welded or mechanically clinched and sealed
watertight as indicated on the drawings.
4. Coping-Cap Attachment Method: Snap-on or face leg hooked to continuous cleat with
back leg fastener exposed, fabricated from coping-cap material.
a. Snap-on Coping Anchor Plates: Concealed, galvanized-steel sheet, 12 inches wide,

with integral cleats.
b. Face-Leg Cleats: Concealed, continuous galvanized-steel sheet.

2.3 ROOF-EDGE SPECIALTIES
A. Canted Roof-Edge Fascia and Gravel Stop: Manufactured, two-piece, roof-edge fascia
consisting of snap-on metal fascia cover in section lengths not exceeding 12 feet a continuous
formed galvanized-steel sheet cant, 0.028 inch thick, minimum, with extended vertical leg
terminating in a drip-edge cleat. Provide matching corner units.

following:

b. Exceptional Metal.
d. Metal-Era, Inc.
2. Formed Aluminum Sheet Fascia Covers: Aluminum sheet, thickness as required to meet

3. Corners: Factory mitered and mechanically clinched and sealed watertight.

4. Splice Plates: Concealed, of same material, finish, and shape as fascia cover.
5. Fascia Accessories: Fascia extenders with continuous hold-down cleats.
B. Roof-Edge Fascia: Manufactured, two-piece, roof-edge fascia consisting of snap-on metal fascia
cover in section lengths not exceeding 12 feet and a continuous metal receiver with integral
drip-edge cleat to engage fascia cover and secure single-ply roof membrane. Provide matching
corner units.

following:

d. Metal-Era, Inc.
2. Formed Aluminum Sheet Fascia Covers: Aluminum sheet, thickness as required to meet


4. Splice Plates: Concealed, of same material, finish, and shape as fascia cover.

5. Receiver: Manufacturer's standard material and thickness.
C. One-Piece Gravel Stops: Manufactured, one-piece, metal gravel stop in section lengths not
exceeding 12 feet, with a horizontal flange and vertical leg fascia terminating in a drip edge, and
concealed splice plates of same material, finish, and shape as gravel stop. Provide matching
corner units.

following:

b. Berridge Manufacturing Company.
2. Formed Aluminum Sheet Gravel Stops: Aluminum sheet, thickness as required to meet


4. Accessories: Fascia extenders with continuous hold-down cleats.
2.4 ROOF-EDGE DRAINAGE SYSTEMS

following:

d. Metal-Era, Inc.
B. Gutters: Manufactured in uniform section lengths not exceeding 12 feet, with matching corner
units, ends, outlet tubes, and other accessories. Elevate back edge at least 1 inch above front
edge. Furnish flat-stock gutter straps, gutter brackets, expansion joints, and expansion-joint
covers fabricated from same metal as gutters.
1. Aluminum Sheet: 0.040 inch thick.

2. Gutter Profile: Style A according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual."
3. Gutter Supports: Gutter brackets with finish matching the gutters.
C. Downspouts: Corrugated rectangular complete with mitered elbows, manufactured from the
following exposed metal. Furnish with metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and
anchors.
1. Formed Aluminum: 0.040 inch thick.

D. Parapet Scuppers: Manufactured with closure flange trim to exterior, 4-inch-wide wall flanges
to interior, and base extending 4 inches beyond cant or tapered strip into field of roof.
E. Aluminum Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.
1. Color: Match A/E's sample.
2.5 REGLETS AND COUNTERFLASHINGS

following:

d. Metal-Era, Inc.
B. Reglets: Manufactured units formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and
counterflashing pieces, from the following exposed metal:

3. Masonry Type, Embedded: Provide reglets with offset top flange for embedment in
masonry mortar joint.
C. Counterflashings: Manufactured units of heights to overlap top edges of base flashings by 4

inches and in lengths not exceeding 12 feet designed to snap into reglets or through-wall-
flashing receiver and compress against base flashings with joints lapped, from the following
exposed metal:
D. Accessories:
1. Flexible-Flashing Retainer: Provide resilient plastic or rubber accessory to secure flexible

flashing in reglet where clearance does not permit use of standard metal counterflashing
or where reglet is provided separate from metal counterflashing.
2. Counterflashing Wind-Restraint Clips: Provide clips to be installed before
counterflashing to prevent wind uplift of counterflashing lower edge.
E. Aluminum Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.
1. Color: Match A/E's sample.

2.6 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with
temper to suit forming operations and performance required.
2.7 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils thick, consisting of slip-

resisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt
adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by
underlayment manufacturer.

following:
a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.

b. Henry Company.
c. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, a Drexel Metals Company.
2. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970/D 1970M; stable after testing at 240 deg F.
3. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970/D 1970M; passes after testing at minus 20

deg F.
B. Felt: ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated.
A. Fasteners: Manufacturer's recommended fasteners, suitable for application and designed to meet
performance requirements. Furnish the following unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed Penetrating Fasteners: Gasketed screws with hex washer heads matching color
of sheet metal.
2. Fasteners for Aluminum: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.
3. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel.
4. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel or hot-dip
zinc-coated steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.
B. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant of type, grade, class,
and use classifications required by roofing-specialty manufacturer for each application.
C. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant;

polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type joints with limited movement.
D. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.
E. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.

2.9 FINISHES
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations
in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved
Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
D. Coil-Coated Aluminum Sheet Finishes:
1. High-Performance Organic Finish: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal
surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 2605. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less

than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply
coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers'
b. Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 2605. Fluoropolymer finish containing not
less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat.
Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with
coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
c. Concealed Surface Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard acrylic
or polyester backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum
total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations,
dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine walls, roof edges, and parapets for suitable conditions for roof specialties.
C. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage where applicable, and
securely anchored.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Apply primer if required by manufacturer. Comply with

temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation. Apply wrinkle free, in
shingle fashion to shed water, and with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches
between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps with roller. Cover
underlayment within 14 days.
1. Apply continuously under copings roof-edge specialties and reglets and counterflashings
and as indicated.
2. Coordinate application of self-adhering sheet underlayment under roof specialties with
requirements for continuity with adjacent air barrier materials.
B. Felt Underlayment: Install with adhesive for temporary anchorage to minimize use of
mechanical fasteners under roof specialties. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped
joints of not less than 2 inches.
A. General: Install roof specialties according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof
specialties securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use
fasteners, solder, protective coatings, separators, underlayments, sealants, and other
miscellaneous items as required to complete roof-specialty systems.
1. Install roof specialties level, plumb, true to line and elevation; with limited oil-canning
and without warping, jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks.
2. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder and sealant.
3. Install roof specialties to fit substrates and to result in weathertight performance. Verify
shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before manufacture.
4. Torch cutting of roof specialties is not permitted.
5. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from
contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with
bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.
1. Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum and stainless-steel roof specialties with
bituminous coating where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious
construction.
2. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by manufacturers of
roof specialties for waterproof performance.
C. Expansion Provisions: Allow for thermal expansion of exposed roof specialties.
1. Space movement joints at a maximum of 12 feet with no joints within 18 inches of

corners or intersections unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

2. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint
members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for
installation at higher ambient temperatures.
D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that penetrate substrate not less than recommended by
fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.
E. Seal concealed joints with butyl sealant as required by roofing-specialty manufacturer.
F. Seal joints as required for weathertight construction. Place sealant to be completely concealed in
joint. Do not install sealants at temperatures below 40 deg F.
3.4 COPING INSTALLATION
A. Install cleats, anchor plates, and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices with
concealed fasteners.
B. Anchor copings with manufacturer's required devices, fasteners, and fastener spacing to meet
1. Interlock face and back leg drip edges of snap-on coping cap into cleated anchor plates
anchored to substrate at manufacturer's required spacing that meets performance
requirements.
2. Interlock face-leg drip edge into continuous cleat anchored to substrate at manufacturer's
required spacing that meets performance requirements. Anchor back leg of coping with
screw fasteners and elastomeric washers at manufacturer's required spacing that meets
3.5 ROOF-EDGE SPECIALITIES INSTALLATION
A. Install cleats, cants, and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices with concealed
fasteners.
B. Anchor roof edgings with manufacturer's required devices, fasteners, and fastener spacing to
meet performance requirements.
3.6 ROOF-EDGE DRAINAGE-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. General: Install components to produce a complete roof-edge drainage system according to

manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with
installation of roof-edge drainage system.

B. Gutters: Join and seal gutter lengths. Allow for thermal expansion. Attach gutters to firmly
anchored gutter supports spaced not more than 24 inches apart. Attach ends with rivets and seal
with sealant to make watertight. Slope to downspouts.
1. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated but not exceeding 50 feet apart.
Install expansion-joint caps.
C. Downspouts: Join sections with manufacturer's standard telescoping joints. Provide hangers
with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls and 1 inch away from walls;
locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c.
1. Provide elbows at base of downspouts at grade to direct water away from building.
D. Splash Pans: Install where downspouts discharge on low-slope roofs. Set in asphalt roofing
cement.
E. Parapet Scuppers: Install scuppers through parapet where indicated. Continuously support
scupper, set to correct elevation, and seal flanges to interior wall face, over cants or tapered
edge strips, and under roofing membrane.
1. Anchor scupper closure trim flange to exterior wall and seal or solder to scupper.
2. Loosely lock front edge of scupper with conductor head.
3.7 REGLET AND COUNTERFLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Coordinate installation of reglets and counterflashings with installation of base

flashings.
B. Embedded Reglets: See Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for installation of reglets.
C. Surface-Mounted Reglets: Install reglets to receive flashings where flashing without embedded
reglets is indicated on Drawings. Install at height so that inserted counterflashings overlap 4
inches over top edge of base flashings.
D. Counterflashings: Insert counterflashings into reglets or other indicated receivers; ensure that
counterflashings overlap 4 inches over top edge of base flashings. Lap counterflashing joints a
minimum of 4 inches and bed with butyl sealant. Fit counterflashings tightly to base flashings.
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and
weathering.
B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.

C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as roof specialties are installed. On
completion of installation, clean finished surfaces, including removing unused fasteners, metal
filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain roof specialties in a clean condition
during construction.
D. Replace roof specialties that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by
finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

SECTION 077200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Roof hatches.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for metal vertical ladders, ships' ladders, and stairs
for access to roof hatches.
2. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for shop- and field-formed metal
flashing, roof-drainage systems, roof expansion-joint covers, and miscellaneous sheet
metal trim and accessories.
3. Section 233423 "HVAC Power Ventilators" for power roof-mounted ventilators.
4. Section 237413 "Packaged, Outdoor, Central-Station Air-Handling Units" for standard
curbs specified with rooftop units.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with roofing membrane and base flashing
and interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight, secure, and
B. Coordinate dimensions with rough-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be

supported.
A. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory.

Project 16018 ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200 - 1

B. Shop Drawings: For roof accessories.
1. Include plans, elevations, keyed details, and attachments to other work. Indicate
dimensions, loadings, and special conditions. Distinguish between plant- and field-
assembled work.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, prepared on
Samples of size to adequately show color.
A. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans, drawn to scale, and coordinating penetrations and roof-
mounted items. Show the following:
1. Size and location of roof accessories specified in this Section.

2. Method of attaching roof accessories to roof or building structure.
3. Required clearances.
B. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties.
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For roof accessories to include in operation and maintenance
manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. General Performance: Roof accessories shall withstand exposure to weather and resist thermally
induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to defective
manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.
2.2 ROOF HATCH
A. Roof Hatches: Metal roof-hatch units with lids and insulated double-walled curbs, welded or
mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints, continuous lid-to-curb counterflashing and
weathertight perimeter gasketing, straight sides, and integrally formed deck-mounting flange at
perimeter bottom.

following:
a. Acudor Products, Inc.

b. Bilco Company (The).
c. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group.

B. Type and Size: Single-leaf lid, 36 by 36 inches.
C. Loads: Minimum 40-lbf/sq. ft. external live load and 20-lbf/sq. ft. internal uplift load.
D. Hatch Material: Aluminum sheet.
1. Thickness: Manufacturer's standard thickness for hatch size indicated.

2. Finish: Clear anodic.
E. Construction:
1. Insulation: Glass-fiber board.
a. R-Value: 12.0 according to ASTM C 1363.
2. Nailer: Factory-installed wood nailer continuous around hatch perimeter.

3. Hatch Lid: Opaque, insulated, and double walled, with manufacturer's standard metal
liner of same material and finish as outer metal lid.
4. Curb Liner: Manufacturer's standard, of same material and finish as metal curb.
5. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form flange at perimeter bottom to conform to roof
profile.
6. Fabricate curbs to minimum height of 12 inches above roofing surface unless otherwise
indicated.
7. Sloping Roofs: Where slope or roof deck exceeds 1:48, fabricate curb with perimeter
curb height that is constant. Equip hatch with water diverter or cricket on side that
obstructs water flow.
F. Hardware: Spring operators, hold-open arm, stainless-steel spring latch with turn handles,
stainless-steel butt- or pintle-type hinge system, and padlock hasps inside and outside.
G. Safety Railing System: Roof-hatch manufacturer's standard system including rails, clamps,
fasteners, safety barrier at railing opening, and accessories required for a complete installation;
attached to roof hatch and complying with 29 CFR 1910.23 requirements and authorities having
jurisdiction.
1. Height: 42 inches above finished roof deck.

2. Posts and Rails: Galvanized-steel pipe, 1-1/4 inches in diameter or galvanized-steel tube,
1-5/8 inches in diameter.
3. Flat Bar: Galvanized steel, 2 inches high by 3/8 inch thick.
4. Maximum Opening Size: System constructed to prevent passage of a sphere 21 inches in
diameter.
5. Self-Latching Gate: Fabricated of same materials and rail spacing as safety railing
system. Provide manufacturer's standard hinges and self-latching mechanism.
6. Post and Rail Tops and Ends: Weather resistant, closed or plugged with prefabricated end
fittings.
7. Provide weep holes or another means to drain entrapped water in hollow sections of
handrail and railing members.
8. Fabricate joints exposed to weather to be watertight.

9. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard, finished to match railing system.

10. Finish: Manufacturer's standard.
a. Color: As selected by A/E from manufacturer's full range.
2.3 METAL MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, manufacturer's standard alloy for finish required, with temper
to suit forming operations and performance required.
1. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.
2. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal
surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer Finish: AAMA 2605. System consisting of primer and

fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by
weight.
B. Aluminum Extrusions and Tubes: ASTM B 221, manufacturer's standard alloy and temper for
type of use, finished to match assembly where used; otherwise mill finished.
C. Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 123/A 123M
D. Steel Tube: ASTM A 500/A 500M, round tube.
E. Galvanized-Steel Tube: ASTM A 500/A 500M, round tube, hot-dip galvanized according to
ASTM A 123/A 123M.
F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, galvanized.
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other
miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.
B. Glass-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 726, nominal density of 3 lb/cu. ft., thermal resistivity
of 4.3 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F, thickness as indicated.
C. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for
aboveground use, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, containing no arsenic or
chromium, and complying with AWPA C2; not less than 1-1/2 inches thick.
D. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.
E. Underlayment:
1. Felt: ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt,
nonperforated.

2. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3 lb/100 sq. ft. minimum, rosin sized.
3. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils thick, consisting of
slip-resisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified
asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when
recommended by underlayment manufacturer.
4. Fasteners: Roof accessory manufacturer's recommended fasteners suitable for application
and metals being fastened. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being
fastened. Provide nonremovable fastener heads to exterior exposed fasteners. Furnish the
following unless otherwise indicated:
5. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated or Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: Series 300 stainless
steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.
6. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.
7. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel.
F. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM, PVC, or

silicone or a flat design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork.
G. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant as recommended by

roof accessory manufacturer for installation indicated; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and
use classifications required to seal joints and remain watertight.
H. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant;

polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for expansion joints with limited movement.
I. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586/D 4586M, asbestos free, of consistency required for
application.
2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations,
dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.

C. Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Install roof accessories level; plumb; true to line and elevation; and without warping, jogs
in alignment, buckling, or tool marks.
2. Anchor roof accessories securely in place so they are capable of resisting indicated loads.
3. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete
installation of roof accessories and fit them to substrates.
4. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, or
loosening of fasteners and seals.
B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from
contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with
bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.
1. Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum roof accessories with bituminous coating
where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
2. Underlayment: Where installing roof accessories directly on cementitious or wood
substrates, install a course of underlayment and cover with manufacturer's recommended
slip sheet.
3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by manufacturers of
roof accessories for waterproof performance.
C. Roof Curb Installation: Install each roof curb so top surface is level.
D. Equipment Support Installation: Install equipment supports so top surfaces are level with each
other.
E. Roof-Hatch Installation:
1. Verify that roof hatch operates properly. Clean, lubricate, and adjust operating
mechanism and hardware.
2. Attach safety railing system to roof-hatch curb.
3. Attach ladder-assist post according to manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required by roof accessory manufacturer.

3.3 REPAIR AND CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Clean off excess sealants.
C. Replace roof accessories that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by
finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls.
B. Related Requirements:.
1. Section 078443 "Joint Firestopping" for joints in or between fire-resistance-rated

construction, at exterior curtain-wall/floor intersections, and in smoke barriers.
B. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location, illustration of
firestopping system, and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
C. Qualification Data: For Installer.
D. Product Test Reports: For each penetration firestopping system, for tests performed by a
qualified testing agency.
A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating that penetration firestopping systems have been
installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written instructions.
Project 16018 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 1

A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to

FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to
comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements."
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping system when ambient or

substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping system
manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
B. Install and cure penetration firestopping materials per manufacturer's written instructions using
natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration

firestopping systems can be installed according to specified firestopping system design.
B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate

penetration firestopping systems.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:
1. Perform penetration firestopping system tests by a qualified testing agency acceptable to

2. Test per testing standards referenced in "Penetration Firestopping Systems" Article.
Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:
a. Penetration firestopping systems shall bear classification marking of a qualified

testing agency.
1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."
2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS
A. Penetration Firestopping Systems: Systems that resist spread of fire, passage of smoke and other
gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration
firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming
openings, and with penetrating items if any.


following:
a. 3M Fire Protection Products.

b. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.
c. Hilti, Inc.
B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings

determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of
0.01-inch wg.
1. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.
C. Exposed Penetration Firestopping Systems: Flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less

than 25 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.
D. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to
install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by
penetration firestopping system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting
agency for conditions indicated.
1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials.

2. Substrate primers.
3. Collars.
4. Steel sleeves.
2.3 FILL MATERIALS
A. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete

floors and consisting of an outer sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a flange attached to one
end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket.
B. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during
exposure to moisture.
C. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with
intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.
D. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced intumescent

elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized-steel sheet.
E. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening, water-resistant, intumescent putties containing no solvents

or inorganic fibers.
F. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil
on one side.

G. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement,
fillers and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a
nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar.
H. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled

with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant
additives. Where exposed, cover openings with steel-reinforcing wire mesh to protect
pillows/bags from being easily removed.
I. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand
and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.
J. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants.
2.4 MIXING
A. Penetration Firestopping Materials: For those products requiring mixing before application,
comply with penetration firestopping system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate
proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer
speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce
products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning: Before installing penetration firestopping systems, clean out openings
immediately to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following
requirements:
1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials
that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping materials.
2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable
of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping materials. Remove loose
particles remaining from cleaning operation.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's

recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage
and migration onto exposed surfaces.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install penetration firestopping systems to comply with manufacturer's written

installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications.
B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during
their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths
required to achieve fire ratings.
1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible
forming materials and other accessories not forming permanent components of
firestopping.
C. Install fill materials by proven techniques to produce the following results:
1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories and
penetrating items to achieve required fire-resistance ratings.
2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and
penetrating items.
3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce
smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Wall Identification: Permanently label walls containing penetration firestopping systems with
the words "FIRE AND/OR SMOKE BARRIER - PROTECT ALL OPENINGS," using lettering
not less than 3 inches high and with minimum 0.375-inch strokes.
1. Locate in accessible concealed floor, floor-ceiling, at 15 feet from end of wall and at
intervals not exceeding 30 feet.
A. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping system is damaged or removed

because of testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping system to comply with
requirements.
B. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping systems with other construction only after
inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.

A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with
cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping system
manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that
penetration firestopping systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out
and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping material and install new materials
to produce systems complying with specified requirements.
3.7 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEM SCHEDULE
A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL's "Fire
Resistance Directory" under product Category XHEZ.

XHEZ.W-L-8086 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 1 of 3
System No. W-L-8086

XHEZ.W-L-8086
Through-penetration Firestop Systems
Page Bottom
Design/System/Construction/Assembly Usage Disclaimer

• Authorities Having Jurisdiction should be consulted in all cases as to the particular requirements covering the installation and use of UL
Certified products, equipment, system, devices, and materials.
• Authorities Having Jurisdiction should be consulted before construction.
• Fire resistance assemblies and products are developed by the design submitter and have been investigated by UL for compliance with
applicable requirements. The published information cannot always address every construction nuance encountered in the field.
• When field issues arise, it is recommended the first contact for assistance be the technical service staff provided by the product
manufacturer noted for the design. Users of fire resistance assemblies are advised to consult the general Guide Information for each
product category and each group of assemblies. The Guide Information includes specifics concerning alternate materials and alternate
methods of construction.
• Only products which bear UL's Mark are considered Certified.
XHEZ - Through-penetration Firestop Systems
XHEZ7 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Certified for Canada

See General Information for Through-penetration Firestop Systems
See General Information for Through-penetration Firestop Systems Certified for Canada
System No. W-L-8086

November 20, 2015
ANSI/UL1479 (ASTM E814) CAN/ULC S115
F Rating — 1 and 2 Hr (See Item 1) F Rating — 1 and 2 Hr (See Item 1)
T Rating — 0 , 1/2 and 1 (See Items 2 and 3) FT Rating — 0 , 1/2 and 1 (See Items 2 and 3)
FH Rating — 1 and 2 Hr (See Item 1)
FTH Rating — 0, 1/2 and 1 (See Items 2 and 3)
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
1. Wall Assembly — The 1 or 2 hr fire-rated gypsum board/stud wall assembly shall be constructed of the materials and
in the manner described within the individual U300, U400, V400 or W400 Series Wall or Partition Designs in the UL Fire
Resistance Directory and shall incorporate the following construction features:
A. Studs — Wall framing shall consist of either wood studs or steel channel studs. Wood studs to
consist of nom 2 by 4 in. (51 by 102 mm) lumber spaced max 16 in. (406 mm) OC. Steel studs to
be min 3-1/2 in. (89 mm) wide and spaced max 24 in. (610 mm) OC.
B. Gypsum Board* — Nom 5/8 in. (16 mm) thick gypsum board as specified in the individual
Wall and Partition Design. Opening in gypsum board to be max 2-1/2 in. (64 mm) diam for 2"
device and max 4-1/2 in. (114 mm) diam for 4" device.
The F, FH Ratings of the firestop system are dependent upon the hourly rating of the
wall in which it is installed.
2. Cables — Within the loading area for each firestop device, the cables may represent a 0 to 100 percent visual fill.
Cables to be tightly bundled within the device and rigidly supported on both sides of wall assembly. Any combination of
the following types of cables may be used:
A. Max 100 pair No. 24 AWG (or smaller) copper conductor telecommunication cable with
polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacketing and insulation.
B. Max 7/C No. 12 AWG copper conductor control cable with PVC or XLPE jacket and insulation.
C. Max 4/0 AWG Type RHH ground cable.
D. Max 4 pr No. 22 AWG Cat 6 computer cables.
E. Max RG 6/U coaxial cable with fluorinated ethylene insulation and jacketing.
F. Fiber optic cable with polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or polyethylene (PE) jacket and insulation having
a max diam of 1/2 in. (13 mm).
G. Max 20/C No. 22 AWG shielded printer cable with PVC jacket.
H. Through-Penetrating Product* — Two copper conductors No. 18 AWG (or smaller) Power or
Non Power Limited Fire Alarm Cable with or without a jacket under a metal armor.
AFC CABLE SYSTEMS INC
I. Max. 1/4 in. (6 mm) diameter S-Video Cable consisting of 2 max 24 AWG 75 ohm coax or
twisted pair cable with PE insulation and PVC jacket .
J. Max 3/C No 12 AWG MC Cable.
K. Through Penetrating Product* — Any cables, Armored Cable+ or Metal Clad Cable+
currently Classified under the Through Penetrating Product category. See Through Penetrating
Product (XHLY) category in the Fire Resistance Directory for names of manufacturers.
For openings with cables, the T, FT, FTH Ratings are 0 hr for 1 hr rated wall assemblies.
For 2 hr rated wall assemblies, the T, FT, FTH Ratings are 1 hr (see Item 3 and 4 also).
3. Metallic Penetrants — One pipe or tube to be installed in opening. The following types and sizes of through
penetrants may be used:
A. Steel Pipe — Nom 2 in. (51 mm) diam (or smaller) Schedule 5 (or heavier) steel pipe.
B. Iron Pipe — Nom 2 in. (51 mm) diam (or smaller) cast or ductile iron pipe.
C. Copper Pipe — Nom 2 in. (51 mm) diam (or smaller) Regular (or heavier) copper pipe.
D. Copper Tube — Nom 2 in. (51 mm) diam (or smaller) Type L (or heavier) copper tube.
E. Conduit — Nom 2 in. (51 mm) diam (or smaller) steel conduit, nom 2 in. (51 mm) diam (or
smaller) steel electrical metallic tubing (EMT), or nom 1 in. (25 mm) diam (or smaller) flexible
steel conduit.
For openings with metallic penetrants the hourly T, FT, FTH Ratings are 1/2 hr.
4. Firestop Device* — Firestop device consists of a corrugated steel tube with an inner plastic housing, intumescent
material rings, tightly twisted inner fabric smoke seal, flanges and gasketing material (not shown). Firestop device to be
installed in accordance with the accompanying installation instructions. Device slid into wall such that ends project an
equal distance from the approximate centerline of the wall assembly. The annular space between the device and the
periphery of the opening shall be min 0 in. (point contact). Device provided with flanges that are spun clockwise onto
device threads, over gasketing material butting tightly to both sides of wall. As an alternate to gasket material, sealant
(Item 5) may be used.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP 653 and CP 653 BA 2" Speed Sleeve, CP 653 and CP
653 BA 4" Speed Sleeve
5. Fill, Void or Cavity Material* - Sealant — As an alternate to gasket material (see Item 3), min 1/2 in. (13 mm)
thickness of fill material applied within the annulus between firestop device and wall, flush with both surfaces of wall, and
an additional 1/4 in. (6 mm) bead applied around periphery of device.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — FS-ONE, FS-ONE MAX Intumescent Sealant or CP 606
Sealant
* Indicates such products shall bear the UL or cUL Certification Mark for jurisdictions employing the UL or cUL Certification
(such as Canada), respectively.
Questions? Print this page Terms of Use Page Top
© 2016 UL LLC
The appearance of a company's name or product in this database does not in itself assure that products so identified have been manufactured
under UL's Follow-Up Service. Only those products bearing the UL Mark should be considered to be Certified and covered under UL's Follow-Up
Service. Always look for the Mark on the product.
UL permits the reproduction of the material contained in the Online Certification Directory subject to the following conditions: 1. The Guide
Information, Assemblies, Constructions, Designs, Systems, and/or Certifications (files) must be presented in their entirety and in a non-
misleading manner, without any manipulation of the data (or drawings). 2. The statement "Reprinted from the Online Certifications Directory with
permission from UL" must appear adjacent to the extracted material. In addition, the reprinted material must include a copyright notice in the
following format: "© 2016 UL LLC".
System No. W-L-8085

XHEZ.W-L-8085
Page Bottom


System No. W-L-8085

November 20, 2015
F Rating — 1 and 2 Hr (See Item 1) F Rating — 1 and 2 Hr (See Item 1)
T Rating — 0 and 3/4 Hr (See Item 1) FT Rating — 0 and 3/4 Hr (See Item 1)
FH Rating — 1 and 2 Hr (See Item 1)
FTH Rating — 0 and 3/4 Hr (See Item 1)
in the manner described within the individual U300, U400 or V400 Series Wall or Partition Designs in the UL Fire
Wall and Partition Design. Opening in gypsum board to be max 2-1/2 in. (64 mm) diam for 2 in.
(51 mm) device and max 4-1/2 in. (114 mm) diam for 4 in. (102 mm) device.
The hourly F, FH Rating of the firestop system is dependent upon the hourly rating of the wall in which
it is installed. The T, FT and FTH Rating is 0 and 3/4 hr for 1 and 2 hr rated wall assemblies,
respectively.
2. Air Conditioning (AC) Line Sets — AC line set consists of two pipes or tubes (Item 2A), tubing insulation (Item 2B)
and a thermostat cable (Item 2C). The AC line sets shall be rigidly supported on both sides of the floor or wall assembly.
2A. Metallic Penetrants — A max of two pipes or tubes to be installed in each AC line set. Of the two pipes or tubes,
only one may have a nom diam greater than 3/4 in. (19 mm). The following types and sizes of through penetrants may
be used:
C. Copper Pipe — Nom 1 in. (25 mm) diam (or smaller) Regular (or heavier) copper pipe.
D. Copper Tube — Nom 1 in. (25 mm) diam (or smaller) Type L (or heavier) copper tube.
2B. Tube Insulation - Plastics# — Nom 3/4 in. (19 mm) thick acrylonitrile butadiene/polyvinyl chloride (AB/PVC)
flexible foam furnished in the form of tubing. The tube insulation may be installed on one max 1 in. (25 mm) diam pipe or
tube in each AC line set. The space between the insulated and uninsulated pipes or tubes within each AC line set shall be
0 in. (point contact).
See Plastics# (QMFZ2) category in the Plastics Recognized Component Directory for names of manufacturers. Any
Recognized Component tube insulation meeting the above specifications and having a UL 94 Flammability Classification of
945VA may be used.
2C. Cable — One 4 pair No. 18 AWG (or smaller) thermostat cable with polyvinyl chloride (PVC) insulation and jacket
materials may be installed with each AC line set.
an additional 1/4 in. (6 mm) bead applied around periphery of device.
Sealant
© 2016 UL LLC
System No. W-L-3335

XHEZ.W-L-3335
Page Bottom


System No. W-L-3335

November 20, 2015
F Ratings - 1 and 2 Hr (See Item 1) F Ratings - 1 and 2 Hr (See Item 1)
T Ratings - 0, 1/2 and 1 Hr (See Item 2) FT Ratings - 0, 1/2 and 1 Hr (See Item 2)
L Rating At Ambient -See Items 2 and 4 FH Ratings - 1 and 2 Hr (See Item 1)
L Ratings At 400 F - See Items 2 and 4 FTH Ratings - 0, 1/2 and 1 Hr (See Item 2)
L Rating At Ambient - See Items 2 and 4
L Ratings At 400 F - See Items 2 and 4
1. Wall Assembly — The 1 or 2 hr fire rated gypsum board/stud wall assembly shall be constructed of the materials and
in the manner described within the individual U300, U400, V400 or W400 Series Wall and Partition Designs in the UL Fire
be min 2-1/2 in. (64 mm) wide and spaced max 24 in. (610 mm) OC. Steel studs to be min 3-1/2
in. (89 mm) wide when 3/4 in. (19 mm) thick gypsum board is used (see Item 1B).
Wall and Partition Design. Alternately, min one layer of nom 3/4 in. (19 mm) thick gypsum board
on each side of wall as specified in the individual Wall and Partition Design may be used. Opening
in gypsum board to be max 3 in. (76 mm) diam for 2" device and max 5 in. (127 mm) diam for 4"
device.
The hourly F and FH Ratings of the firestop system are dependent upon the hourly rating of the wall in
which it is installed.
D. Max 4 pr No. 22 AWG Cat 5 or Cat 6 computer cables.
H. Through-Penetrating Product* - Two copper conductors No. 18 AWG (or smaller) Power or
Product (XHLY) category in the Fire Resistance Directory for names of manufacturers
When the hourly rating of the wall assembly is 1 hr, the T, FT and FTH Ratings are 0 hr.
When the hourly rating of the wall assembly is 2 hr, the T, FT and FTH Ratings are 1 hr
except that, when Item 2J or 2K is used, the T, FT and FTH Ratings are 1/2 hr
L Ratings vary depending on whether the gasketing material (see Item 3) or the sealant
(Item 4) is used. See Table below for L Ratings.
L Rating, CFM/Sq Ft L Rating, CFM
Max Ambient 400°F Ambient 400°F

Cable Cable
Fill Type Sealant Gasket Sealant Gasket Sealant Gasket Sealant Gasket
0% — Less 1.0 Less 2.7 Less Less Less Less

than 1 than 1 than 1 than 1 than 1 than 1
100% Item 2D 4.9 4.9 1.3 3.5 Less Less Less Less
only than 1 than 1 than 1 than 1
100% Any cables 9.2 9.2 9.6 11.8 1.2 1.2 1.3 1.6
(Item 2) in
any
combination
material rings, twisted inner fabric smoke seal, flanges and gasketing material (not shown). Firestop device to be installed
in accordance with the accompanying installation instructions. As an option, the inner fabric seal may remain open except
that, to attain the L Rating, the inner fabric seal shall be twisted to completely close off the opening within device. Device
slid into wall such that ends project an equal distance from the approximate centerline of the wall assembly. Device
provided with flanges that are spun clockwise onto device threads, over gasketing material butting tightly to both sides of
wall. The annular space between the device and the periphery of the opening shall be min 0 in. (point contact). Device
flanges are to be secured to wall with min two 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) long drywall screws except that for blank devices,
minimum four screws shall be used. . As an alternate to gasket material, fill material (Item 4) may be used.
4. Fill, Void or Cavity Material* — As an alternate to gasket material (see Item 3), min 5/8 in. (16 mm) thickness of fill
material applied within the annulus between firestop device and wall, flush with both surfaces of wall. When sealant is
used, for L Ratings, apply an additional 1/4 in. (6 mm) bead of FS-ONE or CP 606 at the device/wall interface
on both sides of wall prior to installing flanges.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — FS-ONE Sealant, FS-ONE MAX Intumescent Sealant, CP
606 Sealant or CP 618 Putty
+Bearing the UL Listing Mark
© 2016 UL LLC
XHEZ.W-J-3189 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 1 of 3
System No. W-J-3189

XHEZ.W-J-3189
Page Bottom


System No. W-J-3189

November 20, 2015
F Rating - 2 Hr F Rating - 2 Hr
T Ratings - 1/2 and 1-1/2 Hr (See Item 2) FT Ratings - 1/2 and 1-1/2 Hr (See Item 2)
L Rating At Ambient - 1.2 and Less Than 1 CFM per Device (See FH Rating - 2 Hr
Items 2, 3A and 3A1)
L Ratings At 400 F - 1.3, 1.6 and Less Than 1 CFM per Device FTH Ratings - 1/2 and 1-1/2 Hr (See Item 2)
(See Items 2, 3A and 3A1)
L Rating At Ambient - Less Than 1.2 and CFM per Device (See
L Ratings At 400 F - 1.3, 1.6 and Less Than 1 CFM per Device
1. Wall Assembly — Minimum 5 in. (127 mm) thick reinforced lightweight or normal weight (100-150 pcf or 1600-2400
3
kg/m ) concrete wall. Wall may also be constructed of any UL Classified Concrete Blocks*. Maximum five individual
openings may be provided (see Item 3A). Diam of opening for each firestop device shall not exceed 4-1/2 in. (114 mm)
and shall be sized to the OD of the firestop device.
See Concrete Blocks (CAZT) category in the Fire Resistance Directory for names of
manufacturers.
2. Cables — The aggregate cross-sectional area of cables in firestop devices to be min 0 percent (blank) to max 100
percent visual fill. Cables to be tightly bundled within the device and rigidly supported on both sides of wall assembly. Any
combination of the following types and sizes of cables may be used:
For opening with cables, the T, FT and FTH Ratings are 1/2 hr. For blank opening (no
cables), the T, FT and FTH Ratings are 1-1/2 hr.
L Rating, CFM Per Device
Max Ambient 400°F

Cable Cable
Fill Type Sealant Gasket Sealant Gasket
0% — Less Less Less Less

than 1 than 1 than 1 than 1
100% Item 2D only Less Less Less Less

100% Any cables 1.2 1.2 1.3 1.6

(Item 2) in
any
combination
3. Firestop System — The firestop system shall consist of the following:
A. Firestop Device* — Maximum five firestop devices grouped in two row configuration as
depicted. The individual openings in the wall for each device are spaced min 2-7/16 in. (62 mm)
apart such that the device flanges of adjacent devices are no closer than point contact. Firestop
device consists of a corrugated steel tube with an inner plastic housing, intumescent material
rings, twisted inner fabric smoke seal, flanges and gasketing material (not shown). Firestop device
to be installed in accordance with the accompanying installation instructions. As an option, the
inner fabric seal within each device may remain open except that, for all blank devices (no
cables), the inner fabric seal shall be twisted to completely close the device. In addition, to attain
the L Rating, the inner fabric seal must also be twisted to completely close the opening within
each device. Device slid into wall such that ends project an equal distance from the approximate
centerline of the wall assembly. Device provided with flanges that are spun clockwise onto device
threads, over gasketing material butting tightly to both sides of wall. The annular space between
each device and the periphery of the opening shall be nom 0 in. (point contact). Device flanges
are to be secured to wall with min two 1-1/4 in. (32 mm) long masonry screws or anchors. As an
alternate to gasket material, sealant (Item 3B) may be used.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP 653 and CP 653 BA 2" Speed
Sleeve, CP 653 and CP 653 BA 4" Speed Sleeve
A1. Firestop Device* — Same as Item A above except maximum four firestop devices grouped
in one row as depicted. The individual openings in the wall for each device are spaced min 1-7/16
in. (36.5 mm) apart. Device flanges may overlap one another. As an option, the inner fabric seal
may remain open except that, to attain the L Rating, the inner fabric seal shall be twisted to
completely close off the opening within each device.
B. Fill, Void or Cavity Material* — As an alternate to gasket material (see Item 3A), min 1/4 in.
(6 mm) bead of fill material applied around periphery of each device to wall interface on both
sides of wall prior to installing device flanges.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP 606 or FS-ONE Sealant or FS-
ONE MAX Intumescent Sealant.
© 2016 UL LLC
System No. W-L-3384

XHEZ.W-L-3384
Page Bottom


System No. W-L-3384

November 20, 2015
F Ratings - 1 and 2 Hr (See Item 1) F Ratings - 1 and 2 Hr (See Item 1)
T Ratings - 1/2 and 1 Hr (See Item 2) FT Ratings - 1/2 and 1 Hr (See Item 2)
L Rating At Ambient - 1.2 and Less Than 1 CFM per Device (See FH Ratings - 1 and 2 Hr (See Item 1)
L Ratings At 400 F - 1.3, 1.6 and Less Than 1 CFM per Device FTH Ratings - 1/2 and 1 Hr (See Item 2)
L Rating At Ambient - 1.2 and Less Than 1 CFM per Device

L Ratings At 400 F - 1.3, 1.6 and Less Than 1 CFM per Device
in the manner described in the individual U400, V400 or W400 Series Wall and Partition Designs in the UL Fire Resistance
Directory and shall include the following construction features:
A. Studs — Wall framing shall consist of steel channel studs. Steel studs to be min 3-1/2 in. (89
mm) wide and spaced 24 in. (610 mm) OC.
B. Gypsum Board* — The gypsum board type, thickness, number of layers, fastener type and
sheet orientation shall be as specified in the individual U400, V400 or W400 Series Designs in the
UL Fire Resistance Directory. Maximum five individual openings may be provided (see Item 3A).
Diam of opening for each firestop device shall not exceed 4-1/2 in. (114 mm) and shall be sized to
the OD of the firestop device.
The hourly F and FH Ratings of the firestop system are equal to the hourly fire rating of
the wall assembly in which it is installed.
2. Cables — The aggregate cross-sectional area of cables in firestop device to be min 0 percent (blank) to max 100
percent visual fill. Cables to be tightly bundled within the device and rigidly supported on both sides of wall assembly. Any
combination of the following types and sizes of cables may be used:
For opening with cables, the T, FT and FTH Ratings are 1/2 hr. For blank opening (no
cables), when the hourly rating of the wall assembly is 2 hr, the T, FT and FTH Ratings
are 1 hr. For blank opening (no cables), when the hourly rating of the wall assembly is 1
hr, the T, FT and FTH Ratings are 1/2 hr.
L Rating, CFM
Max Ambient 400°F

Cable Cable
Fill Type Sealant Gasket Sealant Gasket
0% — Less Less Less Less

100% Item 2D only Less Less Less Less

100% Any cables 1.2 1.2 1.3 1.6

(Item 2) in
any
combination
A. Firestop Device* — Maximum five firestop devices grouped in two row configuration as
depicted (Configuration A). The individual openings in the wall for each device are spaced min
2-7/16 in. (62 mm) apart such that the device flanges of adjacent devices are no closer than point
contact. Firestop device consists of a corrugated steel tube with an inner plastic housing,
intumescent material rings, twisted inner fabric smoke seal, flanges and gasketing material (not
shown). Firestop device to be installed in accordance with the accompanying installation
instructions. As an option, the inner fabric seal within each device may remain open except that,
for all blank devices (no cables), the inner fabric seal shall be twisted to completely close the
device. In addition, to attain the L Rating, the inner fabric seal must also be twisted to
completely close the opening within each device. Device slid into wall such that ends project an
equal distance from the approximate centerline of the wall assembly. Device provided with flanges
that are spun clockwise onto device threads, over gasketing material butting tightly to both sides
of wall. The annular space between each device and the periphery of the opening shall be nom 0
in. (point contact). Device flanges are to be secured to wall with min two 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) long
drywall screws. As an alternate to gasket material, sealant (Item 3B) may be used.
A1. Firestop Device* — Same as Item A above except maximum four firestop devices grouped
in one row as depicted (Configuration B). The individual openings in the wall for each device are
spaced min 1-7/16 in. (36.5 mm) apart. Device flanges may overlap one another. As an option,
the inner fabric seal may remain open except that, to attain the L Rating, the inner fabric seal
shall be twisted to completely close off the opening within each device.
B. Fill, Void or Cavity Material* — As an alternate to gasket material (see Item 3A), min 1/4 in.
(6 mm) bead of fill material applied around periphery of each device to wall interface on both
sides of wall prior to installing device flanges.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP 606, FS-ONE Sealant or FS-ONE
MAX Intumescent Sealant
© 2016 UL LLC
XHEZ.C-AJ-3281 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 1 of 3
System No. C-AJ-3281

XHEZ.C-AJ-3281
Page Bottom



May 26, 2016
F Rating — 2 Hr F Rating — 2 Hr
T Ratings — 0 and 3/4 Hr (See Item 2) FT Ratings — 0 and 3/4 Hr (See Item 2)
L Rating At Ambient — Less Than 1 CFM (See Item 2) FH Rating — 2 Hr
L Rating At 400 F — Less Than 1 CFM (See Item 2) FTH Ratings — 0 and 3/4 Hr (See Item 2)
L Rating At Ambient — Less Than 1 CFM (See Item 2)
L Rating At 400 F — Less Than 1 CFM (See Item 2)
1. Floor or Wall Assembly — Min 2-1/2 in. (64 mm) thick reinforced lightweight or normal weight (100-150 pcf or
3
1600-2400 kg/m ) concrete. Wall may also be constructed of any UL Classified Concrete Blocks*. Floor may also be
constructed of any min 6 in. thick UL Classified hollow-core Precast Concrete Units*. Opening in floor or wall to be max
3 in. (76 mm) diam for 2" device and max 5 in. (127 mm) diam for 4" device.
See Concrete Blocks (CAZT) and Precast Concrete Units (CFTV) categories in the Fire
Resistance Directory for names of manufacturers.
Cables to be tightly bundled within the device and rigidly supported on both sides of floor or wall assembly. Any
combination of the following types of cables may be used:
I. Max. 1/4 in. (6 mm) diameter S-Video Cable consisting of two max 24 AWG 75 ohm coax or
twisted pair cable with PE insulation and PVC jacket.
J. Through Penetrating Product* — Any Cables, Metal-Clad Cable+ or Armored Cable+

currently Classified under the Through Penetrating Products category.
See Through Penetrating Product (XHLY) category in the Fire Resistance Directory for names
of manufacturers.
K. Max 3/C No 12 AWG MC Cable.
The T, FT and FTH Ratings for the firestop system are 1/2 hr except that when cable
types 2J or 2K are used, the T, FT and FTH Ratings are 0 hr.
See Table below for L Ratings.
Max Cable L Rating, L Rating, CFM

Cable Type CFM/Sq Ft
Fill
Ambient 400° Ambient 400°
F F
0% — 1 2 Less than Less

1 than
1
100% Any cables 7 7 Less than Less

(Item 2) in any 1 than
combination 1
material rings and tightly twisted inner fabric smoke seal, flanges and gasket material (not shown). Firestop device to be
installed in accordance with the accompanying installation instructions. Device slid into floor or wall such that ends project
an equal distance from the approximate centerline of the assembly. The annular space between the device and the
device threads, and gasket material butting tightly to both sides of floor or wall. As an alternate to gasket material,
sealant (Item 4) may be used.
4. Fill, Void or Cavity Material* — Sealant — As an alternate to gasket material (see Item 3), min 1/2 in. (13 mm)
thickness of fill material applied within the annulus between firestop device and periphery of opening, flush with top
surface of floor or both surfaces of wall, and an additional 1/4 in. (6 mm) bead applied at the device/floor or wall interface
on top side of floor or both sides of wall assembly prior to installing flanges.
Sealant
© 2016 UL LLC

XHEZ.C-AJ-3282
Page Bottom



May 26, 2016
T Ratings — 0, 3/4 and 1 Hr (See Item 2) FT Ratings — 0, 3/4 and 1 Hr (See Item 2)
FH Rating — 2 Hr
FTH Ratings — 0, 3/4 and 1 Hr (See Item 2)
3
1600-2400 kg/m ) concrete. Wall may also be constructed of any UL Classified Concrete Blocks*. Opening in floor or
wall to be max 4 in. (102 mm) diam for 2" device and max 6 in. (152 mm) diam for 4" device.
manufacturers.
1A. Floor Assembly — (Not Shown) — As an alternate to Item 1, fire-rated unprotected concrete and steel floor
assembly may be used. Floor assembly to be constructed of the materials and in the manner described in the individual
D900 Series Floor-Ceiling Design in the UL Fire Resistance Directory and shall include the following construction features:
A. Concrete — Min 2-1/2 in. (64 mm) thick reinforced lightweight or normal weight (100-150 pcf
3
or 1600-2400 kg/m ) concrete.
B. Steel Floor and Form Units — Composite or noncomposite max 3 in. (76 mm) deep fluted
galv units as specified in the individual Floor-Ceiling design. Opening in floor or wall to be max 4
in. (102 mm) diam for 2" device and max 6 in. (152 mm) diam for 4" device.
I. Max. 1/4 in.(6 mm) diameter S-Video Cable consisting of 2 max 24 AWG 75 ohm coax or

of manufacturers.
The T, FT and FTH Ratings for the firestop system are 3/4 hr except that for blank
openings with no cables, the T, FT and FTH Ratings are 1 hr, and when cable types 2J or
2K are used, the T, FT and FTH Ratings are 0 hr.
material rings, tightly twisted inner fabric smoke seal, flanges and gasketing material (not shown, optional). Firestop
device to be installed in accordance with the accompanying installation instructions. Device slid into floor or wall such that
ends project an equal distance from the approximate centerline of the assembly. The annular space between the device
and the periphery of the opening shall be min 0 in. (point contact). Device provided with flange(s) that are spun clockwise
onto device threads, over gasketing material butting tightly to top side of floor or both sides of wall.
4. Fill, Void or Cavity Material* — Mortar — Min 2-1/2 in. (64 mm) thickness of fill material applied within the annulus
between firestop device and periphery of opening, flush with bottom surface of floor or both surfaces of wall.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP 637 Firestop Mortar
© 2016 UL LLC

XHEZ.C-AJ-3283
Page Bottom



May 26, 2016
3
1600-2400 kg/m ) concrete. Wall may also be constructed of any UL Classified Concrete Blocks*. Opening in floor or
wall to be max 3 in. (76 mm) diam for 2" device and max 5 in. (127 mm) diam for 4" device.
manufacturers.
1A. Floor Assembly — (Not Shown) — As an alternate to Item 1, fire-rated unprotected concrete and steel floor
assembly may be used. Floor assembly to be constructed of the materials and in the manner described in the individual
D900 Series Floor-Ceiling Design in the UL Fire Resistance Directory and shall include the following construction features:
A. Concrete — Min 2-1/2 in. (64 mm) thick reinforced lightweight or normal weight (100-150 pcf
3
or 1600-2400 kg/m ) concrete.
B. Steel Floor and Form Units — Composite or noncomposite max 3 in. (76 mm) deep fluted
galv units as specified in the individual Floor-Ceiling design. Opening in floor or wall to be max 3
in. (76 mm) diam for 2" device and max 5 in. (127 mm) diam for 4" device.
2. Cables — Within the loading area for the firestop device, the cables may represent a 0 to 100 percent visual fill. Cables
to be tightly bundled within the device and rigidly supported on both sides of floor or wall assembly. Any combination of
I. Max 1/4 in. (6 mm) diameter S-Video Cable consisting of 2 max 24 AWG 75 ohm coax or

of manufacturers.

Fill
F F

1 than
1

combination 1
material rings, tightly twisted inner fabric smoke seal, flanges and gasket material (not shown). Firestop device to be
periphery of the opening shall be min 0 in. (point contact). Device provided with flange(s) that are spun clockwise onto
device threads, over gasket material butting tightly to top side of floor or both sides of wall. In floors, when FS-ONE
Sealant is used and installed flush with bottom of floor, device flange shall be threaded tightly to bottom side of floor. In
floors, device flange to be secured to floor with min two 1-1/4 in. (32 mm) long steel masonry screws or anchors. As an
alternate to gasket material, sealant (Item 4) may be used.
material applied within the annulus between firestop device and periphery of opening, flush with top surface of floor or
both sides of wall. As an option, when FS-ONE Sealant is used, the fill material can be installed flush with bottom of floor.
For L Ratings when sealant is used, an additional 1/4 in. (6 mm) bead of fill material is applied at the
device/floor or device/wall interface on top or bottom side of floor or both sides of wall assembly prior to
installing flanges.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP 618 Firestop Putty, FS-ONE Sealant or FS-ONE MAX
Intumescent Sealant.
© 2016 UL LLC

XHEZ.C-AJ-3284
Page Bottom



May 26, 2016
3
1600-2400 kg/m ) concrete. Wall may also be constructed of any UL Classified Concrete Blocks*. Floor may also be
constructed of any min 6 in. thick UL Classified hollow-core Precast Concrete Units*. Opening in floor or wall to be max
3 in. (76 mm) diam for 2" device and max 5 in. (127 mm) diam for 4" device.

of manufacturers.

Fill
F F

1 than
1

combination 1
periphery of the opening shall be min 0 in. (point contact). Device provided with flange(s) that are spun clockwise onto
device threads, over gasket material butting tightly to bottom side of floor or both sides of wall. In floors, device flange to
be secured to floor with min two 1-1/4 in. (32 mm) long masonry screws or anchors. As an alternate to gasket material,
sealant (Item 4) may be used.
4. Fill, Void or Cavity Material* — As an alternate to gasket material (see Item 3), min 1/2 in. (13 mm) thickness of
FS-ONE Sealant or min 1 in. (25 mm) thickness of CP 618 Putty applied within the annulus between firestop device and
periphery of opening, flush with bottom surface of floor or both sides of wall. For L Rating when sealant or putty is
used, an additional 1/4 in. (6 mm) bead of fill material shall be applied at the device/floor or device/wall
interface on bottom side of floor or both sides of wall assembly prior to installing flange(s).
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP 618 Firestop Putty, FS-ONE Sealant or FS-ONE MAX
Intumescent Sealant.
© 2016 UL LLC

XHEZ.C-AJ-3285
Page Bottom



June 23, 2016
T Ratings — 0, 1, 1-1/2 and 3 Hr (See Item 2) FT Ratings — 0, 1, 1-1/2 and 3 Hr (See Item 2)
L Rating At Ambient — Less Than 1 CFM (See Items 2 and 4) FH Rating — 3 Hr
L Rating At 400 F — Less Than 1 CFM (See Items 2 and 4) FTH Ratings — 0, 1, 1-1/2 and 3 Hr (See Item 2)
L Rating At Ambient — Less Than 1 CFM (See Items 2 and 4)
L Rating At 400 F — Less Than 1 CFM (See Items 2 and 4)
3
1. Floor or Wall Assembly — Reinforced lightweight or normal weight (100-150 pcf or 1600-2400 kg/m ) concrete. Min
4-1/2 in. (114 mm) thick floors and min 5 in. (127 mm) thick walls. Wall may also be constructed of any UL Classified
Concrete Blocks*. Floor may also be constructed of any min 6 in. (152 mm) thick UL Classified hollow-core Precast
Concrete Units*. Opening in floor or wall to be max 3 in. (76 mm) diam for 2 in. (51 mm) device and max 5 in. (127
mm) diam for 4 in. (102 mm) device.
D. Max four pair No. 22 AWG Cat 6 computer cables.
I. Max. 1/4 in. (6 mm) diam S-Video Cable consisting of two max No. 24 AWG 75 ohm coax or

See Through Penetrating Product (XHLY) category in the Fire

The hourly T, FT and FTH Ratings for blank opening (no cables) are 3 hr. The hourly T,
FT and FTH Ratings for opening with cables are 1-1/2 hr except that, when cable type
2A, 2B, 2C, 2E or 2H is used, the T, FT and FTH Ratings are 1 hr, and when cable types
2J or 2K are used the T, FT, and FTH Ratings are 0 hr. See Table below for L Ratings.

Fill
F F

1 than
1

combination 1
an equal distance from the approximate centerline of the assembly. As an option, in floors, steel sleeve of device may be
installed flush with bottom of floor. The annular space between the device and the periphery of the opening shall be min 0
in. (point contact). Device provided with flange(s) that are spun clockwise onto device threads, over gasket material
butting tightly to top side of floor or both sides of floor or wall. In floors, when one device flange is used, device flange to
be secured to floor with min two 1-1/4 in. (32 mm) long masonry screws or anchors. As an alternate to gasket material,
sealant (Item 4B) may be used.

3
A. Packing Material — Min 4 in. (102 mm) thickness of min 4 pcf (64 kg/m ) mineral wool batt
insulation firmly packed into annular space between firestop device and opening as a permanent
form. Packing material to be installed flush with bottom of floor and recessed from top surface of
floor or from both surfaces of wall to accommodate the required thickness of fill material.
B. Fill, Void or Cavity Material* — Sealant — As an alternate to gasket material (see Item 3),
min 1/2 in. (13 mm) thickness of fill material applied within the annulus, flush with top surface of
floor or with both surfaces of wall. For L Ratings when sealant is used, an additional 1/4 in.
(6 mm) bead of fill material is required at the device/floor or device/wall interface on
top side of floor or both sides of wall assembly prior to installing flange(s).
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP601S Sealant, CP 606 Sealant,
CFS-S SIL GG, CFS-S SIL SL (floors only), FS-ONE Sealant or FS-ONE MAX Intumescent Sealant.
© 2016 UL LLC
System No. W-J-3168

XHEZ.W-J-3168
Page Bottom


System No. W-J-3168

November 20, 2015
T Ratings — 0, 1/2 and 1 Hr (See Item 2) FT Ratings — 0, 1/2 and 1 Hr (See Item 2)
L Rating At Ambient — See Items 2 and 4 FH Rating — 2 Hr
L Ratings At 400 F — See Items 2 and 4 FTH Ratings — 0, 1/2 and 1 Hr (See Item 2)
L Rating At Ambient — See Items 2 and 4
L Ratings At 400 F — See Items 2 and 4
1. Wall Assembly — Min 5 in. (127 mm) thick reinforced lightweight or normal weight (100-150 pcf or 1600-2400
3
kg/m ) concrete. Wall may also be constructed of any UL Classified Concrete Blocks*. Opening in wall to be max 3 in.
(76 mm) diam for 2" device and max 5 in. (127 mm) diam for 4" device.
manufacturers.
The T, FT and FTH Ratings are 1 hr except that, when Item 2J or 2K is used, the T, FT
and FTH Ratings are 1/2 hr .
Max Cable L Rating, CFM/Sq Ft L Rating, CFM

Cable Type
Fill Ambient 400°F Ambient 400°F
Sealant Gasket Sealant Gasket Sealant Gasket Sealant Gasket
0% - Less 1.0 Less 2.7 Less Less Less Less

100% Any cables 9.2 9.2 9.6 11.8 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.6
(Item 2) in
any
combination
slid into wall such that ends project an equal distance from the approximate centerline of the wall assembly. Device
provided with flanges that are spun clockwise onto device threads, over gasketing material butting tightly to both sides of
wall. The annular space between the device and the periphery of the opening shall be min 0 in. (point contact). Device
flanges are to be secured to wall with min two 1-1/4 in. (32 mm) long masonry screws or anchors. As an alternate to
gasket material, fill material (Item 4) may be used.
material applied within the annulus between firestop device and wall, flush with both surfaces of wall. When sealant is
used, for L Rating, apply an additional 1/4 in. (6 mm) bead of FS-ONE or CP 606 at the device/wall interface
on both sides of wall prior to installing flanges.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — FS-ONE Sealant, FS-ONE MAX Intumescent Sealant, CP
606 Sealant or CP 618 Putty
© 2016 UL LLC

XHEZ.C-AJ-3298
Page Bottom



November 20, 2015
T Rating — 2 Hr FT Rating — 2 Hr
L Rating At 400 F — Less Than 1 CFM (See Item 2) FTH Rating — 2 Hr
3
1. Floor or Wall Assembly — Reinforced lightweight or normal weight (100-150 pcf or 1600-2400 kg/m ) concrete. Min
4-1/2 in. (114 mm) thick floors and min 5 in. (127mm) thick walls. Wall may also be constructed of any UL Classified
Concrete Blocks*. Floor may also be constructed of any min 6 in. thick UL Classified hollow-core Precast Concrete
Units*. Opening in floor or wall to be max 3 in. (76 mm) diam for 2 in. (51 mm) device and max 5 in. (127 mm) diam for
4 in. (102 mm) device.

Fill
F F
0% — 1 2
Less than Less

1 than
1

combination 1
an equal distance from the approximate centerline of the assembly. As an option, in floors, steel sleeve of device may be
installed flush with bottom of floor. The annular space between the device and the periphery of the opening shall be min 0
in. (point contact) to max 1/2 in. (13 mm). Device provided with flange(s) that are spun clockwise onto device threads,
over gasket material butting tightly to top side of floor or both sides of floor or wall. In floors, when one device flange is
used, device flange to be secured to floor with min two 1-1/4 in. (32 mm) long masonry screws or anchors. As an
alternate to gasketing material, sealant (Item 4B) may be used.

3
A. Packing Material — Min 4 in. (102 mm) thickness of min 4 pcf (64 kg/m ) mineral wool batt
insulation firmly packed into annular space between firestop device and opening as a permanent
form. Packing material to be installed flush with bottom of floor and recessed from top surface of
floor or from both surfaces of wall to accommodate the required thickness of fill material.
B. Fill, Void or Cavity Material* — Sealant — As an alternate to gasketing material (see Item
3), min 1/2 in. (13 mm) thickness of fill material applied within the annulus, flush with top surface
of floor or with both surfaces of wall. For L Ratings when sealant is used, an additional 1/4 in. (6
mm) bead of fill material shall be applied at the device/floor or device/wall interface on top side of
floor or both sides of wall assembly prior to installing flange(s).
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP 606 Sealant, FS-ONE Sealant or
FS-ONE MAX Intumescent Sealant.
C. Cable Wrap Materials* — Nom 1-1/2 in. or 2 in. (38 or 51 mm) thick blanket, faced on one
side or two with a foil facing. The cables shall be wrapped with one layer of cable wrap. Cable
wrap is to extend a minimum of 12 in. (305 mm) from top surface of floor or both sides of wall
assembly. The ends are to be tightly butted together and taped. The exposed edges of the faced
blankets are taped with 4 in. (102 mm) wide pressure-sensitive aluminum foil tape.
THERMAL CERAMICS INC — FireMaster FastWrap XL
UNIFRAX I L L C — FyreWrap Duct Insulation or FyreWrap 1.5 Duct Insulation
© 2016 UL LLC
System No. W-J-3167

XHEZ.W-J-3167
Page Bottom


System No. W-J-3167

November 20, 2015
F Ratings — 2, 3 and 4 Hr (See Item 1) F Ratings — 2, 3 and 4 Hr (See Item 1)
T Ratings — 0, 1/2, 1-1/2 and 2 Hr (See Items 2 and 3) FT Ratings — 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, and 2 Hr (See Items 2 and 3)
L Rating At Ambient — See Item 2 FH Ratings — 2, 3, or 4 Hr (See Item 1)
L Ratings At 400 F — See Item 2 FTH Ratings — 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, and 2 Hr (See Items 2 and 3)
L Rating At Ambient — See Item 2
L Ratings At 400 F — See Item 2
1. Wall Assembly — Min 5 in. (127 mm) thick for 2 hr wall assembly, min 5-5/8 in. (142 mm) thick for 3 hr wall
assembly, min 6-1/2 in. (167 mm) thick for 4 hr wall assembly, reinforced lightweight or normal weight (100-150 pcf or
3
1600-2400 kg/m ) concrete. Wall may also be constructed of any UL Classified Concrete Blocks*. Opening in wall to be
max 2-1/2 in. (64 mm) diam for 2" device and max 4-1/2 in. (114 mm) diam for 4" device.
manufacturers.
except that, when Item 2J or 2K is used, the T, FT and FTH Ratings are 1/2 hr . When
the hourly rating of the wall assembly is 3 or 4 hr, the T, FT and FTH Ratings are 1-1/2
and 2 hr, respectively.
L Ratings apply only when device flanges are used. L Ratings vary depending on
whether the gasketing material (see Item 3) or the sealant (Item 4) is used. See Table
below for L Ratings.
Max Cable L Rating, CFM/Sq Ft L Rating, CFM

Cable Type
Fill Ambient 400°F Ambient 400°F
Sealant Gasket Sealant Gasket Sealant Gasket Sealant Gasket

100% Any cables 9.2 9.2 9.6 11.8 1.2 1.2 1.3 1.6
(Item 2) in
any
combination
slid into wall such that ends project an equal distance from the approximate centerline of the wall assembly. The annular
space between the device and the periphery of the opening shall be min 0 in. (point contact). Device provided with
flanges that are spun clockwise onto device threads, over gasketing material , butting tightly to both sides of wall. Device
flanges are optional except for 3 and 4 hr fire rating, flanges are required. When the device flanges are not
used, the T, FT and FTH Ratings for the firestop system are 0 hr. For blank opening (no cables), the T, FT and
FTH Ratings for the firestop system are 2, 3 or 4 hr only when the device flanges are used.
an additional 1/4 in. (6 mm) bead applied around periphery of device. Sealant is required when device flanges are not
used (see Item 3).
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — FS-ONE or FS-ONE MAX Intumescent Sealant, or CP 606
Sealant
© 2016 UL LLC
System No. W-J-1215

XHEZ.W-J-1215
Page Bottom


System No. W-J-1215

November 20, 2015
T Rating — 3/4 Hr FT Rating — 3/4 Hr
FH Rating — 2 Hr
FTH Rating — 3/4 Hr
3
1. Wall Assembly — Min 5-5/8 in. (143 mm) reinforced lightweight or normal weight (100-150 pcf or 1600-2400 kg/m )
concrete. Wall may also be constructed of any UL Classified Concrete Blocks*. Opening in wall to be 2-1/2 in. (64 mm)
diam for nominal 2 in. (51 mm) firestop device and 4 1/2 in. (114 mm) diam for nominal 4 in. (102 mm) firestop device.
manufacturers.
2. Through Penetrant — One metallic pipe, conduit or tubing to be installed concentrically within the firestop system.
Pipe, conduit or tubing to be rigidly supported on both sides of the wall assembly. The following types and sizes of
metallic pipes, conduits and tubes may be used:
C. Conduit — Nom 3 in. (76 mm) diam (or smaller) rigid steel conduit or steel electrical metallic
tubing (EMT).
thickness of fill material applied within the annulus between firestop device and wall, flush with both surfaces of wall. An
additional 1/4 in. (6 mm) bead shall be applied around periphery of device on each side of wall prior to securing device
flanges.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP 606 or FS-ONE Sealant or FS-ONE MAX Intumescent
Sealant
© 2016 UL LLC
System No. W-J-2229

XHEZ.W-J-2229
Page Bottom

System No. W-J-2229

November 20, 2015
F Rating — 2 Hr
T Rating — 1/4 Hr
3
manufacturers.
2. Cross Linked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing — Nom 1 in. diam (or smaller) SDR9 PEX tubing for use in closed (process
or supply) or vented (drain, waste or vent) piping systems. Within the loading area for each firestop device, the PEX tubes
may represent a 0 to 100 percent visual fill. Tubing to be tightly bundled within the device and rigidly supported on both
sides of wall assembly.
flanges.
Sealant.
© 2016 UL LLC
System No. W-J-2230

XHEZ.W-J-2230
Page Bottom

System No. W-J-2230

November 20, 2015
F Rating — 2 Hr
T Rating — 0 Hr
3
manufacturers.
2. Through Penetrant — Nom 2 in. (51 mm) diam (or smaller) Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing+ formed from polyvinyl
chloride (PVC) and installed in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NFPA No. 70). One or more tubes to be
installed within the firestop system. Tubing to be rigidly supported on both sides of wall.
See Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing (FKHU) category in the Electrical Construction Materials
Directory for names of manufacturers.
device threads, over gasketing material butting tightly to both sides of wall. As an alternate to gasketing material, sealant
flanges.
Sealant.
© 2016 UL LLC
System No. W-L-1441

XHEZ.W-L-1441
Page Bottom


System No. W-L-1441

November 20, 2015
F Ratings — 1 and 2 Hr (See Item 1) F Ratings — 1 and 2 Hr (See Item 1)
T Ratings — 1/2 and 3/4 Hr (See Item 1) FT Rating —1/2 and 3/4 Hr (See Item 1)
FH Ratings — 1 and 2 Hr (See Item 1)
FTH Rating — 1/2 and 3/4 Hr (See Item 1)
Wall and Partition Design. Opening in gypsum board to be 2-1/2 in. (64 mm) diam for nominal 2
in. (51 mm) firestop device and 4 1/2 in. (114 mm) diam for nominal 4 in. (102 mm) firestop
device.
The hourly F, FH Ratings of the firestop system is dependent upon the hourly rating of the wall in
which it is installed. The hourly T, FT, FTH Ratings of the firestop system are ½ hr for 1 hr rated walls
and ¾ hr for 2 hr rated walls.
2. Through Penetrant — One metallic pipe, conduit or tubing to be installed concentrically within the firestop system.
Pipe, conduit or tubing to be rigidly supported on both sides of the wall assembly. The following types and sizes of
metallic pipes, conduits and tubes may be used:
C. Conduit — Nom 3 in. (76 mm) diam (or smaller) rigid steel conduit or steel electrical metallic
tubing (EMT).
device threads, over gasketing material butting tightly to both sides of wall. For blank devices, flanges shall be secured to
gypsum wall with min two 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) long drywall screws. As an alternate to gasket material, sealant (Item 4)
may be used.
flanges.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP 606, FS-ONE Sealant or FS-ONE MAX Intumescent
Sealant
© 2016 UL LLC
System No. W-L-2537

XHEZ.W-L-2537
Page Bottom

System No. W-L-2537

November 20, 2015
F Ratings — 1 and 2 Hr (See Item 1)
T Ratings — 0 and 1/4 Hr (See Item 1)
device.
The hourly F Rating of the firestop system is dependent upon the hourly rating of the wall in which it
is installed. The hourly T Rating of the firestop system is 0 hr in 1 hr fire rated walls and 1/4 hr in 2 hr
fire rated walls.
2. Cross Linked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing — Nom 1 in. diam (or smaller) SDR9 PEX tubing for use in closed (process
or supply) or vented (drain, waste or vent) piping systems. Within the loading area for each firestop device, the PEX tubes
may represent a 0 to 100 percent visual fill. Tubing to be tightly bundled within the device and rigidly supported on both
sides of wall assembly.
flanges.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP 606 or FS-ONE Sealant, FS-ONE MAX Intumescent
Sealant
© 2016 UL LLC
System No. W-L-2538

XHEZ.W-L-2538
Page Bottom

System No. W-L-2538

November 20, 2015
T Rating — 0 Hr
device.
The hourly F Rating of the firestop system is dependent upon the hourly rating of the wall in which it
is installed.
2. Through Penetrant — Nom 2 in. (51 mm) diam (or smaller) Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing+ formed from polyvinyl
chloride (PVC) and installed in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NFPA No. 70). One or more tubes to be
installed within the firestop system. Tubing to be rigidly supported on both sides of wall.
See Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing (FKHU) category in the Electrical Construction Materials
Directory for names of manufacturers.
flanges.
Sealant
© 2016 UL LLC
System No. W-L-3334

XHEZ.W-L-3334
Page Bottom


System No. W-L-3334

November 20, 2015
F Ratings - 1, 2, 3 and 4 Hr (See Item 1) F Ratings - 1, 2, 3 and 4 Hr (See Item 1)
T Ratings - 0, 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2 Hr (See Items 2 and 3) FT Ratings - 0, 1/2, 1-1/2, and 2 Hr (See Items 2 and 3)
L Rating At Ambient - See Item 2 FH Ratings - 1, 2, 3 and 4 Hr (See Item 1)
L Ratings At 400 F - See Item 2 FTH Ratings - 0, 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, and 2Hr (See Items 2 and 3)
L Rating At Ambient - See Item 2
L Ratings At 400 F - See Item 2
1. Wall Assembly — The 1, 2, 3 or 4 hr fire rated gypsum board/stud wall assembly shall be constructed of the materials
and in the manner described within the individual U300, U400, V400 or W400 Series Wall and Partition Designs in the UL
Fire Resistance Directory and shall incorporate the following construction features:
be min 2-1/2 in. (64 mm) wide and spaced max 24 in. (610 mm) OC for 1 and 2 hr wall
assemblies. Steel Studs to be 3-5/8 in. (92 mm) for 3 and 4 hr wall assemblies. Steel studs to be
min 3-1/2 in. (89 mm) wide when 3/4 in. (19 mm) thick gypsum board is used (see Item 1B).
Wall and Partition Design. Alternately, for 1 and 2 hr rated walls only, min one layer of nom 3/4
in. (19 mm) thick gypsum board on each side of wall as specified in the individual Wall and
Partition Design may be used. Opening in gypsum board to be max 2-1/2 in. (64 mm) diam for 2"
device and max 4-1/2 in. (114 mm) diam for 4" device.
The hourly F and FH Ratings of the firestop system are dependent upon the hourly rating of the wall in
which it is installed.
When the hourly rating of the wall assembly is 1 hr, the T, FT and FTH Ratings are 0 hr.
except that, when Item 2J or 2K is used, the T, FT and FTH Ratings are 1/2 hr . When
the hourly rating of the wall assembly is 3 or 4 hr, the T, FT and FTH Ratings are 1-1/2
and 2 hr, respectively.
L Ratings apply only when device flanges are used. L Ratings vary depending on
whether the gasketing material (see Item 3) or the sealant (Item 4) is used. See Table
below for L Ratings.
L Rating, CFM/Sq Ft L Rating, CFM
Max Ambient 400°F Ambient 400°F

Cable Cable
Fill Type Sealant Gasket Sealant Gasket Sealant Gasket Sealant Gasket

100% Any cables 9.2 9.2 9.6 11.8 1.2 1.2 1.3 1.6
(Item 2) in
any
combination
slid into wall such that ends project an equal distance from the approximate centerline of the wall assembly. The annular
space between the device and the periphery of the opening shall be min 0 in. (point contact). Device provided with
flanges that are spun clockwise onto device threads, over gasketing material butting tightly to both sides of wall. As an
alternate to gasket material, sealant (Item 4) may be used. Device flanges are optional, except that when ¾ in. (19
mm) gypsum board (see Item 1B) is used, device flanges shall be used and for 3 and 4 hr fire rating, device
flanges shall be used. When the device flanges are not used, the T, FT and FTH Ratings for the firestop
system are 0 hr.
an additional 1/4 in. (6 mm) bead applied around periphery of device. When device flanges are used, gypsum drywall
compound may be used in place of the fill material. Sealant is required when device flanges are not used (see Item 3).
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — FS-ONE, FS-ONE MAX Intumescent Sealant, or CP 606
Sealant
© 2016 UL LLC
System No. W-L-2541

XHEZ.W-L-2541
Page Bottom

System No. W-L-2541

January 28, 2015
T Ratings — 0 and 1-1/2 Hr (See Item 1)
device.
The F Rating of the firestop system is dependent upon the hourly rating of the wall in which it is
installed. The T Rating of the firestop system is 0 and 1-1/2 hr for 1 and 2 hr rated walls, respectively.
2. Through Penetrants — One nonmetallic pipe or conduit to be centered within the firestop system. Pipe to be rigidly
supported on both sides of wall. The following types and sizes of pipes may be used:
A. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe — Nom 3 in. (76 mm) diam (or smaller) Schedule 40 cellular
or solid core PVC pipe for use in closed (process or supply) or vented (drain, waste, or vent)
piping systems.
B. Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC) Pipe — Nom 3 in. (76 mm) diam (or smaller) SDR
13.5 CPVC pipe for use in closed (process or supply) piping systems.
material rings and tightly twisted inner fabric smoke seal. Firestop device to be installed in accordance with the
accompanying installation instructions. Device slid into wall such that ends project an equal distance from the
approximate centerline of the wall assembly. The annular space between the device and the periphery of the opening shall
be min 0 in. (point contact). Device provided with flanges that are spun clockwise onto device threads, butting tightly to
both sides of wall.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP 653 2" Speed Sleeve and CP 653 4" Speed Sleeve
4. Fill, Void or Cavity Material* - Sealant — Min 1/2 in. (13 mm) thickness of fill material applied within the annulus
between firestop device and wall, flush with both surfaces of wall. An additional 1/4 in. (6 mm) bead shall be applied
around periphery of device on each side of wall prior to securing device flanges.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP 606, FS-ONE Sealant or FS-ONE MAX Intumescent
Sealant
© 2016 UL LLC
System No. W-L-3395

XHEZ.W-L-3395
Page Bottom


System No. W-L-3395

August 27, 2013
F Ratings - 1 and 2 Hr (See Items 1 and 2) F Ratings - 1 and 2 Hr (See Items 1 and 2)
T Rating - 1/4 Hr FT Rating - 1/4 Hr
L Rating At Ambient - See Item 5 FH Ratings - 1 and 2 Hr (See Items 1 and 2)
L Rating At 400F - See Item 5 FTH Ratings - 1/4 Hr
L Rating At 400F - See Item 5
in the manner described within the individual U400, V400 or W400 Series Wall and Partition Designs in the UL Fire
A. Studs — Wall framing shall consist of steel channel studs. Steel studs to be min 3-1/2 in. (89
mm) wide and spaced max 24 in. (610 mm) OC.
Wall and Partition Design. Maximum size of opening in gypsum board is dependent on the
mounting of the gangplate firestop device (Item 2). Openings for gangplates that are surface
mounted to the gypsum board may be oriented vertically or horizontally. Openings for gangplates
that are stud mounted direct to the wall studs prior to gypsum board layers are oriented
horizontally. Maximum opening sizes are specified in Table below.
Firestop Device Maximum Opening Size, in. (mm)
(Item 2) Gangplate Mounting
Surface Mounted Stud Mounted
24" Gangplate:
·Single 20-1/2 x (521 x 23 x 6-3/4 (584 x

5-1/2 140) 171)
·Double (Stacked) 20-1/2 x (521 x 23 x 14-1/4 (584 x

13-1/4 337) 362)
16" Gangplate:
·Single 15 x 5-1/2 (381 x 15-3/16 x (386 x

140) 6-3/4 171)
·Double (Stacked) 15 x (381 x 15-3/16 x (386 x

13-1/4 337) 14-1/4 362)
The hourly F and FH Ratings of the firestop system are dependent upon the hourly
rating of the wall in which it is installed.
2. Firestop Device* — The firestop device consists of a steel plate sandwich construction with three (16" device size) or
four (24" device size) circular opening ports which are each nom 4 in. (102 mm) diam. The firestop device is intended to
be oriented vertically or horizontally and mounted to the face of the opening on both sides of wall. The 16" and 24"
firestop devices when oriented horizontally are attached to the 16 in. (406 mm) and 24 in. (610 mm), respectively, center
to center spaced wall studs at each side of opening, over the gypsum board. As an option, up to two devices may be
installed adjacent to each other with a nom 13/16 in. (2 cm) overlap to protect larger sized openings (see Item 1B,
double device). As an option, single and double 16" and 24" gang plates may be attached directly against the studs prior
to installation of the gypsum board layers. When 16" gang plate is installed horizontally in 24" stud cavity, attachment of
plate to wall studs is optional. As an option, two devices may be installed end to end in adjacent stud cavities, over the
gypsum board layers or directly attached to the wall studs when installed in accordance with the Hilti Installation
Instructions and min one layer of gypsum board each side of wall is continuous across the two stud cavities. Each device
shall be secured to gypsum board with min No. 10 by 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) steel drywall screws through prepunched holes
around periphery of steel device plates; min three (16" gang plate) or four (24" gang plate) screws are used at each long
dimension and three screws at each end. When device is secured direct to studs prior to installation of gypsum board
layers, the fasteners along each long dimension of opening are spaced max 2-1/2 in. (64 mm) from corners and max 6 in.
(152 mm) on center unless otherwise noted in Hilti Installation Instructions. Min screw length is 3/4 in. (19 mm) where
device is secured direct to studs and at the overlapping plate to plate joint for double devices. The device shall be
installed in accordance with the accompanying installation instructions. When the hourly rating of the wall assembly
is 1 hr, blank gang plates (no cables) may be installed vertically or horizontally for single gang plate
openings only, and double gang plates are limited to installation horizontally with fasteners at ends of plates
penetrating into wall studs.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CFS-SL GP 16" and 24" Firestop Gangplate
3. Firestop Device — Within each circular opening port of the CFS-SL GP firestop gang plates (Item 2), one of the
following firestop devices shall be installed. Any combination of these firestop devices may be used within each gang
plate.
3A. Firestop Device* — Rectangular steel plate designed to close port openings with no
penetrants. Plate is field installed in accordance with Hilti Installation Instructions. Flanges of gang
plate over port opening are removed by loosening GP nuts, the steel plate cap installed with
prepunched holes aligned with GP fasteners, and the flanges of GP then reinstalled and nuts
reinstalled to tighten the plates in position.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CFS-SL GP CAP Firestop Gangplate
CAP
3B. Firestop Device* — Firestop device consists of a corrugated steel tube. The device flanges
are removed by spinning counterclockwise and are not used. Device tube slid into gang plate port
opening and centered within wall such that ends of device tube project an approximate equal
distance from the gang plate on each side of wall. The two integral screws within the flange of the
gang plate port at each side of wall are tightened to firmly bear against the device sleeve to retain
it in position. Device is designed to allow installation before or after the cable penetrants (if
employed) are in place. Device is used in combination with the firestop plugs described in Item 4.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CFS-SL RK 4" Firestop Sleeve
3C. Firestop Device* — Firestop device consists of a corrugated steel tube. The device flanges
it in position. Device is used in combination with the firestop plugs described in Item 4.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CFS-SL SK 4" Firestop Retrofit
Sleeve
3D. Firestop Device* — Firestop device consists of a corrugated steel tube with an inner plastic
housing, intumescent material rings and twisted inner fabric smoke seal. The device flanges are to
be spun counterclockwise and removed since they are not used. Device tube slid into gang plate
port opening and centered within wall such that ends of device tube project an approximate equal
it in position. The inner fabric seal shall be twisted to completely close off any unused opening
within the device.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP 653 4" Speed Sleeve
4 Fill, Void or Cavity Material* - Plug — Plugs are required to be used with the CFS-SL RK and SK firestop devices
(Items 3B and 3C). Nom 4" diam plug friction fit within the device sleeve flush with each end of the device on both sides
of wall. Plug cut to fit around the cable bundle (if used) and installed tightly within the device sleeve.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CFS-PL Firestop Plug 4"
5. Cables — Within the loading area for each firestop device (Items 3B through 3D), a tightly bundled cable may be
installed. The aggregate cross-sectional area of cables shall be min 0 to max 60 percent fill for each CFS-SL RK and CFS-
SL SK firestop device (Items 3B and 3C). For the CP 653 Speed Sleeve firestop device (Item 3D), the cables can be used
for a 0 to 100 percent visual fill. Cables to be rigidly supported on both sides of wall assembly. Any combination of the
following types of cables may be used:
G. Max 3/C No 12 AWG MC Cable.
The L Ratings are dependent on the type and number of devices within the gang plate
and the cable type and fill. For devices with cable bundle, the cable bundle shall be
nominally centered within the device to attain the L Ratings. The L Ratings in CFM per
2
GP device (Table 1) and in CFM per ft of opening (Table 2) are specified below:
Table 1 - CFM per CFS-SL GP Gangplate Device at Ambient and 400F
Type and Number of Devices in CFS-SL GP

(CAP - Item 3A; Devices - Any
combination of Items 3B through 3D
except as noted)
CAP
CAPs (Opt)
and CAP(s) and
CAPs One and Two Three Four
only Device Devices Devices Devices
Blank Opening Less 1 2 2.5 3.5

(no cables): Than
1
Openings with — 2 4 6 8
any combination
of Item 5 cables
for max 33%
aggregate fill in
device types 3B
and 3C, and/or
max 100%
visual cable fill
in device type
3D.
CAP
CAPs (Opt)
and CAP(s) and
One CP and Two Three Four CP
653 CP 653 CP 653 653
Device Devices Devices Devices
CAPs (Item (Item (Item (Item
only 3D) 3D) 3D) 3D)
Openings with — 1.5 3 4 5.5

max 100%
visual cable fill
with cable type
5D only and CP
653 only
2
Table 2 - CFM per FT of Opening at Ambient and 400F

except as noted)
CAP
CAPs (Opt)
and CAP(s) and
Blank Opening 1.2 1.3 2.6 3.2 4.5

(no cables):
Openings with — 2.6 5.1 7.7 10.2

any combination
of Item 5 cables
for max 33%
aggregate fill in
device types 3B
and 3C, and/or
max 100%
visual cable fill
in device type
3D.
CAP
CAPs (Opt)
and CAP(s) and
653 CP 653 CP 653 653
Openings with — 1.9 3.8 5.1 7.0

max 100%
visual cable fill
with cable type
5D only and CP
653 only
© 2016 UL LLC
System No. W-J-3200

XHEZ.W-J-3200
Page Bottom


System No. W-J-3200

January 25, 2013
F Rating - 2 Hr F Rating - 2 Hr
T Rating - 1/4 Hr FT Rating - 1/4 Hr
L Rating At Ambient - See Item 4 FH Rating - 2 Hr
L Rating At 400F - See Item 4 FTH Ratings - 1/4 Hr
L Rating At 400F - See Item 4
1. Wall Assembly — Min 6 in. (152 mm) thick reinforced lightweight or normal weight (100-150 pcf or 1600-2400
3
kg/m ) concrete. Wall may also be constructed of any UL Classified Concrete Blocks*. Maximum opening sizes are
specified in Table below. Opening may be oriented vertically or horizontally.
Firestop Device (Item 2) Maximum Opening Size, in. (mm)
24" Gangplate:
·Single 5-1/2 x 20-1/2 (140 x 521)
·Double (Stacked) 13-1/4 x 20-1/2 (337 x 521)
16" Gangplate:
·Single 5-1/2 x 15 (140 x 381)
·Double (Stacked) 13-1/4 x 15 (337 x 381)
See Concrete Blocks (CAZT) in the Fire Resistance Directory for names of manufacturers.
2. Firestop Device* — The firestop device consists of a steel plate sandwich construction with three (16" device size) or
four (24" device size) circular opening ports which are each nom 4 in. (102 mm) diam. The firestop device is intended to
be oriented vertically or horizontally and mounted to the face of the opening on both sides of wall. As an option, up to two
devices may be installed adjacent to each other with a nom 13/16 in. (2 cm) overlap to protect larger sized openings (see
Item 1 for double device). Each device shall be secured to wall with min 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) long masonry screws or
anchors through prepunched holes around periphery of steel device plates; min three (16" gang plate) or four (24" gang
plate) fasteners are used at each long dimension and three fasteners at each end. For double plate installations, four min
No. 10 by 3/4 in. (19 mm) steel screws are used to secure the plate to plate joint through prepunched holes in the plate.
The device shall be installed in accordance with the accompanying installation instructions.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CFS-SL GP 16" and 24" Firestop Gangplate
3. Firestop Device — Within each circular opening port of the CFS-SL GP firestop gang plates (Item 2), one of the
following firestop devices shall be installed. Any combination of these firestop devices may be used within each gang
plate.
3A. Firestop Device* — (Not Shown) Rectangular steel plate designed to close port openings
with no penetrants. Plate is field installed in accordance with Hilti Installation Instructions. Flanges
of gang plate over port opening are removed by loosening GP nuts, the steel plate cap installed
with prepunched holes aligned with GP fasteners, and the flanges of GP then reinstalled and nuts
reinstalled to tighten the plates in position.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CFS-SL GP CAP Firestop Gangplate
CAP
3B. Firestop Device* — Firestop device consists of a corrugated steel tube. The device flanges
it in position. Device is designed to allow installation before or after the cable penetrants (if
employed) are in place. Device is used in combination with the firestop plugs described in Item
3D.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CFS-SL RK 4" Firestop Sleeve
3C. Firestop Device* — Firestop device consists of a corrugated steel tube. The device flanges
it in position. Device is used in combination with the firestop plugs described in Item 3D.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CFS-SL SK 4" Firestop Sleeve
3D. Fill, Void or Cavity Material* - Plug — Plugs are required to be used with the CFS-SL RK
and SK firestop devices (Items 3B and 3C). Nom 4" diam plug friction fit within the device sleeve
flush with each end of the device on both sides of wall. Plug cut to fit around the cable bundle (if
used) and installed tightly within the device sleeve.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CFS-PL Firestop Plug 4"
3E. Firestop Device* — Firestop device consists of a corrugated steel tube with an inner plastic
housing, intumescent material rings and twisted inner fabric smoke seal. The device flanges are to
be spun counterclockwise and removed since they are not used. Device tube slid into gang plate
port opening and centered within wall such that ends of device tube project an approximate equal
it in position. The inner fabric seal shall be twisted to completely close off any unused opening
within the device.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP 653 4" Speed Sleeve
4. Cables — Within the loading area for each firestop device (Items 3B through 3E), a tightly bundled cable may be
installed. The aggregate cross-sectional area of cables shall be min 0 to max 60 percent fill for each CFS-SL RK and CFS-
SL SK firestop device (Items 3B and 3C). For the CP 653 Speed Sleeve firestop device (Item 3E), the cables can be used
for a 0 to 100 percent visual fill. Cables to be rigidly supported on both sides of wall assembly. Any combination of the
following types of cables may be used:
G. Max 3/C No 12 AWG MC Cable.
The L Ratings are dependent on the type and number of devices within the gang plate
and the cable type and fill. For devices with cable bundle, the cable bundle shall be
nominally centered within the device to attain the L Ratings. The L Ratings in CFM per
2
GP device (Table 1) and in CFM per ft of opening (Table 2) are specified below:
Table 1 - CFM per CFS-SL GP Gangplate Device at Ambient and 400F

except as noted)
CAP
CAPs (Opt)
and CAP(s) and
Blank Opening Less 1 2 2.5 3.5

(no cables): Than
1
Openings with — 2 4 6 8
any combination
of Item 5 cables
for max 33%
aggregate fill in
device types 3B
and 3C, and/or
max 100%
visual cable fill
in device type
3D.
CAP
CAPs (Opt)
and CAP(s) and
653 CP 653 CP 653 653
Openings with — 1.5 3 4 5.5

max 100%
visual cable fill
with cable type
5D only and CP
653 only
2
Table 2 - CFM per FT of Opening at Ambient and 400F


except as noted)
CAP
CAPs (Opt)
and CAP(s) and
Blank Opening 1.2 1.3 2.6 3.2 4.5

(no cables):
Openings with — 2.6 5.1 7.7 10.2

any combination
of Item 5 cables
for max 33%
aggregate fill in
device types 3B
and 3C, and/or
max 100%
visual cable fill
in device type
3D.
CAP
CAPs (Opt)
and CAP(s) and
653 CP 653 CP 653 653
Openings with — 1.9 3.8 5.1 7.0

max 100%
visual cable fill
with cable type
5D only and CP
653 only
© 2016 UL LLC
SECTION 078443 - JOINT FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Joints in or between fire-resistance-rated constructions.
1. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for firestop tracks for metal-framed
partition heads.
B. Product Test Reports: For each joint firestopping system, for tests performed by a qualified
testing agency.
A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating that joint firestopping systems have been
installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written instructions.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install joint firestopping systems when ambient or substrate
temperatures are outside limits permitted by joint firestopping system manufacturers or when
substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
Project 16018 JOINT FIRESTOPPING 078443 - 1

B. Install and cure joint firestopping systems per manufacturer's written instructions using natural
means of ventilation or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that joint firestopping systems can be installed
according to specified firestopping system design.
B. Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate joint firestopping systems.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:
1. Perform joint firestopping system tests by a qualified testing agency acceptable to

2. Test per testing standards referenced in "Joint Firestopping Systems" Article. Provide
rated systems complying with the following requirements:
a. Joint firestopping systems shall bear classification marking of a qualified testing

agency.
1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."
2.2 JOINT FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS
A. Joint Firestopping Systems: Systems that resist spread of fire, passage of smoke and other gases,
and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assemblies in or between which joint firestopping
systems are installed. Joint firestopping systems shall accommodate building movements
without impairing their ability to resist the passage of fire and hot gases.
B. Joints in or between Fire-Resistance-Rated Construction: Provide joint firestopping systems

with ratings determined per ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079.
following:
a. 3M Fire Protection Products

b. A/D Fire Protection Systems, Inc.
c. Blazeframe Industries
d. Grabber Construction Products
e. Hilti, Inc.
f. Nelson Firestop; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation
g. NUCO Inc.
h. Passive Fire Protection Partners

i. RectorSeal
j. Roxul, Inc.
k. Specified Technologies, Inc
l. Thermafiber, Inc.; an Owe Corning company
m. Tremco, Inc.
2. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the wall, floor,
or roof in or between which it is installed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning: Before installing fire-resistive joint systems, clean joints immediately to
comply with fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions and the following
requirements:
1. Remove from surfaces of joint substrates foreign materials that could interfere with
adhesion of elastomeric fill materials or compromise fire-resistive rating.
2. Clean joint substrates to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum
bond with elastomeric fill materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning
operation.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
B. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by joint firestopping system manufacturer

using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of
bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with manufacturer's written installation
instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.
B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support elastomeric fill
materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and
depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

1. After installing elastomeric fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove
combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent
components of fire-resistive joint system.
C. Install elastomeric fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce
the following results:
1. Elastomeric fill voids and cavities formed by joints and forming materials as required to
achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.
2. Apply elastomeric fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints.
3. For elastomeric fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish
to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
A. Clean off excess elastomeric fill materials adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods
and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by joint firestopping system
manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which joints occur.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure joint
firestopping systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If
damage or deterioration occurs despite such protection, cut out and remove damaged or
deteriorated fire-resistive joint systems immediately and install new materials to produce fire-
resistive joint systems complying with specified requirements.
3.5 JOINT FIRESTOPPING SYSTEM SCHEDULE
A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL's "Fire
Resistance Directory" under product Category XHBN.
B. Head-of-Wall, Fire-Resistive Joint Firestopping Systems:
1. UL-Classified Systems: HW-D-0285.
2. UL-Classified Systems: HW-D-0295.

12/2/2016 XHBN.HWD0285 Joint Systems
System No. HWD0285
XHBN.HWD0285
Joint Systems
Page Bottom
Authorities Having Jurisdiction should be consulted in all cases as to the particular requirements covering the installation and use of UL
Authorities Having Jurisdiction should be consulted before construction.
Fire resistance assemblies and products are developed by the design submitter and have been investigated by UL for compliance with
When field issues arise, it is recommended the first contact for assistance be the technical service staff provided by the product
Only products which bear UL's Mark are considered Certified.
XHBN Joint Systems
See General Information for Joint Systems
System No. HWD0285
June 04, 2010
Assembly Rating — 2 Hr
Nominal Joint Width — 2 In.
L Rating At Ambient — Less Than 1 CFM/Lin Ft
L Rating At 400°F — Less Than 1 CFM/Lin Ft
Class II Movement Capabilities — 12.5% Compression or Extension
http://database.ul.com/cgibin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=XHBN.HWD0285&ccnshorttitle=Joint+Systems&objid=1076104161&cf… 1/3
1. Floor Assembly — The fire rated fluted steel unit/concrete floor assembly shall be constructed of the materials and
in a manner described in the individual D900 FloorCeiling Design in the UL Fire Resistance Directory and shall include
the following construction features:
A. Steel Floor and Form Units* — Max 3 in. (76 mm) deep galv steel fluted floor units.
B. Concrete — Min 21/2 in. (64 mm) thick reinforced concrete as measured from top plane of
the floor units.
1A. Roof Assembly — (Not Shown) —As an alternate to the floor assembly, a fire rated fluted steel deck roof
assembly may be used. The roof assembly shall be constructed of the materials and in the manner described in the
individual P900 Series RoofCeiling Design in the UL Fire Resistance Directory. The hourly rating of the roof assembly
shall be equal to or greater than the hourly rating of the wall assembly. The roof assembly shall include the following
construction features:
A. Steel Roof Deck — Max 2 in. (51 mm) deep galv steel fluted roof deck.
B. Roof Insulation — Min 21/4 in. (57 mm) thick poured insulating concrete, as measured
from the top plane of the floor units.
2. Wall Assembly — Min 8 in. (203 mm) thick steelreinforced lightweight or normal weight (100150 pcf or 1600
2400 kg/m3) structural concrete. Wall may also be constructed of any UL Classified Concrete Blocks*.
manufacturers.
3. Joint System — Max separation between bottom of floor or roof and top of wall at time of installation of
joint system is 2 in. (51 mm). The joint system is designed to accommodate a max 12.5 percent
compression or extension from its installed width. The joint system shall consist of the following:
A. Forming Material — Nom 4 pcf (64 kg/m3) mineral wool batt insulation, min 2 in. (51 mm)
wide, compressed and firmly packed to fill the flutes and the gap between the top of the wall
and bottom of the floor or roof as a permanent form on one side of the wall. Batt insulation cut
to the shape of the fluted steel deck, approx 33 percent larger than the flutes. Pieces
compressed and installed cut edge first into the flutes above the top of the wall. Additional
pieces of batt insulation, min 2 in. wide, installed edgefirst into joint opening between bottom
of fluted steel deck and top of wall, parallel with joint direction, such that batt sections are
compressed min 33 percent in thickness. Compressed batt sections are flush with one surfaces
of wall. Adjoining lengths of batt to be tightly butted with butted seams spaced min 48 in. (1.22
m) apart along the length of the joint.
ROCK WOOL MANUFACTURING CO — Delta Board
B. Fill, Void or Cavity Material* — Min 1/8 in. (3.2 mm) wet thickness (min 1/16 in. or 1.6
mm dry thickness) of fill material sprayed or troweled into the joint to completely cover mineral
wool forming material and to overlap a min of 1/2 in. (13 mm) onto wall and steel deck, within
joint cavity.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP672 Firestop Spray
C. Forming Material — Nom 4 pcf (64 kg/m3) mineral wool batt insulation, min 6 in. wide,
compressed and firmly packed to completely fill the flutes and the gap between the top of the
wall and bottom of the floor or roof as a permanent form. Batt insulation cut to the shape of
the fluted steel deck, approx 33 percent larger than the flutes. Pieces compressed and installed
cut edge first into the flutes above the top of the wall. Additional pieces of batt insulation, min
6 in. (152 mm) wide, installed edgefirst into joint opening between bottom of fluted steel deck
and top of wall, parallel with joint direction, such that batt sections are compressed min 33
percent in thickness. Compressed batt sections are flush with one surface of wall. Adjoining
lengths of batt to be tightly butted with butted seams spaced min 48 in. (1.22 m) apart along
the length of the joint.
C1. Forming Material*Plugs — (OptionalNot Shown) Performed mineral wool plugs, formed
to the shape of the fluted floor units, friction fit to completely fill the flutes. The plugs shall be
tight to the mineral wool, Item 3A, and flush with one wall surface. Additional forming material,
described in Item 3C, to be used in conjunction with the plugs to fill the gap between the top of
the wall and the bottom of the steel floor units.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP777 Speed Plugs
D. Fill, Void or Cavity Material* — Min 1/8 in. (3.2 mm) wet thickness (min 1/16 in. or 1.6
mm dry thickness) of fill material sprayed or troweled on one side of the wall to completely
cover mineral wool forming material and to overlap a min of 1/2 in. (13 mm) onto wall and
steel deck on accessible side of wall.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP672 Firestop Spray or CFSSP
WB Firestop Joint Spray
Last Updated on 20100604
© 2016 UL LLC
under UL's FollowUp Service. Only those products bearing the UL Mark should be considered to be Certified and covered under UL's FollowUp
Information, Assemblies, Constructions, Designs, Systems, and/or Certifications (files) must be presented in their entirety and in a non
misleading manner, without any manipulation of the data (or drawings). 2. The statement "Reprinted from the Online Certifications Directory
with permission from UL" must appear adjacent to the extracted material. In addition, the reprinted material must include a copyright notice in
the following format: "© 2016 UL LLC".
System No. HWD0295
XHBN.HWD0295
Joint Systems
Page Bottom
Authorities Having Jurisdiction should be consulted in all cases as to the particular requirements covering the installation and use of UL
Authorities Having Jurisdiction should be consulted before construction.
Fire resistance assemblies and products are developed by the design submitter and have been investigated by UL for compliance with
When field issues arise, it is recommended the first contact for assistance be the technical service staff provided by the product
Only products which bear UL's Mark are considered Certified.
XHBN Joint Systems
XHBN7 Joint Systems Certified for Canada
See General Information for Joint Systems
See General Information for Joint Systems Certified for Canada
System No. HWD0295
March 23, 2012
ANSI/UL2079 CAN/ULC S115
Assembly Ratings — 1, 2, 3 and 4 Hr (See Item 2) F Ratings — 1, 2, 3 and 4 Hr (See Item 2)
Nominal Joint Width 1 In. FT Ratings — 1, 2, 3 and 4 Hr (See Item 2)
Class II Movement Capabilities —12.5% Compression or FH Ratings — 1, 2, 3 and 4 Hr (See Item 2)
Extension
L Rating At Ambient — Less Than 1 CFM/lin ft FTH Ratings — 1, 2, 3 and 4 Hr (See Item 2)
L Rating At 400 F — Less Than 1 CFM/lin ft Nominal Joint Width 1 In.
Class II Movement Capabilities — 12.5% Compression or
Extension
L Rating At Ambient — Less Than 1 CFM/lin ft
L Rating At 400 F — Less Than 1 CFM/lin ft
1. Floor Assembly — The firerated fluted steel floor unit/concrete floor assembly shall be constructed of the
materials and in the manner described in the individual FloorCeiling Design in the Fire Resistance Directory. The hourly
rating of the floor assembly shall be equal to or greater than the hourly rating of the wall assembly. The floor assembly
and shall include the following construction features:
A. Steel Floor and Form Units* — Max 3 in. (76 mm) deep galv steel fluted floor units.
B. Concrete — Min 21/2 in. (64 mm) thick reinforced concrete, as measured from the top
plane of the floor units.
2. Wall Assembly — The 1, 2, 3 or 4 h fire rated gypsum board/stud wall assembly shall be constructed of the
materials and in the manner specified in the individual U400, V400 or W400 Series Wall and Partition Design in the UL
Fire Resistance Directory and shall include the following construction features:
A. Steel Floor and Ceiling Runners — Floor and ceiling runners of wall assembly shall consist
of min No. 25 gauge galv steel channels sized to accommodate steel studs (Item 2B). Flange
height of ceiling runner shall be min 1/4 in. (6 mm) greater than max extended joint width.
Ceiling runner installed parallel to and centered directly beneath valleys of fluted steel floor
units and secured to valleys with steel fasteners or by welds spaced max 24 in. (610 mm) OC.
A1. Light Gauge Framing*Slotted Ceiling Runner — As an alternate to the ceiling runner in
Item 2A, slotted ceiling runner to consist of galv steel channel with slotted flanges sized to
accommodate steel studs (Item 2B). Slotted ceiling runner installed parallel to and centered
directly beneath valleys of fluted steel floor units and secured to valleys with steel fasteners
spaced max 24 in. (610 mm) OC.
CALIFORNIA EXPANDED METAL PRODUCTS CO — CST
BRADY CONSTRUCTION INNOVATIONS INC, DBA SLIPTRACK SYSTEMS — SLPTRK
MARINO/WARE, DIV OF WARE INDUSTRIES INC — Type SLT
A2. Light Gauge Framing*Vertical Deflection Ceiling Runner — As an alternate to the
ceiling runners in Item 2A and 2A1, vertical deflection ceiling runner to consist of galv steel
channel with slotted vertical deflection clips mechanically fastened within runner. Slotted clips,
provided with step bushings, for permanent fastening of steel studs. Flanges sized to
accommodate steel studs (Item 2B). Vertical deflection ceiling runner installed parallel and
centered directly beneath valleys of fluted steel floor units and secured to valleys with steel
fasteners spaced max 24 in. (610 mm) OC.
THE STEEL NETWORK INC — VertiTrack VTD358, VTD400, VTD600 and VTD800
B. Studs — Steel studs to be min 31/2 in. (89 mm) wide. Studs cut 1/2 in. (13 mm) to 3/4
in. (19 mm) less in length than assembly height with bottom nesting in and resting on the floor
runner and with top nesting in ceiling runner without attachment. When slotted ceiling runner is
used, steel studs secured to slotted ceiling runner with No. 8 by 1/2 in. (13 mm) long wafer
head steel screws at midheight of slot on each side of wall. When vertical deflection ceiling
runner is used, steel studs secured to slotted vertical deflection clips, through bushings, with
steel screws at midheight of each slot. Stud spacing not to exceed 24 in. (610 mm) OC.
C. Gypsum Board* — Nom 5/8 in. (16 mm) thick gypsum board with square or tapered edges.
The gypsum board type, number of layers, fastener type and sheet orientation shall be as
specified in the individual Wall and Partition Design, except that a nom 1 in. (25 mm) gap shall
be maintained between top of gypsum board and the lower surface of the steel floor units. The
screws attaching the gypsum board to the studs at the top of the first layer shall be located 4
in. (102 mm) from the steel floor unit valleys. The screws attaching the second layer to the
steel studs shall be located 31/2 in. (89 mm) from the valleys of the steel floor units. The
screws attaching the gypsum board to the studs at the top of the third layer shall be located 3
in. (76 mm) from the steel floor unit valleys. The screws attaching the fourth layer to the steel
studs shall be located 21/2 in. (64 mm) from the valleys of the steel floor units.
The hourly ratings of the joint system are dependent on the hourly rating of the wall.
3. Joint System — Max separation between bottom of floor units and top of gypsum board at time of
installation is 1 in. (25 mm). The joint system is designed to accommodate a max 12.5 percent compression
or extension from its installed width. The joint system shall consist of a forming material and a fill material as
follows:
A. Forming Material* — Nom 4 pcf (64 kg/m3) density mineral wool batt insulation cut into
strips having a width equal to the total thickness of gypsum board layers, to fill the gap
between the top of the gypsum board and bottom of the steel deck. The strips of mineral wool
are compressed 50 percent and tightly packed, cut edge first, into the gap on both sides of the
wall.
ROXUL INC — SAFE
THERMAFIBER INC — Type SAF
B. Fill, Void or Cavity Material* — Min 1/8 in. (3.2 mm) wet thickness (min 1/16 in. or 1.6
mm dry thickness) of fill material sprayed or troweled on each side of the wall to completely
cover mineral wool forming material and to overlap a min of 1/2 in. (13 mm) onto gypsum
board and steel deck on both sides of wall.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP672 Firestop Spray or CFSSP
WB Firestop Joint Spray
Last Updated on 20120323
© 2016 UL LLC
under UL's FollowUp Service. Only those products bearing the UL Mark should be considered to be Certified and covered under UL's FollowUp
Information, Assemblies, Constructions, Designs, Systems, and/or Certifications (files) must be presented in their entirety and in a non
misleading manner, without any manipulation of the data (or drawings). 2. The statement "Reprinted from the Online Certifications Directory
with permission from UL" must appear adjacent to the extracted material. In addition, the reprinted material must include a copyright notice in
the following format: "© 2016 UL LLC".
SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Standard and custom hollow metal doors and frames.

2. Steel sidelight, borrowed lite and transom frames.
3. Louvers installed in hollow metal doors.
4. Light frames and glazing installed in hollow metal doors.
1. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for embedding anchors for hollow metal work into
masonry construction.
2. Division 08 Section “Flush Wood Doors”.
3. Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glass view panels in hollow metal doors.
4. Division 08 Section "Door Hardware".
5. Division 09 Sections "Exterior Painting" and "Interior Painting" for field painting hollow
metal doors and frames.
6. Division 28 Section "Access Control" for access control devices installed at door
openings and provided as part of a security access control system.
C. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having
Jurisdiction.
1. ANSI/SDI A250.8 - Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
2. ANSI/SDI A250.4 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for
Steel Doors, Frames, Frames Anchors and Hardware Reinforcing.
3. ANSI/SDI A250.6 - Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcing on Standard Steel
Doors and Frames.
4. ANSI/SDI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel
Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames.
5. ANSI/SDI A250.11 - Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames.
6. ASTM A1008 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural,
High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability.
7. ASTM A653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-
Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
8. ASTM A924 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-
Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.
Project 16018 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 1

AIA/AA March 3, 2017
9. ASTM C 1363 - Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies
by Means of a Hot Box Apparatus.
10. ANSI/BHMA A156.115 - Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Frames.
11. ANSI/SDI 122 - Installation and Troubleshooting Guide for Standard Steel Doors and
Frames.
12. ANSI/NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; National Fire Protection
Association.
13. ANSI/NFPA 105: Standard for the Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies.
14. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; National Fire Protection
Association.
15. UL 10C - Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
16. UL 1784 - Standard for Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, core descriptions, hardware reinforcements, profiles, anchors, fire-resistance
rating, and finishes.
B. Door hardware supplier is to furnish templates, template reference number and/or physical
hardware to the steel door and frame supplier in order to prepare the doors and frames to receive
the finish hardware items.
C. Shop Drawings: Include the following:
1. Elevations of each door design.

2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses.
3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.
4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.
5. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.
6. Details of accessories.
7. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.
8. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.
D. Samples for Verification:
1. Samples are only required by request of the architect and for manufacturers that are not
current members of the Steel Door Institute.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal doors and frames through one source from a single
manufacturer wherever possible.
B. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8, latest
edition, "Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames".

C. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled
by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive
pressure according to UL10C (neutral pressure at 40” above sill) or UL 10C.
1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies Construction: For units exceeding sizes of tested
assemblies, attach construction label certifying doors are built to standard construction
requirements for tested and labeled fire rated door assemblies except for size.
2. Temperature-Rise Limit: Where indicated and at vertical exit enclosures (stairwell
openings) and exit passageways, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted
temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F (250 deg C) above ambient after 30
minutes of standard fire-test exposure.
3. Smoke Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105.
a. Smoke "S" Label: Doors to bear “S” label, and include smoke and draft control
gasketing applied to frame and on meeting stiles of pair doors.
D. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are
listed and labeled, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257.
Provide labeled glazing material.
E. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01

Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier, Installer, and
Contractor to review proper methods and procedures for installing hollow metal doors and
frames and to verify installation of electrical knockout boxes and conduit at frames with
electrified or access control hardware.
A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit
and Project site storage. Do not use non-vented plastic.
B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded
to jambs and mullions.
C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a
vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch high wood blocking.
Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity.
1. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.
Door and frames to be stacked in a vertical upright position.
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before

fabrication.

1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings,
templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor
bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
1.8 WARRANTY

replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
B. Warranty includes installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement
of defective doors.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. CECO Door Products (C).

2. Curries Company (CU).
3. Steelcraft (S).
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable
for exposed applications.
B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with
minimum G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coating.
C. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Commercial Steel (CS),
Type B; with minimum G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coating.
2.3 HOLLOW METAL DOORS
A. General: Provide 1-3/4 inch doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated;
fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless
otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and ANSI/NAAMM HMMA 867.
B. Exterior Doors (Energy Efficient): Face sheets fabricated of commercial quality hot-dipped zinc
coated steel that complies with ASTM A924 A60. Provide doors complying with requirements
indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model, ANSI/SDI A250.4 for
physical performance level, and HMMA 867 for door construction.
1. Design: Flush panel.

2. Core Construction: Foamed in place polyurethane and steel stiffened laminated core with
no stiffener face welds, in compliance with HMMA 867 “Laminated Core”.
a. Provide 22 gauge steel stiffeners at 6 inches on-center internally welded at 5" on-
center to integral core assembly, foamed in place polyurethane core chemically
bonded to all interior surfaces. No stiffener face welding is permitted.
b. Thermal properties to rate at a fully operable minimum U-Factor 0.29 and R-Value
3.4, including insulated door, thermal-break frame and threshold.
c. Kerf Type Frames: Thermal properties to rate at a fully operable minimum U-
Factor 0.36 and R-Value 2.7, including insulated door, kerf type frame, and
threshold.
3. Level/Model: Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Minimum
16 gauge (0.053 inch - 1.3-mm) thick steel, Model 2.
4. Vertical Edges: Vertical edges to be mechanically interlocked with hairline seam.
Beveled Lock Edge, 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3 mm in 50 mm).
5. Top and Bottom Edges: Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with a continuous steel
channel not less than 16 gauge, extending the full width of the door and welded to the
face sheet. Doors with an inverted top channel to include a steel closure channel, screw
attached, with the web of the channel flush with the face sheets of the door. Plastic or
composite channel fillers are not acceptable.
6. Hinge Reinforcement: Minimum 7 gauge (3/16") plate 1-1/4" x 9".
7. Hardware Reinforcements: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing
plates from same material as door face sheets.
C. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated of commercial quality cold rolled steel that complies with
ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by
referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical
performance level:
1. Design: Flush panel.

2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, or one-piece
polystyrene core, securely bonded to both faces.
a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection and temperature-rise ratings

indicated.
3. Level/Model: Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Minimum 18

gauge (0.042-inch - 1.0-mm) thick steel, Model 2.
4. Top and Bottom Edges: Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with a continuous steel
channel not less than 16 gauge, extending the full width of the door and welded to the
face sheet.
5. Hinge Reinforcement: Minimum 7 gauge (3/16") plate 1-1/4" x 9" or minimum 14 gauge
continuous channel with pierced holes, drilled and tapped.
6. Hardware Reinforcements: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing
plates from same material as door face sheets.

D. Manufacturers Basis of Design:
1. Curries Company (CU) - Polystyrene Core - 707 Series.

2. Curries Company (CU) - Energy Efficient - 777 Trio-E Series.
2.4 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.
B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated of hot-dipped zinc coated steel that complies with ASTM
A 653/A 653M, Coating Designation A60.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. Profile as indicated on drawings.

2. Frames: Minimum 16 gauge (0.053-inch -1.3-mm) thick steel sheet.
3. Manufacturers Basis of Design:
a. Curries Company (CU) – Kerfed Weatherstripped WM Series.
C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet that complies with
ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. Profile as indicated on drawings.

2. Frames: Minimum 16 gauge (0.053-inch -1.3-mm) thick steel sheet.
3. Manufacturers Basis of Design:
a. Curries Company (CU) - M Series.
D. Fire rated frames: Fabricate frames in accordance with NFPA 80, listed and labeled by a
qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated.
E. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 Table 4 with reinforcement

plates from same material as frames.
2.5 FRAME ANCHORS
A. Jamb Anchors:
1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size,

formed from A60 metallic coated material, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated
or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not
less than 0.177 inch thick.
2. Stud Wall Type: Designed to engage stud and not less than 0.042 inch thick.
3. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on (Knock-Down) Frames: Adjustable compression
anchors.
B. Floor Anchors: Floor anchors to be provided at each jamb, formed from A60 metallic coated
material, not less than 0.042 inches thick.

C. Mortar Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inches thick.
2.6 HOLLOW METAL PANELS
A. Provide hollow metal panels of same materials, construction, and finish as specified for
adjoining hollow metal components.
2.7 LOUVERS
A. Metal Louvers: Door manufacturer's standard metal louvers unless otherwise indicated.
1. Blade Type: Vision proof inverted V or inverted Y.

2. Metal and Finish: Galvanized steel, 0.040 inch thick, factory primed for paint finish with
baked enamel or powder coated finish. Match pre-finished door paint color where
applicable.
B. Louvers for Fire Rated Doors: Metal louvers with fusible link and closing device, listed and
labeled for use in doors with fire protection rating of 1-1/2 hours and less.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide door manufacturers

standard louver to meet rating indicated.
2. Metal and Finish: Galvanized steel, 0.040 inch thick, factory primed for paint finish with
baked enamel or powder coated finish. Match pre-finished door paint color where
applicable.
2.8 LIGHT OPENINGS AND GLAZING
A. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form
corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints at fabricator’s shop. Fixed
and removable stops to allow multiple glazed lites each to be removed independently.
Coordinate frame rabbet widths between fixed and removable stops with the type of glazing and
installation indicated.
B. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors and Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 20
gauge thick, fabricated from same material as door face sheet in which they are installed.
C. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch (16
mm) high unless otherwise indicated. Provide fixed frame moldings and stops on outside of
exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames.
D. Preformed Metal Frames for Light Openings: Manufacturer's standard frame formed of 0.048-
inch-thick, cold rolled steel sheet; with baked enamel or powder coated finish; and approved for
use in doors of fire protection rating indicated. Match pre-finished door paint color where
applicable.

2.9 ACCESSORIES
A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors.
B. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inches thick.
2.10 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form
metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where
practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. When shipping limitations so dictate,
frames for large openings are to be fabricated in sections for splicing or splining in the field by
others.
B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in ANSI/SDI A250.8.
C. Hollow Metal Doors:
1. Exterior Doors: Provide optional weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to

permit moisture to escape where specified.
2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors with applied trim or kits to fit. Factory install
glazing where indicated.
3. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragals as noted in door hardware sets in Division 08
Section "Door Hardware" on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire-
performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch beyond edge of door on
which astragal is mounted.
4. Continuous Hinge Reinforcement: Provide welded continuous 12 gauge strap for
continuous hinges specified in hardware sets in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware".
D. Hollow Metal Frames:
1. Shipping Limitations: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling
limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness
metal as frames.
2. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth,
flush, and invisible.
a. Welded frames are to be provided with two steel spreaders temporarily attached to
the bottom of both jambs to serve as a brace during shipping and handling.
Spreader bars are for bracing only and are not to be used to size the frame opening.
3. Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face
seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings
and to jambs by butt welding.
4. High Frequency Hinge Reinforcement: Provide high frequency hinge reinforcements at
door openings 48-inches and wider with mortise butt type hinges at top hinge locations.
5. Continuous Hinge Reinforcement: Provide welded continuous 12 gauge straps for
continuous hinges specified in hardware sets in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware".

6. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners
unless otherwise indicated for removable stops, provide security screws at exterior
locations.
7. Mortar Guards: Provide guard boxes at back of hardware mortises in frames at all hinges
and strike preps regardless of grouting requirements.
8. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot
welds per anchor.
9. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of
frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:
1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.

2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.
3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high.
4) Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches
or fraction thereof above 120 inches high.
b. Stud Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of
frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:
1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.

2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.
3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high.
4) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches
or fraction thereof above 96 inches high.
5) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches wide and mounted in
metal stud partitions.
10. Door Silencers: Except on weatherstripped or gasketed doors, drill stops to receive door
silencers. Silencers to be supplied by frame manufacturer regardless if specified in
Division 08 Section "Door Hardware".
E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive template mortised
hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door
Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door
Hardware."
1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.

2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive non-template, mortised and surface mounted door
hardware.
3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series
specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware.
4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with
Division 26 Sections.

2.11 STEEL FINISHES
A. Prime Finishes: Doors and frames to be cleaned, and chemically treated to insure maximum
finish paint adhesion. Surfaces of the door and frame exposed to view to receive a factory
applied coat of rust inhibiting shop primer.
1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead and chromate free primer
complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer
manufacturer for substrate; and compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. General Contractor to verify the accuracy of dimensions given to the steel door and frame
manufacturer for existing openings or existing frames (strike height, hinge spacing, hinge back
set, etc.).
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove welded in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding,
filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed
faces.
B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for square, level,
twist, and plumb condition.
C. Tolerances shall comply with SDI-117 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and
Frames."
D. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive non-template, mortised, and surface-mounted door
hardware.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in
place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with
ANSI/SDI A250.11 and NFPA 80 at fire rated openings.
1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, leveled, aligned, and braced securely until
permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete and frames properly set and
secured, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. Shim as
necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor,
and secure with post-installed expansion anchors.
3. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space
between frames and masonry with mortar.
4. Grout Requirements: Do not grout head of frames unless reinforcing has been installed in
head of frame. Do not grout vertical or horizontal closed mullion members.
C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified
below. Shim as necessary.
1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:
a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch.

b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch.
c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch.
d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4
inch.
2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.
D. Field Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with
hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions.
A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final
inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace
defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after
installation.
C. Prime-Coat and Painted Finish Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or
damaged areas of prime coat, or painted finishes, and apply touchup of compatible air drying,
rust-inhibitive primer, zinc rich primer (exterior and galvanized openings) or finish paint.

SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Solid core doors with wood veneer faces.

2. Factory finishing wood doors.
3. Factory fitting wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.
4. Louvers installed in flush wood doors.
5. Light frames and glazing installed in wood doors.
1. Division 08 Section “Door Schedule”.
2. Division 08 Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames".
3. Division 08 Section "Glazing".
4. Division 08 Section "Door Hardware".
5. Division 28 Section "Access Control".
C. Standards and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having
Jurisdiction.
1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.

2. ANSI A208.1 – Wood Particleboard.
3. Intertek Testing Service (ITS Warnock Hersey) - Certification Listings for Fire Doors.
4. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; National Fire Protection
Association.
5. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; National Fire
Protection Association.
6. UL 10C - Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; UL 1784 - Standard for Air
Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies.
7. Window and Door Manufacturers Association - WDMA I.S.1-A Architectural Wood
Flush Doors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include details of core and edge
construction, louvers, trim for openings, and WDMA I.S.1-A classifications. Include factory
finishing specifications.
Project 16018 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 1

AIA/MCS/WP March 3, 2017
B. Shop Drawings shall include:
1. Indicate location, size, and hand of each door.

2. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
3. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.
4. Indicate requirements for veneer matching.
5. Indicate location and extent of hardware blocking.
6. Indicate construction details not covered in Product Data.
7. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.
8. Indicate fire protection ratings for fire rated doors.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For factory finished doors.
1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches, for
each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set of
three samples showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in the finished
work.
2. Corner sections of doors, 8 by 10 inches, with door faces and edges representing actual
materials to be used.
a. Provide samples for each species of veneer and core material.

b. Finish veneer faced door samples with same materials proposed for factory
finished doors.
3. Frames for light openings, 6 inches long, for each material, type, and finish required.
D. Warranty: Provide sample of manufacturer’s warranty.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer
wherever possible.
B. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with WDMA I.S.1-A, latest
edition, "Industry Standard for Architectural Wood Flush Doors’.
C. Fire Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing
and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated,
based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 (neutral pressure at 40” above sill)
or UL10C.
1. Oversize Fire Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies
provide manufacturer’s construction label, indicating compliance to independent 3rd party
certification agency’s procedure, except for size.

2. Temperature Rise Limit: Where required and at vertical exit enclosures (stairwell
openings) and exit passageways, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted
temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F (250 deg C) above ambient after 30
minutes of standard fire test exposure.
3. Smoke Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105.
1) Smoke "S" Label: Doors to bear “S” label, and include smoke and draft
control gasketing applied to frame and on meeting stiles of pair doors.
D. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01

Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier, Installer, and
Contractor to review proper methods and procedures for receiving, handling, and installing
flush wood doors.
A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Package pre-finished doors individually in plastic bags and wrap bundles of doors in plastic
sheeting.
C. Mark each door on top rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and
weather tight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and
maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the
remainder of the construction period.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors
that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section.
b. Telegraphing of core construction in wood face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-
inch span.
2. Warranty includes installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or
replacement of defective doors.
3. Warranty Period for Solid Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DOOR CONSTRUCTION – GENERAL
A. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Extra Heavy Duty; Aesthetic Grade: Premium.
B. Fire Rated Doors: Provide construction and core as needed to provide fire ratings indicated.
1. Category A Edge Construction: Provide fire rated door edge construction with
intumescent seals concealed by outer stile (Category A) at 45, 60, and 90 minute rated
doors. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.
2. Pairs: Provide stiles with concealed intumescent seals. Comply with specified
requirements for exposed edges.
a. Provide fire retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated
without formed steel edges and astragals.
2.2 CORE CONSTRUCTION
A. Particleboard Core Doors:
1. Particleboard: Wood fiber based materials complying with ANSI A208.1 Particleboard
standard. Grade LD-2.
2. Adhesive: Fully bonded construction using Polyurethane (PUR) glue.
B. Fire Resistant Composite Core Doors:
1. Core: Non-combustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced

quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire protection rating indicated.
2. Blocking: As indicated under article “Blocking”.
3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated edge construction with improved
screw holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for
exposed edges.
2.3 BLOCKING
A. Fire Rated Doors:
1. Provide blocking as required to maintain manufacturers fire label/rating.

2.4 VENEERED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH

following:
1. ASSA ABLOY Wood Doors (GR): GPD Series.

2. Eggers Industries (EG): Premium Series.
3. VT Industries (VT): Artistry Series.
4. Algoma, Commercial Wood Doors
B. Interior Solid Core Doors:
1. Grade: Premium.
2. Faces: Veneer grades as noted below; veneer minimum 1/50-inch (0.5mm) thickness at
moisture content of 12% or less.
a. Plain Sliced Select White Maple, A grade faces.
3. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match.
4. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces:
a. Running Match.
5. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by
mullions.
6. Transom Match: Continuous match.
7. Vertical Edges: Matching same species as faces. Wood or composite material, one piece,
laminated, or veneered. Minimum requirements per WDMA section P-1, Performance
Standards for Architectural Wood Flush Doors.
8. Horizontal Edges: Solid wood or structural composite material meeting the minimum
requirements per WDMA section P-1, Performance Standards for Architectural Wood
Flush Doors
9. Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit sanded
before applying face veneers.
10. At doors over 40% of the face cut-out for lights and or louvers, furnish engineered
composite lumber core.

2.5 LIGHT FRAMES AND GLAZING
A. Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors up to and including 20-minute rating:
1. Wood Species: Same species as door faces.

2. Profile:
a. M1 Flush Bead.
b. At wood core doors with 20-minute fire protection ratings, provide wood beads
and metal glazing clips approved for such use.
B. Metal Frames for Light Openings in Fire Rated Doors over 20-minute Rating: Manufacturer's
standard frame formed of 0.048-inch-thick, cold rolled steel sheet; with baked enamel or
powder coated finish; and approved for use in doors of fire protection rating indicated.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Air Louver (LV).

b. All Metal Stamping (AP).
c. Anemostat (AN).
d. Pemko (PE).
C. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with the
flush wood door manufacturer's written instructions.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Factory fit doors to suit frame opening sizes indicated.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire rated doors.
2. Undercut: As required per manufacturer’s templates and sill condition.
B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Comply with final hardware
schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates.
1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment
before factory machining.
2. Metal Astragals: Factory machine astragals and formed steel edges for hardware for pairs
of fire rated doors.
C. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory.
1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.
2. Glazing: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing."
3. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.

D. Electrical Raceways: Provide flush wood doors receiving electrified hardware with concealed
wiring harness and standardized Molex™ plug connectors on both ends to accommodate up to
twelve wires. Coordinate connectors on end of the wiring harness to plug directly into the
electrified hardware and the through wire transfer hardware or wiring harness specified in
hardware sets in Division 08 "Door Hardware". Wire nut connections are not acceptable.
2.7 FACTORY FINISHING
A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication,
including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied,
before finishing.
1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be
omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.
B. Transparent Finish: Provide a clear protective coating over the wood veneer allowing the
natural color and grain of the selected wood species to provide the appearance specified. Stain is
applied to the wood surface underneath the transparent finish to add color and design flexibility.
1. Finish: Meet or exceed WDMA I.S. 1A TR8 UV Cured Acrylated Polyester finish
2. Staining:
a. Custom stain to match A/E’s sample; basis of design Algoma, RA-588.
3. Sheen: Satin.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.
1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing
characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.
2. Reject doors with defects.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."
B. Installation Instructions: Install doors and frames to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions and the referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
1. Install fire rated doors in corresponding fire rated frames according to NFPA 80.

C. Factory Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
D. Factory Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at
Project site.
E. Field modifications to doors shall not be permitted, except those specifically allowed by
manufacturer or fire rating requirements.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Operation: Re-hang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or
refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.

SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Storefront framing for window walls.

2. Storefront framing for punched openings.
3. Exterior and interior manual-swing entrance doors and door-frame units.

B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts. Include plans, elevations,
sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work.
1. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining
moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior.
2. Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminum-
framed entrances and storefronts, showing the following:
a. Joinery, including concealed welds.

b. Anchorage.
c. Expansion provisions.
d. Glazing.
e. Flashing and drainage.
3. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor
barriers.
Project 16018 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 1

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard
sizes.
E. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of assemblies, made from 12-

inch lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following:
1. Joinery, including concealed welds.

2. Anchorage.
3. Expansion provisions.
4. Glazing.
5. Flashing and drainage.
F. Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts indicated to

comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and
sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
A. Qualification Data: For Installer
B. Energy Performance Certificates: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, accessories,

and components, from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: NFRC-certified energy performance values for each aluminum-
framed entrance and storefront.
C. Product Test Reports: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, for tests performed by a
qualified testing agency.
D. Source quality-control reports.
E. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.
A. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts to include in maintenance

manuals.

B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for

aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated
by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they
relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction.
1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by A/E, except with A/E's
approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to A/E for
review.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed

entrances and storefronts that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or
a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.

b. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
c. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.
d. Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas.
e. Failure of operating components.
B. Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or
replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within
specified warranty period.
1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
2. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000

"Quality Requirements," to design aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts.

B. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by

testing of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts representing those indicated for this
Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in
construction.
1. Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand movements of supporting

structure including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term
creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.
2. Failure also includes the following:
a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.

b. Glass breakage.
c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
e. Failure of operating units.
C. Structural Loads:
1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
D. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows:
1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to

glass plane not exceeding 1/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite
or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch,
whichever is less.
2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch,
whichever is smaller.
E. Structural: Test according to ASTM E 330 as follows:
1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do not
evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.
2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures,
assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, or
permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.
3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds.
F. Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E 283 for infiltration as follows:
1. Fixed Framing and Glass Area:
a. Maximum air leakage of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure differential of 6.24

lbf/sq. ft.

2. Entrance Doors:
a. Pair of Doors: Maximum air leakage of 1.0 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure

differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.
b. Single Doors: Maximum air leakage of 0.5 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure
differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft..
G. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E 331 as follows:
1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested
according to a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind-
load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.
H. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: Test according to AAMA 501.1 as follows:
1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested at
dynamic pressure equal to 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less
than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.
2. Maximum Water Leakage: No uncontrolled water penetrating assemblies or water
appearing on assemblies' normally exposed interior surfaces from sources other than
condensation. Water leakage does not include water controlled by flashing and gutters, or
water that is drained to exterior.
I. Energy Performance: Certify and label energy performance according to NFRC as follows:
1. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have U-factor
of not more than 0.45 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F as determined according to NFRC 100.
2. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have a solar heat gain
coefficient of no greater than 0.45 as determined according to NFRC 200.
3. Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have an NFRC-certified
condensation resistance rating of no less than 15 as determined according to NFRC 500.
J. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface
temperature changes:
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

2. Thermal Cycling: No buckling; stress on glass; sealant failure; excess stress on framing,
anchors, and fasteners; or reduction of performance when tested according to
AAMA 501.5.
a. High Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: That which produces an exterior metal-

surface temperature of 180 deg F.
b. Low Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: 0 deg F.
c. Interior Ambient-Air Temperature: 75 deg F.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by the following]

[provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may
be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
1. Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company; 601T 6” Storefront

2. Tublite; 14650 6 ½” Storefront
3. YKK AP; YES 45 TU 6” Storefront- Basis of Design
B. Source Limitations: Obtain all components of aluminum-framed entrance and storefront system,
including framing and accessories, from single manufacturer.
2.3 FRAMING
A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of

thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
1. Construction: Thermally broken

2. Glazing System: [Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides.
3. Glazing Plane: Front.
4. Finish: Baked-enamel or powder-coat finish.
5. Fabrication Method: Field-fabricated stick system.
B. Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if not
integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction.
C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with

nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
D. Materials:
1. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated.
a. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209.

b. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221.
c. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M.
d. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.
2. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer

complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation
and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in
SSPC-SP COM, and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.
a. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

b. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.
c. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.

2.4 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS
A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation.
1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch-thick,

extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with
reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate
concealed tie rods.
2. Door Design: As indicated.

3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed
gaskets.
a. Provide non-removable glazing stops on outside of door.
2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE
A. Entrance Door Hardware: Hardware not specified in this Section is specified in Section 087100
"Door Hardware."
B. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard exterior-door bottom sweep with concealed fasteners
on mounting strip.
2.6 GLAZING
A. Glazing: Comply with Section 088000 "Glazing."
2.7 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining,

nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from
thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.
2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
B. Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of 1 inch that accommodate
fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials
and recommended by manufacturer.
1. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel

inserts complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M requirements.
C. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding

flashing compatible with adjacent materials.
D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12

requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat.

2.8 FABRICATION
A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.
B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration

of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or
grinding.
C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:
1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.

2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to
maintain required glazing edge clearances.
5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior.
6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest
extent possible.
D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.
E. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and
for installing entrance door hardware.
1. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops.

2. At interior doors, provide silencers at stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact. Install
three silencers on strike jamb of single-door frames and two silencers on head of frames
for pairs of doors.
F. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.
1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding-type weather stripping retained in adjustable

strip and mortised into door edge.
2. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms.
G. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest
extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying
finishes.
H. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to
Shop Drawings.
2.9 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness
of 1.5 mils. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion
coating, and applying and baking finish.
1. Color and Gloss: A/E to select from manufacturer’s full range of colors.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Do not install damaged components.
3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
4. Rigidly secure non-movement joints.
5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic
deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints.
6. Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.
B. Metal Protection:
1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by
painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose
or by installing nonconductive spacers.
2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by
painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
C. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Section 079200
"Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.
D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.
E. Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing."
F. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.
1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather
stripping.
A. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts to comply with the
following maximum tolerances:
1. Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet.

2. Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet.

3. Alignment:
a. Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element up to

1/2 inch wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch.
b. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from 1/2 to 1 inch
wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/8 inch.
c. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 1 inch wide or
more, limit offset from true alignment to 1/4 inch.
4. Location: Limit variation from plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/2 inch over total length.

SECTION 087100 – DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes commercial door hardware for the following:
1. Swinging doors.
2. Sliding doors.
3. Other doors to the extent indicated.
B. Door hardware includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following:
1. Mechanical door hardware.

2. Electromechanical door hardware.
3. Automatic operators.
C. Related Sections:
1. Division 08 Section “Door Schedule”.

2. Division 08 Section “Door Hardware Schedule”.
3. Division 08 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames”.
4. Division 08 Section “Flush Wood Doors”.
5. Division 08 Section “Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts”.
6. Division 28 Section “Access Control”.
D. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having
Jurisdiction.
1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.

2. ICC/IBC - International Building Code.
3. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
4. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.
5. NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies.
E. Standards: All hardware specified herein shall comply with the following industry standards:
1. ANSI/BHMA Certified Product Standards - A156 Series

2. UL10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
Project 16018 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 1

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operational descriptions and
finishes.
B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication
and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door
Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand,
function, and finish of door hardware.
1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and
Format for the Hardware Schedule."
2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating
complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Organize door
hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Submittals
that do not follow the same format and order as the Door Hardware Sets will be rejected
and subject to resubmission.
3. Content: Include the following information:
a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware
item.
b. Manufacturer of each item.
c. Fastenings and other pertinent information.
d. Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor
plans and in door and frame schedule.
e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.
f. Mounting locations for door hardware.
g. Door and frame sizes and materials.
h. Warranty information for each product.
4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date,
particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of
other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data,
Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information
essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule.
C. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified access control hardware indicating the following:
1. Wiring Diagrams: Upon receipt of approved schedules, submit detailed system wiring
diagrams for power, signaling, monitoring, communication, and control of the access
control system electrified hardware. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and
field-installed wiring. Include the following:
a. Elevation diagram of each unique access controlled opening showing

location and interconnection of major system components with respect to
their placement in the respective door openings.

b. Complete (risers, point-to-point) access control system block wiring

diagrams.
c. Wiring instructions for each electronic component scheduled herein.
2. Electrical Coordination: Coordinate with related sections the voltages and wiring details
required at electrically controlled and operated hardware openings.
D. Keying Schedule: After a keying meeting with the owner has taken place prepare a separate
keying schedule detailing final instructions. Submit the keying schedule in electronic format.
Include keying system explanation, door numbers, key set symbols, hardware set numbers and
special instructions. Owner must approve submitted keying schedule prior to the ordering of
permanent cylinders/cores.
E. Informational Submittals:
1. Product Test Reports: Indicating compliance with cycle testing requirements, based on
evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a
qualified independent testing agency.
F. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and maintenance

manuals for each item comprising the complete door hardware installation in quantity as
required in Division 01, Closeout Submittals.
A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum 5 years of

documented experience in producing hardware and equipment similar to that indicated for this
Project and that have a proven record of successful in-service performance.
B. Installer Qualifications: A minimum 3 years documented experience installing both standard

and electrified door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this
Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service
performance.
C. Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Experienced commercial door hardware distributors

with a minimum 5 years documented experience supplying both mechanical and
electromechanical hardware installations comparable in material, design, and extent to that
indicated for this Project. Supplier recognized as a factory direct distributor by the
manufacturers of the primary materials with a warehousing facility in Project's vicinity.
Supplier to have on staff a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available during
the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner concerning both
standard and electromechanical door hardware and keying.
D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware specified in this section
from a single source unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide electromechanical door hardware from the same manufacturer as mechanical

door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Each unit to bear third party permanent label demonstrating compliance with the referenced
standards.
F. Keying Conference: Conduct conference to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section

"Project Meetings." Keying conference to incorporate the following criteria into the final keying
schedule document:
1. Function of building, purpose of each area and degree of security required.

2. Plans for existing and future key system expansion.
3. Requirements for key control storage and software.
4. Installation of permanent keys, cylinder cores and software.
5. Address and requirements for delivery of keys.
G. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct coordination conference in compliance with requirements

in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier(s),
Installer(s), and Contractor(s) to review proper methods and the procedures for receiving,
handling, and installing door hardware.
1. Prior to installation of door hardware, conduct a project specific training meeting to

instruct the installing contractors' personnel on the proper installation and adjustment of
their respective products. Product training to be attended by installers of door hardware
(including electromechanical hardware) for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors.
Training will include the use of installation manuals, hardware schedules, templates and
physical product samples as required.
2. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in, power supply connections, and other
preparatory work performed by other trades.
3. Review sequence of operation narratives for each unique access controlled opening.
4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials.
5. Review the required inspecting, testing, commissioning, and demonstration procedures
H. At completion of installation, provide written documentation that components were applied to

manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and according to approved schedule.
A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up and shelving for door hardware
delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic access control hardware, software or
accessories at Project site without prior authorization.
B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware
Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.
C. Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials, software
and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service.
Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference".

1.6 COORDINATION
A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other
work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard and electrified hardware. Check
Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and
installing hardware to comply with indicated requirements.
B. Door Hardware and Electrical Connections: Coordinate the layout and installation of scheduled
electrified door hardware and related access control equipment with required connections to
source power junction boxes, low voltage power supplies, detection and monitoring hardware,
and fire and detection alarm systems.
C. Door and Frame Preparation: Doors and corresponding frames are to be prepared, reinforced
and pre-wired (if applicable) to receive the installation of the specified electrified, monitoring,
signaling and access control system hardware without additional in-field modifications.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties specified
in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions
of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties
made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Warranty Period: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or replace

components of standard and electrified door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period after final acceptance by the Owner. Failures include, but are
not limited to, the following:
1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage.

2. Faulty operation of the hardware.
3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.
4. Electrical component defects and failures within the systems operation.
C. Standard Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise
indicated.
D. Special Warranty Periods:
1. Ten years for mortise locks and latches.

2. Five years for exit hardware.
3. Twenty five years for manual surface door closer bodies.
4. Two years for electromechanical door hardware.
1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and
maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and
removal and replacement of door hardware.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE
A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in Door Hardware
Sets and each referenced section that products are to be supplied under.
B. Designations: Requirements for quantity, item, size, finish or color, grade, function, and other
distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Sets at
the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:
C. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for each door
hardware type required for the purpose of establishing requirements. Manufacturers' names are
abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule.
D. Substitutions: Requests for substitution and product approval for inclusive mechanical and
electromechanical door hardware in compliance with the specifications must be submitted in
writing and in accordance with the procedures and time frames outlined in Division 01,
Substitution Procedures. Approval of requests is at the discretion of the architect, owner, and
their designated consultants.
2.2 HANGING DEVICES
A. Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1 certified butt hinges with number of hinge knuckles as specified
in the Door Hardware Sets.
1. Quantity: Provide the following hinge quantity, unless otherwise indicated:
a. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches.

b. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches.
c. Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches.
d. For doors with heights more than 120 inches, provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge
for every 30 inches of door height greater than 120 inches.
2. Hinge Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized
for door thickness and clearances required:
a. Widths up to 3’0”: 4-1/2” standard or heavy weight as specified.

b. Sizes from 3’1” to 4’0”: 5” standard or heavy weight as specified.
3. Hinge Weight and Base Material: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:
a. Exterior Doors: Heavy weight, non-ferrous, ball bearing or oil impregnated

bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate standard weight.
b. Interior Doors: Standard weight, steel, ball bearing or oil impregnated
bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate heavy weight.

4. Hinge Options: Comply with the following where indicated in the Hardware Sets or on
Drawings:
a. Non-removable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened
into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for
the all out-swinging lockable doors.
5. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Hager Companies (HA).

b. Ives (IV).
c. McKinney Products (MK).
B. Continuous Geared Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.26 Grade 1-600 certified continuous geared
hinge. with minimum 0.120-inch thick extruded 6060 T6 aluminum alloy hinge leaves and a
minimum overall width of 4 inches. Hinges are non-handed, reversible and fabricated to
template screw locations. Factory trim hinges to suit door height and prepare for electrical cut-
outs.
a. Ives (IV).
b. McKinney Products (MK).
c. Stanley Hardware (ST).
2.3 DOOR OPERATING TRIM
A. Flush Bolts and Surface Bolts: ANSI/BHMA A156.3 and A156.16, Grade 1, certified.
1. Flush bolts to be furnished with top rod of sufficient length to allow bolt retraction device
location approximately six feet from the floor.
2. Furnish dust proof strikes for bottom bolts.
3. Surface bolts to be minimum 8” in length and U.L. listed for labeled fire doors and U.L.
listed for windstorm components where applicable.
4. Provide related accessories (mounting brackets, strikes, coordinators, etc.) as required for
appropriate installation and operation.
a. Burns Manufacturing (BU).

b. Ives (IV).
c. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO).
B. Coordinators: ANSI/BHMA A156.3 certified door coordinators consisting of active-leaf, hold-

open lever and inactive-leaf release trigger. Model as indicated in hardware sets.

b. Ives (IV).
C. Door Push Plates and Pulls: ANS/BHMA A156.6 certified door pushes and pulls of type and
design specified in the Hardware Sets. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as
required where conflicting hardware dictates.
1. Push/Pull Plates: Minimum .050 inch thick, size as indicated in hardware sets, with
beveled edges, secured with exposed screws unless otherwise indicated.
2. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as indicated in Hardware Sets.

b. Ives (IV).
2.4 CYLINDERS AND KEYING
A. General: Cylinder manufacturer to have minimum (10) years experience designing secured
master key systems and have on record a published security keying system policy.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of keyed cylinder and keys from the same source
manufacturer as locksets and exit devices, unless otherwise indicated.
a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU)-59 Series.

b. No Substitution.
C. Cylinders: Original manufacturer cylinders complying with the following:
1. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and cams to suit hardware application.
2. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised
trim ring.
3. Bored-Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks.
4. Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and recessed to allow the cylinder face to be
flush and be free spinning with matching finishes.
5. Keyway: Match Facility Standard.
D. Keying System: Each type of lock and cylinders to be factory keyed.
1. Conduct specified "Keying Conference" to define and document keying system

instructions and requirements.
2. Furnish factory cut, nickel-silver large bow permanently inscribed with a visual key
control number as directed by Owner.
3. Existing System: Key locks to Owner's existing system.
E. Key Quantity: Provide the following minimum number of keys:

1. Change Keys per Cylinder: Two (2) Three (3).

2. Master Keys (per Master Key Level/Group): Five (5).
3. Construction Keys (where required): Ten (10).
4. Construction Control Keys (where required): Two (2).
5. Permanent Control Keys (where required): Two (2).
F. Construction Keying: Provide construction master keyed cylinders.
G. Key Registration List (Bitting List):
1. Provide keying transcript list to Owner's representative in the proper format for importing
into key control software.
2. Provide transcript list in writing or electronic file as directed by the Owner.
H. Key Control Cabinet: Provide a key control system including envelopes, labels, and tags with
self-locking key clips, receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent
markers, and standard metal cabinet. Key control cabinet shall have expansion capacity of
150% of the number of locks required for the project.
a. Lund Equipment (LU).

b. MMF Industries (MM).
c. Telkee (TK).
P. Electronic Key Management System: Provide an electronic key control system with Stand-alone
Plug and Play features including advanced RFID technology. Touchscreen interface with PIN
access for keys individually locked in place. Minimum 1,000 system users and 21 iFobs for
locking receptors. System shall have a minimum 250,000 audit events screen displayed or
ability to be exported via USB port.
a. Medeco (MC).
b. Traka (TA).
2.5 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHING DEVICES
A. Mortise Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Series 1000, Operational
Grade 1 certified. Locksets are to be manufactured with a corrosion resistant steel case and be
field-reversible for handing without disassembly of the lock body.
a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) – ML2000 Series.

b. No Substitution.

2.6 AUXILIARY LOCKS
A. Mortise Deadlocks, Small Case: ANSI/BHMA A156.36, Grade 1, small case mortise type
deadlocks constructed of heavy gauge wrought corrosion resistant steel. Steel or stainless steel
bolts with a 1" throw and hardened steel roller pins. Deadlocks to be products of the same
source manufacturer and keyway as other specified locksets.
a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - DL4100 Series.

b. No Substitution.
2.7 LOCK AND LATCH STRIKES
A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with
curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise
indicated, and as follows:
1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by

manufacturer.
2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim.
3. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for
aluminum framing.
4. Double-lipped strikes: For locks at double acting doors. Furnish with retractable stop for
rescue hardware applications.
B. Standards: Comply with the following:
1. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13.

2. Strikes for Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2.
3. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.36.
4. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16.
2.8 ELECTRIC STRIKES
A. Standard Electric Strikes: Heavy duty, cylindrical and mortise lock electric strikes conforming
to ANSI/BHMA A156.31, Grade 1, UL listed for both Burglary Resistance and for use on fire
rated door assemblies. Stainless steel construction with dual interlocking plunger design tested
to exceed 3000 lbs. of static strength and 350 ft-lbs. of dynamic strength. Strikes tested for a
minimum 1 million operating cycles. Provide strikes with 12 or 24 VDC capability and supplied
standard as fail-secure unless otherwise specified. Option available for latchbolt and latchbolt
strike monitoring indicating both the position of the latchbolt and locked condition of the strike.
a. HES (HS).

B. Provide electric strikes with in-line power controller and surge suppressor by the same
manufacturer as the strike with the combined products having a five year warranty.
2.9 CONVENTIONAL EXIT DEVICES
A. General Requirements: All exit devices specified herein shall meet or exceed the following
criteria:
1. At doors not requiring a fire rating, provide devices complying with NFPA 101 and listed
and labeled for "Panic Hardware" according to UL305. Provide proper fasteners as
required by manufacturer including sex nuts and bolts at openings specified in the
Hardware Sets.
2. Where exit devices are required on fire rated doors, provide devices complying with
NFPA 80 and with UL labeling indicating "Fire Exit Hardware". Provide devices with the
proper fasteners for installation as tested and listed by UL. Consult manufacturer’s
catalog and template book for specific requirements.
3. Except on fire rated doors, provide exit devices with hex key dogging device to hold the
pushbar and latch in a retracted position. Provide optional keyed cylinder dogging on
devices where specified in Hardware Sets.
4. Devices must fit flat against the door face with no gap that permits unauthorized dogging
of the push bar. The addition of filler strips is required in any case where the door light
extends behind the device as in a full glass configuration.
5. Lever Operating Trim: Where exit devices require lever trim, furnish manufacturer's
heavy duty escutcheon trim with threaded studs for thru-bolts.
a. Lock Trim Design: As indicated in Hardware Sets, provide finishes and

designs to match that of the specified locksets.
b. Where function of exit device requires a cylinder, provide a cylinder (Rim or
Mortise) as specified in Hardware Sets.
6. Vertical Rod Exit Devices: Where surface or concealed vertical rod exit devices are used
at interior openings, provide as less bottom rod (LBR) unless otherwise indicated.
Provide dust proof strikes where thermal pins are required to project into the floor.
7. Narrow Stile Applications: At doors constructed with narrow stiles, or as specified in

Hardware Sets, provide devices designed for maximum 2” wide stiles.
8. Dummy Push Bar: Nonfunctioning push bar matching functional push bar.
9. Rail Sizing: Provide exit device rails factory sized for proper door width application.
10. Through Bolt Installation: For exit devices and trim as indicated in Door Hardware Sets.

B. Conventional Push Rail Exit Devices (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 certified
panic and fire exit hardware devices furnished in the functions specified in the Hardware Sets.
Exit device latch to be stainless steel, pullman type, with deadlock feature.
a. Von Duprin (VD) - 35A/98 XP Series.

b. No Substitution.
2.10 DOOR CLOSERS
A. All door closers specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria:
1. General: Door closers to be from one manufacturer, matching in design and style, with
the same type door preparations and templates regardless of application or spring size.
Closers to be non-handed with full sized covers including installation and adjusting
information on inside of cover.
2. Standards: Closers to comply with UL-10C for Positive Pressure Fire Test and be U.L.
listed for use of fire rated doors.
3. Size of Units: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for sizing of door
closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use.
Where closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically
handicapped, provide units complying with ANSI ICC/A117.1.
4. Closer Arms: Provide heavy duty, forged steel closer arms unless otherwise indicated in
Hardware Sets.
5. Closers shall not be installed on exterior or corridor side of doors; where possible install
closers on door for optimum aesthetics.
6. Closer Accessories: Provide door closer accessories including custom templates, special
mounting brackets, spacers and drop plates as required for proper installation. Provide
through-bolt and security type fasteners as specified in the hardware sets.
B. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Large Body Cast Iron): ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Grade 1 surface
mounted, heavy duty door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and
fully operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and opening force. Closers
to be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron body construction, with adjustable backcheck and
separate non-critical valves for closing sweep and latch speed control.
a. LCN Closers (LC) - 4040XP Series.

b. No Substitution.

2.11 ARCHITECTURAL TRIM
A. Door Protective Trim
1. General: Door protective trim units to be of type and design as specified below or in the
Hardware Sets.
2. Size: Fabricate protection plates (kick, armor, or mop) not more than 2" less than door
width (LDW) on stop side of single doors and 1” LDW on stop side of pairs of doors, and
not more than 1" less than door width on pull side. Coordinate and provide proper width
and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates. Height to be as specified in
the Hardware Sets.
3. Protection Plates: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 certified protection plates (kick, armor, or mop),
fabricated from the following:
a. Stainless Steel: 300 grade, 050-inch thick.
4. Options and fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as specified in the
Hardware Sets. Provide countersunk screw holes.

b. Ives (IV).
2.12 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. General: Door stops and holders to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware
Sets.
B. Door Stops and Bumpers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 certified door stops and wall
bumpers. Provide wall bumpers, either convex or concave types with anchorage as indicated,
unless floor or other types of door stops are specified in Hardware Sets. Do not mount floor
stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall bumpers are not appropriate, provide
overhead type stops and holders.

b. Ives (IV).
2.13 ARCHITECTURAL SEALS
A. General: Thresholds, weatherstripping, and gasket seals to be of type and design as specified
below or in the Hardware Sets. Provide continuous weatherstrip gasketing on exterior doors and

provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated. At exterior
applications provide non-corrosive fasteners and elsewhere where indicated.
B. Smoke Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by
a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke control
ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784.
1. Provide smoke labeled perimeter gasketing at all smoke labeled openings.
C. Fire Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings
indicated, based on testing according to UL-10C.
1. Provide intumescent seals as indicated to meet UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure
Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and NPFA 252, Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door
Assemblies.
D. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting
agency, for sound ratings indicated.
E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily
replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.
F. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. National Guard Products (NG).

2. Pemko Manufacturing (PE).
3. Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE).
2.14 FABRICATION
A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally
prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to
manufacturers recognized installation standards for application intended.
2.15 FINISHES
A. Standard: Designations used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware finishes
complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.18, including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes
indicated by certain manufacturers for their products.
B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition,
hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than
specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware
C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,

temporary protective covering before shipping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine scheduled openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and
other conditions affecting performance.
B. Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door types,
drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have been
resolved in writing.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115 series.
B. Wood Doors: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115-W series.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Shop Installation: Install hardware on the doors prior to shipment to the jobsite. Field installed
hardware will only be permitted as itemized below. Comply with all other Part 3 installation
requirements.
1. Extent of shop installed hardware shall include, but is not limited to:
a. Hanging devices.
b. Latching devices.
c. Operating trim.
d. Through-door wiring cables.
e. Door closers and overhead stops.
f. Flush bolts, surface bolts, and coordinating accessories.
g. Protective trim – protection plates, edge guards, trim protectors.
h. Coat hooks, viewers, and all other door mounted accessories.
2. Hardware items which are permitted to be installed in the field include:

a. Door stops (wall, floor, other mounting).
b. Frame mounted closer brackets.
c. Lock and latch strike plates.
d. Frame wiring cables.
3. Bench test shop installed work. This includes both mechanical and electrical
components. Replace defective items.
4. Ship field installed hardware items clearly labeled with the door number and attached to
the door using shrink wrap. Include all templates and instructions which are required to
complete the installation.

B. Install each item of mechanical and electromechanical hardware and access control equipment
to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and according to specifications.
1. Installers are to be trained and certified by the manufacturer on the proper installation and
adjustment of fire, life safety, and security products including: hanging devices; locking
devices; closing devices; and seals.
C. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable
publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations:
1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural
Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for
Wood Flush Doors."
3. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1
"Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities."
4. Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops or other wall mounted hardware
is located.
D. Integrated Wiegand access control products are required to be installed through current
members of the ASSA ABLOY "Certified Integrator" (CI) program.
E. Power Operator products and accessories are required to be installed through current members
of the manufacturer's "Power Operator Preferred Installer" program.
F. Retrofitting: Install door hardware to comply with manufacturer's published templates and
written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into
surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and
reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9
Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates
involved.
G. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying
with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
H. Storage: Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed.
Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will
not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation.
A. Field Inspection: Supplier will perform a final inspection of installed door hardware and state in
report whether work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door
hardware is properly installed, operating and adjusted.

3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to
ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to
operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating
and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.
A. Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect exposed
hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the
latest possible time frame.
B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.
C. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish. Provide final protection and
maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of
owner occupancy.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain mechanical and
electromechanical door hardware.
3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SETS
1. IV - Ives
2. HA - Hager
3. RO - Rockwood
4. VD - Von Duprin
5. RU - Corbin Russwin
6. HS - HES
7. LC - LCN Closers
8. RF - Rixson
9. PE - Pemko
10. MK - McKinney
11. SU - Securitron

Hardware Schedule
Set: 1.0
Doors: X100A
Description: Exterior Aluminum Egress Pair x Auto-Door Operator
2 Continuous Hinge 780-112HD Clear HA 087100

1 Removable Mullion KR4954 SP28 VD 087100
1 Rim Exit Device CDSI 33A-NL-OP 388 US26D VD
1 Rim Exit Device CDSI 33A-EO US26D VD 087100
1 Cylinder 3000-59 626 RU 087100
3 Cylinder 1000-59 626 RU 087100
2 Door Pull TBF157 US32D RO 087100
1 Auto-Door Operator 9500 series for pair ANDKB LC
2 Actuator 8310 856T series LC
1 Threshold 253x3AFG PE 087100
1 Rain Guard 346C PE 087100
1 Seals, Sweeps & Astragals By Alum door supplier OT
Notes: Entry by mechanical key or Push / Pull operation by cylinder dogging.

Auto-Operator system as specified to be turned off when doors are locked.
Verify auto-door function and required accessories with owner/architect.
Set: 2.0
Doors: 100A
Description: Interior Aluminum Egress Pair x Auto-Door Operator

2 Push Bar & Pull BF15747 US32D RO 087100
1 Auto-Door Operator 9500 series for par ANDKB LC
2 Actuator 8310 856T series LC
Notes: Push / Pull operation.

Verify auto-door function and required accessories with owner/architect.
Set: 3.0
Doors: X100
Description: Exterior Aluminum Egress


1 Rim Exit Device CDSI 33A-NL-OP 388 US26D VD
1 Cylinder 3000-59 626 RU 087100
1 Cylinder 1000-59 626 RU 087100
1 Door Pull TBF157 US32D RO 087100
1 Door Closer 4040XP SCUSH AL LC 087100
Set: 3.1
Doors: X100B
Description: Exterior HM Egress
3 Hinge 5BB1 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" NRP 630 IV

1 Rim Exit Device CDSI 99NL 990NL US26D VD 087100
1 Cylinder 3000-59 626 RU 087100
1 Cylinder 1000-59 626 RU 087100
1 Door Closer 4040XP HCUSH AL LC 087100
1 Gasketing 303AV PE 087100
1 Kick Plate K1050 10" x 2" LDW 4BE CSK US32D RO 087100
1 Sweep 3452AV PE 087100
Set: 4.0
Doors: X112
Description: Exterior HM Pair - Storeroom Function
6 Hinge 5BB1 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" NRP 630 IV

2 Flush Bolt 555/557 to suit US26D RO 087100
1 Dust Proof Strike 570 US26D RO 087100
1 Mortise Lock (storeroom) ML2057 NSA 59 626 RU 087100
1 Door Closer 4040XP HCUSH AL LC 087100
1 Gasketing 303AV PE 087100
2 Sweep 3452AV PE 087100
Notes: Door closer for active leaf only.

Metal edge astragal by HM door manufacturer.
Set: 5.0
Doors: 100B
Description: Corridor Pair - Fire Rated
6 Hinge 5BB1 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" 652 IV

1 Fire Rated Surf Vert Rod 9927L-BE-F LBR 996L-BE US26D VD 087100
1 Fire Rated Surf Vert Rod 9927EO-F US26D VD 087100
2 Door Closer 4040XP REG AL LC 087100
2 Electromagnetic Holder 990 series 689 RF 087100
1 Gasketing S88 PE 087100
Notes: Hold-open magnets to be controlled by building alarm system.
Set: 6.0
Doors: 101
Description: Storeroom Pair - Fire Rated
6 Hinge 5BB1 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" 652 IV

1 Auto Flush Bolt 2940 US26D RO 087100
1 Coordinator 576 US26D RO 087100
2 Door Stop 406/409/441CU US26D RO 087100
Notes: Metal edge astragal by HM door manufacturer.
Set: 7.0
Doors: 103, 105
Description: Storeroom Function 1 - Fire Rated
3 Hinge 5BB1 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" NRP 652 IV


Set: 8.0
Doors: 113
Description: Storeroom Function 2
3 Hinge 5BB1 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" NRP 652 IV

3 Silencer 608/608CA RO 087100
Set: 9.0
Doors: 114
Description: Card Reader Function - Fire Rated
3 Hinge 5BB1 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" NRP 652 IV

1 SMART Pac Bridge Rectifier 2005M3 HS 087100
1 Electric Strike 8500 x 852K 630 HS 087100
1 Prox Reader By Div. 28 OT
1 Door Closer 4040XP CUSH AL LC 087100
1 ElectroLynx Harness Frame QC-C1500P MK 087100
1 Wiring Diagram By manufacturer(s) 087100
1 Power Supply AQD series SU 087100
Notes: Entry by valid credential to reader or mechanical key override. Free egress at all times.
Reader, controllers, software & credentials by Division 28.
Coordinate with electrical and alarm/security contractor(s).
Set: 9.1
Doors: 110
Description: Card Reader Function
3 Hinge 5BB1 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" NRP 652 IV

1 SMART Pac Bridge Rectifier 2005M3 HS 087100
1 Electric Strike 8500 x 852K 630 HS 087100
1 Prox Reader By Div. 28 OT
1 Door Closer 4040XP CUSH AL LC 087100

1 ElectroLynx Harness Frame QC-C1500P MK 087100

1 Wiring Diagram By manufacturer(s) 087100
1 Power Supply AQD series SU 087100
Notes: Entry by valid credential to reader or mechanical key override. Free egress at all times.
Reader, controllers, software & credentials by Division 28.
Coordinate with electrical and alarm/security contractor(s).
Set: 10.0
Doors: 116
Description: Classroom Function 1 - Fire Rated
3 Hinge 5BB1 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" 652 IV

1 Mortise Lock (classroom intruder) ML2052 NSA 59 626 RU 087100
Set: 11.0
Doors: 102, 104
Description: Classroom Function 2
3 Hinge 5BB1 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" 652 IV

Set: 12.0
Doors: 112A, 112B
Description: Classroom Function 3 - HW Hinges
3 Hinge 5BB1HW 5" x 4-1/2" 652 IV

Set: 13.0
Doors: 116A, 116B, 116C, 116D

Description: Office Function
3 Hinge 5BB1 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" 652 IV

1 Mortise Lock (office) ML2053 NSA 59 626 RU 087100
Set: 14.0
Doors: 109, 111
Description: Push / Pull 1 - Lockable
3 Hinge 5BB1 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" 652 IV

1 Deadbolt DL4117 59 626 RU 087100
1 Push Plate 70F 8" x 16" US32D RO 087100
1 Pull Plate BF 111x70C US32D RO 087100
1 Door Closer 4040XP HEDA AL LC 087100
Set: 15.0
Doors: 109A, 111A
Description: Push / Pull 2
3 Hinge 5BB1 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" 630 IV

1 Push Plate 70F 8" x 16" US32D RO 087100
1 Pull Plate BF 111x70C US32D RO 087100
1 Door Closer 4040XP HEDA AL LC 087100

SECTION 088000 - GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Glass for windows, doors, and storefront framing.

2. Glazing sealants and accessories.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in
referenced glazing publications.
B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to

ASTM C 1036.
C. IBC: International Building Code.
D. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and
face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.
1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's
2. Review temporary protection requirements for glazing during and after installation.
Project 16018 GLAZING 088000 - 1

B. Glass Samples: For each type of the following products; 12 inches square.
1. Insulating glass.
C. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same
designations indicated on Drawings.
A. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturers of insulating-glass units with sputter-coated,
low-E coatings.
B. Product Certificates: For glass.
C. Product Test Reports: For coated glass, insulating glass, and glazing sealants, for tests
performed by a qualified testing agency.
1. For glazing sealants, provide test reports based on testing current sealant formulations
within previous 36-month period.
D. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report.
E. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications for Insulating-Glass Units with Sputter-Coated, Low-E Coatings:

A qualified insulating-glass manufacturer who is approved by coated-glass manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who
are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.
C. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited

according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program.
D. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to

ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.
1.9 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glass product, tape sealant,
gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to and compatibility with
elastomeric glazing sealants.

1. Testing is not required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current sealant
products and glazing materials matching those submitted.
2. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint-preparation
techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing sealants to glass,
tape sealants, gaskets, and glazing channel substrates.
3. Test no fewer than eight Samples of each type of material, including joint substrates,
shims, sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.
4. Schedule enough time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.
5. For materials failing tests, submit sealant manufacturer's written instructions for
corrective measures including the use of specially formulated primers.
A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to

glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or
other causes.
B. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written instructions for venting and sealing units to
avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate
temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when
glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are
outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.
1.12 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer agrees to replace

coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated
glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or
to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects
include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating.
B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Insulating Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace

insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of
insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to
glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written
instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior
surfaces of glass.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope™.
2. Pilkington North America.
3. Viracon, Inc.
B. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each
glass type.
C. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single
manufacturer for each product and installation method.
A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and
impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to
the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to
remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in
construction.
B. Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design loads within limits and
under conditions indicated determined according to the IBC and ASTM E 1300.
1. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Design Wind Pressures: Determine design wind pressures applicable to Project according
to ASCE/SEI 7, based on heights above grade indicated on Drawings.
a. Wind Design Data: As indicated on Drawings.

b. Basic Wind Speed: As indicated on Drawings.
c. Importance Factor: 1.0.
d. Exposure Category: B.
3. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, limit center-of-glass
deflection at design wind pressure to not more than 1/50 times the short-side length or 1
inch, whichever is less.
C. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with
16 CFR 1201, Category II.
D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties
specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated
below:
1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6 mm thick.

2. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall
unit and for each lite.
3. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's
WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F
4. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values,
according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program.
5. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.
2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers

and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these
publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
1. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing
Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."
B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with
certification label of the SGCC. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass,
thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.
C. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one

component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.
D. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum.
1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: 6 mm
E. Strength: Where annealed float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, heat-
strengthened float glass, or fully tempered float glass. Where heat-strengthened float glass is
indicated, provide heat-strengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass. Where fully
tempered float glass is indicated, provide fully tempered float glass.
2.4 GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Clear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3.
B. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated)
unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3.
1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion

parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.
C. Ceramic-Coated Vision Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition C, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2
(tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3; and complying with Specification No. 95-1-31 in GANA's
"Engineering Standards Manual."

D. Heat-Strengthened Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind HS (heat strengthened), Type I,

Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as
indicated, Quality-Q3.

2.5 INSULATING GLASS
A. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a

dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190.
1. Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary sealants.
2. Perimeter Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction.
2.6 GLAZING SEALANTS
A. General:
1. Compatibility: Compatible with one another and with other materials they contact,
including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates,
under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer
based on testing and field experience.
2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for
selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at
time of installation.
3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by A/E from manufacturer's full range.
B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S,
Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT.

following:
a. Dow Corning Corporation.

b. Pecora Corporation.
c. Sika Corporation.
2. Applications: At exterior corner window glazing.
2.7 GLAZING TAPES
A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric
tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer
rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and
complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:

1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated.

2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous
pressure.
3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous
pressure.
B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive
on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:
1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant.
2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with
a full bead of liquid sealant.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing
standard, with requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for
application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in
installation.
B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or
minus 5.
D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass

manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.
E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side
walking).
2.9 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS
A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face
clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product
manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance
requirements.
1. Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on
glass framing members and glazing components.
a. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
B. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the
following:
1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and
offsets at corners.
2. Presence and functioning of weep systems.
3. Minimum required face and edge clearances.
4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing.
Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so
that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that leave visible
marks in the completed Work.
3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL
A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and
other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in
B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from
Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge
damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair performance, or
impair appearance.
C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by
preconstruction testing.
D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of
compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
F. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.

1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass.
Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and
glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances
and to comply with system performance requirements.
2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant
width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of
tape.
G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways
in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to
requirements in referenced glazing publications.
H. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
I. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.
J. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by
gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with
sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
3.4 TAPE GLAZING
A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush
with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.
B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to
make them fit opening.
C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first, then to jambs. Cover
horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs, then to heads and sills.
D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped.
Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed.
F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.
G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against tape by inserting dense
compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops.
Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.
H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.
3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)
A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings

exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place
with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.
C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and
press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and
installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners
and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without
developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket
manufacturer.
D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and
press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-
glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to
produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with
E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.
3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)
A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass
lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding
into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and
backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance
for optimum sealant performance.
B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond
of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.
A. Immediately after installation remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry
surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of
dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains.
1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass,
remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings.
C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period.

D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces not more than four days before date scheduled for
inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in
writing by glass manufacturer.
3.8 MONOLITHIC GLASS SCHEDULE
A. Glass Type [GL-3]: Clear fully tempered float glass.
1. Minimum Thickness: 6 mm.

2. Safety glazing required.
3.9 INSULATING GLASS SCHEDULE
A. Glass Type [GL-1]: Low-E-coated, clear insulating glass.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Viracon; 1” Insulating VE1-2M

2. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch.
3. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6 mm.
4. Outdoor Lite: Heat-strengthened float glass,
5. Interspace Content: Argon.
6. Indoor Lite: Heat-strengthened float glass.
7. Low-E Coating: Sputtered on second surface.
8. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.30 Btu/(hr x sqft x ºF) maximum.
9. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.26 Btu/(hr x sqft x ºF) maximum.
10. Visible Light Transmittance: 70 percent minimum.
11. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.38 maximum.
B. Glass Type [GL-1T]: Low-E-coated, clear insulating glass.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Viracon; 1” Insulating VE1-2M

4. Outdoor Lite: Fully tempered float glass.
5. Interspace Content: Argon.
6. Indoor Lite: Fully tempered float glass.
7. Low-E Coating: Sputtered on second surface.
C. Glass Type [GL-2]: Insulating vision glass.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Viracon VNE1-53


4. Outdoor Lite: Fully tempered float glass.

5. Interspace Content: Air.
6. Indoor Lite: Fully tempered float glass.
7. Coating Location: Second surface.

SECTION 088813 - FIRE-RESISTANT GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Fire-protection-rated glazing.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in
B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to

ASTM C 1036.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and
face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.
A. Qualification Data: For installers.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of glass and glazing product, from manufacturer.
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who
are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.
Project 16018 FIRE-RESISTANT GLAZING 088813 - 1

A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to

glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or
other causes.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install fire-resistant glazing until spaces are
enclosed and weathertight and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient
temperature conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each
glass type.
B. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single
manufacturer for each product and installation method.
A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and impact loads
(where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the
following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; deterioration of glazing materials;
or other defects in construction.
2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers

and organization below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these
publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
1. GANA Publications: "Glazing Manual."
B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark glazing with certification label of the Safety
Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, glass thickness, and safety
glazing standard with which glass complies.

2.4 GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated)
unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated, Quality-Q3.

2.5 FIRE-PROTECTION-RATED GLAZING
A. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing: Listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on positive-pressure testing
according to NFPA 257 or UL 9, including the hose-stream test, and shall comply with
NFPA 80.
1. Fire-protection-rated glazing required to have a fire-protection rating of 20 minutes shall

be exempt from the hose-stream test.
B. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark fire-protection-rated glazing with

certification label of a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall
indicate manufacturer's name; test standard; whether glazing is permitted to be used in doors or
openings; if permitted in openings, whether or not glazing has passed the hose-stream test;
whether or not glazing meets 450 deg F (250 deg C) temperature-rise limitation; and the fire-
resistance rating in minutes.
C. Film-Faced Ceramic Glazing: Clear, ceramic flat glass; 5-mm thickness; faced on one surface
with a clear glazing film; and complying with 16 CFR 1201, Category II.

following:
a. SAFTI FIRST Fire Rated Glazing Solutions.

b. Schott North America, Inc.
c. Technical Glass Products.
2.6 FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED GLAZING
A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Glazing: Listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction, for fire-resistance ratings indicated, based on testing according to
ASTM E 119 or UL 263.
B. Fire-Resistance-Rated Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark fire-resistance-rated glazing with

certification label of a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall
indicate manufacturer's name, test standard, that the glazing is approved for use in walls, and the
fire-resistance rating in minutes.

2.7 GLAZING ACCESSORIES
A. Provide glazing gaskets, glazing sealants, glazing tapes, setting blocks, spacers, edge blocks,
and other glazing accessories that are compatible with glazing products and each other and are
approved by testing agencies that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing products with which
products are used for applications and fire-protection ratings indicated.
B. Glazing Sealants for Fire-Rated Glazing Products: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant
complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT. Comply with sealant and
glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications
indicated.

following:
a. Dow Corning Corporation.

b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc.
2. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by A/E from manufacturer's full range.
C. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric
tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer
rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and
complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:
1. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous
pressure.
2. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous
pressure.
D. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive
on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:
1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant.
2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with
a full bead of liquid sealant.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing
standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application
indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
B. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing agency that
listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for application and fire-
protection rating indicated.

2.9 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS
A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face
clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product
manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance
requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with
manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at
corners, and for compliance with minimum required face and edge clearances.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing.
Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
B. Examine glazing units to locate fire side and protected side. Label or mark units as needed so
that fire side and protected side are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that leave visible
marks in the completed work.
3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL
A. Use methods approved by testing agencies that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing products.
B. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and
other glazing materials unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in
C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from
Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or
other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and
appearance.
D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by
preconstruction testing.
E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing
publications unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of
compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways
in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to
requirements in referenced glazing publications.
H. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face fire side or protected side as
specified.
I. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by
gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with
3.4 TAPE GLAZING
A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush
with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.
B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to
make them fit opening.
C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover
horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.
D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped.
Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed.
F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense
compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops.
Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.
G. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.
3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)
A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings

exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.
B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop, so it is securely in place
with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.
C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and
press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and
installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners
and work toward centers of openings.
D. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)
A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass
lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances. Secure spacers or spacers and backings
in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for
optimum sealant performance.
B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond
of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial washaway from glass.
A. Immediately after installation, remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry
surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of
dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains.
1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass,
remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period.
D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date
scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as
recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
3.8 FIRE-PROTECTION-RATED GLAZING SCHEDULE
A. Glass Type [GL-4]: 45-minute fire-protection-rated glazing; film-faced ceramic glazing.

SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior partitions.

2. Suspension systems for interior ceilings and soffits.
3. Grid suspension systems for gypsum board ceilings.
1. Section 054000 "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for exterior and interior load-bearing and
exterior non-load-bearing wall studs; floor joists; roof rafters and ceiling joists; and roof
trusses.
A. Product Certificates: For each type of code-compliance certification for studs and tracks.
B. Evaluation Reports: For firestop tracks and post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES or other
A. Code-Compliance Certification of Studs and Tracks: Provide documentation that framing

members are certified according to the product-certification program of the Certified Steel Stud
Association, the Steel Framing Industry Association or the Steel Stud Manufacturers
Association.
Project 16018 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-

load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in
assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.
B. Horizontal Deflection: For wall assemblies, limited to 1/240 and 1/360 at walls with tile of the
wall height based on horizontal loading of 10 lbf/sq. ft.
2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless
2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 and ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 at walls
with tile hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated.
B. Studs and Tracks: ASTM C 645
1. Steel Studs and Tracks:
a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0296 inch.
b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Double-Track System: ASTM C 645 top outer tracks, inside track with 2-inch-deep
flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer track
sized to friction-fit over inner track.
C. Firestop Tracks: Top track manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with
movement of structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated;
in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

following:
a. ClarkDietrich Building Systems.

b. Fire Trak Corp.
c. Metal-Lite.
D. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0296 inch.

E. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.0538-inch minimum base-metal thickness, with

minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges.
1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch-thick, galvanized steel.
F. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0296 inch.

G. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-

wide flanges.

2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge-type steel sheet with minimum uncoated-
steel thickness of 0.0329 inch.
3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch-diameter
wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch-diameter wire.
H. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall attachment
flange of 7/8 inch, minimum uncoated-metal thickness of 0.0179 inch, and depth required to fit
insulation thickness indicated.
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.
1. Fasteners for Steel Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power,
and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following:
1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt),
nonperforated.
2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener
penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames,
cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions
affecting performance of the Work.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of

overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building
structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that
hangers will develop their full strength.
1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in
advance of time needed for coordination and construction.
A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.
1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply
to framing installation.
B. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, with connections securely
fastened.
C. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim,
grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.
D. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.
E. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing
members. Frame both sides of joints independently.
3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than
spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
1. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

2. Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior
walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.
D. Install tracks at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports
or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at
suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts that penetrate partitions above ceiling.
1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to
produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished
assemblies.

2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install
track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.
a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.

b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch
clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished
assembly.
c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead
structure.
3. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated

assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to
underside of solid structure.
a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-

rated assembly indicated.
E. Direct Furring:
1. Screw to wood framing.

2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment,
or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.
F. Z-Shaped Furring Members:
1. Erect insulation, specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation," vertically and hold in
place with Z-shaped furring members spaced 24 inches o.c.
2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall
with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven
fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.
3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange
extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring
channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more
than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit.
G. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than
1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Interior gypsum board.

2. Tile backing panels.
1. Section 061600 "Sheathing" for gypsum sheathing for exterior walls.

2. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural steel framing and
suspension systems that support gypsum board panels.
A. Mockups: Build mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects
and to set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockups for the following:
a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations.
2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings, on

exposed surfaces for review of mockups.
3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups.
B. Notify A/E and Owner when gypsum board is completely hung and finish compound is sanded
smooth. A/E and Owner shall review gypsum wall board installation before priming and
painting. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected. This review does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents
unless A/E’s specifically approves such deviations in writing.
Project 16018 GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather,
condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack
panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board

manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent.
B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.
C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and

construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an
independent testing agency.
2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and
that correspond with support system indicated.
2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

following:
a. American Gypsum.
b. CertainTeed Corporation.
c. Georgia-Pacific Building Products.
d. National Gypsum Company.
2. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
3. Long Edges: Tapered.

B. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

following:
a. American Gypsum.
b. CertainTeed Corporation.
c. Georgia-Pacific Building Products.
d. National Gypsum Company.
3. Long Edges: Tapered.
2.4 TILE BACKING PANELS
A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1288 or ASTM C 1325, with
manufacturer's standard edges.

following:
a. CertainTeed Corporation.
b. Custom Building Products.
c. National Gypsum Company.

3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.
2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc.

2. Shapes:
a. Cornerbead.
b. Bullnose bead.
c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound.
f. Expansion (control) joint.
g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.

2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B. Joint Tape:
1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.

2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat, use formulation that is compatible
with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.
2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and
trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.
a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.
3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
D. Joint Compound for Exterior Applications:
1. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting-type,
sandable topping compound.
2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: As recommended by sheathing board manufacturer.
E. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:
1. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from
0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.
2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by
panel manufacturer.
C. Sound-Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)

produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag
wool, or rock wool.
1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.

D. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant

complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through
perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative
assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
E. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation."
F. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Section 072600 "Vapor Retarders."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and support framing, with
Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance
of the Work.
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A. Comply with ASTM C 840.
B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid
abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels
not less than one framing member.
C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with
not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate
supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered
edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not
make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.
E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.
F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings,
etc.), except in chases braced internally.
1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke
ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.
2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.

3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof

slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow
1/4- to 3/8-inch-wide joints to install sealant.
G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural

abutments. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch-wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge
trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural
surfaces with acoustical sealant.
H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to
open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
I. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily
installed after panels have been installed on one side.
3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:
1. Wallboard Type: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Type X: As indicated on Drawings.
3. Ceiling Type: As indicated on Drawings.
B. Single-Layer Application:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest

extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing) unless
otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end
joints.
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses
of panels.
3. On Z-shaped furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with
no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.
4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
3.4 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS
A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11, at locations indicated to receive tile.
B. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a
uniform plane across panel surfaces.

3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same
fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings.
C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated.

2. L-Bead: Use where indicated.
3. U-Bead: Use where indicated.
D. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings.
3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,
fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for
decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not
intended to receive tape.
D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to
ASTM C 840:
1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.

2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile.
3. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.
a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior
Painting."
4. Level 5: Where indicated on Drawings.
a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior
Painting."
E. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other
non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall
application.

B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

BXUV - Fire Resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263

BXUV7 - Fire Resistance Ratings - CAN/ULC-S101 Certified for Canada
See General Information for Fire-resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263
See General Information for Fire Resistance Ratings - CAN/ULC-S101 Certified for Canada
Design No. U419

May 28, 2015
Nonbearing Wall Ratings — 1, 2, 3 or 4 Hr (See Items 4 & 5 through 5K)
* Indicates such products shall bear the UL or cUL Certification Mark for jurisdictions employing the UL or cUL Certification (such as Canada), respectively.
1. Floor and Ceiling Runners — (Not shown) — For use with Item 2 - Channel shaped, fabricated from min 25 MSG corrosion-protected steel, min
depth to accommodate stud size, with min 1-1/4 in. long legs, attached to floor and ceiling with fasteners 24 in. OC max.
1A. Framing Members* - Floor and Ceiling Runner — Not shown - In lieu of Item 1 — For use with Item 2B, proprietary channel shaped runners,
3-5/8 in. deep attached to floor and ceiling with fasteners 24 in. OC max.
CALIFORNIA EXPANDED METAL PRODUCTS CO — Viper25™ Track
CRACO MFG INC — SmartTrack25™
MARINO/WARE, DIV OF WARE INDUSTRIES INC — Viper25™ Track
PHILLIPS MFG CO L L C — Viper25™ Track
1B. Framing Members* - Floor and Ceiling Runner — Not shown - In lieu of Item 1 — For use with Item 2C, proprietary channel shaped runners,
1-1/4 in. wide by 3-5/8 in. deep fabricated from min 0.020 in. thick galv steel, attached to floor and ceiling with fasteners spaced 24 in. OC max.
CALIFORNIA EXPANDED METAL PRODUCTS CO — Viper20™ Track
MARINO/WARE, DIV OF WARE INDUSTRIES INC — Viper20™ Track
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/ulweb/LISEXT/1FRAME/FireResistanceWizard.html 7/10/2015
PHILLIPS MFG CO L L C — Viper20™ Track
1C. Framing Members*— Floor and Ceiling Runners — (Not shown) — In lieu of Item 1 - Channel shaped, attached to floor and ceiling with
fasteners 24 in. OC. max.
ALLSTEEL & GYPSUM PRODUCTS INC — Type SUPREME Framing System
CONSOLIDATED FABRICATORS CORP, BUILDING PRODUCTS DIV — Type SUPREME Framing System
QUAIL RUN BUILDING MATERIALS INC — Type SUPREME Framing System
SCAFCO STEEL STUD MANUFACTURING CO — Type SUPREME Framing System
STEEL CONSTRUCTION SYSTEMS INC — Type SUPREME Framing System
UNITED METAL PRODUCTS INC — Type SUPREME Framing System
1D. Floor and Ceiling Runners — (Not shown)—For use with Item 2A- Channel shaped, fabricated from min 20 MSG corrosion-protected or galv
steel, min depth to accommodate stud size, with min 1 in. long legs, attached to floor and ceiling with fasteners spaced max 24 in. OC.
1E. Framing Members*— Floor and Ceiling Runners — (Not shown, As an alternate to Item 1) — For use with Items 2E, 5F or 5G or 5I only,
channel shaped, fabricated from min. 0.015 in. (min bare metal thickness) galvanized steel, attached to floor and ceiling with fasteners 24 in. OC. max.
CLARKDIETRICH BUILDING SYSTEMS — CD ProTRAK
DMFCWBS L L C — ProTRAK
MBA METAL FRAMING — ProTRAK
RAM SALES L L C — Ram ProTRAK
STEEL STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS L L C — Tri-S ProTRAK
1F. Framing Members* - Floor and Ceiling Runner — Not shown - In lieu of Item 1 — For use with Item 2F, proprietary channel shaped runners,
minimum width to accommodate stud size, with 1- 1/8 in. long legs fabricated from min 0.015 in. (min bare metal thickness) galv steel, attached to floor
and ceiling with fasteners spaced 24 in. OC max.
SUPER STUD BUILDING PRODUCTS — The Edge
1G. Framing Members* - Floor and Ceiling Runner — For use with Item 2G, proprietary channel shaped runners, minimum width to accommodate
stud size attached to floor and ceiling with fasteners 24 in. OC max.
STUDCO BUILDING SYSTEMS — CROCSTUD Track
1H. Floor and Ceiling Runners — (Not shown) — Channel shaped, fabricated from min 0.02 in. galv steel, min width to accommodate stud size, with
min 1 in. long legs, for use with studs specified below and fabricated from min 0.02 in. galv steel or thicker, attached to floor and ceiling with fasteners
spaced max 24 in. OC.
MARINO/WARE, DIV OF WARE INDUSTRIES INC — Viper20™ Track VT100.
1I. Framing Members*— Floor and Ceiling Runners — (Not shown, As an alternate to Item 1) — For use with Items 2H, channel shaped, fabricated
from min. 0.015 in. (min bare metal thickness) galvanized steel, attached to floor and ceiling with fasteners 24 in. OC. max.
TELLING INDUSTRIES L L C — TRUE-TRACK™
1J. Framing Members* - Floor and Ceiling Runner — Not shown - In lieu of Item 1 — For use with Item 2I, proprietary channel shaped runners,
3-5/8 in. deep attached to floor and ceiling with fasteners 24 in. OC max.
TELLING INDUSTRIES L L C — Viper25™ Track
1K. Framing Members* - Floor and Ceiling Runner — Not shown - In lieu of Item 1 — For use with Item 2J, proprietary channel shaped runners,
1-1/4 in. wide by 3-5/8 in. deep fabricated from min 0.020 in. thick galv steel, attached to floor and ceiling with fasteners spaced 24 in. OC max.
TELLING INDUSTRIES L L C — Viper20™ Track
2. Steel Studs — Channel shaped, fabricated from min 25 MSG corrosion-protected steel, min depth as indicated under Item 5, spaced a max of 24 in.
OC. Studs to be cut 3/8 to 3/4 in. less than assembly height.
2A. Steel Studs — (As an alternate to Item 2, For use with Items 5B, 5E, 5H, 5J and 5K) Channel shaped, fabricated from min 20 MSG corrosion-
protected or galv steel, 3-1/2 in. min depth, spaced a max of 16 in. OC. Studs friction-fit into floor and ceiling runners. Studs to be cut 5/8 to 3/4 in. less
than assembly height.
2B. Framing Members* - Steel Studs — (As an alternate to Item 2, For use with Items 5C, 5I or 5K) - Proprietary channel shaped studs, 3-5/8 in. deep
spaced a max of 24 in. OC. Studs to be cut 3/4 in less than the assembly height and installed with a 1/2 in. gap between the end of the stud and track at
the bottom of the wall. For direct attachment of gypsum board only.
CALIFORNIA EXPANDED METAL PRODUCTS CO — Viper25™
CRACO MFG INC — SmartStud25™
MARINO/WARE, DIV OF WARE INDUSTRIES INC — Viper25™
PHILLIPS MFG CO L L C — Viper25™
2C. Framing Members* - Steel Studs — Not shown - In lieu of Item 2 — proprietary channel shaped steel studs, min depth as indicated under Item 5,
spaced a max if 24 in. OC, fabricated from min 0.020 in. thick galv steel. Studs cut 3/8 in. to 3/4 in. less in lengths than assembly heights.
CALIFORNIA EXPANDED METAL PRODUCTS CO — Viper20™
MARINO/WARE, DIV OF WARE INDUSTRIES INC — Viper20™
PHILLIPS MFG CO L L C — Viper20™
2D. Framing Members*— Steel Studs — In lieu of Item 2 - Channel shaped studs, min depth as indicated under Item 5, spaced a max of 24 in. OC.
Studs to be cut 3/4 in. less than assembly height.
ALLSTEEL & GYPSUM PRODUCTS INC — Type SUPREME Framing System
CONSOLIDATED FABRICATORS CORP, BUILDING PRODUCTS DIV — Type SUPREME Framing System
QUAIL RUN BUILDING MATERIALS INC — Type SUPREME Framing System
SCAFCO STEEL STUD MANUFACTURING CO — Type SUPREME Framing System
STEEL CONSTRUCTION SYSTEMS INC — Type SUPREME Framing System
UNITED METAL PRODUCTS INC — Type SUPREME Framing System
2E. Framing Members*— Steel Studs — (Not shown, As an alternate to Item 2) —For use with Items 5F or 5G or 5I or 5K only, channel shaped studs,
min depth as indicated under Item 5F, 5G or 5I, fabricated from min. 0.015 in. (min bare metal thickness) galvanized steel, spaced a max of 24 in. OC.
Studs to be cut 3/4 in. less than assembly height.
CLARKDIETRICH BUILDING SYSTEMS — CD ProSTUD
DMFCWBS L L C — ProSTUD
MBA METAL FRAMING — ProSTUD
RAM SALES L L C — Ram ProSTUD
STEEL STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS L L C — Tri-S ProSTUD
2F. Framing Members* - Steel Studs — Not shown - In lieu of Item 2 — proprietary channel shaped steel studs, minimum width indicated under Item
5, 1-1/4 in. deep fabricated from min 0.015 in. (min bare metal thickness) galvanized steel. Studs 3/8 in. to 3/4 in. less in lengths than assembly heights.
SUPER STUD BUILDING PRODUCTS — The Edge
2G. Framing Members* - Steel Studs — Not shown - In lieu of Item 2 - proprietary channel shaped studs, minimum width indicated under Item 5,
Studs to be cut 3/8 to 3/4 in less than the assembly height.
STUDCO BUILDING SYSTEMS — CROCSTUD
2H. Framing Members*— Steel Studs — (Not shown, As an alternate to Item 2) — Fabricated from min. 0.015 in. (min bare metal thickness)
galvanized steel, spaced a max of 24 in. OC. Studs to be cut 3/4 in. less than assembly height.
TELLING INDUSTRIES L L C — TRUE-STUD™
2I. Framing Members* - Steel Studs — (As an alternate to Item 2, For use with Items 5C or 5L or 5K) - Proprietary channel shaped studs, 3-5/8 in.
deep spaced a max of 24 in. OC. Studs to be cut 3/4 in less than the assembly height and installed with a in. gap between the end of the stud and track
at the bottom of the wall. For direct attachment of gypsum board only.
TELLING INDUSTRIES L L C — Viper25™
2J. Framing Members* - Metal Studs — Not shown - In lieu of Item 2 — proprietary channel shaped steel studs, min depth as indicated under Item 5,
spaced a max if 24 in. OC, fabricated from min 0.020 in. thick galv steel. Studs cut 3/8 in. to 3/4 in. less in lengths than assembly heights
TELLING INDUSTRIES L L C — Viper20™
2K. Framing Members*— Steel Studs — As an alternate to Item 2 - For use with Item 1, channel shaped studs, fabricated from min 25 MSG
corrosion-protected steel, min depth as indicated under Item 5, spaced a max of 24 in. OC. Studs to be cut 3/8 to 3/4 in. less than assembly height.
EB MéTAL INC — EB Stud
2L. Framing Members* — Steel Studs — As an alternate to Item 2 - For use with Item 1, channel shaped studs, fabricated from min 25 MSG
OLMAR SUPPLY INC — PRIMESTUD
2M. Framing Members* — Steel Studs — As an alternate to Item 2 - For use with Item 1, channel shaped studs, fabricated from min 25 MSG
MARINO/WARE, DIV OF WARE INDUSTRIES INC — StudRite™
3. Wood Structural Panel Sheathing — (Optional, For use with Item 5 Only.) - (Not Shown) - 4 ft wide, 7/16 in. thick oriented strand board (OSB) or
15/32 in. thick structural 1 sheathing (plywood) complying with DOC PS1 or PS2, or APA Standard PRP-108, manufactured with exterior glue, applied
horizontally or vertically to the steel studs. Vertical joints centered on studs, and staggered one stud space from wallboard joints. Attached to studs with
flat-head self-drilling tapping screws with a min. head diam. of 0.292 in. at maximum 6 in. OC. in the perimeter and 12 in. OC. in the field. When used,
fastener lengths for gypsum panels increased by min. 1/2 in.
4. Batts and Blankets* — (Required as indicated under Item 5) — Mineral wool batts, friction fitted between studs and runners. Min nom thickness as
indicated under Item 5. See Batts and Blankets (BKNV or BZJZ) Categories for names of Classified companies.
4A. Batts and Blankets* — (Optional) — Placed in stud cavities, any glass fiber or mineral wool insulation bearing the UL Classification Marking as to
Surface Burning Characteristics and/or Fire Resistance. See Batts and Blankets (BKNV or BZJZ) Categories for names of Classified companies.
4B. Batts and Blankets* — For use with Item 5K. Placed in stud cavities, any min. 3-1/2 in. thick glass fiber insulation bearing the UL Classification
Marking as to Surface Burning Characteristics and/or Fire Resistance. See Batts and Blankets (BKNV or BZJZ) Categories for names of Classified
companies.
5. Gypsum Board* — Gypsum panels with beveled, square or tapered edges, applied vertically or horizontally. Vertical joints centered over studs and
staggered one stud cavity on opposite sides of studs. Vertical joints in adjacent layers (multilayer systems) staggered one stud cavity. Horizontal joints
need not be backed by steel framing. Horizontal edge joints and horizontal butt joints on opposite sides of studs need not be staggered. Horizontal edge
joints and horizontal butt joints in adjacent layers (multilayer systems) staggered a min of 12 in. The thickness and number of layers for the 1 hr, 2 hr, 3
hr and 4 hr ratings are as follows:
Gypsum Board Protection on Each Side of Wall
Min No. of Min

Stud Layers Thkns of
Depth, in. & Thkns Insulation
Rating, Hr Items 2, 2C, 2D, 2F and 2G of Panel (Item 4)
1 3-1/2 1 layer, 5/8 in. thick Optional
1 2-1/2 1 layer, 1/2 in. thick 1-1/2 in.
1 1-5/8 1 layer, 3/4 in. thick Optional
2 1-5/8 2 layers, 1/2 in. thick Optional
2 3-1/2 1 layer, 3/4 in. thick 3 in.
4 2-1/2 2 layers, 3/4 in. thick 2 in.
CGC INC — 1/2 in. thick Type C, IP-X2 or IPC-AR; WRC, 5/8 in. thick Type AR, C, IP-AR, IP-X1, IP-X2, IPC-AR, SCX, SHX, WRX or WRC; 3/4
in. thick Types IP-X3 or ULTRACODE
UNITED STATES GYPSUM CO — 1/2 in. thick Type C, IP-X2, IPC-AR or WRC; 5/8 in. thick Type SCX, SGX, SHX, WRX, IP-X1, AR, C, WRC,
FRX-G, IP-AR, IP-X2, IPC-AR ; 3/4 in. thick Types IP-X3 or ULTRACODE
USG MEXICO S A DE C V — 1/2 in. thick Type C, IP-X2, IPC-AR or WRC; 5/8 in. thick Type AR, C, IP-AR, IP-X1, IP-X2, IPC-AR, SCX, SHX,
WRX, WRC or; 3/4 in. thick Types IP-X3 or ULTRACODE
When Item 7B, Steel Framing Members*, is used, Nonbearing Wall Rating is limited to 1 Hr. Min. stud depth is 3-1/2 in., min. thickness of insulation
(Item 4) is 3 in., and two layers of gypsum board panels (1/2 in. or 5/8 in. thick) shall be attached to furring channels as described in Item 6. One layer of
gypsum board panels (1/2 in. or 5/8 in. thick) attached to opposite side of stud without furring channels as described in Item 6.
5A. Gypsum Board* — (As an alternate to Item 5) — 5/8 in. thick, 24 to 54 in. wide, applied horizontally as the outer layer to one side of the assembly.
Secured as described in Item 6.
CGC INC — Type SHX.
UNITED STATES GYPSUM CO — Type FRX-G, SHX.
USG MEXICO S A DE C V — Type SHX.
5B. Gypsum Board* — (Not Shown) - As an alternate to Item 5 when used as the base layer on one or both sides of wall when 5/8 in or in. thick
products are specified. For direct attachment only to steel studs Item 2A, (not to be used with Item 3) - Nom 5/8 in. or in. may be used as alternate to
all 5/8 in. or in. shown in Item 5, Wallboard Protection on Each Side of Wall table. Nom 5/8 in. or in. thick lead backed gypsum panels with
beveled, square or tapered edges, applied vertically. Vertical joints centered over studs and staggered min 1 stud cavity on opposite sides of studs.
Gypsum board secured to 20 MSG steel studs Item 2A with 1-1/4 in. long Type S-12 steel screws spaced 8 in. OC at perimeter and 12 in. OC in the field.
To be used with Lead Batten Strips (see Item 11) or Lead Discs or Tabs (see Item 12).
RAY-BAR ENGINEERING CORP — Type RB-LBG
5C. Gypsum Board* — (For Use With Item 2B) Rating Limited to 1 Hour. 5/8 in. thick, 48 in. wide, Gypsum panels with beveled, square or tapered
edges, applied vertically or horizontally. (Vertical Application) - The gypsum board is to be installed on each side of the studs with 1 in. long Type S
coated steel screws spaced 8 in. OC starting 4 in. from the edge of the board at the vertical edges and 12 in. OC starting 6 in. from the edge of the board
at the center of each board. Gypsum boards are to be secured to the top and bottom track with screws spaced 8 in. OC starting 4 in. from the board edge.
Fasteners shall not penetrate through both the stud and the track at the same time. Vertical joints are to be centered over studs and staggered one stud
cavity on opposite sides of studs. (Horizontal Application) - The gypsum board is to be installed on each side of the studs with 1 in. long Type S coated
steel screws spaced 8 in. OC starting 4 in. from the edge of the board at the vertical edges and 12 in. OC starting 6 in. from the edge of the board at the
center of each board. Gypsum boards are to be secured to the top and bottom track with screws spaced 8 in. OC starting 4 in. from the board edge.
Fasteners shall not penetrate through both the stud and the track at the same time. All horizontal joints are to be backed as outlined under section VI of
Volume 1 in the Fire Resistive Directory.
CGC INC — Type SCX.
UNITED STATES GYPSUM CO — Type SCX, SGX.
USG MEXICO S A DE C V — Type SCX.
5D. Gypsum Board* — (As an alternate to Item 5) — 5/8 in. thick, 48 in. wide, applied vertically or horizontally. Secured as described in Item 6. For
use with Items 1 and 2 only.
CGC INC — Type USGX.
UNITED STATES GYPSUM CO — Type USGX.
USG MEXICO S A DE C V — Type USGX.
5E. Gypsum Board* — (Not Shown) - (As an alternate to Item 5 when used as the base layer on one or both sides of wall when 1/2 in. or 5/8 in thick
products are specified, For direct attachment only to steel studs Item 2A, not to be used with Item 3). Nominal 5/8 in. thick lead backed gypsum panels
with beveled, square or tapered edges, applied vertically. Vertical joints centered over studs and staggered min 1 stud cavity on opposite sides of studs.
Wallboard secured to studs with 1-1/4 in. long Type S-12 (or No. 6 by 1-1/4 in. long bugle head fine driller) steel screws spaced 8 in. OC at perimeter
and 12 in. OC in the field.
NEW ENGLAND LEAD BURNING CO INC, DBA NELCO — Nelco
5F. Gypsum Board* — (As an alternate to Item 5) — For use with Items 1E and 2E and limited to 1 Hour Rating only, Gypsum panels with beveled,
square or tapered edges, applied vertically, and fastened to the steel studs with 1 in. long Type S screws spaced 8 in. OC along vertical and bottom edges
and 12 in. OC in the field. Vertical joints centered over studs and staggered one stud cavity on opposite sides of studs. Steel stud depth shall be a
minimum 3-5/8 in.
UNITED STATES GYPSUM CO — 5/8 in. thick Type SCX, SGX.
5G. Gypsum Board* — (As an alternate to Item 5) — For use with Items 1E and 2E only, Gypsum panels with beveled, square or tapered edges,
applied vertically or horizontally, as specified in the table below and fastened to the steel studs as described in Item 6. Vertical joints centered over studs
and staggered one stud cavity on opposite sides of studs. Vertical joints in adjacent layers (multilayer systems) staggered one stud cavity. Horizontal
joints need not be backed by steel framing. Horizontal edge joints and horizontal butt joints on opposite sides of studs need not be staggered. Horizontal
edge joints and horizontal butt joints in adjacent layers (multilayer systems) staggered a min of 12 in. The thickness and number of layers for the 2 hr, 3
hr and 4 hr ratings are as follows:
Min Stud No. of Layers Min Thkns of

Rating, Depth, in. & Thickness Insulation
Hr Item 2E of Panel (Item 4)
CGC INC — 1/2 in. thick Type C, IP-X2 or IPC-AR;, 5/8 in. thick Type AR, C, IP-AR, IP-X1, IP-X2, IPC-AR, SCX, SHX, or; 3/4 in. thick Types IP-
X3 or ULTRACODE
UNITED STATES GYPSUM CO — 1/2 in. thick Type C, IP-X2, IPC-AR or; 5/8 in. thick Type SCX, SGX, SHX, IP-X1, AR, C, , FRX-G, IP-AR, IP-
X2, IPC-AR ; 3/4 in. thick Types IP-X3 or ULTRACODE
USG MEXICO S A DE C V — 1/2 in. thick Type C, IP-X2, IPC-AR or; 5/8 in. thick Type AR, C, IP-AR, IP-X1, IP-X2, IPC-AR, SCX, SHX, or; 3/4
in. thick Types IP-X3 or ULTRACODE
5H. Gypsum Board* — (Not Shown) - (As an alternate to Item 5 when used as the base layer on one or both sides of wall when 5/8 or 3/4 in thick
products are specified. For direct attachment only to steel studs Item 2A, (not to be used with Item 3) - Nom 5/8 or 3/4 in. may be used as alternate to all
5/8 or 3/4 in. shown in Item 5, Wallboard Protection on Each Side of Wall table. Nom 5/8 or 3/4 in. thick lead backed gypsum panels with beveled,
square or tapered edges, applied vertically. Vertical joints centered over 20 MSG steel studs and staggered min 1 stud cavity on opposite sides of studs.
Wallboard secured to studs with 1-1/4 in. long Type S-12 steel screws spaced 8 in. OC at perimeter and 12 in. OC in the field. Gypsum board secured to
20 MSG steel studs Item 2B with 1-1/4 in. long Type S-12 steel screws spaced 8 in. OC at perimeter and 12 in. OC in the field. For Joint Compound see
Item 5. To be used with Lead Batten Strips (see Item 11A) or Lead Discs (see Item 12A).
MAYCO INDUSTRIES INC — Type X-Ray Shielded Gypsum
5I. Gypsum Board* — (As an alternate to Item 5) - Nom. 5/8 in. thick gypsum panels with beveled, square or tapered edges installed as described in
Item 5. Steel stud minimum depth shall be as indicated in Item 5.
CGC INC — Type ULX
UNITED STATES GYPSUM CO — Type ULX
USG MEXICO S A DE C V — Type ULX
5J. Gypsum Board* — (Not Shown) - (As an alternate to Item 5 when used as the base layer on one or both sides of wall when 1/2 in. or 5/8 in thick
products are specified, For direct attachment only to steel studs Item 2A, not to be used with Item 3). Nom 5/8 in. thick lead backed gypsum panels with
beveled, square or tapered edges, applied vertically. Vertical joints centered over studs and staggered min 1 stud cavity on opposite sides of studs.
Wallboard secured to studs with 1-1/4 in. long Type S-12 steel screws gypsum panel steel screws spaced 8 in. OC at perimeter and 12 in. OC in the field.
Lead batten strips required behind vertical joints of lead backed gypsum wallboard and optional at remaining stud locations. Lead batten strips, min 2 in.
wide, max 8 ft long with a max thickness of 0.14 in. placed on the face of studs and attached to the stud with construction adhesive and two 1 in. long
Type S-12 pan head steel screws, one at the top of the strip and one at the bottom of the strip. Lead discs, nominal 3/8 in. diam by max 0.085 in. thick.
Compression fitted or adhered over the screw heads. Lead batten strips and discs to have a purity of 99.9% meeting the Federal specification QQ-L-201f,
Grade "C".
RADIATION PROTECTION PRODUCTS INC — Type RPP - Lead Lined Drywall
5K. Gypsum Board* — (Not Shown) - (As an alternate to Item 5) - Nom. 5/8 in. thick gypsum panels with beveled, square or tapered edges, applied
vertically or horizontally. Vertical joints centered over studs and staggered one stud cavity on opposite sides of studs. Vertical joints in adjacent layers
(multilayer systems) staggered one stud cavity. Horizontal joints need not be backed by steel framing. Horizontal edge joints and horizontal butt joints on
opposite sides of studs need not be staggered. Horizontal edge joints and horizontal butt joints in adjacent layers (multilayer systems) need not be
staggered. The number of layers for the 1 hr, 2 hr, 3 hr and 4 hr ratings are as follows:
Min No. of Min

Stud Layers Thkns of
Depth, in. & Thkns Insulation
Rating, Hr Items 2 through 2L of Panel (Item 4B)
1 3-5/8 1 layer, 5/8 in. thick 3-1/2 in.
UNITED STATES GYPSUM CO — 5/8 in. thick Type ULIX
6. Fasteners — (Not shown) — For use with Items 2 and 2F - Type S or S-12 steel screws used to attach panels to studs (Item 2) or furring channels
(Item 7). Single layer systems: 1 in. long for 1/2 and 5/8 in. thick panels or 1-1/4 in. long for 3/4 in. thick panels, spaced 8 in. OC when panels are
applied horizontally, or 8 in. OC along vertical and bottom edges and 12 in. OC in the field when panels are applied vertically. Two layer systems: First
layer- 1 in. long for 1/2 and 5/8 in. thick panels or 1-1/4 in. long for 3/4 in. thick panels, spaced 16 in. OC. Second layer- 1-5/8 in. long for 1/2 in., 5/8 in.
thick panels or 2-1/4 in. long for 3/4 in. thick panels, spaced 16 in. OC with screws offset 8 in. from first layer.Three-layer systems: First layer- 1 in.
long for 1/2 in., 5/8 in. thick panels, spaced 24 in. OC. Second layer- 1-5/8 in. long for 1/2 in., 5/8 in. thick panels, spaced 24 in. OC. Third layer- 2-1/4
in. long for 1/2 in., 5/8 in. thick panels or 2-5/8 in. long for 5/8 in. thick panels, spaced 12 in. OC. Screws offset min 6 in. from layer below. Four-layer
systems: First layer- 1 in. long for 1/2 in., 5/8 in. thick panels, spaced 24 in. OC. Second layer- 1-5/8 in. long for 1/2 in., 5/8 in. thick panels, spaced 24
in. OC. Third layer- 2-1/4 in. long for 1/2 in. thick panels or 2-5/8 in. long for 5/8 in. thick panels, spaced 24 in. OC. Fourth layer- 2-5/8 in. long for 1/2
in. thick panels or 3 in. long for 5/8 in. thick panels, spaced 12 in. OC. Screws offset min 6 in. from layer below.
6A. Fasteners — (Not shown) - For use with Item 5K- Type S or S-12 steel screws used to attach panels to studs or furring channels (Item 7). Single
layer systems: 1 in. long screws, spaced 8 in. OC when panels are applied horizontally, or 8 in. OC along vertical and bottom edges and 12 in. OC in the
field when panels are applied vertically. Two layer systems: First layer- 1 in. long screws, spaced 16 in. OC. Second layer- 1-5/8 in. screws, spaced 8 in.
OC with screws offset 8 in. from first layer. Three-layer systems: First layer- 1 in. long screws, spaced 24 in. OC. Second layer- 1-5/8 in. long screws,
spaced 24 in. OC. Third layer- 2-5/8 in. long screws, spaced 8 in. OC. Screws offset min 6 in. from layer below. Four-layer systems: First layer- 1 in.
long screws, spaced 24 in. OC. Second layer- 1-5/8 in. long screws, spaced 24 in. OC. Third layer- 2-5/8 in. long screws, spaced 24 in. OC. Fourth layer-
3 in. long screws, spaced 8 in. OC. Screws offset min 6 in. from layer below.
7. Furring Channels — (Optional, not shown, for single or double layer systems) — Resilient furring channels fabricated from min 25 MSG corrosion-
protected steel, spaced vertically a max of 24 in. OC. Flange portion attached to each intersecting stud with 1/2 in. long Type S-12 steel screws. Not for
use with Item 5A and 5E.
7A. Framing Members* — (Optional on one or both sides, not shown, for single or double layer systems) — As an alternate to Item 7, furring channels
and Steel Framing Members as described below:
a. Furring Channels — Formed of No. 25 MSG galv steel. 2-9/16 in. or 2-23/32 in. wide by 7/8 in. deep, spaced max. 24 in. OC
perpendicular to studs. Channels secured to studs as described in Item b. Gypsum board attached to furring channels as described in
Item 6. Not for use with Item 5A and 5E.
b. Steel Framing Members* — Used to attach furring channels (Item 7Aa) to studs (Item 2). Clips spaced max. 48 in. OC. RSIC-1
and RSIC-1 (2.75) clips secured to studs with No. 8 x 1-1/2 in. minimum self-drilling, S-12 steel screw through the center grommet.
RSIC-V and RSIC-V (2.75) clips secured to studs with No. 8 x 9/16 in. minimum self-drilling, S-12 steel screw through the center
hole. Furring channels are friction fitted into clips. RSIC-1 and RSIC-V clips for use with 2-9/16 in. wide furring channels. RSIC-1
(2.75) and RSIC-V (2.75) clips for use with 2-23/32 in. wide furring channels.
PAC INTERNATIONAL INC — Types RSIC-1, RSIC-V, RSIC-1 (2.75), RSIC-V (2.75).
7B. Framing Members* — (Optional, Not Shown) — As an alternate to Item 7, for single or double layer systems, furring channels and Steel Framing
Members on only one side of studs as described below:
a. Furring Channels — Formed of No. 25 MSG galv steel, spaced 24 in. OC perpendicular to studs. Channels secured to studs as
described in Item b. Batts and Blankets placed in stud cavity as described in Item 5. Two layers of gypsum board attached to furring
channels as described in Item 5. Not for use with Item 5A and 5E.
b. Steel Framing Members* — Used to attach furring channels (Item 7Ba) to one side of studs (Item 2) only. Clips spaced 48 in.
OC., and secured to studs with two No. 8 x 2-1/2 in. coarse drywall screws, one through the hole at each end of the clip. Furring
channels are friction fitted into clips.
KINETICS NOISE CONTROL INC — Type Isomax
7C. Framing Members* — (Not Shown) — (Optional on one or both sides, not shown, for single or double layer systems) — As an alternate to Item 7,
furring channels and Steel Framing Members as described below:
a. Furring Channels — Formed of No. 25 MSG galv steel. 2-3/8 in. wide by 7/8 in. deep, spaced max. 24 in. OC perpendicular to
studs. Channels secured to studs as described in Item b. Gypsum board attached to furring channels as described in Item 6. Not for use
with Item 5A and 5E.
b. Steel Framing Members* — Used to attach furring channels (Item 7Aa) to studs (Item 2). Clips spaced max. 48 in. OC.
GENIECLIPS secured to studs with No. 8 x 1-1/2 in. minimum self-drilling, S-12 steel screw through the center grommet. Furring
channels are friction fitted into clips.
PLITEQ INC — Type GENIECLIP
7D. Steel Framing Members — (Optional, Not Shown)* - Furring channels and resilient sound isolation clip as described below:
a. Furring Channels — Formed of No. 25 MSG galv steel. Spaced 24 in. OC perpendicular to studs. Channels secured to studs as
described in Item b. Ends of adjoining channels overlapped 6 in. and secured together with four self-tapping No. 8x1/2 Self Drilling
screws (2 per side 1 in. and 4 in. from overlap edge). Gypsum board attached to furring channels as described in Item 4. Side joint
furring channels shall be attached to studs with RESILMOUNT Sound Isolation Clips - located approximately 2 in. from each end of
length of channel. Both Gypsum Boards at side joints fastened into channel with screws spaced 8 in. OC, approximately 1/2 in. from
joint edge. Not for use with Item 5A and 5E.
b. Steel Framing Members* — Resilient sound isolation clip used to attach furring channels (Item 7Da) to studs. Clips spaced 24 in.
OC., and secured to studs with No. 10 x 2-1/2 in. coarse drywall screw through the center hole. Furring channels are friction fitted into
clips.
STUDCO BUILDING SYSTEMS — RESILMOUNT Sound Isolation Clips - Type A237 or A237R
8. Joint Tape and Compound — Vinyl or casein, dry or premixed joint compound applied in two coats to joints and screw heads of outer layers. Paper
tape, nom 2 in. wide, embedded in first layer of compound over all joints of outer layer panels. Paper tape and joint compound may be omitted when
gypsum panels are supplied with a square edge.
9. Siding, Brick or Stucco — (Optional, not shown) — Aluminum, vinyl or steel siding, brick veneer or stucco, meeting the requirements of local code
agencies, installed over gypsum panels. Brick veneer attached to studs with corrugated metal wall ties attached to each stud with steel screws, not more
than each sixth course of brick.
10. Caulking and Sealants* — (Optional, not shown) — A bead of acoustical sealant applied around the partition perimeter for sound control.
UNITED STATES GYPSUM CO — Type AS
11. Lead Batten Strips — (Not Shown, For Use With Item 5B) - Lead batten strips, min 1-1/2 in. wide, max 10 ft long with a max thickness of 0.125 in.
Strips placed on the interior face of studs and attached from the exterior face of the stud with two 1 in. long Type S-12 pan head steel screws, one at the
top of the strip and one at the bottom of the strip. Lead batten strips to have a purity of 99.9% meeting the Federal specification QQ-L-201f, Grade "C".
Lead batten strips required behind vertical joints of lead backed gypsum wallboard (Item 5B) and optional at remaining stud locations. Required behind
vertical joints.
11A. Lead Batten Strips — (Not Shown, For Use With Item 5H) Lead batten strips, 2 in. wide, max 10 ft long with a max thickness of 0.140 in. Strips
placed on the face of studs and attached to the stud with two min. 1 in. long min. Type S-8 pan head steel screws, one at the top of the strip and one at the
bottom of the strip or with one min. 1 in. long min. Type S-8 pan head steel screw at the top of the strip. Lead batten strips to have a purity of 99.5%
meeting the Federal specification QQ-L-201f, Grades "B, C or D". Lead batten strips required behind vertical joints of lead backed gypsum wallboard
and optional at remaining stud locations.
12. Lead Discs or Tabs — (Not Shown, For Use With Item 5B) - Used in lieu of or in addition to the lead batten strips (Item 11) or optional at other
locations - Max 3/4 in. diam by max 0.125 in. thick lead discs compression fitted or adhered over steel screw heads or max 1/2 in. by 1-1/4 in. by max
0.125 in. thick lead tabs placed on gypsum boards (Item 5B) underneath screw locations prior to the installation of the screws. Lead discs or tabs to have
a purity of 99.9% meeting the Federal specification QQ-L-201f, Grade "C".
12A. Lead Discs — (Not Shown, for use with Item 5H) Max 5/16 in. diam by max 0.140 in. thick lead discs compression fitted or adhered over steel
screw heads. Lead discs to have a purity of 99.5% meeting the Federal Specification QQ-L-201f, Grades "B, C or D".
13. Lead Batten Strips — (Not Shown, For Use With Item 5E) Lead batten strips, 2 in. wide, max 10 ft long with a max thickness of 0.142 in. Strips
placed on the face of studs and attached to the stud with two min. 1 in. long min. Type S-8 pan head steel screws, one at the top of the strip and one at the
bottom of the strip or with one min. 1 in. long min. Type S-8 pan head steel screw at the top of the strip. Lead batten strips to have a purity of 99.9%
meeting the Federal specification QQ-L-201f, Grade "C". Lead batten strips required behind vertical joints of lead backed gypsum wallboard (Item 5E)
and optional at remaining stud locations.
14. Lead Tabs — (Not Shown, For Use With Item 5E) 2 in. wide, 5 in. long with a max thickness of 0.142 in. Tabs friction-fit around front face of stud,
the stud folded back flange, and the back face of the stud. Tabs required at each location where a screw (that secures the gypsum boards, Item 5E) will
penetrate the steel stud. Lead tabs to have a purity of 99.9% meeting the Federal specification QQ-L-201f, Grade "C". Lead tabs may be held in place
with standard adhesive tape if necessary.
* Indicates such products shall bear the UL or cUL Certification Mark for jurisdictions employing the UL or cUL Certification (such as Canada),
respectively.
SECTION 093013 - CERAMIC TILING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Porcelain tile.
2. Glazed wall tile.
3. Stone thresholds.
1. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and
isolation joints in tile surfaces.
2. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for cementitious backer units.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1
apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified.
B. ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B,
ANSI A108.1C, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9,
ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14,
ANSI A108.15, ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are contained in its "Specifications
for Installation of Ceramic Tile."
C. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated.
D. Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs.
1. Review requirements in ANSI A108.01 for substrates and for preparation by other trades.
Project 16018 CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 1

B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and
locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished
tile surfaces.
C. Samples for Verification:
1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required.
2. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required.
3. Metal edge strips in 6-inch lengths.
B. Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile
manufacturer and Installer.
C. Product Certificates: For each type of product.
D. Product Test Reports: For tile-setting and -grouting products and certified porcelain tile.
A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and
that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount
installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.
2. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type,
composition, and color indicated.
A. Installer Qualifications:
1. Installer is a five-star member of the National Tile Contractors Association or a Trowel of

Excellence member of the Tile Contractors' Association of America.
2. Installer employs Ceramic Tile Education Foundation Certified Installers or installers
recognized by the U.S. Department of Labor as Journeyman Tile Layers.

A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact
until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages.
B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination can be avoided.
D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in
referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile from single source or producer.
1. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent
quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.
B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality
for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from single manufacturer and each aggregate
from single source or producer.
1. Obtain setting and grouting materials, except for unmodified Portland cement and
aggregate, from single manufacturer.
2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types,
compositions, and other characteristics indicated.
1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements.
B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with
ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced
by TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements
specified.

C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and
package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from
other packages and match approved Samples.
D. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard
with manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.
1. Where tile is indicated for installation in wet areas, do not use back- or edge-mounted tile
assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies in writing that this type of mounting is
suitable for installation indicated and has a record of successful in-service performance.
2.3 TILE PRODUCTS
Ceramic Tile Type [CT-2, 3, & 4]: Glazed porcelain tile.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, products by one of the

following:
a. American Olean; a division of Dal-Tile Corporation.

b. Crossville, Inc.
c. Daltile.
2. Certification: Tile certified by the Porcelain Tile Certification Agency.

3. Face Size: 12 by 24 inches.
5. Face: Plain with square edges.
6. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: Not less than 0.42.
7. Tile Color, Glaze, and Pattern: Match A/E's sample, basis of design daltile, Volume 1.0
Glazed Porcelain with Reveal Imaging:
a. CT-2 Intensity Pebble VL72

b. CT-3 Stereo Grey VL73
c. CT-4 Reverb Ash VL74
8. Grout Color: As selected by A/E from manufacturer's full range.
B. Ceramic Tile Type [CT-1]: Glazed wall tile.

following:
a. American Marazzi Tile, Inc.

b. American Olean; a division of Dal-Tile Corporation.
c. Daltile.
2. Module Size: 4 by 16 inches.

3. Face Size Variation: Rectified.
5. Face: Plain with cushion edges.

6. Finish: Bright, clear glaze.

7. Tile Color and Pattern: Match A/E sample; datile, Elevare Glazed Ceramic, Carbonel44.
9. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where
applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows,
selected from manufacturer's standard shapes:
a. Wainscot Cap for Thinset Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, module size 4 by
16 inches.
C. Ceramic Tile Type [CT-5]: Glazed wall tile.

following:
a. American Marazzi Tile, Inc.

b. American Olean; a division of Dal-Tile Corporation.
c. Daltile.
2. Module Size: 4-1/4 by 4-1/4 inches.

3. Face Size Variation: Rectified.
5. Face: Plain with modified square edges or cushion edges.
6. Finish: Bright, clear glaze.
7. Tile Color and Pattern: As selected by A/E from manufacturer's full range.
9. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where
applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows,
selected from manufacturer's standard shapes:
a. Base for Thinset Mortar Installations: Straight, module size 4-1/4 by 4-1/4 inches.
b. Wainscot Cap for Thinset Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, module size 4-1/4
by 4-1/4 inches.
2.4 THRESHOLDS
A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between
adjacent floor finishes.
1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, with lower edge of bevel aligned with or up to 1/16 inch above
adjacent floor surface. Finish bevel to match top surface of threshold. Limit height of
threshold to 1/2 inch or less above adjacent floor surface.
B. Marble Thresholds: ASTM C 503/C 503M, with a minimum abrasion resistance of 10 according
to ASTM C 1353 or ASTM C 241/C 241M and with honed finish.
1. Description: Uniform, fine- to medium-grained white stone with gray veining.

2.5 SETTING MATERIALS
A. Modified Dry-Set Mortar (Thinset): ANSI A118.4.
1. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix combined with acrylic resin liquid-latex additive at
Project site.
2. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging
mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4.
2.6 GROUT MATERIALS
A. High-Performance Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7.

following:
a. Bostik, Inc.
b. LATICRETE SUPERCAP, LLC.
c. MAPEI Corporation.
2. Polymer Type: Acrylic resin in liquid-latex form for addition to prepackaged dry-grout
mix.
A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based

formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations
indicated.
B. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and
grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout
manufacturers.
2.8 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT
A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout
manufacturers' written instructions.
B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.
C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and
other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance
characteristics for installations indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for
1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of coatings that are
incompatible with tile-setting materials, including curing compounds and other
substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances
required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.
2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset mortar comply with
surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.
a. Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically
scarified.
b. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or
grinding.
3. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical
units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed.
4. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if
not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset
mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-
setting material manufacturer.
B. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and
packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from
other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to
manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.
3.3 CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" for TCNA
installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the
ANSI A108 series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCNA
installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and
grouting materials used.

1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 series of tile
installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage:
a. Tile floors in wet areas.
B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete
covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at
obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring
visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for
straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other
penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges.
E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center
tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize
the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise
indicated.
1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within
tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.
2. Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same
size, align joints.
3. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on
floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated.
F. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths:
1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/8 inch.

2. Porcelain Tile: 3/16 inch.
3. Glazed Wall Tile: 1/6 inch.
G. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.
H. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control,
contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting
materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.
1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above
them.
I. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as adjacent floor unless

3.4 TILE BACKING PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Install panels and treat joints according to ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written
instructions for type of application indicated.
A. Remove and replace tile that is damaged or that does not match adjoining tile. Provide new
matching units, installed as specified and in a manner to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are
free of foreign matter.
1. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible.

2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written
instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended
by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by
testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and
plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and
after cleaning.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to
prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral
protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors.
B. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is
completed.
C. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from
tile surfaces.
3.7 INTERIOR CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor:
1. Ceramic Tile Installation [CT-2, 3, &4]: TCNA F113; thinset mortar.
a. Thinset Mortar: Modified dry-set mortar.

b. Grout: High-performance sanded grout.
B. Interior Wall Installations, Masonry or Concrete:
1. Ceramic Tile Installation [CT-5]: TCNA W202; thinset mortar.

b. Grout: High-performance unsanded grout.

C. Interior Wall Installations, Wood or Metal Studs or Furring:
1. Ceramic Tile Installation [CT-1 & CT-5]: TCNA W244C or TCNA W244F; thinset
mortar on cementitious backer units or fiber-cement backer board.

b. Grout: High-performance unsanded grout.

SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for interior ceilings.
B. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling
attachment devices to be cast in concrete.
B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 6 inches in size.
A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items
are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:
1. Ceiling suspension-system members.

2. Structural members to which suspension systems will be attached.
3. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
4. Carrying channels or other supplemental support for hanger-wire attachment where
conditions do not permit installation of hanger wires at required spacing.
5. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical panels.
6. Items penetrating finished ceiling and ceiling-mounted items including the following:
a. Lighting fixtures.
b. Diffusers.
c. Grilles.
d. Speakers.
e. Sprinklers.
Project 16018 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 1

7. Show operation of hinged and sliding components covered by or adjacent to acoustical

panels.
8. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch = 1 foot.
B. Product Test Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling, for tests performed by a qualified
testing agency.
C. Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling suspension system, from ICC-ES.
A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size panels equal to 2 percent of quantity installed.

2. Suspension-System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2 percent
of quantity installed.
A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site and
store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage
from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and
other causes.
B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized
moisture content.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed
and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project
when occupied for its intended use.
1. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before
beginning acoustical panel ceiling installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and its supporting suspension
system from single source from single manufacturer.
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing

agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Flame-Spread Index: Class A according to ASTM E 1264.

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.
2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS BASE BID [ACT-1]

following:
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; basis of design Fine Fissured

2. CertainTeed Corporation.
3. Chicago Metallic Corporation.
B. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels according to ASTM E 1264
and designated by type, form, pattern, acoustical rating, and light reflectance unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Classification: Provide panels as follows:
1. Type and Form: Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 2, water felted.
2. Pattern: CE (perforated, small holes and lightly textured).
D. Color: White.
E. Light Reflectance (LR): Not less than 0.86.
F. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): Not less than 0.75.
G. Edge/Joint Detail: Reveal sized to fit flange of exposed suspension-system members.
H. Thickness: 7/8- inch.
I. Modular Size: 24 by 48 inches.

2.4 Antimicrobial Treatment: Manufacturer's standard broad spectrum, antimicrobial formulation

that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing
no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273, ASTM D 3274,
or ASTM G 21 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21.
2.5 ACOUSTICAL PANELS ALTERNATE [ACT-1]

following:
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; basis of design Cirrus High NRC Tegular
indicated.
1. Type and Form: Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 1, nodular.
2. Pattern: E (lightly textured)
D. Color: White.
F. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): Not less than 0.75.
G. Edge/Joint Detail: Reveal sized to fit flange of exposed suspension-system members.
H. Thickness: 7/8-inch.
I. Modular Size: 24 by 48 inches.
J. Antimicrobial Treatment: Manufacturer's standard broad spectrum, antimicrobial formulation

or ASTM G 21 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21.
2.6 ACOUSTICAL PANELS <ACT-2>

following:
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.


indicated.
1. Type and Form: Type IV, mineral base with membrane-faced overlay; Form 2, water
felted; with vinyl overlay on face.
2. Pattern: GH (smooth and printed).
D. Color: White.
F. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): Not less than 35.
G. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): Not less than 0.55.
H. Edge/Joint Detail: Square.
I. Thickness: 3/4 inch.
J. Modular Size: 24 by 48 inches.
2.7 Antimicrobial Treatment: Manufacturer's standard broad spectrum, antimicrobial formulation

or ASTM G 21 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21.METAL
SUSPENSION SYSTEM
2.8 Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard, direct-hung, metal

suspension system and accessories according to ASTM C 635/C 635M and designated by type,
structural classification, and finish indicated.
A. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll
formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip
galvanized, G30 coating designation; with prefinished 15/16-inch-wide metal caps on flanges.
1. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system.

2. End Condition of Cross Runners: butt-edge type.
3. Face Design: Flat, flush.
4. Cap Material: Cold-rolled steel.
5. Cap Finish: Painted white.

2.9 ACCESSORIES
A. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M,
Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.
B. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires as follows:
1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft
temper.
2. Size: Wire diameter sufficient for its stress at three times hanger design load
(ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but
not less than 0.106-inch-diameter wire.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical
panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified
in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel
ceilings.
B. Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet, moisture
damaged, or mold damaged.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at
opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders unless
otherwise indicated, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
B. Layout openings for penetrations centered on the penetrating items.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install acoustical panel ceilings according to ASTM C 636/C 636M and manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.
2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces
by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard
suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in
form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling-suspension members and to supports above with a
minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly to structure or to inserts, eye
screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not
deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
5. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten
hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or
power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete.
6. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required,
install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.
7. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
8. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
9. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from
hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of
each member.
10. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within
performance limits established by referenced standards.
C. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another.
Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
D. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension-system
runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide precise
fit.
1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows:
a. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans.
2. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of
suspension-system runners and moldings.
3. For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system runners, install panels with bottom of
reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges.
4. For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system members with box-shaped flanges, install
panels with reveal surfaces in firm contact with suspension-system surfaces and panel
faces flush with bottom face of runners.
A. Suspended Ceilings: Install main and cross runners level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet,
non-cumulative.

3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and
suspension-system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and
touchup of minor finish damage.
B. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to
permanently eliminate evidence of damage.

SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Rubber base.
B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, not less than 12
inches long.
1.4 MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each
type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.
A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with
ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than
50 deg F or more than 90 deg F.
Project 16018 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 1

A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than
70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following
periods:
1. 48 hours before installation.

2. During installation.
3. 48 hours after installation.
B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range
recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.
C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 THERMOSET-RUBBER BASE (RB)

following:
1. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; a division of Burke Industries Inc.

2. Flexco.
3. Johnsonite; a Tarkett company.
B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset), Group I (solid,
homogeneous).
1. Style and Location:
a. Style A, Straight: Provide in areas with carpet.

b. Style B, Cove: Provide in areas with resilient floor coverings.
C. Thickness: 0.125 inch.
D. Height: 4 inches.
E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.
F. Outside Corners: Job formed or preformed.
G. Inside Corners: Job formed or preformed.
H. Colors: A/E's sample.

2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based or

blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product
manufacturer for applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient

products and substrate conditions indicated.
C. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish, nominal 2 inches wide, of height
required to protect exposed edges of flooring, and in maximum available lengths to minimize
running joints.
D. Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor-polish products recommended by resilient stair-
tread manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum
moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified
in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and
foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.
1. Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of

resilient products.
B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
C. Do not install resilient products until materials are the same temperature as space where they are
to be installed.
1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation

materials into spaces where they will be installed.
D. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient
products.

3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.
B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other
permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of
adjacent pieces aligned.
D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in
continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.
F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient
base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.
3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.
B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates
throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would
otherwise be exposed.
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products.
B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient-product installation:
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from surfaces.
C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

SECTION 096516 - RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Unbacked rubber sheet flooring.
B. Shop Drawings: For each type of resilient sheet flooring.
1. Include sheet flooring layouts, locations of seams, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing
partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.
2. Show details of special patterns.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color, texture, and pattern specified, in
manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6-by-9-inch sections.
1. For heat-welding bead, manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 9 inches
long, of each color required.
D. Welded-Seam Samples: For seamless-installation technique indicated and for each resilient
sheet flooring product, color, and pattern required; with seam running lengthwise and in center
of 6-by-9-inch Sample applied to a rigid backing and prepared by Installer for this Project.
A. Maintenance Data: For each type of resilient sheet flooring to include in maintenance manuals.
Project 16018 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 096516 - 1

1. Resilient Sheet Flooring: Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or
fraction thereof, in roll form and in full roll width for each type, color, and pattern of
flooring installed.
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are competent in
techniques required by manufacturer for resilient sheet flooring installation and seaming method
indicated.
1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by
resilient sheet flooring manufacturer for installation techniques required.
A. Store resilient sheet flooring and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather,
with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less
than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store rolls upright.
70 deg F or more than 85 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient sheet flooring during the
following periods:

C. Close spaces to traffic during resilient sheet flooring installation.
D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after resilient sheet flooring installation.
E. Install resilient sheet flooring after other finishing operations, including painting and casework
installation, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For resilient sheet flooring, as determined by testing

identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
2.2 UNBACKED RUBBER SHEET FLOORING (RSF)

following:
1. Flexco.
3. Nora Systems, Inc. basis of design noraplan valua
B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1859.
1. Type: Type I, homogeneous rubber sheet floor covering.

2. Thickness: As standard with manufacturer.
3. Hardness: Not less than required by ASTM F 1859.
C. Wearing Surface: Linear structured.
D. Sheet Width: As standard with manufacturer.
E. Seamless-Installation Method: Heat welded.
F. Colors and Patterns: Match A/E's samples: basis of design noraplan value Clear Sky.

blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient sheet flooring
manufacturer for applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers to suit

resilient sheet flooring and substrate conditions indicated.
C. Seamless-Installation Accessories:
1. Heat-Welding Bead: Manufacturer's solid-strand product for heat welding seams.
a. Colors: Match flooring.

D. Integral-Flash-Cove-Base Accessories:
1. Cove Strip: 1-inch radius provided or approved by resilient sheet flooring manufacturer.
2. Corners: Metal inside and outside corners and end stops provided or approved by resilient
sheet flooring manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient sheet flooring.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to resilient sheet flooring manufacturer's written instructions to

ensure adhesion of resilient sheet flooring.
B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and
that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by
resilient sheet flooring manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by resilient sheet flooring
manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range
on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 9
pH.
4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 200 sq. ft., and
perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly
spaced in installation areas.
a. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only
after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000
sq. ft. in 24 hours.
b. Relative Humidity Test: Using in-situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with
installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity
level measurement.

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
D. Do not install resilient sheet flooring until materials are the same temperature as space where
they are to be installed.
1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move flooring and installation materials into
spaces where they will be installed.
E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient
sheet flooring.
3.3 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient sheet flooring.
B. Unroll resilient sheet flooring and allow it to stabilize before cutting and fitting.
C. Lay out resilient sheet flooring as follows:
1. Maintain uniformity of flooring direction.

2. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at least 6
inches away from parallel joints in flooring substrates.
3. Match edges of flooring for color shading at seams.
4. Avoid cross seams.
D. Scribe and cut resilient sheet flooring to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and
permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.
E. Extend resilient sheet flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
by repeating on resilient sheet flooring as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other
nonpermanent marking device.
G. Adhere resilient sheet flooring to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate
to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
H. Seamless Installation:
1. Heat-Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and heat weld with
welding bead to fuse sections permanently into a seamless flooring installation. Prepare,
weld, and finish seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoining flooring surfaces.
I. Integral-Flash-Cove Base: Cove resilient sheet flooring 6 inches up vertical surfaces. Support
flooring at horizontal and vertical junction with cove strip. Butt at top against cap strip.
1. Install metal corners at inside and outside corners.

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient sheet
flooring.
B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient sheet flooring
installation:

2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
C. Protect resilient sheet flooring from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from
construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of
construction period.
D. Cover resilient sheet flooring until Substantial Completion.

SECTION 096519 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Vinyl composition floor tile.
B. Shop Drawings: For each type of resilient floor tile.
1. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in
furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.
2. Show details of special patterns.
C. Samples: Full-size units of each color, texture, and pattern of floor tile required.
D. Product Schedule: For floor tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
A. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals.
Project 16018 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 - 1

1. Floor Tile: Furnish one box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color,
and pattern of floor tile installed.
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are competent in
techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation and seaming method indicated.
1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by
floor tile manufacturer for installation techniques required.
A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient
temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50
deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store floor tiles on flat surfaces.
70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following periods:

C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.
D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.
E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE <VCT-X>

following:
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

2. Congoleum Corporation.

B. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1066, Class 2, through pattern.
C. Wearing Surface: Smooth.
D. Thickness: 0.125 inch.
E. Size: 12 by 12 inches.
F. Colors and Patterns: Match A/E's samples; basis of design Mannington Essentials:
1. VCT-1 Sandrift 137

2. VCT-2 Oyster White 131
3. VCT-3 Flax 143
4. VCT-4 Putty 129

blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by floor tile manufacturer
for applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by floor tile and adhesive manufacturers to suit
floor tile and substrate conditions indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to floor tile manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion
of resilient products.
B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.

2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and
that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by floor
tile manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor tile manufacturer.
Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale
recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 9 pH.
b. Relative Humidity Test: Using in-situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with
level measurement.
C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
D. Do not install floor tiles until materials are the same temperature as space where they are to be
installed.
1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient floor tile and installation
materials into spaces where they will be installed.
E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient
floor tile.
3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.
B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor
offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using
cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.
1. Lay tiles square with room axis in pattern indicated.
C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as
manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed
tiles.
1. Lay tiles with grain running in one direction.
D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent
fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.

E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles
to center of door openings.
F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking
device.
G. Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion-joint covers,
and similar items in installation areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between
pieces of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles. Tightly adhere tile edges to substrates that
abut covers and to cover perimeters.
H. Adhere floor tiles to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a
completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing
of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting floor tile.
B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation:

2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
C. Protect floor tile from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, adhesive, and blemishes from floor tile surfaces before applying
liquid floor polish.
1. Apply three coat(s).
E. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.

SECTION 096813 - TILE CARPETING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes modular carpet tile.
1. Section 096513 "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base and accessories
installed with carpet tile.
1. Review methods and procedures related to carpet tile installation including, but not
a. Review ambient conditions and ventilation procedures.

b. Review subfloor preparation procedures.
1. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade

resistance.
2. Include manufacturer's written installation recommendations for each type of substrate.
B. Shop Drawings: For carpet tile installation, plans showing the following:
1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where
cutouts are required in carpet tiles.
2. Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot.
3. Type of installation.
4. Pattern of installation.
5. Pattern type, location, and direction.
6. Pile direction.
Project 16018 TILE CARPETING 096813 - 1

7. Type, color, and location of insets and borders.

8. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips.
9. Transition details to other flooring materials.
C. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each
Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated
on Drawings and in schedules.
1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample.

2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and Other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch-long Samples.
D. Product Schedule: For carpet tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
B. Product Test Reports: For carpet tile, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
A. Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:
1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and
procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.
2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile.
1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated,
but not less than 10 sq. yd.
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the International Certified

Floorcovering Installers Association at the Commercial II certification level.
A. Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard."

A. Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard" for temperature, humidity, and
ventilation limitations.
B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet tiles until spaces are enclosed and
weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity
conditions are maintained at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the
construction period.
C. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to
bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile
manufacturer.
D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tiles,
install carpet tiles before installing these items.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of
carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic,
failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse.
a. More than 10 percent edge raveling, snags, and runs.

b. Dimensional instability.
c. Excess static discharge.
d. Antimicrobial
e. Anti-staining
f. Loss of tuft-bind strength.
g. Loss of face fiber.
h. Delamination.
3. Warranty Period: Lifetime from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CARPET TILE [CPT-1]
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
1. Shaw Contract Group; a Berkshire Hathaway company.
B. Color: Match A/E's samples; basis of design: tarnished alum 56761

C. Pattern: Match A/E's samples: basis of design: Vertical layers, tinge 5T156
D. Dye Method: 100% solution dyed
E. Fiber Content: 100 percent nylon 6, 6.
F. Fiber Type: Meets equivalent performance/standards or exceeds that of Dupont Antron Legacy,
G. Pile Characteristic: multi-level pattern loop
H. Density: 6652 oz./cu. yd.
I. Pile Thickness: 0.092 inches for finished carpet tile.
J. Stitches: 10 stitches per inch.
K. Gage: 1/10 per inch.
L. Surface Pile Weight: 17 oz./sq. yd.
M. Primary Backing/Backcoating: Manufacturer's standard composite materials meeting the

following properties:
1. Dimensional stability
2. Seam pass lateral seam stress resistance test
N. Size: 9 by 36 inches.
O. Applied Treatments:
1. Soil-Resistance Treatment: Manufacturer's standard treatment that meets or exceeds that

of DuraTech Soil Protection by DuPont.
2. Antimicrobial Treatment: Manufacturer's standard treatment that protects carpet tiles as
follows:
a. Antimicrobial Activity: Not less than 2-mm halo of inhibition for gram-positive
bacteria, not less than 1-mm halo of inhibition for gram-negative bacteria, and no
fungal growth, according to AATCC 174.
3. Fiber Technology: Permanent Stain Resistance as passed by GSA using AATCC Test
Method
2.2 CARPET TILE [CPT-2]
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
1. Shaw Contract Group; a Berkshire Hathaway company.
B. Color: Match A/E's samples; 95761 Portabella

C. Pattern: Match A/E's samples; Colour Plank 59595.
D. Dye Method: 100% solution dyed
E. Fiber Content: 100 percent nylon 6, 6.
F. Fiber Type: Meets equivalent performance/standards or exceeds that of Dupont Antron Legacy,
G. Pile Characteristic: Level loop
H. Density: 9391 oz./cu. yd.
I. Pile Thickness: 0.115 inches for finished carpet tile.
J. Stitches: 11.5 stitches per inch.
K. Gage: 1/10 per inch.
L. Surface Pile Weight: 30 oz./sq. yd.
M. Primary Backing/Backcoating: Manufacturer's standard composite materials meeting the

following properties:
1. Dimensional stability
2. Seam pass lateral seam stress resistance test
N. Size: 18 by 36 inches.
O. Applied Treatments:
1. Soil-Resistance Treatment: Manufacturer's standard treatment that meets or exceeds that

of DuraTech Soil Protection by DuPont.
2. Antimicrobial Treatment: Manufacturer's standard treatment that protects carpet tiles as
follows:
a. Antimicrobial Activity: Not less than 2-mm halo of inhibition for gram-positive
bacteria, not less than 1-mm halo of inhibition for gram-negative bacteria, and no
fungal growth, according to AATCC 174.
3. Fiber Technology: Permanent Stain Resistance as passed by GSA using AATCC Test
Method
2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based

formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit

products and subfloor conditions indicated, that comply with flammability requirements for
installed carpet tile, and are recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation.

C. Metal Edge/Transition Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of profile and width shown,
of height required to protect exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize
running joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other
conditions affecting carpet tile performance.
B. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects.
C. Concrete Slabs: Verify that finishes comply with requirements specified in Section 033000
"Cast-in-Place Concrete" and that surfaces are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and
foreign deposits.
b. Relative Humidity Test: Using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with
level measurement.
c. Perform additional moisture tests recommended in writing by adhesive and carpet
tile manufacturers. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with CRI's "Carpet Installation Standards" and with carpet tile manufacturer's
written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile.
B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written

instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks,
holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider, and protrusions more than 1/32 inch unless more
stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Concrete Substrates: Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that
are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using
solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by adhesive and carpet tile
manufacturers.

D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard," Section 18, "Modular Carpet"
and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.
C. Maintain dye-lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area.
D. Maintain pile-direction patterns indicated on Drawings.
E. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in
furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut
edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
F. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable
flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
G. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
by repeating on carpet tile as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking
device.
H. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.
A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile:
1. Remove excess adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by
carpet tile manufacturer.
2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface.
3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.
B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI's "Carpet Installation Standard," Section 20,
"Protecting Indoor Installations."
C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and
fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or
recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.

SECTION 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on exterior substrates.
1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming metal fabrications.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MPI Gloss Level 1: Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according
to ASTM D 523.
B. MPI Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to

ASTM D 523.
C. MPI Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees,
according to ASTM D 523.
D. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
E. MPI Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
F. MPI Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application
instructions.
1. Include printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category
specified, with the proposed product highlighted.
Project 16018 EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 1

14016/MCS March 3, 2017
B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat.
1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square.

2. Apply coats on Samples in steps to show each coat required for system.
3. Label each coat of each Sample.
4. Label each Sample for location and application area.
1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient
temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.
1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are
between 50 and 95 deg F.
B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at
temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in the
Exterior Painting Schedule for the paint category indicated.
2.2 PAINT, GENERAL
A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its
"MPI Approved Products Lists."

14016/MCS March 3, 2017
B. Material Compatibility:
1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and
substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat
manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
C. Colors: Match Architect's samples.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter
as follows:
1. Concrete: 12 percent.
2. Masonry (Clay and CMUs): 12 percent.
C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing
finishes and primers.
D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural

Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.
B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease,
and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie
coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.
C. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do
not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that
permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

14016/MCS March 3, 2017
D. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content
or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written
instructions.
E. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods
recommended in writing by paint manufacture but not less than the following:
1. SSPC-SP 3.
2. SSPC-SP 11.
F. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop
paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply
with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.
G. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by
mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of
subsequently applied paints.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI

Architectural Painting Specification Manual."
1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final
installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only.
3. Paint both sides and edges of exterior doors and entire exposed surface of exterior door
frames.
4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed
or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.
B. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film
has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,
roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color
breaks.
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from
Project site.
B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by
washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

14016/MCS March 3, 2017
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of
other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and
leave in an undamaged condition.
D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or

defaced painted surfaces.
3.5 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Steel and Iron Substrates:
1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System MPI EXT 5.1C:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, zinc rich, inorganic, MPI #19.
1) Benjamin Moore
2) PPG Architectural
3) Sherwin-Williams
b. Prime Coat: Shop primer specified in Section where substrate is specified.

c. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, matching
topcoat.
d. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss
Level 5), MPI #163.
1) Dunn Edwards
3) Sherwin-Williams
B. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:
1. Latex System MPI EXT 5.3A:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based, MPI #134.
1) Benjamin Moore
3) Sherwin-Williams
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #11.
1) Benjamin Moore; Ben 100% Acrylic exterior Semi-Gloss Finish

2) PPG Architectural; Dulux Diamond; Exterior 100% Acrylic Latex Semi-
Gloss
3) Sherwin-Williams; A-100; exterior Latex Satin

14016/MCS March 3, 2017
SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MPI Gloss Level 1: Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according
to ASTM D 523.
B. MPI Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees,
C. MPI Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to

ASTM D 523.
D. MPI Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees,
E. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
F. MPI Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
G. MPI Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
1. Meet with Owner, A/E and Painter to review substrate and finish locations and transition.
Project 16018 INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 1

15001/MCS March 3, 2017
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application
instructions.
1. Include Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category
specified, with the proposed product highlighted.
B. Product List: Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same
designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations.
1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient
temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F
1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are
between 50 and 95 deg F
B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5
deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in the
Interior Painting Schedule for the paint category indicated.

15001/MCS March 3, 2017
2.2 PAINT, GENERAL
A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its
"MPI Approved Products Lists."
B. Material Compatibility:
1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and
substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat
manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
C. Colors: Match A/E’s sample. Basis of design Benjamin Moore:
1. P-1: CW-55 Finnie Gray

2. P-2: CW-10 Capitol White
3. P-3: CW590 Williamsburg Wythe Blue
4. P-4: CW-45 York Gray
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter
as follows:
1. Concrete: 12 percent.
2. Masonry (Clay and CMUs): 12 percent.
3. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.
D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing
finishes and primers.
E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural

Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

15001/MCS March 3, 2017
B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are
not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item,
provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to
reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease,
and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie
coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.
D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do
not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that
permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content
or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written
instructions.
F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods
recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.
G. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop
paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply
with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.
H. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by
mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of
subsequently applied paints.
1. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI

Manual."
1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.
Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture
with prime coat only.
3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar
hinged items to match exposed surfaces.
4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed
or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

15001/MCS March 3, 2017
B. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film
has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,
roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color
breaks.
D. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety
and Security Work:Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms:
a. Equipment, including panelboards.

b. Uninsulated metal piping.
c. Uninsulated plastic piping.
d. Pipe hangers and supports.
e. Metal conduit.
f. Plastic conduit.
g. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.
h. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering
or other paintable jacket material.
2. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces:
a. Equipment, including panelboards.

b. Uninsulated metal piping.
c. Uninsulated plastic piping.
d. Pipe hangers and supports.
e. Metal conduit.
f. Plastic conduit.
g. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering
or other paintable jacket material.
h. Structural decking, columns, and joists structure at exposed locations
i. Other items as directed by A/E.
3. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and
outlets that are visible from occupied spaces.
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from
Project site.
B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by
washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of
other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by A/E, and leave in
an undamaged condition.

15001/MCS March 3, 2017
D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or

defaced painted surfaces.
3.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Concrete Substrates, Traffic Surfaces:
1. Water-Based Concrete Floor Sealer System MPI INT 3.2G:
a. First Coat: Sealer, water based, for concrete floors, matching topcoat.
b. Topcoat: Sealer, water based, for concrete floors, MPI #99.
c. Color to be gray as selected by A/E.
B. CMU Substrates:
1. Latex System MPI INT 4.2A:
a. Block Filler: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior, MPI #4.
1) Benjamin Moore: Super Spec; Int/ Ext High-Build Block Filler

2) PPG Architectural: Glidden Professional; Concrete Coatings Block Filler
Interior/Exterior Primer
3) Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite; In/Ext Block Filler
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #54.
1) Benjamin Moore; Eco Spec WB Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Finish

2) PPG Architectural; Speedhide Zero; Interior Zero VOC Semi-Gloss
3) Sherwin-Williams; Harmony; Interior Latex Semi-Gloss
C. Steel Substrates:
1. Latex System, Alkyd Primer MPI INT 5.1Q:
a. Prime Coat: Shop primer specified in Section where substrate is specified.



15001/MCS March 3, 2017
D. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:
1. Latex System MPI INT 5.3A:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based, MPI #134.
1) Benjamin Moore; Super Spec HP; Acrulic Metal Primer

2) PPG Architectural; Corrostop Ultra; Metal Primer, Latex base for rust free
galvanized metal
3) Sherwin-Williams; Pro Industrial; Pro-Cryl Universal Primer


E. Plastic Substrates:
1. Latex System MPI INT 6.8E:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, bonding, solvent based, MPI #69.

c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1), MPI #53.
1) Benjamin Moore; Eco Spec WB Interior Latex Flat Finish

2) PPG Architectural; PPG; Speedhide zero Interior Zero VOC Latex Flat
3) Sherwin-Williams; Harmony; Interior Acrylic Latex Flat
d. Topcoat: Latex, interior (MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #52.
1) Benjamin Moore; Eco Spec WB Interior Latex Eggshell Finish

2) PPG Architectural; Speedhide Zero; Interior Zero VOC Latex Satin
3) Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Zero VOC; Interior Latex Eg-Shel
e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #54.


15001/MCS March 3, 2017
F. Gypsum Board Substrates:
1. Latex over Latex Sealer System MPI INT 9.2A:
a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50.
1) Benjamin Moore; Eco Spec WB Interior Latex Primer

2) PPG Architectural; Speedhide Zero; Interior Zero VOC Latex Sealer
3) Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Zero

c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1), MPI #53.
1) Benjamin Moore; Eco Spec WB Interior Latex Flat Finish

2) PPG Architectural; PPG; Speedhide zero Interior Zero VOC Latex Flat
3) Sherwin-Williams; Harmony; Interior Acrylic Latex Flat
d. Topcoat: Latex, interior (MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #52.
1) Benjamin Moore; Eco Spec WB Interior Latex Eggshell Finish

2) PPG Architectural; Speedhide Zero; Interior Zero VOC Latex Satin
3) Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Zero VOC; Interior Latex Eg-Shel
e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #54.


15001/MCS March 3, 2017
SECTION 101100 - VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Visual display board assemblies.

and profiles, finishes, and accessories for visual display units.
B. Shop Drawings: For visual display units.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment to other work.

2. Show locations of panel joints. Show locations of field-assembled joints for factory-
fabricated units too large to ship in one piece.
3. Include sections of typical trim members.
C. Samples: For each type of visual display unit indicated.
1. Visual Display Panel: Not less than 8-1/2 by 11 inches, with facing, core, and backing
indicated for final Work. Include one panel for each type, color, and texture required.
2. Trim: 6-inch-long sections of each trim profile.
D. Product Schedule: For visual display units. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
Project 16018 VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 101100 - 1

15001/MCS March 3, 2017
B. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.
A. Maintenance Data: For visual display units to include in maintenance manuals.
A. Deliver factory-fabricated visual display units completely assembled in one piece. If dimensions
exceed maximum manufactured unit size, or if unit size is impracticable to ship in one piece,
provide two or more pieces with joints in locations indicated on approved Shop Drawings.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install visual display units until spaces are
enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is
complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and
humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty for Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheets: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
porcelain-enamel face sheets that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
a. Surfaces lose original writing and erasing qualities.

b. Surfaces exhibit crazing, cracking, or flaking.
2. Warranty Period: Life of the building.

15001/MCS March 3, 2017
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of visual display unit from single source from single
manufacturer.
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.

2.3 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARD ASSEMBLY (MKBD-1)
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one the

following:
1. Best-Rite: MooreCo, Inc.

2. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.
3. Polyvision Corp.
4. K-PRO Specialty Products
B. Visual Display Board Assembly: Factory fabricated.
1. Assembly: Markerboard.
2. Corners: Square.
3. Width: As indicated on Drawings.
4. Height: Four-feet or as indicated on Drawings.
5. Mounting Method: Direct to wall.
C. Marker board Panel: Porcelain-enamel-faced marker board panel on core indicated.
1. Color: White.
D. Aluminum Frames: Fabricated from not less than 0.062-inch-thick, extruded aluminum; slim
size and standard shape.
1. Aluminum Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked-enamel or powder-coat finish.
a. Color: As selected by A/E from full range of industry colors and color densities.
E. Joints: Make joints only where total length exceeds maximum manufactured length. Fabricate
with minimum number of joints, balance around center of board, as acceptable to A/E.

15001/MCS March 3, 2017
F. Chalk tray: Manufacturer's standard; continuous.
1. Box Type: Extruded aluminum with slanted front, grooved tray, and cast-aluminum end
closures.
G. Display Rail: Manufacturer's standard, extruded-aluminum display rail with plastic-

impregnated-cork insert, end stops, and continuous paper holder, designed to hold accessories.
1. Size: 1 inch high by full length of visual display unit.

2. Tackboard Insert Color: As selected by A/E from full range of industry colors.
3. Aluminum Color: Match finish of visual display assembly trim.
2.4 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARD ASSEMBLY (MKBD-2)
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one the

following:
1. Best-Rite: MooreCo, Inc.

2. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.
3. Polyvision Corp.
4. K-PRO Specialty Products
B. Visual Display Board Assembly: Factory fabricated.
1. Assembly: Marker board.

2. Corners: Square.
3. Width: As indicated on Drawings.
4. Height: Four-feet or as indicated on the drawings.
5. Mounting Method: Direct to wall.
C. Marker board Panel: Porcelain-enamel-faced marker board panel on core indicated.
1. Color: White.
D. Aluminum Frames: Fabricated from not less than 0.062-inch-thick, extruded aluminum; slim
size and standard shape.
1. Aluminum Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked-enamel or powder-coat finish.
a. Color: As selected by A/E from full range of industry colors and color densities.
E. Joints: No joints allowed. Fabricate with minimum number of joints, balanced around center of
board, as acceptable to A/E.
F. Display Rail: Manufacturer's standard, extruded-aluminum display rail with plastic-

impregnated-cork insert, end stops, and continuous paper holder, designed to hold accessories.
1. Size: 1 inch high by full length of visual display unit.

2. Tackboard Insert Color: As selected by A/E from full range of industry colors.

15001/MCS March 3, 2017
G. Aluminum Color: Match finish of visual display assembly trim.
2.5 MARKERBOARD PANELS
A. Porcelain-Enamel Marker board Panels: Balanced, magnetic, high-pressure, factory-laminated

marker board assembly of three-ply construction, consisting of moisture-barrier backing, core
material, and porcelain-enamel face sheet with projectable surface finish. Laminate panels
under heat and pressure with manufacturer's standard, flexible waterproof adhesive.
1. Face Sheet Thickness: 0.021 inch uncoated base metal thickness.

2. Medium-Density Fiberboard Core: 7/16 inch thick; with manufacturer's standard
moisture-barrier backing.
2.6 MATERIALS
A. Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheet: PEI-1002, with face sheet manufacturer's standard two- or three-
coat process.
B. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130.
C. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063.
D. Adhesives for Field Application: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining adhesive for use with specific
type of panels, sheets, or assemblies; and for substrate application; as recommended in writing
by visual display unit manufacturer.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,

temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations
in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved
Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.
B. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A32/A34, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.
C. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603, except with a minimum dry film thickness
of 1.5 mils. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion
coating, and applying and baking finish.

15001/MCS March 3, 2017
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
installation tolerances, surface conditions of wall, and other conditions affecting performance of
the Work.
B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of connections
before installation of motorized, sliding visual display units.
C. Examine walls and partitions for proper preparation and backing for visual display units.
D. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth where sliding visual display units will
be installed.
E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation.
B. Clean substrates of substances, such as dirt, mold, and mildew, that could impair the
performance of and affect the smooth, finished surfaces of visual display boards.
C. Prepare surfaces to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings,
cracks, defects, projections, depressions, and substances that will impair bond between visual
display units and wall surfaces.
D. Prime wall surfaces indicated to receive direct-applied visual display assemblies and as
recommended in writing by primer/sealer manufacturer and visual display unit manufacturer.
E. Prepare recesses for sliding visual display units as required by type and size of unit.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install visual display surfaces in locations and at mounting heights indicated on
Drawings, or if not indicated, at heights indicated below. Keep perimeter lines straight, level,
and plumb. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and
accessories necessary for complete installation.
B. Field-Assembled Visual Display Board Assemblies: Coordinate field-assembled units with

grounds, trim, and accessories indicated. Join parts with a neat, precision fit.
1. Make joints only where total length exceeds maximum manufactured length. Fabricate
with minimum number of joints, balanced around center of board, as acceptable to A/E.
2. Where size of visual display board assemblies or other conditions require support in
addition to normal trim, provide structural supports or modify trim as indicated or as

15001/MCS March 3, 2017
selected by A/E from manufacturer's standard structural support accessories to suit

conditions indicated.
C. Factory-Fabricated Visual Display Board Assemblies: Adhere to wall surfaces with egg-size
adhesive gobs at 16 inches o.c., horizontally and vertically.
D. Visual Display Board Assembly Mounting Heights: Install visual display units at mounting
heights indicated on Drawings, or if not indicated, at heights indicated below.
1. Mounting Height 36 inches above finished floor to top of chalktray unless indicated
otherwise on the drawings.
A. Clean visual display units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach one
removable cleaning instructions label to visual display unit in each room.
B. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
C. Cover and protect visual display units after installation and cleaning.

15001/MCS March 3, 2017
SECTION 102113.19 - PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTSGENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Solid-plastic toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures and urinal screens.
1. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for blocking.

2. Section 102800 "Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories" for toilet tissue dispensers, grab
bars, purse shelves, and similar accessories mounted on toilet compartments.

and profiles, and finishes for toilet compartments.
B. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment details.

2. Show locations of centerlines of toilet fixtures.
3. Show locations of floor drains.
4. Show overhead support or bracing locations.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of toilet compartment material indicated.
1. Include Samples of hardware and accessories involving material and color selection.
D. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes unless
otherwise indicated:
1. Each type of material, color, and finish required for toilet compartments, prepared on 6-
inch-square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work.
2. Each type of hardware and accessory.
Project 16018 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10211319 - 1

A. Product Certificates: For each type of toilet compartment.
A. Maintenance Data: For toilet compartments to include in maintenance manuals.
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents and source.
1. Door Hinges: One hinge(s) with associated fasteners.

2. Latch and Keeper: One latch(es) and keeper(s) with associated fasteners.
3. Door Bumper: One bumper(s) with associated fasteners.
4. Door Pull: One door pull(s) with associated fasteners.
5. Fasteners: Ten fasteners of each size and type.
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of toilet fixtures, walls, columns, ceilings, and
other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before
fabrication.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with NFPA 286; testing by a qualified testing agency.
Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. During the 40kW exposure, flames shall not spread to the ceiling.
2. During the 160kW exposure, the interior finish shall comply with the following:
a. Flame shall not spread to the outer extremity of the sample on any wall or ceiling.
b. Flashover, as defined in NFPA 286, shall not occur
3. The peak rate of heat release throughout the NFPA 286 test shall not exceed 800kW.
4. The total smoke released throughout the NFPA 286 test shall not exceed 1,000m2
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ICC A117.1 for toilet
compartments designated as accessible.

2.2 SOLID-PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS

following:
1. Bradley Corporation.
2. Hadrian Manufacturing Inc.
3. Scranton Products.
4. Accurate Partition Corp.
B. Toilet-Enclosure Style: Overhead braced.
C. Urinal-Screen Style: Wall hung.
D. Door, Panel and Pilaster Construction: Solid, high-density polyethylene (HDPE) panel material,
not less than 1 inch thick, seamless, with eased edges, and with homogenous color and pattern
throughout thickness of material.
1. Heat-Sink Strip: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum or stainless-

steel strip fastened to exposed bottom edges of solid-plastic components to hinder
malicious combustion.
2. Color and Pattern: As selected by A/E from manufacturer’s full range.
E. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel.
F. Brackets (Fittings):
1. Full-Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; extruded aluminum.
G. Overhead Cross Bracing for Ceiling-Hung Units: As recommended by manufacturer and

fabricated from solid polymer.
2.3 HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard operating hardware and accessories.
1. Material: Clear-anodized aluminum.

2. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard continuous, cam type that swings to a closed or partially
open position, allowing emergency access by lifting door.
3. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted latch unit designed for
emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide
units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments
designated as accessible.
4. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized
to prevent in-swinging door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories.
5. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with
regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at
compartments designated as accessible.

B. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories.
1. Hinges: Manufacturer's minimum 0.062-inch-thick stainless-steel continuous, cam type

that swings to a closed or partially open position, allowing emergency access by lifting
door. Mount with through-bolts.
2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's heavy-duty surface-mounted cast-stainless-steel latch
unit designed to resist damage due to slamming, with combination rubber-faced door
strike and keeper, and with provision for emergency access. Provide units that comply
with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as accessible.
Mount with through-bolts.
3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's heavy-duty combination cast-stainless-steel hook and rubber-
tipped bumper, sized to prevent in-swinging door from hitting compartment-mounted
accessories. Mount with through-bolts.
4. Door Pull: Manufacturer's heavy-duty cast-stainless-steel pull at out-swinging doors that
complies with regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of
doors at compartments designated as accessible. Mount with through-bolts.
C. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with

antigrip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish.
D. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel, finished
to match the items they are securing, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for
through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless-steel, hot-dip galvanized-steel,
or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel compatible with related materials.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M.
B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221.
C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.
D. Stainless-Steel Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabrication, General: Fabricate toilet compartment components to sizes indicated. Coordinate

requirements and provide cutouts for through-partition toilet accessories where required for
attachment of toilet accessories.
B. Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports, leveling

mechanism, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Provide shoes at pilasters to
conceal supports and leveling mechanism.
C. Floor-Anchored Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring

assemblies with leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for structural connection to floor. Provide
shoes at pilasters to conceal anchorage.

D. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch-wide, in-swinging doors for
standard toilet compartments and 36-inch-wide, out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch-
wide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
fastening, support, alignment, operating clearances, and other conditions affecting performance
of the Work.
1. Confirm location and adequacy of blocking and supports required for installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid,
straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring
devices.
1. Maximum Clearances:
a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch.

b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch.
2. Full-Height (Continuous) Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with full-
height brackets.
a. Locate bracket fasteners so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints.
b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.
B. Overhead-Braced Units: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Set pilasters
with anchors penetrating not less than 1-3/4 inches into structural floor unless otherwise
indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster
with no fewer than two fasteners. Hang doors to align tops of doors with tops of panels, and
adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position.
C. Floor-Anchored Units: Set pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 2 inches into
structural floor unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Level, plumb,
and tighten pilasters. Hang doors and adjust so tops of doors are level with tops of pilasters
when doors are in closed position.
D. Urinal Screens: Attach with anchoring devices to suit supporting structure. Set units level and
plumb, rigid, and secured to resist lateral impact.

3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's

written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open
approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging
doors to return doors to fully closed position.

SECTION 102239 - FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Manually operated, acoustical panel partitions.
1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for supports that attach supporting tracks to
overhead structural system.
2. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for sound barrier construction above the ceiling at
track.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. NIC: Noise Isolation Class.
B. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient.
C. STC: Sound Transmission Class.
B. Shop Drawings: For operable panel partitions.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, attachment details.

2. Indicate stacking and operating clearances. Indicate location and installation requirements
for hardware and track, blocking, and direction of travel.
Project 16018 FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS 102239 - 1

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed material, finish, covering, or facing.
1. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed material, finish, covering, or facing,
prepared on Samples of size indicated below:
1. Textile Facing Material: Full width by not less than 36-inch-long section of fabric from
dye lot to be used for the Work, with specified treatments applied. Show complete pattern
repeat.
2. Panel Edge Material: Not less than 3 inches long.
3. Hardware: One of each exposed door-operating device.
A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items
1. Partition track, track supports and bracing, switches, turning space, and storage layout.
2. Suspended ceiling components.
3. Structural members to which suspension systems will be attached.
4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
5. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:
b. HVAC ductwork, outlets, and inlets.
c. Speakers.
d. Sprinklers.
e. Smoke detectors.
f. Access panels.
6. Plenum acoustical barriers.
B. Setting Drawings: For embedded items and cutouts required in other work, including support-
beam, mounting-hole template.
C. Qualification Data: For Installer.
D. Product Certificates: For each type of operable panel partition.
1. Include approval letter signed by manufacturer acknowledging Owner-furnished panel

facing material complies with requirements.
E. Product Test Reports: For each operable panel partition, for tests performed by a qualified
testing agency.
F. Field quality-control reports.
G. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For operable panel partitions to include in maintenance
manuals.
1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data,"

include the following:
a. Panel finish facings and finishes for exposed trim and accessories. Include
precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to
finishes and performance.
b. Seals, hardware, track, track switches, carriers, and other operating components.
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same production run, that match products installed and that are
1. Panel Finish-Facing Material: Furnish full width in quantity to cover both sides of two
panels when installed.
A. Protectively package and sequence panels in order for installation. Clearly mark packages and
panels with numbering system used on Shop Drawings. Do not use permanent markings on
panels.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of operable panel

partitions that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
a. Faulty operation of operable panel partitions.

b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Acoustical Performance: Provide operable panel partitions tested by a qualified testing agency
for the following acoustical properties according to test methods indicated:
1. Sound-Transmission Requirements: Operable panel partition assembly tested for

laboratory sound-transmission loss performance according to ASTM E 90, determined by
ASTM E 413, and rated for not less than the STC indicated.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide panels with finishes complying with one of the
following as determined by testing identical products by a testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:
1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing

a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.

b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
2. Fire Growth Contribution: Complying with acceptance criteria of local code and
authorities having jurisdiction when tested according to NFPA 265 Method B Protocol or
NFPA 286.
2.2 OPERABLE ACOUSTICAL PANELS
A. Operable Acoustical Panels: Partition system, including panels, seals, finish facing, suspension
system, operators, and accessories.

following:
a. Hufcor, Inc.
b. KWIK-WALL Company.
c. Panelfold.
B. Panel Operation: Manually operated, paired panels.
C. Panel Construction: As required to support panel from suspension components and with
reinforcement for hardware attachment. Fabricate panels with tight hairline joints and concealed
fasteners. Fabricate panels so finished in-place partition is rigid; level; plumb; aligned, with
tight joints and uniform appearance; and free of bow, warp, twist, deformation, and surface and
finish irregularities.

D. Dimensions: Fabricate operable acoustical panel partitions to form an assembled system of

dimensions indicated and verified by field measurements.
1. Panel Width: Equal widths.
E. STC: Not less than 50.
F. Panel Thickness: Nominal dimension of 3 inches.
G. Panel Closure: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.
1. Initial Closure: Resilient, bulb-shaped acoustical seal.

2. Final Closure: Constant-force, lever-operated mechanical closure expanding from panel
edge to create a constant-pressure acoustical seal.
H. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard as required to operate operable panel partition and

accessories; with decorative, protective finish.
1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard.
I. Finish Facing: Fabric wall covering.
2.3 SEALS
A. Description: Seals that produce operable panel partitions complying with performance
requirements and the following:
1. Manufacturer's standard seals unless otherwise indicated.

2. Seals made from materials and in profiles that minimize sound leakage.
3. Seals fitting tight at contact surfaces and sealing continuously between adjacent panels
and between operable panel partition perimeter and adjacent surfaces, when operable
panel partition is extended and closed.
B. Horizontal Top Seals: Continuous-contact, resilient seal exerting uniform constant pressure on
track or resilient, mechanical, retractable, constant-force-contact seal exerting uniform constant
pressure on track when extended.
C. Horizontal Bottom Seals: Resilient, mechanical, retractable, constant-force-contact seal exerting

uniform constant pressure on floor when extended, ensuring horizontal and vertical sealing and
resisting panel movement.
1. Mechanically Operated for Acoustical Panels: Extension and retraction of bottom seal by
operating handle or built-in operating mechanism, with operating range not less than 1-
1/2 inches between retracted seal and floor finish.

2.4 PANEL FINISH FACINGS
A. Description: Finish facings for panels that comply with indicated fire-test-response
characteristics and that are factory applied to operable panel partitions with appropriate backing,
using mildew-resistant nonstaining adhesive as recommended by facing manufacturer's written
instructions.
1. Apply one-piece, seamless facings free of air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other
defects, with edges tightly butted, and with no gaps or overlaps. Horizontal seams are not
permitted. Tightly secure and conceal raw and selvage edges of facing for finished
appearance.
2. Where facings with directional or repeating patterns or directional weave are indicated,
mark facing top and attach facing in same direction.
3. Match facing pattern 72 inches above finished floor.
B. Fabric Wall Covering: Manufacturer's standard fabric, from same dye lot, treated to resist stains.
1. Color/Pattern: As selected by A/E from manufacturer's full range.
C. Paint: Manufacturer's standard factory-painted finish.
1. Color: As selected by A/E from manufacturer's full range.
D. Cap-Trimmed Edges: Protective perimeter-edge trim with tight hairline joints concealing edges
of panel and finish facing, finished as follows:
1. Steel, Painted: Finished with manufacturer's color as selected by Architect from

manufacturer's full range.
E. Trimless Edges: Fabricate exposed panel edges so finish facing wraps uninterrupted around
panel, covering edge and resulting in an installed partition with facing visible on vertical panel
edges, without trim, for minimal sightlines at panel-to-panel joints.
2.5 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Tracks: Steel or aluminum with adjustable steel hanger rods for overhead support, designed for
operation, size, and weight of operable panel partition indicated. Size track to support partition
operation and storage without damage to suspension system, operable panel partitions, or
adjacent construction. Limit track deflection to no more than 0.10 inch between bracket
supports. Provide a continuous system of track sections and accessories to accommodate
configuration and layout indicated for partition operation and storage.
1. Panel Guide: Aluminum guide on both sides of the track to facilitate straightening of the
panels; finished with factory-applied, decorative, protective finish.
2. Head Closure Trim: As required for acoustical performance; with factory-applied,
decorative, protective finish.
B. Carriers: Trolley system as required for configuration type, size, and weight of partition and for
easy operation; with ball-bearing wheels.

C. Steel Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied, corrosion-resistant, protective coating

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine flooring, floor levelness, structural support, and opening, with Installer present, for
performance of operable panel partitions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install operable panel partitions and accessories after other finishing operations, including
painting, have been completed in area of partition installation.
B. Install panels in numbered sequence indicated on Shop Drawings.
C. Broken, cracked, chipped, deformed, or unmatched panels are not acceptable.
D. Broken, cracked, deformed, or unmatched gasketing or gasketing with gaps at butted ends is not
acceptable.
E. Light-Leakage Test: Illuminate one side of partition installation and observe vertical joints and
top and bottom seals for voids. Adjust partitions for alignment and full closure of vertical joints
and full closure along top and bottom seals.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operable panel partitions, hardware, and other moving parts to function smoothly, and
lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Adjust to operate smoothly and easily, without binding or warping.
C. Verify that safety devices are properly functioning.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain operable panel partitions.

SECTION 102600 - WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Corner guards.
1. Section 087100 "Door Hardware" for metal protective trim units, according to
BHMA A156.6, used for armor, kick, mop, and push plates.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, impact strength, dimensions of

individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For each type of wall and door protection showing locations and extent.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of impact-resistant wall-protection unit indicated, in
each color and texture specified.
1. Include Samples of accent strips and accessories to verify color selection.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish on the following products, prepared
on Samples of size indicated below:
1. Corner Guards: 12 inches long. Include example top caps.
Project 16018 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 102600 - 1

15001/MCS March 3, 2017
A. Material Certificates: For each type of exposed plastic material.
B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
A. Maintenance Data: For each type of wall and door protection product to include in maintenance
manuals.
1. Include recommended methods and frequency of maintenance for maintaining best

condition of plastic covers under anticipated traffic and use conditions. Include
precautions against using cleaning materials and methods that may be detrimental to
finishes and performance.
1. Corner-Guard Covers: Full-size plastic covers of maximum length equal to 2 percent of

each type, color, and texture of cover installed, but no fewer than two, 48-inch-long units.
2. Mounting and Accessory Components: Amounts proportional to the quantities of extra
materials. Package mounting and accessory components with each extra material.
A. Store wall and door protection in original undamaged packages and containers inside well-
ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity.
1. Maintain room temperature within storage area at not less than 70 deg F during the period
plastic materials are stored.
2. Keep plastic materials out of direct sunlight.
3. Store plastic wall- and door-protection components for a minimum of 72 hours, or until
plastic material attains a minimum room temperature of 70 deg F.
a. Store corner-guard covers in a vertical position.

15001/MCS March 3, 2017
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of wall- and door-
protection units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
a. Structural failures including detachment of components from each other or from

the substrates, delamination, and permanent deformation beyond normal use.
b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, plastics, and other materials beyond normal
use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain wall-protection products from single source from single
manufacturer.
A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84 or UL 723; testing by a qualified

testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ICC A117.1.
2.3 CORNER GUARDS (CG)
A. Surface-Mounted, Plastic-Cover Corner Guards: Manufacturer's standard, PVC-free assembly

consisting of snap-on, resilient plastic cover installed over retainer; including mounting
hardware; fabricated with 90- or 135-degree turn to match wall condition.

following:
a. InPro Corporation (IPC).

b. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group.
c. Pawling Corporation.

15001/MCS March 3, 2017
2. Cover: Extruded rigid plastic, minimum 0.078-inch wall thickness; as follows:
a. Profile: Nominal 2-inch-long leg and 1/4-inch corner radius.

b. Height: 4 feet
c. Color and Texture: As selected by A/E from manufacturer's full range.
3. Retainer Clips: Manufacturer's standard impact-absorbing clips.

4. Top and Bottom Caps: Prefabricated, injection-molded plastic; color matching cover;
field adjustable for close alignment with snap-on cover.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Plastic Materials: Chemical- and stain-resistant, high-impact-resistant plastic with integral color
throughout; extruded and sheet material as required, thickness as indicated.
B. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless-steel, or other noncorrosive metal screws, bolts,

and other fasteners compatible with items being fastened. Use security-type fasteners where
exposed to view.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate wall protection according to requirements indicated for design, performance,

dimensions, and member sizes, including thicknesses of components.
B. Factory Assembly: Assemble components in factory to greatest extent possible to minimize

field assembly. Disassemble only as necessary for shipping and handling.
C. Quality: Fabricate components with uniformly tight seams and joints and with exposed edges
rolled. Provide surfaces free of wrinkles, chips, dents, uneven coloration, and other
imperfections. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, and rigid hairline
joints.
2.6 FINISHES
A. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary

protective covering before shipping.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.

15001/MCS March 3, 2017
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and wall areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine walls to which wall and door protection will be attached for blocking, grounds, and
other solid backing that have been installed in the locations required for secure attachment of
support fasteners.
1. For wall and door protection attached with adhesive, verify compatibility with and
suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing wall and door protection.
B. Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Installation Quality: Install wall and door protection according to manufacturer's written
instructions, level, plumb, and true to line without distortions. Do not use materials with chips,
cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished Work.
B. Mounting Heights: Install wall and door protection in locations and at mounting heights
indicated on Drawings.
C. Accessories: Provide splices, mounting hardware, anchors, trim, joint moldings, and other
accessories required for a complete installation.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a
standard ammonia-based household cleaning agent.
B. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing by

manufacturer.

15001/MCS March 3, 2017
SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Public-use washroom accessories.

2. Childcare accessories.
3. Custodial accessories.
1. Section 093013 "Ceramic Tiling" for ceramic toilet and bath accessories.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required
for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation,
cleaning, and servicing of accessories.
B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent
delaying the Work.

2. Include anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in
other work and substrate preparation.
B. Samples: Full size, for each exposed product and for each finish specified.
1. Approved full-size Samples will be returned and may be used in the Work.
Project 16018 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 1

C. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each
accessory required.
1. Identify locations using room designations indicated.

2. Identify accessories using designations indicated.
A. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.
A. Maintenance Data: For accessories to include in maintenance manuals.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Mirrors: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace mirrors
that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, visible silver spoilage defects.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED MATERIALS
A. Owner-Furnished Materials: Toilet paper dispenser (TPD), Sanitary napkin dispenser (SN),
Paper towel dispenser (PT), Soap dispenser (SD), and Trash/recycling containers (WR).
2.2 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES
A. Source Limitations: Obtain public-use washroom accessories from single source from single
manufacturer.
B. Grab Bar (GB18”, GB36”, & GB42”):

following:
a. American Specialties, Inc.

b. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
c. Bradley Corporation.
2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners.

3. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch thick.
a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4 finish (satin).
4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches.

5. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings.
C. Sanitary-Napkin Disposal Unit (SND):

following:

2. Mounting: Surface mounted.
3. Door or Cover: Self-closing, disposal-opening cover.

4. Receptacle: Removable.
5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
D. Mirror Unit (M1 & M2):

following:

2. Frame: Stainless-steel channel.
a. Corners: Welded and ground smooth.
3. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, using method indicated
below.
a. One-piece, galvanized-steel, wall-hanger device with spring-action locking

mechanism to hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts.
4. Size: As indicated on Drawings.
2.3 CHILDCARE ACCESSORIES
A. Source Limitations: Obtain childcare accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Diaper-Changing Station (DCS):

following:

b. Diaper Deck & Company, Inc.
c. Koala Kare Products.
2. Description: Horizontal unit that opens by folding down from stored position and with
child-protection strap.
a. Engineered to support minimum of 250-lb static load when opened.
3. Mounting: Surface mounted, with unit projecting not more than 4 inches from wall when
closed.
4. Operation: By pneumatic shock-absorbing mechanism.
5. Material and Finish: HDPE in manufacturer's standard color.
6. Liner Dispenser: Built in.
2.4 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES
A. Source Limitations: Obtain custodial accessories from single source from single manufacturer.
B. Mop and Broom Holder (MH):

following:

2. Description: Unit with shelf, hooks, holders, and rod suspended beneath shelf.
3. Length: 36 inches.
4. Hooks: Four.
5. Mop/Broom Holders: Three, spring-loaded, rubber hat, cam type.
6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
a. Shelf: Not less than nominal 0.05-inch-thick stainless steel.

b. Rod: Approximately 1/4-inch-diameter stainless steel.
2.5 MATERIALS
A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.031-inch minimum nominal thickness unless

B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.036-
inch minimum nominal thickness.
C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 hot-dip zinc coating.
D. Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after

fabrication.
E. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-and-
theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.
F. Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service).
G. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and
access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with
corrosion-resistant backing plates.
B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying.
Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate

to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and
firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to
ASTM F 446.
A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items.
B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.
C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.

SECTION 104413 - FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Fire-protection cabinets for the following:
a. Portable fire extinguishers.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCE
1. Review methods and procedures related to fire-protection cabinets including, but not
a. Schedules and coordination requirements.
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Show door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel
style. Include roughing-in dimensions and details showing recessed-, semirecessed-, or surface-
mounting method and relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction.
B. Shop Drawings: For fire-protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.
A. Maintenance Data: For fire-protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals.
Project 16018 FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 104413 - 1

1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers
indicated are accommodated.
B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire-protection cabinets with wall depths.
1.7 SEQUENCING
A. Apply vinyl lettering on field-painted fire-protection cabinets after painting is complete.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET (FEC)
A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.

following:
a. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc.

c. Larsens Manufacturing Company.
d. Potter Roemer LLC.
B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated.
C. Cabinet Material: Stainless-steel sheet.
D. Semirecessed Cabinet: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping
surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend).
1. Rolled-Edge Trim: 4-inch backbend depth.
E. Door Material: Stainless-steel sheet.
F. Door Style: Vertical duo panel with frame.
G. Door Glazing: Tempered float glass (clear).
H. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet
type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.
1. Provide recessed door pull and friction latch.

2. Provide continuous hinge, of same material and finish as trim, permitting door to open
180 degrees.

I. Accessories:
1. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style,
size, spacing, and location.
a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire-protection cabinet with the words "FIRE

EXTINGUISHER”
1) Location: Applied to cabinet door.

2) Application Process: Silk-screened.
3) Lettering Color: Red.
4) Orientation: Vertical.
J. Materials:
1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
a. Finish: No. 4 directional satin finish.
2. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 3 mm
thick, Class 1 (clear).
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated
and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles.
1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2
inch thick.
2. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.
B. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground
smooth.
A. Comply with NAAMM's AMP 500, "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products," for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire-protection cabinets from damage by

applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Finish fire-protection cabinets after assembly.
D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semirecessed
cabinets will be installed.
3.2 PREPARATION
3.3 Prepare recesses for semirecessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and size of
cabinet and trim style.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install fire-protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not
indicated, at heights indicated below:
1. Fire-Protection Cabinets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of cabinet.
B. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.
C. Identification: Apply vinyl lettering at locations indicated.
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire-protection cabinets
are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral
locking devices operate properly.
C. On completion of fire-protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as

D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire-protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory-
finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire-
protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers.
E. Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful
repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

SECTION 104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes portable, mounting brackets for fire extinguishers.
B. Owner-Furnished Material: Hand-carried fire extinguishers.
1. Section 104413 "Fire Protection Cabinets."

2. Section 233813 "Commercial-Kitchen Hoods" for fire-extinguishing systems provided as
part of commercial-kitchen exhaust hoods.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable
Fire Extinguishers."
B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2.2 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS BY OWNER
A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet and mounting
bracket indicated.

following:

2. Valves: Nickel-plated, polished-brass body.
Project 16018 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 1

3. Handles and Levers: Stainless steel.

4. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10,
Appendix B.
B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container [FE-1]- UL-rated 2-A:10-B:C, 5-lb

nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel
container.
C. Purple-K Dry-Chemical Type in Aluminum Container [FE-2]: UL-rated 30-B:C, 5-lb nominal
capacity, with potassium bicarbonate-based dry chemical in enameled-aluminum container.
2.3 MOUNTING BRACKETS
A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel, designed to secure fire

extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers
indicated, with plated or black baked-enamel finish.

following:

B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size,
spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.
1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in

red letter decals applied to mounting surface.
a. Orientation: Horizontal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements
of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Mounting Brackets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher.
B. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations
indicated.
Project 16018 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 2

SECTION 105113 - METAL LOCKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Knocked-down corridor lockers.
A. Product Data: For each type of metal locker.

and profiles, and finishes for each type of metal locker.
B. Shop Drawings: For metal lockers.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

2. Show locker trim and accessories.
3. Include locker identification system and numbering sequence.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors
available.
D. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard size:
1. Lockers and equipment.

2. Locker benches.
Project 16018 METAL LOCKERS 105113 - 1

B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
A. Maintenance Data: For adjusting, repairing, and replacing locker doors and latching
mechanisms to include in maintenance manuals.
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Full-size units of the following metal locker hardware items equal to 10 percent of
amount installed for each type and finish installed, but no fewer than five units:
a. Locks.
b. Identification plates.
c. Hooks.
A. Do not deliver metal lockers until spaces to receive them are clean, dry, and ready for their
installation.
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of recessed openings by field measurements

before fabrication.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related
units of work specified in other Sections to ensure that metal lockers can be supported and
installed as indicated.

1.11 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal lockers that
fail in materials or workmanship, excluding finish, within specified warranty period.
a. Structural failures.
b. Faulty operation of latches and other door hardware.
2. Damage from deliberate destruction and vandalism is excluded.

3. Warranty Period for Knocked-Down Metal Lockers: Two years from date of Substantial
Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain metal lockers and accessories from single source from single locker
manufacturer.
A. Accessibility Requirements: For lockers indicated to be accessible, comply with applicable

provisions in ICC A117.1.
2.3 KNOCKED-DOWN CORRIDOR LOCKERS

following:
1. ASI Storage Solutions; ASI Group.

2. General Storage Systems Ltd.
3. Lyon Workspace Products, LLC.
4. Penco Products, Inc.
5. Republic Storage Systems, LLC.
B. Doors: One piece; fabricated from 0.060-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet; formed into
channel shape with double bend at vertical edges and with right-angle single bend at horizontal
edges.
1. Stiffeners: Manufacturer's standard full-height stiffener fabricated from 0.048-inch

nominal-thickness steel sheet; welded to inner face of doors.

C. Body: Assembled by riveting or bolting body components together. Fabricate from unperforated
steel sheet with thicknesses as follows:
1. Tops, Bottoms, and Intermediate Dividers: 0.024-inch nominal thickness, with single
bend at sides.
2. Backs and Sides: 0.024-inch nominal thickness, with full-height, double-flanged
connections.
3. Shelves: 0.024-inch nominal thickness, with double bend at front and single bend at sides
and back.
D. Frames: Channel formed; fabricated from 0.060-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet; lapped and
factory welded at corners; with top and bottom main frames factory welded into vertical main
frames. Form continuous, integral, full-height door strikes on vertical main frames.
1. Cross Frames between Tiers: Channel formed and fabricated from same material as main
frames; welded to vertical main frames.
E. Hinges: Welded to door and attached to door frame with no fewer than two factory-installed
rivets per hinge that are completely concealed and tamper resistant when door is closed;
fabricated to swing 180 degrees.
1. Knuckle Hinges: Steel, full loop, five or seven knuckles, tight pin; minimum 2-inches
high. Provide no fewer than three hinges for each door more than 42-inches high.
F. Recessed Door Handle and Latch: Stainless-steel cup with integral door pull, recessed so
locking device does not protrude beyond door face; pry and vandal resistant.
1. Multipoint Latching: Finger-lift latch control designed for use with built-in combination
locks, built-in key locks, or padlocks; positive automatic latching and prelocking.
a. Latch Hooks: Equip doors 48 inches and higher with three latch hooks and doors
less than 48 inches high with two latch hooks; fabricated from 0.105-inch nominal-
thickness steel sheet; welded or riveted to full-height door strikes; with resilient
silencer on each latch hook.
b. Latching Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard, rattle-free latching mechanism and
moving components isolated to prevent metal-to-metal contact, and incorporating a
prelocking device that allows locker door to be locked while door is open and then
closed without unlocking or damaging lock or latching mechanism.
G. Identification Plates: Manufacturer's standard, etched, embossed, or stamped aluminum plates,

with numbers and letters at least 3/8 inch high.
H. Hooks: Manufacturer's standard ball-pointed type hooks, aluminum or steel; zinc plated.

I. Legs: 6 inches high; formed by extending vertical frame members, or fabricated from 0.075-
inch nominal-thickness steel sheet; welded to bottom of locker.
1. Closed Front and End Bases: Fabricated from 0.036-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet.
J. Recess Trim: Fabricated from 0.048-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet.
K. Filler Panels: Fabricated from 0.048-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet.
L. Boxed End Panels: Fabricated from 0.060-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet.
M. Finished End Panels: Fabricated from 0.024-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet.
N. Materials:
1. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B,
suitable for exposed applications.
O. Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate metal lockers square, rigid, without warp, and with metal faces flat and free of dents
or distortion. Make exposed metal edges safe to touch and free of sharp edges and burrs.
1. Form body panels, doors, shelves, and accessories from one-piece steel sheet unless
2. Provide fasteners, filler plates, supports, clips, and closures as required for complete
installation.
B. Fabricate each metal locker with an individual door and frame; individual top, bottom, and
back; and common intermediate uprights separating compartments. Factory weld frame
members of each metal locker together to form a rigid, one-piece assembly.
C. Equipment: Provide each locker with an identification plate and the following equipment:
1. Double-Tier Units: One double-prong ceiling hook and two single-prong wall hooks.
D. Knocked-Down Construction: Fabricate metal lockers using nuts, bolts, screws, or rivets for
preassembly at plant prior to shipping.
E. Accessible Lockers: Fabricate as follows:
1. Locate bottom shelf no lower than 15 inches above the floor.

2. Where hooks, coat rods, or additional shelves are provided, locate no higher than 48
inches above the floor.

F. Recess Trim: Fabricated with minimum 2-1/2-inch face width and in lengths as long as
practical; finished to match lockers.
G. Filler Panels: Fabricated in an unequal leg angle shape; finished to match lockers. Provide slip-
joint filler angle formed to receive filler panel.
H. Boxed End Panels: Fabricated with 1-inch-wide edge dimension, and designed for concealing
fasteners and holes at exposed ends of nonrecessed metal lockers; finished to match lockers.
1. Provide one-piece panels for double-row (back-to-back) locker ends.
I. Finished End Panels: Designed for concealing unused penetrations and fasteners, except for
perimeter fasteners, at exposed ends of nonrecessed metal lockers; finished to match lockers.
1. Provide one-piece panels for double-row (back-to-back) locker ends.
J. Center Dividers: Full-depth, vertical partitions between bottom and shelf; finished to match
lockers.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Zinc- or nickel-plated steel, slotless-type, exposed bolt heads; with self-locking nuts
or lock washers for nuts on moving parts.
B. Anchors: Material, type, and size required for secure anchorage to each substrate.
1. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of

exterior walls for corrosion resistance.
2. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine walls, floors, and support bases, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of

the Work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install lockers level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims.

1. Anchor locker runs at ends and at intervals recommended by manufacturer, but not more
than 36 inches o.c. Using concealed fasteners, install anchors through backup reinforcing
plates, channels, or blocking as required to prevent metal distortion.
2. Anchor single rows of metal lockers to walls near top of lockers and to floor.
B. Knocked-Down Lockers: Assemble with standard fasteners, with no exposed fasteners on door
faces or face frames.
C. Equipment:
1. Attach hooks with at least two fasteners.

2. Attach door locks on doors using security-type fasteners.
3. Identification Plates: Identify metal lockers with identification indicated on Drawings.
a. Attach plates to each locker door, near top, centered, with at least two aluminum
rivets.
D. Trim: Fit exposed connections of trim, fillers, and closures accurately together to form tight,
hairline joints, with concealed fasteners and splice plates.
1. Attach recess trim to recessed metal lockers with concealed clips.

2. Attach filler panels with concealed fasteners. Locate filler panels where indicated on
Drawings.
3. Attach boxed end panels using concealed fasteners to conceal exposed ends of
nonrecessed metal lockers.
4. Attach finished end panels using fasteners only at perimeter to conceal exposed ends of
nonrecessed metal lockers.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. Adjust doors and latches to operate easily without
binding.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect metal lockers from damage, abuse, dust, dirt, stain, or paint. Do not permit use during
construction.
B. Touch up marred finishes, or replace metal lockers that cannot be restored to factory-finished
appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by locker
manufacturer.

WSU-160027
SECTION 115213 - PROJECTION SCREENS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Manually operated, front-projection screens.
1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for metal support framing for front-projection
screens.
2. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood backing for screen
installation.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Gain: Ratio of light reflected from screen material to that reflected perpendicularly from a
magnesium carbonate surface as determined per SMPTE RP 94.
B. Half-Gain Angle: The angle, measured from the axis of the screen surface to the most central
position on a perpendicular plane through the horizontal centerline of the screen where the gain
is half of the peak gain.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts and types of front-projection screens. Include the following:
1. Drop lengths.
2. Location of seams in viewing surfaces.
3. Location of screen centerline relative to ends of screen case.
4. Anchorage details, including connection to supporting structure for suspended units.
5. Accessories.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For finishes of surface-mounted screen cases.
Project 16018 PROJECTION SCREENS 115213 - 1

WSU-160027
A. Maintenance Data: For front-projection screens to include in maintenance manuals.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install front-projection screens until spaces are
enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC
system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy
levels during the remainder of the construction period.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of front-projection screens with adjacent construction,

including ceiling suspension systems, light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system,
and partitions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations for Projection Screens: Obtain front-projection screens from single
manufacturer. Obtain accessories, including necessary mounting hardware, from screen
manufacturer.
2.2 MANUALLY OPERATED, FRONT-PROJECTION SCREENS
A. General: Manufacturer's standard spring-roller-operated units, consisting of case, screen,

mounting accessories, and other components necessary for a complete installation.
1. Screen Mounting: Top edge securely anchored to a 3-inch-diameter, rigid steel roller;
bottom edge formed into a pocket holding a tubular metal slat, with ends of slat protected
by plastic caps, and with a saddle and pull attached to slat by screws.
Tab tensioning is standard with Stewart Filmscreen Corporation, optional with Draper and Da-Lite Screen
Company, and unavailable from both BEI Audio/Visual Products and Bretford.
2. Tab Tensioning: Provide units that have a durable low-stretch cord, such as braided
polyester, on each side of screen that is connected to edge of screen by tabs to pull screen
flat horizontally.[ In lieu of tab tensioning, screens may be constructed from vinyl-
coated screen cloth that contains horizontal stiffening monofilaments to resist edge
curling.]
B. Bracket-Mounted or Ceiling-Suspended, Metal-Encased, Manually Operated Screens with Tab

Tensioning: Units designed and fabricated for suspending from wall brackets or ceiling,
fabricated from formed-steel sheet not less than 0.027 inch (0.7 mm) thick or from aluminum

WSU-160027
extrusions; with vinyl covering or baked-enamel finish and matching end caps. Provide
mounting brackets unless otherwise indicated.

following:
a. Da-Lite Screen Company

b. Draper Inc.: Premier C Manual Projection Screen
c. Stewart Filmscreen Corporation
C. Finish: Match A/E's sample.
2.3 FRONT-PROJECTION SCREEN MATERIAL
A. Matte-White Viewing Surface: Peak gain of not less than 0.9, and gain of not less than 0.8 at an
angle of 50 degrees from the axis of the screen surface.
B. Mildew-Resistance Rating: Zero or 1 when tested according to ASTM G 21.
C. Flame Resistance: Passes NFPA 701.
D. Flame-Spread Index: Not greater than 75 when tested according to ASTM E 84.
E. Seamless Construction: Provide screens, in sizes indicated, without seams.
F. Edge Treatment: Black masking borders.
G. Size of Viewing Surface: 72 by 96 inches.
H. Provide extra drop length of dimensions and at locations indicated.
1. Color: Black.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install front-projection screens at locations indicated to comply with screen manufacturer's

B. Install front-projection screens with screen cases in position and in relation to adjoining
construction indicated. Securely anchor to supporting substrate in a manner that produces a
smoothly operating screen with vertical edges plumb and viewing surface flat when screen is
lowered.

WSU-160027
3.2 FRONT-PROJECTION SCREEN SCHEDULE
A. Manually Operated, Front-Projection Screen Type [ PS-1]: Bracket mounted or ceiling

suspended, metal encased.
1. Screen Surface: Matte white.

2. Size of Viewing Surface: 9’-0” wide by 7’-0” high with bottom of image at 4’-10” above
finish floor.
3. Extra Drop Length: As needed at top of screen for bottom of screen to be 36 inches above
floor.

SECTION 115313 - LABORATORY FUME HOODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Bench-top laboratory fume hoods.

2. Piping and wiring within fume hoods for service fittings, light fixtures, and other
electrical devices included with fume hoods.
3. Fume hood base stands.
4. Work tops within fume hoods.
5. Laboratory sinks and cup sinks in fume hoods.
6. Water, laboratory gas, and electrical service fittings in fume hoods.
1. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring fume
hoods.
2. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for reinforcements in metal-framed
partitions for anchoring fume hoods.
3. Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for field quality-control
testing of fume hoods.
4. Section 230993 "HVAC Sequence of Operation" for VAV controls for fume hood
exhaust.
5. Division 23 Section for fume hood duct connections, including ducts, control valves and
exhaust fans.
6. Section 230995 “Laboratory Airflow Control System” for air flow control and safety
alarms.
7. Division 22, 23 and 26 Sections for connecting service utilities at back of fume hoods.
Piping and wiring within fume hoods are specified in this Section.
8. Division 26 Sections for electrical device identification plaques.
Project 16018 LABORATORY FUME HOODS 115313 - 1

1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of framing and reinforcements for lateral support of fume
hoods.
B. Coordinate installation of fume hoods with laboratory casework and other laboratory
equipment.
B. Shop Drawings: For laboratory fume hoods.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.

2. Indicate details for anchoring fume hoods to permanent building construction including
locations of blocking and other supports.
3. Indicate locations and types of service fittings together with associated service supply
connection required.
4. Indicate duct connections, electrical connections, and locations of access panels.
5. Include roughing-in information for mechanical, plumbing, and electrical connections.
6. Show adjacent walls, doors, windows, other building components, laboratory casework,
and other laboratory equipment. Indicate clearances from the above items.
7. Include layout of fume hoods in relation to lighting fixtures and air-conditioning registers
and grilles.
8. Include coordinated dimensions for laboratory equipment specified in other Sections.
C. Samples: For fume hood exterior finishes and interior lining.
A. Product Test Reports: Showing compliance with specified performance requirements for as-
manufactured containment and static pressure loss, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests
performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.
B. Source quality-control reports.
A. Furnish complete touchup kit for each type and color of fume hood finish provided. Include
fillers, primers, paints, and other materials necessary to perform permanent repairs to damaged
fume hood finish.

A. Protect finished surfaces during handling and installation with protective covering of
polyethylene film or another suitable material.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver laboratory casework until building is enclosed,

utility roughing-in and wet work is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating
and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of
the construction period.
B. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support fume hoods by field
measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Constant Volume Fume Hoods with VAV Control and Steel Exterior:

following:
a. Kawaunee Scientific Corporation.

b. Labconco Corporation.
c. Mott Manufacturing Ltd.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain laboratory fume hoods from single manufacturer.
1. Obtain laboratory fume hoods from same source from same manufacturer as laboratory
casework.
A. Containment: Provide fume hoods that comply with the following when tested according to
ASHRAE 110 as modified below:
1. As-Manufactured (AM) Rating: AM 0.02 (0.02 ppm).

2. As-Installed (AI) Rating: AI 0.05 (0.05 ppm).
3. Average Face Velocity: 100 fpm plus or minus 10 percent with sashes 18-inch open.
4. Face-Velocity Variation: Not more than 10 percent of average face velocity across the
face opening with sashes fully open.
5. Sash Position: 18-inch open.
6. Release Rate: 4.0 L/min.

7. Test Setup Modifications: Conduct tests with a minimum of three and a maximum of five
people in the test room and with two 1-gal. round paint cans, one 12-by-12-by-12-inch
cardboard box, and three 6-by-6-by-12-inch cardboard boxes in the fume hood during the
test. Position items from 6 to 10 inches behind the sash, randomly distributed, and
supported off the work surface by 2-by-2-inch blocks.
8. Walk-by Test: At the conclusion of containment test, execute three rapid walk-bys at 30-
second intervals, 12 inches behind the mannequin. Test-gas concentration during each
walk-by shall not exceed 0.1 ppm and shall return to specified containment value within
15 seconds.
B. Static-Pressure Loss: Not more than 1/2-inch wg at 100-fpm face velocity with sash 18-inch
open when measured at four locations 90 degrees apart around the exhaust duct and at least
three duct diameters downstream from duct collar.
2.3 FUME HOODS
A. Product Standards: Comply with SEFA 1, "Laboratory Fume Hoods - Recommended

Practices." Provide fume hoods UL listed and labeled for compliance with UL 1805.
B. Constant-Volume Fume Hoods: Provide constant-volume fume hoods without bypass.
C. VAV Control: Refer to Division 23 sections for fume hood control
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Steel Sheet: Cold-rolled, commercial steel (CS) sheet, complying with

ASTM A 1008/A 1008M; matte finish; suitable for exposed applications.
B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled
standard of flatness.
C. Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Polyester: Polyester laminate with a chemical-resistant gel coat on

exposed faces, and having a flame-spread index of 25 or less according to ASTM E 84.
D. Epoxy: Factory molded, modified epoxy-resin formulation with smooth, nonspecular finish.
1. Physical Properties:
a. Flexural Strength: Not less than 10,000 psi.

b. Modulus of Elasticity: Not less than 2,000,000 psi.
c. Hardness (Rockwell M): Not less than 100.
d. Water Absorption (24 Hours): Not more than 0.02 percent.
e. Heat Distortion Point: Not less than 260 deg F.
f. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less according to ASTM E 84.
2. Chemical Resistance: As follows when tested with indicated reagents according to

NEMA LD 3, Test Procedure 3.4.5:

a. No Effect: Acetic acid (98 percent), acetone, ammonium hydroxide (28 percent),
benzene, carbon tetrachloride, dimethyl formamide, ethyl acetate, ethyl alcohol,
ethyl ether, methyl alcohol, nitric acid (70 percent), phenol, sulfuric acid (60
percent), and toluene.
b. Slight Effect: Chromic acid (60 percent) and sodium hydroxide (50 percent).
E. Glass: Clear, laminated tempered glass complying with ASTM C 1172, Kind LT, Condition A,
Type I, Class I, Quality-Q3; with two plies not less than 3.0 mm thick and with clear, polyvinyl
butyral interlayer.
1. Ultraclear Glass: Glass plies each have visible light transmission not less than 91 percent.
2. Safety Glass: Provide products complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for
Category II materials.
3. Permanently mark safety glass with certification label of the SGCC or another
certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate
manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which
glass complies.
F. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
G. Fasteners: Provide stainless-steel fasteners where exposed to fumes.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Assemble fume hoods in factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble fume hoods
only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Fume hoods shall be capable of being
partly disassembled as necessary to permit movement through a 35-by-79-inch door opening.
B. Steel Exterior: Fabricate from steel sheet, 0.048 inch thick, with component parts screwed
together to allow removal of end panels, front fascia, and airfoil and to allow access to
plumbing lines and service fittings. Apply chemical-resistant finish to interior and exterior
surfaces of component parts before assembly.
C. Ends: Fabricate with double-wall end panels without projecting corner posts or other
obstructions to interfere with smooth, even airflow. Close area between double walls at front of
fume hood and as needed to house sash counterbalance weights, utility lines, and remote-control
valves.
D. Splay top and sides of face opening to provide an aerodynamic shape to ensure smooth, even
flow of air into fume hood.
E. Interior Lining: Provide the following unless otherwise indicated:
1. Glass-fiber-reinforced polyester, not less than 3/16 inch thick.

F. Molded Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Polyester Lining: Molded unit consisting of end panels, back
panel, preset rear baffle, and top bonded together into a single piece; reinforced to form a rigid
assembly to which exterior is attached.
1. Punch fume hood lining side panels to receive service fittings and remote controls.
Provide removable plug buttons for holes not used for indicated fittings.
G. Rear Baffle: Unless otherwise indicated, provide baffle, of same material as fume hood lining,
at rear of hood with openings at top and bottom. Secure baffle to cleats at rear of hood with
stainless-steel screws. Fabricate baffle for easy removal for cleaning behind baffle.
1. Provide adjustable baffles with control adjustment strips at top and bottom with plastic or
stainless-steel knobs unless otherwise indicated.
H. Exhaust Plenum: Full width of fume hood and with adequate volume to provide uniform airflow
from hood, of same material as hood lining, and with duct stub for exhaust connection.
1. Duct-Stub Material: glass-fiber-reinforced polyester.
I. Sashes: Provide operable sashes of type indicated.
1. Fabricate from 0.050-inch-stainless steel. Form into four-sided frame with bottom corners
welded and finished smooth. Make top member removable for glazing replacement. Set
glazing in chemical-resistant, U-shaped gaskets.
2. Glaze with laminated safety glass.
3. Counterbalance vertical-sliding sash with sash weight and stainless-steel cable system to
hold sash in place regardless of position. Provide ball-bearing sheaves, plastic glides in
stainless-steel guides, and stainless-steel lift handles. Provide rubber bumpers at top and
bottom of each sash unit.
J. Airfoil: Unless otherwise indicated, provide airfoil at bottom of fume hood face opening with 1-
inch space between airfoil and work top. Sash closes on top of airfoil, leaving 1-inch opening
for air intake. Airfoil directs airflow across work top to remove heavier-than-air gases and to
prevent reverse airflow.
1. Fabricate airfoil from stainless steel coated with polytetrafluoroethylene or

polyvinylidene fluoride.
K. Light Fixtures: Provide vaporproof, two-tube, rapid-start, fluorescent light fixtures, of longest
practicable length; complete with tubes at each fume hood. Shield tubes from hood interior with
1/4-inch-thick laminated glass or 3-mm-thick tempered glass, sealed into hood with chemical-
resistant rubber gaskets. Provide units with fluorescent tubes easily replaceable from outside of
fume hood.
1. Provide fluorescent tubes with color temperature of 3500 K and minimum color-
rendering index of 85.
L. Ceiling Extensions: Provide filler panels matching fume hood exterior to enclose space above
fume hoods at front and sides of fume hoods and extending from tops of fume hoods to ceiling.

M. Finished Back Panels: Where rear surfaces of fume hoods are exposed to view, provide finished
back panels matching rest of fume hood enclosure.
N. Pre-wire and pre-plumb fume hood for single point of connection for each utility. Comply with
requirements in other Sections for installing water and laboratory gas service fittings, piping,
electrical devices, and wiring. Install according to Shop Drawings. Securely anchor fittings,
piping, and conduit to fume hoods unless otherwise indicated.
1. Locate plumbing connection at bottom of hood.

2. Locate electrical connection at top of hood.
2.6 FUME HOOD BASE STANDS, WORK TOPS, SINKS, AND SERVICE FITTINGS
A. Comply with Section 123553.13 "Metal Laboratory Casework.".
B. Work Tops: Epoxy.
1. Work-Top Configuration: Raised (marine) edge with beveled edge and corners.
2. Where epoxy sinks occur in epoxy work tops, provide integral sinks bonded to tops with
invisible joint line.
C. Cup Sinks: Epoxy.
1. Provide with polypropylene strainers and integral tailpieces.
D. Fume Hood Base Stands: Welded steel tubing legs, not less than 2 inches square with channel
stretchers and aprons. Weld or bolt stretchers to legs and cross-stretchers, and bolt legs to
aprons. Provide leveling device welded to bottom of each leg.
1. Structural Performance: Capable of withstanding 50-lb/ft. work top, 75 lb/ft. on work top,
plus weight of hood, without permanent deformation or excessive deflection.
2. Knee Space: Provide clear floor space not less than 36 inches wide by 25 inches deep by
27 inches high within fume hood base stands unless otherwise indicated.
3. Leg Shoes: Black vinyl or rubber, open-bottom, slip-on type.
2.7 CHEMICAL-RESISTANT FINISH
A. General: Prepare, treat, and finish welded assemblies after welding. Prepare, treat, and finish
components that are to be assembled with mechanical fasteners before assembling. Prepare,
treat, and finish concealed surfaces same as exposed surfaces.
B. Preparation: Clean steel surfaces, other than stainless steel, of mill scale, rust, oil, and other
contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to be
applied over it.
C. Chemical-Resistant Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply fume hood
manufacturer's standard two-coat, chemical-resistant, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat

and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for
applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils.
1. Chemical and Physical Resistance of Finish System: Finish complies with acceptance
levels of cabinet surface finish tests in SEFA 8M. Acceptance level for chemical spot test
shall be no more than four Level 3 conditions.
2. Colors for Fume Hood Finish: As selected by A/E from manufacturer's full range.
2.8 ACCESSORIES
A. Sash Stops: Provide fume hoods with sash stops to limit hood opening to 18-inch high. Sash
stops can be manually released to open sash fully for cleaning fume hood and for placing large
apparatus within fume hood.
A. Demonstrate fume hood performance before shipment by testing one fume hood for each type
required according to ASHRAE 110 as modified in "Performance Requirements" Article.
Provide testing facility, instruments, equipment, and materials needed for tests.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of fume hoods.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install fume hoods according to manufacturer's written instructions. Install level,
plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims, and securely anchor to building and
adjacent laboratory casework. Securely attach access panels but provide for easy removal and
secure reattachment. Where fume hoods abut other finished work, apply filler strips and scribe
for accurate fit, with fasteners concealed where practical.
B. Comply with requirements in Section 123553.13 "Metal Laboratory Casework" for installing
fume hood base cabinets, work tops, and sinks.
C. Comply with requirements for installing water and laboratory gas service fittings and electrical
devices.

1. Install fittings according to Shop Drawings, installation requirements in SEFA 2.3, and
manufacturer's written instructions. Set bases and flanges of sink and work top-mounted
fittings in sealant recommended by manufacturer of sink or work-top material. Securely
anchor fittings to fume hoods unless otherwise indicated.
A. Field test installed fume hoods according to "Flow Visualization and Velocity Procedure"
requirements in ASHRAE 110.
1. Test one installed fume hood, selected by Architect, for each type of hood installed,
according to ASHRAE 110 as modified in "Performance Requirements" Article.
B. Field test installed fume hoods according to ASHRAE 110 as modified in "Performance
Requirements" Article to verify compliance with performance requirements.
1. Adjust fume hoods, hood exhaust fans, and building's HVAC system, or replace hoods
and make other corrections until tested hoods perform as specified.
2. After making corrections, retest fume hoods that failed to perform as specified.
A. Adjust moving parts for smooth, near silent, accurate sash operation with one hand. Adjust
sashes for uniform contact of rubber bumpers. Verify that counterbalances operate without
interference.
B. Clean finished surfaces, including both sides of glass; touch up as required; and remove or
refinish damaged or soiled areas to match original factory finish, as approved by Architect.

SECTION 122413 - ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Manually operated roller shades with single rollers.
1. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for
mounting roller shades and accessories.
2. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealing the perimeters of installation accessories for
light-blocking shades with a sealant.

and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions for roller shades.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roller shades, including shadeband
materials, their orientation to rollers, and their seam and batten locations.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type and color of shadeband material.
1. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of roller shade.
1. Shadeband Material: Not less than 10 inches square. Mark interior face of material if
applicable.
2. Installation Accessories: Full-size unit, not less than 10 inches long.
E. Product Schedule: For roller shades.
Project 16018 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 122413 - 1

B. Product Certificates: For each type of shadeband material.
C. Product Test Reports: For each type of shadeband material, for tests performed by a qualified
testing agency.
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For roller shades to include in maintenance manuals.
1. Roller Shades: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of quantity installed for each size, color,
and shadeband material indicated, but no fewer than two units.
A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
A. Deliver roller shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer, product name, and
location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and finish work in
spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and humidity
conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
B. Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operating hardware of operable glazed
units through entire operating range. Notify Architect of installation conditions that vary from
Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain roller shades from single source from single manufacturer.
2.2 MANUALLY OPERATED SHADES WITH SINGLE ROLLERS ALTERNATE

following:
1. Draper Inc.
2. Hunter Douglas Contract.
3. MechoShade Systems, Inc.
B. Chain-and-Clutch Operating Mechanisms: With continuous-loop bead chain and clutch that
stops shade movement when bead chain is released; permanently adjusted and lubricated.
1. Bead Chains: Stainless steel.
a. Loop Length: Full length of roller shade.

b. Limit Stops: Provide upper and lower ball stops.
c. Chain-Retainer Type: Clip, jamb mount.
C. Rollers: Corrosion-resistant steel or extruded-aluminum tubes of diameters and wall thicknesses

required to accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths of shadebands
indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive-end assemblies and
idle-end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shadebands for service.
1. Roller Drive-End Location: Right side of interior face of shade.

2. Direction of Shadeband Roll: Regular, from back (exterior face) of roller.
3. Shadeband-to-Roller Attachment: Manufacturer's standard method.
D. Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, corrosion resistant and compatible with roller
assembly, operating mechanism, installation accessories, and mounting location and conditions
indicated.
E. Shadebands:
1. Shadeband Material: Light-filtering fabric.

2. Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum.
a. Type: Enclosed in sealed pocket of shadeband material.

b. Color and Finish: As selected by A/E from manufacturer's full range.
F. Installation Accessories:

1. Front Fascia: Aluminum extrusion that conceals front and underside of roller and
operating mechanism and attaches to roller endcaps without exposed fasteners.
a. Shape: L-shaped.
b. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to conceal roller and shadeband
assembly when shade is fully open, but not less than 4 inches.
2. Exposed Headbox: Rectangular, extruded-aluminum enclosure including front fascia, top

and back covers, endcaps, and removable bottom closure.
a. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to enclose roller and shadeband

assembly when shade is fully open, but not less than 4 inches.
2.3 SHADEBAND MATERIALS
A. Shadeband Material Flame-Resistance Rating: Comply with NFPA 701. Testing by a qualified
testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
B. Light-Filtering Fabric [RS-1]: Woven fabric, stain and fade resistant.
1. Source: Roller shade manufacturer.

2. Type: PVC-coated polyester.
3. Weave: Basketweave.
4. Roll Width: 72 inches.
5. Orientation on Shadeband: Up the bolt.
6. Openness Factor: 5 percent.
7. Color: Match A/E's sample; basis of design MechoSystem SoHo Collection 1900 Series,
1933 Wooster (Dark Gray).
C. Light-Filtering Fabric [RS-2]: Woven fabric, stain and fade resistant.
1. Source: Roller shade manufacturer.

2. Type: PVC-coated polyester.
3. Weave: Basketweave.
4. Roll Width: 72 inches.
5. Orientation on Shadeband: Up the bolt.
6. Openness Factor: 3 percent.
7. Color: Match A/E's sample; basis of design MechoSystem SoHo Collection 1600 Series,
1622 Howard (Mocka).
2.4 ROLLER SHADE FABRICATION
A. Product Safety Standard: Fabricate roller shades to comply with WCMA A 100.1, including
requirements for flexible, chain-loop devices; lead content of components; and warning labels.
B. Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74
deg F:

1. Between (Inside) Jamb Installation: Width equal to jamb-to-jamb dimension of opening

in which shade is installed less 1/4 inch per side or 1/2-inch total, plus or minus 1/8 inch.
Length equal to head-to-sill or -floor dimension of opening in which shade is installed
less 1/4 inch, plus or minus 1/8 inch.
C. Shadeband Fabrication: Fabricate shadebands without battens or seams to extent possible,

except as follows:
1. Vertical Shades: Where width-to-length ratio of shadeband is equal to or greater than 1:4,
provide battens and seams at uniform spacings along shadeband length to ensure
shadeband tracking and alignment through its full range of movement without distortion
of the material.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, locations of connections to
building electrical system, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
3.2 ROLLER SHADE INSTALLATION
A. Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's
B. Electrical Connections: Connect motor-operated roller shades to building electrical system.
C. Roller Shade Locations: At exterior windows.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or
malfunction throughout entire operational range.
A. Clean roller shade surfaces, after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer, which ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time of

C. Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by A/E, before
time of Substantial Completion.

WSU-160027
SECTION 123553.13 - METAL LABORATORY CASEWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Metal laboratory casework.

2. Utility-space framing at backs of base cabinets.
3. Filler and closure panels.
4. Laboratory casework system that includes support and utility-space framing, filler and
closure panels, and modular countertops.
5. Laboratory countertops.
6. Tables.
7. Shelves.
8. Laboratory sinks.
9. Laboratory accessories.
10. Water, laboratory gas, and electrical service fittings.
1. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring
laboratory casework.
2. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for reinforcements in metal-framed
partitions for anchoring laboratory casework.
3. Section 096513 "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient base applied to metal
laboratory casework.
4. Section 115313 "Laboratory Fume Hoods" for fume hoods.
5. Section 224500 “Emergency Plumbing Fixtures” for emergency showers, eyewashes and
drench hoses.
6. Division 22 and 26 sections for installing service fittings specified in this Section,
including connecting service utilities.
7. Division 26 sections for electrical cover-plate identification.
Project 16018 METAL LABORATORY CASEWORK 12355313 - 1

WSU-160027
1. Meet with Owner, A/E, agency representative, casework installer, roofing system
manufacturer’s representative, installers whose work interfaces with or affects laboratory
casework, including plumbing, electrical and HVAC.
2. Review status of submittals
3. Review mock-up requirements
4. Review Inspection requirements
5. Review Environmental requirements for staring and installing casework
6. Review general, mechanical and electrical trades work that are complete prior to
installation.
7. Review Protection for casework
8. Review coordination and sequencing of trades
9. Review acceptance of room conditions.
10. Review keying requirements
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of framing and reinforcements for support of laboratory
casework.
B. Coordinate installation of laboratory casework with installation of fume hoods and other
laboratory equipment.
A. Product Data: Include sufficient documentation show full compliance with the specifications for
each type of product. Cross out all no-relevant data. Cross reference all service fittings and sink
data to the Architect’s schedules.
B. Shop Drawings: For laboratory casework. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment
details.
1. Indicate types and sizes of cabinets.

2. Include countertop joints and splash configuration.
3. Indicate locations of hardware and keying of locks.
4. Indicate locations and types of sinks service fittings. Cross reference product data.
5. Indicate locations of blocking and reinforcements required for installing laboratory
casework.
6. Include details of utility spaces showing rough-in dimensions and supports for conduits
and piping.
7. Include details of exposed conduits, if required, for service fittings.
8. Indicate locations of and clearances from adjacent walls, doors, windows, other building
components, and other laboratory equipment.
9. Include coordinated dimensions for laboratory equipment specified in other Sections.

WSU-160027
C. Keying Schedule: Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique
designations that are coordinated with the Contract Documents.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For factory-applied finishes and other materials requiring color
selection.
E. Samples for Verification: For each type of cabinet finish and each type of countertop material,
in manufacturer's standard sizes.
F. Samples for Verification: Unless otherwise directed, approved full-size Samples may become
part of the completed Work, if in an undisturbed condition at time of Substantial Completion.
Notify Architect of their exact locations. If acceptable full-size Samples at Project site are not
incorporated into the Work, retain and remove them when directed by Architect.
1. One full-size, finished base cabinet complete with hardware, doors, drawers and
adjustable shelving.
2. One Sample each of hinged doors.
3. One Sample each of lipped shelves.
4. 6-inch-square Samples for each type of countertop material.
5. One of each service fitting specified, complete with accessories and specified finish.
6. One of each type of sink and accessory item specified.
7. One of each type of hardware item specified.
8. One Sample each of utility-space framing.
B. Product Test Reports for Casework: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a
qualified independent testing agency, indicating compliance of laboratory casework with
requirements of specified product standard.
C. Product Test Reports for Countertop Surface Material: Based on evaluation of comprehensive
tests performed by a qualified independent testing agency, indicating compliance of laboratory
countertop surface materials with requirements specified for chemical and physical resistance.
D. Detrimental Chemical List: Include list of chemicals detrimental to cabinet finish and epoxy
resin.
E. Manufacturer’s warranties show compliance with specification requirements.
A. Furnish complete touchup kit for each type and color of metal laboratory casework provided.
Include fillers, primers, paints, and other materials necessary to perform permanent repairs to
damaged laboratory casework finish.
B. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective

WSU-160027
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that produces casework of types

indicated for this Project that has been tested by an independent testing agency for compliance
with SEFA 8 M, SEFA 7 and SEFA 3.
A. Protect finished surfaces during handling and installation with protective covering of
polyethylene film or other suitable material.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver laboratory casework until building is enclosed,

utility roughing-in and wet work is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating
and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of
the construction period.
B. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support casework by field
measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer’ agrees to repair or replace components of the laboratory

casework, fittings and accessories that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1. Special Warranty includes the following defect but are not limited to: ruptured, cracked
or stained coatings; discoloration or lack of finish integrity; cracking or peeling of finish;
slippage, shift, or failure of attachment to wall ,floor or ceiling; weld or structural failure;
waroping or unloaded deflections of components; failure of hardware.
2. Warranty Period: 1 year from date of substantial completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. ICI scientific (Jamestown)

2. Kewaunee Scientific Corporation.
3. Mott Manufacturing Ltd.
4. CiF Lab Solutions
5. AMS

WSU-160027
B. Source Limitations: Obtain laboratory casework from single source from single manufacturer
1. Obtain countertops, sinks, accessories and service fitting from casework manufacturer.
2.2 CASEWORK, GENERAL
A. Casework Product Standard: Comply with SEFA 8 M, "Laboratory Grade Metal Casework."
B. Flammable Liquid Storage: Where cabinets are indicated for solvent or flammable liquid
storage, provide units that are listed and labeled as complying with requirements in NFPA 30 by
FM Approvals.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
2.3 METAL CABINET AND TABLE MATERIALS
A. Metal: Unless indicated otherwise, Cold-rolled, commercial steel (CS) sheet, complying with
ASTM A 1008/A 1008M; matte finish; suitable for exposed applications and ASTM A240, type
304 or 316 alloy.
2.4 AUXILIARY CABINET MATERIALS
A. Acid Storage-Cabinet Lining: 1/4-inch-thick, polyethylene, polypropylene, epoxy, or phenolic-

composite lining material.
B. Add “plastic” drop tags at sink bases.
2.5 COUNTERTOP, TABLETOP,AND SINK MATERIALS
A. Epoxy: Factory-molded, modified epoxy-resin formulation with smooth, nonspecular finish.

following:
a. Durcon Incorporated.
b. Prime Industries, Inc.
c. Kewaunee
2. Physical Properties; minimum acceptable physical performance in accordance with SEFA

3 testing procedures:
a. Flexural Strength: Not less than 10,000 psi.

b. Modulus of Elasticity: Not less than 2,000,000 psi.
c. Hardness (Rockwell M): Not less than 100.
d. Water Absorption (24 Hours): Not more than 0.02 percent.
e. Heat Distortion Point: Not less than 260 deg F.

WSU-160027
3. Chemical Resistance: Epoxy-resin material has the following ratings when tested with
indicated reagents according to NEMA LD 3, Test Procedure 3.4.5:
benzene, carbon tetrachloride, dimethyl formamide, ethyl acetate, ethyl alcohol,
ethyl ether, methyl alcohol, nitric acid (70 percent), phenol, sulfuric acid (60
percent), and toluene.
b. Slight Effect: Chromic acid (60 percent) and sodium hydroxide (50 percent).
4. Color: Gray
B. Phenolic Composite: Solid, high-pressure decorative laminate, complying with NEMA LD 3,

Grade CGS.

following:
a. Arborite.
b. Formica Corporation.
c. Nevamar; a Panolam Industries International, Inc. brand.
d. Trespa; basis of design
2. Chemical Resistance: Composite countertop material has the following ratings when
tested with indicated reagents according to NEMA LD 3, Test Procedure 3.4.5:
ethyl acetate, ethyl alcohol, formaldehyde (37 percent), furfural, nitric acid (30
percent), phosphoric acid (85 percent), sodium hydroxide (20 percent), sulfuric
acid (33 percent), toluene, and zinc chloride.
C. Color: Slate Gray.
D. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304.
2.6 METAL CABINETS AND TABLES
A. Fabrication: Assemble and finish units at point of manufacture. Use precision dies for
interchangeability of like-size drawers, doors, and similar parts. Perform assembly on precision
jigs to provide units that are square. Reinforce units with angles, gussets, and channels. Except
where otherwise specified, integrally frame and weld cabinet bodies to form dirt- and vermin-
resistant enclosures. Where applicable, reinforce base cabinets for sink support. Maintain
uniform clearance around door and drawer fronts of 1/16 to 3/32 inch.
B. Flush Doors: Outer and inner pans that nest into box formation, with full-height channel
reinforcements at center of door. Fill doors with noncombustible, sound-deadening material.
C. Hinged Doors: Mortise for hinges and reinforce with angles welded inside inner pans at hinge
edge.

WSU-160027
D. Drawers: Fronts made from outer and inner pans that nest into box formation, with no raw metal
edges at top. Sides, back, and bottom fabricated in one piece with rolled or formed top of sides
for stiffening and comfortable grasp for drawer removal. Provide drawers with rubber bumpers,
and positive stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact or accidental removal.
E. Adjustable Shelves: Unless noted otherwise on drawings, provide shelves with front, back, and
ends formed down, with edges returned horizontally at front and back to form reinforcing
channels. Shelves to have a one- inch upturn lip at locations noted on the drawings.
F. Toe Space: Fully enclosed, 4 inches high by 3 inches deep, with no open gaps or pockets.
G. Tables: Welded tubing legs, not less than 2 inches square with channel stretchers as needed to
comply with product standard. Weld or bolt stretchers to legs and cross-stretchers, and bolt legs
to table aprons. Provide leveling device welded to bottom of each leg.
1. Leg Shoes: Black vinyl or rubber, open-bottom, slip-on type.
H. Utilities: Provide space, cutouts, and holes for pipes, conduits, and fittings in cabinet bodies to
accommodate utility services and their support-strut assemblies.
1. Provide base cabinets with removable backs for access to utility space.
I. Utility-Space Framing: Steel framing units consisting of two steel slotted channels complying
with MFMA-4, not less than 1-5/8 inches square by 0.105-inch nominal thickness, that are
connected at top and bottom by U-shaped brackets made from 1-1/4-by-1/4-inch steel flat bars.
Framing units may be made by welding specified channel material into rectangular frames
instead of using U-shaped brackets.
J. Filler and Closure Panels: Provide where indicated and as needed to close spaces between
cabinets and walls, ceilings, and indicated equipment. Fabricate from same material and with
same finish as cabinets and with hemmed or flanged edges unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide knee-space panels (modesty panels) at spaces between base cabinets, where
cabinets are not installed against a wall or where space is not otherwise closed, indicated
and as required to conceal utilities and framing. Fabricate from back-to-back panels or of
hollow construction to eliminate exposed hemmed or flanged edges.
2. Provide 3-sided fillers at wall cabinets.
3. Provide 2-sided fillers at tall base cabinets.
4. Provide 1-sided fillers as base cabinet.
5. Provide utility-space closure panels at spaces between base cabinets where utility space
would otherwise be exposed, including spaces below countertops.
6. Provide closure panels at ends of utility spaces where utility space would otherwise be
exposed.

WSU-160027
2.7 LABORATORY CASEWORK SYSTEM
A. Provide casework manufacturer's standard integrated system that includes support framing,
suspended modular cabinets, filler and closure panels, wall panels, countertops, and fittings
needed to assemble system. System includes hardware and fasteners for securing support
framing to permanent construction.
1. Cabinet Construction: Metal.

2. Cabinets can be removed and reinstalled without use of special tools for relocation within
system.
3. Base cabinets can be removed without providing temporary support for, or removing,
countertops.
4. Sinks are supported independent of base cabinets.
5. Support framing has provision for fastening pipe supports at utility space in not more
than 1-inch increments.
6. System includes filler and closure panels to close spaces between support framing,
cabinets, shelves, countertops, floors, and walls unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate
panels from same material and with same finish as metal cabinets and with hemmed or
flanged edges.
B. Support Framing: Casework manufacturer's standard system consisting of vertical supports and
connecting braces and rails as follows:
1. Cabinets, shelves, and countertops are supported from vertical supports except where
floor-supported base cabinets are indicated. Vertical positioning of supported cabinets,
shelves, and countertops can be varied in 1-inch increments through full height of
supports.
2. Vertical supports rest on adjustable leveling bases and are secured to floor with metal
clips fastened to floor.
3. Vertical supports are installed with braces and rails, connecting them to each other and to
permanent building walls to create a stable, rigid structure with framed utility spaces
where indicated.
C. Countertops: Provide in modular lengths indicated, without seams.
2.8 METAL CABINET FINISH FOR COLD ROLLED AND STAINLESS STEEL
A. General: Prepare, treat, and finish welded assemblies after assembling. Prepare, treat, and finish
components that are to be assembled with mechanical fasteners before assembling. Prepare,
treat, and finish concealed surfaces same as exposed surfaces.
B. Preparation: After assembly, clean surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, and other contaminants. After
cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to be applied over it.

WSU-160027
C. Chemical-Resistant Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply laboratory

casework manufacturer's standard two-coat, chemical-resistant, baked-on finish consisting of
prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions
for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils.
1. Chemical and Physical Resistance of Finish System: Finish complies with acceptance
levels of cabinet surface finish tests in SEFA 8 M. Acceptance level for chemical spot
test shall be no more than four Level 3 conditions.
2. Colors for Metal Laboratory Casework Finish: Match A/E’s sample; basis of design Mott
Manufacturing, Bright White 693226.
2.9 HARDWARE
A. General: Provide laboratory casework manufacturer's standard, commercial-quality, heavy-duty

hardware complying with requirements indicated for each type.
B. Hinges: Epoxy-coated-steel, five-knuckle hinges complying with BHMA A156.9, Grade 1, with
antifriction bearings and rounded tips. Provide two for doors 48 inches high or less and three for
doors more than 48 inches high.
C. Hinged Door and Drawer Pulls: Black ABS recessed channel, 4 inch, with no horizontal lips to
hold foreign matter. Provide two pulls for drawers more than 24 inches wide.
1. Design: As selected from manufacturer's full range.

2. Overall Size: As selected from manufacturer's full range.
D. Pulls: Full-width, recessed channel pulls; integrally formed from front pan of doors and drawer
fronts.
E. Door Catches: Nylon-roller spring catches. Provide two catches on doors more than 48 inches
high.
F. Drawer Slides: Side mounted, epoxy-coated steel, self-closing; designed to prevent rebound
when drawers are closed; complying with BHMA A156.9, Type B05091.
1. Standard Duty (Grade 1): Full-extension type, with polymer rollers.

2. Heavy Duty (Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200): Full-extension, ball-bearing type.
G. Label Holders: Stainless steel, aluminum, or chrome plated; sized to receive standard label
cards approximately 1 by 2 inches attached with screws or rivets. Provide where indicated.
H. Locks: Cam or half-mortise type with five-pin tumbler, brass with chrome-plated finish;
complying with BHMA A156.11, Type E07281, Type E07261, Type E07111, or Type E07021.
1. Provide a minimum of two keys per lock and two master keys.
2. Provide on all drawers and doors.
3. Keying: Key locks alike within each room; key each room separately.
4. Master Key System: Key all locks to be operable by master key.

WSU-160027
I. Adjustable Wall Shelf Supports: Surface-type steel standards and steel shelf brackets, with
epoxy powder-coated finish, complying with BHMA A156.9, Types B04102 and B04112.
Select components and anchorage devices to support uniform live load of 100 pounds per linear
foot of shelf.
1. Support shelves from vertical supports. Vertical positioning of shelves can be varied in 1-
inch increments through full height of supports. Provide double slotted supports.
2. Color and finish to match cabinetry.
2.10 COUNTERTOPS, TABLETOPS SHELVES, AND SINKS
A. Countertops, General: Provide units with smooth surfaces in uniform plane, free of defects.
Make exposed edges and corners straight and uniformly beveled. Provide front and end
overhang of 1 inch, with continuous drip groove on underside 1/2 inch from edge.
B. Sinks, General: Provide sizes indicated or laboratory casework manufacturer's closest standard
size of equal or greater volume, as approved by Architect.
1. Outlets: Provide with strainers and tailpieces, NPS 1-1/2, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Epoxy Sinks:
1. Sink Fabrication: Molded in one piece with smooth surfaces, coved corners, and bottom
sloped to outlet; 1/2-inch minimum thickness.
a. Provide with polypropylene strainers and tailpieces.

b. Provide sinks for drop-in installation with 1/4-inch-thick lip around.
c. Provide manufacturer's recommended adjustable support system for table- and
cabinet-type installations.
D. Phenolic-Composite Countertops, Tabletops, and Shelves:
1. Countertop Fabrication: Fabricate with cutouts for sinks, holes for service fittings and
accessories, and butt joints assembled with epoxy adhesive and concealed metal splines.
a. Countertop Configuration: Flat, 1 inch thick, with beveled edge and corners, and
with drip groove and integral coved backsplash.
b. Countertop Configuration: As indicated.
2. Tabletop Fabrication:
a. Tabletop Configuration: Flat, 1 inch thick, with beveled edge and corners, and with
drip groove at perimeter.
3. Shelf Configuration: Flat, 3/4 inch thick, with beveled edge and corners.
1) Depth: As indicated on drawings

WSU-160027
E. Stainless-Steel Countertops: Made from stainless-steel sheet, not less than 0.062-inch nominal
thickness, with No. 4 satin finish.
1. Extend top down 1 inch at edges with a 1/2-inch return flange under frame. Apply heavy
coating of heat-resistant, sound-deadening mastic to undersurface.
2. Form backsplash coved to and integral with top surface.
3. Provide raised (marine) edge around perimeter of countertops containing sinks.
4. Factory punch holes for service fittings.
5. Reinforce underside of countertop with channels, or use thicker metal sheet where
necessary to ensure rigidity without deflection.
6. Weld shop-made joints.
7. Where field-made joints are required, provide hairline butt joints mechanically bolted
through continuous channels welded to underside at edges of joined ends. Keep field
jointing to a minimum.
8. Where stainless-steel sinks or cup sinks occur in stainless-steel countertops, factory weld
into one integral unit.
9. After fabricating and welding, grind surfaces smooth, and polish as needed to produce
uniform, directionally textured finish with no cross scratches or evidence of welds.
Passivate and rinse surfaces; remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces clean.
F. Stainless-Steel Sinks: Made from stainless-steel sheet, not less than 0.050-inch nominal
thickness. Fabricate with corners rounded and coved to at least 5/8-inch radius. Slope sink
bottoms to outlet. Provide double-wall construction for sink partitions, with top edge rounded to
at least 1/2-inch diameter. Provide continuous butt-welded joints. After fabricating and welding,
grind surfaces smooth, and polish as needed to produce uniform finish with no cross scratches
or evidence of welds. Passivate and rinse surfaces; remove embedded foreign matter and leave
surfaces clean.
1. Factory punch holes for fittings.

2. Provide with stainless-steel strainers and tailpieces.
3. Provide with integral rims except where located in stainless-steel countertops.
4. Apply 1/8-inch-thick coating of heat-resistant, sound-deadening mastic to undersink
surfaces.
2.11 LABORATORY ACCESSORIES
A. Upright Rod Assembly and Metal Crossbar: Aluminum or stainless steel. Two vertical rods and
one horizontal crossbar, 3/4 inch in diameter and 36 inches long unless otherwise indicated; two
flush socket receptacles and two crossbar clamps. Ends of vertical rods are tapered to fit
receptacles; all other rod ends are rounded.
B. Pegboards: Polypropylene or epoxy, or phenolic-composite pegboards with removable

polypropylene pegs and stainless-steel drip troughs with drain outlet.
C. Pegboards: Stainless-steel pegboards with removable polypropylene pegs and stainless-steel

drip troughs with drain outlet.

WSU-160027
2.12 CORROSIVE SAFETY CABINETS
A. Corrosive Safety Cabinets shall be constructed similar to base cabinet with a molded
polyethylene interior liner.
1. Case: shall be a double-walled 18 gauge steel, provided internal backing surface for
corrosion resistant inner liner. There shall be a perforated at rear for use of venting
apparatus; no penetration of liner at vent opening.
2. Liner: One-piece welded polypropylene, secured to case with nylon screws. The lining on
the back of the doors shall be fitted so that it overlays the flange on the front of the
molded cabinet liner to protect all metal areas of the cabinet. Molded liner shall
incorporate a 1 inch hip lip along bottom edge to contain spills.
3. Doors: Polypropylene lined with an entirely plastic door catch.
4. Shelf: Acid storage cabinet shall contain one full-width manufacturer’s standard shelf
with 1 inch lip. Shelf support shall be integrally molded into cabinet liner.
5. Labels: Provide the door with a decal signifying “ACID” storage. On acid cabinets with
two doors, provide one decal signifying “ACID” on each door.
2.13 FLAMMABLE SAFETY CABINETS
A. Flammable Safety Cabinets shall meet OSHA 29 CFR 1910.106, considered as organized
storage centers for flammable and combustible liquids. Cabinets shall comply with NFPA
flammable and combustible liquids Code #30 and #45, 1996. Provide grounding screw log in
accordance with codes. Cabinet shall be listed and labelled to the UL1275 standard, “Standards
for Flammable Liquid Storage Cabinets”
1. Case: Double-walled 18 gauge steel with min. 1 ½ inch air space between panels on top,
bottom, sides, back and door.
a. Air spaces shall be filled with min. manufacturer’s required blanket of high-temp
fiberglass to meet NFPA and UL.
b. Bottom floor plan shall provide a 2 inch deep liquid tight pan to contain liquid
spills and prevent leaks.
c. Provisions for attaching grounding wire at base of the cabinet on the outside rear
panel.
2. Doors:
a. Provide a three-point locking mechanism.

b. Self-closing mechanism and fusible link shall also be incorporated.
c. Door synchronizer shall be incorporated on double door units.
d. Provide with full length stainless steel piano hinge.
3. Shelves: Provide adjustable galvanized sheet steel shelves with four edges turned down 1
inch and additionally returned under 5/8 inch on all edges. Provide ½ inch incremental
shelf adjustment.
4. Mobile: Four casters (2-locking), swivel-type. Vent holes factory plugged. Cabinets shall
be ADA compliant for height, width and load capacity.
5. Labels: “FLAMMABLE-KEEP FIRE AWAY” shall be silk-screened onto door,
appearing as red lettering on a bright yellow background.

WSU-160027
2.14 WATER AND LABORATORY GAS SERVICE FITTINGS

following:
1. Broen A/S.
2. Chicago Faucets; Geberit Company.
3. Watersaver Company, Inc.
B. Service Fittings: Provide units that comply with SEFA 7, "Laboratory and Hospital Fixtures -
Recommended Practices." Provide fittings complete with washers, locknuts, nipples, and other
installation accessories. Include wall and deck flanges, escutcheons, handle extension rods, and
similar items.
C. Materials: Fabricated from cast or forged red brass unless otherwise indicated.
D. Finish: Chromium plated or with clear epoxy Acid- and solvent-resistant powder coating
complying with requirements in SEFA 7 for corrosion-resistant finishes at locations indicated
on drawings.
1. Provide chemical-resistant powder coating in laboratory casework manufacturer's

standard metallic brown, aluminum, white, or other color as approved by Architect.
E. Water Valves and Faucets: Provide units complying with ASME A112.18.1, with renewable
seats, designed for working pressure up to 80 psig.
1. Vacuum Breakers: Provide ASSE 1035 vacuum breakers on water fittings.

2. Aerators: Provide aerators on water fittings where indicated on drawings.
3. Self-Closing Valves: Provide self-closing valves where indicated.
F. Ball Valves: Chrome-plated ball and PTFE seals. Handle requires no more than 5 lbf to operate.
Provide units designed for working pressure up to 75 psig, with serrated outlets.
G. Needle Valves: Provide units with renewable, self-centering, floating cones and renewable seats
of stainless steel or Monel metal, with removable serrated outlets.
1. Provide units designed for working pressure up to 100 psig.
H. Hand of Fittings: Furnish right-hand fittings unless fitting designation is followed by "L."
I. Remote-Control Valves: Provide needle valves, straight-through or angle type as indicated for
fume hoods and where indicated.
J. Handles: Provide wrist handles, foraged brass handles for valves unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide lever-type handles for ball valves unless otherwise indicated. Lever handle aligns
with outlet when valve is closed and is perpendicular to outlet when valve is fully open.
2. Provide heat-resistant plastic handles for steam valves.
3. Provide knurled, molded-plastic handles for needle valves.

WSU-160027
K. Service-Outlet Identification: Provide color-coded plastic discs with embossed identification,
secured to each service-fitting handle to be tamper resistant. Comply with SEFA 7 for colors
and embossed identification.
2.15 SEALANT
A. Provide manufacturer’s recommended epoxy adhesive around sinks, at back-splash to wall and
other permanent construction and at locations indicated on the drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
tolerances, location of reinforcements, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work
including but not limited to the following:
1. Do not install laboratory casework until all overhead work is complete including lighting,
HVAC and ceiling finish.
2. Do not install laboratory casework until finish flooring is complete and wall finishes
applied.
3. Do not install laboratory casework until major overhead work is complete (including
mechanical rough-in, ceiling suspension systems & lighting.
4. Do not install laboratory casework until dusty operations are completed room has been
cleaned and concealed utility spaces can be protected.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF CABINETS
A. Comply with installation requirements in SEFA 2.3. Install level, plumb, and true; shim as
required, using concealed shims. Where laboratory casework abuts other finished work, apply
filler strips and scribe for accurate fit, with fasteners concealed where practical. Do not exceed
the following tolerances:
1. Variation of Tops of Base Cabinets from Level: 1/16 inch in 10 feet.

2. Variation of Bottoms of Upper Cabinets from Level: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
3. Variation of Faces of Cabinets from a True Plane: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
4. Variation of Adjacent Surfaces from a True Plane (Lippage): 1/32 inch.
5. Variation in Alignment of Adjacent Door and Drawer Edges: 1/16 inch.
B. Utility-Space Framing: Secure to floor with two fasteners at each frame. Fasten to partition
framing, wood blocking, or metal reinforcements in partitions and to base cabinets. Space no
more than 36 inches off center.
1. Provide supplemental framing at peninsula benches where no base cabinets are located at
intersection with wall and bench.

WSU-160027
C. Base Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to utility-space framing, partition framing, wood blocking, or
reinforcements in partitions, with fasteners spaced not more than 16 inches o.c. Bolt adjacent
cabinets together with joints flush, tight, and uniform.
1. Where base cabinets are installed away from walls, fasten to floor at toe space at not
more than 24 inches o.c. and at sides of cabinets with not less than two fasteners per side.
D. Wall Cabinets: Fasten to hanging strips, masonry, partition framing, blocking, or reinforcements
in partitions. Fasten each cabinet through back, near top, at not less than 16 inches o.c.
E. Install hardware uniformly and precisely. Set hinges snug and flat in mortises.
F. Adjust laboratory casework and hardware so doors and drawers align and operate smoothly
without warp or bind and contact points meet accurately. Lubricate operating hardware as
3.3 INSTALLATION OF COUNTERTOPS
A. Comply with installation requirements in SEFA 2.3. Abut top and edge surfaces in one true
plane with flush hairline joints and with internal supports placed to prevent deflection. Locate
joints only where indicated on Shop Drawings.
B. Field Jointing: Where possible, make in same manner as shop-made joints, using dowels,
splines, fasteners, adhesives, and sealants recommended by manufacturer. Shop prepare edges
for field-made joints.
1. Use concealed clamping devices for field-made joints in plastic-laminate countertops.

Locate clamping devices within 6 inches of front and back edges and at intervals not
exceeding 24 inches. Tighten according to manufacturer's written instructions to exert a
uniform heavy pressure at joints.
C. Fastening:
1. Secure countertops, except for epoxy countertops, to cabinets with Z-type fasteners or
equivalent, using two or more fasteners at each cabinet front, end, and back.
2. Secure epoxy countertops to cabinets with epoxy cement, applied at each corner and
along perimeter edges at not more than 48 inches o.c.
3. Where necessary to penetrate countertops with fasteners, countersink heads
approximately 1/8 inch, and plug hole flush with material equal to countertop in chemical
resistance, hardness, and appearance.
D. Provide required holes and cutouts for service fittings.
E. Seal unfinished edges and cutouts in plastic-laminate countertops with heavy coat of
polyurethane varnish.
F. Provide scribe moldings for closures at junctures of countertop, curb, and splash with walls as
recommended by manufacturer for materials involved. Match materials and finish to adjacent
laboratory casework. Use chemical-resistant, permanently elastic sealing compound where

WSU-160027
G. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF SINKS
A. Comply with installation requirements in SEFA 2.3.
B. Underside Installation of Epoxy Sinks: Use laboratory casework manufacturer's recommended

adjustable support system for table- and cabinet-type installations. Set top edge of sink unit in
sink and countertop manufacturers' recommended chemical-resistant sealing compound or
adhesive, and firmly secure to produce a tight and fully leakproof joint. Adjust sink and
securely support to prevent movement. Remove excess sealant or adhesive while still wet and
finish joint for neat appearance.
1. Flood test sinks for 24 hours, with water filled to top of countertops.
C. Drop-in Installation of Epoxy Sinks: Rout groove in countertop to receive sink rim if not shop
prepared. Set sink in adhesive and fill remainder of groove with sealant or adhesive. Use
procedures and products recommended by sink and countertop manufacturers. Remove excess
adhesive and sealant while still wet and finish joint for neat appearance.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF LABORATORY ACCESSORIES
A. Install accessories according to Shop Drawings, installation requirements in SEFA 2.3, and
B. Securely fasten adjustable shelving supports, stainless-steel shelves, and pegboards to partition
framing, wood blocking, or reinforcements in partitions. Fasten shelving system to support
uniform live load of 100 pounds per linear foot of shelf, with shelves at 12 inches on center full
height of pilasters.
C. Install shelf standards plumb and at heights to align shelf brackets for level shelves. Install
shelving level and straight, closely fitted to other work where indicated. Install standards
(pilasters) as 24 inches, 30 inches or 36 inches on center so modular metal shelves can be added
in the future.
D. Securely fasten pegboards to partition framing, wood blocking, or reinforcements in partitions.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF SERVICE FITTINGS
A. Comply with requirements in other Sections for installing water and laboratory gas service
fittings and electrical devices.
B. Install fittings according to Shop Drawings, installation requirements in SEFA 2.3, and
manufacturer's written instructions. Set bases and flanges of sink- and countertop-mounted
fittings in sealant recommended by manufacturer of sink or countertop material. Securely
anchor fittings to laboratory casework unless otherwise indicated.

WSU-160027
3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Clean finished surfaces, touch up as required, and remove or refinish damaged or soiled areas to
match original factory finish, as approved by Architect.
B. Protect countertop surfaces and concealed space from dust during construction with 6-mil
plastic or other suitable water-resistant covering. Tape to underside of countertop at a minimum
of 48 inches o.c.

SECTION 123661.16 - SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Solid surface material countertops.

2. Solid surface material backsplashes.
3. Solid surface window sills.
A. Product Data: For countertop materials.
B. Shop Drawings: For countertops and window sills. Show materials, finishes, edge and
backsplash profiles, and methods of joining.
1. Show locations and details of joints.

2. Show direction of directional pattern, if any.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of material exposed to view.
D. Samples for Verification: For the following products:
1. Countertop material, 6 inches square.
A. Qualification Data: For fabricator.
A. Maintenance Data: For solid surface material countertops to include in maintenance manuals.
Include Product Data for care products used or recommended by Installer and names, addresses,
and telephone numbers of local sources for products.
Project 16018 SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS 12366116 - 1

A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate countertops
similar to that required for this Project, and whose products have a record of successful in-
service performance.
B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of countertops.
A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements before

countertop fabrication is complete.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or backsplashes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOLID SURFACE MATERIALS
A. Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous-filled plastic resin complying with ICPA SS-1.

following
a. Avonite Surfaces.
b. Formica Corporation.
c. Meganite Inc.
d. Wilsonart Solid Surface
2. Type: Provide Standard type unless Special Purpose type is indicated.

3. Colors and Patterns: Match A/E sample: Wilsonart Solid Surface; Frosty White 1573SL
(1)
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate countertops according to solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions and
to the AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards."
1. Grade: Premium.
B. Countertop Configuration:
1. Front: 1-1/2-inch laminated bullnose.

2. Backsplash: Straight, slightly eased at corner.
3. End Splash: Matching backsplash.

C. Window Sill Configuration:
1. Front: Beveled.
2. Backsplash: None.
D. End Splash: None.
E. Countertops: 3/4-inch-thick, solid surface material with front edge built up with same material.
F. Window Sills: 3/4-inch-thick, solid surface material.
G. Backsplashes: 1/2-inch-thick, solid surface material.
H. Fabricate tops with shop-applied edges and backsplashes unless otherwise indicated. Comply
with solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers,
fabrication, and finishing.
I. Joints: Fabricate countertops without joints.
A. Adhesive: Product recommended by solid surface material manufacturer.
B. Sealant for Countertops: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 079200 "Joint
Sealants."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates to receive solid surface material countertops and conditions under which
countertops will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of countertops.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install solid surface material level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet, 1/4 inch maximum. Do not
exceed 1/64-inch difference between planes of adjacent units.
B. Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of
countertop. Predrill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. Align adjacent surfaces
and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's
written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire
surface.

C. Install backsplashes and end splashes by adhering to wall and countertops with adhesive. Mask
areas of countertops and splashes adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears.
D. Install aprons to backing and countertops with adhesive. Mask areas of countertops and splashes
adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears. Fasten by screwing through backing. Predrill
holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer.
E. Apply sealant to gaps at walls; comply with Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

Project Manual

Building
Lake Campus
Prepared for: Wright State University
Prepared by: SPGB Architects, LLC

Dublin, Ohio
Bassett Associates
Lima, Ohio

Celina, Ohio
GOP Limited
Cincinnati, Ohio
Fanning Howey
Celina, Ohio
Set Number: Bid Set – Volume Two of Two

March 3, 2017
Document 00 01 10 - Table of Contents (General Contracting Project)
Volume Two of Two
SPECIFICATIONS GROUP
FACILITY SERVICES SUBGROUP
Division 20 – Not Used
Division 21 – Fire Suppression

21 05 00 .............. Common Work Results for Fire Suppression
21 10 00 .............. Water-Based Fire Suppression System
Division 22 – Plumbing
22 05 00 .............. Common Work Results for Plumbing
22 05 01 .............. Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods
22 05 13 .............. Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment
22 05 19 .............. Meters and Gauges for Plumbing Piping
22 05 23 .............. General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping
22 05 29 .............. Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment
22 05 53 .............. Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment
22 07 00 .............. Plumbing Insulation
22 11 13 .............. Facility Water Distribution Piping
22 11 16 .............. Domestic Water Piping
22 11 19 .............. Domestic Water Piping Specialties
22 11 23 .............. Domestic Water Pumps
22 11 24 .............. Facility Natural Gas Piping
22 13 16 .............. Sanitary, Waste, and Vent Piping System
22 14 13 .............. Facility Storm Drainage Piping
22 34 00 .............. Fuel-Fired Domestic Water Heaters
22 40 00 .............. Plumbing Fixtures
22 45 00 .............. Emergency Plumbing Fixtures
22 47 00 .............. Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers
22 61 13 .............. Compressed-Air Piping for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities
22 61 19 .............. Compressed-Air Equipment for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities
22 62 13 .............. Vacuum Piping for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities
22 62 19 .............. Vacuum Equipment for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities
22 66 00 .............. Acic Waste and Vent Systems
Division 23 – Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning

23 05 00 .............. Common Work Results for HVAC
23 05 13 .............. Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment
23 05 29 .............. Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment
23 05 48 .............. Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment
23 05 53 .............. Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment
23 05 93 .............. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC
23 07 00 .............. HVAC Insulation
23 09 00 .............. HVAC Direct Digital Controls
23 09 93 .............. HVAC Sequence of Operation
23 09 95 .............. Laboratory Airflow Control Systems

23 23 00 .............. Refrigerant Piping

23 29 23 .............. Variable-Frequency Motor Controllers
23 31 13 .............. Metal Ducts
23 33 00 .............. Air Duct Accessories
23 34 23 .............. HVAC Power Ventilators
23 37 13 .............. Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles
23 38 13 .............. Commercial Kitchen Hoods
23 51 00 .............. Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks
23 74 13 .............. Packaged, Outdoor, Central-Station Air-Handling Units
23 81 26 .............. Split-System Air Conditioners
23 82 25 .............. Variable Refrigerant Volume – VRV
23 82 39 .............. Unit Heaters
Division 25 – Integrated Automation – Not Used
Division 26 – Electrical
26 00 01 .............. Electrical Specification
26 00 50 .............. General Electrical Requirements
26 05 05 .............. Electrical Testing
26 05 19 .............. Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables
26 05 26 .............. Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
26 05 29 .............. Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems
26 05 33 .............. Conduit and Boxes for Electrical Systems
26 05 36 .............. Ladder Type Cable Trays
26 05 43 .............. Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems
26 05 53 .............. Identification for Electrical Systems
26 05 72 .............. Overcurrent Protective Device Short-Circuit Study
26 05 73 .............. Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study
26 05 74 .............. Overcurrent Protective Device Arc-Flash Study
26 08 00 .............. Commissioning of Electrical Systems
26 09 23 .............. Lighting Control Devices
26 22 00 .............. Low-Voltage Transformers
26 24 16 .............. Panelboards
26 27 13 .............. Utility Electric Metering
26 27 26 .............. Wiring Devices
26 32 13 .............. Engine Generators
26 36 00 .............. Transfer Switches
26 43 13 .............. Surge Protective Devices for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits
26 51 00 .............. Interior Lighting
26 56 00 .............. Exterior Lighting
Division 27 – Communications – Not Used
Division 28 – Electronic Safety and Security

28 31 11 .............. Digital, Addressable Fire Alarm System

SITE AND INFRASTRUCTURE SUBGROUP
Division 31 – Earthwork
31 10 00 .............. Site Clearing
31 20 00 .............. Earth Moving
31 25 00 .............. Erosion Control
Division 32 – Exterior Improvements

32 11 00 .............. Concrete Formwork
32 12 00 .............. Flexible Paving
32 13 73 .............. Exterior Joint Sealant
32 14 40 .............. Stone Paving
32 20 00 .............. Concrete Reinforcement
32 30 00 .............. Exterior Cast-in-Place Concrete
32 40 00 .............. Site Improvements
32 90 00 .............. Planting
32 92 00 .............. Turf and Grasses
Division 33 – Utilities
33 05 00 .............. Common Work Results for Utilities
33 05 10 .............. Utilities Services
PROCESS EQUIPMENT SUBGROUP
END OF DOCUMENT

SECTION 210500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:

1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
2. Mechanical sleeve seals.
3. Sleeves.
4. Escutcheons.
5. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
6. Painting and finishing.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces,
pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated
spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient

temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.
E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions
and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures.
Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:

A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural
Welding Code--Steel."
Project 16018 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 210500 - 1

B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes
involved and that certification is current.
C. Electrical Characteristics for Fire-Suppression Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical

characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and
connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If
minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with
requirements.
D. Provide pressure testing per NFPA, state and local codes.
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and
moisture.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of
construction, to allow for fire-suppression installations.
B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place

concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for fire-suppression items requiring access
that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in
Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

manufacturers specified.
2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
A. Refer to individual Division 21 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining
methods.
B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
2.3 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to individual Division 21 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system
contents.
1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless
thickness or specific material is indicated.
a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.
b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face
or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty
brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping,
F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall
thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
2.4 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space
between pipe and sleeve.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
b. Calpico, Inc.
c. Metraflex Co.
d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
2.5 SLEEVES
A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded
longitudinal joint.
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain
ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
2.6 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely
fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers
opening.
B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated

finish.

C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated brass.
D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated brass.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 21 Sections specifying
piping systems.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction
loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless
deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
G. Install piping at indicated slopes.
H. Install piping free of sags and bends.
I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.
K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:
1. New Piping:
a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type.
b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated
finish.
c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips.
d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
e. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
stamped-steel type.

f. Bare piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type

with polished chrome-plated finish.
M. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions,
and concrete floor and roof slabs.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or
other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings
below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.
2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.
3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between
sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:
a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6.
b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum-board
partitions.
c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing.
Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to
extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Refer to Division 07 Section
"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing.
1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.
4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or
pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.
Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.
N. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal
pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular
clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements
required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble
mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten
bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight
seal.
O. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors
at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07
Section "Penetration Firestopping" for materials.
P. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
Q. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in

requirements.
R. Do not support components of the fire-suppression system from steel roof decks. In locations
where structural framing members are not available, provide intermediate structural supports
spanning between closest structural framing members.
3.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 21 Sections
specifying piping systems.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube
end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using
lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"
Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
threading is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and
welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
3.3 PAINTING
A. Painting of fire-suppression systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09

Sections "Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting."
B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and
procedures to match original factory finish.

SECTION 211000 - WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
B. The fire protection contract shall include all labor and materials as required for the complete
installation of this classification of the Work as hereinafter specified and as shown by all of the
accompanying Drawings. The Contractor shall examine all Drawings, including Equipment
Drawings and those which are intended primarily for other classifications as such items will be
considered a part of the Contract.
C. The materials and workmanship throughout shall be first class in every detail, to the best
modern practice. All fixtures shall be first quality of their respective kinds and grades, free
from defects, furnished and set up complete in every detail and in accordance with all codes and
regulations governing the Work. All piping shall be concealed, unless otherwise distinctly
specified or shown on the Drawings.
D. The sprinkler systems shall be zoned on a square foot basis with no zones exceeding 52,000 SF.
Each zone shall be provided with all necessary valves, valve tamper switches, water flow
alarms, and drains as required by NFPA 13.
E. Provide Knox boxes at the main entrances to the building as indicated on the Drawings.
F. Refer to Section 01230 for Alternates that may affect the Work of this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following fire-suppression piping inside the building:
1. Wet-pipe sprinkler systems.
B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 28 Section "Fire Detection and Alarm" for alarm devices not specified in this
Section.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
A. The fire protection system is a standard installation of automatic sprinklers arranged as a wet
pipe system employing automatic sprinklers attached to a piping system containing water and
connected to a water supply main in the street so that water discharges immediately from
sprinklers opened by fire, which is required throughout the new building. The Contractor shall
provide a hydraulically calculated wet-pipe automatic fire sprinkler system designed and
installed to produce densities of not less than 0.10 gpm/sq.ft. over the hydraulically most remote
1,500 sq. ft. area based on the use of 165 degrees F. temperature rated heads spaced at a
maximum of 225 sq.ft. per head for all light hazard occupancy areas. Automatic sprinkler
protection throughout all ordinary hazard group 1 occupancies, including but not necessarily
limited to, the mechanical and electrical equipment rooms and storage rooms shall be designed
Project 16018 WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 211000 - 1

and installed to produce densities of not less than 0.16 gpm/sq.ft. over the hydraulically most
remote 1,500 sq. ft. area based on 165 degrees F. temperature rated heads spaced at a maximum
of 130 sq.ft. per head. Automatic sprinkler protection throughout all ordinary hazard group
occupancies shall be designed and installed to produce densities of not less than 0.19 gpm/sq.ft.
over the hydraulically most remote 1,500 sq. ft. area based on 165 degrees F. degrees F.
temperature rated heads spaced at a maximum of 130 sq. ft. per head.
B. Electrical Contractor shall provide, install, and wire alarm bell on exterior of building that will
sound upon flow in the fire protection system.
1.4 AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION
A. Public Safety
1. Fire Prevention and Building Safety Commission Compliance: Install fire protection
systems in accordance with local regulations of Fire Marshal.
2. Screw Thread Connections: Comply with local Fire Department/Marshal regulations for
sizes, threading and arrangement of connections for Fire Department equipment to
standpipe systems
a. Ohio Building Code currently enforced edition.
b. Ohio Mechanical Code currently enforced edition.
c. Ohio Fire Protection Code currently enforced edition.
d. Ohio Plumbing Code currently enforced edition.
3. Insurance Purposes
a. Factory Mutual (FM): Comply with Factory Mutual’s regulations pertaining to
fire protection systems.
A. Standard Piping System Component Working Pressure: Listed for at least 175 psig.
1.6 SUBMITTALS

1. Piping materials, including sprinkler specialty fittings.
2. Pipe hangers and supports, including seismic restraints.
3. Valves, including listed fire-protection valves, unlisted general-duty valves, and specialty
valves and trim.
4. Sprinklers, escutcheons, and guards. Include sprinkler flow characteristics, mounting,
finish, and other pertinent data.
5. Fire department connections, including type; number, size, and arrangement of inlets;
caps and chains; size and direction of outlet; escutcheon and marking; and finish.
6. Alarm devices, including electrical data.
B. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that
have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations, if
applicable.
C. Welding certificates.
D. Field quality-control test reports.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sprinkler specialties to include in emergency, operation,
F. Test Reports and Certificate: Submit test reports and certificates including “Contractor’s
Material & Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping” and “Contractor’s Material & Test
Certificate for Underground Piping” as described in NFPA 13.
1. Installer's responsibilities include hydraulic calculations, fabricating, and installing fire-
suppression systems. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test.
B. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX.
C. NFPA Standards: Fire-suppression-system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and

testing shall comply with the following:
1. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems."
2. NFPA 24, "Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances."
D. The sprinkler designer shall be state certified and meet all NFPA state and local requirements.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates ceilings,
including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounting, steel cabinet with hinged cover, with space
for minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench. Include number of sprinklers
required by NFPA 13 and sprinkler wrench. Include separate cabinet with sprinklers and
wrench for each type of sprinkler on Project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:

2.2 INTERIOR FIRE MAIN PIPING
A. General: Provide, at the Contractor’s option, pipe and pipe fittings complying with NFPA 13,
in accordance with one or a combination of the following listings and as a minimum meet
specifications ASTM A53 GR.B, A106 GR.B, A135 GR.B, A795, type E, GR.A.
B. Black Steel Pipe: Threaded Ends; Schedule 40 for all sizes; conforming to ANSI B1.20.1.
C. Black Steel Pipe: Cut Groove Ends; Schedule 40 for 2 inches through 6 inches.
D. Galvanized Steel Pipe: Threaded Ends; Schedule 40 for all; conforming to ANSI B1.20.1. (For
aboveground fire protection service piping upstream of double check valve assembly and fire
department connection supply piping only).
E. Sprinkler Head Pipe Drops: Schedule 40, black steel threaded both ends.
F. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pipe and fittings of the
following:
1. Allied Tube and Conduit, Division of Grinnell Co.
2. American Tube and Pipe Co.
3. Bullmoose Tube Co.
4. Grinnell Co.
5. Tyler Gustin-Bacon
6. Vitaulic
7. Wheatland Tube Co.
2.3 FITTINGS
A. Cast-Iron Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.4, Class 125, Class 250, standard pattern, for
threaded joints. Threads shall conform to ANSI B1.20.1.
B. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.3, Class 150, Class 300, standard pattern, for
C. Ductile – Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.3, Class 150, Class 300, Standard pattern, for
D. Steel Fittings: UL listed/FM approved ASTM A106 GR B, ANSI 16.9 or ASTM A234,
seamless or welded for welded joints.
E. Grooved Mechanical Fittings: ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron; ASTM A47
Grade 32510 malleable iron; or ASTM A53, Type F or Types E or S, Grade B fabricated steel
fittings with grooves or shoulders designed to accept grooved end couplings.
F. Grooved Mechanical Couplings: Consist of UL listed/FM approved ductile or malleable iron

housing, a synthetic rubber gasket of a central cavity pressure-responsive design; with nuts,
bolts, locking pin locking toggle, or lugs to secure roll-grooved pipe and fittings.
G. Housing: Ductile iron castings (ASTM A636 Grade 65-45-12).

H. Housing: Malleable iron casting (ASTM A47 Grade 32510).
I. Rubber Gasket: Ethylene Propylene Rubber (EPDM) as standard, to ASTM D2000.
J. Bolts – carbon steel track bolt (ASTM A183 Grade 2).
K. Nuts – carbon steel bars (ASTM A283 Grade D).
L. Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ANSI B16.1, Class 250; raised ground face, bolt holes spot faced.
M. Cast Bronze Flanges: ANSI B16.24, Class 300; raised ground face, bolt holes spot faced.
2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Assembly shall be copper alloy, ferrous, and insulating materials with ends matching piping
system.
B. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining, with
combination of plain, threaded, or grooved ends and 300-psig working-pressure rating at
225 deg F.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Perfection Corporation.
b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
c. Victaulic Co. of America.
2.5 LISTED FIRE-PROTECTION VALVES
A. Valves shall be UL listed or FMG approved, with 175-psig minimum pressure rating. Valves
shall have 300-psig pressure rating if valves are components of high-pressure piping system.
B. Ball Valves: Comply with UL 1091, except with ball instead of disc.
1. NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.
2. NPS 2 and NPS 2-1/2: Bronze body with threaded ends or ductile-iron body with
grooved ends.
3. NPS 3: Ductile-iron body with grooved ends.
a. NIBCO.
b. Victaulic Co. of America.
C. Butterfly Valves: UL 1091.

1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.
a. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Global Safety Products, Inc.
2) Milwaukee Valve Company.
2. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Bronze, cast-iron, or ductile-iron body; wafer type or with
flanged or grooved ends.
1) Central Sprinkler Corp.
2) Global Safety Products, Inc.
3) McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div.

4) Mueller Company.
5) NIBCO.
6) Pratt, Henry Company.
7) Victaulic Co. of America.
D. Check Valves NPS 2 and Larger: UL 312, swing type, cast-iron body with flanged or grooved
ends.
a. Central Sprinkler Corp.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
c. Grinnell Fire Protection.
d. Hammond Valve.
e. Mueller Company.
f. NIBCO.
g. Potter-Roemer; Fire Protection Div.
h. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
i. Star Sprinkler Inc.
j. Stockham.
k. Victaulic Co. of America.
l. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
E. Gate Valves: UL 262, OS&Y type.

1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.
1) Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
2) Hammond Valve.
3) NIBCO.
2. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Cast-iron body with flanged ends.
1) Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
2) Hammond Valve.
4) Mueller Company.
5) NIBCO.
6) Red-White Valve Corp.
F. Indicating Valves: UL 1091, with integral indicating device and ends matching connecting
piping.
1. Indicator: Electrical, 115-V ac, prewired, single-circuit, supervisory switch.
2. NPS 2 and Smaller: Ball or butterfly valve with bronze body and threaded ends.
2) NIBCO.
3. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Butterfly valve with cast- or ductile-iron body; wafer type or with
flanged or grooved ends.
1) Central Sprinkler Corp.
2) Grinnell Fire Protection.
3) McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div.


5) NIBCO.
2.6 SPRINKLERS
A. Sprinklers shall be UL listed or FMG approved, with 175-psig minimum pressure rating.
Sprinklers shall have 300-psig pressure rating if sprinklers are components of high-pressure
piping system.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Central Sprinkler Corp.
2. Firematic Sprinkler Devices, Inc.
3. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.
4. Grinnell Fire Protection.
5. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
6. Star Sprinkler Inc.
7. Victaulic Co. of America.
8. Viking Corp.
C. Automatic Sprinklers: With heat-responsive element complying with the following:

1. UL 199, for nonresidential applications.
2. UL 1767, for early-suppression, fast-response applications.
D. Sprinkler Types and Categories: Nominal 1/2-inch orifice for "Ordinary" temperature
classification rating, unless otherwise indicated or required by application.
a. Orifice: 1/2 inch, with discharge coefficient K between 5.3 and 5.8.
b. Orifice: 17/32 inch, with discharge coefficient K between 7.4 and 8.2.
E. Sprinkler types, features, and options as follows:

1. Concealed ceiling sprinklers, including cover plate.
2. Extended-coverage sprinklers.
3. Flush ceiling sprinklers, including escutcheon.
4. Pendent sprinklers.
5. Quick-response sprinklers.
6. Recessed sprinklers, including escutcheon.
7. Sidewall sprinklers.
8. Upright sprinklers.
F. Sprinkler Finishes: Bronze and painted.
G. Special Coatings: Wax, lead, and corrosion-resistant paint.
H. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting
applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers are specified with
sprinklers.
I. Automatic Sprinklers Types and Locations: Provide automatic sprinkler as listed by UL and
F.M.

1. Provide brass upright pendant and side wall sprinklers as required on exposed piping in
unfinished spaces.
2. Provide brass exposed pendant sprinkler heads in finished areas such as storage rooms
and janitor closets.
3. Provide concealed ceiling sprinklers with white cover plate in all finished spaces, unless
noted otherwise.
4. Sprinkler heads shall be centered in square ceiling tiles or centered or at quarter points in
rectangular ceiling tiles.
5. Sidewall sprinkler heads shall be utilized in Communications/Data Rooms. No sprinkler
piping shall be routed through Communications/Data Rooms.
6. Sidewall sprinkler heads shall be utilized in Vestibules. No sprinkler piping shall be
routed through Vestibules.
2.7 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Central Sprinkler Corp.
2. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc.
3. Guardian Fire Equipment Incorporated.
4. Potter-Roemer; Fire-Protection Div.
5. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
B. Five inch Storz fire department connection. Size and style as required by the local fire chief.
Refer to Plumbing Site Utility Drawings for further information.
2.8 ALARM DEVICES
A. Alarm-device types shall match piping and equipment connections.
B. Water-Flow Indicator: UL 346, electrical-supervision, paddle-operated-type, water-flow

detector with 250-psig pressure rating and designed for horizontal or vertical installation.
Include two single-pole, double-throw circuit switches for isolated alarm and auxiliary contacts,
7 A, 125-V ac and 0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete with factory-set, field-adjustable retard element to
prevent false signals and tamperproof cover that sends signal if removed.
a. ADT Security Services, Inc.
b. Grinnell Fire Protection.
c. Potter Electric Signal Company.
d. Viking Corp.
e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
C. Pressure Switch: UL 753, electrical-supervision-type, water-flow switch with retard feature.

Include single-pole, double-throw, normally closed contacts and design that operates on rising
pressure and signals water flow.
a. Grinnell Fire Protection.
b. Potter Electric Signal Company.
c. System Sensor.
d. Viking Corp.

D. Valve Supervisory Switch: UL 753, electrical, single-pole, double-throw switch with normally
closed contacts. Include design that signals controlled valve is in other than fully open position.
a. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div.
b. Potter Electric Signal Company.
E. Indicator-Post Supervisory Switch: UL 753, electrical, single-pole, double-throw switch with

normally closed contacts. Include design that signals controlled indicator-post valve is in other
than fully open position.
a. Potter Electric Signal Company.
b. System Sensor.
2.9 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. AGF Manufacturing Co.
2. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge.
3. Brecco Corporation.
4. Dresser Equipment Group; Instrument Div.
5. Marsh Bellofram.
6. WIKA Instrument Corporation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291. Use results for system
design calculations required in Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
B. Report test results promptly and in writing.
3.2 EARTHWORK
A. Refer to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.
3.3 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for hose connections and stations to verify actual locations of piping
connections before installation.
B. Examine walls and partitions for suitable thicknesses, fire- and smoke-rated construction,
framing for hose-station cabinets, and other conditions where hose connections and stations are
to be installed.
3.4 PIPING APPLICATIONS, GENERAL
A. Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated.

B. Do not use welded joints for galvanized-steel pipe.
C. Flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings with finish and
pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating may be used in aboveground
applications, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Piping between Fire Department Connections and Check Valves: Galvanized, standard-weight
steel pipe with cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings joints.
E. Underground Service-Entrance Piping: Ductile-iron, mechanical-joint pipe and fittings and

restrained joints.
3.5 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the
following requirements apply:
1. Listed Fire-Protection Valves: UL listed and FMG approved for applications where
required by NFPA 13.
a. Shutoff Duty: Use ball, butterfly, or gate valves.
3.6 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Refer to Division 21 Section "Common Work Results for Fire Suppression" for basic piping
joint construction.
B. Threaded Joints: Comply with NFPA 13 for pipe thickness and threads. Do not thread pipe
smaller than NPS 8 (DN 200) with wall thickness less than Schedule 40 unless approved by
authorities having jurisdiction and threads are checked by a ring gauge and comply with
ASME B1.20.1.
C. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with listed coupling and gasket, lubricant, and bolts.
1. Ductile-Iron Pipe: Radius-cut-groove ends of piping. Use grooved-end fittings and
grooved-end-pipe couplings.
2. Steel Pipe: Square-cut or roll-groove piping as indicated. Use grooved-end fittings and
rigid, grooved-end-pipe couplings, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Test each groove for proper depth and width with manufacturers approved tape measure.
If groove does not meet the manufacturers requirement, regroove pipe as required.
D. Dissimilar-Metal Piping Joints: Construct joints using dielectric fittings compatible with both
piping materials.
3.7 SERVICE-ENTRANCE PIPING
A. Connect fire-suppression piping to water-service piping of size and in location indicated for
service entrance to building. Refer to Division 22 Section "Facility Water Distribution Piping"
for exterior piping.
B. Install double check valve assembly pressure gauge and other accessories indicated at
connection to water-service piping. Refer to Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping
Specialties" for backflow preventers.

3.8 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 21 Section "Common Work Results for Fire Suppression" for basic piping
installation.
B. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general
location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.
1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from
authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating
from approved working plans.
C. Install underground ductile-iron service-entrance piping according to NFPA 24 and with

restrained joints.
D. Use approved fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions
in pipe sizes.
E. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller. Unions are not required on
flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved joints.
F. Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and
larger connections.
G. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with shutoff valve,
sized and located according to NFPA 13.
H. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.
I. Install sprinkler zone control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to standpipes
when sprinkler piping is connected to standpipes.
J. Install drain valves on standpipes.
K. Install ball drip valves to drain piping between fire department connections and check valves.
Drain to floor drain or outside building.
L. Install alarm devices in piping systems.
M. Hangers and Supports: Comply with NFPA 13 for hanger materials.

1. Install sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13.
2. Provide swivel clamp connections at steel supports as required.
3. Do not support components of the fire-suppression system from steel roof decks. In
locations where structural framing members are not available, provide intermediate
structural supports spanning between closest structural framing members.
N. Earthquake Protection: Install piping according to NFPA 13 to protect from earthquake

damage.

O. Install pressure gauges on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection, and at top of
each standpipe. Include pressure gauges with connection not less than NPS 1/4 and with soft
metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gauge and valve. Install gauges to
permit removal, and install where they will not be subject to freezing.
P. Fill wet-pipe sprinkler system piping with water.
3.9 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install listed fire-protection valves, unlisted general-duty valves, specialty valves and trim,
controls, and specialties according to NFPA 13 and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised-open, located to control sources of water
supply except from fire department connections. Install permanent identification signs
indicating portion of system controlled by each valve.
C. Specialty Valves:
1. Alarm Check Valves: Install in vertical position for proper direction of flow, including
bypass check valve and retarding chamber drain-line connection.
2. Dry-Pipe Valves: Install trim sets for air supply, drain, priming level, alarm connections,
ball drip valves, pressure gauges, priming chamber attachment, and fill-line attachment.
a. Air-Pressure Maintenance Devices for Dry-Pipe Systems: Install shutoff valves to
permit servicing without shutting down sprinkler system; bypass valve for quick
system filling; pressure regulator or switch to maintain system pressure; strainer;
pressure ratings with [14- to 60-psig] adjustable range; and [175-psig] maximum
inlet pressure.
b. Install air compressor and compressed-air supply piping.
3.10 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION
A. Install Schedule 40 steel pipe with threaded joints and fittings for 2 inch and smaller.
B. Install Schedule 40 steel pipe with roll-grooved ends and grooved mechanical couplings for
2-1/2 inches to 6 inches.
C. Comply with requirements of ANSI/NFPA #13 for installation of fire sprinkler piping materials.
Install fire sprinkler piping products where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer’s written
instructions, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that fire sprinkler
piping complies with requirements and serves intended purposes.
D. Coordinate with other work including but not limited to plumbing piping, ductwork, equipment,
as necessary to interface components of fire sprinkler piping properly with other work.
E. Install supports, anchors, seals, valves, meters, and gauges per NFPA #13.
F. Prior to connecting sprinkler risers for flushing, flush water feed mains, lead-in connections,
and control portions of sprinkler piping. After sprinkler piping installation has been completed
and before piping is placed in service, flush entire sprinkler system, as required to remove
foreign substances, under pressure as specified in ANSI/NFPA #13. Continue flushing until
water is clean and check to ensure that debris has not clogged sprinklers.

G. After flushing system, test fire sprinkler piping hydrostatically, for a period of 2 hours, at not
less than 200 psi or at 50 psi in excess of maximum static pressure when maximum static
pressure is in excess of 150 psi. Check system for leakage of joints. Measure hydrostatic
pressure at low point of system.
H. Repair or replace piping system as required to eliminate leakage in accordance with

ANSI/NFPA standards. Retest as specified to demonstrate compliance.
I. Sprinkler Head Cabinet and Wrench: Finished steel baked red enamel cabinet, suitable for wall
mounting, with hinged cover and space for 12 spare sprinkler heads plus sprinkler head wrench.
Provide a separate cabinet for each style sprinkler head on the Project.
J. Piping which passes through a non-sprinklered area shall be adequately protected by fire
resistive construction as specified by the Owner and/or code.
K. Cross mains or feed mains which pass through electrical switchgear room(s) shall be double
piped (sleeve) unless the pipe is a branch line serving heads in said rooms. Sleeve shall be set
in such a manner as to avoid joints in the room. If a joint is required in the room, it shall be a
welded joint. Pipe shall be of Schedule 40, black steel. Avoid installing any fire protection
piping in electrical rooms, elevator equipment rooms, switch gear rooms unless absolutely
necessary. Contact Engineer prior to any of these installations.
L. Drains shall terminate at an open-site drain, or outside of the building. Location of drains to
building exterior shall be approved by the Owner/Architect.
M. System main drain shall be piped to the exterior of the building unless noted otherwise.
N. Piping shall not pass through electrical transformer room.
O. In general, sprinkler riser pipe routing has been shown on plans. Integrate spinkler piping with
ducts, lights, diffusers and other mechanical work. All sprinkler head locations shall be
integrated with reflected ceiling plans.
P. Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate the general
location and arrangement of piping systems. So far as practical, install piping as indicated.
1. Deviations from approved “Working Plans” for sprinkler piping, require written approval
of the authority having jurisdiction. Written approval shall be on file with the Architect
prior to deviating for the approved “Working Plans”.
Q. Install sprinkler piping to provide for system drainage in accordance with NFPA 13.
R. Use approved fittings to make all changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and
reductions in pipe sizes.
S. There shall be no sprinkler piping or equipment installed within a minimum of 12’-0” of any
building wall opening which communicates with the outdoors
3.11 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION INSTALLATION
A. Install freestanding-type, fire department connections in level surface.

1. Install protective pipe bollards on three sides of each fire department connection. Refer
to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for pipe bollards.
B. Install ball drip valve at each check valve for fire department connection.
C. Pitch fire department connection piping from buildings to FDC. Provide means for drawings of
this piping in accordance with NFPA 13.
3.12 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect water-supply piping to fire-suppression piping. Include backflow preventer between

potable-water piping and fire-suppression piping. Refer to Division 22 Section "Domestic
Water Piping Specialties" for backflow preventers.
D. Install ball drip valves at each check valve for fire department connection. Drain to floor drain
or outside building.
E. Connect piping to specialty valves, hose valves, specialties, fire department connections, and
accessories.
F. Electrical Connections: Power wiring is specified in Division 26.
G. Connect alarm devices to fire alarm.
3.13 LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION
A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in
NFPA 13
B. This Contractor shall identify all piping installed by him, exposed or concealed, with a marker
consisting of an arrow indicating direction of flow and an abbreviation of the service. Piping
shall be labeled close to valves, at changes in direction, at branches, at access panels, where
pipes pass through the floor before going through the floor), and at entry point into rooms,
however, spacing of markers shall not exceed twenty feet. Markers shall be in contrasting color,
such as black or white placed conspicuous location subject to approval by the Engineer. The
marker shall consist of an arrow, approximately six inches in length with the width to be
determined by letter height, and an abbreviation of the service (FL) for Fireline).
The following table of letter sizes shall apply.
Pipe and Covering O.D. Letter Size

Under 1 inch diameter 1/2 inch
1 inch to 3 inch diameter 1 inch
Over 3 inch diameter 2 inches

A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
3. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.
4. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance"
Chapter.
5. Coordinate with fire alarm tests. Operate as required.
6. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire department equipment.
B. Report test results promptly and in writing to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction.
A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.
B. Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish.
C. Protect sprinklers from damage until Substantial Completion.
3.16 DEMONSTRATION

adjust, operate, and maintain specialty valves. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration
and Training."

SECTION 220500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY

1. Transition fittings.
2. Dielectric fittings.
4. Sleeves.
5. Escutcheons.
7. Concrete housekeeping pads.
8. Supports and anchorages.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated
spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

4. Escutcheons.
6. Mechanical sleeve seals
Project 16018 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 1

Welding Code – Steel.”
C. Electrical Characteristics for Plumbing Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical

characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and
connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If
minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with
requirements.
moisture.
B. Store PVC plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and
bending.
1.7 COORDINATION
construction, to allow for plumbing installations.

C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for plumbing items requiring access that
are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08
Section "Access Doors and Frames."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the


methods.
contents.
D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty
F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall
G. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:

1. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.
2.4 TRANSITION FITTINGS
A. AWWA Transition Couplings: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with
ends compatible with, piping to be joined.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Fernco
b. Mission
2. Underground Piping NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Manufactured fitting or coupling.
3. Underground Piping NPS 2 and Larger: AWWA C219, metal sleeve-type coupling.
4. Aboveground Pressure Piping: Pipe fitting.
B. Plastic-to-Metal Transition and Adaptor Fittings: PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's
Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-
cement-joint end.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Fernco
b. Mission
A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-
joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.
B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Gruvlok
b. Perfection Corp.
c. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
d. Victaulic Co. of America.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Calpico, Inc.
b. Link Seal
c. Metraflex Co.
2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type
and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to
sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.
2.7 SLEEVES
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
2.8 ESCUTCHEONS
opening.
B. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.

1. In Finished Spaces: Polished chrome-plated.
C. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
D. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With spring clips and chrome-plated finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
piping systems.
systems. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination
Drawings.
C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
otherwise.
F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
G. Install piping at indicated slopes.
H. Install piping free of sags and bends.
I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.
K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:
1. New Piping:
finish.
d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-
brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
stamped-steel type.
f. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece or split-casting,
cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
g. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring
clips.
h. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate
type.

M. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, foundation walls, and
concrete floor and roof slabs.
seal.
N. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors
O. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
P. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in

requirements.
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
assembly.
D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube
end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using
lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and
welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings
according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements.
2. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket
fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and
socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.
3. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
J. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.
K. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.
3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping 2 inches and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final
connection to each piece of equipment.
2. Install flanges, in piping 2-1/2 inches and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final
3. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals.
3.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom per manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install plumbing equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of

components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other
installations.
D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
E. If equipment selected is other than the basis of design, and is chosen from the list of acceptable
manufactures, the contractor shall be responsible for providing all necessary connections,
materials, and serviceability clearance shop drawings for engineers review prior to start of
work.
3.5 CONCRETE HOUSEKEEPING PADS
A. Concrete Housekeeping Pads: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment

manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.
1. Construct concrete housekeeping pads of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches
larger in both directions than supported unit.
install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base.
3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete
base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.

4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting
drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be
embedded.
5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
7. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in
Division 03 Section.
8. All concrete pads shall be 6” thick.

SECTION 220501 - BASIC PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 GENERAL
B. The Drawings prepared for this Project are an outline to show where pipes, ducts, and
apparatus must go in order to harmonize with the building and installations of the various
trades. Work must be installed in accordance with the Drawings insofar as possible.
Drawings shall be carefully checked during the course of bidding and construction. If
discrepancies, errors, or omissions are discovered prior to or during the construction phase,
notify the Engineer immediately for interpretation or correction. Take necessary
measurements and be responsible for same, including clearances for equipment that is to be
furnished. The A/E shall reserve the right to make minor location changes of piping and
equipment where such adjustments are deemed desirable from an appearance or operational
standpoint. Such changes will be anticipated sufficiently in advance to avoid extra work or
unduly delay progress on the Project.
C. The general building drawings shall be used to obtain dimensions and exact locations and as a
check with other Contractors to avoid interferences with their Work. Refer to applicable
Drawings on branches of the Work where other trades are involved on the Project so that
added field work and job delays resulting from conflicts between crafts can be avoided.
Piping or ductwork that is prefabricated before coordinating with the other trades may have to
be redone at no additional cost if conflicts are encountered.
1.2 SUMMARY

1. Piping specialties
2. Lubrication and packing
3. Installation requirements common to piping systems and equipment specification
sections
4. Disinfecting water lines
5. Testing and repair
6. Emergency repairs or operation
7. Provisions for later installations
B. The Contractor(s) shall provide the labor, materials, equipment, appliances, services and
transportation, and perform the operations in connection with the construction and installation
of the Work. Work shall be as herein specified and as denoted on the accompanying
Drawings.
Project 16018 BASIC PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS 220501 - 1

C. The Contractor(s) shall arrange and pay for permits and inspections required in connection
with the Work. The Contractor shall apply for and pay for meters, regulators, recorders, and
gauges required. The Contractor must present to the Owner through the A/E, properly signed
certificates of final inspection by the governing authorities when they become due and shall
not cover up Work until approved by those authorities.
D. The Contractor(s) shall make arrangements for connection of the permanent utilities; include
connection costs as part of the Work under his Contract. Verify exact requirements of the
utility with regard to such service; and include in the Work costs related to same.
E. Materials or labor obviously required to fully complete the Work shall be included, even
though each item necessarily involved is not specifically mentioned or shown. Such Work
and materials shall be furnished and shall be of the same grade or quality as the parts actually
specified and shown. Should there be a conflict between the plans and Specifications, the
greater quantity and better quality shall be furnished.
F. Should an overlap of Work between the various trades become evident, the Engineer shall be
notified. Such an event shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for the Work
called for under his branch of the Specifications until a written clarification or directive is
issued concerning the matter.
G. Related Work Specified Elsewhere

1. Firestopping is Work of this Section though fire barrier sealants (firestopping) for
walls and floors are specified in Division 07 Section “Penetration Firestopping”.
Contractors are responsible for proper sizing of their sleeves and core-drilled holes so
that they are at least 1-1/2 inches larger in diameter than the penetrating items.
Schedule 40 steel sleeves and core-drilled holes made excessively large or made and
not used, will be firestopped and charged to the Contractor who was responsible.
2. Refer to Division 26, Electrical Specifications, and to the requirements stated therein
applicable to the Mechanical Work, where coordination of trades is covered.
H. Related Work by Others

1. Motors which are shipped loose from the mechanical equipment shall be installed as
Work under Division 26, Electrical, or other trades as may be required, at the
expense of the Contractor furnishing the loose motor(s).
2. Unless otherwise stipulated under a specific Section of this Division, motor
disconnects and starters shall be provided as Work under Division 26, Electrical.
3. Electric power wiring shall be included as Work under the electrical wiring section of
Division 26, Electrical, except as follows:
a. Control wiring regardless of voltage shall be included as Work under
specific Sections of Division 23.
b. Internal package type wiring as specified under specific Sections of Division
23.
I. Cutting of water lines, electric conduit, or similar service lines in the course of Work
performed under this Section shall be immediately repaired as part of the Work of this
Section.

1.3 REFERENCE
A. Standards are described by reference to various associations. These are in addition, but not
limited to, to those listed in:
AGA American Gas Association
ANSI American National Standards Institute
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
AWS American Welding Society
AWWA American Water Works Association
CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association
UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
B. Work shall be in complete accordance with codes, rules, and ordinances, regulations of
authorities, bodies, associations, and governments, having proper or legal jurisdiction.
Specifically, the following requirements shall be met in their entirety.
1. State and Local Rules, Regulations, Codes, Statutes, and Ordinances
2. National Fire Protection Association - applicable requirements
3. National Board of Fire Underwriters
4. National Electric Code - applicable requirements
5. Other Codes and Standards as specifically noted in each Section of the
Specifications.
6. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
C. References made to codes and standards, in these Specifications or on the Drawings, shall be
taken to mean the latest edition, amendment, or revision of such reference in effect as of the
date indicated on the Bid Documents unless otherwise noted.
A. Instruments used by the Contractor shall be accurately calibrated and maintained in good
working condition.
B. Products and test instruments used shall be subject to approval of A/E.
C. Products and test instruments used shall be provided by each respective Contractor.
D. Note that systems involved under this Contract heading shall be in accordance with applicable
requirements listed in NFPA Standard 90A.
E. Materials used in this Contract shall be those specified herein unless proposals for the use of
alternate materials have been submitted and accepted in writing, as provided hereinbefore.
Materials shall be strictly first grade of their kind and shall be new and in first-class condition
when installed. Damaged materials will be rejected and must be replaced by proper and
acceptable materials. Materials shall be similar and in accordance with the provisions of this
Specification.

F. No materials or equipment may be installed under this contract heading which do not meet the
approval of the authorities having jurisdiction. Specific materials may have certain
restrictions or exclusions as to their usage, including where they may not be located. Such
regulations shall be adhered to where applicable. The requirements and regulations of the
local and state building codes and regulations currently adopted shall be adhered to.
G. Piping systems shall be installed by workmen having skills acquired by working at the trade
which is recognized as necessary for competency.
H. Pressure piping systems installed shall conform to the requirements of the State piping and
welding codes where applicable.
A. Unless otherwise stipulated under a particular heading, the following rules relative to
responsibilities of the several Contractors and subcontractors will apply.
1. Each Contractor shall install roughing-in work pertaining to his trade for connection
of Work performed under other Sections of these Specifications.
B. Certain areas will be designated for the storage of materials and equipment and cooperation
with the Owner in minimizing interference with existing operations will be mandatory.
1. Where possible, store materials inside and protected from weather. Where necessary
to store outside, elevate above grade and enclose with durable, waterproof wrapping.
2. Follow manufacturer's instructions for receiving, inspecting, handling, storage, and
protection of products prior to final installation
C. Equipment Clearances and Requirements

1. For many items of equipment described in these Specifications, several
manufacturers are listed. The first named in each instance is the make on which the
layout was based and on which clearances, service required electrical, and plumbing
characteristics, etc., have been checked. Additional manufacturers listed are
considered acceptable.
2. Due to the possibility of restrictions imposed by space limitations, the responsibility
for resolving conflicts resulting from the use of equipment other than first named
shall rest with the equipment supplier and the Contractor. Submittals for this
equipment will be considered as a statement that clearances for access, service,
maintenance, etc., have been checked and found adequate.
3. Alternate equipment or the equipment of additional manufacturers named in these
documents shall meet Base Bid Specifications. In the event such equipment or any
equipment which the bidder proposes to furnish, deviates from the requirements of
equipment first named regarding electric service, power wiring, control wiring,
plumbing or piping, sound attenuation, or vibration damping, it shall be the
responsibility of the bidder to include in his price a sufficient sum to cover additional
costs or charges resulting therefrom.

D. In general, the piping and ductwork shown on the Drawings shall be considered as
diagrammatic for clearness in indicating the general run and connections required, and may
not be shown in its true position. The piping and ductwork and equipment may have to be
offset, lowered or raised, as required, or as directed at the site in order to accommodate field
conditions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Lubrication and Packing

1. Rotating and reciprocating equipment requiring lubrication shall be lubricated with
the correct grade, type, and quantity of lubricant before being placed in service.
2. Each shaft containing a packing gland shall be checked for condition by backing the
packing gland off and examining for proper grade, amount, and type of packing as
recommended by the manufacturer. Upgrade to proper standards as required.
3. Maintain lubrication gaskets and packing during construction and assure that at the
time of acceptance by the Owner are in first-class operating conditions.
B. Motors, Starters, Controls, and Wiring

1. Alignment of motors, that are factory coupled or mounted and field coupled and
mounted, shall be performed by the equipment manufacturer and shall be rechecked
after connections have been made and after 48 hours of operation in designed service.
2. Starter/fused disconnects, controls, and wiring shall be coordinated with the
appropriate Contractors and completed as required by these Documents.
C. Cutting and Patching

1. Cutting and drilling of walls, slabs, and structural members, required in conjunction
with Work under this Section, shall be done under the supervision of the A/E. Work
shall be neatly done, removing no unnecessary material. Holes, openings, etc., shall
be located where they will not weaken the structure. No beams, joists, etc., shall be
cut without the written consent of the A/E.
2. Cutting of holes in masonry and concrete shall be performed with a core drill to
minimize spalling, and limit damage to wall. Locations shall be accurately
determined and checked, and the appropriate drill bit shall be used to minimize hole
size.
3. Sleeves or thimbles for holes as well as escutcheons and trim plates shall be
provided. Installation shall permit free movement of pipe.
4. Patching of work, where necessary, is to be done by a mechanic of the appropriate
trade. Unless otherwise noted, patching for Work performed under this Section shall
be immediately repaired as part of the Work of this Section.
D. Pipe Sleeves: Install pipe sleeves where piping passes through walls, floors, ceilings, and
roofs.
1. Do not install sleeves through structural members of work, except as detailed on
Drawings, or as reviewed and approved by A/E.
2. Install sleeves accurately centered on pipe runs.

3. Size sleeves so that piping and insulation (if any) will have free movement in sleeve,
including allowance for thermal expansion; but not less than 2 pipe sizes larger than
piping run.
4. Where insulation includes vapor barrier jacket, provide sleeve with sufficient
clearance for installation.
5. Install length of sleeve equal to thickness of construction penetrated, and finish flush
to surface; except floor sleeves.
6. Extend floor sleeves 1/4 inch above level floor finish, and 3/4 inch above floor finish
sloped to drain unless otherwise noted.
7. Provide temporary support of sleeves during placement of concrete and other work
around sleeves, and provide temporary closure to prevent concrete and other
materials from entering sleeves.
8. Where insulated piping passes through fire barriers, stop insulation at barrier for fire
barrier penetration seal.
9. Where piping passes through nonfire rated, or nonwaterproof, partitions, floors, and
walls, apply pipe insulation continuous through pipe sleeves.
10. Do not install sleeves through suspended ceilings.
11. Caulk nonfire rated sleeves with sealant.
E. Protection
1. Provide proper protection to the building during the execution of Work involved
under this contract heading.
2. This protection shall include covering apparatus, building surfaces, and other
materials to protect same from dirt; adequate temporary connections to protect
apparatus from damage and required shielding to protect finished parts of the
building. The following shall apply where applicable:
a. Protect finished floors from chips and cutting oil by the use of metal chip
receiving pans and oilproof floor covers.
b. Protect equipment and finished surfaces from welding and cutting spatters
with baffles and spatter blankets.
c. Protect equipment and finished surfaces from paint droppings, insulation
adhesive, and sizing droppings, etc., by use of drop cloths.
3. Pumps, motors, fans, and other rotating/reciprocating equipment stored for this
Project shall be adequately protected with openings, bearings, etc., covered to
exclude dust and moisture. Stock piled pipe, valves, fittings, ductwork, etc., shall be
placed on dunnage and protected from weather and from entry of foreign material.
4. During installation and until final connections are made, piping and ductwork shall
be protected against entry of foreign matter. Equipment connections shall be
carefully sealed until the actual time of system tie-in.
F. Accessibility
1. Provide a union or flange in the piping at each screwed or welded valve, device, or
item of equipment, and elsewhere as required for accessibility of repair. Each union
shall be so installed as to permit the removal of item without disconnection of any
piping except at the union.

3.2 DISINFECTING WATER LINES
A. Disinfect new domestic water service piping and at connections to existing piping in
accordance with Local or State Board of Health Regulations. Also follow notes as listed
below.
1. Before water system is turned over for use, this Contractor shall have the entire
system thoroughly disinfected.
2. Disinfecting shall be by the introduction of a hypochlorite solution of calcium
hypochlorite powder containing 65 percent to 70 percent free chlorine, through
gravity injection or a suitable pump feeder. Flush throughout the system until
approximately 50 P.P.M. is obtained at outlets, faucets, and hydrants. The solution
shall stand in the system for 24 hours or more and then be flushed out of lines until
not over .2 P.P.M. residual remains.
3. After disinfecting and final flushing, several samples from the various ends of lines
shall be drawn and tested by the State or Local Board of Health or Health Authority
or an independent laboratory approved by the Department of Health, using their own
containers. Such sampling and testing shall be repeated 3 times at 24-hour intervals.
4. Disinfection shall be repeated until the findings of all 3 tests are satisfactory and
approved in writing by the official health authority.
5. During the disinfecting period, warning signs shall be posted at each outlet and
fixture indicating water should not be drawn or consumed.
6. Furnish A/E and Owner with a certificate certifying disinfection was conducted in
accordance with the Specifications, together with a report from health authority of the
water sample analysis and approval.
3.3 TESTING AND REPAIR
A. Upon completion of each respective piping system, but prior to insulating, covering, or
backfilling, each system shall be thoroughly cleaned and flushed to remove construction dirt
and foreign matter.
B. Test Piping as Specified Herein

1. No piping work shall be concealed or covered until it has been inspected and
approved by the project inspector, who shall be notified when the Work is ready for
inspection. Work shall be completely installed and tested as required by this Contract
and Ordinances of the local Municipality and shall be leaktight to the satisfaction of
those making the inspection and the A/E.
2. In general, pressure tests shall be applied to piping. In no case shall piping be subject
to pressure exceeding its rating. Defective work shall be promptly repaired or
replaced and test shall be repeated until the particular system and component parts
thereof receive approval of the A/E.
3. Provide temporary equipment for testing, including pump, blower, and gauges. Test
piping system before insulation is installed and remove control devices before testing.
Test each natural section of each piping/ductwork system independently, but do not
use piping system valves to isolate sections where test pressure exceeds valve
pressure rating.
4. Repair piping system sections which fail required piping test by disassembly and
reinstallation, using new materials to extent required to overcome leakage. Do not
use chemicals, stopleak compounds, mastics, or other temporary repair methods.

5. Drain test water from piping systems after testing and repair work has been
completed.
6. Pressure for Testing of Piping/Ductwork Systems shall be as follows:
a. Domestic Hot and Cold Water Piping
1) Piping shall be tested and results approved by A/E prior to
application of insulation.
2) Piping system shall be capped and subjected to a static water
pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure and a minimum of 125
psig, and pressure maintained for 4 hours with no leaks or loss in
pressure.
3) Test source shall be isolated before conducting pressure tests.
4) Isolation of tested equipment.
b. Sewer, Soil, and Waste Piping
1) Soil and waste piping shall be plugged and subjected to not less
than a 10 foot head of water. Water column shall be maintained for
2 hours with no leaks.
2) Where subject to freezing, use air or smoke test for not less than
30 minutes and as required by code.
c. Natural Gas Piping
1) Per NFPA #54, state and local utility codes.
d. Fire Protection Piping System (Interior)
1) Per NFPA #13, state and local codes.
7. Accurately record and report methods of testing, times, and dates of test, witnesses to
the test, and the results of the test. Test reports shall be neatly typewritten on
standard 8-1/2 inch by 11 inch sheets and submitted in 5 copies to A/E for approval
within 5 days after test has been performed.
C. Damage resulting from tests shall be repaired or damaged materials replaced, to satisfaction of
A/E, and at no cost to Owner.
3.4 EMERGENCY REPAIRS OR OPERATION
A. The Owner reserves the right to make emergency repairs and protection of the equipment and
systems in operation without voiding the Contractor's guarantee bond or relieving the
Contractor of his responsibility during the bonding period.
3.5 PROVISIONS FOR LATER INSTALLATIONS
A. Where work cannot be installed as the structure is being erected, the Contractor for such work
shall provide and arrange for the building-in of boxes, sleeves, inserts, fixtures, and devices
necessary to permit installation of the omitted work during later phases of construction. The
Contractor shall arrange for layout, chases, holes, and other openings which must be provided
in masonry, concrete, and other work.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for becoming informed of the nature and arrangement of
the materials and construction to which his work attached or passes through.

SECTION 220513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose,

horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to
600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment
manufacturer for field installation.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the
following:
1. Motor controllers.
2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.
3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.
4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in
plumbing equipment schedules or Sections.
B. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.
C. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.
D. The contractor shall coordinate all Division 22 motor locations, quantities and electrical
characteristics with corresponding electrical drawings and verify that connections for motors are
indicated on the electrical drawings during the bid phase of the project and notify engineer if
discrepancies exist.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
Project 16018 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS 220513 - 1

AIA/MCS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT March 3, 2017
SECTION 220519 - METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Thermometers.
2. Gauges.
3. Test plugs.
1. Division 22 Section "Facility Water Distribution Piping" for domestic and fire-protection
water service meters outside the building.
2. Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for domestic and fire-protection water
service meters inside the building.
3. Division 23 Section "Facility Natural-Gas Piping" for gas meters.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated; include performance curves.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL-CASE, LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable

product by one of the following:
1. Ashcroft Commercial Instrument Operations; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div.
2. Palmer - Wahl Instruments Inc.
3. Trerice, H. O. Co.
4. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
5. Weksler Instruments Operating Unit; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div.
6. Winters Instruments
B. Case: Die-cast aluminum, 9 inches long.
C. Tube: Red or blue reading, organic-liquid filled, with magnifying lens.
D. Tube Background: Satin-faced, non-reflective aluminum with permanently etched scale

markings.
E. Window: Glass.
Project 16018 METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519 - 1

F. Connector: Adjustable type, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360 degrees in horizontal plane, with
locking device.
G. Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass for thermowell installation and of length to suit
installation.
H. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of
1.5 percent of range.
2.2 THERMOWELLS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one

of the following:
6. Winters Instruments.
B. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type metal fitting made for insertion into piping and of type,
diameter, and length required to hold thermometer.
2.3 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one

of the following:
6. Winters Instruments.
B. Direct-Mounting, Dial-Type Pressure Gauges: Indicating-dial type complying with

ASME B40.100.
1. Case: Dry type, cast aluminum metal, 4-1/2-inch diameter.
2. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Pressure Connection: Brass, 1/4 inch, bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is
indicated.
4. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.
5. Dial: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings.
6. Pointer: Red metal.
7. Window: Glass.
8. Ring: Metal.
9. Vacuum-Pressure Range: 30-in. Hg of vacuum to 15 psig of pressure.
10. Range for Fluids under Pressure: Two times operating pressure.
C. Pressure-Gauge Fittings:
1. Valves: 1/4 inch brass or stainless-steel needle type.

2. Snubbers: ASME B40.5, 1/4 inch brass bushing with corrosion-resistant, porous-metal
disc of material suitable for system fluid and working pressure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 THERMOMETER APPLICATIONS
A. Install thermometers in the outlet of each domestic hot-water storage tank, thermostatic mixing
valves, inlet hot water return pump, and all balancing stations indicated on the plumbing
drawings.
B. Provide the following temperature ranges for thermometers:

1. Domestic Hot Water: 30 to 180 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions.
3.2 GAUGE APPLICATIONS
A. Install dry-case-type pressure gauges at the incoming water main, on the inlet and outlet of the
reduced pressure backflow preventer, on the inlet and outlet of the water heater tank(s),
upstream and down stream of the domestic water meters, on the inlet and outlet of thermostatic
mixing valves, the inlet and outlet of domestic hot water recirculating pumps and each hot water
return balancing station indicated on the plumbing drawings.
3.3 INSTALLATIONS
A. Install direct-mounting thermometers and adjust vertical and tilted positions.
B. Install thermowells with socket extending a minimum of 2 inches into fluid and in vertical
position in piping tees where thermometers are indicated.
C. Install direct-mounting pressure gauges in piping tees with pressure gauge located on pipe at
most readable position.
D. Install needle-valve and snubber fitting in piping for each pressure gauge.
E. Install thermometers and gauges adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and
maintenance for thermometers, gauges, machines, and equipment.
F. Adjust faces of thermometers and gauges to proper angle for best visibility.

SECTION 220523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Drain valves.
2. Ball valves.
3. Check valves.
1. Division 22 plumbing piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections
only.
2. Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for valve tags
and schedules.
3. Division 33 water distribution piping Sections for general-duty and specialty valves for
site construction piping.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.
A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single
manufacturer.
B. ASME Compliance:
1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria.
2. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.
C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.
A. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection.
2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If
outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.
Project 16018 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. This Specification is based on products as manufactured by Milwaukee Valve Company.

Equivalent products as manufactured by Crane Co. - Valve Division, Metraflex, Nibco Inc.,
Nexus, Griswold, Hammond Valve Co., and Watts are acceptable. For grooved end butterfly
valves use Victaulic, Anvil-Gruvlok, Tyco-Grinnell Mechanical Products, or Nibco.
2.2 DRAIN VALVES (HOSE END)
A. For Low Pressure Drainage Service:

1. Threaded Ends 2 inches and Smaller: 150 SWP, 600 CWP, bronze body, ball valve,
3/4 inch hose outlet connection.
2. Soldered Ends 2 inches and Smaller: 150 SWP 600 CWP, bronze body, ball valve,
3/4 inch hose outlet connection.
3. Provide cap with chain for all drain connections.
2.3 BALL VALVES
A. Two Piece Ball Valves 2 inches and Smaller: 600 WOG, 150 SWP, cast bronze body,
ASTM B-584, B-62 or B61 teflon seats, full port, blow-out proof stem, adjustable packing
gland, stainless steel ball and stem, threaded, solder ends, or press fit ends.
B. For domestic interior plumbing water piping:

1. Threaded Ends 2 inches and Smaller: Class 150, full port, bronze ASTM B 584 B61 or
B-62. No forged brass containing more than 15 percent zinc, 2 piece body, Stainless steel
ball and stem.
2. Soldered Ends 2 inches and Smaller: Class 150, full port, bronze ASTM B 584 B61 or
B-62. No forged brass containing more than 15 percent zinc, 2 piece body, Stainless steel
ball and stem.
2.4 CHECK VALVES
A. Comply with MSS SP-71 for design, workmanship, material, and testing. Construct pressure
containing parts of valves as follows:
B. Swing Check Valves 2 inches and Smaller: Class 150, 300 PSI WOG, cast iron bronze body
and cap conforming to ASTM B62. Valves shall be swing type design, threaded or solder ends.
C. Swing Check Valves 2-1/2 inches and Larger: Class 125, 200 PSI WOG, cast iron body, bronze
trim and bolted cap conforming to ASTM A126, Class B. Flanged ends, swing type disk.
D. Grooved Grooved End 2-1/2 inches and Larger: Ductile iron body to ASTM A536, elastomeric
encapsulated disc, Grade "E" EPDM, type 416 stainless steel shaft, nonslamming spring of
304 stainless steel, working pressure of 300 psi.

E. Unless a composition disc is specified, swing check valves 2 inches and smaller shall be bronze,
regrinding, with seating angle 40 to 45 degrees. A stop plug is required as a renewable stop for
the hanger, unless otherwise specified. Disc and hanger shall be separate parts, and the disc
shall be free to rotate. Hanger pins shall be supported on both ends by removable side plug(s).
F. Lift Check Valves 3 inches and Smaller: Bronze or forged steel, to suit the service.
G. Check Valves 4 inches and Larger: Flanged, swing type, unless otherwise specified.
H. For Pump Discharge and Condensate Return Lines:

1. Threaded Ends 2 Inches and Smaller: Class 125, bronze body, screwed cap, spring
activated lift check.
2. Flanged Ends 2 1/2 inches and Larger: Class 125, iron body bronze mounted, bolted cap,
dual door wafer silent check.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove
special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and
handling.
B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made
accessible by such operations.
C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper
size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is
suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.
E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,
maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
E. Provide a line size main valve on the incoming domestic water service where it enters the
building at a point +/- 6” above finished floor and upstream of the domestic water meters.
F. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:

1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.

2. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but
before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.

SECTION 220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following hangers and supports for plumbing system piping and
equipment:
1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.
2. Trapeze pipe hangers.
3. Metal framing systems.
4. Fastener systems.
5. Pipe stands.
6. Equipment supports.

1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze
hangers for pipe and equipment supports.
A. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined
weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported

equipment and connected systems and components.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

2. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
3. Pipe positioning systems.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design: Anvil International, Inc., Portsmouth, New Hampshire. Subject to

compliance with requirements, provide either the product named or a comparable product by
one of the other manufacturers specified.
Project 16018 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR 220529 - 1

AIA/MCS PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT March 3, 2017
1. Manufacturers:
a. Copper B-Line, Inc., Highland, Illinois
b. Erico International Corp., Salon, Ohio
c. PHD Manufacturing, Columbiana, Ohio
e. Amber Booth, Houston, Texas
B. Products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or
exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product. Requests for
A/E’s approval must be accompanied by the “Substitution Request Form” and complete
technical data for evaluation. All materials for evaluation must be received by the Project
Manager and Specification Department at least 10 days prior to bid due date. Additional
approved manufacturers will be issued by Addendum.
2.2 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Beam Clamps: Anvil C-Clamp with retaining clip, Fig. #87 for 3/8 inch to 3/4 inch diameter
rod.
B. Beam Clamps: Anvil forged steel beam clamp with upper nut, Fig. #228 for 5/8 inch to 7/8 inch
diameter rod.
C. Beam Clamps: Anvil Fig. #227 for 3/8 inch and 1/2 inch diameter rod (attachment to top
members of angle iron trusses or to top flanges of I-Beams).
D. Hanger Rod: Carbon steel material of size/diameter required, threaded one end, both ends,
and/or continuous thread. Provide threaded swivel connections to maintain the threaded rod in
a vertical position. Bending threaded rod is not acceptable.
E. Trapeze Type Hangers: Use structural angle, channel, beams, unistrut or equivalent support
and/or framing. Provide proper attachment for service listed below.
F. Pipe Attachment: Anvil split pipe ring Fig. #108 and turnbuckle adjuster Fig. #114 (for pipe
size 3/8 inch to 8 inch, noninsulated).
G. Pipe Attachment for Hot and Cold Service: Anvil adjustable clevis Fig. #260 for 1/2 inch to
30 inches noninsulated, stationary pipe lines. Size Clevis for outer insulation diameter. Provide
with galvanized insulation shield Fig. #167.
H. Pipe Attachment for Independent Support of Hot Service: Anvil Fig. #181, (2-1/2 inch to 20
inch pipe insulated) adjustable steel yoke pipe roll.
I. Trapeze supported for hot and cold service 2 inch to 12 inch insulated Anvil Fig. #175 pipe roll.
Roller sized for insulated diameter.
J. Copper tubing 1/2 inch to 2 inch: When attached directly to copper piping or tubing, hangers
shall be equipped with permanently attached factory liner of high compression factor,
chemically treated to resist moisture, abrasion, heat, cold, and vermin. Liner shall be felt or
equally approvable material, or hangers shall be equal to copper plated Anvil Fig. # CT-99.
Lined or plated hangers not required when hanger is oversized to cover an insulated line.

K. Pipe Attachment: Anvil adjustable clevis for storm sanitary and vent Fig. #260, for 4 inch to
24 inch pipe. Size for insulation as required. Provide galvanized insulation shield Fig. #167.
L. Pipe Attachment: Anvil adjustable clevis for insulated, steel hot pipe, Fig. #300, for 3/4 inch to
2 inch pipe size.
M. Pipe Attachment: Anvil riser clamp Fig. #261 (for either insulated or bare steel pipe, cast iron
or conduit) or Fig. #261c (for glass, copper, brass and/or aluminum pipe), for 3/4 inch to 20
inches and 3/4 inch to 6 inches respectively
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPE INSTALLATION
A. Pipe attachments shall be located adjacent to fittings at each offset or change in direction, at
ends of branches over 5 feet long, at riser pipes, and along piping where necessary to prevent
sags, bends, or vibration. Piping risers shall be supported at each floor level.
B. No pipe will be hung from another pipe or pipes.
C. Hanger rod must hang perpendicular before and after pipe covering or insulation is applied.
1. Support piping from rolled steel beams or channels from any point on either top or
bottom flanges.
2. Support piping from open web steel joists from hangers connected to either top or bottom
chords within 3 inches of center of chord panel points (intersection of diagonal or vertical
chord with top or bottom chord). Joist reinforcement will be required if hangers are not
installed at panel points. Refer to structural details.
3. In addition to maximum spacing of hangers or supports specified below, the number and
spacing of hangers and supports shall be such as to equally distribute loads to all
structural members in the system.
4. Connections to structural members shall be clamping devices which do not damage or
deform structural elements. Welding to or drilling holes in structural members is not
permitted unless specifically approved by Architect.
5. Hanger rods cannot be bent.
D. The maximum horizontal spacing between hangers or supports, measured along the piping for
steel pipe, shall be as follows:
Pipe Size Rod Diameter Maximum Spacing*

Up to 1-1/4 inch 3/8 inch 8 feet
1-1/2 inch and 2 inch 3/8 inch 9 feet
2-1/2 inch and 3 inch 1/2 inch 10 feet
4 inch and 5 inch 5/8 inch 12 feet
6 inch 3/4 inch 12 feet
*Provide hangers on all sides of valves, strainers, elbows, tees, check valves, etc.

E. The maximum spacing between hangers or supports, measured along the piping for plastic
DWV pipe, shall be 4 feet on center and, at end of branches change in direction and trap arms,
3 feet or greater.
F. The maximum horizontal hanger space for water CPVC distribution piping shall not exceed
3 feet
G. The maximum horizontal spacing between hangers or supports, measured along the piping for
copper tubing, shall be as follows:
Nom. Tubing Size Rod Diameter Maximum Spacing

Up to 1 inch 3/8 inch 5 feet
1-1/4 inch and 1-1/2 inch 3/8 inch 8 feet
2-1/2 inch 1/2 inch 9 feet
3 inch and 4 inch 1/2 inch 10 feet
H. Where vertical support locations are not indicated on the Drawings, support cast iron soil pipe,
steel, and copper pipe at every floor. Use friction clamps anchored to building construction
with not less than two-point bearing.
I. Where several pipes occur at the same elevation, trapeze type hangers may be used. For parallel
runs, use unistrut or equivalent capped pipe and approved supports and/or framing. The follow-
ing general rules shall be followed for attachment:
1. Uninsulated steel piping, use clamps. For copper tubing, the clamps shall be copper plat-
ed or lined.
2. Insulated piping 2 inches and smaller, use 18 gauge galvanized steel shield over the insu-
lation in 180 degree segments, minimum 12 inches long with clamp.
3. Insulated piping 2-1/2 inches and larger, use pipe covering protection saddle with roller
supports.
4. Cold water piping 2-1/2 inches and larger, use hard block nonconducting type saddles in
90 degree segments and minimum 12 inches long.
5. Where piping is racked on multiple hangers supported with the use of prefabricated struc-
tural support channels, the piping attachments shall be as specified for trapeze hangers.
6. Trapezing is not allowed for 8 inch diameter and larger pipes. These pipes must be sup-
ported individually.
7. The load on the end of any trapeze shall not be greater than 600 pounds when supported
from steel open web joists and 1000 pounds when supported from rolled beams.
J. Hangers for pipe shall be of a compatible material or coating. Where pipe insulation is continu-
ous through hangers, insulation blocks shall be of compressed insulation material of the same
thickness as the specified covering and will be equal to or larger in size than the metal insula-
tion protector saddle specified to be installed. Hangers will be isolated from dissimilar metal
unless they are of a compatible material.
K. Continuous threaded rod may be used wherever possible. No chain, wire, or perforated strap
shall be used. Threaded rod may not be bent. Threaded swivel connections shall be utilized for
attachment to sloping structure.

L. Hanger rod shall not be supported from the roof deck.
M. Clamp connection on sloped structure shall be provided with swivels so threaded pad will hang
vertically.

SECTION 220553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Equipment labels.
2. Warning signs and labels.
3. Pipe labels.
4. Ceiling tags.
5. Valve tags.
6. Warning tags.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification
material and device.
C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed
content for each label.
D. Valve numbering scheme.
E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

surfaces where devices are to be applied.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.
C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Brady USA
B. 3M
Project 16018 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING 220553 - 1

AIA/MCS PIPING AND EQUIPMENT March 3, 2017
C. Seton
D. Connecticut
E. Bran Ford
2.2 EQUIPMENT LABELS
A. Metal Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032-inch, stainless steel, 0.025-inch, aluminum,
0.032-inch or anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled
or stamped holes for attachment hardware.
2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than
2-1/2 inches by 3/4-inch.
3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4-inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than
24 inches, 1/2-inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger
lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to
three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
4. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets.
5. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
B. Plastic Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving,
1/8-inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
2. Letter Color: White.
3. Background Color: Red.
4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.
2-1/2 inches by 3/4-inch.
6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4-inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than
24 inches, 1/2-inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger
lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-
fourths the size of principal lettering.
7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets.
C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number,

Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the
Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.
D. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2 by 11-inch
bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where
equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number
and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and
maintenance data.
2.3 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS
A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving,
1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

B. Letter Color: Black.
C. Background Color: White.
D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.
E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-
1/2 inches by 3/4-inch.
F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4-inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches,
1/2-inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater
viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal
lettering.
G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets.
H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification
instructions.
2.4 PIPE LABELS
A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering
indicating service, and showing flow direction.
B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of
pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.
C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.
D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of pipe service using same designations or
abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate
both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.
2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.
3. Included piping labels are cold water, hot water, hot water return, sanitary, storm, and
gas.
2.5 CEILING TAGS
A. Additional location and identification of plumbing system valves shall be accomplished using
1/2 inch diameter colored, pressure-sensitive, adhesive circles. Apply circles to ceiling grid
below location of system valves per following color code:
Domestic Cold Water = Blue
Domestic Hot Water = Red

2.6 VALVE TAGS
A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and
1/2-inch numbers.
1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped
holes for attachment hardware.
B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2 by 11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve
number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or
space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for
identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.
1. Valve-tag schedule shall be located on the Plumbing Drawings.
2.7 WARNING TAGS
A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card

stock with matte finish suitable for writing.
1. Size: 4 inches by 7 inches.
2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire.
3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO
NOT OPERATE."
4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification
devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and
encapsulants.
3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.
B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.
3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Piping Color-Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting."
B. Stenciled Pipe Label Option: Stenciled labels may be provided instead of manufactured pipe
labels, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe labels with painted, color-coded bands on each
piping system.
1. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background.
2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking.
C. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces;
machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and
exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device.

2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.
Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed
piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in
areas of congested piping and equipment.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.
D. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Compressed Air – White on Blue “COMP AIR”
2. House Vacuum – White on Blue “HOUSE VAC”
3. Natural Gas – Black on Yellow “GAS”
4. Domestic Cold Water – White on Green “DCWS”
5. Domestic Hot Water – White on Green “DHWS”
6. Domestic Hot Water Return – White on Green “DHWR””
3.4 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION
A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within
factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering
hose connections; and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List
tagged valves in a valve schedule.
B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and
with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:
1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:
a. Cold Water: 2 inches, round.
b. Hot Water: 2 inches, round.
c. Low-Pressure Compressed Air: 2 inches, round.
d. High-Pressure Compressed Air: 2 inches, round.
3.5 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION
A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where
required.

SECTION 220700 - PLUMBING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Insulation Materials for Piping:
a. Provide the labor, materials, equipment, appliances, services and transportation,
and perform operations in connection with the construction and installation of the
Work. Work shall be as herein specified and as denoted on the accompanying
Drawings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, thickness, and
jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-test-

response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84,
by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label
insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with
appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed
index of 50 or less.
B. Insulation shall meet the latest requirements of ASHRAE 90.1.
A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate

ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in
Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application and
equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop
Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-
applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.
Project 16018 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 1

C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.
1.7 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after
installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have
satisfactory test results.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Insulating and covering materials have been selected on the basis of mechanical strength, sound
transmission characteristic, durability under adverse conditions, vapor impermeability, and
appearance, in addition to thermal insulating value. Materials of lesser performance than
specified or materials of less thickness than specified, will be ordered removed and replaced
with acceptable materials.
B. The use of wheat paste, in lieu of lagging adhesives specified, is absolutely forbidden. Vapor
barriers on cold surfaces and piping must be continuous through sleeves, hangers, supports, etc.
Stapling of vapor barrier jackets shall be permitted only if staples are sealed with an approved
vapor barrier mastic or vapor barrier tape. Maintain the vapor barrier seal throughout each
system. No clips or other attachments shall be used that require the perforation or puncturing of
any duct or plenum panel. The Insulating Contractor is hereby notified that any duct or panel
found punctured or penetrated by clips, screws, or any other device for holding insulating
materials, even though penetration is not complete, shall be removed and replaced with new
duct or panel at his expense.
C. Protection of Insulation: In general, it is intended that insulation located in areas subject to

damage such as mechanical equipment rooms, combined traffic and pipe tunnels or crawl space,
and the like, shall be of a dense material to eliminate the possibility of physical damage. Piping
insulation installed below 10 feet above finish floor in unfinished spaces shall be protected with
an aluminum jacket or PVC pipe cover.
D. Vapor Barriers - General: Vapor barrier facings shall have a maximum flame spread rating of
25 and smoke developed rating not exceeding 50.
E. Flame Spread and Smoke Ratings: Components of the insulation for piping, including
coverings, mastics, and adhesives shall have a flame spread rating of not over 25 and the smoke
development rating of not over 50. Rating shall be established by tests conducted in accordance
with ASTM E84 - Surface Burning characteristics of building materials, NFPA 255 - Surface
burning characteristics of building materials, and UL 723 - Surface burning characteristics of
building materials.
F. Jacketing: It is imperative that the jacketing used throughout the systems shall have the flame
spread ratings and smoke development ratings herein specified as a maximum limit. Where
canvas is required to be used as jacketing, the Contractor must include the cost in his bid for
finishing with suitable mastics, finishing coats, etc., as required to provide fire resistance.

2.2 PIPE INSULATION
A. This Specification is based on products as manufactured by Johns-Manville. Equivalent

products as manufactured by Knauf Fiberglass, Nomaco, CertainTeed, and Owens-Corning
Fiberglas Corp are acceptable. The following are acceptable manufacturers for elastomeric foam
insulation - Rubatex Corp., Armstrong and IMCOA.
B. Type A; Glass Fiber: Johns-Manville Micro-Lock meeting ASTM C547; Class 1, rigid molded,
nonflammable.
1. “K” Value: 0.23 at 75 deg F.
2. Maximum Services Temperature: 850 deg F.
3. Vapor Retarder Jacket: AP-T PLUS White kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn
and bonded to aluminum foil, secure with self sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips or
AP jacket with outward clinch expanding staples or vapor barrier mastic as needed.
C. Type B; Hydrous Calcium Silicate: Johns-Manville Thermo-12/Blue ASTM C553; Type 1;

rigid molded pipe; asbestos-free coded throughout material thickness and maintained
throughout temperature range.
1. “K” Value: 0.40 at 300 deg F.
2. Maximum Service Temperature: 1200 deg F.
3. Compressive Strength (block): Minimum of 160 psi to produce 5 percent compression at
1-1/2 inch thickness.
4. Tie Wire: 16 gauge stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers.
D. Type C; Elastomeric Foam: Rubatex R-180-FS/R-1800-FS meeting ASTM C534; flexible,

cellular elastomeric, molded or sheet. Equivalent products as manufactured by Armacell LLC
are also acceptable.
1. “K” Value: 0.23 at 75 deg F.
2. Maximum Service Temperature: 220 deg F.
3. Maximum Flame Spread: 25.
4. Maximum Smoke Developed: 50 (3/4 inch thick and below)
100 (above 3/4 inch thick)
5. Connection: Waterproof vapor retarder adhesive as needed; Rubatex R-373 Adhesive.
6. UV-Protection: Outdoor protective coating; Rubatex 374 Coating. Equivalent products
as manufactured by Armacell LLC are also acceptable.
7. Insulated piping exposed outdoors shall be covered with a 0.016-inch aluminum jacket
with each end and all seams sealed to protect from moisture and Ultra-violet exposure.
E. Type D; Cellular Glass: ASTM C552; "k" value of 0.35 at 75 degrees F; 8.0 lb/cu ft density.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other
conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
1. Verify that systems be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.
2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a
corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows:
1. Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils thick and an
epoxy finish 5 mils thick if operating in a temperature range between 140 and 300 deg F.
Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods
for operating temperature range.
2. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 32 and 300
deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating
materials and application methods for operating temperature range.
C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with
stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;
free of voids throughout the length of equipment and piping including fittings, valves, and
specialties.
B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required
for each item of equipment and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.
C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.
D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,
supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor
legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper
and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to
insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation
material manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over
jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.
K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet
and dry film thicknesses.
L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.
2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch wide strips, of same material as insulation
jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of
strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.
3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with
longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap.
Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.
a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to
maintain vapor seal.
5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at
ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.
M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal
thickness.
N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking
due to thermal movement.
O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.
Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar
to butt joints.
P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Testing agency labels and stamps.
2. Nameplates and data plates.
3. Manholes.
4. Handholes.
5. Cleanouts.
3.4 PENETRATIONS
A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof

penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface
and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation,
install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal
joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of
roof flashing.
4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush

with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.
C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation

continuously through wall penetrations.
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at
least 2 inches.
4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):
Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation

continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.
1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping"irestopping
and fire-resistive joint sealers.
F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.
2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in
Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with
continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from
same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly
against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular
surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is
uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.
3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt
each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with
adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe
insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe
diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets,
valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with
insulating cement.
5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating
cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and
replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable
insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor
barrier.
6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation.
Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe
insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a
mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for
above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the
mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.
8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric
and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and
unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation
facing using PVC tape.
9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION."
Match size and color of pipe labels.
B. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gauges, pressure temperature taps,
test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels,
and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the
connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing
sealant.
C. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the
following:
1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same
thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe
insulation.
2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation
from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe
insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-
steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.
3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except divide
the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.

4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of
mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached
insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe
insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe
insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied
in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.
5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed
surfaces with a metal jacket.
3.6 CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without
deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions
with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient services, secure laps with
outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient services, do not staple
longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation
material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of
cellular-glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.
C. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed sections of cellular-glass insulation to valve body.
2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without
disturbing insulation.
3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
3.7 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate
openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the
thickness of pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as
pipe insulation.
4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive
to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.
2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to
eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when
available.
2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet
insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow
valve operation without disturbing insulation.
4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's
recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to
surface being insulated.
3.8 PIPING INSULATION, GENERAL
A. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation of the following:
1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.
2. Underground piping.
3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.
B. Insulation shall extend through all hangers and shall not be interrupted by any clamps.
3.9 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

Type "A" Type "C"
Pipe Insulation Insulation
Piping Service Type Size Thickness Thickness
Domestic Hot Water

Supply (Above Ground) A or C All 1" 1"
Domestic Hot Water

Recirculating (Above Ground) A or C All 1" 1"
Domestic Cold, Tempered

Water and Trap Primer Water
Piping Supply (Above Ground) A or C All 1" 1"
Roof Drain Bodies A or C All 1" 1"
Roof Drain/Overflow Drain and

Horizontal Storm Piping above
Ceiling A or C All 1” 1”

Notes:
1. Vapor barrier is not required for elastomeric foam insulation.
2. Vapor barrier and waterproof adhesive are required for Type A glass fiber piping
insulation.

SECTION 221113 - FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes water-distribution piping and related components outside the building for
combined water service and fire-service mains.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Coordination Drawings: For piping and specialties including relation to other services in same
area, drawn to scale. Show piping and specialty sizes and valves, meter and specialty locations,
and elevations.
A. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Comply with requirements of utility company supplying water. Include tapping of water
mains and backflow prevention.
2. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for potable-water-service piping,
including materials, installation, testing, and disinfection.
3. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for fire-suppression water-
service piping, including materials, hose threads, installation, and testing.
B. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
D. Comply with ASTM F 645 for selection, design, and installation of thermoplastic water piping.
E. Comply with FMG's "Approval Guide" or UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" for fire-
service-main products.
F. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 24 for materials, installations, tests, flushing, and
valve and hydrant supervision for fire-service-main piping for fire suppression.
G. NSF Compliance:
1. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic potable-water-service piping.
Project 16018 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113 - 1

2. Comply with NSF 61 for materials for water-service piping and specialties for domestic
water.
A. Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves, including fire hydrants, according to the following:
1. Ensure that valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion.
2. Protect valves against damage to threaded ends and flange faces.
3. Set valves in best position for handling. Set valves closed to prevent rattling.
B. During Storage: Use precautions for valves, including fire hydrants, according to the following:
1. Do not remove end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall for storage.
2. Protect from weather. Store indoors and maintain temperature higher than ambient dew-
point temperature. Support off the ground or pavement in watertight enclosures when
outdoor storage is necessary.
C. Handling: Use sling to handle valves and fire hydrants if size requires handling by crane or lift.
Rig valves to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or
rigging points.
D. Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and
handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
E. Protect stored piping from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural
capacity of floor when storing inside.
F. Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt.
G. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
A. Interruption of Existing Water-Distribution Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities

occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only
after arranging to provide temporary water-distribution service according to requirements
indicated:
1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of service.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate connection to water main with utility company. Provide tapping valve, sleeve, and
connect to water main if work is not provided by the utility company.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS (PIPE SIZES 2-1/2 INCHES AND SMALLER)
A. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K water tube, annealed temper.

1. Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22,

wrought-copper, solder-joint pressure type. Furnish only wrought-copper fittings if
indicated.
B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K water tube, drawn temper.
C. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint end. Furnish Class 300 flanges if
required to match piping.
D. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket,

metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.
2.2 DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS (PIPE SIZES 3 INCHES AND LARGER)
A. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with mechanical-joint bell and plain spigot
end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.
1. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard
pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern.
2. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets,
and steel bolts.
B. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with push-on-joint bell and plain spigot end
unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.
1. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard
pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern.
2. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.
C. Grooved-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with cut, rounded-grooved ends.

1. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Pipe Appurtenances:
of the following:
1) Anvil International, Inc.
2) Victaulic Company of America.
b. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Fittings: ASTM A 47/A 47M, malleable-iron castings
or ASTM A 536, ductile-iron castings with dimensions matching pipe.
c. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron-Piping Couplings: AWWA C606, for ductile-iron-pipe
dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, gasket suitable for water, and bolts
and nuts.
D. Flanges: ASME 16.1, Class 125, cast iron.
A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for commonly used
joining materials.
B. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series.

2.4 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Transition Fittings: Manufactured fitting or coupling same size as, with pressure rating at least
equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined.
B. Tubular-Sleeve Pipe Couplings:

following:
a. JCM Industries.
b. Smith-Blair, Inc.
c. Viking Johnson.
2. Description: Metal, bolted, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, with center
sleeve, gaskets, end rings, and bolt fasteners and with ends of same sizes as piping to be
joined.
C. Split-Sleeve Pipe Couplings:

following:
a. Victaulic Depend-O-Lok.
2. Description: Metal, bolted, split-sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling with sealing
pad and closure plates, O-ring gaskets, and bolt fasteners.
D. Flexible Connectors:
1. Nonferrous-Metal Piping: Bronze hose covered with bronze wire braid; with copper-
tube, pressure-type, solder-joint ends or bronze flanged ends brazed to hose.
2. Ferrous-Metal Piping: Stainless-steel hose covered with stainless-steel wire braid; with
ASME B1.20.1, threaded steel pipe nipples or ASME B16.5, steel pipe flanges welded to
hose.
E. Dielectric Fittings: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous; threaded, solder, or plain end
types; and matching piping system materials.
1. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipples with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic
lining, with combination of plain, threaded, or grooved end types, and 300-psig minimum
working pressure at 225 deg F.
2.5 GATE VALVES
A. AWWA, Cast-Iron Gate Valves:

following:
a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.
b. McWane, Inc.; Clow Valve Co. Div. (Oskaloosa).
c. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div.
d. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div.
e. NIBCO INC.
f. U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company.
2. Nonrising-Stem, Metal-Seated Gate Valves:
a. Description: Gray- or ductile-iron body and bonnet; with cast-iron or bronze
double-disc gate, bronze gate rings, bronze stem, and stem nut.
1) Standard: AWWA C500.

2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 200 psig.

3) End Connections: Mechanical joint.
4) Interior Coating: Complying with AWWA C550.
3. Nonrising-Stem, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves:
a. Description: Gray- or ductile-iron body and bonnet; with bronze or gray- or
ductile-iron gate, resilient seats, bronze stem, and stem nut.
3) End Connections: Mechanical joint.
4. Nonrising-Stem, High-Pressure, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves:
a. Description: Ductile-iron body and bonnet; with bronze or ductile-iron gate,
resilient seats, bronze stem, and stem nut.
3) End Connections: Push on or mechanical joint.
5. OS&Y, Rising-Stem, Metal-Seated Gate Valves:
a. Description: Cast- or ductile-iron body and bonnet, with cast-iron double disc,
bronze disc and seat rings, and bronze stem.
3) End Connections: Flanged.
6. OS&Y, Rising-Stem, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves:
a. Description: Cast- or ductile-iron body and bonnet, with bronze or gray- or
ductile-iron gate, resilient seats, and bronze stem.
B. UL/FMG, Cast-Iron Gate Valves:

following:
b. McWane, Inc.; Clow Valve Co. Div. (Oskaloosa).
e. NIBCO INC.
f. U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company.
2. UL/FMG, Nonrising-Stem Gate Valves:
a. Description: Iron body and bonnet with flange for indicator post, bronze seating
material, and inside screw.
1) Standards: UL 262 and FMG approved.
3. OS&Y, Rising-Stem Gate Valves:
a. Description: Iron body and bonnet and bronze seating material.

C. Bronze Gate Valves:

following:
b. Hammond Valve.
c. Milwaukee Valve Company.
d. NIBCO INC.
e. Red-White Valve Corporation.
2. OS&Y, Rising-Stem Gate Valves:
a. Description: Bronze body and bonnet and bronze stem.
3) End Connections: Threaded.
3. Nonrising-Stem Gate Valves:
a. Description: Class 125, Type 1, bronze with solid wedge, threaded ends, and
malleable-iron handwheel.
1) Standard: MSS SP-80.
2.6 GATE VALVE ACCESSORIES AND SPECIALTIES
A. Tapping-Sleeve Assemblies:
following:
a. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; Waterous Co. Subsidiary.
b. East Jordan Iron Works, Inc.
e. U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company.
2. Description: Sleeve and valve compatible with drilling machine.
a. Standard: MSS SP-60.
b. Tapping Sleeve: Cast- or ductile-iron or stainless-steel, two-piece bolted sleeve
with flanged outlet for new branch connection. Include sleeve matching size and
type of pipe material being tapped and with recessed flange for branch valve.
c. Valve: AWWA, cast-iron, nonrising-stem, resilient-seated gate valve with one
raised face flange mating tapping-sleeve flange.
B. Valve Boxes: Comply with AWWA M44 for cast-iron valve boxes. Include top section,
adjustable extension of length required for depth of burial of valve, plug with lettering
"WATER," and bottom section with base that fits over valve and with a barrel approximately
5 inches in diameter.
1. Operating Wrenches: Steel, tee-handle with one pointed end, stem of length to operate
deepest buried valve, and socket matching valve operating nut.
C. Indicator Posts: UL 789, FMG-approved, vertical-type, cast-iron body with operating wrench,
extension rod, and adjustable cast-iron barrel of length required for depth of burial of valve.

2.7 CHECK VALVES
A. AWWA Check Valves:

following:
a. American AVK Co.; Valves & Fittings Div.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.
e. NIBCO INC.
f. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
2. Description: Swing-check type with resilient seat. Include interior coating according to
AWWA C550 and ends to match piping.
a. Standard: AWWA C508.
b. Pressure Rating: 175 psig.
B. UL/FMG, Check Valves:

following:
a. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; Waterous Co. Subsidiary.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.
c. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.
d. McWane, Inc.; Clow Valve Co. Div. (Oskaloosa).
e. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div.
f. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div.
g. NIBCO INC.
h. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
i. Tyco Fire & Building Products.
j. Victaulic Company of America.
k. Viking Corporation.
l. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
2. Description: Swing-check type with pressure rating; rubber-face checks, unless
otherwise indicated; and ends matching piping.
a. Standards: UL 312 and FMG approved.
b. Pressure Rating: 250 psig.
2.8 CORPORATION VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
following:
a. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The); Pipe Products Div.
b. Master Meter, Inc.
c. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div.
B. Service-Saddle Assemblies: Comply with AWWA C800. Include saddle and valve compatible
with tapping machine.
1. Service Saddle: Copper alloy with seal and AWWA C800, threaded outlet for
corporation valve.

2. Corporation Valve: Bronze body and ground-key plug, with AWWA C800, threaded
inlet and outlet matching service piping material.
C. Curb Valves: Comply with AWWA C800. Include bronze body, ground-key plug or ball, and
wide tee head, with inlet and outlet matching service piping material.
D. Service Boxes for Curb Valves: Similar to AWWA M44 requirements for cast-iron valve
boxes. Include cast-iron telescoping top section of length required for depth of burial of valve,
plug with lettering "WATER," and bottom section with base that fits over curb valve and with a
barrel approximately 3 inches in diameter.
1. Shutoff Rods: Steel, tee-handle with one pointed end, stem of length to operate deepest
buried valve, and slotted end matching curb valve.
2.9 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Fire Department Connections:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a comparable product
by one of the following:
a. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc.
b. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc.
c. Kidde Fire Fighting.
d. Potter Roemer.
e. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
2. Description: Freestanding, with cast-bronze body, 5” Storz connection per local fire
department requirements, and threaded bottom outlet. Include lugged caps, gaskets, and
chains; lugged swivel connection and drop clapper for each hose-connection inlet; 18-
inch high brass sleeve; and round escutcheon plate.
2.10 ALARM DEVICES
A. Alarm Devices, General: UL 753 and FMG approved, of types and sizes to mate and match
piping and equipment.
B. Water-Flow Indicators: Vane-type water-flow detector, rated for 250-psig working pressure;
designed for horizontal or vertical installation; with 2 single-pole, double-throw circuit switches
to provide isolated alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7 A, 125-V ac and 0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete
with factory-set, field-adjustable retard element to prevent false signals and tamperproof cover
that sends signal when cover is removed.
C. Supervisory Switches: Single pole, double throw; designed to signal valve in other than fully
open position.
D. Pressure Switches: Single pole, double throw; designed to signal increase in pressure.
2.11 PIPE AND PIPE FITINGS, GENERAL
A. Pipe and pipe fitting materials shall be compatible with each other. Where more than one type
of material or product is indicated, selection is Installer’s option.

B. Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151.

1. Pipe size 4 inches: Class 51
2. Pipe sizes 6 inches and larger: Class 50
3. Lining: AWWA C104, cement mortar, sealcoated.
4. Gaskets: AWWA C111
5. Ductile-Iron and Cast-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile-iron or cast-iron, or
AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact fittings.
a. Lining: AWWA C104, cement mortar.
b. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.
6. Encasement: AWWA C105, polyethylene film tube.
C. Ductile-Iron and Cast-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile-iron or cast-iron, or AWWA C153
ductile-iron compact fittings, of dimension to match pipe outside diameter.
1. Lining: AWWA C104, cement mortar, sealcoated.
2. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.
3. Bells: ASTM D3139.
4. Gaskets: ASTM F477.
D. Couplings: Iron body sleeve assembly fabricated to match outside diameters of pipes to be
joined.
1. Sleeve: ASTM A126, Class B, gray iron.
2. Followers: ASTM A47, Grade 32510 or ASTM A536 ductile iron.
3. Gaskets: Rubber.
4. Bolts and Nuts: AWWA C111.
5. Finish: Enamel paint.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EARTHWORK
3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. General: Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods for piping systems according to the following
applications.
B. Transition couplings and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure
rating may be used, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Flanges, unions, grooved-end-pipe couplings, and special fittings may be used, instead of joints
indicated, on aboveground piping and piping in vaults.
A. General Application: Use mechanical-joint-end valves for NPS 3 and larger underground
installation. Use threaded- or flanged-end valves for installation in vaults. Use UL/FMG,
nonrising-stem gate valves for installation with indicator posts. Use corporation valves and
curb valves with ends compatible with piping, for NPS 2 and smaller installation.

B. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the
following requirements apply:
1. Underground Valves, NPS 3 and Larger: AWWA, cast-iron, nonrising-stem, high-
pressure, resilient-seated gate valves with valve box.
A. See Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping-system common
requirements.
A. Water-Main Connection: Tap water main according to requirements of water utility company
and of size and in location indicated.
B. Make connections larger than NPS 2 with tapping machine according to the following:
1. Install tapping sleeve and tapping valve according to MSS SP-60.
2. Install tapping sleeve on pipe to be tapped. Position flanged outlet for gate valve.
3. Use tapping machine compatible with valve and tapping sleeve; cut hole in main.
Remove tapping machine and connect water-service piping.
4. Install gate valve onto tapping sleeve. Comply with MSS SP-60. Install valve with stem
pointing up and with valve box.
C. Make connections NPS 2 and smaller with drilling machine according to the following:
1. Install service-saddle assemblies and corporation valves in size, quantity, and
arrangement required by utility company standards.
2. Install service-saddle assemblies on water-service pipe to be tapped. Position outlets for
corporation valves.
3. Use drilling machine compatible with service-saddle assemblies and corporation valves.
Drill hole in main. Remove drilling machine and connect water-service piping.
4. Install corporation valves into service-saddle assemblies.
5. Install manifold for multiple taps in water main.
6. Install curb valve in water-service piping with head pointing up and with service box.
D. Comply with NFPA 24 for fire-service-main piping materials and installation.

1. Install copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
E. Install ductile-iron, water-service piping according to AWWA C600 and AWWA M41.
F. Bury piping with depth of 60 inches to top of pipe.
G. Extend water-service piping and connect to water-supply source and building-water-piping

systems at outside face of building wall in locations and pipe sizes indicated.
1. Terminate water-service piping at building wall until building-water-piping systems are
installed. Terminate piping with caps, plugs, or flanges as required for piping material.
Make connections to building-water-piping systems when those systems are installed.
H. Sleeves are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

I. Mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for
Plumbing."
J. Install underground piping with restrained joints at horizontal and vertical changes in direction.
Use restrained-joint piping, thrust blocks, anchors, tie-rods and clamps, and other supports.
K. See Division 21 Section "Water-Based Fire-Suppression Systems" for fire-suppression-water

piping inside the building.
L. See Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for potable-water piping inside the building.
M. Provide line size offset fittings as required to avoid conflicts with all other site utilities, i.e.,
sanitary and storm sewer piping, gas piping, manholes, inlets, and structures. Refer to Site
Utility Drawings during bid phase for coordination.
A. See Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for basic piping joint
construction.
B. Make pipe joints according to the following:

1. Copper-Tubing, Pressure-Sealed Joints: Use proprietary crimping tool and procedure
recommended by copper, pressure-seal-fitting manufacturer.
2. Ductile-Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints for Water-Service Piping: AWWA C600 and
AWWA M41.
3. Ductile-Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints for Fire-Service-Main Piping: UL 194.
4. Ductile-Iron Piping, Grooved Joints: Cut-groove pipe. Assemble joints with grooved-
end, ductile-iron-piping couplings, gaskets, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling
5. Dissimilar Materials Piping Joints: Use adapters compatible with both piping materials,
with OD, and with system working pressure. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common
Work Results for Plumbing" for joining piping of dissimilar metals.
A. AWWA Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44. Install each
underground valve with stem pointing up and with valve box.
B. AWWA Valves Other Than Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44.
C. UL/FMG, Gate Valves: Comply with NFPA 24. Install each underground valve and valves in
vaults with stem pointing up and with vertical cast-iron indicator post.
D. UL/FMG, Valves Other Than Gate Valves: Comply with NFPA 24.
E. MSS Valves: Install as component of connected piping system.
F. Corporation Valves and Curb Valves: Install each underground curb valve with head pointed
up and with service box.

3.8 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION INSTALLATION
A. Install ball drip valves at each check valve for fire department connection to mains.
B. Install protective pipe bollards on four sides of each fire department connection. Pipe bollards
are specified in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications."
C. Pitch piping from connection to low point with accessible means of draining in accordance with
NFPA 13 and 24.
3.9 ALARM DEVICE INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with NFPA 24 for devices and methods of valve supervision. Underground
valves with valve box do not require supervision.
B. Supervisory Switches: Supervise valves in open position.

1. Valves: Install chain and padlock on open OS&Y gate valve.
2. Post Indicators: Install padlock on wrench on indicator post.
C. Pressure Switches: Drill and thread hole in exposed barrel of fire hydrant. Install switch.
D. Water-Flow Indicators: Install in water-service piping in vault. Select indicator with saddle
and vane matching pipe size. Drill hole in pipe, insert vane, and bolt saddle to pipe.
E. Coordinate connection of alarm devices to building fire alarm system. Wiring and fire-alarm
devices are specified in Division 28 Section "Fire Detection and Alarm."
3.10 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. See Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping connections to
valves and equipment.
A. Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after concrete thrust blocks
have hardened sufficiently. Fill pipeline 24 hours before testing and apply test pressure to
stabilize system. Use only potable water.
B. Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than one-and-one-half times working pressure for two hours.
1. Increase pressure in 50-psig increments and inspect each joint between increments. Hold
at test pressure for 1 hour; decrease to 0 psig. Slowly increase again to test pressure and
hold for 1 more hour. Maximum allowable leakage is 2 quarts per hour per 100 joints.
Remake leaking joints with new materials and repeat test until leakage is within allowed
limits.
C. Prepare reports of testing activities.

3.12 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install continuous underground warning tape during backfilling of trench for underground
water-distribution piping. Locate below finished grade, directly over piping. Underground
warning tapes are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
3.13 CLEANING
A. Clean and disinfect water-distribution piping as follows:

1. Purge new water-distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been
altered, extended, or repaired before use.
2. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if
method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in
AWWA C651 or do as follows:
a. Fill system or part of system with water/chlorine solution containing at least
50 ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 24 hours.
b. After standing time, flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine
remains in water coming from system.
c. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat
procedure if biological examination shows evidence of contamination.
B. Prepare reports of purging and disinfecting activities.

SECTION 221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes domestic water piping and water meters inside the building.
B. Water meters will be furnished by utility company for installation by Contractor.
C. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 22 Section "Meters and Gauges for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers,
pressure gauges, and fittings.
2. Division 22 Section "Facility Water Distribution Piping" for water-service piping and
water meters outside the building from source to the point where water-service piping
enters the building.
3. Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for water distribution piping
specialties.
A. Provide components and installation capable of producing domestic water piping systems with
125 psig, unless otherwise indicated.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings and water meters, if provided by the
Contractor.
A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
B. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1
through 9," for potable domestic water piping and components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DOMESTIC WATER (COLD WATER, HOT WATER, HOT WATER RETURN,
TEMPERED WATER, TRAP PRIMER WATER)
A. Piping shall be copper tube complying with ANSI/ASTM B88, Type “L” (above floor) and
Type “K” (below floor). Fittings shall be wrought copper, solder-joints conforming to
ANSI B16.22.
Project 16018 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 1

B. Victaulic, Anvil-Gruvlok, or Tyco-Grinnell Mechanical Products grooved copper connection

may be used for -30 deg F to 230 deg F water service. Coupling shall be Victaulic Style 606,
Anvil-Gruvlok Figure No. 7400, or Tyco-Grinnell Mechanical Products No. 772, with Type "E"
EPDM gasket. Coupling housing shall be ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536. Fittings 2
through 4 inches shall be wrought copper conforming to ASTM B75, alloy C12200. Fittings 5
and 6 inches shall be cast bronze conforming to ASTM B584-87 copper alloy CDA 844 (81-3-
7-9). Hanger spacing shall conform to ANSI B31.9. Hanger selection shall conform to
MSS-SP-69.
C. Piping fittings for pipe sizes 1/2 inch through 4 inch shall be Type “L” (above floor) and Type
“K” (below floor) copper tube complying with ANSI/ASTM B88. Fittings shall be as described
in subparagraph below:
1. Fittings for pipe sizes 4 inch and smaller shall be Type “L” (above floor) and Type “K”
(below floor). Piping and fittings shall be joined by a crimping process.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION
A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section “Earth Moving.”
3.2 PIPE AND FITTING APPLICATIONS
A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used
in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flanges may be used on aboveground piping, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Grooved joints may be used on aboveground grooved-end piping.
D. Fitting Option: Extruded-tee connections and brazed joints may be used on aboveground
copper tubing.
A. Install balancing valve in each hot-water circulation return branch and discharge side of each
pump and circulator. Set balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop flow. Use ball
type valves. Balancing valves are specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping
Specialties."
1. Manual balancing devices shall be calibrated balance or venturi type. Devices shall be
precision machined and calibrated for an accuracy of 3 percent full scale. The induced
differential reading shall be greater than one foot water column at the specified flow with
the valves in the wide open position. The valves shall have differential read-out ports
fitted with check valve and protective cap.
2. Devices are to have a memory stop to allow complete shut off and return to set position
without readjustment.
3. Construction
a. For 3/4 inch through 2-1/2 inch pipe size: Bronze or brass body with full port ball
valve construction and TFE seat rings.

b. For 3 inches and larger flange connections: Brass, cast iron or ductile iron body
with bronze or stainless steel components.
c. Conventional port valves and valves 1/2 inch or smaller are not acceptable.
4. Minimum Ratings
a. Devices with sweat connections: 200 psig at 250 deg F.
b. Devices with NPT connections: 400 psig at 250 deg F.
c. Devices with flanged connections: 175 psig at 250 deg F.
B. Shut Off Duty: Use bronze ball valves. Use flanged and ball valves with flanged ends for
piping 2-1/2 inches and larger.
C. Read-Out Meter Kit

1. Provide a portable readout meter kit by the balancing device manufacturer. The meter
shall be permanently mounted in a durable case complete with two 10-foot color coded
hoses with shut-off valves at eh end that connects to the balance valve so that water does
not drain out between readings. The meter shall have a 6-inch diameter face and a 1.75
percent full rated accuracy. The meter for the venture-type devices shall be provided
with a removable transparent face indicating flow directly in GPM for each size device
furnished. The meter shall have a three valve manifold for over range protection.
D. Balancing devices shall be manufactured by Bell & Gossett, Flow Design, Taco, Nexus,
Griswold, Tour and Anderson, Preso Inc., or Armstrong.
E. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.
F. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or
equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures
that do not have supply stops. Use ball valves.
G. Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping,
and where required to drain water piping.
1. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water mains, risers, and branches.
2. Install stop-and-waste drain valves where indicated.
A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work
Results for Plumbing."
B. Install under-building-slab copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
C. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gauge, and test tee with valve,
inside the building at each domestic water service entrance. Pressure gauges are specified in
Division 22 Section "Meters and Gauges for Plumbing Piping," and drain valves and strainers
are specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialities."
D. Install domestic water piping level without pitch and plumb.
E. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's
requirements.

A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common
Work Results for Plumbing.”
B. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-
alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with grooved-end-pipe or grooved-end-tube coupling housing,

gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.
3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION – REFER TO SPECIFICATION SECTION

220529 “HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT”
3.7 CONNECTIONS
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.
D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve, and extend and
connect to the following:
1. Water Heaters: Cold-water supply and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than sizes of water heater connections.
2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller
than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 22 Section "Plumbing Fixtures."
3. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than
equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use
flanges instead of unions for 2-1/2 inches and larger.
3.8 TESTING PROCEDURE FOR DOMESTIC HOT WATER RETURN SYSTEMS
A. Check the domestic hot water return pump for specified flow.
B. Domestic hot water return balancing shall be performed in accordance with Division 23 Section
“Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC.”
A. Inspect domestic water piping as follows:

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and
approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before
inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having
jurisdiction:
a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or
closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to

observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or
inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Test domestic water piping as follows:

1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound
and that piping is full of water.
2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report
for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and
unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or
concealed before it was tested.
4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure,
without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and
allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must
be repaired.
5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until
satisfactory results are obtained.
6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
3.10 ADJUSTING
A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.
2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.
3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.
4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.
a. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping
to provide flow of hot water in each branch.
b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.
5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and plugs used for temporary sealing of
piping during installation.
6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.
7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for
application where used and are clean and ready for use.
8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.
3.11 CLEANING
A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing domestic water piping that have been altered,
extended, or repaired before using.
2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or,
if methods are not prescribed, procedures described in either AWWA C651 or
AWWA C652 or as described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at
outlets.
b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:
1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm
of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.
2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least
200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.
c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from
system after the standing time.
d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat
procedures if biological examination shows contamination.
B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.
C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

SECTION 221119 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. The Contractor shall provide labor, materials, equipment, appliances, services and
transportation, and perform operations in connection with construction and installation of the
Work. Work shall be as herein specified and as denoted on the accompanying Drawings.
B. This Section includes the following domestic water piping specialties:

1. Reduced pressure principle backflow preventers.
2. Double-check valve assemblies.
3. Pressure type vacuum breakers.
4. Thermostatic mixing valves.
5. Hose bibbs.
6. Wall hydrants.
7. Water hammer arresters.
C. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 22 Section "Meters and Gauges for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers,
pressure gauges, and flow meters in domestic water piping.
2. Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for water meters.
A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig, unless otherwise
indicated.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall consist of:

1. Parts List.
2. Product Data for each type of product indicated.
3. Maintenance Data.
4. Flow and pressure drop characteristics.
5. Operating Instructions.
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
intended use.
Project 16018 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 1

B. NSF Compliance:
1. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1
through 9."
C. Devices shall be included in the list of Approved Backflow Prevention Devices of the USC
Foundation for Cross Connection Control and Hydraulic Research and The American National
Standard Institute A112.1.2-1942 (1979).
D. All thermostatic mixing valves shall comply with National, State, and Local Codes or
Requirements.
E. Thermostatic mixing valves shall meet OBBC, Plumbing Code, Section 4101:2-58-12.
F. All thermostatic mixing valves installed for handicapped usage must comply with the
Americans with Disabilities Act and American National Standard Institute A117, Standard for
Building Requirements for Handicapped People.
G. Thermostatic mixing valve must be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s specific
instructions for type of valve used. Installation must take into consideration location of
thermostatic mixing valve to water heater, temperature differences of hot and cold water,
pressure drop across valve. Capacity of valve shall be as denoted on the Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Approved Manufacturers
1. Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventer: Ames, Febco, Watts, Wilkins, Zurn
2. Double-Check Valve Assemblies: Ames, Febco, Watts, Wilkins, Zurn
3. Pressure Type Vacuum Breaker: Ames, Febco, Watts, Wilkins, Zurn
4. Shock Absorbers: Mifab, PPP Products, Wade, Josam, J.R. Smith, Watts, Zurn
5. Thermostatic Mixing Valves: Bradley, Lawler, Leonard, Symmons
6. Adapter Fittings: Fernco
7. Exterior Wall Hydrant: Mifab, Watts, Wade, Josam, J.R. Smith, Zurn
8. Refrigerator Connection: Guy Gray, PPP Products, Acorn
9. Hose Bibb: Mifab, Watts, Wade, Josam, J.R. Smith, Zurn
2.2 REDUCED PRESSURE BACKFLOW PREVENTER
A. The reduced pressure principle backflow preventer shall consist of two independently operated
spring loaded poppet guided check valves and an easily removable pressure differential relief
control. The device shall be so constructed that it will reduce the pressure in the zone between
the two check valves. If either check valve should leak at the static condition, the pressure
differential relief control shall open and discharge to atmosphere, maintaining the zone pressure
less than the supply pressure. Also, the device shall be constructed so it can be disassembled
and repaired without removing the main body from the line. Further, it shall consist of two
shut-off valves and four test cocks located properly to assist in testing the unit.

2.3 DOUBLE-CHECK DETECTOR CHECK VALVE
A. The main line unit shall consist of two internally spring loaded “Y”-figure check valves having
cast iron bodies, bronze replaceable seat rings, and 300 series stainless steel stems. The stems
shall be guided with replaceable bushings in the cover and seat ring to assure positive check
seating. All internal cast iron parts shall be epoxy coated.
B. The by-pass line unit shall consist of two bronze bodies, internally spring loaded poppet type
check valves, and a total type water meter with registration between 1 and 20 GPM flow rates.
C. Check valve internal parts shall be easily accessible without removing the check valve body
from the line. The assembly shall be suitable for installation in any position, rated to 175 psi
working pressure, and water temperatures from 32 deg F to 140 deg F.
D. Unit shall meet UL and FM requirements.
2.4 PRESSURE TYPE VACUUM BREAKER
A. Pressure type vacuum breaker shall incorporate one spring loaded check valve which closes
tightly when pressure in the device drops below one psi and an air relief valve that opens to
break a siphon when the pressure drops to one psi. The check and air relief valves shall be
constructed so they may be serviced without removing the assembly from the line. Pressure
vacuum breakers shall be rated to 150 psi working pressure and water temperatures between 32
deg F and 180 deg F.
2.5 SHOCK ABSORBERS
A. Factory permanently sealed air chamber sized per method established in accordance with
Plumbing and Drainage Institute "Standard P.D.I.-WH201."
P.D.I. Rating Fixture Unit

A 1-11
B 12-32
C 36-60
D 61-113
E 114-154
F 155-330
2.6 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE
A. The main thermostatic mixing valve shall be assembled with the following features:
1. Thermostatic mixing valve which functions to meet both high and low demand for
tempered water. The thermostatic water mixing valves shall be powered by advanced
thermal actuation thermostat to regulate water temperature.
2. Valve to include integral check stops, and outlet dial thermometer and a ball valve
shut-off.
3. Valve to include spare thermostatic cartridge.

2.7 EXTERIOR WALL HYDRANT
A. Refer to Plumbing Fixture Schedule on the Drawings for manufacturer/model number.
B. Refer to Architectural Drawings for height in exterior wall.
2.8 REFRIGERATOR CONNECTION BOXES
2.9 HOSE BIBB
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining
materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.
B. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to
other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with
1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system.
2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-gap
fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe
diameters in drain piping and pipe to floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or
under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are not acceptable for this application.
3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.
4. Install backflow preventers and double-check valve assemblies at 4’-0” to centerline of
device.
C. Install temperature-actuated water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets
and with shutoff valve on outlet.
1. Install thermometers and water regulators if specified.
D. Install water hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
general arrangement of piping and specialties.
3.3 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or

sign on or near each of the following:
1. Pressure vacuum breakers.
2. Reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventers.

3. Double-check, detector-assembly backflow preventers.

4. Thermostatic mixing valves.
5. Photographic-process, thermostatic, water-mixing-valve assemblies.
A. Perform the following tests and prepare test reports:
B. Test each pressure vacuum breaker, reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer, and double-
check, detector-assembly backflow preventer according to authorities having jurisdiction and
the device's reference standard.
C. Remove and replace malfunctioning domestic water piping specialties and retest as specified
above.
D. Provide Owner training on all equipment items.
3.5 TESTING AND REPAIR
A. Upon completion of each respective piping system, but prior to insulating, covering, or
backfilling, each system shall be thoroughly cleaned and flushed to remove construction dirt
and foreign matter.
B. Test Piping as Specified Herein

1. No piping work shall be concealed or covered until it has been inspected and approved by
the project inspector, who shall be notified when the Work is ready for inspection. Work
shall be completely installed and tested as required by this Contract and Ordinances of
the local Municipality and shall be leaktight to the satisfaction of those making the
inspection and the A/E.
2. In general, pressure tests shall be applied to piping. In no case shall piping be subject to
pressure exceeding its rating. Defective work shall be promptly repaired or replaced and
test shall be repeated until the particular system and component parts thereof receive
approval of the A/E.
3. Provide temporary equipment for testing, including pump, blower, and gauges. Test
piping system before insulation is installed and remove control devices before testing.
Test each natural section of each piping system independently, but do not use piping
system valves to isolate sections where test pressure exceeds valve/damper pressure
rating.
4. Repair piping systems sections which fail required piping test by disassembly and
reinstallation, using new materials to extent required to overcome leakage. Do not use
chemicals, stop leak compounds, mastics, or other temporary repair methods.
5. Drain test water from piping systems after testing and repair work has been completed.
C. Damage resulting from tests shall be repaired or damaged materials replaced, to satisfaction of
A/E, and at no cost to the Owner.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves.

B. Set field-adjustable flow set points of balancing valves.
C. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated water mixing valves.

SECTION 221123 - DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following all-bronze and bronze-fitted centrifugal pumps for domestic
cold- and hot-water circulation:
1. Close-coupled, in-line, seal-less centrifugal pumps.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of domestic water pump specified. Include certified
performance curves with operating points plotted on curves; and rated capacities of selected
models, furnished specialties, and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of domestic
water pumps and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section
"Product Requirements."
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
intended use.
C. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.
A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.
B. Protect bearings and couplings against damage.
C. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions for handling.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: In-Line Circulating Pumps: Bell & Gossett, Armstrong, Taco.
Project 16018 DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS 221123 - 1

2.2 IN-LINE CIRCULATING PUMPS
A. Domestic hot water system in-line recirculating pump(s) shall be of the horizontal in-line, all
bronze, oil lubricated type, suitable for 125# working pressure. Pump body shall be bronze
with brass impeller, heat treated carbon steel shaft, mechanical seal, bronze sleeve-oil
lubricated bearings, flexible spring coupler, and ring mounted nonoverloading motor. Motor
shall be open, dripproof, sleeve bearing, quiet operating, rubber mounted construction, having
built-in thermal overload protection.
B. Each circulating pump shall have sufficient capacity to circulate the scheduled GPM against the
scheduled external head (feet) with the horsepower and speed as scheduled or as denoted on the
Drawings. Motors shall be of electrical characteristics as scheduled, denoted or as indicated on
the electrical plans and Specifications. Pump characteristics shall be such that the head of the
pump, under varying conditions, shall not exceed the rated horsepower of the drive motor.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in of domestic-water-piping system to verify actual locations of connections

before pump installation.
3.2 PUMP INSTALLATION
A. Install pumps with access for periodic maintenance including removal of motors, impellers,
couplings, and accessories.
B. Install in-line, seal-less, centrifugal pumps with motor and pump shafts horizontal.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
B. Install piping adjacent to pumps to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect domestic water piping to pumps. Install suction and discharge piping equal to or
greater than size of pump nozzles. Refer to Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping."
1. Install shutoff valve and strainer on suction side of pumps, and check valve and throttling
valve on discharge side of pumps. Install valves same size as connected piping. Refer to
Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for general-duty valves
for domestic water piping and Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties"
for strainers.
2. Install pressure gages at suction and discharge of pumps. Install at integral pressure-gage
tappings where provided or install pressure-gage connectors in suction and discharge
piping around pumps. Refer to Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing
Piping" for pressure gages and gage connectors.
D. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."

E. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors

and Cables."

SECTION 221124 - FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings.
2. Piping specialties.
3. Piping and tubing joining materials.
4. Valves.
5. Pressure regulators.
7. Concrete bases.
B. Provide new piping for the natural gas service which shall be installed in strict accordance with
the latest edition of the Pressure Piping Code, NFPA Code #54, and in confirmation with the
local gas utility company requirements, as approved by the A/E.
C. Contractor shall make his own arrangements with local gas utility company for connection on
house side of gas meter or regulator.
D. This Contractor is responsible for all work on the gas system which occurs downstream of the
gas meter. This includes all valves, gas pressure regulators inside or outside of the building, gas
pressure regulator vents for a complete and operational system. The Contractor shall review the
Site Utility Drawings for any additional work required to complete work entirely to the point
just downstream of gas meter.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings,
unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

A. Natural-Gas System Pressure within Buildings: 0.5 psig but not more than 2 psig.
Project 16018 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 221124 - 1

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of the following:

1. Piping specialties.
2. Piping materials and associated components a specified.
3. Valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection data of
selected models.
4. Pressure regulators. Indicate pressure ratings and capacities.
A. Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code.
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
A. Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and dispose of liquids from existing natural-gas piping
according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
moisture.
C. Store and handle pipes and tubes having factory-applied protective coatings to avoid damaging
coating, and protect from direct sunlight.
A. Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations. Contact
utility-locating service for area where Project is located.
B. Interruption of Existing Natural-Gas Service: Do not interrupt natural-gas service to facilities

occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only
after arranging to provide purging and startup of natural-gas supply according to requirements
indicated:
1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of natural-gas
service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of natural-gas service without Owner's written
permission.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

B. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for valves installed concealed behind
finished surfaces. Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and
Frames."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS
A. Gas piping for pipe sizes 2 inches and smaller may be Schedule 40 steel pipe with threaded
malleable iron fittings in compliance with NFPA 54 (1988) Section 2.6.8. Gas piping and
fittings for pipe sizes 2-1/2 inches and larger shall be welded Schedule 40 black steel. Piping
smaller than 1/2 inch NPS will not be allowed.
B. Fittings shall be standard weight welding fittings, Nibco, Tubeturns, Allied, or approved equal.
C. Corrugated, Stainless-Steel Tubing: Comply with ANSI/IAS LC 1. (Pipe sizes 2 inches and
smaller.)
following:
a. OmegaFlex, Inc.
2. Tubing: ASTM A 240/A 240M, corrugated, Series 300 stainless steel.
3. Coating: PE with flame retardant.
a. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products
according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with
appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1) Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
2) Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.
4. Fittings: Copper-alloy mechanical fittings with ends made to fit and listed for use with
corrugated stainless-steel tubing and capable of metal-to-metal seal without gaskets.
Include brazing socket or threaded ends complying with ASME B1.20.1.
5. Striker Plates: Steel, designed to protect tubing from penetrations.
6. Manifolds: Malleable iron or steel with factory-applied protective coating. Threaded
connections shall comply with ASME B1.20.1 for pipe inlet and corrugated tubing
outlets.
2.2 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Appliance Flexible Connectors:

1. Indoor, Fixed-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.24.
2. Indoor, Movable-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.69.
3. Outdoor, Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.75.
4. Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with polymer coating.
5. Operating-Pressure Rating: 0.5 psig.
6. End Fittings: Zinc-coated steel.
7. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1.
8. Maximum Length: 72 inches.
B. Weatherproof Vent Cap: Cast- or malleable-iron increaser fitting with corrosion-resistant wire
screen, with free area at least equal to cross-sectional area of connecting pipe and threaded-end
connection.

A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.
B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate
for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
C. Brazing Filler Metals: Alloy with melting point greater than 1000 deg F complying with
AWS A5.8/A5.8M. Brazing alloys containing more than 0.05 percent phosphorus are
prohibited.
2.4 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES
A. See "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles for where each valve type is
applied in various services.
B. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, 2 inches and Smaller: Comply with ASME B16.33.
1. CWP Rating: 125 psig.
2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1.
3. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3.
4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas
Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule"
Articles.
5. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for
valves 1 inch and smaller.
6. Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inches to 2 inches shall have initials "WOG" permanently
marked on valve body.
C. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, 2-1/2 inches and Larger: Comply with
ASME B16.38.
2. Flanged Ends: Comply with ASME B16.5 for steel flanges.
3. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas
Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule"
Articles.
4. Service Mark: Initials "WOG" shall be permanently marked on valve body.
D. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.
following:
a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company.
b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.
c. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.
2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584.
3. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze.
4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof.
5. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof.
6. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing.
7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff
Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.


9. Listing: Valves 1 inch and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to
10. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.
E. Bronze Plug Valves: MSS SP-78.

following:
a. Lee Brass Company.
b. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.
2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584.
3. Plug: Bronze.
4. Ends: Threaded, socket, or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff
Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.
5. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated.
6. Pressure Class: 125 psig.
F. Cast-Iron, Nonlubricated Plug Valves: MSS SP-78.

following:
a. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.
b. Mueller Co.; Gas Products Div.
2. Body: Cast iron, complying with ASTM A 126, Class B.
3. Plug: Bronze or nickel-plated cast iron.
4. Seat: Coated with thermoplastic.
5. Stem Seal: Compatible with natural gas.
6. Ends: Threaded or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve
Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.
G. Cast-Iron, Lubricated Plug Valves: MSS SP-78.

following:
a. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.
b. Mueller Co.; Gas Products Div.
2. Body: Cast iron, complying with ASTM A 126, Class B.
3. Plug: Bronze or nickel-plated cast iron.
4. Seat: Coated with thermoplastic.
5. Stem Seal: Compatible with natural gas.
6. Ends: Threaded or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve
Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.

2.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS
A. General Requirements:
1. Single stage and suitable for natural gas.
2. Steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components.
3. Elevation compensator.
4. End Connections: Threaded for regulators 2 inches and smaller; flanged for regulators
2-1/2 inches and larger.
5. Each regulator shall be vented independently to the outside atmosphere with an approved
vent cap. Verify sizes and venting requirements with the gas company.
6. Gas piping installed in a ceiling air plenum area shall not contain any valves or unions.
B. Service Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80.

following:
a. Equimeter.
b. Rockwell.
2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum.
3. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable.
4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel.
5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the
valve port.
6. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable.
7. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon.
8. Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum
pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator.
9. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not exceed
150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff.
10. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator.
11. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in opening if not
connected to vent piping.
12. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 100 psig.
C. Line Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80.

following:
a. Equimeter.
b. Rockwell.
2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum.
5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the
valve port.
6. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable.

8. Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum

pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator.
9. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not exceed
150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff.
10. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in opening if not
connected to vent piping.
11. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 2 psig or 5 psig.
D. Appliance Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.18.

following:
a. Equimeter.
b. Rockwell.
2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Die-cast aluminum.
5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber.
7. Factory-Applied Finish: Minimum three-layer polyester and polyurethane paint finish.
8. Regulator may include vent limiting device, instead of vent connection, if approved by
9. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 0.5 psig.
2.6 SLEEVES
A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain
ends.
B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe,
with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, PE film warning tape manufactured for
marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick,
continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective
jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches
deep; colored yellow.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for natural-gas piping system to verify actual locations of piping
connections before equipment installation.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off natural gas to premises or piping section.
B. Inspect natural-gas piping according to NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code to
determine that natural-gas utilization devices are turned off in piping section affected.
C. Comply with NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code requirements for prevention of
accidental ignition.
3.3 OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of
natural-gas piping.
B. Steel Piping with Protective Coating:

1. Apply joint cover kits to pipe after joining to cover, seal, and protect joints.
2. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective coating
manufacturer.
3. Replace pipe having damaged PE coating with new pipe.
C. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
D. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall and Slab Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and
mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe
and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.
2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.
E. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal
F. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for
pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and
install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that
cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
G. Install pressure gauge upstream and downstream from each service regulator. Pressure gauges
are specified in Division 23 Section "Meters and Gauges for HVAC Piping."
3.4 INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of
natural-gas piping.

systems. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,
expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to
layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during
progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.
D. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
otherwise.
F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
G. Locate valves for easy access.
H. Install natural-gas piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment traps.
I. Install piping free of sags and bends.
J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
K. Install escutcheons at penetrations of interior walls, ceilings, and floors.
L. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors
at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements
in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
M. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
N. Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas-fired appliances and equipment for
roughing-in requirements.
O. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including
service-meter outlets. Locate where accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install
where condensate is subject to freezing.
1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped.
Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long and
same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove plug or
cap.
P. Extend relief vent connections for service regulators, line regulators, and overpressure
protection devices to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap.
Q. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or
floors, unless indicated to be exposed to view.

R. Concealed Gas Supply Piping Locations: A Schedule 40 plastic coated or mill wrapped welded
gas casing vent that is a minimum of two times the pipe diameter larger than the supply pipe
shall be installed on all concealed gas supply piping, i.e., below floors, in walls, and vented full
size directly to atmosphere and terminated with a 90 degree gooseneck fitting and bug screen.
The vent pipe shall be sealed around the supply pipe at each point where pipe enters and exits
the concealed space. All fittings shall be coated and a test of 50 psi for 10 minutes be made
before covering. Installation shall be in accordance with NFPA 54 and the International Fuel
Gas Code.
S. All gas valves installed shall be accessible below ceilings outside of concealed areas and no
higher than 54 inches AFF.
T. All gas piping and equipment regulator vent piping from a point downstream of the gas meter to
the final connection to equipment shall be painted yellow like Porter Paints No. D6209-4.
1. Prohibited Locations:
a. Do not install natural-gas piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes or trash
chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or elevator
shafts.
b. Do not install natural-gas piping in solid walls or partitions.
U. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side
down.
V. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.
W. Install unions in pipes 2 inches and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each
piece of equipment. Unions are not required at flanged connections.
X. Do not use natural-gas piping as grounding electrode.
Y. Install strainer on inlet of each line-pressure regulator.
Z. Install pressure gauge upstream and downstream from each line regulator. Pressure gauges are
specified in Division 23 Section "Meters and Gauges for HVAC Piping."
AA. Horizontal runs shall grade down to riser at a pitch of 1/4 inch in 15 feet.
BB. At each point where gas piping connects to equipment and at the bottom of each riser, furnish
and install suitable drip leg or moisture pocket comprising drip pocket not les than 12 inches
long, unless otherwise indicated, with reducer and 125 lb. black malleable cap for blowing out
drip pockets.
CC. Piping systems for natural gas shall be electrically continuous and properly bonded to an
approved grounding electrode in accordance with the National Electrical Code, NFPA No. 70.
DD. Gas lines shall be purged to the outside atmosphere before being put into service. Purging must
be witnessed by the Architect or an authorized person to witness purging of the lines.

A. Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless-steel
tubing, aluminum, or copper connector.
B. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space adequate
for servicing and testing.
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
C. Threaded Joints:
1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1.
2. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies.
3. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter of pipe.
4. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dryseal
D. Welded Joints:
1. Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and
welding operators.
2. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
3. Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field welds
and where damage to coating occurs during construction.
Chapter.
F. Flanged Joints: Install gasket material, size, type, and thickness appropriate for natural-gas
service. Install gasket concentrically positioned.
G. Flared Joints: Cut tubing with roll cutting tool. Flare tube end with tool to result in flare
dimensions complying with SAE J513. Tighten finger tight, then use wrench. Do not
overtighten.
3.7 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum
rod sizes:
1. 1 inch and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
2. 1-1/4 inches: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
3. 1-1/2 and 2 inches: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
4. 2-1/2 to 3-1/2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.
5. 4 and Larger: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch.

B. Install hangers for horizontal, corrugated stainless-steel tubing with the following maximum
spacing and minimum rod sizes:
1. 3/4 inch and Larger: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
3.8 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect to utility's gas main according to utility's procedures and requirements.
B. Install natural-gas piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipment
grounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70.
C. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances.
D. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within
72 inches of each gas-fired appliance and equipment. Install union between valve and
appliances or equipment.
E. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as
practical to inlet of each appliance.
A. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and
Equipment" for piping and valve identification.Install detectable warning tape directly above
gas piping, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements
and slabs.
3.10 CONCRETE BASES
A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base.

1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 6 inches larger in both
directions than supported unit.
embedded.
B. Use 3000-psig, 28-day, compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified.
C. Perform tests and inspections.
D. Tests and Inspections:

1. Test, inspect, and purge natural gas according to NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas
Code and authorities having jurisdiction.
E. Natural-gas piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.11 ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Valves for pipe sizes 2 inches and smaller at service meter shall be one of the following:
1. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim.
2. Bronze plug valve.
B. Valves for pipe sizes 2-1/2 inches and larger at service meter shall be one of the following:
3. Cast-iron, nonlubricated plug valve.
C. Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be one of the following:
1. One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim.

SECTION 221316 – SANITARY, WASTE, AND VENT PIPING SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following for soil, waste, and vent piping inside the building:
1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.
2. Floor drains.
3. Cleanouts.
4. Trap Primers
5. Adapter fittings.

1. Division 22 Section "Sanitary Sewerage Pumps."
A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working
pressure, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.
2. Sanitary Sewer, Force-Main Piping: 150 psig.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, couplings, floor drains, and trench drains.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Design Calculations: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer for selecting
seismic restraints.
C. Field quality-control inspection and test reports.
B. All cast iron soil piping and fittings shall comply with ASTM A 888 (or A 74) and be marked
with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI) and be listed by NSF
International.
Project 16018 SANITARY, WASTE, AND VENT PIPING SYSTEM 221316 - 1

C. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic
piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping;
"NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping; "NSF-tubular" for plastic continuous waste piping; and
"NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers
1. Cleanouts and Floor Drains: Wade, Josam Company, Zurn, J. R. Smith, Mifab, Watts,
Blucher/Josam
2. Trap Primers: PPP Products, Sioux Chief, Watts
3. Adapter Fittings: Fernco
4. Pipe Tube and Fittings: Tyler, Charlotte, AB&I
2.2 CLEANOUTS
A. Floor: Cast iron, inside caulking, with adjustable nickel-bronze round tops; Josam No. 55000-1.
Provide Josam “-CFC” carpet cleanout flange in carpeted areas. Review Finish Schedule for
locations.
B. Wall: Concealed screw plug with countersunk wrench hole and stainless steel flush cover and
frame with tamper-proof screw. Josam No. 58600-PLG.
C. Review Finish Schedule for locations.
2.3 ADAPTER FITTINGS
A. Adaptor fittings shall be used where changing from one type of material to another such as:
"DWV" to cast iron soil pipe shall be with an approved brass adapter ferrule and caulk "DWV"
into cast iron hub. Leaded joint against "DWV" copper is not permitted. Cast iron soil pipe to
vitrified tile connection shall be made using ABS "Fernco Donut" gasket.
2.4 FLOOR DRAINS
A. Floor Drain (all finished areas on or above grade conditions).
B. Floor Drain "FD": Ground floor and above ground floor conditions. Cast iron body and
flashing color, nickel bronze round adjustable strainer head with secured square hole grate;
Josam No. 30000-E.
C. Floor Drain “FDSK”: Provide a 12 inch by 12 inch by 8 inch floor drain sink with a square
nickel bronze top with deep seal ‘P’ trap, full grate, aluminum sediment bucket. Josam No.
49340A-NB-3-31.
D. Size: As described on the Drawings.
E. Tops: Adjustable nickel-bronze.

F. Strainers: 6 inch round. All strainers shall be adjustable nonclog style.
G. Bodies: Cast iron, double drainage type.
H. Flashing Rings: Nonpuncture clamping rings are required wherever membrane waterproofing
occurs.
I. Traps: All traps shall be cast iron, deep seal (4 inches minimum seal).
J. Cleanouts: As shown and as required by Code.
K. Trap Primers:
1. Prime-Time Electronic Trap Priming Manifold Kit as manufactured by PPP Products
shall be installed in the cold water piping serving the laboratory areas. Trap primer water
service shall then be extended and connected to all floor drain traps in laboratories. Refer
to Drawings for location of trap primer valve assembly.
2. Oregon #1 Trap Primer as manufactured by PPP Products shall be installed in the cold
water piping serving the water closets. Trap primer water service shall then be extended
and connected to all floor drains in the toilet and mechanical rooms. Refer to the
Drawings for location of trap primer valve assembly.
2.5 SANITARY, WASTE, AND VENT PIPING
A. Aboveground Piping:
1. Pipe size 1-1/2 inches through 15 inches: Hubless cast iron soil pipe, service weight;
hubless cast iron soil pipe fittings, hubless joints, ASTM A-74; CISPI 301. All cast iron
soil pipe and fittings shall bear the collective mark of the cast iron soil pipe institute.
Copper D.W.V., ASTM B306 piping and fittings is also acceptable.
2. Hubless cast iron soil pipe shall be joined using “Heavy Weight” couplings torqued to
80 inch/lbs meeting the requirements of ASTM by Clamp-All, Mission or Husky.
Couplings shall be constructed of type 304 stainless steel with 305 Stainless Steel worm
drive screws; 4 bands 4 inch and below, 6 bands 5 inch and above. The gasket material
shall be neoprene and conform to ASTM C-564.
3. Heavy Duty couplings as described above may be provided by the pipe manufacturer for
fitting locations only. All straight runs of pipe must be joined.
4. An option shall be Schedule 40 PVC with solvent joints per ASTM per D2665/D2564.
Installation shall be per ASTM D2321 for locations not in communication with the return
air plenum.
B. Underground Piping:
1. Pipe size 2 inches through 15 inches: Cast iron hub and spigot soil pipe service weight;
Cast iron hub and spigot soil pip fittings, ASTM A-74; CISPI 301; compression gasket
joints, ASTM C564-70, or lead and oakum joints are acceptable. All cast iron soil pipe
and fittings shall bear the collective mark of the cast iron soil pipe institute.
80 inch/lbs meeting the requirements of ASTM by Clamp-All, Mission or Husky.
shall be neoprene and conform to ASTM C-564.

3. Heavy Duty couplings as described above may be provided by the pipe manufacturer for
fitting locations only. All straight runs of pipe must be joined.
Installation shall be per ASTM D2321.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION
A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise indicated.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following,
unless otherwise indicated:
1. Size same as drainage piping up to 4 inches. Use 4 inches for larger drainage piping
unless larger cleanout is indicated.
2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping.
4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
B. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with
finished floor.
C. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types
indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.
D. Install floor drains as noted on the Drawings. Set grates of drains 1/2 inch below finished floor,
1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.
2. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and
adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
3. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless
E. Install through-penetration firestop assemblies in plastic conductors and stacks at floor

penetrations.
F. Install deep-seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets.
G. Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste piping

discharge into sanitary drainage system.
H. Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof
membrane.

I. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets.
J. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and
within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding
pipe fittings.
K. All sanitary vent piping, including acid vent piping, which terminates to any exterior point, shall
extend to a point 2’-0” above any outdoor air intake which are located within 10’-0” of the
intake opening.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
A. Sanitary sewer piping outside the building is specified in Division 22 Section "Facility Sanitary
Sewers."
B. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work
C. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building
sanitary sewers.
D. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in sanitary force-main piping.
E. Install mechanical sleeve (in basement conditions). Select number of interlocking rubber links
required to make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in
Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."
F. Install wall-penetration fitting at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make
installation watertight.
G. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,"
Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
H. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate
branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used
on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn,
double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side
with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not
change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and
reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction
of flow is prohibited.

I. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to
grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping
upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of
lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past
each joint as completed.
J. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless
otherwise indicated:
1. Building Sanitary Drain: 1/4 inch per foot downward in direction of flow for piping
2 inches and smaller; 1/8 inch per foot downward in direction of flow for piping 3 inches
and larger.
2. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.
K. Install underground soil and waste drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321.
L. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by
A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common
Work Results for Plumbing."
B. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil
Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints.
C. Join hubless cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and
Fittings Handbook" for hubless-coupling joints.
D. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-
alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.
E. PVC Nonpressure Piping Joints Below Underground Slab: Join piping according to
ASTM D 2665.
A. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Install the following:
1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.
2. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs according to the following:
a. MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
3. Support stacks at each floor with two-piece risers clamps.
B. Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping
and Equipment."
3.8 CONNECTIONS

B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.
C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than
required by plumbing code.
2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated,
but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than required by plumbing code.
A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection
must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in
after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to
observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection,
make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction
or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent
piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed
before it was tested.
3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside
leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with
water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes
before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect
joints for leaks.
4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps
filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-
stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into
piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap
of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without
introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture
connections for gas and water leaks.
5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until

3.10 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris
and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
3.11 PROTECTION
A. PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of water-based latex
paint.

SECTION 22 14 13 - FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following storm drainage piping inside the building:
1. Pipe, tube, couplings, and fittings.
2. Cleanouts.
3. Adaptor fittings.
4. Roof drains/overflow drains.
5. Miscellaneous storm drainage piping specialties.
6. Flashing materials.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For pipes, tubes, fittings, couplings, roof drains/overflow drains, trench drains,
cleanouts, and storm drainage piping specialties.
B. Field static head test reports.
B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic
piping components. Include marking with “NSF-DWV” for plastic sanitary and storm drainage
pipe and fittings, "NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Aboveground Piping:
1. Pipe size 1-1/2 inches through 15 inches: Hubless cast iron soil pipe, service weight;
hubless cast iron soil pipe fittings, hubless joints, ASTM A 888; CISPI 301. All cast iron
soil pipe and fittings shall bear the collective mark of the cast iron soil pipe institute.
manufacturer’s recommended torque using a calibrated torque wrench meeting the
requirements of ASTM C 1540 by Clamp-All, Mission, Husky or approved equal.
shall be neoprene and conform to ASTM C 564.
3. Couplings from pipe manufacturer are not acceptable.
Project 16018 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413 - 1

Installation shall be per ASTM D2321 for locations not in communication with the return
air plenum.
B. Underground Piping:
1. Pipe size 2 inches through 15 inches: Cast iron hub and spigot soil pipe service weight;
Cast iron hub and spigot soil pip fittings, ASTM A 74; CISPI 301; compression gasket
joints, ASTM C 564, or lead and oakum joints are acceptable. All cast iron soil pipe and
fittings shall bear the collective mark of the cast iron soil pipe institute.
manufacturer’s recommended torque using a calibrated torque wrench meeting the
requirements of ASTM C 1540 by Clamp-All, Mission or Husky. Couplings shall be
constructed of type 304 stainless steel with 305 Stainless Steel worm drive screws;
4 bands 4 inch and below, 6 bands 5 inch and above. The gasket material shall be
neoprene and conform to ASTM C 564.
3. Couplings from pipe manufacturer are not acceptable.
Installation shall be per ASTM D2321.
2.2 CLEANOUTS
A. Floor: Cast iron, inside caulking, with adjustable nickel-bronze round tops; Josam No. 55000-1.
Provide Josam No. 55000-1-14 carpet marker in carpeted areas. Review Finish Schedule for
locations.
B. Wall: Concealed screw plug with countersunk wrench hole and stainless steel screwed flush
cover and frame; Josam 58600-PLG. Review Finish Schedule for locations.
2.3 ADAPTER FITTINGS
A. Adaptor fittings shall be used where changing from one type of material to another such as:
"DWV" to cast iron soil pipe shall be with an approved brass adapter ferrule and caulk "DWV"
into cast iron hub. Leaded joint against "DWV" copper is not permitted. Cast iron soil pipe to
vitrified tile connection shall be made using ABS "Fernco Donut" gasket.
2.4 ROOF DRAINS/OVERFLOW DRAINS
A. Roof Drains: Comply with ASME A112.3.1.

1. Basis-of-Design: Josam No. 21500-AE-1-22; sizes as indicated.
a. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either named product or
comparable product by one of the following:
1) Mifab
2) Josam, Michigan City, Indiana
3) J. R. Smith, Montgomery, Alabama
4) Zurn, Jamestown, New York
5) Wade
6) Watts Drainage Products, North Andover, Maryland
2. Construction: Cast iron or aluminum body with flange, flashing ring with integral gravel
stop, adjustable extension ring, and noncorrosive clamping units hinged to body, cast
iron, aluminum, or stainless steel mushroom type dome strainer, and deck clamp.

a. Outlet and body dimensions shall be coordinated with plumbing work.

3. Overflow Drain: Drain shall allow for no more than 2 inches of ponded water before it
begins to relieve primary drain. Overflow drain shall use an internal water dam or
external water dam/gravel stop clamping collar. Provide a companion overflow drain,
connected to the building storm water system for every roof drain shown in the
Architectural Roof Plan. Josam No. 21500-AE-1-17-22.
2.5 FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152, 12 oz./sq. ft. thickness.
B. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, with 0.20 percent copper content and 0.04-inch
minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 hot-dip galvanized,
mill-phosphatized finish for painting if indicated.
C. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40-mil minimum
thickness.
D. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.
E. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units
required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.
F. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy.
G. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic.
2.6 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785 and ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.
B. Cellular-Core PVC Pipe: ASTM F 891, Schedule 40.

1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent
patterns and to fit Schedule 40 pipe.
C. Cellular-Core, Sewer and Drain Series, PVC Pipe: ASTM F 891, Series PS 100.
1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent
patterns and to fit Series PS 100 sewer and drain pipe.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work
B. Test storm drainage piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in
absence of published procedures, as follows:

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced storm drainage
piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed
before it was tested.
3. Test Procedure: Test storm drainage piping on completion of roughing-in. Close
openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-
foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection,
water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.
4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until
C. Install cast iron soil piping according to CISPI’s “Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,”
Chapter IV, “Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.”
D. Install plastic pipe below grade in accordance with ASTM D 2321 “Underground Installation of
Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Installations.”
3.2 FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are
required. Join flashing according to the following if required:
1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 6.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch thickness or thicker.
Solder joints of lead sheets 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch thickness or thinner.
2. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheet.
B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors
and roofs with waterproof membrane.
1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches, and
skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe.
2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around sleeve.
3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches
around specialty.
C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.
D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris
and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

SECTION 223400 - FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following fuel-fired water heaters:

1. Power gas water heater.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of water heater indicated. Include rated capacities,
operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.
C. Product Certificates: For each type of commercial and instantaneous water heater, signed by
product manufacturer.
D. Source quality-control test reports.
E. Field quality-control test reports.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For water heaters to include in emergency, operation, and
G. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of water heaters through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of water
heaters and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product
Requirements."
intended use.
D. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1
through 9" for all components that will be in contact with potable water.
Project 16018 FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 223400 - 1

1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with Architectural and Structural Drawings.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty Period(s): From date of Substantial Completion:

1. Provide basis-of-design manufacturer’s standard warranty on parts and labor as a
minimum. Alternate manufacturers from the list of acceptable manufacturers shall
provide their standard warranty for parts and service, but no less than the basis-of-design.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. Lochinvar
2. A.O. Smith
3. Bock
4. LAARS
5. Rheem
6. State
2.2 POWER GAS DOMESTIC WATER HEATER
A. The water heater shall be a high-efficiency, condensing, tank type water heater having a
modulating input rating and recovery capacity as denoted on the Drawings, and shall be
operated on Natural Gas. The water heater shall be capable of full modulation firing down to
20% of rated input with a turn down ratio of 5:1.
B. The water heater shall consist of a direct fired stainless steel heat exchanger mounted on top of
a glass lined storage tank in a fashion that will reduce the amount of scale build-up that is
known to reduce efficiency. The water heater shall have no visible pipes that connect the heat
exchanger to the storage tank. There shall be no banding material, bolts, gaskets or "O" rings in
the header configuration. The stainless steel combustion chamber shall be designed to drain
condensation to the bottom of the heat exchanger assembly. A built-in trap shall allow
condensation to drain from the heat exchanger assembly. The water heater shall carry a three (3)
year warranty.
C. The tank shall be glass lined and fired to 1600°F to ensure a molecular fusing of glass and steel.
The tank shall be completely encased in high density insulation of sufficient thickness to meet
the energy efficiency requirements of the latest edition of the ASHRAE 90.1 Standard. The
tank shall be fitted with a brass drain valve.
D. The water heater shall be certified and listed by C.S.A. International under the latest edition of
the harmonized ANSI Z21.10.3 test standard for the US and Canada . The water heater shall
comply with the energy efficiency requirements of the latest edition of the ASHRAE 90.1
standard. The water heater shall operate at a minimum of 96% thermal efficiency. The water

heater shall be certified for indoor installation. The water heater’s efficiency shall be verified
through third party testing by AHRI and listed in the AHRI Certification Directory.
E. The water heater shall be constructed with a heavy gauge steel jacket assembly, primed and pre-
painted on both sides. The combustion chamber shall be sealed and completely enclosed,
independent of the outer jacket assembly, so that integrity of the outer jacket does not affect a
proper seal. A burner/flame observation port shall be provided. The burner shall be a premix
design and constructed of high temperature stainless steel with a woven metal fiber outer
covering to provide modulating firing rates. The water heater shall be supplied with a gas valve
designed with negative pressure regulation and be equipped with a variable speed blower
system, to precisely control the fuel/air mixture to provide modulating water heater firing rates
for maximum efficiency. The water heater shall operate in a safe condition at a de-rated output
with gas supply pressures as low as 4 inches of water column.
F. The water heater shall utilize a 24 VAC control circuit and components. The control system
shall have an electronic display for water heater set-up, status, and diagnostics. All electronic
circuitry shall be easily accessed and serviceable from the front of the jacket. The water heater
shall be equipped with; an all-bronze circulating pump; high limit temperature control; ASME
certified temperature and pressure relief valve; inlet & outlet water temperature sensors; flue
temperature sensor; runtime contacts; alarm contacts; low water flow protection, contacts for
louvers, security protection, adjustable pump delay, enable/disable contacts and built-in freeze
protection. The manufacturer shall verify proper operation of the burner, all controls and the
heat exchanger by connection to water and venting for a factory fire test prior to shipping.
G. The water heater shall feature a SMART Control with an LCD display with soft key pad, pump
delay with freeze protection and pump exercise. The water heater shall be equipped with an
eight foot power cord. Supply voltage shall be 120 volt / 60 hertz / single phase.
H. The water heater shall be installed and vented with a direct vent vertical system with a vertical
roof top termination of both the vent and combustion air. The flue shall be AL29-4C sealed
vent material terminating at the roof top with the manufacturers specified vent termination. A
separate pipe shall supply combustion air directly to the water heater from the outside. The air
inlet pipe may be insulated galvanized sealed pipe. The air inlet must terminate on the roof top
with the manufacturer’s specified air inlet cap. The water heater’s total combined air intake
length shall not exceed 100 equivalent feet. The water heater’s total combined exhaust venting
length shall not exceed 100 equivalent feet. Foam Core pipe is not an approved material for
exhaust piping.
I. The water heater shall be approved for 140°F operation.
J. The water heater shall have an independent laboratory rating for Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) of
20 ppm or less, corrected to 3% O2.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install and place in operation the water heater system as shown on the Drawings, complete with
piping, supports, circulating pumps, etc., and as recommended by the manufacturer. System
shall meet or exceed state and local codes.

B. Provide shut-off valves and unions entering and leaving heater. In addition, provide for
multiple heaters, balancing valves in entering line with entering and leaving gauges, and
balance for equal flow through each heater.
3.2 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION
A. Install commercial water heaters on concrete bases.

1. Concrete base construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common
Work Results for Plumbing."
B. Install water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and
referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so
controls and devices needing service are accessible.
C. Install gas water heaters according to NFPA 54.
D. Install gas shutoff valves on gas supplies to gas water heaters without shutoff valves.
E. Install gas pressure regulators on gas supplies to gas water heaters without gas pressure
regulators if gas pressure regulators are required to reduce gas pressure at burner.
F. Install automatic gas valves on gas supplies to gas water heaters, if required for operation of
safety control.
G. Install combination temperature and pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use
relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend commercial-water-heater,
relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic water piping in continuous downward
pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.
H. Install water heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open drains or
over floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for water heaters
that do not have tank drains. Refer to Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties"
for hose-end drain valves.
I. Install thermometer on outlet piping of water heaters. Refer to Division 22 Section "Meters and
Gauges for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers.
J. Install pressure gauge(s) on inlet and outlet piping of commercial, fuel-fired water heater
piping. Refer to Division 22 Section "Meters and Gauges for Plumbing Piping" for pressure
gauges.
K. Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of water heater storage tanks without
integral or fitting-type heat traps.
L. Fill water heaters with water.
M. Charge thermal expansion tanks with air.
N. Install condensate neutralization basin on water heater condensate drain.

3.3 CONNECTIONS
B. Install piping adjacent to water heaters to allow service and maintenance. Arrange piping for
easy removal of water heaters.
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
connections. Report results in writing.
B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, confirm proper operation.
equipment.
C. Remove and replace water heaters that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as specified
above.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION

adjust, operate, and maintain instantaneous and commercial water heaters. Refer to Division 01
Section "Demonstration and Training."

SECTION 224000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following conventional plumbing fixtures and related components:
1. Flushometers.
2. Toilet seats.
3. Fixture supports.
4. Water closets.
5. Urinals.
6. Lavatories.
7. Floor service sinks.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of plumbing fixture indicated. Include selected fixture and trim,
fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports. Indicate materials
and finishes, dimensions, construction details, and flow-control rates.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures to include in emergency, operation,
A. Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each category
through one source from a single manufacturer.
1. Exception: If fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a single
manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for that
category.
intended use.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable
Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public
Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; for plumbing fixtures for people with
disabilities.
Project 16018 PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 1

D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy
Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures.
E. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects,"
for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.
F. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are
compatible.
G. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for plumbing
fixtures:
1. Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M.
H. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for lavatory
and sink faucets:
1. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1.
2. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011.
3. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.
4. Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.
5. NSF Potable-Water Materials: NSF 61.
6. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
7. Supply Fittings: ASME A112.18.1.
8. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.
I. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for shower
faucets:
1. Combination, Pressure-Equalizing and Thermostatic-Control Antiscald Faucets:
ASSE 1016.
2. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1.
3. High-Temperature-Limit Controls for Thermal-Shock-Preventing Devices:
ASTM F 445.
5. Manual-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444.
7. Thermostatic-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444 and ASSE 1016.
J. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
miscellaneous fittings:
1. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.
2. Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME A112.18.1.
3. Dishwasher Air-Gap Fittings: ASSE 1021.
4. Manual-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037.
5. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.
K. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
miscellaneous components:
1. Disposers: ASSE 1008 and UL 430.
2. Flexible Water Connectors: ASME A112.18.6.
3. Floor Drains: ASME A112.6.3.

5. Off-Floor Fixture Supports: ASME A112.6.1M.

7. Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5.
8. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Warranty Period for Commercial Applications: One year from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Lavatories
1. American Standard, Kohler, Crane, Eljer, Zurn
2. Trim: Zurn Aquaspec, T & S Brass, Chicago, Speakman
B. Water Closets and Urinals

1. Water Closet and Urinal : American Standard, Kohler, Crane, Eljer, Zurn
2. Flush Valve: Sloan, Zurn
3. Seats: Beneke, Olsonite, Bemis, Church, Centoco
C. Mop Basin
1. Sink: Fiat, Swan, Acron, Mustee
2. Trim: Zurn Aquaspec, T & S Brass, Chicago, Speakman
D. Lavatory, Sink and Water Fountain/Cooler Connections

1. Chicago, American Standard, Kohler, T&S Brass, Zurn
2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Exposed connections and trim to fixtures shall be chromium plated. Trim shall be
chrome-plated brass, unless otherwise specified. Each fixture shall have chrome plated stops in
the supplies and escutcheons at wall.
B. Unless otherwise specified, lavatory and sink connections to include Chicago No. 1017 supply
with 1/2 inch female inlet, 12 inches long, 3/8 inch OD flexible riser and wall flange. Finish to
be polished chromium plate. "P" trap shall be 1-1/2 inches chrome-plate cast brass #8-394 with
cleanout made by Brass Craft Manufacturing Co., Zurn, or McGuire.
C. Flow restriction devices shall be used on plumbing fixtures (other than units used for safety
reasons) to meet the requirements as set forth in the State and Local Building Codes for new
building construction.
D. All handicap fixtures and trim shall meet ADA Requirements. Exposed supplies and trap on all
fixtures with exposed supplies and drain shall be wrapped with insulation equal to Trap Wrap
by Brocar Products, Inc.
E. All fixture and trim screw attachments shall be vandal resistant.

F. Provide offset grid strainer and tailpiece for ADA accessible lavatories and sinks.
G. Provide approved white sealant at all fixtures to wall.
H. Refer to Architectural drawings for sinks that are to be furnished and installed as part of the
casework. This Contractor to provide trim, supplies, stops, escutcheons, plates, traps, and the
like for complete plumbing installation for all plumbing fixtures shown on the Plumbing and
Architectural Drawings. See Equipment Schedules and Drawings for types and locations.
I. All faucets shall be heavy duty and be provided with ceramic disc valving.
J. Refer to Plumbing Fixture Schedule on the Drawings for additional requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify
actual locations of piping connections before plumbing fixture installation.
B. Examine cabinets, counters, floors, and walls for suitable conditions where fixtures will be
installed.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Assemble plumbing fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers'
B. Install off-floor supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounting fixtures.

1. Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet fixtures.
2. Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste piping.
3. Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible fixtures.
C. Install back-outlet, wall-mounting fixtures onto waste fitting seals and attach to supports.
D. Install floor-mounting fixtures on closet flanges or other attachments to piping or building

substrate.
E. Install counter-mounting fixtures in and attached to casework.
F. Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.
G. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water
distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures.
Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.
1. Exception: Use ball valves if supply stops are not specified with fixture. Valves are
specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."
H. Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected to
sanitary drainage system.

I. Install tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture designated to be indirectly connected
to drainage system.
J. Install flushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with handle mounted on wide
side of compartment. Install other actuators in locations that are easy for people with
disabilities to reach.
K. Install toilet seats on water closets.
L. Install traps on fixture outlets.

1. Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps.
2. Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes, unless otherwise indicated.
M. Install escutcheons at piping wall ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within
cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.
N. Set service basins in leveling bed of cement grout. Grout is specified in Division 22 Section
"Common Work Results for Plumbing."
O. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and countertops using sanitary-type, one-part,
mildew-resistant sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color.
P. Supplies and waste shall run in wall wherever practicable.
Q. Pipes shall be jointed to plumbing fixtures with screwed tailpiece couplings and unions so that
fixtures can be easily removed and reset.
R. An escutcheon plate to match the pipe shall be used around waste and supply piping wherever
same passes through floors, walls, or ceilings.
S. Provide adjustable lavatory, urinal, and water closet carriers to support each independently of
wall. Carriers shall be complete with feet and vertical or horizontal style waste fittings to
comply with waste and vent arrangement indicated on the accompanying Drawings and as
required by construction. Supporting feet must be located within wall or in pipe space without
damage to wall face. Manufacturer shall provide suitable template frames for mounting on
carriers before tiling of wall for adjustment.
T. Furnish vacuum breakers on fixtures or equipment having under-rim supply or hose connection,
as furnished or installed under this Contract.
U. Provide sealant on all plumbing fixtures.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
B. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent
piping for all fixtures shown on the Plumbing and Architectural Drawings. Use size fittings
required to match fixtures.

C. Coordinate grounding of equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding

for Electrical Systems."
D. Coordinate wiring connections according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical

Power Conductors and Cables."
A. Check that plumbing fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified
components.
B. Inspect installed plumbing fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
C. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace
malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate
properly.
D. Install fresh batteries in sensor-operated mechanisms.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings,
and controls.
B. Adjust water pressure at faucets and flushometer valves to produce proper flow and stream.
C. Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods
and materials. Do the following:
1. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall strainers
and spouts.
2. Remove sediment and debris from drains.
B. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished fixtures, faucets, and fittings, inspect
exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.

SECTION 224500 - EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following emergency plumbing fixtures:

1. Emergency showers.
2. Eye/face wash equipment.
3. Combination units.
4. Water-tempering equipment.

1. Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for backflow preventers.
2. Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties" for floor drains.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include flow rates and capacities, furnished
specialties, and accessories.
B. Product Certificates: Submit certificates of performance testing specified in "Source Quality

Control" Article.
C. Field quality-control test reports.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For emergency plumbing fixtures to include in maintenance
manuals.
A. ANSI Standard: Comply with ANSI Z358.1, "Emergency Eyewash and Shower Equipment."
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with "Americans with Disabilities Act."
C. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects,"
D. Temperature mixing valve shall meet ASSE 1071.
Project 16018 EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURES 224500 - 1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EMERGENCY SHOWERS AND EYE WASHES – REFER TO PLUMBING FIXTURE

SCHEDULE ON PLUMBING DRAWINGS
A. Emergency Showers:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. Bradley Corporation.
b. Encon Safety Products.
c. Guardian Equipment Co.
d. Haws Corporation.
e. Speakman Company.
f. WaterSaver Faucet Co.
2. Description: Plumbed, single-shower-head horizontal, wall-mounted, emergency shower.
a. Capacity: Deliver tepid water at rate not less than 20 gpm for at least 15 minutes,
minimum.
b. Supply Piping: 1-1/4 copper with stay-open control valve.
c. Control-Valve Actuator: Pull rod.
d. Shower Head: 8-inch minimum diameter, stainless steel.
2.2 EYEWASH EQUIPMENT – REFER TO PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE ON

PLUMBING DRAWINGS
A. Emergency Eyewash:
following:
2. Description: Plumbed, accessible, wall-mounted eye and face wash equipment with
receptor and wall bracket.
a. Capacity: Deliver tepid water at rate not less than 0.4 gpm for at least 15 minutes.
b. Supply Piping: 1/2" inch copper (concealed) with stay-open control valve.
c. Counter-top mounted, behind sink.
d. Control-Valve Actuator: Swing down from storage position.
e. Construction: Chrome plated brass
2.3 COMBINATION SHOWER/EYE WASH UNITS – REFER TO PLUMBING FIXTURE

SCHEDULE ON PLUMBING DRAWINGS
A. Combination Shower/Eyewash Units

following:

2. Description: Plumbed, freestanding, emergency shower and eye/face wash equipment.
3. Description: Plumbed, accessible, eyewash bowl, push paddle, and pull rod actuator.
a. Unit Supply: 1-1/4 inch minimum
b. Unit Drain: Outlet at side near bottom. Extend over to floor drain.
c. Shower Capacity: Deliver potable water at rate not less than 20 gpm for at least
15 minutes.
1) Control-Valve Actuator: Pull rod.
2) Shower Head: 8 inch minimum diameter, stainless steel.
d. Eyewash Equipment: With capacity to deliver tepid water at rate not less than 0.4
gpm for at least 15 minutes.
1) Control-Valve Actuator: Paddle.
2) Receptor: Stainless Steel.
2.4 EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE – REFER TO

PLUMBING EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE ON PLUMBING DRAWINGS
A. Emergency Equipment Thermostatic Mixing Valve:

following:
b. Lawler Manufacturing Co., Inc.
c. Leonard Valve Company.
d. Powers, a Watts Industries Co.
2. Description: Factory-fabricated, hot and cold water-tempering equipment with
thermostatic mixing valve.
a. Thermostatic Mixing Valve: Designed to provide 85 deg F tepid, potable water at
emergency plumbing fixtures, to maintain temperature at plus or minus 5 deg F
throughout required 15-minute test period, and in case of unit failure to continue
cold-water flow, with union connections, controls, metal piping, and corrosion-
resistant enclosure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for water and waste piping systems to verify actual locations of piping
connections before plumbed emergency plumbing fixture installation.
3.2 EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURE INSTALLATION
A. Assemble emergency plumbing fixture piping, fittings, control valves, and other components.

B. Install fixtures level and plumb.
C. Fasten fixtures to substrate.
D. Install shutoff valves in water-supply piping to fixtures. Use ball, gate, or globe valve if
specific type valve is not indicated. Install valves chained or locked in open position if
permitted. Install valves in locations where they can easily be reached for operation. Valves
are specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."
E. Install dielectric fitting in supply piping to fixture if piping and fixture connections are made of
different metals. Dielectric fittings are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work
F. Install thermometers in outlet piping connections to water-tempering equipment. Thermometers

are specified in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gauges for Plumbing Piping."
G. Install trap and waste to wall on drain outlet of fixture receptors that are indicated to be directly
connected to drainage system.
H. Install indirect waste piping to wall on drain outlet of fixture receptors that are indicated to be
indirectly connected to drainage system. Drainage piping is specified in Division 22 Section
"Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."
I. Install escutcheons on piping wall and ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations.
Escutcheons are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."
J. Install equipment nameplates or equipment markers on fixtures and equipment signs on water-
tempering equipment. Identification materials are specified in Division 22 Section
"Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
3.3 CONNECTIONS
B. Connect cold-water-supply piping to plumbed emergency plumbing fixtures not having water-
tempering equipment.
C. Connect hot and cold water supply piping to hot and cold water-tempering equipment. Connect
output from water-tempering equipment to emergency plumbing fixtures.
D. Directly connect emergency plumbing fixture receptors with trapped drain outlet to sanitary
drainage and vent piping.
E. Indirectly connect emergency plumbing fixture receptors without trapped drain outlet to
sanitary drainage piping.

A. Mechanical-Component Testing: After plumbing connections have been made, test for
compliance with requirements. Verify ability to achieve indicated capacities and temperatures.
B. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or replacements
are made.
C. Report test results in writing.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust equipment temperature settings.

SECTION 224700 - DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following drinking fountains and water coolers and related
components:
1. Drinking water coolers.
2. Fixture supports.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each fixture indicated. Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and
accessories.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and
intended use.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in "Americans with Disabilities Act."
C. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects,"
D. ARI Standard: Comply with ARI's "Directory of Certified Drinking Water Coolers" for style
classifications.
E. ARI Standard: Comply with ARI 1010, "Self-Contained, Mechanically Refrigerated Drinking-
Water Coolers," for water coolers and with ARI's "Directory of Certified Drinking Water
Coolers" for type and style classifications.
F. ASHRAE Standard: Comply with ASHRAE 34, "Designation and Safety Classification of
Refrigerants," for water coolers. Provide HFC 134a (tetrafluoroethane) refrigerant, unless
Project 16018 DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS 2247000 - 1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DRINKING WATER COOLERS – REFER TO PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE ON

PLUMBING DRAWINGS
A. Drinking Water Coolers

1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the following:
a. Acorn
b. Elkay Manufacturing Co.
c. Halsey Taylor.
e. Oasis Corporation.
2.2 FIXTURE SUPPORTS

following:
1. Josam Co.
2. MIFAB Manufacturing, Inc.
3. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.
4. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
5. Watts Drainage Products Inc.; a div. of Watts Industries, Inc.
6. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
B. Description: ASME A112.6.1M, water cooler carriers. Include vertical, steel uprights with feet
and tie rods and bearing plates with mounting studs matching fixture to be supported.
1. Supports for Accessible Fixtures: Include rectangular, vertical, steel uprights instead of
steel pipe uprights.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for water and waste piping systems to verify actual locations of piping
connections before fixture installation. Verify that sizes and locations of piping and types of
supports match those indicated.
B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed.
3.2 APPLICATIONS
A. Use carrier supports for wall-mounting fixtures, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Use chrome-plated brass or copper tube, fittings, and valves in locations exposed to view. Plain
copper tube, fittings, and valves may be used in concealed locations.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install fixtures level and plumb. For fixtures indicated for children, install at height required by
B. Install water-supply piping with shutoff valve on supply to each fixture to be connected to water
distribution piping. Use ball valve. Install valves in locations where they can be easily reached
for operation. Valves are specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing
Piping."
C. Install trap and waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be connected to sanitary drainage
system.
D. Install pipe escutcheons at wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use deep-pattern
escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe fittings. Escutcheons are specified in
Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."
E. Seal joints between fixtures and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant,
silicone sealant, as approved by A/E (white). Match sealant color to fixture color. Sealants are
specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
3.4 CONNECTIONS
B. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent
piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.
A. Water Cooler Testing: After electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with
requirements. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
1. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust fixture flow regulators for proper flow and stream height.
3.7 CLEANING
A. After completing fixture installation, inspect unit. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt,
and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.
B. Clean fixtures, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

SECTION 226113 - COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING FOR LABORATORY AND HEALTHCARE

FACILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Compressed-air piping and specialties for nonmedical laboratory facilities, designated

"laboratory air," operating at 50 psig.
1. Division 11 Section "Laboratory Fume Hoods" for compressed-air outlets in laboratory

fume hoods.
2. Division 12 Section "Laboratory Casework" for compressed-air outlets in casework.
3. Division 22 Section "Compressed-Air Equipment for Laboratory and Healthcare
Facilities" for laboratory air compressors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1. Compressed-air tubes and fittings.

2. Compressed-air valves.
C. Piping Material Certification: Signed by Installer certifying that medical compressed-air piping
materials comply with NFPA 99 requirements.
D. Qualification Data: For Installer and testing agency.
E. Brazing certificates.
F. Field quality-control test reports.
G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For compressed-air piping specialties to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
Project 16018 COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING FOR LABORATORY AND 226113 - 1

AIA/MCS HEALTHCARE FACILITIES March 3, 2017
1. Compressed-Air Piping Systems for Laboratory Facilities: Qualify installers according to

ASSE Standard #6010.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, with the experience and
capability to conduct the vacuum piping testing indicated, that is a member of the Medical Gas
Professional Healthcare Organization or is an NRTL, and that is acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1. Qualify testing personnel according to ASSE Standard #6020 for inspectors and
ASSE Standard #6030 for verifiers.
C. Brazing: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications," or AWS B2.2, "Standard for Brazing
Procedure and Performance Qualification."
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
intended use.
E. ASME Compliance:
1. Comply with ASME B31.1, "Power Piping," for laboratory compressed-air piping
operating at more than 150 psig.
2. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for laboratory compressed-air
piping operating at 150 psig or less.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate compressed-air service connections with other service connections. Vacuum service
connections are specified in Division 22 Section "Vacuum Piping for Laboratory and
Healthcare Facilities."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Copper Medical Gas Tube: ASTM B 819, Types K and L, seamless, drawn temper, that has
been manufacturer cleaned, purged, and sealed for medical gas service or according to CGA G-
4.1 for oxygen service. Include standard color marking "AIR" in green for Type K tube and in
blue for Type L tube.
1. General Requirements for Copper Fittings: Manufacturer cleaned, purged, and bagged
for oxygen service according to CGA G-4.1.

2. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, solder-joint pressure type or MSS SP-73, with
dimensions for brazed joints.
3. Copper Unions: ASME B16.22 or MSS SP-123, wrought copper or cast-copper alloy.
B. Copper Water Tube: ASTM B 88, Type M, seamless, drawn temper.
1. Copper Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper or ASME B16.22, wrought-copper, solder-

joint pressure type.
A. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-
duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.
B. Threaded-Joint Tape: PTFE.
2.3 VALVES
A. General Requirements for Valves: Manufacturer cleaned, purged, and bagged according to
CGA G-4.1 for oxygen service.
B. Ball Valves: MSS SP-110, 3-piece body, brass or bronze.

following:
a. Allied Healthcare Products, Inc.; Chemetron Div.

b. Allied Healthcare Products, Inc.; Oxequip Health Industries.
c. Amico Corporation.
d. BeaconMedaes.
e. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
f. NIBCO INC.
g. Squire-Cogswell/Aeros Instruments, Inc.
h. Tri-Tech Medical.
2. Pressure Rating: 300 psig minimum.

3. Ball: Full-port, chrome-plated brass.
4. Seats: PTFE or TFE.
5. Handle: Lever type.
6. Stem: Blowout proof with PTFE or TFE seal.
7. Ends: Manufacturer-installed ASTM B 819, copper-tube extensions.
C. Check Valves: In-line pattern, bronze.

following:

b. Amico Corporation.
c. BeaconMedaes.
d. Conbraco Industries, Inc.

e. Squire-Cogswell/Aeros Instruments, Inc.
f. Tri-Tech Medical.

3. Operation: Spring loaded.
D. Zone Valves: MSS SP-110, 3-piece-body, brass or bronze ball valve with gage.
following:

d. BeaconMedaes.

8. Pressure Gage: Manufacturer installed on one copper-tube extension.
E. Safety Valves: Bronze-body, ASME-construction, poppet, pressure-relief type with settings to

match system requirements.
F. Pressure Regulators: Bronze body and trim; spring-loaded, diaphragm-operated relieving type;
manual pressure-setting adjustment; rated for 250-psig minimum inlet pressure; and capable of
controlling delivered air pressure within 0.5 psig for each 10-psig inlet pressure.
G. Automatic Drain Valves: Stainless-steel body and internal parts, rated for 200-psig minimum
working pressure, capable of automatic discharge of collected condensate. Include mounting
bracket where wall mounting is indicated.
2.4 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS

following:
1. Flex-Hose Co., Inc.

2. Flexicraft Industries.
3. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
4. Mercer Rubber Co.
5. Metraflex, Inc.
6. Proco Products, Inc.
7. Unaflex.
8. Universal Metal Hose; a Hyspan Co.
B. Description: Corrugated-bronze tubing with bronze wire-braid covering and ends brazed to
inner tubing.
1. Working-Pressure Rating: 200 psig minimum.

2. End Connections: Threaded copper pipe or plain-end copper tube.
2.5 SLEEVES
longitudinal joint.
B. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include
clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
2.6 ESCUTCHEONS
A. General Requirements for Escutcheons: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor
plates, with ID to closely fit around pipe and tube and OD that completely covers opening.
B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Escutcheons: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-

plated finish.
C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Escutcheons: With set screw.
D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Escutcheons: With concealed hinge and set screw.
E. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Escutcheons: With set screw or spring clips and chrome-plated
finish.
F. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Escutcheons: With concealed-rivet hinge, set screw or spring clips,
and chrome-plated finish.
2.7 NITROGEN
A. Description: Comply with USP 28 - NF 23 for oil-free dry nitrogen.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Cleaning of Medical Gas Tubing: If manufacturer-cleaned and -capped fittings or tubing are
not available or if precleaned fittings or tubing must be recleaned because of exposure, have
supplier or separate agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction perform the following
procedures:
1. Clean medical gas tube and fittings, valves, gages, and other components of oil, grease,
and other readily oxidizable materials as required for oxygen service according to
CGA G-4.1, "Cleaning Equipment for Oxygen Service."
2. Wash medical gas tubing and components in hot, alkaline-cleaner-water solution of
sodium carbonate or trisodium phosphate in proportion of 1 lb of chemical to 3 gal. of
water.
a. Scrub to ensure complete cleaning.

b. Rinse with clean, hot water to remove cleaning solution.
A. Connect new tubing to existing tubing with memory-metal couplings.
B. Laboratory Air Piping: Use one of the following piping materials for each size range:
1. NPS 4 and Smaller: Type L, copper medical gas tube; wrought-copper fittings; and
brazed joints.
C. Drain Piping: Use one of the following piping materials:
1. Copper water tube, cast- or wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints.
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of
compressed-air piping. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and
calculate friction loss, expansion, air-compressor sizing, and other design considerations.
Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
B. Comply with ASSE Standard #6010 for installation of compressed-air piping.
C. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants
unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal and
coordinate with other services occupying that space.
F. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance.
G. Install air and drain piping with 1 percent slope downward in direction of flow.
H. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings same as or higher than
system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.
I. Install eccentric reducers, if available, where compressed-air piping is reduced in direction of

flow, with bottoms of both pipes and reducer fitting flush.
J. Install branch connections to compressed-air mains from top of main. Provide drain leg and
drain trap at end of each main and branch and at low points.
K. Install thermometer and pressure gage on discharge piping from each air compressor and on
each receiver. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for
Plumbing Piping."
L. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
M. Install piping free of sags and bends.
N. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
O. Install compressed-air piping to compressed-air service connections specified in this Section

and to equipment specified in other Sections requiring compressed-air service.
P. Install compressed-air service connections recessed in walls. Attach roughing-in assembly to

substrate; attach finishing assembly to roughing-in assembly.
Q. Connect compressed-air piping to air compressors and to compressed-air outlets and equipment
requiring compressed-air service.
R. Install unions in copper compressed-air tubing adjacent to each valve and at final connection to
each piece of equipment, machine, and specialty.
A. Install shutoff valve at each connection to and from compressed-air equipment and specialties.
B. Install check valves to maintain correct direction of compressed-air flow from compressed-air
equipment.
C. Install safety valves on compressed-air receivers where required by NFPA 99 and where
recommended by specialty manufacturers.
D. Install pressure regulators on compressed-air piping where reduced pressure is required.

E. Install automatic drain valves on equipment, specialties, and piping with drain connection. Run
drain piping to floor drain so contents spill over or into it.
F. Install flexible pipe connectors in discharge piping and in inlet air piping from remote air-inlet
filter of each air compressor.
A. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from outside of cleaned tubing and fittings before assembly.
B. Threaded Joints: Apply appropriate tape to external pipe threads.
C. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook,"
"Brazed Joints" Chapter. Continuously purge joint with oil-free dry nitrogen during brazing.
D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to tube end. Join copper tube and
fittings according to ASTM B 828.
3.6 SLEEVE INSTALLATION
A. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
B. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.
C. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof
slabs using galvanized-steel pipe.
1. Wall Penetrations: Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
D. Install sleeves in walls as new walls are constructed.
E. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and
pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:
1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6.
F. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors
3.7 ESCUTCHEON INSTALLATION
A. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:
1. New Piping:
a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One piece, deep pattern.

b. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece, cast
brass with polished chrome-plated finish, stamped steel with set screw, stamped
steel with set screw or spring clips, or stamped steel with spring clips.
c. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece, cast brass with
polished chrome-plated finish, stamped steel with set screw, stamped steel with set
screw or spring clips, or stamped steel with spring clips.
d. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One piece, cast brass with polished
chrome-plated finish, stamped steel with set screw, stamped steel with set screw or
spring clips, or stamped steel with spring clips.
e. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One piece, cast brass with polished chrome-
plated finish, stamped steel with set screw, stamped steel with set screw or spring
clips, or stamped steel with spring clips.
A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping
and Equipment" for pipe hanger and support devices.
B. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps.
C. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:
1. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel, clevis hangers.
D. Support horizontal piping within 12 inches of each fitting and coupling.
E. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
1. NPS 1/4: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

2. NPS 3/8 and NPS 1/2: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
4. NPS 1: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
5. NPS 1-1/4: 108 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
6. NPS 1-1/2: 10 feet with 3/8-inch rod.
7. NPS 2: 11 feet with 3/8-inch rod.
13. NPS 6: 20 feet) with 5/8-inch rod.
F. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.

A. Install identifying labels and devices for nonmedical laboratory compressed-air piping, valves,
and specialties. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing
Piping and Equipment."
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL FOR COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING IN NONMEDICAL

LABORATORY FACILITIES
A. Testing Agency: Engage qualified testing agency to perform field tests and inspections of
compressed-air piping in nonmedical laboratory facilities and prepare test reports.
B. Perform tests and inspections of compressed-air piping in nonmedical laboratory facilities and
prepare test reports.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Piping Leak Tests for Compressed-Air Piping: Test new and modified parts of existing
piping. Cap and fill general-service compressed-air piping with oil-free dry nitrogen to
pressure of 50 psig above system operating pressure, but not less than 150 psig. Isolate
test source and let stand for four hours to equalize temperature. Refill system, if required,
to test pressure; hold for two hours with no drop in pressure.
2. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
3. Inspect filters and pressure regulators for proper operation.

SECTION 226119 - COMPRESSED-AIR EQUIPMENT FOR LABORATORY AND HEALTHCARE

FACILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Packaged, oil-free scroll air compressors.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Actual Air: Air delivered at air-compressor outlet. Flow rate is compressed air delivered and
measured in acfm.
B. Laboratory Air Equipment: Compressed-air equipment and accessories for nonmedical

laboratory facilities.
C. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or
for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits.
D. Standard Air: Free air at 68 deg F and 1 atmosphere before compression or expansion and
measured in scfm.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating
characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.
1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
B. Field quality-control reports.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For compressed-air equipment to include in operation and
Project 16018 COMPRESSED-AIR EQUIPMENT FOR LABORATORY 226119 - 1

AIA/MCS AND HEALTHCARE FACILITIES March 3, 2017
1. Laboratory Air System Equipment for Nonmedical Laboratory Facilities: An employer

of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.
2. Qualify installers according to ASSE 6010.
capability to conduct the compressed-air equipment testing indicated, that is a member of the
Medical Gas Professional Healthcare Organization or is an NRTL and that is acceptable to
1. Qualify testing personnel according to ASSE 6020 for inspectors and ASSE 6030 for
verifiers.
D. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label receivers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with equipment provided.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Air-Compressor, Inlet-Air Filter Elements: 2 units.

2. Belts: One for each belt-driven compressor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PACKAGED AIR COMPRESSORS
A. Description: Factory-assembled, -wired, -piped, and -tested; electric-motor-driven; air-cooled;

continuous-duty air compressors with remote receivers that deliver air of quality equal to intake
air.
B. Control Panels: Automatic control station with load control and protection functions. Comply
with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508.
1. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, Type 12 control panel unless otherwise indicated.

2. Motor Controllers: Full-voltage, combination-magnetic type with undervoltage release

feature and motor-circuit-protector-type disconnecting means and short-circuit protective
device.
3. Control Voltage: 120-V ac or less, using integral control power transformer.
4. Motor Overload Protection: Overload relay in each phase.
5. Starting Devices: Hand-off-automatic selector switch in cover of control panel, plus pilot
device for automatic control.
6. Automatic control switches to alternate lead-lag air compressors for duplex and sequence
lead-lag air compressors for multiplex air compressors.
7. Instrumentation: Include discharge-air and receiver pressure gages, air-filter maintenance
indicator, hour meter, air-compressor discharge-air and coolant temperature gages, and
control transformer.
8. Alarm Signal Device: For connection to alarm system to indicate when backup air
compressor is operating.
C. Receivers: Steel tank constructed according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
Section VIII, Division 1.
1. Pressure Rating: At least as high as highest discharge pressure of connected air

compressors and bearing appropriate code symbols.
2. Interior Finish: Corrosion-resistant coating.
3. Accessories: Include safety valve, pressure gage, automatic drain, and pressure regulator.
D. Mounting Frame: Fabricate base and attachment to pressure vessel with reinforcement strong
enough to resist packaged equipment movement during a seismic event when base is anchored
to building structure.
2.2 PACKAGED, OIL-FREE SCROLL AIR COMPRESSORS

following:
1. Atlas Copco.
2. California Air Tools.
3. CompAir, Ltd.
4. Ingersoll-Rand.
5. Gardner Denver.
6. Gardner Denver; Champion Pneumatic.
7. Quincy Compressor.
B. Description: Base-mounted unit with remote receiver.
C. Air Compressor(s): Single- or Multi-stage, oil-free, scroll type of construction that prohibits oil
from entering compression chamber.
1. Cooling/Lubrication System: Unit-mounted, air-cooled exchanger package pre-piped to

unit; with air-pressure circulation system with coolant stop valve, full-flow coolant filter,
and thermal-bypass valve.
2. Air Filter: Dry type, with maintenance indicator and cleanable replaceable filter element.
3. Air/Coolant Receiver and Separation System: 150-psig-rated steel tank with ASME
safety valve, coolant-level gage, multistage air-coolant separator element, minimum
pressure valve, blowdown valve, discharge check valve, coolant stop valve, full-flow
coolant filter, and thermal-bypass valve.
4. Capacity Control: Capacity modulation between 0 and 100 percent air delivery, with
operating pressures between 50 and 100 psig. Include necessary control to hold constant
pressure. When air demand is zero, unload compressor by using pressure switch and
blowdown valve.
5. Mounting: Freestanding.
D. Sound-attenuation enclosure.
E. Integrated refrigerated or desiccant air dryer.
2.3 MOTORS
A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and
efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 22 Section "Common Motor
Requirements for Plumbing Equipment."
1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load
will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical
devices and connections specified in Division 26 Sections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean compressed-air equipment, accessories, and components that have not been cleaned for
oxygen service and sealed or that are furnished unsuitable for laboratory air applications,
according to CGA G-4.1, "Cleaning Equipment for Oxygen Service."
3.2 COMPRESSED-AIR EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. General Requirements for Compressed-Air Equipment Installation:
1. Install compressed-air equipment to allow maximum headroom unless specific mounting

heights are indicated.
2. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems
and components in exposed interior spaces unless otherwise indicated.
3. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement
of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum
interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
4. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
5. Install the following devices on compressed-air equipment:
a. Thermometer, Pressure Gage, and Safety Valve: Install on each compressed-air

receiver.
b. Pressure Regulators: Install downstream from air compressors, dryers, purification
units, and filter assemblies.
c. Drain Valves: Install on aftercoolers, receivers, and dryers. Discharge condensate
over nearest floor drain.
B. Nonmedical Laboratory Compressed-Air Equipment Installation:
1. Install compressed-air equipment on concrete bases. Install units anchored to substrate in

locations indicated. Maintain manufacturers' recommended clearances. Orient
equipment so controls and devices are accessible for servicing.
a. Anchor equipment to concrete bases according to manufacturer's written

instructions.
1) For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend

through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
2) Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates,
diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
3) Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported
equipment.
b. Vibration Isolation: Install vibration isolation mounts as recommended by unit

manufacturer.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements for water-supply piping specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic
Water Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Comply with requirements for drain piping specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste
and Vent Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
C. Comply with requirements for compressed-air piping specified in Division 22 Section

"Compressed-Air Piping for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities." Drawings indicate general
arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
D. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
E. Connect compressed-air piping to compressed-air equipment, accessories, and specialties with

shutoff valve and union or flanged connection.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify nonmedical laboratory compressed-air equipment system components. Comply with

requirements for identification specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL FOR LABORATORY COMPRESSED-AIR EQUIPMENT
B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,

test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
1. Compressed-Air Equipment Testing Coordination: Perform tests, inspections,

verifications, and certification of medical compressed-air equipment concurrently with
tests, inspections, and certification of Laboratory compressed-air piping systems.
2. Preparation: Perform medical compressed-air equipment tests according to requirements
in NFPA 99 for the following:
a. Air-quality purity test.

b. System operation test.
3. Equipment Verification: Comply with requirements in ASSE 6020, ASSE 6030, and
NFPA 99 for verification of medical compressed-air equipment.
4. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
5. Testing Certification: Certify that specified tests, inspections, and procedures have been
performed and certify report results. Include the following:
a. Inspections performed.
b. Procedures, materials, and gases used.
c. Test methods used.
d. Results of tests.
E. Components will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
3.6 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Check for lubricating oil in lubricated-type equipment.
3. Check belt drives for proper tension.
4. Verify that air-compressor inlet filters and piping are clear.
5. Check for equipment vibration-control supports and flexible pipe connectors and verify
that equipment is properly attached to substrate.
6. Check safety valves for correct settings. Ensure that settings are higher than air-
compressor discharge pressure but not higher than rating of system components.
7. Check for proper seismic restraints.
8. Drain receiver tanks.
9. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation.
10. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION

adjust, operate, and maintain air compressors, compressed-air dryers, filters, etc.

SECTION 226213 - VACUUM PIPING FOR LABORATORY AND HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Laboratory low-vacuum piping and specialties, designated "laboratory low vacuum"

operating at 19 inches mercury.
1. Division 11 Section "Laboratory Fume Hoods" for vacuum outlets in laboratory fume
hoods.
2. Division 12 Section "Laboratory Casework" for vacuum outlets in casework.
3. Division 22 Section "Vacuum Equipment for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities" for
laboratory vacuum producers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1. Vacuum pipes, tubes, and fittings.

2. Vacuum valves.
C. Piping Material Certification: Signed by Installer certifying that medical vacuum piping
materials comply with NFPA 99 requirements.
D. Qualification Data: For Installer and testing agency.
E. Brazing certificates.
F. Field quality-control test reports.
G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For vacuum piping specialties to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
Project 16018 VACUUM PIPING FOR LABORATORY AND 226213 - 1

1. Medical Vacuum Piping Systems for Laboratory Facilities: Qualify installers according
to ASSE Standard #6010.
2. Extruded-Tee Outlet Procedure: Qualify operators according to training provided by T-
DRILL Industries Inc., for making branch outlets.
capability to conduct the vacuum piping testing indicated, that is a member of the Medical Gas
Professional Healthcare Organization or is an NRTL, and that is acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1. Qualify testing personnel according to ASSE Standard #6020 for inspectors and
ASSE Standard #6030 for verifiers.
C. Brazing: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications," or AWS B2.2, "Standard for Brazing
Procedure and Performance Qualification."
intended use.
E. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for vacuum piping in laboratory
facilities.
F. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 99, "Health Care Facilities," for medical vacuum
system materials and installation in healthcare facilities.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate medical vacuum service connections with other service connections. Medical
compressed-air service connections are specified in Division 22 Section "Compressed-Air
Piping for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Copper Medical Gas Tube: ASTM B 819, Type L, seamless, drawn temper that has been
manufacturer cleaned, purged, and sealed for medical gas service or according to CGA G-4.1
for oxygen service. Include standard color marking "VAC." in blue.
1. General Requirements for Copper Fittings: Manufacturer cleaned, purged, and bagged
for oxygen service according to CGA G-4.1.

2. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, solder-joint pressure type or MSS SP-73, with
dimensions for brazed joints.
B. Copper Water Tube: ASTM B 88, Type M, seamless, drawn temper.
1. Cast-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.18, solder-joint pressure type.

2. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, solder-joint pressure type.
3. Cast-Copper-Alloy Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150.
C. Extruded-Tee Outlets: ASTM F 2014 procedure for making branch outlets in copper tube.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering procedure that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide procedure according
to one of the following:
a. T-DRILL Industries Inc.
A. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-
duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.
B. Threaded-Joint Tape: PTFE.
C. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch

maximum thickness, full-face type.
D. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel.
2.3 VALVES
A. General Requirements for Valves: Manufacturer cleaned, purged, and bagged according to
CGA G-4.1 for oxygen service.
1. Exception: Factory cleaning and bagging are not required for valves for WAGD service.
B. Copper-Alloy Ball Valves: MSS SP-110, 3-piece body, brass or bronze.

following:

d. BeaconMedaes.

e. Conbraco Industries, Inc.

f. NIBCO INC.
g. Squire-Cogswell/Aeros Instruments, Inc.
h. Tri-Tech Medical.

C. Bronze Check Valves: In-line pattern.

following:

b. Amico Corporation.
c. BeaconMedaes.
d. Conbraco Industries, Inc.

3. Operation: Spring loaded.
D. Zone Valves: MSS SP-110, 3-piece-body, brass or bronze ball valve with gage.
following:

d. BeaconMedaes.

5. Handle: Lever type
8. Vacuum Gage: Manufacturer installed on one copper-tube extension.

2.4 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS

following:
1. Flex-Hose Co., Inc.

2. Flexicraft Industries.
3. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
4. Mercer Rubber Co.
5. Metraflex, Inc.
6. Proco Products, Inc.
7. Unaflex.
8. Universal Metal Hose; a Hyspan Co.
B. Description: Corrugated-bronze tubing with bronze wire-braid covering and ends brazed to
inner tubing.
1. Working-Pressure Rating: 200 psig minimum.

2. End Connections: Threaded copper pipe or plain-end copper tube.
2.5 SLEEVES
longitudinal joint.
B. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include
2.6 ESCUTCHEONS
B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Escutcheons: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-

plated finish.
C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Escutcheons: With set screw.
D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Escutcheons: With concealed hinge and set screw.
E. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Escutcheons: With set screw or spring clips and chrome-plated
finish.

F. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Escutcheons: With concealed-rivet hinge, set screw or spring clips,
and chrome-plated finish.
2.7 NITROGEN
A. Description: Comply with USP 28 - NF 23 for oil-free dry nitrogen.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Cleaning of Medical Gas Tubing: If manufacturer-cleaned and -capped fittings or tubing are
not available or if precleaned fittings or tubing must be recleaned because of exposure, have
supplier or separate agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction perform the following
procedures:
1. Clean medical gas tube and fittings, valves, gages, and other components of oil, grease,
and other readily oxidizable materials as required for oxygen service according to
CGA G-4.1, "Cleaning Equipment for Oxygen Service."
2. Wash medical gas tubing and components in hot, alkaline-cleaner-water solution of
sodium carbonate or trisodium phosphate in proportion of 1 lb of chemical to 3 gal. of
water.
a. Scrub to ensure complete cleaning.

b. Rinse with clean, hot water to remove cleaning solution.
A. Connect new copper tubing to existing tubing with memory-metal couplings.
B. Nonhealthcare Laboratory Low Vacuum Piping: Use one of the following piping materials for
each size range:
1. NPS 4 and Smaller: Type L, copper medical gas tube; wrought-copper fittings; and
brazed joints.
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of vacuum
piping. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,
expansion, air-compressor sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated
unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
B. Comply with ASSE Standard #6010 for installation of vacuum piping.

C. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants
unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
otherwise.
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal and
coordinate with other services occupying that space.
F. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance.
G. Install vacuum and drain piping with 1 percent slope downward in direction of flow.
H. Install nipples, unions, and special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings same as or higher
than piping pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.
I. Install eccentric reducers, if available, where vacuum piping is reduced in direction of flow,
with bottoms of both pipes and reducer fitting flush.
J. Provide drain leg and drain trap at end of each main and branch and at low points.
K. Install thermometer and vacuum gage on inlet piping to each vacuum producer and on each
receiver and separator. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages
for Plumbing Piping."
L. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
M. Install piping free of sags and bends.
N. Install fittings for changes in direction and for branch connections. Extruded-tee branch outlets
in copper tubing may be made where specified.
O. Install medical vacuum piping to medical vacuum service connections specified in this Section
and to equipment specified in other Sections requiring medical vacuum service.
P. Install medical vacuum service connections recessed in walls. Attach roughing-in assembly to
substrate; attach finishing assembly to roughing-in assembly.
Q. Connect vacuum piping to vacuum producers and to equipment requiring vacuum service.
R. Install unions, in copper vacuum tubing adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each
piece of equipment, machine, and specialty.
A. Valves for Copper Vacuum Tubing: Use copper alloy ball and bronze check types.

A. Install shutoff valve at each connection to and from vacuum equipment and specialties.
B. Install check valves to maintain correct direction of vacuum flow to vacuum-producing

equipment.
C. Install safety valves on vacuum receivers, where required by NFPA 99, and where
recommended by specialty manufacturers.
D. Install automatic drain valves on equipment, specialties, and piping with drain connection. Run
drain piping to floor drain, so contents spill over or into it.
E. Install flexible pipe connectors in suction inlet piping to each vacuum producer.
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from outside of cleaned tubing and fittings before assembly.
assembly.
D. Threaded Joints: Apply appropriate tape to external pipe threads.
E. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook,"
"Brazed Joints" Chapter. Continuously purge joint with oil-free dry nitrogen during brazing.
F. Extruded-Tee Outlets: Form branches in copper tube according to ASTM F 2014, with tools
recommended by procedure manufacture.
G. Flanged Joints:
1. Copper Tubing: Install flange on copper tubes. Use pipe-flange gasket between flanges.
Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9 for bolting procedure.
3.7 SLEEVE INSTALLATION
A. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
B. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.
C. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof
slabs using galvanized-steel pipe.
1. Wall Penetrations: Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
D. Install sleeves in walls as new walls are constructed.

E. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and
pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:
1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6.
F. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors
3.8 ESCUTCHEON INSTALLATION
A. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:
1. New Piping:
a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One piece, deep pattern.
b. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece, cast
brass with polished chrome-plated finish, stamped steel with set screw, stamped
steel with set screw or spring clips, or stamped steel with spring clips.
c. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece, cast brass with
polished chrome-plated finish, stamped steel with set screw, stamped steel with set
screw or spring clips, or stamped steel with spring clips.
d. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One piece, cast brass with polished
chrome-plated finish, stamped steel with set screw, stamped steel with set screw or
spring clips, or stamped steel with spring clips.
e. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One piece, cast brass with polished chrome-
plated finish, stamped steel with set screw, stamped steel with set screw or spring
clips, or stamped steel with spring clips.
A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping
and Equipment" for pipe hanger and support devices.
B. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps.
C. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:
1. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel, clevis hangers.
D. Support horizontal piping within 12 inches of each fitting and coupling.
E. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:

2. NPS 3/8 and NPS 1/2: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
4. NPS 1: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

5. NPS 1-1/4: 108 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
13. NPS 6: 20 feet) with 5/8-inch rod.
F. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.
A. Install identifying labels and devices for laboratory vacuum piping, valves, and specialties.
Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment."
3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL FOR LABORATORY FACILITY NONMEDICAL VACUUM

PIPING
A. Testing Agency: Engage qualified testing agency to perform field tests and inspections of
vacuum piping in nonmedical laboratory facilities.
B. Perform tests and inspections of vacuum piping in nonmedical laboratory facilities.
1. Piping Leak Tests for Vacuum Piping: Test new and modified parts of existing piping.
Cap and fill vacuum piping with oil-free, dry nitrogen. Isolate test source and let stand
for four hours to equalize temperature. Refill system, if required, to test pressure; hold
for two hours with no drop in pressure.
a. Test Pressure for Copper Tubing: 100 psig.
2. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

3. Inspect filters for proper operation.
D. Prepare test reports.

SECTION 226219 - VACUUM EQUIPMENT FOR LABORATORY AND HEALTHCARE

FACILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Packaged, oil-sealed, rotary, sliding-vane vacuum pumps.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Actual Air: Air delivered at vacuum producer inlet. Flow rate is air measured in expanded cfm.
B. Laboratory Vacuum Equipment: Equipment and accessories for nonmedical laboratory

facilities.
C. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or
for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits.
D. Standard Air: Free air at 68 deg F and 1 atmosphere before compression or expansion and
measured in scfm.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating
characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.
1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
B. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and testing agency.
C. Field quality-control reports.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For vacuum equipment to include in operation and
Project 16018 VACUUM EQUIPMENT FOR LABORATORY AND 226219 - 1

1. Laboratory Vacuum System Equipment for Nonmedical Laboratory Facilities: An

employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.
2. Qualify installers according to ASSE 6010.
capability to conduct the vacuum equipment testing indicated, that is a member of the Medical
Gas Professional Healthcare Organization or is an NRTL, and that is acceptable to authorities
1. Qualify testing personnel according to ASSE 6020 for inspectors and ASSE 6030 for
verifiers.
D. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label receivers and separators to comply with ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Belts: One for each belt-driven vacuum producer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PACKAGED VACUUM PUMPS
A. Description: Factory-assembled, -wired, -piped, and -tested; electric-motor-driven; air-cooled;

continuous-duty vacuum pumps and receivers.
B. Control Panels: Automatic control station with load control and protection functions. Comply
with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508.
1. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, Type 12 control panel unless otherwise indicated.

2. Motor Controllers: Full-voltage, combination-magnetic type with undervoltage release

feature and motor-circuit-protector-type disconnecting means and short-circuit protective
device.
3. Control Voltage: 120-V ac or less, using integral control power transformer.
4. Motor Overload Protection: Overload relay in each phase.
5. Starting Devices: Hand-off-automatic selector switch in cover of control panel, plus pilot
device for automatic control.
6. Automatic control switches to alternate lead-lag vacuum pumps for duplex and sequence
lead-lag vacuum pumps for multiplex vacuum pumps.
7. Instrumentation: Include vacuum pump inlet and receiver vacuum gages, hour meter,
vacuum pump discharge-air and coolant temperature gages, and control transformer.
8. Alarm Signal Device: For connection to alarm system to indicate when backup vacuum
pump is operating.
C. Receivers: Steel tank constructed according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,
Section VIII, Division 1; bearing appropriate code symbols.
1. Interior Finish: Corrosion-resistant coating.

2. Accessories: Include vacuum relief valve, vacuum gage, and drain.
2.2 OIL-SEALED, ROTARY VANE VACUUM PUMPS

following:
1. Atlas Copco.
2. Allied Healthcare Products, Inc.; Chemetron Div.
3. Allied Healthcare Products, Inc.; Oxequip Health Industries.
4. BeaconMedaes.
5. Becker Pumps Corp.
6. EMSE Corporation.
7. Gast Manufacturing Inc.
8. Rietschle Thomas Hanover, Inc.
9. Squire-Cogswell/Aeros Instruments, Inc.
10. Travaini Pumps USA, Inc.
11. Tri-Tech Medical.
12. Tuthill Corporation; Tuthill Vacuum & Blower Systems.
B. Description: Packaged unit.
C. Vacuum Pumps: Nonpulsating, oil-sealed, rotary vane type.
1. Cleanable inlet screens.

2. Outlet silencers and oil-mist separators on discharge connections.

2.3 MOTORS
A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and
Requirements for Plumbing Equipment."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean vacuum equipment, accessories, and components that have not been cleaned for oxygen
service and sealed or that are furnished unsuitable for laboratory vacuum applications,
according to CGA G4.1, "Cleaning Equipment for Oxygen Service."
3.2 VACUUM EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Equipment Mounting: Install vacuum producers on concrete bases using vibration isolators as
recommended by unit manufacturer. Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-
in-Place Concrete." Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in
Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.
2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete
base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements for water-supply piping specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic
Water Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Comply with requirements for drain piping specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste
and Vent Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
C. Comply with requirements for vacuum piping specified in Division 22 Section "Vacuum Piping
for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping,
fittings, and specialties.

D. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
E. Connect vacuum piping to vacuum equipment, accessories, and specialties with shutoff valve
and union or flanged connection.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify nonmedical laboratory vacuum equipment system components. Comply with

requirements for identification specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL FOR HEALTHCARE-FACILITY MEDICAL VACUUM

EQUIPMENT


1. Laboratory Vacuum Equipment Testing Coordination: Perform tests, inspections,

verifications, and certification of laboratory vacuum equipment concurrently with tests,
inspections, and certification of laboratory vacuum piping systems.
2. Preparation: Perform laboratory vacuum equipment tests according to requirements in
NFPA 99 for the following:
a. System operation test.
3. Equipment Verification: Comply with requirements in ASSE 6020, ASSE 6030, and
NFPA 99 for verification of laboratory vacuum equipment.
4. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
5. Testing Certification: Certify that specified tests, inspections, and procedures have been
performed and certify report results. Include the following:
a. Inspections performed.
b. Procedures and materials used.
c. Test methods used.
d. Results of tests.
E. Components will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

3.6 STARTUP SERVICE

2. Check for lubricating oil in lubricated-type equipment.
3. Check belt drives for proper tension.
4. Verify that vacuum producer outlet piping is clear.
5. Check for equipment vibration-control supports and flexible pipe connectors and verify
that equipment is properly attached to substrate.
6. Check safety valves for correct settings.
7. Check for proper seismic restraints.
8. Drain receiver and separator tank(s).
10. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
B. Verify that vacuum equipment is installed and connected according to the Contract Documents.
C. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and written
installation requirements in Division 26 Sections.
D. Prepare written report documenting testing procedures and results.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION

adjust, operate, and maintain vacuum producers.

SECTION 226600 – ACID WASTE AND VENT SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Above and below ground acid waste and vent piping.
2. Acid neutralization tanks.
A. Single Wall Piping Pressure Rating: 10 feet head of water.
B. Delegated Design: Design seismic restraints for aboveground piping, including comprehensive
engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and
design criteria indicated.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of pipe and fittings indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For neutralization tank system and piping.

1. Detail neutralization tanks and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For chemical-waste specialties and neutralization tanks and
A. Deliver and store piping and specialties with sealing plugs in ends or with end protection.
B. Do not store plastic pipe or fittings in direct sunlight.
C. Protect pipe, fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations with site utilities.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
Project 16018 ACID WASTE AND VENT SYSTEMS 226600 - 1

1. Neutralization-Tank Limestone: Equal to 200 percent of amount required for tank sump
initial charge. Furnish limestone in 50-lb bags.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACID WASTE AND VENT PIPING – “AW” or “AV” (Below Grade)
A. Acceptable manufactures for acid resistant sanitary waste vent and piping and fittings: Enfield,
Orion, George Fisher, Zurn and Spears schedule 40 polypropylene pipe. Installation and testing
shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
1. All piping below grade shall be joined with electric fusion or no hub pipe and fittings.
2. Mechanical joint piping is not acceptable.
2.2 ADIC WASTE AND VENT PIPING – “AW” or “AV” (Above Grade)
A. Acid resistant sanitary waste and vent piping and fittings shall be “PVDF” Polyvinylidene
Fluoride thermoplastic scheduled 40 drainage pipe and fittings rated and UL listed for
installation in return air plenums and through fire walls per UL 723 mechanical joint.
Applicable testing includes ASTM D 635. UL 94, ASTM E119, ASTM E814, ASTM E84, and
ASTM 2843.
B. Polypropylene, Schedule 40, mechanical or glued joint pipe and fittings, may be used above
floor locations outside of the return air plenums and outside of concealed spaces, in these
spaces, provide electric fusion or no hub pipe and fitting connections. (Refer to Drawings for
return air plenum locations.)
A. Couplings: Assemblies with combination of clamps, gaskets, sleeves, and threaded or flanged
parts; compatible with piping and system liquid; and made by piping manufacturer for joining
system piping.
B. Adapters and Transition Fittings: Assemblies with combination of clamps, couplings, adapters,
gaskets, and threaded or flanged parts; compatible with piping and system liquid; and made for
joining different piping materials.
C. Flanges: Assemblies of companion flanges and gaskets complying with ASME B16.21 and
compatible with system liquid, and bolts and nuts.
2.4 ACID NEUTRALIZATION TANKS – Refer to the plumbing drawings for design basis model
number and capacity information.
A. Polypropylene Acid Neutralization Tanks:

following:
a. Orion Fittings, Inc.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
b. Schier Products Company.
c. Sloane, George Fischer Inc.
d. Town & Country Plastics, Inc.

e. Spears
f. Zurn
g. RFC Plastics
2. Description: Corrosion-resistant plastic materials; with removable, gastight cover;
interior, sidewall, dip-tube inlet; vent; and threaded or flanged, sidewall pipe connections.
a. Material: ASTM D 4101, PP.
b. Tank Capacity: Refer to Plumbing Equipment Schedule on Plumbing Drawings
for this information.
c. Dip Tube: On outlet pipe instead of inlet pipe.
d. Extension: PP.
e. Limestone: Chips or lumps, with more than 90 percent calcium carbonate content
and 1- to 3-inch diameter.
2.5 SLEEVES
A. Cast Iron Wall Pipes: Cast or fabricated of cast iron and equivalent to ductile-iron pressure
pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc-coated, plain
ends.
2.6 SLEEVE SEALS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a comparable product by one

of the following:
1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
2. Calpico, Inc.
3. Metraflex, Inc.
4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
B. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space
2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel or stainless steel.
sealing elements.
2.7 ESCUTCHEONS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EARTHWORK
A. Comply with requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching,
and backfilling.

A. Acid Waste and Vent Piping Inside the Building:

1. Install piping next to equipment, accessories, and specialties to allow service and
maintenance.
2. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating
may be used unless otherwise indicated.
3. Flanges may be used on aboveground piping unless otherwise indicated.
4. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment
rooms and service areas.
5. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at
right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically
indicated otherwise.
6. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel
removal.
7. Install piping at indicated slopes.
8. Install piping free of sags and bends.
9. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
10. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the
following:
a. New Piping:
1) Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-
pattern type.
2) Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips.
3) Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
stamped-steel type.
4) Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type
with set screw or spring clips.
5) Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type with set
screw or spring clips.
6) Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-
plate type.
11. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, foundation walls,
gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.
a. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
1) Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas
or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron
sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is
specified.
b. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and
pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location
of joint. Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and
installation.
12. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and
floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to
Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for materials.
13. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

A. Pipe sizes in this article refer to aboveground, single-wall piping.
B. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping
and Equipment" for pipe hanger and support devices. Install the following:
1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or MSS Type 42, riser clamps.
2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:
a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
c. Longer Than 100 Feet, if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.
3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.
Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
C. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping
and Equipment" for installation of supports.
D. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches of each fitting and coupling.
E. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
F. Install supports for vertical polypropylene piping every 72 inches.
G. Install vinyl-coated hangers for PVDF piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing
and minimum rod diameters:
1. All Sizes: Install continuous support for piping with liquid waste at temperatures above
140 deg F.
2. NPS 1/2 inch and Smaller: 30 inches with 3/8 inch rod.
3. NPS 3/4 inch to NPS 1-1/2 inch: 36 inches with 3/8 inch rod.
4. NPS 2: 36 inches with 3/8 inch rod.
5. NPS 2-1/2 inch and NPS 3: 42 inches with 1/2 inch rod.
6. NPS 4 inch and NPS 5 inch: 48 inches with 5/8 inch rod.
7. NPS 6: 48 inches with 3/4 inch rod.
H. Install supports for vertical PVDF piping NPS 1-1/2 inch every 48 inchesnd NPS 2 inch and
larger every 72 inches.
I. Install hangers for borosilicate glass piping with types and spacing per manufacturer’s
recommendations.
3.4 ACID NEUTRALIZATION TANK INSTALLATION
A. Install exterior acid neutralization tanks, complete with appurtenances indicated.

1. Set lid covers flush with finished surface where covers occur in pavements. Set covers 3
inches above finished surface elsewhere unless otherwise indicated.
2. Include initial fill of limestone for neutralization tanks and fill with water.

3.5 CONNECTIONS
B. Make connections to existing piping so finished Work complies as nearly as practical with
requirements specified for new Work.
C. Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for acid waste and vent piping branch
connections. Remove section of existing pipe; install wye fitting into existing piping; and
encase entire wye fitting plus 6-inch overlap, with not less than 6 inches of concrete with 28-
day compressive strength of 3000 psi.
D. Protect existing piping to prevent concrete or debris from entering while making connections.
Remove debris or other extraneous material that may accumulate.
E. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment" for labeling of equipment and piping.
A. Inspect interior of sewerage piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has
occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place and again at completion
of Project.
1. Defects requiring correction include the following:
a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between inspection
points.
b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or
cylinder of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter.
c. Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping.
d. Hydrostatic Tests for Drainage Piping:
1) Close openings in system and fill with water.
2) Purge air and refill with water.
3) Disconnect water supply.
4) Test and inspect joints for leaks.
2. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.
3. Submit separate reports for each test.
B. Replace leaking sewerage piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within
allowances specified.
C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,


3.8 CLEANING
A. Use procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if not prescribed, use
procedures described below:
1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or
repaired before using.
2. Clean piping by flushing with potable water.

SECTION 230500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
B. Warranty, closeout procedures, and submitted requirements are specified in Division 01

Sections.
1.2 SUMMARY

1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
5. Sleeves.
6. Escutcheons.
7. Grout.
8. HVAC demolition.
10. Painting and finishing.
11. Concrete bases.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
pipe and duct chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings,
unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and chases.
F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:

1. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.
Project 16018 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 - 1

2. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

3. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:

1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene monomer rubber.
2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

4. Escutcheons.
Welding Code--Steel."
C. Electrical Characteristics for HVAC Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics

may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting
electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum
energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.
moisture.
B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
C. Sheet metal accessories shall include air distribution outlets, air filters, sound attenuators and
ductwork accessories.
D. Store all insulation, ductwork, and sheet metal accessories indoors, or in a storage trailer. Do
not store outdoors. Any insulation, ductwork, or accessories stored outdoors will be rejected,
and shall be removed from the project site by the Contractor.
E. Do not allow insulation, ductwork, or sheet metal accessories to be exposed to moisture, in

order to avoid introduction of mold spores into the building.

F. Do not run air systems prior to ductwork being insulated, in order to prevent condensation from
occurring on the ductwork.
G. Equipment covered under this article include the following:

1. Unit heaters
2. Cabinet unit heaters
3. Exhaust fans
4. Split system air conditioners
5. Packaged rooftop units
6. Variable refrigerant flow units
H. Air handling units shall be shipped fully crated or shrink-wrapped from the factory for
protection of the equipment from the weather.
I. Equipment shall be stored at the site indoors, or outdoors on pallets. Do not set units directly on
grade.
J. Equipment shall be fully protected from moisture while being stored. Use heavy tarps with tie
down straps or other means to protect the units from moisture and outdoor weather conditions.
K. All air side devices such as air handling units, VAV terminals, coils, fans, terminal heating
devices, ductwork and ductwork accessories shall be shipped, received and stored in such a
manner that moisture is not allowed to be exposed to any portion of the equipment. Any
equipment that is found to have or have had moisture present shall be removed from the job site
and replaced.
1.7 COORDINATION
construction, to allow for HVAC installations.

C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors in walls, ceilings, and floors for HVAC
items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors for
building components are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames." Access
doors for ductwork are specified in Section 233300 – Air Duct Accessories.
D. Coordinate with the Division 26 Contractor regarding the location of all Switchboards and
Switchgear. Piping shall not be run over or near any Switchboard or Switchgear. Piping or
ductwork foreign to the electrical installation whose malfunction would endanger the operation
of the electrical system shall not be routed through the Main Electrical Room, shall not be
routed through the Main Emergency Equipment Room, and shall not be routed through the
Emergency Generator Room. The exception would be statutorily required fire protection
piping.
1. Piping should be avoided over any wall mounted electrical panel with a voltage of 120
volts or higher. Obtain written approval from Owners Representative before routing
piping above an electrical panel.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the manufacturers specified.
methods.
contents.
D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping
system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty
G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall
H. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:

1. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.

I. Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer.
A. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings: CPVC and PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's
Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-
cement-joint end.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Eslon Thermoplastics.
B. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Adaptors: One-piece fitting with manufacturer's SDR 11 equivalent

dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Thompson Plastics, Inc.
C. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions: MSS SP-107, CPVC and PVC four-part union. Include
brass end, solvent-cement-joint end, rubber O-ring, and union nut.
1. Manufacturers:
a. NIBCO INC.
b. NIBCO, Inc.; Chemtrol Div.
A. Refer to Section 232113 – Hydronic Piping for dielectric fitting requirements.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
b. Calpico, Inc.
c. Metraflex Co.
d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
3. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element.
sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.
2.7 SLEEVES
longitudinal joint.
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain
ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include
2.8 ESCUTCHEONS
opening.
B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated

finish.
C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.

D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.

E. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With set screw or spring clips and chrome-plated finish.
F. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With concealed or exposed-rivet hinge, set screw or spring
clips, and chrome-plated finish.
G. One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate.
H. Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.
2.9 GROUT
A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.
1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
piping systems.
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction
loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping in general location
as indicated in Contract Documents unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination
Drawings. Minor offsets, lowering or raising the piping shall be routed to accommodate field
conditions at no expense to the project.

C. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:
1. New Piping:
finish.
d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-
brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
stamped-steel type.
f. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type
with polished chrome-plated finish.
g. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel
type and set screw.
h. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with
polished chrome-plated finish.
i. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type with
hinge and set screw.
j. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type.
k. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type with set screw.
l. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate
type.
2. Existing Piping: Use the following:
a. Chrome-Plated Piping: Split-casting, cast-brass type with chrome-plated finish.
b. Insulated Piping: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed or exposed-rivet
hinge and spring clips.
c. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting, cast-
brass type with chrome-plated finish.
d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-plate,
stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and spring clips.
e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting, cast-brass
type with chrome-plated finish.
f. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-plate, stamped-steel
type with concealed hinge and set screw.
g. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-casting, cast-brass type with
polished chrome-plated finish.
h. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with
concealed or exposed-rivet hinge and set screw or spring clips.
i. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting, cast-brass type.
j. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with set screw
or spring clips.
k. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting, floor-plate
type.
D. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
E. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.
F. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions,
and concrete floor and roof slabs.


a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or
other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings
below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.
3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between
sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:
a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6.
b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum-board
partitions.
c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing.
Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to
extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Refer to Division 07 Section
"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing.
1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.
4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or
pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.
Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.
G. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical
sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve
for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.
2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.
seal.
H. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal
seal.
I. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors
J. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
K. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in

requirements.

B. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings
according to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements.
2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.
3. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket
fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and
socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.
C. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.
D. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.
E. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or
paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.
1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.
2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
F. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to
pipe manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection
to each piece of equipment.
2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final
3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of
dissimilar metals.
4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals.
3.4 DUCT SYSTEMS – COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install ductwork according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying
ductwork systems.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of
ductwork systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size ductwork and
calculate friction loss, expansion, fan sizing, and other design considerations. Install ductwork
in general location as indicated in Contract Documents unless deviations to layout are approved
on Coordination Drawings. Minor offsets, lowering or raising the ductwork shall be routed to
accommodate field conditions at no expense to the project.

3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are
not indicated.
B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install HVAC equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of

components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other
installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
3.6 PAINTING
A. Painting of HVAC systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09 Sections

"Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting."
B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and
procedures to match original factory finish.
3.7 CONCRETE BASES
A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's

1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both
directions than supported unit.
embedded.
7. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in
Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
3.8 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor HVAC materials and equipment.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.

3.9 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor
HVAC materials and equipment.
B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or
will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without
splitting wood members.
C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.
3.10 GROUTING
A. Mix and install grout for HVAC equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment
base plates, and anchors.
B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G. Place grout around anchors.
H. Cure placed grout.

SECTION 230513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose,

horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to
600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment
manufacturer for field installation.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the
following:
1. Motor controllers.
2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.
3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.
4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in
HVAC equipment schedules or Sections.
B. Motor shall be Premium Efficient as described in NEMA Standards Publication MG 1-2006.
2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS
A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above
sea level.
B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads
at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence,
and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.
2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS
A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.
B. Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.
C. Service Factor: 1.15.
Project 16018 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513 - 1

D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.

1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding.
2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.
E. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed.
F. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.
G. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.
H. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.
I. Insulation: Class F.
J. Code Letter Designation:

1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.
2. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.
K. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor
frame sizes smaller than 324T.
2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection
requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box,
suited to control method.
B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features
coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.
1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and
tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by
pulse-width modulated inverters.
2. Energy- and Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation.
3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.
4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected
motors.
5. All motors driven by a variable frequency controller shall include a maintenance free,
circumferential, conductive microfiber shaft grounding ring (AEGIS-SGR) to discharge
shaft currents to ground.
2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and
requirements of specific motor application:
1. Permanent-split capacitor.
2. Split phase.
3. Capacitor start, inductor run.
4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.
B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.

C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and
thrust loading.
D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.
E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor
when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor
insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns
to normal range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)

SECTION 230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following hangers and supports for HVAC system piping and
equipment:
2. Trapeze pipe hangers.
3. Metal framing systems.
4. Equipment supports.
5. Structural roof curbs.
6. Pipe curbs.

1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze
hangers for pipe and equipment supports.
2. Division 23 Section " Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment"
for vibration isolation devices.
3. Division 23 Section(s) " Metal Ducts" and "Nonmetal Ducts" for duct hangers and
supports.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.
B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and
Supports."
A. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined
weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

C. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain approval
from authorities having jurisdiction.
1.5 SUBMITTALS

AIA/MCS HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT March 3, 2017
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
2. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum."
3. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
4. AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel."
5. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
product selection:
2.2 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3
"Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types.
B. Manufacturers:
1. AAA Technology & Specialties Co., Inc.
2. Bergen-Power Pipe Supports.
3. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
4. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.
5. Empire Industries, Inc.
6. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.
7. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc.
8. Grinnell Corp.
9. GS Metals Corp.
10. National Pipe Hanger Corporation.
11. PHD Manufacturing, Inc.
12. PHS Industries, Inc.
13. Piping Technology & Products, Inc.
14. Tolco Inc.
C. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.
D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
E. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of
bearing surface of piping.

2.3 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS
A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from
structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.
2.4 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Description: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels

and other components.
B. Manufacturers:
1. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.; ERISTRUT Div.
3. GS Metals Corp.
4. Power-Strut Div.; Tyco International, Ltd.
5. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
6. Tolco Inc.
7. Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd.
C. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.
D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
2.5 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural-steel

shapes.
A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and
nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
2.7 STRUCTURAL ROOF CURBS
A. Roof curbs with vibration isolators and wind or seismic restraints are specified in Division 23
Section “Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment”.
B. Equipment Supports: Internally reinforced metal equipment supports capable of supporting

superimposed live and dead loads, including equipment loads and other construction indicated
on Drawings; with welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints stepped integral
metal cant raised the thickness of roof insulation, and integrally formed deck-mounting flange at
perimeter bottom.
C. Materials: Galvanized steel with corrosion-protection coating, watertight gaskets, and factory-
installed wood nailer; complying with NRCA standards.

1. Curb Insulation and Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.
a. Materials: ASTM C1071, Type I or II.
b. Thickness: 1-1/2 inches.
2. Application: Factory applied with adhesive and mechanical fasteners to the internal
surface of curb.
a. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C916, Type I.
b. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment,
mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner
when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in
cabinet.
c. Liner materials applied in this location shall have air-stream surface coated with a
temperature-resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric
depending on service air velocity.
d. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C916, Type I.
e. Metal Counterflashing: Manufacturer’s standard, removable, fabricated of same
metal and finish as equipment support. Coordinate with roofing contractor.
f. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom to
conform to roof profile.
g. Fabricate equipment supports to minimum height of 12 inches unless otherwise
indicated.
h. Sloping Roofs: Where roof slope exceeds 1:48, fabricate each support with height
to accommodate roof slope so that tops of supports are level with each other.
Equip supports with water diverters or crickets on sides that obstruct water flow.
2.8 PIPE CURBS
A. Pipe curb shall consist of a heavy gauge galvanized steel roof curb, unitized construction, with
integral base plate, 3 pound density insulation, and 2 by 2 nailer. Curb shall be covered with a
thermoplastic cover, fastening screws, graduated step boots with stainless steel adjustable
clamps.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems
and equipment.
B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in
piping system Sections.
C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will
not have field-applied finish.
D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in
direct contact with copper tubing.
E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

F. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or
insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F pipes,
NPS 4 to NPS 16, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.
3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of
pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.
4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to
NPS 24, if little or no insulation is required.
5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off-
center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.
6. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of
noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.
7. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated
stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated stationary
pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
9. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated
stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 2.
10. Split Pipe-Ring with or without Turnbuckle-Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type 11): For
suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 8.
11. Extension Hinged or 2-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of
noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 3.
12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or
contraction.
14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel
pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with
steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange and with U-bolt to retain pipe.
16. Adjustable, Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes,
NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36, if vertical adjustment is required, with steel pipe base stanchion
support and cast-iron floor flange.
17. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30, from 2
rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.
18. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to
NPS 20, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction
might occur.
19. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42, if
longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical
adjustment is not necessary.
20. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 24, if
small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical
adjustment is not necessary.
21. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to
NPS 30, if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition
to expansion and contraction.

G. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to
NPS 20.
2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers,
NPS 3/4 to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
H. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.
2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.
4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of
building attachments.
5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
6. Swivel connections shall be utilized for attachment to sloping structure. Threaded rod
shall not be bent.
I. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend
pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist
construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.
3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,
channels, or angles.
4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.
5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads
are considerable and rod sizes are large.
6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to
flange edge.
8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.
9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-
beams for heavy loads.
10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-
beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.
11. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to
structural steel.
12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above
by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.
b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.
c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.
13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.
15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear
horizontal movement where headroom is limited.

J. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with
insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer
to prevent crushing insulation.
3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
K. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Sections, install the following types:
1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement.
2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed
1-1/4 inches.
3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with
springs.
4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal
expansion in piping systems.
5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability
factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger.
6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from
base support.
7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from
trapeze support.
8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress
from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include
auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These
supports include the following types:
a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.
b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.
c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member.
L. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
M. Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
N. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building

attachments where required in concrete construction. The use of powder-actuated fasteners or
mechanical-expansion anchors may only be used after approval from the structural engineer.
A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers,
supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building
structure.

B. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for
grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated trapeze
pipe hangers.
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or
install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual
pipe hangers.
2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported.
Weld steel according to AWS D1.1.
C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support
together on field-assembled metal framing systems.
D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.
E. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less
than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use
operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners
according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.
2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely
cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and
other accessories.
G. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.
H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal movement of piping systems, to permit
freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints,
expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
I. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
J. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional
attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger
and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten
inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
K. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from
movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
L. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum
pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.1 (for power piping) and ASME B31.9 (for building
services piping) are not exceeded.
M. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through
insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield

insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.1 for power piping and
ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is
indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-
distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields
shall span an arc of 180 degrees.
a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-
distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.
b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inchesng and 0.06 inch thick.
d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.
e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.
5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood inserts.
6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.
7. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.
3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support

equipment above floor.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.
C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment
supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be
shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance
and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours
of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve
indicated slope of pipe.
B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.
3.6 PAINTING
A. Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately
after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply
with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
B. Touch Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas
of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

SECTION 230548 – VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY

1. Elastomeric hangers.
2. Spring hangers.
3. Spring hangers with vertical-limit stops.
4. Restrained vibration isolation roof-curb rails.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. IBC: International Building Code.
B. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service.
C. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development for the State of California.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation
device.
2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each
type.
B. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for HVAC piping and
equipment with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and
seismic restraints.
C. Welding certificates.
D. Qualification Data: For [professional engineer] [and] [testing agency].
E. Field quality-control test reports.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-mounting systems to include in operation and
Project 16018 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS 230548 - 1

AIA/MCS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT March 3, 2017
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to
conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as
defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are
more stringent.
C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural

Welding Code - Steel."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

following:
1. Ace Mountings Co., Inc.
2. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.
3. California Dynamics Corporation.
4. Isolation Technology, Inc.
5. Kinetics Noise Control.
6. Mason Industries.
7. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.
8. Vibration Isolation.
9. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.
B. Elastomeric Hangers: Single or double-deflection type, fitted with molded, oil-resistant

elastomeric isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections for hanger
rods. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.
C. Spring Hangers: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and insert
in compression.
1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a
maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing
isolation efficiency.
2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced
cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.
7. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support
spring coil.

2.2 RESTRAINED VIBRATION ISOLATION ROOF-CURB RAILS

following:
1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.
2. California Dynamics Corporation.
3. Isolation Technology, Inc.
4. Kinetics Noise Control.
5. Mason Industries.
6. Thybar Corporation.
7. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.
8. Vibration Isolation.
9. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.
B. General Requirements for Restrained Vibration Isolation Roof-Curb Rails: Factory-assembled,

fully enclosed, insulated, air- and watertight curb rail designed to resiliently support equipment
and to withstand wind forces.
C. Lower Support Assembly: Formed sheet-metal section containing adjustable and removable
steel springs that support upper frame. Upper frame shall provide continuous support for
equipment and shall be captive to resiliently resist wind forces. Lower support assembly shall
have a means for attaching to building structure and a wood nailer for attaching roof materials,
and shall be insulated with a minimum of 2 inches of rigid, glass-fiber insulation on inside of
assembly.
D. Spring Isolators: Adjustable, restrained spring isolators shall be mounted on 1/4-inch- thick,
elastomeric vibration isolation pads and shall have access ports, for level adjustment, with
removable waterproof covers at all isolator locations. Isolators shall be located so they are
accessible for adjustment at any time during the life of the installation without interfering with
the integrity of the roof.
1. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with wind
restraint.
a. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops and adjustable equipment
mounting and leveling bolt.
b. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of
the spring at rated load.
c. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
d. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
e. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
2. Pads: Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading
over pad area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory
cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment.
a. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant.
E. Snubber Bushings: All-directional, elastomeric snubber bushings at least 1/4 inch thick.

F. Water Seal: Galvanized sheet metal with EPDM seals at corners, attached to upper support
frame, extending down past wood nailer of lower support assembly, and counterflashed over
roof materials.
2.3 FACTORY FINISHES
A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.
B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment

before shipping.
1. Powder coating on springs and housings.
2. All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot-dip galvanize metal components for exterior use.
3. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use.
4. Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation devices to indicate capacity range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation devices for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations

before installation.
3.2 APPLICATIONS
3.3 VIBRATION-CONTROL DEVICE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for installation of roof
curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.
B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height.
After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during
normal operation.

SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Equipment labels.
2. Warning signs and labels.
3. Pipe labels.
4. Duct labels.
5. Valve tags.
6. Warning tags.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.
C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS
A. Metal Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032-inch Stainless steel, 0.025-inch Aluminum, 0.032-
inch or anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or
stamped holes for attachment hardware.
2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.
3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24
inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering
for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the
size of principal lettering.
4. Fasteners: Stainless-steel self-tapping screws.
Project 16018 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 - 1

B. Plastic Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving,
1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
2. Letter Color: White.
3. Background Color: Black.
4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.
2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.
6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24
inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering
for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the
size of principal lettering.
7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel self-tapping screws.
C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number.
2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS
A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8
inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
B. Letter Color: Black.
C. Background Color: Yellow.
D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.
E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2
by 3/4 inch.
F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2
inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater
lettering.
G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel self-tapping screws.
H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification
instructions.
2.3 PIPE LABELS
A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering
indicating service, and showing flow direction.

B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of
pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.
C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.
D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or
abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate
both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.
E. Pipe Label Schedule:

1. Condensate Drain – Black on White “C.D.”
2. Refrigerant Piping – Green on Red “REF””
2.4 DUCT LABELS
A. Material: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.
B. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.
C. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2
by 3/4 inch.
D. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2
inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater
lettering.
E. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
F. Duct Label Contents: Include identification of duct service using same designations or
abbreviations as used on Drawings, duct size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with duct system service lettering to accommodate both
directions, or as separate unit on each duct label to indicate flow direction.
2.5 VALVE TAGS
A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-
inch numbers.
1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped
holes for attachment hardware.
2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook.
B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve
number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or
space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for
identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.
1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.6 WARNING TAGS
A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card

stock with matte finish suitable for writing.
1. Size: 3 by 5-1/4 inches minimum.
2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire.
3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO
NOT OPERATE."
4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification
devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and
encapsulants.
3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.
B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.
3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Piping Color-Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting."
B. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces;
machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and
exterior exposed locations as follows:
1. Near each valve and control device.
2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.
Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed
piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in
areas of congested piping and equipment.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.
3.4 DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Install self-adhesive duct labels with permanent adhesive on air ducts.
B. Stenciled Duct Label Option: Stenciled labels, showing service and flow direction, may be
provided instead of plastic-laminated duct labels, at Installer's option, if lettering larger than 1
inch high is needed for proper identification because of distance from normal location of
required identification.

C. Locate labels near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of
50 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system.
3.5 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION
A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within
factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering
hose connections; and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use
fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.
3.6 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION
A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where
required.

SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes TAB to produce design objectives for the following:
1. Air Systems:
a. Constant-volume air systems.
b. Variable-air-volume systems.
c. Exhaust systems.
2. Laboratory fume hood airflow balancing.
3. Exhaust hood airflow balancing.
4. Space pressurization testing and adjusting.
5. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly.
6. Reporting results of activities and procedures specified in this Section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to reduce
fan speed or adjust a damper.
B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains, branches, and
terminals, according to indicated quantities.
C. Barrier or Boundary: Construction, either vertical or horizontal, such as walls, floors, and
ceilings that are designed and constructed to restrict the movement of airflow, smoke, odors,
and other pollutants.
D. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of high
air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is withdrawn
from a person's skin than is normally dissipated.
E. NC: Noise criteria.
F. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield repeatable

results.
G. RC: Room criteria.
H. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.
I. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of measurement. In a
closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump.
Project 16018 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 1

J. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause
reduced capacities in all or part of a system.
K. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings of a
fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was
performance tested.
L. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
M. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves the
distribution system.
N. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of systems or equipment.
O. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Firm: The entity responsible for performing and
reporting TAB procedures.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Certified TAB Reports: Submit two copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on
approved forms certified by TAB firm.
B. Warranties specified in this Section.
A. TAB Firm Qualifications: Engage a TAB firm certified by either AABC or NEBB.
B. Certification of TAB Reports: Certify TAB field data reports. This certification includes the
following:
1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB
reports.
2. Certify that TAB team complied with approved TAB plan and the procedures specified
and referenced in this Specification.
C. TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from AABC's "National Standards for Testing and
Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems," NEBB's "Procedural Standards
for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems," or SMACNA's "HVAC
Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing."
D. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in AABC's "National Standards

for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems or NEBB's "
Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems, "
Section II, " Required Instrumentation for NEBB Certification."
E. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every six months or more frequently
if required by instrument manufacturer.
1. Keep an updated record of instrument calibration that indicates date of calibration and the
name of party performing instrument calibration.

A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB
period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's
operations.
B. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial
Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's
operations.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment,
HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to
support and assist TAB activities.
B. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and
times.
C. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been
satisfactorily completed.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. National Project Performance Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on AABC's "National Standards

for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems" forms stating
that AABC will assist in completing requirements of the Contract Documents if TAB firm fails
to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the following provisions:
1. The certified TAB firm has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract
Documents.
2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation
limits.
B. Special Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on NEBB forms stating that NEBB will assist in
completing requirements of the Contract Documents if TAB firm fails to comply with the
Contract Documents. Guarantee shall include the following provisions:
1. The certified TAB firm has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract
Documents.
2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation
limits.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover
conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.

1. Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions of

Contract.
2. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gauge cocks, thermometer wells, flow-
control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are installed
as required by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these
balancing devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient
system and equipment operation.
B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.
C. Examine Project Record Documents described in Division 01 Section "Project Record

Documents."
D. Examine design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions
for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and
assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.
E. Examine equipment performance data including fan curves. Relate performance data to Project
conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted
conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate system effect
factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions
different from those presented when the equipment was performance tested at the factory. To
calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and
Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Duct Design," Sections 5
and 6. Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions.
F. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing,
cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Sections have been performed.
G. Examine system and equipment test reports.
H. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices,
such as flow-control devices and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and that their
locations are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and
equipment operation.
I. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and
balancing.
J. Examine HVAC equipment to ensure that clean filters have been installed, bearings are greased,
belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.
K. Examine plenum ceilings used for supply air to verify that they are airtight. Verify that pipe
penetrations and other holes are sealed.
L. Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations.
M. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.
N. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls.

O. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following:

1. Dampers and other controlled devices are operated by the intended controller.
2. Dampers are in the position indicated by the controller.
3. Integrity of dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully closed and fully
open positions.
4. Thermostats and humidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts, and
cold walls.
5. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions.
6. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents.
7. Controller set points are set at indicated values.
8. Interlocked systems are operating.
9. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to indicated values.
P. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe
and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from
indicated values.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.
B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following:
1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete.
2. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
3. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
4. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.
5. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
6. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and
access to balancing devices is provided.
7. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be
met.
3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained
in AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air
Conditioning Systems", NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
of Environmental Systems", or SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and
Balancing" and this Section.
B. Cut insulation, ducts, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum
extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and balancing,
close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed. Restore
vapor barrier and finish according to insulation Specifications for this Project.
C. Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent
identification material, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-
control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings.
D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.

3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with
required fan volumes.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.
C. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements.
D. Check airflow patterns from the outside-air dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers,
through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
E. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
F. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
G. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
H. Check for airflow blockages.
I. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
J. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.
K. Check for proper sealing of air duct system.
3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS
A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by
fan manufacturer.
1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:
a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and
upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.
b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.
c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as
possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct
restrictions.
d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum
that houses the fan.
2. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit,
rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment.
a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance personnel
must change filters.
3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps, heat
recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions.
4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static
pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with
calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend
corrective action to align design and actual conditions.

5. Obtain approval from Architect for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than
indicated speed. Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical
connections to accommodate fan-speed changes.
6. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment
manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor
amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling, full
heating, economizer, and any other operating modes to determine the maximum required
brake horsepower.
B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated
airflows within specified tolerances.
1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust
volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.
a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube
traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate
the total airflow for that zone.
2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to
adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.
C. Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments.

1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written
instructions and calculating factors.
D. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified
tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors
and the dampers at air terminals.
1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated
quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the
Contract Documents.
2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
3.6 PROCEDURES FOR EXHAUST AIR SYSTEMS
A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by
fan manufacturer.
1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure.
2. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static
pressure versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with
calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend
corrective action to align design and actual conditions.
3. Obtain approval from A/E for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated
speed. Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections
to accommodate fan-speed changes.
4. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment
manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor
amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling, full
heating, economizer, and any other operating modes to determine the maximum required
brake horsepower.

B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated
airflows within specified tolerances.
1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust
volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.
a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube
traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate
the total airflow for that zone.
2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to
adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.
C. Measure air devices without making adjustments.

1. Measure air devices using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer’s written
instructions and calculating factors.
D. Adjust air devices for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of indicated
values. Make adjustments using volume dampers.
1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated
quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the
Contract Documents.
3.7 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS
A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:
1. Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers.
2. Motor horsepower rating.
3. Motor rpm.
4. Efficiency rating.
5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.
B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying
from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass for the controller to prove proper
operation. Record observations, including controller manufacturer, model and serial numbers,
and nameplate data.
3.8 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS
A. Electric-Heating Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:

1. Nameplate data.
2. Airflow.
3. Entering- and leaving-air temperature at full load.
4. Voltage and amperage input of each phase at full load and at each incremental stage.
5. Calculated kilowatt at full load.
6. Fuse or circuit-breaker rating for overload protection.
B. Refrigerant Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:

1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
2. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
3. Airflow.

4. Air pressure drop.

5. Refrigerant suction pressure and temperature.
3.9 PROCEDURES FOR TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENTS
A. During TAB, report the need for adjustment in temperature regulation within the automatic
temperature-control system.
B. Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of two successive
eight-hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final temperature
settings. Measure when the building or zone is occupied.
C. Measure outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures.
3.10 PROCEDURES FOR COMMERCIAL KITCHEN HOODS
A. Measure, adjust, and record the airflow of each kitchen hood. For kitchen hoods designed with
integral makeup air, measure and adjust the exhaust and makeup airflow. Measure airflow by
duct Pitot-tube traverse. If a duct Pitot-tube traverse is not possible, provide an explanation in
the report of the reason(s) why and also the reason why the method used was chosen.
1. Install welded test ports in the sides of the exhaust duct for the duct Pitot-tube traverse.
Install each test port with a threaded cap that is liquid tight.
B. After balancing is complete, do the following:

1. Measure and record the static pressure at the hood exhaust-duct connection.
2. Measure and record the hood face velocity. Make measurements at multiple points
across the face of the hood. Perform measurements at a maximum of 12 inches between
points and between any point and the perimeter. Calculate the average of the
measurements recorded. Verify that the hood average face velocity complies with the
Contract Documents and governing codes.
3. Check the hood for capture and containment of smoke using a smoke emitting device.
Observe the smoke pattern. Make adjustments to room airflow patterns to achieve
optimum results.
C. Visually inspect the hood exhaust duct throughout its entire length in compliance with
authorities having jurisdiction. Begin at the hood connection and end at the point it discharges
outdoors. Report findings.
1. Check duct slopes as required.
2. Verify that duct access is installed as required.
3. Verify that point of termination is as required.
4. Verify that duct air velocity is within the range required.
5. Verify that duct is within a fire-rated enclosure.
D. Report deficiencies.

3.11 PROCEDURES FOR LABORATORY FUME HOODS
A. Before performing laboratory fume hood testing, measure, adjust and record the supply airflow
and airflow patterns of each supply air outlet that is located in the same room as the hood.
Adjust the air outlet flow pattern to minimize turbulence and to achieve the desired airflow
patterns at the face and inside the hood. Verify that adequate makeup air is available to achieve
the indicated flow of the hood.
B. Measure, adjust, and record the airflow of each laboratory fume hood by duct Pitot-tube traverse
with the laboratory fume hood sash in the design open position.
1. For laboratory fume hoods installed in variable exhaust systems, measure, adjust, and
record the hood exhaust airflow at maximum and at minimum airflow conditions.
2. For laboratory fume hoods designed with integral makeup air, measure, adjust, and
record the exhaust and makeup airflow.
C. For laboratory fume hoods that are connected to centralized exhaust systems using automatic
dampers, adjust the damper controller to obtain the indicated exhaust airflow.
D. After balancing is complete, do the following:

1. Measure and record the static pressure at the hood duct connection with the hood
operating at indicated airflow.
2. Measure and record the face velocity across the open sash face area. Measure the face
velocity at each point in a grid pattern. Perform measurements at a maximum of 12
inches between points and between any point and the perimeter of the opening.
a. For laboratory fume hoods designed to maintain a constant face velocity at varying
sash positions, also measure and record the face velocity at 50 and 25 percent of
the design open sash position.
b. Calculate and report the average face velocity by averaging all velocity
measurements.
c. Calculate and report the exhaust airflow by multiplying the calculated average face
velocity by the sash open area. Compare this quantity with the exhaust airflow
measured by duct Pitot-tube traverse. Report differences.
d. If the average face velocity is less than the indicated face velocity, retest the
average face velocity and adjust hood baffles, fan drives, and other parts of the
system to provide the indicated average face velocity.
3. Check each laboratory fume hood for the capture and containment of smoke by using a
hand-held emitting device. Observe the capture and containment of smoke flow pattern
across the open face and inside the hood. Make adjustments necessary to achieve the
desired results.
3.12 PROCEDURES FOR EXHAUST HOODS
A. Measure, adjust, and record the airflow of each exhaust hood. Measure airflow by duct Pitot-
tube traverse. If a duct Pitot-tube traverse is not possible, explain why, in the report, and
explain the test method used.
B. After balancing is complete, do the following:

1. Measure and record the static pressure at the hood exhaust-duct connection.
2. Check the hood for capture and containment of smoke using a smoke emitting device.
Observe the smoke pattern. Make adjustments to achieve optimum results.

3.13 PROCEDURES FOR SPACE PRESSURIZATION MEASUREMENTS AND

ADJUSTMENTS
A. Before testing for space pressurization, observe the space to verify the integrity of the space
boundaries. Verify that windows and doors are closed and applicable safing, gaskets, and
sealants are installed. Report deficiencies and postpone testing until after the reported
deficiencies are corrected.
B. Measure, adjust, and record the pressurization of each room, each zone, and each building by
adjusting the supply, return, and exhaust airflows to achieve the indicated conditions.
C. Measure space pressure differential where pressure is used as the design criteria, and measure
airflow differential where differential airflow is used as the design criteria for space
pressurization.
1. For pressure measurements, measure and record the pressure difference between the
intended spaces at the door with all doors in the space closed. Record the high-pressure
side, low-pressure side, and pressure difference between each adjacent space.
2. For applications with cascading levels of space pressurization, begin in the most critical
space and work to the least critical space.
3. Test room pressurization first, then zones, and finish with building pressurization.
D. To achieve indicated pressurization, set the supply airflow to the indicated conditions and adjust
the exhaust and return airflow to achieve the indicated pressure or airflow difference.
E. For spaces with pressurization being monitored and controlled automatically, observe and adjust
the controls to achieve the desired set point.
1. Compare the values of the measurements taken to the measured values of the control
system instruments and report findings.
2. Check the repeatability of the controls by successive tests designed to temporarily alter
the ability to achieve space pressurization. Test overpressurization and
underpressurization, and observe and report on the system's ability to revert to the set
point.
3. For spaces served by variable-air-volume supply and exhaust systems, measure space
pressurization at indicated airflow and minimum airflow conditions.
F. In spaces that employ multiple modes of operation, such as normal mode and emergency mode
or occupied mode and unoccupied mode, measure, adjust, and record data for each operating
mode.
G. Record indicated conditions and corresponding initial and final measurements. Report
deficiencies.
3.14 TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION
A. Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned.
B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect
control functions.
C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements.

D. Check the operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low-temperature controllers).
E. Check free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve operators.
F. Check the sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device positions and
correlate with airflow and water flow measurements. Note the speed of response to input
changes.
G. Check the interaction of electrically operated switch transducers.
H. Check the interaction of interlock and lockout systems.
I. Check main control supply-air pressure and observe compressor and dryer operations.
J. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine whether the system operates
on a grounded or nongrounded power supply.
K. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations.
3.15 TOLERANCES
A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent.
2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent.
3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 10 percent.
4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 5 percent.
3.16 REPORTING
A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as

specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems'
balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to
facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to
HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and
balancing devices.
B. Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe completed procedures,

procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems
found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each
building floor for systems serving multiple floors.
3.17 FINAL REPORT
A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in

three-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.
B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and
balancing engineer.
1. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

C. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field report data, include the following:
1. Fan curves.
2. Manufacturers' test data.
3. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
4. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include Shop Drawings
and Product Data.
D. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data in the
final report, as applicable:
1. Title page.
2. Name and address of TAB firm.
3. Project name.
4. Project location.
5. Architect's name and address.
6. Engineer's name and address.
7. Contractor's name and address.
8. Report date.
9. Signature of TAB firm who certifies the report.
10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.
Number each page in the report.
11. Summary of contents including the following:
a. Indicated versus final performance.
b. Notable characteristics of systems.
c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract
Documents.
12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.
13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings.
14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports varies from indicated
values.
15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:
a. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.
b. Conditions of filters.
c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.
d. Face and bypass damper settings.
e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.
f. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.
g. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
E. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present
each system with single-line diagram and include the following:
1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.
2. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
3. Terminal units.
4. Position of balancing devices.
F. Air-Handling Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:
1. Unit Data: Include the following:
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.

c. Make and type.

d. Model number and unit size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Unit arrangement and class.
g. Discharge arrangement.
h. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
i. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches.
j. Number of belts, make, and size.
k. Number of filters, type, and size.
2. Motor Data:
a. Make and frame type and size.
b. Horsepower and rpm.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full-load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches.
3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Total airflow rate in cfm.
b. Total system static pressure in inches wg.
c. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg.
e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg.
f. Preheat coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.
g. Cooling coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.
h. Heating coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.
i. Outside airflow in cfm.
j. Return airflow in cfm.
k. Outside-air damper position.
l. Return-air damper position.
m. Vortex damper position.
G. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports:

1. Coil Data:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Coil type.
d. Number of rows.
e. Fin spacing in fins per inch o.c.
f. Make and model number.
g. Face area in sq. ft.
h. Tube size in NPS.
i. Tube and fin materials.
j. Circuiting arrangement.
a. Airflow rate in cfm.
b. Average face velocity in fpm.
c. Air pressure drop in inches wg.
d. Outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.
e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.

f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.

g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.
h. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types.
i. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig.
j. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F.
k. Inlet steam pressure in psig.
H. Gas-Fired Heat Apparatus Test Reports: In addition to manufacturer's factory startup

equipment reports, include the following:
1. Unit Data:
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and unit size.
f. Fuel type in input data.
g. Output capacity in Btuh.
h. Ignition type.
i. Burner-control types.
j. Motor horsepower and rpm.
k. Motor volts, phase, and hertz.
l. Motor full-load amperage and service factor.
m. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
n. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches.
b. Entering-air temperature in deg F.
c. Leaving-air temperature in deg F.
d. Air temperature differential in deg F.
e. Entering-air static pressure in inches wg.
f. Leaving-air static pressure in inches wg.
g. Air static-pressure differential in inches wg.
h. Low-fire fuel input in Btuh.
i. High-fire fuel input in Btuh.
j. Manifold pressure in psig.
k. High-temperature-limit setting in deg F.
l. Operating set point in Btuh.
m. Motor voltage at each connection.
n. Motor amperage for each phase.
o. Heating value of fuel in Btuh.
I. Electric-Coil Test Reports: For electric furnaces, duct coils, and electric coils installed in
central-station air-handling units, include the following:
1. Unit Data:
b. Location.
c. Coil identification.
d. Capacity in Btuh.
e. Number of stages.
f. Connected volts, phase, and hertz.

g. Rated amperage.
h. Airflow rate in cfm.
i. Face area in sq. ft.
j. Minimum face velocity in fpm.
a. Heat output in Btuh.
b. Airflow rate in cfm.
c. Air velocity in fpm.
d. Entering-air temperature in deg F.
e. Leaving-air temperature in deg F.
f. Voltage at each connection.
g. Amperage for each phase.
J. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:
1. Fan Data:
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and size.
f. Arrangement and class.
g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
h. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches.
2. Motor Data:
a. Make and frame type and size.
b. Horsepower and rpm.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full-load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches.
g. Number of belts, make, and size.
b. Total system static pressure in inches wg.
c. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg.
e. Suction static pressure in inches wg.
K. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid
representing the duct cross-section and record the following:
1. Report Data:
a. System and air-handling unit number.
b. Location and zone.
c. Traverse air temperature in deg F.
d. Duct static pressure in inches wg.
e. Duct size in inches.
f. Duct area in sq. ft.
g. Indicated airflow rate in cfm.
h. Indicated velocity in fpm.
i. Actual airflow rate in cfm.

j. Actual average velocity in fpm.

k. Barometric pressure in psig.
L. Compressor and Condenser Reports: For refrigerant side of unitary systems, stand-alone
refrigerant compressors, air-cooled condensing units, or water-cooled condensing units, include
the following:
1. Unit Data:
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
c. Unit make and model number.
d. Compressor make.
e. Compressor model and serial numbers.
f. Refrigerant weight in lb.
g. Low ambient temperature cutoff in deg F.
a. Inlet-duct static pressure in inches wg.
b. Outlet-duct static pressure in inches wg.
c. Entering-air, dry-bulb temperature in deg F.
d. Leaving-air, dry-bulb temperature in deg F.
e. Condenser entering-water temperature in deg F.
f. Condenser leaving-water temperature in deg F.
g. Condenser-water temperature differential in deg F.
h. Condenser entering-water pressure in feet of head or psig.
i. Condenser leaving-water pressure in feet of head or psig.
j. Condenser-water pressure differential in feet of head or psig.
k. Control settings.
l. Unloader set points.
m. Low-pressure-cutout set point in psig.
n. High-pressure-cutout set point in psig.
o. Suction pressure in psig.
p. Suction temperature in deg F.
q. Condenser refrigerant pressure in psig.
r. Condenser refrigerant temperature in deg F.
s. Oil pressure in psig.
t. Oil temperature in deg F.
u. Voltage at each connection.
v. Amperage for each phase.
w. Kilowatt input.
x. Crankcase heater kilowatt.
y. Number of fans.
z. Condenser fan rpm.
aa. Condenser fan airflow rate in cfm.
bb. Condenser fan motor make, frame size, rpm, and horsepower.
cc. Condenser fan motor voltage at each connection.
dd. Condenser fan motor amperage for each phase.
M. Instrument Calibration Reports:

1. Report Data:
a. Instrument type and make.
b. Serial number.

c. Application.
d. Dates of use.
e. Dates of calibration.
3.18 INSPECTIONS
A. Initial Inspection:
1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check
measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance
readings documented in the Final Report.
2. Randomly check the following for each system:
a. Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets.
b. Measure water flow of at least 5 percent of terminals.
c. Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare the
reading to the set point.
d. Measure sound levels at two locations.
e. Measure space pressure of at least 10 percent of locations.
f. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position.
g. Note deviations to the Contract Documents in the Final Report.
B. Final Inspection:
1. After initial inspection is complete and evidence by random checks verifies that testing
and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, request that a
final inspection be made by Engineer.
2. TAB firm test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of Owner
and/or A/E.
3. Engineer shall randomly select measurements documented in the final report to be
rechecked. The rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements
recorded, or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour
business day.
4. If the rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the
final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as
"FAILED."
5. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total
measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be
considered incomplete and shall be rejected.
6. TAB firm shall recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report
and balancing device settings to include all changes and resubmit the final report.
7. Request a second final inspection. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner shall
contract the services of another TAB firm to complete the testing and balancing in
accordance with the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the
final payment.
3.19 ADDITIONAL TESTS
A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional testing and balancing to verify that
balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.

B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and
winter conditions, perform additional testing, inspecting, and adjusting during near-peak
summer and winter conditions.

SECTION 230700 - HVAC INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Insulation Materials:
a. Cellular glass.
b. Flexible elastomeric.
c. Mineral fiber.
2. Fire-rated insulation systems.
3. Insulating cements.
4. Adhesives.
5. Mastics.
6. Sealants.
7. Factory-applied jackets.
8. Field-applied fabric-reinforcing mesh.
9. Field-applied cloths.
10. Field-applied jackets.
11. Tapes.
1. Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liners.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, thickness, and
jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship

program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of
Apprenticeship and Training.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-test-

response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84,
by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label
insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with
appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed
Project 16018 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 1

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed

A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate

ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in
Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application, duct
Installer for duct insulation application, and equipment Installer for equipment insulation
application. Before preparing piping and ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain
clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and
for space required for maintenance.
C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.
1.7 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after
installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have
satisfactory test results.
B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of
construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be
applied.
B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less
than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable
according to ASTM C 795.
E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing
process.

F. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid,
hermetically sealed cells. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-
Applied Jackets" Article.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cell-U-Foam Corporation; Ultra-CUF.
b. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Foamglas Super K.
2. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I.
3. Special-Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III.
4. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV.
5. Preformed Pipe Insulation without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 1.
6. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.
G. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with

ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.
a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel.
b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.
c. RBX Corporation; Insul-Sheet 1800 and Insul-Tube 180.
d. Armstrong
e. Certainteed
f. Johns Manville
g. Knauf Insulation
h. Owens Corning
i. Rubatex Corp.
H. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory-applied FSK
jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
a. CertainTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap.
b. Johns Manville; Microlite.
c. Knauf Insulation; Duct Wrap.
d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap.
e. Owens Corning; All-Service Duct Wrap.
I. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide
insulation with factory-applied FSK jacket. For equipment applications, provide insulation with
factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-
Applied Jackets" Article.
a. CertainTeed Corp.; Commercial Board.
b. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; FBX.
c. Johns Manville; 800 Series Spin-Glas.
d. Knauf Insulation; Insulation Board.
e. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Board.
f. Owens Corning; Fiberglas 700 Series.
J. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:


a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200.

b. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok.
c. Knauf Insulation; 1000 Pipe Insulation.
d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K.
e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.
2. Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied
jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
3. Type II, 1200 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 547, Type II, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied
jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
2.2 FIRE-RATED INSULATION SYSTEMS
A. Fire-Rated Board: Structural-grade, press-molded, xonolite calcium silicate, fireproofing board

suitable for operating temperatures up to 1700 deg F. Comply with ASTM C 656, Type II,
Grade 6. tested and certified to provide a 2-hour fire rating by a NRTL acceptable to authority
a. Johns Manville; Super Firetemp M.
B. Fire-Rated Blanket: High-temperature, flexible, blanket insulation with FSK jacket that is
tested and certified to provide a 2-hour fire rating by a NRTL acceptable to authority having
jurisdiction.
a. CertainTeed Corp.; FlameChek.
b. Johns Manville; Firetemp Wrap.
c. Nelson Firestop Products; Nelson FSB Flameshield Blanket.
d. Thermal Ceramics; FireMaster Duct Wrap.
e. 3M; Fire Barrier Wrap Products.
f. Unifrax Corporation; FyreWrap.
g. Vesuvius; PYROSCAT FP FASTR Duct Wrap.
2.3 INSULATING CEMENTS
A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.

a. Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; Triple I.
b. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; Super-Stik.
B. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 196.

a. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; Thermal-V-Kote.
C. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with

ASTM C 449/C 449M.
a. Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; SmoothKote.
b. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; PK No. 127, and Quik-Cote.
c. Rock Wool Manufacturing Company; Delta One Shot.

2.4 ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding
insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.
1. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers.
B. Cellular-GlassAdhesive: Solvent-based resin adhesive, with a service temperature range of

minus 75 to plus 300 deg F.
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-96.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81-33.
C. Flexible Elastomeric: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.

a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aeroseal.
b. Armacell LCC; 520 Adhesive.
c. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-75.
d. RBX Corporation; Rubatex Contact Adhesive.
D. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.

c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80.
d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225.
e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.
E. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2,
Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.
c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80.
F. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.

a. Dow Chemical Company (The); 739, Dow Silicone.
b. Johns-Manville; Zeston Perma-Weld, CEEL-TITE Solvent Welding Adhesive.
c. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; Welding Adhesive.
d. Red Devil, Inc.; Celulon Ultra Clear.
e. Speedline Corporation; Speedline Vinyl Adhesive.

2.5 MASTICS
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with
MIL-C-19565C, Type II.
1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when
B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient
services.
c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-50.
f. Vimasco Corporation; 749.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film
thickness.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.
4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight.
5. Color: White.
C. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.
c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-25.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 35-mil dry film thickness.
3. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F.
5. Color: White.
D. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below ambient services.
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; Encacel.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 60-95/60-96.
c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 570.
d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-70.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 30-mil dry film thickness.
5. Color: White.
E. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services.
c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-05/15.


f. Vimasco Corporation; WC-1/WC-5.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 3 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness.
4. Solids Content: 63 percent by volume and 73 percent by weight.
5. Color: White.
2.6 SEALANTS
A. Joint Sealants:
1. Joint Sealants for Cellular-Glass: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one
of the following:
e. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittseal 444.
f. Vimasco Corporation; 750.
2. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when
3. Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:

a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76-8.
e. Vimasco Corporation; 750.
2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
5. Color: Aluminum.
C. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:
2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
5. Color: White.

2.7 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When

factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a
removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.
4. FSP Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with polyethylene backing;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.
5. Vinyl Jacket: White vinyl with a permeance of 1.3 perms when tested according to
ASTM E 96, Procedure A, and complying with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.
2.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
B. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784,

Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming.
Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.
a. Johns Manville; Zeston.
b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series.
c. Proto PVC Corporation; LoSmoke.
d. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe.
2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.
3. Color: White.
4. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate.
a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges,
unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and
supply covers for lavatories.
5. Factory-fabricated tank heads and tank side panels.
C. Self-Adhesive Outdoor Jacket: 60-mil thick, laminated vapor barrier and waterproofing
membrane for installation over insulation located aboveground outdoors; consisting of a
rubberized bituminous resin on a crosslaminated polyethylene film covered with white or
stucco-embossed aluminum-foil facing.
a. Polyguard; Alumaguard 60.

2.9 TAPES
A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive,
complying with ASTM C 1136.
a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0835.
b. Compac Corp.; 104 and 105.
c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 428 AWF ASJ.
d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ.
2. Width: 3 inches.
3. Thickness: 11.5 mils.
4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
5. Elongation: 2 percent.
6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.
7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive;
complying with ASTM C 1136.
b. Compac Corp.; 110 and 111.
c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 491 AWF FSK.
d. Venture Tape; 1525 CW, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ.
2. Width: 3 inches.
7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.
C. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive.
Suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.
b. Compac Corp.; 130.
c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 370 White PVC tape.
d. Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS.
2. Width: 2 inches.
3. Thickness: 6 mils.
D. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.

b. Compac Corp.; 120.
c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 488 AWF.
d. Venture Tape; 3520 CW.
2. Width: 2 inches.


PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other
conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of
defects.
2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with
requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.
C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with
stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;
free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including
fittings, valves, and specialties.
B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required
for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in insulation system
schedules.
C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.
D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,
supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor
legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper
and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.
3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to
insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation
material manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over
jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.
K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet
and dry film thicknesses.
L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.
2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch wide strips, of same material as insulation
jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of
strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.
3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with
longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap.
Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c.
a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to
maintain vapor seal.
5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at
ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings.
M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal
thickness.
N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking
due to thermal movement.
O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.
Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar
to butt joints.
P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices.
2. Testing agency labels and stamps.
3. Nameplates and data plates.
4. Manholes.
5. Handholes.

6. Cleanouts.
3.4 PENETRATIONS
A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof

penetrations.
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of
roof flashing.
4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush

with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.
C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation

continuously through wall penetrations.
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at
least 2 inches.
4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):
Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation

continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. Terminate insulation at fire
damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper
sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches.
1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping"irestopping
and fire-resistive joint sealers.
F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Duct: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations that are not fire rated.
For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves
and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation.
Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches.
2. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.
3. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in
Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more
specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.
B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with
continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from
same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly
against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular
surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is
uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.
3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt
each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with
adhesive.
4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets,
valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with
insulating cement.
5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating
cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and
replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable
insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor
barrier.
6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation.
Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe
insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a
mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for
above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the
mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.
8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric,
install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions.
Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing
using PVC tape.
9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION."
Match size and color of pipe labels.
C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gauges, pressure temperature taps,
test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels,
and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the
connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing
sealant.

D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the
following:
1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same
thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe
insulation.
2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation
from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe
insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-
steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.
3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except divide
the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.
4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of
mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached
insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe
insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe
insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied
in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.
5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed
surfaces with a metal jacket.
3.6 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate
openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as
pipe insulation.
4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive
to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.
2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to
eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when
available.
2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet
insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow
valve operation without disturbing insulation.
4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's
recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to
surface being insulated.

3.7 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten
bands without deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions
with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with
outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple
longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation
material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.

1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.
4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least
1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.

available.
2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections
of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation
materials with wire or bands.

available.
2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to
valve body.
3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without
disturbing insulation.
E. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation
pins.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area,
for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-
discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as
follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal
centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16
inches o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each
way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold
insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers.
f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation
facing.
4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous
unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with
insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure
laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c.
Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier
mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.
a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-
barrier seal.
b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot
intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped
pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface.
Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the
insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches.
5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints.
At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.
6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section
for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually
mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with
6-inch wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of
stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.
F. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area,
for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-
discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as
follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal
centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16
inches o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, space pins 16 inches o.c. each
way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold
insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.

d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.

e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation
facing.
4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous
unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with
insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure
laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c.
Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier
mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.
a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-
barrier seal.
b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot
intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped
pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface.
Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the
insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches.
5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section
for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and
inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with
individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with
6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of
stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.
3.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION
A. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end
joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks
and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the
finish bead along seam and joint edge.
3.9 FIRE-RATED INSULATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Where fire-rated insulation system is indicated, secure system to ducts and duct hangers and
supports to maintain a continuous fire rating.
B. Insulate duct access panels and doors to achieve same fire rating as duct.
C. Install firestopping at penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Fire-stop systems are

specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
3.10 FINISHES
A. Duct, Equipment, and Pipe Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket
Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 09
painting Sections.
1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket
material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.

a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of
insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual
inspection of the completed Work.
D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.
3.11 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:

1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air.
2. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air.
3. Indoor, concealed return located in nonconditioned space.
4. Indoor, exposed return located in nonconditioned space.
5. Indoor, concealed, Type I, commercial, kitchen hood exhaust.
6. Indoor, concealed exhaust or relief between isolation damper and penetration of building
exterior.
7. Indoor, exposed exhaust or relief between isolation damper and penetration of building
exterior.
8. Outdoor, concealed supply and return.
9. Outdoor, exposed supply and return.
B. Items Not Insulated:

1. Fibrous-glass ducts.
2. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
3. Factory-insulated flexible ducts.
4. Factory-insulated plenums and casings.
5. Flexible connectors.
6. Vibration-control devices.
7. Factory-insulated access panels and doors.
3.12 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Concealed, rectangular, round and flat-oval, supply-air duct insulation shall be the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
B. Concealed, rectangular, round and flat-oval, exhaust-air duct insulation shall be the following:
C. Concealed, Type I, Commercial, Kitchen Hood Exhaust Duct and Plenum Insulation: Fire-rated
blanket or board; thickness as required to achieve 2-hour fire rating.
D. Exposed, rectangular, round and flat-oval, supply-air duct insulation in unconditioned spaces
shall be the following:

E. Exposed, rectangular, round and flat-oval, exhaust-air or relief air duct insulation shall be the
following:
3.13 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for
each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system,
selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
3.14 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Condensate and Equipment Drain Water below 60 Deg F:

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following:
a. Flexible Elastomeric: 3/4 inch thick.
b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.
B. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Piping:

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:
a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.
3.15 OUTDOOR, ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Refrigerant Suction, Liquid and Hot Gas Bypass

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:
a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick with protective jacketing.
3.16 OUTDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE
A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the
field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.
B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
C. Piping, Exposed:
1. PVC: 30 mils thick.
2. Self-Adhesive Outdoor Jacket: 60 mil thick.

SECTION 230900 - HVAC DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS
PART 1 GENERAL
B. Refer to Section 230993 – HVAC Sequence of Operations.
C. Refer to Section 230995 – Laboratory Airflow Control System.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. The temperature control contractor shall furnish and install a web based fully integrated building
automation system with a building graphical user interface that will be comprised of a network of
interoperable, stand-alone digital controllers communicating on an open protocol communication
network residing on/or through the school’s Ethernet system. Anyone with approved password
shall be capable of viewing and changing setpoints through any computer connected to the
schools based on multiple assigned supervisory levels from read only up to full access. Supply
the Engineer and Commissioning Agent passwords to monitor the BAS system. The installing
contractor shall certify, in writing, that the equipment manufacturer has prepared the shop
drawings and that the equipment manufacturer shall certify, in writing, that their company
prepared the shop drawings and that all temperature control equipment was installed under their
direct supervision. System shall be based on BACnet controllers.
B. All temperature control contractor shall furnish and install a fully integrated building automation
system, incorporating direct digital control (DDC) for energy management, equipment
monitoring and control, and subsystems as herein specified. The installation of the control
system shall be performed under the direct supervision of the controls manufacturer with the shop
drawings, flow diagrams, bill of materials, component designation or identification number, and
sequence of operation all bearing the name of the manufacturer. The installing manufacturer
shall certify, in writing, that the shop drawings have been prepared by the equipment
manufacturer and that the equipment manufacturer shall certify, in writing, that the shop
drawings were prepared by their company and that all temperature control equipment was
installed under their direct supervision.
C. The installed controls system to utilize BACnet protocol only.
D. All materials and equipment used shall be standard components, regularly manufactured for the
specified system. All systems and components shall have been thoroughly tested and proven in
actual use of at least 2 years.
E. Temperature control contractor shall be responsible for:

1. Providing of a complete DDC electronic automatic temperature control system.
2. Control of rooftop units with energy recovery, variable refrigerant flow, exhaust fans,
laboratory airflow control systems, and others as denoted on drawings, etc. in accordance
with requirements herein specified.
Project 16018 HVAC DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS 230900 - 1

3. Providing of control devices, valves, instruments, and the like, as herein specified and as
required to comply with required sequences of automatic control.
4. Providing of wiring for secondary control devices, relay switches, safety low limit
controls, etc., and such interlock wiring required.
5. Furnishing adequate supervision on Work performed for him by others to insure proper
operation and the neatest and best possible arrangement.
6. Testing, maintenance of system as herein specified.
F. The temperature control contractor shall read all other Drawings and Specifications, become
familiar with requirements and scope of the Project, and include such coordination work as may
be required.
G. Associated Services: Cooperate with test and balance contractor performing required tests,
inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as
requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel.
Provide the following:
1. Access to the work.
2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests, inspections, and recalibration.
3. Provide access password in controls system.
1.3 SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
A. The software licensing shall have no restrictions on which brand of JACE, Supervisor or System
Programming tools can interact with the system. Station Compatibility must = All and Tool
Compatibility must = ALL.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Control Diagrams
1. Prior to installation and as required in Section 01330, submit to the A/E a complete
system diagram, showing control connections and devices and their connection to other
equipment, together with a clearly written description of the system and an outline of its
function under conditions of operation.
2. Submittals shall be prepared on, or folded to, 8-1/2 inch by 11 inch size and bound in
brochure form.
3. DDC logic and control diagrams shall be included for all equipment and sequences of
control.
4. Upon completion of the Work, provide the complete, accurate, and approved
diagrammatic blueprinted layouts on the automatic control system specified herein and
as installed. Layouts shall show all control equipment including job installation changes,
and the function of each system shall be indicated. Layouts and descriptions shall be
included in the project record set and in the operating and maintenance manuals.
5. Points list to be provided prior to controls programming
B. Equipment
1. Submit shop drawings for the A/E's approval on all, but not limited to, the following
equipment and components indicating arrangements, capacities, range, voltage,
horsepower, construction.
a. Valves

b. Thermostats
c. Relays
d. Panels
e. Gauges
f. Sensors
g. Dampers
h. Switches
i. Pressure Controllers
j. DDC microprocessor
k. Unitary DDC controllers
l. Actuators
C. Project Record Documents: Refer to Division 01.
D. Controls Graphics
1. Equipment Graphics must have written approval from A/E and Owner. Contractor is
responsible to initiate a meeting with A/E and Owner’s Representative. A minimum of
10 days notice must be given prior to meeting. Items to be addressed include:
a. All major equipment and components controls graphics.
b. Labels of all units, panels, actuators, and sensors to match the as-built drawings.
c. Set-points, alarms, and sensors to match as-built drawings.
d. Adjustable and non-adjustable set-points display.
2. Temperature Control Contractor to submit print-out of proposed graphics for each piece
of equipment for approval. Graphics to be submitted within one month following shop
drawing submittal approval.
E. Manufacturer Provided Controls

1. Control diagrams, sequence of operations, and graphics for equipment with manufacturer
provided, unit mounted controls shall be included in the submittal, so that the Owner can
access all information in one location.
1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit three copies of record (as-built) documents upon completion of installation for approval
prior to final completion. Each building shall be submitted independently. Submittal shall
consist of :
1. Project Record Drawings. As-built versions of submittal shop drawings provided as
AutoCAD 2004 (or newer) compatible files on optical disk (file format: .DWG, .DXF,
.VSD, or comparable, and .PDF) and 6 prints of each drawing on 11" x 17" paper.
2. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manual. Printed, electronic, or online help
documentation of the following:
a. As-built versions of submittal product data.
b. Names, addresses, and telephone numbers of installing contractors and service
representatives for equipment and control systems.
c. Operator's manual with procedures for operating control systems: logging on
and off, handling alarms, producing point reports, trending data, overriding
computer control, and changing setpoints and variables.

d. Programming manual or set of manuals with description of programming

language and syntax, of statements for algorithms and calculations used, of
point database creation and modification, of program creation and modification,
and of editor use.
e. Engineering, installation, and maintenance manual or set of manuals that
explains how to design and install new points, panels, and other hardware; how
to perform preventive maintenance and calibration; how to debug hardware
problems; and how to repair or replace hardware.
f. Documentation of programs created using custom programming language
including setpoints, tuning parameters, and object database. Electronic copies of
programs shall meet this requirement if control logic, setpoints, tuning
parameters, and objects can be viewed using furnished programming tools.
g. Graphic files, programs, and database on magnetic or optical media.
h. List of recommended spare parts with part numbers and suppliers.
i. Complete original-issue documentation, installation, and maintenance
information for furnished third-party hardware including computer equipment
and sensors.
j. Complete original-issue copies of furnished software, including operating
systems, custom programming language, operator workstation or web server
software, and graphics software.
k. Licenses, guarantees, and warranty documents for equipment and systems.
l. Recommended preventive maintenance procedures for system components,
including schedule of tasks such as inspection, cleaning, and calibration; time
between tasks; and task descriptions.
A. Electrical components shall be UL listed.
1.7 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
A. The temperature control contractor shall be responsible for final design drawings, installation of
all control wiring and control devices in accordance with National Electric Code. The
temperature control contractor shall also be responsible for startup and complete checkout of the
systems.
B. This Contractor shall furnish complete drawings, component lists, specification sheets and
sequences of operation to the Engineer for approval before start of installation.
C. After corrections and any job installation changes, 6 sets of full drawings, parts lists, specification
sheets, and operation and maintenance manuals are to be furnished to the mechanical contractor
for delivery to the Owner.
D. All DDC logic diagrams shall be updated as built and included in the Operation and Maintenance
Manuals for the Owner.
E. The temperature control contractor is responsible to use all room numbers developed and
approved by the school district in the development of the temperature control system for this
building.

F. This Contractor shall assist the Test and Balance Contractor as required to complete his work.
1.8 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION
A. Duct accessories:
1. Automated dampers
1.9 PRODUCTS NOT FURNISHED OR INSTALLED BUT INTEGRATED WITH THE WORK OF THIS
SECTION
A. Section 230995 – Laboratory Airflow Control System (LACS)

1. Laboratory Airflow Control System: Furnish LACS with an interface to monitor and
control the system as specified in 230995. Use a BACnet or Lon interface.
B. Section 238225 – Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF)

1. VRF System Controls: Furnish VRF system with an interface to monitoring and, as a
minimum, control points specified in Section 230993. Points specified shall be the
minimum acceptable list of interface points. Use a BACnet or Lon interface for points
listed.
C. Sections 237413 - Roof-top units.

1. Roof-top Controls: Furnish Roof-top units with an interface for monitoring and, as a
minimum, control points specified in the Sequence of Operations. Points specified shall
be the minimum acceptable list of interlace points. Use a BACnet interface for points.
D. Communications with Third Party Equipment:

1. Any additional integral control systems included with the products integrated with the
work of this section shall be furnished with a BACnet interface for integration into
the Direct Digital Control System described in this section.
E. Smoke detector supplied by electrical contractor and installed by others. Detector shall
include dry contact for building automation system.
F. Occupancy sensors supplied by electrical contractor. Sensors shall include dry contact for
building automation system. All wiring between VRF units and LACS system to occupancy
sensor by Temperature Control Contractor.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. All approved systems must integrate to an acceptable open protocol, web browser system.
B. The temperature control system shall be bid and installed by an authorized office of the
manufacturer.
C. The temperature control system shall be installed by

1. Siemens Factory Branch Office - Apogee

D. The intent of this specification is to provide a peer-to-peer networked, stand-alone, distributed

control system with BACnet communication protocol into one open, interoperable system.
E. The temperature control contractor shall have 10 years experience in the installation of the same
size of control system as proposed.
2.2 DAMPERS
A. Dampers intended for automatic control, unless part of a factory made unit, shall be furnished by
the temperature control contractor.
1. Dampers, unless otherwise specified, shall be "low leakage" dampers, and shall be
designed for tight shut-off such that for a 1500 FPM damper, leakage does not exceed 1
percent at 6 inches W.G. Silent closing replaceable butyl and neoprene seals shall be
provided on each blade and on all four sides of the frame. Louver linkage to be
concealed in frame channel outside of the air stream. Bearings to be nylon bushings or to
be oil impregnated sintered iron. Rigid blade construction of not lighter than double #22
gauge and 6 inch maximum blade width; frames to have welded corners and be
diagonally braced.
2. Modulating dampers shall be opposed blade type.
3. Whenever practicable, damper size shall be based on 1000 to 1500 FPM air velocity.
4. Automatic dampers installed in unitary equipment furnished by the Equipment
Manufacture shall be checked for proper size and design by the Temperature Control
Contractor. Should any features of these dampers appear to be unsatisfactory, full details
shall be given to the Engineer, in writing, and suggestions made for necessary
corrections.
2.3 DAMPER OPERATORS
A. Damper Operators
1. Damper operators shall be electronic, spring return, low voltage (24VAC), and shall be
properly sized so as to stroke the damper smoothly and efficiently throughout its range.
Actuator response shall be linear in response to sensed load.
a. Damper operators on outside air intakes shall be spring return closed.
2. Operators shall have ample power to overcome damper linkage friction and 200 percent
of the torque required. Provide not less than one damper operator for each 25 square feet
of damper area.
2.4 RELAYS
A. Electric
1. Where required, provide relays for energizing or re-energizing the various branch
circuits, in response to master control panels. Relays shall be UL labeled and sized for
not less than 140 percent of the connected amperage load. Relays shall be rated for the
system voltage and have proper throw and poles.

2.5 SENSING DEVICES
A. Electronic Temperature Sensors

1. Provide temperature sensors and other temperature indicating sensors of commercial
grade quality located at the point of measurement and installed according to the
manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Thermistor temperature sensors shall be 10,000 ohm at 77 F with Precon type-3 material.
Accuracy shall be +/-0.36 F between the range of 32.0 - 158.0 F.
3. Provide temperature sensors such that the BAS shall be able to convert the resistive input
signal available from the element into a digital signal for use by the BAS.
4. Provide outside air temperature sensors with a watertight fitting and adequate protection
from the effects of solar radiation.
5. Provide water temperature sensors of the bulb type, mounted within brass or stainless
steel wells filled with a heat conductive compound and in direct contact with the water
within the pipe.
6. All field mounted sensors shall be labeled as to their function and name used in the
control program.
B. Electronic Room Temperature Sensors

1. Temperature sensors shall be Precon type-3 or equal thermistors utilizing a 10K ohm
thermistor. Sensors shall be manufactured in a durable epoxy housing and shall be
enclosed for protection from elements when installed in the sensors operating
environment. The sensor cover shall be provided with tamperproof screws. Room
temperature sensors shall be provided with digital LCD display, with plus or minus 3
degrees temperature adjustment control. Override buttons shall be provided for each
zone in an accessible area. A minimum of one override per zone is required.
C. Wall Plate Temperature Sensors

1. Wall temperature sensors shall be a brushed stainless steel plate to fit a common 2x4
electrical box to measure temperature only in the space. A foam gasket seal is required
at the plate to the electrical box. Plate back shall be insulated. Provide communication
connection on face for local diagnostics. Sensors shall be located in gymnasiums,
vestibules, in area as indicated on the drawings.
D. Electric Thermostats
1. Electric thermostats shall be line voltage type of single-pole, single-throw design.
2. Sensing element shall be liquid-filled.
3. Thermostat shall include an accessible adjustment knob for setting temperature setpoints.
4. Covers and base plates shall be of standard design and finish.
E. Electronic Duct Temperature Sensors

1. All duct sensors shall be true averaging type sensors with capillary lengths not less than
20 feet long. The only exceptions will be return air and outdoor air sensors.
2. All duct sensors shall be installed within enclosures that are suitable for the application.
F. Sensor Guards
1. Provide guard of almond colored, mounted with back frame to wall using screws where
denoted on drawings with a sub "G".
2. Guards shall be made of durable material to withstand abuse.

G. Safety Low Limit Thermostats

1. Safety low limit thermostats with flexible sensing elements shall serpentine full length of
duct or coil. Instrument to be sensitive to lowest temperature at any 12 inch increment
on its 20 foot length. Thermostat shall have a range of 34 degrees F. to 60 degrees F.
with a fixed 5 degrees F. differential.
a. Safety low limit thermostats shall be capable of being reset through software at
the building energy management computer.
H. Electronic Pressure Sensors

1. Provide pressure sensors and other pressure indicating sensors of commercial grade
quality located at the point of measurement and installed according to the manufacturer's
recommendations.
2. Provide pressure sensors of the direct acting or reverse acting, unidirectional or bi-
directional type such that the BAS shall be able to convert the 0 to 5 volts DC input
signal available from the sensor into a digital signal for use by the BAS.
3. Provide pressure sensors utilizing the smallest possible operating range which will
sufficiently cover the range required for normal operating conditions.
4. Provide pressure sensors of the ultra precision type with a tolerance at 70 degrees F of no
greater than plus/minus .8 percent of full scale and an end-to-end (full scale) accuracy of
plus/minus 2 percent of full scale.
5. All field mounted sensors shall be labeled as to their function and name used in the
Building Automation System software program.
I. Humidity Sensors
1. Shall be a "Current Type" humidity transducer. Sensor shall produce a linear 4-20mA
current representing the span of the sensor. This signal shall be produced by the sensor
itself through a current convertor supplied with the sensor.
2. Outdoor air humidity sensor shall be enclosed in a weathertight enclosure and shall be
located in a place to provide best representation of outdoor air relative humidity. Sensor
span shall be 10 to 90 percent relative humidity and shall be accurate within + 2 percent
of span.
3. Space humidity sensor shall be enclosed in a durable enclosure for mounting in interior
zones. Sensor shall have a range of 0 to 100 percent relative humidity and shall be
accurate with + 2 percent of span.
4. Duct humidity sensor shall be a probe type with all wiring enclosed in an electrical box.
Sensor shall have a range of 0 to 100 percent with an accuracy of + 3 percent of span.
J. Current Sensing Status Switch

1. Shall be capable of detecting changes in flow of current to motors in determining
accurate and reliable equipment status.
2. Ampere rating for 0 - 135 amps continuous.
3. Sensor supply voltage shall be included from monitor conductor.
4. Minimum current required is 1 amp.
5. Trip setpoint shall be adjustable to +/- 1 percent of range.

K. Remote Differential Pressure Transmitter (DPT)

1. Differential Pressure Transmitters shall be provided by the Temperature Control
Contractor to be completely self-contained, variable capacitance type gauge pressure
transmitters. Wiring terminals and electronics shall be in separate compartments, so the
electronics remain sealed during installation. Reverse polarity protection shall be
included to keep wiring mishaps from damaging the transmitter. The 4-20mA DC signal
shall be transmitted over a pair of No. 22 gauge or larger wire directly to the control
enclosure.
2. Design range shall be as required by system. External zero and span adjustments, over
pressure to 2,000 PSI and no humidity effects.
3. Minimum accuracy shall be +/-0.25 percent of calibrated span. Includes combined
effects of linearity, hysteresis and repeatability. Stability shall be +/-0.25 percent of
upper range limit for 6 months. No internal mechanical linkages shall be used in the
transmitter.
L. Duct Mounted Carbon Dioxide Sensors

1. Provide sensors in return air ducts to air handling units.
2. Sensor shall employ non-dispersive infrared technology repeatable to + 20 ppm + 1
percent of measured valve and accuracy to + 30 ppm + 5 percent or measured valve.
a. Measurement range: 0-2000 ppm.
b. Field selectable outputs of 0-10V or 4-20mA.
c. LCD display of Co2 ppm.
d. 5 year calibration interval.
M. Wall Mounted Carbon Dioxide Sensors

1. Provide sensors in location shown on Drawings. A minimum of one sensor per zone.
2. Sensor shall employ non-dispersive infrared technology repeatable to + 20 ppm + 1
percent of measured valve and accuracy to + 30 ppm + 5 percent or measured valve.
a. Measurement range: 0-2000 ppm.
b. Field selectable outputs of 0-10V or 4-20mA.
c. Without LCD display.
d. 5 year calibration interval.
2.6 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
A. Refer to Project Manual Section 232923 – Variable Frequency Motor Controllers
B. Provide direct communication between the DDC/BAS system and the variable frequency
controller (VFC). VFC fan control data as well as drive power data (minimum voltage, current,
and frequency) shall be available for data collection and trending at the DDC/BAS operator’s
workstation.
2.7 CONTROL CABINETS/ENCLOSURES
A. Control cabinet/enclosure shall be extruded aluminum, galvanized steel or factory-hardened

plastic with key locks and hinged doors. Electric panels shall be of code steel construction with
UL label.

1. The control cabinet/enclosure shall be required to house devices not enclosed as a part of
the DDC building automation system panels. Prewire with internal wiring terminated at
labeled terminal strips. Thermometers and switches shall be mounted on the cover of the
panel. Relays, transformers, and components shall be mounted inside the panel.
Devices, whether interior or exterior, shall be provided with legend plates of engraved
formica or equal. Cabinets shall be located as approved by the A/E or as indicated on
the Drawings.
2. Where two or more control items or accessories (thermostats, thermometer, relay, etc.)
are to be mounted at a single location, such equipment shall be mounted in a suitable
cabinet. Cabinets shall be located as approved by the A/E or indicated on the Drawings.
3. Local type panels need not contain graphic representations or symbols, unless specified
below, but must contain approved nameplates, legends, etc., for each device.
4. Where panels contain any wiring, panels shall be UL approved cubicles.
2.8 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM
A. General
1. The Building Automation System (BAS) shall be comprised of a network of
interoperable, stand-alone digital controllers, a computer system, graphical user interface
software, portable operator terminals, printers, network devices and other devices as
specified herein. The installed system shall provide secure password access to all
features, functions and data contained in the overall BAS.
2. The system shall reside on/through the campus Ethernet system.
B. Open, Interoperable, Integrated Architectures

1. The intent of this specification is to provide a peer-to-peer networked, stand-alone,
distributed control system with the ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-1995 BACnet
technology communication protocol in one open, interoperable system.
2. The supplied computer software shall employ object-oriented technology (OOT) for
representation of all data and control devices within the system. In addition, adherence
to industry standards including ANSI / ASHRAE™ Standard 135-1995, BACnet to
assure interoperability between all system components is required. For each BACnet
device, the device supplier must provide a PICS document showing the installed
device’s compliance level. Minimum compliance is Level 3; with the ability to support
data read and write functionality. Physical connection of BACnet devices shall be via
Ethernet.
3. All components and controllers supplied under this contract shall be true “peer-to-peer”
communicating devices. Components or controllers requiring “polling” by a host to pass
data shall not be acceptable.
4. The supplied system must incorporate the ability to access all data using standard web
browsers without requiring proprietary operator interface and configuration programs.
An Open DataBase Connectivity (ODBC) or Structured Query Language (SQL)
compliant server database is required for all system database parameter storage. This
data shall reside on a supplier-installed server for all database access. Systems requiring
proprietary database and user interface programs shall not be acceptable.
5. A hierarchical topology is required to assure reasonable system response times and to
manage the flow and sharing of data without unduly burdening the customer’s internal
Intranet network. Systems employing a “flat” single tiered architecture shall not be
acceptable.

a. Maximum acceptable response time from any alarm occurrence (at the point of
origin) to the point of annunciation shall not exceed 5 seconds for network
connected user interfaces.
b. Maximum acceptable response time from any alarm occurrence (at the point of
origin) to the point of annunciation shall not exceed 60 seconds for remote or
dial-up connected user interfaces.
C. Networks
1. The Local Area Network (LAN) shall be either a 10 or 100 Megabits/sec Ethernet
network supporting BACnet, Java, XML, HTTP, and CORBA IIOP for maximum
flexibility for integration of building data with enterprise information systems and
providing support for multiple Network Area Controllers (NACs), user workstations and,
if specified, a local host computer system.
2. Local area network minimum physical and media access requirements:
a. Ethernet; IEEE standard 802.3
b. Cable; 10 Base-T, UTP-8 wire, category 5
c. Minimum throughput; 10 Mbps, with ability to increase to 100 Mbps
D. Network Access
1. Remote Access
a. For Local Area Network installations, provide access to the LAN from a remote
location, via the Internet. The owner shall provide a connection to the Internet
to enable this access via T1 Line or via the customer’s Intranet to a corporate
server providing access to an Internet Service Provider (ISP). Owner agrees to
pay monthly access charges for connection and ISP.
b. Where no Local Area Network exists, FMCS supplier shall provide the
following:
1) 8 Port Ethernet hub (3Com, or equal)
2) Ethernet router (Cisco or equal)
E. Network Area Controller (NAC)

1. The Network Area Controller (NAC) shall provide the interface between the LAN or
WAN and the field control devices, and provide global supervisory control functions
over the control devices connected to the NAC. It shall be capable of executing
application control programs to provide:
a. Calendar functions
b. Scheduling
c. Trending
d. Alarm monitoring and routing
e. Time synchronization
f. Integration of LonWorks controller data and BACnet controller data
g. Network Management functions for all LonWorks based devices
2. The Network Area Controller must provide the following hardware features as a
minimum:
a. One Ethernet Port -10 / 100 Mbps
b. One RS-232 port
c. One LonWorks Interface Port – 78KB FTT-10A

d. Flash memory for long term data backup (If battery backup or flash memory is
not supplied, the controller must contain a hard disk with at least 1 gigabyte
storage capacity)
e. The NAC must be capable of operation over a temperature range of 0 to 55°C
f. The NAC must be capable of withstanding storage temperatures of between 0
and 70°C
g. The NAC must be capable of operation over a humidity range of 5 to 95% RH,
non-condensing
3. The NAC shall provide multiple user access to the system and support for ODBC or
SQL. A database resident on the NAC shall be an ODBC-compliant database or must
provide an ODBC data access mechanism to read and write data stored within it.
4. The NAC shall support standard Web browser access via the Intranet/Internet. It shall
support a minimum of 16 simultaneous users.
5. Event Alarm Notification and actions
a. The NAC shall provide alarm recognition, storage; routing, management, and
analysis to supplement distributed capabilities of equipment or application
specific controllers.
b. The NAC shall be able to route any alarm condition to any defined user location
whether connected to a local network or remote via dial-up, telephone
connection, or wide-area network.
c. Alarm generation shall be selectable for annunciation type and
acknowledgement requirements including but limited to:
1) To alarm
2) Return to normal
3) To fault
d. Provide for the creation of an unlimited number of alarm classes for the purpose
of routing types and or classes of alarms, i.e.: security, HVAC, Fire, etc.
e. Provide timed (schedule) routing of alarms by class, object, group, or node.
f. Provide alarm generation from binary object “runtime” and /or event counts for
equipment maintenance. The user shall be able to reset runtime or event count
values with appropriate password control.
6. Control equipment and network failures shall be treated as alarms and annunciated.
7. Alarms shall be annunciated in any of the following manners as defined by the user:
a. Screen message text
b. Email of the complete alarm message to multiple recipients. Provide the ability
to route and email alarms based on:
1) Day of week
2) Time of day
3) Recipient
c. Pagers via paging services that initiate a page on receipt of email message.
d. Building graphical display with flashing alarm objects/areas.
e. Printed message, routed directly to a dedicated alarm printer.
8. The following shall be recorded by the NAC for each alarm (at a minimum):
a. Time and date
b. Location (building, floor, zone, office number, etc.)
c. Equipment (air handler #, accessway, etc.)
d. Acknowledge time, date, and user who issued acknowledgement.
e. Number of occurrences since last acknowledgement.

9. Alarm actions may be initiated by user defined programmable objects created for that
purpose.
10. Defined users shall be given proper access to acknowledge any alarm, or specific types
or classes of alarms defined by the user.
11. A log of all alarms shall be maintained by the NAC and/or a server (if configured in the
system) and shall be available for review by the user.
12. Provide a “query” feature to allow review of specific alarms by user defined parameters.
13. A separate log for system alerts (controller failures, network failures, etc.) shall be
provided and available for review by the user.
14. An Error Log to record invalid property changes or commands shall be provided and
available for review by the user.
F. Data Collection and Storage

1. The NAC shall have the ability to collect data for any property of any object and store
this data for future use.
2. The data collection shall be performed by log objects, resident in the NAC that shall
have, at a minimum, the following configurable properties:
a. Designating the log as interval or deviation.
b. For interval logs, the object shall be configured for time of day, day of week and
the sample collection interval.
c. For deviation logs, the object shall be configured for the deviation of a variable
to a fixed value. This value, when reached, will initiate logging of the object.
d. For all logs, provide the ability to set the maximum number of data stores for the
log and to set whether the log will stop collecting when full, or rollover the data
on a first-in, first-out basis.
e. Each log shall have the ability to have its data cleared on a time-based event or
by a user-defined event or action.
3. All log data shall be stored in a relational database in the NAC and the data shall be
accessed from a server (if the system is so configured) or a standard Web Browser.
4. All log data, when accessed from a server, shall be capable of being manipulated using
standard SQL statements.
5. All log data shall be available to the user in the following data formats:
a. HTML
b. XML
c. Plain Text
d. Comma or tab separated values
6. Systems that do not provide log data in HTML and XML formats at a minimum shall not
be acceptable.
7. The NAC shall have the ability to archive it’s log data either locally (to itself), or
remotely to a server or other NAC on the network. Provide the ability to configure the
following archiving properties, at a minimum:
a. Archive on time of day
b. Archive on user-defined number of data stores in the log (buffer size)
c. Archive when log has reached it’s user-defined capacity of data stores
d. Provide ability to clear logs once archived

G. Audit Log
1. Provide and maintain an Audit Log that tracks all activities performed on the NAC.
Provide the ability to specify a buffer size for the log and the ability to archive log based
on time or when the log has reached it’s user-defined buffer size. Provide the ability to
archive the log locally (to the NAC), to another NAC on the network, or to a server. For
each log entry, provide the following data:
a. Time and date
b. User ID
c. Change or activity: i.e., Change setpoint, add or delete objects, commands, etc.
H. Database Backup And Storage

1. The NAC shall have the ability to automatically backup its database. The database shall
be backed up based on a user-defined time interval.
2. Copies of the current database and, at the most recently saved database shall be stored in
the NAC. The age of the most recently saved database is dependent on the user-defined
database save interval.
3. The NAC database shall be stored, at a minimum, in XML format to allow for user
viewing and editing, if desired. Other formats are acceptable as well, as long as XML
format is supported.
I. Interoperable BACnet Controller (IBC)

1. Controls shall be microprocessor based Interoperable BACnet Controllers (IBC) in
accordance with the ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-1995. IBCs shall be provided for
terminal units, etc. The application control program shall be resident within the same
enclosure as the input/output circuitry, which translates the sensor signals. The system
supplier must provide a PICS document showing the installed systems compliance level
to the ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-1995. Minimum compliance is Level 3.
2. The IBCs shall communicate with the NAC via an Ethernet connection at a baud rate of
not less than 10 Mbps.
3. The IBC Sensor shall connect directly to the IBC and shall not utilize any of the I/O
points of the controller. The IBC Sensor shall provide a two-wire connection to the
controller that is polarity and wire type insensitive. The IBC Sensor shall provide a
communications jack for connection to the BACnet communication trunk to which the
IBC controller is connected. The IBC Sensor, the connected controller, and all other
devices on the BACnet bus shall be accessible by the POT.
4. All IBCs shall be fully application programmable and shall at all times maintain their
BACnet Level 3 compliance. Controllers offering application selection only (non-
programmable), require a 10% spare point capacity to be provided for all applications.
All control sequences within or programmed into the IBC shall be stored in non-volatile
memory, which is not dependent upon the presence of a battery, to be retained.
J. Graphical User Interface Software

1. Operating System:
a. The GUI shall run on Microsoft Windows 7 or most recent.

2. The GUI shall employ browser-like functionality for ease of navigation. It shall include
a tree view (similar to Windows Explorer) for quick viewing of, and access to, the
hierarchical structure of the database. In addition, menu-pull downs, and toolbars shall
employ buttons, commands and navigation to permit the operator to perform tasks with a
minimum knowledge of the HVAC Control System and basic computing skills. These
shall include, but are not limited to, forward/backward buttons, home button, and a
context sensitive locator line (similar to a URL line), that displays the location and the
selected object identification.
3. Real-Time Displays. The GUI, shall at a minimum, support the following graphical
features and functions:
a. Color graphic floor plan displays for each building, floor and zone controlled as
well as system schematics for each piece of mechanical equipment, including
rooftop units, VRF units, terminal units, unitary equipment, exhaust fans,
laboratory airflow control systems, shall be provided by the temperature control
contractor to optimize system performance analysis and speed alarm
recognition. Rooms shall be color coded on the floor plan. The room color shall
change based on temperature compared to the setpoint.
b. The temperature control contractor is responsible to use all room numbers
developed and approved by the school district in the development of the
temperature control system for this building. The room numbers shall match
room signage.
c. The sequence of operations shall be located as a pull down feature at each piece
of equipment.
d. The operator interface shall allow users to access the various system schematics
and floor plans via a graphical penetration scheme, menu selection or text-based
commands. Dynamic temperature values, flow values and status indication shall
be shown in their actual respective locations and shall automatically update to
represent current conditions without operator intervention.
e. Graphic screens shall be developed using any drawing package capable of
generating a GIF, BMP, or JPG file format. Use of proprietary graphic file
formats shall not be acceptable. In addition to, or in lieu of a graphic
background, the GUI shall support the use of scanned pictures.
f. Graphic screens shall contain objects for text, real-time values, animation, color
spectrum objects or “thermo-graphics”, logs, graphs, HTML or XML document
links, schedule objects, hyperlinks to other URL’s, and links to other graphic
screens.
g. Graphics shall support layering and each graphic object shall be configurable
for assignment to a layer. A minimum of six layers shall be supported.
h. Modifying common application objects, such as schedules, calendars, and set
points shall be accomplished in a graphical manner.
1) Schedule times will be adjusted using a graphical slider, without
requiring any keyboard entry from the operator.
2) Holidays shall be set by using a graphical calendar, without requiring
any keyboard entry from the operator.
i. Commands to start and stop binary objects shall be done by right-clicking the
selected object and selecting the appropriate command from the pop-up menu.
No entry of text shall be required.

j. Adjustments to analog objects, such as set points, shall be done by right-clicking

the selected object and using a graphical slider to adjust the value. No entry of
text shall be required.
4. System Configuration. At a minimum, the GUI shall permit the operator to perform the
following tasks, with proper password access:
1) Create, delete or modify control strategies.
2) Add/delete objects to the system.
3) Tune control loops through the adjustment of control loop parameters.
4) Enable or disable control strategies.
5) Generate hard copy records or control strategies on a printer.
6) Select points to be alarmable and define the alarm state.
7) Select points to be trended over a period of time and initiate the
recording of values automatically.
5. On-Line Help. Provide a context sensitive, on-line help system to assist the operator in
operation and editing of the system. On-line help shall be available for all applications
and shall provide the relevant data for that particular screen. Additional help
information shall be available through the use of hypertext. All system documentation
and help files shall be in HTML format.
6. Security. Each operator shall be required to log on to that system with a user name and
password in order to view, edit, add, or delete data. System security shall be selectable
for each operator. The system administrator shall have the ability to set passwords and
security levels for all other operators. Each operator password shall be able to restrict
the operators’ access for viewing and/or changing each system application, full screen
editor, and object. Each operator shall automatically be logged off of the system if no
keyboard or mouse activity is detected. This auto log-off time shall be set per operator
password. All system security data shall be stored in an encrypted format.
7. System Diagnostics. The system shall automatically monitor the operation of all
workstations, printers, modems, network connections, building management panels, and
controllers. The failure of any device shall be annunciated to the operator.
8. Alarm Console
a. The system will be provided with a dedicated alarm window or console. This
window will notify the operator of an alarm condition, and allow the operator to
view details of the alarm and acknowledge the alarm. The use of the Alarm
Console can be enabled or disabled by the system administrator.
b. When the Alarm Console is enabled, a separate alarm notification window will
supercede all other windows on the desktop and shall not be capable of being
minimized or closed by the operator. This window will notify the operator of
new alarms and un-acknowledged alarms. Alarm notification windows or
banners that can be minimized or closed by the operator shall not be acceptable.
9. All sensors, devices, start/stop, status, schedules, setpoints, and reset schedules shall be
shown and labeled in the controls graphics. All labels shall match as-built drawings and
actual installed tag designation.
10. The GUI shall be capable of trending a minimum of 8 separate points on a single graph
K. Web Browser Clients

1. The system shall be capable of supporting an unlimited number of clients using a
standard Web browser such as Internet Explorer™ or Netscape Navigator™. Systems
requiring additional software (to enable a standard Web browser) to be resident on the
client machine, or manufacture-specific browsers shall not be acceptable.

2. The Web browser software shall run on any operating system and system configuration
that is supported by the Web browser. Systems that require specific machine
requirements in terms of processor speed, memory, etc., in order to allow the Web
browser to function with the FMCS, shall not be acceptable.
3. The Web browser shall provide the same view of the system, in terms of graphics,
schedules, calendars, logs, etc., and provide the same interface methodology as is
provided by the Graphical User Interface. Systems that require different views or that
require different means of interacting with objects such as schedules, or logs, shall not be
permitted.
4. The Web browser client shall support at a minimum, the following functions:
a. User log-on identification and password shall be required. If an unauthorized
user attempts access, a blank web page shall be displayed. Security using Java
authentication and encryption techniques to prevent unauthorized access shall
be implemented.
b. Graphical screens developed for the GUI shall be the same screens used for the
Web browser client. Any animated graphical objects supported by the GUI
shall be supported by the Web browser interface.
c. HTML programming shall not be required to display system graphics or data on
a Web page. HTML editing of the Web page shall be allowed if the user desires
a specific look or format.
d. Storage of the graphical screens shall be in the Network Area Controller (NAC),
without requiring any graphics to be stored on the client machine. Systems that
require graphics storage on each client are not acceptable.
e. Real-time values displayed on a Web page shall update automatically without
requiring a manual “refresh” of the Web page.
f. User’s shall have administrator-defined access privileges. Depending on the
access privileges assigned, the user shall be able to perform the following:
1) Modify common application objects, such as schedules, calendars, and
set points in a graphical manner.
a) Schedule times will be adjusted using a graphical slider,
without requiring any keyboard entry from the operator.
b) Holidays shall be set by using a graphical calendar, without
requiring any keyboard entry from the operator.
2) Commands to start and stop binary objects shall be done by right-
clicking the selected object and selecting the appropriate command
from the pop-up menu. No entry of text shall be required.
3) View logs and charts
4) View and acknowledge alarms
g. The system shall provide the capability to specify a user’s (as determined by the
log-on user identification) home page. Provide the ability to limit a specific user
to just their defined home page. From the home page, links to other views, or
pages in the system shall be possible, if allowed by the system administrator.
h. Graphic screens on the Web Browser client shall support hypertext links to
other locations on the Internet or on Intranet sites, by specifying the Uniform
Resource Locator (URL) for the desired link.

L. Server Functions and Hardware

1. The existing campus server shall be utilized for new controls. The server shall support
all Network Area Controllers (NAC) connected to the customer’s network whether local
or remote.
2. Local connections shall be via an Ethernet LAN. Remote connections can be via T1 or
intranet connection.
3. It shall be possible to provide access to all Network Area Controllers via a single
connection to the server. In this configuration, each Network Area Controller can be
accessed from the Graphical User Interface (GUI) or from a standard Web browser
(WBI) by connecting to the server.
4. The server shall provide the following functions, at a minimum:
a. Global Data Access: The server shall provide complete access to distributed
data defined anywhere in the system.
b. Distributed Control: The server shall provide the ability to execute global
control strategies based on control and data objects in any NAC in the network,
local or remote.
c. The server shall include a master clock service for its subsystems and provide
time synchronization for all Network Area Controllers (NAC).
d. The server shall accept time synchronization messages from trusted precision
Atomic Clock Internet sites and update its master clock based on this data.
e. The server shall provide scheduling for all Network Area Controllers and their
underlying field control devices.
f. The server shall provide demand limiting that operates across all Network Area
Controllers. The server must be capable of multiple demand programs for sites
with multiple meters and or multiple sources of energy. Each demand program
shall be capable of supporting separate demand shed lists for effective demand
control.
g. The server shall implement the BACnet Command Prioritization scheme (16
levels) for safe and effective contention resolution of all commands issued to
Network Area Controllers. Systems not employing this prioritization shall not
be accepted.
h. Each Network Area Controller supported by the server shall have the ability to
archive its log data, alarm data and database to the server, automatically.
Archiving options shall be user-defined including archive time and archive
frequency.
i. The server shall provide central alarm management for all Network Area
Controllers supported by the server. Alarm management shall include:
1) Routing of alarms to display, printer, email and pagers
2) View and acknowledge of alarms
3) Query alarm logs based on user-defined parameters
j. The server shall provide central management of log data for all Network Area
Controllers supported by the server. Log data shall include process logs,
runtime and event counter logs, audit logs and error logs. Log data management
shall include:
1) Viewing and printing log data
2) Exporting log data to other software applications
3) Query log data based on user-defined parameters

M. System Programming
1. The Graphical User Interface software (GUI) shall provide the ability to perform system
programming and graphic display engineering as part of a complete software package.
Access to the programming functions and features of the GUI shall be through password
access as assigned by the system administrator.
2. A library of control, application, and graphic objects shall be provided to enable the
creation of all applications and user interface screens. Applications are to be created by
selecting the desired control objects from the library, dragging or pasting them on the
screen, and linking them together using a built in graphical connection tool. Completed
applications may be stored in the library for future use. Graphical User Interface screens
shall be created in the same fashion. Data for the user displays is obtained by
graphically linking the user display objects to the application objects to provide “real-
time” data updates. Any real-time data value or object property may be connected to
display its current value on a user display. Systems requiring separate software tools or
processes to create applications and user interface display shall not be acceptable.
3. Programming Methods
a. Provide the capability to copy objects from the supplied libraries, or from a
user-defined library to the user’s application. Objects shall be linked by a
graphical linking scheme by dragging a link from one object to another. Object
links will support one-to-one, many-to-one, or one-to-many relationships.
Linked objects shall maintain their connections to other objects regardless of
where they are positioned on the page and shall show link identification for
links to objects on other pages for easy identification. Links will vary in color
depending on the type of link; i.e., internal, external, hardware, etc.
b. Configuration of each object will be done through the object’s property sheet
using fill-in the blank fields, list boxes, and selection buttons. Use of custom
programming, scripting language, or a manufacturer-specific procedural
language for configuration will not be accepted.
c. The software shall provide the ability to view the logic in a monitor mode.
When on-line, the monitor mode shall provide the ability to view the logic in
real time for easy diagnosis of the logic execution. When off-line (debug), the
monitor mode shall allow the user to set values to inputs and monitor the logic
for diagnosing execution before it is applied to the system.
d. All programming shall be done in real-time. Systems requiring the uploading,
editing, and downloading of database objects shall not be allowed.
e. The system shall support object duplication within a customer’s database. An
application, once configured, can be copied and pasted for easy re-use and
duplication. All links, other than to the hardware, shall be maintained during
duplication.
N. Object Libraries
1. A standard library of objects shall be included for development and setup of application
logic, user interface displays, system services, and communication networks.
2. The objects in this library shall be capable of being copied and pasted into the user’s
database and shall be organized according to their function. In addition, the user shall
have the capability to group objects created in their application and store the new
instances of these objects in a user-defined library.

3. In addition to the standard libraries specified here, the supplier of the system shall
maintain an on-line accessible (over the Internet) library, available to all registered users
to provide new or updated objects and applications as they are developed.
4. All control objects shall conform to the control objects specified in the BACnet
specification.
5. The library shall include applications or objects for the following functions, at a
minimum:
a. Scheduling Object. The schedule must conform to the schedule object as
defined in the BACnet specification, providing 7-day plus holiday & temporary
scheduling features and a minimum of 10 on/off events per day. Data entry to
be by graphical sliders to speed creation and selection of on-off events.
b. Calendar Object. . The calendar must conform to the calendar object as defined
in the BACnet specification, providing 12-month calendar features to allow for
holiday or special event data entry. Data entry to be by graphical “point-and-
click” selection. This object must be “linkable” to any or all scheduling objects
for effective event control.
c. Duty Cycling Object. Provide a universal duty cycle object to allow repetitive
on/off time control of equipment as an energy conserving measure. Any
number of these objects may be created to control equipment at varying
intervals
d. Temperature Override Object. Provide a temperature override object that is
capable of overriding equipment turned off by other energy saving programs
(scheduling, duty cycling etc.) to maintain occupant comfort or for equipment
freeze protection.
e. Start-Stop Time Optimization Object. Provide a start-stop time optimization
object to provide the capability of starting equipment just early enough to bring
space conditions to desired conditions by the scheduled occupancy time. Also,
allow equipment to be stopped before the scheduled un-occupancy time just far
enough ahead to take advantage of the building’s “flywheel” effect for energy
savings. Provide automatic tuning of all start / stop time object properties based
on the previous day’s performance.
6. The library shall include control objects for the following functions. All control objects
shall conform to the objects as specified in the BACnet specification.
a. Analog Input Object - Minimum requirement is to comply with the BACnet
standard for data sharing. Allow high, low and failure limits to be assigned for
alarming. Also, provide a time delay filter property to prevent nuisance alarms
caused by temporary excursions above or below the user defined alarm limits.
b. Analog Output Object - Minimum requirement is to comply with the BACnet
standard for data sharing.
c. Binary Input Object - Minimum requirement is to comply with the BACnet
standard for data sharing. The user must be able to specify either input
condition for alarming. This object must also include the capability to record
equipment run-time by counting the amount of time the hardware input is in an
“on” condition. The user must be able to specify either input condition as the
“on” condition.

d. Binary Output Object - Minimum requirement is to comply with the BACnet

standard for data sharing. Properties to enable minimum on and off times for
equipment protection as well as interstart delay must be provided. The BACnet
Command Prioritization priority scheme shall be incorporated to allow multiple
control applications to execute commands on this object with the highest
priority command being invoked. Provide sixteen levels of priority as a
minimum. Systems not employing the BACnet method of contention resolution
shall not be acceptable.
e. PID Control Loop Object - Minimum requirement is to comply with the
BACnet standard for data sharing. Each individual property must be adjustable
as well as to be disabled to allow proportional control only, or proportional with
integral control, as well as proportional, integral and derivative control.
f. Comparison Object - Allow a minimum of two analog objects to be compared to
select either the highest, lowest, or equality between the two linked inputs. Also,
allow limits to be applied to the output value for alarm generation.
g. Math Object - Allow a minimum of four analog objects to be tested for the
minimum or maximum, or the sum, difference, or average of linked objects.
Also, allow limits to be applied to the output value for alarm generation.
h. Custom Programming Objects - Provide a blank object template for the creation
of new custom objects to meet specific user application requirements. This
object must provide a simple BASIC-like programming language that is used to
define object behavior. Provide a library of functions including math and logic
functions, string manipulation, and e-mail as a minimum. Also, provide a
comprehensive on-line debug tool to allow complete testing of the new object.
Allow new objects to be stored in the library for re-use.
i. Interlock Object - Provide an interlock object that provides a means of
coordination of objects within a piece of equipment such as an Air Handler or
other similar types of equipment. An example is to link the return fan to the
supply fan such that when the supply fan is started, the return fan object is also
started automatically without the user having to issue separate commands or to
link each object to a schedule object. In addition, the control loops, damper
objects, and alarm monitoring (such as return air, supply air, and mixed air
temperature objects) will be inhibited from alarming during a user-defined
period after startup to allow for stabilization. When the air handler is stopped,
the interlocked return fan is also stopped, the outside air damper is closed, and
other related objects within the air handler unit are inhibited from alarming
thereby eliminating nuisance alarms during the off period.
j. Temperature Override Object - Provide an object whose purpose is to provide
the capability of overriding a binary output to an “On” state in the event a user
specified high or low limit value is exceeded. This object is to be linked to the
desired binary output object as well as to an analog object for temperature
monitoring, to cause the override to be enabled. This object will execute a Start
command at the Temperature Override level of start/stop command priority
unless changed by the user.

k. Composite Object - Provide a container object that allows a collection of objects

representing an application to be encapsulated to protect the application from
tampering, or to more easily represent large applications. This object must have
the ability to allow the user to select the appropriate parameters of the
“contained” application that are represented on the graphical shell of this
container.
7. The object library shall include objects to support the integration of devices connected to
the Network Area Controller (NAC). At a minimum, provide the following as part of
the standard library included with the programming software:
a. For BACnet devices, provide the following objects at a minimum:
1) BACnet AI
2) BACnet AO
3) BACnet BI
4) BACnet BO
5) BACnet Device
b. For each BACnet object, provide the ability to assign the object to a BACnet
device and object’s instance number.
2.9 PERSONAL COMPUTER OPERATOR WORKSTATION
A. The existing campus temperature control workstation(s) and devices shall be utilized for control
of new systems.
1. Critical alarms shall be reported via e-mail and/or cell phones to the maintenance
department employees.
2. All existing workstations and devices shall include the ability to access the temperature
control system via the Owner’s Ethernet wide area network or the internet. User
interface shall be seamless and the user shall be capable of performing all functions that
can be performed locally.
B. All existing workstations and devices shall be used for command entry, information management,
network alarm management, and data base management functions. All real-time control
functions shall be resident in the standalone DDC panels to facilitate greater fault tolerance and
reliability.
2.10 TEMPERATURE CONTROL WIRING
A. Wiring in air plenums shall be open wired UL listed plenum cable or shall be installed in conduit.
B. Conduit shall be 1/2 inch minimum size and shall be furnished and installed by the temperature
control contractor.
C. Concealed wiring and wiring in non-plenum ceiling cavities, which is operating under 100 volts,
may be open wired if in compliance with Article 725, NFPA-70 (NEC). Open wiring shall be
secured with plastic tie wraps to the permanent building structure as approved by the A/E.
D. Terminations shall be performed by the Temperature Control Contractor.
E. Wire and conduit not indicated on the Drawings or in the Specifications, but required by the
controls supplier, shall be paid for by the Temperature Control Contractor.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. DDC Global Control Panel for network control and building interface shall be located shown on
the Drawings.
B. Control of the rooftop units, variable refrigerant flow, exhaust fans, and laboratory airflow
control system shall be accomplished through DDC control.
C. Control of the cabinet unit heaters and unit heaters shall be accomplished through local electric
thermostats.
D. All sensors and devices shall be labeled. All labels and designations shall match designations in
controls software and as-built drawings.
3.2 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
A. Refer to Specification Section 230993 for all equipment sequences of operation.
3.3 OCCUPIED/UNOCCUPIED ZONES
A. Zone control shall include all units designated in sequence of operation. All zones to include
capabilities through the Building Automation System for override setting to full occupied cycle
during unoccupied cycle.
1. All zones shall include computer controlled overrides.
3.4 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY
A. It is intended that the Temperature Control Contractor include as part of his bid one (1) year full
service warranty. All labor and material shall be guaranteed against defects in workmanship for
the one (1) year period from the date of Substantial Completion as determined by A/E and/or
Owner. Any material proving defective shall be repaired or replaced during that period. This
shall not, however, apply to material that has been damaged due to willful negligence.
B. The Contractor will provide hardware and software support during the first year guarantee after
the date of acceptance. Hardware support includes replacing of any major or minor components,
relays, sensors, etc., that fail to operate properly. Software support includes upgrading of
software during warranty period such that system is loaded with latest available revision at end of
warranty period.
C. Support is also defined to include Owner personnel training needed to operate the system
effectively as outlined in this Specification. Explicitly included is the training needed to analyze
a building's operation with a view to minimizing energy costs.

3.5 COMPLETION
A. Prior to final inspection, this Contractor shall perform the following service work, including, but
not limited to, the following items:
1. Check and oil electric motors furnished under control system.
2. Lubricate damper bearings as required.
3. Check damper travel, adjust and tighten set screws.
4. Lubricate valve stems, as required, check packing; repair as required.
5. Calibration of instruments.
6. Check and verify circuitry.
7. Calibrate and checkout controllers, fusing, etc.
8. Test and debug microprocessor and software.
3.6 When the work is completed, and at a time directed by the Owner or the A/E, the Contractor shall
carefully adjust all parts of the equipment and systems. This includes adjustment of automatic controls
and safety devices, proper setting of adjustable devices, dampers and valves, and other necessary
operations so the systems are fully operable and automatic in operation. Upon completion of the Work,
notify the Owner, and/or A/E that system is ready for final tests and inspection.
A. At the time of final inspection, this Contractor shall be represented by a person with the proper
authority, who shall demonstrate, as directed by the A/E, that his Work fully complies with the
purpose and intent of the Specifications and Drawings. Labor, services, instruments, and tools
necessary for demonstrations and tests shall be provided by the Contractor.
B. The Contractor shall test and adjust each instrument specialty and equipment furnished by him,
prior to final acceptance. The Contractor shall demonstrate, for approval by the A/E, that
subsystems operate as a coordinated and properly functioning, integrated system.
C. The Contractor shall furnish labor, provide adjustments and incidentals necessary to obtain the
desired and intended results.
D. The Contractor shall turn over a printed copy and electronic copy of the completed and debugged
operating software to the Owner at the conclusion of the first year warranty.

SECTION 230993 - HVAC SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
PART 1 GENERAL
A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections included under
Division 1, General Requirements, and Section 15050 of this Division are included as a part of
this Section as though Bound herein.
B. Refer to Section 012300 for Alternates that may affect the Work of this Section.
C. Refer to the details and schedules on the Drawings for additional requirements.
D. Refer to Project Manual for commissioning requirements.
E. Refer to section 23 09 95 for Laboratory Airflow Control System requirements.
F. Refer to section 23 74 13 for Packaged, Outdoor, Central Station Air Handling Unit
requirements.
G. Refer to section 23 82 25 “Variable Refrigerant Flow – VRF”
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This Section includes the sequences of operation for the HVAC equipment and systems.
B. The Temperature Control Contractor shall read all other Drawings and Specifications, become
familiar with requirements and scope of the Project, and include such coordination work as may
be required.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals are required and shall include detailed descriptions of the proposed sequence of
operations for all HVAC systems specific to the project.
B. Refer to Section 23 09 00 – HVAC Direct Digital Controls for submittal requirements.
C. Any variations from proposed sequences to be submitted in writing for approval by A/E.
1.4 BUILDING SET POINTS:
A. All set points and other variables noted in the sequences are to be adjustable from the web
accessible graphical user interface so that the owner does not have to go to the school or open any
programming software to change the settings. Access to the adjustable settings shall be password
protected and an audit log shall track who made what changes and when they were made.
Project 16018 HVAC SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 230993 - 1

Winter Design:
Occupied Mode Unoccupied Mode
68 deg. F (adj.) 55 deg. F (adj.)
Summer Design:
Occupied Mode Unoccupied Mode
75 deg. F (adj.), 50% RH 85 deg. F, (adj.)
1.5 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
A. Dedicated Outside Air Packaged Rooftop Units

1. Unit shall be equipped with its own control package that provides required ventilation air
into the building, dehumidifies outside air to required levels, tempers the outside air to
neutral temperature and operates in unoccupied mode. The unit mounted controls shall
all be fully integrated into the BAS. The BAS system shall provide complete
communication for the control and supervisory monitoring of the unit. The unit controls
shall be compatible with the BAS system via BACnet.
2. Refer to project manual section 23 74 13 for scope requirements and additional
information.
3. Supervisory monitoring points – Outside air temperature, outside air humidity, filter
status, return air temperature, return air humidity, exhaust air temperature, exhaust air
humidity, supply air temperature, supply air humidity, mixed air temperature after each
coil/recovery device, cooling staging, gas heat modulation, fan status and speed, damper
positions, and any other points deemed necessary.
a. Trending shall be provided with a minimum of 15 minute increments and 7 day
storage of the following points as a minimum. Additional points as determined
by the Owner or Engineer may be required.
1) Supply Fan Speed
2) Exhaust Fan Speed
3) Discharge Air Temperature
4) Outdoor Air Damper Position
4. Safeties
a. Provide differential pressure sensing across air filters and send alarm to BAS
panel requesting filter change. Include independent alarm for each filter bank at
each unit. Pre-filters and primary filters shall be monitored independently.
Alarms and set points shall be capable of being reset through software at the
temperature control computer. (Coordinate with unit manufacturer for quantity
and locations).
b. A fan proving device will indicate the fan status for each fan and send an alarm
to the central BAS panel indicating fan failure. Fan proving device must be
compatible with variable frequency controllers.
c. Provide a software reset safety low limit thermostat downstream of heating coils
or gas-fired burner set to close the outside air damper, open the heating coil
valve full, and stop the supply fan it the air temperature drops below 38 degrees
F. (adj.). System shall automatically reset when freezing condition has been
eliminated.
d. The system provided must be capable of manually positioning all damper
operators, and the heating valve actuators, if all levels of DDC control fail.

B. Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF) Units

1. Unit shall be equipped with its own control package that provides temperature control
for the building, dehumidifies air to required levels, and operates in unoccupied mode.
The unit mounted controls shall all be fully integrated into the BAS. The BAS system
shall provide complete communication for the control and supervisory monitoring of the
unit. The unit controls shall be compatible with the BAS system via BACnet (coordinate
with Temperature Control Contractor).
a. Variable Refrigerant Flow System (VRF) shall be equipped with its own control
package. The VRF system controls shall all be fully integrated into the BAS.
The BAS system shall provide complete communication for the controls and
supervisory monitoring of the VRF systems with the capability to change
temperature setpoints in each space. The BAS shall be wired into the main
temperature control panel provided by the (VRF) manufacturer.
b. The temperature control contractor shall be responsible to install thermostats,
controllers, and interconnecting wiring as required for a fully functioning
system.
c. Indoor unit to be associated with space occupancy sensor. Temperature control
contractor is responsible for all wiring between occupancy sensor and VRF
units, and any programming required.
d. Scheduling, set-points, and over-ride control to be accomplished by BAS, and
all programming required to be responsibility of temperature controls contractor.
Coordinate all requirements with unit manufacturer.
e. BAS to provide supervisory monitoring of all other points provided by the VRF
system. All information is to be provided graphically.
f. The VRF Outdoor Units shall be interlocked with the corresponding roof-top
unit, and capable of turning on supply fan, and increasing discharge air
temperature during defrost cycle.
g. Refer to project manual section 23 82 25 for scope requirements
C. Cabinet Heaters
1. A line-voltage, electric thermostat shall cycle the unit fan and electric heating coil on a
call for heating.
D. Propeller Unit Heaters

1. A line-voltage, electric thermostat shall cycle the unit fan and electric heating coil on a
call for heating.
E. Laboratory Airflow Control Systems (LACS)

1. The Laboratory Airflow Control System shall be fully integrated into the BAS. The
BAS shall have the ability to fully interface with the LACS system and shall have the
ability to monitor and adjust all points in the system.
F. Exhaust Fans
1. Exhaust fans as scheduled shall operate through the LACS fume hood controller.
2. Exhaust fans as scheduled shall operate with the commercial kitchen hood operation.
3. See Exhaust Fan Schedule on the Drawings.

G. Self-Contained Cooling Units

1. Temperature control contractor shall mount and wire thermostat provided by unit
manufacturer. Control sequence shall be part of unit mounted controls. Temperature
Control Contractor shall monitor room temperature and unit status through the central
BAS panel and alarm if room temperature rises above desired temperature.
H. Kitchen Hood
1. Provide necessary contacts to enable roof top unit when kitchen hood fan is in operation.
I. Variable Frequency Controller

1. The Building Automation System shall monitor all alarms and outputs from the VFCs.
Coordinate communication interface.
J. Humidity Control
1. A space mounted humidity sensor shall send an alarm to the BAS system to override the
dehumidification unit into maximum dehumidification cycle at the air handling unit.
Close the outside air dampers and open the recirculation dampers, activate the DX and
reheat system as required. The unit shall return to normal once humidity levels are
acceptable. Humidity sensors are shown as indicated on the temperature control
drawings.
K. Carbon Dioxide Detection/Demand Controlled Ventilation (Alternate Bid)

1. The BAS system shall monitor the levels of CO2 in spaces as indicated in the
temperature control plan. Under Alternate Bid, demand controlled ventilation shall be
utilized in conjunction with the Laboratory Airflow Control System to reduce the amount
of outdoor air in the classrooms and commons based on occupancy.
L. Smoke Detection
1. Temperature Control Contractor shall wire between smoke detector and unit to shut-
down unit on smoke detection.
M. Day/Night Zones
1. Zone control shall include all mechanical equipment. All zones to include capabilities
through the direct digital controller for override setting to full occupied cycle during
unoccupied cycle.
2. Zones: Refer to temperature control drawings for zone information.
N. Fire Alarm
1. Coordinate with Division 26 Electrical Contractor and provide necessary contacts to shut
down all mechanical equipment during a fire alarm. The system shall be capable of
restarting equipment globally upon a “no alarm signal” from the fire alarm panel.
O. Emergency Generator
1. Monitor status of emergency generator through the BAS.
P. Snow Day
1. A “snow day” routine shall be provided to return all systems to unoccupied mode upon
indication by system operator.

Q. Critical Alarms
1. Critical alarms shall dial personal cell telephones, personal home telephones, and/or send
email messages to school district employees as determined by the school district. The
following will be considered critical alarms:
a. Any supply units manual low-limit alarm or fan failure.
b. Any space temperature dropping below 40 degrees F. (adj.)
c. Rooftop unit failure.
d. VRF outdoor unit failure
e. VRF condensate alarm.
f. Emergency generator operation.
g. Any other alarm deemed critical by school district and/or A/E

SECTION 230995 - LABORATORY AIRFLOW CONTROL SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
B. Warranty, closeout procedures, and submitted requirements are specified in Division 01

Sections.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. A Laboratory Airflow Control System (LACS) shall be furnished and installed under this section.
The LACS shall be capable of operating as a standalone system or as a system integrated with the
Building Management System (BMS).
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Abbreviations and Acronyms

1. ATC – Advanced Temperature Control
2. BMS – Building Management System
3. LACS – Laboratory Airflow Control System
4. UBC – Usage Based Controls
5. VAV – Variable Air Volume
B. Reference Standards
1. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
ARI 880 Performance Rating of Air Terminals
2. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers / American
National Standards Institute
ASHRAE/ANSI Standard 130, Methods for Testing Air Terminal Units
3. American National Standards Institute / American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air
Conditioning Engineers
ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2012: BACnet® - A Data Communication Protocol for Building
Automation Systems (including Standard and all published Addenda)
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination
1. The LACS representative shall coordinate all details of the installation with the successful
mechanical contractor. This effort shall include complete coordination of the sheet metal
layout drawings to assure that the ductwork layout and sizing is based on the actual sizes of
the airflow control valves for this project.
B. Preinstallation Meetings
1. The LACS representative shall review the proper installation of the system with the sheet
metal contractor and the building management system (BMS) contractor.
Project 16018 LABORATORY AIRFLOW CONTROL SYSTEM 230995 - 1

2. Project Installation Phase – The LACS representative shall make periodic visits to the project
jobsite to assure that the system is being installed properly to assure optimal performance
and that the location and orientation of the control valves is consistent for proper operation
and future owner maintenance. Any discrepancies shall first be brought to the attention of
the appropriate subcontractor. If no action is taken by said contractor, the representative
shall bring these issues to the project manager, engineer or owner’s representative for
resolution.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit listed Submittals in accordance with Conditions of the General Contract and
Division 1 Submittal Procedures Section. LACS submittals shall contain, at a minimum, the
following information:
1. Product Data Sheets
2. Equipment Schedule Sheets containing room number, tag, min/max flows, model number and
other configuration data as required to provide fully engineered LACS.
3. Installation Instructions
4. Project-specific wiring diagrams
5. Points lists
B. Closeout submittals:
1. Operation and maintenance manuals, including as-built wiring diagrams and component lists,
shall be provided as closeout submittals.
A. Certifications
1. The laboratory airflow system provider shall be an entity that designs, develops,
manufactures and sells products and services to control the environment and airflow of
critical spaces using a Quality Management System registered to ISO 9001:2008.
A. Storage and Handling Requirements

1. Prior to installation, the LACS shall be stored in dry conditions within an environment
complying with LACS product specifications as shown on product data sheets within the
submittals.
2. The LACS products shall be handled and transported in a manner consistent trade practices
for control systems and instruments.
1.8 SITE CONDITIONS
A. The ambient environmental conditions during installation and operation shall comply with LACS
product specifications as shown on the product data sheets within the submittals.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. The Warranty shall commence upon the date of shipment and extend for a period of 60 months
for all airflow control devices and 36 months for all other control system components.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LABORATORY AIRFLOW CONTROL SYSTEMS
A. A LACS shall be furnished and installed to control the airflow into and out of laboratory rooms
in addition to other spaces in the building. The exhaust flow rate of a laboratory fume hood shall
be controlled precisely to maintain a constant average face velocity into the fume hood at either a
standard/in-use or standby level. The laboratory control system shall vary the amount of make-
up/supply air into the room and general exhaust air out of the room to operate the laboratories at
the lowest possible airflow rates necessary to achieve minimum ventilation rates and maintain
space pressurization in relation to adjacent spaces (positive or negative). The LACS shall be
capable of operating as a standalone system or as a system integrated with the Building
Management System (BMS).
2.2 COMPONENTS
A. USAGE BASED CONTROL EQUIPMENT

1. For fume hood systems, a sash sensor shall be provided to measure the height of each
vertically moving fume hood sash. Control systems employing sidewall-mounted velocity
sensors shall be unacceptable.
2. The airflow at the fume hood shall vary in a linear manner between two adjustable minimum
and maximum flow set points to maintain a constant face velocity throughout this range. A
minimum volume flow shall be set to assure flow through the fume hood even with the sash
fully closed.
B. AIRFLOW CONTROL DEVICE - GENERAL

1. The airflow control devices shall be venturi or blade damper style valves.
2. The valve assembly manufacturer’s Quality Management System shall be registered to ISO
9001:2008.
3. Airflow control device shall be OSHPD tested and certified per 2013 CBC, 2012, IBC,
ASCE 7-10, and ICC-ES-AC-156.
4. The airflow control device shall be pressure independent over its specified differential static
pressure operating range. An integral pressure independent assembly shall respond and
maintain specific airflow within one second of a change in duct static pressure irrespective of
the magnitude of pressure and/or flow change or quantity of airflow controllers on a
manifolded system.
5. The airflow control device shall maintain accuracy within ±5% of signal over an airflow
turndown range.
6. No minimum entrance or exit duct diameters shall be required to ensure accuracy and/or
pressure independence.
7. No rotational/axial orientation requirements shall be required to ensure accuracy and/or
pressure independence.
8. The airflow control device shall maintain pressure independence regardless of loss of power.
9. The airflow control device shall be constructed of one of the following four types:
a. Class A—The airflow control device for non-corrosive airstreams, such as supply and
general exhaust, shall be constructed of 16-gauge aluminum. The device's shaft and
internal “S” link shall be made of 316 stainless steel. The shaft support brackets shall be
made of galvaneal (for non-shutoff valves) or 316 stainless steel (for shutoff valves). The
pivot arm shall be made of aluminum (for non-shutoff valves) and 303/304 stainless (for

shut off valves). The pressure independent springs shall be a spring-grade stainless steel.
All shaft bearing surfaces shall be made of a PP (polypropylene) or PPS (polyphenylene
sulfide) composite. Sound attenuating devices used in conjunction with general exhaust
or supply airflow control devices shall be constructed using 24 gauge galvanized steel or
other suitable material used in standard duct construction. No sound absorptive materials
of any kind shall be used.
a. Class B—The airflow control device for corrosive airstreams, such as fume hoods and
biosafety cabinets, shall have a baked-on, corrosion-resistant phenolic or heresite
coating. The device's shaft shall be made of 316 stainless steel with a Teflon coating.
The shaft support brackets shall be made of 316 stainless steel. The pivot arm and
internal “S” link shall be made of 316 or 303 stainless steel. The pressure independent
springs shall be a spring-grade stainless steel. The internal nuts, bolts and rivets shall be
stainless steel. All shaft bearing surfaces shall be made of PP (polypropylene) or PPS
(polyphenylene sulfide) composite.
10. Actuation
a. For electrically actuated VAV operation, a CE certified electronic actuator shall be
factory mounted to the valve. Loss of main power shall cause the valve to position itself
in an appropriate failsafe state. Options for these failsafe states include: normally open-
maximum position, normally closed-minimum position and last position. This position
shall be maintained constantly without external influence, regardless of external
conditions on the valve (within product specifications).
b. Non-Laboratory spaces will be provided with venturi airflow control valve describe
herein and as denoted on the drawings. The actuators for these rooms do not require
high speed actuators with one second speed of response to airflow quantity changes. An
integral pressure independent assembly shall respond and maintain specific airflow
within one second of a change in duct static pressure irrespective of the magnitude of
pressure and/or flow change or quantity of airflow controllers on a manifolded system.
These systems fail in the last position.
c. Constant volume valves do not require actuators.
11. The controller for the airflow control devices shall be microprocessor based and operate
using peer-to-peer control architecture. The room-level airflow control devices shall function
as a standalone network.
12. The room-level control network shall utilize a BACnet or LonTalk communications
protocol.
13. There shall be no reliance on external or building-level control devices to perform room-
level control functions. Each laboratory control system shall have the capability of
performing fume hood control, pressurization control, and implement occupancy and
emergency mode control schemes.
14. The LACS shall be integrated with the BMS.
15. NIST Accreditation
a. Each airflow control device shall be factory characterized on air stations NIST
Accredited to ISO/IEC 17025:2005 standards.
b. Each airflow control device shall be factory characterized to the job specific airflows as
detailed on the plans and specifications using NIST accredited air stations and
instrumentation having a combined accuracy of no more than ±1% of signal (5,000 to
250cfm), ±2% of signal (249 to 100cfm) and ±3% of signal (199 to 35cfm). Electronic
airflow control devices shall be further characterized and their accuracy verified to ±5%
of signal at a minimum of 48 different airflows across the full operating range of the
device.

c. Each airflow control device shall be marked with device-specific factory characterization
data. At a minimum, it should include the room number, tag number, serial number,
model number, eight-point characterization information (for electronic devices), date of
manufacture and quality control inspection numbers. All information shall be stored by
the manufacturer for use with as-built documentation. Characterization data shall be
stored indefinitely by the manufacturer and backed up off site for catastrophic event
recovery.
C. EXHAUST AND SUPPLY AIRFLOW DEVICE CONTROLLER

1. The airflow control device shall be a microprocessor-based design and shall use closed loop
control to linearly regulate airflow based on a digital control signal. The device shall
generate a digital feedback signal that represents its airflow.
2. The airflow control device shall store its control algorithms in non-volatile, re-writeable
memory. The device shall be able to stand-alone or to be networked with other room-level
digital airflow control devices using an industry standard protocol.
3. Room-level control functions shall be embedded in and carried out by the airflow device
controller using distributed control architecture. Critical control functions shall be
implemented locally; no room-level controller shall be required.
4. The airflow control device shall use industry standard 24 VAC power.
5. The airflow control device shall have provisions to connect a notebook PC commissioning
tool and every node on the network shall be accessible from any point in the system.
6. The airflow control device shall have built-in integral input/output connections that address
fume hood control, occupancy control, emergency control, and non-network sensors switches
and control devices. At a minimum, the airflow controller shall have:
a. Three universal inputs capable of accepting 0 to 10 VAC, 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 65 K ohms, or
Type 2 or Type 3 10 K ohm @ 25 degree C thermistor temperature sensors.
b. One digital input capable of accepting a dry contact or logic level signal input.
c. Two analog outputs capable of developing either a 0 to 10 VAC or 4 to 20 mA linear
control signal.
d. One Form C (SPDT) relay output capable of driving up to 1 A @ 24 VAC/VAC.
7. The airflow control device shall meet FCC Part 15 Subpart J Class A, CE, and CSA Listed
per file #228219.
D. CONSTANT VOLUME AIRFLOW CONTROL DEVICE

1. The airflow control device shall maintain a constant airflow set point. It shall be factory
characterized and set for the desired airflow. It shall also be capable of field adjustment for
future changes in desired airflow.
E. FUME HOOD MONITOR

1. A fume hood monitor shall be provided to receive the sash sensor output, and presence
and/or motion signal. This same monitor shall generate an exhaust airflow control signal for
the appropriate airflow control device in order to provide a constant average face velocity.
Audible and separate visual alarms shall be provided for flow alarm and emergency exhaust
conditions. The fume hood monitor shall incorporate the following capabilities:
a. LED display with the ability to display one of the following measurements:
1) Cubic feet per minute (CFM)
2) Feet per minute (FPM)

b. Alarm Muting option, which silences the audible alarm for an adjustable time period
when the mute button is pushed. If another alarm is generated during the mute period, the
new alarm will override the mute delay and the alarm will sound again.
c. Auto Alarm Muting option, which sets the alarm to mute automatically after 20 seconds.
d. Emergency Exhaust button with LED, which activates an emergency exhaust mode. In
this mode, the exhaust air is at its maximum flow. When activated, the alarm will sound
and the LED will flash. To activate emergency exhaust mode, push the button. Push the
button again to cancel emergency exhaust mode.
e. Flow Alarm LED, which illuminates to indicate an unsafe airflow condition. The audible
alarm will also activate and may be muted.
f. Broken retracting cable alarm, an audible alarm with a flashing LED that indicates
whether a vertical sash sensor cable is detached, thereby ensuring the fume hood users’
safety.
g. Energy waste alarm option, which generates a local visual and audible alarm to notify
when the fume hood sash is open beyond its minimum flow position and the lights in the
room are off. When activated, the LED display will show “ENRG” and the audible alarm
will sound until the sash is closed. The light levels at which the alarm is both initiated
and cancelled shall be configurable.
h. Fume hood decommissioning option, which commands the exhaust flow through the
fume hood to the minimum allowed by the exhaust valve when the sash is fully closed
and no chemicals are present in the hood. The mode shall be initiated by either a
pushbutton sequence on the fume hood monitor, external momentary switch input to the
fume hood monitor, or a network command. When activated, the LED display will show
“OFF,” and the exhaust valve will move to its minimum position or shutoff position and
the associated fume hood exhaust fan will be diabled. Safety shall be built into the
decommission option, whereby opening the fume hood sash will automatically return the
fume hood exhaust to an in-use operating volume as determined by the sash sensor.
Fume hood decommissioning shall be a point that can be integrated to the BMS system.

following:
1. Phoenix Controls Corporation
2. Triatek, LLC
3. Siemens
2.4 PERFORMANCE/DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Each dedicated LACS shall support a minimum of 20 network controlled airflow devices.
B. The LACS shall employ individual average face velocity controllers that directly measure the
area of the fume hood sash opening and proportionally control the hood’s exhaust airflow to
maintain a constant face velocity over a minimum range of 20% to 100% of sash travel. The
corresponding minimum hood exhaust flow turndown ratio shall be 5 to 1.
C. The hood exhaust airflow control device shall respond to the fume hood sash opening by
achieving 90% of its commanded value within one second of the sash reaching 90% of its final

position (with no more than 5% overshoot/undershoot) of required airflow. Rate of sash

movement shall be from one to one and one-half feet per second.
D. The LACS shall maintain specific airflow (±5% of signal within one second of a change in duct
static pressure) regardless of the magnitude of the pressure change, airflow change or quantity of
airflow control devices on the manifold (within 0.6" to 3.0" wc).
E. The LACS shall use volumetric offset control to maintain room pressurization. The system shall
maintain proper room pressurization polarity (negative or positive) regardless of any change in
room/system conditions, such as the raising and lowering of any or all fume hood sashes or rapid
changes in duct static pressure. Systems using differential pressure measurement or velocity
measurement to control room pressurization are unacceptable.
F. The LACS shall maintain specific airflow (±5% of signal) with a minimum turndown to ensure
accurate pressurization at low airflow and guarantee the maximum system diversity and energy
efficiency.
G. Airflow Control Sound Specification

1. The LACS manufacturer shall provide comprehensive sound power level data for each size
airflow control device. All data shall be obtained from testing in accordance with
ASHRAE/ANSI Standard 130, Methods of Testing Air Terminal Units.
2. All proposed airflow control devices shall include discharge, exhaust and radiated sound
power level performance.
3. If the airflow control device cannot meet the sound power levels required to achieve the
sound criteria appropriate for the space, as determined by the engineer, a properly sized
sound attenuator must be used. All sound attenuators must be of a packless design
(constructed of at least 18 gauge 316L stainless steel when used with fume hood exhaust)
with a maximum pressure drop at the device’s maximum rated flow rate not to exceed 0.20
inches of water.
2.5 OPERATION SEQUENCES
A. The airflow control devices shall utilize peer-to-peer, distributed control architecture to perform
room-level control functions. Master-slave control schemes shall not be acceptable. Control
functions shall include, at a minimum, volumetric offset pressurization, as well as respond to
occupancy and emergency control commands.
B. Volumetric Offset Pressurization Control
1. The laboratory control system shall control supply and auxiliary exhaust airflow devices in
order to maintain a volumetric offset (either positive or negative). Offset shall be maintained
regardless of any change in flow or static pressure. This offset shall be field adjustable and
represents the volume of air, which will enter (or exit) the room from the corridor or adjacent
spaces.
2. The pressurization control algorithm shall sum the flow values of all supply and exhaust
airflow devices and command appropriate controlled devices to new set points to maintain
the desired offset. The offset shall be adjustable.
3. The pressurization control algorithm shall consider both networked devices, as well as:
a. Up to three non-networked devices providing a linear analog flow signal.
b. Any number of constant volume devices where the total of supply devices and the total
of exhaust devices may be factored into the pressurization control algorithm.

C. Volumetric offset shall be the only acceptable means of controlling room pressurization. Systems
that rely on differential pressure as a means of control shall not be acceptable.
D. Occupancy Control
1. The laboratory control system shall have the ability to change the minimum ventilation set
points, based on the occupied state, in order to reduce energy consumption when the space is
not occupied. The occupancy state may be set by either the BMS as a scheduled event or
through the use of a local occupancy sensor or switch. The laboratory control system shall
support a local occupancy override button that allows a user to override the occupancy mode
and set the space to occupied for a predetermined interval. The override interval shall be
configurable from one to 1440 minutes. The local occupancy sensor/switch or bypass button
shall be given priority over a BMS command.
E. Emergency Mode Control

1. The laboratory control system shall provide a means of overriding pressurization control in
response to a command indicating an emergency condition exists, and airflow control devices
are to be driven to a specific flow set point. The system shall support up to four emergency
control modes. The emergency control modes may be initiated either by a local contact input
or BMS command. Valve level emergency modes can be individually programmed on each
valve as one of four emergency control modes. Zone level emergency modes will drive
supply and exhaust valves to maintain or ignore zone offset (excludes control of hood
valves).
2. Once an emergency mode is invoked, pressurization and temperature control are overridden
for the period that the mode is active. Emergency modes shall have a priority scheme
allowing a more critical mode to override a previously set condition.
F. Local Alarm Control

1. The laboratory control system shall provide the means of summing selective alarm activity at
the room-level network and generating a local alarm signal. The local alarm signal may be
directed to any available output, as well as to the BMS. The alarm mask may be configured
differently for each room-level system.
G. Fume Hood Control

1. Airflow devices intended to control the face velocity of a fume hood shall have the ability to
interface directly with the fume hood monitoring device. The airflow control device shall:
a. Accept command inputs to regulate the flow accordingly and make this command value
available to the BMS.
2. Accept a sash position signal and make this value available to the BMS.
3. Face velocity control and monitoring shall be based on a flow feedback signal to the fume
hood monitor, which may be used for calculating face velocity or to confirm the airflow
device has achieved the proper flow rate, or direct measurement of face velocity. The face
velocity shall be made available to the BMS.
4. Provide alarm signals to the fume hood monitor in the event the airflow device is unable to
achieve the proper flow rate, there is a loss of static pressure indicating improper fan
operation, or there is a loss of power to the airflow control device, in order to provide a local
alarm indication.

5. The fume hood airflow control device shall respond to changes in sash position and user
presence within one second, in order to provide a constant 100-feet-per-minute face velocity
when the fume hood is in use.
H. The laboratory control system shall be segregated into subnets to isolate network
communications to ensure room-level control functions and BMS communications are carried
out reliably. Each laboratory space or pressurization zone shall be its own subnet. Commercially
available routers shall be used to provide this isolation.
I. The LACS shall support at least 20 networked devices in each pressurized zone.
J. Refer to the BMS specification for the required input/output summary for the necessary points to
be monitored and/or controlled.
2.6 INTERFACE TO BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS
A. All points shall be available through the interface to the BMS for trending, archiving, graphics,
alarm notification and status reports. LACS performance (speed, stability and accuracy) shall be
unaffected by the quantity of points being monitored, processed or controlled.
B. The LACS network shall have the capability of digitally interfacing with the BMS. The required
software interface drivers shall be developed and housed in a dedicated interface device
furnished by the LACS supplier. Coordinate specific requirements with BMS Contractor.
C. LACS critical environment integration shall support distributed network architecture from room
level BACnet MS/TP segment or LON FTT-10 bus to a dedicated BACnet MS/TP segment,
building BACnet/Ethernet, or BACnet/IP building backbone using single or multiple IP
addresses. Backbone communication protocol must be field selectable/upgradable.
D. Integration must also support the ability to have a single point of access in the case that multiple
IP addresses are not acceptable.
1. Each LACS room integrator shall support up to 20 high speed devices or 32 low speed
devices per network channel. There shall be up to 2 network channels per room integrator.
E. Communication between devices in a room or zone will operate independent of building level
communications maintaining integrity of the airflow. LACS Building level communication, or
loss of, will not disrupt the communication between devices in a room or zone.
F. LACS critical environment integration shall provide an easy means to access room level device
health status at a room-by-room or building wide level via web page. The system health pages
shall provide information to assist in diagnostics for:
1. Online/Offline status for the room level integration appliance
2. Runtime information such as heap memory usage and CPU usage
3. Communication channel online/offline and configuration data
4. Device level online/offline information
5. Device level alarm information
6. Device level Configuration errors

G. The LACS shall provide a Lab Verification feature. This feature shall allow field technicians to
perform field acceptance for one pressurization zone at a time.
H. The Lab Verification Feature functionality shall include:

1. The ability to force the airflow to minimum and maximum settings
2. The ability to force airflows to occupied/unoccupied settings
I. LACS critical environment integration shall provide an easy means to access a Test and Balance
function tool at a room-by-room or building wide level via web page. This tool shall be available
to field technicians and air balancers to assure proper and timely system startup. Password
protection shall be provided for this functionality.
J. The LACS shall provide a Test and Balance feature. Test and balance functions shall include:
1. Ability to several spaces in full heating or cooling to enable the air balancer to check out full
air handling systems.
2. Allow air balancers to enter and save measured field data for use in their reports
3. Manually override the outputs for testing purposes
4. Adjust airflow to meet field acceptance tests
K. LACS critical environment integration shall support SQL database for long term data storage.
L. LACS critical environment integration shall provide optional software to manage local backup
and restore, entire site device management, building wide test and balance functions, building
wide diagnostic tools, and building wide configuration tools. Software shall be field upgradable
to support graphical dashboard displays.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. The LACS contractor shall install the sash sensors, interface boxes, and fume hood monitor on
the fume hood. Reel-type sash sensors and their stainless steel cables shall be hidden from view.
Bar-type sash sensors shall be affixed to the individual sash panels. Sash interface boxes with
interface cards shall be mounted in an accessible location.
B. The LACS shall provide an appropriately sized and fused 24 VAC transformer suitable for NEC
Class II wiring.
C. All cable shall be furnished and installed by the BMS contractor. The BMS contractor shall
terminate and connect all cables as required. The BMS shall utilize cables specifically
recommended by the laboratory airflow controls supplier.
D. The mechanical contractor shall install all airflow control devices in the ductwork and shall
connect all airflow control valve linkages.
E. The mechanical contractor shall provide and install insulation as required.

F. Each pressurization zone shall have either a dedicated, single-phase primary circuit or a
secondary circuit disconnect.
3.2 SYSTEM START UP
A. System start-up shall be provided by a factory-authorized representative of the LACS

manufacturer. Start-up shall include calibrating the fume hood monitor and any combination sash
sensing equipment, as required. Start-up shall also provide electronic verification of airflow
(fume hood exhaust, supply, make-up, general exhaust or return), system programming and
integration to BMS (when applicable).
B. The LACS contractor must have a minimum of three (3) factory certified technicians in the Ohio
area.
C. The LACS startup shall include assisting the balancing contractor in the final air balance of the
facility The balancer shall be responsible for final verification and reporting of all airflows.
3.3 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. Training
1. The LACS supplier shall furnish a minimum of eight hours of owner training by factory
trained and certified personnel. The training will provide an overview of the job specific
airflow control components, verification of initial fume hood monitor calibration, general
procedures for verifying airflows of air valves and general troubleshooting procedures.
2. Training sessions shall be distributed throughout the warranty period as determined and
agreed to by the Owner.
3. Operation and maintenance manuals, including as-built wiring diagrams and component lists,
shall be provided for each training attendee.

SECTION 232300 - REFRIGERANT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air-conditioning applications.
A. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-410A:

1. Suction Lines for Air-Conditioning Applications: 300 psig.
2. Suction Lines for Heat-Pump Applications: 535 psig.
3. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: 535 psig.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of valve and refrigerant piping specialty indicated. Include
pressure drop, based on manufacturer's test data, for the following:
1. Thermostatic expansion valves.
2. Solenoid valves.
3. Hot-gas bypass valves.
4. Filter dryers.
5. Strainers.
6. Pressure-regulating valves.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layout of refrigerant piping and specialties, including pipe, tube, and
fitting sizes, flow capacities, valve arrangements and locations, slopes of horizontal runs, oil
traps, double risers, wall and floor penetrations, and equipment connection details. Show
interface and spatial relationships between piping and equipment.
1. Shop Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch equals 1 foot.
2. Refrigerant piping indicated on Drawings is schematic only. Size piping and design
actual piping layout, including oil traps, double risers, specialties, and pipe and tube sizes
to accommodate, as a minimum, equipment provided, elevation difference between
compressor and evaporator, and length of piping to ensure proper operation and
compliance with warranties of connected equipment.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to include in
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
Project 16018 REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 - 1

B. Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Refrigeration Systems."
C. Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components."
1.6 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store piping in a clean and protected area with end caps in place to ensure that piping interior
and exterior are clean when installed.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These
items are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, Type ACR.
B. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.
C. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.
D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32. Use 95-5 tin antimony or alloy HB solder to join copper
socket fittings on copper pipe.
E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8.
F. Flexible Connectors:
1. Body: Tin-bronze bellows with woven, flexible, tinned-bronze-wire-reinforced
protective jacket.
2. End Connections: Socket ends.
3. Offset Performance: Capable of minimum 3/4-inch misalignment in minimum 7-inch-
long assembly.
4. Pressure Rating: Factory test at minimum 500 psig.
5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.
2.2 VALVES AND SPECIALTIES
A. Diaphragm Packless Valves:

1. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze; globe design with straight-through or
angle pattern.
2. Diaphragm: Phosphor bronze and stainless steel with stainless-steel spring.
3. Operator: Rising stem and hand wheel.
4. Seat: Nylon.
5. End Connections: Socket, union, or flanged.
6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.

B. Packed-Angle Valves:
1. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze.
2. Packing: Molded stem, back seating, and replaceable under pressure.
3. Operator: Rising stem.
4. Seat: Nonrotating, self-aligning polytetrafluoroethylene.
5. Seal Cap: Forged-brass or valox hex cap.
6. End Connections: Socket, union, threaded, or flanged.
C. Check Valves:
1. Body: Ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; globe pattern.
2. Bonnet: Bolted ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; or brass hex plug.
3. Piston: Removable polytetrafluoroethylene seat.
4. Closing Spring: Stainless steel.
5. End Connections: Socket, union, threaded, or flanged.
6. Maximum Opening Pressure: 0.50 psig.
D. Service Valves:
1. Body: Forged brass with brass cap including key end to remove core.
2. Core: Removable ball-type check valve with stainless-steel spring.
3. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene.
4. End Connections: Copper spring.
E. Solenoid Valves: Comply with ARI 760 and UL 429; listed and labeled by an NRTL.
1. Body and Bonnet: Plated steel.
2. Solenoid Tube, Plunger, Closing Spring, and Seat Orifice: Stainless steel.
4. End Connections: Threaded.
5. Electrical: Molded, watertight coil in NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by location
with 1/2-inch conduit adapter, and 24, 115, or 208-V ac coil.
8. Manual operator.
F. Safety Relief Valves: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; listed and labeled
by an NRTL.
1. Body and Bonnet: Ductile iron and steel, with neoprene O-ring seal.
2. Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel.
3. Seat Disc: Polytetrafluoroethylene.
4. End Connections: Threaded.
G. Thermostatic Expansion Valves: Comply with ARI 750.

1. Body, Bonnet, and Seal Cap: Forged brass or steel.
2. Diaphragm, Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel.

3. Packing and Gaskets: Non-asbestos.

4. Capillary and Bulb: Copper tubing filled with refrigerant charge.
5. Suction Temperature: 40 deg F.
6. Superheat: Adjustable.
7. Reverse-flow option (for heat-pump applications).
8. End Connections: Socket, flare, or threaded union.
H. Hot-Gas Bypass Valves: Comply with UL 429; listed and labeled by an NRTL.
1. Body, Bonnet, and Seal Cap: Ductile iron or steel.
2. Diaphragm, Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel.
3. Packing and Gaskets: Non-asbestos.
4. Solenoid Tube, Plunger, Closing Spring, and Seat Orifice: Stainless steel.
6. Equalizer: External.
7. Electrical: Molded, watertight coil in NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by location
with 1/2-inch conduit adapter, and 24, 115, or 208-V ac coil.
8. End Connections: Socket.
9. Set Pressure: As required by system.
10. Throttling Range: Maximum 5 psig.
I. Straight-Type Strainers:
1. Body: Welded steel with corrosion-resistant coating.
2. Screen: 100-mesh stainless steel.
3. End Connections: Socket or flare.
J. Angle-Type Strainers:
1. Body: Forged brass or cast bronze.
2. Drain Plug: Brass hex plug.
3. Screen: 100-mesh monel.
K. Moisture/Liquid Indicators:
1. Body: Forged brass.
2. Window: Replaceable, clear, fused glass window with indicating element protected by
filter screen.
3. Indicator: Color coded to show moisture content in ppm.
4. Minimum Moisture Indicator Sensitivity: Indicate moisture above 60 ppm.

L. Replaceable-Core Filter Dryers: Comply with ARI 730.

1. Body and Cover: Painted-steel shell with ductile-iron cover, stainless-steel screws, and
neoprene gaskets.
2. Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless-steel support.
3. Desiccant Media: Activated alumina or charcoal.
4. Designed for reverse flow (for heat-pump applications).
6. Access Ports: NPS 1/4 connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure differential
measurement.
7. Maximum Pressure Loss: 2 psig.
8. Rated Flow: As required by system.
M. Permanent Filter Dryers: Comply with ARI 730.

1. Body and Cover: Painted-steel shell.
2. Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless-steel support.
3. Desiccant Media: Activated alumina or charcoal.
4. Designed for reverse flow (for heat-pump applications).
6. Access Ports: NPS 1/4 connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure differential
measurement.
7. Maximum Pressure Loss: 2 psig.
8. Rated Flow: As required by system.
N. Mufflers:
O. Receivers: Comply with ARI 495.

1. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; listed and labeled by an NRTL.
2. Comply with UL 207; listed and labeled by an NRTL.
4. Tappings: Inlet, outlet, liquid level indicator, and safety relief valve.
5. End Connections: Socket or threaded.
P. Liquid Accumulators: Comply with ARI 495.

2. End Connections: Socket or threaded.

2.3 REFRIGERANTS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Atofina Chemicals, Inc.
2. DuPont Company; Fluorochemicals Div.
3. Honeywell, Inc.; Genetron Refrigerants.
4. INEOS Fluor Americas LLC.
B. ASHRAE 34, R-410A: Pentafluoroethane/Difluoromethane.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS FOR REFRIGERANT
A. Suction Lines NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller for Conventional Air-Conditioning Applications: Copper,
Type ACR, annealed-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed or soldered joints.
B. Suction Lines NPS 2 to NPS 4 for Conventional Air-Conditioning Applications: Copper, Type
ACR, drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with joints.
C. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines, and Suction Lines for Heat-Pump Applications NPS 1-1/2 and
Smaller: Copper, Type ACR, annealed-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed
or soldered joints.
D. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines, and Suction Lines for Heat-Pump Applications NPS 2 and Larger:
Copper, Type ACR, drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed or soldered
joints.
E. Safety-Relief-Valve Discharge Piping: Copper, Type ACR, drawn-temper tubing and wrought-
copper fittings with soldered joints.
3.2 VALVE AND SPECIALTY APPLICATIONS
A. Install diaphragm packless valves in suction and discharge lines of compressor.
B. Install service valves for gauge taps at inlet and outlet of hot-gas bypass valves and strainers if
they are not an integral part of valves and strainers.
C. Install a check valve at the compressor discharge and a liquid accumulator at the compressor
suction connection.
D. Except as otherwise indicated, install diaphragm packless valves on inlet and outlet side of filter
dryers.
E. Install a full-sized, three-valve bypass around filter dryers.
F. Install solenoid valves upstream from each expansion valve and hot-gas bypass valve. Install
solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at top.

G. Install thermostatic expansion valves as close as possible to distributors on evaporators.

1. Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb.
2. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using two bulb straps. Do
not mount bulb in a trap or at bottom of the line.
3. If external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will reflect suction-line
pressure at bulb location.
H. Install safety relief valves where required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Pipe
safety-relief-valve discharge line to outside according to ASHRAE 15.
I. Install moisture/liquid indicators in liquid line at the inlet of the thermostatic expansion valve or
at the inlet of the evaporator coil capillary tube.
J. Install strainers upstream from and adjacent to the following unless they are furnished as an
integral assembly for device being protected:
1. Solenoid valves.
2. Thermostatic expansion valves.
3. Hot-gas bypass valves.
4. Compressor.
K. Install filter dryers in liquid line between compressor and thermostatic expansion valve.
L. Install receivers sized to accommodate pump-down charge.
M. Install flexible connectors at compressors.
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems; indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,
expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless
deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings.
B. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.
C. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
otherwise.
F. Install piping adjacent to machines to allow service and maintenance.
G. Install piping free of sags and bends.
H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

I. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
J. Refer to Division 23 Sections "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" and "Sequence of
Operation" for solenoid valve controllers, control wiring, and sequence of operation.
K. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows, and
fittings.
L. Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of refrigeration equipment. Install valves and
specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection. Install access doors or
panels as specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames" if valves or equipment
requiring maintenance is concealed behind finished surfaces.
M. Install refrigerant piping in protective conduit where installed belowground.
N. Install refrigerant piping in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where exposed to mechanical
injury.
O. Slope refrigerant piping as follows:

1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward away from
compressor.
2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor.
3. Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs.
4. Liquid lines may be installed level.
P. When brazing or soldering, remove solenoid-valve coils and sight glasses; also remove valve
stems, seats, and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply
heat near expansion-valve bulb.
Q. Install pipe sleeves at penetrations in exterior walls and floor assemblies.
R. Seal penetrations through fire and smoke barriers according to Division 07 Section "Penetration
Firestopping."
S. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or between
pipes for insulation installation.
T. Install sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings, sized to permit installation of full-thickness
insulation.
U. Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls according to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants"
for materials and methods.
V. Identify refrigerant piping and valves according to Division 23 Section "Identification for
HVAC Piping and Equipment."
3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

assembly.
C. Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide), during brazing, to prevent
scale formation.
D. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube
Handbook."
E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe and
Tube."
1. Use Type BcuP, copper-phosphorus alloy for joining copper socket fittings with copper
pipe.
2. Use Type BAg, cadmium-free silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.
F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
3.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hanger, support, and anchor products are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and
Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
B. Install the following pipe attachments:

1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet long.
2. Copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with copper
pipe.
C. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:
1. NPS 1/2: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
2. NPS 5/8: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
3. NPS 1: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
4. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
6. NPS 2: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
8. NPS 3: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
9. NPS 4: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.
D. Support multifloor vertical runs at least at each floor.
A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Comply with ASME B31.5, Chapter VI.
2. Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor, condenser,
evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure if they are not rated above the test
pressure.

3. Test high- and low-pressure side piping of each system separately at not less than the
pressures indicated in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.
a. Fill system with nitrogen to the required test pressure.
b. System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gauge throughout duration of
test.
c. Test joints and fittings with electronic leak detector or by brushing a small amount
of soap and glycerin solution over joints.
d. Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory results are
achieved.
3.7 SYSTEM CHARGING
A. Charge system using the following procedures:

1. Install core in filter dryers after leak test but before evacuation.
2. Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to 500 micrometers. If vacuum
holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging.
3. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig.
4. Charge system with a new filter-dryer core in charging line.
3.8 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat.
B. Adjust high- and low-pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to fluctuating
suction pressure.
C. Adjust set-point temperature of air-conditioning or chilled-water controllers to the system

design temperature.
D. Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system, according to
manufacturer's written instructions:
1. Open shutoff valves in condenser water circuit.
2. Verify that compressor oil level is correct.
3. Open compressor suction and discharge valves.
4. Open refrigerant valves except bypass valves that are used for other purposes.
5. Check open compressor-motor alignment and verify lubrication for motors and bearings.
E. Replace core of replaceable filter dryer after system has been adjusted and after design flow
rates and pressures are established.

SECTION 232923 - VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes solid-state, PWM, VFCs for speed control of three-phase, squirrel-cage
induction motors.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. ASHRAE: American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers.
B. BMS: Building management system.
C. IGBT: Integrated gate bipolar transistor.
D. LAN: Local area network.
E. PID: Control action, proportional plus integral plus derivative.
F. PWM: Pulse-width modulated.
G. VFC: Variable frequency controller.
H. VFD: Same as VFC.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: For each VFC.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances
and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment
features, and ratings. Include the following:
a. Each installed unit's type and details.
b. Nameplate legends.
c. Short-circuit current rating of integrated unit.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring for VFCs. Provide schematic wiring
diagram for each type of VFC.
B. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals:

1. Product Data: For each type of VFC. Include dimensions, mounting arrangements, location
for conduit entries, shipping and operating weights, and manufacturer's technical data on
features, performance, electrical ratings, characteristics, and finishes.
Project 16018 VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 232923 - 1

2. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that VFCs,

accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section
"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:
a. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test
of assembled components or on calculation.
1) The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of
any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the
unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
b. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and
locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
c. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.
3. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.
4. Field quality-control test reports.
C. Closeout Submittals:
1. Operation and Maintenance Data: For VFCs, all installed devices, and components to
include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified
in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
a. Routine maintenance requirements for VFCs and all installed components.
b. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective
devices.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. Maintain, within 100 miles of Project

site, a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance and repairs.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain VFCs of a single type through one source from a single
manufacturer.
intended use.
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
E. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for VFCs,
minimum clearances between VFCs, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with
indicated maximum dimensions and clearances.
A. Store VFCs indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation.
Protect VFCs from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage.

A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation, capable of driving full
load without derating, under the following conditions, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Ambient Temperature: 0 to 40 deg C.
2. Humidity: Less than 90 percent (noncondensing).
3. Altitude: Not exceeding 3300 feet.
B. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities

occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after
arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of
electrical service.
2. Indicate method of providing temporary electrical service.
3. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Construction Manager's
written permission.
C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for VFCs,
including clearances between VFCs, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with
indicated maximum dimensions.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of VFCs with other construction including conduit, piping,
equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required
clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are
specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."
C. Coordinate features of VFCs, installed units, and accessory devices with pilot devices and control
circuits to which they connect.
D. Coordinate features, accessories, and functions of each VFC and each installed unit with ratings
and characteristics of supply circuit, motor, required control sequence, and duty cycle of motor
and load.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. ABB Power Distribution, Inc.; ABB Control, Inc. Subsidiary.
2. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer products.
3. Schneider Electric; Square D products.
4. Yaskawa Electric America, Inc.; Drives Division.

2.2 VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLERS
A. Description: NEMA ICS 2, IGBT, PWM, VFC; listed and labeled as a complete unit and
arranged to provide variable speed of an NEMA MG 1, Design B, 3-phase induction motor by
adjusting output voltage and frequency.
1. Provide unit suitable for operation of premium-efficiency motor as defined by
NEMA MG 1.
B. Design and Rating: Match load type such as fans, blowers, and pumps; and type of connection
used between motor and load such as direct or through a power-transmission connection.
C. Output Rating: 3-phase; 6 to 60 Hz, with voltage proportional to frequency throughout voltage
range.
D. Unit Operating Requirements:

1. Input ac voltage tolerance of 208 V, plus or minus 10 percent.
2. Input ac voltage tolerance of 380 to 500 V, plus or minus 10 percent.
3. Input frequency tolerance of 60 Hz, plus or minus 6 percent.
4. Minimum Efficiency: 96 percent at 60 Hz, full load.
5. Minimum Displacement Primary-Side Power Factor: 96 percent.
6. Overload Capability: 1.1 times the base load current for 60 seconds; 2.0 times the base load
current for 3 seconds.
7. Starting Torque: 100 percent of rated torque or as indicated.
8. Speed Regulation: Plus or minus 1 percent.
E. Isolated control interface to allow controller to follow control signal over an 11:1 speed range.
1. Electrical Signal: 4 to 20 mA at 24 V.
2. Pneumatic Signal: 3 to 15 psig.
F. Internal Adjustability Capabilities:

1. Minimum Speed: 5 to 25 percent of maximum rpm.
2. Maximum Speed: 80 to 100 percent of maximum rpm.
3. Acceleration: 2 to a minimum of 22 seconds.
4. Deceleration: 2 to a minimum of 22 seconds.
5. Current Limit: 50 to a minimum of 110 percent of maximum rating.
G. Self-Protection and Reliability Features:

1. Input transient protection by means of surge suppressors.
2. Under- and overvoltage trips; inverter overtemperature, overload, and overcurrent trips.
3. Motor Overload Relay: Adjustable and capable of NEMA ICS 2, Class 20 performance.
4. Notch filter to prevent operation of the controller-motor-load combination at a natural
frequency of the combination.
5. Instantaneous line-to-line and line-to-ground overcurrent trips.
6. Loss-of-phase protection.
7. Reverse-phase protection.
8. Short-circuit protection.
9. Motor overtemperature fault.

H. Multiple-Motor Capability: Controller suitable for service to multiple motors and having a
separate overload relay and protection for each controlled motor. Overload relay shall shut off
controller and motors served by it when overload relay is tripped.
I. Automatic Reset/Restart: Attempts three restarts after controller fault or on return of power after
an interruption and before shutting down for manual reset or fault correction. Bidirectional
autospeed search shall be capable of starting into rotating loads spinning in either direction and
returning motor to set speed in proper direction, without damage to controller, motor, or load.
J. Torque Boost: Automatically varies starting and continuous torque to at least 1.5 times the
minimum torque to ensure high-starting torque and increased torque at slow speeds.
K. Motor Temperature Compensation at Slow Speeds: Adjustable current fall-back based on output
frequency for temperature protection of self-cooled, fan-ventilated motors at slow speeds.
L. Input Line Conditioning: DC bus link reactors, 5 percent impedance.
M. VFC Output Filtering: Output line reactors, 5 percent impedance.
N. Status Lights: Door-mounted LED indicators shall indicate the following conditions:
1. Power on.
2. Run.
3. Overvoltage.
4. Line fault.
5. Overcurrent.
6. External fault.
O. Panel-Mounted Operator Station: Start-stop and auto-manual selector switches with manual
speed control and elapsed time meter.
P. Indicating Devices: Meters or digital readout devices and selector switch, mounted flush in
controller door and connected to indicate the following controller parameters:
1. Output frequency (Hz).
2. Motor speed (rpm).
3. Motor status (running, stop, fault).
4. Motor current (amperes).
5. Motor torque (percent).
6. Fault or alarming status (code).
7. PID feedback signal (percent).
8. DC-link voltage (VDC).
9. Set-point frequency (Hz).
10. Motor output voltage (V).
Q. Control Signal Interface:

1. Electric Input Signal Interface: A minimum of 2 analog inputs (0 to 10 V or 0/4-20 mA)
and 6 programmable digital inputs.
2. Pneumatic Input Signal Interface: 3 to 15 psig.
3. Remote Signal Inputs: Capability to accept any of the following speed-setting input signals
from the BMS or other control systems:
a. 0 to 10-V dc.

b. 0-20 or 4-20 mA.

c. Potentiometer using up/down digital inputs.
d. Fixed frequencies using digital inputs.
e. RS485.
f. Keypad display for local hand operation.
4. Output Signal Interface:
a. A minimum of 1 analog output signal (0/4-20 mA), which can be programmed to any
of the following:
1) Output frequency (Hz).
2) Output current (load).
3) DC-link voltage (VDC).
4) Motor torque (percent).
5) Motor speed (rpm).
6) Set-point frequency (Hz).
5. Remote Indication Interface: A minimum of 2 dry circuit relay outputs (120-V ac, 1 A) for
remote indication of the following:
a. Motor running.
b. Set-point speed reached.
c. Fault and warning indication (overtemperature or overcurrent).
d. PID high- or low-speed limits reached.
R. Communications: Provide an RS485 interface allowing VFC to be used with an external system
within a multidrop LAN configuration. Interface shall allow all parameter settings of VFC to be
programmed via BMS control. Provide capability for VFC to retain these settings within the
nonvolatile memory. Coordinate protocol with BMS installer. Comply with the following BMS
protocol[s]:
1. ASHRAE; BACnet.
2. Siemens Building Technologies, Inc; APOGEE BMS.
S. Integral Disconnecting Means: NEMA AB 1, instantaneous-trip circuit breaker with lockable

handle.
T. Remote Indication Circuit Terminals: Mode selection, controller status, and controller fault.
2.3 ENCLOSURES
A. Description: NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Devices shall be factory installed in controller enclosure, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Push-Button Stations, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: NEMA ICS 2, heavy-duty type.
C. Stop and Lockout Push-Button Station: Momentary-break, push-button station with a factory-
applied hasp arranged so padlock can be used to lock push button in depressed position with
control circuit open.
D. Standard Displays:
1. Output frequency (Hz).

2. Set-point frequency (Hz).

3. Motor current (amperes).
4. DC-link voltage (VDC).
5. Motor torque (percent).
6. Motor speed (rpm).
7. Motor output voltage (V).
E. Historical Logging Information and Displays:

1. Real-time clock with current time and date.
2. Running log of total power versus time.
3. Total run time.
4. Fault log, maintaining last four faults with time and date stamp for each.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, surfaces, and substrates to receive VFCs for compliance with requirements,
installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in for conduit systems to verify actual locations of conduit connections before
VFC installation.
3.2 APPLICATIONS
A. Select features of each VFC to coordinate with ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and
motor; required control sequence; and duty cycle of motor, controller, and load.
B. Select horsepower rating of controllers to suit motor controlled.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 230.
B. Install wall-mounted VFCs to steel slotted support system specified in Division 26 Section
"Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
C. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration
and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify VFCs, components, and control wiring according to Division 26 Section "Identification

3.5 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Install wiring between VFCs and remote devices according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage
Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.
C. Connect hand-off-automatic switch and other automatic-control devices.

1. Connect selector switches to bypass only manual- and automatic-control devices that have
no safety function when switch is in hand position.
2. Connect selector switches with control circuit in both hand and automatic positions for
safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature
cutouts, and motor overload protectors.
3.6 CONNECTIONS
A. Conduit installation requirements are specified in other Division 26 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of conduit, fittings, and specialties.
B. Ground equipment according to Division 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller element, bus, component, connecting
supply, feeder, and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform the

following:
1. Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test and
adjust controllers, components, and equipment.
2. Assist in field testing of equipment including pretesting and adjusting of solid-state
controllers.
3. Report results in writing.
C. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection, except optional tests,
stated in NETA ATS. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance;
otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
3.8 ADJUSTING
A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.

3.9 DEMONSTRATION

adjust, operate, and maintain variable frequency controllers. Refer to Division 01 Section
"Demonstration and Training."

SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes metal ducts for supply, return, outside, and exhaust air-distribution
systems in pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 10-inch wg. Metal ducts include the
following:
1. Rectangular ducts and fittings.
2. Single-wall, round, and flat-oval spiral-seam ducts and formed fittings.
3. Double-wall, round, and flat-oval spiral-seam ducts and formed fittings.
4. Duct liner.

1. Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
2. Division 09 Section "Interior Painting."
3. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-
mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. NUSIG: National Uniform Seismic Installation Guidelines.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select size and type of air-moving and -
distribution equipment and other air system components. Changes to layout or configuration of
duct system must be specifically approved in writing by A/E. Accompany requests for layout
modifications with calculations showing that proposed layout will provide original design
results without increasing system total pressure.
B. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in
ASHRAE 62.1.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Drawn to 1/4 inch equals 1 foot scale. Show fabrication and installation
details for metal ducts.
1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components,
and attachments to other work.
2. Duct layout indicating sizes and pressure classes.
3. Elevations of top and bottom of ducts.
4. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines.
Project 16018 METAL DUCTS 233113 - 1

5. Fittings.
6. Reinforcement and spacing.
7. Seam and joint construction.
8. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.
9. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project.
10. Duct accessories, including access doors and panels.
11. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment, vibration
isolation, and seismic restraints.
B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items
are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:
1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.
2. Other systems installed in same space as ducts.
3. Ceiling- and wall-mounting access doors and panels required to provide access to
dampers and other operating devices.
4. Ceiling-mounting items, including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,
sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.
5. In general, the piping and ductwork shown on the drawings shall be considered as
diagrammatic for clearness in indicating the general run and connections required, and
may not be shown in its true position. The piping and ductwork equipment may have to
be offset, lowered, or raised as required to accommodate field conditions.
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding
Code--Steel," for hangers and supports, AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum," for
aluminum supporting members, and AWS D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint
and seam welding.
B. NFPA Compliance:
1. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
2. NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
C. Comply with NFPA 96, "Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking
Operations," Ch. 3, "Duct System," for range hood ducts, unless otherwise indicated.
D. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 – Systems and

Equipment" and Section 7 – "Construction and System Start-up."
E. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section

6.4.4 – "HVAC System Construction and Insulation."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
product selection:


2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for
acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise
indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,
discolorations, and other imperfections.
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and
having G60 coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed
to view.
C. PVC-Coated Galvanized Steel: Acceptable by authorities having jurisdiction for use in

fabricating ducts with UL 181, Class 1 listing. Lock-forming-quality, galvanized sheet steel
complying with ASTM A 653 and having G60 coating designation. Factory-applied PVC
coatings shall be 4 mils thick on sheet metal surfaces of ducts and fittings exposed to corrosive
conditions and 2 mils thick on opposite surfaces.
D. Carbon-Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366, cold-rolled sheets; commercial quality; with oiled, matte
finish for exposed ducts.
E. Stainless Steel: ASTM A480, Type 304 and having a No. 20 finish for concealed ducts, and a
finish to match kitchen or dishwasher hoods for exposed ducts.
F. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209, alloy 3003, temper H14; with mill finish for concealed ducts
and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.
G. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on

galvanized sheet metal ducts.
H. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch
minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
2.3 DUCT LINER
A. Fibrous-Glass Liner: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with NAIMA AH124.
1. Manufacturers:
a. CertainTeed Corp.; Insulation Group.
b. Johns Manville International, Inc.
c. Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH.
d. Owens Corning.
2. Materials: ASTM C 1071; surfaces exposed to airstream shall be coated to prevent
erosion of glass fibers.
a. Thickness: 1 inch.
b. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 at 75 deg F mean temperature.

c. Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and smoke-

developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84.
d. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with ASTM C 916.
1) For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less
when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2) Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the
California Department of Health Services' Standard Practice for the Testing
of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale
Environmental Chambers.
e. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel suitable for adhesive attachment,
mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner
when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in
duct.
1) Tensile Strength: Indefinitely sustain a 50-lb tensile, dead-load test
perpendicular to duct wall.
2) Fastener Pin Length: As required for thickness of insulation and without
projecting more than 1/8 inch into airstream.
3) Adhesive for Attaching Mechanical Fasteners: Comply with fire-hazard
classification of duct liner system.
2.4 SEALANT MATERIALS
A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials of adhesive or
mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open-weave fabric strips and mastics.
1. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when
2. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
B. Tape Sealing System: Woven-fiber tape impregnated with gypsum mineral compound and
modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable,
airtight seal.
C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: Flexible, adhesive sealant, resistant to UV light when
cured, UL 723 listed, and complying with NFPA requirements for Class 1 ducts.
D. Solvent-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized

butyl sealant formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.
E. Flanged Joint Mastic: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealant complying with
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.
F. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.
2.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hanger Materials: Galvanized sheet steel or threaded steel rod.

1. Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or
galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.

2. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--
Metal and Flexible" for steel sheet width and thickness and for steel rod diameters.
3. Galvanized-steel straps attached to aluminum ducts shall have contact surfaces painted
with zinc-chromate primer.
B. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible
with duct materials.
C. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.
1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.
2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel support materials.
3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum support materials unless materials are
electrolytically separated from ducts.
D. Contractor may use load rated cable suspension system. Suspension system shall have a
specified manufacturers safe working load and supplemental safety factor of at least five times
the safe working load.
1. Suspension system shall be verified by SMACNA Testing and Research Institute to be in
compliance with SMACNA Duct Construction Standards Guidelines (1995 CH.4).
2.6 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION
A. Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction
according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" and
complying with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod
applications, and joint types and intervals.
1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity
class required for pressure class.
2. Deflection: Duct systems shall not exceed deflection limits according to SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
B. Transverse Joints: Prefabricated slide-on joints and components constructed using

manufacturer's guidelines for material thickness, reinforcement size and spacing, and joint
reinforcement.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
b. Nexus Inc.
c. Ward Industries, Inc.
C. Formed-On Flanges: Construct according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards--Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, using corner, bolt, cleat, and gasket details.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
b. Lockformer.
2. Duct Size: Maximum 30 inches wide and up to 2-inch wg pressure class.
3. Longitudinal Seams: Pittsburgh lock sealed with noncuring polymer sealant.
D. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches and larger
and 0.0359 inch thick or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. of nonbraced panel area unless ducts are
lined.

2.7 APPLICATION OF LINER IN RECTANGULAR DUCTS
A. The net free area of the duct dimensions on the Contract Documents shall be maintained.
Increase metal duct dimensions as necessary to compensate for addition of the liner.
B. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive
coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers of duct
liner is prohibited.
C. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal nosing.
D. Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive.
E. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-edge
overlapping.
F. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts,
unless duct size and standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal joints necessary.
G. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 2500 fpm
H. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not exceeding 12
inches transversely; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches
longitudinally.
I. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have either
channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings at the
following locations:
1. Fan discharges.
2. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.
3. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are greater than 2500
fpm or where indicated.
J. Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers, turning vane
assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout means
are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct walls with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds.
2.8 ROUND AND FLAT-OVAL DUCT AND FITTING FABRICATION
A. Diameter as applied to flat-oval ducts in this Article is the diameter of a round duct with a
circumference equal to the perimeter of a given size of flat-oval duct.
B. Round, Longitudinal- and Spiral Lock-Seam Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts of galvanized steel
according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
C. Flat-Oval, Spiral Lock-Seam Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."

D. Duct Joints:
1. Ducts up to 20 Inches in Diameter: Interior, center-beaded slip coupling, sealed before
and after fastening, attached with sheet metal screws.
2. Ducts 21 to 72 Inches in Diameter: Three-piece, gasketed, flanged joint consisting of two
internal flanges with sealant and one external closure band with gasket.
3. Ducts Larger Than 72 Inches in Diameter: Companion angle flanged joints per
SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2.
4. Round Ducts: Prefabricated connection system consisting of double-lipped, EPDM
rubber gasket. Manufacture ducts according to connection system manufacturer's
tolerances.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Ductmate Industries, Inc.
2) Lindab Inc.
5. Flat-Oval Ducts: Prefabricated connection system consisting of two flanges and one
synthetic rubber gasket.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Ductmate Industries, Inc.
2) McGill AirFlow Corporation.
3) SEMCO Incorporated.
E. 90-Degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," with metal thicknesses specified for
longitudinal-seam straight ducts.
F. Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with reduced entrance to branch taps and with no excess
material projecting from fitting onto branch tap entrance.
G. Fabricate elbows using die-formed, gored, pleated, or mitered construction. Bend radius of die-
formed, gored, and pleated elbows shall be 1-1/2 times duct diameter. Unless elbow
construction type is indicated, fabricate elbows as follows:
1. Mitered-Elbow Radius and Number of Pieces: Welded construction complying with
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for
pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 2-inch wg:
a. Ducts 3 to 36 Inches in Diameter: 0.034 inch.
b. Ducts 37 to 50 Inches in Diameter: 0.040 inch.
c. Ducts 52 to 60 Inches in Diameter: 0.052 inch.
d. Ducts 62 to 84 Inches in Diameter: 0.064 inch.
3. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for
pressure classes from 2- to 10-inch wg:
a. Ducts 3 to 26 Inches in Diameter: 0.034 inch.
b. Ducts 27 to 50 Inches in Diameter: 0.040 inch.
c. Ducts 52 to 60 Inches in Diameter: 0.052 inch.
d. Ducts 62 to 84 Inches in Diameter: 0.064 inch.
4. Flat-Oval Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with same metal thickness as
longitudinal-seam flat-oval duct.
5. 90-Degree, 2-Piece, Mitered Elbows: Use only for supply systems or for material-
handling Class A or B exhaust systems and only where space restrictions do not permit
using radius elbows. Fabricate with single-thickness turning vanes.

6. Round Elbows 8 Inches and Less in Diameter: Fabricate die-formed elbows for 45- and
90-degree elbows and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees only. Fabricate
nonstandard bend-angle configurations or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored
construction.
7. Round Elbows 9 through 14 Inches in Diameter: Fabricate gored or pleated elbows for
30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees unless space restrictions require mitered elbows. Fabricate
nonstandard bend-angle configurations or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored
construction.
8. Round Elbows Larger Than 14 Inches in Diameter and All Flat-Oval Elbows: Fabricate
gored elbows unless space restrictions require mitered elbows.
9. Die-Formed Elbows for Sizes through 8 Inches in Diameter and All Pressures 0.040 inch
thick with 2-piece welded construction.
10. Round Gored-Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as non-elbow fittings specified above.
11. Flat-Oval Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as longitudinal-seam flat-oval duct specified
above.
12. Pleated Elbows for Sizes through 14 Inches in Diameter and Pressures through 10-Inch
wg: 0.022 inch.
H. PVC-Coated Elbows and Fittings: Fabricate elbows and fittings as follows:

1. Round Elbows 4 to 8 Inches in Diameter: Two piece, die stamped, with longitudinal
seams spot welded, bonded, and painted with PVC aerosol spray.
2. Round Elbows 9 to 26 Inches in Diameter: Standing-seam construction.
3. Round Elbows 28 to 60 Inches in Diameter: Standard gored construction, riveted and
bonded.
4. Other Fittings: Riveted and bonded joints.
5. Couplings: Slip-joint construction with a minimum 2-inch insertion length.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DUCT APPLICATIONS
A. Static-Pressure Classes: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts according to the following:
1. Supply Ducts: 2-inch wg.
2. Supply Ducts (before Air Terminal Units): 3-inch wg.
3. Supply Ducts (after Air Terminal Units): 2-inch wg.
4. Return Ducts (Negative Pressure): 1-inch wg.
5. Exhaust Ducts (Negative Pressure): 2-inch wg.
B. All ducts shall be galvanized steel except as follows:

1. Range Hood Exhaust Ducts: Comply with NFPA 96.
a. Concealed: Carbon-steel sheet.
b. Exposed: Type 304, stainless steel with finish to match kitchen equipment and
range hood.
c. Weld and flange seams and joints.

2. Kitchen Hood Exhaust Ducts

a. The exhaust duct shall be sized to have a minimum velocity of 1500 FPM and a
maximum velocity of 2200 FPM and shall be constructed of 16 gauge, carbon
steel, welded liquid tight to comply with NFPA 96. Ductwork shall slope as
required by the local building code with sealed access panels as required and at the
required intervals. Ductwork shall be protected with fire resistance insulation in
accordance with ASTM E814 and “F” and “T” rating.
3. Acid-Resistant (Fume-Handling) Ducts: PVC-coated galvanized steel with thicker
coating on duct interior.
3.2 DUCT INSTALLATION
A. Construct and install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--
Metal and Flexible," unless otherwise indicated.
B. Install round and flat-oval ducts in lengths not less than 12 feet unless interrupted by fittings.
C. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
D. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, size, and shape and for connections.
E. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct. Secure
couplings with sheet metal screws. Install screws at intervals of 12 inches, with a minimum of
3 screws in each coupling.
F. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and parallel and
perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs.
G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent
enclosure elements of building.
H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.
I. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions
unless specifically indicated.
J. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke-control dampers, lighting layouts,
and similar finished work.
K. Seal all joints and seams. Apply sealant to male end connectors before insertion, and afterward
to cover entire joint and sheet metal screws.
L. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and
electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.
M. Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and
exterior walls and are exposed to view, conceal spaces between construction openings and ducts
or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as ducts. Overlap openings
on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.

N. Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior
walls, install appropriately rated fire dampers, sleeves, and firestopping sealant. Fire and smoke
dampers are specified in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." Firestopping materials
and installation methods are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
O. Install ducts with hangers and braces designed to withstand, without damage to equipment,
seismic force required by applicable building codes. Refer to SMACNA's "Seismic Restraint
Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems" or NUSIG.
P. Protect duct interiors from the elements and foreign materials until building is enclosed. Follow
SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction."
Q. Paint interiors of metal ducts, that do not have duct liner, for 24 inches upstream of registers and
grilles. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex finish coat over a compatible galvanized-steel
primer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 09 painting
Sections.
R. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials.
Comply with SMACN's "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction,"
Appendix G, "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines."
3.3 PVC-COATED DUCT, SPECIAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Repair damage to PVC coating with manufacturer's recommended materials.
3.4 RANGE HOOD EXHAUST DUCTS, SPECIAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install ducts to allow for thermal expansion through 2000 deg F temperature range.
B. Install ducts without dips or traps that may collect residues unless traps have continuous or
automatic residue removal.
C. Install access openings at each change in direction and at intervals defined by NFPA 96; locate
on sides of duct a minimum of 1-1/2 inches from bottom; and fit with grease-tight covers of
same material as duct.
D. Do not penetrate fire-rated assemblies except as permitted by applicable building codes.
3.5 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING
A. Seal duct seams and joints according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--
Metal and Flexible" for duct pressure class indicated and in compliance with ASHRAE/IESNA
90.1.
1. For pressure classes lower than 2-inch wg, seal transverse joints.
B. Seal ducts before external insulation is applied.

3.6 HANGING AND SUPPORTING
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible," Chapter
5, "Hangers and Supports," unless otherwise noted.
B. Support horizontal ductwork runs on 6 foot centers and within 24 inches of each elbow and
within 48 inches of each branch intersection. Where duct weight for the 6 foot length is less
than 40 pounds, support hangers may be on 8 foot centers.
C. Support vertical ducts at maximum intervals of 16 feet and at each floor.
D. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-fourth of
failure (proof-test) load.
3.7 CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 23 Section "Air
Duct Accessories."
B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for
branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections according to SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct
Leakage Test Manual" and prepare test reports:
1. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing
and for compliance with test requirements.
2. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section
being tested. If pressure classes are not indicated, test entire system at maximum system
design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure.
Give seven days' advance notice for testing.
3. Maximum Allowable Leakage: Comply with requirements for Leakage Class 3 for round
and flat-oval ducts, Leakage Class 12 for rectangular ducts in pressure classes lower than
and equal to 2-inch wg (both positive and negative pressures), and Leakage Class 6 for
pressure classes from 2- to 10-inch wg.
4. Remake leaking joints and retest until leakage is equal to or less than maximum
allowable.
3.9 CLEANING NEW SYSTEMS
A. Mark position of dampers and air-directional mechanical devices before cleaning, and perform
cleaning before air balancing.
B. Use service openings, as required, for physical and mechanical entry and for inspection.
1. Create other openings to comply with duct standards.
2. Disconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection.
3. Remove and reinstall ceiling sections to gain access during the cleaning process.

C. Vent vacuuming system to the outside. Include filtration to contain debris removed from
HVAC systems, and locate exhaust down wind and away from air intakes and other points of
entry into building.
D. Clean the following metal duct systems by removing surface contaminants and deposits:
1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers).
2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply
and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive
assemblies.
3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section,
condensate drain pans, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains.
4. Coils and related components.
5. Return-air ducts, dampers, and actuators except in ceiling plenums and mechanical
equipment rooms.
6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.
7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems.
E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:

1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants
from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.
2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect
vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under
negative pressure.
3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without
damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories.
4. Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner
to get wet.
5. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational.
Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and
straighten fins.
6. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures.
F. Cleanliness Verification:
1. Visually inspect metal ducts for contaminants.
2. Where contaminants are discovered, re-clean and reinspect ducts.

SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Backdraft and pressure relief dampers.
2. Barometric relief dampers.
3. Manual volume dampers.
4. Fire dampers.
5. Ceiling dampers.
6. Smoke dampers.
7. Combination fire and smoke dampers.
8. Flange connectors.
9. Turning vanes.
10. Duct-mounted access doors.
11. Flexible connectors.
12. Flexible ducts.
13. Duct accessory hardware.
1. Division 28 Section "Fire Detection and Alarm" for duct-mounted fire and smoke
detectors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

1. For duct silencers, include pressure drop and dynamic insertion loss data. Include
breakout noise calculations for high transmission loss casings.
B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which ceiling-mounted

access panels and access doors required for access to duct accessories are shown and
coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and
A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with
NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
B. Comply with AMCA 500-D testing for damper rating.
Project 16018 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 1

1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for
acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise
indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,
discolorations, and other imperfections.
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60.
2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.
C. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304.
D. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14; with mill finish for
concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.
E. Extruded Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063, Temper T6.
F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on

galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.
G. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch
minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
2.2 BACKDRAFT AND PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS

following:
1. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.
2. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.
3. Duro Dyne Inc.
4. Greenheck Fan Corporation.
5. Lloyd Industries, Inc.
6. Nailor Industries Inc.
7. NCA Manufacturing, Inc.
8. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc.
9. Ruskin Company.
10. SEMCO Incorporated.
11. Vent Products Company, Inc.
B. Description: Gravity balanced.

C. Maximum Air Velocity: 2000 fpm.
D. Maximum System Pressure: 1-inch wg.
E. Frame: 0.063-inch thick extruded aluminum, with welded corners and mounting flange.
F. Blades: Multiple single-piece blades, maximum 6-inch width, 0.025-inch thick, roll-formed
aluminum with sealed edges.
G. Blade Action: Parallel.
H. Blade Seals: Extruded vinyl, mechanically locked.
I. Blade Axles:
1. Material: Aluminum.
2. Diameter: 0.20 inch.
J. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.
K. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.
L. Bearings: Steel ball or synthetic pivot bushings.
M. Accessories:
1. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.
2. Counterweights and spring-assist kits for vertical airflow installations.
3. Electric actuators.
4. Chain pulls.
5. Front of rear screens.
6. 90-degree stops.
N. Sleeve: Minimum 20-gauge thickness.
2.3 BAROMETRIC RELIEF DAMPERS

following:
3. Duro Dyne Inc.
5. Lloyd Industries, Inc.
9. Ruskin Company.
B. Suitable for horizontal or vertical mounting.

C. Maximum Air Velocity: 2000 fpm.
D. Maximum System Pressure: 2-inch wg.
E. Frame: 0.063-inch thick extruded aluminum, with welded corners and mounting flange.
F. Blades:
1. Multiple, 0.025-inch thick, roll-formed aluminum.
2. Maximum Width: 6 inches.
3. Action: Parallel.
4. Balance: Gravity.
5. Eccentrically pivoted.
G. Blade Seals: Vinyl.
H. Blade Axles: Nonferrous metal.
I. Tie Bars and Brackets:

1. Material: Aluminum.
2. Rattle free with 90-degree stop.
J. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.
K. Bearings: Synthetic or bronze.
L. Accessories:
1. Flange on intake.
2. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressures.
2.4 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS
A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:

following:
a. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.
b. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.
c. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
d. McGill AirFlow LLC.
e. METALAIRE, Inc.
f. Nailor Industries Inc.
g. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc.
h. Ruskin Company.
i. Trox USA Inc.
j. Vent Products Company, Inc.
2. Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream.
3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.
4. Frames:
a. Hat-shaped, galvanized-steel channels, 0.064-inch minimum thickness.
b. Mitered and welded corners.
c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.

5. Blades:
a. Multiple or single blade.
b. Parallel-blade design.
c. Stiffen damper blades for stability.
d. Galvanized-steel, 0.064 inch thick.
6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
7. Bearings:
a. Oil-impregnated bronze or molded synthetic.
b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full
length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
B. Standard, Aluminum, Manual Volume Dampers:

following:
e. METALAIRE, Inc.
h. Ruskin Company.
i. Trox USA Inc.
2. Standard leakage rating.
4. Frames: Hat-shaped, 0.10-inch thick, aluminum sheet channels; frames with flanges for
attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.
5. Blades:
b. Parallel-blade design.
d. Roll-Formed Aluminum Blades: 0.10-inch thick aluminum sheet.
6. Blade Axles: Nonferrous metal.
7. Bearings:
8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.
C. Low-Leakage, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:

following:
e. METALAIRE, Inc.


h. Ruskin Company.
i. Trox USA Inc.
2. Low-leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and bearing AMCA's Certified
Ratings Seal for both air performance and air leakage.
4. Frames:
a. Hat shaped.
b. Galvanized-steel channels, 0.064 inch thick.
c. Mitered and welded corners.
d. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.
5. Blades:
b. Opposed blade design.
d. Galvanized, roll-formed steel, 0.064 inch thick.
6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
7. Bearings:
8. Blade Seals: Vinyl.
9. Jamb Seals: Flexible metal.
10. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
11. Accessories:
a. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position without
vibration.
D. Low-Leakage, Aluminum, Manual Volume Dampers:

following:
e. METALAIRE, Inc.
h. Ruskin Company.
i. Trox USA Inc.
2. Low-leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and bearing AMCA's Certified
Ratings Seal for both air performance and air leakage.
4. Frames: Hat-shaped, 0.10-inch thick, aluminum sheet channels; frames with flanges for
attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.
5. Blades:

b. Opposed blade design.

c. Roll-Formed Aluminum Blades: 0.10-inch thick aluminum sheet.
6. Blade Axles: Nonferrous metal.
7. Bearings:
8. Blade Seals: Vinyl.
9. Jamb Seals: Cambered aluminum.
10. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.
11. Accessories:
a. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position without
vibration.
E. Jackshaft:
1. Size: 1-inch diameter.
2. Material: Galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing assembly mounted on
supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies.
3. Length and Number of Mountings: As required to connect linkage of each damper in
multiple-damper assembly.
F. Damper Hardware:
1. Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch thick zinc-plated steel,
and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut.
2. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size.
3. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.
2.5 FIRE DAMPERS

following:
2. Arrow United Industries; a division of Mestek, Inc.
5. McGill AirFlow LLC.
6. METALAIRE, Inc.
9. PHL, Inc.
11. Prefco; Perfect Air Control, Inc.
12. Ruskin Company.
14. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
B. Type: Static; rated and labeled according to UL 555 by an NRTL.
C. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 or 3 hours.

D. Frame: Curtain type with blades inside airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inch thick
galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.
E. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed, galvanized sheet steel.

1. Minimum Thickness: 0.052 or 0.138 inch thick, as indicated, and of length to suit
application.
2. Exception: Omit sleeve where damper-frame width permits direct attachment of
perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor; thickness of damper frame must
comply with sleeve requirements.
F. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.
G. Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.034-inch thick, galvanized sheet steel. In place of

interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch thick, galvanized-steel blade connectors.
H. Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated, fusible links.
2.6 SMOKE DAMPERS

following:
5. Ruskin Company.
B. General Requirements: Label according to UL 555S by an NRTL.
C. Frame: Multiple-blade type; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inch thick galvanized steel;
with mitered and interlocking corners.
D. Blades: Roll-formed, horizontal, interlocking, 0.034-inch thick, galvanized sheet steel. In place
of interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch thick, galvanized-steel blade connectors.
E. Leakage: Class II.
F. Rated pressure and velocity to exceed design airflow conditions.
G. Smoke detector shall be provided by Division 28.
H. Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, 0.052-inch thick, galvanized sheet steel; length to suit wall
or floor application.
I. Damper Motors: Two-position action.
J. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and
Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

3. Permanent-Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Motors: With oil-immersed and sealed gear
trains.
4. Spring-Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral-spring mechanism where indicated.
Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for service or
adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating
of 150 in. x lbf.
5. Outdoor Motors and Motors in Outdoor-Air Intakes: Equip with O-ring gaskets designed
to make motors weatherproof. Equip motors with internal heaters to permit normal
operation at minus 40 deg F.
6. Nonspring-Return Motors: For dampers larger than 25 sq. ft., size motor for running
torque rating of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating of 300 in. x lbf.
7. Electrical Connection: 115 V, single phase, 60 Hz.
2.7 COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS

following:
5. Ruskin Company.
B. Type: Static; rated and labeled according to UL 555 and UL 555S by an NRTL.
C. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 or 3 hours.
D. Frame: Multiple-blade type; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inch thick galvanized steel;
E. Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated, fusible links.
F. Frame: Multiple-blade type; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inch thick galvanized steel;
G. Blades: Roll-formed, horizontal, interlocking, 0.034-inch thick, galvanized sheet steel. In place
of interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch thick, galvanized-steel blade connectors.
H. Leakage: Class II.
I. Rated pressure and velocity to exceed design airflow conditions.
J. Smoke detector shall be provided by Division 28.
K. Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, 0.052-inch thick, galvanized sheet steel; length to suit wall
or floor application.

L. Damper Motors: Two-position action.
M. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and
Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
3. Permanent-Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Motors: With oil-immersed and sealed gear
trains.
4. Spring-Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral-spring mechanism where indicated.
Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for service or
adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating
of 150 in. x lbf.
5. Outdoor Motors and Motors in Outdoor-Air Intakes: Equip with O-ring gaskets designed
to make motors weatherproof. Equip motors with internal heaters to permit normal
operation at minus 40 deg F.
6. Nonspring-Return Motors: For dampers larger than 25 sq. ft., size motor for running
torque rating of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating of 300 in. x lbf.
7. Electrical Connection: 115 V, single phase, 60 Hz.
N. Smoke detector shall be provided and installed by Division 26. Division 23 shall install
ductwork sleeve as required for installation of detector. Coordinate with Division 26
Contractor.
2.8 FLANGE CONNECTORS

following:
1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
2. Nexus PDQ; Division of Shilco Holdings Inc.
B. Description: Add-on or roll-formed, factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange connectors,

gaskets, and components.
C. Material: Galvanized steel.
D. Gauge and Shape: Match connecting ductwork.
2.9 TURNING VANES

following:
2. Duro Dyne Inc.
3. METALAIRE, Inc.

B. Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with bars
perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.
C. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible"; Figures 2-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
D. Vane Construction: Double wall.
2.10 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS

following:
1. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.
4. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
9. Ventfabrics, Inc.
B. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 2-10, "Duct Access Doors and Panels,"
and 2-11, "Access Panels - Round Duct."
1. Door:
a. Double wall, rectangular.
b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct
pressure class.
c. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches.
d. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.
2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.
3. Number of Hinges and Locks:
a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks.
b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks.
c. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches: Three hinges and two compression
latches with outside and inside handles.
d. Access Doors Larger Than 24 by 48 Inches: Four hinges and two compression
latches with outside and inside handles.
C. Pressure Relief Access Door:

1. Door and Frame Material: Galvanized sheet steel.
2. Door: Double wall with insulation fill with metal thickness applicable for duct pressure
class.
3. Operation: Open outward for positive-pressure ducts and inward for negative-pressure
ducts.
4. Factory set at 10-inch wg.
5. Doors close when pressures are within set-point range.
6. Hinge: Continuous piano.

7. Latches: Cam.
8. Seal: Neoprene or foam rubber.
9. Insulation Fill: 1-inch thick, fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board.
2.11 DUCT ACCESS PANEL ASSEMBLIES

following:
2. Flame Gard, Inc.
3. 3M.
B. Labeled according to UL 1978 by an NRTL.
C. Panel and Frame: Minimum thickness 0.0528-inch carbon or 0.0428-inch stainless steel.
D. Fasteners: Carbon or stainless steel. Panel fasteners shall not penetrate duct wall.
E. Gasket: Comply with NFPA 96; grease-tight, high-temperature ceramic fiber, rated for
minimum 2000 deg F.
F. Minimum Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg, positive or negative.
2.12 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

following:
2. Duro Dyne Inc.
3. Ventfabrics, Inc.
B. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.
C. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.
D. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to 2
strips of 2-3/4-inch wide, 0.028-inch thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch thick aluminum
sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.
E. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.
1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd.
2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.
3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.
F. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof,
synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone.
1. Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd..
3. Service Temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250 deg F.

G. High-Corrosive-Environment System, Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric with chemical-

resistant coating.
1. Minimum Weight: 14 oz./sq. yd..
3. Service Temperature: Minus 67 to plus 500 deg F
H. Thrust Limits: Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert with spring and insert in
compression, and with a load stop. Include rod and angle-iron brackets for attaching to fan
discharge and duct.
1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a maximum of
30 degrees of angular rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.
2. Outdoor Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.
7. Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of 1/4-inch movement at
start and stop.
2.13 FLEXIBLE DUCTS

following:
1. Atco
2. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
3. Hercules Industries, Inc.
5. Tuttle & Bailey; A Division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
B. Low Pressure Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, multiple layers of aluminum laminate
supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; aluminized vapor-
barrier film.
1. Pressure Rating: 4-inch wg positive and 0.5-inch wg negative.
2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm.
3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 175 deg F.
C. Flexible Duct Connectors:

1. Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a
worm-gear action or nylon strap in sizes 3 through 18 inches, to suit duct size.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous
Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.

B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in
galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and
aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.
C. Install backdraft dampers at discharge of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to
exhaust fan unless otherwise indicated.
D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend
from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with
hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.
1. Coordinate subparagraphs below with Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts."Install steel
volume dampers in steel ducts.
2. Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts.
E. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.
F. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.
G. Install fire and smoke dampers according to UL listing.
H. Connect ducts to duct silencers rigidly.
I. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining
accessories and equipment at the following locations:
1. On both sides of duct coils.
2. Downstream from control dampers and equipment.
3. Adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers, to reset or reinstall fusible links.
Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible links shall be pressure
relief access doors and shall be outward operation for access doors installed upstream
from dampers and inward operation for access doors installed downstream from dampers.
4. At all backdraft damper locations.
5. At all airflow measuring stations.
6. Elsewhere as indicated.
J. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.
K. Access Door Sizes:

1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches.
2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches.
3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches.
4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches.
5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches.
6. Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches.
L. Label access doors according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and
Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door.
M. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.

N. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg and more, cover flexible connectors with
loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.
O. Flexible duct shall not be acceptable for use in exhaust system or negative pressure applications.
P. Connect diffusers to low-pressure ducts with maximum 4 foot lengths of flexible duct clamped
or strapped in place.
Q. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands.
R. Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on both sides of equipment. Attach
thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4-inch movement during start
and stop of fans.
A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.
2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be
performed.
3. Operate fire, smoke, and combination fire and smoke dampers to verify full range of
movement and verify that proper heat-response device is installed.
4. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.
5. Operate remote damper operators to verify full range of movement of operator and
damper.

SECTION 233423 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY

1. Centrifugal roof ventilators.
2. Laboratory exhaust fans.
A. Project Altitude: Base fan-performance ratings on actual Project site elevations.
B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of
product indicated and include the following:
1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.
2. Certified fan sound-power ratings.
3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories.
4. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts.
5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.
6. Roof curbs.
7. Fan speed controllers.
B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the
following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of
the items involved:
1. Roof framing and support members relative to duct penetrations.
2. Ceiling suspension assembly members.
4. Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers,
access panels, and special moldings.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in emergency, operation,
Project 16018 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423 - 1

intended use.
B. AMCA Compliance: Products shall comply with performance requirements and shall be
licensed to use the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
C. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.
D. UL Standard: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705.
A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled unit, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with
protective crating and covering.
B. Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to final location, according to
C. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.
B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.
C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items
are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Belts: One set(s) for each belt-driven unit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS

following:
1. Greenheck.
2. Loren Cook Company.
3. Penn Ventilation.

B. Description: Direct- or belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft,
bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, curb base, and accessories.
C. Housing: Removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; square, one-piece,
aluminum base with venturi inlet cone.
1. Upblast Units: Provide spun-aluminum discharge baffle to direct discharge air upward,
with rain and snow drains and grease collector.
2. Hinged Subbase: Galvanized-steel hinged arrangement permitting service and
maintenance.
D. Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades.
E. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to housing, with the following features:
1. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub.
2. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings.
3. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley.
4. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream.
F. Accessories:
1. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50
percent.
2. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted inside
fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.
3. Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2-inch mesh, aluminum or brass wire.
4. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb base;
factory set to close when fan stops.
G. Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 1-1/2-inch thick, rigid, fiberglass
insulation adhered to inside walls; and 1-1/2-inch wood nailer. Size as required to suit roof
opening and fan base.
1. Configuration: Self-flashing without a cant strip, with mounting flange.
2. Overall Height: 12 inches, 18 inches for kitchen hood exhaust fan(s).
3. Pitch Mounting: Manufacture curb for roof slope.
H. Finish
1. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer’s
standard finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat, with a minimum dry
film thickness of 1 mil for topcoat and an overall minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils.
a. Color and Gloss: Standard color as selected from manufacturer chart.
2.2 LABORATORY EXHAUST FANS

following:
1. Greenheck.
2. Loren Cook Company.
3. Penn Ventilation.
B. Description: Direct or belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft,
bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, and accessories.

C. Housing: Fabricated of galvanized steel with side sheets fastened with a deep lock seam or
welded to scroll sheets.
1. Housing Discharge Arrangement: Vertical stack.
D. Fan Wheels: Single-width, single inlet; welded to cast-iron or cast-steel hub and spun-steel
inlet cone, with hub keyed to shaft.
1. Blade Materials: Steel or aluminum.
2. Blade Type: Backward inclined, or forward curved, or airfoil.
3. Spark-Resistant Construction: AMCA 99.
E. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub.
F. Shaft Bearings: Pre-lubricated and sealed, self-aligning, pillow-block-type ball bearings with
ABMA 9, L50 of 200,000 hours.
G. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation.
1. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: 1.5.
2. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp; fixed pitch for use
with larger motors. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of adjustment range
at fan design conditions.
3. Belts: Oil resistant, non-sparking, and non-static; matched sets for multiple belt drives.
4. Belt Guards: Fabricate of steel for motors mounted on outside of fan cabinet.
H. Accessories:
1. Inlet and Outlet: Flanged.
2. Companion Flanges: Rolled flanges for duct connections of same material as housing.
3. Backdraft Dampers: Gravity actuated with counterweight and interlocking aluminum
blades with felt edges in steel frame installed on fan discharge.
4. Access Door: Gasketed door in scroll with latch-type handles.
5. Scroll Dampers: Single-blade damper installed at fan scroll top with adjustable linkage.
6. Inlet Screens: Removable wire mesh.
7. Drain Connections: NPS 3/4 threaded coupling drain connection installed at lowest point
of housing.
8. Weather Hoods: Weather resistant with stamped vents over motor and drive
compartment.
9. Mounting curb specifically designed for fume jet fan, provided by unit manufacturer.
2.3 MOTORS
A. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC
Equipment."
B. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.
A. Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound
Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant
Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

B. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation,
and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of
Testing Fans for Rating."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install power ventilators level and plumb.
B. Support in-line units using restrained spring isolators having a static deflection of 1 inch.
Vibration-control devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls
for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
C. Secure roof-mounting fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware. Refer to Division 07
Section "Roof Accessories" for installation of roof curbs.
D. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and elastomeric hangers or
spring hangers having a static deflection of 1 inch. Vibration-control devices are specified in
Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
E. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
F. Label units according to requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Identification for

3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct
connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Division 23 Section
"Air Duct Accessories."
B. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance.
C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
D. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors

and Cables."
1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.
2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to
ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload
protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.
3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.

4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan
wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and
adjust belts, and install belt guards.
5. Adjust belt tension.
6. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.
8. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in
connected ductwork systems are in fully open position.
9. Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to
indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage.
10. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators.
B. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
B. Adjust belt tension.
C. Refer to Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing,
adjusting, and balancing procedures.
D. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow.
E. Lubricate bearings.

SECTION 233713 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes ceiling- and wall-mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles.

1. Division 08 Section "Louvers and Vents" for fixed and adjustable louvers and wall vents,
whether or not they are connected to ducts.
2. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume-
control dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated, include the following:

1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and
performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.
2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate Drawing designation, room location,
quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
product selection:
a. A-J Manufacturing Co., Inc.
b. Anemostat; a Mestek Company.
c. Carnes.
d. Dayus Register & Grille.
e. Hart & Cooley, Inc.; Hart & Cooley Div.
f. Krueger.
g. METALAIRE, Inc.; Metal Industries Inc.
h. Nailor Industries of Texas Inc.
i. Price Industries.
j. Titus.
k. Tuttle & Bailey.
Project 16018 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 233713 - 1

2.2 AIR TRANSFER GRILLES, RETURN GRILLES, AND EXHAUST GRILLES
A. All aluminum construction.
B. 35 degree louvers spaced 1/2 inch on center.
C. One set of fixed louvers parallel to long dimension.
D. Baked white enamel or powder paint white finish for ceiling installation. Provide wall mounted
and exposed duct mounted installation with primed finish for field painting.
E. Size of grille as indicated on Drawings.
2.3 SQUARE PANEL CEILING DIFFUSER
A. All 18 gauge steel diffuser, 24 inch by 24 inch module size, 18 inch by 18 inch face panel.
B. Round neck connection, dimension as scheduled on Drawings.
C. Solid face panel with curved back pan designed for VAV usage. Face panel shall be easily
removed.
D. Back pan shall be one-piece die-formed with smooth surfaces and no corner joints.
E. Baked white enamel finished unless otherwise denoted on Drawings.
F. Provide blank-off plates to convert diffuser to 2-way or 3-way blow where indicated on
Drawings.
G. Equivalent to Titus “Omni.”
2.4 LINEAR SLOT DIFFUSER
A. Pattern controllers shall be one piece extruded aluminum, 24 inches long maximum, positioned
between spring loaded spacers. Pattern controllers shall allow the airstream to be directed flat
against the ceiling in either direction or downward, as well as allowing throw reduction every
two feet along the entire length of the linear slot diffusers. The airstream shall be maintained at
the ceiling plane and shall not dump when volume is reduced. Pattern controllers shall be field
adjustable from the face of the diffuser.
B. Material shall be minimum wall thickness 0.062 extruded aluminum. Spring steel retainers
shall be used under the spacers to hold the slot diffusers assembly tightly together.
C. Factory mounted plenums shall be minimum 24 gauge galvanized steel and lined inside with
black matte fiberglass insulation.
D. Flanges exposed to view shall be painted factory standard white. All other surfaces shall be
painted flat.

E. For lay-in ceiling, provide hanger wire support clips that are integral with the linear slot diffus-
ers allowing the linear slot diffusers to be supported from the building structure with ceiling
wire.
F. Slot width, number of slots, diffuser length and inlet collar size shall be as scheduled on the
Drawings.
G. Equivalent to Titus FlowBar-FlowTee “FTI-15-HT and “FTI-20-HT.”
2.5 JET THROW SLOT DIFFUSER
A. Aluminum construction, a minimum wall thickness of 0.062 inches.
B. 1 inch slot, jet throw option.
C. Provide insulated plenum like Titus “FBPI-10.”
D. Provide mitered corners and butt ends where applicable.
E. Refer to reflected ceiling plans for border style appropriate to diffuser location.
F. Surface mounted, with concealed type fastening.
G. Baked white enamel finish.
H. Length of slot diffuser shall be as indicated on Drawings.
I. Equivalent to Titus “FL-10-JT.”
2.6 JET THROW SLOT DIFFUSER
A. Aluminum construction, a minimum wall thickness of 0.062 inches.
B. 1-1/2 inch slot, jet throw option.
C. Provide insulated plenum like Titus “FBPI-15.”
D. Provide mitered corners and butt ends where applicable.
E. Refer to reflected ceiling plans for border style appropriate to diffuser location.
F. Surface mounted, with concealed type fastening.
G. Baked white enamel finish.
H. Length of slot diffuser shall be as indicated on Drawings.
I. Equivalent to Titus “FL-15-JT.”

A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70,
"Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
equipment.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb.
B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings,
and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design
requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make
final locations where indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in lay-in ceiling
panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict
with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.
C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and
maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed,
before starting air balancing.

SECTION 233813 - COMMERCIAL-KITCHEN HOODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes Type I commercial kitchen hoods.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Listed Hood: A hood, factory fabricated and tested for compliance with UL 710 by a testing
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Standard Hood: A hood, usually field fabricated, that complies with design, construction, and
performance criteria of applicable national and local codes.
C. Type I Hood: A hood designed for grease exhaust applications.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

1. Standard hoods.
2. Filters/baffles.
3. Fire-suppression systems.
4. Lighting fixtures.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

1. Shop Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch = 1 foot.
2. Show plan view, elevation view, sections, roughing-in dimensions, service requirements,
duct connection sizes, and attachments to other work.
3. Show cooking equipment plan and elevation to confirm minimum code-required
overhang.
4. Indicate performance, exhaust and makeup air airflow, and pressure loss at actual Project-
site elevation.
5. Show water-supply and drain piping connections.
6. Show control cabinets.
7. Show fire-protection cylinders, piping, actuation devices, and manual control devices.
8. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
9. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints.
10. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
11. Piping Diagrams: Detail fire-suppression piping and components and differentiate
between manufacturer-installed and field-installed piping. Include roughing-in
Project 16018 COMMERCIAL-KITCHEN HOODS 233813 - 1

requirements for drain connections. Show cooking equipment plan and elevation to
illustrate fire-suppression nozzle locations.
a. Piping Diagram Scale: 1/4 inch = 1 foot.
C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items
are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:
1. Coordination Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch = 1 foot.
2. Suspended ceiling assembly components.
3. Structural members to which equipment will be attached.
4. Roof framing and support members for duct penetrations.
5. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following:
b. Air outlets and inlets.
c. Speakers.
d. Sprinklers.
e. Access panels.
f. Moldings on hoods and accessory equipment.
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D 1.1M, "Structural
Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports; and AWS D9.1/D9.1M, "Sheet Metal Welding
Code," for joint and seam welding.
intended use.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate equipment layout and installation with adjacent Work, including lighting fixtures,
HVAC equipment, plumbing, and fire-suppression system components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 HOOD MATERIALS
A. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.

1. Minimum Thickness: 0.050 inch.
2. Finish: Comply with SSINA's "Finishes for Stainless Steel" for recommendations for
applying and designating finishes.
a. Finish shall be free from tool and die marks and stretch lines and shall have
uniform, directionally textured, polished finish indicated, free of cross scratches.
Grain shall run with long dimension of each piece.
3. Concealed Stainless-Steel Surfaces: ASTM A 480/A 480M, No. 2B finish (bright, cold-
rolled, unpolished finish).
4. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign
matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.

B. Carbon-Steel Sheets: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, cold-rolled sheets; commercial quality; with
oiled, exposed matte finish.
C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Lock-forming quality; ASTM A 653, G90 coating designation.

D. Zinc-Coated Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36, zinc coated according to ASTM A 123 requirements.
E. Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. Elastomeric sealant shall be NSF
certified for commercial kitchen hood application. Sealants, when cured and washed, shall
comply with requirements in 21 CFR, Section 177.2600, for use in areas that come in contact
with food.
1. Color: As required to match hood finish.
2. Backer Rod: Closed-cell polyethylene, in diameter larger than joint width.
F. Sound Dampening: NSF-certified, nonabsorbent, hard-drying, sound-deadening compound for

permanent adhesion to metal in minimum 1/8-inch thickness that does not chip, flake, or blister.
G. Gaskets: NSF certified for end-use application indicated; of resilient rubber, neoprene, or PVC
that is nontoxic, stable, odorless, nonabsorbent, and unaffected by exposure to foods and
cleaning compounds, and that passes testing according to UL 710.
2.2 GENERAL HOOD FABRICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Welding: Use welding rod of same composition as metal being welded. Use methods that
minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metal. Make ductile
welds free of mechanical imperfections such as gas holes, pits, or cracks.
1. Welded Butt Joints: Full-penetration welds for full-joint length. Make joints flat,
continuous, and homogenous with sheet metal without relying on straps under seams,
filling in with solder, or spot welding.
2. Grind exposed welded joints flush with adjoining material and polish to match adjoining
surfaces.
3. Where fasteners are welded to underside of equipment, finish reverse side of weld
smooth and flush.
4. Coat concealed stainless-steel welded joints with metallic-based paint to prevent
corrosion.
5. After zinc-coated steel is welded, clean welds and abraded areas and apply SSPC-
Paint 20, high-zinc-dust-content, galvanizing repair paint to comply with
ASTM A 780/A 780M.
B. For metal butt joints, comply with SMACNA's "Kitchen Equipment Fabrication Guidelines."
C. Where stainless steel is joined to a dissimilar metal, use stainless-steel welding material or
fastening devices.
D. Form metal with break bends that are not flaky, scaly, or cracked in appearance; where breaks
mar uniform surface appearance of material, remove marks by grinding, polishing, and
finishing.

E. Sheared Metal Edges: Finish free of burrs, fins, and irregular projections.
F. In food zones, as defined in NSF, fabricate surfaces free from exposed fasteners.
G. Cap exposed fastener threads, including those inside cabinets, with stainless-steel lock washers
and stainless-steel cap (acorn) nuts.
H. Fabricate pipe slots on equipment with turned-up edges sized to accommodate service and
utility lines and mechanical connections.
I. Fabricate enclosures, including panels, housings, and skirts, to conceal service lines, operating
components, and mechanical and electrical devices including those inside cabinets, unless
J. Fabricate seismic restraints according to SMACNA's "Kitchen Equipment Fabrication

Guidelines," Appendix 1, "Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of Kitchen Equipment."
K. Fabricate equipment edges and backsplashes according to SMACNA's "Kitchen Equipment

Fabrication Guidelines."
L. Fabricate enclosure panels to ceiling and wall as follows:

1. Fabricate panels on all exposed side(s) with same material as hood, and extend from
ceiling to top of hood canopy and from canopy to wall.
2. Wall Offset Spacer: Minimum of 6 inches.
2.3 TYPE I EXHAUST HOOD FABRICATION

following:
1. Captive-Aire Systems.
2. Grease Master; a division of Custom Industries, Inc.
3. Greenheck.
4. Halton Company.
5. LCSystems, Inc.
B. Weld all joints exposed to grease with continuous welds, and make filters/baffles or grease
extractors and makeup air diffusers easily accessible for cleaning.
1. Fabricate hoods according to NSF 2, "Food Equipment."
2. Hoods shall be listed and labeled, according to UL 710, by a testing agency acceptable to
3. Hoods shall be designed, fabricated, and installed according to NFPA 96.
4. Include access panels as required for access to fire dampers and fusible links.
5. Duct Collars: Minimum 0.0598-inch thick steel at least 3 inches long, continuously
welded to top of hood and at corners.
6. Duct-Collar Fire Dampers: Hood shall be listed and labeled according to UL 710 without
fire dampers.
C. Hood Configuration: Exhaust only.
D. Hood Style: Wall-mounted canopy.

E. Filters/Baffles: Removable, stainless-steel. Fabricate stainless steel for filter frame and
removable collection cup and pitched trough. Exposed surfaces shall be pitched to drain to
collection cup. Filters/baffles shall be tested according to UL 1046, "Grease Filters for Exhaust
Ducts," by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
F. Lighting Fixtures: Recessed, LED fixtures and lamps with lenses sealed vaportight. Wiring
shall be installed in conduit on hood exterior. Number and location of fixtures shall provide a
minimum of 50 fc.
1. Light switches shall be mounted on front panel of hood canopy.
2. Lighting Fixtures: LED complying with UL 1598.
G. Hood Controls: Hood-mounting control cabinet, fabricated of stainless steel.

1. Exhaust Fan: On-off switches shall start and stop the exhaust fan. Interlock exhaust fan
with fire-suppression system to operate fan(s) during fire-suppression-agent release and
to remain in operation until manually stopped. Include red pilot light to indicate fan
operation. Motor starters shall comply with Division 26 Section "Enclosed Controllers."
2. Exhaust Fan Interlock: Factory wire the exhaust fan starters in a single control cabinet
for adjacent hoods to operate together.
3. Photocell and Temperature Control: Cycle makeup air and exhaust-air fans on and off,
based on temperature at hood discharge and opacity of smoke in hood. Interlock fan
control with fire-suppression system to operate during fire-suppression-agent release and
to remain in operation until manually stopped. Provide air-purge fan and conduit to
photocell and reflector to avoid grease accumulation that will negatively affect
performance of system.
2.4 WET-CHEMICAL FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEM

following:
1. Ansul Incorporated; a Tyco International Ltd. Company.
2. Badger Fire Protection.
3. Kidde Fire Systems.
4. Pyro Chem.
B. Description: Engineered distribution piping designed for automatic detection and release or
manual release of fire-suppression agent by hood operator. Fire-suppression system shall be
listed and labeled for complying with NFPA 17A, "Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems," by a
1. Steel Pipe, NPS 2 and Smaller: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type S, Grade A, Schedule 40,
plain ends.
2. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300.
3. Piping, fusible links and release mechanism, tank containing the suppression agent, and
controls shall be factory installed. Controls shall be in stainless-steel control cabinet
mounted on hood or wall. Furnish manual pull station for wall mounting. Exposed
piping shall be covered with chrome-plated aluminum tubing. Exposed fittings shall be
chrome plated.
4. Liquid Extinguishing Agent: Noncorrosive, low-pH liquid.
5. Furnish electric-operated gas shutoff valve; refer to Division 23 Section "Facility
Natural-Gas Piping."

6. Furnish manual reset, electric-operated gas shutoff valve with clearly marked open and
closed indicator for field installation.
7. Fire-suppression system controls shall be integrated with controls for fans, lights, and
fuel supply and located in a single cabinet for each group of hoods immediately adjacent.
8. Wiring shall have color-coded, numbered terminal blocks and grounding bar. Spare
terminals for fire alarm, optional wiring to start fan with fire alarm, red pilot light to
indicate fan operation, and control switches shall all be factory wired in control cabinet
with relays or starters. Include spare terminals for fire alarm, and wiring to start fan with
fire alarm.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before
equipment installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Complete field assembly of hoods where required.

1. Make closed butt and contact joints that do not require filler.
2. Grind field welds on stainless-steel equipment smooth, and polish to match adjacent
finish. Comply with welding requirements in Part 2 "General Hood Fabrication
Requirements" Article.
B. Install hoods and associated services with clearances and access for maintaining, cleaning, and
servicing hoods, filters/baffles, grease extractor, and fire-suppression systems according to
manufacturer's written instructions and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Make cutouts in hoods where required to run service lines and to make final connections, and
seal openings according to UL 1978.
D. Securely anchor and attach items and accessories to walls, floors, or bases with stainless-steel
fasteners, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Install hoods to operate free from vibration.
F. Install trim strips and similar items requiring fasteners in a bed of sealant. Fasten with stainless-
steel fasteners at 48 inches o.c. maximum.
G. Install sealant in joints between equipment and abutting surfaces with continuous joint backing,
unless otherwise indicated. Provide airtight, watertight, vermin-proof, sanitary joints.
H. Install lamps, with maximum recommended wattage, in equipment with integral lighting.

I. Set initial temperatures, and calibrate sensors.
J. Set field-adjustable switches.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
B. Install piping with clearance to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect ducts according to requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." Weld
exhaust-duct connections with continuous liquid-tight joint.
D. Install fire-suppression piping for remote-mounted suppression systems according to

NFPA 17A, "Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems."
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare
test reports.

Report results in writing.


1. Test each equipment item for proper operation. Repair or replace equipment that is
defective, including units that operate below required capacity or that operate with
excessive noise or vibration.
equipment.
3. Test water, drain, gas, and liquid-carrying components for leaks. Repair or replace
leaking components.
4. Perform hood performance tests required by authorities having jurisdiction.
5. Perform fire-suppression system performance tests required by authorities having
jurisdiction.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION

adjust, operate, and maintain commercial kitchen hoods. Refer to Division 01 Section


SECTION 235100 - BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY

1. Listed double-wall vents.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

1. Special gas vents.
B. Shop Drawings: For vents, breechings, chimneys, and stacks. Include plans, elevations,
sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, methods of field assembly, components, hangers, and location and size of
each field connection.
C. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain listed system components through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural

Welding Code--Steel," for hangers and supports and AWS D9.1/D9.1M, "Sheet Metal Welding
Code," for shop and field welding of joints and seams in vents, breechings, and stacks.
C. Certified Sizing Calculations: Manufacturer shall certify venting system sizing calculations.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items
are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LISTED SPECIAL GAS VENTS

following:
1. Heat-Fab, Inc.
Project 16018 BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS 235100 - 1

2. Metal-Fab, Inc.
3. Selkirk Inc.; Selkirk Metalbestos and Air Mate.
4. Z-Flex; Flexmaster Canada Limited.
5. Van-Packer Company, Inc.
B. Description: Double-wall metal vents tested according to UL 1738 and rated for 480 deg F
continuously, with positive or negative flue pressure complying with NFPA 211.
C. Construction: Inner shell and outer jacket separated by at least a 1/2-inch airspace.
D. Inner Shell: ASTM A 959, Type AL-29-4C stainless steel.
E. Outer Jacket: Aluminized steel.
F. Accessories: Tees, elbows, increasers, draft-hood connectors, terminations, adjustable roof

flashings, storm collars, support assemblies, thimbles, firestop spacers, and fasteners; fabricated
from similar materials and designs as vent-pipe straight sections; all listed for same assembly.
1. Termination: Stack cap designed to exclude minimum 90 percent of rainfall.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and
other conditions affecting performance of work.
3.2 APPLICATION
A. Listed Special Gas Vent: Condensing gas appliances.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF LISTED VENTS AND CHIMNEYS
A. Locate to comply with minimum clearances from combustibles and minimum termination
heights according to product listing or NFPA 211, whichever is most stringent.
B. Seal between sections of positive-pressure vents and grease exhaust ducts according to
manufacturer's written installation instructions, using sealants recommended by manufacturer.
C. Support vents at intervals recommended by manufacturer to support weight of vents and all
accessories, without exceeding appliance loading.
D. Slope breechings down in direction of appliance, with condensate drain connection at lowest
point piped to nearest drain.
E. Lap joints in direction of flow.

3.4 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed
finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes.
B. Clean breechings internally, during and after installation, to remove dust and debris.
C. Provide temporary closures at ends of breechings, chimneys, and stacks that are not completed
or connected to equipment.

SECTION 237413 - PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes packaged, outdoor, central-station air-handling units (rooftop units) with
the following components and accessories:
1. Direct-expansion cooling.
2. Gas furnace.
3. Economizer outdoor- and return-air damper section.
4. Energy recovery
5. Integral, space temperature controls.
6. Roof curbs.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. DDC: Direct-digital controls.
B. ECM: Electrically commutated motor.
C. Outdoor-Air Refrigerant Coil: Refrigerant coil in the outdoor-air stream to reject heat during
cooling operations and to absorb heat during heating operations. "Outdoor air" is defined as the
air outside the building or taken from outdoors and not previously circulated through the
system.
D. Outdoor-Air Refrigerant-Coil Fan: The outdoor-air refrigerant-coil fan in RTUs. "Outdoor air"
is defined as the air outside the building or taken from outdoors and not previously circulated
through the system.
E. RTU: Rooftop unit. As used in this Section, this abbreviation means packaged, outdoor,
central-station air-handling units. This abbreviation is used regardless of whether the unit is
mounted on the roof or on a concrete base on ground.
F. Supply-Air Fan: The fan providing supply air to conditioned space. "Supply air" is defined as
the air entering a space from air-conditioning, heating, or ventilating apparatus.
G. Supply-Air Refrigerant Coil: Refrigerant coil in the supply-air stream to absorb heat (provide
cooling) during cooling operations and to reject heat (provide heating) during heating
operations. "Supply air" is defined as the air entering a space from air-conditioning, heating, or
ventilating apparatus.
Project 16018 PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL 237413 - 1

AIA/MCS STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS March 3, 2017
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical data for each RTU, including rated capacities,
dimensions, required clearances, characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.
B. Coordination Drawings: Plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items
1. Structural members to which RTUs will be attached.
2. Roof openings
3. Roof curbs and flashing.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For RTUs to include in emergency, operation, and
D. Warranty: Warranty specified in this Section.
A. ARI Compliance:
1. Comply with ARI 210/240 and ARI 340/360 for testing and rating energy efficiencies for
RTUs.
2. Comply with ARI 270 for testing and rating sound performance for RTUs.
B. ASHRAE Compliance:
1. Comply with ASHRAE 15 for refrigeration system safety.
2. Comply with ASHRAE 33 for methods of testing cooling and heating coils.
3. Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 for minimum efficiency of heating and cooling.
C. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.
D. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1995.
E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
intended use.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace

components of RTUs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period for Compressors: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than one year
parts and labor from date of Substantial Completion.
2. Warranty Period for Gas Furnace Heat Exchangers: Manufacturer's standard, but not less
than one year parts and labor from date of Substantial Completion.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Fan Belts: One set for each belt-driven fan.

2. Filters: One set of filters for each unit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. Valent
2. AAON, Inc.
3. Annex Air.
4. Engineered Air.
5. Venmar.
2.2 CASING
A. General Fabrication Requirements for Casings: Formed and reinforced double-wall insulated
panels, fabricated to allow removal for access to internal parts and components, with joints
between sections sealed.
B. Exterior Casing Material: Galvanized steel with factory-painted finish, with pitched roof panels
and knockouts with grommet seals for electrical and piping connections and lifting lugs.
1. Exterior Casing Thickness: 0.052 inch thick.
C. Inner Casing Fabrication Requirements:

1. Inside Casing: Galvanized steel, 0.034 inch thick.
D. Casing Insulation and Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.
1. Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type I.
2. Thickness: 1 inch.
3. Liner materials shall have air-stream surface coated with an erosion- and temperature-
resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric.
4. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.
E. Condensate Drain Pans: Formed sections of stainless-steel sheet, a minimum of 2 inches deep,
and complying with ASHRAE 62.
1. Double-Wall Construction: Fill space between walls with foam insulation and seal
moisture tight.
2. Drain Connections: Threaded nipple.
2.3 FANS
A. Direct-Driven Supply-Air Fans: Double width, forward curved or backward inclined,

centrifugal; with permanently lubricated, multispeed motor resiliently mounted in the fan inlet.
Aluminum or painted-steel wheels, and galvanized- or painted-steel fan scrolls.
B. Belt-Driven Supply-Air Fans: Double width, forward curved, centrifugal; with permanently
lubricated, single-speed motor installed on an adjustable fan base resiliently mounted in the
casing. Aluminum or painted-steel wheels, and galvanized- or painted-steel fan scrolls.

C. Condenser-Coil Fan: Propeller, mounted on shaft of permanently lubricated motor.
D. Exhaust-Air Fan: Forward curved or backward inclined, shaft mounted on permanently

lubricated motor.
E. Fan Motor: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements
for HVAC Equipment."
F. All motors driven by a variable frequency controller shall include a maintenance free,
circumferential, conductive microfiber shaft grounding ring (AEGIS-SGR) to discharge shaft
currents to ground.
2.4 COILS
A. Supply-Air Refrigerant Coil:

1. Aluminum-plate fin and seamless copper tube in steel casing with equalizing-type
vertical distributor.
2. Polymer strip shall prevent all copper coil from contacting steel coil frame or condensate
pan.
3. Coil Split: Interlaced.
4. Coating.
5. Condensate Drain Pan: Stainless steel formed with pitch and drain connections
complying with ASHRAE 62.
B. Outdoor-Air Refrigerant Coil:

pan.
C. Hot-Gas Reheat Refrigerant Coil:

pan.
2.5 REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT COMPONENTS
A. Compressor: Hermetic, scroll, mounted on vibration isolators; with internal overcurrent and
high-temperature protection, internal pressure relief, and crankcase heater.
B. Refrigeration Specialties:
1. Refrigerant Charge: R-410A.
2. Expansion valve with replaceable thermostatic element.
3. Refrigerant filter/dryer.
4. Manual-reset high-pressure safety switch.
5. Automatic-reset low-pressure safety switch.
6. Minimum off-time relay.
7. Automatic-reset compressor motor thermal overload.
8. Brass service valves installed in compressor suction and liquid lines.

9. Low-ambient kit high-pressure sensor.

10. Hot-gas reheat solenoid valve with a replaceable magnetic coil.
11. Hot-gas bypass solenoid valve with a replaceable magnetic coil.
12. Four-way reversing valve with a replaceable magnetic coil, thermostatic expansion
valves with bypass check valves, and a suction line accumulator.
2.6 FIXED-PLATE SENSIBLE HEAT EXCHANGERS
A. Energy recovery heat exchanger shall be constructed of an aluminum housing and an aluminum
heat transfer surface. Housing corner profiles shall be aluminum and housing endplates shall be
aluzinc. Heat exchanger must have aluminum framing and minimum 0.008 inch thick 99.5
percent pure aluminum plates. Plates shall be corrugated for increased turbulence and
maximum effectiveness, occurring without any stagnation points and speed changes. Plates
shall be sealed with silicone-free sealant. Provide drain pans under entire heat exchanger.
Terminate drain pan connections through the side of the unit. Drain lines must be properly
trapped by the installing contractor.
B. Heat exchanger performance and pressure drops shall be as specified on equipment schedule.
The heat exchanger shall be capable of withstanding up to 10 inches of differential pressure
without deformation and shall operate at temperatures up to 400 degrees Fahrenheit. Heat
exchanger shall be rated in accordance with ARI.
2.7 AIR FILTRATION
A. Minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum efficiency reporting value
(MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2.
1. Pleated: Minimum 90 percent arrestance, and MERV 13.
2.8 GAS FURNACE
A. Description: Factory assembled, piped, and wired; complying with ANSI Z21.47 and
NFPA 54.
1. CSA Approval: Designed and certified by and bearing label of CSA.
B. Burners: Stainless steel with a minimum thermal efficiency of 80 percent.

1. Fuel: Natural gas.
2. Ignition: Electronically controlled electric spark or hot-surface igniter with flame sensor.
C. Heat-Exchanger and Drain Pan: Stainless steel.
D. Power Vent: Integral, motorized centrifugal fan interlocked with gas valve.
E. Safety Controls:
1. Gas Control Valve: Modulating.
2. Gas Train: Single-body, regulated, redundant, 24-V ac gas valve assembly containing
pilot solenoid valve, pilot filter, pressure regulator, pilot shutoff, and manual shutoff.

2.9 DAMPERS
A. Outdoor-Air Damper: Linked damper blades, for 0 to 100 percent outdoor air, with motorized
damper.
B. Outdoor- and Recirculation- Dampers: Parallel- or opposed-blade galvanized-steel dampers

mechanically fastened to cadmium plated for galvanized-steel operating rod in reinforced
cabinet. Connect operating rods with common linkage and interconnect linkages so dampers
operate simultaneously.
1. Damper Motor: Modulating with adjustable minimum position.
2. Relief-Air Damper: Gravity actuated with bird screen and hood.
2.10 ELECTRICAL POWER CONNECTION
A. Provide for single connection of power to unit with unit-mounted disconnect switch accessible
from outside unit and control-circuit transformer with built-in overcurrent protection.
2.11 CONTROLS
A. Control equipment and sequence of operation are specified in Division 23 Section

"Instrumentation and Control for HVAC."
B. Basic Unit Controls:

1. Control-voltage transformer.
2. Unit-Mounted Annunciator Panel for Each Unit:
a. Lights to indicate power on, cooling, heating, fan running, filter dirty, and unit
alarm or failure.
b. DDC controller or programmable timer and interface with HVAC instrumentation
and control system.
c. Digital display of outdoor-air temperature, supply-air temperature, return-air
temperature, economizer damper position, indoor-air quality, and control
parameters.
C. DDC Controller:
1. Controller shall have volatile-memory backup.
2. Safety Control Operation:
a. Smoke Detectors: Stop fan and close outdoor-air damper if smoke is detected.
Provide additional contacts for alarm interface to fire alarm control panel.
b. Fire Alarm Control Panel Interface: Provide control interface to coordinate with
operating sequence described in Division 28 Section "Fire Detection and Alarm."
c. Low-Discharge Temperature: Stop fan and close outdoor-air damper if supply air
temperature is less than 40 deg F.
d. Defrost Control for Condenser Coil: Pressure differential switch to initiate defrost
sequence.
3. Scheduled Operation: Occupied and unoccupied periods on 365-day.
4. Unoccupied Period: Unit Off
a. Heating Setback: 55 deg F.
b. Cooling Setback: 85 deg F.
c. Override Operation: Two hours (adj.).
5. Supply Fan Operation:

a. Occupied Periods: Run fan continuously.

b. Unoccupied Periods: Cycle fan to maintain setback temperature.
6. Refrigerant Circuit Operation:
a. Occupied Periods: Cycle or stage compressors, and operate hot-gas bypass to
match compressor output to cooling load to maintain discharge temperature and
humidity. Cycle condenser fans to maintain maximum hot-gas pressure. Operate
low-ambient control kit to maintain minimum hot-gas pressure.
b. Unoccupied Periods: Cycle compressors and condenser fans for heating to
maintain setback temperature.
c. Switch reversing valve for heating or cooling mode on air-to-air heat pump.
7. Hot-Gas Reheat-Coil Operation:
a. Occupied Periods: Humidistat opens hot-gas valve to provide hot-gas reheat, and
cycles compressor.
b. Unoccupied Periods: Reheat not required.
8. Gas Furnace Operation:
a. Occupied Periods: Modulate burner to maintain discharge temperature.
b. Unoccupied Periods: Cycle burner to maintain setback temperature.
9. Fixed Minimum Outdoor-Air Damper Operation:
a. Occupied Periods: Open to 100 percent.
b. Unoccupied Periods: Close the outdoor-air damper.
D. Interface Requirements for HVAC Instrumentation and Control System:

1. Interface relay for scheduled operation.
2. Interface relay to provide indication of fault at the central workstation and diagnostic
code storage.
3. Provide BACnet compatible interface for central HVAC control workstation for the
following: Communication protocol shall be coordinated with the Temperature Control
Contractor.
a. Adjusting set points.
b. Monitoring supply fan start, stop, and operation.
c. Inquiring data to include outdoor-air damper position, supply- and room-air
temperature and humidity.
d. Monitoring occupied and unoccupied operations.
2.12 ACCESSORIES
A. Duplex, 115-V, ground-fault-interrupter outlet with 15-A overcurrent protection. Include

transformer if required. Outlet shall be energized even if the unit main disconnect is open.
B. LED service lights in sections with access doors. Include transformer if required. Lights shall
be energized even if main disconnect is open.
C. Low-ambient kit for operation down to 35 deg F.
D. Filter differential pressure switch with sensor tubing on either side of filter. Set for final filter
pressure loss.
E. Coil guards of painted, galvanized-steel wire.

2.13 STRUCTURAL ROOF CURBS
A. Roof curbs with vibration isolators and wind restraints are specified in Division 23 Section
"Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of RTUs.
B. Examine roughing-in for RTUs to verify actual locations of piping and duct connections before
equipment installation.
C. Examine roofs for suitable conditions where RTUs will be installed.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Roof Curb: Install on roof structure, level and secure, according to NRCA's "Low-Slope
Membrane Roofing Construction Details Manual," Illustration "Raised Curb Detail for Rooftop
Air Handling Units and Ducts." and ARI Guideline B. Install RTUs on curbs and coordinate
roof penetrations and flashing with roof construction specified in Division 07 Section "Roof
Accessories." Secure RTUs to upper curb rail, and secure curb base to roof framing or concrete
base with anchor bolts.
B. Unit Support: Install unit level on structural curbs or pilings. Coordinate wall penetrations and
flashing with wall construction. Secure RTUs to structural support with anchor bolts.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Install condensate drain, minimum connection size, with trap and indirect connection to nearest
roof drain or area drain.
B. Install piping adjacent to RTUs to allow service and maintenance.

1. Gas Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 23 Section "Facility
Natural-Gas Piping" Connect gas piping to burner, full size of gas train inlet, and connect
with union and shutoff valve with sufficient clearance for burner removal and service.
C. Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate
the general arrangement of ducts. The following are specific connection requirements:
1. Install ducts to termination at top of roof curb.
2. Remove roof decking only as required for passage of ducts. Do not cut out decking
under entire roof curb.
3. Connect supply ducts to RTUs with flexible duct connectors specified in Division 23
Section " Air Duct Accessories."
4. Install return-air duct continuously through roof structure.

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,

Report results in writing.
B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

to assist in testing. Report results in writing.

1. After installing RTUs and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units for
compliance with requirements.
2. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps.
equipment.
D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
3.5 STARTUP SERVICE
B. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and do
the following:
1. Inspect for visible damage to unit casing.
2. Inspect for visible damage to furnace combustion chamber.
3. Inspect for visible damage to compressor, coils, and fans.
4. Inspect internal insulation.
5. Verify that labels are clearly visible.
6. Verify that clearances have been provided for servicing.
7. Verify that controls are connected and operable.
8. Verify that filters are installed.
9. Clean condenser coil and inspect for construction debris.
10. Clean furnace flue and inspect for construction debris.
11. Connect and purge gas line.
12. Remove packing from vibration isolators.
13. Inspect operation of barometric relief dampers.
14. Verify lubrication on fan and motor bearings.
15. Inspect fan-wheel rotation for movement in correct direction without vibration and
binding.
16. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension.
17. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions.
a. Start refrigeration system.
b. Do not operate below recommended low-ambient temperature.
c. Complete startup sheets and attach copy with Contractor's startup report.
18. Inspect and record performance of interlocks and protective devices; verify sequences.

19. Operate unit for an initial period as recommended or required by manufacturer.

20. Perform the following operations for both minimum and maximum firing. Adjust burner
for peak efficiency.
a. Measure gas pressure on manifold.
b. Inspect operation of power vents.
c. Measure combustion-air temperature at inlet to combustion chamber.
d. Measure flue-gas temperature at furnace discharge.
e. Perform flue-gas analysis. Measure and record flue-gas carbon dioxide and
oxygen concentration.
f. Measure supply-air temperature and volume when burner is at maximum firing
rate and when burner is off. Calculate useful heat to supply air.
21. Calibrate thermostats.
22. Adjust and inspect high-temperature limits.
23. Inspect outdoor-air dampers for proper stroke and interlock with return-air dampers.
24. Start refrigeration system and measure and record the following when ambient is a
minimum of 15 deg F above return-air temperature:
a. Coil leaving-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures.
b. Coil entering-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures.
c. Outdoor-air, dry-bulb temperature.
d. Outdoor-air-coil, discharge-air, dry-bulb temperature.
25. Inspect controls for correct sequencing of heating, mixing dampers, refrigeration, and
normal and emergency shutdown.
26. Measure and record the following minimum and maximum airflows. Plot fan volumes on
fan curve.
a. Supply-air volume.
b. Return-air volume.
c. Relief-air volume.
d. Outdoor-air intake volume.
27. Simulate maximum cooling demand and inspect the following:
a. Compressor refrigerant suction and hot-gas pressures.
b. Short circuiting of air through condenser coil or from condenser fans to outdoor-air
intake.
28. Verify operation of remote panel including pilot-light operation and failure modes.
Inspect the following:
a. High-temperature limit on gas-fired heat exchanger.
b. Low-temperature safety operation.
c. Filter high-pressure differential alarm.
d. Economizer to minimum outdoor-air changeover.
e. Relief-air fan operation.
f. Smoke and firestat alarms.
29. After startup and performance testing and prior to Substantial Completion, replace
existing filters with new filters.
3.6 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
A. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing RTU and air-
distribution systems, clean filter housings and install new filters.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

adjust, operate, and maintain RTUs. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and
Training."

SECTION 238126 - SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes split-system air-conditioning and heat pump units consisting of separate
evaporator-fan and compressor-condenser components. Units are designed for exposed or
concealed mounting, and may be connected to ducts.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
product indicated. Include performance data in terms of capacities, outlet velocities, static
pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements, and electrical characteristics.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For split-system air-conditioning units to include in

E. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of split-
system units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section
intended use.
C. Energy-Efficiency Ratio: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy

Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."
D. Coefficient of Performance: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy

Project 16018 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS 238126 - 1

1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for units. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete."
B. Coordinate size, location, and connection details with roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof
penetrations specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."
1.6 WARRANTY

replace components of split-system air-conditioning units that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. Daikin
2. Carrier Air Conditioning; Div. of Carrier Corporation.
3. Mitsubishi Electronics America, Inc.; HVAC Division.
4. Sanyo.
5. Trane Company (The); Unitary Products Group.
2.2 WALL-MOUNTING, EVAPORATOR-FAN COMPONENTS
A. Cabinet: High strength molded plastic with manufacturer’s standard finish, filter access, and
discharge drain pans with drain connection.
B. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with
ARI 210/240, and with thermal-expansion valve.
C. Fan: Direct drive, centrifugal fan.
D. Fan Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements
1. Special Motor Features: Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and
permanent lubrication.
E. Filters: Permanent, cleanable.

2.3 AIR-COOLED, COMPRESSOR-CONDENSER COMPONENTS
A. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel in color selected by Architect, with removable
panels for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base.
Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gauge ports on exterior of casing.
B. Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration isolation.
Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload devices, start capacitor,
relay, and contactor.
1. Compressor Type: Scroll.
C. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with
ARI 210/240, and with liquid subcooler.
D. Heat Pump Components: Reversing valve and low-temperature air cut-off thermostat.
E. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor.
F. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection.
G. Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to 0 deg F.
H. Mounting Base: Polyethylene.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Control equipment and sequence of operation are specified in Division 23 Sections

"Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" and "Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls."
B. Thermostat: Low voltage or wireless infrared to control compressor and evaporator fan.
1. Compressor time delay.
2. 24-hour time control of system stop and start.
3. Liquid-crystal display indicating temperature, set-point temperature, time setting,
operating mode, and fan speed.
4. Fan-speed selection, including auto setting.
C. Automatic-reset timer to prevent rapid cycling of compressor.
D. Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried,
pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install units level and plumb.
B. Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely

fastened to building structure.

C. Install roof-mounting compressor-condenser components on equipment supports specified in

Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories." Anchor units to supports with removable, cadmium-
plated fasteners.
D. Install compressor-condenser components on restrained, spring isolators with a minimum static

deflection of 1 inch. Refer to Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC
E. Install and connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings. Install
tubing to allow access to unit.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
1. Water Coil Connections: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Hydronic
Piping." Connect to supply and return coil with shutoff-duty valve and union or flange
on the supply connection and with throttling-duty valve and union or flange on the return
connection.
2. Remote Water-Cooled Condenser Connections: Comply with requirements in
Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping." Connect to supply and return with shutoff-duty
valve and union or flange on the supply connection and with throttling-duty valve and
union or flange on the return connection.
3. Steam Coil Connections: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Steam and
Condensate Heating Piping." Connect to steam piping with shutoff valve and union or
flange; for condensate piping, starting from the coil connection, connect with union or
flange, strainer, trap, and shutoff valve.
B. Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.
C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
D. Electrical Connections: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Sections for power wiring,
switches, and motor controls.

connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.
equipment.

C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
3.4 STARTUP SERVICE

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

adjust, operate, and maintain units. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."

SECTION 238225 – VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME - VRV
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes multiple evaporator, direct expansion, air cooled, variable capacity, split
system units consisting of separate evaporator-fan and compressor-condenser components.
Units are designed concealed mounting, and may be connected to ducts.
B. System Description – Features:

1. The variable capacity, heat recovery air conditioning system shall be a Variable
Refrigerant Volume Series (simultaneous heat and cool model) split system as specified.
The system shall consist of multiple evaporators, branch selector boxes/controllers,
Engineered Refrigerant Piping joints and headers, a three pipe refrigeration distribution
system using PID control, and Variable Refrigerant Volume outdoor unit. The outdoor
unit is a direct expansion (DX), air-cooled heat recovery, multi-zone air-conditioning
system with variable speed inverter driven compressors using R-410A refrigerant. The
outdoor unit may connect an indoor evaporator capacity up to 100% of the outdoor
condensing unit heating capacity. All zones are each capable of operating separately with
individual temperature control.
2. The Variable Refrigerant Volume outdoor unit shall be interconnected to VRV INDOOR
UNITS which range in capacity as scheduled. The indoor units shall be connected to the
outdoor unit utilizing the VRV manufacturers engineered refrigerant piping joints,
headers, or controller. Interconnecting refrigerant piping is by the installing contractor.
3. Operation of the system shall permit either individual cooling or heating of each VRV
INDOOR UNIT simultaneously. Each VRV INDOOR UNIT or group of VRV INDOOR
UNITS shall be able to provide set temperature independently via a local remote
controller, and a BAS (Building Automation System) interface.
4. The VRV outdoor unit and the associated number of connected indoor units per
scheduled outdoor unit are indicated. Each indoor unit or group of indoor units shall be
independently controlled, as shown on construction documents.
5. Voltage Platform –Heat recovery condensing units shall be as scheduled.
6. Auto charging – Each system shall have a refrigerant auto-charging function.
7. Charge Checking – Each system shall have a refrigerant charge checking function.
8. Defrost Heating – Each system shall maintain continuous heating during defrost
operation.
9. Independent Control – Each VRV INDOOR UNIT shall use a dedicated electronic
expansion valve for independent control.
10. Energy Efficiency – System shall have equivalent or better performance than high
efficiency air cooled or water cooled chiller systems.
11. Space Saving – Each system shall have a condensing unit module footprint as denoted on
the drawings.
Project 16018 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME 238225 - 1

12. Advanced Diagnostics – Systems shall include a self diagnostic, auto-check function to
detect a malfunction and display the type and location.
13. Each system shall be capable of integrating with open protocol BACnet and LONworks
building management systems. Coordinate with Temperature Controls Contractor.
14. Low Sound Levels – Each system shall use indoor and outdoor units with quiet operation.
See schedule for sound level requirements
15. VFD Inverter Control – Each condensing unit shall use a high efficiency, variable speed
“inverter” compressor coupled with inverter fan motors for superior part load
performance.
a. Compressor capacity shall be modulated automatically to maintain a constant
suction pressure, while varying the refrigerant volume for the needs of the cooling
or heating loads.
b. VRV INDOOR UNITS shall use PID control to control superheat to deliver a
comfortable room temperature condition.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
product indicated. Include performance data in terms of capacities, outlet velocities, static
pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements, and electrical characteristics.
1. Heating Capacities shall be submitted @ -4F.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For VRV units to include in emergency, operation, and
E. Manufacturer Training Certificate must be submitted prior to starting installation of Variable

Refrigerant Volume System.
F. The equipment supplier shall submit as part of the equipment data package outdoor unit data
sheets. Data sheets to include the following:
Capacities: Cooling
Cooling (Btu/h)
Cooling Input Power

(kW)
Capacities: Heating @ -4F

Heating (Btu/h)
Heating Input Power

(kW)
Operating Temperature Range:

Cooling
Heating

Power Supply:
Maximum Circuit Amps (MCA)
Maximum Fuse Amps (MFA)
Maximum Starting Current (MSC)
Total Over Current Amps (TOCA)
Outdoor Fan Motor
Refrigerant:
Refrigerant Type/Charge
Unit Data:
Max. Number of Indoor Units
Sound Pressure Level at 3ft. (dBA)
Weight (lbs)
Dimensions
The equipment supplier shall guarantee the performance of their system and all published data
submitted. Performance shall be based on the design criteria below.
Room Temperature (Cooling): _75 DEGREES F

Room Temperature (Heating): _70 DEGREES F
Ambient Temperature (Summer): _95 DEGREES F
Ambient Temperature (Winter): _(0) DEGREES F
The equipment supplier shall submit with bid, indoor unit data sheets. Data sheets to include the
following:
Capacities:
Cooling (Btu/h)
Heating (Btu/h) @ 0F
Air Flow (CFM)
External Static Pressure (ESP)

Electrical Data (MCA, MFA, FLA)
Weight (lbs)
Dimensions
G. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of VRV units
and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product
Requirements."
intended use.

C. Energy-Efficiency Ratio: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy

D. Coefficient of Performance: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy

E. The outdoor unit will be factory charged with R-410A.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of roof mounted equipment rails. Roof mounted equipment rails
are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC."
B. Coordinate size, location, of wall penetration.
C. Coordinate routing of refrigerant piping with all other trades.
D. Coordinate location of refrigerant controllers as required to eliminate maintenance access and

noise concerns.
E. Access shall be provided to each unit for serviceability, filter change, and electrical connection
code clearance access.
1.6 WARRANTY

replace components of VRV units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion for Parts and Labor.
2. All warranty service work shall be preformed by the Variable Refrigerant Volume
manufacturers factory trained service professional.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
1.8 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The system must be installed by a factory trained contractor. The Variable Refrigerant Volume
System Manufacturer is responsible for including 4 days of Training for the installing contractor
in their equipment proposal. The mechanical contractor’s installation price shall be based on the
systems installation requirements. The mechanical contractor is responsible for evacuating and
pressure testing the refrigerant lines according to VRV manufacturers requirements. The
mechanical contractor is responsible for contacting the Variable Refrigerant Volume system
manufacturer prior to bid to coordinate installation training requirements.

1.9 STARTUP REQUIREMENTS
A. The system (VRV INDOOR /Outdoor units) must be started and inspected/approved by the
Variable Refrigerant Volume Manufacturer. The mechanical contractor is responsible for
providing refrigerant and charging the variable refrigerant volume system under direction of the
manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. Daikin
2. Mitsubishi Electric
2.2 OUTDOOR VRV UNIT
A. Outdoor VRV Unit

1. The outdoor unit shall be factory assembled and pre-wired with all necessary electronic
and refrigerant controls. The refrigeration circuit of the condensing unit shall consist of
scroll compressors, motors, fans, condenser coil, electronic expansion valves, solenoid
valves, 4-way valve, distribution headers, capillaries, filters, shut off valves, oil
separators, service ports and refrigerant regulator.
2. All refrigerant lines must be individually insulated between the outdoor and indoor units,
for both (2) and (3) pipe systems.
3. VRV OUTDOOR and INDOOR UNITS are to be provided by same manufacturer.
4. The outdoor unit to be located as approximately shown on drawings. Allow for 36-inch
electrical access.
5. The connection ratio of indoor units to outdoor unit shall be permitted up to 100% indoor
units heating capacity @ 0F.
6. Each outdoor system shall be able to support the connection of indoor units specified on
the drawings.
7. The sound pressure level standard shall be that value as listed in the plan schedule at 3
feet from the front of the unit.
8. The system will automatically restart operation after a power failure and will not cause
any settings to be lost, thus eliminating the need for reprogramming.
9. The unit shall incorporate an auto-charging feature and a refrigerant charge check
function.
10. The outdoor unit shall be modular in design and should allow for side-by-side installation
with minimum spacing. Install per manufacturers requirements
11. The following safety devices shall be included on the condensing unit; high pressure
switch, control circuit fuses, crankcase heaters, fusible plug, high pressure switch,
overload relay, inverter overload protector, thermal protectors for compressor and fan
motors, over current protection for the inverter and anti-recycling timers.
12. To ensure the liquid refrigerant does not flash when supplying to the various VRV
INDOOR UNITS, the circuit shall be provided with a sub-cooling feature.
13. Oil recovery cycle shall be automatic occurring 2 hours after start of operation and then
every 8 hours of operation.

14. The outdoor unit shall be capable of heating operation at 0°F dry bulb ambient
temperature without additional low ambient controls.
15. VRV OUTDOOR UNITS to be factory tested at the factory prior to shipping.
B. Unit Cabinet:
1. The outdoor unit shall be completely weatherproof and corrosion resistant. The unit shall
be constructed from rust-proofed mild steel panels coated with a baked enamel finish.
C. Fan:
1. The condensing unit shall consist of one or more propeller type, direct-drive, variable-
speed fans.
2. The fan shall be a vertical discharge configuration.
3. Nominal sound pressure levels shall be as scheduled on the documents.
4. The fan motor shall have inherent protection and permanently lubricated bearings and be
completely variable speed.
5. The fan motor shall be provided with a fan guard to prevent contact with moving parts.
D. Condenser Coil:
1. The condenser coil shall be manufactured from copper tubes expanded into aluminum
fins to form a mechanical bond.
2. The heat exchanger coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and rifled bore tube design to
ensure high efficiency performance.
3. The heat exchanger on the condensing units shall be manufactured from Hi-X seamless
copper tube with N-shape internal grooves mechanically bonded on to aluminum fins to
an e-Pass Design.
4. The fins are to be covered with an anticorrosion acrylic resin and hydrophilic film type
E1.
5. The pipe plates shall be treated with powdered polyester resin for corrosion prevention.
The thickness of the coating must be between 2.0 to 3.0 microns.
E. Compressor:
1. The inverter scroll compressors shall be variable speed controlled which is capable of
changing the speed to follow the variations in total cooling and heating load as
determined by the suction gas pressure as measured in the condensing unit. In addition,
samplings of evaporator and condenser temperatures shall be made so that the high/low
pressures detected are read every 20 seconds and calculated. With each reading, the
compressor capacity (INV frequency or STD ON/OFF) shall be controlled to eliminate
deviation from target value.
2. The inverter driven compressor in each condensing unit shall be of highly efficient
reluctance DC (digitally commutating), hermetically sealed scroll with a maximum speed
of 7,980 rpm.
3. Neodymium magnets shall be adopted in the rotor construction to yield a higher torque
and efficiency in the compressor instead of the normal ferrite magnet type. At complete
stop of the compressor, the neodymium magnets will position the rotor into the optimum
position for a low torque start.
4. The capacity control range shall be as low as 16% to 100%.
5. Each non-inverter compressor shall also be of the hermetically sealed scroll type.
6. Each compressor shall be equipped with a crankcase heater, high pressure safety switch,
and internal thermal overload protector.

7. Oil separators shall be standard with the equipment together with an intelligent oil
management system.
8. The compressor shall be mounted to avoid the transmission of vibration.
9. compressors shall be balanced by means of the Duty Cycling Function, ensuring
sequential starting of each module at each start/stop cycle, completion of oil return,
completion of defrost or every 8 hours.
F. Electrical:
1. The power supply to the outdoor unit shall be 460 volts, 3 phase, 60 hertz
2. The control voltage between the indoor and outdoor unit shall be 16VDC non-shielded,
stranded 2 conductor cable.
3. The control wiring shall be a two-wire multiplex transmission system, making it possible
to connect multiple indoor units to one outdoor unit with one 2-cable wire, thus
simplifying the wiring operation.
2.3 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME INDOOR TERMINAL UNITS:
A. 4 Way Ceiling Cassette Unit

1. General: Indoor unit model shall be a ceiling cassette VRV INDOOR UNIT, operable
with R-410A refrigerant, equipped with an electronic expansion valve, for installation
into the ceiling plenum equipped with an air panel grill. It shall be connected to outdoor
unit heat recovery model. It shall be a four-way air distribution type, ivory white, impact
resistant with a washable decoration panel. The supply air is distributed via motorized
louvers which can be horizontally and vertically adjusted from 0° to 90°. Computerized
PID control shall be used to control superheat to deliver a comfortable room temperature
condition. The indoor units maximum sound pressure shall range are scheduled on
drawings.
2. Performance: Each unit’s performance is based on nominal operating conditions: See
Schedules for required performance.
3. Indoor Unit:
a. The indoor unit shall be completely factory assembled and tested. Included in the
unit is factory wiring, piping, electronic proportional expansion valve, control
circuit board, fan motor thermal protector, flare connections, condensate drain pan,
condensate drain pump, self-diagnostics, auto-restart function, 3-minute fused time
delay, and test run switch.
b. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes will be charged with dehydrated air prior to
shipment from the factory.
c. All refrigerant lines must be individually insulated between the outdoor and indoor
units, for both (2) and (3) pipe systems.
d. The 4-way supply air flow can be field modified to 3-way and 2-way airflow to
accommodate various installation configurations including corner installations.
e. The indoor units shall be equipped with an integral condensate pump and
condensate alarm switch.
f. The indoor units shall be equipped with a return air thermistor.
g. The indoor unit will be separately powered with voltages as scheduled on the
drawings.
4. Unit Cabinet:
a. The cabinet shall be space saving and shall be located in the ceiling plenum.
b. The vanes shall have controls to position vanes for even heating of the space, as
well as even air distribution during cooling mode.

c. The airflow of the unit shall have the ability to shut down one or two sides
allowing for simpler corner installation.
d. Fresh air intake connection flange shall be provided, as denoted on drawings.
e. A branch duct knockout shall exist for branch ducting supply air, where required
on drawings.
f. The cabinet shall be constructed with sound absorbing foamed polystyrene and
polyethylene insulation.
5. Fan:
a. The fan shall be direct-drive turbo fan type with statically and dynamically
balanced impeller with high and low fan speeds available.
b. The fan motor shall operate on with electrical requirements as scheduled on the
drawings.
c. The airflow rate shall be available in high and low settings.
d. The fan motor shall be thermally protected.
6. Filter:
a. The return air shall be filtered by means of a washable long-life filter with mildew
proof resin.
7. Coil:
a. Coils shall be of the direct expansion type constructed from copper tubes expanded
into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond.
b. The coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and high heat exchange, rifled bore tube
design to ensure highly efficient performance.
c. The coil shall be a 2-row cross fin copper evaporator coil with 17 FPI design
completely factory tested.
d. The refrigerant connections shall be flare connections and the condensate will be 1
-1/4 inch outside diameter PVC.
e. A condensate pan shall be located under the coil.
f. A condensate pump with a 21 inch lift (minimum) shall be located below the coil
in the condensate pan with a built in safety alarm.
g. A thermistor will be located on the liquid and gas line.
8. Electrical:
a. A separate power supply will be required, as scheduled on the drawings.
B. Concealed Ceiling Unit

1. General: Indoor unit model shall be a concealed VRV INDOOR UNIT located above the
ceiling, operable with R-410A refrigerant, equipped with an electronic expansion valve,
for installation into the ceiling plenum equipped with mixed air temperature inlet collar
and supply ducted collar. It shall be connected to outdoor unit heat recovery model.
Computerized PID control shall be used to control superheat to deliver a comfortable
room temperature condition. The indoor units maximum sound pressure shall range are
scheduled on drawings.
2. Performance: Each unit’s performance is based on nominal operating conditions: See
Schedules for required performance.
3. Indoor Unit:
a. The indoor unit shall be completely factory assembled and tested. Included in the
unit is factory wiring, piping, electronic proportional expansion valve, control
circuit board, fan motor thermal protector, flare connections, condensate drain pan,
condensate drain pump, self-diagnostics, auto-restart function, 3-minute fused time
delay, and test run switch.

b. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes will be charged with dehydrated air prior to
shipment from the factory.
c. All refrigerant lines must be individually insulated between the outdoor and indoor
units.
d. The indoor units shall be equipped with an integral condensate pump and
condensate alarm switch.
e. The indoor units shall be equipped with a return air thermistor.
f. The indoor unit will be separately powered with voltages as scheduled on the
drawings.
4. Unit Cabinet:
a. The cabinet shall be space saving and shall be located in the ceiling plenum.
b. Include a ducted discharge collar in front and a mixed air inlet ducted collar in
back of unit.
c. The cabinet shall be constructed with sound absorbing foamed polystyrene and
polyethylene insulation.
5. Fan:
a. The fan shall be direct-drive turbo fan type with statically and dynamically
balanced impeller with high and low fan speeds available.
b. The fan motor shall operate on with electrical requirements as scheduled on the
drawings.
c. The airflow rate shall be available in high and low settings.
d. The fan motor shall be thermally protected.
6. Filter:
a. The return air shall be filtered by means of a washable long-life filter with mildew
proof resin.
7. Coil:
a. Coils shall be of the direct expansion type constructed from copper tubes expanded
into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond.
b. The coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and high heat exchange, rifled bore tube
design to ensure highly efficient performance.
c. The coil shall be a 2-row cross fin copper evaporator coil with 17 FPI design
completely factory tested.
d. The refrigerant connections shall be flare connections and the condensate will be 1
-1/4 inch outside diameter PVC.
e. A condensate pan shall be located under the coil.
f. A condensate pump with a 21 inch lift (minimum) shall be located below the coil
in the condensate pan with a built in safety alarm.
g. A thermistor will be located on the liquid and gas line.
8. Electrical:
a. A separate power supply will be required, as scheduled on the drawings.
2.4 CONTROLS
A. The unit shall have controls provided to perform input functions necessary to operate the fully
functioning system.
B. Controller with LCD display to be provided by unit manufacturer, with wall mounted
thermostat/ controller capable of individually displaying temperature set point, space
temperature, time of day, and fan speed. Refer to Temperature Control drawings for wall
mounted locations.

C. The unit shall be compatible with interfacing with connection to BacNet networks or interfacing
with connection to BAS system. Consult manufacturer prior to applying controls. Coordinate
with Temperature Controls Contractor.
D. Controls
1. Unit manufacturer shall provide a microprocessor based direct digital control system that
shall provide the following:
a. Direct digital controller interface.
b. Occupied-unoccupied control.
c. Necessary operating interlocks.
d. Interface requirements with the Building Automation System.
1) Communicate with BACnet, Lon, or TCP/IP.
2) Accept occupied/unoccupied scheduling from the BAS.
3) Send alarms to BAS.
2. Sequence of Operation
a. An electronic room temperature sensor provided by the unit manufacturer shall,
through a DDC unitary controller, control the electronic expansion valve as
required to maintain setpoint temperature.
b. The supply fans shall run continuous during occupied mode.
c. During unoccupied mode. The fan shall be off, and shall cycle on in coordination
with the electronic expansion valve as required to maintain night setback
temperature.
E. Interface Requirements for HVAC Instrumentation and Control System

1. Interface relay for scheduled operation.
2. Interface relay to provide indication of fault at the central workstation and diagnostic
code storage.
3. Provide BACnet compatible interface as determined by the BAS, for central HVAC
control workstation for the following: Coordinate communication with temperature
control contractor.
a. Adjusting set points and temperature inputs.
b. Monitoring supply fan start, stop, and operation of indoor units.
c. Status of outdoor unit.
d. Monitoring occupied and unoccupied operations.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Control equipment and sequence of operation are specified in Division 23 Sections

"Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" and "Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls."
B. Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried,
pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends.
1. To be used only between VRV Refrigerant Controller and VRV Indoor Units.
C. Outdoor Air Connection kit as required.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install all VRV units level and plumb.
B. Install VRV INDOOR UNITS using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely
fastened to building structure.
C. Install ground-mounting, VRV OUTDOOR UNITS on 4-inch thick, reinforced concrete base; 4
inches larger on each side than unit. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in
Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Coordinate anchor installation with concrete
base.
D. Install VRV OUTDOOR UNIT components on restrained, spring isolators with a minimum
static deflection of 1 inch. Refer to Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for
E. Install and connect pre-charged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings. Install
tubing to allow access to unit.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
1. Refer to Drawings for General Refrigerant Piping Details.
2. Manufacturer is required to provide description and quantity of all pipe fittings,
refrigerant controllers, etc. to provide a complete, fully functioning system.
B. Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.
C. Duct Connections: Duct installation requirements are specified in Division 23 Section "Metal
Ducts." Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. Connect supply ducts to VRV
INDOOR UNITS with flexible duct connectors. Flexible duct connectors are specified in
Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."
Systems."
E. Electrical Connections: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Sections for power wiring,
switches, and motor controls.


equipment.
4. Perform additional tests as required by system manufacturer. All tests to be witnessed by
A/E, CM, CA, and/or Owners Representative. Contractor must provide 10 days notice to
CM prior to testing. Testing must be signed-off prior to system start-up.
D. All components to be provided to ensure a fully-operating system.
3.4 STARTUP SERVICE

2. Complete a startup at the beginning of heating season and an additional startup at the
beginning of cooling season.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION

adjust, operate, and maintain units. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."

SECTION 238239 - UNIT HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Cabinet unit heaters with centrifugal fans and electric-resistance heating coils.
2. Propeller unit heaters with electric-resistance heating coils.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. BAS: Building automation system.
B. CWP: Cold working pressure.
C. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic.
D. TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene plastic.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and
accessories for each product indicated.
B. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, reflected ceiling plans, and other details, drawn to scale,
on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from
installers of the items involved:
1. Suspended ceiling components.
2. Structural members to which unit heaters will be attached.
3. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
5. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following:
b. Air outlets and inlets.
c. Speakers.
d. Sprinklers.
e. Access panels.
6. Perimeter moldings for exposed or partially exposed cabinets.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For cabinet unit heaters to include in emergency, operation,
Project 16018 UNIT HEATERS 238239 - 1

intended use.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Cabinet Unit Heater Filters: Furnish one spare filter for each unit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CABINET UNIT HEATERS

following:
1. Chromalox, Inc.; a division of Emerson Electric Company.
2. Markel Products; a division of TPI Corporation.
3. QMark Electric Heating; a division of Marley Engineered Products.
4. Raywall
5. Trane.
B. Description: A factory-assembled and -tested unit complying with ARI 440.

1. Electric cabinet unit heaters shall comply with UL 2021.
C. Coil Section Insulation: ASTM C 1071; surfaces exposed to airstream shall be aluminum-foil
facing or erosion-resistant coating to prevent erosion of glass fibers.
2. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. at 75 deg F mean temperature.
3. Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and smoke-developed
index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84.
4. Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916 and with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.
D. Cabinet: Steel with baked-enamel finish with manufacturer's standard paint, in color selected
by Architect.
1. Vertical Unit, Exposed Front Panels: Minimum 0.0528-inch thick, galvanized, sheet
steel, removable panels with channel-formed edges secured with tamperproof cam
fasteners.
2. Horizontal Unit, Exposed Bottom Panels: Minimum 0.0528-inch thick, galvanized, sheet
steel, removable panels secured with tamperproof cam fasteners and safety chain.
3. Recessing Flanges: Steel, finished to match cabinet.
4. Control Access Door: Key operated.
5. Base: Minimum 0.0528-inch thick steel, finished to match cabinet, 4 inches high with
leveling bolts.
6. Extended Piping Compartment: 8-inch wide piping end pocket.
7. False Back: Minimum 0.0428-inch thick steel, finished to match cabinet.

E. Filters: Minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1 and a minimum efficiency reporting
value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2.
1. Glass Fiber Treated with Adhesive: 80 percent arrestance and MERV 5.
F. Electric-Resistance Heating Coil: Nickel-chromium heating wire, free from expansion noise
and hum, mounted in ceramic inserts in a galvanized-steel housing; with fuses in terminal box
for overcurrent protection and limit controls for high-temperature protection. Terminate
elements in stainless-steel machine-staked terminals secured with stainless-steel hardware.
G. Fan and Motor Board: Removable.

1. Fan: Forward curved, high static, double width, centrifugal; directly connected to motor.
Thermoplastic or painted-steel wheels, and aluminum, painted-steel, or galvanized-steel
fan scrolls.
2. Motor: Permanently lubricated, multispeed; resiliently mounted on motor board.
Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for
HVAC Equipment."
3. Wiring Terminations: Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.
H. Electrical Connection: Factory wire motors and controls for a single field connection.
1. Disconnect switch.
2. Motor speed controller.
2.2 PROPELLER UNIT HEATERS

following:
1. Chromalox, Inc.; a division of Emerson Electric Company.
2. Markel Products; a division of TPI Corporation.
3. QMark Electric Heating; a division of Marley Engineered Products.
4. Raywall
5. Trane.
B. Description: An assembly including casing, coil, fan, and motor in vertical or horizontal
discharge configuration with adjustable discharge louvers.
C. Electric unit heaters shall comply with UL 2021.
D. Cabinet: Removable panels for maintenance access to controls.
E. Cabinet Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked enamel applied to factory-assembled and -tested
propeller unit heater before shipping.
F. Discharge Louver: Adjustable fin diffuser for horizontal units and conical diffuser for vertical
units.
G. Electric-Resistance Heating Elements: Nickel-chromium heating wire, free from expansion

noise and 60-Hz hum, embedded in magnesium oxide refractory and sealed in steel or
corrosion-resistant metallic sheath with fins no closer than 0.16 inch. Element ends shall be
enclosed in terminal box. Fin surface temperature shall not exceed 550 deg F at any point
during normal operation.

1. Circuit Protection: One-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection and limit
controls for high-temperature protection of heaters.
2. Wiring Terminations: Stainless-steel or corrosion-resistant material.
H. Fan: Propeller type with aluminum wheel directly mounted on motor shaft in the fan venturi.
I. Fan Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements
1. Motor Type: Permanently lubricated, multispeed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive unit heaters for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations before unit
heater installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install cabinet unit heaters to comply with NFPA 90A.
B. Install propeller unit heaters level and plumb.
C. Suspend cabinet unit heaters from structure with elastomeric hangers. Vibration isolators and
seismic restraints are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for
D. Suspend propeller unit heaters from structure with all-thread hanger rods and elastomeric or
spring hangers. Hanger rods and attachments to structure are specified in Division 23 Section
"Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Vibration hangers are specified in
Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
E. Install new filters in each fan-coil unit within two weeks of Substantial Completion.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
C. Comply with safety requirements in UL 1995.
Systems."

E. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors

and Cables."

2. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and
electrical connections.
3. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust initial temperature set points.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION

adjust, operate, and maintain cabinet unit heaters. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration
and Training."

SECTION 260001 - ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
B. The party performing the Work under this Section hereinafter referred to as the Contractor, shall
furnish all labor, material, tools, equipment, services, and related accessories for a complete
installation of all electrical work as indicated in the Drawings and Specifications. Items omitted
from either the Specifications or the Drawings, but shown or described in the other, and all items
necessary to make the electrical system functional and complete per required codes, shall form a
part of the Work. No "extras" will be allowed.
C. All work, material, and equipment shall comply with all requirements of the latest editions and
interim amendments of the National Electrical Code (NEC), National Electrical Safety Code,
National Fire Protection Association, OSHA, Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), and all
applicable federal, state, and local laws and ordinances. All electrical equipment provided under
this Contract shall be new (except where otherwise noted) and shall comply with the requirements
of the Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) and bear the UL label.
D. Any discrepancies within Drawings and Specifications shall be promptly brought to the attention
of the engineer for clarification during the bidding period. No allowance shall subsequently be
made to the Contractor by reason of his failure to have brought said discrepancies to the attention
of the Engineer during the bidding period or of any error on the Contractor's part.
E. The Contractor shall check all existing field conditions (or Civil, Structural, Architectural and
Mechanical trades work) for possible interference caused by conditions in the field before bid is
made. No allowance shall subsequently be made to the Contractor by reason of his failure to have
made such examinations or of any error on his part.
F. The Contractor shall be held to have examined the premises and site to as to compare them with
the Contract Documents and to have satisfied himself as to the conditions of the premises, the
site, any obstructions, the actual levels, access panels, and all other existing conditions. The
Contractor shall verify all dimensions in the field, shall check location of and connection to
existing facilities, and shall assume all responsibility for same.
G. Should any changes in the Drawings and Specifications be required to conform to the above
regulations, the Contractor shall notify the Owner or his representative at the time of submitting
his bid. After entering into the Owner-Contractor Agreement, the Contractor shall be held to
complete all Work necessary to meet these requirements without additional expense to the
Owner.
H. The Contractor shall receive, store, uncrate, protect, and install Owner-furnished equipment with
all appurtenances required to place the equipment in operation, ready for use. The Contractor
shall be responsible for the equipment when received, as if he had purchased the equipment
himself.
Project 16018 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION 260001 - 1

I. The Contractor shall secure and pay for all permits and inspections required for the Work.
J. The Contractor shall not allow or cause any of the Work to be covered up or enclosed until it has
been inspected. Any Work that is enclosed or covered up before such inspection and test shall be
uncovered at the Contractor's expense; after it has been inspected, the Contractor shall restore the
Work to its original condition at his own expense.
K. All general trades and mechanical drawings shall be checked before installing any outlets, power
wiring, etc. For purposes of these drawings and specification, the word “provide” shall mean
furnish and install.
L. The Contractor shall turn over all certificates of approval for inspections of electrical work to the
Owner promptly when received. These certificates must be received before payment will be made
for the Work involved.
M. The Contractor shall keep an up-to-date record of all deviations from the Contract Documents.
At completion of this Project, the Contractor shall deliver a set of As-Built Drawings and
Specifications showing these deviations to the Owner. Refer to Section 01200, "Field
Procedures."
N. All work shall be done in accordance with the Contract Documents, in a neat and workmanlike
manner consistent with recognized good practice, and shall be subject to the approval of the
Owner or his representative.
O. Certain areas require the Contractor to remove, add to, or relocate portions of existing Work. It
shall be the Contractor's responsibility to remove ceilings, portions of walls, etc., in a manner so
that he may install new Work. The Contractor shall then patch, repair and/or replace ceilings,
walls, etc., to match existing conditions. The above applies to all areas not specifically indicated
on Architectural Drawings as work to be performed by General Trades Contractor(s).
P. If the Contractor fails to do any required patching or repair any damage resulting from the
installation of the electrical Work, such patching or repairing shall be done by the Owner and the
cost shall be paid by the Contractor.
Q. All equipment furnished with finished surfaces from manufacturer are not to be defaced in any
way and shall be cleaned to original finish at time of completion of Work except where otherwise
noted.
R. The Contractor shall conduct such tests and adjustments of equipment as required to verify
equipment performance. Such tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Owner or his
representative.
S. The Contractor shall remove all debris resulting from the Work, as well as all tools, equipment,
etc., from the site upon completion of this contract. All equipment, including lighting fixtures and
lenses shall be clean and free from dirt, grease, finger marks, etc., before final acceptance.
T. All equipment furnished and work performed under the Contract Documents shall be guaranteed
against defects in materials or workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of final
acceptance. Any failure of equipment or work due to defects in materials or workmanship shall be
corrected by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner.

U. During building operations some existing installation may be exposed that will have to be
changed, altered, re-routed, removed, and/or abandoned. Any such Work which in the trade
comes under the jurisdiction of the Electrical Contractor shall be done by this Contractor without
extra cost to the Owner as though fully detailed and/or described on Plans and in Specifications.

SECTION 260050 - GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Electrical equipment coordination and installation.
2. Substitutions
3. Sleeves for raceways and cables.
4. Sleeve seals.
5. Grout.
6. Common electrical installation requirements.
7. Plywood backing panels.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
C. Provide: Furnish and Install
1.4 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Refer Division 01, Section 012500, Substitution Procedures for contractual requirements
B. Products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed
the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product. Submission of the
“Substitution Request Form” and complete technical data for evaluation must accompany
requests for A/E’s approval. All materials for evaluation must be received by the Project
Manager and Specification Department at least ten days prior to bid due date. If a manufacturer
substitution is approved and allowed, it will be issued by Addendum.
C. It is the Contractors responsibility to prove that the product submitted for substation is equal or
exceeds the requirements. The Engineer’s decision will be based on samples submitted and
technical literature presented. If the information provided is not adequate, then the substation
shall be denied.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment:

1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce
headroom are indicated.
Project 16018 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260050 - 1

2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other
installations.
3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope.
4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of
obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.
B. Equipment, furnished by others but installed by Division 26 shall include, but is not limited to:
variable frequency controllers, variable speed controllers, motor starters, pump controllers,
disconnect switches, flow switches, pressure switches and other control devices. Refer to
Mechanical system drawings and specifications, such as Division 23, which shall require
equipment to be furnished by them, but installed by others. Division 26 Contractor shall review
those documents and make provisions to install that equipment. Refer to specification section
26 29 13 for additional requirements.
C. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete,
masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.
D. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished
surfaces or otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 08 Section
"Access Doors and Frames."
E. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping
specified in Division 07 Section "Firestopping."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES
A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain
ends.
B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe,
with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel.

1. Minimum Metal Thickness:
a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side more than
16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.
b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50 inches and 1 or
more sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.
2.2 SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between
sleeve and raceway or cable.
1. Sealing Elements: EPDM or NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or
conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.
2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element.
3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length required
to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

2.3 GROUT
A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic

aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for
application and a 30-minute working time.
2.4 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire-
retardant treated, not less than 3/4-inch nominal thickness.
1. Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C27.
a. Use Interior Type A, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Fire retardant treated wood products shall be free of halogens, sulfates, amononium
phosphate, and formaldehyde.
2. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and wall-mounting
items.
C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange
and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with
these requirements.
D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of

both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate
future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.
E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.
3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways penetrate
concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.
B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed
openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.
C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.
D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies
unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor
or wall.

E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.
F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.
G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable,
unless indicated otherwise.
H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry
1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed
surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.
I. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and
raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply
with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
J. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings,

and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable
penetration sleeves with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section
"Firestopping."
K. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-
type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.
L. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and
mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe
and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
M. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for
1-inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve
seals.
N. Interior Sleeves for Fiber Optical and Voice and Data Communications Cables: Construct of
4-inch metallic conduit, unless otherwise indicated, with insulated bushings on each end.
1. Length: 12 inches longer than width of wall.
2. Location: Install 12 inches above finished ceiling.
3. Manufacturer and model number: Hilti Speed Sleeves
3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION
A. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations.
B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable
material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve
seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against
pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
3.4 PLYWOOD BACKING PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Provide in main cross-connect/equipment rooms, telecommunication rooms, and other locations

indicated.

B. Install vertically, 12 inches above finished floor.
C. Paint plywood backing panels with two coats of fire-retardant paint. Do not paint over
classification marking of testing and inspecting agency.
3.5 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for electrical
installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and
installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Firestopping."

SECTION 260505 - ELECTRICAL TESTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements for electrical field testing and inspecting of all electrical
systems for this project. Each Division 26 Section shall reference components that require
testing. The detailed requirements shall be defined in this section, including but not limited to
the following:
1. Qualifications of testing agencies and their personnel.
2. Suitability of test equipment.
3. Calibration of test instruments.
4. Coordination requirements for testing and inspecting.
5. Reporting requirements for testing and inspecting.
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: As specified in each Section containing electrical testing

requirements and in subparagraph and associated subparagraph below.
1. Independent Testing Agencies: Independent of manufacturers, suppliers, and installers
of components to be tested or inspected.
a. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor for Power Component Testing: Person
currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the
National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-
site testing specified in Division 16 power component Sections.
B. Test Equipment Suitability: Comply with NETA ATS, Acceptance Testing Specification,
Section 5.2.
C. Test Equipment Calibration: Comply with NETA ATS Acceptance Testing Specification,
Section 5.3.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPONENTS TO BE TESTED
A. Low Voltage Cables, Section 26 05 19

1. Perform the following field tests and inspections:
a. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been
energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors for compliance with
requirements.
b. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
Project 16018 ELECTRICAL TESTING 260505 - 1

a. Test procedures used.

b. Test results that comply with requirements.
c. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to
achieve compliance with requirements.
B. Grounding and Bonding, Section 26 05 26

1. Perform the following tests and inspections:
a. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have
been energized, test for compliance with requirements.
b. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-
resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding
terminal, at ground test wells. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors
are connected.
1) Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace of
precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than
natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other
artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.
2) Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.
c. Prepare dimensioned drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground
rod assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in
alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the
number of rods driven and their depth at each location, and include observations
of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures
taken to improve test results.
2. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
c. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to
achieve compliance with requirements
3. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:
a. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 kVA and Less: 10
ohms.
b. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 to 1000 kVA: 5
ohms.
c. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA:
3 ohms.
d. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 1
ohm(s).
e. Substations and Pad-Mounted Equipment: 5 ohms.
f. Manhole Grounds: 10 ohms.
4. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values above,
notify A/E promptly. Provide additional grounds rods connected to the building ground
ring or offer recommendations to reduce ground resistance.
C. Low-Voltage Transformers, Section 26 22 00

1. Perform the following field tests and inspection:
a. After installing transformers but before primary is energized, verify that
grounding system at substation is tested at specified value or less.

b. After installing transformers and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test
for compliance with requirements.
c. Perform visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in
NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test
parameters.
d. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
2. Test Reports: Prepare written reports to record the following:
c. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective actions taken to
3. Remove and replace units that do not pass tests or inspections and retest as specified
above.
4. Test Labeling: On completion of satisfactory testing of each unit, attach a dated and
signed "Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.
D. Engine Generator, Section 26 32 13

1. Tests and Inspections:
a. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and each electrical test and visual
and mechanical inspection for "AC Generators and for Emergency Systems"
specified in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with
test parameters.
b. NFPA 110 Acceptance Tests: Perform tests required by NFPA 110 that are
additional to those specified here including, but not limited to, single-step full-
load pickup test.
c. Battery Tests: Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's
written instructions. Record individual cell voltages.
1) Measure charging voltage and voltages between available battery
terminals for full-charging and float-charging conditions. Check
electrolyte level and specific gravity under both conditions.
2) Test for contact integrity of all connectors. Perform an integrity load test
and a capacity load test for the battery.
3) Verify acceptance of charge for each element of the battery after
discharge.
4) Verify that measurements are within manufacturer's specifications.
d. Battery-Charger Tests: Verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing and
float-charging conditions.
e. System Integrity Tests: Methodically verify proper installation, connection, and
integrity of each element of engine-generator system before and during system
operation. Check for air, exhaust, and fluid leaks.
f. Voltage and Frequency Transient Stability Tests: Use recording oscilloscope to
measure voltage and frequency transients for 50 and 100 percent step-load
increases and decreases, and verify that performance is as specified.
g. Harmonic-Content Tests: Measure harmonic content of output voltage under 25
percent and at 100 percent of rated linear load. Verify that harmonic content is
within specified limits.

h. Noise Level Tests: Measure A-weighted level of noise emanating from

generator-set installation, including engine exhaust and cooling-air intake and
discharge, at four locations on the property line, and compare measured levels
with required values.
2. Coordinate tests with tests for transfer switches and run them concurrently.
3. Test instruments shall have been calibrated within the last 12 months, traceable to
standards of NIST, and adequate for making positive observation of test results. Make
calibration records available for examination on request.
6. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
7. Test Reports: Prepare written reports to record the following:
c. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective actions taken to
d. Record adjustable relay settings and measured insulation resistances, time delays,
and other values and observations. Attach a label or tag to each tested
component indicating satisfactory completion of tests
8. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until
specified requirements are met.
E. Wiring Devices, Section 26 27 26

1. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
a. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.
b. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with
digital readout or illuminated LED indicators of measurement.
2. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:
a. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V
b. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not
acceptable.
c. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.
d. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.
e. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.
f. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at
the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective
devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning
units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above:
F. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final
Acceptance, perform infrared scan of the following equipment. Remove front and rear panels
so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.
1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each
piece of equipment tested, 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
2. Instrument: Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or to
detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

3. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies switchgear

checked and that describes infrared-scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies
detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
4. Provide an electronic copy of results on a flash drive
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A. If a group of tests are specified to be performed by an independent testing agency, prepare

systems, equipment, and components for tests and inspections, and perform preliminary tests to
ensure that systems, equipment, and components are ready for independent agency testing.
Include the following minimum preparations as appropriate:
1. Perform insulation-resistance tests.
2. Perform continuity tests.
3. Perform rotation test (for motors to be tested).
4. Provide a stable source of single-phase, 208/120-V electrical power for test
instrumentation at each test location.
B. Test and Inspection Reports: In addition to requirements specified elsewhere, report the
following:
1. Manufacturer's written testing and inspecting instructions.
2. Calibration and adjustment settings of adjustable and interchangeable devices involved
in tests.
3. Tabulation of expected measurement results made before measurements.
4. Tabulation of "as-found" and "as-left" measurement and observation results.

SECTION 26 05 19 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY

1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.
2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.

1. Division 26 Section "Common Work Results for Electrical" for sleeves and sleeve seals for
cables.
2. Division 27 Section "Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling" for cabling used for
voice and data circuits.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Quality Assurance/Control Submittal:

intended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.
B. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THW, THHN-THWN, XHHW
1. Provide No. 6 AWG and smaller conductors with color-coded insulation.
2. Tape conductors larger than No 6 AWG with the appropriate color tape for a minimum of 6
inches starting from the termination. Each conductor of multi-conductor cables shall be
color coded the same as single conductors. Color coding shall be as shown below.
Project 16018 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL 260519 - 1

AIA/MCS POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES March 3, 2017
C. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for metal-clad cable, Type MC.
2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type,
and class for application and service indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS
A. Feeders: Copper, No. 10 AWG, minimum.

1. Feeder Conductor sizes indicated on drawings are for copper conductors, unless indicated
otherwise.
B. Branch Circuits: Copper. No. 12 AWG, minimum.
C. Class 1 Control Circuits: Copper. No. 14 AWG, minimum.
D. Class 2 Control Circuits: Copper. No. 16 AWG, minimum.
E. Voltage drop shall not exceed 3 percent from panelboard to farthest outlet.
1. Maximum permitted length of 20 amp, 120, 208, and 240 volt circuits using No. 12 AWG
copper wire is 100 feet.
2. Maximum permitted length of 20 amp, 120, 208, and 240 volt circuits using No. 10 AWG
copper wire is 140 feet.
3. Maximum permitted length of 20 amp, 277 and 480 volt circuits using No. 12 AWG copper
wire is 170 feet.
4. Maximum permitted length of 20 amp, 277 and 480 volt circuits using No. 10 AWG copper
wire is 250 feet.
3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND

WIRING METHODS
A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway; or Type XHHW, single
conductors in raceway.
B. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single
conductors in raceway; or Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway.

C. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type -THWN, single
conductors in raceway; or Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway.
D. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.
E. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway; power-limited cable, concealed in

building finishes; or power-limited tray cable, in cable tray.
1. Exposed-Structure Type Ceiling Spaces: Install Class 2 control circuits in raceway.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used

must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended
maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will
not damage cables or raceway.
D. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A .
B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or
better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.

1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test
service entrance and feeder conductors for compliance with requirements.
2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
C. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1. Test procedures used.
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve


SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.
B. EF: Entrance Facility for voice and data communications.
C. ER: Equipment Room for voice and data communications.
D. MC: Main Cross-Connect for voice and data communications.
E. TBB: Telecommunications Bonding Backbone conductor.
F. TDMM: Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual, published by BICSI.
G. TGB: Telecommunications Grounding Busbar.
H. TMBC: Telecommunications Main Bonding Conductor (same as ANSI-J-STD-607-A Bonding

Conductor for Telecommunications.)
I. TMGB: Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar.
J. TR: Telecommunications Room for voice and data communications.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals:

B. Closeout Documents:
1. Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features specified in Part 3
"Field Quality Control" Article, including the following:
a. Test wells.
b. Building Ground rods.
c. Ground rods at light poles
d. Connections to building steel
e. Connections to roof steel
Project 16018 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 1

2. Photographs- Take a minimum of 15 digital photo graphs with visible dates,

documenting the concealed or buried grounding components noted in the previous
paragraph.
intended use.
B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
C. Voice and Data Communications Equipment Grounding: Install grounding according to

BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter, and comply with
ANSI-J-STD-607-A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTORS
A. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.
2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.
3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.
4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter.
5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.
6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-
5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.
7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with
copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.
B. Grounding Bus: Rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 4 inches in cross section, unless
otherwise indicated; with insulators.
2.2 CONNECTORS
A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of
conductors and other items connected.
B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure-type,
with at least two bolts.
1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.
C. All cable to cable, cable to rod, cable to steel connection shall be welded connectors: Use
exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined
and installation conditions. Exothermic welds shall use powdered copper oxide and aluminum
to form a molded homogeneous copper joint connection between the copper conductor and the
material being bonded to.

2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4-inch-diameter by 10 feet in length.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements.
B. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing service
equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.
1. Install bus on insulated spacers 1 inch, minimum, from wall 18 inches above finished
floor, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Dimensions: 0.25 inches-by-2 inches-by-24-inches.
3. Copper
4. Conductors leading to ground ring around transformer pad shall be exothermically
welded to ground bus, all others shall be bolted connections.
C. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.
2. Underground Connections: Exothermic-welded connectors, except at test wells and as
3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.
4. Connections to Structural Steel: Exothermic-welded connectors.
3.2 GROUNDING UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements.
B. Grounding Power Feeder Handholes: Install a driven ground rod through bottom of handhole ,
close to wall, and set rod depth so 4 inches will extend above bottom. If necessary, install
ground rod before handhole is placed. Connect ground rod to building ground ring or to ground
wire in duct bank when applicable.
C. Provide Grounding Triangle. This will consist of 3 ground rods spaced 10 feet apart, connected
with a #2/0 bare copper conductor, exothermically bonded to each rod. The Grounding Triangle
shall be connected to the building ground ring.
D. Pad-Mounted Transformers, Switches, and Generators: a ground ring of #4/0 AWG bare copper
conductors shall be provided around the transformer pad. Ground rods shall be placed
approximately 3 ft. outside each corner of the pad. Two #4/0 AWG conductors shall be brought
up into the transformer enclosure for equipment grounding. The transformer neutral shall only
be grounded inside the service entrance (SE) equipment in the building. A #4/0 AWG ground
conductor shall extend from the outdoor ground ring to underground to the main electric room
ground bus.

3.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with feeders and branch circuits. Equipment
and grounding electrode conductors (all bolted conductors) shall be labeled. Labeling shall
utilize embossed brass metal tags with nylon tie wraps
B. Ground conductors brought through the floor or walls shall be in PVC conduit sleeves.
C. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-

mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters,
dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to
air duct and connected metallic piping.
D. Water Heater: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water
heater. Bolt conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.
E. Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate
insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with
branch-circuit conductors. Provide a Copper-clad steel ground rod; 5/8-inch-diameter by 8 feet
in length at each light pole in excess of 12 feet tall. Bond ground rod to a ground lug in the
lighting pole with a minimum #6 bare solid conductor routed up through a ½ “ PVC conduit.
3.4 TECHNOLOGY SYSTEM GROUNDING
A. Voice and Data Communication Equipment: For telephone, video, voice and data, and other
communication equipment.
1. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical
Protection" Chapter.
2. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.
3. IT Room: Install 1/4-by-4-by-12-inch copper TMGB. Bond TMGB to the following:
a. Electrical service entrance grounding bus with No. 3/0 AWG TMBC.
b. Structural steel with No. 2 AWG insulated grounding conductor.
c. Cable trays and metallic pathways.
B. Signal and Communication Equipment: For sound, alarm, security, and other communication
equipment, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from
grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central
equipment location.
3.5 INSTALLATION
B. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise
indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may
be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

C. Common Ground Bonding with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 and
UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical power system
ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical
service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode
conductor, and install in conduit.
D. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as
otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating, if
any.
2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length
from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes,
and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor.
3. When ground rod cannot be driven vertically due to shallow bedrock, drive at 45 degree
angle so that the top if 12 inches below grade.
4. When D2 and D3 cannot be installed, bury ground rods as deep as possible but 30
inches minimum to top.
5. When D2, D3, and D4 cannot be installed, use electrolytic ground rod shall be 2 inch
diameter, hollow Type K copper tube, drilled 12 feet deep into rock, straight shaft with
No. 4/0 copper conductor exothermically welded to tube, 12 inches from top end.
Conductor length shall be as required to run to main grounding bus bar in buildings.
Tube shall have weep holes drilled in sides near ends and shall be prefilled with
metallic salts. Provide protective access box shall be 10 inches diameter, 12 inches
deep, hollow precast concrete with cast iron cover. Provide backfill material shall be as
E. Test Wells: Install at least one test well for each service, unless otherwise indicated. Install
with removable cover at the ground rod electrically closest to service entrance. Set top of test
well flush with finished grade or floor.
F. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance,
except where routed through short lengths of conduit.
1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to
penetrate any adjacent parts. Install at expansion joints.
2. Catwalks: Bond straps directly to catwalks and basic structure, taking care not to
penetrate any adjacent parts.
3. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install
so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.
4. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect-type
connection is required, use a bolted clamp.
G. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit,
from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service
entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service
pipes, using a bolted clamp connector. Where a dielectric main water fitting is
installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding
conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.

2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water
meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.
3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment
shutoff valve.
H. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner
column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet apart.
3.6 VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
A. Ensure that VFC and motor frame are properly bonded to the grounding conductor and that
equipment grounding conductor is provided in the feeder conduit to the VFC and motor.
3.7 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify voice and data communications equipment grounding components, complying with
TIA/EIA-606-A.
B. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been
energized, test for compliance with requirements.
2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance
level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, at ground test
wells. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected.
a. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace of
precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural
drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of
reducing natural ground resistance.
b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.
3. Prepare dimensioned drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground rod
assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order,
and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and
their depth at each location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena
that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results.
B. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:

1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms.
2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms.
3. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3
ohms.
4. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 1 ohm(s).
5. Substations and Pad-Mounted Equipment: 5 ohms.
6. Manhole Grounds: 10 ohms.

C. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values above, notify
A/E promptly. Provide additional grounds rods connected to the building ground ring or offer
recommendations to reduce ground resistance.

SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY

1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.
2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.

1. Division 26 Section “Identification for Electrical Systems” for cable ties.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.
A. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported
systems and its contents.

C. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated
or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied
force.
1.5 SUBMITTALS

1. Welding certificates.
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural

Welding Code - Steel."
Project 16018 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 1

1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are
specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field
assembly.
1. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.
2. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4.
3. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.
B. Nonmetallic Slotted Support Systems: Structural-grade, factory-formed, glass-fiber-resin

channels and angles with 9/16-inch-diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches o.c., in at least 1
surface.
1. Fittings and Accessories: Products of channel and angle manufacturer and designed for use
with those items.
2. Fitting and Accessory Materials: Same as channels and angles, except metal items may be
stainless steel.
3. Rated Strength: Selected to suit applicable load criteria.
C. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.
D. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for
types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
E. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded

body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in
riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required
to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.
F. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes,
and bars; black and galvanized.
G. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their
supports to building surfaces include the following:
1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Not permitted.
2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened
portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for
supported loads and building materials in which used.
3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS
Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.
4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached
structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.
6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
8. Wire Rope Systems: Galvanized steel wire rope with spring-loaded, key-releasable locking
device with the following rated strength:
a. 0.059-inch (1.5-mm): 44 pounds.
b. 5/64-inch (2-mm): 100 pounds.
c. 1/8-inch (3-mm): 200 pounds.
2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES
A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions
of supported equipment.
B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel
shapes and plates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical
equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.
B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for
EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.
C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support
system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding
specified design load limits.
1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps using spring
friction action for retention in support channel.
3.2 SLOTTED SUPPORT SYSTEMS APPLICATIONS
A. Heated Interior Spaces: Painted steel.
B. Non-Heated Interior Spaces and Outdoors: Hot-dipped galvanized steel.
3.3 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this
Article.
B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC
may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will
be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum
static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus
200 lb.
D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten
electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless
otherwise indicated by code:
1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.
2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.
3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor
fasteners on solid masonry units.
4. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69.
5. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
6. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,
panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers,
and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismic-
restraint strength and anchorage requirements.
E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing
bars.
F. Exposed Conduits: Use one-hole or two-hole straps 8 feet or less AFF. Conduit clamps and
hangers that project past the conduit wall are limited to above 8 feet AFF.
G. Do not use wood plugs, perforated metal bands, chain, or wire to support electrical equipment,
H. Open-Web Joists: Install supports only at panel points. Fasten supports to top of bottom chord of
joist. Do not exceed 100 pounds working load per panel point.
I. Roof and Elevated Floor Decks: Do not fasten supports to roof decks or elevated floor decks.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS
A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for site-
fabricated metal supports.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
3.5 CONCRETE BASES
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both
directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge
of the base. Chamfer edges 1 inch.
1. Base Height: 3.5 inches, unless indicated otherwise.

B. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and

placement requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
C. Anchor equipment to concrete base.

embedded.
3.6 CONCRETE CURBS
A. Construct concrete curbs of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both
directions than outline of electrical enclosures above, so conduits will be a minimum of 2 inches
from edge of the base. Chamfer edges 1 inch.
1. Base Height: Match finish wall base material, but not less than 3.5 inches.
B. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and

placement requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
3.7 PAINTING
A. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for cleaning and touchup
painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous
metal.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-
repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

SECTION 260533 - CONDUIT AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes conduits, fittings, boxes, outlet boxes, floor boxes, high capacity floor
boxes enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring. The term raceway shall also apply to conduit
and boxes.

1. Division 26 Section "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems" for exterior
ductbanks, manholes, and underground utility construction.
2. Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for mounting heights of devices.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.
B. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
C. ER: Equipment room (Telecommunications.)
D. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.
E. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
F. MC: Main cross-connect (Telecommunications.)
G. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.
H. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.
I. TDMM: Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual, published by BICSI.
J. TR: Telecommunications room.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

1. Product Data: Provide product data sheet for each conduit, boxes, floor fittings, and conduit
bodies in this Section and on the Drawings that are specifically applicable to this project.
Provide an arrow stamp pointing to the exact catalog number or product and do not merely
highlight the information.
Project 16018 CONDUIT AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 1

intended use.
C. Voice and Data Communications Pathways: Install conduit, raceways, and boxes according to
BICSI TDMM, "Horizontal Distribution Systems" Chapter, and comply with NECA 568.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. HVAC Control and Monitoring: Verify locations of temperature control panels with Building
Management System installer.
B. MC/ER and TR: Verify locations of backboards, cable trays, equipment cabinets and racks, and
conduit stub-outs with Voice and Data Communications Cable installer
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING
A. RMC: ANSI C80.1.
B. IMC: ANSI C80.6.
C. EMT: ANSI C80.3.
D. FMC: Zinc-coated steel or aluminum.
E. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.
F. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable:
NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and
environment in which installed.
1. Die-cast type, pot-metal type, and indenter type fittings are not permitted.
2. Fittings for EMT: Steel, compression type.
G. Joint Compound for RMC or IMC: Listed for use in cable connector assemblies, and
compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded raceway joints from corrosion and enhance
their conductivity.
2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT
A. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Fittings for RNC: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

2.3 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

1. Gangable boxes are not permitted.
B. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, aluminum, Type FD, with gasketed cover.
C. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
D. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with gasketed cover.
E. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch,
1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic.
F. Cabinets:
1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable
front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.
3. Key latch to match panelboards.
4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.
5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.
2.4 FLOOR BOXES
A. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

1. Gangable boxes are not permitted.
B. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, aluminum, Type FD, with gasketed cover.
C. Metal Floor Boxes: Cast metal, fully adjustable, rectangular; one, two, or three gangs as
indicated.
1. Slabs-on-Grade: Threaded hubs to accommodate at least four 1-inch conduits.
a. Minimum Box Height: 3.19 inches without base screws.
b. Minimum Depth of Pour: 3.75 inches.
2. Elevated Floor Slabs: Threaded hubs to accommodate at least four 3/4-inch conduits.
a. Minimum Box Height: 2.00 inches without base screws.
b. Minimum Depth of Pour: 2.00 inches.
D. Nonmetallic Floor Boxes: Nonadjustable, round
2.5 TELCOMMUNICATIONS CONDUIT BODIES
A. General Description: Conduit bodies specifically designed to maintain the required bend radius
for data and communications cabling, complying with BISCI TDMM “Horizontal Distribution
Systems” Chapter.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONDUIT APPLICATION
A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: Only PVC coated RMC.
2. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.
3. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
B. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.
2. Exposed and Subject to Physical Damage: RMC. Includes raceways in the following
locations:
3. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.
4. Concealed Under Slabs-on-Grade: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC.
5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC in damp or wet locations unless in
air plenum.
6. Conduits for Optical Fiber or Communications Cable in Spaces Used for Environmental
Air: EMT.
7. Conduits for Optical Fiber or Communications Cable Risers in Vertical Shafts: EMT.
8. Conduits s for Concealed General Purpose Distribution of Optical Fiber or Communications
Cable: EMT.
C. Minimum RMC, EMT, Size: 3/4-inch trade size, unless indicated otherwise.
D. Minimum FMC or LFMC Size: 3/4-inch trade size, unless indicated otherwise.
E. Conduit Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
1. RMC: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated.
2. EMT Fittings shall be compression type. No set screw fittings shall be allowed.
F. All raceways shall follow the color scheme listed below. All existing conduits that are reused
shall have their boxes, couplings, and fittings hand painted by brush to match the color scheme
below using the PPG number shown.

3.2 OUTLET AND DEVICE BOX APPLICATION
A. Flush Boxes in Masonry Walls and Partitions: Use masonry boxes at least 3.5 inches deep.
B. Flush Boxes in Gypsum-Board Partitions: Use square boxes at least 2.125 inches deep with
raised box covers.
C. Flush Device Boxes in Ceilings: Use square boxes at least 2.125 inches deep with raised box
covers.
D. Flush Outlet Boxes in Ceilings: Use 4-inch round or octagonal boxes at least 2.125 inches deep.
E. Surface Boxes: Use cast-metal type with matching cover. Provide knock-out plugs in unused
openings.
F. Technology boxes: back boxes for technology equipment, wireless access points and data drops
shall have a 5 inch square back box.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements applicable to products
specified in Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter.
B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes.
Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
D. Support conduits as specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical
Systems."
E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.
F. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and below floors, unless otherwise
indicated.
G. Conduits Beneath Concrete Slabs:

1. Install conduit parallel or at right angles building lines, at least 1 inch below top of drainage
fill.

2. Arrange conduits to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings.
3. Do not embed conduits in concrete slabs.
H. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply
listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound
I. Conduit Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to

protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.
J. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not
less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.
K. Install conduit sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with
listed sealing compound. For concealed conduits, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a
blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install conduit
sealing fittings at the following points:
1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces.
2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
L. Expansion-Joint Fittings for RNC: Install in each run of aboveground conduit that is located
where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F, and that has straight-run length
that exceeds 25 feet.
1. Install expansion-joint fittings for each of the following locations, and provide type and
quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for location:
a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change.
b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change.
2. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of
length of straight run per deg F of temperature change.
3. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected
according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at the
time of installation.
M. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and
semi recessed lighting fixtures.
1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations.
2. Equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and
motors shall use LFMC and be limited to 36 inches unless in air plenum.
N. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Coordinate work with masonry contractor. Saw-cut opening
for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Box shall be
vertically plumb and flush with plane of wall, or slightly recessed. All boxes installed improperly
will be replaced at Contractors expense. Provide oversized plate for all boxes that have exposed
joints.
O. Recessed Boxes in Gypsum-Board Partitions: Coordinate work with drywall contractor. Box shall
be vertically plumb and flush with plane of wall, or slightly recessed. All boxes installed
improperly will be replaced at Contractors expense. Provide oversized plate for all boxes that
have exposed joints.

P. Metal Floor box installations: Install all conduit and boxes level prior to pouring concrete. If
owner representative is not present before the concrete is poured, take a minimum of 3 digital
photograph of typical installation. Verify finished floor surface prior to pour. When installed in
tile or finished concrete floor, ensure that final surface fitting and plate will be flush and not
protrude above the finished plane. Install trim kit after floor is poured to fit flush with finished
surface.
Q. Conduits less than 3-inch trade size may be field bent, unless indicated otherwise. Use factory
45 and 90 degree, and special radius elbows for conduits 3-inch and larger.
R. Conduits for Feeders: Electrically continuous, terminated with grounding and insulating
bushings.
S. Conduits for Branch Circuits: Electrically continuous.
T. Finished Spaces: Provide escutcheons where conduits penetrate surfaces of finished spaces.
Match finish of adjacent surfaces.
U. Conduits for Optical Fiber and Voice and Data Communications Cable: Install raceways,
metallic, rigid and flexible, as follows:
1. 3/4-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 50 feet.
2. 1-Inch Trade Size and Larger: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 75 feet.
3. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of raceway
unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes or
terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these
requirements.
4. Elbows: Use factory elbows. Field bent elbows are not permitted for optical fiber and
communications cables.
a. Radii of Elbows for Conduits 1-1/2-inches and Larger: At least 10 times inside
diameter of conduit.
5. Conduit Bodies: Use telecommunications conduit bodies.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are
without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.
2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by
manufacturer.

SECTION 260536 – LADDER TYPE CABLE TRAYS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes aluminum cable trays and accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

1. Field quality-control reports.
B. Closeout Submittals:
1. Operation and Maintenance Data: For cable trays to include in emergency, operation, and
A. Source Limitations: Obtain cable tray components through one source from a single
manufacturer.
intended use.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
D. Minimum tray size is 12 in x 4 in.
A. Aluminum cable tray may be stored outside without cover, but shall be loosely stacked, elevated
off the ground, and ventilated to prevent staining during storage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. Cooper B-Line, Inc.
2. Cope, T. J., Inc.; a subsidiary of Allied Tube & Conduit.
3. GS Metals Corp.; GLOBETRAY products.
4. MONO-SYSTEMS, Inc.
Project 16018 LADDER TYPE CABLE TRAYS 260536 - 1

5. The Wiremold Co.
B. Products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance only when allowed in Section
260050, General Electrical Requirements.
2.2 MATERIALS AND FINISHES
A. Cable Trays, Fittings, and Accessories: Aluminum, complying with NEMA VE 1, Aluminum
Association's Alloy 6063-T6 for rails, rungs, and cable trays, and Alloy 5052-H32 or Alloy 6061-
T6 for fabricated parts; with chromium-zinc, ASTM F 1136, splice-plate fasteners, bolts, and
screws
B. Sizes and Configurations: Refer to Part 3 Article "Cable Tray Schedule" for specific
requirements for types, materials, sizes, and configurations.
2.3 CABLE TRAY ACCESSORIES
A. Fittings: Tees, crosses, risers, elbows, and other fittings as indicated, of same materials and
finishes as cable tray.
B. Cable tray supports and connectors, including bonding jumpers, as recommended by cable tray
manufacturer.
A. Perform design and production tests according to NEMA VE 1.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CABLE TRAY INSTALLATION
A. Comply with recommendations in NEMA VE 2. Install as a complete system, including all

necessary fasteners, hold-down clips, splice-plate support systems, barrier strips, hinged
horizontal and vertical splice plates, elbows, reducers, tees, and crosses.
B. Remove burrs and sharp edges from cable trays.
C. Fasten cable tray supports to building structure.

1. Design each fastener and support to carry load indicated by seismic requirements.
2. Place supports so that spans do not exceed maximum spans on schedules.
3. Construct supports from channel members, threaded rods, and other appurtenances
furnished by cable tray manufacturer. Arrange supports in trapeze or wall-bracket form as
required by application.
4. Support bus assembly to prevent twisting from eccentric loading.
5. Manufacture center-hung support, designed for 60 percent versus 40 percent eccentric
loading condition, with a safety factor of 3.
6. Locate and install supports according to NEMA VE 2.
D. Make changes in direction and elevation using standard fittings.

E. Make cable tray connections using standard fittings.
F. Where cable tray would penetrate wall (4) 4” Hilti Speed sleeves shall be used.
G. Seal penetrations through fire and smoke barriers with re-enterable fire-rated pathways according
to Division 07 Section "Firestopping." Provide quantity to match cross sectional area of cable
tray:
H. Workspace: Install cable trays with enough space to permit access for installing cables.
1. Cable tray will be the lowest system in the ceiling space
I. Install end caps on rails.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground cable trays according to manufacturer's written instructions and Division 26 Section
"Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
A. After installing cable trays and after electrical circuitry has been energized, survey for compliance
with requirements. Perform the following field quality-control survey:
1. Visually inspect cable insulation for damage. Correct sharp corners, protuberances in cable
tray, vibration, and thermal expansion and contraction conditions, which may cause or have
caused damage.
2. Verify that there is no intrusion of such items as pipe, hangers, or other equipment that
could damage cables.
3. Remove deposits of dust, industrial process materials, trash of any description, and any
blockage of tray ventilation.
4. Visually inspect each cable tray joint and each ground connection for mechanical continuity.
Check bolted connections between sections for corrosion. Clean and retorque in suspect
areas.
5. Check for missing or damaged bolts, bolt heads, or nuts. When found, replace with
specified hardware.
6. Perform visual and mechanical checks for adequacy of cable tray grounding; verify that all
takeoff raceways are bonded to cable tray.
7. Fabrication in the field, other than the shortening of a single straight section per each
straight run to meet field conditions, will not be permitted. Corners, intersections, and tee
units shall be standard manufactured units for this purpose; modification of straight sections
to meet these needs will not be permitted. Where vertical space permits, and as approved by
the Project Manager, tees and intersections can be in the form of two separate, straight tray
sections at differing elevations; minimum spacing between these sections in the vertical
direction shall be 6 in.
8. Cable trays are to be routed near the side of the utility or pedestrian corridor wherever
possible. Cable tray locations shall be coordinated with adjacent utilities so that the tray will
be accessible for adding or removing cables in the future. Routing shall also be adjusted so
as not to obstruct access to other utility items that would routinely require access for
maintenance or adjustment.
B. Report results in writing.

3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed cable trays.

1. Install temporary protection for cables in open trays to protect exposed cables from falling
objects or debris during construction. Temporary protection for cables and cable tray can be
constructed of wood or metal materials until the risk of damage is over.

SECTION 260543 - UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL

SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY

1. Conduit, ducts, and duct accessories for direct-buried and concrete-encased duct banks, and
in single duct runs.
2. Handholes and boxes.
1.3 DEFINITION
A. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings for Precast or Factory-Fabricated Underground Utility Structures: Include plans,
elevations, sections, details, attachments to other work, and accessories, including the following:
1. Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes.
2. Reinforcement details.
3. Frame and cover design and manhole frame support rings.
4. Ladder details.
5. Grounding details.
6. Dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, pulling-in and lifting irons, and sumps.
7. Joint details.
B. Shop Drawings for Factory-Fabricated Handholes and Boxes Other Than Precast Concrete:
Include dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations, and fabrication and installation details,
1. Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes.
2. Cover design.
3. Grounding details.
4. Dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, and pulling-in and lifting irons.
C. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals:

1. Product Data: For the following:
a. Duct-bank materials, including separators and miscellaneous components.
b. Ducts and conduits and their accessories, including elbows, end bells, bends, fittings,
and solvent cement.
c. Accessories for , handholes, and boxes.
d. Warning tape.
Project 16018 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS 260543 - 1

AIA/MCS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS March 3, 2017
2. Product Certificates: For concrete and steel used in precast concrete and handholes, as
required by ASTM C 858.
3. Source quality-control test reports.
A. Comply with ANSI C2.
A. Deliver ducts to Project site with ends capped. Store nonmetallic ducts with supports to prevent
bending, warping, and deforming.
B. Store precast concrete and other factory-fabricated underground utility structures at Project site as
recommended by manufacturer to prevent physical damage. Arrange so identification markings
are visible.
C. Lift and support precast concrete units only at designated lifting or supporting points.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of ducts, handholes, and boxes with final arrangement of other
utilities, site grading, and surface features as determined in the field.
B. Coordinate elevations of ducts and duct-bank entrances into handholes, and boxes with final
locations and profiles of ducts and duct banks as determined by coordination with other utilities,
underground obstructions, and surface features. Revise locations and elevations from those
indicated as required to suit field conditions and to ensure that duct runs drain to and handholes,
and as approved by A/E.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUIT
A. Rigid Galvanized.Steel Conduit: Comply with ANSI C80.1. Use RGS when noted in this
specification or where required on drawings.
B. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, UL 651, with matching fittings by same manufacturer
as the conduit, complying with NEMA TC 3 and UL 514B.
2.2 NONMETALLIC DUCTS AND DUCT ACCESSORIES
A. Underground Plastic Utilities Duct: NEMA TC 6 & 8, Type EB-20-PVC, ASTM F 512,
UL 651A, with matching fittings by the same manufacturer as the duct, complying with
NEMA TC 9.

B. Duct Accessories:
1. Duct Separators: Factory-fabricated rigid PVC interlocking spacers, sized for type and sizes
of ducts with which used, and selected to provide minimum duct spacings indicated while
supporting ducts during concreting or backfilling.
2. Warning Tape: Underground-line warning tape specified in Division 260553 Section
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
2.3 HANDHOLES AND BOXES OTHER THAN PRECAST CONCRETE
A. Description: Comply with SCTE 77.

1. Color:
a. Paved and Off-Road Locations: Gray.
b. Grass and Turf Locations: Green.
2. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have open bottom, unless
3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural
load rating consistent with enclosure.
4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50.
5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering. Selected to suit system.
a. Legend: "ELECTRIC" for duct systems with power wires and cables for systems
operating at 600 V and less.
b. Legend: "COMMUNICATIONS" for communications, data, and telephone duct
systems.
6. Handholes 12 inches wide by 24 inches long and larger shall have factory-installed inserts
for cable racks and pulling-in irons.
B. Polymer Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and
aggregate, bound together with a polymer resin, and reinforced with steel or fiberglass or a
combination of the two.
C. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes with Polymer Concrete Frame and Cover: Sheet-molded,
fiberglass-reinforced, polyester resin enclosure joined to polymer concrete top ring or frame.
D. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes: Molded of fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin, with covers of
fiberglass.
E. High-Density Plastic Boxes: Injection molded of high-density polyethylene or copolymer-

polypropylene. Cover shall be plastic.
2.4 PRECAST
A. Comply with ASTM C 858, with structural design loading as specified in Part 3 "Underground
Enclosure Application" Article and with interlocking mating sections, complete with accessories,
hardware, and features.
1. Duct Entrances in Manhole Walls: Cast end-bell or duct-terminating fitting in wall for each
entering duct.
a. Type and size shall match fittings to duct or conduit to be terminated.
b. Fittings shall align with elevations of approaching ducts and be located near interior
corners of to facilitate racking of cable.

B. Joint Sealant: Asphaltic-butyl material with adhesion, cohesion, flexibility, and durability
properties necessary to withstand maximum hydrostatic pressures at the installation location with
the ground-water level at grade.
2.5 CAST-IN-PLACE
A. Description: Underground utility structures, constructed in place, complete with accessories,

hardware, and features. Include concrete knockout panels for conduit entrance and sleeve for
ground rod.
B. Materials: Comply with ASTM C 858 and with Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
C. Structural Design Loading: As specified in Part 3 "Underground Enclosure Application" Article.
A. Test and inspect precast concrete utility structures according to ASTM C 1037.
B. Nonconcrete Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of and boxes for
compliance with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied.
1. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing agency
or the manufacturer. A qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests by
manufacturer.
2. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying with
ISO 9000 and ISO 10012, and traceable to NIST standards.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Ducts for Electrical Feeders 600 V and Less: RNC, NEMA Type EB-20-PVC, in concrete-
encased duct bank, unless otherwise indicated. A feeder is defined as any circuit shown on the
one line diagram or any circuit with an overcurrent device in excess of 150 amperes.
Underground feeders below concrete slab on grade shall be excluded from the requirement of
concrete encasement.
B. Underground Ducts for any electrical feeder or branch that is part of the Emergency System or
Optional Standby System or Legally Required Standby System: RNC, NEMA Type EB-20-PVC,
in concrete-encased duct bank, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Ducts for Electrical Branch Circuits: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, in direct-buried duct
bank, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Underground Ducts for Telephone, Communications, or Data Utility Service Cables: RNC,
NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, installed in direct-buried duct bank, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Underground Ducts for Telephone, Communications, or Data Circuits: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-
40-PVC, in direct-buried duct bank, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Install underground ducts for telephone, communications, or data utility service cables at least
24 inches from underground ducts for electrical feeders or branch circuits.

G. Underground Ducts Crossing Paved Paths, Walkways, Driveways, and Roadways: RNC, NEMA
Type EPC-40-PVC, encased in reinforced concrete.
3.2 UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURE APPLICATION
A. Handholes and Boxes for 600 V and Less, Including Telephone, Communications, and Data
Wiring:
1. Units in Roadways and Other Deliberate Traffic Paths: Precast concrete. AASHTO HB 17,
H-20 structural load rating.
2. Units in Driveway, Parking Lot, and Off-Roadway Locations, Subject to Occasional,
Nondeliberate Loading by Heavy Vehicles: Use one of the following:
a. Precast concrete. AASHTO HB 17, H-20 structural load rating.
b. Polymer concrete, SCTE 77, Tier 15 structural load rating.
c. Fiberglass enclosures with polymer concrete frame and cover, SCTE 77, Tier 15
structural load rating.
3. Units in Sidewalk and Similar Applications with a Safety Factor for Nondeliberate Loading
by Vehicles: Use one of the following:
a. Precast concrete. AASHTO HB 17, H-10 structural load rating.
b. Polymer concrete units, SCTE 77, Tier 8 structural load rating.
c. Heavy-duty fiberglass units with polymer concrete frame and cover, SCTE 77, Tier 8
structural load rating.
4. Units Subject to Light-Duty Pedestrian Traffic Only: Fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin
or high-density plastic, structurally tested according to SCTE 77 with 3000-lbf vertical
loading.
5. Minimum Dimensions for Telephone, Communications, and Data Wiring Handholes: 30 by
42 by 36-inches deep.
3.3 EARTHWORK
A. Excavation and Backfill: Comply with Division 31 Section "Earth Moving," but do not use
heavy-duty, hydraulic-operated, compaction equipment.
3.4 DUCT INSTALLATION
B. Slope: Pitch ducts a minimum slope of 1:300 down toward and handholes and away from
buildings and equipment. Slope ducts from a high point in runs between two to drain in both
directions.
C. Curves and Bends: Use 5-degree angle couplings for small changes in direction. Use
manufactured long sweep bends with a minimum radius of 48 inches, both horizontally and
vertically, at other locations, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Joints: Use solvent-cemented joints in ducts and fittings and make watertight according to
manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger couplings so those of adjacent ducts do not lie in
same plane.
E. Duct Entrances to Concrete and Polymer Concrete Handholes: Use end bells, spaced
approximately 10 inches o.c. for 5-inch ducts, and vary proportionately for other duct sizes.

1. Begin change from regular spacing to end-bell spacing 10 feet from the end bell without
reducing duct line slope and without forming a trap in the line.
2. Grout end bells into structure walls from both sides to provide watertight entrances.
F. Building Wall Penetrations: Make a transition from underground duct to rigid steel conduit at
least 10 feet outside the building wall without reducing duct line slope away from the building,
and without forming a trap in the line. Use fittings manufactured for duct-to-conduit transition.
Install conduit penetrations of building walls as specified in Division 26 Section "Common Work
Results for Electrical."
G. Sealing: Provide temporary closure at terminations of ducts that have cables pulled. Seal spare
ducts at terminations. Use sealing compound and plugs to withstand at least 15-psig hydrostatic
pressure.
H. Pulling Cord: Install 100-lbf- test nylon cord in ducts, including spares.
I. Concrete-Encased Ducts: Support ducts on duct separators.

1. Separator Installation: Space separators close enough to prevent sagging and deforming of
ducts, with not less than 4 spacers per 20 feet of duct. Secure separators to earth and to
ducts to prevent floating during concreting. Stagger separators approximately 6 inches
between tiers. Tie entire assembly together using fabric straps; do not use tie wires or
reinforcing steel that may form conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups.
2. Concreting Sequence: Pour each run of envelope between or other terminations in one
continuous operation.
a. Start at one end and finish at the other, allowing for expansion and contraction of ducts
as their temperature changes during and after the pour. Use expansion fittings
installed according to manufacturer's written recommendations, or use other specific
measures to prevent expansion-contraction damage.
b. If more than one pour is necessary, terminate each pour in a vertical plane and install
3/4-inch reinforcing rod dowels extending 18 inches into concrete on both sides of
joint near corners of envelope.
3. Pouring Concrete: Spade concrete carefully during pours to prevent voids under and
between conduits and at exterior surface of envelope. Do not allow a heavy mass of
concrete to fall directly onto ducts. Use a plank to direct concrete down sides of bank
assembly to trench bottom. Allow concrete to flow to center of bank and rise up in middle,
uniformly filling all open spaces. Do not use power-driven agitating equipment unless
specifically designed for duct-bank application.
4. Concrete Type: Concrete shall be dyed red through and through and shall be rated at #3500
PSI.
5. Reinforcement: Reinforce concrete-encased duct banks where they cross disturbed earth
and where indicated. Arrange reinforcing rods and ties without forming conductive or
magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups.
6. Forms: Use walls of trench to form side walls of duct bank where soil is self-supporting and
concrete envelope can be poured without soil inclusions; otherwise, use forms.
7. Minimum Space between Ducts: 3 inches between ducts and exterior envelope wall, 2
inches between ducts for like services, and 4 inches between power and signal ducts.
8. Depth: Install top of duct bank at least 24 inches below finished grade in areas not subject
to deliberate traffic, and at least 30 inches below finished grade in deliberate traffic paths for
vehicles, unless otherwise indicated.

9. Stub-Ups: Use manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment
and at building entrances through the floor.
a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase
coupling with 3 inches of concrete.
b. Stub-Ups to Equipment: For equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend
steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of base. Install insulated
grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.
1) Where steel conduit stub-ups are prohibited by the electrical utility company, use
manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups. Extend concrete encasement throughout
the length of the elbow
10. Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line warning
tape directly above line at approximately 8 inches below finished grade. As a minimum,
bury warning tape approximately 12 inches above concrete envelope. Align tape parallel
to and within 3 inches of the centerline of duct bank. Provide multiple tapes where width of
multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches overall.
Space additional tapes 12 inches apart, horizontally.
J. Direct-Buried Duct Banks:

1. Support ducts on duct separators coordinated with duct size, duct spacing, and outdoor
temperature.
2. Space separators close enough to prevent sagging and deforming of ducts, with not less than
4 spacers per 20 feet of duct. Secure separators to earth and to ducts to prevent
displacement during backfill and yet permit linear duct movement due to expansion and
contraction as temperature changes. Stagger spacers approximately 6 inches between tiers.
3. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for duct bank. Prepare trench
bottoms as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for pipes less than 6 inches in
nominal diameter.
4. Install backfill as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
5. After installing first tier of ducts, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point and work
toward end of duct run, leaving ducts at end of run free to move with expansion and
contraction as temperature changes during this process. Repeat procedure after placing each
tier. After placing last tier, hand-place backfill to 4 inches over ducts and hand tamp.
Firmly tamp backfill around ducts to provide maximum supporting strength. Use hand
tamper only. After placing controlled backfill over final tier, make final duct connections at
end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Division 31
Section "Earth Moving."
6. Install ducts with a minimum of 3 inches between ducts for like services and 6 inches
between power and signal ducts.
7. Depth: Install top of duct bank at least 36 inches below finished grade, unless otherwise
indicated.
8. Set elevation of bottom of duct bank below the frost line.
9. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building
entrances through the floor, unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts
throughout the length of the elbow.
10. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at
building entrances through the floor.
a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase
coupling with 3 inches of concrete.

b. For equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit horizontally a
minimum of 60 inches from edge of equipment pad or foundation. Install insulated
grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.
1) Where steel conduit stub-ups are prohibited by the electrical utility company, use
manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups. Extend concrete encasement throughout
the length of the elbow
11. Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line warning
tape directly above line at approximately 8 inches below finished grade. As a minimum,
bury warning tape approximately 12 inches above ducts. Align tape parallel to and within
3 inches of the centerline of duct bank. Provide multiple tapes where width of multiple lines
installed in a common trench exceeds 16 inches overall. Space additional tapes 12 inches
apart, horizontally.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF HANDHOLES AND BOXES OTHER THAN PRECAST CONCRETE
A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with
connecting ducts to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. Use box
extension if required to match depths of ducts, and seal joint between box and extension as
recommended by the manufacturer.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from
1/2-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.
C. Elevation: In paved areas and trafficways, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade.
Set covers of other handholes 1 inch above finished grade.
D. Install handholes and boxes with bottom below the frost line, 30 inches below grade.
E. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators,
as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm
lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables, but short enough to preserve
adequate working clearances in the enclosure.
F. Field-cut openings for ducts and conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written
instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for
terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.
G. For enclosures installed in asphalt paving and subject to occasional, nondeliberate, heavy-vehicle
loading, form and pour a concrete ring encircling, and in contact with, enclosure and with top
surface screeded to top of box cover frame. Bottom of ring shall rest on compacted earth.
1. Concrete: 3000 psi , 28-day strength, complying with Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete," with a troweled finish.
2. Dimensions: 10 inches wide by 12 inches deep.
3.6 GROUNDING
A. Ground underground ducts and utility structures according to Division 26 Section "Grounding
and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements on completion of installation of
underground ducts and utility structures.
2. Pull aluminum or wood test mandrel through duct to prove joint integrity and test for out-of-
round duct. Provide mandrel equal to 80 percent fill of duct. If obstructions are indicated,
remove obstructions and retest.
3. Test manhole and handhole grounding to ensure electrical continuity of grounding and
bonding connections. Measure and report ground resistance as specified in Division 26
Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
B. Correct deficiencies and retest as specified above to demonstrate compliance.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Pull leather-washer-type duct cleaner, with graduated washer sizes, through full length of ducts.
Follow with rubber duct swab for final cleaning and to assist in spreading lubricant throughout
ducts.

SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY

1. Identification for raceway, more than 600 V.
2. Identification for conductors and control cable.
3. Underground-line warning tape.
4. Warning labels and signs.
5. Instruction signs.
6. Equipment identification labels.
7. Factory nameplates
8. Miscellaneous identification products.
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and ANSI C2.
C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in
the Contract Documents, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and
Maintenance Manual, and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use
consistent designations throughout Project.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTOR AND COMMUNICATION- AND CONTROL-CABLE IDENTIFICATION

MATERIALS
A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1
to 2 inches wide.
Project 16018 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 1

B. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification
legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
2.2 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE
A. Description: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, polyethylene tape.

1. Not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick.
2. Compounded for permanent direct-burial service.
3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core.
4. Printed legend shall indicate type of underground line by name. Use yellow “ELECTRIC”
for general use. Use red “HIGH VOLTAGE” for cables in excess of 600 volts. Use “LOW
VOLTAGE” for communication, alarm systems telecom cables etc. Use orange “FIBER
OPTIC” for fiber optic cables.
2.3 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS
A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
B. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with
colors, legend, and size required for application. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.
Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches.
C. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs: Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-

acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and
size required for application. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. Nominal size, 10 by
14 inches.
D. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:
1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD -
EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."
2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN
FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES."
2.4 INSTRUCTION SIGNS
A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20 sq.
in. and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes.
1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face.
2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.
3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment.
2.5 IDENTIFICATION LABELS
A. All labels required below in Part 3.0 shall meet the following requirements.
1. Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic, melamine label or metal. Mounted with
corrosion-resistant screws or permanent adhesive.
2. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic, melamine label or metal. Mounted with
corrosion-resistant screws.
3. Nameplates shall have a white background with black engraved letters and numbers

4. Nameplates for emergency systems or power transfer equipment shall have a red
background with white engraved letters and numbers.
5. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.
6. Do not use Kroy labels, paper labels
7. Do not use double stick tape to attach laminated labels.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, 1-piece, self-locking, fluoropolymer cable ties

suitable for ducts or plenums; and other spaces used for environmental air.
1. Flammability Rating: UL94V-0.
2. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch .
3. Tensile Strength: 50 lb, minimum.
4. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F.
5. Color: Maroon.
B. Paint: Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 09 painting
Sections.
C. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine
screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Raceways and Duct Banks More Than 600 V Concealed within Buildings: 4-inch- wide black
stripes on 10-inch centers over orange background that extends full length of raceway or duct and
is 12 inches wide. Stencil legend "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with
3-inch high black letters on 20-inch centers. Stop stripes at legends. Apply to the following
finished surfaces:
1. Floor surface directly above conduits running beneath and within 12 inches of a floor that is
in contact with earth or is framed above unexcavated space.
2. Wall surfaces directly external to raceways concealed within wall.
3. Accessible surfaces of concrete envelope around raceways in vertical shafts, exposed in the
building, or concealed above suspended ceilings.
B. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables More Than 600 V: Identify with "DANGER-HIGH
VOLTAGE" in black letters at least 2 inches high, with snap-around labels. Repeat legend at 10-
foot maximum intervals.
C. Accessible Raceways and Cables of Fire Alarm Systems: Identify junction boxes by painting
boxes and covers red.
D. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification: For primary and secondary conductors No. 4 AWG and
larger in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes use marker tape. Identify
source and circuit number of each set of conductors. For single conductor cables, identify phase
in addition to the above.

E. Branch-Circuit Conductor Identification: All branch circuits shall be marked in every accessible
junction box, pull box, wireway, panelboard, disconnect switch, motor control center, surface
mounted raceway, hand hole, etc.
F. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach marker tape to conductors and list source and
circuit number.
G. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and
signal connections.
1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull
points. Identify by system and circuit designation.
2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by
manufacturer for factory-installed connections.
3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and
Operation and Maintenance Manual.
H. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power,
lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable. Install as required in Div 26
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.
I. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Comply
with 29 CFR 1910.145 and apply baked-enamel or metal-backed, butyrate warning signs.
Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. Apply to exterior of door,
cover, or other access.
1. Equipment with Multiple Power or Control Sources: Apply to door or cover of equipment
including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Power transfer switches.
b. Controls with external control power connections.
2. Equipment Requiring Workspace Clearance According to NFPA 70: Unless otherwise
indicated, apply to door or cover of equipment but not on flush panelboards and similar
equipment in finished spaces.
J. Instruction Signs:
1. Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and
maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs
with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.
2. Emergency Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red
background with minimum 3/8-inch- high letters for emergency instructions at equipment
used for power transfer.
K. Factory installed nameplates. All equipment shall have a factory installed nameplates. Do not
install nameplates inside of the equipment. Nameplate shall be metal. Provide the following
information on the exterior of panel or inside the door.
1. UL listing.
2. Name of manufacturer
3. Ampere and voltage rating and phasing
4. Short circuit rating

L. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that
is consistent with drawings, wiring diagrams, schedules, and Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control
panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power,
lighting, control, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its
own identification.
1. Labeling Instructions:
a. All electrical equipment shall have nameplates identifying the name of the piece of
equipment or the name of the equipment served (disconnects, starters, etc.). Where the
equipment is remote from its electrical source under the equipment name in smaller
letters the words FED FROM followed by the source panel or riser name shall be
included
b. Nameplates shall be laminated phenolic legend plates with black letters on white
surround for normal power, white letters on a red surround for emergency power and red
letters on a white surround for stand‐by power.
c. Nameplates shall have minimum 0.25 in. high letters for small equipment and
disconnects, 0.5 in. high for medium‐sized wall mounted equipment such as panel boards
and individual Size 2 starters and above, and 2 in. high for freestanding equipment such
as large panel boards, switchgear, and transformers.
d. The nameplates shall be attached with stainless steel screws.
e. All devices, switches, and receptacles shall be labeled with panel and circuit number that
serves them. Labels shall be made from clear label tape with 1/8” high black text. Label
shall be adhered to the front face of the device plate.
f. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for
viewing from the floor.
g. (For example) PANEL 1AL1, 1AL2. [Line 2] FED FROM MSB1
2. Equipment to Be Labeled:
a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures.
b. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.
c. Electrical switchgear and switchboards.
d. Transformers.
e. Electrical substations.
f. Emergency system boxes and enclosures.
g. Disconnect switches.
h. Motor starters.
i. Push-button stations.
j. Power transfer equipment.(Identify “Emergency” and “Optional Standby”)
k. Contactors.
l. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices.
m. Power-generating units.
n. Uninterruptible power supply equipment.
o. Junction boxes and pull boxes with covers larger than 5-by-5-inches.
3. For wiring devices: On front of cover plate, write the panel name for energy source and
circuit number with permanent, indelible ink.
4. For small Pull Boxes, and small Junction Boxes (less than 5-by-5-inches): On front of
cover plate, write the panel name for energy source and circuit number with permanent,
indelible ink.

M. Nominal System Voltage Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique
nominal system voltage and color-coding label that is consistent with drawings, wiring diagrams,
schedules, and Operation and Maintenance Manual.
a. Indoor Equipment: Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 3/8-
inch- high letters on 3/4-inch- high label; where 2 lines of text are required, use labels
1.5 inches high.
b. (For example) 208/120 V, 3 PH-4W
2. Equipment to Be Labeled:
a. Panelboards.
b. Electrical switchgear and switchboards.
c. Motor-control centers.
d. Safety switches used for service entrance disconnecting means or in mechanical
rooms.
e. Power transfer equipment
f. Generators
N. Combined equipment labels. When required above a single nameplate can be created for all
required information. The equipment identification label MUST appear on the first line and shall
be notably larger font than the rest of the information, and all information shall appear on a
separate line. (For example)
PANEL 1AL1
208/120 V, 3 PH-4W
FED FROM MAIN SWITCHBOARD MSBL
O. Main Service Entrance Panels or Switchboards AIC Label: Provide an engraved nameplate
adjacent to the manufacturers nameplate that dispalys the AIC withstand, with the following data.
1. Maximum available calculated 3 phase fault current. (or single phase when applicable)
2. Current date.
P. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide type-written or laser printed circuit directory on heavy
card stock. Arrange in two columns with odd numbered circuits on left and even numbered
circuits on right. Include panelboard identification at the top and installation date. Indicate spare
circuit breakers: “SPARE”. Install in metal frame with clear plastic cover over directory.
Handwritten directories are not acceptable. Indicating the load description for all circuit numbers
installed.
Q. Feeder and Branch Circuit Load Identification Labels: On each overcurrent protective device,
install unique load designation label that is consistent with drawings, wiring diagrams, schedules,
and Operation and Maintenance Manual.
a. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide type-written or laser printed circuit directory
on heavy card stock. Arrange in two columns with odd numbered circuits on left and
even numbered circuits on right. Include panelboard identification at the top and
installation date. Indicate spare circuit breakers: “SPARE”. Install in metal frame
with clear plastic cover over directory. Handwritten directories are not acceptable.
Indicating the load description for all circuit numbers installed.

b. Lighting and Appliance Branch-Circuit Panelboards: Use room names and numbers
furnished by Owner for the actual room numbers. Do not use room names and
numbers indicated on Contract Drawings. Load description shall identify each circuit
number with its clear, evident, and specific purpose. Load description shall include
sufficient detail to allow each circuit to be distinguished from all others.
2. Distribution Panels and Switchboards: Provide a load identification nameplate adjacent to
each overcurrent protective device. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text
with 3/8-inch high letters on 3/4-inch high label; where 2 lines of text are required, use
labels 1.5 inches high.
a. Label shall identify each circuit number with its clear, evident, and specific purpose.
Load description shall include sufficient detail to allow each circuit to be distinguished
from all others. Do not use paper labels. Use room names and numbers furnished by
Owner for the actual room numbers. Do not use room names and numbers indicated
on Contract Drawings.
R. GFI receptacles: Provide a self adhesive, factory furnished label on receptacles cover plate,
“Protected from ground fault device” (or words to that effect). Apply for all standard receptacles
that are fed from a ground fault circuit interrupting breaker or fed downstream from a ground
fault circuit interrupting receptacle (as a thru feed device).
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.
B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing
without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.
D. Attach signs and plastic labels with screws and auxiliary hardware appropriate to the location and
substrate.
E. Painted Identification: Prepare surface and apply paint according to Division 09 painting
Sections.

SECTION 260572 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes a computer-based, fault-current study to determine the minimum interrupting

capacity of circuit protective devices.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not
otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.
B. One-Line Diagram: A diagram which shows, by means of single lines and graphic symbols, the
course of an electric circuit or system of circuits and the component devices or parts used
therein.
C. Protective Device: A device that senses when an abnormal current flow exists and then removes
the affected portion from the system.
D. SCCR: Short-circuit current rating.
E. Service: The conductors and equipment for delivering electric energy from the serving utility to
the wiring system of the premises served.
A. Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies.
B. Other Action Submittals: Submit the following after the approval of system protective devices
submittals. Submittals shall be in digital form.
1. Short-circuit study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets.
2. Short-circuit study and equipment evaluation report; signed, dated, and sealed by a
qualified professional engineer.
a. Submit study report for action prior to receiving final approval of the distribution
equipment submittals. If formal completion of studies will cause delay in
equipment manufacturing, obtain approval from Architect for preliminary
submittal of sufficient study data to ensure that the selection of devices and
associated characteristics is satisfactory.
b. Revised single-line diagram, reflecting field investigation results and results of
short-circuit study.
Project 16018 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE 260572 - 1

AIA/MCS SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY March 3, 2017
C. Prior to ordering equipment, short-circuit study to confirm interrupting ratings of equipment. If

short-circuit results differ from that on drawings, consult with A/E prior to ordering equipment.
A. Qualification Data: For Short-Circuit Study Specialist
B. Product Certificates: For short-circuit study software, certifying compliance with IEEE 399.
A. Studies shall use Easy Power or SKM Power Tools. Software algorithms shall comply with
requirements of standards and guides specified in this Section. Manual calculations are
unacceptable.
B. Short-Circuit Study Specialist Qualifications: Professional engineer in charge of performing the

study and documenting recommendations, licensed in the state where Project is located. All
elements of the study shall be performed under the direct supervision and control of this
professional engineer.
C. Field Adjusting Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and
capability to adjust overcurrent devices and to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member
company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing
laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPUTER SOFTWARE
A. Easy Power or SKM Power Tools
B. Comply with IEEE 399 and IEEE 551.
C. Analytical features of fault-current-study computer software program shall have the capability
to calculate "mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399.
D. Computer software program shall be capable of plotting and diagramming time-current-

characteristic curves as part of its output.
2.2 SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY REPORT CONTENTS
A. Executive summary.
B. Study descriptions, purpose, basis, and scope. Include case descriptions, definition of terms, and
guide for interpretation of the computer printout.
C. One-line diagram, showing the following from the utility transformer to all three phase
electrical equipment:
1. Protective device designations, ampere ratings, and settings.

2. Cable size and lengths.

3. Transformer kilovolt ampere (kVA) and voltage ratings.
4. Motor and generator designations and kVA ratings.
5. Switchgear, switchboard, motor-control center, and panelboard designations.
D. Comments and recommendations for system improvements, where needed.
E. Protective Device Evaluation:

1. Evaluate equipment and protective devices and compare to short-circuit ratings.
2. Tabulations of circuit breaker, fuse, and other protective device ratings versus calculated
short-circuit duties.
3. For 600-V overcurrent protective devices, ensure that interrupting ratings are equal to or
higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.
4. For devices and equipment rated for asymmetrical fault current, apply multiplication
factors listed in the standards to 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.
5. Verify adequacy of phase conductors at maximum three-phase bolted fault currents;
verify adequacy of equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors
at maximum ground-fault currents. Ensure that short-circuit withstand ratings are equal to
or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.
F. Short-Circuit Study Input Data: As described in "Power System Data" Article in the
Evaluations.
G. Short-Circuit Study Output:

1. Low-Voltage Fault Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the
following for each overcurrent device location:
a. Voltage.
b. Calculated fault-current magnitude and angle.
c. Fault-point X/R ratio.
d. Equivalent impedance.
2. Momentary Duty Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the
a. Voltage.
b. Calculated symmetrical fault-current magnitude and angle.
d. Calculated asymmetrical fault currents:
1) Based on fault-point X/R ratio.
2) Based on calculated symmetrical value multiplied by 1.6.
3) Based on calculated symmetrical value multiplied by 2.7.
3. Interrupting Duty Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the
a. Voltage.
d. No AC Decrement (NACD) ratio.
e. Equivalent impedance.
f. Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a
symmetrical basis.
g. Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a total basis.

H. Results of the short circuit study are to match the AIC ratings of each piece of electrical
equipment on this project. Coordinate with gear supplier on AIC ratings of equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Obtain all data necessary for the conduct of the study.

1. Verify completeness of data supplied on the one-line diagram. Call any discrepancies to
the attention of Architect.
2. For equipment provided that is Work of this Project, use characteristics submitted under
the provisions of action submittals and information submittals for this Project.
B. Gather and tabulate the following input data to support the short-circuit study. Comply with
recommendations in IEEE 551 as to the amount of detail that is required to be acquired in the
field. Field data gathering shall be under the direct supervision and control of the engineer in
charge of performing the study, and shall be by the engineer or its representative who holds
NETA ETT Level III certification or NICET Electrical Power Testing Level III certification.
1. Product Data for Project's overcurrent protective devices involved in overcurrent
protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags that are consistent
with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective device submittals,
input and output data, and recommended device settings.
2. Obtain electrical power utility impedance at the service.
3. Power sources and ties.
4. For transformers, include kVA, primary and secondary voltages, connection type,
impedance, X/R ratio, taps measured in percent, and phase shift.
5. For reactors, provide manufacturer and model designation, voltage rating, and
impedance.
6. For circuit breakers and fuses, provide manufacturer and model designation. List type of
breaker, type of trip, SCCR, current rating, and breaker settings.
7. Generator short-circuit current contribution data, including short-circuit reactance, rated
kVA, rated voltage, and X/R ratio.
8. Busway manufacturer and model designation, current rating, impedance, lengths, and
conductor material.
9. Motor horsepower and NEMA MG 1 code letter designation.
10. Cable sizes, lengths, number, conductor material and conduit material (magnetic or
nonmagnetic).
3.2 SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY
A. Perform study following the general study procedures contained in IEEE 399.
B. Calculate short-circuit currents according to IEEE 551.
C. Base study on the device characteristics supplied by device manufacturer.
D. The extent of the electrical power system to be studied is indicated on Drawings.
E. Begin short-circuit current analysis at the service, extending down to the system overcurrent
protective devices as follows:

1. To normal system low-voltage load buses where fault current is 10 kA or less.
F. Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout
electrical distribution system for Project. Study all cases of system-switching configurations and
alternate operations that could result in maximum fault conditions.
G. The calculations shall include the ac fault-current decay from induction motors, synchronous
motors, and asynchronous generators and shall apply to low- and medium-voltage, three-phase
ac systems. The calculations shall also account for the fault-current dc decrement, to address the
asymmetrical requirements of the interrupting equipment.
1. For grounded systems, provide a bolted line-to-ground fault-current study for areas as
defined for the three-phase bolted fault short-circuit study.
H. Calculate short-circuit momentary and interrupting duties for a three-phase bolted fault at each
of the following:
1. Electric utility's supply termination point.
2. Incoming switchgear.
3. Unit substation primary and secondary terminals.
4. Low-voltage switchgear.
5. Motor-control centers.
6. Control panels.
7. Standby generators and automatic transfer switches.
8. Branch circuit panelboards.
9. Disconnect switches.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Make minor modifications to equipment as required to accomplish compliance with short-

circuit study.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's operating and maintenance personnel in the use of study results.

SECTION 260573 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes computer-based, overcurrent protective device coordination studies to

determine overcurrent protective devices and to determine overcurrent protective device settings
for selective tripping.
1. Study results shall be used to determine coordination of series-rated devices.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not
otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.
B. One-Line Diagram: A diagram which shows, by means of single lines and graphic symbols, the
therein.
C. Protective Device: A device that senses when an abnormal current flow exists and then removes
D. SCCR: Short-circuit current rating.
E. Service: The conductors and equipment for delivering electric energy from the serving utility to
B. Other Action Submittals: Submit the following after the approval of system protective devices
submittals. Submittals shall be in digital form.
1. Coordination-study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets.
2. Study and equipment evaluation reports.
3. Overcurrent protective device coordination study report; signed, dated, and sealed by a
qualified professional engineer.

AIA/MCS CO0ORDINATION STUDY March 3, 2017
A. Qualification Data: For Coordination Study Specialist.
B. Product Certificates: For overcurrent protective device coordination study software, certifying
compliance with IEEE 399.
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For the overcurrent protective devices to include in
1. In addition to items specified in Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data,"
a. The following parts from the Protective Device Coordination Study Report:
1) One-line diagram.
2) Protective device coordination study.
3) Time-current coordination curves.
b. Power system data.
A. Studies shall use Easy Power or SKM. Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of
standards and guides specified in this Section. Manual calculations are unacceptable.
B. Coordination Study Software Developer Qualifications: An entity that owns and markets
computer software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similar magnitude
on electrical distribution systems using similar devices.
1. The computer program shall be developed under the charge of a licensed professional
engineer who holds IEEE Computer Society's Certified Software Development
Professional certification.
C. Coordination Study Specialist Qualifications: Professional engineer in charge of performing the

study and documenting recommendations, licensed in the state where Project is located. All
elements of the study shall be performed under the direct supervision and control of this
professional engineer.
D. Field Adjusting Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS
A. Software Developers:
1. Easy Power
2. SKM Power Tools

B. Comply with IEEE 242 and IEEE 399.
C. Analytical features of device coordination study computer software program shall have the
capability to calculate "mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in
IEEE 399.
D. Computer software program shall be capable of plotting and diagramming time-current-

characteristic curves as part of its output. Computer software program shall report device
settings and ratings of all overcurrent protective devices and shall demonstrate selective
coordination by computer-generated, time-current coordination plots.
1. Optional Features:
a. Arcing faults.
b. Simultaneous faults.
c. Explicit negative sequence.
d. Mutual coupling in zero sequence.
2.2 PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY REPORT CONTENTS
B. Study descriptions, purpose, basis and scope. Include case descriptions, definition of terms and
guide for interpretation of the computer printout.
C. Coordination Study shall be performed from secondary of utility transformer and for all 3 phase
electrical equipment.
D. One-line diagram, showing the following:

1. Protective device designations and ampere ratings.
5. Switchgear, switchboard, motor-control center, and panelboard designations.
E. Study Input Data: As described in "Power System Data" Article.
F. Short-Circuit Study Output: As specified in "Short-Circuit Study Output" Paragraph in "Short-

Circuit Study Report Contents" Article in Section 26 05 72 "Overcurrent Protective Device
Short-Circuit Study."
G. Protective Device Coordination Study:

1. Report recommended settings of protective devices, ready to be applied in the field. Use
manufacturer's data sheets for recording the recommended setting of overcurrent
protective devices when available.
a. Phase and Ground Relays:
1) Device tag.
2) Relay current transformer ratio and tap, time dial, and instantaneous pickup
value.
3) Recommendations on improved relaying systems, if applicable.
b. Circuit Breakers:
1) Adjustable pickups and time delays (long time, short time, ground).

2) Adjustable time-current characteristic.

3) Adjustable instantaneous pickup.
4) Recommendations on improved trip systems, if applicable.
c. Fuses: Show current rating, voltage, and class.
H. Time-Current Coordination Curves: Determine settings of overcurrent protective devices to

achieve selective coordination. Graphically illustrate that adequate time separation exists
between devices installed in series, including power utility company's upstream devices.
Prepare separate sets of curves for the switching schemes and for emergency periods where the
power source is local generation. Show the following information:
1. Device tag and title, one-line diagram with legend identifying the portion of the system
covered.
2. Terminate device characteristic curves at a point reflecting maximum symmetrical or
asymmetrical fault current to which the device is exposed.
3. Identify the device associated with each curve by manufacturer type, function, and, if
applicable, tap, time delay, and instantaneous settings recommended.
4. Plot the following listed characteristic curves, as applicable:
a. Power utility's overcurrent protective device.
b. Medium-voltage equipment overcurrent relays.
c. Medium- and low-voltage fuses including manufacturer's minimum melt, total
clearing, tolerance, and damage bands.
d. Low-voltage equipment circuit-breaker trip devices, including manufacturer's
tolerance bands.
e. Transformer full-load current, magnetizing inrush current, and ANSI through-fault
protection curves.
f. Cables and conductors damage curves.
g. Ground-fault protective devices.
h. Motor-starting characteristics and motor damage points.
i. Generator short-circuit decrement curve and generator damage point.
j. The largest feeder circuit breaker in each motor-control center and panelboard.
5. Provide adequate time margins between device characteristics such that selective
operation is achieved.
6. Comments and recommendations for system improvements.
I. Recommended circuit breaker settings from this study are to be applied to the applicable circuit
breaker.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals for compliance with electrical
distribution system coordination requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
Devices to be coordinated are indicated on Drawings.
1. Proceed with coordination study only after relevant equipment submittals have been
assembled. Overcurrent protective devices that have not been submitted and approved
prior to coordination study may not be used in study.

3.2 PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY
A. Comply with IEEE 242 for calculating short-circuit currents and determining coordination time
intervals.
B. Comply with IEEE 399 for general study procedures.
C. The study shall be based on the device characteristics supplied by device manufacturer.
D. The extent of the electrical power system to be studied is indicated on Drawings.
E. Begin analysis at the service, extending down to the system overcurrent protective devices as
follows:
1. To normal system low-voltage load buses where fault current is 10 kA or less.
F. Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout
electrical distribution system for Project. Study all cases of system-switching configurations and
alternate operations that could result in maximum fault conditions.
G. Transformer Primary Overcurrent Protective Devices:

1. Device shall not operate in response to the following:
a. Inrush current when first energized.
b. Self-cooled, full-load current or forced-air-cooled, full-load current, whichever is
specified for that transformer.
c. Permissible transformer overloads according to IEEE C57.96 if required by
unusual loading or emergency conditions.
2. Device settings shall protect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.00, for fault
currents.
H. Motor Protection:
1. Select protection for low-voltage motors according to IEEE 242 and NFPA 70.
2. Select protection for motors served at voltages more than 600 V according to IEEE 620.
I. Conductor Protection: Protect cables against damage from fault currents according to ICEA P-
32-382, ICEA P-45-482, and protection recommendations in IEEE 242. Demonstrate that
equipment withstands the maximum short-circuit current for a time equivalent to the tripping
time of the primary relay protection or total clearing time of the fuse. To determine
temperatures that damage insulation, use curves from cable manufacturers or from listed
standards indicating conductor size and short-circuit current.
J. Generator Protection: Select protection according to manufacturer's written recommendations

and to IEEE 242.
K. The calculations shall include the ac fault-current decay from induction motors, synchronous
motors, and asynchronous generators and shall apply to low- and medium-voltage, three-phase
ac systems. The calculations shall also account for the fault-current dc decrement, to address the
asymmetrical requirements of the interrupting equipment.
1. For grounded systems, provide a bolted line-to-ground fault-current study for areas as
defined for the three-phase bolted fault short-circuit study.

L. Calculate short-circuit momentary and interrupting duties for a three-phase bolted fault and
single line-to-ground fault at each of the following:
1. Electric utility's supply termination point.
2. Switchgear.
3. Unit substation primary and secondary terminals.
4. Low-voltage switchgear.
5. Motor-control centers.
6. Standby generators and automatic transfer switches.
7. Branch circuit panelboards.
M. Protective Device Evaluation:

1. Evaluate equipment and protective devices and compare to short-circuit ratings.
2. Adequacy of switchgear, motor-control centers, and panelboard bus bars to withstand
short-circuit stresses.
3. Any application of series-rated devices shall be recertified, complying with requirements
in NFPA 70.
3.3 POWER SYSTEM DATA
A. Obtain all data necessary for the conduct of the overcurrent protective device study.
1. Verify completeness of data supplied in the one-line diagram on Drawings. Call
discrepancies to the attention of Architect.
2. For new equipment, use characteristics submitted under the provisions of action
submittals and information submittals for this Project.
3. For existing equipment, whether or not relocated obtain required electrical distribution
system data by field investigation and surveys, conducted by qualified technicians and
engineers. The qualifications of technicians and engineers shall be qualified as defined by
NFPA 70E.
B. Gather and tabulate the following input data to support coordination study. The list below is a
guide. Comply with recommendations in IEEE 551 for the amount of detail required to be
acquired in the field. Field data gathering shall be under the direct supervision and control of the
engineer in charge of performing the study, and shall be by the engineer or its representative
who holds NETA ETT Level III certification or NICET Electrical Power Testing Level III
certification.
1. Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other Sections and involved
in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags
that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective
device submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings.
2. Electrical power utility impedance at the service.
4. Short-circuit current at each system bus, three phase and line-to-ground.
5. Full-load current of all loads.
6. Voltage level at each bus.
impedance, X/R ratio, taps measured in percent, and phase shift.
8. For reactors, provide manufacturer and model designation, voltage rating, and
impedance.

breaker, type of trip and available range of settings, SCCR, current rating, and breaker
settings.
11. For relays, provide manufacturer and model designation, current transformer ratios,
potential transformer ratios, and relay settings.
12. Maximum demands from service meters.
conductor material.
15. Low-voltage cable sizes, lengths, number, conductor material, and conduit material
(magnetic or nonmagnetic).
16. Medium-voltage cable sizes, lengths, conductor material, and cable construction and
metallic shield performance parameters.
17. Data sheets to supplement electrical distribution system diagram, cross-referenced with
tag numbers on diagram, showing the following:
a. Special load considerations, including starting inrush currents and frequent starting
and stopping.
b. Transformer characteristics, including primary protective device, magnetic inrush
current, and overload capability.
c. Motor full-load current, locked rotor current, service factor, starting time, type of
start, and thermal-damage curve.
d. Generator thermal-damage curve.
e. Ratings, types, and settings of utility company's overcurrent protective devices.
f. Special overcurrent protective device settings or types stipulated by utility
company.
g. Time-current-characteristic curves of devices indicated to be coordinated.
h. Manufacturer, frame size, interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical, ampere
or current sensor rating, long-time adjustment range, short-time adjustment range,
and instantaneous adjustment range for circuit breakers.
i. Manufacturer and type, ampere-tap adjustment range, time-delay adjustment range,
instantaneous attachment adjustment range, and current transformer ratio for
overcurrent relays.
j. Panelboards, switchboards, motor-control center ampacity, and SCCR in amperes
rms symmetrical.
k. Identify series-rated interrupting devices for a condition where the available fault
current is greater than the interrupting rating of the downstream equipment. Obtain
device data details to allow verification that series application of these devices
complies with NFPA 70 and UL 489 requirements.
3.4 FIELD ADJUSTING
A. Adjust relay and protective device settings according to the recommended settings provided by
the coordination study. Field adjustments shall be completed by the engineering service division
of the equipment manufacturer under the Startup and Acceptance Testing contract portion.
B. Make minor modifications to equipment as required to accomplish compliance with short-

circuit and protective device coordination studies.

C. Testing and adjusting shall be by a full-time employee of the Field Adjusting Agency, who
holds NETA ETT Level III certification or NICET Electrical Power Testing Level III
certification.
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. Perform
NETA tests and inspections for all adjustable overcurrent protective devices.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage the Coordination Study Specialist to train Owner's maintenance personnel in the
following:
1. Acquaint personnel in the fundamentals of operating the power system in normal and
emergency modes.
2. Hand-out and explain the objectives of the coordination study, study descriptions,
purpose, basis, and scope. Include case descriptions, definition of terms, and guide for
interpreting the time-current coordination curves.
3. Adjust, operate, and maintain overcurrent protective device settings.

SECTION 260574 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE ARC-FLASH STUDY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes a computer-based, arc-flash study to determine the arc-flash hazard distance
and the incident energy to which personnel could be exposed during work on or near electrical
equipment.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. One-Line Diagram: A diagram which shows, by means of single lines and graphic symbols, the
therein.
B. Protective Device: A device that senses when an abnormal current flow exists and then removes
C. SCCR: Short-circuit current rating.
D. Service: The conductors and equipment for delivering electric energy from the serving utility to
B. Other Action Submittals: Submit the following submittals after the approval of system
protective devices submittals. Submittals shall be in digital form.
1. Arc-flash study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets.
2. Arc-flash study report; signed, dated, and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.
A. Qualification Data: For Arc-Flash Study Specialist
B. Product Certificates: For arc-flash hazard analysis software, certifying compliance with
IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E.
Project 16018 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE ARC-FLASH STUDY 260574 - 1

A. Maintenance procedures according to requirements in NFPA 70E shall be provided in the

equipment manuals.
B. Operation and Maintenance Procedures: In addition to items specified in Section 01 78 23

"Operation and Maintenance Data," provide maintenance procedures for use by Owner's
personnel that comply with requirements in NFPA 70E.
A. Studies shall use Easy Power or SKM Power Tools. Software algorithms shall comply with
requirements of standards and guides specified in this Section. Manual calculations are
unacceptable.
B. Arc-Flash Study Specialist Qualifications: Professional engineer in charge of performing the

study, analyzing the arc flash, and documenting recommendations, licensed in the state where
Project is located. All elements of the study shall be performed under the direct supervision and
control of this professional engineer.
C. Field Adjusting Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS
A. Software Developers:
1. Easy Power
2. SKM Power Tools
B. Comply with IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E.
C. Analytical features of device coordination study computer software program shall have the
capability to calculate "mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in
IEEE 399.
2.2 ARC-FLASH STUDY REPORT CONTENT
B. Study descriptions, purpose, basis and scope.
C. One-line diagram, showing the following from the utility transformer to all three phase
electrical equipment:
1. Protective device designations and ampere ratings.


5. Switchgear, switchboard, motor-control center and panelboard designations.
D. Study Input Data: As described in "Power System Data" Article.
E. Short-Circuit Study Output: As specified in "Short Circuit Study Output" Paragraph in "Short-
Circuit Study Report Contents" Article in Section 26 05 72 "Overcurrent Protective Device
Short-Circuit Study."
F. Protective Device Coordination Study Report Contents: As specified in "Protective Device

Coordination Study Report Contents" Article in Section 26 05 73 "Overcurrent Protective
Device Coordination Study."
G. Arc-Flash Study Output:

1. Interrupting Duty Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the
a. Voltage.
d. No AC Decrement (NACD) ratio.
e. Equivalent impedance.
f. Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a
symmetrical basis.
g. Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a total basis.
H. Incident Energy and Flash Protection Boundary Calculations:

1. Arcing fault magnitude.
2. Protective device clearing time.
3. Duration of arc.
4. Arc-flash boundary.
5. Working distance.
6. Incident energy.
7. Hazard risk category.
8. Recommendations for arc-flash energy reduction.
I. Fault study input data, case descriptions, and fault-current calculations including a definition of
terms and guide for interpretation of the computer printout.
J. Settings recommendations to reduce incident energy levels below 8 cal/cm2.
K. UV resistant labels for each piece of equipment and field applied to that equipment.
2.3 ARC-FLASH WARNING LABELS
A. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." Produce

a 3.5-by-5-inch thermal transfer label of high-adhesion polyester for each work location
included in the analysis.

B. The label shall have an orange header with the wording, "WARNING, ARC-FLASH
HAZARD," and shall include the following information taken directly from the arc-flash hazard
analysis:
1. Location designation.
2. Nominal voltage.
3. Flash protection boundary.
4. Hazard risk category.
5. Incident energy.
6. Working distance.
7. Engineering report number, revision number, and issue date.
C. Labels shall be machine printed, with no field-applied markings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals. Proceed with arc-flash study only
after relevant equipment submittals have been assembled. Overcurrent protective devices that
have not been submitted and approved prior to arc-flash study may not be used in study.
3.2 ARC-FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS
A. Comply with NFPA 70E and its Annex D for hazard analysis study.
B. Preparatory Studies:
1. Short-Circuit Study Output: As specified in "Short-Circuit Study Output" Paragraph in
"Short-Circuit Study Report Contents" Article in Section 26 05 72 "Overcurrent
Protective Device Short-Circuit Study."
2. Protective Device Coordination Study Report Contents: As specified in "Protective
Device Coordination Study Report Contents" Article in Section 26 05 73 "Overcurrent
Protective Device Coordination Study."
C. Calculate maximum and minimum contributions of fault-current size.

1. The minimum calculation shall assume that the utility contribution is at a minimum and
shall assume no motor load.
2. The maximum calculation shall assume a maximum contribution from the utility and
shall assume motors to be operating under full-load conditions.
D. Calculate the arc-flash protection boundary and incident energy at locations in the electrical
distribution system where personnel could perform work on energized parts.
E. Safe working distances shall be specified for calculated fault locations based on the calculated
arc-flash boundary, considering incident energy of 1.2 cal/sq.cm.
F. Incident energy calculations shall consider the accumulation of energy over time when
performing arc-flash calculations on buses with multiple sources. Iterative calculations shall
take into account the changing current contributions, as the sources are interrupted or
decremented with time. Fault contribution from motors and generators shall be decremented as
follows:

1. Fault contribution from induction motors should not be considered beyond three to five
cycles.
2. Fault contribution from synchronous motors and generators should be decayed to match
the actual decrement of each as closely as possible (e.g., contributions from permanent
magnet generators will typically decay from 10 per unit to three per unit after 10 cycles).
G. Arc-flash computation shall include both line and load side of a circuit breaker as follows:
1. When the circuit breaker is in a separate enclosure.
2. When the line terminals of the circuit breaker are separate from the work location.
H. Base arc-flash calculations on actual overcurrent protective device clearing time. Cap maximum
clearing time at two seconds based on IEEE 1584, Section B.1.2.
3.3 POWER SYSTEM DATA
A. Obtain all data necessary for the conduct of the arc-flash hazard analysis.
1. Verify completeness of data supplied on the one-line diagram on Drawings. Call
discrepancies to the attention of Architect.
2. For new equipment, use characteristics submitted under the provisions of action
submittals and information submittals for this Project.
3. For existing equipment, whether or not relocated, obtain required electrical distribution
system data by field investigation and surveys, conducted by qualified technicians and
engineers.
B. Electrical Survey Data: Gather and tabulate the following input data to support study. Comply
with recommendations in IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E as to the amount of detail that is required
to be acquired in the field. Field data gathering shall be under the direct supervision and control
of the engineer in charge of performing the study, and shall be by the engineer or its
representative who holds NETA ETT Level III certification or NICET Electrical Power Testing
Level III certification.
1. Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other Sections and involved
in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags
that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective
device submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings.
2. Obtain electrical power utility impedance at the service.
4. Short-circuit current at each system bus, three phase and line-to-ground.
5. Full-load current of all loads.
6. Voltage level at each bus.
impedance, X/R ratio, taps measured in per cent, and phase shift.
8. For reactors, provide manufacturer and model designation, voltage rating and impedance.
breaker, type of trip and available range of settings, SCCR, current rating, and breaker
settings.
11. For relays, provide manufacturer and model designation, current transformer ratios,
potential transformer ratios, and relay settings.

conductor material.
14. Low-voltage cable sizes, lengths, number, conductor material and conduit material
(magnetic or nonmagnetic).
15. Medium-voltage cable sizes, lengths, conductor material, and cable construction and
metallic shield performance parameters.
3.4 LABELING
A. Apply one arc-flash label for 600-V ac, 480-V ac, and applicable 208-V ac panelboards and
disconnects and for each of the following locations:
1. Motor-control center section.
2. Low-voltage switchboard.
3. Switchgear section.
4. Medium-voltage switch section.
5. Control panel.
3.5 APPLICATION OF WARNING LABELS
A. Install the arc-fault warning labels under the direct supervision and control of the Arc-Flash
Study Specialist.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage the Arc-Flash Study Specialist to train Owner's maintenance personnel in the potential
arc-flash hazards associated with working on energized equipment and the significance of the
arc-flash warning labels.

SECTION 260800 – COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes specific requirements that apply to implementation of commissioning of

electrical systems, assemblies, or components.
1. Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for responsibilities of
Contractor, Owner, and Commissioning Authority.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Commissioning. Commissioning is a systematic process of ensuring that all building systems

perform interactively according to the design intent and the owner’s operational needs. This is
achieved by beginning in the design phase and documenting design intent and continuing through
construction, acceptance and the warranty period with actual verification of performance. The
commissioning process shall encompass and coordinate the traditionally separate functions of
system documentation, equipment startup, control system calibration, testing and balancing,
performance testing and training.
1. Commissioning during the construction phase is intended to achieve the following specific
objectives according to the Contract Documents:
a. Verify that applicable equipment and systems are installed according to the
manufacturer’s recommendations and to industry accepted minimum standards and
that they receive adequate operational checkout by installing contractors.
b. Verify and document proper performance of equipment and systems.
c. Verify that operation and maintenance documentation left on site is complete.
d. Verify that the Owner’s operating personnel are adequately trained.
2. The commissioning process does not take away from or reduce the responsibility of the
installing contractors to provide a finished and fully functioning product.
3. Refer to Division 01 Section “General Commissioning Requirements” for complete
commissioning plan and specifications.
1.4 SYSTEMS TO BE COMMISSIONED
A. Contractor shall perform commissioning requirements specified in Section 010800 and other
sections referenced in Section 010800.
B. The following systems will be commissioned in this project.

1. Lighting Control Systems
2. Electrical distribution systems
a. Service entrance equipment
Project 16018 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260800 - 1

b. Switchboards
c. Power and lighting panelboards
3. Grounding systems
4. Ground fault detection systems
5. Emergency Power Systems
a. Generator Set
b. Automatic Transfer Switch
6. Thermal Imaging of all power and lighting panels to be included in the electrical scope of
work.
C. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:
1. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after
Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove front panels so
joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.
2. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each
panelboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
3. Instruments and Equipment:
a. Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect
significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.
1.5 TEST EQUIPMENT
A. Standard testing equipment required to perform startup and initial checkout and required
functional performance testing shall be provided by the Contractor for the equipment being
tested. For example, the electrical contractor shall ultimately be responsible for standard testing
equipment for the electrical system, except for equipment specific to and used by Commissioning
Authority in their commissioning responsibilities.
B. Special equipment, tools and instruments (only available from vendor, specific to a piece of
equipment) required for testing equipment, according to these Contract Documents shall be
included in the base bid price to the Contractor and left on site, except for stand-alone
datalogging equipment that may be used by the Commissioning Authority.
C. Datalogging equipment and software required to test equipment will be provided by the
Commissioning Authority, but shall not become the property of the Owner.
D. Testing equipment shall be of sufficient quality and accuracy to test and measure system
performance with the tolerances specified in the Specifications.
Project 16018 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260800 - 2

SECTION 260923 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following lighting control devices:

1. Time switches.
2. Outdoor and indoor photoelectric switches.
3. Indoor occupancy sensors.
4. External Emergency transfer devices.

1. Division 26 Section "Network Lighting Controls" for low-voltage, manual and
programmable lighting control systems.
2. Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for wall-box dimmers and manual light switches.
3. Division 26 Section "Interior Lighting" for luminaires use in the interior of the building.
4. Division 26 Section "Exterior Lighting" for luminaires use on the exterior of the building.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. LED: Light-emitting diode.
B. PIR: Passive infrared.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

1. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency,
intended use.
Project 16018 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 1

1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that
penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke
detectors, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where title below introduces lists, the following requirement applies for
product selection:
2.2 ELECTROMECHANICAL-DIAL TIME SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Intermatic, Inc.
2. Paragon Electric Co.; Invensys Climate Controls.
3. TORK.
B. Description: Type complying with UL 917.

1. Contact Configuration: SPST, DPST, SPDT, or DPDT as required for application.
2. Contact Rating: 40-A resistive, 277-V ac.
3. Skip-a-day mode.
4. Wound-spring reserve carryover mechanism to keep time during power failures, minimum
of 16 hours.
5. Astronomic time dial.
2.3 OUTDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Intermatic, Inc.
2. Leviton Mfg. Co., Inc.; Lighting Control Division.
3. Paragon Electric Co.; Invensys Climate Controls.
4. TORK.
B. Description: Solid state, with SPST or DPST dry contacts as required for application, rated for
1800-VA tungsten or 1000-VA inductive, to operate connected relay, contactor coils, or
microprocessor input; complying with UL 773A.
1. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc, with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off
levels within that range, and a directional lens in front of photocell to prevent fixed light
sources from causing turn-off.
2. Time Delay: 15-second minimum, to prevent false operation.
3. Surge Protection: Metal-oxide varistor, complying with IEEE C62.41.1, IEEE C62.41.2,
and IEEE 62.45 for Category A1 locations.

4. Mounting: Twist lock complying with IEEE C136.10, with base-and-stem mounting or
stem-and-swivel mounting accessories as required to direct sensor.
2.4 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Sensor Switch, Inc.; an Acuity Brands company.
B. General Description: Wall- or ceiling-mounting, solid-state units with a separate relay unit,
complying with NEMA WD 7.
1. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, self adjusting to turn lights on when covered area is
occupied and off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, manually
adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.
2. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A.
Sensor shall be powered from the relay unit.
3. Relay Unit: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A
tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Power supply to sensor shall be 24-V dc,
150-mA, Class 2 power source as defined by NFPA 70.
a. Provide dry contact for integration with building management system in addition to
contact required for lighting control.
4. Mounting:
a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box.
b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch knockout in a standard electrical
enclosure.
c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged
door.
5. Indicator: LED, to show when motion is being detected during testing and normal operation
of the sensor.
6. Bypass Switch: Override the on function in case of sensor failure.
7. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc; keep lighting off when
selected lighting level is present.
C. Dual-Technology Type (Plan Type “CT”): Ceiling mounting; detect occupancy by using a
combination of PIR and ultrasonic detection methods in area of coverage. Particular technology
or combination of technologies that controls on-off functions shall be selectable in the field by
operating controls on unit.
1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology.
2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- minimum movement of any portion of a
human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in, and detect a person of average
size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at
an approximate speed of 12 inches/s .
3. (Plan Type “CT”) 360 Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere
within a circular area of 2000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling.
4. (Plan Type “CT”) 180 Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere
within a half circular area of 1200 sq. ft. (min.) when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling.
Provide with ceiling mounting bracket if not supplied as standard with sensor

D. Wall Mounted Dual-Technology Type (Plan Type “WT”): Wall mounting; detect occupancy by
using a combination of PIR and ultrasonic detection methods in area of coverage. Particular
technology or combination of technologies that controls on-off functions shall be selectable in the
field by operating controls on unit.
1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology.
2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- minimum movement of any portion of a
human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in, and detect a person of average
size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at
an approximate speed of 12 inches/s.
3. Detection Coverage: Detect occupancy anywhere within a 180 degree area of 1200 sq. ft.
(min.) when mounted at 96-inches above finish floor.
4. Mounting: Articulating mounting base.
E. Wall-Switch Sensors, Passive-Infrared Type (Plan Type “SI”):

1. Description: Passive-infrared type, 120/277 V, adjustable time delay up to 20 minutes,
manual override switch, 180-degree field of view, with a minimum coverage area of 900 sq.
ft., complying with NEMA WD 7.
2. Device color to match other supplied wiring devices. Refer to Division 26 Section “Wiring
Devices” for requirements.
F. Power Pack: Self-contained power pack with transformer and relay (an ON/OFF switch
controlled by a circuit) compatible with the supplied occupancy sensors designed for low-voltage
24 VDC occupancy sensors.
1. Universal voltage input (100–277 VAC; 50/60Hz).
2. Automatic voltage detection.
3. Electrical load switching capability: maximum of 20 Amps.
4. Regulated 24 VDC current; 150mA output; short circuit protected.
5. Zero Arc Point Switching.
6. Plenum rated.
7. Suitable for mounting inside or outside a junction box, or inside a ballast or driver cavity.
8. UL and cUL listed
2.5 OUTDOOR MOTION SENSORS (PIR)
A. Manufacturers:
B. Performance Requirements: Suitable for operation in ambient temperatures ranging from minus
40 to plus 130 deg F, rated as raintight according to UL 773A.
1. Operation: Turn lights on when sensing infrared energy changes between background and
moving body in area of coverage; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a
minimum range of 1 to 30 minutes.
2. Mounting:
a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outdoor junction box.
b. Relay: Internally mounted in a standard weatherproof electrical enclosure.
c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged
door.
3. Bypass Switch: Override the on function in case of sensor failure.
4. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 1 to 20 fc ; keep lighting off during
daylight hours.

C. Detection Coverage: Up to 35 feet, with a field of view of 180 degrees.
D. Individually Mounted Sensor: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with
UL 773A. Sensor shall be powered from the relay unit.
2. Indicator: LED, to show when motion is being detected during testing and normal operation
of the sensor.
2.6 INDOOR DAYLIGHT SENSOR

following:
B. Ceiling-Mounted Daylight Sensors: Solid-state, light-level sensor unit, with separate relay unit,
to detect changes in lighting levels that are perceived by the eye. Cadmium sulfide photoresistors
are not acceptable.
1. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the associated relay, complying with UL 773A.
Sensor shall be powered from the relay unit.
3. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 10 to 200 fc, with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off
levels within that range.
4. Time Delay: Adjustable from 5 to 300 seconds to prevent cycling, with deadband
adjustment.
5. Indicator: Two LEDs to indicate the beginning of on-off cycles.
2.7 LIGHTING CONTACTORS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Products.
2. Square D; Schneider Electric.
B. Description: Electrically operated and electrically held, complying with NEMA ICS 2 and
UL 508.
1. Current Rating for Switching: 30-A LED lighting rating,
2. Contacts: Two through 12 poles, field-convertible contacts.
3. Fault Current Withstand Rating: Equal to or exceeding the available fault current at the
point of installation.
4. Control Circuit: 120 or 277V Coil as shown on drawings: Provide integral control power
transformer, with integral primary and secondary fusing. With sufficient capacity to operate
connected load plus 100 percent spare capacity.
5. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1.
6. Provide with the following control and pilot devices, matching the NEMA type specified for
the enclosure:
a. Hand/Off/Automatic selector switch in cover.
b. Green pilot light to indicate contacts are energized.

c. Nameplates for all devices
2.8 REMOTE EMERGENCY TRANSFER DEVICE (RTD), REMOTE FROM LUMINAIRE TO

CONTROL A WHOLE CIRCUIT

following manufacturers:
1. Bodine
B. Whole Circuit Emergency Transfer Devices: When the facility has an emergency generator,
provide a field mounted, emergency transfer switch unit, adjacent to emergency panel as shown
on drawings.
1. Comply with UL 924.
2. Provide 120 or 277 V, 60 Hz operation as indicated.
3. Provide threaded hub to attach to electrical box.
4. Provide temperature rating from minus 4 deg F to 131 deg F.
5. Provide device capable of switching 20 amps, minimum, electronic fluorescent or
incandescent load.
6. LED lamp(s) as intended shall display Normal Mode Operation: Normal AC power is
present. AC load controlled by wall switch.
7. LED lamp(s) as intended shall display Emergency Mode Operation: Normal AC power
fails. Emergency transfer device senses normal AC power failure and automatically
switches to emergency AC power, bypassing wall switch. When normal AC power is
restored, emergency transfer device switches system back to normal mode operation.
8. Provide external push to test button.
9. Provide one device per each emergency circuit, unless otherwise indicated.
2.9 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG.
Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors
and Cables."
B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not
smaller than No. 18 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage
Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than
No. 14 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SENSOR INSTALLATION
A. Provide occupancy sensors, power packs, and all associated accessories, backboxes, conduit,
wiring, etc. for a complete installation of occupancy sensor controlled lighting for rooms
indicated as requiring occupancy sensor control on the Drawings

B. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas
indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Occupancy Adjustments: Adjust each sensor to suit occupied conditions. Adjust time delay on
all occupancy sensors to its maximum setting, 30 minutes or longer. Adjust sensitivity to quickly
pick up motion or presence of a person. Coordinate any required adjustments of occupancy
sensors (as applicable for selected manufacturer) with the Owner and make any adjustments as
directed.
D. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion,

provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit occupied conditions. Provide up to two
visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.
E. Wire occupancy sensors per manufacturer’s recommendations to allow for both sensor and
manual control of lighting as indicated on the Drawings.
F. Power packs shall be provided in the quantity required to serve occupancy sensor(s) with the
switching and branch circuiting schemes indicated on the Drawings. Power pack
locations/quantities are not indicated on the Drawings. Power packs shall be plenum rated.
Install power pack on local branch circuit junction box serving local area lighting.
3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Wiring Method: Comply with Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors
and Cables."
B. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and non-power-
limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions, unless
D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: DO NOT SPLICE LOW VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS

OUTSIDE OF A BOX. Make all connections only in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal
cabinets; and equipment enclosures. Terminate on numbered terminal strips or use wire nuts if
terminal strips are not available.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 26 Section
1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors.
2. Identify circuits or luminaries controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each
sensor.
B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.

1. After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized,
adjust and test for compliance with requirements.
2. Operational Test: Verify operation of each lighting control device, and adjust time delays.
B. Lighting control devices that fail tests and inspections are defective work.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-
site assistance in adjusting the angle of any luminaire that had not been properly aimed. Provide
up to one visit to Project during the evening hours for this purpose.
B. Adjust all Photoelectric switches so that they are not directed toward artificial light source which
will provide a false off signal. Aim all devices toward the North sky exposure. Calibrate so that
they will only energize luminaire in darkness of 1.5 to 3 footcandles.

SECTION 262200 - LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less, with
capacities up to 1000 kVA:
1. Distribution transformers.
2. High efficiency transformers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1. Product Data: Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum
clearances, installed devices and features, and performance for each type and size of
transformer indicated.
a. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and
b. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
2. Source quality-control test reports.
1. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency, operation, and
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each transformer type through one source from a single
manufacturer.
intended use.
C. Comply with IEEE C57.12.91, "Test Code for Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers."
Project 16018 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 262200 - 1

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions

within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit, throughout periods during which equipment is
not energized and when transformer is not in a space that is continuously under normal control of
temperature and humidity.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual transformer provided. Cast anchor-
bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in
Division 03.
B. Coordinate installation of wall-mounting and structure-hanging supports with actual transformer

provided.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where title below introduces lists, the following requirement applies for
product selection:
2.2 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service.
B. Cores: Grain-oriented, non-aging silicon steel.
C. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps.

1. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type.
2. Coil Material: Copper.
2.3 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products.
B. Comply with NEMA ST 20 and list and label as complying with UL 1561.
C. Cores: One leg per phase.
D. Indoor Enclosure: Ventilated, NEMA 250, Type 2.
E. Outdoor Enclosure: Ventilated, NEMA 250, Type 3R.

1. Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out moisture and air.

F. Taps for Transformers Smaller Than 3 kVA: None.
G. Taps for Transformers 7.5 to 24 kVA: Two 5 percent taps below normal full capacity.
H. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and four 2.5 percent taps
below normal full capacity.
I. Insulation Class for Transformers Rated 14 kVA and Smaller: 180 deg C, UL-component-
recognized insulation system with a maximum of 115 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient
temperature.
J. Insulation Class for all Transformers UL-component-recognized insulation system with a

maximum of 115 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient temperature.
K. Wall Brackets: Manufacturer's standard brackets.
L. Low-Sound-Level Requirements: Minimum of 3 dBA less than NEMA ST 20 standard sound

levels when factory tested according to IEEE C57.12.91.
M. Terminal Boards: Provide top or bottom mounted terminal boards for transformers rated 25 kVA
and larger. Loose leads are not acceptable.
N. Equipment lugs: Provide a mechanical ground lug to the transformer enclosure. In addition,
provide a separate ground bar inside the transformer enclosure from termination of all grounding
conductors. Refer to grounding details on drawings for location of neutral bonding jumper and
method of installation for separately derived systems.
2.4 HIGH EFFICIENCY TRANSFORMERS
A. Manufacturers:
2. Square D; Schneider Electric
B. Description: Comply with Candidate Standard Level CSL 3 as defined by the Office of Energy
Efficiency and Renewable Energy, Department of Energy in Advance Notice of Proposed Rule
Making; 10 CFR Part 430, Energy Conservation Program for Commercial and Industrial
Equipment: Energy Conservation Standards for Distribution Transformers; newest edition.
C. Comply with Part 2 Article “Distribution Transformers.”
2.5 TRANSFORMER SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE
A. On all transformers, 45KVA and above, provide a surge protective device.
B. The surge protective device shall be 3 phase with neutral and ground conductor leads. (High
Energy), MOV, low-voltage distribution-class surge arrester, designed to provide surge protection
at distribution transformer secondary bushings. Externally mounted with thread hud. Conductor
leads must be as short as possible.

C. The surge protective device must pass all design tests for light duty distribution class arresters per
IEEE Std C62.11™ -1993 standard.
D. Manufacturer shall be Cooper Power Systems Storm Trapper H.E. The Storm Trapper H.E. or
Engineer approved equal.
2.6 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each transformer, mounted with
corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in Division 26 Section
A. Test and inspect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.91.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient-temperature requirements for
each transformer.
B. Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by
NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where
transformers will be installed.
D. Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding
and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5
ohms at location of transformer.
E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
B. Install wall-mounting transformers level and plumb with wall brackets fabricated by transformer
manufacturer.
C. Install and anchor floor-mounting transformers level on concrete bases, 4-inch nominal thickness.
Concrete base is specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems,"
and concrete materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 03.
install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around full perimeter of base.
2. For floor-mounting transformers, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through
concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.

3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to floor-mounting
transformers.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
B. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."

C. Remove and replace units that do not pass tests or inspections and retest as specified above.
D. Test Labeling: On completion of satisfactory testing of each unit, attach a dated and signed
"Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Record transformer secondary voltage at each unit for at least 48 hours of typical occupancy
period. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at secondary terminals.
Optimum is defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 10 percent and not being lower than
nameplate voltage minus 3 percent at maximum load conditions. Submit recording and tap
settings as test results.
B. Output Settings Report: Prepare a written report recording output voltages and tap settings.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.

SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY

1. Distribution panelboards.
2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.
3. Surge suppression panelboards.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
C. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices,
equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:
a. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
b. Bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
c. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.
d. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices and auxiliary components.

1. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, overcurrent protective device, surge protective
device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers'
technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.
2. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that panelboards,
overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces
defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems"
Include the following:
a. Basis of Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test
of assembled components or on calculation.
Project 16018 PANELBOARDS 262416 - 1


3. Field quality-control test reports including the following:
c. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply
with requirements.
4. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards.
1. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in
Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
a. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective
devices.
b. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent
protective device.
2. Extra Materials: Receipt for extra materials.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and

accessories through one source from a single manufacturer.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of panelboards
and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product
Requirements."
intended use.
D. Comply with NEMA PB 1.
E. Comply with NFPA 70.
A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following
conditions, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 104 deg F.
2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.
B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:

1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified.
2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet.

1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that
penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment,
raceways, piping, and encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements.
B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty for Surge Protective Devices: Manufacturer's standard form in which
manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Keys: Six spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
3. General Electric
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in
Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
B. Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets. NEMA PB 1, Type 1.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.
a. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
b. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.
2. Front: All panelboards shall employ a “door in door” construction that is hinged such that
the removal of the cover shall not be required to access wiring compartment.
3. Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front with
flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor.
4. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish over corrosion-resistant treatment or primer
coat.
5. Directory Card: With transparent protective cover, mounted in metal frame, inside
panelboard door.

C. Phase and Ground Buses:

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity..
2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment ground
conductors; bonded to box.
3. Split Bus: Vertical buses divided into individual vertical sections.
D. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material.

1. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type.
2. Ground Lugs and Bus Configured Terminators: Mechanical type.
3. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at
opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.
E. Service Equipment Label: UL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards with main
service disconnect switches.
2.3 PANELBOARD SHORT-CIRCUIT RATING
A. Short-Circuit Current Rating: Refer to drawings for RMS symmetrical, ampere AIC ratings.
1. Series-connected ratings are not permitted.
2.4 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. Omit for fused-switch
panelboards.
B. Main Overcurrent Protective Devices: Circuit breaker or fused switch as indicated.
C. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: One of the following as indicated:

1. For Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt-on circuit breakers.
2. For Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-in
circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release for
removal.
3. Fused switches
D. Circuit Identification: Distribution panelboards shall have each circuit number permanently
identified, factory installed label, adjacent to breaker. Identification shall stamped into trim or
installed engraved circuit numbers or paper labels. If paper labels are used, they must be covered
with a continuous, clear, self adhesive, protective plastic sheet.
2.5 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
B. Main Overcurrent Devices: Thermal-magnetic circuit breaker.
C. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing
adjacent units.

D. Circuit Identification: Panelboards shall have each circuit number permanently identified, factory
installed label, adjacent to breaker. Identification shall stamped into trim or installed engraved
circuit numbers or paper labels. If paper labels are used, they must be covered with a continuous,
clear, self adhesive, protective plastic sheet.
2.6 SURGE SUPPRESSION PANELBOARDS
A. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
B. Main Overcurrent Devices: Thermal-magnetic circuit breaker.
C. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing
adjacent units.
D. Surge Protective Device: IEEE C62.41, integrally mounted, solid-state, parallel-connected, sine-
wave tracking suppression and filtering modules.
1. Maximum Continuous Operation Voltage (MCOV) Rating: Not less than 115 percent of
nominal system operating voltage.
2. UL 1449 Application Designation: Type 1 or Type 2.
3. Short-Circuit Current Rating (SCCR): 100,000 A RMS symmetrical.
4. Nominal Discharge Current (In) Rating: 20 kA.
5. LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
6. Audible alarm activated on failure of any surge diversion module.
7. Minimum Single-Impulse Current Ratings:
a. Line to Neutral: 50,000 A.
b. Line to Ground: 50,000 A.
c. Neutral to Ground: 50,000 A.
8. Protection modes shall be as follows:
a. Line to neutral.
b. Line to ground.
c. Neutral to ground.
9. Maximum UL 1449 voltage protection rating (VPR) shall not exceed 700 V, line to neutral
and line to ground on 120/208 V systems; 1200 V, line to neutral and line to ground on
277/480 V systems.
10. Provide integrally mounted three pole disconnecting device with overcurrent protection
properly sized for the SPD provided.
2.7 LIFE SAFETY FUSED PANELBOARDS (LSEMXXX)
A. When show n on drawings, provide a fused panelboard to serve electrical circuits required on the
Life Safety Branch. UL 67 listed.
B. Manufacture: Bussmann QSCP4.
C. 120/208 Volt three phase or 277/480 Volt three phase panels shall be fusible type for
coordination requirements, Nema 1 construction, amperage and circuit number as indicated on
drawings.
D. Provide with main lug only or main fusible switch panelboards with replaceable fuses as
indicated on drawings.

E. Branch Distribution fusible switches to have replaceable CUBEFuse fuses.
F. Provide with surge suppression protection as indicated on drawings.
G. Provide 20 % spare fuses or modules in each panel. Minimum 5 spare 20 amp fuses. “Bussman
CUBEFuse.
H. When a Surge Protective Device is required as shown on drawings, provide an internal, factory
supplied SPD per paragraph above.
2.8 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault
currents.
1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads,
and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting
for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted,
field-adjustable trip setting.
3. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with 5-mA trip sensitivity.
B. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories: Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and
number of poles.
1. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor materials.
2. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent
lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment.
3. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and
time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.
4. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 55 percent of rated
voltage.
C. Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD; clips to accommodate specified fuses; lockable handle.
D. Fuses are specified in Division 26 Section "Fuses."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
B. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.
C. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration
and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
D. Mount top of trim 74 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Mount plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts
uniformly flush with wall finish.

F. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers.

1. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.
G. Install filler plates in unused spaces.
H. Flush Panelboards: Stub four 1-inch empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling
space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits into
raised floor space or below slab not on grade.
I. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties.
J. Panelboards shall not be used as junction boxes, auxiliary gutters, or raceways for conductors
feeding through or tapping off to other switches or overcurrent devices. Splices shall not be
allowed in any panelboard. Phase conductors shall terminate on breakers and then leave the
panelboard either grouped in three phase configuration or with associated neutrals and routed into
the branch circuit conduit out to the load.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Refer to Division 260533 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." Provide all
identification for field-installed conductors in panels, labels, nameplates, warning signs, etc.
including, but not limited to:
1. Equipment Identification Label
2. Nominal System Voltage Identification Label
3. Electrical Energy Source Identification Label
4. Panelboards shall have circuit Directories
5. Distribution Panelboards shall have Load Identification Labels for each Feeder and Branch
Circuit
B. Provide Factory installed nameplates.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
Systems."
Cables."
A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:

1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder,
and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
1. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA ATS,
Section 7.5 for switches and Section 7.6 for molded-case circuit breakers. Certify
compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance;
otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
3.5 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. Remove paint

splatters and other spots. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.
B. Vacuum interior of panels to remove dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in
cleaning.

SECTION 262713 – UTILITY ELECTRIC METERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes equipment for utility company's electricity metering.
intended use.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Electrical Service Connections: Coordinate with utility companies and components they furnish
as follows:
1. Comply with requirements of utilities providing electrical power and communication
services.
2. Coordinate installation and connection of utilities and services, including provision for
electricity-metering components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer products.
2.2 EQUIPMENT FOR ELECTRICITY METERING BY UTILITY COMPANY
A. Current-Transformer Cabinets: Comply with requirements of electrical power utility company.
B. Meter Sockets: Comply with requirements of electrical power utility company.

1. Housing: NEMA 250, Type 3R enclosure.
2. Minimum Short-Circuit Rating 42,000 amperes symmetrical at rated voltage.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with equipment installation requirements in NECA 1.
Project 16018 UTILITY ELECTRIC METERING 262713 - 1

B. Install equipment for utility company metering. Install raceways and equipment according to
utility company's written requirements. Provide empty conduits for metering leads and extend
grounding connections as required by utility company.
Project 16018 UTILITY ELECTRIC METERING 262713 - 2

SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY

1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates.
2. Twist-locking receptacles.
3. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers.
4. Wall-switch occupancy sensors.
5. USB charging outlets
6. Spring-wound interval time switches.
7. Cord reels.
8. Pendant cord-connector devices
9. Drop Cords
10. Cord and plug sets.

1. Division 26 Section "Conduit and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for conduit, metal and
nonmetallic floor boxes, floor boxes, etc.
2. Division 26 Section "Lighting Control Devices" for photoelectric switches and occupancy
sensors other than wall-switch type.
3. Division 27 Section "Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling" for workstation outlets.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
B. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

1. Product Data: Provide product data sheet for each wiring device or product in this Section
and on the Drawings that are specifically applicable to this project. Provide an arrow stamp
pointing to the exact catalog number or product and do not merely highlight the information.
2. For special purpose NEMA type receptacles, Submittal shall indicate equipment served for
each special purpose receptacle type (e.g. NEMA 15-50R-- “Kiln”).
1. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers'
packing label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.
Project 16018 WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 1

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through one
source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring devices and
associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source.
intended use.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.

1. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following

manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:
1. Arrow Hart/Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Ltd. (Arrow Hart).
2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell).
3. Leviton Mfg. Co., Inc. (Leviton).
4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour).
B. All wiring devices in this building shall be supplied from the same manufacturer. Use of multiple
manufactures of wiring devices in the same building is not allowed.
2.2 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES
A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6

configuration 5-20R, DSCC W C 596G, and UL 498.
a. Arrow Hart; 5361 (single), AH5362 (duplex).
b. Hubbell; HBL5361 (single), HBL5362 (duplex).
c. Leviton; 5361 (single), 5362 (duplex).
d. Pass & Seymour; 5361 (single), 5362-A (duplex), PT5362A (duplex, with separable
pigtailed connector).
B. Tamper-Resistant Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1,

NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.
a. Arrow Hart; TR8300.
b. Hubbell; HBL8300SG.
c. Leviton; 8300-SG.
d. Pass & Seymour; TR63H, or PTR63H (with separable pigtailed connector).

2. Description: Labeled to comply with NFPA 70, "Health Care Facilities" Article, "Pediatric
Locations" Section.
2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES
A. General Description: Straight blade, feed-through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1,

NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when
device is tripped.
B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:

a. Arrow Hart; VGF20.
b. Bryant; GF20L.
c. Hubbell; GF20L.
d. Leviton; 7899.
e. Pass & Seymour; 2095, or PT2095 (with separable pigtailed connector).
C. Listed Weather-Resistant Type Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:

a. Arrow Hart; WRVGF20.
b. Hubbell; GFTR20.
c. Pass & Seymour; 2095-TRWR.
D. Tamper-Resistant Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:

a. Arrow Hart; TRVGF20.
b. Hubbell; GFTR20.
c. Leviton; T7899.
d. Pass & Seymour; 2095-TR, or PT2095-TR (with separable pigtailed connector).
2.4 DUPLEX RECEPTACLE WITH USB CHARGER.
A. Duplex Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, AC, 20 A with USB Charger, Tamper-Resistant:

Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.
a. Arrow Hart; TR7746.
b. Hubbell; USB20X2.
c. Pass & Seymour; TR5362USB.
B. Description: duplex receptacle with two USB Type 2.0 ports, Type A rated 3.0 Amps (minimum)
at 5 Volts DC, integral AC/DC transformer, compatible with USB 2.0/3.0 devices, compliance
with battery charging specification USB BC1.2, capable of charging two devices simultaneously.
Decorator style thermoplastic body and tamper resistant sliding doors will prohibit insertion of
objects that are not an electrical plug. Provide device in color to match other supplied wiring
devices.
2.5 TWIST-LOCKING RECEPTACLES
A. Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 15 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6

configuration L5-15R, and UL 498.


a. Hubbell; HBL4710.
b. Leviton; 4710.
c. Pass & Seymour; L515-R.
B. Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6

a. Arrow Hart; CWL520R.
b. Hubbell; HBL2310.
c. Leviton; 2310.
d. Pass & Seymour; L520-R.
C. Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 30 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6

a. Arrow Hart; CWL530R.
b. Hubbell; HBL2610.
c. Leviton; 2610.
d. Pass & Seymour; L530-R.
2.6 SNAP SWITCHES
A. Comply with NEMA WD 1, DSCC W C 896F, and UL 20.
B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:
a. Arrow Hart; AH1221 (single pole), AH1222 (two pole), AH1223 (three way),
AH1224 (four way).
b. Hubbell; HBL1221 (single pole), HBL1222 (two pole), HBL1223 (three way),
HBL2224 (four way).
c. Leviton; 1221-2 (single pole), 1222-2 (two pole), 1223-2 (three way), 1224-2 (four
way).
d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1 (single pole), PS20AC2 (two pole), PS20AC3 (three
way), PS20AC4 (four way).
C. Pilot Light Switches, 20 A:

a. Arrow Hart; AH1221PL for 120 V and 277 V.
b. Bryant; 4901PLR120 for 120 V, 4901PLR277 for 277 V.
c. Hubbell; HBL1221PL for 120 V and 277 V.
d. Leviton; 1221-PLR for 120 V, 1221-7PLR for 277 V.
e. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-RPL for 120 V, PS20AC1-RPL7 for 277 V.
2. Description: Single pole, with red neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is "ON."
D. Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary Contact, Center-Off Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A; for use

with mechanically held lighting contactors.
a. Arrow Hart; 1995.
b. Bryant; 4921.

c. Hubbell; HBL1557.
d. Leviton; 1257.
e. Pass & Seymour; 1251.
2.7 WALL-BOX DIMMERS
A. Dimmer Switches: Sensor Switch: WSXD for office spaces and SPODMRD when used in
conjunction with ceiling mounted occupancy sensors.
B. Control: Continuously adjustable button type with networked switching as required. Comply
with UL 1472.
C. Contractor shall verify voltage and lamp source for the luminaire that is to be dimmed. Select
from the following options and provide the matching required wall dimmer.
1. For LED luminaires: 0 to 10 volt dimmers for solid sate luminaires. Verify the
maximum quantity of luminaires in each space that can be controlled from one dimmer.
Provide each space with the required quantity of dimmers to control all luminaires in that
space.
2.8 SPRING-WOUND INTERVAL TIME SWITCHES
A. Single-gang, wall box spring-wound, auto-off timer:

a. Intermatic Incorporated, FF60MHC.
b. Paragon Electrical Products, SWP60M.
c. Tork, C560M.
2. Description: 0 to 60 minute time cycle, brushed stainless steel or aluminum faceplate with
coordinated time dial and knob.
3. Electrical Ratings:
a. Inductive: 20 A, 125 VAC; 10 A, 277 VAC.
b. Tungsten: 7 A, 125 VAC.
c. Motor: 1 HP, 125 VAC.
2.9 WALL PLATES
A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.
2. Material for Finished Spaces: white nylon unless for life safety-standby which shall be red
nylon or non-life safety standby which shall be gray.
3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel.
4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and
labeled for use in "wet locations."
B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weather-
resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.

2.10 CORD REELS

following:
1. EGS Electrical Group; McGill products.
2. Industrial Electric Reels, Inc.
3. Reelcraft Industries, Inc.
4. Daniel Woodhead; a Woodhead Industries, Inc. Co.
B. Description: 115 V, 35 A, 60 Hz, spring retractable electric cord reel with latch, solid steel
construction, abrasion and corrosion resistant baked on powder coat finish, nylon roller cable
guides, adjustable cord stop, under-hung ceiling mounted.
1. Provide 25 foot cord with No. 10 AWG stranded-copper conductors, rubber insulated, with
green insulated grounding conductor, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Provide two GFCI duplex receptacles, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Provide cast aluminum or non-metallic portable outlet box, listed and labeled for “wet
locations.”
4. External Cable Grip: Provide woven wire-mesh, cord strain relief grip, made of high-
strength galvanized-steel wire strand, matched to cable diameter and with corresponding
attachment connector, and the device end.
2.11 CORD AND PLUG SETS
A. Description: Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of
equipment being connected.
1. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with
green-insulated grounding conductor and equipment-rating ampacity plus a minimum of 30
percent.
Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for
connection.
2.12 FINISHES
A. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device color. Color as
defined by NEMA WD 1 unless otherwise indicated.
1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: White, unless otherwise indicated or
required by NFPA 70 or device listing.
2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: life safety-standby which shall be
red nylon or non-life safety standby which shall be gray.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish
materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by
riding against outside of the boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust,
paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.
3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint
unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.
4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.
C. Conductors:
1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on
devices.
2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid
scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.
3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70,
Article 300, without pigtails.
4. Existing Conductors:
a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.
b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.
c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough.
D. Device Installation:
1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs
that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete.
2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect
conductors.
3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last
possible moment.
4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length.
5. Connect grounding terminals of devices to device box and equipment grounding conductor
using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length with factory-crimped flanged spade
and ring terminals.
6. When using side wiring with binding-head screw terminals, use solid conductor pigtails.
Wrap conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw.
7. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer.
8. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice
No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.
9. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.
10. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device
mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.
11. Install device boxes so that finish plates do not span different types of building finishes.
E. Receptacle Orientation:
1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted
receptacles to the left.
F. Device Plates:
1. Install blank device plates on unused device boxes.
2. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush
or do not cover rough wall opening. Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates, unless
approved by engineer.
G. Dimmers:

1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing.

2. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to
manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions.
H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical
and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single,
multigang wall plates.
I. Securely install multioutlet assemblies with screws and anchors. Comply with Division 26
Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
J. GFCI Receptacles: Where double-duplex GFCI receptacles are indicated, provide one duplex
GFCI receptacle and feed-through to standard straight blade convenience receptacle in same
device box.
1. Unless indicated otherwise, do not feed-through to receptacles in other device boxes.
K. Utilization Equipment: Refer to Shop Drawings for mounting height of special purpose devices
serving, but not limited to, the following:
1. Commercial kitchen equipment.
2. Commercial clothes washers and dryers.
3. Drinking water coolers.
4. Sensor operated wash fountains and lavatories.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with Division 26 05 53 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems"
A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. Refer to Division 26 Section “Electrical
Testing” for requirements.

SECTION 26 32 13 – ENGINE GENERATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes packaged engine-generator sets for emergency power and optional standby
supply with the following features:
1. Natural Gas Engine fuel supply system.
2. Engine cooling system.
3. Engine control and monitoring.
4. Outdoor enclosure

1. Division 26 Section "Transfer Switches" for transfer switches including sensors and relays
to initiate automatic-starting and -stopping signals for engine-generator sets.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EGSA: Electrical Generator Systems Association; Boca Raton, Florida.
B. Operational Bandwidth: The total variation from the lowest to highest value of a parameter over
the range of conditions indicated, expressed as a percentage of the nominal value of the
parameter.
C. LP: Liquid petroleum.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
1. Dimensioned outline plan and elevation drawings of engine-generator set and other
components specified.
2. Design Calculations: Computer generated load summary indicating starting kVA and
voltage-dip for each load step for loads indicated.
a. Demonstrate compliance with NFPA 70 Article 695 15 percent voltage drop
requirement for fire pumps.

1. Product Data: For each type of packaged engine generator indicated. Include rated
capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. In addition,
a. Thermal damage curve for generator.
Project 16018 ENGINE GENERATORS 263213 – 1

b. Time-current characteristic curves for generator protective device.

c. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and
d. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
2. Qualification Data: For installer and manufacturer.
3. Source quality-control test reports: Certified summary of prototype-unit test report.
1. Operation and Maintenance Data: For packaged engine generators to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section
"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
a. List of tools and replacement items recommended to be stored at Project for ready
access. Include part and drawing numbers, current unit prices, and source of supply.
2. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved

for installation of units required for this Project.
1. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than two hours' normal travel time from Installer's place
of business to Project site.
2. Installer shall be EGSA Certified Electrical Generator Systems Technician.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. Maintain within 100 miles of Project

site, a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs
within a response period of less than eight hours from time of notification.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain packaged generator sets and auxiliary components through one
source from a single manufacturer.
intended use.
E. Comply with ASME B15.1.
F. Comply with NFPA 37.
G. Comply with NFPA 70.
H. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 emergency power supply system.
I. Comply with UL 2200.
J. Engine Exhaust Emissions: Comply with applicable state and local government requirements.

A. Environmental Conditions: Engine-generator system shall withstand the following environmental

conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of performance capability:
1. Altitude: Sea level to 1000 feet.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for package engine generators. Cast anchor-bolt
inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in
Division 03.
1.8 WARRANTY

replace components of packaged engine generators and associated auxiliary components that fail
in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.
1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months' full

maintenance by skilled employees of manufacturer's designated service organization. Include
quarterly exercising to check for proper starting, load transfer, and running under load. Include
routine preventive maintenance as recommended by manufacturer and adjusting as required for
proper operation. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and
installation of original equipment.
1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Filters: One set each of lubricating oil, fuel, and combustion-air filters.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. Kohler Co.; Generator Division.
2. Cummins
2.2 ENGINE-GENERATOR SET
A. Factory-assembled and -tested, engine-generator set.

B. Mounting Frame: Maintain alignment of mounted components without depending on concrete

foundation; and have lifting attachments.
C. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. Power Output Ratings: Nominal ratings as indicated, with capacity as required to operate as
a unit as evidenced by records of prototype testing.
2. Output Connections: Three-phase, four wire.
3. Nameplates: For each major system component to identify manufacturer's name and
address, and model and serial number of component.
D. Generator-Set Performance:
1. Steady-State Voltage Operational Bandwidth: 3 percent of rated output voltage from no
load to full load.
2. Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 20 percent variation for 50 percent step-
load increase or decrease. Voltage shall recover and remain within the steady-state
operating band within three seconds.
3. Steady-State Frequency Operational Bandwidth: 0.5 percent of rated frequency from no
load to full load.
4. Steady-State Frequency Stability: When system is operating at any constant load within the
rated load, there shall be no random speed variations outside the steady-state operational
band and no hunting or surging of speed.
5. Transient Frequency Performance: Less than 5 percent variation for 50 percent step-load
increase or decrease. Frequency shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating
band within five seconds.
6. Output Waveform: At no load, harmonic content measured line to line or line to neutral
shall not exceed 5 percent total and 3 percent for single harmonics. Telephone influence
factor, determined according to NEMA MG 1, shall not exceed 50 percent.
7. Sustained Short-Circuit Current: For a 3-phase, bolted short circuit at system output
terminals, system shall supply a minimum of 250 percent of rated full-load current for not
less than 10 seconds and then clear the fault automatically, without damage to generator
system components.
8. Excitation System: Provide permanent magnet excitation for power source to voltage
regulator.
9. Start Time: Comply with NFPA 110, Type 10, system requirements.
2.3 ENGINE
A. Engine Fuel System: Natural gas.

1. Main Fuel Pump: Mounted on engine. Pump ensures adequate primary fuel flow under
starting and load conditions.
2. Relief-Bypass Valve: Automatically regulates pressure in fuel line and returns excess fuel
to source.
3. Natural Gas
a. Carburetor.
b. Secondary Gas Regulator.
c. Fuel-Shutoff Solenoid Valve.
d. Flexible Fuel Connectors.
B. Lubrication System: The following items are mounted on engine or skid:

1. Filter and Strainer: Rated to remove 90 percent of particles 5 micrometers and smaller
while passing full flow.
2. Thermostatic Control Valve: Control flow in system to maintain optimum oil temperature.
Unit shall be capable of full flow and is designed to be fail-safe.
3. Crankcase Drain: Arranged for complete gravity drainage to an easily removable container
with no disassembly and without use of pumps, siphons, special tools, or appliances.
C. Coolant Jacket Heater: Electric-immersion type, factory installed in coolant jacket system.
Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 equipment for heater capacity.
D. Governor: Electronic adjustable isochronous, with speed sensing.
E. Cooling System: Closed loop, liquid cooled, with radiator factory mounted on engine-generator-
set mounting frame and integral engine-driven coolant pump.
1. Coolant: Solution of 50 percent ethylene-glycol-based antifreeze and 50 percent water, with
anticorrosion additives as recommended by engine manufacturer.
2. Size of Radiator: Adequate to contain expansion of total system coolant from cold start to
110 percent load condition.
3. Temperature Control: Self-contained, thermostatic-control valve modulates coolant flow
automatically to maintain optimum constant coolant temperature as recommended by engine
manufacturer.
4. Coolant Hose: Flexible assembly with inside surface of nonporous rubber and outer
covering of aging-, ultraviolet-, and abrasion-resistant fabric.
a. Rating: 50-psig maximum working pressure with coolant at 180 deg F , and
noncollapsible under vacuum.
b. End Fittings: Flanges or steel pipe nipples with clamps to suit piping and equipment
connections.
F. Muffler/Silencer: Critical type, sized as recommended by engine manufacturer and selected with
exhaust piping system to not exceed engine manufacturer's engine backpressure requirements.
1. Minimum sound attenuation of 25 dB at 500 Hz.
2. Sound level measured at a distance of 10 feet from exhaust discharge after installation is
complete shall be 85 dBA or less.
G. Air-Intake Filter: Standard-duty, engine-mounted air cleaner with replaceable dry-filter element
and "blocked filter" indicator.
H. Starting System: 12 or 24-V electric, with negative ground.

1. Components: Sized so they will not be damaged during a full engine-cranking cycle with
ambient temperature at maximum specified in Part 1 "Project Conditions" Article.
2. Cranking Motor: Heavy-duty unit that automatically engages and releases from engine
flywheel without binding.
3. Cranking Cycle: As required by NFPA 110 for system level specified.
4. Battery: Adequate capacity within ambient temperature range specified in Part 1 "Project
Conditions" Article to provide specified cranking cycle at least twice without recharging.
5. Battery Cable: Size as recommended by engine manufacturer for cable length indicated.
Include required interconnecting conductors and connection accessories.

6. Battery Compartment: Factory fabricated of metal with acid-resistant finish and thermal
insulation. Thermostatically controlled heater shall be arranged to maintain battery above
10 deg C regardless of external ambient temperature within range specified in Part 1
"Project Conditions" Article. Include accessories required to support and fasten batteries in
place.
7. Battery-Charging Alternator: Factory mounted on engine with solid-state voltage regulation
and 35-A minimum continuous rating.
8. Battery Charger: Current-limiting, automatic-equalizing and float-charging type. Unit shall
comply with UL 1236 and include the following features:
a. Operation: Equalizing-charging rate of 10 A shall be initiated automatically after
battery has lost charge until an adjustable equalizing voltage is achieved at battery
terminals. Unit shall then be automatically switched to a lower float-charging mode
and shall continue to operate in that mode until battery is discharged again.
b. Automatic Temperature Compensation: Adjust float and equalize voltages for
variations in ambient temperature from minus 40 deg C to plus 60 deg C to prevent
overcharging at high temperatures and undercharging at low temperatures.
c. Automatic Voltage Regulation: Maintain constant output voltage regardless of input
voltage variations up to plus or minus 10 percent.
d. Ammeter and Voltmeter: Flush mounted in door. Meters shall indicate charging rates.
e. Safety Functions: Sense abnormally low battery voltage and close contacts providing
low battery voltage indication on control and monitoring panel. Sense high battery
voltage and loss of ac input or dc output of battery charger. Either condition shall
close contacts that provide a battery-charger malfunction indication at system control
and monitoring panel.
f. Enclosure and Mounting: NEMA 250, Type 1, wall-mounted cabinet.
2.4 CONTROL AND MONITORING
A. Automatic Starting System Sequence of Operation: When mode-selector switch on the control
and monitoring panel is in the automatic position, remote-control contacts in one or more separate
automatic transfer switches initiate starting and stopping of generator set. When mode-selector
switch is switched to the on position, generator set starts. The off position of same switch
initiates generator-set shutdown. When generator set is running, specified system or equipment
failures or derangements automatically shut down generator set and initiate alarms. Operation of
a remote emergency-stop switch also shuts down generator set.
B. Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic system controls, and
engine gages shall be grouped in a common control and monitoring panel mounted on the
generator set. Mounting method shall isolate the control panel from generator-set vibration.
C. Indicating and Protective Devices and Controls: As required by NFPA 110 for Level 1 system,
and the following:
1. AC voltmeter.
2. AC ammeter.
3. AC frequency meter.
4. DC voltmeter (alternator battery charging).
5. Engine-coolant temperature gage.
6. Engine lubricating-oil pressure gage.
7. Running-time meter.
8. Ammeter-voltmeter, phase-selector switch(es).

9. Generator-voltage adjusting rheostat.
D. Supporting Items: Include sensors, transducers, terminals, relays, and other devices and include
wiring required to support specified items. Locate sensors and other supporting items on engine
or generator, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Remote Alarm Annunciator: Comply with NFPA 99. An LED labeled with proper alarm
conditions shall identify each alarm event and a common audible signal shall sound for each
alarm condition. Silencing switch in face of panel shall silence signal without altering visual
indication. Connect so that after an alarm is silenced, clearing of initiating condition will
reactivate alarm until silencing switch is reset. Cabinet and faceplate are surface- or flush-
mounting type to suit mounting conditions indicated.
F. Remote Emergency-Stop Button: Provide one switch inside weather proof enclosure and one
switch wall mounted, unless otherwise indicated; and labeled. Push button shall be protected
from accidental operation.
2.5 GENERATOR OVERCURRENT AND FAULT PROTECTION
A. Generator Disconnect for Emergency Operation: Provide a fused disconnect to ensure

coordination of emergency electrical system.
1. Mount inside generator enclosure if possible.
2. Tripping Characteristic: Designed specifically for generator protection.
3. Trip Rating: As shown on Drawings.
B. Generator Disconnect for Standby Operation: Provide a molded-case breaker, thermal-magnetic

type; complying with NEMA AB 1 and UL 489.
1. Mount inside generator enclosure. Adjacent to or integrated with control and monitoring
panel.
2. Tripping Characteristic: Designed specifically for generator protection.
3. Trip Rating: As shown on Drawings.
2.6 GENERATOR, EXCITER, AND VOLTAGE REGULATOR
A. Comply with NEMA MG 1.
B. Drive: Generator shaft shall be directly connected to engine shaft. Exciter shall be rotated
integrally with generator rotor.
C. Electrical Insulation: Class H or Class F.
D. Stator-Winding Leads: Brought out to terminal box to permit future reconnection for other
voltages if required.
E. Construction shall prevent mechanical, electrical, and thermal damage due to vibration, overspeed
up to 125 percent of rating, and heat during operation at 110 percent of rated capacity.
F. Enclosure: Dripproof.
G. Instrument Transformers: Mounted within generator enclosure.

H. Voltage Regulator: Solid-state type, separate from exciter, providing performance as specified.
1. Adjusting rheostat on control and monitoring panel shall provide plus or minus 5 percent
adjustment of output-voltage operating band.
2.7 OUTDOOR GENERATOR-SET ENCLOSURE
A. Description: Vandal-resistant, weatherproof steel housing, wind resistant up to 100 mph.

Multiple panels shall be lockable and provide adequate access to components requiring
maintenance. Panels shall be removable by one person without tools. Instruments and control
shall be mounted within enclosure.
B. Engine Cooling Airflow through Enclosure: Maintain temperature rise of system components
within required limits when unit operates at 110 percent of rated load for 2 hours with ambient
temperature at top of range specified in system service conditions.
1. Louvers: Fixed-engine, cooling-air inlet and discharge. Storm-proof and drainable louvers
prevent entry of rain and snow.
2. Muffler Location: Within enclosure.
2.8 FINISHES
A. Indoor and Outdoor Enclosures and Components: Manufacturer's standard finish over corrosion-
resistant pretreatment and compatible primer.
A. Prototype Testing: Factory test engine-generator set using same engine model, constructed of
identical or equivalent components and equipped with identical or equivalent accessories.
1. Tests: Comply with NFPA 110, Level 1 Energy Converters and with IEEE 115.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, equipment bases, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation and other conditions affecting packaged engine-generator
performance.
B. Examine roughing-in of piping systems and electrical connections. Verify actual locations of
connections before packaged engine-generator installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
B. Comply with packaged engine-generator manufacturers' written installation and alignment

instructions and with NFPA 110.

C. Install packaged engine generator to provide access, without removing connections or

accessories, for periodic maintenance.
D. Install Schedule 40, black steel piping with welded joints and connect to engine muffler. Install
thimble at wall. Piping shall be same diameter as muffler outlet. Flexible connectors and steel
piping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 23 Section "Hydronic
Piping."
1. Install condensate drain piping to muffler drain outlet full size of drain connection with a
shutoff valve, stainless-steel flexible connector, and Schedule 40, black steel pipe with
welded joints. Flexible connectors and piping materials and installation requirements are
specified in Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping."
E. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but not
specified to be factory mounted.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general
arrangement of piping and specialties.
B. Connect fuel, cooling-system, and exhaust-system piping adjacent to packaged engine generator
to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect engine exhaust pipe to engine with flexible connector.
D. Connect fuel piping to engines with a gate valve and union and flexible connector.
1. Natural-gas piping, valves, and specialties for gas distribution are specified in Division 23
Section "Facility Natural-Gas Piping."
2. LP-gas piping, valves, and specialties for gas piping are specified in Division 23 Section
"Facility Liquefied-Petroleum Gas Piping."
E. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
F. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping
and Equipment" and Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect
components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in
testing.

1. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and each electrical test and visual and
mechanical inspectionfor "AC Generators and for Emergency Systems" specified in
NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2. NFPA 110 Acceptance Tests: Perform tests required by NFPA 110 that are additional to
those specified here including, but not limited to, single-step full-load pickup test.
3. Battery Tests: Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Record individual cell voltages.
a. Measure charging voltage and voltages between available battery terminals for full-
charging and float-charging conditions. Check electrolyte level and specific gravity
under both conditions.
b. Test for contact integrity of all connectors. Perform an integrity load test and a
capacity load test for the battery.
c. Verify acceptance of charge for each element of the battery after discharge.
d. Verify that measurements are within manufacturer's specifications.
4. Battery-Charger Tests: Verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing and float-
charging conditions.
5. System Integrity Tests: Methodically verify proper installation, connection, and integrity of
each element of engine-generator system before and during system operation. Check for air,
exhaust, and fluid leaks.
6. Voltage and Frequency Transient Stability Tests: Use recording oscilloscope to measure
voltage and frequency transients for 50 and 100 percent step-load increases and decreases,
and verify that performance is as specified.
7. Harmonic-Content Tests: Measure harmonic content of output voltage under 25 percent and
at 100 percent of rated linear load. Verify that harmonic content is within specified limits.
8. Noise Level Tests: Measure A-weighted level of noise emanating from generator-set
installation, including engine exhaust and cooling-air intake and discharge, at four locations
on the property line, and compare measured levels with required values.
C. Coordinate tests with tests for transfer switches and run them concurrently.
D. Test instruments shall have been calibrated within the last 12 months, traceable to standards of
NIST, and adequate for making positive observation of test results. Make calibration records
available for examination on request.
E. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no
leaks exist.
F. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper
motor rotation and unit operation.
G. Test and adjust controls, breaker trip settings and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
H. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
I. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified
requirements are met.

J. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured
insulation resistances, time delays, and other values and observations. Attach a label or tag to
each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION

adjust, operate, and maintain packaged engine generators. Refer to Division 01 Section
END OF SECTION 26 32 13

SECTION 263600 - TRANSFER SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes transfer switches rated 600 V and less, including the following:
1. Automatic transfer switches.
2. Nonautomatic transfer switches.

1. Division 21 Section "Electric-Drive, Centrifugal Fire Pumps" for automatic transfer
switches for fire pumps.
2. Division 21 Section "Electric-Drive, Vertical-Turbine Fire Pumps" for automatic transfer
switches for fire pumps.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details showing minimum
clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter space, installed features and devices, and material
lists for each switch specified.

1. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, weights,
operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.
2. Qualification Data: For installer and manufacturer.
1. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section
"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
a. Features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual.
b. List of all factory settings of relays; provide relay-setting and calibration instructions,
including software, where applicable.
Project 16018 TRANSFER SWITCHES 263600 - 1

A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved

for installation of units required for this Project.
1. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than two hours' normal travel time from Installer's place
of business to Project site.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. Maintain within 100 miles of Project

site, a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs
within a response period of less than eight hours from time of notification.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain transfer switches through one source from a single manufacturer.
intended use.
E. Comply with NEMA ICS 1.
F. Comply with NFPA 70.
G. Comply with NFPA 110.
H. Comply with UL 1008 unless requirements of these Specifications are stricter.
A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities

arranging to provide temporary electrical service:
electrical service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Construction Manager's
written permission.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. Kohler Power Systems; Generator Division.
2. Cummins
2.2 GENERAL TRANSFER-SWITCH PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
A. Indicated Current Ratings: Apply as defined in UL 1008 for continuous loading and total system
transfer, including tungsten filament lamp loads not exceeding 30 percent of switch ampere
rating, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Tested Fault-Current Closing and Withstand Ratings: Adequate for duty imposed by protective
devices at installation locations in Project under the fault conditions indicated, based on testing
according to UL 1008.
1. Fault-current closing and withstand ratings which require specific circuit breakers or fuse
classes to be used are not acceptable.
C. Solid-State Controls: Repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be plus or minus 2 percent or better
over an operating temperature range of minus 20 to plus 70 deg C.
D. Resistance to Damage by Voltage Transients: Components shall meet or exceed voltage-surge

withstand capability requirements when tested according to IEEE C62.41. Components shall
meet or exceed voltage-impulse withstand test of NEMA ICS 1.
E. Electrical Operation: Accomplish by a nonfused, momentarily energized solenoid or electric-

motor-operated mechanism, mechanically and electrically interlocked in both directions.
F. Switch Characteristics: Designed for continuous-duty repetitive transfer of full-rated current

between active power sources.
1. Limitation: Switches using molded-case switches or circuit breakers or insulated-case
circuit-breaker components are not acceptable.
2. Switch Action: Double throw; mechanically held in both directions.
3. Contacts: Silver composition or silver alloy for load-current switching. Conventional
automatic transfer-switch units, rated 225 A and higher, shall have separate arcing contacts.
G. Factory Wiring: Train and bundle factory wiring and label, consistent with Shop Drawings,
either by color-code or by numbered or lettered wire and cable tape markers at terminations.
Color-coding and wire and cable tape markers are specified in Division 26 Section "Identification
1. Designated Terminals: Pressure type, suitable for types and sizes of field wiring indicated.
2. Power-Terminal Arrangement and Field-Wiring Space: Suitable for top, side, or bottom
entrance of feeder conductors as indicated.
3. Control Wiring: Equipped with lugs suitable for connection to terminal strips.
H. Enclosures: General-purpose NEMA 250, Type 1, complying with NEMA ICS 6 and UL 508,
2.3 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES
A. Comply with Level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110.
B. Switching Arrangement: Double-throw type, incapable of pauses or intermediate position stops

during normal functioning, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Manual Switch Operation: Under load, with door closed and with either or both sources
energized. Transfer time is same as for electrical operation. Control circuit automatically
disconnects from electrical operator during manual operation.

D. In-Phase Monitor: Factory-wired, internal relay controls transfer so it occurs only when the two
sources are synchronized in phase. Relay compares phase relationship and frequency difference
between normal and emergency sources and initiates transfer when both sources are within 15
electrical degrees, and only if transfer can be completed within 60 electrical degrees. Transfer is
initiated only if both sources are within 2 Hz of nominal frequency and 70 percent or more of
nominal voltage.
E. Automatic Transfer-Switch Features:

1. Undervoltage Sensing for Each Phase of Normal Source: Sense low phase-to-ground
voltage on each phase. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of
nominal, and dropout voltage is adjustable from 75 to 98 percent of pickup value. Factory
set for pickup at 90 percent and dropout at 85 percent.
2. Adjustable Time Delay: For override of normal-source voltage sensing to delay transfer and
engine start signals. Adjustable from zero to six seconds, and factory set for one second.
3. Time Delay for Retransfer to Normal Source: Adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes, and factory
set for 10 minutes to automatically defeat delay on loss of voltage or sustained undervoltage
of emergency source, provided normal supply has been restored.
4. Test Switch: Simulate normal-source failure.
5. Switch-Position Pilot Lights: Indicate source to which load is connected.
6. Source-Available Indicating Lights: Supervise sources via transfer-switch normal- and
emergency-source sensing circuits.
a. Normal Power Supervision: Green light with nameplate engraved "Normal Source
Available."
b. Emergency Power Supervision: Red light with nameplate engraved "Emergency
Source Available."
7. Unassigned Auxiliary Contacts: Two normally open, single-pole, double-throw contacts for
each switch position, rated 10 A at 240-V ac.
8. Transfer Override Switch: Overrides automatic retransfer control so automatic transfer
switch will remain connected to emergency power source regardless of condition of normal
source. Pilot light indicates override status.
9. Engine Starting Contacts: One isolated and normally closed, and one isolated and normally
open; rated 10 A at 32-V dc minimum.
10. Engine Shutdown Contacts: Time delay adjustable from zero to five minutes, and factory
set for five minutes. Contacts shall initiate shutdown at remote engine-generator controls
after retransfer of load to normal source.
11. Engine-Generator Exerciser: Solid-state, programmable-time switch starts engine generator
and transfers load to it from normal source for a preset time, then retransfers and shuts down
engine after a preset cool-down period. Initiates exercise cycle at preset intervals adjustable
from 7 to 30 days. Running periods are adjustable from 10 to 30 minutes. Factory settings
are for 7-day exercise cycle, 20-minute running period, and 5-minute cool-down period.
Exerciser features include the following:
a. Exerciser Transfer Selector Switch: Permits selection of exercise with and without
load transfer.
b. Push-button programming control with digital display of settings.
c. Integral battery operation of time switch when normal control power is not available.

A. Factory test and inspect components, assembled switches, and associated equipment. Ensure
proper operation. Check transfer time and voltage, frequency, and time-delay settings for
compliance with specified requirements. Perform dielectric strength test complying with
NEMA ICS 1.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Identify components according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Set field-adjustable intervals and delays, relays, and engine exerciser clock.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
Systems."
Cables."

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect
components, assemblies, and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in
testing.
2. After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for
4. Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with insulation-resistance
tester. Include external annunciation and control circuits. Use test voltages and procedure
recommended by manufacturer. Comply with manufacturer's specified minimum resistance.
a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits.
b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and integrity of
barriers, covers, and safety features.
c. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed.
d. Perform manual transfer operation.
5. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function for
each switch at least three times.
a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and of
emergency source with normal source available.
b. Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal source.
c. Verify time-delay settings.
d. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control settings.
e. Test bypass/isolation unit functional modes and related automatic transfer-switch
operations.

f. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting, transfer time
delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and engine cool-down and
shutdown.
6. Ground-Fault Tests: Coordinate with testing of ground-fault protective devices for power
delivery from both sources.
a. Verify grounding connections and locations and ratings of sensors.
B. Coordinate tests with tests of generator and run them concurrently.
C. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured
insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag to each tested component
indicating satisfactory completion of tests.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION

adjust, operate, and maintain transfer switches and related equipment as specified below. Refer
to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."
B. Coordinate this training with that for generator equipment.

SECTION 264313 – SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL

POWER CIRCUITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes SPDs for low-voltage power equipment installed external to power
equipment.

1. Division 26 Section "Switchboards" for factory-installed SDPs.
2. Division 26 Section "Panelboards" for factory-installed SPDs.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. ATS: Acceptance Testing Specifications.
B. MCOV: Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage Rating.
C. MOV: Metal-Oxide Varistors, sometimes plural MOVs.
D. SCCR: Short-circuit Current Rating.
E. SPD: Surge Protective Device.
F. TVSS: Same as SPD, formerly transient voltage surge suppressor.
G. VPR: Voltage Protection Rating.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

1. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating
weights, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.
1. Operation and Maintenance Data: For surge protective devices to include in emergency,
2. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain suppression devices and accessories through one source from a single
manufacturer.
Project 16018 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES FOR LOW- 264313 - 1

AIA/MCS VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS March 3, 2017
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, dimensional requirements, and electrical performance
of suppressors and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section
intended use.
D. Comply with UL 1449, "Surge Protective Devices."
A. Service Conditions: Rate surge protection devices for continuous operation under the following
conditions, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Operating Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 140 deg F.
2. Humidity: 5 to 95 percent, noncondensing.
3. Altitude: Less than 12,000 feet above sea level.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate location of field-mounted surge suppressors to allow adequate clearances for

maintenance.
1.8 WARRANTY

replace components of surge suppressors that fail in materials or workmanship within ten years
from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
product selection:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.
2.2 SERVICE ENTRANCE SUPPRESSORS
A. Products:
1. Eaton Corporation; Electrical Sector; SPD series.
2. ERICO International Corporation; CRITEC TDXM series.
3. LEA International, Inc.; PowerVantage PV Plus series.
4. Liebert Corporation; a division of Emerson; Interceptor II series.
5. Thomas & Betts Power Solutions LLC; Current Technology Products; TransGuard series.

B. Surge Protective Device Description: Solid-state, parallel-connected, modular design with field-
replaceable modules, sine-wave-tracking suppression and filtering, with individually fused or
thermally protected MOVs matched to within 1 percent, and the following features and
accessories:
1. MCOV Rating: Not less than 115 percent of nominal system operating voltage.
LEA PV 400 Liebert SI 025 Current Eaton ERICO

Technology SPD 250 TDX300M
TG 125
Type 1 No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Type 2 Yes Yes No Yes No

3. SCCR: 100,000 A RMS symmetrical.
5. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring.
6. Redundant suppression circuits.
7. Arrangement with copper bus bars and for bolted connections to phase buses, neutral bus,
and ground bus.
9. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed.
10. Fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity.
11. Integral disconnect switch.
C. Minimum single-impulse current rating shall be as follows:

1. Line to Neutral: 125,000 A.
2. Line to Ground: 125,000 A.
3. Neutral to Ground: 125,000 A.
4. Line to Line: 125,000 A.
UL 1449 VPR for 480Y/277 V without
LEA Liebert Current Current Eaton ERICO

PV 400 SI 025 Technology Technology SPD 250 TDX300M
TG 125 TG 125
(Note 3) (Note 1)
(Note 1) (Note 2)
Line to 1800 V 1200 V 1200 V 900 V 1000 V 1200 V

Neutral
Line to 1800 V 1200 V 1200 V 1200 V 1200 V 1200 V

Ground
Neutral to 1800 V 1200 V 1200 V 1200 V 1000 V 1000 V

Ground
Line to Line 2500 V 1800 V 1800 V 1800 V 1800 V 1800 V

Note 1: According to UL.com.
Note 2: According to Current Technology product data sheet. Product is also listed on Intertek
ETL Listed Directory without performance data.
Note 3: Values listed are with typically specified features –alarm, form “C” contact which appear
to only be available in a Type 2 configuration. Type 1 unit with only LED monitoring UL 1449
VPRs are 1200/1200/1200/1800 V.
D. Protection modes and UL 1449 VPR for grounded wye circuits with voltages of 480Y/277, 3-
phase, 4-wire circuits shall be as follows:
1. Line to Neutral: 1800 V.
2. Line to Ground: 1800 V.
3. Neutral to Ground: 1800 V.
4. Line to Line: 2500 V
UL 1449 VPR for 208Y/120 V without disconnect
LEA Liebert Current Current Eaton ERICO

PV 400 SI 025 Technology Technology SPD 250 TDX300M
TG 125 TG 125
(Note 3) (Note 1)
(Note 1) (Note 2)
Line to 1200 V 700 V None listed 700 V 600 V 800 V

Neutral
Line to 1200 V 700 V None listed 700 V 800 V 800 V

Ground
Neutral to 1500 V 700 V None listed 900 V 600 V 700 V

Ground
Line to Line 1500 V 1000 V None listed 900 V 1000 V 1200 V
Note 1: According to UL.com.
Note 2: According to Current Technology product data sheet. Product is also listed on Intertek
ETL Listed Directory without performance data.
Note 3: Values listed are with typically specified features – alarm, form “C” contact which appear
to only be available in a Type 2 configuration. Type 1 unit with only LED monitoring UL 1449
VPRs are 700/700/700/1000 V.
E. Protection modes and UL 1449 VPR for grounded wye circuits with voltages of 208Y/120, 3-


4. Line to Line: 1500 V
F. Connection Means: Permanently wired.
2.3 PANELBOARD SUPPRESSORS
A. Products:
1. Eaton Corporation; Electrical Sector; SPD series.
3. LEA International, Inc.; SP Plus series.
4. Liebert Corporation; a division of Emerson;AccuVar II series.
5. Thomas & Betts Power Solutions LLC; Current Technology Products; CurrentGuard Plus
series.
B. Surge Protection Device Description: Solid-state, parallel-connected, non-modular design, sine-

wave-tracking suppression and filtering, with individually fused or thermally protected MOVs
matched to within 1 percent, and the following features and accessories:
1. MCOV Rating: Not less than 115 percent of nominal system operating voltage.
UL 1449 location designations
LEA SP 200 Liebert AII Current Eaton ERICO

CGP 80
Type 1 No Yes Yes Yes Yes.
Type 2 Yes Yes Yes Yes No.

3. SCCR: 100,000 A RMS symmetrical.
C. Minimum single-impulse current rating shall be as follows:

1. Line to Neutral: 80,000 A.
2. Line to Ground: 80,000 A.
3. Neutral to Ground: 80,000 A.
4. Line to Line: 80,000 A.
UL 1449 VPR for 480Y/277 V without disconnect

CGP 80
(Note 2)

Line to 1200 V 1000 V 1000 V 1200 V 1000 V

Neutral
Line to 1200 V 1000 V 1000 V 1200 V 1200 V

Ground
Neutral to 1200 V 900 V 1000 V 1200 V 1200 V

Ground
(Note 1)
Line to Line 2000 V 1800 V 1800 V 2000 V 1800 V
Note 1: From LEA product data sheet. UL.com does not list VPR for N-G mode.
Note 2: From Current Technology product data sheet. Product not listed on UL.com. Does not
appear to be listed on Intertek ETL Listed Directory either.
D. Protection modes and UL 1449 VPR for grounded wye circuits with voltages of 480Y/277, 3-
3. Neutral to Ground: 1200 V
4. Line to Line: 2000 V.
UL 1449 VPR for 120/240 V and 208Y/120 V without disconnect

CGP 80
(Note 2)
Line to 700 V 600 V 700 V 700 V 600 V

Neutral
Line to 700 V 700 V 700 V 700 V 600 V

Ground
Neutral to 700 V (Note 1) 600 V 700 V 700 V 600 V

Ground
Line to Line 1200 V 900 V 1200 V 1200 V 1000 V
Note 1: From LEA product data sheet. UL.com does not list VPR for N-G mode.
Note 2: From Current Technology product data sheet. Product not listed on UL.com. Does not
appear to be listed on Intertek ETL Listed Directory either.

E. Protection modes and UL 1449 VPR for grounded wye circuits with voltages of 208Y/120, 3-
F. Protection modes and UL 1449 VPR for 240/120-V, single-phase, 3-wire circuits shall be as
follows:
2.4 PANELBOARD EXTENSION MODULES
A. Products:
2. Liebert Corporation; a division of Emerson; LPGE series.
3. Thomas & Betts Power Solutions LLC; Current Technology Products; EGPE2 series.
B. Surge Protection Device Description: Panelboard extention module-type that isolated surge
protection device from panelboard interior, matching width, depth, trim and finish of panelboard.
C. Comply with UL 67 and requirements in Part 2 Article "Panelboard Suppressors."
2.5 ENCLOSURES
A. NEMA 250, Type 4.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES
A. Install devices at service entrance on load side, with ground lead bonded to service entrance
ground.
B. Install devices for panelboard and auxiliary panels with conductors or buses between suppressor
and points of attachment as short and straight as possible. Do not exceed manufacturer's
recommended lead length. Do not bond neutral and ground.
1. Provide multipole, 30-A circuit breaker as a dedicated disconnect for suppressor or
ampacity and configuration is recommended by the manufacturer, unless otherwise
indicated.
3.2 PLACING SYSTEM INTO SERVICE
A. Do not energize or connect service entrance equipment or panelboards to their sources until surge
protection devices are installed and connected.

A. Testing: Perform the following field tests and inspections:

1. After installing surge protection devices, but before electrical circuitry has been energized,
test for compliance with requirements.
2. Complete startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS,
"Surge Arresters, Low-Voltage Surge Protection Devices" Section.
B. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION

adjust, operate, and maintain surge protective devices. Refer to Division 01 Section

SECTION 265100 – INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the following:

1. Interior luminaires, and solid-state lighting drivers.
2. Exterior luminaires normally mounted on exterior surfaces of buildings.
3. Emergency lighting units.
4. Exit signs.
5. Luminaire supports.

1. Division 26 Section "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including
time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, emergency transfer devices and
multipole lighting relays and contactors.
2. Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for manual wall-box dimmers for incandescent
lamps.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. CEE: Consortium for Energy Efficiency, Inc.
B. CRI: Color-rendering index.
C. LED: Light-emitting diode.
D. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.
E. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast and driver housing if provided.
F. SSL: Solid-state lighting.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

1. Product Data: For each type of luminaire, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include
data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:
a. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions.
b. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger.
Project 16018 INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 1

c. Solid-state lighting Drivers. Submit product data sheets marked or highlighted for the
specific ballast or solid-state lighting driver manufacturers/models for applicable
products being provided from Part 2 of this Section ”Generic” or “manufacturers
choice” solid-state lighting drivers are not acceptable. Submittals missing this
information will be Rejected.
d. Energy-efficiency data.
e. Life, output, energy-efficiency data. Submit product data sheets marked or highlighted
for the lamp manufacturer/models for applicable products being provided from Part 2
of this Section. Submittals missing this information will be Rejected.
f. Photometric data, in IESNA format, based on laboratory tests of each lighting fixture
type, outfitted with solid-state lighting drivers, and accessories identical to those
indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project.
1) Photometric data shall be certified by a manufacturer's laboratory with a current
accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program
(NVLAP) for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
1. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in
operation and maintenance manuals.
2. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers'

laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program
for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
intended use.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire-
suppression system, and partition assemblies.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty for solid-state lighting Luminaires and solid-state lighting Drivers:
Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of lighting unit agrees to repair or replace
components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period for Solid-state lighting Luminaires and Solid-State Lighting Drivers: 5
years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Warranty for Drivers: Manufacturer's standard form in which solid-state lighting driver
manufacturers agree to repair or replace ballasts and solid-state lighting drivers that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period for Solid-State Lighting Drivers for Solid-State Lighting Luminaires: Five
years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: 1 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at
least one of each type.
2. Solid-State Lighting Drivers: 1 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at
3. LED Packages, Arrays and Modules: 1 for every 100 of each type and rating installed.
Furnish at least one of each type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In the Luminaire Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that introduce lists, the
following requirements apply to product selection:
2.2 LUMINAIRES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.
B. LED Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598, in addition to the requirements contained in UL

Subject 8750.
C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
D. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent
warping and sagging.
E. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under
operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent
doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping
and when secured in operating position.
F. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated:
1. White Surfaces: 85 percent.
2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.
3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.

4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent.
G. Plastic Diffusers, Covers, and Globes:

1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing
and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.
a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch nominal unless different thickness is indicated.
b. UV stabilized.
2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Trim Work: Provide solid aluminum or solid brass bar work, finials, and similar trim on wall
sconces and decorative pendent lighting fixtures. Steel or hollow tubes are not permitted.
I. Tap Connections (Fixture Whips): Not longer than 6 feet, constructed of No. 12 AWG copper
conductors.
2.3 DRIVERS FOR SOLID-STATE LIGHTING LUMINAIRES

1. Acuity
2. Eaton – Cooper Lighting
3. Phillips
B. Electronic Drivers: Comply with ANSI C82.11, NEMA SSL 1, and UL 935 in addition to the
requirements contained in UL Subject 8750; UL Class 2 listed power supply, isolated output, and
designed for type and quantity of LEDs served.
1. Input Rating: 120 to 277 V, 60 Hz, plus or minus 10 percent.
2. Output Rating: 12 or 24 V dc, based on lumen output with minimum of 350 mA, plus or
minus 5 percent.
3. Sound Rating: Class A.
4. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent.
5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better.
6. Minimum Operating Temperature: minus 40 deg F.
7. Power Factor: 0.90 or higher.
C. Drivers for Dimmer-Controlled Lighting Fixtures: Electronic type.

1. Dimming Range: 100 to 10 percent of rated LED lumens.
2. Driver Input Watts: Can be reduced to 25 percent of normal.
3. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific dimming control system and
lamp type indicated.
4. Control: 0 to 10 V dc.
2.4 EMERGENCY TRANSFER DEVICE, GENERATOR TRANSFER DEVICE, and WHOLE

CIRCUIT TRANSFER DEVICES.
A. Selected luminaires as shown on the drawings shall have a transfer device installed at the factory,
or a whole circuit device installed in the field, to automatically transfer the branch circuit from a
normal source to an emergency source. Refer to Division 26 Section "Lighting Control Devices"
for additional details.

2.5 EXIT SIGNS
A. Description: Comply with UL 924; Comply with NEMA EM 1; for sign colors, visibility,
luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Internally Lighted Signs:

1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.
2.6 SOLID-STATE LIGHTING LUMINAIRES
A. LED Package (Component) Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

products by one of the following manufacturers: Manufacturers of LED drivers and LED
modules shall be tested by the Luminaire Manufacturers and the stated warranty shall be based on
the compatibility of the tested components, and substituted manufacturers will not be allowed.
Refer to the list of approved LED drivers above.
B. LED Luminaires: Photometric data complying with IES LM-79, Energy Star rated by the U.S.
Department of Energy, CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 4000 K, white light produced by
binary complementary wavelength conversion. Color mixing red, green, and blue LEDs is not
acceptable.
1. LED Packages, Arrays, and Modules:
a. Binned for color consistency per NEMA SSL 3; and B50, L70 rating of at least 50,000
hours when tested according to IES LM-80.
b. LED packages, arrays or modules shall be field replaceable without having to replace
the entire luminaire.
2.7 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT COMPONENTS
A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and
angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.
B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish
same as fixture.
C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single
fixture. Finish same as fixture.
D. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.
E. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with
threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.
F. Chains: 12 gage, zinc-plated steel jack chain or double-loop chain.
G. Air-Craft Cable: 3/32-inch stainless steel cable with adjustable cable holder, adjustable plus or
minus 6 inches.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 500 and NECA 502.
B. Protect all luminaires from dust, moisture and debris during construction with plastic or other
suitable barriers. Clean all luminaire that are dirty.
C. Luminaires: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each
luminaire.
D. Temporary Lighting: If it is necessary, and approved by A/E, to use permanent luminaires for
temporary lighting, install and energize the minimum number of luminaires necessary. When
construction is sufficiently complete, remove the temporary luminaires, disassemble, clean
thoroughly, install new lamps, and reinstall.
E. Remote Mounting of Ballasts and Solid-State Lighting Drivers: Distance between the ballast or
solid-state lighting driver and fixture shall not exceed that recommended by ballast or solid-state
lighting driver manufacturer. Verify, with ballast and solid-state lighting driver manufacturers,
maximum distance between ballast or solid-state lighting driver and luminaire.
F. Lay-in Ceiling Luminaires Supports: Use grid as a support element.

1. Support Clips: Fasten to luminaires and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture
corner with clips that are UL listed for the application.
2. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or
center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-inch
metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.
G. Suspended Luminaires Support:

1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging.
2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers.
3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for
suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end.
4. Do not use grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to
building structure.
H. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
I. Install wire guards to exit signs and emergency lighting units in gymnasia, milt-purpose rooms,
shops, and stage areas.
J. Install manufacturers bonding jumpers at all splice joints and non-continuous runs on entire cable
tray system.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction and outlet boxes. Comply
with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical
Systems."
A. Selected luminaires as shown on the drawings shall have emergency transfer capability and
sensors installed. Refer to Division 26 Section "Lighting Control Devices" for all adjustments
and tests required on these luminaires.
B. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and
interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance
with standards.
3.4 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Burn-in all lamps that require specific aging period to operate properly, prior to occupancy by
Owner. Burn-in fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps intended to be dimmed, for at least
100 hours at full voltage.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion,

provide on-site assistance in adjusting aimable luminaires to suit actual occupied conditions.
Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.
Some of this work may be required after dark.
1. Adjust aimable luminaires in the presence of A/E.

SECTION 26 56 00 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY

1. Exterior luminaires with lamps, ballasts, and solid-state lighting drivers.
2. Luminaire-mounted photoelectric relays.
3. Poles and accessories.

1. Division 26 Section "Interior Lighting" for exterior luminaires normally mounted on
exterior surfaces of buildings.
2. Division 26 Section "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including
time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, emergency transfer devices and
multipole lighting relays and contactors.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. CRI: Color-rendering index.
B. HID: High-intensity discharge.
C. LED: Light-emitting diode.
D. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast and SSL driver housing if provided.
E. Pole: Luminaire support structure, including tower used for large area illumination.
F. SSL: Solid-state lighting.
G. Standard: Same definition as "Pole" above.
1.4 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS CRITERIA FOR POLE SELECTION
A. Dead Load: Weight of luminaire and its horizontal and vertical supports, and supporting
structure, applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-5.
B. Ice Load: Load of 3 lbf/sq. ft., applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-5.
C. Wind Load: Pressure of wind on pole and luminaire, calculated and applied as stated in
AASHTO LTS-5.
1. Basic wind speed for calculating wind load for poles 50 feet or less in height is 90 mph.
a. Wind Importance Factor: 1.0.
Project 16018 EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 - 1

b. Minimum Design Life: 50 years.

c. Velocity Conversion Factors: 1.0.
1.5 SUBMITTALS

1. Product Data: For each luminaire, pole, and support component, arranged in order of
lighting unit designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:
a. Physical description of luminaire, including materials, dimensions, effective projected
area, and verification of indicated parameters.
b. Details of attaching luminaires and accessories.
c. Details of installation and construction.
d. Luminaire materials.
e. Photometric data based on laboratory tests of each luminaire type, complete with
indicated lamps, ballasts, SSL drivers, and accessories.
1) Photometric data shall be certified by manufacturer's laboratory with a current
accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for
Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
2) Manufacturer’s test data for IESNA TM-15-07: Backlight, Uplight, and Glare
(BUG) Ratings for each specified plan type luminaire.
f. Photoelectric relays.
g. Ballasts and SSL Drivers, including energy-efficiency data.
h. Lamps, including life, output, and energy-efficiency data.
i. Materials, dimensions, and finishes of poles.
j. Means of attaching luminaires to supports, and indication that attachment is suitable
for components involved.
k. Anchor bolts for poles.
2. Pole and Support Component Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of poles, certifying that
products are designed for indicated load requirements in AASHTO LTS-5 and that load
imposed by luminaire has been included in design.
1. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and poles to include in operation and
2. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers'

laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program
for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
intended use.
C. Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code."

D. Comply with NFPA 70.
A. Package aluminum poles for shipping according to ASTM B 660.
B. Store poles on decay-resistant-treated skids at least 12 inches above grade and vegetation.
Support poles to prevent distortion and arrange to provide free air circulation.
C. Retain factory-applied pole wrappings on metal poles until right before pole installation. For
poles with nonmetallic finishes, handle with web fabric straps.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty for SSL Luminaires and Drivers: Manufacturer's standard form in which
manufacturer of lighting unit agrees to repair or replace components that fail in materials or
1. Warranty Period for SSL Luminaires and Drivers: 5 years from date of Substantial
Completion.
B. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace products that fail in materials or workmanship; that corrode; or that fade, stain, perforate,
erode, or chalk due to effects of weather or solar radiation within specified warranty period.
Manufacturer may exclude lightning damage, hail damage, vandalism, abuse, or unauthorized
repairs or alterations from special warranty coverage.
1. Warranty Period for Luminaires: One year from date of Substantial Completion.
2. Warranty Period for Metal Corrosion: One year from date of Substantial Completion.
3. Warranty Period for Color Retention: One year from date of Substantial Completion.
4. Warranty Period for Lamps: Replace lamps and fuses that fail within 12 months from date
of Substantial Completion; furnish replacement lamps and fuses that fail within the second
12 months from date of Substantial Completion.
5. Warranty Period for Poles: Repair or replace lighting poles and standards that fail in finish,
materials, and workmanship within manufacturer's standard warranty period, but not less
than one year from date of Substantial Completion.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each
type.
2. Glass and Plastic Lenses, Covers, and Other Optical Parts: 10 for every 100 of each type
and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.
3. Ballasts and SSL Drivers: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at
4. Globes and Guards: 10 for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one
of each type.
5. LED Packages, Arrays and Modules: 1 for every 100 of each type and rating installed.
Furnish at least one of each type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In Lighting Fixture Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that introduce lists,
the following requirements apply to product selection:
2.2 LUMINAIRES, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Luminaires shall comply with UL 1598 and be listed and labeled for installation in wet locations
by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Comply with IESNA RP-8 for parameters of lateral light distribution patterns indicated for
luminaires.
C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
D. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum, unless otherwise indicated. Form and
support to prevent warping and sagging.
E. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or deform
in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires.
F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under
operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent
doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping
and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or replacing
lenses. Designed to disconnect ballast and SSL driver when door opens.
G. Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel.
H. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and
UV radiation.
I. Light Shields: Metal baffles, factory installed and field adjustable, arranged to block light
distribution to indicated portion of normally illuminated area or field.
J. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated:
1. White Surfaces: 85 percent.
2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.
3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.
K. Lenses and Refractors Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal and cushion
lenses and refractors in luminaire doors.

L. Factory-Applied Finish for Steel and Aluminum Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal
Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and
designating finishes.
1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," or
SSPC-SP 10/NACE No. 2, "Near-White Blast Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil, grease, and
other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind welds and polish surfaces to a
smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying
with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."
2. Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of electro-statically coated
urethane polyester thermosetting powder at least 3.0 mils thick, cured in a convection oven
at 400 degrees F.
a. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard catalog of colors.
b. Color: Match A/E's sample of custom color.
c. Color: As selected by A/E from manufacturer's full range of standard and optional
colors.
2.3 SSL LUMINAIRES
A. LED Package (Component) Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

products by one of the following manufacturers: Manufacturers of LED drivers and LED modules
shall be tested by the Luminaire Manufacturers and the stated warranty shall be based on the
compatibility of the tested components, and substituted manufacturers will not be allowed. Refer
to the list of approved LED drivers above.
B. LED Luminaires: Comply with UL 1598, in addition to the requirements contained in UL

Subject 8750. Photometric data complying with IES LM-79, Energy Star rated by the U.S.
Department of Energy, CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 4000 K, white light produced by
binary complementary wavelength conversion. Color mixing red, green, and blue LEDs is not
acceptable. Listed for damp or wet locations according to application.
1. LED Packages, Arrays, and Modules: Binned for color consistency per NEMA SSL 3; and
B50, L70 rating of at least 50,000 hours when tested according to IES LM-80.
2. LED packages, arrays or modules shall be field replaceable without having to replace the
entire luminaire.
2.4 LUMINAIRE-MOUNTED PHOTOELECTRIC RELAYS
A. Selected luminaires as shown on the drawings shall have a photoelectric relay installed at the
factory, to automatically de-energize the luminaire after a period of time when there is sufficient
daylight and the luminaire does not need to operate. Refer to Division 26 Section "Lighting
Control Devices" for additional details.
2.5 LUMINAIRE-MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSOR
A. Selected luminaires as shown on the drawings shall have an integral occupancy sensor installed at
the factory, to automatically de-energize the luminaire, after an adjustable period of time, when
the area is not occupied. Refer to Division 26 Section "Lighting Control Devices" for additional
details.

2.6 EMERGENCY TRANSFER DEVICE, GENERATOR TRANSFER DEVICE, and WHOLE

CIRCUIT TRANSFER DEVICES.
A. Selected luminaires as shown on the drawings shall have a transfer device installed at the factory,
or a whole circuit device installed in the field, to automatically transfer the branch circuit from a
normal source to an emergency source. Refer to Division 26 Section "Lighting Control Devices"
for additional details.
2.7 DRIVERS FOR SSL LUMINAIRES

1. Sylvania.
2. Philips Lighting Co.
3. EldoLED (Acuity Brand).
4. Energy Recovery Products (Cooper Brand).
5. Thomas Research Products (Hubbell Brand).
6. Lutron (1% dimming).
B. Electronic Drivers: Comply with ANSI C82.11, NEMA SSL 1, and UL 935 in addition to the
requirements contained in UL Subject 8750; UL Class 2 listed power supply, isolated output, and
designed for type and quantity of LEDs served, listed for damp or wet locations according to
application.
1. Input Rating: 120 to 277 V, 60 Hz, plus or minus 10 percent.
2. Output Rating: 12 or 24 V dc, 350 mA, plus or minus 5 percent.
3. Sound Rating: Class A.
4. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent.
5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better.
6. Minimum Operating Temperature: minus 40 deg F.
7. Power Factor: 0.90 or higher.
C. Drivers for Dimmer-Controlled Lighting Fixtures: Electronic type.

1. Dimming Range: 100 to 10 percent of rated LED lumens.
2. Driver Input Watts: Can be reduced to 25 percent of normal.
3. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific dimming control system and
lamp type indicated.
4. Control: 0 to 10 V dc.
2.8 BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS

1. General Electric Co.; GE Lighting Division.
2. Holophane; a Division of Acuity Lighting Group, Inc.
3. OSRAM SYLVANIA.
4. Philips Advance.
5. Venture Lighting International; an Advanced Lighting Technologies Company.
6. Universal Lighting Technologies, Inc.

B. Electromagnetic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029 and capable of open-circuit
operation without reduction of average lamp life. Include the following features unless otherwise
indicated:
1. Ballast Circuit: Constant-wattage autotransformer or regulating high-power-factor type.
2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F.
3. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F.
4. Ballast Fuses: One in each ungrounded power supply conductor. Voltage and current
ratings as recommended by ballast manufacturer.
C. High-Pressure Sodium Ballasts: Electromagnetic type with solid-state igniter/starter and capable
of open-circuit operation without reduction of average lamp life. Igniter/starter shall have an
average life in pulsing mode of 10,000 hours at an igniter/starter-case temperature of 90 deg C.
1. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 40 deg F.
2.9 HID LAMPS

1. EYE Lighting International of North America, Inc.
2. General Electric Co.; GE Lighting Division.
3. OSRAM SYLVANIA.
4. Philips Lighting Co.; a Division of Philips Electronics North America Corporation.
5. Venture Lighting International; an Advanced Lighting Technologies Company.
B. High-Pressure Sodium Lamps: ANSI C78.42, CRI 21 (minimum), CCT color temperature
1900 K, and average rated life of 24,000 hours, minimum.
C. Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.43, CRI 65 (minimum), and CCT color temperature
4000 K, unless otherwise indicated.
2.10 POLES AND SUPPORT COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Characteristics: Comply with AASHTO LTS-5.

1. Wind-Load Strength of Poles: Adequate at indicated heights above grade without failure,
permanent deflection, or whipping in steady winds of speed indicated in Part 1 "Structural
Analysis Criteria for Pole Selection" Article, with a 3-s gust effect factor of 1.14.
B. Luminaire Attachment Provisions: Comply with luminaire manufacturers' mounting

requirements. Use stainless-steel fasteners and mounting bolts, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Mountings, Fasteners, and Appurtenances: Corrosion-resistant items compatible with support

components.
1. Materials: Shall not cause galvanic action at contact points.
2. Anchor Bolts, Leveling Nuts, Bolt Caps, and Washers: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication,
unless stainless-steel items are indicated.
3. Anchor-Bolt Template: Plywood or steel.
D. Concrete Pole Foundations: Cast in place, with anchor bolts to match pole-base flange.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete."

2.11 STEEL POLES
A. Poles: Comply with ASTM A 500, Grade B, carbon steel with a minimum yield of 46,000 psig ;
1-piece construction up to 40 feet in height with access handhole in pole wall.
1. Shape: [Round, tapered] [Round, straight] [Square, tapered] [Square, straight].
2. Mounting Provisions: Butt flange for bolted mounting on foundation.
B. Brackets for Luminaires: Detachable, cantilever, without underbrace.

1. Adapter fitting welded to pole and bracket, then bolted together with galvanized-steel bolts.
2. Cross Section: Tapered oval, with straight tubular end section to accommodate luminaire.
3. Match luminaire material and finish.
C. Grounding and Bonding Lugs: Welded 1/2-inch threaded lug, complying with requirements in
Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems," listed for attaching
grounding and bonding conductors of type and size listed in that Section, and accessible through
handhole.
D. Cable Support Grip: Wire-mesh type with rotating attachment eye, sized for diameter of cable
and rated for a minimum load equal to weight of supported cable times a 5.0 safety factor.
E. Steel Pole Finish: Match finish process and color of luminaire.
F. Vibration Dampening: Units selected by manufacturer to limit induced harmonic pole vibration.
2.12 ALUMINUM POLES
A. Poles: Seamless, extruded structural tube complying with ASTM B 429/B 429M, Alloy 6063-T6
with access handhole in pole wall.
1. Shape: [Round, tapered] [Round, straight] [Square, tapered] [Square, straight].
2. Mounting Provisions: Butt flange for bolted mounting on foundation or breakaway support.
B. Grounding and Bonding Lugs: Welded 1/2-inch (13-mm) threaded lug, complying with
requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems," listed for
attaching grounding and bonding conductors of type and size listed in that Section, and accessible
through handhole.
C. Brackets for Luminaires: Detachable, with pole and adapter fittings of cast aluminum. Adapter
fitting welded to pole and bracket, then bolted together with stainless-steel bolts.
1. Tapered oval cross section, with straight tubular end section to accommodate luminaire.
2. Finish: Same as luminaire.
D. Aluminum Finish: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
1. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
2. Color: Match finish process and color of luminaire.
E. Vibration Dampening: Units selected by manufacturer to limit induced harmonic pole vibration.

2.13 FIBERGLASS POLES
A. Poles: Designed specifically for supporting luminaires, with factory-formed cable entrance and
handhole. Not less than 65 percent fiberglass, with resin and pigment making up the remainder.
1. Resin Color: [Dark bronze] <Insert color>; provide uniform coloration throughout entire
wall thickness.
2. Surface Finish: Surface layer of pole inherently UV inhibited.
2.14 POLE ACCESSORIES
A. Duplex Receptacle: 120 V, 20 A in a weatherproof assembly complying with Division 26

Section "Wiring Devices" for ground-fault circuit-interrupter type.
1. Recessed, 12 inches above finished grade.
2. Nonmetallic polycarbonate plastic or reinforced fiberglass cover, that when mounted results
in NEMA 250, Type 4X enclosure.
3. With cord opening.
4. With lockable hasp and latch that complies with OSHA lockout and tag-out requirements.
B. Base Covers: Manufacturers' standard metal units, arranged to cover pole's mounting bolts and
nuts. Finish same as pole.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION
B. Install lamps in each luminaire.
C. Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports.

1. Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the
application and approved by manufacturer.
D. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming. Include adjustment of photoelectric
device to prevent false operation of relay by artificial light sources.
3.2 POLE INSTALLATION
A. Align pole foundations and poles for optimum directional alignment of luminaires and their
mounting provisions on the pole.
B. Clearances: Maintain the following minimum horizontal distances of poles from surface and
underground features, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings:
1. Fire Hydrants and Storm Drainage Piping: 60 inches.
2. Water, Gas, Electric, Communication, and Sewer Lines: 10 feet.
3. Trees: 15 feet.
C. Concrete Pole Foundations: Set anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt templates furnished by
pole manufacturer. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing requirements are specified in
Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

1. Finish: Smooth-rubbed finish as specified in Division 03 Section “Cast-in-Place Concrete.”
D. Foundation-Mounted Poles: Mount pole with leveling nuts, and tighten top nuts to torque level
recommended by pole manufacturer.
1. Use anchor bolts and nuts selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application and
2. Grout void between pole base and foundation. Use nonshrink or expanding concrete grout
firmly packed to fill space.
3. Install base covers, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Use a short piece of 1/2-inch-diameter pipe to make a drain hole through grout. Arrange to
drain condensation from interior of pole.
E. Poles and Pole Foundations Set in Concrete Paved Areas: Install poles with minimum of 6-inch-
wide, unpaved gap between the pole or pole foundation and the edge of adjacent concrete slab.
Fill unpaved ring with pea gravel to a level 1 inch below top of concrete slab.
F. Raise and set poles using web fabric slings (not chain or cable).
G. Install vibration dampening devices.
3.3 BOLLARD LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION
A. Align units for optimum directional alignment of light distribution.
B. Install on concrete base with top 4 inches above finished grade or surface at bollard location.
Cast conduit into base, and shape base to match shape of bollard base. Finish by troweling and
rubbing smooth. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing are specified in Division 03
Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
3.4 INSTALLATION OF INDIVIDUAL GROUND-MOUNTING LUMINAIRES
A. Install on concrete base with top 4 inches above finished grade or surface at luminaire location.
Cast conduit into base, and finish by troweling and rubbing smooth. Concrete materials,
installation, and finishing are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
3.5 CORROSION PREVENTION
A. Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a
dissimilar metal, protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment.
B. Steel Conduits: Comply with Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems."
In concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010-inch-thick, pipe-wrapping plastic tape applied
with a 50 percent overlap.
3.6 GROUNDING
A. Ground metal poles and support structures according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and
Bonding for Electrical Systems."
1. Install grounding electrode for each pole, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Install grounding conductor pigtail in the base for connecting luminaire to grounding
system.
B. Ground nonmetallic poles and support structures according to Division 26 Section "Grounding
and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
1. Install grounding electrode for each pole.
2. Install grounding conductor and conductor protector.
3. Ground metallic components of pole accessories and foundations.
A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
B. Illumination Observations: Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing luminaires
and energizing circuits with normal power source.
1. Verify operation of photoelectric controls.
C. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and
interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance
with standards.

SECTION 283111 – DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Fire-alarm control unit.
2. Manual fire-alarm boxes.
3. System smoke detectors.
4. Heat detectors.
5. Notification appliances.
6. Magnetic door holders.
7. Remote annunciator.
8. Addressable interface device.
9. Digital alarm communicator transmitter.
10. System printer.
11. Fire alarm wire and cable.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. LED: Light-emitting diode.
B. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Noncoded addressable system, with automatic sensitivity control of certain smoke detectors and
multiplexed signal transmission, dedicated to fire-alarm service only.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work. Submit simultaneously with Product Data. Include the following as a
minimum shop drawing requirement.
1. Submit to authorities having jurisdiction for approval, submittals reviewed and marked “No
Exceptions Taken” by Architect.
2. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:
a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design.
b. NICET-certified fire-alarm technician, Level III minimum.
c. Licensed or certified by authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Comply with recommendations in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of
Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72.
4. Include voltage drop calculations for notification appliance circuits.
Project 16018 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 1

5. Include battery-size calculations.

6. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector, verifying that
each detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humidity possible
when air-handling system is operating.
7. Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning ducts,
drawn to scale and coordinating installation of duct smoke detectors and access to them.
Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes, detector
housing, and remote status and alarm indicators. Locate detectors according to
manufacturer's written recommendations.
8. Include voice/alarm signaling-service equipment rack or console layout, grounding
schematic, amplifier power calculation, and single-line connection diagram.
9. Include 1/8-inch scale floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each
addressable device. Show size and route of cable and conduits.
10. Show details of graphic maps.
11. Provide written Warranty as follows
a. The Fire System shall have a 1 year warranty starting for the date of Beneficial
Occupancy.
b. Batteries shall have a full 1-year warranty and a 10-year pro rata warranty starting for
the date of Beneficial Occupancy.

1. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
2. Qualification Data: Provide Certification form, from the manufacturer, that the Installer and
Persons preparing Shop Drawings are Qualified by the manufacturer. Submit qualifications
simultaneously with Product Data.
3. Field quality-control reports.
1. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in
Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
a. Comply with the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance"
Chapter in NFPA 72.
b. Provide "Record of Completion Documents" according to NFPA 72 article "Permanent
Records" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance"
Chapter.
c. Record copy of site-specific software.
d. Provide "Maintenance, Inspection and Testing Records" according to NFPA 72 article
of the same name and include the following:
1) Frequency of testing of installed components.
2) Frequency of inspection of installed components.
3) Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance.
4) Manufacturer's user training manuals.
e. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements.
f. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control unit.
2. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:
a. Software operating and upgrade manuals.
b. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data
files.
c. Device address list.

d. Printout of software application and graphic screens.

A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation
of units required for this Project.
1. Installation shall be by personnel certified by NICET as fire-alarm Level II technician.
2. Distributors shall also be certified by the manufacturer.
B. Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: Obtain fire-alarm system from
single source from single manufacturer. Components shall be compatible with, and operate as, an
extension of existing system.
C. Fire Alarm Wire and Cable Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical
products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with
appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
A. Interruption of Existing Fire-Alarm Service: Do not interrupt fire-alarm service to facilities

arranging to provide temporary guard service according to requirements indicated:
fire-alarm service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of fire-alarm service without Construction Manager's
written permission.
1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Existing Fire-Alarm Equipment: Maintain existing equipment fully operational until new
equipment has been tested and accepted. As new equipment is installed, label it "NOT IN
SERVICE" until it is accepted. Remove labels from new equipment when put into service and
label existing fire-alarm equipment "NOT IN SERVICE" until removed from the building.
B. Equipment Removal: After acceptance of new fire-alarm system, remove existing disconnected
fire-alarm equipment and wiring.
1.9 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT
A. Comply with UL 864.
B. Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software support for two
years.

C. Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. Install and program
software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion.
Upgrading software shall include operating system. Upgrade shall include new or revised
licenses for use of software.
1. Provide 30 days' notice to Owner to allow scheduling and access to system.
1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Lamps for Remote Indicating Lamp Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount
installed, but no fewer than 1 unit.
2. Lamps for Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than
1 unit.
3. Smoke Detectors, Fire Detectors: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount of each type
installed, but no fewer than 1 unit of each type.
4. Detector Bases: Quantity equal to 2 percent of amount of each type installed, but no fewer
than 1 unit of each type.
5. Keys and Tools: One extra set for access to locked and tamperproofed components.
6. Audible and Visual Notification Appliances: One of each type installed.
7. Fuses: Two of each type installed in the system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. Simplex
B. Products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed
the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product. The “Substitution
Request Form” and complete technical data for evaluation must accompany requests for A/E’s
approval. All materials for evaluation must be received by the Project Manager and Specification
Department at least 10 days prior to bid due date. Additional approved manufacturers will be
issued by Addendum.
2.2 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION
A. Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and systems:
1. Manual stations.
2. Heat detectors.
3. Smoke detectors.
4. Duct smoke detectors.
5. Automatic sprinkler system water flow.
6. Fire-extinguishing system operation, including kitchen hoods.
7. Water flow switches
8. Fire standpipe system.

B. Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:

1. Continuously operate alarm notification appliances.
2. Identify alarm at fire-alarm control unit and remote annunciators.
3. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station.
4. Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths.
5. Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders.
6. Activate voice/alarm communication system.
7. Switch designated heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire-
alarm mode.
8. Close smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-handling duct systems.
9. Transmit an alarm signal to building management system per air-handling systems zone.
10. Recall elevators to primary or alternate recall floors by designated detectors.
11. Activate elevator shunt-trip circuit breakers by designated detectors.
12. Activate kitchen equipment shunt-trip circuit breakers on fire-extinguishing system
operation.
13. Activate emergency lighting control for theatrical lighting system.
14. Activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies, including emergency generators
where required by local codes.
15. Record events in the system memory.
16. Record events by the system printer.
C. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:
1. Valve supervisory switch.
2. Low-air-pressure switch of a dry-pipe sprinkler system.
3. Elevator shunt-trip supervision.
4. Kitchen equipment shunt-trip supervision.
D. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:
1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits.
2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating
devices.
3. Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control unit.
4. Ground or a single break in fire-alarm control unit internal circuits.
5. Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control unit.
6. Break in standby battery circuitry.
7. Failure of battery charging.
8. Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control unit or annunciator.
9. Fire-pump power failure, including a dead-phase or phase-reversal condition.
10. Low-air-pressure switch operation on a dry-pipe or preaction sprinkler system.
E. System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Initiate notification appliance and annunciate at
fire-alarm control unit and remote annunciators. Record the event on system printer.
2.3 FIRE-ALARM CONTROL UNIT
A. General Requirements for Fire-Alarm Control Unit:

1. Field-programmable, microprocessor-based, modular, power-limited design with electronic
modules, complying with UL 864 and listed and labeled by an NRTL.

a. System software and programs shall be held in flash electrically erasable

programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), retaining the information through
failure of primary and secondary power supplies.
b. Include a real-time clock for time annotation of events on the event recorder and
printer.
2. Addressable initiation devices that communicate device identity and status.
a. Smoke sensors shall additionally communicate sensitivity setting and allow for
adjustment of sensitivity at fire-alarm control unit.
b. Temperature sensors shall additionally test for and communicate the sensitivity range
of the device.
3. Addressable control circuits for operation of mechanical equipment.
B. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at
fire-alarm control unit and addressable system components including annunciation and
supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming
and control menu.
1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, 2 line(s) of 40 characters, minimum.
2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control
commands and to indicate control commands to be entered into the system for control of
smoke-detector sensitivity and other parameters.
C. Circuits:
1. Initiating Device, Notification Appliance, and Signaling Line Circuits: NFPA 72, Class B.
a. Initiating Device Circuits: Style A.
b. Notification Appliance Circuits: Style Y.
c. Signaling Line Circuits: Style 4.
d. Install no more than 70 percent rated capacity of addressable devices on each signaling
line circuit.
e. Install no more than 70 percent rated capacity of notification appliances on each
notification appliance circuit.
2. Serial Interfaces: Two RS-232 ports for service modem and printer.
D. Door Controls: Door hold-open devices that are controlled by smoke detectors at doors in smoke
barrier walls shall be connected to fire-alarm system.
E. Remote Smoke-Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Controls shall select specific addressable

smoke detectors for adjustment, display their current status and sensitivity settings, and change
those settings. Allow controls to be used to program repetitive, time-scheduled, and automated
changes in sensitivity of specific detector groups. Record sensitivity adjustments and sensitivity-
adjustment schedule changes in system memory, and print out the final adjusted values on system
printer.
F. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, supervisory,

and trouble signals to a remote alarm station.
G. Voice/Alarm Signaling Service: Central emergency communication system with redundant

microphones, preamplifiers, amplifiers, and tone generators provided as a special module that is
part of fire-alarm control unit.

1. Indicated number of alarm channels for automatic, simultaneous transmission of different

announcements to different zones or for manual transmission of announcements by use of
the central-control microphone. Amplifiers shall comply with UL 1711 and be listed by an
NRTL.
a. Allow the application of and evacuation signal to indicated number of zones and, at
same time, allow voice paging to the other zones selectively or in any combination.
b. Programmable tone and message sequence selection.
c. Standard digitally recorded messages for "Evacuation" and "All Clear."
d. Generate tones to be sequenced with audio messages of type recommended by
NFPA 72 and that are compatible with tone patterns of notification appliance circuits
of fire-alarm control unit.
2. Status Annunciator: Indicate the status of various voice/alarm speaker zones and the status
of firefighters' two-way telephone communication zones.
3. Preamplifiers, amplifiers, and tone generators shall automatically transfer to backup units,
on primary equipment failure.
H. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module. Initiating
devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signals, supervisory and digital alarm
communicator transmitters shall be powered by 24-V dc source.
1. Alarm current draw of entire fire-alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the power-
supply module rating.
I. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger, and
automatic transfer switch.
1. Backup Battery: Premium, valve-regulated, recombinant-sealed, lead-calcium battery; spill
proof; with a warranty per PART 1 above. Provide a single-stage, constant-voltage-current,
limited battery charger, comply with battery manufacturer's written instructions for battery
terminal voltage and charging current recommendations for maximum battery life.
2. Backup Power Supply Capacity: Comply with NFPA 72, but not less than 24 hours normal
and 30 minutes alarm operation.
J. Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or glass
cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe appropriate
response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the system under
normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.
2.4 MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES
A. General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes shall be
finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color; shall show
visible indication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessed outlet box. If indicated as
surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box.
1. Single-action mechanism, pull-lever type; with integral addressable module arranged to
communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.
2. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch.
3. Weatherproof Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosure hinged at the top
to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm.

2.5 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS
A. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors:

1. Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal.
2. Detectors shall be four-wire type. If detectors are UL listed with the Fire Alarm Control
Panel for power, alarm and trouble using a 2 wire system, then 2 wire detectors may be
used.
3. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a twist-
lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for
connection to building wiring.
4. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore
them to normal operation.
5. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type indicating detector has operated and power-on
status.
6. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be analog-addressable type,
individually monitored at fire-alarm control unit for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm
condition and individually adjustable for sensitivity by fire-alarm control unit.
a. Rate-of-rise temperature characteristic shall be selectable at fire-alarm control unit for
15 or 20 deg F per minute.
b. Fixed-temperature sensing shall be independent of rate-of-rise sensing and shall be
settable at fire-alarm control unit to operate at 135 or 155 deg F .
c. Provide multiple levels of detection sensitivity for each sensor.
B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:

1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to identify
the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.
2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to
manually access the following for each detector:
a. Primary status.
b. Device type.
c. Present average value.
d. Present sensitivity selected.
e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).
C. Duct Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric type complying with UL 268A.

1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to identify
the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.
2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to
manually access the following for each detector:
a. Primary status.
b. Device type.
c. Present average value.
d. Present sensitivity selected.
e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).
3. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X; NRTL listed for use with
the supplied detector.
4. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity.
5. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for specific
duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied.

2.6 HEAT DETECTORS
A. General Requirements for Heat Detectors: Comply with UL 521.
B. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 deg F or a rate
of rise that exceeds 15 deg F per minute unless otherwise indicated.
1. Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases.
2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or
trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.
C. Heat Detector, Fixed-Temperature Type: Actuated by temperature that exceeds a fixed

temperature of 190 deg F.
1. Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases.
2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or
trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.
2.7 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
A. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification appliance signal

circuits, zoned as indicated, with screw terminals for system connections, and shall be mounted
on recessed outlet box. If indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box.
1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-mounting
assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system
connections.
B. Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating
mechanism behind a grille. Comply with UL 464. Horns shall produce a sound-pressure level of
90 dBA, measured 10 feet from the horn, using the coded signal prescribed in UL 464 test
protocol.
C. Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights comply with UL 1971, with clear or
nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is
engraved in minimum 1-inch- high letters on the lens.
1. Rated Light Output: 110 cd, unless indicated otherwise.
2. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated.
3. For units with guards to prevent physical damage, light output ratings shall be determined
with guards in place.
4. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units.
5. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.
6. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, red.
D. Weatherproof Bells: Electric-vibrating, 24-V dc, under-dome type; with provision for housing
operating mechanism behind bell. Bells shall produce a sound-pressure level of 94 dBA,
measured 10 feet from bell. 10-inch size, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Voice/Alarm Notification Appliances:

1. Appliances shall comply with UL 1480 and shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL.
a. Cone-Type Loudspeakers:
1) High-Range Units: Rated 2 to 8 W.
a) Minimum Axial Sensitivity: 93 dB at 10 feet at rated output.

2) Low-Range Units: Rated 1/4 to 2 W.

a) Minimum Axial Sensitivity: 84 dB at 10 feet at rated output.
3) Frequency Response: Within plus or minus 3 dB from 400 to 4,000 Hz.
4) Minimum Dispersion Angle: 100 degrees, minus 6 dB at 2,000 Hz.
5) Matching Transformer: Full-power rated with four taps. Maximum insertion
loss of 0.5 dB.
6) Mounting: Flush or semirecessed, wall and ceiling mounted, unless noted
otherwise.
a) Flush-Ceiling-Mounting Units: In steel back boxes. Metal ceiling grille
with white baked enamel.
b. Horn-Type Loudspeakers:
1) Type: Single- and multiple-horn units, double-reentrant design, with minimum
full-range power rating of 15 W.
2) Minimum Axial Sensitivity: 102 dB at 10 feet at rated output.
3) Frequency Response: Within plus or minus 3 dB from 400 to 4,000 Hz.
4) Minimum Dispersion Angle: 70 degrees, minus 6 dB at 2,000 Hz.
5) Matching Transformer: Full-power rated with four standard taps. Maximum
insertion loss of 0.5 dB.
6) Mounting: Integral bracket.
a) Multiple-horn Units: Factory installed to prefabricated 10- by 10- by 6-inch
nominal steel enclosure suitable for pendent mounting.
2.8 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE CIRCUIT POWER SUPPLY UNITS
A. General Requirements for Notification Appliance Circuit Power Supply Unit:

1. Power-limited design, complying with UL 864 and listed and labeled by an NRTL.
B. Notification Appliance Circuits: NFPA 72, Class B, Style Y.

1. Install no more than 70 percent rated capacity of notification appliances on each notification
appliance circuit.
C. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module. Initiating
devices, notification appliances, trouble signals, and supervisory signals shall be powered by 24-
V dc source.
1. Alarm current draw of entire notification appliance circuit power supply unit shall not
exceed 80 percent of the power-supply module rating.
D. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger, and
automatic transfer switch.
1. Backup Battery: Premium, valve-regulated, recombinant-sealed, lead-calcium battery; spill
proof; with a full 1-year warranty and a pro rata 19-year warranty. With single-stage,
constant-voltage-current, limited battery charger, comply with battery manufacturer's
written instructions for battery terminal voltage and charging current recommendations for
maximum battery life.
2. Backup Power Supply Capacity: Comply with NFPA 72, but not less than 24 hours normal
and 30 minutes alarm operation.

2.9 MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products:
1. Simplex
B. Description: Units are equipped for wall mounting complete with matching doorplate.
1. Electromagnet: Requires no more than 3 W to develop 25-lbf holding force.
2. Wall-Mounted Units: Flush mounted at least 2.375-inches deep, with maximum 1.625-inch
deep pin-pivoted door armature. The use of ball-jointed catches and extension links on door
armatures is not permitted.
3. Rating: 120-V ac.
C. Material and Finish: Brushed or painted aluminum.
2.10 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR
A. Description: Annunciator functions shall match those of fire-alarm control unit for alarm,
supervisory, and trouble indications. Manual switching functions shall match those of fire-alarm
control unit, including acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing.
1. Mounting: Flush cabinet, NEMA 250, Type 1.
B. Display Type and Functional Performance: Alphanumeric display and LED indicating lights
shall match those of fire-alarm control unit. Provide controls to acknowledge, silence, reset, and
test functions for alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals.
1. Graphic Annunciator:
a. Backbox: Cold rolled steel with welded and ground seams, finished with black
polyester powder coating.
b. Door: Satin finished stainless steel or brushed aluminum, with concealed piano hinge,
secured by a key lock with no other visible fasteners.
c. Graphic: Reversed printed polycarbonate lexan laminated to aluminum, with full color
image, and LEDs indicating alarm, trouble, or supervisory condition, and fire alarm
device type. Building detail shall be selected and color-coded as directed by Owner
and A/E.
d. Provide keyed lamp test switch.
e. Provide "power-on" LED indicator.
f. Wiring: LED and switch wiring shall be neatly harnessed to designated terminal
blocks located in annunciator backbox.
g. Install alphanumeric display in face of graphic.
h. Install graphic annunciator adjacent to alphanumeric display.
2. Graphic Map:
a. Graphic: Full color image printed on the reverse side of a 10 mil polycarbonate Lexan
laminated to a 1/8-inch rigid backing with a removable adhesive for future
replacement.
b. Frame: Black anodized aluminum frame with concealed security hanging system to
prevent unauthorized removal.
c. Location of fire-alarm control unit, main graphic map and other graphic maps shall be
shown in red with "YOU ARE HERE" printed in red. Detection devices,
nomenclature, and building detail shall be color coded as selected by Owner and A/E.
d. Mounting: Adjacent to remote annunciator.

2.11 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE
A. Description: Microelectronic monitor module, NRTL listed for use in providing a system address
for alarm-initiating devices for wired applications with normally open contacts.
B. Integral Relay: Capable of providing a direct signal to the following:

1. Elevator controller to initiate elevator recall.
2. Circuit-breaker shunt trip for power shutdown.
3. Theatrical lighting controller for panic lighting.
4. Heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controllers for power shutdown.
5. Smoke dampers for closing.
6. Magnetic door holders, electric locks, coiling doors and grilles for releasing.
7. Building management system for equipment shutdown and alarm notification.
8. Gas and fuel solenoid valves for emergency shut-off.
C. Voltage Sensing Relay: Capable of detecting presence of 120 V ac for supervision of control
power for shunt-trip circuit breakers.
2.12 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER
A. Digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be acceptable to the remote central station and shall
comply with UL 632 and be listed and labeled by an NRTL.
B. Functional Performance: Unit shall receive an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from fire-
alarm control unit and automatically capture two telephone lines and dial a preset number for a
remote central station. When contact is made with central station, signals shall be transmitted. If
service on either line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, transmitter shall initiate a local
trouble signal and transmit the signal indicating loss of telephone line to the remote alarm
receiving station over the remaining line. Transmitter shall automatically report telephone
service restoration to the central station. If service is lost on both telephone lines, transmitter
shall initiate the local trouble signal.
C. Local functions and display at the digital alarm communicator transmitter shall include the
following:
1. Verification that both telephone lines are available.
2. Programming device.
3. LED display.
4. Manual test report function and manual transmission clear indication.
5. Communications failure with the central station or fire-alarm control unit.
D. Digital data transmission shall include the following:

1. Address of the alarm-initiating device.
2. Address of the supervisory signal.
3. Address of the trouble-initiating device.
4. Loss of ac supply or loss of power.
5. Low battery.
6. Abnormal test signal.
7. Communication bus failure.
E. Self-Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central station.

2.13 SMOKE DAMPERS
A. Smoke dampers, when shown on drawings or in other specifications, shall be provided by others.
Provide 120 volt A.C. power circuits, fire alarm interface device, smoke dampers, remote alarm
indicator and control wiring as required to operate smoke dampers as required in system
operational description above.
2.14 PATHWAYS
A. Support of Open Cabling: NRTL labeled for support of Category 6 cabling, designed to prevent
degradation of cable performance and pinch points that could damage cable.
1. Support brackets with cable tie slots for fastening cable ties to brackets.
2. Lacing bars, spools, J-hooks, and D-rings.
3. Straps and other devices.
4. Cable Ties: Comply with Division 26 Section “Identification of Electrical Systems.”
B. Cable Trays: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Cable Trays for Electrical
Systems."
C. Conduit and Boxes: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for
Electrical Systems."
1. Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 2 inches wide, 3 inches high, and 2-1/2 inches deep.
2.15 FIRE ALARM WIRE AND CABLE
A. General Wire and Cable Requirements: NRTL listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70,
Article 760.
B. Signaling Line Circuits: Twisted, shielded pair, not less than No. 18 AWG.
C. Non-Power-Limited Circuits: Solid-copper conductors with 600-V rated, 75 deg C, color-coded

insulation.
1. Low-Voltage Circuits: No. 16 AWG, minimum.
2. Line-Voltage Circuits: No. 12 AWG, minimum.
2.16 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Comply with UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating
adhesives, and inks used by label printers.
B. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS
A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems."
for installation of conduits and wireways.

3.2 FIRE ALARM WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NFPA 72.
B. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway according to Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes
for Electrical Systems," and cable tray except as follows: within consoles, cabinets, desks, and
counters and except in accessible ceiling spaces where unenclosed wiring method may be used.
Use NRTL-listed plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings. Conceal
raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces. All vertical cable exposed to abuse, inside walls
or surface mounted up to 12 feet above finished floor, shall be in conduit.
C. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as

recommended by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and
back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess.
Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with
the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to the system's wiring
diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type
terminal blocks, or plug connectors.
D. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes, cabinets, or
equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.
E. Color-Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building power
wiring. Use one color-code for alarm circuit wiring and another for supervisory circuits. Color-
code audible alarm-indicating circuits differently from alarm-initiating circuits. Use different
colors for visible alarm-indicating devices. Paint fire alarm system junction boxes and covers
red.
F. Wiring to Remote Alarm Transmitting Device: 1-inch conduit between the fire alarm control
panel and the transmitter. Install number of conductors and electrical supervision for connecting
wiring as needed to suit monitoring function.
3.3 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
B. Comply with NFPA 72 for installation of fire-alarm equipment.
C. Equipment Mounting: Install wall-mounted equipment, with tops of cabinets not more than 72
inches above the finished floor.
D. Connecting to Existing Equipment: Verify that existing fire-alarm system is operational before
making changes or connections.
1. Connect new equipment to existing control panel in existing part of the building.
2. Connect new equipment to existing monitoring equipment at the supervising station.
3. Expand, modify, and supplement existing control and monitoring equipment as necessary to
extend existing control and monitoring functions to the new points. New components shall
be capable of merging with existing configuration without degrading the performance of
either system.

E. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 3 feet from air-supply diffuser on return-air opening.
F. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they
extend the full width of duct.
1. Provide for air-handling units with capacity of 2000 cfm or greater.
2. Provide for variable air volume type fan-powered terminal units served by return air
plenums with capacity of 2000 cfm or greater.
3. Provide within 5 feet of smoke dampers.
G. Heat Detectors in Elevator Shafts: Coordinate temperature rating and location with sprinkler
rating and location.
H. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install near each smoke detector and each sprinkler water-
flow switch and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal viewing position.
1. Install flush in ceiling below duct smoke detectors, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Install in public space near device they monitor. Do not install in normally unoccupied
spaces.
I. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches below the ceiling. Install bells
and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a
grille.
J. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and at least 6
inches below the ceiling.
K. Notification Appliance Circuit Power Supply Units: Provide quantity of units required for
notification appliances indicated.
1. Provide system smoke detector at each group of units.
2. Provide 120 V, 20 A circuit to each unit.
L. Mechanical Equipment Rooms and Kitchens: Provide 190 deg F fixed heat detectors.
M. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.
N. Fire-Alarm Control Unit: Surface mounted, with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above
the finished floor.
O. Annunciator: Install with top of panel not more than 72 inches above the finished floor.
P. Sprinkler Bell: Install weatherproof bell at fire department connections.
Q. Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter: Where digital alarm communicator transmitter is not
installed in fire-alarm control unit, provide 1-inch conduit between fire-alarm control unit and
digital alarm communicator transmitter.
R. Additional mounting heights are specified in Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices."

3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. For fire-protection systems related to overhead coiling fire doors and coiling counter fire doors in
fire-rated walls and partitions and in smoke partitions, comply with requirements in Division 08
Section "Overhead Coiling Fire Doors" and Division 08 Section "Coiling Counter Fire Doors."
Connect hardware and devices to fire-alarm system.
1. Verify that hardware and devices are NRTL listed for use with fire-alarm system in this
Section before making connections.
B. Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following devices and
systems. Install the interface device less than 3 feet from the device controlled. Make an
addressable confirmation connection when such feedback is available at the device or system
being controlled.
1. Smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-handling duct systems.
2. Air-handling unit controllers of designated air-handling systems.
3. Variable air volume type fan-powered box controllers of designated air-handling systems.
4. Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths.
5. Release magnetic door holders.
6. Activate circuit breaker shunt-trip to elevator controller.
7. Activate circuit breaker shunt-trip to designate kitchen equipment.
8. Alarm-initiating connection to building management system of designated air-handling duct
system.
9. Alarm-initiating connection to elevator recall system and components.
10. Alarm-initiating connection to activate theatrical lighting control.
11. Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies.
12. Alarm-initiating connection to overhead coiling fire doors and coiling counter fire doors.
13. Supervisory connections at valve supervisory switches.
14. Supervisory connections at low-air-pressure switch of each dry-pipe sprinkler system.
15. Supervisory connections at elevator shunt trip breaker.
16. Supervisory connections at kitchen equipment shunt trip breakers.
17. Supervisory connections at fire-pump power failure including a dead-phase or phase-
reversal condition.
18. Supervisory connections at fire-pump engine control panel.
3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for
identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control unit.
3.6 FIRESTOPPING
A. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Firestopping."
3.7 GROUNDING
A. Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. An equipment
grounding conductor shall be installed in the branch circuit from the main service ground to fire-
alarm control unit.

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test,

and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.
a. Inspection shall be based on completed Record Drawings and system documentation
that is required by NFPA 72 in its "Completion Documents, Preparation" Table in the
"Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter.
b. Comply with "Visual Inspection Frequencies" Table in the "Inspection" Section of the
"Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72; retain the
"Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components.
2. System Testing: Comply with "Test Methods" Table in the "Testing" Section of the
"Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.
3. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of
Completion" in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems"
Chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" Section of the
"Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.
C. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or
replaced devices and appliances.
D. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
F. Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly,
quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.
G. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire-alarm
system complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Use forms
developed for initial tests and inspections.
3.9 DEMONSTRATION

adjust, operate, and maintain fire-alarm system.

Project No.WSU-160027
SECTION 31 10 00 - SITE CLEARING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Perform site-clearing work as shown and specified. Work includes:

1. Protecting existing trees, plants, grasses and improvements designated to re-
main.
2. Removing plants, lawns and vegetation where required.
3. Clearing undergrowth, stripping weeds and other vegetation where required.
4. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil.
5. Removing designated above and below grade site improvements.
6. Removing debris and waste materials.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this
section.
1. Division 01 General Requirements
2. 31 20 00 Earth Moving
C. Related Documents
1. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supple-
mentary Conditions and Division 00 & 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
A. Comply with all applicable City, State and Federal requirements regarding materials,
methods of work and disposal of excess and waste materials.
B. Obtain and pay for all required inspections, permits and fees. Provide notices re-
quired by governmental authorities.
A. Locate and identify existing underground and overhead utilities in areas of work. If
utilities are to remain, provide adequate means of protection during site work opera-
tions. Repair utilities damaged during site work operations to satisfaction of utility
owner and at Contractor's expense. Call local utilities protection service 72 hours pri-
or to beginning work on site.
B. Should uncharted or incorrectly charted underground piping or other utilities be en-
countered during site work operations, notify the applicable utility company and the
Owner immediately for procedure directions. Cooperate with the applicable utility
company in maintaining active services in operation.
C. Locate, protect and maintain benchmarks, monuments, control points and project en-
gineering reference points. Re-establish if disturbed or destroyed at Contractor's ex-
pense.
D. Conduct site work operations and the removal of excess and waste materials to as-
sure minimum interference with streets and other adjacent occupied or used facilities.
Comply with City and State requirements for trucking of materials, including standing,
parking, traffic routes and covering of open trucks.
Project 16018 SITE CLEARING 311000 - 1

March 3, 2017
E. Do not close or obstruct streets and adjacent facilities without permission of authori-
ties having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic
ways when required by governing authorities.
F. Control dust caused by the Work. Moisten surfaces as required. Comply with pollu-
tion control regulations of governing authorities.
G. Protect existing buildings, paving and other services or facilities, except items desig-
nated for removal, on site and adjacent to the site, from damage caused by site work
operations. Cost of repair and restoration of damaged items at Contractor's expense.
H. Protect and maintain streetlights, utility poles and services, traffic signal control boxes,
curb boxes, valves and other services, except items designated for removal. Provide
for temporary relocation when required to maintain facilities and services in operation
during construction work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Materials and equipment: As selected by Contractor, except as indicated.

B. Tree protection: Plastic fencing; standard orange plastic snow fence supplied in
rolls, exposed height above grade to be 4 feet.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A. Clear areas only as required for access to new construction, site excavation and per-
formance of the work. Refer to the drawings for contract limits.
B. Examine existing trees and plants; suitably identify trees and plants to remain.
C. Remove trees, brush, plants, undergrowth, other vegetative matter and debris from
areas to be cleared and grubbed within contract limits. Strip weeds, lawns and
heavy grass.
1. Use only hand methods for grubbing inside the drip line of trees designated to
remain. Strip existing grass plant materials to a maximum depth of 1 inch under
tree canopies and carefully till or scarify existing grade to a maximum depth of 1
inch.
2. Remove stumps 4” in diameter and larger to their full depth; remove 3 in. and
larger roots to a depth of 2 ft. below finish grade; and remove 3 in. and larger
roots within 5 ft. of an underground structure, utility line, footings, and paved
areas.
D. Protect existing trees and other vegetation indicated to remain in place, against un-
necessary cutting, breaking or skinning of roots, skinning or bruising of roots and
bark, smothering of trees by stockpiling construction materials or excavated material
within drip line, excess foot or vehicular traffic, or parking of vehicles within drip line.
Fires not permitted under or near trees and vegetation to remain.
1. Protect designated trees to remain with 48-inch high wood or orange plastic
snow fence enclosure. Trees grouped together may be fenced together; see

March 3, 2017
site plan.
Trunk Diameter Distance From Edge of Trunk to Outer Edge of Fencing
greater than 10” 10’
2. Planting beds to be installed under trees to remain must be hand dug and roots
2” in diameter and larger shall be protected from damage.
3. Water trees and other vegetation as required to maintain their health during the
course of construction operations.
4. The Owner’s Representative may remove interfering branches of trees subject
to direction and approval.
5. Repair or replace trees and any other vegetation damaged by construction op-
erations, in a manner acceptable to the Owner’s Representative. Repair dam-
aged trees promptly to prevent progressive deterioration.
6. The Owner shall receive a monetary settlement for damage to tree(s) designat-
ed to remain, which are damaged by the work of the Contractor. The amount of
the settlement shall be the value of the tree(s) prior to construction, less the val-
ue of the tree(s) or their replacements at project acceptance. The monetary
value of trees shall be as determined by the Shade Tree Valuation Handbook of
the International Shade Tree Conference, latest edition. Repair and replace-
ment of trees significantly damaged due to lack of adequate protection during
work operations shall be at Contractor’s expense.
3.2 DEMOLITION
A. Demolish, remove, relocate or adjust designated site improvements. Remove foun-

dations to a minimum of 3 ft. below finish grade for open areas and to the elevation
indicated for areas to receive new structures. Remove all wood and metal construc-
tion.
1. Existing foundations and slabs remaining below the cut-off elevation under new
structures and not interfering with new construction may remain.
2. Break foundations and slabs into sections not greater than 3 sq. ft. to provide
drainage.
3. Break floors of cisterns to provide drainage.
B. Leave below grade voids open and clean. Fill material will be provided and grading
performed under Division 31 Section “Earthwork”.
C. Remove existing sidewalks, curbs and paving including all base material as required
to permit new construction and as indicated on the drawings.
D. Remove existing above and below grade site improvements as indicated on the
demolition plan.
E. Remove existing trash and debris from indicated areas.
3.3 EXISTING UTILITIES
A. Perform all work and provide materials necessary to disconnect and remove or relo-
cate existing utilities as indicated. Record existing piping termination prior to dis-
connection or relocation.
B. Information on the drawings relating to existing utilities services and other structures
is from the best sources presently available. All such information is furnished only
for information and is not guaranteed. Excavate test pits as required to determine
exact locations.
C. Completely fill pipes indicated to be plugged with an 8-inch thick concrete plug or

March 3, 2017
mortar jointed masonry bulkhead.
3.4 SALVAGED MATERIALS
A. Store and protect material scheduled for reuse and relocation.

B. All material resulting from site preparation work and not scheduled for reuse, reloca-
tion or salvaged for Owner use are property of the Contractor. Promptly remove
from the site as materials accumulate.
3.5 WASTE MATERIALS
A. Stockpile, haul from site and legally dispose of waste materials and debris.
B. Maintain street and disposal routes clear, clean and free of debris.
C. On-site burning of combustible cleared materials.
1. There will be no on-site burning permitted.
3.6 CLEANING
A. At completion of work, clean entire area within designated limits and leave site clear,
clean and free of rubbish and debris ready for excavating, filling and grading.

March 3, 2017
SECTION 31 20 00 - EARTH MOVING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Perform earthwork as shown and specified. Work includes:

1. Topsoil stripping and stockpiling
2. Site grading and filling to attain proposed grade elevations.
3. Filling voids below grade resulting from site preparation work.
4. Subgrade preparation for building slabs and pavements.
5. Structure excavation and backfill.
6. Topsoil distribution and finish grading.
7. Disposal of surplus and waste materials.
B. Related Work:
1. Section 01 22 50: Unit Prices and Alternates
2. Section 03 30 00: Cast-in-Place Concrete
3. Section 22 14 13 Facility Storm Drainage
3. Section 32 93 00: Plants
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide samples of excavated material, fill material, geogrid or geotextile, granu-

lar material, and topsoil (both on-site and imported) proposed for use. Forward
samples to testing laboratory for testing as required. Materials used in the work
shall be the same as those tested. Do not use proposed materials until test re-
ports have been reviewed by the Architect and approved. Recent test reports
available for proposed materials will be acceptable in lieu of samples.
B. Test Reports: Submit test reports as specified further in this Section.
C. Submit, for Architect’s approval, the manufacturers’ recommended installation
procedures for each type of drainage or utility piping conduit. This shall also in-
clude the recommended bedding material for each condition encountered. When
approved, these procedures and materials shall become the project standard and
shall become the basis for inspecting and accepting or rejecting the work.
A. Codes and Standards: Perform earthwork complying with requirements of au-

thorities having jurisdiction.
B. Testing and Inspection Service: A qualified independent geotechnical engineer-
ing testing agency acceptable to the Architect and Owner will classify proposed
on-site and borrow soils to verify that soils comply with specified requirements
and to perform required field and laboratory testing, in accordance with Section
01 45 23.
1.4 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Protect existing trees, plants, lawns and other features designed to remain as
part of the Work.
Project 16018 EARTH MOVING 312000 - 1

March 3, 2017
B. Protect excavations by shoring, bracing, sheeting, underpinning or other meth-

ods, as required to prevent cave-ins or loose dirt from entering excavations. Bar-
ricade open excavations and post warning lights at work adjacent to streets.
C Underpin adjacent structures, including utility and service lines, which may be
damaged by excavation work.
D. Provide for safe passage of persons around the area of excavation.
E. Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by earthwork operations.
Cost of repair at Contractor's expense.
F. Promptly notify Owner of unexpected sub-surface conditions. Discontinue work
until notification to resume work is provided by the Owner.
G. Protect bottoms of excavations and soil beneath and around foundations from
frost and freezing.
H. Grade around excavations to prevent surface water runoff into excavated areas.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. All topsoil, fill and backfill material subject to inspection, testing and approval.
B. All materials must comply with minimum requirements of authorities having juris-
diction.
C. Imported Topsoil:
4. Provide fertile, friable, native, surface soil, reasonably free of subsoil, clay
lumps, brush, weed and other litter and free of roots, stumps, stones, and
other extraneous or toxic matter harmful to plant growth.
5. Topsoil shall be a sandy loam or loam soil as defined by the Soil Conserva-
tion Service U.S.D.A. Soil Classification System.
6. Mechanical analysis shall fall within the following particle ranges:
Average percentage Range
Sand (0.05-2.0 mil dia. range) 30-70% 50%
Silt (0.002-0.05 mil dia. range) 20-50% 35%
Clay (less than 0.002 mil dia. range) 5-20% 15%
95% of topsoil shall pass a 2.0 mil sieve.
7. Provide topsoil free of stones one inch in longest dimension, earth clods,
plant parts and debris.
8. Topsoil shall possess from 5% to 12% organic matter.
D. On-site fill: Clean soil or soil-rock mixture free of foreign materials, organic mate-
rial and debris. Suitable excavated materials removed to accommodate new
construction may be used for fill, subject to approval.
E. Imported fill: Clean, natural sandy-clay subsoil or soil-rock mixture, free of foreign
matter, organic material, debris, or expansive soils. Designate borrow area. Ma-
terial subject to approval.
F. Geogrid or Geotextile Fabrics: ODOT 712.09 geotextile fabric, Type D. Spun or
woven, strong, rot-proof polymeric fiber fabric, manufacturer certified to meet
ODOT specification requirements or equivalent.
G. Granular backfill: AASHTO M 43 #10 crushed stone or gravel grits, except as
otherwise indicated on drawings.
H. Granular backfill for subgrade stabilization: ODOT #304 crushed aggregate.

March 3, 2017
I. Pipe bedding and cover fill: Clean natural river sand, bank sand, or red sand free
of rubble and rocks of 1” diameter or more, or material as recommended by pipe
manufacturer. Bedding subject to approval.
J. On-Site topsoil: Natural topsoil stripped from the project site.
K. Other materials required for proper completion of work: As selected by Contrac-
tor, subject to the Architect’s approval.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed.
B. Consult the Soils Report for subsurface findings and earthwork recommendations
in areas of existing, unsuitable sub-soils.
C. Consult the records and drawings of adjacent work and of existing utilities and
their connections for conditions which may affect the work under this Section.
B. Establish extent of grading and excavation by area and elevation; designate and
identify datum elevation. Set required lines and levels.
C. Do not cover or enclose work of this Section prior to obtaining required inspec-
tions, tests and approvals and location recording.
D. Where conduit must be routed through an area of existing tree roots, boring shall
be used under the limits of the tree canopy to minimize disturbance of the root
zone except as approved in writing by the Owner’s Representative.
E. Provide erosion control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and
discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and
walkways.
3.2 UTILITIES
A. Before starting grading and excavation, verify the location and extent of under-
ground utilities in the work area. Exercise care to protect existing utilities during
earthwork operations. Perform excavation work at utilities by hand and provide
necessary shoring, sheeting and supports as the work progresses.
B. Maintain, protect, re-route or extend as required existing utility lines to remain
which pass through the work area. When such work is not shown on the draw-
ings, costs for re-routing or extending existing utility lines (unless covered by the
utility companies) will be paid for as a change in work. Obtain Owner's written au-
thorization prior to performing extra work.
C. Protect active utility services uncovered by excavation.
D. Remove abandoned utility service lines from areas of excavation. Cap, plug or
seal such lines and identify at grade.
E. Accurately locate and record abandoned and active utility lines re-routed or ex-
tended on Project Record Documents.
3.3 SITE GRADING
A. Perform grading within contract limits, including adjacent transition areas, to new
elevations, levels, profiles and contours indicated. Insure subgrade surfaces are
parallel to finished surface grades. Provide uniform levels and slopes between
new elevations and existing grades.

March 3, 2017
B. Grade to assure areas drain away from structures and to prevent ponding of sur-
face drainage. Provide subgrade surface free from irregular surface changes and
as follows:
1. Rough grading: plus or minus 0.10 ft. subgrade tolerance. Degree of finish
required will be that ordinarily obtained from either blade grader or scraper
operations.
2. Subgrade surface shall be free of exposed boulders or stones exceeding 4
inches in greatest dimension in paved areas; 2 inches in lawn areas.
3. Fill all areas of settlement to proper grade prior to subsequent construction.
4. Planting areas: Allow for 12 in. depth at planting areas (shrub beds). Hand
excavate around existing trees to remain to attain new finished grades. Con-
sult with Owner’s Representative prior to this portion of the work.
5. Paved Areas: Shape surface of subgrade areas to line, grade and cross-
section indicated. Provide compacted subgrade suitable to receive paving
base materials. Subgrade tolerance plus 0, minus ½ in.
C. It is not intended that the earthwork be balanced on site. The Contractor shall
provide additional imported fill or remove excess excavated material as required
to achieve the grades shown on the drawings. (Dispose of excess excavated
material in a manner described further in the Section.)
3.4 EXCAVATION: GENERAL
A. Excavate for structures to elevations and dimensions shown. Extend excavation

a sufficient distance from foundations to permit placing and removal of formwork,
installation of materials, services, and inspection. Hand trim foundation excava-
tions to final grade just before concrete is placed. Remove loose, soft materials
and all organic matter. Foundations shall bear on tested and approved bearing
soil or bedrock as shown on the Drawings.
B. Obtain inspection and approval of foundation excavations by Soils Engineer and
governing authorities before concrete is placed.
C. Excavate for pavements, curbs, and walls to cross-sections, elevations and
grades indicated. Allow for paving base material.
D. Excavation is unclassified, i.e. excavation shall include the satisfactory removal
and disposal of all materials, other than bedrock, encountered regardless of the
nature of the materials, the conditions of the materials at the time they were ex-
cavated, or the manner in which they are excavated.
E. Extra excavation: Excavate unsatisfactory soil materials extending below re-
quired elevations to depth as directed. Such extra excavation will be paid for as a
change in work at the unit price bid for Excavation. Obtain Owner's written au-
thorization prior to performing extra excavation work.
F. Unauthorized excavation: Backfill and fill all over excavation to proper grades.
Fill over excavation at footings with concrete. Additional labor and material for
unauthorized excavation at Contractor's expense.
G. Shore, sheet or brace excavations as required to maintain them secure; remove
shoring as backfilling progresses, when banks are safe against caving.
H. Do not excavate footings or slabs to the full depth when freezing temperatures
may be expected, unless footings or slabs are placed immediately after the exca-
vation has been completed. Protect excavations bottoms from freezing if the
placing of concrete is delayed.

March 3, 2017
3.5 ROCK EXCAVATION
A. Rock: Material that cannot be removed with ¾ cubic yard capacity power shovel
without drilling or blasting or solid boulders with a volume of more than ½ cubic
yard.
B. Rock Excavation: Material excavation of buried boulders and rock in excess of ½
cubic yard that required continuous and systematic drilling and blasting or contin-
uous use of a ripper or other special equipment. All other excavation shall be
classified as earth excavation.
C. Contractor will be paid for cost of rock excavation as a change in work. Obtain
Owner’s written authorization prior to performing rock excavation work.
D. Cut away rock in bottom of excavations to form level beds that follow natural stra-
ta. Form with sharp steps. In utility trenches, excavate to 6 in. below invert eleva-
tion to pipe and 24 in. wider than pipe diameter.
3.6 SITE DRAINAGE EXCAVATING
A. Excavate banks of trenches as nearly vertical as possible to the line of narrow

trench limit.
B. Trim and shape trench bottoms to exact line and grade, free of irregularities,
lumps and projections.
C. Provide trench dimensions as indicated. Allow for proper installation of services
and inspection.
D. In areas where soft, unstable materials are encountered at the surface upon
which the granular material or conduit is to be place, remove the unstable materi-
al and replace it with material approved by the Architect. Make sufficient depth to
develop a firm foundation for the item being installed. If the need for such over-
excavation has been occasioned by an act or failure to act on the part of the Con-
tractor, make the over-excavation and replacement at no additional cost to the
Owner.
E. Shaping:
1. At each joint in pipe, recess the bottom of the trench as required into the firm
foundation in such a manner as to relieve the bell of the pipe of all loads and
to ensure continuous bearing of the pipe barrel on the firm foundation.
2. Accurately shape all pipe subgrade and fit the bottom of the trench to the pipe
shape. Use a drag template shaped to conform to the outer surface of the
pipe if other methods do not produce satisfactory results.
3.7 PUMPING AND DRAINAGE
A. Provide necessary pumps, hose and drainage lines and maintain all excavations,
including footings and pits, free from water, ice and snow at all times during exca-
vation, concrete work and paving work.
B. Maintain ground water in the bearing soil strata at a safe level at all times by
methods which prevent loss of fines and other disturbance to these strata. If the
methods employed prove inadequate and the bearing value of the soil is reduced,
the disturbed soil shall be removed as directed and replaced with concrete at the
Contractor's expense.

March 3, 2017
C. Provide drainage of the working area at all times.

D. At the beginning of the work, provide a drainage system sufficient to maintain the
site in good working condition. Such system may be of temporary nature or may
include portions of the permanent drainage system, but in any case, shall provide
for protection of the site from surface and subsurface flows.
3.8 GENERAL FILLING AND BACKFILLING
A. Obtain inspection and approval of subgrade surfaces by Soils Engineer or land-

scape Architect prior to filling operations. Scarify, dry and compact soft and wet
areas: remove and replace unsuitable subgrade materials with compacted fill
material as directed.
B. Spread approved fill material in layers not greater than 8 inches of un-compacted
thickness. Do not use muddy or frozen fill materials. Do not place fill material on
muddy or frozen ground.
C. Moisture condition fill materials as required by aerating or watering and thorough-
ly mix material to obtain moisture content permitting proper compaction.
D. Compact each layer of fill material to at least the scheduled density requirement:
repeat until plan grade elevation is attained.
E. Use hand tampers or vibrating compactors at locations inaccessible to large
equipment and rollers. Do not use rolling equipment adjacent to foundations.
F. Do not backfill against foundation or retaining walls until floor slab is in place or
walls for bearing surfaces have reached design strength and are properly braced
and backfilling operations approved. Provide granular fill material for interior
backfill material and granular fill or other approved backfill material at exterior
G. areas.
H. Soil Stabilization: In the event exposed natural subgrade surfaces become spon-
gy and pump during construction operations, or if the existing subgrade materials
are determined to be unstable, subgrade materials are to be stabilized as di-
rected by the Architect. Soil stabilization will be paid for as a change in work at
the unit prices included on the Bid Form for Excavation, Geogrid Stabilization and
Granular Backfill. Obtain Owner's written authorization prior to performing soil
stabilization work.
3.9 BACKFILLING FOR SITE DRAINAGE & UTILITIES
A. Place and compact bedding course as recommended by piping manufacturer and

approved by Architect. Also conform to minimum requirements of authorities hav-
ing jurisdiction.
B. Carefully compact material under pipe haunches and bring material evenly up on
both sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or
displacement of utility system. Bring material up to a minimum depth of one foot
above the outside diameter of the pipe barrel.
C. After the pipe has been thoroughly bedded and covered, spread the approved on-
site material in uniform lifts of not more that 8 inches in uncompacted thickness,
and then compact as specified. Repeat the spreading and compacting procedure
until adjacent grade level is attained.
D. If pipe occurs under pavements, after the pipe has been thoroughly bedded and
covered, fill the remaining portion of the trench with granular material, and com-

March 3, 2017
pact as specified.
E. Concrete backfill trenches that carry below or pass under footings and that are
excavated within 18 inches (450 mm) of footings. Place concrete to level of bot-
tom of footings.
F. Where pipe is specially coated for protection against corrosion, exercise care to
avoid damage to the coating.
G. Do not backfill against drainage structures until services have been inspected.
Concrete shall have been in place for at least 7 days. Mortar joints and plaster
coating of masonry structures and mortar joints of precast manhole sections shall
be thoroughly set and shall have been in place at least 3 days. Backfill shall be
deposited in horizontal layers, not over 8 inches in compacted thickness uniformly
spread and compacted to the specified density. Take special precautions to pre-
vent wedging action against the walls of structures.
H. When compacting by rolling or operating heavy equipment parallel with the pipe,
exercise care to prevent displacement of, or injury to, the pipe. Movement of
construction machinery over drainage lines at any stage of construction shall be
at the Contractor's risk. Any pipe impaired or damaged shall be replaced or re-
paired as directed by the Architect at Contractor's expense.
3.10 GRADING AT EXISTING TREES TO REMAIN
A. Minor fills of 6 inches or less: Remove vegetation within drip-line perimeter. Fill
with single layer of uncompacted topsoil; hand grade to required finish grade ele-
vation.
B. Carefully hand grade at all existing trees to remain..
3.11 COMPACTION
A. Provide compaction control for all fill and backfill. Field compaction tests and re-
lated laboratory analysis shall be performed by a qualified independent laborato-
ry, a member of the American Society for Testing and Materials, under the super-
vision of a registered Professional Engineer specializing in soils engineering.
Soils proposed for fill and backfill shall be analyzed by the Soils Engineer.
B. Compact top 12 inches of subgrade and each layer of fill or backfill material at
foundations, retaining walls, building slabs and paved areas to a density of 98%
at optimum moisture content in accordance with ASTM D 698 Standard Proctor
Method.
C. Compact top 6 in. of subgrade and each layer of fill or backfill material at lawns
and unpaved areas to a density of 90% at optimum moisture content in accord-
ance with ASTM D 698 Standard Proctor Method.
D. Compact fill and backfill material for utility trenches within building and pavement
areas and extending minimum five feet beyond building and pavement areas to a
density of 98% at optimum moisture content in accordance with ASTM D 698
Standard Proctor Method.
E. Compact fill and backfill material for utility trenches within lawn areas to a density
of 90% at optimum moisture content in accordance with ASTM D698 Standard
Proctor Method.
F. Puddling or jetting of fill and backfill material as a compaction method is not per-
mitted.

March 3, 2017
3.12 FINISH GRADING
A. Uniformly distribute and spread topsoil in areas designated on plan. Use topsoil
in loose dry state. Do not use frozen or muddy topsoil. Place during dry weather.
B. Fine grade all topsoil areas eliminating rough and low areas to ensure positive
drainage. Maintain levels, profiles and contours of subgrades. Finish grade shall
not vary more than 1" from the plan grade.
C. Remove stone, roots, weeds and debris while spreading topsoil materials. Pro-
vide surfaces suitable for soil preparation provided under planting work.
3.13 MAINTENANCE
A. Protect graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.
Repair and re-establish grades in settled, eroded and damaged areas.
B. Where completed areas are disturbed by construction operations or adverse
weather, scarify surface, reshape and compact to required density.
3.14 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatis-
factory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off the Owner’s property.
B. Excess topsoil shall remain the property of the owner. The Contractor shall move
it out of the immediate project area and to a permanent stockpile location as di-
rected by the Owner.
B. Maintain disposal routes clear, clean and free of debris.
3.15 TESTING
A. Foundation excavations: Provide bearing tests in locations and spacing as di-

rected by the structural engineer Based on visual examination at the site, provide
additional bearing tests as required to verify bearing surfaces are adequate and
meet or exceed design bearing values.
B. Fill material and granular base materials: Test proposed materials to verify suita-
bility for use, gradation of material, moisture-density relation by ASTM D 698
Standard Proctor, and percent of organic materials.
C. Topsoil: Test proposed material to determine mechanical analysis, organic con-
tent, and Ph level.
D. Subgrade surfaces: Based on visual examination at the site, provide bearing
tests as required to verify subgrade surfaces are adequate and meet or exceed
design bearing values.
E. When, during progress of work, field tests indicate that installed compacted mate-
rials do not meet specified requirements, remove defective materials, replace and
retest at Contractor’s expense, as directed by the Owner.

March 3, 2017
SECTION 31 25 00
EROSION CONTROL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY

1. Preparing site for any temporary or permanent erosion and sediment control
devices that are intended to prevent soil erosion or to trap sediment
2. Actual construction of erosion and sediment control devices.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. NPDES: National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System

B. Erosion and Sediment Control Device: Any temporary or permanent structure or
construction measure that is intended to prevent soil erosion or to trap sediment.
Ultimate result is keeping the soil on the site being developed.
C. Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control Device: Said device is utilized before and
during the course of construction activities. The device is removed after all construction
is completed.
D. Permanent Erosion and Sediment Control Device: Said device is utilized after the
course of construction activities. The device shall remain in place after all construction
is completed.
E. Block and Gravel Drop Inlet Sediment Barrier: Concrete block and gravel positioned
around a storm drain to keep sediment from entering the storm sewer system. Typically
used for flat inlet drains in landscaped areas.
F. Silt Fence: Vertical fence typically made from a geotextile mounted on wooded posts.
Typically positioned at extremities of work area to help keep soil and sediment runoff
from leaving the site.
G. Temporary Gravel Construction Entrance/Exit: Gravel driveway used by the contractor
for access to the site. Helps to keep soil chunks on the site and not leaving on truck
tires.
H. Temporary Sediment Basin: Gathers the silt and sediment in a pit so it doesn’t leave the
site.
A. Comply with applicable requirements of the NPDES Storm Water Program and
documentation as regulated and governed by National, State and local agencies of the
EPA.
A. Existing vegetation: Do not disturb unless otherwise noted on the construction

plan.Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed vegetation
interruptions.
Project 16018 EROSION CONTROL 312500 - 1

March 3, 2017
B. Surrounding neighbors: Do not disturb any dirt or vegetation on any land adjacent to the
site being developed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 EROSION, SEDIMENT AND OTHER DEVICES
A. General: Provide construction materials that achieve the intended function of the
device.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1. PREPARATION
A. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and

discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and
walkways.
3.2 EXCAVATION, GENERAL
A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavation to proper depth for device regardless of the

character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered, including rock, soil
materials, and obstructions.
1 If excavated materials intended for device include unsatisfactory soil materials and
rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.
3.3 EXCAVATION FOR DEVICES
A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1

inch (25 mm). Extend excavations a sufficient distance from devices for installing
services and other construction, and for inspections.
3.4 APPROVAL OF DEVICES
A. Notify Architect when devices have been installed.

B. If Architect determines that unsatisfactory devices are present, then suggested
modifications or additions will be required.
3.5 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS
A. Stockpile borrow materials and satisfactory excavated soil materials. Stockpile soil
materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water
but prevent soil from draining away. Cover to prevent windblown dust. Temporary soil
stabilization shall be applied if stockpile materials are to be left for a long period of time.
3.6 BACKFILL
A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly for each device to help stabilize the
site.
3.7 GRADING
A. Uniformly grade areas for the devices to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface
changes. Comply with all earthwork and grading requirements.

March 3, 2017
3.8 CONSTRUCTION
A. General construction sequence:
1. Clearing and grubbing for those areas necessary for the installation of erosion and
sediment perimeter control measures.
2. Install erosion and sediment control measures.
3. Grading and stripping of the remaining areas of the development site or project
area.
4. Install storm water management systems.
5. Temporary vegetative stabilization of erosion and sediment control measures.
6. Grading of roads, streets, or parking areas, etc.
7. Installation of all utilities.
8. Site construction.
9. Final grading, stabilization and landscaping.
10. Removal of erosion and sediment control measures.
B. General construction notes:
1. The installation of the specified water management and sediment control measures
shall be accomplished in accordance with the standards and specifications
contained in the latest edition of “Water Management and Sediment Control for
Urbanizing Areas” handbook (unless otherwise specified herein.). A copy of the
handbook may be obtained from the local county engineer’s office.
2. The contractor shall install temporary erosion and sedimentation devices as shown
and required by these plans. Sediment basins and traps, perimeter dikes, sediment
barriers and other measures intended to trap sediment on site shall be constructed
as a first step in grading and be made functional before upslope land disturbance
takes place. Earthen structures such as dams, dikes, and diversions shall be
seeded and mulched within seven (7) days of completion of installation.
3. Erosion and any sedimentation from work on this site shall be contained on the site
and not allowed to collect in any off-site drainage course, whether natural or man-
made.
4. All earth changes shall be constructed and completed in a manner, which shall limit
the exposed area of any disturbed land for the shortest period of time.
5. Clearing and stripping are to be limited to areas in which construction will proceed to
completion. Areas not to be improved presently are to remain undisturbed.
6. Disturbed soils shall be stabilized as quickly as practicable with temporary
vegetation and/or mulching to protect exposed critical areas during development.
7. The permanent final vegetation and structural erosion control and drainage
measures shall be installed as soon as practical in the development.
8. The contractor shall make daily inspections of the site to insure effectiveness of
erosion and sedimentation control measures, and will immediately make necessary
repairs.
9. Permanent soil stabilization shall be installed on denuded areas within seven (7)
days after final grade is reached on any portion of the site. Application practices
include vegetative establishment, mulching, and the early application of gravel base
on areas to be paved. Soil stabilization measures should be selected to be
appropriate for the time of year, site conditions, and estimated time of use.
10. Temporary soil stabilization shall be established on any denuded areas, which will
not be regraded for longer than thirty (30) days. Temporary soil stabilization shall
be applied within seven (7) days after rough grading.
11. A permanent vegetative cover shall be established on denuded areas not otherwise
permanently stabilized after final grading. Permanent vegetation shall not be
considered established until a ground cover is achieved which is mature enough to
control soil erosion and to survive severe weather conditions.
12. All construction traffic shall enter and leave by the designated entrance. The
contractor shall instruct all vehicles to clean and promptly remove soil,

March 3, 2017
miscellaneous debris, or other materials spilled, dumped or otherwise deposited on

public streets, highways, sidewalks or other public thoroughfares during transit to
and from site.
13. All erosion and sediment control measures shall be inspected and repaired at the
end of each working day and, in addition, after each storm. Seeded areas shall be
repaired, reseeded and mulched as soon as possible after being damaged.
14. All temporary erosion and sediment control practices shall be maintained and
repaired as needed to assure continued performance of their intended function. The
contractor will be responsible for such maintenance until the final inspection by the
local governing agency.
15. All temporary erosion and sediment control measures shall be disposed of within
thirty (30) days after final site stabilization is achieved as determined by the local
governing agency. Trapped sediment and other disturbed soil areas resulting from
the disposition of temporary measures shall be permanently stabilized from further
erosion and sedimentation.
16. Land Grading for Minimizing Erosion
a. Only disturb, clear, or grade areas necessary for construction. Flag or
otherwise delineate areas not to be disturbed. Exclude vehicles and
construction equipment from these areas to preserve natural vegetation.
b. All graded or disturbed areas including slopes shall be protected during clearing
and construction in accordance with the approved erosion and sediment control
plan until they are permanently stabilized.
c. All sediment control measures shall be constructed and maintained in
accordance with the approved erosion and sediment control plan and according
to the standards and specifications for the appropriate erosion control practices.
d. If topsoil is required for the establishment of vegetation, it shall be stockpiled in
the amount necessary to complete finished grading and protected from erosion
during the interim.
e. Areas to be filled shall be cleared, grubbed to remove trees, vegetation, roots
and other objectionable material, and stripped of topsoil.
f. Areas to receive topsoil shall be scarified to a minimum depth of 3 inches (76
mm) prior to placement of topsoil.
g. All fills shall be compacted as required by building standards to reduce erosion,
slippage, settlement, subsidence and other related problems. Fill intended to
support buildings, structures, conduits, etc., shall be compacted in accordance
with local requirements or codes.
h. The outer face of the fill slope should be allowed to stay loose, not rolled,
compacted, or bladed smooth. A bulldozer may run up and down the fill slope
so the dozer treads (cleat tracks) create grooves perpendicular to the slope. If
the soil is not too moist, excessive compaction will not occur.
i. All fill shall be placed and compacted in layers not to exceed 8 inches (0.2 m)
per lift.
j. Use slope breaks, such as diversions, benches, or contour furrows as
appropriate, to reduce the length of cut-and-fill slopes to limit sheet and rill
erosion and prevent gully erosion.
k. The finished cut-and-fill slopes, which are to be vegetated with grass and
legumes, should not be steeper than 2:1.
l. Slopes to be maintained by tractor or other equipment should not be steeper
than 3:1.
m. Slopes in excess of 2:1 may require hydroseeding, hydromulching, tactifying,
and/or "punching-in" straw, bioengineering techniques, or retaining walls.
n. Roughen the surface of all slopes during the construction operation to retain
water, increase infiltration, and facilitate vegetation establishment.
o. Seeps or springs encountered during construction shall be handled in
accordance with approved methods.

March 3, 2017
p. Stabilize all graded areas with vegetation, crushed stone, riprap, or other ground
cover as soon as grading is completed or if work is interrupted for 21 working
days or more.
q. Use mulch to stabilize areas temporarily where final grading must be delayed.
r. Stockpiles, borrow areas and spoil areas shall be shown on the plans and shall
be stabilized to prevent erosion and sedimentation.
17. Minimize Disturbance and Buffer Strips
a. Designate areas of no disturbance. Clearly show on the plans, and flag in the
field areas of no disturbance and construction vehicle exclusion.
b. Designate trees and shrubs that are to be preserved
c. Designate watercourse buffer-filter strips on the site design plan.
d. Maintain and preserve riparian and naturally vegetated buffer strips along
watercourses.
e. The width of a buffer strip between a road and the stream is recommended to
be 50 feet plus four times the slope of the land in percent, measured between
the road and the top of stream bank.
18. Temporary Seeding
a. Timing: The proper time to seed is dependent upon the climate of the area.
b. Seed Mixes: Select plants appropriate to the season and site conditions.
1) The seeding rates are based on a minimum acceptable pure live seed (PLS)
of 80%. When PLS is below 80% adjust rates accordingly.
2) Legumes should be inoculated with the proper rhizobium bacteria before
planting. Pellet inoculated seed can be purchased or inoculation can be
done in the field. Use only fresh, age dated inoculate specifically labeled for
use with the legume you are using.
c. Site Preparation
1) Grade as needed and feasible to permit the use of equipment for seedbed
preparation.
2) Install needed erosion control practices, such as sediment basins, diversion
dikes and channels, prior to seeding. Divert concentrated flows away from
seeded areas.
3) Soil tests should be done to determine the nutrient and pH content of soil.
Depending on the results of soil tests, soil management may be necessary
to adjust the pH to between 6.5 and 7.0 (for most conditions). All lime,
fertilizer and other soil amendments should be addressed following sound
soil management practices.
4) Surface roughening: If the area has been recently loosened or disturbed,
no further roughening is required. When the area is compacted, crusted or
hardened the soil shall be loosened with discing, raking or harrowing.
Tracking with bulldozer cleats is very effective on sandy soils.
5) Hydroseeding and hydraulic planting generally require less seedbed prep.
6) Generally, slopes steeper than 2:1 that cannot have good seedbed
preparations with equipment, and will sometimes require hydraulic planting
techniques.
7) Seed to soil contact is the key to good germination. Prepare a 3-5 inch (76-
127 mm) deep seedbed, with the top 3-4 inches (76-102 mm) consisting of
topsoil. Note that the earth bed upon which the topsoil is to be placed
should be at the required grade.
8) The seedbed should be firm but not compact. The top 3 inches (76 mm) of
soil should be loose , moist and free of large clods and stones. For most
applications, all stones larger than 2 inches (51 mm) in diameter, roots, litter
and any foreign matter should be raked and removed.
9) The topsoil surface should be in reasonably close conformity to the lines,
grades and cross sections shown on the grading plans.
d. Planting

March 3, 2017
1) Seed should be applied as soon after seedbed preparation as possible,

when the soil is loose and moist.
2) Always apply seed before mulch.
3) Apply seed using calibrated spreaders, cyclone seeders, mechanical drills,
or hydroseeders so the seed is applied uniformly on the site.
4) Apply fertilizer if required. Seed and fertilizer should be incorporated into
the soil by raking or chain dragging, or otherwise floated, then lightly
compacted to provide good seed-soil contact.
5) Straw mulch, erosion control blankets or mulch and tackifiers/soil binders
should be applied over the seeded areas.
19. Topsoiling
a. Determine whether the quality and quantity of available topsoil justifies
selective handling.
b. Soils of the textural class of loam, sandy loam, and silt loam are best; sandy
clay loam, silty clay loam, clay loam, and loamy sand are fair. Do not use
heavy clay and organic soils such as peat or muck as topsoil.
c. Strip topsoil only from those areas that will be disturbed by excavation, filling,
road building, or compacting by equipment. A 4-6 inch (0.1-0.2 m) stripping
depth is common, but depth varies depending on the site.
d. Determine depth of stripping by taking soil cores at several locations within
each area to be stripped. Topsoil depth generally varies along a gradient
from hilltop to toe of the slope.
e. Put sediment basins, diversions, and other controls into place before
stripping.
f. Select stockpile location to avoid slopes, natural drainage ways, and traffic
routes. On large sites, re-spreading is easier and more economical when
topsoil is stockpiled in small piles located near areas where they will be used.
g. Use silt fences or other barriers where necessary to retain sediment.
h. Protect topsoil stockpiles by temporarily seeding and/or mulching as soon as
possible to assure the stored material is not exposed and allowed to erode.
i. If stockpiles will not be used within 12 months they must be stabilized with
permanent vegetation to control erosion and weed growth.
j. Before spreading topsoil, establish erosion and sedimentation control
practices such as diversions, berms, dikes, waterways, and sediment basins.
k. Where the pH of the existing subsoil is 6.0 or less, or the soil is composed of
heavy clays, incorporate agricultural limestone in amounts recommended by
soil tests or specified for the seeding mixture to be used. Incorporate lime to
a depth of at least 2 inches (51 mm) by disking.
l. Immediately prior to spreading the topsoil, loosen the subgrade by disking or
scarifying to a depth of at least 3 inches (76 mm), to ensure bonding of the
topsoil and subsoil. If no amendments have been incorporated, loosen the
soil to a depth of at least 6 inches (0.15 m) before spreading topsoil.
m. Uniformly distribute topsoil to a minimum compacted depth of 2 inches (51
mm) on 3:1 slopes and 4 inches (0.1 m) on flatter slopes.
n. Do not spread topsoil while it is frozen or muddy or when the subgrade is wet
or frozen.
o. Correct any irregularities in the surface that result from topsoiling or other
operations to prevent the formation of depressions or water pockets.
p. Compact the topsoil enough to ensure good contact with the underlying soil,
but avoid excessive compacting, as it increases runoff and inhibits seed
germination. Light packing with a roller is recommended where high
maintenance turf is to be established.
q. On slopes and areas that will not be mowed, the surface may be left rough
after spreading topsoil. A disk may be used to promote bonding at the
interface between the topsoil and subsoil.
3.9 Temporary Gravel Construction Entrance/Exit

March 3, 2017
A. The aggregate size for construction of the pad shall be 2-3 inch (51-76 mm) stone.
Place the gravel to the specific grade and dimensions shown on the plans, and smooth
it.
B. The thickness of the pad shall not be less than 6 inches (0.2 m). Use geotextile fabrics,
if necessary, to improve stability of the foundation in locations subject to seepage or
high water table.
C. The width of the pad shall not be less than the full width of all points of ingress or egress
and in any case shall not be less than 12 feet (3.6 m) wide.
D. The length of the pad shall be as required, but not less than 50 feet (15.2 m).
E. Locate construction entrances and exits to limit sediment leaving the site and to provide
for maximum utility by all construction vehicles. Avoid entrances which have steep
grades and entrances at curves in public roads.
F. The entrance shall be maintained in a condition that will prevent tracking or flowing of
sediment onto public rights-of-way. This may require periodic top dressing with
additional stone as conditions demand, and repair and/or maintenance of any measures
used to trap sediment.
G. All sediment spilled, dropped, washed or tracked onto public rights-of-way shall be
removed immediately.
H. Provide drainage to carry water to a sediment trap or other suitable outlet.
I. When necessary, wheels shall be cleaned to remove sediment prior to entrance onto
public rights-of-way. When washing is required, it shall be done on an area stabilized
with crushed stone that drains into an approved sediment trap or sediment basin.
J. All sediment shall be prevented from entering any storm drain, ditch or watercourse
through use of sand bags, gravel, straw bales, or other approved methods.
3.10 Temporary Sediment Basin
A. Construct the basin by excavating or building an embankment before any clearing or

grading work begins.
B. Areas under the embankment and any structural works shall be cleared, grubbed and
stripped of any vegetation and rootmat as shown on the erosion and sediment control
plan.
C. In order to facilitate cleanout and restoration, the basin area shall be cleared, grubbed
and stripped of any vegetation.
D. A cut-off trench shall be excavated along the centerline of the earth fill embankments.
The minimum depth shall be 2 feet (0.6 m) The cut-off trench shall extend up both
abutments to the riser crest elevation.
E. Fill material for the embankment should be clean mineral soil free of roots, woody
vegetation, oversized stones, rocks or other objectionable material.
F. The fill material shall contain sufficient moisture so that it can be formed by hand into a
ball without crumbling.
G. Fill material shall be placed in 6 inch (0.2 m) lifts, continuous layers over the entire
length of the fill. Compacting shall be obtained by routing the hauling equipment over
the fill so that the entire surface of each layer of the fill is traversed by at least one
wheel or tread track of the equipment, or by the use of a compactor.
H. The embankment should be constructed to an elevation of 10 percent higher than the
design height to allow for settlement if compacting is achieved with hauling equipment.
If compactors are used for compacting, the overbuild may be reduced to not less than 5
percent.
I. The principle spillway riser shall be securely attached to the discharge pipe by welding
all around. All connections shall be watertight.
J. The pipe and riser shall be placed on a firm, smooth soil foundation. The connection
between the riser and the riser base shall be watertight. Pervious materials such as
sand, gravel or crushed stone shall not be used as backfill around the pipe or anti-seep
collars.

March 3, 2017
K. The fill material around the pipe spillway shall be placed in 4-inch (101 mm) layers and
compacted under the shoulders and around the pipe to at least the same density as the
adjacent embankment. A minimum of 2 feet (0.6 m) of compacted backfill shall be
placed over the pipe spillway before crossing it with construction equipment.
L. Steel base plates shall have at least 2 1/2 feet (0.8 m) of compacted earth, stone or
gravel over them to prevent flotation.
M. The emergency spillway shall not be installed in fill. Elevations, design width, and
entrance and exit channel slopes are critical to the successful operation of the
emergency spillway.
N. Baffles shall be constructed of 4 inch (101 mm) by 4 inch (101 mm) posts and of 4 foot
(1.2 m) by 8 foot (2.4 m) - 1/2inch (12.7 mm) exterior plywood. The posts shall be set
at least 3 feet (0.9 m) into the ground, no further apart than 8 feet (2.4 m) center to
center, and shall reach a height 6 inches (.2 m) below the riser crest elevation.
O. The embankment and emergency spillway shall be stabilized with vegetation
immediately following construction.
P. Construction operations shall be carried out in such a manner that erosion and water
pollution will be minimized.
Q. Local and state requirements shall be met concerning fencing and signs warning the
public of hazards of soft sediment and floodwater.
3.11 Silt Fence
A. The height of a silt fence shall not exceed 36 inches (0.9 m). Storage height and
ponding height shall never exceed 18 inches (0.5 m).
B. Stakes for silt fences shall be four (2) inch square wood or 1.33 lbs./lin. ft. steel with a
minimum length of four feet.
C. The fence line shall follow the contour as closely as possible.
D. If possible, the filter fabric shall be cut from a continuous roll to avoid the use of joints.
When joints are necessary, filter cloth shall be spliced only at a support post, with a
minimum 6 inch (0.2 m) overlap and both ends securely fastened to the post.
E. Posts shall be spaced a maximum of 10 feet (3.1 m) apart and driven securely into the
ground (minimum of 12 inches (0.3 m)). When extra-strength fabric is used without the
wire support fence, post spacing shall not exceed 6 feet (1.8 m).
F. Turn the ends of the fence uphill.
G. A trench shall be excavated approximately 4 inches (101 mm) wide and 6 inches (0.2
m) deep along the line of posts and upslope from the barrier.
H. When standard-strength filter fabric is used, a wire mesh support fence shall be
fastened securely to the upslope side of the posts using heavy duty wire staples at
least 1inch (25.4 mm) long, tie wires or hog rings. The wire shall extend into the trench
a minimum of 2 inches (51 mm) and shall not extend more than 36 inches (0.9 m)
above the original ground surface.
I. The standard-strength filter fabric shall be stapled or wired to the fence, and 6 inches
(0.2 m) of the fabric shall extend into the trench. The fabric shall not extend more than
36 inches (0.9 m) above the original ground surface. Filter fabric shall not be stapled to
existing trees.
J. When extra-strength fabric is used in conjunction with closer post spacing, the fabric
can be stapled directly to the posts with eight (8) inches of fabric extending into the
trench.
K. The trench shall be backfilled and the soil compacted over the toe of the filter fabric.
L. Silt fences placed at the toe of a slope shall be set at least 6 feet (1.8 m) from the toe in
order to increase ponding volume.
M. Silt fences shall be removed when they have served their useful purpose, but not
before the upslope area has been permanently stabilized and any sediment stored
behind the silt fence has been removed.
3.12 Curb Inlet Sediment Barriers

March 3, 2017
A. Sandbag Type Barrier

1. Place the barriers on gently sloping streets where water can pond.
2. The barriers must allow for overflow from a severe storm event. Slope runoff shall
be allowed to flow over blocks and gravel and not be bypassed over the curb. A
spillway shall be constructed with the sandbag structures to allow overflow.
3. The sandbag should be of woven-type geotextile fabric since burlap bags
deteriorate rapidly.
4. The sandbags shall be filled with 3/4 inch (19 mm) drain rock or 1/4 inch (6 mm) pea
gravel.
5. The sandbags shall be placed in a curved row from the top of curb at least 3 feet
(0.9 m) into the street. The row should be curved at the ends, pointing uphill.
6. Several layers of bags should be overlapped and packed tightly.
7. Leave a one-sandbag gap in the top row to act as a spillway.
B. For Block and Gravel Type Barriers:
1. Place two concrete blocks on their sides perpendicular to the curb at either end of
the inlet opening. These will serve as spacer blocks.
2. Place concrete blocks on their sides across the front of the inlet and abutting the
spacer blocks. The openings in the blocks should face outward, not upward.
3. Cut a 2 by 4 inch (51 by 102 mm) stud the length of the curb inlet plus the width of
the two spacer blocks. Place the stud through the outer hole of each spacer block
to help keep the front blocks in place.
4. Place wire mesh over the outside vertical face (open ends) of the concrete blocks to
prevent stone from being washed through the blocks.
5. Use chicken wire, hardware cloth with 1/2 inch (13 mm) openings, or filter fabric.
6. Place 3/4 -1 1/3 inch (19-34 mm) gravel against the wire to the top of the barrier.
3.13 MAINTENANCE
A. Inspection reports: Per NPDES requirements, the contractor will directly perform
erosion & sediment control inspections or will engage a qualified independent agency
to perform field quality-inspection reports. Inspection reports to be submitted and
maintained by the contractor.
B. Erosion and sediment control devices shall be checked regularly and after each rainfall
(that exceeds 0.5 inches in 24 hours) for weather-related or other damage.
1. Any necessary repairs shall be made immediately.
2. If the device becomes clogged with sediment so that it no longer adequately
performs its function, the device must be pulled cleaned and/or replaced.
3. Close attention shall be paid to the repair of damaged devices and the undercutting
of the devices by runoff.
C Sediment deposits must be removed when the level of deposition has reached
approximately one-half the height of the device. The device shall be restored to its
original construction requirements and dimensions. The sediment shall be properly
discarded offsite or placed in such a manner that it will not erode from the site. The
sediment shall not be deposited downstream from the embankment or in or adjacent to
a stream or floodplain
D. Any acceptable sediment deposits, remaining in place after the device is no longer
required, shall be dressed to conform to the existing grade, prepared, and seeded.
E. Structures shall be removed and the area stabilized when the remaining drainage area
has been properly stabilized.
F. Newly seeded areas need to be inspected frequently to ensure the grass is growing.
Areas which fail to establish cover adequate to prevent sheet and rill erosion will be
reseeded as soon as such areas are identified. Spot seeding can be done on small
areas to fill in bare spots where grass did not grow properly. If the seeded area is
damaged due to concentrated runoff, additional practices may be needed. Temporary
vegetated areas will be maintained until permanent vegetation or other erosion control
practices can be established.

March 3, 2017
A. Inspection reports: Per NPDES requirements, the contractor will directly perform
erosion & sediment control inspections or will engage a qualified independent agency
to perform field quality-inspection reports.
1. Inspections shall be weekly and after every rainfall that exceeds 0.5 inches in 24
hours.
2. Inspection reports to be submitted and maintained by the contractor.
3.11 PROTECTION
A. Protecting Devices: Protect constructed devices from construction, traffic, freezing,

and erosion.
B. Repair any damaged device to its original construction requirements and dimensions.
3.12 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Disposal: Remove erosion and sediment control practices (surplus and temporary) and
waste material (including unsatisfactory trash and debris) and legally dispose of it off
Owner's property.

March 3, 2017
SECTION 32 11 00 - CONCRETE FORMWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Included are all concrete formwork and related items necessary for
concrete work related to building construction.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 322000: Concrete reinforcement

B. Section 323000: Exterior Cast-in-Place Concrete
1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. The design and engineering of the formwork, as well as its construction,

shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
B. The formwork shall be designed for the loads, lateral pressures, and
allowable stresses outlined in Section 102 and 103 of “Recommended
Practice for Concrete Formwork” (AC1347) and wind loads so specified
by controlling local building codes.
C. Form shall conform to the shape, lines, and dimensions of the members
as called for on the plans and shall be constructed so as to insure that the
concrete surfaces will conform to the tolerances of Section 203.1 of (ACI-
347).
D. Plywood forms shall meet the requirements of the latest edition of U. S.
Product Standard PS1 or one of American Plywood Association’s
performance-engineered proprietary specifications.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used
Project 16018 CONCRETE FORMWORK 321100 - 1

March 3, 2017
SECTION 32 12 00
FLEXIBLE PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The extent of asphaltic concrete paving work is shown on the drawings. Asphaltic Concrete
paving shall include:
1. Prepare subgrade to receive base course materials for asphaltic concrete pavements.
2. Place and compact base course materials (ODOT #304).
3. Plane existing asphalt surfaces to accommodate transition to resurfaced asphalt
pavement surface as called for on the drawings (ODOT #254).
4. Tack existing asphalt pavement areas to receive surface course (ODOT #407).
5. Intermediate course asphaltic concrete (ODOT # 448).
6. Surface course asphaltic concrete (ODOT # 448).
7. Joints filled.
8. Pavement markings (ODOT #642).
B. RELATED WORK
1. Section 31 20 00: Earth Moving
A. Comply with materials and methods of construction requirements of the Ohio Department of
Transportation Construction and Material Specifications, (ODOT), referenced sections only.
B. Provide asphalt materials furnished by bulk asphalt concrete producer regularly engaged in
production of hot-mix, hot-laid asphalt concrete paving materials.
C. Tolerances:
1. In-place compacted thickness:
a. Intermediate course: 2 inch plus, minus 0.
b. Surface course: 1/4 inch plus, minus 0.
2. Finished surface smoothness.
a. Intermediate course: Maximum 3/8 inch in 10 feet.
b. Surface course: Maximum 1/4 inch in 10 feet.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit data identifying types, sources and installer of materials proposed for the work.
1.4 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Establish and maintain required lines and grade elevations for each course, including cross
slopes as required.
B. Protect adjacent work from damage, soiling, and staining.
C. Provide temporary barriers and warning lights as required for protection of project work and
public safety.
1.5 WEATHER LIMITATIONS
A. Apply tack coat only when the ambient temperature in the shade is above 50 deg. F and when
the temperature has not been below 35 deg. F for twelve hours immediately prior to
application. Also do not apply when the base surface is wet or frozen or contains an excess of
moisture which would prevent uniform distribution.
B. Construct asphalt concrete surface course only when atmospheric temperature is above 50o F,
when the underlying base is dry, and when weather is not rainy. Intermediate course may be
placed when air temperature is not below 40o and rising, when acceptable to Landscape
Project 16018 FLEXIBLE PAVING 321200 - 1

March 3, 2017
Architect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ASPHALT PAVEMENT MIX
A. Combine mineral constituents in proportions to produce a mixture conforming to following

gradation requirements:
1. Intermediate Course (ODOT #448): Course limestone aggregate (No. 67 or a blend of
No. 6 and No. 8) and fine aggregate shall be combined in a blend as follows:
Sieve Total Passing, % by Weight
1 inch 100
3/4 inch 90- 100
1/2inch 65 - 90
No. 4 35 - 65
No. 16 15 - 45
No. 50 3 - 22
No. 200 0-8
Bitumen (Percent of total mix) 4.0 - 12.0
2. Surface Course (ODOT # 448): Course limestone aggregate (No. 8) and fine aggregate
shall be combined in a blend as follows:
2 inch 100
3/8 inch 90 - 100
No. 4 45 - 75
No. 16 15 - 46
No. 50 3 - 22
No. 200 0-8
Bitumen (Percent of total mix) 4.5 - 12.0
2.2 TACK COAT - SS1 OR SS1H - APWA 2204
2.3 AGGREGATE BASE
A. Angular pit run crushed natural carbonate stone; free from shale, clay, and friable materials
and debris; graded within following limits: (ODOT # 304)
2 inches 100
1 inch 70 - 90
3/4 inch 50 - 85
No. 4 25 - 60
No. 40 7 - 30
No. 200 0 - 15
2.4 JOINT FILLER
A. Hot Applied Joint Sealer ASTM D 3405 (ODOT 705.04)
A. Pavement Marking Paint: Latex, waterborne emulsion, lead and chromate free, ready mixed,
non-bleeding traffic paint complying with FS TT-P-1952, with drying time of less than 3
minutes.
1. Color: White.

March 3, 2017
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVEMENTS
A. All areas shown on drawings to receive new asphaltic concrete paving shall receive the
following treatment:
1. Grade and compact subgrade as required. Before placing base course and paving,
check subgrade and do all necessary rolling and compacting to obtain firm, even
surface. Fill and consolidate any dented or depressed areas. Remove non-
compactable material, replace with clean fill and compact solidly.
2. Install crushed aggregate base in uniform courses; depth and number of courses
required shall be as shown on the drawings.
3. Compact each course of crushed aggregate in accordance with ODOT 304, until a
satisfactory, firm sound base course has been established.
4. Install asphaltic concrete intermediate course (ODOT #448) and asphaltic concrete
surface course (ODOT #448) of the required depth (when compacted) to all asphaltic
concrete pavement areas as shown and detailed on the drawings.
5. Care shall be taken to neatly finish exposed edges and surfaces of asphalt paving to
conform to lines and grades shown on drawings.
6. Joints shall be sealed where asphaltic concrete pavement abuts concrete pavement,
concrete curbs and drainage or manhole structures. The Contractor shall fill any
resulting joints with sand to within 2" of surface of pavement. The upper 2" shall be
filled with bituminous material. Care shall be taken in filling this joint so that no
bituminous material comes in contact with exposed concrete surfaces.
7. Laying temperature of all asphaltic concrete shall be 300o +/- 20oF.
B. All areas shown on the drawings to receive asphaltic concrete resurfacing shall receive the
following treatment:
1. Plane tapered transitions between areas shown to be resurfaced and areas not to be
resurfaced to achieve flush joints, as indicated on the drawings.
2. Remove areas with excessive cracking as directed by the Landscape Architect. Repair
these areas as specified for new asphaltic concrete paving.
3. Clean all areas to be resurfaced to remove all loose material.
4. Patch all depressions, and low areas by applying tack coat and a “scratch coat” of
asphaltic concrete surface course material (ODOT #448) to bring the pavement to a
uniform surface.
5. Apply tack coat (ODOT #407) to all areas to be resurfaced.
6. Install asphaltic concrete surface course (ODOT #448) minimum 1 ½” thick (compacted
thickness) to all areas to be resurfaced. Coordinate this installation with installation of
surface course on adjacent new asphaltic concrete paving.
7. Care shall be taken to neatly finish exposed edges and surfaces of asphalt resurfacing.
8. Joints shall be sealed where asphaltic concrete pavement abuts concrete pavement,
concrete curbs and drainage or manhole structures. The Contractor shall fill any
resulting joints with sand to within 2" of surface of pavement. The upper 2" shall be
filled with bituminous material. Care shall be taken in filling this joint so that no
bituminous material comes in contact with exposed concrete surfaces. Seal joints
between resurfaced asphalt and existing asphalt.
9. Laying temperature of all asphaltic concrete shall be 300o +/- 20oF.
3.2 COMPACTING THE MIX
A. Begin rolling operation soon after placing when the mixture will bear the weight of the roller
without excessive displacement. Do not suddenly change the line or direction of rolling.
B. Compact the mixture with hand tampers or vibrating plate compactors in all areas inaccessible
to rollers.
C. Do not permit heavy equipment, including rollers, to stand on the finished surface before it has
thoroughly cooled or set.

March 3, 2017
3.3 PAVEMENT MARKING
A. Do not apply pavement marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified
with the Architect.
B. Allow paving to age 30 days before starting pavement marking.
C. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust.
D. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings, of dimensions
indicated, with uniform, straight lines. Apply at manufacturer’s recommended rates, to provide
a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils.
3.4 PATCHING
A. Remove and replace mixtures that become mixed with foreign materials and all defective
areas. Cut out such areas and fill with fresh, hot asphalt concrete. Compact by rolling to the
required surface density and smoothness.
B. Remove deficient areas for the full depth of the course. Cut sides perpendicular and parallel to
the direction of traffic with edges vertical. Apply a tack coat before placing asphalt concrete
mixture.
3.5 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect asphalt paving from construction and vehicular damage until project acceptance.
B. Sweep asphalt paving and wash free of stains, discolorations, dirt and other foreign material
immediately prior to project acceptance.

March 3, 2017
SECTION 32 13 73 EXTERIOR PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY

A. Expansion joints within portland cement concrete pavement.
1. Section 03 30 00: "Cast-in-place Concrete" for constructing joints in concrete paving.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated with color selection chart. Color to be
selected by Landscape Architect.

A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has specialized in installing joint
sealants similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose
work has resulted in joint-sealant installations with a record of successful in-service
performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single
manufacturer.
A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels
indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing
time, and mixing instructions for multi-component materials.
B. Store and handle materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent their
deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other
causes.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the
following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint
sealant manufacturer or are below 40 degrees F.
2. When joint substrates are wet.
B. Joint-Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths
are less than that allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for application indicated.
C. Joint-Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until
contaminants capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backing materials, and other related materials that are
compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and
Project 16018 EXTERIOR PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS 321373 - 1

March 3, 2017
application, as demonstrated by joint sealant manufacturer based on testing and field
experience.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following or approved equal:
1. Cold-applied multi-component sealant for concrete, complying with ASTM C-920, Type M,
Class 25 or F.S. TT-S-0027E, Type 1, Class A:
A. Sika Sikaflex 2C/SL, Architect to select color.
2.2 JOINT-SEALANT BACKER MATERIALS
A. General: Provide joint-sealant backer materials that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint
substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications
indicated by joint sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
1. Closed cell backer rod by Noamco or equal, sized to fit the joint width.
2.3 PRIMERS
A. Primers: Product recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of
sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-
substrate tests and field tests.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting
joint-sealant performance.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended in writing by
joint sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior
experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto
adjoining surfaces.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable
to products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. Apply ½”
minimum sealant depth.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Install backer materials of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position
required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint
widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of backer materials.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear backer materials.
3. Remove absorbent backer materials that have become wet before sealant application and
replace them with dry materials.
D. Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration.

March 3, 2017
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
E. Provide joint configuration to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions,
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by
methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of
products in which joints occur.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating
substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so
sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite
such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated
joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the
original work.

March 3, 2017
SECTION 32 14 40 – STONE PAVING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The extent of the stone paving work including all labor and materials is shown on the
drawings.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Ohio Department of Transportation Construction & Material Specifications (ODOT)
current edition.

A. Weight tickets shall be collected to determine quantities.
B. Tolerances:
1. In-place thickness: 1 inch plus, minus 0.
2. Finished surface smoothness: max. ½ inch in 10 feet.
C. Aggregate acceptance shall be determined prior to incorporation into the work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 BASE MATERIAL ODOT #304

A. Aggregate base shall be crushed limestone, crushed carbonate stone or crushed
gravel meeting the following gradation:
Sieve Size Total % Passing

2 inch 100
1 inch 70-90
¾ inch 50-85
No. 4 25-60
No. 40 7-30
No. 200 0-15
B. Prior to placing, aggregate shall have a reasonably uniform moisture content, at or

near optimum for compaction.
2.2 COVER AGGREGATE

A. No. 78 (AASHTO M43) crushed limestone, crushed carbonate stone or crushed
gravel meeting the following gradation:
Sieve Size Total % Passing

¾ inch 100
½ inch 90-100
3/8 inch 40-75
No. 4 5-25
No. 8 0-10
No. 16 0-5
Project 16018 STONE PAVING 321440 - 1

March 3, 2017
B. Prior to placing, aggregate shall have a reasonably uniform moisture content at or

near optimum for compaction.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 BASE MATERIAL

A. Do not proceed with installation of the base material until the subgrade has been
approved
B. When vibratory compaction equipment is used, the compacted depth of a single lay-
er shall not exceed 6 inches. When vibratory compaction equipment is not used, the
maximum compacted thickness of one layer shall not exceed 3 inches. The base
material shall be constructed in layers of approximately equal thickness to obtain the
total compacted thickness required, as shown on the drawings.
C. The aggregate shall be placed with self-propelled machines capable of placing the
aggregate to true line and grade. Other approved placing methods may be used in
small areas where machine spreading is impractical.
D. Compact the base material until no further increase in density is obtainable.
3.2 COVER AGGREGATE

A. After approval of the base course installation, uniformly spread No. 78 crushed lime-
stone to a depth of 1” on all stone pavement areas and compact.
B. Protect surface from construction and vehicular damage until project acceptance.
Project 16018 STONE PAVING 321440 - 2

March 3, 2017
SECTION 32 20 00 - CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A Included is all steel bar, welded wire fabric reinforcing, and related items necessary
for concrete work related to building construction. Reinforcing steel shall be
detailed, fabricated and placed in accordance with codes and requirements specified
herein.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 03 11 00: Concrete Formwork

B. Section 03 30 00: Cast-in-Place Concrete
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Regularly engaged in the manufacture of steel bars and

welded wire fabric reinforcing.
B. Installers Qualifications:
1. Three (3) years experience in installation of steel bar and welded wire fabric
reinforcing.
2. Welders qualified in accordance with AWS D 12.1-61.
C. Source Quality Control: Mill test certificates identifying chemical and physical
analysis of each load of reinforcing steel delivered.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Detail reinforcing steel in accordance with ACI-315-74, “Manual of Standard
Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures”. Show sizes and
dimensions for fabrication and placing reinforcing steel and accessories.
Indicate bar schedules, tie and stirrup spacing, and diagrams of bar bends.
2. Before submittal to the Engineer, shop drawings shall be checked and
approved by the Contractor to verify that bar details are in conformity with the
design drawings and are consistent with the anticipated concrete pours.
3. Submit 5 copies of shop drawings to the Engineer that show the approval by
the Contractor. Do not fabricate reinforcing steel until approval of the
Engineer has been obtained.
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver reinforcement to project site in bundles marked with metal tags indicating bar
size and length. Handle and store materials to prevent contamination or
deterioration. Handle welding electrodes in accordance with AWS D 12.1.
Project 16018 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 322000 - 1

March 3, 2017
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. All bar reinforcement shall be intermediate or hard grade billet or rail steel, ASTM
A615 or A616, Grade 60 or 40 and conforming to A-305. All #3 and #4 Ties and
Stirrups to be Grade 40. All other to be Grade 60 unless shown otherwise on plans.
B. Welded wire fabric reinforcing shall conform to ASTM A185.
C. All accessories to be of standard types as called for in ACI 315-74. Accessories are
to plastic coated, stainless steel or galvanized, where surface on which they rest is
exposed.
D. Other Supports: Concrete brick may be used to support reinforcing in foundation to
obtain proper clearances from the earth.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Bars shall be prefabricated to detail and delivered to the job plainly tagged and
ready to set. Bends and hooks shall conform to ACI Specifications. Beam stirrups
and column ties shall not have dimension errors more than one bar diameter and the
depth of truss bends shall not be in error more than ½ bar diameter.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Reinforcing for one day’s pour shall be completely placed and inspection made by
the Engineer prior to pouring.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Reinforcement shall be securely tied at all intersections with #18 black annealed wire
and be carried on spaces of sufficient weight and number to properly support bars.
B. Placement:
1. Bar Supports: CRSI 65
2. Reinforcing Bars: CRSI 63
C. Steel Adjustment:
1. Move within allowable tolerance to avoid interference with other reinforcing
steel, conduits or embedded items.
2. Do not move bars beyond allowable tolerances without concurrence of the
Engineer.
3. Do not heat, bend, or cut bars without concurrence of the Engineer.
D. Splices:
1. Lap Splices: Tie securely with wire to prevent displacement of splices during
placement of concrete.
2. Splice Devices: Install in accordance with manufacturer’s written
instructions.
3. Welding: Perform in accordance with AWS 12.1.

March 3, 2017
4. Do not splice bars except at locations shown on drawings without

concurrence of the Engineer.
E. Wire Fabric:
1. Install in longest practicable lengths.
2. Lap adjoining pieces 1’-0” minimum and lay splices with #16 gauge wire.
3. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps.
4. Wire fabric reinforcing for slabs on fill shall be placed approximately in center
of slab.
F. Footing Foundations: Install vertical dowel steel as required before placing
concrete. Provide template to hold dowels in proper position and alignment.
G. Cleaning: Remove dirt, grease, oil, loose mill scale, excessive rust, and foreign
matter that will reduce bond with concrete.
H. Protection during Concreting: Keep reinforcing steel in proper position during
concrete placement.

March 3, 2017
SECTION 32 30 00 EXTERIOR CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Prepare sub-grade to receive base course materials for concrete pavements.

B. Place and compact base course materials for concrete pavements.
C. Provide concrete pavements, sidewalks and miscellaneous site concrete work, complete with
reinforcement where required.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 01 33 23: Shop Drawings, product Data, and Samples

B. Section 01 45 23: Testing and Inspection Services
C. Section 31 20 00: Earth Moving
D. Section 07 92 00: Joint Sealants
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement

B. ASTM C94 - Ready-mixed Concrete
C. ASTM C260 - Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
D. ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
E. ASTM C33 - Concrete Aggregates
F. ASTM D1751 - Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Con-
struction
G. ASTM C308 - Liquid Membrane Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FILL MATERIALS
A. Crushed aggregate base: Angular pit run crushed natural carbonate stone; free from shale,
clay, and friable materials and debris; graded within the following limits:
Sieve Size % Passing

2 inches 100
1 inch 70 - 90
¾ inch 50 - 85
No. 4 25 - 60
No. 40 7 - 30
No. 200 0 - 15
2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150; normal - type 1

B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33
C. Water: Clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, alkali, organic matter, or other deleteri-
ous material
D. Air Entrainment: ASTM C260
E. Only one type and manufacturer of approved cement shall be used throughout this project.
2.3 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES
Project 16018 EXTERIOR CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 323000 - 1

March 3, 2017
A. Formwork: Matched, tight fitting and adequately stiffened to support weight of concrete with-
out deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of concrete.
B. Joint Filler: One half inch thick, asphaltic impregnated vegetable fiber and finely divided min-
eral filler, ASTM D1751.
C. Curing Compound: VOC compliant , rapid decomposing resin curing compound shall be
Safe-Cure Clear as manufactured by ChemMasters, Inc. or approved equal.
D. Concrete Sealer (non-colored concrete): A water-based silane/siloxane water repellent such
as Weather Seal Siloxane WB as manufactured by Prosoco, Spall Guard WB 10% by
ChemMasters, Inc., or approved equal.
E. Concrete Stain for colored concrete: Lithochrome Tintura Stain (non acid stain) as manufac-
tured by Scofield Systems or approved equal. Colors as selected by the Landscape Architect.
F. Sealer for colored concrete: Selectseal-W (water based/low VOC) as manufactured by Sco-
field Systems or approved equal.
2.4 CONCRETE MIX
A. Mix and proportion to produce minimum 4000 psi concrete at 28 days with maximum slump of
4 inches and 6 percent plus or minus 1-1/2% air entrainment, ASTM C94.
B. Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather only when acceptable to Landscape Architect.
Use of admixtures shall not relax cold weather placement requirements. Do not use calcium
chloride nor fly ash.
C. Use set-retarding admixtures during hot weather only when acceptable to Landscape Archi-
tect.
2.5 SAMPLE
A. The Contractor shall provide a 3’ x 3’ sample slab of each required concrete finish for the
Landscape Architect’s approval, to insure the desired texture and appearance. Once a sam-
ple has been approved, this shall become the standard for the remainder of the job.
B. The materials including mix design and finishing techniques proposed for use on the job will
be those used in the sample. Also the same curing and sealing methods proposed for use on
the job should be used for the approved sample
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION OF SUB-GRADE
A. Ensure rough grading has brought sub-grade to required elevations.

B. Fill soft spots and hollows with additional fill
C. Level and compact sub-grade to receive granular base for concrete walks, curbs, and paving
to 98% maximum dry density.
3.2 PLACEMENT OF GRAVEL FILL
A. Place and level crushed aggregate base over prepared sub-grade to a compacted depth of 4
inches (or as shown on the drawings) true to lines and levels. Compact until no further in-
crease in density is obtainable.
3.3 FORMING
A. Form vertical surfaces to full depth and securely position to required lines and levels.
B. Ensure form ties are not placed so as to pass through finished faces of concrete work, unless
otherwise approved by the Landscape Architect

March 3, 2017
C. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit easy dismantling and stripping, and to prevent
damage to concrete during formwork removal.
3.4 PLACING REINFORCING
A. Reinforce concrete pavement and structures as shown on the drawings. Allow for minimum
1-1/2 inch concrete cover.
B. Do not extend reinforcing through expansion joints.
3.5 JOINTS
A. Construct expansion, control and construction joints true-to-line with face perpendicular to
surface concrete. Where possible, make joints of curbs coincide with joints in walks. When
sidewalks abut building, and other vertical stationary structures, provide continuous joint filler.
B. Provide control joints, sectioning concrete into areas indicated. Construct joints for a depth
equal to at least one-fourth (1/4) of the concrete thickness.
1. Broom finish concrete walks: Provide hand tooled control joints in pattern indicated.
Do not allow edges of tooled joint to become depressed below adjacent concrete sur-
face.
C. Provide construction joints at the end of all pours and at locations where placement opera-
tions are stopped for a period of more than one-half hour, except where such pours terminate
at expansion joints.
1. Construct joints with standard keyed-section forms.
D. Provide premolded joint filler for expansion joints abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, man-
holes, inlets, structures, walks and other fixed objects.
1. Locate expansion joints as indicated on the drawings, or as specified herein; set per-
pendicular to longitudinal axis of walks, curbs and paving. Align expansion joints in
abutting curbs and walks.
2. Extend joint fillers full-width and depth of joint. Maintain top edge not more than 1/8
inch below finished surface. Recess top edge ½ inch if joints are to be sealed.
3. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths for the full width being placed, whenever pos-
sible. Where more than one length is required, clip joint filler sections together.
4. Protect the top edge of the joint filler during concrete placement.
3.6 CONCRETE TEST
A. Testing of concrete will be performed by an independent testing laboratory employed and paid
for by the Contractor and acceptable to the Landscape Architect and the Owner. All work
shall be in accordance with Section 01410. Testing and inspection will be performed so as to
minimize disruption to Work.
B. Compressive Strength Testing: Test cylinders sets shall be made from concrete delivered to
the job site.
1. One (1) twenty-eight (28) day test and one (1) seven (7) day test equals one set of
tests. Provide one set of test cylinders for each fifty (50) cubic yards of concrete de-
livered to the job site.
2. Test specimens shall be taken and tested in accordance with ASTM Specifications for
“Compression Test of Concrete”. Results of tests shall immediately be submitted to
the Landscape Architect.
3. Where the ultimate 28 days compressive strength of concrete in any test cylinder falls
below the strength for the class of concrete tested, or below proportional minimum
seven day strengths, that portion of concrete shall be removed and replaced at no
additional cost to the Owner.
C. Air and Slump Testing:

March 3, 2017
1. A minimum of one test each (air and slump) shall be made for each load of concrete
delivered to job site and each test cylinder set taken. Results of air and slump tests
shall be referenced to test cylinder sets when applicable. Results of tests shall im-
mediately be submitted to the Landscape Architect.
2. Do not obtain samples from the very first or last portions of the batch.
D. Failure to detect any defective work or materials shall not in any way prevent later rejection
when such defect is discovered, nor shall it obligate the Owner or Landscape Architect for fi-
nal acceptance.
3.7 PLACING AND FINISHING CONCRETE
A. Place concrete, screed and wood float surfaces to a smooth and uniform finish, free of open
texturing and exposed aggregate.
B. Avoid working mortar to surface. Finishing operations shall be kept to an absolute minimum
for exterior work and where broom finishes are required, normally no troweling is required.
No working of the concrete will be allowed while bleed water is on the surface as this tends to
weaken the surface and significantly contributes to potential scaling.
C. Provide applicable concrete finishes as follows:
1. Broom finish: (for all standard flatwork unless otherwise noted on the drawing).
a. Provide exterior pavement surfaces with a medium broom textured finish.
b. Ramps: provide a non-slip heavy broom finish
c. Curbs: smooth brushed finish
d. Steps: Medium broom textured finish.
D. Round all edges, including edges of dummy and expansion and contraction joints, with ½ ra-
dius edging tool.
E. Ensure finished surfaces do not vary from true lines, levels, or grade by more than 1/8 inch in
10 feet when measured with straight edge.
F. Concrete shall be placed so as to avoid any segregation of planes between pours and shall
be vibrated or puddled as required to provide a smooth surface free from honeycomb or seg-
regation. After forms are removed, all tie holes or honeycomb shall be pointed and exposed
surfaces shall have fins removed by rubbing with carborundum and water to produce a
smooth, even surface.
G. Apply curing compound on all concrete finished surfaces immediately after placement. Apply
in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
H. Apply concrete sealer after the concrete has cured at least twenty eight days. Concrete sur-
faces must be clean and dry prior to application. Remove all stains and curing compound res-
idue prior to sealing. Temperature of the concrete shall be not less than 45 degrees F. Apply
in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
I. Provide for heating of concrete materials and the wet concrete during freezing or near freez-
ing weather. No frozen materials or materials containing ice shall be used. All concrete ma-
terials and all reinforcing forms, fillers and ground with which the concrete is to be in contact
shall have a temperature of between 70 degrees and 80 degrees F., and adequate means
shall be provided for maintaining a temperature of not less than 70 degrees F. for three days
or 50 degrees F. for five days after concrete is poured. Follow recommended ACI-305 prac-
tice for hot weather concreting. Admixture for the purpose of accelerating or retarding set
shall be utilized only upon the approval and instructions of the Landscape Architect. Water
reducing admixture may be used to improve workability or reduce water content upon prior
approval of the Landscape Architect. Concrete shall be placed within one and one-half hours
from the time it is batched.
3.8 CONCRETE WALLS
A. Concrete shall be placed in such manner as to prevent segregation and accumulations of

hardened concrete on forms or reinforcement above mass of concrete being placed. To

March 3, 2017
achieve this end, suitable hoppers, spouts with restricted outlets and tremies shall be used as
required.
B. During and immediately after depositing, concrete shall be thoroughly compacted by means of
internal type mechanical vibrators or other tools, spading to produce required quality of finish.
Vibration shall be done by experienced operators under close supervision and shall be carried
on only enough to produce homogeneity and optimum consolidation without permitting segre-
gation of constituents or “pumping” of air. Vibrators used for normal weight concrete shall op-
erate at speed at no less than 8,000 rpm and be of suitable capacity. Do not use vibrators to
move concrete. Vibration shall be supplemented by proper wooden spade puddling to re-
move included bubbles and honeycomb adjacent to visible surfaces. At least one vibrator
shall be on hand for every 10 cubic yards of concrete placed per hour, plus one spare. Vibra-
tor shall be operable and on site prior to starting placement.
C. Vertical lifts shall not exceed 18 inches. Vibrate through successive lifts to avoid pour lines.
Vibrate first lift thoroughly until top of lift glistens to avoid stone pockets, honeycomb, and seg-
regation.
D. Concrete shall be deposited continuously, and in layers of such thickness that no concrete will
be deposited on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause formation of seams and
planes of weakness within section. If section cannot be placed continuously between planned
construction joints, as specified, field joint and additional reinforcement shall be introduced so
as to preserve structural continuity. Architect shall be notified in any such case.
E. Cold joints, particularly in exposed concrete, including “honeycomb”, are unacceptable. If
they occur in concrete surfaces exposed to view, Architect will require that entire section in
which blemish occurs be removed and replaced with new materials at Contractor’s expense.
3.9 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. Protect concrete from damage until acceptance of work. Exclude traffic for at least 14 days.
When construction traffic is permitted, maintain walks and pavement as clean as possible by
removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.
B. Repair defective concrete to match color and texture of adjacent surfaces.
C. Sweep concrete sidewalks and pavement and wash free of stains, discolorations, dirt and
other foreign material immediately prior to project acceptance.

March 3, 2017
SECTION 32 40 00 - SITE IMPROVEMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide site improvements as shown and specified. Work includes:

1. Gravel strip building edging
B. Related work:
1. Section 31 10 00: Site Clearing
3. Section 03 30 00: Cast-in-Place Concrete
4. Section 33 40 00: Storm Drainage Utilities
A. Obtain Owner’s approval for each type of stone and gravel required prior to delivery
to site. Landscape Architect will assist in selection of stone for walls.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer’s product data and installation instructions for factory

fabricated site improvement items.
B. Submit rock and gravel samples when requested by Owner. Designate source
location of rock and gravel materials.
C. Submit shop drawings for all handrails. Submit material, color and finish sample for
approval. Submit product data for all brackets and mounting hardware required.
D. Submit color and fabric samples for retractable canopy.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Gravel Strip building edging materials:

1. Gravel: Clean, round, washed river rock ¾” to 1” in size.
2. Weed Barrier: 4.5 oz/sy black polyethylene landscape mat.
3. Aluminum edging: 3/16” thickness x 4” depth aluminum edging with black
finish as manufactured by Permaloc Edging, Inc., 13505 Barry Street,
Holland, Michigan 49423, Phone: (800) 356-9660, or approved equal.
Provide manufacturer’s standard line stake and splicing stakes.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Gravel strip building edging: Provide as shown on the drawings.

1. Grade area to receive gravel strip to proper subgrade depth.
Project 16018 SITE IMPROVEMENTS 324000 - 1

March 3, 2017
2. Install single layer of polyethylene weed barrier with 6” lapped joints.

3. Install aluminum edging. Provide top edge level with finish grade of lawn. Install
in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions. Install edging true to
line and grade with straight lines.
4. Install minimum 4 in. depth of gravel. Install gravel as required to assure
complete coverage of weed barrier. Rake level.
5. Avoid mixing of stone and soil.
Project 16018 SITE IMPROVEMENTS 324000 - 2

March 3, 2017
SECTION 32 90 00
PLANTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide trees, plants and ground cover as shown and specified. Work includes:
1. Trees, plants and ground cover.
2. Soil amendments, planting soil mixtures and accessories.
3. Provide additional topsoil as required for planting soil backfill in plant pits and planting
beds, or as noted on the drawings.
4. Provide maintenance of all plants and transplants until final acceptance.
B. A plant list, including a schedule of sizes, quantities and other requirements, is provided on
the drawings.
C. Related work:
1. Section 31 10 00: Site Clearing
3. Section 32 92 00: Turf and Grasses
A. Plants shall conform to names indicated on the drawings and plant list and to the nomencla-
ture listed in the American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature’s “Standardized
Plant Names”, latest edition.
B. Size, quality, handling, planting and maintenance of plant materials shall be in accordance
with “USA Standard of Nursery Stock”, American Association of Nurserymen, Inc. Minimum
acceptable sizes of plants, measured before pruning with branches in normal position, shall
conform to measurements specified in the plant list.
C. Plants shall be subject to the Landscape Architect’s inspection and approval at place of
growth or upon delivery for conformity to specification requirements. Such approval shall
preclude neither right of inspection upon delivery at the site or during progress of work, nor
right of rejection at the site due to damage suffered in handling or transportation.
D. Contractor will provide and pay for materials testing. Testing agency shall be acceptable to
the Landscape Architect.
1. Test representative samples of materials proposed for use. Materials used in the work
shall be the same materials as tested. Do not use proposed materials in the work until
test reports have been reviewed by the Landscape Architect and approval obtained to
proceed with plant excavations.
E. Test reports: Provide the following information:
1. Topsoil:
a. Mechanical analysis
b. Percentage of organic content
c. Recommendations on the type and quantity of soil nutrient additives required to
bring nutrients to a satisfactory level for specified plants.
d. Recommendations on the type and quantity of soil additives required to bring the
pH of soil to a value of 6.5-7.0 (unless otherwise noted).
2. Peat Moss:
a. Loss of weight by ignition
b. Moisture absorption capacity
Project 16018 PLANTING 329000 - 1

March 3, 2017
3. If on-site topsoil is used, provide a minimum of 4 separate tests to verify mechanical

analysis, organic matter content, nutrient level and pH value of topsoil. Sample loca-
tions as directed by the Landscape Architect.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit complete written maintenance instructions at least 10 days prior to end of mainte-
nance period. Include all requirements for proper care, development and maintenance of
plantings.
B. Submit samples of proposed mulch used in planting beds for approval.
C. Submit certificate of inspection of plant material by state or federal authorities.
D. Submit a label from the manufacturer’s container certifying fertilizer content.
E. Submit material test reports and soil nutrient additive recommendations.
1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Prepare, transport and handle plants to ensure protection against injury. Cover all plants
while transporting to and from the site.
B. Deliver plants with legible waterproof identification labels.
C. Temporary storage of new material:
1. No new plants shall remain in temporary storage over the winter or summer. Plants that
are not planted immediately shall be protected as follows:
a. Plants shall remain on the site of the work no longer than three days prior to being
planted or placed in storage.
b. The earth balls shall be kept moist and their solidity carefully preserved. To pre-
vent drying out or freezing, store plants in a compact group with a suitable mulch
material placed around and between the balls so they are completely covered. The
duration of storage, method of storage of plants and mulch material shall be ac-
ceptable to the Landscape Architect.
D. Do not deliver or use topsoil in frozen or muddy condition.
1.5 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Install plant materials during time periods indicated. Planting operations conducted at other
times are at the option and full responsibility of the Contractor and without additional compen-
sation, except as otherwise agreed to by the Landscape Architect and Owner.
1. Deciduous materials:
a. March 1 to June 1
b. October 1 to December 1
2. Evergreen material:
a. April 1 to June 1
b. September 1 to October 15
3. Ground Cover: Spring only, unless otherwise authorized.
4. When planting operations vary, plant early in the day. When planting occurs in the
summer, apply anti-desiccant spray to plantings after leaves become full size.
B. Weather limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather condi-
tions permit.
C. Coordination with Lawns: Plant trees and shrubs after finish grades are established and be-
fore planting lawns, unless otherwise acceptable to Landscape Architect.
1. When planting trees and shrubs after lawns, protect lawn areas and promptly repair
damage caused by planting operations.
2. When hydroseeding is used, protect shrubs, trees and other site improvements from
hydroseed overspray. Any improvements damaged by overspray will be repaired or re-
placed by the responsible contractor.

March 3, 2017
1.6 GUARANTEE
A. Guarantee unconditionally labor and plant materials for a period of one year after Landscape
Architect’s acceptance. Replace at Contractor’s expense all plant materials which die during
guarantee period, except for defects resulting from lack of adequate maintenance, neglect, or
abuse by Owner. At end of guarantee period, replace all plant materials that are more than
25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition.
B. During guarantee period, replace plants that die or are, in the Landscape Architect’s opinion,
in an unhealthy, unsightly, or badly impaired condition. Make no replacements in any season
unfavorable for planting. Provide replacement plants of the same kind and size as specified
in the plant list, and meeting all requirements of these specifications.
C. Initial inspection of planting will be made by Landscape Architect at completion of planting.
Guarantee period shall begin at date of acceptance.
D. The Contractor shall make as many periodic inspections as necessary during the guarantee
period at no additional cost to the Owner, to determine if the Owner’s maintenance program is
providing satisfactory care for the new plant materials. Submit in writing to the Owner all rec-
ommended changes.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Plant Materials:
1. Provide healthy, sound, vigorous plant materials, free from plant diseases, insect
pests, or their eggs, with healthy well-developed root systems; freshly dug, nursery-
grown, well-branched, densely foliated when in leaf, and well-proportioned, particular-
ly with respect to the width-height relationship, hardy under climatic conditions similar
to those of the project.
2. Damaged or broken branches, broken ball, and loose top in ball are not acceptable.
Provide balled and burlapped plants, designated B&B, adequately balled with firm
natural balls as set forth in the ASNS. Firmly wrap balls with burlap or approved cloth
secured in place.
3. Obtain the Landscape Architect’s specific written approval for substitution of plants
other than those named in the plant list. Proposed substitutes shall have essentially
the same characteristics as plants specified in appearance, ultimate height, shape,
habit of growth, general soil and other requirements. Average cost and value of sub-
stituted plants shall be no less than cost and value of plants specified. Plants of
greater value may be accepted without additional cost to the Owner.
4. Provide container-grown stock with root system sufficiently developed to hold soil to-
gether, firm and whole. No plants shall be loose in containers; nor pot-bound.
5. Size range and measurement of height and caliper of all material shall be as specified
in the ASNS.
B. Guying and Staking Material:
1. Tree stakes: 2” x 2” x 8’ hardwood.
2. Hose: High quality braided rubber or plastic hose, ¾ inch diameter and suitable
length. (Color Black)
3. Wire: 12 gauge galvanized steel.
4. Guying cable: Galvanized steel, #9 gauge. Thimbles and nicroress clips shall be
used for connections and splices.
5. Turnbuckles: Galvanized or zinc dip painted with an 8 inch length-wise opening fitted
with eyebolts and spot welded or fitted with a locking device to prevent vandalism.
6. Guying stakes: 2” x 2” x 33”, notched hardwood.
7. Deadman: Sound lumber 4” x 8” x 36”.
C. Mulch:

March 3, 2017
1. Paygro or equal, shredded bark mulch or wood chips, containing no sticks larger than
¼” in diameter, stones, clay or other foreign material that will prevent eventual decay
of the mulch necessary for its complete effectiveness.
2. Gravel mulch as noted on the plans shall be washed river rock, size as noted. It shall
be inert, durable stone free of material deleterious to plant growth. Submit sample to
Landscape Architect for approval.
D. Wrapping material for tree trunks: Two thickness’ of crinkled paper cemented together with
bituminous material, in strips 4” to 6” wide, laced in place.
E. Anti-desiccant: “Wilt-Pruf”, Nursery Specialty Products, Inc., New York or equal. Use accord-
ing to manufacturer’s instructions.
F. Tree Paint: Cabot Tree Paint or equal.
G. Peat moss used in planting soil preparation: High quality pure Canadian sphagnum peat with
a pH value not less than 3.5 nor greater than 6.0 at 25 degrees C. The ash content shall be
not more than 10 percent and water holding capacity shall be not less than 800 percent.
H. Water: Free of substances harmful to plant growth.
I. Fertilizer mixture: At the time of plant installation, add fertilizer mixture into the planting soil.
100 lb. of fertilizer mixture consists of the following:
3 pounds chelated iron (Sequestrene)
5 pounds aluminum sulfate
7 pounds finely ground sulphur
10 pounds steamed bonemeal
75 pounds complete fertilizer, such as 8-32-16
J. Topsoil:
1. Provide fertile, friable, surface soil, reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, brush,
weeds and other litter and free of roots, stumps, stones, and other extraneous or toxic
matter harmful to plant growth.
2. Topsoil shall be a sandy loam or loam soil as defined by the Soil Conservation Ser-
vice U.S.D.A., Soil Classification System.
3. Mechanical analysis shall fall within the following particle ranges:
Average percentage Range
Sand ().05-2.0 mil dia. Range) 30-70% 50%
Silt (0.002-0/05 mil dia. Range) 20-50% 35%
Clay (less than .002 mil dia. Range) 5-25% 15%
95% of topsoil shall pass a 2.0 mil sieve.
4. Provide topsoil free of stones one inch in longest dimension, earth clods, plant parts
and debris.
5. Topsoil shall possess from 5% to 12% organic matter.
K. Landscape Mat: When specified on the drawings, landscape mat shall be DeWitt Pro 5
Weed Barrier polypropylene fabric mat 4.8 oz. per square yard as manufactured by DeWitt
Company, phone: (800) 325-0950 or approved equal. Joints shall be lapped 4”-6” with care
taken not to puncture or tear mat.
2.2 PLANTING SOIL MIXTURE
A. Planting soil mixture: For all planting operations, provide 4 parts topsoil and 1 part peat moss
by volume.
B. Planting soil shall have a pH value range of 6.5 to 7.0. If the topsoil used in making the plant-
ing soil mixture does not fall within the pH range specified, amend with limestone or aluminum
sulphate to bring topsoil within the specified limit.
C. Test topsoil to be used in making planting soil mixture for nutrients. When testing indicates a
deficiency of nutrients, apply fertilizer at rates recommended by testing.
D. Apply fertilizer recommended by testing within a ten day period prior to installing plants.
PART 3 EXECUTION

March 3, 2017
3.1 GENERAL
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which the work is to be performed. Provide the re-
quired additional topsoil in all planting areas. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfacto-
ry conditions have been corrected.
B. Locate plants as shown or as approved in field by Landscape Architect after staking by Con-
tractor.
3.2 BED PREPARATION
A. Unless otherwise directed by the Landscape Architect, incorporate 5 pounds of specified ferti-
lizer mixture per cubic yard of planting soil mixture.
B. Test drain plant beds and pits by filling with water twice in succession. Conditions permitting
retention of water in planting beds for more than 24 hours shall be brought to the Landscape
Architect’s attention. Notify Landscape Architect in writing of condition considered detrimental
to growth of plant materials, and submit proposal for correcting condition, if feasible, including
change in cost, if any.
C. Excavate plant pits with vertical sides. Make tree pits 2 ft. greater in diameter than ball of
earth or spread of roots of trees and deep enough to allow for depth of ball. Make shrub pits
1 ft. greater than spread of roots and 12” deep minimum, below finished grade. Adjust depth
of planting beds to permit a minimum of 4” of tamped topsoil beneath ball or roots of all
plants. Set plants at finished grade.
D. Remove all rock or other underground obstruction encountered in any plant pit excavation to a
depth of not less than 3 ft. below grade and not less than 6” below bottom of ball or roots.
3.3 PLANT INSTALLATION
A. Set plants in center of pits plumb and straight and at such a level that after settlement, plants
will bear same relation to finished grade of surrounding ground as to grade of ground from
which plants were dug. In setting balled and burlapped trees and shrubs, compact topsoil
around bases of ball to fill all voids. Remove ropes, wires or strings.
B. Thoroughly compact and water topsoil around balls. To compensate for shrinkage, fix fin-
ished grade of topsoil prior to watering at an elevation 10% of fill depth higher than desired fin-
ished grade. To facilitate watering, form shallow saucer approximately 3” deep around each
plant by placing a ridge of topsoil around the edge of each filled-in pit. After planting, cultivate
soil in shrub beds between shrub pits, rake smooth and neatly outline.
C. Wrap all trees immediately after planting. Wrap tree trunks spirally from bottom to top and
entirely cover trunk from ground to height of second branches neatly and snugly. Overlay ap-
proximately 2”. Stake or guy as shown on drawings.
D. Prune each tree and shrub in accordance with the American Association of Nurserymen’s
Standard to preserve natural character of plant. Remove all dead wood or suckers and all
broken or badly bruised branches. Remove ¼ to 1/3 of wood by thinning out and shortening
branches to balance root loss due to transplanting. Make all cuts flush, leaving no stubs.
Paint cuts over 1” diameter with tree paint, covering all exposed cambium and other exposed
living tissue.
E. Within 2 days after planting, cover all tree shrub and ground cover pits and beds with a mini-
mum 3” layer of mulch. Limit of mulch for trees shall be area of pit, and for shrubs and
ground cover in beds, entire area of bed. Where gravel mulch is specified, avoid contaminat-
ing gravel with other materials. Temporary edging material, where shown on the drawings,
shall be removed after adjoining ground cover materials have become established.
3.4 MAINTENANCE OF PLANTING
A. Maintenance shall begin immediately after each plant is planted and shall continue until final
acceptance with the following requirements: Maintenance of new planting shall consist of
pruning, watering, cultivating, weeding, mulching, tightening, and repairing of guys, resetting

March 3, 2017
plants to proper grades and upright position, restoration of guys, resetting plants to proper
grades and upright position, restoration of the planting saucer, and furnishing and applying
such sprays as are necessary to keep the plantings free of insects and disease.
B. Planting areas and plants shall be protected at all times against trespassing and damage for
the duration of the maintenance period. If any plants become damaged or injured, they shall
be treated or replaced as directed by the Landscape Architect at no additional cost to the
Owner.
3.5 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE
A. The work will be inspected upon Contractor’s written request submitted at least 10 days be-
fore anticipated date of inspection. Repairs or replacements deemed necessary after inspec-
tion, shall be completed before acceptance is made by the Landscape Architect.
B. The work may be accepted in parts when it is deemed to be in the Owner’s best interest to do
so, and when permission is given to the Contractor in writing to complete the work in parts.
C. The guarantee period for trees and shrubs shall begin at the date of acceptance. All plant
material shall be guaranteed by the Contractor, for a period of one year from the date of ac-
ceptance to be in good, healthy and flourishing condition. When the work is accepted in
parts, the guarantee periods shall extend from each of the partial acceptances to the terminal
date of the last guarantee period. Thus, all guarantee periods terminate at one time.
D. The Contractor shall replace, without cost to the Owner, and as soon as weather conditions
permit and within a specified planting period, all dead plants and all plants not in a vigorous,
thriving condition, as determined by the Landscape Architect during and at the end of the
guarantee period. The plants shall be free of dead or dying branches and branch tips, and
shall bear foliage of a normal density, size and color. Replacements shall closely match adja-
cent specimens of the same species. Replacements shall be subject to all requirements stat-
ed in this specification. The Contractor shall make all necessary repairs due to plant re-
placements. Such repairs shall be done at no extra cost to the Owner. The Guarantee of all
replacement plants shall extend for an additional period of one year from the date of their ac-
ceptance after replacement. In the event that a replacement plant is not acceptable during or
at the end of the said extended guarantee period, the Owner may elect subsequent replace-
ment or credit for each item.
3.6 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Upon completion of planting and prior to acceptance, remove excess soil and debris from site
and repair all damage to structures and site improvements, resulting from planting operations.
B. Sweep and hose down paved surfaces affected by planting operations.

March 3, 2017
SECTION 32 92 00
TURF AND GRASSES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and supplementary
1.2 SUMMARY

1. Topsoil placement from stockpile on site to achieve required depths and proposed
grades.
2. Establish finished grades in all designated lawn and seeding areas as shown on
drawings.
3. Provide and install seeded lawns in designated areas shown on drawings and specified
herein.
4. Fertilizer, mulch, and accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit seed analysis certification for approval.

B. Submit a label from manufacturer’s container certifying fertilizer content.
C. Submit product sample and manufacturer’s literature for each erosion control product used.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in the original unopened containers showing weight, analysis and the name
of the manufacturer and store in a dry, weatherproof location.
1.5 BIDDER QUALIFICATIONS
A. The lawn and specialty seed bidder shall be, and have been actively and directly engaged in
the installation of seeded lawn and wetlands for a period of two or more years. Provide proof
of 5 or more successful wetland seed installations.
B. The bidder shall possess specialized equipment for working in and around water, including a
small boat, hip waders, and floatation life preservers to be worn while working in water.
C. Wetland seed may be hydroseeded into the mud, utilizing enough water to ensure good
contact of seed with soil.
1.6 GUARANTEE
A. Examine the area and conditions under which the work is to be performed. Do not proceed
with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Guarantee a good stand of grass by watering, mowing, regrading and reseeding and re-
mulching eroded areas and otherwise maintaining seeded areas to the satisfaction of the
Landscape Architect, until final acceptance. Any areas which fail to show a uniform stand
shall be reseeded and re-mulched at Contractor’s expense with the same seed mixture
originally specified. Reseed as required until all affected areas are accepted by the
Landscape Architect.
Project 16018 TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 1

March, 3, 2017
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Perform lawn work only after other work affecting ground surface has been completed.
B. Do not seed when wind velocity exceeds 5 mph.
C. Restrict traffic from lawn areas until grass is established. Erect temporary signs and barriers
as required.
D. Normal lawn seeding shall be performed between April 1 through June 15 and August 15
through October 1.
E. Specialty seed areas shall be planted between April 20 and July 1 except as otherwise noted
for a specific seed mix.
F. If the site is prepared at any other time of the year, the site shall be stabilized with the
following seed mix:
Rate:
Seed Oats – (Avena sativa) 64 lbs. per acre
Annual Rye – (Lolium multiflorum) 25 lbs. per acre
G. All native seed shall be refrigerated for at least 90 days prior to installation.
H. Areas adjacent to specialty seed areas shall have no pre-emergent herbicide application
within the six months prior to or in the first year following installation.
I. Surrounding turf areas shall be stabilized prior to prairie grass seeding.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Agricultural Limestone: Apply ground agricultural limestone if necessary, at the rate

determined by Contract’s soil tests to adjust pH of topsoil at no less than 6.5.
B. Fertilizer: Commercial fertilizer shall be applied uniformly at the rate specified. It shall be dry
and free flowing, furnished in original, unopened containers which bear the manufacturer’s
guaranteed statement of analysis.
C. Lawn Seed: Seed shall be approved by the State Department of Agriculture and shall meet
the latest specifications on file with the Department as to percentage of purity, weed seed,
and germination. The seed shall be delivered to the site in original containers bearing the
dealer’s statement of composition of mixture and percentages of purity and germination of
each variety.
General Grass Seeding Mix A (102,000 Sq. Ft.)
Grasses: % by weight germination

Amigo Tall Fescue 40% 90%
Titan Turf-type Tall Fescue 40% 90%
Baron Kentucky Bluegrass 10% 90%
Goalkeeper Perennial Ryegrass 10% 90%
Seeding Rate: 8 lb. per 1000 s.f.

5-10-10 Fertilizer 20 lb. per 1000 s.f.
Season: April 1 through June 1 and August 15 through October 1

March, 3, 2017
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Jute Matting: Provide Jute Matting in accordance with ODOT 667.02.

B. Sand: Dry, coarse sand free from chemical contaminants.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SITE PREPARATION
A. Apply glyphosate herbicide approved for use around water if vegetation exists on the site
to be planted:
1. In areas to be seeded or overseeded, apply at least three days prior to installation
of all actively growing vegetation.
2. In wetland and shoreline areas, apply two weeks prior to installation of wetland
plantings.
B. Verify Soil shall be cultivated to provide a firm seed bed, 4” deep, smooth, friable, fine
textured and free of clods. In areas adjacent to water, till as close to the shoreline as
moisture conditions permit. No heavy objects, except necessary lawn making equipment,
shall be moved over the area after the soil is prepared unless it is again loosened and
graded.
C. Provide lawn areas smooth and with a continual grade between existing or fixed controls,
such as walks, elevations at steps or buildings. Roll, scarify, rake and level as necessary
to obtain true, even lawn surfaces. Correct irregularities in the surface resulting from
tillage operations to prevent formation of depressions or water pockets.
D. Distribute ground limestone evenly by machine over whole area and incorporate
thoroughly into topsoil.
E. Drill seed when soil is sufficiently dry to avoid soil sticking to the packer wheels.
F. Verify proper calibration of the drill to ensure even coverage of the area with the specified
amount of seed.
G. If seed bed has become muddy, hard or excessively dry, re-till to a smooth, friable,
uniform condition, free from stones or lumps. Regrade all settling prior to seeding. Seed
immediately after bed preparation.
3.2 APPLICATION AND MAINTENANCE
A. Just prior to seeding, apply fertilizer at the rate specified. Incorporate into seed bed to a
depth of 1”. Fertilizer may be applied with grass seed if hydroseeding is used.
B. Prior to seeding small areas of detailed seeding, mark out limits of seeding areas with
string or hose and secure Landscape Architect’s approval of layout before sowing seed.
C. Sow seed immediately after preparation of seed bed.
D. Sow lawn seed evenly by mechanical spreader seeding equipment. If seed is broadcast
with a mechanical spreader, rake surface of soil slightly with a fine toothed rake to
incorporate seed into ¼” of soil. Firm soil over seed with a cultipacker or lawn roller to
insure good seed/soil contact. Do all seeding when soil is dry and wind does not exceed
5 mph velocity.
E. Sow the seeds of sedges, and extremely small or chaffy grass seed by using the following
method:
1. Mix the required seed mix with a larger volume of inert matter such as sawdust,
peat moss, vermiculite, or sand. The inert matter should be slightly damp, so that the
seeds will stick to it. For each 1000 square foot of seeding, use about two bushels of
inert material. Mix the seed evenly into the inert material.
2. Take one-half of the total mix and hand spread it evenly across the area. Fling
the seed in a broad arc to scatter it widely and evenly across the area.

March, 3, 2017
3. Spread the remaining half of the seed mix evenly across the same area, walking
perpendicular to the direction used when spreading the first half of the mix.
4. Rake or drag the seed into the soil so that it is lightly covered, one quarter to one
half inch deep.
5. Roll the site with a roller or drive across it with tractor tires to firm the seed into
the soil. Soil must be dry to avoid soil compaction.
F. Oat straw mulch shall be used in areas to receive sedge seeding:
1. Place mulch on seeded areas within 48 hours after seeding.
2. Place mulch uniformly in a continuous blanket at rate of one and one half bales
per 1,000 square feet and wet down to prevent displacement. Areas subject to
extreme wind shall be treated with asphaltic emulsion applied uniformly at rate of
not less than 100 gallons per acre. A mechanical blower may be used to apply
mulch, provided the machine has been specifically designed and approved for
this purpose.
3. Where size of areas mulched precludes use of equipment, mulch may be
anchored by use of a light covering of topsoil or other approved means.
4. Protect buildings, pavements and plantings and non-seeded areas from asphaltic
emulsion overspray.
G. Hydraulic seeding equipment may not be used.
H. Install jute matting to areas as indicated on the drawings in accordance with ODOT Item
671.
I. Water as required to maintain adequate moisture in the upper 4” of soil to promote proper
root growth. Maintain watering and mowing as necessary until acceptance of lawn areas,
but not less than 30 days.
A. Final inspection to determine acceptance of seeded areas shall be made by the

Landscape Architect upon request of the Contractor.
B. No areas of lawn and/or native grass seeding shall be accepted having bare spots or
gaps measuring one square foot, and with bare spots accounting for no more than 2% of
total seeded area.

March, 3, 2017
SECTION 330500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY

1. Piping joining materials.
3. Sleeves.
4. Grout.
5. Flowable fill.
6. Piped utility demolition.
7. Piping system common requirements.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Exposed Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient

temperatures and weather conditions.
B. Concealed Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions
and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
C. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
D. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.
E. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
F. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
A. Comply with NSF 61, “Drinking Water Systems Components – Health Effects,” for
materials for potable water.
B. Comply with NFPA 24, “Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and their
Appurtenances,” for materials, installation, tests, flushing and valve and hydrant
supervision.
C. Water main testing shall be performed in accordance with local agency jurisdiction.
Pressure testing – comply with AWWA (American Water Works Association)
guidelines.
Project 16018 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES 0330500-1
D. Utility Compliance: Comply with regulations pertaining to water distribution systems.
E. Steel Support Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to

F. Steel Piping Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding
processes involved and that certification is current.
G. Comply with ASME A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing
angles of identification devices.
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through
shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of
dirt, debris, and moisture.
B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and
bending.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-

place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing covering and painting if

devices are applied to surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements
apply to product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the manufacturers specified.
B. Products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal
or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product.
Requests for A/E's approval must be accompanied by the Substitution Request Form”
and complete technical data for evaluation. All materials for evaluation must be
received by the Project Manager and Specification Department at least 10 days prior to
bid due date. Additional approved manufacturers will be issued by Addendum.

2.2 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS
A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping
system contents.
1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness,
a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze

flanges.
2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and
full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by
piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:

1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235.
2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.
4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138.
E. Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer.
A. Transition Fittings, General: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to
and with ends compatible with, piping to be joined.
B. Transition Couplings NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller:

1. Underground Piping: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system
fitting.
2. Aboveground Piping: Specified piping system fitting.
C. AWWA Transition Couplings NPS 2 and Larger:

one of the following:
a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.
b. Dresser, Inc.; DMD Div.
c. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The); Pipe Products Div.
d. JCM Industries.
e. Smith-Blair, Inc.
f. Viking Johnson.
2. Description: AWWA C219, metal sleeve-type coupling for underground pressure
piping.
D. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Drainage Piping:

one of the following:
a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.
b. Fernco, Inc.
c. Mission Rubber Company.
d. Plastic Oddities.
E. Description: ASTM C 1173 with elastomeric sleeve, ends same size as piping to be
joined, and corrosion-resistant metal band on each end.
2.4 SLEEVES
A. Mechanical sleeve seals for pipe penetrations are specified in Division 22 Section
"Common Work Results for Plumbing."
B. Galvanized-Steel Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed

with welded longitudinal joint.
C. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized,
plain ends.
D. Cast-Iron Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure

pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Molded PVC Sleeves: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
F. PVC Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
G. Molded PE Sleeves: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface
with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
2.5 GROUT
A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement

grout.
1. Characteristics: Post hardening, volume adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
2.6 FLOWABLE FILL
A. Description: Low-strength-concrete, flowable-slurry mix.

1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, portland.
2. Density: 115- to 145-lb/cu. ft.
3. Aggregates: ASTM C 33, natural sand, fine and crushed gravel or stone, coarse.
4. Aggregates: ASTM C 33, natural sand, fine.
5. Admixture: ASTM C 618, fly-ash mineral.
6. Water: Comply with ASTM C 94/C 94M.
7. Strength: 100 to 200 psig at 28 days.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPED UTILITY DEMOLITION
A. Disconnect, demolish, and remove piped utility systems, equipment, and components
indicated to be removed.
1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and
cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping. Fill abandoned piping with

flowable fill, and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material.
3. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove
equipment.
4. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and
remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and
make operational.
5. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and
remove equipment and deliver to Owner.
B. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is

unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new
products of equal capacity and quality.
A. Install piping according to the following requirements.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of
piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and
calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install
piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on the Coordination
Drawings.
C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas
at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless
specifically indicated otherwise.
D. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
E. Install piping at indicated slopes.
F. Install piping free of sags and bends.
G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
H. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system
operating pressure.
I. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
J. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.

K. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete
floor and roof slabs.
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of equipment areas or other
wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level.
a. PVC Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6.
L. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
M. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections for roughing-in requirements.
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements.
assembly.
C. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and
fittings according to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and
solvent cements.
2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 appendixes.
3. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.
4. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC
socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number
PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.
6. PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D 3138
Appendix.
D. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.
E. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.
F. Plastic Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean
cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.
1. Plain-End PE Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.
2. Plain-End PE Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final
2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at
final connection to each piece of equipment.

3.5 GROUTING
A. Mix and install grout for equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment
base plates, and anchors.
B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G. Place grout around anchors.
H. Cure placed grout.

SECTION 330510 - UTILITIES SERVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: General utility services, including but not limited to the following:
1. Storm sewer pipe and tube.
2. Concrete structures.
3. Drainage castings.
4. Water main piping
5. Natural gas piping
6. Sanitary sewer piping.
7. Rip rap.
8. Catch basins.
9. Manholes.
10. Inlets.
11. Manhole frames and covers.
12. Field verification.
1. Division 31 Section “Site Clearing”.
2. Division 31 Section “Earth Moving”.
3. Division 33 Section “Common Work Results for Utilities”.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. The term utilities as hereinafter stated or indicated is that part of the water, storm,
sanitary system beginning 5 feet from the outer face of the outside building wall, and
conveying it to the local utility mains or other disposal terminals.
1. Provide waterline to building as indicated on the plans
2. Provide sanitary to building as indicated on the plans.
B. Site sanitary sewer work includes, but is not limited to, the following: Sewer drainage
piping and fittings, rodding holes, manholes, sewer structures, and related materials
and labor adjunct to the completion of the sanitary sewer system.
C. Site drainage work includes, but is not limited to, the following:
1. Providing stormwater drainage pipe and fittings outside the buildings, new
stormwater culverts, manholes, catch basins, perforated plastic underdrain
systems, and related materials and labor adjunct to the completion of site
drainage work.
Project 16018 UTILITIES SERVICES 330510 – 1

2. The Contractor for the Work under this Section will be responsible for
installing or constructing special sewer structures that are a part of the storm
drainage system.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: For the following:

1. Manholes: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and frames and
covers.
2. Catch Basins and Stormwater Inlets: Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and frames, covers, and grates.
3. Detail precast concrete vault assemblies and indicate dimensions, method of
field assembly, and components.
B. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals

1. Product Data: For each material specified herein.
a. Special pipe fittings.
b. Backwater valves.
2. Field Quality Control Test Reports: From Contractor.
A. Environmental Agency Compliance: Comply with regulations pertaining to water,

sanitary sewerage and storm drainage systems.
B. Utility Compliance: Comply with local regulations pertaining to the site work. Include
all costs in bid associated with the utilities installation.
C. Unless otherwise instructed, Work is to be observed by the Architect/Engineer; and

tests and observation work are to meet his approval at each stage before backfilling.
When public authorities require observation and approval by, or supervision of, the
Work is required, comply with their requirements. Re-excavate any Work covered
before observation and approval at no additional cost to Owner.
D. Install pipe and fittings in strict accordance with best, acceptable practice to insure
proper functioning, freedom from trouble, and neatness of appearance.
E. Provide proper fittings for the installation of, and connection to, sewer lines. Where an
underground branch connection is required, provide a "Y" branch and 30 degree curve
type fitting. Connections made by cutting holes in pipe will not be permitted.
F. Prior to final observation flush sewers with water in sufficient volume to obtain free flow
through each line. Remove all obstructions and correct defects discovered.
G. Verify connection requirements with the utility owners.

H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at project site to comply with

requirements in Division 01 Section “Project Management and Coordination”.
1. Before excavation begins, review and coordinate documents with related
disciplines, including governmental and utility. Review local, state and
federal guidelines and utility requirements. Require representatives,
including the following, of each entity directly concerned with utility services,
to attend conference:
a. Contractor’s superintendent
b. Local utility representative
c. A/E’s representative
2. Send written notification of the meeting to each entity at least 7 day’s in
advance stating date, time, and location.
A. Do not store plastic manholes, pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight.
B. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.
A. Existing Sewers or Drain Lines

1. When existing sewers are encountered, whether indicated on the Drawings
or not, make adequate provisions for diverting the flow of such existing
sewers so that the excavation will be kept dry during the progress of
construction. Reroute such existing sewers as required to maintain proper
functioning. Before completion of the construction work, restore the existing
sewers as called for on the Drawings, or otherwise provide with an adequate
outlet, as directed by the Architect/Engineer. Under no conditions abandon
or plug an underground line until sufficient tests have been made to indicate
that it is not a functioning line, and then only when so directed by the
Architect/Engineer in writing.
2. Reconnect existing drain lines which are to remain in service and which
would otherwise be cut off and blocked by new Work.
3. Interruption of Existing Storm Drainage Service: Do not interrupt service to
facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following
conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary service
according to the following requirements:
a. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed
interruption of service.
b. Do not proceed with interruption of service without Owner’s
written permission.
B. Public Rights-Of-Way: Construct sewers to be installed in public rights-of-way,

including rights-of-way that are to be dedicated to public use, in strict accordance with
standards and methods established by the public authority having jurisdiction over
same, and requirements of their specifications shall be complied with. Install other
Work occurring on the Owner's property or adjacent property within contract limits in
accordance with the requirements of this Section.

C. Relationship to Water Lines

1. Sewer lines that cross over or under water lines and do not have an 18-inch
vertical separation between pipes, must be water grade ductile iron with
mechanical joints. The ductile pipe shall comply with ANSI/AWWA
C104/A21.4, joints to comply with ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11. Pipe and
fittings to be Class 51. This material is to extend 10 feet on each side of the
water line.
2. Where it is necessary to lay sewer pipes adjacent to existing water lines,
where the flow line of the sewer pipe is above or level with the water lines,
and the distance between them is less than 10 feet, construct the sewer line
of extra heavy cast iron, water seal and test, and relocate the water line, as
directed by the Architect/Engineer.
3. Sewer lines are to have the right-of-way over underground water lines.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Storm Sewer Pipe and Tubing

1. Supply piping and fittings as required to complete the Work.
2. Where indicated, piping shall be C900, Schedule 150, with ductile-iron
mechanical joints. Pipe and fittings shall be according to ANSI/ASTM
C151/A21.51.
3. Provide reinforced concrete pipe (RCP) conforming to latest ASTM C76
Class III specifications with rubber gaskets (ASTM C443) for pipe sizes 12
inch diameter and larger.
4. Provide polyvinylchloride (PVC) pipe, SDR 35 (ASTM D3034), for pipe sizes
smaller than 12 inch diameter.
5. Bushings, reducers, and couplings shall be PVC conforming to requirements
of ASTM C-594-70.
6. Where indicated, provide corrugated metal pipe culvert, helically corrugated
14 gauge steel, with aluminized Type 2 coating. Conform to AASHTO Spec.
M36 or ASTM A760 with gasketed joints or bell and spigot joints.
Corrugations shall be 2-2/3 by 1/2 inch. Provide prefabricated metal end
sections for both, corrugated metal and reinforced concrete pipe.
7. Underdrains in gravel areas, playground "soft-surface areas," and berm
drains shall be perforated, filter wrapped plastic tubing, 4 to 6 inches in
diameter. Berm drains shall be 6-inch diameter.
8. Fittings shall be supplied as required to complete the Work. Fittings
produced by manufacturers other than the supplier of the pipe shall not be
permitted.
9. Provide a manufacturers certification for all storm sewer piping prior to any
storm sewer trench excavation.
10. Exposed piping from downspout shall be hub type cast iron.
B. Concrete Structures
1. Manholes and catch basins shall be constructed with components of precast
concrete.

C. Drainage Castings
1. Castings shall be of uniform quality, free from blowholes, porosity, hard
spots, shrinkage distortion, or other defects. Castings shall be smooth and
well cleaned by shot blasting and shall be coated with coal tar epoxy (SSPC
Paint 16).
2. Castings shall be equal to those as manufactured by Neenah Foundry
Company, Neenah, Wisconsin; East Jordon Iron Works, East Jordan,
Michigan; or Zurn, Sanford, North Carolina.
3. Furnish only the following castings for installation under Division 03 Section
“Cast-In-Place Concrete”.
D. Water Lead/Main Piping

1. Piping 3 inches or larger shall be C900 with cement mortar lining complying
with ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4 Fittings shall be ductile iron mechanical joint
or push-on type according to ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11. Fittings shall be
Class 51. Provide 8-mil polyethylene tube encasement around pipe per
ANSI/AWWA - C105/A21.5. Line from main to fire hydrant to be C909 as per
City of Celina specifications.
2. Piping 2 inches or smaller shall be Type K copper according to ASTM B88-
96. Cast fittings shall meet the requirements of ASTM B61 or ASTM B62.
3. The fire protection lines are to be tested to 200 psi and meet all current
NFPA requirements.
4. Install water as per NFPA requirements.
E. Natural Gas Piping

1. Line from the meter to the school to be installed by the contractor.
2. Shall be SDR-11 plastic piping with stab or fussion joints as approved by the
local gas company. Provide 12 gauge coated wire continuous end to end.
3. Valves 2 inch NPS and smaller shall be all brass screwed gas service stops.
Gas stops shall be square head type. Valves 2 inch NPS and larger shall be
semi-steel, straightway flanged, 125 lbs. SWP, wrench operated, lubricated
plug valves. Furnish for each size of plug valve two standard plug valve
wrenches. Plug valves shall be fully lubricated before final inspection of
Work.
4. Tape to be installed 12 inches above plastic gas line. Tape to read ‘Natural
Gas-5 PSI’.
5. Install gas as per NFPA 54 and local gas company requirements.
F. Sanitary Sewer Piping

1. Shall be SDR-35 PVC piping per ASTM #D-3034.
G. Riprap: Sound and durable rock shall be free of soil and placed as a rock fill for the
protection of slopes so denoted on the Drawings. Thin, slablike pieces shall not be
used. Rock shall consist of sizes such that the amount of material passing a 3 inch
sieve shall not be more than 15 percent by weight of the total material, and the amount
of material passing a 6 inch square opening shall not be more than 50 percent by
weight of the total material.

2.2 STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES
A. Unless otherwise approved by the Architect/Engineer or called for on the Drawings,

structures shall be precast concrete made up of vertical sections of appropriate length
and diameter to meet drawing requirements. The precast sections shall be reinforced
with steel, in accordance with ASTM C478 standards, with tongue and groove joints.
B. The top section shall be flat or tapered to the size required to make a proper base for
the cover and frame called for (see plan for type required). The bottom section shall
have openings cast therein to receive sewer lines that are to be connected thereto. In
the event that a sewer line empties into the manhole at an elevation above the first
section, it shall have an opening cast therein to receive such lines.
C. The manufacturer shall cast openings in the sections of the manholes to receive
standard rungs of proper design to permit access to the structure without the use of a
ladder. Openings for these rungs shall be located in such a way that they will permit
the installation of the rungs in a straight, vertical line. The manufacturer shall furnish
shop drawings showing the location and size of openings to receive sewer lines, the
location of the holes for the access rungs in relation to the openings, the height of the
special section, if and when required, to achieve the necessary elevation for the
manhole cover and frame, and the contour of the tapered section required to fit the
frame called for.
D. All structures shall be provided with size and shape to receive all pipe shown on the
Drawings and maintain structure integrity.
E. All pipe connections to the structure shall be ground both inside and outside of the
structure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FIELD VERIFICATION
A. The term field verify or similar as related to the utilities shall be defined as a complete
exposure of the pipe, manhole or other utility related item. Take field survey
measurements to determine the top and invert elevations. Determine the existing
material type and/or all other related field features.
B. The Contractor shall locate and expose the existing utility line prior to commencing the
general trench excavation for the installation of the new utility lines.
C. The Contractor shall report to the Architect and Construction Manager the existing
depth, size, material type, and invert elevation of the utility line.
D. The information determined in the field shall be coordinated with the new utility lines
prior to commencing with the general trench excavation.
E. The Architect shall use the additional information obtained in the field and verify the
compatibility of the existing utility with the new utility.

F. In the event the existing utility is compatible with the new utility no adjustments to the
Drawing will be made.
G. In the event the existing utility is not compatible with the new utility, adjustments to the
Drawing or contract will be made in accordance with the General Conditions.
3.2 LAYOUT
A. The Work under this Section shall include the making of a complete layout on the site
of storm sewer lines indicating the location of sewer structures, in accordance with the
design drawings. Carefully check this layout against the finished grades and other
improvements called for on the Drawings. Call conflict or deviation from drawing
requirements to the Architect's attention for instructions before proceeding with the
Work. Perform layout in cooperation with other Contractors in establishing the exact
routing, crossings, and points of connection with the Work of other Contractors.
B. Verify the location, as close as possible, of existing and new utilities prior to
excavation. Exercise the utmost care to avoid contact and injury to electrical
underground cables and underground utilities. Proper protection of said services must
be maintained.
C. Sizes indicated on accompanying Drawings and as specified refer to nominal inside

diameter of the pipe, unless otherwise indicated.
3.3 GENERAL PIPE AND STRUCTURE INSTALLATION
A. Excavating, trenching, backfilling, grading, and related work shall follow the
Specifications as outlined in Division 31 Section “Earth Moving” and as hereinafter
noted.
B. Exercise care in trenching, preparation of the bedding, and installation of the piping
materials so that the pipe will be held in a straight line, conforming to the gradients
called for on the Drawings.
C. Make sure pipe is properly mated and sealed as it is installed.
D. Maintain a dry trench to avoid sediment entry into the system and to achieve a firm and
secure bed. Protect joint work as the Work progresses. When required, perform
piping and bailing to meet this requirement.
E. Place a properly designed stopper in the open end of each pipeline when work is not in
progress. Where "Y" branches are installed, locate as close as possible to the points
shown on the Drawings. Place secure, temporary caps or plugs in branch openings,
pending the installation of branch sewers.
F. Where dissimilar pipe is to be connected, install PVC bushings, reducers, or couplings

and secure in place with stainless steel bands. Perform installation in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
G. Exercise care in placing sections of the manhole so as to achieve proper alignment of

the holes prepared to receive the manhole rungs.

H. After the manhole has been properly constructed, grout the rungs into the openings
provided, so as to achieve a permanent and substantial attachment to the manhole.
I. Make sure that the ends of sewer lines and fittings, which connect into sewer
structures, are properly positioned and held in position at the proper elevation and
location, so the connections may be constructed as called for on Drawings or in
accordance with best trade practice.
J. Where pipe is introduced into manholes or sewer structures after it has been
constructed, use methods and take all precautions necessary to insure a watertight,
permanent connection. Use a hot poured bituminous compound at such points of
connection.
K. Sewer pipe terminating in manholes or sewer structures, installed before such structure
is built, shall be completely coated with a uniform layer of hot mix bituminous
compound just prior to the construction of the structure and its base, so that a
watertight connection will be achieved.
L. Wherever sanitary manholes have inlets with the invert 2 feet or more above the flow
line of the outlet base of effluent invert, provide a drop pipe and fittings from the top
flow grade to empty onto the floor of the manhole. Encase the drop pipe and fittings in
concrete, bonded to the exterior of the manhole and extending from the manhole base,
so as to completely encase the drop line and fittings. Provide necessary opening at
the bottom of the manhole to permit the incoming water to flow to the outlet. Provide a
flow channel from the opening in the manhole connected to the outlet channel. Provide
additional width of concrete base to support the drop pipe and enclose.
M. Install gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use of

lubricants, cements, and other special installation requirements.
N. Verify the location of existing and new utilities prior to excavation. Exercise the utmost
care to avoid contact or injury to electrical underground cables and underground
utilities. Proper protection of said services must be maintained.
O. When tying in new sewer lines which are required to take the place of existing sewer
lines, maintain service and make the new tie-in in such a way that there will be no
interruption of service through existing sewage lines.
P. When existing sewers are encountered, whether indicated on the Drawings or not,
make adequate provisions for diverting the flow of such existing sewers so that the
excavation will be kept dry during the progress of construction. Reroute such existing
sewers as required to maintain proper functioning. Before completion of the
construction work, restore the existing sewers as called for on the Drawings or
otherwise provide with an adequate outlet, as directed by the Architect. Under no
conditions abandon or plug an underground line before making sufficient tests to
indicate that it is not a functioning line, and then only when directed by the
Architect/Engineer in writing.

Q. Install sewers so that infiltration of ground water in any section of the line will not
exceed a rate of 100 gallons per inch of pipe diameter per lineal mile of sewer line in
24 hours. Wherever, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer, the flow in line or section
thereof indicates that such rates of infiltration may be exceeded, furnish the necessary
equipment and conduct a test by a method acceptable to the Architect/Engineer to
prove that the requirements of this subsection have been complied with. Conduct such
test in the presence of the Architect/Engineer or his representative. In the event that
the test reveals that the infiltration limit specified herein has been exceeded, make
such repairs as are necessary to bring the sewer line up to the specification
requirements.
R. When the storm sewer system is complete, and except at the building connection
where care must be exercised to achieve a uniform grade and straight alignment, make
a light test by flashing a light from manhole to manhole or from the manhole to the
cleanout connection.
Where a cleanout connection is used, use an appropriate mirror for this test. If the
view through the pipe does not show a vertical axis on full pipe diameter and a
horizontal axis on at least 3/4 of the pipe diameter, remove and relay the pipe as
necessary to meet these requirements. Conduct the light test in the presence of the
Architect/Engineer or his representative.
1. The light test is the responsibility of the Contractor including all items
required and scheduling the test.
S. The Contractor under the supervision of the governing agency shall test all PVC and
other flexible pipe used for sanitary sewers for deflection. Tests shall not be conducted
until at least 60 days after final full backfill has been placed. Maximum allowable
deflection shall be 5%. If test is to be accomplished by pulling a mandrel through the
pipe, no mechanical equipment shall be used to assist. Sewers that fail this test shall
be relayed and re-tested to meet this requirement.
T. All sanitary sewer manholes shall be vacuum tested using the following procedures
from ASTM C-1244: All lift holes shall be plugged. All pipes entering the manhole
shall be temporarily plugged taking care to securely brace the pipes and plugs to
prevent them being drawn into the manhole. The testing equipment shall be placed in
the casting to allow the joint between the casting and manhole to be tested. A vacuum
of 10” of mercury shall be drawn on the manhole. The valve on the vacuum line of the
test head closed and the vacuum pump shut off. The time shall be measured for the
vacuum to drop to 9” of mercury. The manhole shall pass the test if the time for the
vacuum reading to drop from 10” of mercury to 9” of mercury is greater than one
minute. If the manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made by an
approved method. The manhole shall be re-tested until a satisfactory test is obtained.
3.4 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE INSTALLATION
A. Buried concrete pipe shall rest on a firm bearing, undisturbed earth surface along the
entire length of the pipe. Bell or grooved ends shall lay upgrade in a hollowed out bed.

B. Follow manufacturer's recommendations in joining sections of pipe and fittings.

Concrete pipe joints shall be sealed with flexible watertight rubber gaskets conforming
to ASTM C443 standards.
C. Make line or grade changes and junction with a proper fitting.
3.5 PVC PIPE INSTALLATION
A. Buried PVC pipe shall rest on a firm bearing, bedding material along the entire length
of the pipe. Bell or grooved ends shall lay upgrade in a hollowed out bed.
B. Follow manufacturer's recommendations in joining sections of pipe and fittings. PVC

joints shall be sealed with flexible, watertight rubber gaskets conforming to ASTM
C3212 standards.
C. Line or grade changes and junction shall be made with a proper fitting.
D. Contractor must strictly adhere to Uni-Bell UNI-B-5, recommended practice, except that
natural compaction is not allowed for the installation of polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe.
(Water main and force main piping)
3.6 PERFORATED UNDERDRAIN TUBING AND FRENCH DRAIN INSTALLATION
A. Install drainage pipe pitched down in direction of flow, at a minimum slope of 0.5
percent, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Provide ell's at 90-degree turns, adapters, tees, and transitions as noted or required.
Cap laterals at open-end terminals.
3.7 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE PIPE INSTALLATION
A. Install high-density polyethylene pipe in strict accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations.
3.8 INLET INSTALLATION
A. The concrete base shall not be less than 4 inches thick, reinforced. The base shall sit
on a minimum 3 inch thick gravel base placed over an undisturbed or thoroughly
compacted earth excavation. Carefully establish the entire height of the unit so as to
meet the top elevation of the inlet lid and as denoted on the Drawings.
B. Set the inlet level to meet elevations as denoted on the Drawings.
3.9 CATCH BASIN INSTALLATION
A. The concrete base shall not be less than 6 inches thick, reinforced as denoted, and
shall extend a minimum of 4 inches beyond the exterior wall of the barrel. The base
shall sit on a minimum 3 inch thick gravel base placed over an undisturbed or
thoroughly compacted earth excavation. Carefully establish the entire height of the unit
so as to meet the top elevation of the catch basin lid and as denoted on the Drawings.

B. Set the barrel section on the base with a heavy consistency of approved bituminous
material so as to provide watertight connections.
C. Grout the top section cover pad to sit level and to meet grade elevations as denoted on
the Drawings.
3.10 MANHOLE/MANHOLE - INLET INSTALLATION
A. Verify the location of utilities prior to excavation. After properly preparing the
excavation, cast the concrete base for each manhole or structure in accordance with
the following:
1. The concrete used shall be of 2500-pound strength. It shall be reinforced
with welded wire road mesh not less than 6 by 6-6/6. The concrete base
shall be not less than 6 inches thick and extend a minimum of 4 inches
beyond the exterior walls of the structure. The height of the base thus
prepared shall be carefully established so as to meet the invert elevation
requirements of the manholes.
2. After the base has sufficiently set, place the first section of the manhole with
the grooved side up. Coat the inside of the manhole for a distance of
approximately 6 inches above the base with a heavy consistency of approved
bituminous material, so as to provide a watertight connection between the
precast manhole and the sewer floor.
3. After the first section has been properly placed and oriented, pour the floor of
the manhole, using concrete similar to the quality called for above. The
manhole floor shall be not less than 4 inches thick or greater, if the size of
the sewers entering same so requires, in order to permit formation of the flow
channels hereinafter specified, and so as to maintain not less than 2 inches
of concrete below the bottom of flow channels. Form flow channels in the
floor of the manhole and locate so as to conform to the sewer lines entering
and leaving same. Smoothly finish such flow channels and provide
semi-circular section, conforming to the inside diameter of the connecting
sewers. The depth of such flow channels shall be approximately 75 percent
of the inside diameter of the sewers they connect. Make changes in size or
grade gradually. Where changes of direction are required, work them out to
form true curves. Provide such channels for connection sewers in each
manhole.
4. Continue setting the subsequent sections, using a heavy consistency of
asphalt cement at each joint. The channel or groove in the bottom section is
to be completely filled with this cement and the tongue of the section above
is to be placed in such a way that a watertight connection will be achieved.
5. As the top section of the structure is prepared for setting, carefully check the
top elevation and if it fails to conform to the required elevation, it is to be
adjusted as may be necessary and approved by the Architect/Engineer so
that the finished grade of the manhole frame and cover will occur at the
correct elevation, as called for on the Drawings, and to meet job
requirements.

3.11 DRAINAGE CASTINGS INSTALLATION
A. After concrete subbase is prepared, accurately set castings in position with top
surfaces, coinciding with proposed elevations of concrete slabs and connect as
required to storm sewer.
B. Backfill around castings to previous elevation of prepared subbase and compact to

same density of remaining prepared subbase.
3.12 RIPRAP INSTALLATION
A. The Contractor is responsible for the procurement and placement of riprap where and
as so denoted on the Drawings.
B. Riprap shall be placed on an approved filter cloth as specified in Division 31 Section

“Earth Moving”.
C. Riprap placement shall not damage the filter cloth.
3.13 DOMESTIC WATER MAIN
A. All water mains shall be pressure tested and disinfected in accordance with
ANSI/AWWA C600-93 and C651-92 standards and local jurisdictions requirements for
cleaning, testing, and disinfecting of the water main piping.
B. Install ductile iron piping in a manner similar to that of cast iron soil pipe, except that
joints as fittings shall be mechanical joints, with installation as recommended by the
manufacturer.
C. Defections from a straight line or grade, as required by vertical or horizontal curves or

offsets, shall not exceed 6/D inches per foot of pipe where "D" represents the nominal
pipe diameter expressed in inches with deflections measured between the extended
center lines of any two connecting lengths of pipe. For alignment in excess of above,
shorter lengths or fittings shall be employed.
D. Firmly anchor fittings at bends with concrete thrust blocks and suitably rod to adjacent
connecting lines to prevent fittings from being blown off the lines when under service.
Provide anchors and yokes at fittings exceeding a turn equivalent to a 1/16 bend.
E. Clamps shall be of the type approved by the National Board of Fire Underwriters.
Clamps, rods, washers, and nuts shall be coated with bitumastic coating.
F. Coat exposed threads after nuts are tightened. Tighten bolts to a torque range as
follows: 5/8-inch bolt, 40-60 ft.lbs. with 8 inch wrench; 3/4 inch bolt, 60-90 ft.lbs. with
10- inch wrench; 1 inch bolt, 70-100 ft.lbs. with 12 inch wrench, and 1-1/4 inch bolt, 90-
120 ft.lbs. with 14 inch wrench. Tighten in a manner so that the gland is brought up
toward the pipe flange evenly.
G. Where water mains cross sewers, install the water main above the sewer whenever
possible. Provide one full length of water main centered over the sewer so that both
joints will be as far from the sewer as possible. Lay water mains with a cover of not
less than 5'-0" from top of pipe to finish grade.
H. Use a permanently pliable waterproof material. Special wall sleeve fittings with soft
rubber seals are approved. Provide a swing joint on water lines just outside the
building to compensate for pipe movement. Anchor lines entering the building to keep
fittings from sliding off.
I. Follow piping installation procedures as outlined by the piping manufacturer shall be

followed. The Contractor shall be responsible for one year of tightness of joints made
by him.


Specs 2 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Specs 2 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Project Number: WSU-160027

Project Name: Agricultural Education and Water Quality

Prepared for: Wright State University

Prepared by: SPGB Architects, LLC

Access Engineering Solutions

Set Number: Rebid Set – Volume One of Two

Volume One of Two

PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS GROUP

Division 00 – Procurement and Contracting Requirements

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SUBGROUP

Division 01 – General Requirements

M160-00 01 10 2014 Edition (2015-JUL) Page 1 of 4

01 33 00 .............. Submittal Procedures

FACILITY CONSTRUCTION SUBGROUP

Division 02 – Existing Conditions- Not Used

Division 06 – Wood, Plastics, and Composites

Division 07 – Thermal and Moisture Control

M160-00 01 10 2014 Edition (2015-JUL) Page 2 of 4

M160-00 01 10 2014 Edition (2015-JUL) Page 3 of 4

10 44 13 .............. Fire Protection Cabinets

Division 13 – Special Construction – Not Used

Division 14 – Conveying Equipment – Not Used

Divisions 15 through 19 – Not Used

M160-00 01 10 2014 Edition (2015-JUL) Page 4 of 4

for the following Project:

M160-00 10 00 2014 Edition (2016-AUG) Page 1 of 4

M160-00 10 00 2014 Edition (2016-AUG) Page 2 of 4

Cincinnati Builders Exchange Pittsburgh Builders Exchange

ConstructConnect Construction Journal

Dodge Data Analytics Minority Business Solutions

Subcontractors Association of Northeast Ohio Northeast Ohio Procurement Technical Assistance

M160-00 10 00 2014 Edition (2016-AUG) Page 3 of 4

Region 6 Minority Business Assistance Center

M160-00 10 00 2014 Edition (2016-AUG) Page 4 of 4

ARTICLE 1 - GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

1.2 Project Scheduling and Coordination

1.3 Written Notice

ARTICLE 2 - BIDDING PROCEDURES

M160-00 21 13 2014 Edition (2016-JAN) Page 1 of 13

2.2 Pre-Bid Meeting

2.3 Request for Interpretation

2.4 Basis of Design and Acceptable Components

M160-00 21 13 2014 Edition (2016-JAN) Page 2 of 13

2.5 Substitutions Prior to Bid Opening

2.6 Bid Form

M160-00 21 13 2014 Edition (2016-JAN) Page 3 of 13

2.8 Unit Prices

2.10 Submittals with Bid Form

M160-00 21 13 2014 Edition (2016-JAN) Page 4 of 13

2.11 Changes in the Bid Amount

ARTICLE 3 - BID OPENING AND EVALUATION

M160-00 21 13 2014 Edition (2016-JAN) Page 5 of 13

3.2 Bid Opening

3.3 Bid Opening Extension

3.4 Bid Evaluation Criteria

3.5 Bid Evaluation Procedure

M160-00 21 13 2014 Edition (2016-JAN) Page 6 of 13

3.6 Rejection of Bid

3.7 Notice of Intent to Award

M160-00 21 13 2014 Edition (2016-JAN) Page 7 of 13

ARTICLE 4 - WITHDRAWAL OF BID

4.2 Withdrawal after Bid Opening

4.3 Refusal to Accept Withdrawal